Ubc 1991 PDF

UNIFORM
BUILDING
CODE™
1991 Edition
Eighth Printing
Publication Date: May I, 1991
ISSN 0896-9655
COPYRIGHT© 1991
by
International Conference of Building Officials

5360 WORKMAN MILL ROAD
WHITTIER, CALIFORNIA 90601-2298
(31 0) 699-0541
PRINTED IN THE U.S.A.

Preface
THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE is dedicated to the development of bet-
ter building construction and greater safety to the public by uniformity in building
laws. The code is founded on broad-based performance principles that make possi-
ble the use of new materials and new construction systems.
THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE was first enacted by the International
Conference of Building Officials at the Sixth Annual Business Meeting held in
Phoenix, Arizona, October I S-21, 1927. Revised editions of this code have been
published since that time at approximate three-year intervals. New editions incor-
porate changes approved since the last edition.
THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE is designed to be compatible with re-
lated publications listed on the following pages to provide a complete set of docu-
ments for regulatory usc.
Anyone may propose amendments to this code. For more information, write to
the International Conference of Building Officials at the address on the copyright
page.
Changes in the code are processed each year and published in supplements in a
form permitting ready adoption by local communities. These changes are careful-
ly reviewed in public hearings by professional experts in the field of building con-
struction and fire and life safety.
Solid vertical lines in the margins within the body of the code indicate a change
from the requirements of the 1988 edition except where the entire chapter was re-
v iscd, a new chapter was added or the change was minor. Where an entire chapter is
changed or new chapter was added, a notation appears at the beginning of that
chapter. Vertical lines in the margins that arc interrupted by the letter "F" indicate
that the provision is maintained under the code change procedures of the Western
Fire Chiefs Association. Deletion indicators ( . . ) arc provided in the margin
where a paragraph or item listing has been deleted if the deletion resulted in a
change of requirements.
An analysis of changes between editions is published in pamphlet form by the
Conference.
iii
RELATED PUBLICATIONS
Known widely for its Uniform Building Code TM, the International Conference of Building
Officials (lCBO) publishes other related codes as well as textbooks to improve the user's
knowledge of code enforcement and the administration of a building inspection program.
Pubkations are continually being added, so inquiries should be directed to Conference
headquarters for a list of those available. At the time of this publication, the following publi-
cations were available:
Uniform Building Code. Covers the fire, life and structural safety aspects of all build-
ings and related structures.
Handbook to the Uniform Building Code-An illustrative commentary. A new pub-
lication containing a description of the purpose and intent of individual code sections ap-
pearing in the 1991 edition of the Uniform Building Code. Where appropriate, provides
historical background and references other documents for additional information. Also in-
cluded are numerous drawings and figures clarifying the application and intent of the 1991
code provisions.
Uniform Building Code StandardsTM. Presents in a compact and concise manner nation-
al test, material and special design standards referred to in the Uniform Building Code.
Uniform Mechanical CodeTM, Contains requirements for the installation and main-
tenance of heating, ventilating, cooling and refrigeration systems. This publication is spon-
sored jointly by ICBO and the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Offi-
cials (IAPMO).
Uniform Plumbing Code. Published by the IAPMO, the Uniform Plumbing Code covers
all aspects of plumbing, including requirements for plumbing materials, and IAPMO instal-
lation standards. It is endorsed by the Conference as a companion document to ICBO's mod-
el codes and is available from either organization.
Uniform Housing CodeTM, Provides complete requirements affecting conservation and
rehabilitation of housing. Its regulations are compatible with the Uniform Building Code.
Uniform Code for the Abatement of Dangerous BuildingsTM. Sets forth orderly proce-
dures for remedying dangerous buildings. Follows due process provisions which reflect the
latest court decisions in such matters. This code covers all structures and may be used to sup-
plement the Uniform Housing Code and the Uniform Building Code.
Uniform Sign CodeTM, Dedicated to the development of better sign regulation. Its re-
quirements pertain to all signs and sign construction attached to buildings.
Uniform Administrative CodeTM. This code covers administration areas in connection
with adoption of the Uniform Building Code, Uniform Mechanical Code and related codes
by a jurisdiction. It contains provisions which relate to site preparation, construction, alter-
ation, moving, repair and occupancies of buildings or structures. It also contains administra-
tive provisions for implementing plumbing, electrical and mechanical regulations. The code
is compatible with the administrative provisions of all codes published by the Conference.
Uniform Building Security CodeTM, This code establishes minimum standards to make
dwelling units resistant to unlawful entry. It regulates swinging doors, sliding doors, win-
dows and hardware in connection with dwelling units of apartment houses or one- and two-
family dwellings. The code gives consideration to the concerns of police, fire and building
officials in establishing requirements for resistance to burglary which are compatible with
fire and life safety.
Uniform Code for Building Conservation. A building conservation guideline pres-
ented in code format which will provide a community with the means to preserve its existing
iv
buildings while achieving appropriate levels of safety. It is formatted in the same manner as
the Uniform Building Code, compatible with other Uniform Codes, and may be adopted as a
code or used as a guideline.
Dwelling Construction under the Uniform Building Code™. Designed to acquaint the
home builder with basic Uniform Building Code requirements relating to dwelling construc-
tion. A useful text for apprentice training programs.
Dwelling Construction under the Uniform Mechanical CodeTM. This is a new publica-
tion for the convenience of the homeowner or contractor interested in installing mechanical
equipment in a one- and two-family dwelling in conformance with the Uniform Mechanical
Code. The material conforms with the 1991 edition of the Uniform Mechanical Code, which
is dedicated to the development of better equipment and installations and greater safety to
the public.
Uniform Fire CodeTM. Sets out provisions necessary for fire prevention while achieving
uniformity in terms and requirements with other codes published by the Conference. This
code is sponsored jointly by the Western Fire Chiefs Association and ICBO.
Uniform Fire Code Standards™. This publication is a companion to the Uniform Fire
Code. It contains standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials and of the Na-
tional Fire Protection Association (NFPA) referenced by the Uniform Fire Code.
U.B.C. Supplements. Between new editions of the codes, changes approved each year
are incorporated in the supplements.
Analysis of Revisions to the Uniform Codes. Discusses the changes included in the lat-
est codes published by the Conference as compared to the prior editions.
Uniform Building Code-1927 Edition. A special 60th anniversary printing of the first
published Uniform Building Code.
CABO One and Two Family Dwelling Code. This code is jointly sponsored by the three
model code organizations of the Council of American Building Officials (CABO): ICBO,
Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA), and Southern
Building Code Congress International, Inc. (SBCCI). It eliminates conflicts and duplica-
tions among the model codes to achieve national uniformity. Covers mechanical and plumb-
ing requirements as well as construction and occupancy.
Application and Commentary: CABO One and Two Family Dwelling Code. An in-
terpretive commentary on the CABO One and Two Family Dwelling Code intended to en-
hance uniformity of interpretation and application of the code nationwide. Developed by the
three model code organizations under contract with the Department of Housing and Urban
Development and in cooperation with the National Association of Home Builders.
CABO Model Energy Code. This code sets forth minimum requirements for effective
use of energy in the design of new buildings and structures and additions to existing build-
ings. It is based on ASHRAE Standard 90A-1980 and was originally developed jointly by
ICBO, BOCA, SBCCI and the National Conference of States on Building Codes and Stan-
dards under a contract funded by the United States Department of Energy. The code is now
maintained by CABO and is adopted by reference in the Uniform Building Code.
Uniform Disaster Mitigation Plan. A plan developed to aid building departments in
coping with major disasters such as fires, floods and earthquakes. Defines standard operat-
ing procedures for initiating disaster assessment and mitigation and includes samples of re-
cords, reports, entry signs, etc.
National Electrical Code"!' The National Electrical Code is the electrical code for the
majority of states, counties and cities in the United States. Researched and published every
v
three years by NFPA, it is an indispensable aid to every electrician, electrical inspector, elec-
trical equipment manufacturer, architect, builder, consulting engineer, contractor. fire mar-
shal, fire chief, building inspector and anyone who must specify or certify electrical
installations.
Building Department Administration. An excellent guide for improvement of skills
in departmental management and in the enforcement and application of the Uniform Build-
ing Code and other regulations administered by a building inspection department. Recorn-
mcmkLI fm both undergraduate and advanced study.
Uniform Building Code Application/Interpretation Manual. A manual discussing
sections of the Uniform Building Code with a question and answer format providing a com-
prehensive analysis of the intent of the code section. Most sections include illustrative ex-
amples. The manual is in loose-leaf form so that code interpretations published in Building
Standards magazine may be inserted.
Plan Review Manual. Provides an understanding of the extent of Uniform Building
Code provisions and illustrates application to given situations. Covers nonstructural aspects
and provides an insight into the basic engineering considerations a plan examiner or checker
must utilize.
Field Inspection Manual. Designed to improve inspection skills and techniques. A fun-
damental and important text for courses of study at the community college and trade or tech-
nical school level.
Building Official Management Manual. This manual addresses the unique nature of
code administration and the managerial duties of the building official. A supplementary in-
sert addresses the budgetary and financial aspects of a building department. It is also an ideal
resource for those preparing for the management module of the CABO Building Otficial
Certification Examination.
Legal Aspects of Code Administration. A manual developed by the three model code
organizations to inform the building olficial on the legal aspects of the profession. The text is
written in a logical sequence with explanation of legal terminology and is designed to serve
as a refresher to those preparing to take the legal module of the CABO Building Official Cer-
tification Examination.
Illustrated Mechanical Manual. Contains a series of illustrations with explanatory text
covering requirements in the Uniform Mechanical Code which respond to graphic treat-
ment. It is highly useful for code application and for training purposes.
Concrete Manual. A publication for individuals seeking an understanding of the funda-
mentals of concrete field technology and inspection practices. Of particular interest to con-
crete construction inspectors, it will also benefit employees of concrete producers, concrete
contractors, testing and inspection laboratories, and material suppliers.
You Can Build It! Published by ICBO in cooperation with CABO, this booklet contains
information and advice to aid "do-it-yourselfers" with building projects. Provides guidance
in necessary procedures such as permit requirements, codes, plans, cost estimation, etc.
Guidelines for Manufactured Housing Installations. A guideline in code fonn imple-
menting the Uniform Building Code and its companion code documents to regulate the per-
manent installation of a manufactured horne on a privately owned nonrental site. A com-
mentary is included to explain specific provisions, and codes applying to each component
part are defined.
Tabulated Fire-Resistive Requirements by Occupancy. Related code requirements arc
assembled for quick access. The tabulations assemble the limitations in Tables Nos. 5-A,
5-B, 5-C, and 17-A and the provisions of the 01 through 03 sections of the occupancy and
type of construction chapters in the Uniform Building Code.
vi
Introduction to the Uniform Building Code Workbook. A student workbook contain·
ing a series of exercises designed to complement the course "Introduction to the Uniform
Building Code, BIT -I 00." Assignments are arranged to provide an overview of the basics of
the Uniform Building Code.
Plan Reading and Nonstructural Plan Review Workbook. A series of exercises in-
tended to be a useful tool in understanding the concepts developed in "Plan Reading and
Nonstructural Plan Review, BIT -I 0 1." The student exercises include assignments on code
requirements and plan reading.
vii
OUTLINE OF CONTENTS BY PARTS,
CHAPTERS AND SECTIONS
Page
Effective Use of the Uniform Building Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Sample Ordinance for Adoption of the Uniform
Building Code and Uniform Building Code Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Part !-Administrative
CHAPTER 1. Title, Scope and General
SEC. 101. Title ............................................... .
102. Purpose ............................................ .
103. Scope .............................................. .
104. Application to Existing Buildings and Structures ............ .
I 05. Alternate Materials and Methods of Construction ............ 3
I 06. Modifications ......................................... 3
I07. Tests ................................................ 3
CHAPTER 2. Organization and Enforcement
SEC. 201. Creation of Enforcement Agency ......................... 5
202. Powers and Duties of Building Official .................... 5
203. Unsafe Buildings or Structures ........................... 6
204. Board of Appeals ...................................... 7
205. Violations ............................................ 7
CHAPTER 3. Permits and Inspections
SEC. 301. Permits .............................................. 9
302. Application for Permit ................................. 10
303. Permits Issuance ..................................... II
304. Fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
305. Inspections .......................................... 13
306. Special Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
307. Structural Observation ................................. IX
30X. Certificate of Occupancy ............................... I H
Part 11-Definitions and Abbreviations

CHAPTER 4. Definitions and Abbreviations ...................... 21
Part Ill-Requirements Based on Occupancy

CHAPTER 5. Classification of All Buildings by Use or Occupancy
and General Requirements for All Occupancies
SEC. 50 I.Occupancy Classified ................................. 35
502. Change in Use ....................................... 35
503. Mixed Occupancy .................................... 35
504. Location on Property .................................. 37
505. Allowable Floor Areas ................................ 3X
506. Allowable Area Increases .............................. 40
507. Maximum Height of Buildings and Increases .............. 41
SOH. Fire-resistive Substitution .............................. 42
ix
509. Pedestrian Walkways ................................. 42
510. Samtallon .......................................... 43
511. Accessibility to Toilets and Other Features ................ 44
512. Compressed Gases ................................... 44
513. Premises Identification ................................ 44
C\-\~PI'ER 6. Requirements for Group A Occupancies
SEC. 601. Group A Occupancies Defined .......................... 53
602. Construction, Height and Allowable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
604. Access and Exit Facilities .............................. 55
605. Light, Ventilation and Sanitation ........................ 55
606. Shaft and Exit Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
607. Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems ........................ 56
60!1. Special Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
609. Fire Alarm Systems ................................... 56
610. Amusement Building Alarm System ..................... 56
CHAPTER 7. Requirements for Group B Occupancies
SEC. 70 I. Group B Occupancies Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
702. Construction, Height and Allowable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
704. Access and Exit Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
706. Shaft and Exit Enclosures .............................. 63
70!1. Special Hazards ...................................... 64
709. Open Parking Garages ................................ 64
710. Helistops ........................................... 66
CHAPTER 8. Requirements for Group E Occupancies
SEC. ROI. GroupE Occupancies Defined .......................... 69
R02. Construction, Height and Allowable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
!103. Location on Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
R04. Access and Exit Facilities .............................. 71
R07. Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
!108. Special Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
809. Fire Alarms ......................................... 72
CHAPTER 9. Requirements for Group H Occupancies
SEC. 90 I. Group H Occupancies Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
902. Construction, Height and Allowable Area ................. 76
904. Access and Exit Facilities .............................. 7R
907. Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
908. Special Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO
909. Fire Alarms ......................................... 80
910. Explosion Control .................................... 81
911. Division 6 Occupancies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
912. Heliports ........................................... 85
CHAPTER 10. Requirements for Group I Occupancies
SEC. 1001. Group I Occupancies Defined ........................... 95
1002. Construction, Height and Allowable Area ................. 95
X
I 004. Access and Exit Facilities .............................. 97
I 006. Shaft and Exit Enclosures .............................. 97
I OOX. Special Hazards ...................................... 9X
1009. Fire Alarms ......................................... 98
I 010. Smoke Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9R
CHAPTER 11. Requirements for Group M Occupancies

SEC. 1101. Group M Occupancies Defined...................... 101
II 02. Construction, Height and Allowable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . I0 I
1103. Location on Property ................................. 101
II 04. Special Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I0 I
1105. Garage Floor Surfaces ................................ 102
II 06. Agricultural Buildings ................................ I02
CHAPTER 12. Requirements for Group R Occupancies
SEC. 1201. Group R Occupancies Defined ......................... 103
1202. Construction, Height and Allowable Area ................ 103
1203. Location on Property ................................. I03
1204. Access and Exit Facilities and Emergency Escapes ......... I03
1205. Light, Ventilation and Sanitation ....................... I 04
1206. Yards and Courts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I05
1207. Room Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................... I 06
120X. Efficiency Dwelling Units...... .......... 106
1209. Shaft and Exit Enclosures . . . . . . . ............ I06
1210. Smoke Detectors and Sprinkler Systen ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 07
1211. Fire Alarm Systems .................................. I m:
1212. Heating ........................................... lOX
1213. Special Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I OX
CHAPTERS 13-16 (No Requirements)
Part IV-Requirements Based on Types of Construction
CHAPTER 17. Classification of All Buildings by Types of

Construction and General Requirements
SEC. 170 I. General ........................................... I09
1702. Structural Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II 0
1703. Usable Space Under Floors ............................ II 0
1704. Vertical Fire Spread at Exterior Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ill
1705. Exceptions to Table No. 17-A .......................... Ill
1706. Shaft Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
1707. Construction Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
1708. Weather Protection .................................. 114
1709. Members Carrying Masonry or Concrete ................. 115
1710. Parapets ........................................... 115
1711. Projections ......................................... 116
1712. Guardrails and Vehicle Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1713. Foam Plastic Insulation ............................... 117
1714. Insulation .......................................... 120
1715. Solar Energy Collectors ............................... 120
1716. Atria...................... 120
1717. Mezzanines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 23
xi
CHAPTER 18. Type I Fire-resistive Buildings
SEC. 1801. Definition ......................................... 127
1802. Structural Framework ................................ 127
1803. Exterior Walls and Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 27
\804. Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \27
\805. Stairway Construction ................................ 128
1806. Roofs ............................................. 128
\807. Special Provisions for Group B, Division 2 Office
Buildings and Group R, Division I Occupancies ........... 129
CHAPTER 19. Type II Buildings
SEC. 19tll. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \35
1902. Structural Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
1903. Exterior Walls and Openings .......................... 135
\904. Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
\905. Stairway Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
1906. Roofs . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
1907. Special Provisions for Group B, Division 2 Office
Buildings and Group R, Division I Occupancies . . . . . . . . . . . \37
CHAPTER 20. Type Ill Buildings
SEC. 2001. Definition ......................................... 139
2002. Structural Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
2003. Exterior Walls, Openings and Partitions .................. 139
2004. Stairway Construction ................................ 140
2005. Roof, ............................................. 140
CHAPTER 21. Type IV Buildings
SEC. 2101. Definition ......................................... 141
2\02. Structural Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \4\
2103. Exterior Walls, Openings and Partitions .................. \41
2104. Stairway Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
2105. Roofs ............................................. 142
2106. Heavy-timber Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
CHAPTER 22. Type V Buildings
SEC. 22(JI. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
2202. Structural Framework ................................ 145
2203. Exterior Walls and Openings .......................... 145
2204. Stairway Construction ................................ 145
2205. Roofs ............................................. 145
Part V-Engineering Regulations-Quality and Design of

the Materials of Construction
CHAPTER 23. Part !-General Design Requirements
~~~l:iti~~s· : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
SEC. 2301. 147
2302. 147
2303. Design Methods ................................... . \47
2304. Floor Design ...................................... . 149
2305. Roof Design ...................................... . 149
2306. Reduction of Live Loads ............................. . !50
2307. Deflection ........................................ . !51
2308. Special Design ..................................... . !51
2309. Walls and Structural Framing ......................... . !52
23\0. Anchorage of Concrete or Masonry Walls ............... . !52
xii
Part 11-Wind Design
2311. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
2312. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
2313. Symbols and Notations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2314. Basic Wind Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2315. Exposure .......................................... 154
2316. Design Wind Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2317. Primary Frames and Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2318. Elements and Components of Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2319. Open-frame Towers .................................. 155
2320. Miscellaneous Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2321. Occupancy Categories (Sections 2322 through
2329 are reserved.) .................................. 155
Part Ill-Earthquake Design
2330. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2331. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2332. Symbols and Notations ............................... 158
2333. Criteria Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2334. Minimum Design Lateral Forces and Related Effects . . . . . . . 161
2335. Dynamic Lateral Force Procedures ...................... 166
2336. Lateral Force on Elements of Structures and Nonstructural
Components Supported by Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2337. Detailed Systems Design Requirements .................. 170
2338. Nonbuilding Structures ............................... 174
2339. Earthquake-recording Instrumentations .................. 175
CHAPTER 24. Masonry
SEC. 240 I. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
2402. Material Standards ................................... 201
2403. Mortar and Grout .................................... 203
2404. Construction ....................................... 204
2405. Quality Control ..................................... 209
2406. Allowable Stresses .................................. 211
2407. Design, General Requirements ......................... 216
2408. Design, Unreinforced Masonry ......................... 226
2409. Design, Reinforced Masonry .......................... 227
2410. Design, Composite Construction ....................... 232
2411. Design, Reinforced Masonry Slender Wall ................ 233
2412. Strength Design, Reinforced Masonry Shear Wall .......... 235
CHAPTER 25. Wood
SEC. 2501. General ........................................... 247
2502. Definitions and Symbols .............................. 249
2503. Size of Structural Members ............................ 252
2504. Stresses ........................................... 252
2505. Identification ....................................... 256
2506. Horizontal Member Design ............................ 256
2507. Column Design ..................................... 260
2508. Flexural and Axial Loading Combined ................... 261
2509. Compression at Angle to Grain ......................... 263
2510. Timber Connectors and Fasteners ....................... 263
2511. Structural Glued-laminated Timber Design ............... 265
2512. Design of Glued Built-up Members ..................... 270
2513. Wood Shear Walls and Diaphragms ..................... 270
2514. Fiberboard Sheathing Diaphragms ...................... 273
2515. Wood Combined with Masonry or Concrete .............. 273
2516. General Construction Requirements ..................... 274
2517. Conventional Construction Provisions ................... 282
xiii
CHAPTER 26. Concrete
SEC. ~~g~: ~~~l;iti~~~ ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: 18~

2o03. Specifications for Tests and Materials ................... 408
2o04. Durability Requirements .............................. 411
2o05. Concrete Quality. Mixing and Placing ................... 412
2o06. Form work. Embedded Pipes and Construction Joints ....... 418
2o07. Details of Reinforcement ............................. 420
2608. Analysis and Design ................................. 428
2o09. Strength and Serviceability Requirements ................ 432
2o I 0.
Flexure and Axial Loads .............................. 439
2o II.Shear and Torsion ................................... 449
2o 12.Development and Splices of Reinforcement .............. 468
2o13. Slab Systems with Multiple Square or Rectangular Panels ... 47R
2o 14.Walls ............................................. 488
2ol5. Footings ........................................... 492
2o 16.Precast Concrete .................................... 490
2o 17.Composite Concrete Flexural Members .................. 497
2o 18.Prestressed Concrete ................................. 499
2o 19.Shells and Folded Plates .............................. 509
2o20. Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
2o21. Shotcrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
2o22. Plain Concrete ...................................... 516
2623. Minimum Slab Thickness ............................. 51 o
2624. Anchorage to Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
2o25. Reinforced Concrete Structures Resisting Forces Induced
by Earthquake Motions .............................. . 518
2626. Alternate Design Method ............................ . 532
2627. Reinforced Gypsum Concrete ......................... . 539
CHAPTER 27. Steel
SEC. 270 I. Design and Identification of Steel for Structures ........... 549
2702. Structural Steel Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
2703. Cold-formed Steel Construction ........................ 550
2704. Cold-fonned Stainless Steel Construction ................ 550
2705. Open-web Steel Joists and Joist Girders .................. 551
2706. Steel Storage Racks .................................. 55 I
2707. Steel Cables ........................................ 551
2708. Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
2709. Bolts ............................................. 551
2710. Steel Structures Resisting Forces Induced by
Earthquake Motions in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 551
2711. Steel Structures Resisting Forces Induced by
Earthquake Motions in Seismic Zones Nos. I and 2 562
CHAPTER 28. Aluminum
SEC. 2801. Material Standards and Symbols ....................... 567
2802. Allowable Stresses for Members and Fasteners ............ 570
2803. Design ............................................ 571
2804. Fabrication and Erection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Part VI-Detailed Regulations

CHAPTER 29. Excavations, Foundations and Retaining Walls
SEC. 290 I. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
2902. Quality and Design .................................. 579
2903. Excavations and Fills ................................ 579
xiv
2904. Soil Classification-Expansive Soil ..................... 580
2905. Foundation Investigation .............................. 580
2906. Allowable Foundation and Lateral Pressures .............. 581
2907. Footings ........................................... 581
2908. Piles-General Requirements .......................... 584
2909. Specific Pile Requirements ............................ 586
2910. Foundation Construction-Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 ..... 589
CHAPTER 30. Veneer
SEC. 3001.
3002. t~~l~iti~~s· : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : ~~~
3003. Materials .......................................... 593
3004. Design ............................................ 594
3005. Adhered Veneer ..................................... 594
3006. Anchored Veneer .................................... 595
3007. Plastic Veneer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
CHAPTER 31. Accessibility
SEC. 3101. Scope ............................................. 599
3102. Definitions ......................................... 599
3103. Building Accessibility ................................ 599
3104. Egress and Areas for Evacuation Assistance .............. 60 I
3105. Facility Accessibility ................................. 603
CHAPTER 32. Roof Construction and Covering
SEC. 3201. Scope ............................................. 605
3202. Definitions ......................................... 605
3203. Roof-covering Requirements .......................... 607
3204. Roof-covering Classification .......................... 608
3205. Attics: Access, Draft Stops and Ventilation ............... 609
3206. Smoke and Heat Venting .............................. 609
3207. Roof Drainage ...................................... 611
3208. Roof-covering Materials and Application ................ 611
CHAPTER 33. Exits
SEC. 330 I. General ........................................... 627
3302. Occupant Load ..................................... 628
3303. Exits Required ...................................... 629
3304. Doors ............................................. 632
3305. Corridors and Exterior Exit Balconies ................... 635
3306. Stairways .......................................... 638
3307. Ramps ............................................ 641
3308. Horizontal Exit ..................................... 642
3309. Stairway, Ramp and Escalator Enclosures ................ 642
3310. Smokeproof Enclosures ............................... 643
3311. Exit Courts ......................................... 645
3312. Exit Passageways ................................... 646
3313. Exit Illumination .................................... 646
3314. Exit Signs .......................................... 646
3315. Aisles ............................................. 647
3316. Seat Spacing ....................................... 649
3317. Group A Occupancies ................................ 650
3318. Group E Occupancies ................................ 651
3319. Group H Occupancies ................................ 653
3320. Group I Occupancies ................................. 653
3321. Special Hazards ..................................... 654
3322. Reviewing Stands, Grandstands, Bleachers and
Folding and Telescoping Seating ....................... 655
XV
CHAPTER 34. Sloped Glazing and Skylights
SEC. 340 I. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
3402. Allowable Glazing Materials .......................... 661
3403. Screening .......................................... 661
3404. Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
3405. Design Loads ....................................... 662
3406. Floors and Sidewalks ................................ 662
CHAPTER 35. Sound Transmission Control (See Appendix Chapter 35)
CHAPTER 36. Penthouses and Roof Structures

360 I. Penthouses and Roof Structures ........................ 663
3602. Towers and Spires ................................... 663
CHAPTER 37. Chimneys, Fireplaces and Barbecues
t~~-f~iti~~~ ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ~~~

SEC. 3701.
3702.
3703. Chimneys, General .................................. 666
3704. Masonry Chimneys .................................. 667
3705. Factory-built Chimneys and Fireplaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
3706. Metal Chimneys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
3707. Masonry and Concrete Fireplaces and Barbecues .......... 668
CHAPTER 38. Fire-extinguishing Systems
SEC. 3801. Scope ............................................. 675
3802. Automatic Fire-extinguishing Systems .................. 676
3803. Sprinkler System Supervision Alarms ................... 678
3804. Permissible Sprinkler Omissions ....................... 679
3805. Standpipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 79
3806. Buildings under Construction .......................... 680
3807. Basement Pipe Inlets ................................. 681
CHAPTER 39. Stages and Platforms
SEC. 390 I. Scope ............................................. 683
3902. Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
3903. Stages ............................................ 684
CHAPTER 40. Motion Picture Projection Rooms
SEC. 4001. General ........................................... 687
4002. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
4003. Exits .............................................. 687
4004. Projection Ports and Openings ......................... 687
4005. Ventilation ......................................... 687
4006. Miscellaneous Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
4007. Sanitary Facilities ................................... 689
CHAPTER 41. (See Uniform Building Security Code)
Part VII-Fire-resistive Standards for Fire Protection

CHAPTER 42. Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish
SEC. 42(ll. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
4202. Testing and Classification of Materials .................. 691
4203. Application of Controlled Interior Finish ................. 692
4204. Maximum Allowable Flame Spread ..................... 692
4205. Textile Wall Coverings ............................... 693
xvi
CHAPTER 43. Fire-resistive Standards
SEC. 4301. General ........................................... 695
4302. Fire-resistive Materials and Systems .................... 695
4303. Protection of Structural Members ....................... 696
4304. Walls and Partitions .................................. 698
4305. Floor-Ceilings or Roof-Ceilings ........................ 699
4306. Fire-resistive Assemblies for Protection of Openings ....... 700
4307. Roof Coverings ..................................... 703
4301\. Through-penetration Fire Stops ........................ 703
4309. Smoke Dampers .................................... 703
Part VIII-Regulations for Use of Public Streets and

Projections Over Public Property
CHAPTER 44. Protection of Pedestrians during Construction
or Demolition
SEC. 440 I. General ........................................... 743
4402. Temporary Use of Streets and Alleys .................... 743
4403. Storage on Public Property ............................ 743
4404. Mixing Mortar on Public Property ...................... 743
4405. Protection of Utilities ................................ 743
4406. Walkway .......................................... 744
4407. Pedestrian Protection ................................. 744
4408. Maintenance and Removal of Protective Devices .......... 745
4409. Demolition ......................................... 745
CHAPTER 45. Permanent Occupancy of Public Property
SEC. 450 I. General ........................................... 747
4502. Projection into Alleys ................................ 747
4503. Space below Sidewalk ................................ 747
4504. Balconies, Sun-control Devices and Appendages .......... 747
4505. Marquees .......................................... 748
4506. Awnings ........................................... 748
4507. Doors ............................................. 749
CHAPTER 46. (No Requirements)
Part IX-Wall and Ceiling Coverings

CHAPTER 47. Installation of Wall and Ceiling Coverings
SEC. 4701. Scope ............................................. 751
4702. Materials .......................................... 752
4703. Vertical Assemblies .................................. 753
4704. Horizontal Assemblies ............................... 753
4705. Interior Lath ........................................ 754
4706. Exterior Lath ....................................... 755
4707. Interior Plaster ...................................... 755
4708. Exterior Plaster ..................................... 756
4709. Exposed Aggregate Plaster ............................ 758
4710. Pneumatically Placed Plaster (Gunite) ................... 758
4711. Gypsum Wallboard .................................. 759
4712. Use of Gypsum in Showers and Water Closets ............. 760
4713. Softwood Plywood Paneling ........................... 760
4714. Shear-resisting Construction with Wood Frame ............ 760
xvii
Part X-Special Subjects
CHAPTER 48. Cellulose Nitrate
SEC. 4801. Cellulose Nitrate ................................... 777
CHAPTER 49. (No Requirements) (See page 979-Appendix)
CHAPTER 50. Prefabricated Construction
SEC. 5001. General ........................................... 779
5002. Tests of Materials ................................... 779
5003. Tests of Assemblies ................................. 779
5004. Connections ....................................... 779
5005. Pipes and Conduits .................................. 779
5006. Certificate and Inspection ............................. 779
CHAPTER 51. Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators and Moving Walks
SEC. 5101. Scope ............................................ 781
S I02. Elevator and Elevator Lobby Enclosures ................. 781
5103. Special Provisions .................................. 781
5104. Hoistway Venting ................................... 785
5105. Elevator Machine Room Floors ........................ 785
5106. Additional Doors ................................... 785
CHAPTER 52. Light-transmitting Plastics
SEC. 5201. Scope ............................................ 7'il7
5202. Definitions ........................................ 787
5203. Design and Installation ............................... 7'il8
5204. Glazing of Unprotected Openings ...................... 788
5205. Light-transmitting Exterior Wall Panels .................. 789
5206. Roof Panels ........................................ 789
5207. Skylights .......................................... 789
5208. Light-diffusing Systems .............................. 791
5209. Diffusers in Electrical Fixtures ......................... 791
5210. Partitions .......................................... 791
5211. Awnings and Patio Covers ............................ 791
5212. Greenhouses ....................................... 791
5213. Canopies .......................................... 791
5214. Solar Collectors .................................... 792
CHAPTER 53. (See Appendix Chapter 53)
CHAPTER 54. Glass and Glazing
SEC. 54lll. Scope ............................................ 795
5402. Identification ...................................... 795
5403. Area Limitations .................................... 795
5404. Glazing Support .................................... 796
5405. Louvered Windows and Jalousies ...................... 796
5406. Safety Glazing ..................................... 796
5407. Hinged Shower Doors ............................... 798
54ml. Racquetball and Squash Courts ........................ 798
CHAPTER 55. (See Appendix Chapter 55)
CHAPTER 56. Covered Mall Buildings
SEC. 560 I. General ........................................... 80 I
5602. Types of Construction and Required Yards for
Unlimited Area .................................... 801
5603. Special Provisions .................................. 802
5604. Exits ............................................. 804
5605. Occupancy ........................................ 806
CHAPTERS 57-59. (No Requirements)
xviii
Part XI-Uniform Building Code Standards
CHAPTER 60. Uniform Building Code Standards
SEC. 6001. U.B.C. Standards .................................... R09
6002. Standard of Duty .................................... R09
6003. Guideline Standards ................................. R09
APPENDIX
CHAPTER 1. Division 1-Life-safety Requirements for Existing
Buildings Other Than High-rise Buildings
SEC. 110. General ........................................... R25
Ill. Exits .............................................. R25
112. Enclosure of Vertical Shafts ........................... R27
113. Basement Access or Sprinkler Protection ................. R2R
114. Standpipes ......................................... R2R
115. Smoke Detectors .................................... R2R
116. Separation of Occupancies ............................ R2R
CHAPTER 1. Division 11-Life-safety Requirements for Existing
High-rise Buildings
SEC. 120. Scope ............................................. 829
121. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R29
122. Compliance Data .................................... R29
123. Authority of the Building Official ....................... R29
124. Appeals Board ...................................... 830
125. Specific Provisions and Alternates ...................... 830
CHAPTER 7. Aviation Control Towers
SEC. 711. General ........................................... R39
712. Construction, Height and Allowable Area ................ 839
713. Exit Facilities ....................................... 839
714. Fire Alarms ........................................ 839
715. Access for Handicapped .............................. 839
716. Standby Power and Emergency Generation Systems ........ 839
C'-IAPTER 10. Detention and Correctional Facilities
SLC. 10' Scope ............................................. 841
10.
101
101 f.
ch~:ft~::~; .::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::~1:
0
('< ·,truction. Requirement Exceptions .................. 841

1015. C'<ll ,'artmentation ................................... 842
1016. Occupancy Separations ............................... R42
1017. Glazing ........................................... 842
IOIR. Electrical .......................................... 842
1019. Automatic Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems .............. 842
1020. Fire Alarm Systems .................................. 843
1021. Smoke Management ................................. 844
1022. &~ .............................................. 00
1023. Fenced Enclosures ................................... R45
CHAPTER 11. Agricultural Buildings
SEC. 1107. Scope ............................................. 847
II OR. Construction. Height and Allowable Area ................ 847
1109. Occupancy Separations ............................... 847
1110. Exterior Walls and Openings ........................... 847
xix
1111. Exit Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
CHAPTER 12. Division !-Requirements for Group R, Division 3
Occupancies
SEC. 1221. General .. . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . 851
1222. One and Two Family Dwelling Code Adopted ............ 851
CHAPTER 12. Division 11-Requirements for Group R, Division 4
Occupancies
SEC. 1223. General ........................................... 851
1224. Construction, Height and Allowable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
1225. Location on Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
1226. Exits and Emergency Escapes ......................... 852
1227. Light, Ventilation and Sanitation ....................... 853
1228. Yards and Courts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
1229. Room Dimensions ................................... 853
1230. No Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
1231. Shaft Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
1232. Fire Alarm Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
1233. Heating ........................................... 853
1234. Special Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
CHAPTER 12. Division Ill-Barriers for Swimming Pools, Spas
and Hot Tubs
SEC. 1241. General ........................................... 854
1242. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
1243. Requirements ...................................... 854
CHAPTER 23. Division 1-Snow Load Design
SEC. 2340. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
2341. Notations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
2342. Ground Snow Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
2343. Roof Snow Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
2344. Unbalanced Snow Loads, Gable Roofs .................. 859
2345. Unbalanced Snow Load for Curved Roofs ................ 860
2346. Special Eave Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
2347. Drift Loads on Lower Roofs, Decks and Roof Projections ... 860
2348. Rain on Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
2349. Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
2350. Impact Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
2351. Vertical Obstructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
CHAPTER 23. Division 11-Earthquake Recording Instrumentation
SEC. 2360. General ........................................... 874
2361. Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 4
2362. Maintenance ....................................... 874
2363. Instrumentation of Existing Buildings ................... 874
CHAPTER 23. Division Ill-Earthquake Regulations for
Seismic-isolated Structures
SEC. 2370. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
2371. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
2372. Symbols and Notations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
2373. Criteria Selection ................................... 878
2374. Static Lateral Response Procedure ...................... 879
2375. Dynamic Lateral Response Procedure ................... 881
2376. Lateral Load on Elements of Structures and Nonstructural
Components Supported by Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
XX
2377. Detailed Systems Requirements ........................ RR5
237R. Nonbuilding Structures ............................... R86
2379. Foundations ........................................ 8R6
2380. Design and Construction Review ....................... 886
2381. Required Tests of Isolation System ...................... 887
CHAPTER 23. Division IV-Fiood-resistant Construction
SEC. 2390. General ........................................... 892
2391. Manufactured Structures .............................. 892
2392. Protection of Mechanical and Electrical Systems .......... 892
2393. Flood Hazard Zones-A Zones ........................ 892
2394. Coastal High Hazard Zones-V Zones ................... 894
2395. Elevation Certification ............................... 894
2396. Design Requirements ................................ 895
CHAPTER 24. Prescriptive Masonry Construction in High-wind Areas
SEC. 2425. General ........................................... 897
CHAPTER 25. Conventional Light-frame Construction in
High-wind Areas
SEC. 2518. General ........................................... 951
CHAPTER 26. Protection of Residential Concrete Exposed to Freezing
and Thawing
SEC. 262R. General ........................................... 959
CHAPTER 29. Waterproofing and Dampproofing Foundations
SEC. 2911. Scope ............................................. 961
2912. Groundwater Table Investigation ....................... 961
2913. Dampproofing Required .............................. 961
2914. Floor Dampproofing ................................. 961
2915. Wall Dampproofing .................................. 961
2916. Other Dampproofing Requirements ..................... 962
2917. Waterproofing Required .............................. 962
2918. Floor Waterproofing ................................. 963
2919. Wall Waterproofing .................................. 963
2920. Other Dampproofing and Waterproofing Requirements ...... 963
CHAPTER 31. Division l-5ite Accessibility
SEC. 3106. Exterior Routes of Travel ............................. 965
3107. Parking Facilities .................................... 965
31 OR. Passenger Drop-off and Loading Zones .................. 965
CHAPTER 31. Division 11-Accessibility for Existing Buildings
SEC. 3109. Scope ............................................. 966
3110. Definitions ......................................... 966
3111. Additions .......................................... 967
3112. Alterations ......................................... 967
3113. Historic Preservation ................................. 969
3114. Appeal ............................................ 969
CHAPTER 32. Reroofing
SEC. 3209. General ........................................... 971
3210. Inspections ......................................... 971
3211. Built-up Roofs ...................................... 971
3212. Shingles and Shakes ................................. 972
3213. Tile ............................................... 973
3214. Metal Roofing ...................................... 973
3215. Other Roofings ..................................... 973
xxi
CHAPTER 35. Sound Transmission Control
SEC. 3501. Sound Transmission Control ........................... 975
3502. Sound Transmission Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
CHAPTER 38. Basement Pipe Inlets
SEC. 3!107. Basement Pipe Inlets ................................. 977
CHAPTER 49. Patio Covers
SEC. 490 I. Patio Covers Defined ................................ 979
4902. Design Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
4903. Light and Ventilation ................................. 979
4904. Footings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
CHAPTER 51. Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators and Moving Walks
SEC. 5107. Purpose ........................................... 9!11
510!1. Scope ............................................. 981
5109. Definitions ......................................... 9!11
S II 0. Permits-Certificates of Inspection ..................... 981
5111. ANSI Code Adopted ................................. 9!12
5112. Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
5113. Requirements for Operation and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
5114. Unsafe Conditions ................................... 9!13
CHAPTER 53. Energy Conservation in New Building Construction
SEC. 53()]. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9!15
CHAPTER 55. Membrane Structures
SEC. 550 I. General ........................................... 987
5502. Type of Construction and General Requirements .......... 98!1
5503. Inflation Systems .................................... 988
5504. Section Provisions ................................... 989
5505. Engineering Design .................................. 989
CHAPTER 57. Regulations Governing Fallout Shelters
SEC. 57()]. Purpose .......................................... . 991
991
t~~.f:iti(;~~ :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
5702.
5703. 991
5704. Occupancy Requirements ............................ . 991
5705. &~ ............................................. . 992
5706. Flame-spread Index of Interior Surfaces ................ . 992
992
~i~~it~~r,~ De.sign .L,~a·d·s· : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 992
5707.
570!1.
CHAPTER 70. Excavation and Grading
SEC. 700 I. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
7002. Scope ............................................. 993
7003. Permits Required .................................... 993
7004. Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
7005. Definitions ......................................... 994
7006. Grading Permit Requirements ......................... 995
7007. Grading Fees ....................................... 997
700!1. Bonds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
7009. Cuts .............................................. 999
7010. Fills .............................................. 999
70 II. Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I000
7012. Drainage and Terracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I000
7013. Erosion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 00 I
7014. Grading Inspection ................................. 1002
xxii
7015. Completion of Work ................................ 1003
UNIT CONVERSION TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 005
INDEX .......................................................... 1009
xxiii
EFFECTIVE USE OF THE UNIFORM
BUILDING CODE
The following procedure may be helpful in using the Uniform Building Code:
I. Classify the building:
A. OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: Compute the floor area ana

occupant load of the building or portion thereof. Sec Sections 407,
3302 and Table No. 33-A. Determine the occupancy group which the
usc of the building or portion thereof most nearly resembles. Sec the '0 I
sections of Chapters 5 through 12. See Section 503 for buildings with
mixed occupancies.
B. TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: Determine the type of construction of

the building by the building materials used and the fire resistance of the
parts of the building. See Chapters 17 through 22.
C. LOCATION ON PROPERTY: Determine the location of the building

on the site and clearances to property lines and other buildings from the
plot plan. See Table No. 5-A and '03 sections of Chapters 18 through 22
for fire resistance of exterior walls and wall opening requirements based
on proximity to property lines. Sec Section 504.
D. ALLOWABLE FLOOR AREA: Determine the allowable floor area
of the building. Sec Table No. 5-C for basic allowable floor area based
on occupancy group and type of construction. See Section 506 for
allowable increases based on location on property and installation of an
approved automatic fire-sprinkler system. See Section 505 (b) for
allowable floor area of multistory buildings.
E. HEIGHT AND NUMBER OF STORIES: Compute the height of the
building, Section 409 and determine the number of stories, Section
420. See Table No. 5-D for the maximum height and number of stories
permitted based on occupancy group and type of construction. Sec
Section 507 for allowable story increase based on the installation of an
approved automatic fire-sprinkler system.
2. Review the building for conformity with the occupancy requirements in
Chapters 6 through 12.
3. Review the building for conformity with the type of construction require-
ments in Chapters 17 through 22.
4. Review the building for conformity with the exiting requirements in Chap-
ter 33.
5. Review the building for other detailed code regulations in Chapters 29
through 54, Chapter 56, and the Appendix.
6. Review the building for conformity with engineering regulations and
requirements for materials of construction. See Chapters 23 through 2!(
xxiv
SAMPLE ORDINANCE FOR ADOPTION OF THE
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE AND
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARDS
ORDINANCE NO. _ _ __
An ordinance of the _(j],l_risd!!tlk!nL__ adopting the 1991 edition of the Uni-
form Building Code and the 1991 edition of the Uniform Building Code Standards
regulating the erection, construction, enlargement, alteration, repair, moving, re-
moval, demolition, conversion, occupancy, equipment, use, height, area and main-
tenance of all buildings or structures in the <iurisdiction) ; providing for the
issuance of permits and collection of fees therefor; providing for penalties for the
violation thereof, repealing Ordinance No. _ _ _ of the ____(jyr~!!)__ and
all other ordinances and parts of the ordinances in conflict therewith.
The __(goYJU!!i!lll-~dYL__ of the ______u~J__ does ordain as follows:
Section I. That certain documents, three (3) copies of which are on file and are
open for inspection of the public in the office of the (jurisdlction'skeeperolr~!lsj__
of the ____(jyri~gnL__ , being marked and designated as:
Un(f(Jrm Building Code. /991 Edition. published by the International Confer-
ence of Building Officials, including the generic fire-resistive assemblies listed in
the Fire Resistance Design Manual, Twelfth Edition, dated August 1988, pub-
lished by the Gypsum Association as referenced in Tables Nos. 43-A, 43-B and
43-C (also reference Appendix Chapter 35, if adopted) of the specified Uniform
Building Code, including Appendix Chapters . f Fill in the applicable
Appendix chapters (see Unij(Jrm Building Code Section /03, last paragraph).!/
ref(•rence is made to Appendix Chapter 51. an additional reference to ANSI!ASME
A 17.1. /984. Safety Code for Elemtors and Escalators. including Supplements
A/7./a-/985. A/7./b-1985. A/7./c-1986, A/7./d-/986 and A/7./e-1987. pub-
lished by the American Society of' Mechanical Engineers, should be added and
three (3) copies ll{this code should also be on file (sec Appendix Sections 5109 and
51//)j,and
Unif(n-m Building CodcStandards,/991 Edition, published by the International
Conference of Building Officials, including (i) Structural Welding Code-Rein-
forcing Steel, AWS 01.4-79 (U.B.C. Standard No. 26-8); (ii) Structural Welding
Code-Steel, ANSI/AWS Dl.l-90 (U.B.C. Standard No. 27-6); (iii) Structural
Welding Code-Sheet Steel, ANSI/AWS 01.3-81 (U.B.C. Standard No. 27-13)
published by the American Welding Society, Inc.; and (iv) Standard for Buildings
and Facilities-Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped
People, A 117.1-1986 (U.B.C. Standard No. 31-1) published by the American Na-
tional Standards Institute, as modified or amended in the Uniform Building Code
Standards referenced herein:
be and the same are hereby adopted as the code of the <iurisdi!;ti_o!!)_ for
regulating the erection, construction, enlargement, alteration, repair, moving, re-
movaL demolition, conversion, occupancy, equipment, use, height, area and main-
tenance of all buildings or structures in the _lli!rlsdlcllon) providing for
issuance of permits and collection of fees therefor; and each and all of the regula-
XXV
tions, provisions, conditions and terms of such Uniform Building Code, 1991 Edi-
tion. and Un!f(n·m Building Code Standards, 1991 Edition, published by the
International Conference of Building Officials, and the secondary publications
referenced above, all of which are on file in the office of the _____(jurisdlctlonl
are hereby referred to, adopted and made a part hereof as if fully set out in this ordi-
nance.
Section 2. (Incorporate penalties for violations. See Section 205).
Section 3. That Ordinance No. of (jurlsdlctlonl entitled (fill in
the title l!{ huilding ordinance or ordinances in effect at the present time) and all
other ordinances or parts of ordinances in conflict herewith are hereby repealed.
Section 4. That if any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this ordi-
nance is, for any reason, held to be invalid or unconstitutional, such decision shall
not affect the validity or constitutionality of the remaining portions of this ordi-
nance. The __{ggnrnlng bodyl hereby declares that it would have passed this
ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase hereof, irrespective of the
fact that any one or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses and phrases be
declared unconstitutional.
Section 5. That the (jurisdiction's keeper of records) is hereby ordered and di-
rected to cause this ordinance to be published. (An additional provision may here-
quired to direct the numher oftimes the ordinance is to he published and to specify
that it is to he in a newspaper in general circulation. Posting may also he required.)
Section 6. That this ordinance and the rules, regulations, provisions, require-
ments, orders and matters established and adopted hereby shall take effect and be in
fu II force and effect _!lL~.!IL__ from and after the date of its final passage
and adoption.
xxvi
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 101-104
Part/
ADMINISTRATIVE
Chapter 1
TITLE, SCOPE AND GENERAL
Title
Sec. 101. These regulations shall be known as the "Uniform Building Code,"
may be cited as such and will be referred to herein as "this code."
Purpose
Sec. 102. The purpose of this code is to provide minimum standards to safeguard
life or limb, health, property and public welfare by regulating and controlling the
design, construction, quality of materials, use and occupancy, location and mainte-
nance of all buildings and structures within this jurisdiction and certain equipment
specifically regulated herein.
The purpose of this code is not to create or otherwise establish or designate any
particular class or group of persons who will or should be especially protected or
benefited by the terms of this code.
Scope
Sec. 103. The provisions of this code shall apply to the construction, alteration,
moving, demolition, repair and use of any building or structure within this jurisdic-
tion, except work located primarily in a public way, public utility towers and poles,
mechanical equipment not specifically regulated in this code, and hydraulic tlood
control structures.
Where, in any specific case, different sections ofthis code specify different ma-
terials. methods of construction or other requirements, the most restrictive shall
govern. Where there is a conflict between a general requirement and a specific re-
quirement, the specific requirement shall be applicable.
Wherever in this code reference is made to the appendix, the provisions in the
appendix shall not apply unless specifically adopted.
Application to Existing Buildings and Structures

Sec. 104. (a) General. Buildings and structures to which additions, alterations
or repairs are made shall comply with all the requirements of this code fornew faci-
lities except as specifically provided in this section. See Section 1210 for provi-
sions requiring installation of smoke detectors in existing Group R, Division 3
Occupancies.
(b) Additions, Alterations or Repairs. Additions, alterations or repairs may be
made to any building or structure without requiring the existing building or struc-
ture to comply with all the requirements of this code, provided the addition, alter-
1
104 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
ation or repair conforms to that required for a new building or structure. Additions
or alterations shall not be made to an existing building or structure which will cause
the existing building or structure to be in violation of any of the provisions of this
code nor shall such additions or alterations cause the existing building or structure
to hecQme unsafe. An unsafe condition shall be deemed to have been created if an
addition or alteration will cause the existing building or structure to become struc-
turally unsafe or overloaded; will not provide adequate egress in compliance with
the provisions of this code or will obstruct existing exits; will create a fire hazard;
*lW reduce required fire resistance or will otherwise create conditions dangerous
to human life. Any building so altered, which involves a change in use or occupan-
cy, shall not exceed the height, number of stories and area permitted for new build-
ings. Any building plus new additions shall not exceed the height, number of
stories and area specified for new buildings. Additions or alterations shall not be
made to an existing building or structure when such existing building or structure is
not in full compliance with the provisions of this code except when such addition or
alteration will result in the existing building or structure being no more hazardous
based on life safety, fire safety and sanitation, than before such additions or alter-
ations are undertaken. [See also Section 911 (c) for Group H, Division 6 Occupan-
cies.]
Alterations orrepairs to an existing building or structure which are nonstructural
and do not adversely affect any structural member or any part of the building or
structure having required fire resistance may be made with the same materials of
which the building or structure is constructed. The installation or replacement of
glass shall be as required for new installations.
(c) Existing Installations. Buildings in existence at the time of the adoption of
this code may have their existing use or occupancy continued, if such use or occu-
pancy was legal at the time of the adoption of this code, provided such continued
use is not dangerous to life.
Any change in the use or occupancy of any existing building or structure shall
comply with the provisions of Sections 308 and 502 of this code.
For existing buildings, see Appendix Chapter I.
(d) Maintenance. All buildings and structures, both existing and new, and all
parts thereof, shall be maintained in a safe and sanitary condition. All devices or
safeguards which are required by this code shall be maintained in conformance
with the code edition under which installed. The owner or the owner's designated
agent shall be responsible for the maintenance of buildings and structures. To de-
termine compliance with this subsection, the building official may cause a struc-
ture to be reinspected.
(e) Moved Buildings and Temporary Buildings. Buildings or structures
moved into or within the jurisdiction shall comply with the provisions of this code
for new buildings or structures.
Temporary structures such as reviewing stands and other miscellaneous struc-
tures, sheds, canopies or fences used for the protection of the public around and in
conjunction with construction work may be erected by special permit from the
building official for a limited period of time. Such buildings or structures need not
2
comply with the type of construction or fire-resistive time periods required by this
code. Temporary buildings or structures shall be completely removed upon the ex-
piration of the time limit stated in the permit.
(t) Historic Buildings. Repairs, alterations and additions necessary for the pres-
ervation, restoration, rehabilitation or continued use of a building or structure may
be made without conformance to all the requirements of this code when authorized
by the building official, provided:
I. The building or structure has been designated by official action of the legally
constituted authority of this jurisdiction as having special historical or architectur-
al significance.
2. Any unsafe conditions as described in this code are corrected.
3. The restored building or structure will be no more hazardous based on life
safety, fire safety and sanitation than the existing building.
Alternate Materials and Methods of Construction

Sec. 105. The provisions of this code are not intended to prevent the use of any
material or method of construction not specifically prescribed by this code, pro-
vided any alternate has been approved and its use authorized by the building offi-
cial.
The building official may approve any such alternate, provided the building offi-
cial finds that the proposed design is satisfactory and complies with the provisions
of this code and that the material, method or work offered is, for the purpose in-
tended, at least the equivalent of that prescribed in this code in suitability, strength,
effectiveness, fire resistance, durability, safety and sanitation.
The building official shall require that sufficient evidence or proof be submitted
to substantiate any claims that may be made regarding its use. The details of any
action granting approval of an alternate shall be recorded and entered in the files of
the code enforcement agency.
Modifications
Sec. 106. When there are practical difficulties involved in carrying out the provi-
sions of this code, the building official may grant modifications for individual
cases. The building official shall first find that a special individual reason makes
the strict letter of this code impractical and that the modification is in conformance
with the intent and purpose of this code and that such modification does not lessen
any fire-protection requirements or any degree of structural integrity. The details
of any action granting modifications shall be recorded and entered in the files of
the code enforcement agency.
Tests
Sec. 107. Whenever there is insufficient evidence of compliance with any of the
provisions of this code or evidence that any material or construction does not con-
form to the requirements of this code, the building official may require tests as
proof of compliance to be made at no expense to this jurisdiction.
3
Test methods shall be as specified by this code or by other recognized test stan-
dards. If there are no recognized and accepted test methods forthe proposed alter-
nate, the building official shall determine test procedures.
All tests shall be made by an approved agency. Reports of such tests shall be re-
tained by the building official for the period required for the retention of public re-
corus.
4
Chapter 2
ORGANIZATION AND ENFORCEMENT
Creation of Enforcement Agency
Sec. 201. There is hereby established in this jurisdiction a code enforcement
agency which shall be under the administrative and operational control of the
building official.
Powers and Duties of Building Official

Sec. 202. (a) General. The building official is hereby authorized and directed to
enforce all the provisions of this code. For such purposes, the building official shall
have the powers of a law enforcement officer.
The building official shall have the power to render interpretations of this code
and to adopt and enforce rules and supplemental regulations in order to clarify the
application of its provisions. Such interpretations, rules and regulations shall be in
conformance with the intent and purpose of this code.
(b) Deputies. In accordance with prescribed procedures and with the approval
of the appointing authority, the building official may appoint such number of tech-
nical officers and inspectors and other employees as shall be authorized from time
to time. The building official may deputize such inspectors or employees as may be
necessary to carry out the functions of the code enforcement agency.
(c) Right of Entry. When it is necessary to make an inspection to enforce the
provisions of this code, or when the building official has reasonable cause to be-
lieve that there exists in a building or upon a premises a condition which is contrary
to or in violation ofthis code which makes the building or premises unsafe, danger-
ous or hazardous, the building official may enter the building or premises at reason-
able times to inspect or to perform the duties imposed by this code, provided that if
such building or premises be occupied that credentials be presented to the occupant
and entry requested.lf such building or premises be unoccupied, the building offi-
cial shall first make a reasonable effort to locate the owner or other person having
charge or control of the building or premises and request entry. If entry is refused,
the building official shall have recourse to the remedies provided by law to secure
entry.
(d) Stop Orders. Whenever any work is being done contrary to the provisions of
this code, or other pertinent laws or ordinances implemented through the enforce-
ment of this code, the building official may order the work stopped by notice in
writing served on any persons engaged in the doing or causing such work to be
done, and any such persons shall forthwith stop such work until authorized by the
building official to proceed with the work.
(e) Occupancy Violations. Whenever any building or structure or equipment
therein regulated by this code is being used contrary to the provisions of this code,
the building official may order such use discontinued and the structure, or portion
thereof, vacated by notice served on any person causing such use to be continued.
Such person shall discontinue the use within the time prescribed by the building
5
202-203 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
official after receipt of such notice to make the structure, or portion thereof, comply
with the requirements of this code.
(f) Liability. The building official charged with the enforcement of this code,
: : acting in good faith and without malice in the discharge of the duties required by
.,., this code or other pertinent law or ordinance shall not thereby be rendered person-
,~: ~~:i:;~~:~t;~:~~~~;~.~:,~3%~?iE~~;~;£~!{~i~:~l~!:E~::
:······'··'·
...•.. ...
·····'... ·'...!
i····'i,•i
.· ..
········'... · · · · ·'
formed by the building official or employee in the enforcement of any provision of
such codes or other pertinent laws or ordinances implemented through the enforce-
ment of this code or enforced by the code enforcement agency shall be defended by
1!1/' this jurisdiction until final termination of such proceedings, and any judgment re-
sulting therefrom shall be assumed by this jurisdiction.
This code shall not be construed to relieve from or lessen the responsibility of
any person owning, operating or controlling any building or structure for any dam-
ages to persons or property caused by defects, nor shall the code enforcement
agency or its parent jurisdiction be held as assuming any such liability by reason of
the inspections authorized by this code or any permits or certificates issued under
this code.
(g) Cooperation of Other Officials and Officers. The building official may re-
: :; quest, and shall receive, the assistance and cooperation of other officials of this ju-
:i:. risdiction so far as is required in the discharge ofthe duties required by this code or
J other pertinent law or ordinance.
Unsafe Buildings or Structures

Sec. 203. All buildings or structures regulated by this code which are structurally
unsafe or not provided with adequate egress, or which constitute a fire hazard, or
are otherwise dangerous to human life are, for the purpose of this section, unsafe.
Any use of buildings or structures constituting a hazard to safety, health or public
welfare by reason of inadequate maintenance, dilapidation, obsolescence, fire haz-
ard, disaster, damage or abandonment is, for the purpose of this section, an unsafe
use. Parapet walls, cornices, spires, towers, tanks, statuary and other appendages
or structural members which are supported by, attached to, or a part of a building
and which are in deteriorated condition or otherwise unable to sustain the design
loads which are specified in this code are hereby designated as unsafe building ap-
pendages.
All such unsafe buildings, structures or appendages are hereby declared to be
public nuisances and shall be abated by repair, rehabilitation, demolition or remov-
al in accordance with the procedures set forth in the Dangerous Buildings Code or
such alternate procedures as may have been or as may be adopted by this jurisdic-
tion. As an alternative, the building official, or other employee or official of this
jurisdiction as designated by the governing body, may institute any other appropri-
ate action to prevent, restrain, correct or abate the violation.
6
Board of Appeals
Sec. 204. (a) General. In order to hear and decide appeals of orders, decisions
or determinations made by the building official relative to the application and inter-
pretation of this code, there shall be and is hereby created a board of appeals con-
sisting of members who are qualified by experience and training to pass on m<.Jiters
pertaining to building construction and who are not employees ofthe jurisdiction.
The building official shall be an ex officio member of and shall act as o.ecretary"to
said board but shall have no vote on any matter before the board. The board of ap-
peals shall be appointed by the governing body and shall hold office at its pleasure.
The board shall adopt rules of procedure for conducting its business, and shall ren-
der all decisions and findings in writing to the appellant with a duplicate copy to
the building official.
(b) Limitations of Authority. The board of appeals shall have no authority rela-
tive to interpretation of the administrative provisions of this code nor shall the
board be empowered to waive requirements of this code.
Violations
Sec. 205. It shall be unlawful for any person, firm or corporation to erect, con-
struct, enlarge, alter, repair, move, improve, remove, convert or demolish, equip,
use, occupy or maintain any building or structure or cause or permit the same to be
done in violation of this code.
7
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
NOTES
8
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 301
Chapter 3
PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
Permits
Sec. 301. (a) Permits Required. Except as specified in Subsection (b) of this
section, no building or structure regulated by this code shall be erected, con-
structed, enlarged, altered, repaired, moved, improved, removed, converted or de-
molished unless a separate permit for each building or structure has first been
obtained from the building official.
(b) Work Exempt from Permit. A building permit shall not be required for the
following:
I. One-story detached accessory buildings used as tool and storage sheds, play-
houses and similar uses, provided the projected roof area does not exceed 120
square feet.
2. Fences not over 6 feet high.
3. Oil derricks.
4. Movable cases, counters and partitions not over 5 feet 9 inches high.
5. Retaining walls which are not over 4 feet in height measured from the bottom
of the footing to the top of the wall, unless supporting a surcharge or impounding
Class I, II or III-A liquids.
6. Water tanks supported directly upon grade if the capacity does not exceed
5,000 gallons and the ratio of height to diameter or width does not exceed 2 to I.
7. Platforms, walks and driveways not more than 30 inches above grade and not
over any basement or story below.
8. Painting, papering and similar finish work.
9. Temporary motion picture, television and theater stage sets and scenery.
I 0. Window awnings supported by an exterior wall of Group R, Division 3, and
Group M Occupancies when projecting not more than 54 inches.
II. Prefabricated swimming pools accessory to a Group R, Division 3 Occupan-
cy in which the pool walls are entirely above the adjacent grade and if the capacity
does not exceed 5,000 gallons.
Unless otherwise exempted, separate plumbing, electrical and mechanical per-
mits will be required for the above-exempted items.
Exemption from the permit requirements of this code shall not be deemed to
grant authorization for any work to be done in any manner in violation of the provi-
sions of this code or any other laws or ordinances of this jurisdiction.
d•;~!~:::~;,~:.~ ~u~~~.!h::O:'~:~~t~~~re~;~wo~·.~:'~o~;u Bc '"'" '.' [i.'.'!' .,
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-13, Ready-mixed Concrete

2. Connections
9
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-7, High-strength Bolting

3. Fireproofing
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 43-8, Thickness and Density Determination for Spray-
!:ii!
:::::
applied Fireproofing
Application for Permit

Sec. 302. (a) Application. To obtain a permit, the applicant shall first file an
application therefor in writing on a form furnished by the code enforcement agency
for that purpose. Every such application shall:
I. Identify and describe the work to be covered by the permit for which applica-
tion is made.
2. Describe the land on which the proposed work is to be done by legal descrip-
tion, street address or similar description that will readily identify and definitely
locate the proposed building or work.
3. Indicate the use or occupancy for which the proposed work is intended.
4. Be accompanied by plans, diagrams, computations and specifications and
other data as required in Subsection (b) of this section.
5. State the valuation of any new building or structure or any addition, remodel-
ing or alteration to an existing building.
6. Be signed by the applicant, or the applicant's authorized agent.
7. Give such other data and information as may be required by the building offi-
cial.
(b) Plans and Specifications. Plans, engineering calculations, diagrams and
other data shall be submitted in one or more sets with each application for a permit.
When such plans are not prepared by an architect or engineer, the building official
may require any applicant submitting such plans or other data to demonstrate that
state law does not require that the plans be prepared by a licensed architect or engi-
neer. The building official may require plans, computations and specifications to
be prepared and designed by an engineer or architect licensed by the state to prac-
tice as such even if not required by state law. Submittals shall include construction
inspection requirements as defined in Section 302 (c).
EXCEPTION: The building official may waive the submission of plans, calcula-
tions, construction inspection requirements and other data if it is found that the nature
of the work applied for is such that reviewing of plans is not necessary to obtain com-
pliance with this code.
(c) Construction Inspection. The engineer or architect in responsible charge of
the structural design work shall include in the construction documents the follow-
ing:
I. Special inspections required by Section 306.
2. Other structural inspections required by the engineer or architect in responsi-
ble charge of the structural design work.
(d) Information on Plans and Specifications. Plans and specifications shall
be drawn to scale upon substantial paper or cloth and shall be of sufficient clarity to
indicate the location, nature and extent of the work proposed and show in detail that
10
it will conform to the provisions of this code and all relevant laws, ordinances, rules
and regulations.
Plans for buildings more than two stories in height of other than Group R, Divi-
sion 3 and Group M Occupancies shall indicate how required structural and fire-re-
sistive integrity will be maintained where a penetration will be made for electrical,
mechanical, plumbing and communication conduits, pipes and similar systems.
Permits Issuance
Sec. 303. (a) Issuance. The application, plans, specifications, computations
and other data filed by an applicant for a permit shall be reviewed by the building
official. Such plans may be reviewed by other departments of this jurisdiction to
verify compliance with any applicable laws under their jurisdiction. If the building
official finds that the work described in an application for a permit and the plans,
specifications and other data filed therewith conform to the requirements of this
code and other pertinent laws and ordinances, and that the fees specified in Section
304 have been paid, the building official shall issue a permit therefor to the appli-
cant.
When the building official issues the permit where plans are required, the build-
ing official shall endorse in writing or stamp the plans and specifications
APPROVED. Such approved plans and specifications shall not be changed, modi-
fied or altered without authorizations from the building official, and all work regu-
lated by this code shall be done in accordance with the approved plans.
The building official may issue a permit for the construction of part of a building
or structure before the entire plans and specifications for the whole building or
structure have been submitted or approved, provided adequate information and de-
tailed statements have been filed complying with all pertinent requirements of this
code. The holder of a partial permit shall proceed without assurance that the permit
for the entire building or structure will be granted.
(b) Retention of Plans. One set of approved plans, specifications and computa-
tions shall be retained by the building official for a period of not less than 90 days
from date of completion of the work covered therein; and one set of approved plans
and specifications shall be returned to the applicant, and said set shall be kept on the
site of the building or work at all times during which the work authorized thereby is
in progress.
(c) Validity of Permit. The issuance or granting of a permit or approval of plans,
specifications and computations shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an ap-
proval of, any violation of any of the provisions of this code or of any other ordi-
nance of the jurisdiction. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel
the provisions of this code or other ordinances of the jurisdiction shall not be valid.
The issuance of a permit based on plans, specifications and other data shall not
prevent the building official from thereafter requiring the correction of errors in
said plans, specifications and other data, or from preventing building operations
being carried on thereunder when in violation of this code or of any other ordi-
nances of this jurisdiction.
11
. (d) ~xpiration. Every permit issued by the building official under the provi-
swns ot this code shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building
o~ work authorized by such permit is not commenced within 180 days from the date
of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit is suspended or
abandoned at any time after the work is commenced for a period of 180 days. Be-
fore such work can be recommenced, a new permit shall be first obtained to do so,
and the fee therefor shall be one half the amount required for a new permit for such
work, provided no changes have been made or will be made in the original plans
and specifications for such work; and provided further that such suspension or
abandonment has not exceeded one year. In order to renew action on a permit after
expiration, the permittee shall pay a new full permit fee.
Any permittee holding an unexpired permit may apply for an extension of the
time within which work may commence under that permit when the permittee is
unable to commence work within the time required by this section for good and
satisfactory reasons. The building official may extend the time for action by the
permittee for a period not exceeding 180 days on written request by the permittee
showing that circumstances beyond the control of the permittee have prevented ac-
tion from being taken. No permit shall be extended more than once.
(e) Suspension or Revocation. The building official may, in writing, suspend or
revoke a permit issued under the provisions of this code whenever the permit is is-
sued in error or on the basis of incorrect information supplied, or in violation of any
ordinance or regulation or any of the provisions of this code.
Fees
Sec. 304. (a) General. Fees shall be assessed in accordance with the provisions
of this section or shall be as set forth in the fee schedule adopted by the jurisdiction.
(b) Permit Fees. The fee for each permit shall be as set forth in Table No. 3-A.
The determination of value or valuation under any of the provisions of this code
shall be made by the building official. The value to be used in computing the build-
ing permit and building plan review fees shall be the total value of all construction
work for which the permit is issued, as well as all finish work, painting, roofing,
electrical, plumbing, heating, air conditioning, elevators, fire extinguishing sys-
tems and any other permanent equipment.
(c) Plan Review Fees. When a plan or other data are required to be submitted
by Section 302 (b), a plan review fee shall be paid at the time of submitting plans
and specifications for review. Said plan review fee shall be 65 percent of the build-
ing permit fee as shown in Table No. 3-A.
The plan review fees specified in this subsection are separate fees from the per-
mit fees specified in Section 304 (b), and are in addition to the permit fees.
Where plans are incomplete or changed so as to require additional plan review,
an additional plan review fee shall be charged at the rate shown in Table No. 3-A.
(d) Expiration of Plan Review. Applications for which no permit is issued
within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation, and
plans and other data submitted for review may thereafter be returned to the appli-
cant or destroyed by the building official. The building official may extend the time
12
for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days on request by the
applicant showing that circumstances beyond the control of the applicant have pre-
vented action from being taken. No application shall be extended more than once.
In order to renew action on an application after expiration, the applicant shall re-
submit plans and pay a new plan review fee.
(e) Investigation Fees: Work without a Permit.!. Investigation. Whenever
any work for which a permit is required by this code has been commenced wiihout
first obtaining said permit, a special investigation shall be made before a permit
may be issued for such work.
2. Fee. An investigation fee, in addition to the permit fee, shall be collected
whether or not a permit is then or subsequently issued. The investigation fee shall
be equal to the amount of the permit fee required by this code. The minimum inves-
tigation fee shall be the same as the minimum fee set forth in Table No. 3-A. The
payment of such investigation fee shall not exempt any person from compliance
with all other provisions of this code nor from any penalty prescribed by law.
(f) Fee Refunds. The building official may authorize refunding of any fee paid
hereunder which was erroneously paid or collected.
The bui !ding official may authorize refunding of not more than 80 percent of the
permit fee paid when no work has been done under a permit issued in accordance
with this code.
The building official may authorize refunding of not more than 80 percent of the
plan review fee paid when an application for a permit for which a plan review fee
has been paid is withdrawn or canceled before any plan reviewing is done.
The building official shall not authorize refunding of any fee paid except on writ-
ten application filed by the original permittee not later than 180 days after the date
of fee payment.
Inspections
Sec. 305. (a) General. All construction or work for which a permit is required
shall be subject to inspection by the building official and all such construction or
work shall remain accessible and exposed for inspection purposes until approved
by the building official. In addition, certain types of construction shall have contin-
uous inspection as specified in Section 306.
Approval as a result of an inspection shall not be construed to be an approval of a
violation of the provisions of this code or of other ordinances of the jurisdiction.
Inspections presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of this
code or of other ordinances of the jurisdiction shall not be valid.
It shall be the duty of the permit applicant to cause the work to remain accessible
and exposed for inspection purposes. Neither the building official nor the jurisdic-
tion shall be liable for expense entailed in the removal or replacement of any mate-
rial required to allow inspection.
A survey of the lot may be required by the building official to verify that the
structure is located in accordance with the approved plans.
(b) Inspection Record Card. Work requiring a permit shall not be commenced
until the permit holder or an agent of the permit holder shall have posted or other-
13
wise made available an inspection record card such as to allow the building official
to conveniently make the required entries thereon regarding inspection of the
work. This card shall be maintained available by the permit holder until final ap-
(7mv,11 has been granted by the building official.
(c) Inspection Requests. It shall be the duty of the person doing the work autho-
rized by a permit to notify the building official that such work is ready for inspec-
tion. The building official may require that every request for inspection be filed at
least one working day before such inspection is desired. Such request may be in
writing or by telephone at the option of the building official.
It shall be the duty of the person requesting any inspections required by this code
to provide access to and means for inspection of such work.
(d) Approval Required. Work shall not be done beyond the point indicated in
each successive inspection without first obtaining the approval ofthe building offi-
cial. The building official, upon notification, shall make the requested inspections
and shall either indicate that portion of the construction is satisfactory as com-
pleted, or shall notify the permit holder or an agent of the permit holder wherein the
same fails to comply with this code. Any portions which do not comply shall be
corrected and such portion shall not be covered or concealed until authorized by the
building official.
There shall be a final inspection and approval of all buildings and structures
when completed and ready for occupancy and use.
(e) Required Inspections. Reinforcing steel or structural framework of any part
of any building or structure shall not be covered or concealed without first obtain-
ing the approval of the building official.
The building official, upon notification, shall make the following inspections:
I. Foundation inspection. To be made after excavations for footings are com-
plete and any required reinforcing steel is in place. For concrete foundations, any
required forms shall be in place prior to inspection. All materials for the foundation
shall be on the job, except where concrete is ready mixed in accordance with
U .B.C. Standard No. 26-13, the concrete need not be on the job. Where the founda-
tion is to be constructed of approved treated wood, additional inspections may be
required by the building official.
2. Concrete slab or under-floor inspection. To be made after all in-slab or un-
der-floor building service equipment, conduit, piping accessories and other ancil-
lary equipment items are in place, but before any concrete is placed or floor
sheathing installed, including the subfloor.
3. Frame inspection. To be made after the roof, all framing, fire blocking and
bracing arc in place and all pipes, chimneys and vents are complete and the rough
electrical, plumbing, and heating wires, pipes and ducts are approved.
4. Lath or gypsum board inspection. To be made after all lathing and gypsum
board, interior and exterior, is in place, but before any plastering is applied or be-
fore gypsum board joints and fasteners are taped and finished.
5. Final inspection. To be made after finish grading and the building is com-
pleted and ready for occupancy.
14
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 305·306
(f) Other Inspections. In addition to the called inspections specified above, the
building official may make or require other inspections of any construction work to
ascertain compliance with the provisions of this code and other laws which are en-
forced by the code enforcement agency.
(g) Reinspections. A reinspection fee may be assessed for each inspection or
reinspection when such portion of work for which inspection is called is not com-
plete or when corrections called for are not made.
This subsection is not to be interpreted as requiring reinspection fees the first
time a job is rejected for failure to comply with the requirements of this code, but as
controlling the practice of calling for inspections before the job is ready for such
inspection or reinspection.
Reinspection fees may be assessed when the inspection record card is not posted
or otherwise available on the work site, the approved plans are not readily available
to the inspector, for failure to provide access on the date for which inspection is
requested, or for deviating from plans requiring the approval of the building otTi-
cial.
To obtain a reinspection, the applicant shall file an application therefor in writing
on a form furnished for that purpose and pay the reinspection fee in accordance
with Table No. 3-A or as set forth in the fee schedule adopted by the jurisdiction.
In instances where reinspection fees have been assessed, no additional inspec-
tion of the work will be performed until the required fees have been paid.
Special Inspections
Sec. 306. (a} General. In addition to the inspections required by Section 305,
the owner or the engineer or architect of record acting as the owner's agent shall
employ one or more special inspectors who shall provide inspections during con-
struction on the following types of work:
j!~!
I. Concrete. During the taking of test specimens and placing of reinforced con-
crete. See Item 12 for shotcrete.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Concrete for foundations conforming to minimum require-
ments ofTable No. 29-A or for Group R. Division 3 or Group M, Division I Occupan-
cies, provided the building official finds that a special hazard does not exist.
2. For foundation concrete when the structural design is based on an j'; no greater
than 2.500 pounds per square inch (psi).
3. Non structural slabs on grade, including prestressed slabs on grade when effec-
tive prestress in concrete is less than 150 psi.
4. Site work concrete fully supported on earth and concrete where no special haz-
ard exists.
2. Bolts installed in concrete. Prior to and during the placement of concrete
around bolts when stress increases permitted by Footnote No.5 of Table No. 26-E
or Section 2624 (b) are utilized.
3. Special moment-resisting concrete frame. As required by Section 2625 Ul
of this code.
4. Reinforcing steel and prestressing steel tendons. A. During all stressing
and grouting of tendons in prestressed concrete.
15
!/!/ B. During placing of reinforcing steel and prestressing tendons for all concrete
, , required to have special inspection by Item I.
EXCEPTION: The special inspector need not be present continuously during
placing of reinforcing steel and prestressing tendons, provided the special inspector
has inspected for conformance with the approved plans prior to the closing of forms
or the delivery of concrete to the jobsite.
;; S. Welding. A. Special moment-resisting steel frames. As required by Sec-
J tion 2710 (k) of this code.
B. All structural welding, including welding of reinforcing steel.
EXCEPTIONS: I. When welding is done in an approved fabricator's shop.
2. When approved by the building official. single-pass fillet welds when stressed
to less than 50 percent of allowable stresses and tloor and roof deck welding and
welded studs when used for structural diaphragm or composite systems may have
periodic inspections in accordance with Section 306 (e) of this code. For periodic in-
spection. the inspector shall check qualifications of welders at the start of work and
then make final inspection of all welds for compliance prior to completion of weld-
ing.
6. High-strength bolting. As required by U.B.C. Standard No. 27-7.
EXCEPTION: The special inspector need not be present during the entire instal-
lation and tightening operation, for shear/bearing-type connections when threads are
not required by design to be excluded from the shear plane, provided that prior to the
start of bolting, the surfaces and the bolt size and type are inspected for conformance
to plans and specifications. Additionally, at the completion of all bolting, the inspec-
tor shall determine that the plies have been brought into snug contact.
7. Structural masonry. During preparation of masonry wall prisms, sampling
and placing of all masonry units, placement of reinforcement, inspection of grout
space, immediately prior to closing of cleanouts, and during all grouting opera-
tions.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Special inspection need not be provided when design stresses
have been adjusted to pennit noncontinuous inspection.
2. For closed-end hollow-unit masonry where the f~, is no more than I ,500 psi
for concrete units or 2,600 psi for clay units and cleanouts are provided at the bottom
course of every grout pour at each vertical bar, special inspection for placing of units
may be performed on a periodic basis in accordance with Section 306 (e).
3. For open-end hollow-unit masonry where cleanouts are provided at the bottom
course of every grout pour at each vertical bar, special inspection for placing units
may be performed on a periodic basis in accordance with Section 306 (e).
X. Reinforced gypsum concrete. When cast-in-place Class B gypsum concrete
is being mixed and placed.
9. Insulating concrete fill. During the application of insulating concrete fill
when used as part of a structural system.
EXCEPTION: The special inspections may be limited to an initial inspection to
check the deck surface and placement of reinforcing. The special inspector shall su-
pervise the preparation of compression test specimens during this initial inspection.
10. Spray-applied fireproofing. As required by U.B.C. Standard No. 43-X.
16
II. Piling, drilled piers and caissons. During driving and testing of piles and
construction of cast-in-place drilled piles or caissons. See Items I and 4 for concrete
and reinforcing steel inspection.
12. Shotcrete. During the taking of test specimens and placing of all shotcrete
and as required by Section 2621 U) and (k).
EXCEPTION: Shotcrete work fully supported on earth, minor repairs and when,
in the opinion of the building official, no special hazard exists.
13. Special grading, excavation and filling. During earth-work excavations,
grading and filling operations inspection to satisfy requirements of Chapter 29 and
Appendix Chapter 70 of this code.
14. Special cases. Work which, in the opinion of the building official, involves
unusual hazards or conditions.
(b) Special Inspector. The special inspector shall be a qualified person who
shall demonstrate competence, to the satisfaction of the building official. for in-
spection of the particular type of construction or operation requiring special in-
spection.
(c) Duties and Responsibilities of the Special Inspector. The special inspector
shall observe the work assigned for conformance with the approved design draw-
ings and specifications.
The special inspector shall furnish inspection rer the building official, the
engineer or architect of record, and other designated r rsons. All discrepancies
shall be brought to the immediate attention of the contractor for correction, then, if
uncorrected, to the proper design authority and to the building official.
The special inspector shall submit a final signed report stating whether the work
requiring special inspection was, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in con-
formance with the approved plans and specifications and the applicable workman-
ship provisions of this code.
(d) Waiver of Special Inspection. The building official may waive the require-
ment for the employment of a special inspector if the construction is of a minor na-
ture.
(e) Periodic Special Inspection. Some inspections may be made on a periodic
basis and satisfy the requirements of continuous inspection, provided this periodic
scheduled inspection is performed as outlined in the project plans and specifica-
tions and approved by the building official.
(f) Approved Fabricators. Special inspections required by this section and
elsewhere in this code shall not be required where the work is done on the premises
of a fabricator registered and approved by the building official to perform such
work without special inspection. The Certificate of Registration shall be subject to
revocation by the building official if it is found that any work done pursuant to the
approval is in violation of this code. The approved fabricator shall submit a Certifi-
cate ofComplianee that the work was performed in accordance with the approved
plans and specifications to the building official and to the engineer or architect of
record. The approved fabricator's qualifications shall be contingent on compliance
with the following:
17
1. The fabricator has developed and submitted a detailed fabrication procedural

manual reflecting key quality control procedures which will provide a basis for in-
spection control of workmanship and the fabricator plant.
2. Verification of the fabricator's quality control capabilities, plant and person-
nel as outlined in the fabrication procedural manual shall be by an approved inspec-
tion or quality control agency.
3. "et\odic plant inspections shall be conducted by an approved inspection or
quality control agency to monitor the effectiveness of the quality control program.
4. It shall be the responsibility of the inspection or quality control agency to
notify the approving authority in writing of any change to the procedural manual.
Any fabricator approval may be revoked for just cause. Reapproval of the fabrica-
tor shall be contingent on compliance with quality control procedures during the
past year.
fi Structural Observation
:.
·' ~,. : wor~ee:~~::f~~:~~~;~~~~~e:~~~\~:~:~!i~~tovided
:•.•. ·.' . in Seismic Zone No. 3 or 4
I. The structure is defined in Table No. 23-K as Occupancy Category I, II or III,
2. The structure is required to comply with Section 1807, or

3. Construction inspection as defined in Section 302 (c), Item 2, is required, or
4. When such observation is specifically required by the building official.
if The owner shall employ the engineer or architect responsible for the structural
: : : design, or another engineer or architect designated by the engineer or architect re-
•t sponsible for the structural design to perform structural observation as defined in
•J Section 420. The engineer or architect shall submit a statement in writing to the
': : building official stating that the site visits have been made and whether or not any
observed deficiencies have been corrected to conform to the approved plans and
specifications, or to revised details approved by the building official.
Certificate of Occupancy
Sec. 308. (a) Use and Occupancy. No building or structure shall be used or oc-
cupied, and no change in the existing occupancy classification of a building or
structure or portion thereof shall be made until the building official has issued a
Certificate of Occupancy therefor as provided herein.
EXCEPTION: Group R, Division 3 and Group M Occupancies.
Issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy shall not be construed as an approval of a
violation of the provisions of this code or of other ordinances of the jurisdiction.
Certificates presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of this
code of other ordinances of the jurisdiction shall not be valid.
(b) Change in Use. Changes in the character or use of a building shall not be
made except as specified in Section 502 of this code.
(c) Certificate Issued. After the building official inspects the building or struc-
ture and finds no violations of the provisions of this code or other laws which are
18
enforced by the code enforcement agency, the building official shall issue a Certifi-
cate of Occupancy which shall contain the following:
I. The building permit number.
2. The address of the building.
3. The name and address of the owner.
4. A description of that portion of the building for which the certificate is issued.
5. A statement that the described portion of the building has been inspected for
compliance with the requirements of this code for the group and division of occu-
pancy and the use for which the proposed occupancy is classified.
6. The name of the building official.
(d) Temporary Certificate. If the building official finds that no substantial
hazard will result from occupancy of any building or portion thereof before the
same is completed, a temporary Certificate of Occupancy may be issued for the use
of a portion or portions of a building or structure prior to the completion of the en-
tire building or structure.
(e) Posting. The Certificate of Occupancy shall be posted in a conspicuous place
on the premises and shall not be removed except by the building official.
(f) Revocation. The building official may, in writing, suspend or revoke a Cer-
tificate of Occupancy issued under the provisions of this code wheneverthe certifi-
cate is issued in error, or on the basis of incorrect information supplied, or when it is
determined that the building or structure or portion thereof is in violation of any
ordinance or regulation or any of the provisions of this code.
19
3-A 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 3-A-BUILDING PERMIT FEES
TOTAL VALUATION FEE

$1 .DDto$500.00 $15.00
$501.00 to $2,000.00 $15.00 for the first $500.00 plus $2.00 for each addi-
tional $100.00 or fraction thereof, to and including
$2,000.00
$2,001.00 to $25,000.00 $45.00 for the first $2,000.00 plus $9.00 for each addi-
tional $1,000.00 or fraction thereof, to and including
$25,000.00
$25,001.00 to $50,000.00 $252.00 for the first $25,000.00 plus $6.50 for each
additional $ I ,000.00 or fraction thereof, to and includ-
ing $50,000.00
$50,001.00 to $100,000.00 $414.50 for the first $50,000.00 plus $4.50 for each addi-
tional $1,000.00 or fraction thereof, to and including
$100,000.00
$100,001.00 to $500,000.00 $639.50 for the first $100,000.00 plus $3.50 for each ad-
ditional $1 ,000.00 or fraction thereof to and including
$500,000.00
$500,001.00to $2,039.50 for the first $500,000.00 plus $3.00 for each
$1 ,000,000.00 additional $1,000.00 or fraction thereof, to and including
$1,000,000.00
$1,000,001.00 and up $3,539.50 for the first $1,000,000.00 plus $2.00 for each
additional $1,000.00 or fraction thereof
Other Inspections and Fees:
I. Inspections outside of normal business hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . $30.00 per hour*
(minimum charge-two hours)
2. Reinspection fees assessed under provisions of
Section 305 (g) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $30.00 per hour*
3. Inspections for which no fee is specifically indicated ....... $30.00 per hour*
(minimum charge--one-half hour)
4. Additional plan review required by changes, additions
or revisions to approved plans ......................... $30.00 per hour*
*Or the total hourly cost to the JUnsdtc!Ion, whtchever ts the greatest. Thts cost shall mclude
supervision, overhead, equipment, hourly wages and fringe benefits of the employees in-
volved.
20
Part II
DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Chapter 4
DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Definitions
Sec. 401. (a) General. For the purpose of this code, certain terms, phrases,
words and their derivatives shall be construed as specified in this chapter. Words
used in the singular include the plural and the plural the singular. Words used in the
masculine gender include the feminine and the feminine the masculine.
Where terms are not defined, they shall have their ordinary accepted meanings
within the context with which they are used. Webster's Third New International
Dictionary ofthe English Language, Unabridged, copyright 1986, shall be consid-
ered as providing ordinarily accepted meanings.
(b) Standards of Quality. The standards listed below labeled a "U .B.C. stan-
dard" are also listed in Chapter 60, Part II, and are part of this code. The other stan-
dards listed below are guideline standards and as such are not adopted as part of this
code (see Sections 6002 and 6003).
I. Noncombustible material
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 4-1, Noncombustible Material Test ··
~-~~;·~~~~:~~:~~~!';_',~~:~·~:~~,;;;;:~"'·homing Ch•m<l<ri"' '

of Building Materials
•·,.I,!·'·
B. U .B.C. Standard No. 25-28, Fire-retardant-treated Wood Tests on Durability

and Hygroscopic Properties
3. Corrosives and irritants
A. Code of Federal Regulations 49, Part 173, Appendix A, Testing for Corro-
siveness
B. Code of Federal Regulations 16, Sections 1500.41 and 1500.42, Methods of
Testing Primary Irritant Substances and Test for Eye Irritants
Re~,g:;~~Jig~f:~::¥::fiootion of the HeiDfu, Fl•mm•bility '"d·, · '·1 .,' ~

A. ASTM D 635, Method of Test for Determining Classification of Approved
. .•,
.
Light -transmitting Plastics
A
Sec. 402. ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM is an assembly consisting of panels
mounted on pedestals to provide an under-floor space for the installations of me-
21
chanica!, electrical, communication or similar systems or to serve as an air-supply

or return-air plenum.
i.i. ACI is the American Concrete Institute, Box 19150, Redford Station, Detroit,
Michigan 48219.
ADDITION is an extension or increase in floor area or height of a building or
structure.
jj AEROSOL is a product which is dispensed by a propellant from a metal can up
•.·' ·' ·',:· to a maximum size of 33.8 fluid ounces or a glass or plastic bottle up to a size of 4
'. fluid ounces, other than a rim-vented container.
AGRICULTURAL BUILDING is a structure designed and constructed to
house farm implements, hay, grain, poultry, livestock or other horticultural prod-
ucts. This structure shall not be a place of human habitation or a place of employ-
ment where agricultural products are processed, treated or packaged; nor shall it be
a place used by the public.
AISC is the American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 400 North Michigan
Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611.
ALLEY is any public way or thoroughfare less than 16 feet but not less than I0
feet in width which has been dedicated or deeded to the public for public use.
ALTER or ALTERATION is any change, addition or modification in construc-
tion or occupancy.
AMUSEMENT BUILDING is a building or portion thereof, temporary or per-
manent, used for entertainment or educational purposes and which contains a sys-
tem which transports passengers or provides a walkway through a course so
arranged that the required exits are not apparent due to theatrical distractions, are
disguised or not readily available due to the method of transportation through the
building or structure.
ANSI is the American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York,
New York I0018.
APARTMENT HOUSE is any building or portion thereof which contains three
or more dwelling units and, fort he purpose of this code, includes residential condo-
miniums.
APPROVED, as to materials and types of construction, refers to approval by
the building official as the result of investigation and tests conducted by the build-
ing official, or by reason of accepted principles or tests by recognized authorities,
technical or scientific organizations.
APPROVED AGENCY is an established and recognized agency regularly en-
gaged in conducting tests or furnishing inspection services, when such agency has
been approved.
APPROVED FABRICATOR is an established and qualified person, firm or
corporation approved by the building official pursuant to Section 306 (f) of this
code.
AREA. See "floor area."
ASSEMBLY BUILDING is a building or portion of a building used for the
gathering together of 50 or more persons for such purposes as deliberation, educa-
22
lion, instruction, worship, entertainment, amusement, drinking or dining or await-

ing transportation.
ASTM is the American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street, •.',,•,,•.
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103. .
ATRIUM is an opening through two or more floor levels other than enclosed
stairways, elevators, hoistways, escalators, plumbing, electrical, air-conditioning
or other equipment, which is closed at the top and not defined as a mall. Floor lev-
els, as used in this definition, do not include balconies within assembly occupan-
cies or mezzanines which comply with Section 1717.
AUTOMATIC, as applied to fire-protection devices, is a device or system pro-
viding an emergency function without the necessity of human intervention and ac-
tivated as a result of a predetermined temperature rise, rate of rise oftemperature or
increase in the level of combustion products.
8
Sec. 403. BALCONY is that portion of the seating space of an assembly room,
the lowest part of which is raised 4 feet or more above the level of the main floor
and shall include the area providing access to the seating area or serving only as a
foyer.
BALCONY, EXTERIOR EXIT. See Section 3301 (b).
BASEMENT is any floor level below the first story in a building, except that a
floor level in a building having only one floor level shall be classified as a basement
unless such tloor level qualifies as a first story as defined herein.
BOILER, HIGH-PRESSURE, is a boiler furnishing steam at pressures in ex-
cess of 15 pounds per square inch (psi) or hot water at temperatures in excess of
250°F., or at pressures in excess of 160 psi.
BOILER ROOM is any room containing a steam or hot-water boiler.
BUILDING is any structure used or intended for supporting or sheltering any
use or occupancy.
BUILDING, EXISTING, is a building erected prior to the adoption of this
code. or one for which a legal building permit has been issued.
BUILDING OFFICIAL is the officer or other designated authority charged
with the administration and enforcement of this code, or the building official's duly
authorized representative.
c
Sec. 404. CAST STONE is a precast building stone manufactured from port-
land cement concrete and used as a trim, veneer or facing on or in buildings or struc-
tures.
CENTRAL HEATING PLANT is environmental heating equipment which
directly utilizes fuel to generate heat in a medium for distribution by means of ducts
or pipes to areas other than the room or space in which the equipment is located.
C.F.R. is the Code of Federal Regulations, a regulation of the United States of
America available from the Superintendent of Documents, United States Govern-
ment Printing Otlice, Washington, D.C. 20402.
23
CHIEF OF THE FIRE DEPARTMENT is the head of the fire department or a

regularly authorized deputy.
COMBUSTIBLE LIQUID. See the Fire Code.
;,; CONGREGATE RESIDENCE is any building or portion thereof which con-
jj[l! tains facilities for living, sleeping and sanitation, as required by this code, and may
,,,, include facilities for eating and cooking, for occupancy by other than a family. A
::: congregate residence may be a shelter, convent, monastery, dormitory, fraternity
M~ or sorority house but does not include jails, hospitals, nursing homes, hotels or
lodging houses.
CONDOMINIUM, RESIDENTIAL. See "apartment house."
CONTROL AREA is a space bounded by not less than a one-hour fire-resistive
occupancy separation within which the exempted amounts of hazardous materials
may be stored, dispensed, handled or used.
CORROSIVE is a chemical that causes visible destruction of, or irreversible
alterations in, living tissue by chemical action at the site of contact. A chemical is
considered to be corrosive if, when tested on the intact skin of albino rabbits by the
method described in the United States Department of Transportation in Appendix
A toC.F.R. 49 Part 173, it destroys or changes irreversibly the structure of the tissue
at the site of contact following an exposure period of four hours. This term shall not
refer to action on inanimate surfaces.
COURT is a space, open and unobstructed to the sky, located at or above grade
level on a lot and bounded on three or more sides by walls of a building.
D
Sec. 405. DANGEROUS BUILDINGS CODE is the Uniform Code for the
Abatement of Dangerous Buildings promulgated by the International Conference
of Building Officials, as adopted by this jurisdiction.
DISPENSING is the pouring or transferring of any material from a container,
tank or similar vessel, whereby vapors, dusts, fumes, mists or gases may be liber-
.. ated to the atmosphere.

DISPERSAL AREA, SAFE. See Section 3322 (b) .
DRAFT STOP is a material, device or construction installed to restrict the
movement of air within open spaces of concealed areas of building components
such as crawl spaces, floor-ceiling assemblies, roof-ceiling assemblies and attics.
DWELLING is any building or portion thereof which contains not more than
two dwelling units.
DWELLING UNIT is any building or portion thereof which contains living fa-
cilities, including provisions for sleeping, eating, cooking and sanitation, as re-
quired by this code, for not more than one family, or a congregate residence for I0
or less persons.
E
Sec. 406. EFFICIENCY DWELLING UNIT is a dwelling unit containing
only one habitable room.
24
ELECTRICAL CODE is the National Electrical Code promulgated by the Na-

tional Fire Protection Association, as adopted by this jurisdiction.
ELEVATOR CODE is the safety code for elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators
and moving walks as adopted by this jurisdiction (see Appendix Chapter 51).
I
EMERGENCY CONTROL STATION is an approved location on the prem- F
ises of a Group H, Division 6 Occupancy where signals from emergency equip- 1
ment are received and which is continually staffed by trained personnel. F

I
EXISTING BUILDINGS. See "building, existing."
EXIT. See Section 3301 (b).
EXIT COURT. See Section 3301 (b).
EXIT PASSAGEWAY. See Section 3301 (b).
F
Sec. 407.FABRICATION AREA (fabarea) is an area within a Group H, Divi-
sion 6 Occupancy in which there are processes involving hazardous production
materials and may include ancillary rooms or areas such as dressing rooms and of-
fices that are directly related to the fab area processes.
FAMILY is an individual or two or more persons related by blood or marriage or
a group of not more than five persons (excluding servants) who need not be related
by blood or marriage living together in a dwelling unit.
FIRE ASSEMBLY. See Section 4306 (b).
FIRE CODE is the Uniform Fire Code promulgated jointly by the Western Fire
Chiefs Association and the International Conference of Building Officials, as
adopted by this jurisdiction.
FIRE RESISTANCE or FIRE-RESISTIVE CONSTRUCTION is construc-
tion to resist the spread of fire, details of which are specified in this code.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD is any wood product impregnated
with chemicals by a pressure process or other means during manufacture, and
whiL 1, when test<"'' in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1 fora periodof30
minutes. shall h: 1 flame spread of not over 25 and show no evidence of progres-
sive combustion ,,, lition, the flame front shall not progress more than I 0 1h feet
beyond the centu , me ,f the burner at any time during the test. Materials which
may be exposed to the . ~ather shall pass the accelerated weathering test and be
identified as Exterior type, in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 25-28. Where
material is not directly exposed to rainfall but exposed to high humidity conditions,
it shall be subjected to the hygroscopic test and identified as Interior Type A in ac-
cordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-28.
All materials shall bear identification showing the fire performance rating there-
of. Such identifications shall be issued by an approved agency having a service for
inspection of materials at the factory.
FLAMMABLE LIQUID. See the Fire Code.
FLOOR AREA is the area included within the surrounding exterior walls of a
building or portion thereof, exclusive of vent shafts and courts. The floor area of a
25
building, or portion thereof, not provided with surrounding exterior walls shall be
the usable area under the horizontal projection of the roof or floor above.
~{ FM is Factory Mutual Engineering and Research, 1151 Boston-Providence
~j; Turnpike, Norwood, Massachusetts 02062.
FOAM PLASTIC INSULATION is a plastic which is intentionally expanded
by the use of a foaming agent to produce a reduced-density plastic containing voids
... consisting of hollow spheres or interconnected cells distributed throughout the
't plastic for thermal insulating or acoustical purposes and which has a density less
than 20 pounds per cubic foot.
FOOTING is that portion of the foundation of a structure which spreads and
transmits loads directly to the soil or the piles.
FRONT OF LOT is the front boundary line of a lot bordering on the street and,
in the case of a comer lot, may be either frontage.
G
Sec. 408. GARAGE is a building or portion thereof in which a motor vehicle
containing flammable or combustible liquids or gas in its tank is stored, repaired
or kept.
GARAGE, PRIVATE, is a building or a portion of a building, not more than
I ,000 square feet in area, in which only motor vehicles used by the tenants of the
building or buildings on the premises are stored or kept. (See Chapter II.)
GARAGE, PUBLIC, is any garage other than a private garage.
GRADE (Adjacent Ground Elevation) is the lowest point of elevation of the
finished surface of the ground, paving or sidewalk within the area between the
building and the property line or, when the property line is more than 5 feet from the
building, between the building and a line 5 feet from the building.
GRADE (Lumber) is the classification oflumber in regard to strength and util-
ity.
GUARDRAIL is a system of building components located near the open sides
of elevated walking surfaces for the purpose of minimizing the possibility of an
accidental fall from the walking surface to the lower level.
GUEST is any person hiring or occupying a room for living or sleeping pur-
poses.
GUEST ROOM is any room or rooms used or intended to be used by a guest for
sleeping purposes. Every 100 square feet of superficial floor area in a dormitory
shall be considered to be a guest room.
H
Sec. 409. HABITABLE SPACE (ROOM) is space in a structure for living,
sleeping, eating or cooking. Bathrooms, toilet compartments, closets, halls, stor-
age or utility space, and similar areas, are not considered habitable space.
HANDLING is the deliberate transport of materials by any means to a point of
storage or use.
26
HANDRAIL is a railing provided for grasping with the hand for support. See !i![
also Section 408, definition of "guardrail." .:i:i
HAZARDOUS PRODUCTION MATERIAL (HPM) is a solid, liquid or gas
that has a degree of hazard rating in health, flammability or reactivity of 3 or 4
and which is used directly in research, laboratory or production processes which
have, as their end product, materials which are not hazardous.
HEALTH HAZARD is a classification of a chemical for which there is statisti-
cally significant evidence based on at least one study conducted in accordance with
established scientific principles that acute or chronic health effects may occur in
exposed persons. The term "health hazard" includes chemicals which are carcino-
gens, toxic or highly toxic agents, reproductive toxins, irritants, corrosives, sensi-
tizers, hepatotoxins, nephrotoxins, neurotoxins, agents which act on the
hematopoietic system, and agents which damage the lungs, skin, eyes or mucous
membranes.
HEIGHT OF BUILDING is the vertical distance above a reference datum
measured to the highest point of the coping of a flat roof or to the deck line of a
mansard roof or to the average height of the highest gable of a pitched or hipped
roof. The reference datum shall be selected by either of the following, whichever
yields a greater height of building:
1. The elevation of the highest adjoining sidewalk or ground surface within a
5-foot horizontal distance of the exterior wall of the building when such sidewalk
or ground surface is not more than 10 feet above lowest grade.
2. An elevation 10 feet higher than the lowest grade when the sidewalk or ground
surface described in Item 1 above is more than 10 feet above lowest grade.
The height of a stepped or terraced building is the maximum height of any seg-
ment of the building.
HELIPORT is an area ofland or water or a structural surface which is used, or
intended for use, for the landing and take-off of helicopters, and any appurtenant
areas which are used, or intended for use, for heliport buildings and other heliport
facilities.
HELISTOP is the same as a heliport, except that no refueling, maintenance, re-
pairs or storage of helicopters is permitted.
HIGHLY TOXIC MATERIAL is a material which produces a lethal dose or a
lethal concentration which falls within any of the following categories:
1. A chemical that has a median lethal dose (LD50) of 50 milligrams or less per
kilogram of body weight when administered orally to albino rats weighing be-
tween 200 and 300 grams each.
2. A chemical that has a median lethal dose (LD 50 ) of200 milligrams or less per
kilogram of body weight when administered by continuous contact for 24 hours (or
less if death occurs within 24 hours) with the bare skin of albino rabbits weighing
between 2 and 3 kilograms each.
3. A chemical that has a median lethal concentration (LC 50) in air of 200 parts
per million by volume or less of gas or vapor, or 2 milligrams per liter or less of
mist, fume or dust, when administered by continuous inhalation for one hour (or
27
409·413 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
less if death occurs within one hour) to albino rats weighing between 200 and 300
grams each.
Mixtures of these materials with ordinary materials, such as water, may not war-
rant a classification of highly toxic. While this system is basically simple in appli-
cation, any hazard evaluation which is required for the precise categorization of
this type of material shall be performed by experienced, technically competent per-
sons.
HORIZONTAL EXIT. See Section 3301 (b).
HOTEL is any building containing six or more guest rooms intended or de-
signed to be used, or which are used, rented or hired out to be occupied, or which are
occupied for sleeping purposes by guests.
HOT-WATER HEATING BOILER is a boiler having a volume exceeding
120 gallons, or a heat input exceeding 200,000 Btu/h, or an operating temperature
exceeding 21 0°F. that provides hot water to be used externally to itself.
HPM STORAGE ROOM is a room used for the storage or dispensing of haz-
ardous production materials (HPM) and which is classified as a Group H, Division
2, 3 or 7 Occupancy.
Sec. 410. IRRITANT is a chemical which is not corrosive but which causes a
reversible inflammatory effect on living tissue by chemical action at the site of con-
tact. A chemical is a skin irritant if, when tested on the intact skin of albino rabbits
by the methods of 16 C.F.R. 1500.41 for four hours' exposure or by other appropri-
ate techniques, it results in an empirical score of 5 or more. A chemical is an eye
irritant if so determined under the procedure listed in 16 C.F.R. 1500.42 or other
appropriate techniques.
J
Sec. 411. JURISDICTION, as used in this code, is any political subdivision
which adopts this code for administrative regulations within its sphere of authority.
K
Sec. 412. No definitions.
L
Sec. 413. LINTEL is a structural member placed over an opening or a recess in
a wall and supporting construction above.
LIQUID is any material which has a fluidity greater than that of 300 penetration
asphalt when tested in accordance with the Uniform Fire Code Standards. When
not otherwise identified, the term "liquid" is both flammable and combustible liq-
uids.
'.!!:.; LIQUID STORAGE ROOM is a room classified as a Group H, Division 3 Oc-
cupancy used only for the storage of flammable or combustible liquids in a closed
;::: condition. The quantities of flammable or combustible liquids in storage shall not
:::1 exceed the limits set forth in the Fire Code.
28
LIQUID STORAGE WAREHOUSE is a Group H, Division 3 Occupancy =:=!
used only for the storage of flammable or combustible liquids in an unopened con- iiii
dition. The quantities of flammable or combustible liquids stored are not limited. '.•.' ,_'
LISTED and LISTING are terms referring to equipment and materials which
are shown in a list published by an approved testing agency qualified and equipped i1[:
for cxpcdrimental tesdtingh_anhd _m~intaining ahn adhequate ~eriodic i~spection of c ur-
1 1
len\ pro ucttons an w 1c 1stmg states t at t e matena or eqmpment comp 11es
:._ , :.·[,_:
with accepted national standards which are approved, or standards which have t
been evaluated for conformity with approved standards.
LOADS. See Chapter 23.
LODGING HOUSE is any building or portion thereof containing not more
than five guest rooms where rent is paid in money, goods, labor or otherwise.
LOW-PRESSURE HOT-WATER-HEATING BOILER is a boiler furnish- .·'[,_·_.'!·~ ..'.
ing hot water at pressures not exceeding 160 psi and at temperatures not exceeding
250°F.
LOW-PRESSURE STEAM-HEATING BOILER is a boiler furnishing 1:1•1
steam at pressures not exceeding 15 psi.

M
Sec. 414. MARQUEE is a permanent roofed structure attached to and sup-
ported by the building and projecting over public property. Marquees are regulated
in Chapter 45.
::::·
MASONRY is that form of construction composed of stone, brick, concrete, !iii
gypsu~, hollow-~lay tile, conb~ret~ blocfkhor tile, gla~s bl o~kd or oth~rbsimil_ar budild- .·' :._,'.:•
1 11
mg umts or matena s or com matwn o t ese matena s a1 up umt y umt an set
in mortar.
MASONRY, SOLID, is masonry of solid units built without hollow spaces.
MECHANICAL CODE is the Uniform Mechanical Code promulgated jointly
by the International Conference of Building Officials and the International Associ-
ation of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, as adopted by this jurisdiction.
str~~~~n~~l%~ t~~~~~~~:!~:r~~!~i!!~!i~~~t:a;::is:~:~;~::~. ~~~~ :_,_l.li.••
and hot gases through openings in a protective membrane in order to accommodate

cables, cable trays, conduit, tubing, pipes or similar items.
MEZZANINE or MEZZANINE FLOOR is an intermediate floor placed
within a room.
MOTEL shall mean hotel as defined in this code.
MOTOR VEHICLE FUEL-DISPENSING STATION is that portion of a
building where flammable or combustible liquids or gases used as motor fuels are
stored and dispensed from fixed equipment into the fuel tanks of motor vehicles.
N
Sec. 415. NONCOMBUSTIBLE as applied to building construction material
means a material which, in the form in which it is used, is either one of the follow-
ing:
29
(a) Material of which no part will ignite and bum when subjected to fire. Any
material conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 4-1 shall be considered noncombus-
tible within the meaning of this section.
(b) Material having a structural base of noncombustible material as defined in
Item (a) above, with a surfacing material not over 1/g inch thick which has a
flame-spread rating of 50 or less.
"Noncombustible" does not apply to surface finish materials. Material required
to be noncombustible for reduced clearances to flues, heating appliances or other
sources of high temperature shall refer to material conforming to Item (a). Noma-
terial shall be classed as noncombustible which is subject to increase in combusti-
bility or flame-spread rating, beyond the limits herein established, through the
effects of age, moisture or other atmospheric condition.
Flame-spread rating as used herein refers to rating obtained according to tests
conducted as specified in U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1.
0
Sec. 416. OCCUPANCY is the purpose for which a building, or part thereof, is
used or intended to be used.
ORIEL WINDOW is a window which projects from the main line of an enclos-
ing wall of a building and is carried on brackets or corbels.
OWNER is any person, agent, firm or corporation having a legal or equitable
interest in the property.
p
Sec. 417. PANIC HARDWARE. See Section 3301 (b).
PEDESTRIAN WALKWAY is a walkway used exclusively as a pedestrian
trafficway.
~~ br:n~~!;,~!~~~~f~t:r~:. STOP is a through-penetration fire stop or a mem-
PERMIT is an official document or certificate issued by the building otficial
authorizing performance of a specified activity.
PERSON is a natural person, heirs, executors, administrators or assigns, and
also includes a firm, partnership or corporation, its ortheir successors or assigns, or
the agent of any of the aforesaid.
PLASTIC MATERIALS, APPROVED, other than foam plastics regulated
under Sections 1705 (e) and 1713, are those having a self-ignition temperature of
650°F. or greater and a smoke-density rating not greater than 450 when tested in
accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 42-1, in the way intended for use, or a
smoke-density rating no greater than 75 when tested in the thickness intended for
use by U.B.C. Standard No. 52-2. Approved plastics shall be classified as either
CCI or CC2 in accordance with the following requirements:
::§ CCI: Plastic materials which have a burning extent of I inch or less when tested
l! in nominal 0.060-inch thickness (or in the thickness intended for use).
~ CC2: Plastic materials which have a burning rate of2.5 inches per minute or less
] when tested in nominal 0.060-inch thickness (or in the thickness intended for use).
30
PLATFORM. See Chapter 39.

PLUMBING CODE is the Uniform Plumbing Code promulgated by the Inter-
national Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials as adopted by this ju-
risdiction.
PROTECTIVE MEMBRANE is a surface material which forms the required X
outer layer or layers of a fire-resistive assembly containing concealed spaces. ~{):
PUBLIC WAY. See Section 3301 (b).
Q
R
Sec. 419. REPAIR is the reconstruction or renewal of any part of an existing
building for the purpose of its maintenance.
s
Sec. 420. SENSITIZER is a chemical that causes a substantial proportion of ex-
posed people or animals to develop an allergic reaction in normal tissue after re-
peated exposure to the chemical.
SERVICE CORRIDOR is a fully enclosed passage used for transporting haz-
ardous production materials and for purposes other than required exiting.
SHAFT is an interior space, enclosed by walls or construction, extending l
through one or more stories or basements which connects openings in successive !lli
floors, or floors and roof, to accommodate elevators, dumbwaiters, mechanical ;.
equipment or similar devices or to transmit light or ventilation air. ·:
'.~ )
·''.;·[···'!,,
.. .. ·''.
SHAFT ENCLOSURE is the walls or construction forming the boundaries of a ,l.r,~.:,:

shaft.
SHALL, as used in this code, is mandatory.
SMOKE DETECTOR is an approved listed device that senses visible or in- i.='l.',i.:l.,:,,
visible particles of combustion.

STAGE. See Chapter 39.
STORY is that portion of a building included between the upper surface of any
floor and the upper surface of the floor next above, except that the topmost story
shall be that portion of a building included between the upper surface of the top-
most floor and the ceiling or roof above. If the finished floor level directly above a
usable or unused under-floor space is more than 6 feet above grade as defined here-
in form ore than 50 percent of the total perimeter or is more than 12 feet above grade
as defined herein at any point, such usable or unused under-floor space shall be
considered as a story.
STORY, FIRST, is the lowest story in a building which qualifies as a story, as
defined herein, except that a floor level in a building having only one floor level
shall be classified as a first story, provided such floor level is not more than 4 feet
below grade, as defined herein, for more than 50 percent of the total perimeter, or
not more than 8 feet below grade, as defined herein, at any point.
STREET is any thoroughfare or public way not less than 16 feet in width which
has been dedicated or deeded to the public for public use.
31
ST RUCT~R AdL. OBbSERVATION means the visual observation of the struc-

!.'.:,;,;.!
'
1
tura 1system, me u mg, ut not limited to, the elements and connections at signifi-
& cant construction stages, and the completed structure for general conformance to
'
i,~ :.,l ! the approved plans and specifications. Structural observation does not include or
waive the responsibility for the inspections required by Sections 305 and 306.
STRUCTURE is that which is built or constructed, an edifice or building of any
kind, or any piece of work artificially built up or composed of parts joined together
in some definite manner.
"..,t'~.;· ' SURGICAL AREA is the preoperating, operating, recovery and similar rooms
.
'
~: within an outpatient health-care center.
T
::::
'f Sec. 421. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRE STOP is a material, device or
:\j construction installed to resist, for a prescribed time period, the passage of flame,
;, , heat and hot gases through openings which penetrate the entire fire-resistive as-
,j) scmbly in order to accommodate cables, cable trays, conduit, tubing, pipes or simi-
:':: lar items.
u
Sec. 422. U.B.C. STANDARDS is the Uniform Building Code Standards pro-
mulgated by the International Conference of Building Officials, as adopted by this
jurisdiction. (See Chapter 60.)
~! Illi~~si~~~~ ~nderwriters Laboratories Inc., 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook,
2
USE with reference to flammable or combustible liquids is the placing in ac-
tion or service of flammable or combustible liquids whereby flammable vapors
may be liberated to the atmosphere.
USE with reference to hazardous materials other than flammable or com-
bustible liquids is the placing in action or making available for service by opening
or connecting any container utilized for confinement of material whether a solid,
liquid or gas.
USE, CLOSED SYSTEM, is use of a solid or liquid hazardous material in a
t! closed vessel or system that remains closed during normal operations where va-
•...
'·:·
..
·'··:'i
..
•,.,:
..,:'i,''. ~~~~~~iit:~~~~:~~~:~~~~~::~~~ts~~:~:t~~r~~~s~~~:~~p:~:~~~~;;s~~~e::;1 :~~~~~
. compressed gases. Examples of closed systems for solids and liquids include prod-
, .,. uct conveyed through a piping system into a closed vessel, system or piece of
j'l equipment; and reaction process operations.
USE, OPEN SYSTEM, is use of a solid or liquid hazardous material in a vessel
\jj\ or system that is continuously open to the atmosphere during normal operations
i)! and where vapors are liberated, or the product is exposed to the atmosphere during
l:[ normal operations. Examples of open systems for solids and liquids include dis-
"'' pensing from or into open breakers or containers, dip tank and plating tank opera-
%:::
tions.
32
v
Sec. 423. VALUE or VALUATION of a building shall be the estimated cost to
replace the building and structure in kind, based on current replacement costs, as
determined in Section 304 (b).
VENEER. See Section 3002.
w
Sec. 424. WALLS shall be defined as follows:
Bearing Wall is any wall meeting either of the following classifications:
(a) Any metal or wood stud wall which supports more than I OOpounds per lineal
foot of superimposed load.
(b) Any masonry or concrete wall which supports more than 200 pounds per lin-
eal foot superimposed load, or any such wall supporting its own weight for more
than one story.
Exterior Wall is any wall or element of a wall, or any member or group of mem-
bers, which defines the exterior boundaries or courts of a building and which has a
slope of 60 degrees or greater with the horizontal plane.
Faced Wall is a wall in which the masonry facing and backing are so bonded as
to exert a common action under load.
Nonbearing Wall is any wall that is not a bearing wall.
Parapet Wall is that part of any wall entirely above the roof line.
Retaining Wall is a wall designed to resist the lateral displacement of soil or oth-
er materials.
WATER HEATER is an appliance designed primarily to supply hot water and
is equipped with automatic controls limiting water temperature to a maximum of
210°F.
WEATHER-EXPOSED SURFACES are all surfaces of walls, ceilings,
floors, roofs, soffits and similar surfaces exposed to the weather, excepting the fol-
lowing:
(a) Ceilings and roof soffits enclosed by walls or by beams which extend a mini-
mum of 12 inches below such ceiling or roof soffits.
(b) Walls or portions of walls within an unenclosed roof area, when located a
horizontal distance from an exterior opening equal to twice the height of the open-
ing.
(c) Ceiling and roof soffits beyond a horizontal distance of I 0 feet from the outer
edge of the ceiling or roof soffits.
X
y
Sec. 426. YARD is an open, unoccupied space, other than a court, unobstructed
from the ground to the sky, except where specifically provided by this code, on the
lot on which a building is situated.
z
33
NOTES
34
Part III
REQUIREMENTS BASED ON OCCUPANCY
Chapter 5
CLASSIFICATION OF ALL BUILDINGS BY USE OR
OCCUPANCY AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR ALL OCCUPANCIES
Occupancy Classified
Sec. 501. Every building, whether existing or hereafter erected, shall be classi-
fied by the building official, according to its use or the character of its occupancy,
as a building of Group A, B, E, H, I, M orR as defined in Chapters 6, 7, 8, 9, I 0,
II and 12. (See Table No. 5-A.)
Any occupancy not mentioned specifically or about which there is any question
shall be classified by the building official and included in the group which its use
most nearly resembles, based on the existing or proposed life and fire hazard.
Change in Use
Sec. 502. No change shall be made in the character of occupancies or use of any
building which would place the building in a different division of the same group
of occupancy or in a different group of occupancies, unless such building is made
to comply with the requirements of this code for such division or group of occupan-
cy.
EXCEPTION: The character of the occupancy of existing buildings may be
changed subject to the approval of the building official, and the building may be occu-
pied for purposes in other groups without conforming to all the requirements of this
code for those groups, provided the new or proposed use is less hazardous, based on
life and fire risk, than the existing use.
No change in the character of occupancy of a building shall be made without a
Certificate of Occupancy, as required in Section 308 of this code. The building offi-
cial may issue a Certificate of Occupancy pursuant to the intent of the above excep-
tion without certifying that the building complies with all provisions of this code.
Mixed Occupancy
Sec. 503. (a) General. When a building is used for more than one occupancy
purpose, each part ofthe building comprising a distinct" occupancy," as described
in Chapters 5 through 12, shall be separated from any other occupancy as specified
in Section 503 (d).
EXCEPTIONS: I. Where an approved spray booth constructed in accordance
with the Fire Code is installed, such booth need not be separated from other Group
H Occupancies or from Group B Occupancies.
2. The following occupancies need not be separated from the uses to which they
are accessory:
35
A. Assembly rooms having a floor area of not over 750 square feet.
B. Administrative and clerical offices and similar rooms which do not exceed 25
percent of the floor area of the major use when not related to Group H, Division
2 and Group H, Division 3 Occupancies.
C. Gift shops, administrative offices and similar rooms in Group R, Division I
Occupancies not exceeding 10 percent of the floor area of the major use.
D. The kitchen serving the dining area of which it is a part.
3. An occupancy separation need not be provided between a Group R, Division
3 Occupancy and a carport having no enclosed uses above, provided the carport is
entirely open on two or more sides.
4. A Group B, Division I Occupancy used exclusively for the parking or storage
of private or pleasure-type motor vehicles need not be separated from a Group B, Di-
vision 3 Occupancy open parking garage as defined in Section 709.
5. A one-hour occupancy separation need not be provided between fuel-dispens-
ing pumps covered with a canopy that is open on three or more sides, and a Group
B, Division 2 Occupancy retail store having an area of less than 2,500 square feet
when the following conditions exist:
A. The Group B, Division 2 Occupancy is provided with two exits separated as
required by Section 3303 (c) and not located in the same exterior wall.
B. Pump islands are not located within 20 feet of the Group B, Division 2 Occu-
pancy retail store.
~j~j!
~t When a building houses more than one occupancy, each portion of the building
t~ shall conform to the requirements for the occupancy housed therein.
• An occupancy shall not be located above the story or height set forth in Table No.
5-D, except as provided in Section 507. When a mixed occupancy building con-
tains a Group H, Division 6 Occupancy, the portion containing the Group H, Divi-
sion 6 Occupancy shall not exceed three stories or 55 feet in height.
(b) Forms of Occupancy Separations. Occupancy separations shall be vertical
or horizontal or both or, when necessary, of such other form as may be required to
afford a complete separation between the various occupancy divisions in the build-
ing.
Where the occupancy separation is horizontal, structural members supporting
the separation shall be protected by equivalent fire-resistive construction.
(c) Types of Occupancy Separations. Occupancy separations shall be classed
as "four-hour fire-resistive," "three-hour fire-resistive," "two-hour fire-resis-
tive," and "one-hour fire-resistive."
I. A four-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation shall have no openings there-
in and shall not be of less than four-hour fire-resistive construction.
2. A three-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation shall not be of less than
three-hour fire-resistive construction. All openings in walls forming such separa-
tion shall be protected by a fire assembly having a three-hour fire-protection ra-
ting. The total width of all openings in any three-hour fire-resistive occupancy
separation wall in any one story shall not exceed 25 percent of the length of the wall
in that story and no single opening shall have an area greater than 120 square feet.
All openings in floors forming a three-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation
shall be protected by vertical enclosures extending above and below such open-
36
ings. The walls of such vertical enclosures shall not be of less than two-hour fire-
resistive construction and all openings therein shall be protected by a fire assembly
having a one- and one-half-hour fire-protection rating.
3. A two-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation shall not be of less than
two-hour fire-resistive construction. All openings in such separation shall be pro-
tected by a fire assembly having a one- and one-half-hour fire-protection raimg.
4. A one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation shall not be of less than
one-hour fire-resistive construction. All openings in such separation shall be pro-
tected by a fire assembly having a one-hour fire-protection rating.
(d) Fire Ratings for Occupancy Separations. Occupancy separations shall be
provided between the various groups and divisions of occupancies as set forth in
Table No. 5-B.
EXCEPTIONS: I. A three-hour occupancy separation may be used between a
Group A, Division I and a Group B, Division I Occupancy used exclusively for the
parking or storage of private or pleasure-type motor vehicles and provided no repair
or fueling is done. A two-hour occupancy separation may be used between a Group
A, Division 2, 2.1, 3 or 4 orE or I Occupancy and a Group B, Division I Occupancy
that is used exclusively for the parking or storage of private or pleasure-type motor
vehicles and provided no repair or fueling is done.
2. Unless required by Section 702 (b) I, the three-hour occupancy separation be-
tween a Group R, Division I Occupancy and a Group B, Division I Occupancy used
only for the parking or storage of private or pleasure-type motor vehicles with no re-
pair or fueling may be reduced to two hours. Such occupancy separation may be fur-
ther reduced to one hour where the area of such Group B, Division I Occupancy does
not exceed 3,000 square feet.
3. In the one-hour occupancy separation between Group R, Division 3 and Group
M Occupancies, the separation may be limited to the installation of materials ap-
proved for one-hour fire-resistive construction on the garage side and a self-closing, ::::
tight-fitting solid wood door I 'fs inches in thickness, or a self-closing tight-fitting (
door having a fire-protection rating of not less than 20 minutes when tested in accor- ;i
dance with Part II of U.B.C. Standard No. 43-2, which is a part of this code, is per- ~:.;.:.:.
mined in lieu of a one-hour fire assembly. Fire dampers need not be installed in air
ducts passing through the wall, tloor or ceiling separating a Group R, Division 3 Oc-
cupancy from a Group M Occupancy, provided such ducts within the Group M Occu-
pancy are constructed of steel having a thickness not less than 0.019 inch (No. 26
galvanized sheet gage) and have no openings into the Group M Occupancy.
4. Group H, Division 2 and Group H, Division 3 Occupancies need not be sepa-
rated from Group H, Division 7 Occupancies when such occupancies also comply
with the requirements for a Group H, Division 7 Occupancy.
Location on Property
Sec. 504. (a) General. Buildings shall adjoin or have access to a public way or
yard on not less than one side. Required yards shall be permanently maintained.
For the purpose of this section, the center line of an adjoining public way shall be
considered an adjacent property line.
Eaves over required windows shall not be less than 30 inches from the side and
rear property lines. For eaves, see Section 1711.
37
(b) Fire Resistance of Walls. Exterior walls shall have fire resistance and open-
ing protection as set forth in Table No. 5-A, Part III, and in accordance with such
additional provisions as are set forth in Part IV and Part VII. Distance shall be mea-
sured at right angles from the property line. The above provisions shall not apply to
walls at right angles to the property line.
Projections beyond the exterior wall shall not extend beyond:
I. A point one third the distance to the property line from an assumed vertical
plane located where fire-resistive protection of openings is first required due to lo-
cation on property; or
2. More than 12 inches into areas where openings are prohibited.
When openings in exterior walls are required to be protected due to distance
from property Iine, the sum of the area of such openings shall not exceed 50 percent
of the total area of the wall in each story.
(c) Buildings on Same Property and Buildings Containing Courts. For the
purposes of determining the required wall and opening protection and roof-cover-
ing requirements, buildings on the same property and court walls ofbuildings over
one story in height shall be assumed to have a property line between them.
EXCEPTION: In court walls where opening protection is required such protec-
tion may be omitted, provided (I) not more than two levels open into the court, (2)
the aggregate area of the building including the court is within the allowable area and
(3) the building is not classified as a Group I Occupancy.
When a new building is to be erected on the same property as an existing build-
ing, the location of the assumed property line with relation to the existing building
shall be such that the exterior wall and opening protection of the existing building
meet the criteria as set forth in Table No. 5-A and Part IV.
EXCEPTION: Two or more buildings on the same property may be considered
as portions of one building if the aggregate area of such buildings is within the limits
specified in Section 505 for a single building.
When the buildings so considered house different occupancies or are of different
types of construction, the area shall be that allowed for the most restricted occupancy
or construction.
Allowable Floor Areas

'·, ·' ·':. ·' Sec. 505. (a) One-story Areas. The area of a one-story building shall not exceed
. the limits set forth in Table No. 5-C except as provided in Section 506 .
•!:: (b) Areas of Buildings over One Story. The total combined floor area for mul-
tistory buildings may be twice that permitted by Table No. 5-C for one-story build-
ings. and the floor area of any single story shall not exceed that permitted for a
one-story building.
(c) Allowable Floor Area of Mixed Occupancies. When a building houses
more than one occupancy, the area ofthe building shall be such that the sum of the
ratios of the actual area for each separate occupancy divided by the total allowable
area for each separate occupancy shall not exceed one.
In other than Group I, Division 1.2 Occupancies, where minor accessory uses
do not occupy more than I 0 percent of the area of any floor of a building, nor more
38
U~C::~, lVl UIC:: _lJUlpV~C:: Vl UC::lC::IIIIllllllt; aliVWaUI~ at'-'a, llll..., liiUJVl U.3\.. VJ UJ\.. UUliUHI,O
shall determine the occupancy classification, provided the uses are separated as
specified in Section 503 (d).
(d) Mezzanines. Unless considered as a separate story, the floor area of all ma-
zanines shall be included in calculating the allowable floor area of the stm\es \\\
which the mezzanines are located.
(e) Basements. A basement need not be included in the total allowable area, pro-
vided such basement does not exceed the area permitted for a one-story building.
(f) Area Separation Walls. I. General. Each portion of a building separated by
one or more area separation walls which comply with the provisions of this subsec-
tion may be considered a separate building. The extent and location of such area
separation walls shall provide a complete separation.
When an area separation wall also separates occupancies that are required to be
separated by an occupancy separation, the most restrictive requirements of each
separation shall apply.
2. Fire-resistance. Area separation walls shall not be of less than four-hour
fire-resistive construction in Types I, 11-F.R., III and IV buildings and two-hour
fire-resistive construction in Type II One-hour, 11-N or V buildings. The total width
of all openings in such walls shall not exceed 25 percent of the length of the wall in
each story. All openings shall be protected by a fire assembly having a three-hour
fire-protection rating in four-hour fire-resistive walls and one- and one-half-hour
fire-protection rating in two-hour fire-resistive walls.
3. Extensions beyond exterior walls. Area separation walls shall extend to the
outer edges of horizontal projecting elements such as balconies, roof overhangs,
canopies, marquees or architectural projections.
EXCEPTION: When horizontal projecting elements do not contain concealed
spaces, the area separation wall may terminate at the exterior wall.
When the horizontal projecting elements contain concealed spaces, the area sepa-
ration wall need only extend through the concealed space to the outer edges of the
projecting elements.
The exterior walls and the projecting elements above shall not be of less than
one-hour fire-resistive construction for a distance not less than the depth of the proj-
ecting elements on both sides of the area separation wall. Openings within such
widths shall be protected by fire assemblies having a fire-protection rating of not less
than three-fourths hour.
4. Terminating. Area separation walls shall extend from the foundation to a
point at least 30 inches above the roof.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Area separation walls may terminate at the underside of the
roof sheathing, deck or slab, provided the roof-ceiling assembly is of at least two-
hour fire-resistive construction.
2. Two-hour area separation walls may terminate at the underside of the roof
sheathing, deck or slab, provided:
A. Where the roof-ceiling framing elements are parallel to the walls, such fram-
ing and elements supporting such framing shall not be of less than one-hour
39
fire-resistive construction for a width of not less than 5 feet on each side of
the wall.
B. Where roof-ceiling framing elements are perpendicular to the wall, the entire
span of such framing and elements supporting such framing shall not be of
less than one-hour fire-resistive construction.
C. Openings in the roof shall not be located within 5 feet of the area separation
wall.
D. The entire building shall be provided with not less than a Class B roofing.
3. Two-hour area separation walls may terminate at the underside of noncombus-
tible roof sheathing, deck or slab of roofs of noncombustible construction provided:
A. Openings in the roof are not located within 5 feet of the area separation wall.
B. The entire building is provided with not less than a Class B roofing.
5. Parapet faces. Parapets of area separation walls shall have noncombustible
faces for the uppermost 18 inches, including counterflashing and coping materials.
6. Buildings of different heights. Where an area separation wall separates por-
tions of a building having different heights, such wall may terminate at a point 30
inches above the lower roof level, provided the exterior wall for a height of I 0 feet
above the lower roof is of one-hour fire-resistive construction with openings pro-
tected by assemblies having a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating.
EXCEPTION: The area separation wall may terminate at the underside of the
roof sheathing, deck or slab of the lower roof, provided:
A. Where the roof-ceiling framing elements are parallel to the wall, such framing
and elements supporting such framing shall not be of less than one-hour
fire-resistive construction for a width of 10 feet along the wall at the lower
roof.
B. Where the lower roof-ceiling framing elements are perpendicular to the wall,
the entire span of such framing and elements supporting such framing shall
not be of less than one-hour fire-resistive construction.
C. Openings in the lower roof shall not be located within 10 feet of the area sepa-
ration wall.
See Chapters 6 through 12 for special occupancy provisions.
Allowable Area Increases

Sec. 506. (a) General. The floor areas specified in Section 505 may be increased
by one of the following:
I. Separation on two sides. Where public ways or yards more than 20 feet in
width extend along and adjoin two sides of the building, floor areas may be in-
creased at a rate of 11/ 4 percent for each foot by which the minimum width exceeds
20 feet, but the increase shall not exceed 50 percent.
2. Separation on three sides. Where public ways or yards more than 20 feet in
width extend along and adjoin three sides of the building, floor areas may be in-
creased at a rate of2 1/z percent for each foot by which the minimum width exceeds
20 feet, but the increase shall not exceed I 00 percent.
3. Separation on all sides. Where public ways or yards more than 20 feet in
width extend on all sides of a building and adjoin the entire perimeter, floor areas
may be increased at a rate of 5 percent for each foot by which the minimum ex-
40
ceeds 20 feet. Such increases shall not exceed 100 percent, except that greater in-
creases shall be permitted for the following occupancies:
A. Group 8, Division 3 aircraft storage hangars not exceeding one story in
height.
B. Group 8, Division 4 Occupancies not exceeding two stories in height.
C. Group H, Division 5 aircraft repair hangars not exceeding one story ·m
height. Area increases shall not exceed 500 percent for aircraft repair han-
gars except as provided in Section 506 (b).
(b) Unlimited Area. The area of any one- or two-story building of Group 8 and
Group H, Division 5 Occupancies shall not be limited if the building is provided
with an approved automatic sprinkler system throughout as specified in Chapter
38, and entirely surrounded and adjoined by public ways or yards not less than 60
feet in width.
The area of a Group 8, Division 4 Occupancy in a one-story Type II, Type III
One-hour or Type IV building shall not be limited if the building is entirely sur-
rounded and adjoined by public ways or yards not less than 60 feet in width.
(c) Automatic Sprinkler Systems. The areas specified in Table No. 5-C and
Section 505 (b) may be tripled in one-story buildings and doubled in buildings of
more than one story if the building is provided with an approved automatic sprin-
kler system throughout. The area increases permitted in this subsection may be
compounded with that specified in Item I, 2 or 3 of Subsection (a) of this section.
The increases permitted in this subsection shall not apply when automatic sprink-
ler systems are installed under the following provisions:
I. Section 507 for an increase in allowable number of stories.
2. Section 3802 (f) for Group H, Divisions I, 2 and 3 Occupancies.
3. Substitution for one-hour fire-resistive construction pursuant to Section 508.
4. Section 1716, Atria.
Maximum Height of Buildings and Increases

Sec. 507. The maximum height and number of stories of buildings shall be de-
pendent on the character of the occupancy and the type of construction and shall
not exceed the limits set forth in Table No. 5-D, except as provided in this section
and as specified in Section 503 (a) for mixed occupancy buildings.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Towers, spires and steeples erected as a part of a building and
not used for habitation or storage are limited as to height only by structural design if
completely of noncombustible materials, or may extend not to exceed 20 feet above
the height limit in Table No. 5-D if of combustible materials.
2. The height of one-story aircraft hangars shall not be limited if the building is
provided with automatic sprinkler systems throughout as specified in Chapter 38 and
is entirely surrounded by public ways or yards not less in width than one and one-half
times the height of the building.
The story limits set forth in Table No. 5-D may be increased by one story if the
building is provided with an approved automatic sprinkler system throughout. The
increase in the number of stories for automatic sprinkler systems shall not apply
41
when the automatic sprinkler systems throughout are installed under the following
provisions:
l. Section 3802 (f) for Group H, Divisions I, 2, 3, 6 and 7 Occupancies.
2. Section 506 for an increase in allowable area.
3. Substitution for one-hour fire-resistive construction pursuant to Section 508.
4. Section 1716, Atria.
.~ 5. Section 3802 (g) for Group I, Divisions 1.1 and 1.2 Occupancies used as hos-
i~ p'na)s, nursing homes or health-care centers in Type II One-hour, Type III
One-hour, Type IV or Type V One-hour construction.
See Chapters 6 through 12 for special occupancy provisions .
~':,.·' ::~~;~~~o~;;;:~~::;o;;:,:•~r.~k:;~te::~~~:'::,::.~7~~
..
·'!,:::
·'!.',,.····'
•.. ..• ··':
...
II One-hour, Type III One-hour and Type V One-hour construction to substitute for
the one-hour fire-resistive construction. Such substitution shall not waive or re-
'!:!\ duce the required fire-resistive construction for:
(a) Occupancy separations [Section 503 (c)].
(b) Exterior wall protection due to proximity of property lines [Section 504 (b)].
(c) Area separations [Section 505 (f)].
(d) Dwelling unit separations [Section 1202 (b)].
(e) Shaft enclosures (Section 1706).
(f) Corridors [Section 3305 (g) and (h)].
(g) Stair enclosures (Section 3309).
(h) Exit passageways [Section 3312 (a)].
(i) Type of construction separation (Section 1701).
(j) Boiler, central heating plant or hot-water supply boiler room enclosures.
Pedestrian Walkways
Sec. 509. (a) General. A pedestrian walkway shall be considered a building
when determining the roof covering permitted by Table No. 32-A. Pedestrian
walkways connecting separate buildings need not be considered as buildings and
need not be considered in the determination of the allowable floor area of the con-
nected buildings when the pedestrian walkway complies with the provisions of this
section.
(b) Construction. Pedestrian walkways shall be constructed of noncombus-
tible materials.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Pedestrian walkways connecting buildings of Type III, IV
or V construction may be constructed of one-hour fire-resistive construction or of
heavy-timber construction in accordance with Section 2106.
2. Pedestrian walkways located on grade having both sides open by at least 50
percent and connecting buildings of Type III, IV or V construction may be con-
structed with any materials allowed by this code.
42
(c) Openings between Pedestrian Walkways and Buildings. Openings from

buildings to pedestrian walkways shall conform to the requirements of Table No.
5-A and Sections 1803 (b), 1903 (b), 2003 (b), 2103 (b) and 504 (c). In addition,
pedestrian walkways connecting buildings shall be either provided with opening
protection at connections to buildings in accordance with Section 3305 (h) or con-
structed with both sides of the pedestrian walkway at least 50 percent open with the
open area distributed so as to prevent the accumulation of smoke and toxic gases.
(d) Width. The unobstructed width of pedestrian walkways shall not be less than
44 inches. The total width of a pedestrian walkway shall not exceed 30 feet.
(e) Maximum Length. The length of a pedestrian walkway shall not exceed
300 feet.
EXCEPTIONS: l. Pedestrian walkways that are fully sprinklered may be 400
feet in length.
2. Unenclosed walkways at grade.
(f) Multiple Pedestrian Walkways. The distance between any two pedestrian
walkways on the same horizontal plane shall not be less than 40 feet.
(g) Required Exits. Pedestrian walkways at other than grade shall not be used as
required exits. Pedestrian walkways at grade level used as required exits shall pro-
vide an unobstructed means of egress to a public way and shall have a minimum
width in accordance with Section 3303 (b).
EXCEPTION: Pedestrian walkways conforming to the requirements of a hori-
zontal exit may be used as a required exit.
(h) Pedestrian Walkways over Public Streets. Pedestrian walkways over
public streets shall be subject to the approval of local jurisdictions.
Sanitation
Sec. 510. (a) Water Closet Room Separation. A room in which a water closet
is located shall be separated from food preparation or storage rooms by a tight-fit-
ting door.
(b) Floors and Walls in Water Closet Compartment and Showers. I. :. ·,~.!,
Floors. In other than dwelling units, toilet room floors shall have a smooth, hard
nonabsorbent surface such as portland cement, concrete, ceramic tile or other ap-
:j:j
f
proved material which extends upward onto the walls at least 5 inches.
2. Walls. Walls within 2 feet of the front and sides of urinals and water closets il·
shall have a smooth, hard nonabsorbent surface of portland cement, concrete, ce-
ramic tile or other smooth, hard nonabsorbent surface to a height of 4 feet, and ex- j~i
cept for structural elements, the materials used in such walls shall be of a type .•i,i. i,i.
which is not adversely affected by moisture. See Section4712 for other limitations.
I
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Dwelling units and guest rooms.
2. Toilet rooms which are not accessible to the public and which have not more
than one water closet.
In all occupancies, accessories such as grab bars, towel bars, paper dispensers
and soap dishes, provided on or within walls, shall be installed and sealed to protect
structural elements from moisture.
43
t: 3. Showers. Showers in all occupancies shall be finished as specified in Subsec-

{:: lions I and 2 to a height of not less than 70 inches above the drain inlet. Materials
:[:[[ other than structural elements used in such walls shall be of a type which is not ad-
j:·; versely affected by moisture. See Section 4712 for other limitations.
Accessibility to Toilets and Other Features
Compressed Gases
Sec. 512. The storage and handling of compressed gases shall comply with the
Fire Code.
Premises Identification
Sec. 513. Approved numbers or addresses shall be provided for all new build-
ings in such a position as to be plainly visible and legible from the street or road
fronting the property.
44
.....
ID
TABLE NO. S-A-WALL AND OPENING PROTECTION OF OCCUPANCIES BASED ON LOCATION ON PROPERTY ID
TYPES II ONE-HOUR, 11-N AND V CONSTRUCTION: For exterior wall and opening protection of Types II One-hour, 11-N and V
.....
buildings, see table below and Sections 504, 709, 1903 and 2203. c:
This table does not apply to Types I, 11-F.R., Ill and IV construction, see Sections 1803, 1903,2003 and 2103.
z
FIRE RESISTANCE OF OPENINGS IN ' ~:II
GROUP DESCRIPTION OF OCCUPANCY EXTERIOR WALLS'
EXTERIOR WALLS
s::
!-Any assembly building or portion of a building with a legitimate stage tD
and an occupant load of I ,000 or more Not applicable (See Sections 602 and 603) c:
2-Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room with an
r=c
A occupant load of less than I ,000 and a legitimate stage
2 hours less than I 0 Not permitted less than z
G)
See also 2.1-Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room with an 5 feet
Section feet, I hour less than 0
occupant load of 300 or more without a legitimate stage, including such 40 feet Protected less than
602 buildings used for educational purposes and not classed as a Group E or 0
10 feet c
Group B, Division 2 Occupancy m
3-Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room with an Not permitted less than
occupant load of less than 300 without a legitimate stage, including such 2 hours less than 5 feet, 5 feet
buildings used for educational purposes and not classed as a Group E or I hour less than 20 feet Protected less than
Group B, Division 2 Occupancy 10 feet
4--Stadiums, reviewing stands and amusement park structures not included Protected less than
within other Group A Occupancies I hour less than 10 feet 10 feet
!-Repair garages where work is limited to exchange of parts and
maintenance requiring no open flame, welding, or use of Class I, II or
III-A liquids, motor vehicle fuel-dispensing stations and parking garages
not classified as Group B, Division 3 open parking garages or Group M,
B Division I private garages Not permitted less than '
See also 2-Drinking and dining establishments having an occupant load of less than 5 feet '
Section 50, wholesale and retail stores, office buildings, printing plants, police I hour less than 20 feet Protected less than
702 and fire stations, factories and workshops using material not highly 10 feet
flammable or combustible, storage and sales rooms for combustible
goods, paint stores without bulk handling
Buildings or portions of buildings having rooms used for educational
purposes, beyond the 12th grade, with less than 50 occupants in any room
(Contmued)
TABLE NO. S-A-Continued
TYPES II ONE-HOUR, 11-N AND V ONLY
FIRE RESISTANCE OF OPENINGS IN
GROUP DESCRIPTION OF OCCUPANCY EXTERIOR WALLS EXTERIOR WALLS
3-Aircraft hangars where no repair work is done except exchange of parts

and maintenance requiring no open flame, welding, or the use of Class I Not permitted less than
B 5 feet
(Cont.) or II liquids I hour less than 20 feet
Open parking garages (For requirements, see Section 709) Protected less than
Helistops 20 feet
4---Ice plants, power plants, pumping plants, cold storage and creameries
Factories and workshops using noncombustible and nonexplosive Not permitted less than
material I hour less than 5 feet 5 feet
Storage and sales rooms of noncombustible and nonexplosive materials
that are not packaged or crated in or supported by combustible material
1-Any building used for educational purposes through the 12th grade by 50
or more persons for more than 12 hours per week or four hours in any one
E day Not permitted less than
See also 2-Any building used for educational purposes through the 12th grade by 2 hours less than 5 feet,
I hour less than 5 feet .....
Section less than 50 persons for more than 12 hours per week or four hours in any Protected less than
802 one day 10 feet 2
10 feet 2 :8
.....
3-Any building or portion thereof used for day-care purposes for more than c
six persons z
' =n
H See Table No. 9-C ' 0
:II
1.1-Nurseries for the full-time care of children under the age of six (each
s::
ID
accommodating more than five persons) c
I Hospitals, sanitariums, nursing homes with nonambulatory patients and Not permitted less than 5 r=0
See also similar buildings (each accommodating more than five~sons) 2 hours less than 5 feet, feet
Section 1.2-Health-care centers for ambulatory patients receiving outpatient I hour elsewhere Protected less than z
C)
1002 medical care which may render the patient incapable of unassisted 10 feet 0
self-preservation (each tenant space accommodating more than five such 0
patients) 0
m
...
2-Nursing homes for ambulatory patients, homes for children six years of
age or over (each accommodating more than five persons) I hour Not permitted less than 5
...
<0
<0
c:
feet z
3-Mental hospitals, mental sanitariums, jails, prisons, reformatories and 2 hours less than 5 feet, Protected less than :;;
buildings where personal liberties of inmates are similarly restrained I hour elsewhere 10 feet 0
:a
3:
!-Private garages, carports, sheds and agricultural buildings I hour less than 3 feet Ill
M3 (or may be protected
See also on the exterior with Not permitted less than §
Section materials approved for 3 feet b
1102 !-hour fire-resistive z
C)
construction)
0
2-Fences over 6 feet high, tanks and towers Not regulated for fire resistance
0
c
m
R !-Hotels and apartment houses Not permitted less than
I hour less than 5 feet
See also Congregate residences (each accommodating more than 10 persons) 5 feet ~1
Section 3-Dwellings and lodging houses, congregate residences (each Not permitted less than ~l
I hour less than 3 feet ::::
~
1202 accommodating 10 persons or less) 3 feet
1
0penings shall be protected by a fire assembly having at least a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating.
2Group E, Divisions 2 and 3 Occupancies having an occupant load of not more than 20 may have exterior wall and opening protection as required
for Group R, Division 3 Occupancies.
3For agricultural buildings, see Appendix Chapter II.
NOTES: (I) See Section 504 for types of walls affected and requirements covering percentage of openings permitted in exterior walls.
(2) For additional restrictions, see chapters under Occupancy and Types of Construction
(3) For walls facing yards and public ways, see Part IV.
TABLE NO. 5-8-REQUIRED SEPARATION IN BUILDINGS OF MIXED OCCUPANCY 1
(In Hours)
A-1 A-2 A-2.1 A-3 A-4 B-1 B-2 B-3 2 B-4 E H-1 H-2 H-3 H-4-5 H-6-7 3 I M4 R-1 R-3
A-1 N N N N 4 3 3 3 N 4 4 4 4 3 I I I
A-2 N N N N 3 I I I N 4 4 4 4 3 I I I
A-2.1 N N N N 3 I I I N 4 4 4 4 3 I I I
A-3 N N N N 3 N I I N 4 4 4 3 2 I I I
A-4 N N N N 3 I I I N 4 4 4 4 3 I I I
B-1 4 3 3 3 3 I I I 3 2 I I I 4 I 3 I
B-2 3 I I N I I I I I 2 I I I 2 I I I
I
B-32 3 I I I I I I I I 2 I I I 3 I I I
B-4 3 I I I I I I I I 2 I I I 4 N I I
E N N N N N 3 I I I 4 4 4 3 I I I I
H-1 Not Permitted in Mixed Occupancies. See Chapter 9. Not Permitted in Mixed Occupancies. See Chapter 9.
H-2 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 4 I I 2 4 I 4 4 ....
CD
H-3 4 4 4 4 4 I I I I 4 I I I 4 I 3 3 ....
CD
H-4-5 4 4 4 4 4 I I I I 4 I I I 4 I 3 3 c:
H-6-7 3 4 4 4
z
4 3 4 I I I I 3 2 I I 4 3 4 :;;
0
I 3 3 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 I 4 4 4 4 I I I 1\~ ::D
M4 I I I I I I I I N I I I I 3 I I I ~ill
s::
m
R-1 I I I I I 3 I I I I 4 3 3 4 I I N c:
R-3 I I I I I I I I I I 4 3 3 4 I I N r=c
1
For detailed reqUirements and exceptiOns. see Section 503. N-No reqUirements for fire resistance.
::::
~j:j
z
C>
2
0pen parking garages are excluded, except as provided in Section 702 (b) 2. j:j:
0
3For special provisions on highly toxic materials, see Fire Code. 0
4
For agricultural buildings, see also Appendix Chapter II.
c
m
.....
TABLE NO. 5-C-BASIC ALLOWABLE FLOOR AREA FOR BUILDINGS ONE STORY IN HEIGHT1 CD
CD
(In Square Feet) .....
c:
TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION z
I II Ill I IV I v :;;
0
OCCUPANCY F.R. F.R. ONE-HOUR N ONE-HOUR N I H.T. I ONE-HOUR N
::0
A-1 Unlimited 29,900 Not Permitted 3:
ID
A-2-2.1 2 Unlimited 29,900 13,500 Not 13,500 Not 13,500 !0,500 Not ii!ii c:
:·::: j=
Permitted Permitted Permitted ~::::
c
A-3-42 Unlimited 29,900 13,500 9,100 13,500 9,100 13,500 !0,500 6,000 z
(;)
B-1-2-3 3 Unlimited 39,900 18,000 12,000 18,000 12,000 18,000 14,000 8,000
0
B-4 Unlimited 59,900 27,000 18,000 27,000 18,000 27,000 21,000 12,000 0
c
E-1-2-3 Unlimited 45,200 20,200 13,500 20,200 13,500 20,200 15,700 9,100 m
H-1 15,000 12,400 5,600 3,700 Not Permitted
H-2 4 15,000 12,400 5,600 3,700 5,600 3,700 5,600 4,400 2,500
H-3-4-5 4 Unlimited 24,800 11,200 7,500 11,200 7,500 11,200 8,800 5,100
H-6-7 Unlimited 39,900 18,000 12,000 18,000 12,000 18,000 14,000 8,000
1-1.1-1.2-2 Unlimited 15,100 6,800 Not 6.800 Not 6,800 5,200 Not
Permitted8 Permitted Permitted
1-3 Unlimited 15,100 Not Permitted5
M6 See Chapter II
R-1 Unlimited 29,900 13,500 9,1007 13,500 9,1007 13,500 10,500 6,0007
R-3 Unlimited
1For multistory buildings, see Section 505 (b). 5See Section 1002 (b).
2For limitations and exceptions, see Section 602. 6 Foragricultural buildings, see also Appendix Chapter II.
3For open parking garages, see Section 709. 7For limitations and exceptions, see Section 1202 (b).
4 See Section 903. 8In hospitals and nursing homes, see Section !002 (a) for exception.
t N-No requirements for fire resistance F.R.-Fire resistive H.T.-Heavy timber

Ul TABLE NO. 5-0-MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF BUILDINGS
0
TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
I II Ill IV v
OCCUPANCY F.R. F.R. ONE-HOUR N I ONE-HOUR I N H.T. ONE-HOUR N
MAXIMUM HEIGHT IN FEET
Unlimited 160 65 55 65 55 65 50 40
MAXIMUM HEIGHT IN STORIES
A-1 Unlimited 4 Not Permitted
A-2-2.1 Unlimited 4 2 Not 2 Not 2 2 Not
Permitted Permitted Permitted
A-3-4 1 Unlimited 12 2 I 2 I 2 2 I
B-1-2-3 2 Unlimited 12 4 2 4 2 4 3 2
B-4 Unlimited 12 4 2 4 2 4 3 2
E3 Unlimited 4 2 I 2 I 2 2 I
H-1 4 I I I I Not Permitted
H-24 Unlimited 2 l I I I I I I .....
<D
H-3-4-5 4 Unlimited 5 2 I 2 I 2 2 I <D
.....
H-6-7 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 I c:
z
1-1.15-1.2 Unlimited 3 I Not I Not I I Not ;;
Permitted Permitted Permitted 0
:II
1-2 Unlimited 3 2 Not 2 Not 2 2 Not 3:
Permitted Permitted Permitted Ill
c:
1-3 Unlimited 2 Not Permitted6 r=c
M7 See Chapter II z
C)
R-1 Unlimited 12 4 28 4 28 4 3 28
0
R-3 Unlimited 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0
c
m
1For
.....
limitations and exceptions, see Section 602 (a). "1-No requirements for fire resistance <0
2For open parking garages. see Section 709. F.R.-Fire resistive ...
<0
3See Section 802 (c). H.T.-Heavy timber c
4
See Section 902. z
5See Section 1002 (a) for exception to the number of stories in hospitals and nursing homes. ;;
6See Section 1002 (b). 0
JJ
7 3:
For agricultural buildings, see also Appendix Chapter II.
8For limitations and exceptions, see Section 1202 (b). !D
c
i=
c
z
C)
0
0
c
m
CJ1
CJ1
..... 6
NOTES
52
Chapter 6
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP A OCCUPANCIES
Group A Occupancies Defined

Sec. 601. Group A Occupancies shall be:
Division 1. An'y assembly building or portion of a building with a legitimate
stage and an occupant load of I ,000 or more.
Division 2. Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room with
an occupant load of less than I ,000 and a legitimate stage.
Division 2.1. Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room
with an occupant load of 300 or more without a legitimate stage, including such
buildings used for educational purposes and not classed as a GroupE or Group B,
Division 2 Occupancy.
Division 3. Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room with
an occupant load of less than 300 without a legitimate stage, including such build-
ings used for educational purposes and not classed as a GroupE or Group B, Divi-
sion 2 Occupancy.
Division 4. Stadiums, reviewing stands and amusement park structures not in-
cluded within other Group A Occupancies. Specific and general requirements for
grandstands, bleachers and reviewing stands are to be found in Chapter 33.
For occupancy separations, see Table No. 5-B. ::::.
Amusement buildings shall conform with the requirements of this code for their *!'
o c cu pa ncy cl ass ification in addition to the provisions set forth in Sections 610, f.:
3__3 I 4 (0 and_380 2 (c). ·
EXCEPTION: Amusement buildings or portions thereof which are without ~*~~:
walls or a roof and constructed to prevent the accumulation of smoke in assembly ~=t
areas. ~~
Construction, Height and Allowable Area

Sec. 602. (a) General. Unless otherwise specified in this section, buildings or :m
~:;:~",~;~;,~~~~~:~: ~;:;:~ ;;,;;;:~io~h~;~~::;~~::..:,~,::: ~;r~~:;o'~=~~;

Nos. 5-C and 5-D, and shall not exceed in area or height the limits specified in Sec- ~
";,1,.1,_.···
lions 505, 506 and 507. ,~
The roof-framing system for the roof-ceiling assembly in one-story portions of ~!!
buildings ofType II One-hour, Type III One-hourorType V One-hour construction ~l
may be of unprotected construction when such roof-framing system is open to the l
assembly area and does not contain concealed spaces. r:~
Stages and platforms shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of ~:
Chapter 39. ~·
The slope of the main floor of an assembly room shall not exceed the slopes per- -.~_t ;_ :
mitted in Section 3307.
53
Group A assembly rooms having an aggregate occupant load of I ,000 or more

shall not be located in a basement, except basements in buildings of Type I or Type
li-F.R. construction.
Gymnasiums and similar occupancies may have floor surfaces constructed of
wood or unprotected steel or iron.
In gymnasiums having an area not greater than 3,200 square feet, l-inch nomi-
nal thickness tight tongue-and-grooved boards or 3/ 4 -inch plywood wall covering
may be used on the inner side in lieu of fire-resistive plaster.
For attic space partitions and draft stops, see Section 2516 (f).
(b) Division 1 Provisions. The main assembly floor shall be located at or near
the adjacent ground level.
(c) Division 2.1 Provisions. Division 2.1 Occupancies with an occupant load
of I ,000 or more shall be of Type I, Type II F.R .. Type II One-hour, Type III
One-hour or Type IV construction, except that the roof-framing system for
one-story portions of buildings of Type II One-hourorType III One-hour construc-
tion may be of unprotected construction when such roof-framing system is open to
the assembly area and does not contain concealed spaces.
(d) Division 3 Provisions. Division 3 Occupancies located in a basement or
above the first floor shall not be of less than one-hour fire-resistive construction.
Division 3 Occupancies with an occupant load of 50 or more which are located
over usable space shall be separated from such space by not less than one-hour
fire-resistive construction.
(c) Division 4 Provisions. I. General. Grandstands, bleachers or reviewing
stands of Type III One-hour, Type IV or Type V One-hour construction shall not
exceed 40 feet to the highest level of seat boards; 20 feet in cases where construc-
tion is Type III-Nor Type V-N; and 12 feet incases where construction is with com-
bustible members in the structural frame and located indoors.
Division 4 structures other than Type III-Nand Type V-N grandstands, bleach-
ers, reviewing stands and folding and telescoping seating of open skeleton-frame-
type without roof, cover or enclosed usable space are not limited in area or height.
2. Special Division 4 provisions. Erection and structural maintenance shall
conform to these special requirements as well as with other applicable provisions
of this code.
When the space under a Division4 Occupancy is used for any purpose, including
exits. it shall be separated from all parts of such Division 4 Occupancy, including
exits, by walls. floor and ceiling of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construc-
tion.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Exits under temporary grandstands need not be separated.
2. The underside of continuous steel deck grandstands when erected outdoors
need not be fire protected when occupied for public toilets.
The building official may cause Division 4 structures to be reinspected at least
once every six months.
54
Grandstands, bleachers or folding and telescoping seating may have seat boards, '!j!:
toeboards, bearing or base pads and footboards of combustible materials regard- .• .:· ·
less of construction type.
Seating and exiting requirements for reviewing stands, grandstands, bleachers
and folding and telescoping seating are provided under Section 3322.
Sec. 603. Buildings housing Group A Occupancies shall front directly on or
have access to a public street not less than 20 feet in width. The access to the public
street shall be a minimum 20-foot-wide right-of-way, unobstructed and main-
tained only as access to the public street. The main entrance to the building shall
be located on a public street or on the access way.
For fire-resistive protection of exterior walls and openings, as determined by lo-
cation on property, see Section 504 and Part IV.
Access and Exit Facilities

Sec. 604. (a) General. Exits shall be provided as specified in Chapter 33. (For ::·:
special exiting requirements, see Section 3317 .) Access to, and egress from, build- : : :
ings required to be accessible shall be provided as specified in Chapter 31.
(b) Amusement Structures. Exits and exit signs for Division 4, Amusement
Structures. shall be approved by the building official and, where practicable, shall
comply with the requirements specified in Chapter 33.
Light, Ventilation and Sanitation

Sec. 605. All enclosed portions of Group A Occupancies customarily used by
human beings and all dressing rooms shall be provided with natural light by means
of exterior glazed openings with an area not less than one tenth of the total tloor
area, and natural ventilation by means of openable exterior openings with an area
of not less than one twentieth of the total floor area, or shall be provided with artifi-
cial light and a mechanically operated ventilating system. The mechanically oper-
ated ventilating system shall be capable of supplying a minimum of5 cubic feet per
minute of outside air per occupant with a total circulated of not less than 15 cubic
feet per minute per accupant in all portions of the building during such time as the
building is occupied. If the velocity of the air at the register exceeds I Ofeet per sec-
ond. the register shall be placed more than 8 feet above the floor directly beneath.
Toilet rooms shall be provided with a fully openable exterior window at least 3
square feet in area; or a vertical duct not less than I 00 square inches in area for the
first toilet facility, with 50 additional square inches for each additional facility; or a
mechanically operated exhaust system capable of providing a complete change of
air every 15 minutes. Such systems shall be connected directly to the outside, and .':. ,:.,i..,:.,i
the point of discharge shall be at least 3 feet from any opening into the building.
There shall be provided in an approved location at least one lavatory for each two
water closets for each sex, and at least one drinking fountain for each floor level.
EXCEPTION: A drinking fountain need not be provided in a drinking or dining
establishment.
55
For other requirements on water closets, see Sections 510 and 511.
Shaft and Exit Enclosures

Sec. 606. Exits shall be enclosed as specified in Chapter 33.
Elevator shafts, vent shafts and other vertical openings shall be enclosed and the
cndosure shall be as specified in Section 1706.
Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems

Sec. 607. When required by other provisions of this code, automatic sprinkler
systems and standpipes shall be installed as specified in Chapter 38.
Special Hazards
Sec. 608. Stages shall be equipped with automatic ventilators as required in Sec-
tion 3903 (c).
Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform to the requirements of Chapter
37 of this code and the Mechanical Code.
Motion picture machine booths shall conform to the requirements ofChapter40.
Proscenium curtains shall conform to the requirements set forth in U .B.C. Stan-
dard No. 6-1 which is a part of this code. (See Chapter 60, Part II.)
Class I, II or III-A liquids shall not be placed or stored in any Group A Occupan-
cy.
All exterior openings in a boiler room orroom containing central heating equip-
ment if located below openings in another story or if less than I 0 feet from other
doors or windows ofthe same building shall be protected by a fire assembly having
a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating. Such fire assemblies shall be fixed, au-
tomatic or self-closing. Every room containing a boiler, central heating plant or
hot-water supply boiler shall be separated from the rest of the building by not less
than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
EXCEPTION: Boilers. central heating plants or hot-water supply boilers where
the largest piece of fuel equipment does not exceed 400,000 Btu per hour input.
Sec. 610. (a) General. An approved smoke-detection system installed in accor-

•.'i,.•.'•.·'· dance with the Fire Code shall be provided in amusement buildings.
'. EXCEPTION: In areas where ambient conditions will cause a smoke-detector
system to alarm, an approved alternate type of automatic detector shall be installed.
(b) Alarm System. Activation of any single smoke detector, the automatic
sprinkler system or other automatic fire-detection device shall immediately sound
an alarm in the building at a constantly supervised location from which the manual
operation of systems noted in Section 610 (c), Items I, 2 and 3, may be initiated.
56
(c) System Response. The activation of two or more smoke detectors, a single !ii
smoke detector monitored by an alarm verification zone, the automatic sprinkler "''
system or other approved automatic fire-detection device shall automatically: ~:
I. Stop confusing sounds and visual effects, and
2. Activate an approved directional exit marking, and
3. Cause illumination of the exit path with light of not less than one footcandle at :l:
th~~~~~7cs~::~:~s System. A public address system which is audible through- ·ii

out the amusement building shall be provided. The public address system may also
serve as an alarm system.
57
NOTES
58
Chapter 7
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP B OCCUPANCIES
Group B Occupancies Defined
Sec. 701. Group B Occupancies shall be:
Division 1. Repair garages where work is limited to exchange of parts and main- !1''
tenance
tor requiring
vehicle no open flame,
fuel-dispensing welding
stations or usegarages
and parking of Classnot
I, IIclassified
or III -A liquids,
as Group mo- :~
B, .· :·.•',.::········'!...
· · ·'1
Division 3 open parking garages or Group M, Division I private garages.

Division 2. Drinking and dining establishments having an occupant load of less
than 50, wholesale and retail stores, office buildings, printing plants, police and fire !j!!
stations, factories and workshops using materials not highly flammable or com-
bustible, storage and sales rooms for combustible goods, paint stores without bulk
handling. (See Section 402 for definition of assembly buildings.)
Buildings or portions of buildings having rooms used for educational purposes
beyond the 12th grade with less than 50 occupants in any room.
Division 3. Aircraft hangars where no repair work is done except exchange of
parts and maintenance requiring no open flame, welding or the use of Class I or II
liquids.
Open parking garages.
Helistops.
Division 4. Ice plants, power plants, pumping plants, cold storage and creamer-
ies.
Factories and workshops using noncombustible and nonexplosive materials.
Storage and sales rooms containing only noncombustible and nonexplosive ma-
terials that are not packaged or crated in or supported by combustible material.
For occupancy separations, see Table No. 5-B.

Sec. 702. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group B Occu-
pancy because of the use or character of the occupancy shall be limited to the types
of construction set forth in Tables Nos. 5-C and 5-D and shall not exceed, in area
or height, the limits specified in Sections 505, 506 and 507.
(b) Special Provisions. I. Group B, Division 1 with Group A, Division 3; if'
Group B, Division 2; or Group R, Division 1 Occupancy above. Other provi- l!!
sions of this code notwithstanding, a basement or first story of a building may be !!j!
considered as a separate and distinct building for the purposes of area limitations, 1m
~::~:~:::::~:~:::::~::~;:::::::::::~:::::::::.:0:::::::
building above with a three-hour occupancy separation.
:!..·.:.i
B. The building above the three-hour occupancy separation contains only Group ~~'
A, Division 3; Group B, Division 2; or Group R, Division I Occupancies. i::
59
~.- '.:_;~_:,
C. The building below the three-hour occupancy separation is used exclusively
® for the parking and storage of private or pleasure-type motor vehicles.
!;!·!
EXCEPTIONS: I. Entry lobbies, laundry rooms, mechanical rooms and similar
uses incidental to the operation of the building.
f 2. Group B, Division 2 office and retail occupancies in addition to those incidental
~';-,_:.~'_-,,.:_·,'_,. to the operation of the building (including storage areas) provided that the entire
structure below the three-hour occupancy separation is protected throughout by an
automatic sprinkler system.
;-lJ D. The maximum building height in feet shall not exceed the limits set forth in
~ Table No. 5-D for the least type of construction involved.
2. Group B, Division 1 with Group B, Division 3 Occupancy above. Other
provisions of this code notwithstanding, a Group B, Division I Occupancy, located
in the basement or first story below a Group B, Division 3 open parking garage, as
defined in Section 709, may be classified as a separate and distinct building for the
purpose of determining the type of construction when all of the following condi-
tions are met:
A. The allowable area of the structure shall be such that the sum of the ratios of
the actual area divided by the allowable area for each separate occupancy shall not
exceed I.
B. The Group B, Division I Occupancy is of Type I or II construction and is at
least equal to the fire resistance of the Group B, Division 3 Occupancy.
C. The height and the number of the tiers above the basement shall be limited as
specified in Table No. 7-A or Section 709 (e).
D. The floor-ceiling assembly separating the Group B, Division I and Group B,
Division 3 Occupancies shall be protected as required for the floor-ceiling assem-
bly of the Group B, Division I Occupancy. Openings between the Group B, Divi-
sion I and Group B, Division 3 Occupancies, except exit openings, need not be
protected.
E. The Group B, Division I Occupancy is used exclusively for the parking or
storage for private or pleasure-type motor vehicles but may contain (a) mechanical
equipment rooms incidental to the operation of the building and (b) an office, and
waiting and toilet rooms having a total area of not more than I ,000 square feet.
(c) Specific Use Provisions. I. Group B, Divisions 1 and 3 Occupancies. Ma-
rine or motor vehicle fuel-dispensing stations, including canopies and supports
over pumps, shall be of noncombustible, fire-retardant-treated wood or of
one-hour fire-resistive construction.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Roofs of one-story fuel-dispensing stations may be of
heavy-timber construction.
2. Canopies conforming to Section 5213 may be erected over pumps.
i In areas where motor vehicles, boats or aircraft are stored, and in motor vehicle
"* fuel-dispensing stations and Division I repair garages, floor surfaces shall be of
noncombustible, nonabsorbent materials. Floors shall drain to an approved oil sep-
:,i.:,.r,:,·_:.:
. arator or trap discharging to sewers in accordance with the Plumbing Code.

EXCEPTION: Floors may be surfaced or waterproofed with asphaltic paving
materials in areas where motor vehicles or airplanes are stored or operated.
60
Canopies under which fuels are dispensed shall ha_ve a cle ar, unobstrhucted l,.l.:_;_._
height of not less than 13 feet 6 inches to the lowest proJectmg e 1ement m t e ve- ;
hicle drive-through area. ®
2. Group B, Division 2 storage areas. Storage areas in connection with whole-
sale or retail sales in Division 2 Occupancies shall be separated from the public area
by a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
EXCEPTION: Occupancy separation need not be provided when any one of the
following conditions exists:
A. The storage area does not exceed I ,000 square feet, or
B. The storage area is sprinklered and does not exceed 3,000 square feet, or
C. The building is provided with an approved automatic sprinkler system
throughout. Area increases as specified in Section 506 (c) are permitted.
3. Laboratories and vocational shops. Laboratories and vocational shops in
buildings used for educational purposes and similar areas containing hazardous
materials shall be separated from each other and other portions of the building by
not less than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation. When the quantities
of hazardous materials in such uses do not exceed those listed in Table No. 9-A or
9-B, the requirements of Sections 905 and 908 shall apply. When the quantities of
hazardous materials in such uses exceed those allowed by Table No. 9-A or9-B, the
use shall be classified as the appropriate Group H Occupancy.
Occupants in laboratories having an area in excess of 200 square feet shall have
access to at least two exits from the room and all portions of the room shall be with-
in 75 feet of an exit.
4. Medical gas systems. Medical gas systems shall be installed and maintained @
in accordance with the Fire Code. When nonflammable gas supply cylinders for t
such systems are located inside buildings they shall be in a separate room or enclo-
sure separated from the rest of the building by not less than one-hour fire-resistive
construction. Openings between the room or enclosure and interior spaces shall be
protected by self-closing smoke- and draft-control assemblies having a fire-pro-
JN
tection rating of not less than one hour. Rooms shall have at least one exterior wall ti~
in which there are not less than two vents of not less than 36 square inches in area.
One vent shall be within 6 inches of the floor and one shall be within 6 inches of the
ceiling.
EXCEPTION: When anexteriorwall cannot be provided for the room, automat-
ic sprinklers shall be installed within the room and the room shall be vented to the ex-
terior through ducting contained within a one-hour-rated shaft enclosure. Approved
mechanical ventilation shall provide six air changes per hour for the room.
5. Parking garage headroom. Parking garages shall have an unobstructed
headroom clearance of not less than 7 feet above the finish floor to any ceiling,
beam, pipe or similar construction, except for wall-mounted shelves, storage sur-
faces, racks or cabinets.
6. Group B, Division 4 roof framing. In Division 4 Occupancies, fire protec-
tion of the underside of roof framing may be omitted in all types of construction.
7. Amusement buildings. Amusement buildings with an occupant load of less :~~
than 50 shall comply with Sections 610,3314 (f) and 3802 (c). ~
61
IJ. EXCEPTION: Amusement buildings or portions thereof which are without

walls or a roof and constructed to prevent the accumulation of smoke in assembly
areas.
For flammable decorative materials, see the Fire Code.
Sec. 703. For fire-resistive protection of exterior walls and openings, as deter-
mined by location on property, see Section 504 and Part IV.
'.:·t~,;· A~~=~;o:~:x~:~~~~~~~i~~:~ided
'.: 702 (c) for exits from laboratories.]
as specified in Chapter 33. [See also Section
==~' Access to, and egress from, buildings required to be accessible shall be provided
~ ~~t::~~~~~~~:~~::~~~i~:op~<y boildiog•, '""""" portio"' co•-

' ' ' tomarily occupied by human beings, other than rooms and areas for which require-
~' ments are specified elsewhere in this section, shall be provided with natural light
.,. by means of exterior glazed openings with an area equal to one tenth of the total
~ floor area of such portions, or shall be provided with artificial light.
=:~: (b) Ventilation. l. General. In Group B Occupancy buildings, enclosed por-
\(~ tions customarily occupied by human beings, other than rooms and areas for which
i·.'~, -!~·
' requirements are specified elsewhere in this section, shall be provided with natural
,: ventilation by means of exterior openings with an openable area not less than 1/ 20 of
~ the total floor area of such portions, or shall be provided with a mechanically oper-
~ ated ventilating system. The mechanically operated ventilation system shall be ca-
1 pable of supplying a minimum of 5 cubic feet per minute of outside air per occupant
)~ with all total circulated of not less than 15 cubic feet per minute per occupant in all
,,,, occupied portions of the building.
I
EXCEPTION: In Group B, Division I repair garages and motor vehicle fuel-
dispensing stations without lubrication pits, storage garages and aircraft hangars,
such ventilating system may be omitted when, in the building official's opinion, the
building is supplied with unobstructed openings to the outer air which are sufficient
to provide the necessary ventilation.
In all buildings or portions thereof where Class I, II or III-A liquids are used, ex-
~~-hsausht vehntilation s~ all. be phrov idbed skufficfient to pr?duce six air chhanflges per ho ur.
1
uc ex aust ventt atton s a 11 e ta en rom a pomt at or near t e oor 1eve 1.
~~ Toilet rooms shall be provided with a fully openable exterior window at least 3
jJ square feet in area; or a vertical duct not less than I 00 square inches in area for the
' ' ' first toilet facility, with 50 additional square inches for each additional facility; or a
II mechanically operated exhaust system capable of providing a complete change of
~ air every 15 minutes. Such systems shall be connected directly to the outside, and
~.,: t,: .,= . the point of discharge shall be at least 3 feet from openings into the building .
., 2. Parking garages. In parking garages, other than open parking garages as de-
[ fined in Section 709 (b), used for storing or handling of automobiles operating un-
62
:::·:
dber thei~dowdn powber andt· onhallloading pl~t~orms infb us termb_in:ls, ventila~ion shall !·'"· ' : :':· ' ..,.
e prov1 e capa 1e o ex austmg a mtmmum o 1.5 cu IC teet per mmute per

square foot of gross tloor area. The building official may approve an alternate ven- ~
tilation system designed to exhaust a minimum of 14,000 cubic feet per minute for
each operating vehicle. Such system shall be based on the anticipated in.~tanta- ),)
neous movement rate of vehicles, but not Jess than 2.5 percent (or one vehicle) of "''
the garage capacity. Automatic carbon monoxide-sensing devices may be :r
:::=·
employed to modulate the ventilation system to maintain a maximum average con- '"
centration of carbon monoxide of 50 parts per million during any eight-hour peri- : ;:
od, with a maximum concentration not greater than 200 parts per million for a :::=
period not exceeding one hour. Connecting offices, waiting rooms, ticket booths ::
\~~
and similar uses shall be supplied with conditioned air under positive pressure.
EXCEPTION: Mechanical ventilation need not be provided within a Group B, H
Division I parking garage when openings complying with Item 2 of Section 709 (b)
~~~
(c) Sanitation. Buildings or portions thereof where persons are employed shall
I :::l
:~~j
be provided with at least one water closet. Separate facilities shall be provided for H
each sex when the number of employees exceeds four. Such toilet facilities shall be !!'
located either in such building or conveniently in a building adjacent thereto on the t:

same property.
Such water closet rooms in connection with food establishments where food is ' ' '
prepared, stored or served shall have a nonabsorbent interior finish as specified in ~!/
Section 510 (b), shall have hand-washing facilities therein or adjacent thereto, and ::::
shall be separated from food preparation or storage rooms as specified in Section }
510(a). l
For other requirements on water closets, see Section 511.

~/
Elevator shafts, vent shafts and other openings through floors shall be enclosed, ?
" :t"t:~;:h~ f h ~ ,t~gl: :~:~ ;d~ t:;b~ §ld~d~ ~?l:u~:~: h: ~;t;h~: tl: I
sys ems t roug ou , enc osures nee no e provt e tOT esca ators w ere e op
of the escalator opening at each story is provided with a draft curtain and automatic
::''
''
fire sprinklers are installed around the perimeter of the opening within 2 feet ofthe {
draft curtain. The draft curtain shall enclose the perimeter of the unenclosed open- t
ing and extend from the ceiling downward at least 12 inches on all sides. The spac- :;;
ing between sprinklers shall not exceed 6 feet.

63
Special Hazards
Sec. 708. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform to the requirements of
Chapter 37 of this code and the Mechanical Code.
f:! Storage and use of flammable and combustible liquids shall be in accordance
{i with the Fire Code.
Devices generating a glow or flame capable of igniting gasoline vapor shall not
be installed or used within 18 inches ofthe floor in any room in which Class I flam-
mable liquids or gas are used or stored.
Every room containing a boiler, central heating plant or hot-water supply boiler
shall be separated from the rest of the building by not less than a one-hour fire-re-
sistive occupancy separation.
EXCEPTION: Boilers, central heating plants or hot-water supply boilers where
::~::
{i Buildings erected or converted to house high-piled combustible storage or aero-
' ' ' sols shall comply with the Fire Code.
Open Parking Garages

Sec. 709. (a) Scope. Except where specific provisions are made in the following
subsections, other requirements of this code shall apply.
(b) Definitions. I. General. For the purpose of this section, certain terms are
defined as follows:
MECHANICAL-ACCESS OPEN PARKING GARAGES are open parking
garages employing parking machines, lifts, elevators or other mechanical devices
for vehicles moving from and to street level and in which public occupancy is pro-
hibited above the street level.
OPEN PARKING GARAGE is a structure of Type I or Type II construction
with the openings as described in Subsection 2 on two or more sides and which is
used exclusively for the parking or storage of private or pleasure-type motor ve-
hicles.
EXCEPTION: The grade-level tier may contain an office, and waiting and toilet
rooms having a total area of not more than l ,000 square feet, and such area need not
be separated from the open parking garage.
RAMP-ACCESS OPEN PARKING GARAGES are open parking garages
employing a series of continuously rising floors or a series of interconnecting
ramps between floors permitting the movement of vehicles under their own power
from and to the street level.
2. Openness. For natural ventilation purposes, the exterior side of the structure
shall have uniformly distributed openings on two or more sides. The area of such
openings in exterior walls on a tier must be at least 20 percent of the total perimeter
wall area of each tier. The aggregate length of the openings considered to be pro-
viding natural ventilation shall constitute a minimum of 40 percent of the perimeter
of the tier. Interior wall lines and column lines shall be at least 20 percent open with
uniformly distributed openings.
64
(c) Construction. Construction shall be of noncombustible materials. Open f

parking garages shall meet the design requirements of Chapter 23. For vehicle bar- );
riers, see Section 1712. ;:
(d) Area and Height. Area and height of open parking garages shall be limited
as set forth in Table No. 7-A except for increases allowed by Subsection (e).
In structures having a spiral or sloping floor, the horizontal projection of the
structure at any cross section shall not exceed the allowable area per parking tier.
In the case of a structure having a continuous spiral floor, each 9 feet 6 inches of
height or portion thereof shall be considered as a tier.
The clear height of a parking tier shall not be less than 7 feet, except that a lesser
clear height may be permitted in mechanical-access open parking garages when
approved by the building official.
(e) Area and Height Increases. The area and height of structures with cross
ventilation throughout may be increased in accordance with provisions of this sub-
section. Structures with sides open on three fourths of the building perimeter may
be increased by 25 percent in area and one tier in height. Structures with sides open
around the entire building perimeter may be increased 50 percent in area and one
tier in height. For a side to be considered open under the above provisions, the total
area of openings along the side shall not be less than 50 percent of the interior area
of the side at each tier, and such openings shall be equally distributed along the
length of the tier.
Open parking garages constructed to heights less than the maximums estab-
lished by Table No.7 -A may have individual tier areas exceeding those otherwise
permitted, provided the gross tier area of the structure does not exceed that per-
mitted for the higher structure. At least three sides of each such larger tier shall have
continuous horizontal openings not less than 30 inches in clear height extending for
at least 80 percent of the length of the sides, and no part of such larger tier shall be
more than 200 feet horizontally from such an opening. in addition, each such open-
ing shall face a street or yard accessible to a street with a width of at least 30 feet for
the full length of the opening, and standpipes shall be provided in each such tier.
Structures of Type 11-F.R., Type II One-hour or Type 11-N construction, with all
sides open, may be unlimited in area when the height does not exceed 75 feet. For a
side to be considered open, the total area of openings along the side shall not be less
than 50 percent of the interior area of the side at each tier, and such openings shall
be equally distributed along the length of the tier. All portions of tiers shall be with-
in 200 feet horizontally from such openings.
(t) Location on Property. Exterior walls and openings in exterior walls shall
comply with Table No. 7-B. The distance from an adjacent property line shall be
determined in accordance with Section 504.
(g) Stairs and Exits. Where persons other than parking attendants are per-
mitted, stairs and exits shall meet the requirements of Chapter 33, based on an oc-
cupant load of 200 square feet per occupant. Where no persons other than parking
attendants are permitted, there shall not be less than two stairs 3 feet wide. Lifts
may be installed for use of employees only, provided they are completely enclosed
by noncombustible materials.
65
(h) Standpipes. Standpipes shall be installed when required by the provisions of

Chapter 38.
(i) Sprinkler Systems. When required by other provisions of this code, auto-
matic sprinkler systems and standpipes shall be installed in accordance with the
provisions of Chapter 38.
(j) Enclosure of Vertical Openings. Enclosure shall not be required for vertical
openings except as specified in Subsection (g) for lifts.
(k) Ventilation. Ventilation, other than the percentage of openings specified in
Subsection (b), shall not be required.
(I) Prohibitions. The following uses and alterations are not permitted:
I. Automobile repair work.
2. Parking of buses, trucks and similar vehicles.
3. Partial or complete closing of required openings in exterior walls by tarpau-
lins or any other means.
4. Dispensing of fuel.
Helistops
Sec. 710. (a) General. Helistops may be erected on buildings or other locations
if they are constructed in accordance with this section.
(b) Size. The touchdown or landing area for helicopters of less than 3,500
pounds shall be a minimum of 20 feet by 20 feet in size. The touchdown area shall
be surrounded on all sides by a clear area having a minimum average width at roof
level of 15 feet but with no width less than 5 feet.
(c) Design. Helicopter landing areas and supports therefor on the roof of a build-
ing shall be of noncombustible construction. Landing areas shall be designed to
confine any Class I, II or III-A liquid spillage to the landing area itself and provi-
sion shall be made to drain such spillage away from any exit or stairway serving the
helicopter landing area or from a structure housing such exit or stairway.
(d) Exits and Stairways. Exits and stairways from helistops shall comply with
the provisions of Chapter 33 of this code, except that all landing areas located on
buildings or structures shall have two or more exits. For landing platforms or roof
areas less than 60 feet in length, or less than 2,000 square feet in area, the second
exit may be a fire escape or ladder leading to the floor below.
(e) Federal Aviation Approval. Before operating helicopters from helistops,
approval must be obtained from the Federal Aviation Administration.
66
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 7-A, 7-B
TABLE NO. 7-A-OPEN PARKING GARAGES AREA AND HEIGHT

HEIGHT
Mechanical Access
Aulomatlc
Fire-extinguishing
System
TYPE OF AREA PER TIER

CONSTRUCTION (square feet) Ramp Access No Yes
I Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited

11-F.R. 125,000 12 Tiers 12 Tiers 18 Tiers
Il-l-hour 50,000 10 Tiers 10 Tiers 15 Tiers
11-N 30,000 8 Tiers 8 Tiers 12 Tiers
TABLE NO. 7-B-OPEN PARKING GARAGES-EXTERIOR WALLS1

FIRE RESISTANCE OF EXTERIOR WALLS OPENING IN EXTERIOR WALLS
One hour less than I 0 feet Not permitted less than 5 feet,
protected less than I 0 feet
I See Sec lion 709 (f).
67
NOTES
68
Chapter 8
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP E OCCUPANCIES
Group E Occupancies Defined
Ber~ BOJ. GroupE Occupancies shall be:
Division 1. Any building used for educational purposes through t~ ~ 1.'1;vg,w..
by 50 or more persons for more than 12 hours per week or four hours in any one day.
Division 2. Any building used for educational purposes through the 12th grade
by less than 50 persons for more than 12 hours per week or four hours in any one
day.
Division 3. Any building or portion thereof used for day-care purposes for more .~,'. ;,.•
than six persons. ,,

Sec. 802. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in GroupE be-
cause of the use or character of the occupancy shall be limited to the types of con-
struction set forth in Tables Nos. 5-C and 5-D and shall not exceed, in area or
height, the limits specified in Sections 505,506 and 507, except that the area may
be increased by 50 percent when the maximum travel distance specified in Section
3303 (d) is reduced by 50 percent.
(b) Atmospheric Separation Requirements. I. Definitions. For the purpose
of this chapter and Section 3318, the following definitions are applicable:
COMMON ATMOSPHERE. A common atmosphere exists between rooms,
spaces or areas within a building which are not separated by an approved smoke-
and draft-stop barrier.
SEPARATE ATMOSPHERE. A separate atmosphere exists between rooms,
spaces or areas that are separated by an approved smoke- and draft-stop barrier.
SMOKE AND DRAFT BARRIER. A smoke and draft barrier consists of
walls, partitions, floors and openings therein of such construction as will prevent
the transmission of smoke or gases through the construction.
2. General provisions. The provisions of this subsection apply when a separate
exit system is required in accordance with Section 3318.
Walls, partitions and floors forming all of, or part of, an atmospheric separation
shall be of materials consistent with the requirements for the type of construction,
but of construction not less effective than a smoke- or draft-stop barrier. Glass
lights of approved wired glass set in steel frames may be installed in such walls or
partitions.
Every door opening therein shall be protected with a fire assembly as required
elsewhere in the code, but not less than a self-closing or automatic-closing,
tight-fitting smoke barrier and fire assembly having a fire-protection rating of not
less than 20 minutes when tested in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 43-2
which is a part of this code. (See Chapter 60, Part II.)
69
Ducts penetrating atmospheric separation walls, partitions or t1oors shall be

equipped with an approved automatic-closing smoke damper when having open-
ings into more than one atmosphere.
All automatic-closing fire assemblies installed in the atmospheric separation
shall be activated by approved smoke detectors.
The specific requirements of this section are not intended to prevent the design
or use of other systems, equipment or techniques which will effectively prevent the
products of combustion from breaching the atmospheric separation.
(c) Special Provisions. Rooms in Divisions I and 2 Occupancies used for kin-
dergarten. first- or second-grade pupils and Division 3 Occupancies shall not be
located above or below the first story, except for basements that have required exits
at grade level.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In buildings equipped with an automatic sprinkler system
throughout, rooms used for kindergarten, first- and second-grade children or for
day-care purposes may be located on the second story. provided there arc at least two
exits directly to the exterior for the exclusive use of such occupants; or
2. In buildings equipped with an automatic sprinkler system throughout and of
Type I or Type II fire-resistive construction, day-care facilities are permitted to be
located above the first story when:
A. The entire story on which the day-care facility is located is equipped with an
approved fire alarm and smoke-detection system as set forth in the Fire Code.
Actuation of the system shall sound an audible alarm throughout the day-care
facility; and
B. The day-care facility is divided into not less than two areas of approximately
the same size, separated from each other by not less than one-hour fire-resis-
tive construction. Openings between the two areas shall be protected by auto-
matic-closing fire assemblies, having a fire-protection rating of not less than
20 minutes, which will close automatically on actuation of the fire alarm or
detection systems: and
C. Each area is provided with air-moving equipment independent of that serving
..
the other; and
D. Each area has not less than two exits, one of which is permitted to be through
the adjoining area .
Stages and platforms shall be constructed in accordance with Chapter 39. For
attic space partitions and draft stops, see Section 2516 (f).
(d) Special Hazards. Laboratories, vocational shops and similar areas contain-
ing hazardous materials shall be separated from each other and from other portions
of the building by not less than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
When the quantities of hazardous materials in such uses do not exceed those listed
in Table No. 9-A or 9-8, the requirements of Sections 905 and 908 shall apply.
When the quantities of hazardous materials in such uses exceed those allowed by
Table No. 9-A or 9-8, the use shall be classified as the appropriate Group H Occu-
pancy.
Occupants in laboratories having an area in excess of200 square feet shall have
access to at least two exits from the room and all portions ofthe room shall be with-
in 75 feet of an exit.
70
Equipment in rooms or groups of rooms sharing a common atmosphere where

flammable liquids, combustible dust or hazardous materials are used, stored, de-
veloped or handled shall conform to the requirements of the Fire Code.
Sec. 803. All buildings housing GroupE Occupancies shall front directly on or
have access to a public street not less than 20 feet in width. The access to the public
street shall be a minimum 20-foot-wide right-of-way, unobstructed and main-
tained only as access to the public street. At least one required exit shall be located
on the public street or on the access way.
For fire-resistive protection of exterior walls and openings, as determined by lo-
cation on property, see Section 504 and Part IV.

Sec. 805. All portions of GroupE Occupancies shall be provided with light and
ventilation, either natural or artificial, as specified in Section 605.
Water closets shall be provided on the basis of the following ratio of water clos-
ets to the number of students:
Boys Girls
Elementary Schools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I: I 00 1:35
Secondary Schools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I: I00 1:45
In addition, urinals shall be provided for boys on the basis of I :30 in elementary
and secondary schools.
There shall be provided at least one lavatory for each two water closets or uri-
nals, and at least one drinking fountain on each tloor for elementary and secondary
schools.

Sec. 806. Exits shall be enclosed as specified in Chapter 33. Elevator shafts, vent
shafts and other vertical openings shall be enclosed, and the enclosure shall be as
specified in Chapter 17.

Sec. 807. Where required, automatic sprinkler systems and standpipes shall be
installed as specified in Chapter 38.
71
Special Hazards
Motion picture machine rooms shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 40.
All exterior openings in a boiler room or rooms containing central heating equip-
ment. if located below openings in another story or if less than I 0 feet from other
doors or windows of the same building, shall be protected by a fire assembly hav-
ing a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating. Such fire assemblies shall be fixed,
automatic closing or self-closing. Every room containing a boiler, central heating
plant or hot-water supply boiler shall be separated from the rest of the building by
not less than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
EXCEPTION: Boilers, central heating plants or hot-water supply boilers where
When the opening for a heater or equipment room is protected by a pair of fire
doors, the inactive leaf shall be normally secured in the closed position and shall be
openable only by the use of a tool. An as tragal shall be provided and the active leaf
shall be self-closing.
Class I, II or III-A liquids shalJ not be placed, stored or used in GroupE Occu-
pancies, except in approved quantities as necessary in laboratories and classrooms
and for operation and maintenance as set forth in the Fire Code.
I Fire Alarms
F
I Sec. 809. An approved fire alarm system shalJ be provided for GroupE Occu-
F pancies with an occupant load of 50 or more persons. In GroupE Occupancies pro-
I vided with an automatic sprinkler or detection system, the operation of such system
F
shalJ automatically activate the school fire alarm system, which shalJ include an
I alarm mounted on the exterior of the building. See Chapter 33 for smoke-detection
F
I requirements. For installation requirements, see the Fire Code.
72
Chapter 9
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP H OCCUPANCIES
Group H Occupancies Defined
Sec: 9 0ld•.(a) Genferal.f1For deflb·n1 ition1~d'

idedntification anbd control of habzardt.obules •·.',·.
matena 1s, 1sp1ay o non amma e so 1 an non 11 amma 1e or noncom us 1
·'·.!·...·',· ...
·'·.!
liquid hazardous materials in Group B, Division 2 Occupancies, see the Fire Code. ::::
For application and use of control areas, see Footnote No. 1 of Tables Nos. 9-A and , ,
9-B. Group H Occupancies shall be:
Division l. Occupancies with a quantity of material in the building in excess of
those listed in Table No. 9-A which present a high explosion hazard, including, but
not limited to:
I. Explosives, blasting agents, fireworks and black powder.
EXCEPTION: Storage and the use of pyrotechnic special effect materials in
motion picture, television. theatrical and group entertainment production when un-
der permit as required in the Fire Code. The time period for storage shall not exceed
90 days.
2. Unclassified detonatable organic peroxides.
3. Class 4 oxidizers.
4. Class 4 or Class 3 detonatable unstable (reactive) materials.
Division 2. Occupancies with a quantity of material in the building in excess of
those listed in Table No. 9-A, which present a moderate explosion hazard or a haz-
ard from accelerated burning, including, but not limited to:
I. Class I organic peroxides.
2. Class 3 nondetonatable unstable (reactive) materials.
3. Pyrophoric gases.
4. Flammable or oxidizing gases.
5. Class I, II or III-A flammable or combustible liquids which are used in nor-
mally open containers or systems or in closed containers pressurized at more than
15-pounds-per-square-inch gauge.
EXCEPTION: Aerosols. ?
6. Combustible dusts in suspension or capable of being put into suspension in
the atmosphere of the room or area.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Rooms or areas used for woodworking, where no more than }~
three woodworking appliances having an aggregate exhaust requirement of less than ··
I ,000 cubic feet per minute are utilized, may be classified as a Group B, Division 2 ·.·':,· . ·':·.'!
Occupancy, provided the appliances are equipped with dust collectors sufficient to .
remove dust generated by the appliances.
2. Lumberyards and similar retail stores utilizing only power saws may be classi-
fied as Group B, Division 2 Occupancies.
The building official may revoke the use of these exceptions for due cause.
7. Class 3 oxidizers.
73
Division 3. Occupancies with a quantity of material in the building in excess of

those listed in Table No. 9-A which present a high fire or physical hazard, includ-
ing, but not limited to:
l. Class II, III or IV organic peroxides.
2. Class l or 2 oxidizers.
3. Class I, II or III-A flammable liquids or combustible liquids which areut\\i:z.ed
or stored in normally closed containers or systems and containers pressurized at
: : : 15-pounds-per-square-inch gauge or less and aerosols.
4. Class III-8 combustible liquids.
5. Pyrophoric liquids or solids.
6. Water reactives.
7. Flammable solids, including combustible fibers or dusts, except for dusts in-
cluded in Division 2 Occupancies.
8. Flammable or oxidizing cryogenic fluids (other than inert).
~r 9. Class I unstable (reactive) gas or Class 2 unstable (reactive) materials.
Division 4. Repair garages not classified as Group B, Division 1 Occupancies.
Division 5. Aircraft repair hangars not classified as Group B, Division 3 Occu-
pancies, and heliports.
Division 6. Semiconductor fabrication facilities and comparable research and
development areas when the facilities in which hazardous production materials
(HPM) are used and the aggregate quantity of materials is in excess of those listed
in Table No. 9-A or9-8. Such facilities and areas shall be designed and constructed
in accordance with Section 911.
Division 7. Occupancies having quantities of materials in excess of those listed
in Table No. 9-8 that are health hazards, including:
I. Corrosives.
2. Toxic and highly toxic materials.
3. Irritants.
4. Sensitizers.
5. Other health hazards.
(b) Multiple Hazards. When a hazardous material has multiple hazards, all
hazards shall be addressed and controlled in accordance with the provisions of this
chapter.
(c) Liquid Use, Dispensing and Mixing Rooms. Rooms in which Class I, Class
II and Class III-A flammable or combustible liquids are used, dispensed or mixed
in open containers shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements for a
Group H, Division 2 Occupancy and the following:
I. Rooms in excess of 500 square feet shall have at least one exterior door ap-
proved for fire department access.
2. Rooms shall not exceed I ,000 square feet in area.
3. Rooms shall be separated from other areas by an occupancy separation hav-
ing a fire-resistive rating of not less than one hour for rooms up to 150 square feet in
74
area and not less than two hours where the room is more than 150 square feet in
area. Separations from other occupancies shall not be less than required by Chapter
5, Table No. 5-B.
4. Shelving, racks and wainscoting in such areas shall be of noncombustible
construction or wood not less than l-inch nominal thickness.
5. Liquid use, dispensing and mixing rooms shall not be located in basements.
(d) Liquid Storage Rooms. Rooms in which Class I, Class II and Class III-A
flammable or combustible liquids are stored in closed containers shall be con-
structed in accordance with the requirements for a Group H, Division 3 Occupancy
and to the following:
I. Rooms in excess of 500 square feet shall have at least one exterior door ap-
proved for fire department access.
2. Rooms shall be separated from other areas by an occupancy separation hav-
ing a fire-resistive rating of not less than one hour for rooms up to !50 square feet in
area and not less than two hours where the room is more than 150 square feet in
area. Separations from other occupancies shall not be less than required by Chapter
5, Table No. 5-B.
3. Shelving, racks and wainscoting in such areas shall be of noncombustible
construction or wood of not less than l-inch nominal thickness.
4. Rooms used for the storage of Class I flammable liquids shall not be located in
a basement.
(e) Flammable or Combustible Liquid Storage Warehouses. Liquid storage
warehouses in which Class I, Class II and Class III-A flammable or combustible
liquids are stored in closed containers shall be constructed in accordance with the
requirements for a Group H, Division 3 Occupancy and the following:
I. Liquid storage warehouses shall be separated from all other uses by a
four-hour area separation wall.
2. Shelving, racks and wainscoting in such warehouses shall be of noncombus-
tible construction or wood not less than l-inch nominal thickness.
3. Rooms used for the storage of Class I flammable liquids shall not be located
in a basement.
(t) Requirement for Report. The building official may require a technical
opinion and report to identify and develop methods of protection from the hazards
presented by the hazardous material. The opinion and report shall be prepared by a
qualified person, firm or corporation approved by the building official and shall be
provided without charge to the enforcing agency.
The opinion and report may include, but is not limited to, the preparation of a
hazardous material management plan (HMMP); chemical analysis; recommenda-
tions for methods of isolation, separation, containment or protection of hazardous
materials or processes, including appropriate engineering controls to be applied;
the extent of changes in the hazardous behavior to be anticipated under conditions
of exposure to fire or from hazard control procedures; and the limitations or condi-
tions of use necessary to achieve and maintain control of the hazardous materials or
operations. The report shall be entered into the files of the code enforcement agen-
75
cies. Proprietary and trade secret information shall be protected under the laws of
the state or jurisdiction having authority.

Sec. 902. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group H be-
.51.J"JJCJjon set forth in Tables Nos. 5-C and 5-D and shall not exceed, in area or
height, the limits specified in Sections 505,506 and 507.
(b) Floors. Except for surfacing, floors in areas containing hazardous materials
and in areas where motor vehicles, boats, helicopters or airplanes are stored, re-
paired or operated shall be of noncombustible, liquid-tight construction.
EXCEPTION: In Group H, Divisions 4 and 5 Occupancies, tloors may be sur-
faced or waterproofed with asphaltic paving materials in that portion of the facility
where no repair work is done.
(c) Spill Control. When required by the Fire Code, floors shall be recessed a
minimum of 4 inches or shall be provided with a liquid-tight raised sill with a mini-
mum height of 4 inches so as to prevent the flow ofliquids to adjoining areas. When
liquid-tight sills are provided, they may be omitted at door openings by the installa-
tion of an open-grate trench which connects to the room drainage system.
(d) Drainage. When required by the Fire Code, the room, building or area shall
be provided with a drainage system to direct the flow ofliquids to an approved loca-
tion or, the room, building or area shall be designed to provide secondary contain-
ment for the hazardous materials and fire-protection water.
Drains from the area shall be sized to carry the sprinkler system design flow rate
over the sprinkler system design area. The slope of drains shall not be less than I
percent. Materials of construction for the drainage system shall be compatible with
the stored materials.
Incompatible materials shall be separated from each other in the drain systems.
They may be combined when they have been rendered acceptable for discharge by
an approved means into the public sewer. Drainage of spillage and fire-protection
water directed to a neutralizer or treatment system shall comply with the following:
I. The system shall be designed to handle the maximum worst-case spill from
the single largest container plus the volume of fire-protection water from the sys-
tem over the minimum design area for a period of 20 minutes.
2. Overflow from the neutralizer or treatment system shall be provided to direct
liquid leakage and fire-protection water to a safe location away from the building,
any material or fire-protection control valve, means of egress, adjoining property,
or fire department access roadway.
(e) Containment. When required by the Fire Code, drains shall be directed to a
containment system or other location designed as secondary containment for the
hazardous material liquids and fire-protection water, or the building, room or area
shall be designed to provide secondary containment of hazardous material liquids
and fire-protection water through the use of recessed floors or liquid-tight raised
sills.
76
Secondary containment shall be designed to retain the spill from the largest
single container plus the design flow rate of the sprinkler system for the area of the
room or area in which the storage is located or the sprinkler system design area,
whichever is smaller. The containment capacity shall be capable of containing the
flow for a period of 20 minutes.
Overflow from the secondary containment system shall be provided to direct
liquid leakage and fire-protection water to a safe location away from the building,
any material or fire-protection control valve, means of egress, fire access roadway,
adjoining property or storm drains.
If the storage area is open to rainfall, the secondary containment shall be de-
signed to accommodate the volume of a 24-hour rainfall as determined by a
25-year storm.
When secondary containment is required, a monitoring method capable of de-
tecting hazardous material leakage from the primary containment into the second-
ary containment shall be provided. When visual inspection of the primary
containment is not practical, other approved means of monitoring may be pro-
vided. When secondary containment may be subject to the intrusion of water, a
monitoring method for such water shall be provided. Whenever monitoring de-
vices are provided, they shall be connected to distinct visual or audible alarms.
(t) Smoke and Heat Vents. Smoke and heat venting shall be provided in areas
containing hazardous materials as set forth in the Fire Code in addition to the provi-
sions of this code.
(g) Standby Power. Standby power shall be provided in Group H, Divisions I
and 2 Occupancies and in Group H, Division 3 Occupancies in which Class II or III iili
organic peroxides are stored. The standby power system shall be designed and in-
stalled in accordance with the Electrical Code to automatically supply power to all
required electrical equipment when the normal electrical supply system is inter- ~l
rupted.
(h) Emergency Power. An emergency power system shall be provided in Group
H, Divisions 6 and 7 Occupancies. The emergency power system shall be designed
and installed in accordance with the Electrical Code to automatically supply power
to all required electrical equipment when the normal electrical supply system is in-
terrupted.
The exhaust system may be designed to operate at not less than one halfthe nor-
mal fan speed on the emergency power system when it is demonstrated that the lev-
el of exhaust will maintain a safe atmosphere.
(i) Special Provisions for Group H, Division 1 Occupancies. Group H, Divi-
sion I Occupancies shall be in buildings used for no other purpose, without base-
ments, crawl spaces or other under-floor spaces. Roofs shall be of lightweight
construction with suitable thermal insulation to prevent sensitive material from
reaching its decomposition temperature.
Group H, Division I Occupancies containing materials which are in themselves I.
both physical and health hazards in quantities exceeding the exempt amounts in ~
Table No. 9-B shall comply with requirements for both Group H, Division I and it
Group H, Division 7 Occupancies. Jl
77
U) Special Provisions for Group H, Divisions 2 and 3 Occupancies. Group H,

Divisions 2 and 3 Occupancies containing quantities of hazardous materials in ex-
cess of those set forth in Table No. 9-E shall be in buildings used for no other pur-
pose, 8hall not exceed one story in height and shall be without basements. crawl
spaces or other under-floor spaces.
Group H, Division 3 Occupancies containing water-reactive materials shall be
re.fi.ftant to water penetration. Piping for conveying liquids shall not be over or
through areas containing water reactives, unless isolated by approved liquid-tight
construction.
EXCEPTION: Fire-protection piping may be installed over reactives without
isolation.
(k) Special Provisions for Group H, Divisions 4 and 5 Occupancies. A Divi-
sion 4 Occupancy having a floor area not exceeding 2,500 square feet may have
exterior walls of not less than two-hour fire-resistive construction when less than 5
.. feet from a property line and of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction
when 5 feet or more but less than 20 feet from a property line .
(I) Special Provisions for Group H, Division 6 Occupancies. See Section 911.
Sec. 903. Group H Occupancies shall be located on property in accordance with
~1: Section 504, Tables Nos. 9-C and 9-D and other provisions of this chapter. In Group
H, Division 2 or 3 Occupancies, not less than 25 percent of the perimeter wall of
the occupancy shall be an exterior wall.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Liquid use, dispensing and mixing rooms having a floor area
of not more than 500 square feet need not be located on the outer perimeter of the
building when they are in accordance with Section 901 (c).
2. Liquid storage rooms having a floor area of not more than 1,000 square feet need
not be located on the outer perimeter when they are in accordance with Section 90 I
(d).
3. Spray paint booths which comply with the Fire Code need not be located on
the outer perimeter.
~ Access and Exit Facilities

l~ Sec. 904. Exits shall be provided as specified in Chapter 33. (For special provi-
1 sions see Section 3319.)
:~::
f Access to, and egress from, buildings required to be accessible shall be provided
~j as specified in Chapter 31.

\~) Sec. 905. (a) General. In Group H Occupancy buildings, all enclosed portions
customarily occupied by human beings, other than rooms and areas for which re-
quirements are specified elsewhere in this section, shall be provided with natural
light by means of exterior glazed openings with an area equal to one tenth of the
total floor area of such portions, and natural ventilation by means of exterior open-
ings with an openable area not less than one twentieth of the total floor area of such
78
portions, or shall be provided with artificial light and a mechanically operated ven-
tilation system. The mechanically operated ventilation system shall be capable of
supplying a minimum of 5 cubic feet per minute of outside air per occupant, with
a total circulated of not less than 15 cubic feet per minute per occupant in all occu-
pied portions of the building. When recirculation of air is not permitted, the ventila-
tion system shall be capable of providing not less than 15 cubic feet per minute of
outside air per occupant.
(b) Ventilation in Hazardous Locations. Rooms, areas or spaces in which ex- ::;;
plosive, corrosive, combustible, flammable or highly toxic dusts, mists, fumes, va- :·=::
pors or gases are or may be emitted due to the processing, use, handling or storage .::!;
of materials shall be mechanically ventilated as required by the Fire Code and the
Mechanical Code. ~i
Emissions generated at work stations shall be confined to the area in which they
are generated as specified in the Fire and Mechanical Codes.
The location of supply and exhaust openings shall be in accordance with the Me-
chanical Code. Exhaust air contaminated by highly toxic material shall be treated
in accordance with the Fire Code.
A manual shutoff control for ventilation equipment required by this subsection
shall be provided outside the room adjacent to the principal access door to the
room. The switch shall be of the break-glass type and shall be labeled "Ventilation
System Emergency Shutoff."
(c) Ventilation in Group H, Division 4 Occupancies. In all buildings used for
the repair or handling of motor vehicles operating under their own power, mechan-
ical ventilation shall be provided capable of exhausting a minimum of I cubic foot
per minute per square foot of floor area. Each engine repair stall shall be equipped
with an exhaust pipe extension duct, extending to the outside of the building,
which, if over I 0 feet in length, shall mechanically exhaust 300 cubic feet per min-
ute. Connecting offices and waiting rooms shall be supplied with conditioned air
under positive pressure.
EXCEPTION: When approved, ventilating equipment may be omitted in repair
garages, enclosed heliports and aircraft hangars when well-distributed unobstructed
openings to the outer air of sufficient size to supply necessary ventilation are fur-
nished.
(d) Sanitation. Every building or portion thereof where persons are employed I
shall be provided with at least one water closet. Such toilet facilities shall be located ~
!~.such building or conveniently in a building adjacent thereto on the same proper- ~i
Toilet rooms shall be provided with a fully openable exterior window at least 3
square feet in area; or a vertical duct not less than I 00 square inches in area for the
first water closet, with 50 additional square inches for each additional fixture; or a
mechanically operated exhaust system capable of providing a complete change of
air every 15 minutes. Such systems shall be connected directly to the outside, and ~..r.:·.. ;,i:;.'
the point of discharge shall be at least 3 feet from any opening into the building. ;z
79
::::=
@j
~t Sec. 906. Exits shall be enclosed as specified in Chapter 33.
I'\ E\evator shafts, vent shafts and other openings through floors shall be enclosed,
;;! and the enclosure shall be as specified in Section 1706.
· · · ;.•:. Doors which are a part of an automobile ramp enclosure shall be equipped with
automatic-closing devices .
•·. •'. ·•.•·•·. • Occh~phancies,da

Inhbui.ldin gds with Gd roup H, Divisio.n 6
. mec amca1, uct an p1pmg penetrations w IC ex ten t roug no more an wo
fhabricahtiont area mthay htave
floors within that fabrication area. The annular space around penetrations for
, , . cables, cable trays, tubing, piping, conduit or ducts shall be sealed at the floor level
t to restrict the movement of air. The fabrication area, including the areas through
which the ductwork and piping extend, shall be considered a single conditioned
environment.

Sec. 907. When required by other provisions of this code, automatic fire-extin-
guishing systems and standpipes shall be designed and installed as specified in
Chapter 38.
Special Hazards
Every boiler, central heating plant or hot-water supply boiler shall be separated
from the rest of the building by not less than a two-hour fire-resistive occupancy
separation. In Divisions I, 2 and 3, there shall be no openings in such occupancy
separations except for necessary ducts and piping.
In Division 4 Occupancies, devices which generate a spark, flame or glow capa-
ble of igniting gasoline vapors shall not be installed or used within 18 inches ofthe
floor.
Equipment or machinery which generates or emits combustible or explosive
dust or fibers shall be provided with an adequate dust-collecting and exhaust sys-
tem installed in conformance with the Mechanical Code. Equipment or systems
that are used to collect, process or convey combustible dusts or fibers shall be pro-
vided with an approved explosion venting or containment system.
j\ii Combustible fiber storage rooms with a fiber storage capacity not exceeding 500
~:::: cubic feet shall be separated from the remainder of the building by a one-hour fire-
resistive occupancy separation. Combustible fiber storage vaults having a fiber
storage capacity of more than 500 cubic feet shall be separated from the remainder
of the building by a two-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
Cellulose nitrate film storage and handling shall be in accordance with Chapter
48.
1
Fire Alarms
l }l Sec. 909. An approved manual fire alarm system shall be provided in Group H
~ )~\ Occupancies used for the manufacturing of organic coatings. Approved automatic
80
smoke detection shall be provided for rooms used for the storage, dispensing, use
and handling of hazardous materials when required by the Fire Code. For Group
H, Division 6 Occupancies, see Section 911. For installation requirements, see the
Fire Code. For aerosol storage warehouses, see the Fire Code.
Explosion Control
Sec. 910. Explosion control, equivalent protective devices or suppression sys-
tems; or barricades shall be provided to control or vent the gases resulting from def-
lagrations of dusts, gases or mists in rooms, buildings or other enclosures as
required by the Fire Code so as to minimize structural or mechanical damage. If
detonation rather than deflagration is considered likely, protective devices or sys-
tems such as fully contained barricades shall be provided, except that explosion
venting to minimize damage from less than 2.0 grams of trinitrotoluene (TNT)
(equivalence) is permitted. Walls, floors and roofs separating a use from an explo-
sion exposure shall be designed to resist a minimum internal pressure of I 00
pounds per square foot in addition to the loads required by Chapter 23.
Explosion venting shall be provided in exterior walls or roof only. The venting
shall be designed to prevent serious structural damage and production of lethal
projectiles. The aggregate clear vent relief area shall be regulated by the pressure
resistance of the nonrelieving portions of the buildi1 ·~be designed by persons
competent in such design. The design shall recognize ,he 1•ature of the material and
its behavior in an explosion. Vents shall consist of any one or any combination of
the following to relieve at a maximum internal pressure of 20 pounds per square
foot, but not less than the loads required by Chapter 23:
I. Walls of lightweight material.
2. Lightly fastened hatch covers.
3. Lightly fastened, outward-opening swinging doors in exterior walls.
4. Lightly fastened walls or roof.
Venting devices shall discharge vertically or directly to an unoccupied yard not
less than 50 feet in width on the same lot. Releasing devices shall be so located that
the discharge end shall not be less than 10 feet vertically and 20 feet horizontally
from window openings or exits in the same or adjoining buildings or structures.
The exhaust shall always be in the direction of least exposure and never into the
interior of the building unless a suitably designed shaft is provided which dis-
charges to the exterior. See Footnote No. 12 of Table No. 9-A.
Division 6 Occupancies
Sec. 911. (a) General. In addition to the requirements set forth elsewhere in this
code, Group H, Division 6 Occupancies shall comply with the provisions of this
section and the Fire Code.
(b) Fabrication Area. I. Separation. Fabrication areas, whose size is limited
by the quantity of hazardous production materials (HPM) permitted by the Fire
Code, shall be separated from each other, from exit corridors, and from other parts
of the building by not less than one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separations.
81
EXCEPTIONS: I. Doors within such occupancy separation, including doors to

corridors, shall be only self-closing fire assemblies having a fire-protection rating of
not less than three-fourths hour.
2. Windows between fabrication areas and exit corridors may be in accordance
with Section 3305 (h) 2.
2. Floors. Except for surfacing, floors within fabrication areas shall be of non-
combustible construction. Openings through floors of fabrication areas may be un-
protected when the interconnected levels are used solely for mechanical
equipment directly related to such fabrication area. See also Section 906. When
forming a part of an occupancy separation, floors shall be liquid tight.
3. Ventilation. Mechanical ventilation, which may include recirculated air,
shall be provided throughout the fabrication area at the rate of not less than 1 cubic
foot per minute per square foot of floor area. The exhaust air duct system of one
fabrication area shall not connect to another duct system outside that fabrication
area within the building.
Ventilation systems shall comply with the Mechanical Code except that the au-
tomatic shutoffs need not be installed on air-moving equipment. However, smoke
detectors shall be installed in the circulating airstream and shall initiate a signal at
the emergency control station.
Except for exhaust systems, at least one manually operated remote control
switch that will shut down the fabrication area ventilation system shall be installed
at an approved location outside the fabrication area.
4. Transporting hazardous production materials. Hazardous production ma-
terials shall be transported to fabrication areas through enclosed piping or tubing
systems that comply with Section 911 (f), through service corridors or in exit corri-
dors as permitted in the exception to Section 911 (c). The handling or transporting
of hazardous production materials within service corridors shall comply with the
Fire Code.
5. Electrical. Electrical equipment and devices within the fabrication area shall
comply with the Electrical Code. The requirements for hazardous locations need
not be applied when the average air change is at least four times that set forth in
Section 911 (b) 3 and when the number of air changes at any location is not less than
three times that required by Section 911 (b) 3 and the Fire Code.
(c) Exit Corridors. Exit corridors shall comply with Section 3305 and shall be
separated from fabrication areas as specified in Section 911 (b) I. Exit corridors
shall not be used for transporting hazardous production materials except as pro-
vided in Section 911 (f) 2.
EXCEPTION: In existing Group H, Division 6 Occupancies when there areal-
terations or modifications to existing fabrication areas, the building official may per-
mit the transportation of hazardous production materials in exit corridors subject to
the requirements of the Fire Code and as follows:
A. Corridors adjacent to the fabrication area where the alteration work is to be
done shall comply with Section 3305 for a length determined as follows:
(i) The length of the common wall of the corridor and the fabrication area, and
(ii) For the distance along the exit corridor to the point of entry of HPM into the
exit corridor serving that fabrication area.
82
B. There shall be an emergency telephone system or a local alarm manual pull sta-
tion or approved signal device within exit corridors at not more than 150-foot inter-
vals or fraction thereof and at each exit stair doorway. The signal shall be relayed
to the emergency control station and a local signaling device shall be prov\ded.
C. Sprinkler protection shall be designed in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No.
38-1 for Ordinary Hazard Group 3, except that when one row of sprinklers is used
in the corridor protection, the maximum number of sprinklers that need be calculated
is 13. U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1 is a part of this code. (See Chapter 60, Part II.)
(d) Service Corridors. Service corridors shall be classified as Group H, Divi-
sion 6 Occupancies. Service corridors shall be separated from exit corridors as re-
quired by Section 911 (b) I.
Service corridors shall be mechanically ventilated as required by Section 911 (b)
3 or at not less than six air changes per hour, whichever is greater.
The maximum distance oftravel from any point in a service corridor to an exteri-
or exit door, horizontal exit, exit passageway, enclosed stairway or door into a fab-
rication area shall not exceed 75 feet. Dead ends shall not exceed 4 feet in length.
There shall be not less than two exits, and not more than one half of the required
exits shall be into the fabrication area. Doors from service corridors shall swing in
the direction of exit travel and shall be self-closing.
(e) Storage of Hazardous Production Material. I. Construction. The stor-
age of hazardous production materials in quantities greater than those listed in
Table No. 9-A or 9-B shall be in inside rooms complying with Section 901 (d) or
shall be in HPM storage rooms not exceeding 6,000 square feet in area. Such HPM
storage rooms shall be separated from all other areas by not less than a two-hour
fire-resistive occupancy separation when the area is 300 square feet or more and
not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction when the area is less than 300
square feet. The provisions of Section 503 (a) shall apply.
When an HPM storage room is also used for dispensing of Class I or II flam-
mable liquids or flammable gases, the area of the room shall not exceed I ,000
square feet. Except for surfacing, floors of storage rooms shall be of noncombus-
tible liquid-tight construction. Raised grating over floors shall be of noncombus-
tible materials. See Section 902 (c) for sill requirements for liquid storage rooms.
2. Location within building. When HPM storage rooms are provided, they
shall have at least one exterior wall and such wall shall be not less than 30 feet from
property lines, including property lines adjacent to public ways. Explosion control
shall be provided when required by Section 910.
3. Exits. When two exits are required from HPM storage rooms, one shall be di-
rectly to the outside of the building. See Section 911 (b) I, Exception I.
4. Ventilation. Mechanical exhaust ventilation shall be provided in storage
rooms at the rate of not less than I cubic foot per minute per square foot of floor area
or six air changes per hour, whichever is greater, for all categories of material.
5. Fire and emergency alarm. An approved manual fire alarm system shall be
provided for Group H, Division 6 Occupancies.
An approved initiating device connected to a local alarm system shall be pro-
vided outside of each interior exit door from HPM storage rooms. Operation of an
83
F
I alarm bar or an alarm-initiating device shall initiate a local alarm and initiate a sig-
F nal at the emergency control station.
I For installation requirements, see the Fire Code.
F
6. Electrical. Hazardous production materials storage rooms containing flam-
mable liquids or gases shall be classified as Class I, Division I hazardous locations.
Electrical wiring and equipment within such rooms shall comply with the Electri-
cal Code for such location.
(f) Piping and Tubing. I. General. Hazardous production materials piping and
tubing shall comply with this subsection and shall be installed in accordance with
nationally recognized standards. Piping and tubing systems shall be metallic un-
less the material being transported is incompatible with such system. Systems sup-
plying gaseous HPM having a health hazard ranking of 3 or 4 shall be welded
throughout, except for connections, valves and fittings, to the systems which are
within a ventilated enclosure. Hazardous production materials supply piping or
tubing in service corridors shall be exposed to view.
2. Installations in exit corridors and above other occupancies. Hazardous
production materials shall not be located within exit corridors or above areas not
classified as Group H, Division 6 Occupancies except as permitted by this subsec-
tion.
Hazardous production material piping and tubing may be installed within the
space defined by the walls of exit corridors and the floor or roof above or in con-
cealed spaces above other occupancies under the following conditions:
A. Automatic sprinklers shall be installed within the space unless the space is
less than 6 inches in least dimension.
B. Ventilation at not less than six air changes per hour shall be provided. The
space shall not be used to convey air from any other area.
C. When the piping or tubing is used to transport HPM liquids, a receptor shall
be installed below such piping or tubing. The receptor shall be designed to collect
any discharge or leakage and drain it to an approved location. The one-hour enclo-
sure shall not be used as part of the receptor.
D. All HPM supply piping and tubing and HPM nonmetallic waste lines shall
be separated from the exit corridor and from any occupancy other than Group H,
Division 6 by construction as required for walls or partitions that have a fire-pro-
tection rating of not less than one hour. When gypsum wallboard is used, joints on
the piping side of the enclosure need not be taped, provided the joints occur over
framing members. Access openings into the enclosure shall be protected by ap-
proved fire assemblies.
E. Readily accessible manual or automatic remotely activated fail-safe emer-
gency shutoff valves shall be installed on piping and tubing other than waste lines at
the following locations:
(i) At branch connections into the fabrication area.
(ii) At entries into exit corridors.
Excess flow valves shall be installed as required by the Fire Code.
84
F. Electrical wiring and equipment located in the piping space shall be approved
for Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations.
EXCEPTION: Occasional transverse crossings of the corridors by supply pip-
ing which is enclosed within a ferrous pipe or tube for the width of the corridor need
not comply with Items A through F.
3. Identification. Piping, tubing and HPM waste lines shall be identified in ac-
cordance with nationally recognized standards to indicate the material being trans-
ported.
Heliports
Sec. 912. Heliports may be erected on buildings or other locations if they are
constructed in accordance with this chapter and with Section 710.
85
TABLE NO. 9-A-EXEMPT AMOUNTS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS, LIQUIDS
AND CHEMICALS PRESENTING A PHYSICAL HAZARD
MAXIMUM QUANTITIES PER CONTROL AREA 1
When two units are given, values within parentheses are in cubic feet (Cu. Ft.) or pounds (Lbs.)
II
CONDITION STORAGE' USE 2-<:LOSED SYSTEMS USE2-0PEN SYSTEMS
Liquid Liquid Liquid
Solid Lbs. 3 Gallons' Gas Solid Lbs. Gallons Gas Solid Lbs. Gallons
MATERIAL CLASS (Cu. Ft.) (Lbs.) Cu. Ft. (Cu. Ft.) (Lbs.) Cu. Ft. (Cu. Ft.) (Lbs.)
1.1 Combustible liquid4·5·6·8 •9· 10 II N.A. 1207 N.A. N.A. 120 NA NA 30
III-A N.A. 3307 N.A. NA 330 NA NA 80 ;~
III-B NA 13,2007· 11 N.A. NA 13,200 11 NA N.A. 3,30011
1.2 Combustible dust lbs./1000
cu. ft. 12
1.3 Combustible fiber
I N.A. NA I N.A. N.A. I N.A.
I
(loose)
(baled)
(100)
(1,000)
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
(100)
(1,000)
NA
NA
N.A.
N.A.
(20)
(200)
NA
NA I
I .4 Cryogenic, flammable or 45 N.A. N.A. 45 N.A. N.A. 10
oxidizing ' ....
CD
2. I Explosives 13 ,7.14 (1)7.14 N.A. 1/4 (1/4) N.A. 1/4 e14) ....
CD
3.1 Flammable solid 125 6·7 NA NA 25 6 NA NA 25 6 NA c:

z
3.2 Flammable gas :;;
(gaseous) N.A. N.A. 7506.7 NA NA 7506·7 N.A. N.A. 0
15 6,7 156.7 :ll
(liquefied) N.A. N.A. NA NA N.A. N.A. 3:
3.3 Flammable liquid 4 ·5·6·8·9•10 1-A NA 307 NA N.A. 30 N.A. N.A. 10 aJ
c:
1-B N.A. 607 N.A. N.A. 60 N.A. N.A. 15 r=
c
1-C N.A. 907 NA N.A. 90 N.A. N.A. 20
..
zc;)
Combination 1-A, 1-B, l-C 15 N.A. 1207 NA N.A. 120 N.A. N.A. 30
S:: 0
0
c
m
...
...
CD
I
4.1 Organic peroxide, CD
unclassified detonatable J7.13 (1)7,13 N.A. 1;413 (1/4)13 N.A. lf413 (1/4)13 c:
4.2 Organic peroxide I 56,7 (5)6,7 N.A. J6 (1)6 N.A. J6 (1)6 z
:;;
II 506,7 (50)6,7 N.A. 50 6 (50) 6 N.A. J06 (10)6 0
::D
III 125 6.7 (125)6,7 N.A. 125 6 (125) 6 N.A. 25 6 (25) 6 1. 3:
ID
IV 500 (500) N.A. 500 6 (500) N.. A. 100 (100) c:
v N.L. N.L. N.A. N.L. N.L. N.A. N.L. N.L. ii r=
c
J7.13 (1)7,13 g z
4.3 Oxidizer 4 N.A. lf413 (lf4)13 N.A. lf413 (1/4)13 ;:·:·
C)
316 J06,7 (10)6.7 N.A. 26 (2)6 N.A. 26 (2)6 i~ij~ 0
2 250 6·7 (250) 6.7 N.A. 250 6 (250) 6 N.A. 506 (50) 6 1~ ~[ 0
c
m
I 4,0006· 7 (4,000) 6.7 N.A. 4,0006 (4,000) 6 N.A. 1,0006 (1,000)6 [1~ :
I
4.4 Oxidizer-Gas
(gaseous) 6·7 N.A. N.A. 1,500 N.A. N.A. 1,500 N.A. N.A.
(liquefied) 6·7 N.A. 15 N.A. N.A. 15 N.A. N.A. N.A.
5 .I Pyrophoric 47,13 (4)7,13 5o7J3 Jl3 (I )13 J07.13 0 0
6.1 Unstable (reactive) 4 J7.13 (1)7,13 J07.13 lf413 ci/4) 13 27,13 lf413 ci/4)13 ~I
3 56,7 (5)6,7 506,7 J6 (1)6 J06.7 J6 (1)6
2 506,7 (50)6,7 2506· 7 50 6 (50) 6 2506· 7 J06 (10)6
I N.L. N.L. 7506·7 N.L. N.L. N.L. N.L. N.L.
7 .I Water (reactive) 3 56,7 (5)6,7 N.A. 56 (5)6 N.A. j6 (1)6
2 506,7 (50)6.7 N.A. 50 6 (50) 6 N.A. J06 (10)6
I 1257,11 (125)7,11 N.A. 125 11 (125)7,11 N.A. 2511 (25)11
1Control area is a space bounded by not Jess than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation within which the exempted amounts of hazardous
materials may be stored. dispensed, handled or used. The number of control areas within a building used for retail and wholesale stores shall not
exceed two. The number of control areas in buildings with other uses shall not exceed four. ·
~ (Continued)
(Continued)
2The aggregate quantity in use and storage shall not exceed the quantity listed for storage.
3The aggregate quantity of nonflammable solid and nonflammable ornoncombustible liquid hazardous materials within a single control area of Group :::::
B, Division 2 Occupancies used for retail sales may exceed the exempt amounts when such areas are in compliance with the Fire Code.
4 The quantities of alcoholic beverages in retail sales uses are unlimited provided the liquids are packaged in individual containers not exceeding four
liters.
The quantities of medicines, foodstuffs and cosmetics containing not more than 50 percent of volume of water-miscible liquids and with the
remainder of the solutions not being flammable in retail sales or storage occupancies are unlimited when packaged in individual containers not
exceeding four liters.
5 For aerosols, see the Fire Code.
6Quantities may be increased I 00 percent in sprinklered buildings. When Footnote No. 7 also applies, the increase for both footnotes may be applied.
7Quantities may be increased 100 percent when stored in approved storage cabinets, gas cabinets, fume hoods, exhaust enclosures or safety cans as ;,:;:
specified in the Fire Code. When Footnote No. 6 also applies, the increase for both footnotes may be applied.
8For storage and use of flammable and combustible liquids in Groups A, B, E. I, M and R Occupancies, see Sections 608, 708, 808, 1008, ll04 and
l
1\l
1213. i~
9For wholesale and retail sales use, also see the Fire Code. {
10Spray application of any quantity of flammable or combustible liquids shall be conducted as set forth in the Fire Code. :~:~
11 The quantities permitted in a sprinklered building are not limited.
12A dust explosion potential is considered to exist if 1 pound or more of combustible dust per I ,000 cubic feet of volume is normally in suspension
or could be put into suspension in all or a portion of an enclosure or inside pieces of equipment. This also includes combustible dust which .....
accumulates on horizontal surfaces inside buildings or equipment and which could be put into suspension by an accident, sudden force or small U)
U)
explosion. .....
13Permitted in sprinklered buildings only. None is allowed in unsprinklered buildings.
c:
14
0ne pound of black sporting powder and 20 pounds of smokeless powder are permitted in sprinklered or unsprinklered buildings. z
15 Containing not more than the exempt amounts of Class I-A, Class I-B or ClassI-C flammable liquids. ::;;
16 A maximum quantity of 200 pounds of solid or 20 gallons of liquid Class 3 oxidizers may be permitted in Groups I, M and R Occupancies when :::: 0
JJ
such materials are necessary for maintenance purposes or operation of equipment as set forth in the Fire Code. s::
IJI
c:
r=c
z
C)
0
0
c
m
...
TABLE NO. 9-8-EXI:. ••iPT AMOUNTS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS, LIQUIDS
AND CHEMICALS PRESENTING A HEALTH HAZARD ...
(Q
(Q
MAXIMUM QUANTITIES PER CONTROL AREA 1•2 c

z
When two units are given, values within parentheses are in pounds (Lbs.)
STORAGE3 USE 3-CLOSED SYSTEMS USE3-0PEN SYSTEMS
~
:a
I Liquid Liquid Liquid
s::
Jallons4 ·5·6 Gas Solid Gallons4 •5 Gas Solid Gallons4 •5 Ill
MATERIAL Solid Lbs. 4 • (Lbs.) Cu.Ft. 5 Lbs. 4 •5 (Lbs.) Cu. Ft. Lbs. 4 •5 (Lbs.) 5
Il:::::l r
c
6506 6505 ·6
I. Corrosives 5,000 500 5,000 500 1,000 100
z
2. Highly Toxics 8
3. Irritants
4. Sensitizers
I
5,000
5,000
(I)
500
500
207
6506
6506
5,000
5,000
I (I)
500
500
20 7
650S· 6
650S·6
1
14
1,000
1,000
(
100
100
1
14)
I "
0
0
c
m
5. Other Health Hazards 5,000 500 6506 5,000 500 650S·6 1,000 100 It
6. Toxics 500 (500) 6506 500 (500) 20S·7 125 (125)
ill
1
Control area IS a space bounded by not less than one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation within which the exempted amounts of hazardous
materials may be stored, dispensed, handled or used. The number of control areas within retail and wholesale stores shall not exceed two and the
number of control areas in other uses shall not exceed four.
2The quantities of medicines, foodstuffs and cosmetics, containing not more than 50 percent by volume of water-miscible liquids and with the
remainder of the solutions not being flammable, in retail sales uses are unlimited when packaged in individual containers not exceeding 4 liters.
3
The aggregate quantity in use and storage shall not exceed the quantity listed for storage. ..
4The aggregate quantity of nonflammable solid and nonflammable or noncombustible liquid health hazard materials within a single control area of jf
Group B, Division 2 Occupancies used for retail sales may exceed the exempt amounts when such areas are in compliance with the Fire Code. }
5Quantities may be increased I 00 percent in sprinklered buildings. When Footnote No.6 also applies, the increase for both footnotes may be applied. ..
6Quantities may be increased I 00 percent when stored in approved storage cabinets, gas cabinets, fume hoods, exhausted enclosures or safety cans J
as specified in the Fin: Code. When Footnote No. 5 also applies, the increase for both footnotes may be applied. f
7Permitted only when st!Jred in approved exhausted gas cabinets, exhausted enclosures or fume hoods.
8 For special provisions, ~ee the Fire Code.
cp
Ill
tD TABLE NO. 9-C-EXTERIOR WALL1 AND OPENINGS PROTECTION FOR GROUP H OCCUPANCIES cp
0 0
TYPE OF TYPE I I TYPE II TYPE Ill' I TYPE IV' I TYPEV
CONSTRUCTION Noncombustible Combustible
SUBJECT F.R. I F.R. 1-HR. N 1-HR. J N I H.T. I 1-HR. I N
1.1 Bearing wall 4 hr. 1 hr. No rating
required
Group H 1.2 Nonbearing wall No rating required Not permitted
Division 1 1.3 Opening No protection required
Minimum distance Not less than 75 feet nor
1.4 from pro~erty less than required by Table No. 9-D
lines
4 hr. < 5 ft. 4 hr.< 5 ft. 4 hr.< 5 ft. 4 hr.< 5 ft.
2.1 Bearing wall 4 4 hr. 2 hr.< 10ft. 2 hr.< 10ft. 4 hr. 2 hr. <10ft. 2hr.<10ft.
1 hr. ;:>: 10ft. 1 hr.< 20ft. 1 hr. ;:.: 10ft. 1 hr. <20ft.
Group H 4 hr < 5 ft. 4 hr.< 5 ft. 4 hr.< 5 ft. 4 hr < 5 ft. 4 hr.< 5 ft. 4 hr. < 5 ft.
Divisions 2, 2.2 Nonbearing wall 4 2 hr.< 10ft. 2 hr.< 10ft. 2 hr.< 10ft. 2 hr.< 10ft. 2 hr.< 10ft. 2 hr.< 10ft.
3, 4, 6 and 7 1 hr.< 40ft. 1 hr.< 20ft. 1 hr.< 20ft. 1 hr. <40ft. 1 hr;:.: 10ft. 1 hr. <20ft.
.....
2.3 Opening 4 Not permitted less than 5 ft. Not permitted less than 5 ft. tD
tD
.....
%hr.< 20ft. j/4 hr.< 20ft.
c:
Minimum distance 30 feet for Group H, Division 2 or 3 Occupancies when area exceeds 1,000 sq. ft. and not in a z
:;;
2.4 from pro~erty detached building. Fifty feet for Group H, Division 2 or 3 Occupancies when a detached building is 0
lines required, and for explosive materials not less than required by Table No. 9-D. See Table No. 9-E. ::D
3:
3.1 Bearing wall 4 hr. 1 hr. 1 hr.< 60ft. 4 hr. 1 hr. 1 hr. <60ft. m
4 hr.< 40ft. 4 hr.< 40ft. c:
3.2 Nonbearing wall 1 hr. <60ft. 1 hr. <60ft. 1 hr. <60ft. 1 hr.< 60ft. 1 hr. 1 hr. <60ft. ;:::
c
Group H 3.3 Opening" 14 hr.< 60ft. j/4 hr. <60ft. zC>
Division 5 Minimum distance 0
3.4 from property No requirement No requirement 0
lines c
m
.....
co
~ : ~~~sa:~~n~r greater than.
co
.....
II
c::
1Regardless of type of construction or fire-resistive requirements for exterior walls, certain elements of walls fronting on public ways or yards having ... z
a width of at least 40 feet may be constructed of combustible materials. See Section 170S (d). :I =n
·'~
0
2Exterior bearing and nonbearing walls of Type III and Type IV construction shall be constructed of noncombustible materials. When nonbearing . :IJ
walls front on public ways or yards having a width of at least 40 feet, approved fire-retardant-treated wood framing may be used within the assembly.
····'1:·
:•
........
····':_
.......
·':,
s::
Where fire-retardant-treated wood is used, the required fire resistance for the exterior walls shall be maintained and the exposed outer and inner m
c::
faces of such walls shall be noncombustible. ''' r=c
Wood columns and arches conforming to heavy-timber sizes may be used externally for walls located 40 feet or more from the property line. See
Sections 2003 (a) and 2103 (a), exceptions.
.:'_.·'1.:··__ ...·'1.
z
C)
3Distances are measured from the walls enclosing the occupancy to all property lines, including those on a public way.
0
4 In Group H, Divisions 2 and 3 Occupancies, not less than 2S percent of the perimeter wall of the occupancy shall be an exterior wall. See Section :I 0
903 for exceptions. t c
m
Walls or portions of walls used for explosion venting shall be located not less than SO feet from any property line, including those on a public way. t
A Group H, Division 4 Occupancy having a floor area not exceeding 2,SOO square feet may have exterior walls of not less than two-hour f
fire-resistive construction when less than S feet from the property line and not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction when S feet or more H
but less than 20 feet from the property line. r
swhen openings in exterior walls are required to be protected due to distance to property line, the sum of the area of such openings shall not exceed f
SO percent of the total area of the wall in each story. See Section S04 (b). .··
co
co
..... 0
9-D 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
J TABLE NO. 9-D-MINIMUM DISTANCES FOR BUILDINGS CONTAINING

li EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS
QUANTITY OF EXPLOSIVE
MATERIAL' MINIMUM DISTANCE (Feet)
\1
fj Pounds Not Property Llnes2 and Inhabited Separation of
Pounds Over Over Buildings' Magazines'·5 •6
Barricaded' Unbarrlcaded
2 5 70 140 12
5 10 90 180 16
10 20 110 220 20
20 30 125 250 22
30 40 140 280 24
40 50 150 300 28
50 75 170 340 30
75 100 190 380 32
100 125 200 400 36
125 150 215 430 38
150 200 235 470 42
200 250 255 510 46
250 300 270 540 48
300 400 295 590 54
400 500 320 640 58
500 600 340 680 62
600 700 355 710 64
700 800 375 750 66
800 900 390 780 70
900 1,000 400 800 72
1,000 1,200 425 850 78
1,200 1,400 450 900 82
1,400 1,600 470 940 86
1,600 1,800 490 980 88
1,800 2,000 505 1,010 90
2,000 2,500 545 1,090 98
2,500 3,000 580 1,160 104
3,000 4,000 635 1,270 116
4,000 5,000 685 1,370 122
5,000 6,000 730 1,460 130
6,000 7,000 770 1,540 136
7,000 8,000 800 1,600 144
8,000 9,000 835 1,670 150
9,000 10,000 865 1,730 156
10,000 12,000 875 1,750 164
92
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 9-D
TABLE NO. 9-D-MINIMUM DISTANCES FOR BUILDINGS CONTAINING

EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS-(Continued)
12,000 14,000 885 1,770 174
14,000 16,000 900 1,800 180
16,000 18,000 940 1,880 188
18,000 20,000 975 1,950 196
20,()()0 25,000 1,055 2,000 210
25,000 30,000 1,130 2,000 224
30,000 35,000 1,205 2,000 238
35,000 40,000 1,275 2,000 248
40,000 45,000 1,340 2,000 258
45,000 50,000 1,400 2,000 270
50,000 55,000 1,460 2,000 280
55,000 60,000 1,515 2,000 290
60,000 65,000 1,565 2,000 300
65,000 70,000 1,610 2,000 310
70,000 75,000 1,655 2,000 320
75,000 80,000 1,695 2,000 330
80,000 85,000 1,730 2,000 340
85,000 90,000 1,760 2,000 350
90,000 95,000 1,790 2,000 360
95,000 100,000 1,815 2,000 370
100,000 110,000 1,835 2,000 390
110,000 120,000 1,855 2,000 410
120,000 130,000 1,875 2,000 430
130,000 140,000 1,890 2,000 450
140,000 150,000 1,900 2,000 470
150,000 160,000 1,935 2,000 490
160,000 170,000 1,965 2,000 510
170,000 180,000 1,990 2,000 530
180,000 190,000 2,010 2,010 550
190,000 200,000 2,030 2,030 570
200,000 210,000 2,055 2,055 590
210,000 230,000 2,100 2,100 630
230,000 250,000 2,155 2,155 670
250,000 275,000 2,215 2,215 720
275,000 300,000 2,275 2,275 770
1The number of pounds of explosives listed is the number of pounds oftrinitrotoluene (TNT)
or the equivalent pounds of other explosive.
2The distance listed is the distance to property line, including property lines at public ways.
·1 lnhabited building is any building on the same property which is regularly occupied by hu-
man beings. When two or more buildings containing explosives or magazines are located
on the same property, each building or magazine shall comply with the minimum dis-
tances specified from inhabited buildings, and, in addition, they should be separated from
each other by not less than the distances shown for "Separation of Magazines," except
that the quantity of explosive materials contained in detonator buildings or magazines
93
9-D, 9-E 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
shall govern in regard to the spacing of said detonator buildings or magazines from build-
ings or magazines containing other explosive materials. If any two or more buildings or
magazines are separated from each other by less than the specified "Separation of Maga-
zines" distances, then such two or more buildings or magazines, as a group, shall be con-
sidered as one building or magazine, and the total quantity of explosive materials stored
in such group shall be treated as if the explosive were in a single building or magazine
located on the site of any building or magazine of the group, and shall comply with the
minimum distance specified from other magazines or inhibited buildings.
'
~_,·.'._.'~·_,. 4Barrbicades shall effectively scwreehn the buildding contatt.nt idng ex p losfivesrtfhrom otherdbfuildbing~,
. pu 1tc ways or magazmes. en moun s or reve e wa11s o ea are use or arrt-
cades, they shall not be less than 3 feet in thickness. A straight line from the top of any
side wall of the building containing explosive materials to the eave line of any other build-
ing, magazine or a point 12 feet above the center line of a public way shall pass through
the barricades.
5Magazine is a building or structure approved for storage of explosive materials. In addition
to the requirements of this code, magazines shall comply with the Fire Code.
6 The distance listed may be reduced by 50 percent when approved natural or artificial barri-
ers are provided in accordance with the requirements in Footnote No. 4.
TABLE NO. 9-E-REQUIRED DETACHED STORAGE
DETACHED STORAGE IS REQUIRED WHEN THE QUANTITY OF

MATERIAL EXCEEDS THAT LISTED
Solids and Gases
Material Liquids (Tons)1,2 (Cubic Feet)1,2
I. Explosives, blasting agents, black Over exempt Over exempt

powder, fireworks, detonatable amounts amounts
organic peroxides,
2. Class 4 oxidizers,
3. Class 4 or Class 3 detonatable
unstable (reactives)
4. Oxidizers, liquids and solids Class 3 1,200 -
Class 2 2,000 -
5. Organic peroxides Class I Over exempt -
amounts
Class II 25 -
Class III so -
6. Unstable (reactives) Class 4 1/1,000 20
Class 3 I 2,000
Class 2 25 10,000
7. Water reacti ves Class 3 I 2,000

Class 2 25 10,000
8. Pyrophoric gases - 2,000
IDistance to other buildings or property lines shall be as specified in Table No. 9-D based
on TNT equivalence of the material.
20ver exempt amounts mean over the quantities listed in Table No. 9-A.
94
Chapter 10
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP I OCCUPANCIES
Group I Occupancies Defined
Sec. 1001. Group I Occupancies shall be:
Dif·ision 1.1. Nurseries for the full-time care of children under the age of six
(each accommodating more than five persons).
Hospitals, sanitariums, nursing homes with nonambulatory patients and similar
buildings (each accommodating more than five persons).
Division 1.2. Health-care centers for ambulatory patients receiving outpatient 1~: ~
medical care which may render the patient incapable of unassisted self-preserva- t~
tion. (Each tenant space accommodating more than five such patients.) ~t
Division 2. Nursing homes for ambulatory patients, homes for children six years
of age or over (each accommodating more than five persons).
Division 3. Mental hospitals, mental sanitariums, jails, prisons, reformatories
and buildings where personal liberties of inmates are similarly restrained.
EXCEPTION: Group I Occupancies shall not include buildings used only for
private residential purposes for a family group.

Sec. 1002. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group I be-
struction set forth in Tables Nos. 5-C and No. 5-D and shall not exceed, in area or
height, the limits specified in Sections 505,506 and 507.
EXCEPTIONS: l. Hospitals and nursing homes classified as Group I, Division
1.1 Occupancies that are equipped with an automatic sprinkler system throughout
shall not exceed one story in height when in Type III One-hour, Type IV or Type V
One-hour construction.
2. Hospitals and nursing homes classified as Group I, Division 1.1 Occupancies
that are equipped with automatic sprinkler systems throughout may be five stories
when of Type II-F.R. construction and three stories when of Type II One-hour con-
struction. The allowable area increase specified in Section 506 (c) applies only when
the number of stories in the building is one less than set forth above.
3. Hospitals and nursing homes classified as Group I, Division 1.1 Occupancies
that are equipped with automatic sprinkler systems throughout may be housed within
one-story buildings of Type II-N construction. The area of such building shall not
exceed 13,500 square feet plus the allowable area increase for separation by public
space or yards as set forth in Section 506 (a).
(b) Special Provisions. Division 3 Occupancies shall be housed in buildings of
Type I or Type 11-F.R. construction.
EXCEPTION: One-story buildings of Type II One-hour, Type III One-hour, or
Type V One-hour construction may be permitted, provided the floor area does not ex-
ceed 3,900 square feet between separation walls of two-hour fire-resistive construc-
tion with openings protected by fire assemblies having one- and one-half-hour
fire-protection rating.
95
Floor levels of Group I, Division 1.1 Occupancies used by inpatients for sleep-
ing or treatment, or having an occupant load of 50 or more, shall be divided into at
least two compartments by smoke barriers. The area within a smoke compartment
shall not exceed 22,500 square feet nor shall its width or length exceed !50 feet.
The area of a smoke compartment shall not be less than that required to accommo-
date the occupants of the compartment plus the occupants from the adjoining com-
partments, assuming not less than 30 square feet net clear floor area for bed and
litter patients and 6 square feet for other occupants.
Smoke barriers shall have a fire-resistance rating of not less than one hour. Such
barriers shall form an effective membrane continuous from outside wall to outside
wall, from a smoke barrier to a smoke barrier, from floor to floor or roof above, or a
combination thereof, including continuity through all concealed spaces, such as
above suspended ceilings, interstitial structural and mechanical spaces. Transfer
grilles, louvers and similar openings shall not be used in these partitions.
Doors in smoke barriers shall be tight-fitting smoke- and draft-control assem-
blies having a fire-protection rating of not less than 20 minutes and shall comply
with Section 3320 (b). When doors are installed across corridors, a pair of oppo-
,\); site-swinging doors without a center mullion or horizontal sliding doors that com-
ply with U.B.C. Standard No. 43-13, which is a part of this code (see Chapter 60,
Part ll), shall be installed. Smoke barrier doors shall:
I. When installed across corridors, have vision panels of not less than
1
I4-inch-thick approved wired glass in steel frames. The area of the vision panels
shall not exceed that tested.
2. Be close fitting with only the clearance necessary for proper operation and
shall be without undercuts, louvers or grilles.
3. Have stops atthe head and jambs. Opposite swinging corridor doors shall have
rabbets or astragals at the meeting edges.
4. Have positive latching devices except on doors installed across corridors.
5. Be self-closing or automatic closing. An approved sign shall be on or adjacent
to self-closing doors specifying that they are to be maintained in a closed position.
Doors installed across corridors shall comply with Section 4306 (f) 1, Item C, and
doors on the floor or in the affected zone shall automatically close if the fire alarm
or sprinkler system is activated.
An approved damper designed to resist the passage of smoke shall be provided at
each point a duct penetrates a smoke barrier. The damper shall close upon detection
of smoke by an approved smoke detector located within the duct.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In lieu of an approved smoke detector located within the
duct, ducts which penetrate smoke barriers above required smoke-barrier doors are
permitted to have the approved damper arranged to close upon detection of smoke by
the local device designed to detect smoke on either side of the smoke-barrier door
opening.
2. Dampers are not required where the openings in ducts are limited to a single
smoke compartment and the ducts are of steel construction.
96
At least two exits shall be provided from each smoke compartment. Exits may be
through adjacent compartments, provided at least one exit does not return through
the compartment from which exiting originated.
Roams occupied by inmates or patients whose personal liberties are restrained
shall have noncombustible floor surfaces.
Medical gas systems shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the
F.ire Code. When nonflammable supply cylinders for such systems are located in-
side buildings they shall be in a separate room or enclosure separated from the rest
of the building by not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction. Doors to the
room or enclosure shall be self-closing smoke- and draft-control assemblies hav-
ing a fire-protection rating of not less than one hour. Rooms shall have at least one
exterior wall in which there are not less than two vents of not less than 36 square
inches in area. One vent shall be within 6 inches of the floor and one shall be within
6 inches of the ceiling.
EXCEPTION: When an exterior wall cannot be provided, the room shall be
vented to the exterior through dueling contained within a one-hour-rated shaft enclo-
sure. Approved mechanical ventilation shall provide six air changes per hour for the
room.

Sec. 1004. Exits shall be provided as specified in Chapter 33. (For special provi- .·.':.·'.'
sions see Section 3320.) .
Access to, and egress from, buildings required to be accessible shall be provided f.,l.;,:..\.'
as specified in Chapter 31.

~~
Sec. 1005. All portions of Group I Occupancies customarily used by human be-
ings shall be provided with natural light by means of exterior glazed openings with
an area equal to one tenth of the total floor area, and natural ventilation by means
of exterior openings with an area not less than one twentieth of the total floor area,
or shall be provided with artificial light and a mechanically operated ventilating
system as specified in Section 605.

Elevator shafts, vent shafts and other vertical openings shall be enclosed, and the
enclosure shall be as specified in Section 1706.

97
1008-1010 1991 UNIFORM BUilDING CODE
Special Hazards
Sec. 1008. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform to the requirements
of Chapter 37 of this code and the Mechanical Code.
Motion picture projection rooms shall conform to the requirements of Chapter
40.
Srrecific use areas shall be separated from Group I, Division 1.1 Occnp<tiiC.'.'t'b
used for hospitals or nursing homes in accordance with Table No. 10-A. Doors
shall be maintained self-closing or shall be automatic closing by actuation of a
smoke detector.
Storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids shall be in accor-
dance with the Fire Code.
All exterior openings in a boiler room or room containing central heating equip-
ment iflocated below openings in another story, or ifless than 10 feet from the other
doors or windows of the same building, shall be protected by a fire assembly hav-
ing a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating. Such fire assemblies shall be fixed,
automatic closing or self-closing. Every room containing a boiler, central heating
plant or hot-water supply boiler shall be separated from the rest of the building by
not less than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
F Fire Alarms
I Sec. 1009. An approved manual and automatic fire alarm system shall be pro-
F
I vided for Group I Occupancies. Audible alarm devices shall be used in nonpatient
F areas. Visible alarm devices may be used in lieu of audible devices in patient -occu-
I pied areas. For installation requirements, see the Fire Code.
Smoke Detectors
Sec. 1010. Smoke detectors which receive their primary power from the build-
ing wiring shall be installed in patient sleeping rooms of hospital and nursing
homes. Actuation of such detectors shall cause a visual display on the corridor side
of the room in which the detector is located and shall cause an audible and visual
alarm at the respective nurses' station. If such detectors and related devices are
0::: combined with the nursing call system, the system need not be electrically super-
vised.
EXCEPTION: In rooms equipped with automatic door closers having integral
smoke detectors on the room side, the integral detector may substitute for the room
smoke detector, provided it performs the required alerting functions.
98
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 10-A
TABLE NO. 10-A-REQUIRED SEPARATION OF SPECIFIC USE AREAS
DESCRIPTION OCCUPANCY SEPARATION
I. Employee locker rooms none
2. Gift/retail shops none
3. Handicraft shops none

4. Kitchens none
5. Laboratories which employ
hazardous materials in quantities
less than that which would cause
classification as a Group H
Occupancy One hour
6. Laundries greater than 100 sq. ft. One hour
7. Paint shops employing hazardous
substances and materials in
quantities less than that which
would cause classification as a
Group H Occupancy One hour
8. Physical plant maintenance shop One hour
9. Soiled linen room One hour
10. Storage rooms I 00 sq. ft. or less in
area storing combustible material none
11. Storage rooms more than 100 sq. ft.
storing combustible material One hour
12. Trash-collection rooms One hour
99
NOTES
100
Chapter 11
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP M OCCUPANCIES
Group M Occupancies Defined
Sec. 1101. Group M Occupancies shall be:
Division 1. Private garages, carports, sheds and agricultural buildings.
EXCEPTION: Where applicable (see Section 103) for agricultural buildings,
see Appendix Chapter II.
Division 2. Fences over 6 feet high, tanks and towers.
Sec. 1102. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed as Group M, Di-
vision I Occupancies because of the use or character of the occupancy shall not ex-
ceed I ,000 square feet in area or one story in height except as provided in
Subsection (b). Any building or portion thereofthat exceeds the limitations speci-
fied in this chapter shall be classed in the occupancy group otherthan Group M, Di-
vision I that it most nearly resembles.
(b) Special Area Provisions. The total area of a private garage used only as a
parking garage for private or pleasure-type motor vehicles where no repair work is
done nor fuel dispensed may be 3,000 square feet, provided the provisions set forth
in Item I or 2 below are satisfied. More than one 3,000-square-foot Group M,
Division I Occupancy may be within the same building, provided each
3,000-square-foot area is separated by area separation walls complying with Sec-
tion 505 (f).
I. For a mixed-occupancy building, the exterior wall and opening protection for
the Group M, Division I portion of the building shall be as required for the major
occupancy of the building. For such mixed-occupancy building, the allowable
floor area of the building shall be as permitted for the major occupancy contained
therein.
2. For a building containing only a Group M, Division I Occupancy, the exteri-
or wall and opening protection shall be as required for a building classified as a
Group R, Division I Occupancy.
(c) Headroom Clearance. Garages in connection with Group R, Division I
Occupancies shall have an unobstructed headroom clearance of not less than 7 feet
above the finish floor to any ceiling, beam, pipe or similar construction except for
wall-mounted shelves, storage surfaces, racks or cabinets.
Special Hazards
of Chapter 37 and the Mechanical Code.
101
Under no circumstances shall a private garage have any opening into a room
used for sleeping purposes.
Class I, II or Ill-A liquids shall not be stored, handled or used in Group M Occu-
pancies unless such storage or handling shall comply with the Fire Code.
Garage Floor Surfaces

Sec. 1105. In areas where motor vehicles are stored or operated, floor surfaces
shall be of noncombustible materials or asphaltic paving materials.
Agricultural Buildings
Sec. 1106. Where applicable (see Section 103) for agricultural buildings, see
Appendix Chapter II.
102
Chapter 12
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP R OCCUPANCIES
Group R Occupancies Defined
Sec. 1201. Group R Occupancies shall be:
Division 1. Hotels and apartment houses.
Congregate residences (each accommodating more than 10 persons). l
Division 2. Not used.
Division 3. Dwellings and lodging houses.
Congregate residences (each accommodating 10 persons or Jess). ~
A complete code for construction of detached one- and two-family dwellings is
in Appendix Chapter 12 of this code. When adopted, as set forth in Section I 03, it
will take precedence over the requirements set forth in Parts I through X and Chap-
ter 60 of this code.

Sec. 1202. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group R be-
struction set forth in Tables Nos. 5-C and 5-D and shall not exceed, in area or
height, the limits specified in Sections 505, 506 and 507.
(b) Special Provisions. Walls and floors separating dwelling units in the same
building shall not be of Jess than one-hour fire-resistive construction.
Group R, Division I Occupancies more than two stories in height or having more
than 3,000 square feet of floor area above the first story shall not be of less than
one-hour fire-resistive construction throughout except as provided in Section 1705
(b) 2.
Storage or laundry rooms that are within Group R, Division I Occupancies that
are used in common by tenants shall be separated from the rest of the building by
not Jess than one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
ForGroupR,Division I OccupancieswithaGroupB,Division I parking garage
in the basement or first floor, see Section 702 (b) I.
For attic space partitions and draft stops, see Section 2516 (f).
Access and Exit Facilities and Emergency Escapes I

Sec. 1204. Exits shall be provided as specified in Chapter 33. (See also Section ~
3314 for exit markings.) i
Access to, and egress from, buildings required to be accessible shall be provided -~
as specified in Chapter 31. ~,.;
103
Basements in dwelling units and every sleeping room below the fourth story
shall have at least one operable window or door approved for emergency escape or
rescue which shall open directly into a public street, public alley, yard or exit court.
The units shall be operable from the inside to provide a full clear opening without
the use of separate tools.
All escape or rescue windows shall have a minimum net clear openable area of
5.7 square feet. The minimum net clear openable height dimension shall be 24 in-
ches. The minimum net clear openable width dimension shall be 20 inches. When
windows are provided as a means of escape or rescue they shall have a finished sill
height not more than 44 inches above the floor.
Bars, grilles, grates or similar devices may be installed on emergency escape or
rescue windows or doors, provided:
I. The devices are equipped with approved release mechanisms which are open-
able from the inside without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort; and
2. The building is equipped with smoke detectors installed in accordance with
Section 1210.

Sec. 1205. (a) General. For the purpose of determining the light or ventilation
required by this section, any room may be considered as a portion of an adjoining
room when one half of the area of the common wall is open and unobstructed and
provides an opening of not less than one tenth of the floor area of the interior room
or 25 square feet, whichever is greater.
Exterior openings for natural light or ventilation required by this section shall
open directly onto a public way or a yard or court located on the same lot as the
building.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Required windows may open into a roofed porch where the
porch:
A. Abuts a public way, yard or court; and
B. Has a ceiling height of not less than 7 feet; and
C. Has a longer side at least 65 percent open and unobstructed.
2. Skylights.
!ii:i (b) Light. Guest rooms and habitable rooms within a dwelling unit or congre-
{: gate residence shall be provided with natural light by means of exterior glazed
··· openings with an area not less than one tenth of the floor area of such rooms with a
minimum of 10 square feet.
·:;: (c) Ventilation. Guest rooms and habitable rooms within a dwelling unit or con-
t gregate residence shall be provided with natural ventilation by means of openable
,.,. exterior openings with an area of not less than one twentieth of the floor area of
such rooms with a minimum of 5 square feet.
In lieu of required exterior openings for natural ventilation, a mechanical venti-
lating system may be provided. Such system shall be capable of providing two air
changes per hour in all guest rooms, dormitories, habitable rooms and in public
corridors. One fifth of the air supply shall be taken from the outside.
104
Bathrooms, water closet compartments, laundry rooms and similar rooms shall
be provided with natural ventilation by means of openable exterior openings with
an area not less than one twentieth of the floor area of such rooms with a minimum
of 11/z square feet.
In lieu of required exterior openings for natural ventilation in bathrooms con-
taining a bathtub or shower or combination thereof, laundry rooms, and similar
rooms, a mechanical ventilation system connected directly to the outsideca;pable ,
of providing five air changes per hour shall be provided. The point of discharge of I:
exhaust air shall be at least 3 feet from any opening into the building. Bathrooms ' '
which contain only a water closet or lavatory or combination thereof, and similar
rooms may be ventilated with an approved mechanical recirculating fan or similar
device designed to remove odors from the air.
(d) Sanitation. Every building shall be provided with at least one water closet.
Hotels or subdivisions thereof where both sexes are accommodated shall contain at
least two separate toilet facilities which are conspicuously identified for male or
female use, each of which contains at least one water closet.
EXCEPTION: Hotel guest rooms may have one unidentified toilet facility.
Additional water closets shall be provided on each floor for each sex at the rate of
one for every additional I 0 guests, or fractional part thereof, in excess of I 0.
Dwelling units shall be provided with a kitchen equipped with a kitchen sink. .,_
Dwelling units, congregate residences and lodging houses shall be provided with a t
·=:~
bathroom equipped with facilities consisting of a water closet, lavatory and either a
bathtub or shower. Each sink, lavatory and either a bathtub or shower shall be
equipped with hot and cold running water necessary for its normal operation.
Yards and Courts

Sec. 1206. (a) Scope. This section shall apply to yards and courts having re-
quired windows opening therein.
(b) Yards. Yards shall not be less than 3 feet in width for one-story and two-story
buildings. For buildings more than two stories in height, the minimum width of the
yard shall be increased at the rate of I foot for each additional story. For buildings
exceeding 14 stories in height, the required width of the yard shall be computed on
the basis of 14 stories.
(c) Courts. Courts shall not be less than 3 feet in width. Courts having windows
opening on opposite sides shall not be less than 6 feet in width. Courts bounded on
three or more sides by the walls of the building shall not be less than 10 feet in
length unless bounded on one end by a public way or yard. For buildings more than
two stories in height, the court shall be increased I foot in width and 2 feet in length
for each additional story. For buildings exceeding 14 stories in height, the required
dimensions shall be computed on the basis of 14 stories.
Adequate access shall be provided to the bottom of all courts for cleaning pur-
poses. Every court more than two stories in height shall be provided with a horizon-
tal air intake at the bottom not less than I 0 square feet in area and leading to the
exterior of the building unless abutting a yard or public way. The construction of
105
the air intake shall be as required for the court walls of the building, but in no case
shall be less than one-hour fire resistive.
Room Dimensions
Sec. 1207. (a) Ceiling Heights. Habitable space shall have a ceiling height of not
less than 7 feet 6 inches except as otherwise permitted in this section. Kitchens,
halls, bathrooms and toilet compartments may have a ceiling height of not less than
7 feet measured to the lowest projection from the ceiling. Where exposed beam
ceiling members are spaced at less than 48 inches on center, ceiling height shall be
measured to the bottom of these members. Where exposed beam ceiling members
are spaced at 48 inches or more on center, ceiling height shall be measured to the
bottom of the deck supported by these members, provided that the bottom of the
members is not less than 7 feet above the floor.
If any room in a building has a sloping ceiling, the prescribed ceiling height for
the room is required in only one half the area thereof. No portion of the room mea-
suring less than 5 feet from the finished floor to the finished ceiling shall be in-
cluded in any computation of the minimum area thereof.
If any room has a furred ceiling, the prescribed ceiling height is required in two
thirds the area thereof, but in no case shall the height of the furred ceiling be less
than 7 feet.
[j\\
:l;: (b) Floor Area. Dwelling units and congregate residences shall have at least one
room which shall have not less than 120 square feet of floor area. Other habitable
rooms except kitchens shall have an area of not less than 70 square feet. Efficiency
dwelling units shall comply with the requirements of Section 1208.
(c) Width. Habitable rooms other than a kitchen shall not be less than 7 feet in
any dimension.
Efficiency Dwelling Units

Sec. 1208. An efficiency dwelling unit shall conform to the requirements of the
code except as herein provided:
I. The unit shall have a living room of not less than 220 square feet of superficial
floor area. An additional! 00 square feet of superficial floor area shall be provided
for each occupant of such unit in excess of two.
2. The unit shall be provided with a separate closet.
3. The unit shall be provided with a kitchen sink, cooking appliance and refrig-
eration facilities, each having a clear working space of not less than 30 inches in
front. Light and ventilation conforming to this code shall be provided.
4. The unit shall be provided with a separate bathroom containing a water closet,
lavatory and bathtub or shower.

Elevator shafts, vent shafts, dumbwaiter shafts, clothes chutes and other vertical
openings shall be enclosed and the enclosure shall be as specified in Section 1706.
106
In nonsprinklered Group R, Division I Occupancies, corridors serving an occu-

pant load of 10 or more shall be separated from corridors and other areas on adja-
cent floors by not Jess than approved fixed wired glass set in steel frames or by
20-minute smoke- and draft-control assemblies which are automatic closing by
smoke detection.
Smoke Detectors and Sprinkler Systems

Sec. 1210. (a) Smoke Detectors. I. General. Dwelling units, congregate resi- ~\
dences and hotel or lodging house guest rooms that are used for sleeping purposes H
shall be provided with smoke detectors. Detectors shall be installed in accordance
with the approved manufacturer's instructions.
2. Additions, alterations or repairs to Group R Occupancies. When the valu-
ation of an addition, alteration or repair to a Group R Occupancy exceeds $1 ,000
and a permit is required, or when one or more sleeping rooms are added or created
in existing Group R Occupancies, smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance
with Subsections 3, 4 and 5 of this section.
3. Power source. In new construction, required smoke detectors shall receive L. ~
their primary power from the building wiring when such wiring is served from a -~
commercial source and shall be equipped with a battery backup. The detector shall ft
emit a signal when the batteries are low. Wiring shall be permanent and without a !~
disconnecting switch other than those required for overcurrent protection. Smoke '=',,"',N:··:,,,
detectors may be solely battery operated when installed in existing buildings; or in )

buildings without commercial power; or in buildings which undergo alterations,
repairs or additions regulated by Subsection 2 of this section. I
4. Location within dwelling units. In dwelling units, a detector shall be in- i,
...;· .
stalled in each sleeping room and at a point centrally located in the corridor or area ~
giving access to each separate sleeping area. When the dwelling unit has more than
one story and in dwellings with basements, a detector shall be installed on each
story and in the basement. In dwelling units where a story or basement is split into
two or more levels, the smoke detector shall be installed on the upper level, except
that when the lower level contains a sleeping area, a detector shall be installed on
each level. When sleeping rooms are on an upper level, the detector shall be placed
at the ceiling of the upper level in close proximity to the stairway. In dwelling units
where the ceiling height of a room open to the hallway serving the bedrooms ex-
ceeds that of the hallway by 24 inches or more, smoke detectors shall be installed in
the hallway and in the adjacent room. Detectors shall sound an alarm audible in all
sleeping areas of the dwelling unit in which they are located.
5. Location in efficiency dwelling units, congregate residences and hotels. In I
efficiency dwelling units, hotel suites and in hotel and congregate residence sleep- I
ing rooms, detectors shall be located on the ceiling or wall of the main room or each
sleeping room. When sleeping rooms within an efficiency dwelling unit or hotel
suite are on an upper level, the detector shall be placed at the ceiling of the upper
level in close proximity to the stairway. When actuated, the detector shall sound an
alarm audible within the sleeping area of the dwelling unit, hotel suite or sleeping
room in which it is located.
107
(b) Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems. When required by other provisions of

this code, automatic sprinkler systems and standpipes shall be installed as speci-
fied in Chapter 38.
F Fire Alarm Systems
:j::,
I Sec. 1211. Group R, Division I Occupancies shall be provided with an approved
F :~:~:
I :r manual and automatic fire alarm system in apartment houses three or more stories
F ·~=~=
::::: in height or containing 16 or more dwelling units, in hotels three or more stories in
I ·r height or containing 20 or more guest rooms and in congregate residences three or
F
I
more stories in height or having an occupant load of 20 or more. A fire alarm and
I communication system shall be provided in Group R, Division I Occupancies lo-
F
cated in a high-rise building.
I
F EXCEPTIONS: I. A manual fire alarm system need not be provided in build-
I 1:::
ings not over two stories in height when all individual dwelling units and contiguous
F attic and crawl spaces are separated from each other and public or common areas by
I w~ at least one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separations and each individual dwelling
I
F unit or guest room has an exit directly to a public way, exit court or yard.
I 2. A separate fire alarm system need not be provided in buildings which are pro-
F tected throughout by an approved supervised fire sprinkler system having a local
I alarm to notify all occupants.
F ·::::
For the purposes of this section, area separation walls shall not define separate
I buildings.
F :1·1
Heating
1 ~[ Sec. 1212. Dwelling units, guest rooms and congregate residences shall be pro-
vided with heating facilities capable of maintaining a room temperature of 70°F.
at a point 3 feet above the floor in all habitable rooms.
Special Hazards
of Chapter 37 and the Mechanical Code.
The storage, use and handling of flammable and combustible liquids in Division
I!, I Occupancies shall be in accordance with the Fire Code.
In Division I Occupancies, doors leading into rooms in which Class I flammable
liquids are stored or used shall be protected by a fire assembly having a one-hour
fire-protection rating. Such fire assembly shall be self-closing and shall be posted
with a sign on each side of the door in l-inch block letters stating: FIRE DOOR-
KEEP CLOSED.
Every room containing a boiler, central heating plant or hot-water supply boiler
in Division I Occupancies shall be separated from the rest of the building by not
less than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
EXCEPTION: A separation shall not be required for such rooms with equip-
.. ment serving only one dwelling unit.
Chapters 13-16
NO REQUIREMENTS
108
Part IV
REQUIREMENTS BASED ON TYPES OF
CONSTRUCTION
Chapter 17
CLASSIFICATION OF ALL BUILDINGS BY TYPES
OF CONSTRUCTION AND GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
General
Sec. 1701. (a) Classification of Buildings. The requirements of Part IV are for
the various types of construction and represent varying degrees of public safety
and resistance to fire. Every building shall be classified by the building official into
one ofthe types of construction set forth in Table No. 17-A. Any building which
does not entirely conform to a type of construction set forth in Table No. 17-A shall
be classified by the building official into a type having an equal or lesser degree of
fire resistance.
A building or portion thereof shall not be required to conform to the details of a
type of construction higher than that type which meets the minimum requirements
based on occupancy (Part III) even though certain features of such building actual-
ly conform to a higher type of construction.
Where specific materials, types of construction or fire-resistive protection are
required, such requirements shall be the minimum requirements, and any materi-
als, types of construction or fire-resistive protection which will afford equal or
greater public safety or resistance to fire, as specified in this code, may be used.
Portions of buildings separated as specified in Section 505 (f) may be considered
a separate building for classification of types of construction. When there is no
such separation, the area of the entire building shall not exceed the least area per-
mitted for the types of construction involved.
(b) Standards of Quality. The standards listed below labeled a "U.B.C. stan-
I
dards listed below are guideline standards and as such are not adopted as part of this
1. Building paper
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 17-1, Kraft Waterproof Building Paper
B. Asphalt-saturated Rag Felt, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Standard Speci-
fication 55 A, Materials for Construction of Built-up Roof Coverings
2. Potential heat of building materials
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 17-2, Test Method to Determine Potential Heat of
Building Materials
109
''' 3. Foam plastic tests

,.·•.'•: ·,:. A. U.B.C. Standard No. 17-3, TestMethodfortheEvaluationofThermal Barri-
ers, Standard of the International Conference of Building Officials
,,. B. Factory Mutual Standard Fire Test Standard for Insulated Roof Deck Con-
"tmction
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1256, Fire Test Standard for Insulated Roof
Deck Construction
D. U.B.C. Standard No. 17-5, RoomFireTest Standard for Interior Foam Plastic
Systems, Standard of the International Conference of Building Officials
E. U. B.C. Standard No. I 7-6, Method ofTest for the Evaluation of Flammability
Characteristics of Exterior, Nonload-bearing Wall Panel Assemblies Using Foam
Plastic Insulation, Test Standard of the International Conference of Building Offi-
cials
4. Roof coverings
A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Standard Specification 55A, Materials for
Use in Construction of Built-up Roof Coverings
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 32-7, Test Standard for Determining the Fire Retardan-
cy of Roof Covering Material
5. Surface-burning characteristics and fire resistance of building materi-
als and assemblies
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1, Test Method for Surface-burning Characteristics
B. U .B.C. Standard No. 43-1, Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials
6. Self-ignition properties of plastics
A. ASTM D 1929, Ignition Properties of Plastics
7. Fire dampers
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 43-7, Fire Dampers
Structural Frame
Sec. 1702. The structural frame shall be considered to be the columns and the
girders, beams, trusses and spandrels having direct connections to the columns and
all other members which are essential to the stability ofthe building as a whole. The
members of floor or roof panels which have no connection to the columns shall be
considered secondary members and not a part of the structural frame.
Usable Space under Floors

, ., Sec. 1703. Usable space under the first story shall be enclosed and such enclo-
::::
sure when constructed of metal or wood shall be protected on the side of the usable
space as required for one-hour fire-resistive construction. Doors shall be self-clos-
ing, of noncombustible construction or solid wood core, not less than I 3/ 4 inches
in thickness.
t EXCEPTIONS: I. Group R, Division 3 and Group M Occupancies.
2. Vehicle service pits.
110
Vertical Fire Spread at Exterior Walls

Sec. 1704. (a) General. The provisions of this section are intended to restrict the
passage of smoke, flame and hot gases from one floor to another at exterior walls. $
See Section 4305 for floor penetrations. l,.
(b) Interior. When fire-resistive floor or floor-ceiling assemblies are required, ,·'., •'. ,.'•.
voids created at the intersection of the exterior wall assemblies and such floor as-
semblies shall be sealed with an approved material. Such material shall be securely '''
installed and capable of preventing the passage of flame and hot gases sufficient to ' :\j
ignite cotton waste when subjected to U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1 time-temperature //,ii
fire conditions under a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.0 I inches of jjj\
water column for the time period at least equal to the fire-resistance rating of the ,,,
floor assembly.
t~
(c) Exterior. When openings in an exterior wall are above and within 5 feet later- ;;
ally of an opening in the story below, such openings shall be separated by an ap- ::
proved flame barrier extending 30 inches beyond the exterior wall in the plane of ::!:
the floor or by approved vertical flame barriers not less than 3 feet high measured
vertically above the top of the lower opening. Flame barriers shall have a fire res is- !j!j
tance of not less than three-fourths hour. t
::·:
EXCEPTIONS: I. Flame barriers are not required in buildings equipped with an f
approved automatic sprinkler system throughout. ;';;
2. This subsection shall not apply to buildings of three stories or less in height. [[[[
Exceptions to Table No. 17-A

Sec. 1705. (a) General. The provisions of this section are exceptions to the con-
struction requirements of Table No. 17-A, Chapters 5 through 12 and 18 through
22.
(b) Fixed Partitions. I. Stores and offices. Interior nonload-bearing partitions
dividing portions of stores, offices or similar places occupied by one tenant only
and which do not establish a corridor serving an occupant load that would require it
to be of fire-resistive construction under the provisions of Section 3305 (g) may be
constructed of:
A. Noncombustible materials.
B. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
C. One-hour fire-resistive construction.
D. Wood panels or similar light construction up to three fourths the height of the
room in which placed; when more than three fourths the height of the room, such
partitions shall not have less than the upper one fourth of the partition constructed
of glass.
2. Hotels and apartments. Interior nonload-bearing partitions within individ-
ual dwelling units in apartment houses and guest rooms or suites in hotels when
such dwelling units, guest rooms or suites are separated from each other and from
corridors by not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction may be constructed
of:
A. Noncombustible materials or fire-retardant-treated wood in buildings of any
type of construction; or
111
B. Combustible framing with noncombustible materials applied to the framing

in buildings of Type III or V construction.
Openings to such corridors shall be equipped with doors conforming to Section
3305 (h) regardless of the occupant load served.
For use of plastics in partitions, see Section 5210.
(c) Folding, Portable or Movable Partitions. Approved folding, portable or
movable partitions need not have a fire-resistive rating, provided:
I. They do not block required exits (without providing alternative conforming
exits) and they do not establish an exit corridor.
2. Their location is restricted by means of permanent tracks, guides or other ap-
proved methods.
3. Flammability shall be limited to materials having a flame-spread classifica-
tion as set forth in Table No. 42-B for rooms or areas.
(d) Walls Fronting on Streets or Yards. Regardless of fire-resistive require-
ments for exterior walls, certain elements of the walls fronting on streets or yards
having a width of 40 feet may be constructed as follows:
I. Bulkheads below show windows, show-window frames, aprons and show-
cases may be of combustible materials, provided the height of such construction
does not exceed 15 feet above grade.
2. Wood veneer of boards not less than l-inch nominal thickness or exterior-type
panels not less than 3/ 8 -inch nominal thickness may be applied to walls, provided
the veneer does not exceed 15 feet above grade, and further provided such veneer
shall be placed either directly against noncombustible surfaces or furred out from
t: such surfaces not to exceed 15/ 8 inches with all concealed spaces fire blocked as
provided in Section 2516 (f). Where boards, panels and furring as described above
comply with Section 407 as fire-retardant-treated wood suitable for exterior expo-
sure, the height above grade may be increased to 35 feet.
(e) Trim. Trim, picture molds, chair rails, baseboards, handrails and show-win-
dow backing may be of wood. Unprotected wood doors and windows may be used
except where openings are required to be fire protected.
Foam plastic trim covering not more than 10 percent of the wall or ceiling area
may be used, provided such trim (I) has a density of no less than 20 pounds per
cubic foot, (2) has a maximum thickness of 1h inch and a maximum width of 4 in-
ches and (3) has a flame-spread rating no greater than 75.
Materials used for interior finish of walls and ceilings, including wainscoting,
shall be as specified in Chapter 42.
(f) Loading Platforms. Exterior loading platforms may be of noncombustible
construction or heavy-timber construction with wood floors not less than 2-inch
nominal thickness. Such wood construction shall not be carried through the exteri-
or walls.
(g) Insulating Boards. Combustible insulating boards may be used under fin-
ished flooring.
112
Shaft Enclosures
Sec. 1706. (a) General. Openings through floors shall be enclosed in a shaft en- ~ ~
closure of fire-resistive construction having the time period set forth in Table No. iii!
~:~~:~:~~:ca;rc~:~!~;:~~~·~~=~~~tp~:~~s:~~~d in Section 1706 (c), (e) and (f). ,::··'_,:1,,·=.':!=:·,1
(b) Extent of Enclosures. Shaft enclosures shall extend from the lowest floor
opening through successive floor openings and shall be enclosed at the top and bot-
tom. EXCEPTIONS:
sheathing, deck or slabI. need
Shafts
notextending through
be enclosed at the or
top.to the underside of the roof . 'l_
..
·''···''.···'l_.=···
2: Noncodmb ustible ducts , ve nt shor chi mneys usehd tob convey vapors, dusts or com- ,!_,:_,!.,:_,~
bus 1ton pro uc1s may pene1ra 1e 1 e enc 1osure a1 1 e o11om.
3. Shafts need not be enclosed at the bottom when protected by fire dampers con- :~:~:
~~~i:;ctl~~~~.. C. Standard No. 43-7, installed at the lowest floor level within the IIIII
Shaft enclosures shall be constructed to continuously maintain the required fire- :,:;:
·::::
resistive integrity.
(c) Special Provision. In other than Group I Occupancies, openings which ~,: ,: .:.,':,.
penetrate only one floor and are not connected with openings communicating with
~ther storiebs ?r basedmentsband whichdare not concea: ' ".;thin building construe- .'~,: _ .=:,:: :·__
!IOn assem 1tes nee not e enc 1ose .

Exit enclosures shall conform to the applicable provisions of Sections 3309 and t
3310.
::::
In one- and two-story buildings other than Group I Occupancies, gas vents, ·:=:
ducts, piping and factory-built chimneys which extend through not more than two
floors need not be enclosed, provided the openings around the penetrations are fire
r
stopped at each floor.
EXCEPTION: BW gas vents installed in accordance with their listing.
Gas vents and factory-built chimneys shall be protected as required by the Me-
chanical Code.
Walls containing gas vents or noncombustible piping which pass through three
floors or less need not provide the fire-resistance rating specified in Table No. 17 -A
for "Shaft Enclosures," provided the annular space around the vents or piping is
filled at each floor or ceiling with noncombustible materials.
EXCEPTION: BW gas vents installed in accordance with their listing.
Openings made through a floor for penetrations such as cables, cable trays, con-
duit, pipes or tubing which are protected with approved through-penetration fire
stops to provide the same degree of fire resistance as the floor construction need not
be enclosed. For floor-ceiling assemblies, see Section 4305.
(d) Protection of Openings. Openings into a shaft enclosure shall be protected ·
by a self-closing or an automatic-closing fire assembly conforming to Section
4306 and having a fire-protection rating of one hour for openings through one-hour
,:.'~_ ,:.·
!,:_.,.:::__
fire-resistive walls and one and one-half hours for openings through two-hour fire-
resistive walls. 1
113
@1
I
EXCEPTIONS: I. Openings to the exterior may be unprotected when permitted
by Table No. 5-A or 9-C or Sections 1803 (b), 1903 (b), 2003 (b) and 2103 (b).
2. Openings protected by through-penetration fire stops to provide the same de-
gree of fire resistance as the shaft enclosure. See Sections 4304 and 4305.
I
j)jjj
(e) Rubbish and Linen Chute Termination Rooms. In other than Group R, Di-
vision 3 Occupancies, rubbish and linen chutes shall terminate in rooms separated
from the remainder of the building by an occupancy separation having the same
fire resistance as required for the shaft enclosure, but not less than one hour. Open-
ings into chutes and chute termination rooms shall not be located in exit corridors
or stairways. For sprinklers, see Section 3802 (b).
(f) Chute and Dumbwaiter Shafts. In buildings of Type V construction, chutes
1111 and dumbwaiter shafts with a cross-sectional area of not more than 9 square feet
may be either of approved fire-resistive wall construction or may have the inside
layers of the approved fire-resistive assembly replaced by a lining of not less than
0.019-inch (26-gage) galvanized sheet metal with all joints locklapped. The out-
side layers of the wall shall be as required for the approved construction. All open-
ings into any such enclosure shall be protected by not less than a self-closing solid
wood door 13/ 8 inches thick or equivalent.
Construction Joints
Sec. 1707. Construction joints, such as those used to accommodate wind, seis-
mic or expansion movements, installed in fire-resistive walls required to have pro-
tected openings or in floors shall be protected with an approved material or
construction assembly designed to provide the same degree of fire resistance as the
floor or wall in which it is installed when tested in accordance with U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 43-1. See Section 4302 (b).
Such material or construction assembly shall be securely installed in or on the
joint for its entire length so as not to dislodge, loosen or otherwise impair its ability
to accommodate expected building movements and to resist the spread of fire and
hot gases.
Weather Protection
Sec. 1708. (a) Weather-resistive Barriers. All weather-exposed surfaces shall
have a weather-resistive barrier to protect the interior wall covering. Such barrier
shall be equal to that provided for in U.B.C. Standard No. 17-1 for kraft waterproof
building paper or asphalt-saturated rag felt. Building paper and felt shall be free
from holes and breaks other than those created by fasteners and construction sys-
tem due to attaching of the building paper, and shall be applied over studs or sheath-
iii!. ing of all ~xterior walls. Such felt or paper shall be applied horizontally, with the
upper l~er lapped over the lower layer not less than 2 inches. Where vertical joints
·.::. occur/.~lt or paper shall be lapped not less than 6 inches.
Weather-protected barrier may be omitted in the following cases:
I. When exterior covering is of approved weatherproof panels.
2. In back-plastered construction.
3. When there is no human occupancy.
114
4. Over water-repellent panel sheathing.

5. Under approved paperbacked metal or wire fabric lath.
6. Behind lath and portland cement plaster applied to the underside of roof and
eave projections.
\b) F\ashing and Counternashing. Exterior openings exposed to the weather
shall be flashed in such a manner as to make them weatherproof.
All paiapets shall be provided with coping of approved materials. All flashing,
counterflashing and coping, when of metal, shall not be of less than No. 26 U.S.
gauge corrosion-resistant metal.
(c) Waterproofing Weather-exposed Areas. Balconies, landings, exterior
stairways and similar surfaces exposed to the weather and sealed underneath shall
be waterproofed.
(d) Dampproofing Foundation Walls. Unless otherwise approved by the
building official, foundation walls enclosing a basement below finished grade
shall be dampproofed outside by approved methods and materials.
Members Carrying Masonry or Concrete
Sec. 1709. All members carrying masonry or concrete walls in buildings over
one story in height shall be fire protected with one-hour fire protection or the
fire-resistive requirement of the wall, whichever is greater.
EXCEPTION: Fire protection may be omitted from the bottom flange of lintels
spanning not over 6 feet, shelf angles, or plates that are not a part of the structural
frame.
Parapets
Sec. 1710. (a) General. Parapets shall be provided on all exterior walls ofbuild-
ings.
EXCEPTION: A parapet need not be provided on an exterior wall when any of
the following conditions exist:
A. The wall is not required to be of fire-resistive construction.
B. The wall, due to location on property line, may have unprotected openings.
C. The building has an area of not more than I ,000 square feet on any floor.
D. Walls which terminate at roofs of not less than two-hour fire-resistive construc-
tion or roofs constructed entirely of noncombustible materials.
E. One-hour fire-resistive exterior walls may terminate at the underside of the roof
sheathing, deck or slab, provided:
(i) Where the roof-ceiling framing elements are parallel to the walls, such
framing and elements supporting such framing shall not be of less than ··
one-hour fire-resistive construction for a width of 5 feet measured from J
~~~~~§J~~ii~;;~~~;;,;;; 7 1
(ii) 1. .·'.:.
·'1.';.'1
(iii) Openings in the roof shall not be located within 5 feet of the one-hour fire-
resistive exterior wall for Groups M and R Occupancies and I 0 feet for all
other occupancies.
115
(iv) The entire building shall be provided with not less than a Class B roof cov-
ering.
(b) Construction. Parapets shall have the same degree of fire resistance re-
quired for the wall upon which they are erected, and on any side adjacent to a roof
surface, shall have noncombustible faces for the uppermost 18 inches, including
counterflashing and coping materials. The height of the parapet shall not be less
than 30 inches above the point where the roof surface and the wall intersect. Where
the roof slopes toward a parapet at slopes greater than 2: 12, the parapet shall extend
to the same height as any portion of the roof that is within the distance where protec-
tion of wall openings would be required, but in no case shall the height be less than
30 inches.
Projections
Sec. 1711. Cornices, eave overhangs, exterior balconies and similar architectur-
al appendages extending beyond the floor area as defined in Section 407 shall con-
form to the requirements of this section. (See Sections 3305 and 3306 for additional
requirements applicable to exterior exit balconies and stairways.)
Projections from walls of Type I or II construction shall be of noncombustible
materials.
Projections from walls of Type III, IV or V construction may be of noncombus-
tible or combustible materials.
Combustible projections located where openings are not permitted or where
protection of openings is required shall be of one-hour fire-resistive or heavy-tim-
ber construction conforming to Section 2106.
. . For projections extending over public property, see Chapter 45.
For combustible ornamentation, see Section 1705 (d).
For fire-resistive requirements, see Section 504 (b).
Guardrails and Vehicle Barriers

Sec. 1712. (a) Guardrails. Unenclosed floor and roof openings, open and
glazed sides of stairways, landings and ramps, balconies or porches, which are
more than 30 inches above grade or floor below, and roofs used for other than ser-
vice of the building shall be protected by a guardrail.
EXCEPTION: Guardrails need not be provided at the following locations:
A. On the loading side of loading docks.
B. On the auditorium side of a stage or enclosed platform.
C. Along vehicle service pits not accessible to the public.
The top of guardrails shall not be less than 42 inches in height.
EXCEPTIONS: I. The top of guardrails for Group R, Division 3 and Group M,
Division I Occupancies and interior guardrails within individual dwelling units,
Group R, Division 3 congregate residences and guest rooms of Group R, Division I
Occupancies may be 36 inches in height.
2. The top of guardrails on a balcony immediately in front of the first row of fixed
seats and which are not at the end of an aisle may be 26 inches in height.
116
3. The top of guardrails for stairways, exclusive of their landings, may have a
height as specified in Section 3306 (i) for handrails.
Open guardrails shall have intermediate rails or an ornamental pattern such that
a sphere 4 inches in diameter cannot pass through. !!iii
EXCEPTIONS: I. The open space between the intermediate rails or ornamental
pattern of guardrails in areas of commercial and industrial-type occupancies which
are not accessible to the public may be such that a sphere 12 inches in diameter cannot
pass through.
2. The triangular openings formed by the riser, tread and bottom element of a guar- :::'
drail at the open side of a stairway may be of such size that a sphere 6 inches in diame- ·:!,.:!,1
ter cannot pass through.

(b) Vehicle Barriers. In all parking garages where any parking area is located : : :
more than 5 feet above the adjacent grade, vehicle barriers shall be provided.
EXCEPTION: Parking garages of Group M, Division I Occupancies.
Vehicle barriers shall comply with the following:
I. The vehicle barrier shall be designed to resist a horizontal load of not less than
6,000 pounds. The horizontal force shall be applied over a one-foot-square area at a
height of 18 inches above the parking surface. The force shall be distributed
through the vehicle barrier into the structural frame.
2. The vehicle barrier shall have a minimum vertical dimension of 12 inches and
shall be centered at 18 inches above the parking surface.
Foam Plastic Insulation

Sec. 1713. (a) General. The provisions of this section shall govern the require-
ments and uses of foam plastic insulation in buildings and structures. For trim, see
Section 1705 (e).
~=~==
(b) Labeling and Identification. Packages and containers of foam plastic in- ,.,.,
sulation and foam plastic insulation components delivered to the jobsite shall bear :~:
the label of an approved agency showing the manufacturer's name, the product list- . ·.' .
ing, product identification and information to show that the end use will comply
·'~ ··'1.,•.' ..
···'1
with the code requirements.

(c) Surface-burning Characteristics. Foam plastic insulation used in building
construction shall have a flame-spread rating of not more than 75 and a smoke-de-
veloped rating of not more than 450 when tested in accordance with U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 42-1 in the maximum thickness intended for use.
:;::·
EXCEPTION: Foam plastic insulation when tested in a minimum thickness of :,·.,: ,·.,•.:
4 inches may be used in a greater thickness in cold-storage buildings, ice plants, food-
processing rooms and similar areas. For rooms within a building, the foam plastic in-
sulation shall be protected by a thermal barrier on both sides having an index of 15.
(d) Thermal Barrier. The interior of the building shall be separated from the
foam plastic insulation by an approved thermal barrier having an index of 15 when
tested in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 17-3. The thermal barrier shall be
installed in such a manner that it will remain in place for the time of its index classi-
fication based on approved diversified tests.
EXCEPTION: The thermal barrier is not required:
117
A. For siding backer board, provided the foam plastic insulation is not of more
than 2,000 Btu per square foot as determined by U.B.C Standard No. 17-2 and when
it is separated from the interior of the building by not less than 2 inches of mineral
fiber insulation or equivalent, or applied as re-siding over existing wall construction.
B. For walk-in coolers and freezer units having an aggregate floor area less than
400 square feet.
I
C, In a masonry or concrete wall, floororroof system when the foam plastic insula-
tion is covered by a minimum of l-inch thickness of masonry or concrete. Loose-fill
type foam plastic insulation shall be tested as board stock for flame spread and smoke
development as described above.
D. Within an attic or crawl space where entry is made only for service of utilities,
and when foam plastic insulation is covered with a material such as I 1f2-inch-thick
mineral fiber insulation, 1/4-inch-thick plywood, hardboard or gypsum wallboard,
corrosion-resistant sheet metal having a base metal thickness not less than 0.0160
inch at any point, or other approved material installed in such a manner that the foam
plastic insulation is not exposed.
E. In cooler and freezer walls when:
(i) The foam plastic insulation has a flame-spread rating of 25 or less when
tested in a minimum 4-inch thickness;
(ii) Has flash and self-ignition temperatures of not less than600°F. and 800°F.,
respectively;
(iii) Is covered by not less than 0.032-inch aluminum or corrosion-resistant
steel having a base metal thickness not less than 0.0160 inch at any point;
and
(iv) Is protected by an automatic sprinkler system. When the cooler or freezer
is within a building, both the cooler or freezer and that part of the building
in which it is located shall be sprinklered.
(e) Special Provisions. I. General. Foam plastic insulation may be used in the
following applications as set forth in this section:
2. Noncombustible exterior walls. A. One-story buildings. Foam plastic insu-
lation may be used in exterior walls of one-story buildings where exterior walls are
required to be of noncombustible construction subject to the following:
(i) The building is protected throughout with automatic sprinklers.
(ii) Foam plastic insulation tested in the maximum thickness and density in-
tended for use, has a flame-spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke-developed rat-
ing of 450 or less in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1.
(iii) The foam plastic insulation has a maximum 4-inch thickness.
(iv) The thermal barrier may be omitted when the foam plastic insulation is cov-
ered by not less than 0.032-inch-thick aluminum or corrosion-resistant sheet steel,
having a base metal thickness of 0.0160 inch.
(v) When the wall is required to have a fire-resistive rating, data based on tests
conducted in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1 are provided to substanti-
ate that the required fire-resistive rating is maintained.
B. Buildings of any height. Except for foam plastic insulation in masonry or
concrete construction complying with Section 1713 (d), Exception 3, assemblies
employing foam plastic insulation in or on exterior walls of buildings where the
118
exterior walls are required to be of noncombustible constru«:tion shall comply with

the following:
(i) When the wall is required to have a fire-resistive rating, data based on tests
conducted in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 43-1, are provided to substanti-
ate that the fire-resistive rating is maintained.
(ii) The foam plastic insulation is separated from the interior of the building by a
thermal barrier having an index of 15 unless specifically approved under Section
1713 (f).
(iii) Combustible content of foam plastic insulation in any portion of the wall or
panel does not exceed 6,000 Btu per square foot of wall area as determined by tests
in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 17-2.
(iv) Foam plastic insulation, exterior coatings and facings tested separately,
shall each have a flame-spread rating of25 or less and a smoke-developed rating of
450 or less in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1. The foam plastic shall be
tested in the thickness intended for use.
(v) The wall assembly is tested in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 17-6
and complies with the conditions of acceptance contained therein.
(vi) Foam plastic insulation is listed and the edge or face of each piece is labeled
with the following information:
a. Inspection agency name.
b. Product for which the insulation is listed.
c. Identification of the insulation manufacturer.
d. Flame-spread and smoke-development classifications.
3. Roofing. Foam plastic insulation meeting the requirements of Section 1713
(b), (c) and (d) may be used as part of a roof-covering assembly, provided the as-
sembly with the foam plastic insulation is a Class A, B or C roof-covering when
tested in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 32-7. Foam plastic insulation which
is a part of a Class A, B or C roof covering assembly need not meet the require-
ments of Section 1713 (b), (c) and (d), provided the assembly with the foam plastic
insulation satisfactorily passes a test for insulated roof decks.
Any roof covering installed in accordance with this code and the manufacturer's
instructions may be applied over foam plastic insulation when the foam is sepa-
rated from the interior ofthe building by plywood sheathing not less than 1/z inch in
thickness bonded with exterior glue, with edges supported by blocking,
tongue-and-groove joints or other approved type of edge support, or an equivalent
material. The thermal barrier requirement is waived.
For all roof applications, the smoke-developed rating shall not be limited.
4. Doors. Where doors are permitted without a fire-resistive rating, foam plastic
insulation having a flame-spread rating of75 or less may be used as a core material
when the door facing is metal having a minimum thickness of0.032-inch alumi-
num or steel having a base metal thickness not less than 0.0160 inch at any point.
The thermal barrier is not required for this condition.
(f) Specific Approval. Foam plastic insulation or assemblies using foam plastic
insulation may be used based on approved tests such as, but not limited to, tunnel
119
• .• •· tests in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1, fire tests related to actual end
' use such as U.B.C. Standard No. 17-5 and an ignition temperature test establishing
a minimum self-ignition temperature of 650°F. In lieu of testing, the specific ap-
proval may be based on the end use, quantity, location and similar considerations
where such tests would not be applicable or practical.
Foam plastic insulation in a thickness greater than 4 inches may be used if it has
ti!ii
been tested for flame spread and smoke development at a minimum thickness of 4
inches provided the end use has been specifically approved in accordance with this
subsection with the thickness and density intended for use.
Insulation
Sec. 1714. (a) General. Thermal and acoustical insulation located on or within
floor-ceiling and roof-ceiling assemblies, crawl spaces, walls, partitions and insu-
lation on pipes and tubing shall comply with this section. Duct insulation and insu-
lation in plenums shall conform to the requirements of the Mechanical Code.
EXCEPTION: Roof insulation shall comply with Section 3208 (d).
(b) Insulation and Covering on Pipe and Thbing. Insulation and covering on
pipe and tubing shall have a flame-spread rating not to exceed 25 and a smoke den-
sity not to exceed 450 when tested in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1.
EXCEPTION: Foam plastic insulation shall comply with Section 1713.
(c) Insulation. All insulation materials, including facings, such as vapor barri-
ers or breather papers installed within floor-ceiling assemblies, roof-ceiling as-
semblies, walls, crawl spaces or attics, shall have a flame-spread rating not to
exceed 25 and a smoke density not to exceed 450 when tested in accordance with
U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Foam plastic insulation shall comply with Section 1713.
2. When such materials are installed in concealed spaces of Types III, IV and V
construction, the flame-spread and smoke-developed limitations do not apply to fac-
ings, provided that the facing is installed in substantial contact with the unexposed
surface of the ceiling, floor or wall finish.
Solar Energy Collectors

Sec. 1715. Collectors which function as building components shall comply with
the applicable provisions of the code.
Collectors located above or upon a roof and not functioning as building compo-
nents shall not reduce the required fire-resistance or fire-retardancy classification
of the roof-covering materials.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Collectors installed on one- and two-family dwellings.
2. Noncombustible collectors located on buildings not over three stories in height
or 9,000 square feet in total floor area.
3. Collectors that comply with the provisions of Section 5214.
Atria
Sec. 1716. (a) General. Buildings, of other than Group H Occupancy, with auto-
matic sprinkler protection throughout may have atria complying with the provi-
120
sions of this section. Such atria shall have a minimum opening area and dimension
as set forth in Table No. 17-B.
(b) Smoke-control System. I. General. A mechanically operated air-handling
system shall be installed that will exhaust smoke either entering or developed with-
in the atrium.
2. Exhaust openings. Exhaust openings shall be located in the ceiling or in a
smoke trap area immediately adjacent to the ceiling ofthe atrium. The lowest level
of the exhaust openings shall be located above the top of the highest portion of door
openings into the atrium.
3. Supply openings. Supply openings sized to provide a minimum of 50 percent
of the exhaust volume shall be located at the lowest level of the atrium. When the
height of the atrium is 55 feet or less, supply air may be introduced by gravity, pro-
vided smoke control is accomplished. When the height of the atrium is more than
55 feet, supply air shall be introduced mechanically from the floor of the atrium and
be directed vertically toward the exhaust outlets. In atria over six stories in height or
where tenant spaces above the second story are open to the atrium, supplemental
supply air may be introduced at upper levels.
4. Automatic operation. The smoke-control system for the atrium shall operate
automatically upon the actuation of the automatic sprinkler system within the
atrium or areas open to the atrium. The smoke-control system for the atrium shall
also operate automatically upon the activation of two or more smoke detectors re-
quired by this section. Actuation of the smoke-control system shall follow immedi-
ately after the actuation of the second smoke detector. When projected beam-type
smoke detection is used in lieu of open area smoke-detection devices, the smoke-
control system shall operate upon actuation of any one beam detector.
5. Manual operation. The smoke-control system shall also be manually oper-
able by controls designed for fire department use. The smoke-control system may
b·~ separate or integrated with other air-handling systems. When the smoke-control
,,.ode is actuated, air-handling systems which would interfere with the smoke-con-
trol system shall be automatically shut down.
6. Separated ant spaces. Tenant spaces that are adjacent to but separated
from the atrium r ·"'·lis or glazing as specified in Section 1716 (c) shall be pro-
vided with a smoJ..~.:-control system complying with the requirements of a sprin-
klered building in Scctil•l1 1807 (g).
7. Exhaust quantities. The atrium smoke-control system shall exhaust not less
than the following quantities of air:
A. For atria having a volume of not more than 600,000 cubic feet, including the
volume of any levels not physically separated from the atrium, not less than six air
changes per hour nor less than 40,000 cubic feet per minute (cfm). A lesser cfm is
acceptable if it can be shown by test that smoke will not migrate beyond the perim-
eter of the atrium.
B. For atria having a volume of more than 600,000 cubic feet, including the vol-
ume of any levels not physically separated from the atrium, not less than four air
changes per hour.
121
l.il 8. Smoke detector location. Smoke detectors which will automatically operate
, . the atrium smoke-control system shall be accessible for maintenance, testing and
',
..
··'·:•
:· •~_, se~~c~~e:n~n::;:~~;y~:~!~~~t~::::~~~~;!~::~~:~~o:::installed:
.....
.. ..
··'·:··.······''1
(i) At the atrium ceiling, spaced in accordance with their listing.

(ii) On the underside of projections into the atrium, spaced in accordance with
their listing.
(iii) Around the perimeter of the atrium opening on all floors open to the
atrium. These detectors shall be spaced no more than 30 feet on center and
shall be located within 15 feet of the atrium opening.
B. When projected beam-type smoke detection is used, it shall be installed and
spaced in accordance with its listing.
(c) Enclosure of Atria. Atria shall be separated from adjacent spaces by not less
than one-hour fire-resistive construction.
EXCEPTIONS: I. The separation between atria and tenant spaces that are not
guest rooms, congregate residences or dwelling units may be omitted at three floor
levels.
2. Open exit balconies are permitted within the atrium.
Openings in the atrium enclosure other than fixed glazing shall be protected by
smoke- and draft-control assemblies conforming to Section 3305 (h).
EXCEPTION: Other tight-fitting doors which are maintained automatic clos-
ing, in accordance with Section 4306 (b), by actuation of a smoke detector, or
self-closing may be used when protected as required for glazed openings in Excep-
tion 2 below.
Fixed glazed openings in the atrium enclosure shall be equipped with fire win-
dows having a fire-resistive rating of not less than three-fourths hour, and the total
area of such openings shall not exceed 25 percent of the area of the common wall
between the atrium and the room into which the opening is provided.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In Group R, Division I Occupancies, openings may be un-
protected when the floor area of each guest room, congregate residence or dwelling
unit does not exceed I ,000 square feet and each room or unit has an approved exit not
entering the atrium.
2. Guest rooms, dwelling units, congregate residences and tenant spaces may be
separated from the atrium by approved fixed wired glass set in steel frames. In lieu
thereof, tempered or laminated glass or listed glass block may be used, subject to the
following:
A. The glass shall be protected by a sprinkler system equipped with listed
quick-response sprinklers. The sprinkler system shall completely wet the en-
tire surface of the glass wall when actuated. Where there are walking surfaces
on both sides of the glass, both sides of the glass shall be so protected.
B. The tempered or laminated glass shall be in a gasketed frame so installed that
the glazing system may deflect without breaking (loading) the glass before
the sprinkler system operates.
C. The glass block wall assembly shall be installed in accordance with its listing
for a three-fourths-hour fire-resistive rating and Section 2407 (j).
D. Obstructions such as curtain rods, drapery traverse rods, curtains, drapes or
similar materials shall not be installed between the sprinkler and the glass.
122
(d) Travel Distance. When a required exit enters the atrium space, the travel dis-
tance from the doorway of the tenant space to an enclosed stairway, horizontal exit,
exterior door or exit passageway shall not exceed 100 feet.
(e) Group I Occupancy Exits. In Group I Occupancies, other than jails, prisons
and reformatories, sleeping rooms shall not be permitted to have required exits
through the atrium.
(f) Occupancy Separation Exceptions. The vertical portion of the occupancy
separation which is adjacent to the atrium may be omitted between a Group B, Di-
vision 2 Occupancy office or sales area or Group A, Division 3 Occupancy and
Group R, Division I apartment, congregate residence or guest room located on f
another level.
(g) Standby Power. The smoke-control system for the atrium and the
smoke-control system for the tenant space are to be provided with standby power
as required in Section 1807 (i).
(h) Interior Finish. The interior finish of walls and ceilings of the atrium and all
unseparated tenant spaces allowed under Exception I to the first paragraph of Sub-
section (c) above shall be Class I with no reduction in class for sprinkler protection.
(i) Acceptance ofthe Smoke-control System. Before the Certificate of Occu-
pancy is issued, the smoke-control systems shall be tested in an approved manner
and shall show compliance with the requirements of this section.
U) Combustible Furnishings in Atria. The quantity of combustible furnish-
ings in atria shall not exceed that specified in the Fire Code.
~~:"~~:~::~'-~~~:::~~ ~~~::~~~~:.~,~;~~:::~~~~.';';;;:o~,~~~~·.·'
I. The construction of a mezzanine shall be consistent with the requirements for
·'!_.'1,_·[_,
__!
the type of construction in which the mezzanine is located, but the fire-resistive
time period need not exceed one hour for unenclosed mezzanines. The clear height
above and below the mezzanine floor construction shall not be less than 7 feet.
2. There shall not be more than two levels of mezzanines in a room. However,
there is no limitation on the number of mezzanines within a room.
3. The aggregate area of mezzanines within a room shall not exceed one third of
the area of the room in which they are located.
4. All portions of a mezzanine shall be open and unobstructed to the room in
~~~c~~~~o~~et~~~a~:;~~~:~~~o~e~;~~~ns and posts and protective walls or rail- ~_; :_;
EXCEPTIONS: I. Partitioning may be installed if either of the following condi-
tions exist:
A. The aggregate floor area of the enclosed space does not exceed I 0 percent of
the mezzanine area
B. The occupant load of the enclosed area of the mezzanine does not exceed \0.
2. A mezzanine having two or more exits need not be open into the room in which
it is located. provided at least one of the exits gives direct access to a protected exit
123
) corridor, an exit court, enclosed exit stairway, exterior exit, exterior exit balcony or
I T;~~~E:::::,:::::,,::;:::::~::~::::::::'::::
5.
:) Table No. 33-A.
6. If any required exit enters the room below, the occupant load of the mezzanine
shall be added to the occupant load of the room in which it is located.
124
....CD
TABLE NO. 17-A-TVPES OF CONSTRUCTION-FIRE-RESISTIVE REQUIREMENTS (In Hours)
For details see chapters under Occupancy and Types of Construction and for exceptions see Section 1705.
....
CD
c
TYPE I TYPE II TYPE Ill TYPE IV TYPEV z
NONCOMBUSTIBLE COMBUSTIBLE
::;;
0
BUILDING ELEMENT Fire-resistive Fire-resistive 1-Hr. N 1-Hr. N H.T. 1-Hr. N :tl
3:
I. Exterior Bearing Walls 4 aJ
Sec. 4 4 4 4 c
;=
1803 (a) 1903 (a) I N 2003 (a) 2003 (a) 2103 (a) I N c
2. Interior Bearing Walls 3 2 I N I N I I N z
G)
3. Exterior Nonbearing 4 0
Walls Sec. 4 I 4 4 4 0
c
1803 (a) 1903 (a) 1903 (a) N 2003 (a) 2003 (a) 2103 (a) I N m
4. Structural Frame 1 3 2 I N I N I orH.T. I N
5. Partitions-Permanent )2 12 )2 N I N I or H.T. I N
6. Shaft Enclosures 3 2 2 I I I I I I I
7. Floors-Ceilings/Floors 2 2 I N I N H.T. I N
8. Roofs-Ceilings/Roofs 2 I I
Sec. 1806 1906 1906 N I N H.T. I N
9. Exterior Doors and Sec.
Windows 1803 (b) 1903 (b) 1903 (b) 1903(b) 2003 (b) 2003 (b) 2103 (b) 2203 2203
10. Stairway Construction Sec. 1805 1905 1905 1905 2004 2004 2104 2204 2204
N-No general requirements for fire resistance. H.T.-Heavy Timber. .. .
1Structural frame elements in an exterior wall that is located where openings are not permitted or where protection of openings is required, shall be J
protected against external fire exposure as required for exterior bearing walls or the structural frame, whichever is greater. ~:~''
2Fire-retardant-treated wood (see Section 407) may he used in the assembly, provided fire-resistance requirements are maintained. See Sections 1801
and 1901, respectively.
-
N
Ul
3For special provisions, see Sections 1706, 706 and 906.
17-B UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 17-B-ATRIUM OPENING AND AREA
MINIMUM
HEIGHT IN STORIES CLEAR OPENING 1 (Ft.) MINIMUM AREA (Sq. Ft.)
3-4 20 400
5-7 30 900
8ormore 40 1600
!The specified dimensions are the diameters of inscribed circles whose centers fall on a
common axis for the full height of the atrium.
126
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 1801-180.4
Chapter 18
TYPE I FIRE-RESISTIVE BUILDINGS
Definition
Sec. 1801. The structural elements in Type I fire-resistive buildings shall be of
steel, iron, concrete or masonry.
Walls and permanent partitions shall be of noncombustible fire-resistive con-
struction except that permanent nonbearing partitions of one-hour or two-hour
fire-resistive construction, which are not part of a shaft enclosure, may have
fire-retardant-treated wood (see Section 407) within the assembly.
Materials of construction and fire-resistive requirements shall be as specified in
Chapter 17.
Structural Framework
Sec. 1802. Structural framework shall be of structural steel or iron as specified
in Chapter 27, reinforced concrete as in Chapter 26, or reinforced masonry as in
Chapter24.
For additional requirements for Group H Occupancies, see Section 902.
Exterior Walls and Openings
Sec. 1803. (a) Exterior Walls. Exterior walls and all structural members shall
comply with the requirements specified in Section 504 and the fire-resistive pro-
visions set forth in Table No. 17-A. For Group H Occupancies, see also Table No.
9-C.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Nonbearing walls fronting on public ways or yards having a
width of at least 40 feet may be of unprotected noncombustible construction.
2. In Group R, Division I and Group B Occupancies, exterior bearing walls may
be of two-hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction where openings are per-
mitted.
3. In other than Group H Occupancies, exterior nonbearing walls may be of
one-hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction where unprotected openings
are permitted and two-hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction where fire
protection of openings is required.
(b) Openings in Walls. All openings in exterior walls shall conform to there-
quirements of Section 504 (b) and shall be protected by a fire assembly having a
three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating when they are less than 20 feet from an
adjacent property line or the center line of a public way.
No openings shall be permitted in exterior walls of Groups A, E, I and B, Divi-
sions 1, 2 and 3 Occupancies less than 5 feet from the property line, and no openings
in Groups B, Division 4, Rand M Occupancies less than 3 feet from the property
line.
For Group H Occupancies, see Chapter 9.
Floors
Sec. 1804. Where wood sleepers are used for laying wood flooring on masonry
or concrete fire-resistive floors, the space between the floor slab and the underside
127
;i:'i of the wood flooring shall be filled with noncombustible material or fire blocked
in such a manner that there will be no open spaces under the flooring which will ex-
ceed l 00 square feet in area and such space shall be filled solidly under all perma-
nent partitions so that there is no communication under the flooring between
~djoining rooms.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Fire blocking need not be provided in such floors when at or
below grade level in gymnasiums.
2. Fire blocking need be provided only at the juncture of each alternate lane and
at the ends of each lane in a bowling facility.
Stairway Construction
Sec. 1805. Stairways shall be constructed of reinforced concrete, iron or steel
with treads and risers of concrete, iron or steel. Brick, marble, tile or other hard
noncombustible materials may be used for the finish of such treads and risers.
Stairways shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 33.
Roofs
'~..• Sec. 1806. Except in retail sales and storage areas cflassified ~s Group B, Divi-
'·,·,.. ...·'!..·'J
sion 2 Occupancies and in Group H Occupancies, roo s and their members, other
'
than the structural frame, may be of unprotected noncombustible materials when
..,. every part of the roof framing, including the structural frame, is 25 feet or more
•.,:. ,:.', above the floor, balcony or gallery immediately below. Heavy-timber members in
.' accordance with Section 2106 may be used for such unprotected members in one-
story buildings.
When every part of the structural framework of the roof of a Group A orE Occu-
pancy or of an atrium is not less than 25 feet above any floor, balcony or gallery, fire
protection of all members ofthe roof construction, including those of the structural
frame, may be omitted. Heavy-timber members in accordance with Section 2106
may be used for such unprotected members in one-story buildings.
Roofs of unprotected noncombustible or heavy-timber construction conform-
ing to Section 2106 (d) may be less than 25 feet above any floor, balcony or gallery
of a Group A, Division 2.1 Occupancy having an occupant load of l 0,000 or more
when all of the following conditions are met:
I. The building is not more than one story in height, except for multilevel areas
located under the roof and used for locker rooms, exiting, concession stands, me-
chanical rooms and others accessory to the assembly room.
2. The area in which the roof clearance is less than 25 feet does not exceed 35
percent of the area encompassed by the exterior walls.
3. An approved supervised automatic sprinkler system shall be installed
throughout.
Where every part of the structural steel framework of the roof of a Group A orE
Occupancy is more than 18 feet and less than 25 feet above any floor, balcony or
gallery, the roof construction shall be protected by a ceiling of not less than
128
Roof coverings shall be as specified in Chapter 32.
Special Provisions for Group B, Division 2 Office Buildings and

Group A, Division 1 Occupancies
s~c. 1807. (a) Scope. This section applies to all Group B, Division 2 office and
Group R, Division 1 Occupancies, each having floors used for human occupancy
located more than 75 feet above the lowest level of fire department access. Such
buildings shall be provided with an approved automatic sprinkler system in accor-
dance with Section 1807 (c).
(b) Certificate of Occupancy. All mechanical and electrical equipment and
other required life safety systems shall be approved and installed in accordance
with approved plans and specifications pursuant to this section and shall be tested
and proved to be in proper working condition to the satisfaction of the building offi-
cial before issuance of the Certificate of Occupancy. Such system shall be main-
tained in accordance with the Fire Code.
(c) Automatic Sprinkler System. 1. System design. The automatic sprinkler
system shall be provided throughout the building. The sprinkler system shall be
designed using the parameters set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1 and the fol-
lowing:
A. Shutoff valves and a water-flow device shall be provided for each floor. The
sprinkler riser may be combined with the standpipe riser.
B. In Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4, in addition to the main water supply, a sec-
ondary on-site supply of water equal to the hydraulically calculated sprinkler de-
sign demand plus 100 gallons per minute additional for the total standpipe system
shall be provided. This supply shall be automatically available if the principal sup-
ply fails and shall have a duration of 30 minutes.
2. Modifications. The following modifications of code requirements are per-
mitted:
A. The fire-resistive time periods set forth in Table No. 17-A may be reduced by
one hour for interior bearing walls, exterior bearing and non bearing walls, roofs
and the beams supporting roofs, provided they do not frame into columns. Vertical
shafts other than stairway enclosures and elevator shafts may be reduced to one
hour when sprinklers are installed within the shafts at alternate floors. The fire-re-
sistive time period reduction as specified herein shall not apply to exterior bearing
and non bearing walls whose fire-resistive rating has already been reduced under
the exceptions contained within Section 1803 (a) or 1903 (a).
B. Except for corridors in Group B, Division 2 and Group R, Division 1 Occu-
pancies and partitions separating dwelling units or guest rooms, all interior non-
bearing partitions required to be one-hour fire-resistive construction by Table No.
17 -A may be of noncombustible construction without a fire-resistive time period. •
C. Travel distance from the most remote point in the floor area to a horizontal
exit or to an enclosed stairway may be 300 feet.
D. Fire dampers, other than those needed to protect floor-ceiling assemblies to
maintain the fire resistance of the assembly, are not required.
129
E. Emergency windows required by Section 1204 are not required.

(d) Smoke-detection Systems. At least one approved smoke detector suitable
for the intended use shall be installed:
I. In every mechanical equipment, electrical, transformer, telephone equip-
ment, elevator machine or similar room.
2. In the main return- and exhaust-air plenum of each air-conditioning system
and located in a serviceable area downstream of the last duct inlet.
3. At each connection to a vertical duct or riser serving two or more stories from a
return-air duct or plenum of an air-conditioning system. In Group R, Division I
Occupancies, an approved smoke detector may be used in each return-air riser car-
rying not more than 5,000 cfm and serving not more than 10 air inlet openings.
The actuation of any detector required by this section shall operate the voice
alarm system and shall place into operation all equipment necessary to prevent the
recirculation of smoke.
(e) Alarm and Communication Systems. The alarm and communication sys-
tems shall be designed and installed so that damage to any terminal unit or speaker
will not render more than one zone of the system inoperative.
The voice alarm and public address system may be a combined system. When
approved by the fire department, a communications system may be combined with
the voice alarm system and the public address system.
Three communication systems which may be combined as set forth above shall
be provided as follows:
I. Voice alarm system. The operation of any smoke detector, sprinkler, water-
How device or manual fire alarm station shall automatically sound an alert signal to
the desired areas followed by voice instructions giving appropriate information
and direction to the occupants.
The central control station shall contain controls for the voice alarm system so
that a selective or general voice alarm may be manually initiated.
The system shall be supervised to cause the activation of an audible trouble sig-
nal in the central control station upon interruption or failure of the audiopath in-
cluding amplifiers, speaker wiring, switches and electrical contacts and shall
detect opens, shorts and grounds which might impair the function of the system.
The alarm shall be designed to be heard clearly by all occupants within the build-
ing or designated portions thereof as is required for the public address system.
2. Public address system. A public address communication system designed to
be clearly heard by all occupants ofthe building shall operate from the central con-
trol station. It shall be established on a selective or general basis to the following
terminal areas:
A. Elevators.
B. Elevator lobbies.
C. Corridors.
D. Exit stairways.
E. Rooms and tenant spaces exceeding 1,000 square feet in area.
130
F. Dwelling units in apartment houses.

G. Hotel guest rooms or suites.
3. Fire department communication system. A two-way fire department com- :::::
munication system shall be provided for fire department use. It shall operate be- ·.
tween the central control station and elevators, elevator lobbies, emergency and
~·:'.i,!-·': ! ...
·'·
standby power rooms and at entries into enclosed stairways.

(t) Central Control Station. A central control station for fire department opera-
tions shall be provided. The location of the central control station shall be approved ::::
by the fire department. The central control station room shall have a minimum .'
of96 square feet with a minimum dimension of8 feet. It shall contain the following
,'··'!.'!.·,1··'·':.'·.·,!.'
as a minimum:
I. The voice alarm and public address system panels.
2. The fire department communications panel.
3. Fire-detection and alarm system annunciator panels.
4. Annunciator visually indicating the location of the elevators and whether they
are operational.
5. Status indicators and controls for air-handling systems.
6. Controls for unlocking all stairway doors simultaneously.
7. Sprinkler valve and water-flow detector display panels.
8. Emergency and standby power status indicators.
9. A telephone for fire department use with controlled access to the public tele-
phone system.
10. Fire pump status indicators.
II. Schematic building plans indicating the typical floor plan and detailing the
building core, exit facilities, fire-protection systems, fire-fighting equipment and
fire department access.
12. Work table.
All control panels in the central control station shall be permanently identified as
to function.
Alarm, supervisory and trouble signals as required by Items 3 and 7 above shall
be annunciated in compliance with the Fire Code in the central control station by
means of an audible and visual indicator. For purposes of annunciation, zoning
:~~~@It:~::::::;:~~:ll:::·::: ::::~":~:::::,:: ,.:·'

risers serve the same floor, each riser shall be considered a separate zone.
EXCEPTION: When more than one riser serves the same system on the floor.
.
·'.1. .
1
'•.:'.:.::1:
··'
...
(g) Smoke Control. Natural or mechanical ventilation forthe removal of prod-

ucts of combustion shall be provided in every story and shall consist of one of the
following:
I. Easily identifiable, manually operable windows or panels shall be distributed !, :.,: [.~ ·
around the perimeter ofthe building at not more than 50-foot intervals. The area of ·
131
I ope_rable windows or panels shall not be less than 20 square feet per 50 linear feet of
[ penmeter.
lli EXCEPTIONS: I. In Group R, Division I hotel occupancies, each guest room
~ or suite having an exterior wall may be provided with 2 square feet of venting area
~;i, in lieu of the area specified above.
\ 2. Windows may be of fixed tempered glass provided that no coating or film is
~ applied which will modify the natural breaking characteristics of the glass.
2. When a complete and approved automatic sprinkler system is installed, the
mechanical air-handling equipment may be designed to accomplish smoke remov-
al. Under fire conditions, the return and exhaust air shall be moved directly to the
outside without recirculation to other sections of the building. The air-handling
system shall provide a minimum of one exhaust air change each I 0 minutes for the
area involved.
3. Any other approved design which will produce equivalent results.
(h) Elevators. Elevators and elevator lobbies shall comply with the provisions
of Chapter 51 and the following:
NOTE: A bank of elevators is a group of elevators or a single elevator controlled
by a common operating system; that is, all those elevators which respond to a single
call button constitute a bank of elevators. There is no limit on the number of cars
which may be in a bank or group but there may not be more than four cars within a
common hoistway.
l. Elevators on all floors shall open into elevator lobbies which are separated
from the remainder of the building, including corridors and other exits, by walls
extending from the floor to the underside of the fire-resistive floor or roof above.
Such walls shall not be ofless than one-hour fire-resistive construction. Openings
through such walls shall conform to Section 3305 (h).
EXCEPTIONS: I. The main entrance-level elevator lobby in office buildings.
2. Elevator lobbies located within an atrium complying with the provisions of Sec-
tion 1716.
3. In fully sprinkle red office buildings, corridors may lead through enclosed eleva-
tor lobbies if all areas of the building have access to at least one required exit without
passing through the elevator lobby.
~ 2. Each elevator lobby shall be provided with an approved listed smoke detector
located on the lobby ceiling. When the detector is activated, elevator doors shall not
open and all cars serving that lobby are to return to the main floor and be under man-
ual control only. If the main floor detector or a transfer floor detector is activated,
all cars serving the main floor or transfer floor shall return to a location approved by
l.
the fire department and building official and be under manual control only. The de-
tectormay serve to close the lobby doors and additional doors at the hoistway open-
ing allowed in Section 5106.
3. Elevator hoistways shall not be vented through an elevator machine room.
Cable slots entering the machine room shall be sleeved beneath the machine room
floor and extend to not less than 12 inches below the shaft vent to inhibit the passage
of smoke into the machine room.
(i) Standby Power, Light and Emergency Systems. 1. Standby power. Stand-
by power-generating system conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 18-1, which is a
132
part of this code (see Chapter 60, Part II), shall be provided. The system shall be
equipped with suitable means for automatically starting the generator set upon fail-
ure of the normal electrical supply systems and for automatic transfer of all func-
tions required by this section at full power within 60 seconds of such normal
service failure. System supervision with manual start and transfer override fea- ,.,.,.,·.,!
tures shall be provided at the central control station.

An on-premises fuel supply sufficient for not less than two hours' full-demand
operation of the system shall be provided.
The standby system shall have a capacity and rating that would supply all equip-
ment required to be operational at the same time. The generating capacity need not
be sized to operate all the connected electrical equipment simultaneously.
All power, lighting, signal and communication facilities specified in Subsec-
tions (d), (e), (f), (g), (h), (i) and (j) of this section, as applicable; fire pumps
required to maintain pressure, standby lighting and normal circuits supplying exit
signs and exit illumination shall be transferable to the standby source.
2. Standby lighting. Standby lighting shall be provided as follows:
A. Separate lighting circuits and fixtures sufficient to provide light with an in-
tensity of not less than one footcandle measured at floor level in all exit corridors,
stairways, smokeproof enclosures, elevator cars and lobbies and other areas which
are clearly a part of the escape route.
B. All circuits supply lighting for the central control station and mechanical
equipment room.
3. Emergency systems. The following are classified as emergency systems and
shall operate within I 0 seconds of failure of the normal power supply:
A. Exit sign and exit illumination as required by Sections 3313 and 3314.
B. Elevator car lighting.
(j) Exits. Exits shall comply with other requirements of this code and the follow-
ing:
I. All stairway doors which are locked from the stairway side shall have theca-
pability of being unlocked simultaneously without unlatching upon a signal from
the central control station.
2. A telephone or other two-way communications system connected to an ap-
proved emergency service which operates continuously shall be provided at not
less than every fifth floor in each required stairway where other provisions of this
code permit the doors to be locked.
(k) Seismic Considerations. In Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4, the anchorage of
mechanical and electrical equipment required for life-safety systems, including
fire pumps and elevator drive and suspension systems, shall be designed in accor-
dance with the requirements of Section 2330.
133
NOTES
134
Chapter 19
TYPE II BUILDINGS
Definition
Sec. 1901. The structural elements in Type II fire-resistive buildings shall be of
steel, iron, concrete or masonry.
The structural elements of Type II One-hour or II-N buildings shall be of non-
combustible materials.
Walls and permanent partitions of Type II-F.R. buildings shall be of noncom-
bustible fire-resistive construction, except that permanent non bearing partitions of
one-hour or two-hour fire-resistive construction, which are not part of a shaft en-
closure, may have fire-retardant-treated wood (see Section 407) within the assem-
bly.
Type II One-hour buildings shall be of noncombustible construction and
one-hour fire resistive throughout except that permanent nonbearing partitions
may use fire-retardant-treated wood (see Section 407) within the assembly, pro-
vided fire-resistive requirements are maintained.
Walls and permanent partitions of Type 11-N buildings shall be of noncombus-
tible materials.
Chapter 17.
For requirements due to occupancy, see Chapters 6 through 12.
Sec. 1902. Structural framework shall be as specified in Chapter 27 for iron and
steel, Chapter 26 for concrete and Chapter 24 for masonry.

Sec. 1903. (a) Exterior Walls. Exterior walls and all structural members shall
comply with the requirements specified in Section 504 and the fire-resistive provi-
sions set forth in Table No. 17-A. For Group H Occupancies, see Table No. 9-C.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Nonbearing walls fronting on public ways or yards having a
width of at least 40 feet may be of unprotected noncombustible construction.
2. In Group R, Division I and Group B Occupancies, exterior bearing walls of
Type II-F.R. buildings may be of two-hour fire-resistive noncombustible constmc-
tion where openings are permitted.
3. In other than Group H Occupancies, exterior nonbearing walls of Type II-F.R.
buildings may be of one-hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction where un-
protected openings are permitted and two-hour fire-resistive noncombustible con-
struction where fire protection of openings is required.
4. In a Group B Occupancy, a fire-resistive time period will not be required for
an exterior wall of a one-story Type II-N building, provided the floor area of the build-
ing does not exceed I ,000 square feet and such wall is located not less than 5 feet
from a property line.
135
(b) Openings in Walls. All openings in exterior walls of Type II-F.R. buildings
shall conform to the requirements of Section 504 (b) and shall be protected by a fire
assembly having a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating when they are less
than 20 feet from an adjacent property line or the center line of a public way.
No openings shall be permitted in exterior walls of Type II-F.R. buildings hous-
ing Groups A, E, I and B, Divisions 1, 2 and 3 Occupancies less than 5 feet from the
property line, and no openings in Groups B, Division 4, R, and M Occupancies less
than 3 feet from the property line.
Openings in exterior walls located where protected openings are required by
Table No. 5-A shall be protected by fixed fire windows or automatic-closing fire
windows or self-closing doors having a fire-protection rating of at least three-
fourths hour and shall comply with Section 504.
Floors
Sec. 1904. Where wood sleepers are used for laying wood flooring on masonry
,.,., or concrete fire-resistive floors, the space between the floor slab and the underside
t:ti[ of the wood flooring shall be filled with noncombustible material or fire blocked
... in such a manner that there will be no open spaces under the flooring which will ex-
ceed 100 square feet in area and such space shall be filled solidly under all perma-
nent partitions so that there is no communication under the flooring between
adjoining rooms.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Fire blocking need not be provided in such floors when at or
below grade level in gymnasiums.
2. Fire blocking need be provided only at the juncture of each alternate lane and
at the ends of each lane in a bowling facility.
Floor construction of Type II One-hour and Type 11-N buildings shall be of non-
combustible material, provided, however, that a wood surface or finish may be
applied over such noncombustible material.
Sec. 1905. Stairways of Type II-F.R. buildings shall be constructed of reinforced
concrete, iron or steel with treads and risers of concrete, iron or steel. Brick,
marble, tile or other hard noncombustible materials may be used for the finish of
such treads and risers. Stairways of Type II One-hour and Type II-Nbuildings shall
be of noncombustible construction.
Stairways shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 33.
Roofs
Sec. 1906. Roofs shall be of noncombustible construction, except that in Type
II-F.R. and Type II One-hour buildings, roofs may be as specified in Section 1806.
Roof coverings shall not be less than a Class Bas specified in Table No. 32-A.
136
Special Provisions for Group 8, Division 2 Office Buildings and

Group R, Division 1 Occupancies
Sec. 1907. Group B, Division 2 office buildings and Group R, Division I Occu-
pancies of Type II-F.R. construction, having floors used for human occupancy lo-
cated more than 75 feet above the lowest level of fire department vehicle access,
shall comply with the special provisions on high-rise buildings in Section 1807.
EXCEPTION: The reduction provisions for roofs in Section 1807 (c), Item 2A,
are not permitted.
137
NOTES
138
Chapter 20
TYPE Ill BUILDINGS
Definition
Sec. 2001. Structural elements in Type III buildings may be of any materials per-
mitted by this code.
Type III One-hour buildings shall be of one-hour fire-resistive construction
throughout.
Sec. 2002. Structural framework shall be of steel or iron as specified in Chapter
27, concrete as in Chapter 26, masonry as in Chapter 24, or wood as in Chapter 25
and this chapter.
Exterior Walls, Openings and Partitions

Sec. 2003. (a) Exterior Walls. Exterior walls shall be constructed of noncom-
bustible materials and shall comply with the fire-resistive requirements set forth
in Section 504 and Table No. 17-A. For Group H Occupancies, see also Table No. ;):)
~c I
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Nonbearing walls fronting on public ways, or yards having a
width of at least 40 feet may be unprotected when entirely of noncombustible materi-
al.
2. In other than Groups H and I Occupancies, exterior nonbearing walls may be
noncombustible one-hour fire resistive where unprotected openings are permitted
and noncombustible two-hour fire resistive where protection of openings is required.
3. In Group R, Division I, and Group B Occupancies, exterior noncombustible
bearing walls may be two-hour fire resistive where openings are permitted.
4. Approved fire-retardant-treated wood framing may be used within the assem-
bly of exterior walls as permitted by Exceptions 1, 2 and 3, provided the required fire
resistance is maintained and the exposed outer and inner faces of such walls are non-
combustible.
5. Wood columns and arches conforming to heavy-timber sizes may be used exter-
nally where exterior walls are permitted to be of unprotected, noncombustible con-
struction or where one-hour fire-resistive noncombustible exterior walls are
permitted.
(b) Openings in Walls. Openings in exterior walls shall conform to the require-
ments of Section 504 (b) and shall be protected by a fire assembly having a
three-fourths-hour fire-resistive rating when they are less than 20 feet from an ad-
jacent property line or the center line of a public way.
sions 1, 2 and 3 Occupancies less than 5 feet from the property line, and no openings
line.
For Group H Occupancies, see also Chapter 9.
139
(c) Partitions. Bearing partitions, when constructed of wood, shall comply with
Section 2516 (d).
Sec. 2004. (a) General. Stairways shall comply with the requirements of Chap-
ter 33.
(b) Interior. Interior stairways serving buildings not exceeding three stories in
height may be constructed of any material permitted by this code.
In buildings more than three stories in height, interior stairways shall be con-
structed as required for Type I buildings.
(c) Exterior. Exterior stairways shall be of noncombustible material except that
on buildings not exceeding two stories in height, they may be of wood not less than
2 inches in nominal thickness.
Roofs
Sec. 2005. Roof coverings shall be as specified in Chapter 32 .
,,•.1.•1.
.
pa;c~~~~~~i~~;~~~~ ~~~~~~~~:r::~f~~:~~i~~fr~;'~~~~s~~~~~~!~~;e~~~~
tural frame may be of unprotected noncombustible materials when every part of
? the roof framing, including the structural frame, is 25 feet or more above the floor,
balcony or gallery immediately below. Heavy-timbermembers in accordance with
Section 2106 may be used for such unprotected members in one-story buildings.
140
Chapter 21
TYPE IV BUILDINGS
Definition
Sec. 2101. Structural elements of Type IV buildings may be of any materials
permitted by this code.
Type IV construction shall conform to Section 2106 except that permanent par-
titions and members of the structural frame may be of other materials, provided
they have a fire resistance of not less than one hour.
and this chapter.
Exterior Walls, Openings and Partitions

Sec. 2103. (a) Exterior Walls. Exterior walls shall be constructed of noncom-
bustible materials and shall comply with the fire-resistive requirements set forth
in Section504 and Table No. 17-A. For Group H Occupancies, see a1soTable No. i!!i!
9-C. :w
EXCEPTIONS: I. Nonbearing walls fronting on public ways, or yards having
a width of at least 40 feet may be unprotected when entirely of noncombustible ma-
terial.
2. In other than Groups H and I Occupancies, exterior nonbearing walls may be
noncombustible one-hour fire resistive where unprotected openings are permitted
and noncombustible two-hour fire resistive where protection of openings is required.
3. In Group R, Division 1 and Group B Occupancies, exterior noncombustible
bearing walls may be two-hour fire resistive where openings are permitted.
4. Approved fire-retardant-treated wood framing may be used within the assem-
bly of exterior walls as permitted by Exceptions I, 2 and 3, provided the required fire
resistance is maintained and the exposed outer and inner faces of such walls are non-
combustible.
5. Wood columns and arches conforming to heavy-timber sizes may beuseu e-:~o\eT
nally where exterior walls are permitted to be unprotected noncombustible construc-
tion or where one-hour fire-resistive noncombustible exterior walls are permitted.
(b) Openings in Walls. Openings in exterior walls shall conform to the require-
ments of Section 504 (b) and shall be protected by a fire assembly having a
three-fourths-hour fire-resistive rating when they are less than 20 feet from an ad-
jacent property line or the center line of a public way.
sions 1, 2 and 3 Occupancies less than 5 feet from the property line and no openings
line.
141
(c) Partitions. Bearing partitions, when constructed of wood, shall comply with
Section 2516 (d).
ter 33.
(b) Interior. Interior stairways serving buildings not exceeding three stories in
height may be constructed of wood or as required for Type I buildings. If con-
structed of wood, treads and risers shall not be less than 2 inches in thickness, ex-
cept where built on laminated or plank inclines as required for floors, where they
may be of l-inch thickness. Wood stair stringers shall be a minimum of3 inches in
thickness and not less than 10 inches in depth.
In buildings more than three stories in height, interior stairways shall be con-
structed as required for Type I buildings.
(c) Exterior. Exterior stairways shall be of noncombustible material except that
on buildings not exceeding two stories in height they may be of wood not less than
2 inches in nominal thickness.
Roofs
Sec. 2105. Roof coverings shall be as specified in Chapter 32.
Heavy-timber Construction
Sec. 2106. (a) General. Details of heavy-timber construction shall be in accor-
dance with the provisions of this section. Unless otherwise specified, all dimen-
sions are nominal as defined in Section 2502.
(b) Columns. Wood columns may be of sawn timber or structural glued-lami-
nated timber not less than 8 inches in any dimension when supporting roof or floor
loads except as specified in Section 2106 (d).
Columns shall be continuous or superimposed and connected in an approved
manner.
(c) Floor Framing. Beams and girders may be of sawn timber or structural
glued-laminated timber and shall not be less than 6 inches in width and not less than
I 0 inches in depth.
Framed sawn timber or structural glued-laminated timber arches, which spring
from the floor line and support floor loads, shall not be less than 8 inches in any
dimension.
Framed lumber or structural glued-laminated timber trusses supporting floor
loads shall have members of not less than 8 inches in any dimension.
(d) Roof Framing. Framed sawn timber arches or structural glued-laminated
timber arches for roof construction, which spring from the floor line and do not
support floor loads, shall have members not less than 6 inches in width and not less
than 8 inches in depth for the lower half of the height and not less than 6 inches in
depth for the upper half.
Framed sawn timber or structural glued-laminated timber arches for roof con·
struction, which spring from the top of walls or wall abutments, framed lumber or
142
structural glued-laminated timber trusses, and other roof framing which does not
support floor loads, shall have members not less than 4 inches in width and not less
than 6 inches in depth. Spaced members may be composed of two or more pieces
not less than 3 inches in thickness, when blocked solidly throughout their interven-
ing spaces, or when such spaces are tightly closed by a continuous wood cover plate
of not less than 2 inches in thickness, secured to the underside of the members.
Splice plates shall not be less than 3 inches in thickness. When protected by an ap-
proved automatic sprinkler system under the roof deck, framing members shall not
be less than 3 inches in thickness.
(e) Floors. Floors shall be without concealed spaces. Floors shall be of planks,
splined or tongue and groove, of not less than 3 inches in thickness covered with
l-inch tongue-and-groove flooring laid crosswise or diagonally, or 15hz-inch ply-
wood, or of plank not less than 4 inches in width set on edge close together and well
spiked, and covered with l-inch flooring or 15hz-inch plywood. The lumber shall
be laid so that no continuous line of joints will occur except at points of support.
Floors shall not extend closer than 1/z inch to walls. Such 1/z-inch space shall be
covered by a molding fastened to the wall and so arranged that it will not obstruct
the swelling or shrinkage movements of the floor. Corbeling of masonry walls un-
der floors may be used in place of such molding.
(f) Roof Decks. Roofs shall be without concealed spaces and roof decks shall be
of planks, splined or tongue and groove, of not less than 2-inch thickness, or
11/ 8-inch tongue-and-groove plywood with exterior glue, or of a double thickness
of l-inch boards with tongue-and-groove joints, or with staggered joints, oflumber
not less than 3 inches nominal in width, set on edge close together and laid as re-
quired for floors.
(g) Construction Details. Approved wall plate boxes or hangers shall be pro-
vided where wood beams, girders or trusses rest on masonry or concrete walls.
Girders and beams shall be closely fitted around columns, and adjoining ends
shall be cross tied to each other, or intertied by caps or ties, to transfer horizontal
loads across the joints. Wood bolsters may be placed on top of columns which sup-
port roof loads only.
Where intermediate beams are used to support a floor, they shall rest on top of the
girders, or shall be supported by ledgers or bloc:ks securely fastened to the sides of
the girders, or they may be supported by approved metal hangers into which the
ends of the beams shall be closely fitted.
In heavy-timber roof construction, every roof girder and at least every alternate
roof beam shall be anchored to its supporting member; roof decks, where sup-
ported by a wall, shall be anchored to such wall at intervals not exceeding 20 feet;
every monitor and every sawtooth construction shall be anchored to the main roof
construction. Such anchors shall consist of steel or iron bolts of sufficient strength
to resist vertical uplift of the roof.
(h) Mechanically Laminated Floors and Roof Decks. Mechanically lami-
nated floors and roof decks conforming to Section 2516 (I) may be used as
heavy-timber floors or roof decks, provided the minimum thickness and other
applicable requirements of the section are followed.
143
(i) Partitions. Partitions shall be of solid wood construction formed by not less
than two layers of l-inch matched boards or laminated construction of 4-inch
thickness, or of one-hour fire-resistive construction.
144
Chapter 22
TYPE V BUILDINGS
Definition
Sec. 2201. Type V buildings may be of any materials allowed by this code.
Type V One-hour buildings shall be of one-hour fire-resistive construction
throughout.
Chapter 17.
For requirements due to occupancy, see Chapters 6 through 12.
and this chapter.

Sec. 2203. Exterior walls shall comply with fire-rc"stive requirements set forth
in Section 504 and Table No. 17 -A. Openings in exterior walls located where pro-
tected openings are required by Table No. 5-A shall be protected by fixed fire win- i!ii!
dows or automatic-closing fire windows or self-closing doors having a fire-
protection rating of at least three-fourths hour and shall comply with Section 504.
For Group H Occupancies, see Table No. 9-C.
ter 33.
(b) Interior. Interior stairways may be constructed of any materials permitted
by this code.
(c) Exterior. Exterior stairways shall be constructed of wood not less than 2 in-
ches in nominal thickness, or may be of noncombustible materials.
Roofs
Sec. 2205. Roof coverings shall be as specified in Chapter 32.
Except in retail sales and storage areas classified as Group B, Division 2 Occu- f
pancies and in Group H Occupancies, roofs and their members other than the struc- i!i!
the
turalroof framing,
frame may beincluding the structural
of unprotected frame, is 25materials
noncombustible feet or more
whenabove thepart
every
balcony or gallery immediately below. Heavy-timber members in accordance with
floor, =·:~_ ·
of ..
....
=·_..
='.-=··'..
j:··''...
·_· · ' :j· · ·
Section 2106 may be used for such unprotected members in one-story buildings.
145
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
NOTES
146
PartV
ENGINEERING REGULATION5-QUALITY
AND DESIGN OF THE MATERIALS OF
CONSTRUCTION
Chapter 23
Part I-GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Scope
Sec. 2301. This chapter prescribes general design requirements applicable to all
struct1,1res regulated by this code.
Definitions
Sec. 2302. The following definitions give the meaning of certain terms used in
this chapter:
DEAD LOAD is the vertical load due to the weight of all permanent structural
and nonstructural components of a building, such as walls, floors, roofs and fixed
service equipment.
LIVE LOAD is the load superimposed by the use and occupancy of the building
not including the wind load, earthquake load or dead load.
LOAD DURATION is the period of continuous application of a given load, or
the aggregate of periods of intermittent application of the same load.
Design Methods
Sec. 2303. (a) General. All buildings and portions thereof shall be designed and
constructed to sustain, within the stress limitations specified in this code, all dead
loads and all other loads specified in this chapter or elsewhere in this code. Impact
loads shall be considered in the design of any structure where impact loads occur.
EXCEPTION: Unless otherwise required by the building official, buildings or
portions thereof which are constructed in accordance with the conventional framing
requirements specified in Chapter 25 of this code shall be deemed to meet the require-
ments of this section.
(b) Rationality. Any system or method of construction to be used shall be based
on a rational analysis in accordance with well-established principles of mechanics.
Such analysis shall result in a system which provides a complete load path capable
of transferring all loads and forces from their point of origin to the load-resisting
elements. The analysis shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
I. Distribution ofhorizontal shear. The total lateral force shall be distributed to
the various vertical elements of the lateral force-resisting system in proportion to
their rigidities considering the rigidity of the horizontal bracing system or dia-
phragm. Rigid elements that are assumed not to be part of the lateral force-resisting
147
system may be incorporated into buildings, provided that their effect on the action
of the system is considered and provided for in the design.
2. Horizontal torsional moments. Provision shall be made for the increased
forces induced on resisting elements of the structural system resulting from torsion
due to eccentricity between the center of application of the lateral forces and the
center of rigidity of the lateral force-resisting system. Forces shall not be decreased
due to torsional effects. For accidental torsion requirements for seismic design, see
Section 2334 (f).
3. Stability against overturning. Every building or structure shall be designed
to resist the overturning effects caused by the lateral forces specified in this chapter.
See Section 2317 for wind and Section 2334 for seismic.
4. Anchorage. Anchorage of the roof to walls and columns, and of walls and
columns to foundations, shall be provided to resist the uplift and sliding forces
which result from the application ofthe prescribed forces. For additional require-
ments for masonry or concrete walls, see Section 2310.
(c) Critical Distribution of Live Loads. Where structural members are ar-
ranged so as to create continuity, the loading conditions which would cause maxi-
mum shear and bending moments along the member shall be investigated.
(d) Stress Increases. All allowable stresses and soil-bearing values specified in
this code for working stress design may be increased one third when considering
wind or earthquake forces either acting alone or when combined with vertical
loads. No increase will be allowed for vertical loads acting alone.
(e) Load Factors. Load factors for ultimate strength design of concrete and
plastic design of steel shall be as indicated in the appropriate chapters on the mate-
rials.
(f) Load Combinations. Every building component shall be provided with
strength adequate to resist the most critical effect resulting from the following
combination of loads (floor live load shall not be included where its inclusion re-
sults in lower stresses in the member under investigation): 1
l. Dead plus floor live plus roof live (or snow).Z
2. Dead plus floor live plus wind2 (or seismic).
3. Dead plus floor live plus wind plus snow/2. 2
4. Dead plus floor live plus snow plus wind/2. 2
5. Dead plus floor live plus snow 3 plus seismic.
1Lateral
earth pressure shall be included in the design where it will result in a more critical
combination.
2Crane hook loads need not be combined with roof live load or with more than three fourths
of the snow load or one half of the wind load.
3Snow loads over 30 pounds per square foot (psf) may be reduced 75 percent upon approval
of the building official, and snow loads 30 psf or less need not be combined with seismic.
148
Floor Design
Sec. 2304. (a) General. Floors shall be designed for the unit loads set forth in
Table No. 23-A. These loads shall be taken as the minimum live loads in pounds
per square foot of horizontal projection to be used in the design of buildings for the
occupancies listed, and loads at least equal shall be assumed for uses not listed in
this section but which create or accommodate similar loadings.
When it can be determined in designing floors that the actual live load will be
greater than the value shown in Table No. 23-A, the actual live load shall be used in
the design of such buildings or part thereof and special provisions shall be made for
machine or apparatus loads.
(b) Distribution of Uniform Floor Loads. Where uniform floor loads are in-
volved, consideration may be limited to full dead load on all spans in combination
with full live load on adjacent spans and on alternate spans.
(c) Concentrated Loads. Provision shall be made in designing floors for a con-
centrated load as set forth in Table No. 23-A placed upon any space 2 1h feet square,
wherever this load upon an otherwise unloaded floor would produce stresses great-
er than those caused by the uniform load required therefor.
Provision shall be made in areas where vehicles are used or stored for concen-
trated loads consisting of two or more loads spaced 5 feet nominally on center with-
out uniform live loads. Each load shall be 40 percent of the gross weight of the
maximum-size vehicle to be accommodated. The condition of concentrated or uni-
form live load producing the greater stresses shall govern. Parking garages for the
storage of private or pleasure-type motor vehicles with no repair or fueling shall
have a floor system designed for a concentrated wheel load of not Jess than 2,000
pounds without uniform live loads. The condition of concentrated or uniform live
load producing the greater stresses shall govern.
Provision shall be made for special vertical and lateral loads as set forth in Table
No. 23-B.
(d) Partition Loads. Floors in office buildings and in other buildings where par-
tition locations are subject to change shall be designed to support, in addition to all
other loads, a uniformly distributed dead load equal to 20 pounds per square foot.
Access floor systems may be designed to support, in addition to all other loads, a
uniformly distributed dead load equal to 10 pounds per square foot.
(e) Live Loads Posted. The live loads for which each floor or part thereof of a
commercial or industrial building is or has been designed shall have such designed
live loads conspicuously posted by the owner in that part of each story in which
they apply, using durable metal signs, and it shall be unlawful to remove or deface
such notices. The occupant of the building shall be responsible for keeping the ac-
tual load below the allowable limits.
Roof Design
Sec. 2305. (a) General. Roofs shall sustain, within the stress limitations of this
code, all "dead loads" plus unit "live loads" as set forth in Table No. 23-C. The
live loads shall be assumed to act vertically upon the area projected upon a horizon-
tal plane.
149
(b) Distribution of Loads. Where uniform roofloads are involved in the design
of structural members arranged so as to create continuity, consideration may be
limited to full dead loads on all spans in combination with full live loads on adja-
cent spans and on alternate spans.
EXCEPTION: Alternate span loading need not be considered where the uni-
form roof live load is 20 pounds per square foot or more or the provisions of Section
2305 (d) are met.
(c) Unbalanced Loading. Unbalanced loads shall be used where such loading
will result in larger members or connections. Trusses and arches shall be designed
to resist the stresses caused by unit live loads on one half of the span if such loading
results in reverse stresses, or stresses greater in any portion than the stresses pro-
duced by the required unit live load upon the entire span. For roofs whose structures
are composed of a stressed shell, framed or solid, wherein stresses caused by any
point loading are distributed throughout the area of the shell, the requirements for
unbalanced unit live load design may be reduced 50 percent.
(d) Snow Loads. Snow loads full or unbalanced shall be considered in place of
loads set forth in Table No. 23-C, where such loading will result in larger members
or connections.
Potential accumulation of snow at valleys, parapets, roof structures and offsets
in roofs of uneven configuration shall be considered. Where snow loads occur, the
snow loads shall be determined by the building official.
Snow loads in excess of 20 pounds per square foot may be reduced for each de-
gree of pitch over 20 degrees by Rs as determined by the following formula:
R =~ 1
s 40 2
WHERE:
Rs snow load reduction in pounds per square foot per degree of pitch over
20 degrees.
S total snow load in pounds per square foot.
For alternate design procedure see Appendix Chapter 23, Division I.
(e) Special Roof Loadings. Roofs to be used for special purposes shall be de-
signed for appropriate loads as approved by the building official.
Greenhouse roof bars, purlins and rafters shall be designed to carry a 100-
pound-minimum concentrated load in addition to the live load.
(f) Water Accumulation. All roofs shall be designed with sufficient slope or
camber to assure adequate drainage after the long-time deflection from dead load
or shall be designed to support maximum loads, including possible ponding of wa-
ter from any source, including snow, due to deflection. See Section 2307 for deflec-
tion criteria.
Reduction of Live Loads

Sec. 2306. The design live load determined using the unit live loads as set forth
in Table No. 23-A for floors and Table No. 23-C, Method 2, for roofs may be re-
duced on any member supporting more than 150 square feet, including flat slabs,
150
except for floors in places of public assembly and for live loads greater than I 00
pounds per square foot, in accordance with the following formula:
R = r (A - 150) (6-1)
The reduction shall not exceed 40 percent for members receiving load from one
\e'le\ only, 60 percent for other members, orR as determined by the following for-
mula:
R = 23.1 (I + D/L) (6-2)
WHERE:
R reduction in percentage.
r = rate of reduction equal to 0.08 percent for floors. See Table No. 23-C for
roofs.
A area of floor or roof supported by the member.
D dead load per square foot of area supported by the member.
L unit live load per square foot of area supported by the member.
For storage live loads exceeding I 00 pounds per square foot, no reduction shall
be made, except that design live loads on columns may be reduced 20 percent.
The live load reduction shall not exceed 40 percent in garages for the storage of
private pleasure cars having a capacity of not more than nine passengers per ve-
hicle.
Deflection
Sec. 2307. The deflection of any structural members shall not exceed the values
set forth in Table No. 23-D, based on the factors set forth in Table No. 23-E. The
deflection criteria representing the most restrictive condition shall apply. Deflec-
tion criteria for materials not specified shall be developed in a manner consistent
with the provisions of this section. See Section 2305 (f) for camber requirements.
Span tables for light wood-frame construction as specified in Section 2517 (d) and
(h) 2 shall conform to the design criteria contained therein, except that where the
dead load exceeds 50 percent of the live load, Table No. 23-D shall govern. (For
aluminum, see Section 2803.)
Special Design
Sec. 2308. (a) General. In addition to the design loads specified in this chapter,
the design of all structures shall consider the special loads set forth in Table No.
23-B and in this section.
(b) Retaining Walls. Retaining walls shall be designed to resist the lateral pres-
sure of the retained material in accordance with accepted engineering practice.
Walls retaining drained earth may be designed for pressure equivalent to that ex-
erted by a fluid weighing not less than 30 pounds per cubic foot and having a depth
equal to that ofthe retained earth. Any surcharge shall be in addition to the equiva-
lent fluid pressure.
Retaining walls shall be designed to resist sliding by at least 1.5 times the lateral
force and overturning by at least 1.5 times the overturning moment.
151
(c) Heliport and Helistop Landing Areas. In addition to other design require-
ments of this chapter, heliport and helistop landing or touchdown areas shall be de-
signed for the maximum stress induced by the following:
I. Dead load plus actual weight of the helicopter.
2. Dead load plus a single concentrated impact load covering 1 square foot of
0.7 5 times the fully loaded weight of the helicopter if it is equipped with hydrau-
lic-type shock absorbers, or 1.5 times the fully loaded weight of the helicopter if it
is equipped with a rigid or skid-type landing gear.
3. The dead load plus a uniform live load of 100 pounds per square foot. There-
quired live load may be reduced in accordance with the formula in Section 2306.
(d) Hydrostatic Uplift. All foundations, slabs and other footings subject to wa-
ter pressure shall be designed to resist a uniformly distributed uplift equal to the full
hydrostatic pressure.
t: (e) Flood-resistant Construction. For flood-resistant construction require-
:·: : ments see Appendix Chapter 23, Division IV.
Walls and Structural Framing

Sec. 2309. (a) General. Walls and structural framing shall be erected true and
plumb in accordance with the design.
(b) Interior Walls. Interior walls, permanent partitions and temporary parti-
tions which exceed 6 feet in height shall be designed to resist all loads to which they
are subjected but not less than a force of 5 pounds per square foot applied perpen-
dicular to the walls. The deflection of such walls under a load of 5 pounds per
square foot shall not exceed 1fz 40 ofthe span for walls with brittle finishes and 1/ 120
of the span for walls with flexible finishes. See Table No. 23-P for earthquake de-
sign requirements where such requirements are more restrictive.
EXCEPTION: Flexible, folding or portable partitions are not required to meet
the load and deflection criteria but must be anchored to the supporting structure to
meet the provisions of this code.
Anchorage of Concrete or Masonry Walls

}~ Sec. 2310. Concrete or masonry walls shall be anchored to all floors, roofs and
~I
other structural elements which provide required lateral support for the wall. Such
anchorage shall provide a positive direct connection capable of resisting the hori-
zontal forces specified in this chapter or a minimum force of200 pounds per lineal
foot of wall, whichever is greater. Walls shall be designed to resist bending between
anchors where the anchor spacing exceeds 4 feet. Required anchors in masonry
walls of hollow units or cavity walls shall be embedded in a reinforced grouted
structural element ofthe wall. See Sections 2336, 2337 (b) 8 and 9.
Part II-WIND DESIGN

General
Sec. 2311. Every building or structure and every portion thereof shall be de-
signed and constructed to resist the wind effects determined in accordance with the
152
requirements of this section. Wind shall be assumed to come from any horizontal
direction. No reduction in wind pressure shall be taken for the shielding effect of
adjacent structures.
Structures sensitive to dynamic effects, such as buildings with a height-to-width
ratio greater than five, structures sensitive to wind-excited oscillations, such as
vortex shedding or icing, and buildings over 400 feet in height, shall be, and any
structure may be, designed in accordance with approved national standards.
The provisions of this section do not apply to building and foundation systems in :}
)
those areas subject to scour and water pressure by wind and wave action. Buildings t
and foundations subject to such loads shall be designed in accordance with ap- .•:·,.~.~
proved national standards.
Definitions
Sec. 2312. The following definitions apply only to this part:
BASIC WIND SPEED is the fastest-mile wind speed associated with an annual : :
~:~~:~~~t~a~~~~~ ~~asured at a point 33 feet above the ground for an area having :111
EXPOSURE B has terrain with buildings, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet I!

or more in height covering at least 20 percent of the area extending one mile or ,• •
more from the site.
EXPOSURE C has terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half t'
mi~;;~;~~;~ :~;::::~~s ~~~ :: s;~:~:::~xposure

1
in areas with basic wind 1!1
speeds of80 miles per hour (mph) or greater and has terrain which is flat and unob- t:
structed facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in width relative to any ,:. ',.:.•
quadrant of the building site. Exposure D extends inland from the shoreline 1/ 4 mile :::::
or 10 times the building height, whichever is greater.
~ill~
FASTEST -MILE WIND SPEED is the wind speed obtained from wind veloc- j
ity maps prepared by the National Oceanographic and Atmospheric Administra- Ji
:::··
tion and is the highl'st sustained average wind speed based on the time required for ~?
a mile-long sam. of air to pass a fixed point. ::~:
OPEN STRU< 'lJ RE or STORY is a partially enclosed structure that has a
greater area of exterior wall openings on any one wall than the sum of the areas of
the openings on all the other walls and has more than 15 percent of the wall area
open. All windows and doors or other openings in exterior walls shall be consid-
ered as openings unless such openings and their frames are specifically detailed
and designed to resist the loads on elements and components in accordance with
the provisions of this section.
SPECIAL WIND REGION is an area where local records and terrain features
~n ~\c.ate 50-year fastest-mile basic wind speed is higher than shown in Figure No.
3 1111
UNENCLOSED STRUCTURE or STORY is a structure which has openings

on two or more sides but the sum of the areas of openings in each side is within 15
percent or less of each other.
153
I
Symbols and Notations
Sec. 2313. The following symbols and notations apply to the provisions of this
part.
~.. P = design wind pressure.
~ C, combined height, exposure and gust factor coefficient as given in Table
No. 23-G.
Cq pressure coefficient for the structure or portion of structure under con-
sideration as given in Table No. 23-H.
Qs wind stagnation pressure at the standard height of 33 feet as set forth in
Table No. 23-F.
I importance factor as set forth in Table No. 23-L.
Basic Wind Speed

ml Sec. 2314. The minimum basic wind speed at any site shall not be less than that
shown in Figure No. 23-1. For those areas designated in Figure No. 23-1 as special
wind regions and other areas where local records or terrain indicate higher 50-year
. . (mean recurrence interval) fastest-mile wind speeds, these higher values shall be
~ the minimum basic wind speeds.
Exposure
Sec. 2315. An exposure shall be assigned at each site for which a building or
structure is to be designed.
Design Wind Pressures

Sec. 2316. Design wind pressures for structures or elements of structures shall
be determined for any height in accordance with the following formula:
I (16-1)
Primary Frames and Systems

Sec. 2317. (a) General. The primary frames or load-resisting system of every
structure shall be designed for the pressures calculated using Formula ( 16-1) and
the pressure coefficients, Cq, of either Method I or Method 2. In addition, design
of the overall structure and its primary load-resisting system shall conform to Sec-
tion 2303.
The base overturning moment for the entire structure, or for any one of its indi-
vidual primary lateral-resisting elements, shall not exceed two thirds of the
dead-load-resisting moment. For an entire structure with a height-to-width ratio of
0.5 or less in the wind direction and a maximum height of 60 feet, the combination
of the effects of uplift and overturning may be reduced by one third. The weight of
earth superimposed over footings may be used to calculate the dead-load-resisting
moment.
(b) Method 1 (Normal Force Method). Method I shall be used for the design of
gabled rigid frames and may be used for any structure. In the Normal Force Meth-
154
od, the wind pressures shall be assumed to act simultaneously normal to all exterior
surfaces. For pressures on roofs and leeward walls, C, shall be evaluated at the
mean roof height.
(c) Method 2 (Projected Area Method). Method 2 may be used for any struc-
ture less than 200 feet in height except those using gabled rigid frames. This meth-
od may be used in stability determinations for any structure less than 200 feet high.
In the Projected Area Method, horizontal pressures shall be assumed to act upon
the full vertical projected area of the structure, and the vertical pressures shall be
assumed to act simultaneously upon the full horizontal projected area.
Elements and Components of Structures

Sec. 2318. Design wind pressures for each element or component of a structure
shall be determined from Formula (16-1) and Cq values from Table No. 23-H, and
shall be applied perpendicular to the surface. For outward acting forces the value
of C, shall be obtained from Table No. 23-G based on the mean roof height and
applied for the entire height of the structure. Each element or component shall be
designed for the more severe of the following loadings:
I. The pressures determined using Cq values for elements and components act-
ing over the entire tributary area of the element.
2. The pressures determined using Cq values for local areas at discontinuities
such as comers, ridges and eaves. These local pressures shall be applied over a dis-
tance from a discontinuity of 10 feet or 0.1 times the least width of the structure,
whichever is less.
The wind pressures from Sections 2317 and 2318 need not be combined.
Open-frame Towers
Sec. 2319. Radio towers and other towers of trussed construction shall be de-
signed and constructed to withstand wind pressures specified in this section, multi-
plied by the shape factors set forth in Table No. 23-H.
Miscellaneous Structures
Sec. 2320. Greenhouses, lath houses, agricultural buildings or fences 12 feet or
less in height shall be designed in accordance with Part II, Chapter 23. However,
three fourths of qs, but not less than I 0 pounds per square foot, may be substituted
for q, in Formula ( 16-1 ). Pressures on local areas at discontinuities need not be con-
sidered.
Occupancy Categories l
Sec. 2321. For the purpose of wind-resistant design, each structure shall be t~
placed in one of the occupancy categories listed in Table No. 23-K. Table No. 23-L .,
lists importance factors,/, for each category. iJJj
(Sections 2322 through 2329 are reserved.)

155
Part Ill-EARTHQUAKE DESIGN

General
Sec. 2330. (a) Minimum Seismic Design. Structures and portions thereof shall,
as a minimum, be designed and constructed to resist the effects of seismic ground
motions as provided in this section.
(b) Seismic and Wind. When the code-prescribed wind design produces greater
effects, the wind design shall govern, but detailing requirements and limitations
prescribed in this and referenced sections shall be followed.
Definitions
Sec. 2331. For the purposes of this section certain terms are defined as follows:
BASE is the level at which the earthquake motions are considered to be imparted
to the structure or the level at which the structure as a dynamic vibrator is sup-
ported.
BASE SHEAR, V, is the total design lateral force or shear at the base of a struc-
ture.
BEARING WALL SYSTEM is a structural system without a complete verti-
~i cal load-carrying space frame. See Section 2333 (f) 2.
BOUNDARY ELEMENT is an element at edges of openings or at perimeters
of shear walls or diaphragms.
BRACED FRAME is an essentially vertical truss system of the concentric or
eccentric type which is provided to resist lateral forces.
BUILDING FRAME SYSTEM is an essentially complete space frame which
provides support for gravity loads. See Section 2333 (f) 3.
COLLECTOR is a member or element provided to transfer lateral forces from
a portion of a structure to vertical elements of the lateral force-resisting system.
CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME is a braced frame in which the
members are subjected primarily to axial forces.
DIAPHRAGM is a horizontal or nearly horizontal system acting to transmit lat-
eral forces to the vertical resisting elements. The term "diaphragm" includes hori-
zontal bracing systems.
DIAPHRAGM CHORD is the boundary element of a diaphragm or shear wall
which is assumed to take axial stresses analogous to the flanges of a beam.
DIAPHRAGM STRUT (drag strut, tie, collector) is the element of a dia-
phragm parallel to the applied load which collects and transfers diaphragm shear to
the vertical resisting elements or distributes loads within the diaphragm. Such
members may take axial tension or compression.
DRIFT. See "story drift."
DUAL SYSTEM is a combination of special or intermediate moment-resisting
frames and shear walls or braced frames designed in accordance with the criteria of
Section 2333 (f) 5.
ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) is a steel-braced frame de-
signed in conformance with Section 2710 (i).
156
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES are those structures which are necessary for emer- .'•.,:.,•.,!:·'·
gency operations subsequent to a natural disaster.

FLEXIBLE ELEMENT or system is one whose deformation under lateral
load is significantly larger than adjoining parts of the system. Limiting ratios for
defining specific flexible elements are set forth in Sections 2334 (c) 2 B, 2334 (f) or
2336 (b).
HORIZONTAL BRACING SYSTEM is a horizontal truss system that serves
the same function as a diaphragm.
INTERMEDIATE MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME (IMRF) is a concrete ,~t
frame designed in accordance with Section 2625 (k).
LATERAL FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM is that part ofthe structural sys-
tem assigned to resist lateral forces.
:·::
MOMENT -RESISTING FRAME is a frame in which members and joints are :.
capable of resisting forces primarily by flexure. ,,
ORDINARY MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME (OMRF) is a moment-res- . .•1..•.•
isting frame not meeting special detailing requirements for ductile behavior.
ORTHOGONAL EFFECTS are the effects on structural elements common to
the resisting systems along two orthogonal axes due to earthquake forces acting in
a direction other than those axes.
P-DELTA EFFECT is the secondary effect on shears, axial forces and mo-
ments of frame members induced by the vertical loads acting on the laterally dis-
placed building frame.
SHEAR WALL is a wall designed to resist lateral forces parallel to the plane of
the wall (sometimes referred to as a vertical diaphragm).
SOFT STORY is one in which the lateral stiffness is less than 70 percent ofthe
stiffness of the story above. See Table No. 23-M.
SPACE FRAME is a three-dimensional structural system, without bearing
walls, composed of members interconnected so as to function as a complete
self-contained unit with or without the aid of horizontal diaphragms or floor-brac-
ing systems.
:!:;::
SPECIAL MOMENT -RESISTING FRAME (SMRF) is a moment-resisting t
frame specially detailed to provide ductile behavior and comply with the require- :•:
ments given in Chapter 26 or 27. !J
STORY is the space between levels. Story x is the story below Level x.
STORY DRIFT is the displacement of one level relative to the level above or
below.
STORY DRIFT RATIO is the story drift divided by the story height.
STORY SHEAR, Vx, is the summation of design lateral forces above the story
under consideration.
STRENGTH is the useable capacity of a structure or its members to resist load
within the deformation limits prescribed in this section and referenced sections.
STRUCTURE is an assemblage offraming members designed to support grav-
ity loads and resist lateral forces. Structures may be categorized as building struc-
tures or non building structures.
157
::,; VERTICAL LOAD-CARRYING FRAME is a space frame designed to carry

r all vertical gravity loads.
WEAK STORY is one in which the story strength is less than 80 percent of that
of the story above. See Table No. 23-M.

Sec. 2332. The following symbols and notations apply to the provisions of this
section:
A,. the combined effective area, in square feet, of the shear walls in the
first story of the structure.
the minimum cross-sectional shear area in any horizontal plane in the
first story, in square feet, of a shear wall.
the torsional amplification factor at Level x.
numerical coefficient specified in S!!ction 2334 (b) I.
numerical coefficient specified in Section 2336 and given in Table
No. 23-P.
numerical coefficient given in Section 2334 (b) 2.
the length, in feet, of a shear wall in the first story in the direction par-
allel to the applied forces.
horizontal displacement at Level i relative to the base due to applied
lateral forces,f, for use in Formula (34-5).
lateral force at Level i for use in Formula (34-5).
lateral force applied to Level i, n, or x, respectively.
lateral forces on a part of the structure.
that portion of the base shear, V, considered concentrated at the top of
the structure in addition to Fn.
acceleration due to gravity.
height in feet above the base to Level i, n, or x, respectively.
I importance factor given in Table No. 23-L.
Leveli level of the structure referred to by the subscript i. "i = l" designates
the first level above the base.
Leveln that level which is uppermost in the main portion of the structure.
Levelx that level which is under design consideration. "x= l" designates the
first level above the base.
R., numerical coefficient given in Tables Nos. 23-0 and 23-Q.
s site coefficient for soil characteristics given in Table No. 23-J.
T fundamental period of vibration, in seconds, of the structure in the di-
rection under consideration.
the total design lateral force or shear at the base.
the design story shear in Story x.
the total seismic dead load defined in Section 2334 (a).
158
that portion of W which is located at or is assigned to Level i or x, re-

spectively.
the weight of the diaphragm and the elements tributary thereto at
Level x, including applicable portions of other loads defined in Sec-
tion 2334 (a).
the weight of an element or component.
seismic zone factor given in Table No. 23-I.
Criteria Selection
Sec. 2333. (a) Basis for design. The procedures and limitations for the design
of structures shall be determined considering zoning, site characteristics, occupan-
cy, configuration, structural system and height in accordance with this section. The
minimum design seismic forces shall be those determined in accordance with the
static lateral force procedure of Section 2334 except as modified by Section 2335
(e) 3. One- and two-family dwellings in Seismic Zone No. I need not conform to
the provisions of this section.
(b) Seismic Zones. Each site shall be assigned to a seismic zone in accordance
with Figure No. 23-2. Each structure shall be assigned a zone factor, Z, in accor-
dance with Table No. 23-1.
(c) Site Geology and Soil Characteristics. Soil profile type and site coefficient,
S, shall be established in accordance with Table No. 23-J.
(d) Occupancy Categories. For purposes of earthquake-resistant design, each
structure shall be placed in one of the occupancy categories listed in Table No.
23-K. Table No. 23-L lists importance factors,/, and review requirements for each
category.
(e) Configuration Requirements. I. General. Each structure shall be desig-
nated as being structurally regular or irregular.
2. Regular structures. Regular structures have no significant physical disconti-
nuities in plan or vertical configuration or in their lateral force-resisting systems
such as the irregular features described below.
3. Irregular structures.
A. Irregular structures have significant physical discontinuities in configuration
or in their lateral force-resisting systems. Irregular features include, but are not
limited to, those described in Tables Nos. 23-M and 23-N. Structures in Seismic
Zone No. I and in Occupancy Category IV in Seismic Zone No. 2 need be eva-
luated only for vertical irregularities of Type E (Table No. 23-M) and horizontal
irregularities of Type A (Table No. 23-N).
B. Structures having one or more of the features listed in Table No. 23-M shall be
designated as if having a vertical irregularity.
=:;::
EXCEPTION: Where no story drift ratio under design lateral forces is greater t:
than 1.3 times the story drift ratio of the story above the structure may be deemed to ~:!:
not have the structural irregularities of Type A orB in Table No. 23-M. The story drift
ratio for the top two stories need not be considered. The story drifts for this determina-
tion may be calculated neglecting torsional effects.
159
C. Structures having one or more ofthe features listed in Table No. 23-N shall be
designated as having a plan irregularity.
(t) Structural Systems. I. General. Structural systems shall be classified as
one of the types listed in Table No. 23-0 and defined in this subsection.
2. Bearing wall system. A structural system without a complete vertical
load-carrying space frame. Bearing walls or bracing systems provide support for
all or most gravity loads. Resistance to lateral load is provided by shear walls or
braced frames.
3. Building frame system. A structural system with an essentially complete
space frame providing support for gravity loads. Resistance to lateral load is pro-
vided by shear walls or braced frames.
4. Moment-resisting frame system. A structural system with an essentially
complete space frame provides support for gravity loads. Moment-resisting
frames provide resistance to lateral load primarily by flexural action of members.
5. Dual system. A structural system with the following features:
·'~ loa~~.An essentially complete space frame which provides support for gravity
•'·. .'· '.,·:,•'.
B. Resistance to lateral load is provided by shear walls or braced frames and mo-
'. ment-resisting frame (SMRF, IMRF or steel OMRF). The moment-resisting
'
·' ·'.~'/ ~:s~~~:~:.n be designed to independently resist at least 25 percent of the design
. C. The two systems shall be designed to resist the total design base shear in pro-
portion to their relative rigidities considering the interaction of the dual system at
all levels.
6. Undefined structural system. A structural system not listed in Table No.
23-0.
7. Non building structural system. A structural system conforming to Section
2338.
(g) Height Limits. Height limits for the various structural systems in Seismic
Zones Nos. 3 and 4 are given in Table No. 23-0.
EXCEPTION: Regular structures may exceed these limits by not more than 50
percent for unoccupied structures which are not accessible to the general public.
(h) Selection of Lateral Force Procedure. I. General. Any structure may be,
and certain structures defined below shall be, designed using the dynamic lateral
force procedures of Section 2335.
2. Static. The static lateral force procedure of Section 2334 may be used for the
following structures:
A. All structures, regular or irregular, in Seismic Zone No. I and in Occupancy
Category IV in Seismic Zone No. 2.
B. Regular structures under 240 feet in height with lateral force resistance pro-
vided by systems listed in Table No. 23-0 except where Section 2333 (h) 3 D ap-
plies.
C. Irregular structures not more than five stories or 65 feet in height.
160
D. Structures having a flexible upper portion supported on a rigid lower portion

where both portions of the structure considered separately can be classified as be-
ing regular, the average story stiffness of the lower portion is at least I 0 times the
average story stiffness of the upper portion and the period of the entire structure is
not greater than 1.1 times the period of the upper portion considered as a separate
structure fixed at the base.
3. Dynamic. The dynamic lateral force procedure of Section 2335 shall be used
for all other structures, including the following:
A. Structures 240 feet or more in height except as permitted by Section 2333 (h)
1A.
B. Structures having a stiffness, weight or geometric vertical irregularity of
Type A, B orCas defined in Table No. 23-M or structures having irregular features
not described in Table No. 23-M or 23-N except as permitted by Section 2334 (c) 2.
C. Structures over five stories or 65 feet in height in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4
not having the same structural system throughout their height except as permitted
by Section 2334 (c) 2.
D. Structures, regular or irregular, located on Soil Profile Type S4 which have a ,j,JJ
period greater than 0. 7 second. The analysis shall include the effects of the soils at
the site and shall conform to Section 2335 (b) 4.
(i) System Limitations. 1. Discontinuity. Structures with a discontinuity inca-
pacity, vertical irregularity Type E as defined in Table No. 23-M, shall not be over
two stories or 30 feet in height where the weak story has a calculated strength ofless
than 65 percent of the story above.
EXCEPTION: Where the weak story is capable of resisting a total lateral seis-
mic force of 3 (R• ./8) times the design force prescribed in Section 2334.
2. Undefined structural systems. Undefined structural systems shall be shown
by technical and test data which establish the dynamic characteristics and demon-
strate the lateral force resistance and energy absorption capacity to be equivalent to
systems listed in Table No. 23-0 for equivalent Rw values.
3. Irregular features. All structures having irregular features described in
Table No. 23-M or 23-N shall be designed to meet the additional requirements of
those sections referenced in the tables.
U) Alternative Procedures. I. General. Alternative lateral force procedures
using rational analyses based on well-established principles of mechanics may be
used in lieu of those prescribed in these provisions.
te~~ !e~;~;:!:~'~;~:ct~:i~:~~ sit~~~~~~;; ;~:~:P~~~~~~t!~~h:n~u~~~:r:~rfi~:~ !j//

and when special detailings are used to provide results equivalent to those obtained
by the use of conventional structural systems. For alternate design procedures on
seismic isolation systems, refer to Appendix Chapter 23, Division III, Earthquake
Regulations for Seismic-isolated Structures.
Minimum Design Lateral Forces and Related Effects

Sec. 2334. (a) General. Structures shall be designed for seismic forces coming
from any horizontal direction.
161
The design seismic forces may be assumed to act noncurrently in the direction of
each principal axis of the structure, except as required by Section 2337 (a).
Seismic dead load, W, is the total dead load and applicable portions of other loads
listed below.
l. In storage and warehouse occupancies, a minimum of 25 percent of the floor
live load shall be applicable.
2. Where a partition load is used in the floor design, a load of not less than l 0
pounds per square foot (psf) shall be included.
3. Where the snow load is greater than 30 psf, the snow load shall be included.
Where considerations of siting, configuration and load duration warrant, the snow
load may be reduced up to 75 percent when approved by the building official.
4. Total weight of permanent equipment shall be included.
(b) Static Force Procedure. I. Design base shear. The total design base shear in
a given direction shall be determined from the following formula:
(34-1)
1.25 s
C=~ (34-2)
The value of C need not exceed 2. 75 and may be used for any structure without
regard to soil type or structure period.
Except for those provisions where code-prescribed forces are scaled up by 3
(R•./8) the minimum value of the ratio C!Rw shall be 0.075.
2. Structure period. The value ofT shall be determined from one of the follow-
ing methods:
A. METHOD A: For all buildings, the value T may be approximated from the
following formula:
(34-3)
WHERE:
C, = 0.035 for steel moment-resisting frames.
C, 0.030 for reinforced concrete moment-resisting frames and eccentrical-
ly braced frames.
C = 0.020 for all other buildings.
Alternatively, the value of C, for structures with concrete or masonry shear walls
may be taken as 0.1/ j A,.
162
The value of Ac shall be determined from the following formula:

A, = ~e [0.2 + (D,/hn) 2 ] (34-4)
The value of D,fhn used in formula (34-4) shall not exceed 0.9.
B. METHOD B: The fundamental period T may be calculated using the struc-
tural properties and deformational characteristics of the resisting elements in a
properly substantiated analysis. This requirement may be satisfied by using the fol-
lowing formula:
T = 2Jr (34-5)
The values of/; represent any lateral force distributed approximately in accor-
dance with the principles of Formulas (34-6), (34-7) and (34-8) or any other
rational distribution. The elastic deflections, &, shall be calculated using the
applied lateral forces,fi. The value of C shall be not less than 80 percent of the value
obtained by using T from Method A.
(c) Combinations of Structural Systems. 1. General. Where combinations of
structural systems are incorporated into the same structure, the requirements of
this subsection shall be satisfied.
2. Vertical combinations. The value of Rw used in the design of any story shall
be less than or equal to the value of Rw used in the given direction for the story
above.
EXCEPTION: This requirement need not be applied to a story where the dead
weight above that story is less than I Opercent of the total dead weight of the structure.
Structures may be designed using the procedures of this section under the fol-
lowing conditions:
A. The entire structure is designed using the lowestRw of the lateral force-resist-
ing systems used, or
B. The following two-stage static analysis procedures may be used for structures
conforming to Section 2333 (h) 2 D:
(i) The flexible upper portion shall be designed as a separate structure, sup-
ported laterally by the rigid lower portion, using the appropriate value of
Rw.
(ii) The rigid lower portion shall be designed as a separate structure using the
appropriate value of Rw. The reactions from the upper portion shall be
those determined from the analysis of the upper portion amplified by the
ratio of the Rw of the upper portion over the Rw of the lower portion.
3. Combinations along different axes. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 where a
structure has a bearing wall system in only one direction, the value of Rw used for
design in the orthagonal direction shall not be greater than that used for the bearing
wall system.
163
Any combination of bearing wall systems, building frame systems, dual systems
or moment-resisting frame systems may be used to resist seismic forces in struc-
tures less than 160 feet in height. Only combinations of dual systems and special
moment-resisting frames shall be used to resist seismic forces in structures ex-
ceeding 160 feet in height in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4.
(d) Vertical Distribution of Force. The total force shall be distributed over the
height of the structure in conformance with Formulas (34-6), (34-7) and (34-8) in
the absence of a more rigorous procedure.
n
v = F, + L F; (34-6)
i:::l
The concentrated force F,, at the top, which is in addition to Fn, shall be deter-
mined from the formula:
F, = 0.07TV (34-7)
The value ofT used for the purpose of calculatingF, may be the period that corre-
sponds with the design base shear as computed using Formula (34-l ). F, need not
exceed 0.25V and may be considered as zero where Tis 0.7 seconds or less. The
remaining portion of the base shear shall be distributed over the height of the struc-
ture, including Level n, according to the following formula:
(V- F,) wA
Fx = --n::-----
L W;h;
(34-8)
i=l
At each level designated as x, the force Fx shall be applied over the area of the
building in accordance with the mass distribution at that level. Stresses in each
structural element shall be calculated as the effect of forces Fx and F, applied at the
appropriate levels above the base.
(e) Horizontal Distribution of Shear. The design story shear, Vx, in any story is
the sum of the forces F, andFx above that story. Vx shall be distributed to the various
elements of the vertical lateral force-resisting system in proportion to their rigidi-
ties, considering the rigidity of the diaphragm. See Section 2337 (b) 4 for rigid ele-
ments that are not intended to be part of the lateral force-resisting systems.
To account for the uncertainties in locations ofloads, the mass at each level shall
be assumed to be displaced from the calculated center of mass in each direction a
distance equal to five percent of the building dimension at that level perpendicular
to the direction of the force under consideration. The effect of this displacement on
the story shear distribution shall be considered.
(f) Horizontal Torsional Moments. Provision shall be made for the increased
shears resulting from horizontal torsion where diaphragms are not flexible. Dia-
phragms shall be considered flexible for purposes of this paragraph when the maxi-
mum lateral deformation of the diaphragm is more than two times the average story
drift of the associated story. This may be determined by comparing the computed
164
midpoint in-plane deflection of the diaphragm under lateral load with the story drift
of adjoining vertical resisting elements under equivalent tributary lateral load.
The torsional design moment at a given story shall be the moment resulting from
eccentricities between applied design lateral forces at levels above that story and
the vertical resisting elements in that story plus an accidental torsion.
The accidental torsional moment shall be determined by assuming the mass is
displaced as required by Section 2334 (e).
Where torsional irregularity exists, as defined in Table No. 23-N, the effects
shall be accounted for by increasing the accidental torsion at each level by an am-
plification factor, A"' determined from the following formula:
2
omax ]
Ax= (34-9)
[ 1.2 oavg
WHERE:
Om ax the maximum displacement at Level x.
Oavg the average of the displacements at the extreme points of the structure at
Levelx.
The value of Ax need not exceed 3.0.
The more severe loading for each element shall be considered for design.
(g) Overturning. 1. General. Every structure shall be designed to resist the
overturning effects caused by earthquake forces specified in Section 2334 (d). At
any level, the overturning moments to be resisted shall be determined using those
seismic forces (F, and Fx) which act on levels above the level under consideration.
At any level, the incremental changes of the design overturning moment shall be
distributed to the various resisting elements in the manner prescribed in Section
2334 (e). Overturning effects on every element shall be carried down to the founda-
tion. See Section 2337 for combining gravity and seismic forces.
2. Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, where a lateral
load-resisting element is discontinuous, such as for vertical irregularity TypeD in
Table No. 23-M or plan irregularity TypeD in Table No. 23-N, columns supporting
such elements shall have the strength to resistthe axial force resulting from the fol-
lowing load combinations, in addition to all other applicable load combinations:
1.0 DL + 0.8 LL + 3 (R./8)£
0.85 DL + 3 (Rw/8)£
A. The axial forces in such columns need not exceed the capacity of other ele-
ments of the structure to transfer such loads to the column.
B. Such columns shall be capable of carrying the above-described axial forces
without exceeding the axial load strength of the column. For designs using working
stress methods this capacity may be determined using an allowable stress increase
of 1.7.
C. Such columns shall meet the following detailing or member limitations:
165
Chapter 26, Section 2625 (e), for concrete, and Chapter 27, Section 2710 (e), for
steel in structures in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4.
Chapter 26, Section 2625 (k), for concrete, Chapter 27, and U .B.C. Standard No.
27-15, special provisions for developing plastic hinges at ultimate loading, for
steel in structures in Seismic Zone No. 2.
3. At foundation. See Section 2910 (d) for overturning moments to be resisted
at the foundation soil interface.
(h) Story Drift Limitation. 1. Defined. Story drift is the displacement of one
level relative to the level above or below due to the design lateral forces. Calculated
drift shall include translational and torsional deflections.
t: 2. Calculated. Calculated story drift shall not exceed 0.04/R., or 0.005 times the
j·····'···'
...\ ··'...j·:...· ' .: story height for structures having a fundamental period of less than 0.7 seconds.
'
For structures having a fundamental period ofO. 7 seconds or greater, the calculated
...
story drift shall not exceed 0.03/Rw or0.004 times the story height. These drift lim-
its may be exceeded when it is demonstrated that greater drift can be tolerated by
both structural elements and nonstructural elements that could affect life safety.
3. Deriving forces. The design lateral forces used to determine the calculated
drift may be derived from a value ofCbasedon the period determined from Formu-
la (34-5) neglecting the lower bound ratio for C!Rw of 0.075 of Section 2334 (b) I
and the 80 percent limitation of Section 2334 (b) 2 B.
(i) P ~Effects. The resulting member forces and moments and the story drifts
induced by P ~ effects shall be considered in the evaluation of overall structural
frame stability. P ~need not be considered when the ratio of secondary moment to
primary moment does not exceed 0.1 0; the ratio may be evaluated for any story as
the product of the total dead, floor live load and snow load, as required in Section
2303 (f), above the story times the seismic drift in that story divided by the product
of the seismic shear in that story times the height of that story. In Seismic Zones
Nos. 3 and 4, P ~need not be considered where the story drift ratio does not exceed
0.02/Rw.
(j) Vertical Component. The following requirements apply in Seismic Zones
Nos. 3 and 4 only.
Horizontal cantilever components shall be designed for a net upward force of0.2
Wr.
In addition to all other applicable load combinations, horizontal prestressed
components shall be designed using not more than 50 percent of the dead load for
the gravity load, alone or in combination with the lateral force effects.
Dynamic lateral Force Procedures

Sec. 2335. (a) General. Dynamic analyses procedures, when used, shall con-
form to the criteria established in this section. The analysis shall be based on an ap-
propriate ground motion representation and shall be performed using accepted
principles of dynamics. Structures which are designed in accordance with this sec-
tion shall comply with all other applicable requirements of these provisions.
166
(b) Ground Motion. The ground motion representation shall, as a minimum, be =:::
one having a I 0 percent probability of being exceeded in 50 years and may be one
of the following:
I. The normalized response spectrum given in Figure No. 23-3.
2. A site-specific response spectrum based on the geologic, tectonic, seismolog-
ic and soil characteristics associated with the specific site. The spectrum shall be
developed for a damping ratio of0.05 unless a different value is shown to be consis-
tent with the anticipated structural behavior at the intensity of shaking established
for the site.
3. Ground motion time histories developed for the specific site shall be represen-
tative of actual earthquake motions. Response spectra from time histories, either
individually or in combination, shall approximate the site design spectrum con-
forming to Section 2335 (b) 2.
4. For structures on Soil Profile Type S4, the following requirements shall apply
wh~~ rr~~~:;;~~:;~i~:e~!~~e~:~~a~~n shall be developed in accordance with

B. Possible amplification of building response due to the effects of soil-struc-
..
.·''·
1 '•.
. .·····'
. ,·'.·,1···':.'
...•
ture interaction and lengthening of building period caused by inelastic be-
~~:i~::::~e~: ~:~e::::~
C. base shear, V, by dividing byby
tor for the structure.
a factor not greater than
these procedures may the to aRw
appropriate
be reduced fac- .· '·•. '· ,'·. '·
design
5. The vertical component of ground motion may be defined by scaling corre-

sponding horizontal accelerations by a factor of two thirds. Alternative factors may
be used when substantiated by site-specific data.
(c) Mathematical Model. A mathematical model of the physical structure shall
represent the spatial distribution ofthe mass stiffness of the structure to an extent
which is adequate for the calculation of the significant features of its dynamic re-
sponse. A three-dimensional model shall be used for the dynamic analysis of struc-
tures with highly irregular plan configurations such as those having a plan
irregularity defined in Table No. 23-N and having a rigid or semirigid diaphragm.
(d) Description of Analysis Procedures. I. Response spectrum analysis. An
elastic dynamic analysis of a structure utilizing the peak dynamic response of all
modes having a significant contribution to total structural response. Peak modal
responses are calculated using the ordinates of the appropriate response spectrum
curve which correspond to the modal periods. Maximum modal contributions are
combined in a statistical manner to obtain an approximate total structural response.
2. Time-history analysis. An analysis of the dynamic response of a structure at
each increment of time when the base is subjected to a specific ground motion time
history.
(e) Response Spectrum Analysis. 1. Number of modes. The requirement of
Section 2335 (d) I that all significant modes be included may be satisfied by dem-
onstrating that for the modes considered, at least 90 percent of the participating
167
mass of the structure is included in the calculation of response for each principal
horizontal direction.
2. Combining modes. The peak member forces, displacements, story forces,
story shears and base reactions for each mode shall be combined by recognized
methods. When three-dimensional models are used for analysis, modal interaction
effects shall be considered when combining modal maxima.
3. Scaling of results. The base shear for a given direction determined using these
procedures, when less than the values below, shall be scaled up to these values.
A. The base shear shall be increased to the following percentage of the values
determined from the procedures of Section 2334:
(i) One hundred percent for irregular buildings.
(ii) Ninety percent for regular buildings, except that the base shear shall not be
less than 80 percent of that determined from Section 2334 using the period, T, cal-
culated from Method A.
All corresponding response parameters, including deflections, member forces
and moments, shall be increased proportionately.
B. The base shear for a given direction determined using these procedures need
not exceed that required by Item A above. All corresponding response parameters
may be adjusted proportionately.
4. Directional effects. Directional effects for horizontal ground motion shall
conform to the requirements of Section 2334 (a). The effects of vertical ground
motions on horizontal cantilevers and prestressed elements shall be considered in
accordance with Section 2334 (j). Alternately, vertical seismic response may be
determined by dynamic response methods; in no case shall the response used for
design be less than that obtained by the static method.
5. Torsion. The analysis shall account for torsional effects, including accidental
torsional effects as prescribed in Section 2334 (f). Where three-dimensional mod-
els are used for analysis, effects of accidental torsion shall be accounted for by ap-
propriate adjustments in the model such as adjustment of mass locations, or by
equivalent static procedures such as provided in Section 2334 (f).
· :.: •.!'·.' ;, ~;::!~e;~~~~~t;~~~~:lf~o~~~~:~~~::r:r~i~!f~~;h:~~:~~~;~~i~;tr~;

frame shall conform to Section 2333 (f) 5 Band may be analyzed using either the
procedures of Section 2334 (d) or those of Section 2335 (e).
(f) Time-history Analysis. Time-history analyses shall meet the requirements
of Section 2333 (j).
Lateral Force on Elements of Structures and Nonstructural

Components Supported by Structures
t: Sec. 2336. (a) General. Parts and portions of structures and their attachments,
•. .!.··
...•. ...··!.!_.··...': permanent nonstructural components and their attachments, and the attachments
for permanent equipment supported by a structure shall be designed to resist the to-
tal design seismic forces prescribed in Section 2336 (b).
168
;~;E~~~~;B,;~~~}f~t~~;~;;;E:.~~~~~~~~ ·.i,:•,.:'•
EXCEPTION: Equipment weighing less than 400 pounds, furniture or tempo-
rary or movable equipment.
·,i··.:!
When allowable design stresses and other acceptance criteria are not contained
in or referenced by this code or the U.B.C. Standards, such criteria shall be obtained
from approved national standards.
(b) Design for Total Lateral Force. The total design lateral seismic force, F1,
shall be determined from the following formula:
F, = z1c,w, (36-I)
The values of Z and I shall be the values used for the building.
EXCEPTIONS: I, For anchorage of machinery and equipment required for
life-safety systems, the value of I shall be taken as 1.5.
2. For the design of tanks and vessels containing sufficient quantities of highly
toxic or explosive substances to be hazardous to the safety of the general public if
released, the value of I shall be taken as 1.5.
3. The value of I for panel connectors for panels in Section 2337 (b) 4 B shall be
1.0 for the entire connector.
The coefficient c, is for elements and components and for rigid and rigidly sup-
ported equipment. Rigid or rigidly supported equipment is defined as having a fun-
damental period less than or equal to 0.06 second. Nonrigid or flexibly supported
equipment is defined as a system having a fundamental period, including the
equipment, greater than 0.06 second.
The lateral forces calculated for nonrigid or flexibly supported equipment sup-
ported by a structure and located above grade shall be determined considering the
dynamic properties of both the equipment and the structure which supports it, but
the value shall not be less than that listed in Table No. 23-P. In the absence of an
analysis or empirical data, the value of C, for nonrigid or flexibly supported equip-
ment located above grade on a structure shall be taken as twice the value listed in
Table No. 23-P, but need not exceed 2.0.
ductile materials and connections may use the values of c, from Table No. 23-P. iiii
The value of C, for elements, components and equipment laterally self-sup- }
ported at or below ground level may be two thirds of the value set forth in Table No. i\:\
23-P. However, the design lateral forces for an element or component or piece of : :
~~~!fe~e~t~~~:~~r~~n~e~~~~~~~~ ;~0u;~~:n~b~:~=~~nt~~a;~~g the item as an inde- ·.':.,•'.· ',·.: '

The design lateral forces determined using Formula (36-1) shall be distributed in
proportion to the mass distribution of the element or component.
Forces determined using Formula (36-1) shall be used to design members and
connections which transfer these forces to the seismic-resisting systems.
169
:::f! For applicable forces in connectors for exterior panels and diaphragms, refer to
m: Section 2337 (b) 4 and 9.
\\\ Forces shall be applied in the horizontal directions, which result in the most cri
r tical loadings for design.
(c) Specifying Lateral Forces. Design specifications for equipment shall either
specify the design lateral forces prescribed herein or reference these provisions.
(d) Essential or Hazardous Facilities and Life-safety Systems. For equip-
ment in facilities assigned to Occupancy Categories I and II and for life-safety sys-
tems, the design and detailing of equipment which needs to be functional following
a major earthquake shall consider the effect of drift.
(e) Alternative Designs. Where an approved national standard or approved
physical test data provide a basis for the earthquake-resistant design of a particular
type of equipment or other nonstructural component, such a standard or data may
be accepted as a basis for design of the items with the following limitations:
1. These provisions shall provide minimum values for the design of the anchor-
age and the members and connections which transfer the forces to the seismic-re-
sisting system.
2. The force, Fp, and the overturning moment used in the design of the nonstruc-
tural component shall not be less than 80 percent of the values that would be ob-
tained using these provisions.
Detailed Systems Design Requirements

Sec. 2337. (a) General. All structural framing systems shall comply with there-
quirements of Section 2333. Only the elements of the designated seismic-force-re-
sisting system shall be used to resist design forces. The individual components
shall be designed to resist the prescribed design seismic forces acting on them. The
components shall also comply with the specific requirements for the material con-
tained in Chapters 24 through 28. In addition, such framing systems and compo-
nents shall comply with the detailed system design requirements contained in
Section 2337.
All building components in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4 shall be designed to
resist the effects of the seismic forces prescribed herein and the effects of gravity
loadings from dead, floor live and snow loads.
Consideration shall be given to design for uplift effects caused by seismic loads.
For materials which use working stress procedures, dead loads shall be multiplied
by 0.85 when used to reduce uplift.
In Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4, provision shall be made for the effects of earth-
quake forces acting in a direction other than the principal axes in each of the follow-
ing circumstances:
The structure has plan irregularity Type E as given in Table No. 23-N.
The structure has plan irregularity Type A as given in Table No. 23-N for both
major axes.
A column of a structure forms part of two or more intersecting lateral force-
resisting systems.
170
EXCEPTION: If the axial load in the column due to seismic forces acting in ei-
ther direction is less than 20 percent of the column allowable axial load.
The requirement that orthogonal effects be considered may be satisfied by de-
signing such elements for 100 percent of the prescribed seismic forces in one direc-
tion plus 30 percent of the prescribed forces in the perpendicular direction. The
combination requiring the greater component strength shall be used for design. Al-
ternatively, the effects of the two orthogonal directions may be combined on a
square root of the sum of the squares (SRSS) basis. When the SRSS method of
combining directional effects is used, each term computed shall be assigned the
sign that will result in the most conservative result.
(b) Structural Framing Systems. l. General. Four types of general building
framing systems defined in Section 2333 (f) are recognized in these provisions and
shown in Table No. 23-0. Each type is subdivided by the types of vertical elements
used to resist lateral seismic forces. Special framing requirements are given in this
section and in Chapters 24 through 27.
2. Detailing for combinations of systems. For components common to differ-
ent structural systems, the more restrictive detailing requirements shall be used.
3. Connections. Connections which resist seismic forces shall be designed and
detailed on the drawings.
4. Deformation compatibility. All framing elements not required by design to
be part of the lateral force-resisting system shall be investigated and shown to be
adequate for vertical load-carrying capacity when displaced 3(Rw/8) times the dis-
placements resulting from the required lateral forces. P d effects on such elements
shall be accounted for. For designs using working stress methods, this capacity
may be determined using an allowable stress increase of I. 7. The rigidity of adjoin-
ing rigid and exterior elements shall be considered as follows:
A. Adjoining rigid elements. Moment-resistant frames may be enclosed by or
adjoined by more rigid elements which would tend to prevent the frame from re-
sisting lateral forces where it can be shown that the action or failure of the more
rigid elements will not impair the vertical and lateral load-resisting ability of the
frame.
B. Exterior elements. Exterior nonbearing, nonshear wall panels or elements
which are attached to or enclose the exterior shall be designed to resist the forces
per Formula (36-1) and shall accommodate movements of the structure resulting
from lateral forces or temperature changes. Such elements shall be supported by
means of cast-in-place concrete or by mechanical connections and fasteners in ac-
cordance with the following provisions:
(i) Connections and panel joints shall allow for a relative movement between
stories of not less than two times story drift caused by wind, 3(Rw/8) times
the calculated elastic story drift caused by design seismic forces, or 1h
inch, whichever is greater.
(ii) Connections to permit movement in the plane of the panel for story drift
shall be sliding connections using slotted or oversize holes, connections
which permit movement by bending of steel, or other connections provid-
ing equivalent sliding and ductility capacity.
171
(iii) Bodies of connections shall have sufficient ductility and rotation capacity
so as to preclude fracture of the concrete or brittle failures at or near welds.
(iv) The body of the connection shall be designed for one and one-third times
the force determined by Formula (36-1 ).
(v) All fasteners in the connecting system such as bolts, inserts, welds and
dowels shall be designed for four times the forces determined by Formula
(36-1 ).
(vi) Fasteners embedded in concrete shall be attached to, or hooked around, re-
inforcing steel or otherwise terminated so as to effectively transfer forces
to the reinforcing steel.
5. Ties and continuity. All parts of a structure shall be interconnected and the
connections shall be capable oftransmitting the seismic force induced by the parts
being connected. As a minimum, any smaller portion ofthe building shall be tied to
the remainder of the building with elements having at least a strength to resist
~ times the weight of the smaller portion.
3
A positive connection for resisting a horizontal force acting parallel to the mem-
ber shall be provided for each beam, girder or truss. This force shall not be less
than ~ times the dead plus live load.
5
6. Collector elements. Collector elements shall be provided which are capable
of transferring the seismic forces originating in other portions of the building to the
element providing the resistance to those forces.
7. Concrete frames. Concrete frames required by design to be part ofthe lateral
force-resisting system shall conform to the following:
A. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 they shall be special moment-resisting frames.
B. In Seismic Zone No.2 they shall, as a minimum, be intermediate moment-
resisting frames.
8. Anchorage of concrete or masonry walls. Concrete or masonry walls shall
be anchored to all floors and roofs which provide lateral support for the wall. The
anchorage shall provide a positive direct connection between the wall and floor or
roof construction capable of resisting the horizontal forces specified in Section
2336 or Section 2310. Requirements for developing anchorage forces in dia-
phragms are given in Section 2337 (b) 9 below. Diaphragm deformation shall be
considered in the design of the supported walls.
9. Diaphragms.
A. The deflection in the plane of the diaphragm shall not exceed the permissible
deflection of the attached elements. Permissible deflection shall be that deflection
which will permit the attached element to maintain its structural integrity under the
individual loading and continue to support the prescribed loads.
B. Floor and roof diaphragms shall be designed to resist the forces determined in
accordance with the following formula:
172
F,+ IF;
i=x
n (37-1)
I
i=x
W;
The force Fpx determined from Formula(37-1) neednotexceed0.75 Z/ Wpx. but

shall not be less than 0.35 Z I wpx-
When the diaphragm is required to transfer lateral forces from the vertical resist-
ing elements above the diaphragm to other vertical resisting elements below the
diaphragm due to offset in the placement of the elements or to changes in stiffness
in the vertical elements, these forces shall be added to those determined from For-
mula (37-1).
C. Diaphragms supporting concrete or masonry walls shall have continuous ties
or struts between diaphragm chords to distribute the anchorage forces specified in
Section 2337 (b) 8. Added chords may be used to form subdiaphragms to transmit
the anchorage forces to the main crossties.
D. Where wood diaphragms are used to laterally support concrete or masonry
walls, the anchorage shall conform to Section 2337 (b) 8 above. In Seismic Zones
Nos. 2, 3 and 4 anchorage shall not be accomplished by use of toenails or nails sub- ~I
ject to withdrawal, nor shall wood ledgers or framing be used in cross-grain bend-
ing or cross-grain tension, and the continuous ties required by Item C above shall
be in addition to the diaphragm sheathing.
E. Connections of diaphragms to the vertical elements and to collectors and con-
nections of collectors to the vertical elements in structures in Seismic Zones Nos. 3
and 4, having a plan irregularity of Type A, B, CorD in Table No. 23-N, shall be
designed without considering one-third increase usually permitted in allowable
stresses for elements resisting earthquake forces.
F. In structures in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 having a plan irregularity of Type
Bin Table No. 23-N, diaphragm chords and drag members shall be designed con-
sidering independent movement of the projecting wings of the structure. Each of
these diaphragm elements shall be designed for the more severe of the following
two assumptions:
Motion of the projecting wings in the same direction.
Motion of the projecting wings in opposing directions.
EXCEPTION: This requirement may be deemed satisfied if the procedures of
Section 2335 in conjunction with a three-dimensional model have been used to deter-
mine the lateral seismic forces for design.
10. Framing below the base. The strength and stiffness ofthe framing between
the base and the foundation shall not be less than that of the superstructure. The
special detailing requirements of Chapters 26 and 27, as appropriate, shall apply to
columns supporting discontinuous lateral force-resisting elements and to SMRF,
IMRF and EBF system elements below the base which are required to transmit the
forces resulting from lateral loads to the foundation.
173
II. Building separations. All structures shall be separated from adjoining

structures. Separations shall allow for 3(Rw/8) times the displacement due to seis-
mic forces.
!i!i~ EXCEPTION: Smaller separations may be permitted when justified b)' !\\tiona!
analyses based on maximum expected ground motions. As a minimum, building sep-
arations shall not be less than (R,./8) ~ I times the sum of displacements due lo
code-specified seismic forces.
Nonbuilding Structures
Sec. 2338. (a) General. I. Nonbuilding structures include all self-supporting
structures other than buildings which carry gravity loads and resist the effects of
earthquake. Nonbuilding structures shall be designed to resist the minimum lateral
forces specified in this section. Design shall conform to the applicable provisions
of other sections as modified by the provisions contained in Section 2338.
2. The minimum design lateral forces prescribed in this section are at a service
level (rather than yield or ultimate level). The design of nonbuilding structures
shall provide sufficient strength and ductility, consistent with the provisions speci-
fied herein for buildings, to resist the effects of seismic ground motions as repre-
sented by these design forces.
When applicable, allowable stresses and other detailed design criteria shall be
obtained from other sections or their referenced standards.
When applicable design stresses and other design criteria are not contained in or
referenced by this code or the U.B.C. Standards, such criteria shall be obtained
from approved national standards.
3. The weight W for non building structures shall include all dead load as defined
for buildings in Section 2334 (a). For purposes of calculating design seismic forces
in nonbuilding structures, W shall also include all normal operating contents for
items such as tanks, vessels, bins and piping.
4. The fundamental period of the structure shall be determined by rational meth-
ods such as by using Method B in Section 2334 (b).
5. The drift limitations of Section 2334 (h) need not apply to non building struc-
tures. Drift limitations shall be established for structural or nonstructural elements
whose failure would cause life hazards. P Ll effects shall be considered for struc-
tures whose calculated drifts exceed the values in Section 2334 (h).
6. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, structures which support flexible nonstructural
elements whose combined weight exceeds 25 percent of the weight of the structure
shall be designed considering interaction effects between the structure and the sup-
ported elements.
(b) Lateral Force. Lateral force procedures for nonbuilding structures with
structural systems similar to buildings (those with structural systems which are
listed in Table No. 23-0.) shall be selected in accordance with the provisions of
Section 2333.
EXCEPTION: Intermediate moment-resisting frames (IMRF) may be used in
Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 for non building structures in Occupancy Categories III
174
and IV if (I) the structure is less than 50 feet in height and (2) an Rw = 4.0 is used for
design.
Rigid structures (those with period T less than 0.06 second), including their an-
chorages, shall be designed for the lateral force obtained from Formula (38-1 ).
V = 0.5 Z I W (38-1)
The force V shall be distributed according to the distribution of mass and shall be
assumed to act in any horizontal direction.
(c) Tanks with Supported Bottoms. Flat bottom tanks or other tanks with sup-
ported bottoms, founded at or below grade, shall be designed to resist the seismic
forces calculated using the procedures in Section 2338 for rigid structures consid-
ering the entire weight of the tank and its contents. Alternatively, such tanks may be
designed using one of the two procedures described below.
A response spectrum analysis, which includes consideration of the actual
ground motion anticipated at the site and the inertial effects of the contained fluid.
A design basis prescribed for the particular type of tank by an approved national
standard, provided that the seismic zones and occupancy categories shall be in con-
formance with the provisions of Sections 2333 (b) and 2333 (d), respectively.
(d) Other Non building Structures. Non building structures which are not cov-
ered by Section 2338 (b) and (c) shall be designed to resist minimum seismic lateral
forces not less than those determined in accordance with the provisions in Section
2334 with the following additions and exceptions:
I. The factor Rw shall be as given in Table No. 23-Q. The ratio C!Rw used for de-
sign shall be not less than 0.5.
2. The vertical distribution of the lateral seismic forces in structures covered by
this section may be determined by using the provisions of Section 2334 (d) or by
using the procedures of Section 2335.
EXCEPTION: For irregular structures assigned to Occupancy Categories I and
II which cannot be modeled as a single mass, the procedures of Section 2335 shall be
used.
3. Where an approved national standard provides a basis for the earthquake-re-
sistant design of a particular type of non building structure covered by this Section
2338 (d), such a standard may be used, subject to the limitations in this subsection:
The seismic zones and occupancy categories shall be in conformance with the
provisions of Section 2333 (e) and (d), respectively.
The values for total lateral force and total base overturning moment used in de-
sign shall not be less than 80 percent of the values that would be obtained using
these provisions.
Earthquake-recording Instrumentations
Sec. 2339. For earthquake-recording instrumentations, see Appendix Chapter
23, Division II.
175
TABLE NO. 23-A-UNIFORM AND CONCENTRATED LOADS

USE OR OCCUPANCY
CONCEN·
UNIFORM TRATED
Category Description LOAD 1 LOAD
l. Access floor systems Office use 50 2,0002

Computer use 100 2,0002
2. Armories !50 0
3. Assembly areas 3 and Fixed seating areas 50 0
auditoriums and Movable seating and other
balconies therewith areas 100 0
Stage areas and enclosed
platforms 125 0
4. Cornices, marquees and
residential balconies 60 0
5. Exit facilities 4 100 os
6. Garages General storage and/or repair 100 6
Private or pleasure-type motor

vehicle storage 50 6
7. Hospitals Wards and rooms 40 1,0002

8. Libraries Reading rooms 60 1,0002
Stack rooms 125 1,5002
9. Manufacturing Light 75 2,0002
Heavy 125 3,0002
10. Offices 50 2,0002
II. Printing plants Press rooms ISO 2,5002
Composing and linotype
rooms 100 2,0002
12. Residential 7 40 os
13. Restrooms 8
14. Reviewing stands,
grandstands, bleachers,
and folding and
telescoping seating 100 0
15. Roof decks Same as area served or for the
type of occupancy
accommodated
16. Schools Classrooms 40 1,0002
17. Sidewalks and
driveways Public access 250 6
18. Storage Light 125

Heavy 250
19. Stores Retail 75 2,0002
Wholesale 100 3,0002
(Continued)
176
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 23-A
1
See Section 2306 for live load reductions.
2See Section 2304 (c), first paragraph, for area of load application.
3Assembly areas include such occupancies as dance halls, drill rooms, gymnasiums, play-
grounds, plazas, terraces and similar occupancies which are generally accessible to the
public.
4 Exit facilities shall include such uses as corridors serving an occupant load of I 0 or more
persons, exterior exit balconies, stairways, fire escapes and similar uses.
5 lndividual stair treads shall be designed to support a 300-pound concentrated load placed
in a position which would cause maximum stress. Stair stringers may be designed for the
uniform load set forth in the table.
6See Section 2304 (c), second paragraph, for concentrated loads.
7Residential occupancies include private dwellings, apartments and hotel guest rooms.
8 Restroom loads shall not be less than the load for the occupancy with which they are asso-
ciated, but need not exceed 50 pounds per square foot.
177
TABLE NO. 23·8-SPECIAL LOADS1

VERTICAL LATERAL
USE LOAD LOAD
(Pounds per Square Foot
Category Description unless Otherwise Noted)
I. Construction, public Walkway, see Sec. 4406 150
access at site (live load) Canopy, see Sec. 4407 150
2. Grandstands, reviewing Seats and footboards 1202 See
stands, bleachers, and Footnote
folding and telescoping No.3
seating (live load)
3. Stage accessories (live Gridirons and fly
load) galleries 75
Loft block wells 4 250 250
Head block wells and
sheave beams 4 250 250
4. Ceiling framing Over stages 20
(live load) All uses except over
stages 105
5. Partitions and interior
walls, see Sec. 2309
(live load) 5
6. Elevators and
dumbwaiters (dead and 2 x Total
live load) loads 6
7. Mechanical and
electrical equipment
(dead load) Total loads
8. Cranes (dead and live Total load including 1.25 x Total O.lOx Total
load) impact increase load7 load 8
9. Balcony railings and Exit facilities serving an
guardrails occupant load greater
than 50 509
Other 209
10. Handrails See See
Footnote Footnote
No. 10 No. 10
11. Storage racks Over 8 feet high Total See Table
loads 11 No. 23-P
12. Fire sprinkler structural 250 pounds
support plus weight See Table
of water- No. 23-P
filled pipe 12
'''
13. Explosion exposure Hazardous occupancies,
see Sec. 910
(Continued)
178
1
The tabulated loads are minimum loads. Where other vertical loads required by this code
or required by the design would cause greater stresses, they shall be used.
2 Pounds per lineal foot.
3Lateral sway bracing loads of24 pounds per foot parallel and I 0 pounds per foot perpendic-
ular to seat and footboards.
4 All loads are in pounds per lineal foot. Head block wells and sheave beams shall be de-
signed for all loft block well loads tributary thereto. Sheave blocks shall be designed with
a factor of safety of five.
5Does not apply to ceilings which have sufficient total access from below, such that access
is not required within the space above the ceiling. Does not apply to ceilings if the attic
areas above the ceiling are not provided with access. This live load need not be considered
as acting simultaneously with other live loads imposed upon the ceiling framing or its sup-
porting structure.
6Where Appendix Chapter 51 has been adopted, see reference standard cited therein for ad-
ditional design requirements.
7The impact factors included are for cranes with steel wheels riding on steel rails. They may
be modified if substantiating technical data acceptable to the building official is sub-
mitted. Live loads on crane support girders and their connections shall be taken as the
maximum crane wheel loads. For pendant-operated traveling crane support girders and
their connections, the impact factors shall be 1.1 0.
8Th is applies in the direction parallel to the runway rails (longitudinal). The factor for forces
perpendicular to the rail is 0.20 X the transverse traveling loads (trolley, cab, hooks and
lifted loads). Forces shall be applied at top of rail and may be distributed among rails of
multiple rail cranes and shall be distributed with due regard for lateral stiffness of the
structures supporting these rails.
9
A load per lineal foot to be applied horizontally at right angles to the top rail. ;;;;.
1<Yfhe mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed handrail and supporting struc-
ture are capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied in any direction at
any point on the rail. These loads shall not be assumed to act cumulatively with Item 9.
11 Vertical members of storage racks shall be protected from impact forces of operating
equipment, or racks shall be designed so that failure of one vertical member will not cause
collapse of more than the bay or bays directly supported by that member.
12The 250-pound load is to be applied to any single fire sprinkler support point but not simul- if
taneously to all support joints.
179
23-C 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 23-C-MINIMUM ROOF LIVE LOADS1

METHOD1 METHOD2
TRIBUTARY LOADED AREA IN
RATE OF MAXIMUM
SQUARE FEET FOR ANY REDUC· REDUC·
STRUCTURAL MEMBER UNIFORM TIONr TIONR
ROOF SLOPE Oto200 201 to600 Over600 LOAD2 (Percent) (Percent)
I . Flat or rise less
than 4 inches per
foot. Arch or 20 16 12 20 .08 40
dome with rise
less than one
eighth of span
2. Rise 4 inches per
foot to less than
12 inches per 16 14 12 16 .06 25
foot. Arch or
dome with rise
one eighth of span
to less than three
eighths of span
3. Rise 12 inches per
foot and greater.
Arch or dome 12 12 12 12
with rise three
eighths of span or
greater
4. Awnings except 5 5 5 5 No Reductions
cloth covered3 Permitted
5. Greenhouses, lath
houses and 10 10 10 10
agricultural
buildings•
'Where snow loads occur, the roof structure shall be designed for such loads as determined by
the building official. See Section 2305 (d). For special-purpose roofs, see Section 2305 (e).
2See Section 2306 for live load reductions. The rate of reduction r in Section 2306 Formula
(6-1) shall be as indicated in the table. The maximum reduction R shall not exceed the
value indicated in the table.
JAs defined in Section 4506.
4 See Section 2305 (e) for concentrated load requirements for greenhouse roof members.
180
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 23-D, 23-E, 23-F, 23-G
TABLE 23-D-MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION

FOR STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 1
MEMBER LOADED WITH LIVE
MEMBER LOADED WITH LIVE LOAD PLUS DEAD
TYPE OF MEMBER LOAD ONLY (L.L.) LOAD (L.L. + K.D.L.)
Roof member supporting

plaster or floor member L/360 L/240
..
1Sufficient slope or camber shall be provided for flat roofs m accordance with SectiOn 2305
(f).
L.L. = live load.
D.L. = dead load.
K = factor as determined by Table No. 23-E.
L = length of member in same units as deflection.
TABLE 23-E-VALUE OF "K"

WOOD
Unseasoned
I Seasoned' REINFORCED CONCRETE' STEEL
1.0 I 0.5 [2- 1.2 W,!As)l;:: 0.6 0
1Seasoned lumber IS lumber havmg a mOisture content of less than 16 percent at time of In-
stallation and used under dry conditions of use such as in covered structures.
2See also Section 2609.
A:, = area of compression reinforcement.

A., = area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement.
:=:::
TABLE NO. 23-F-WIND STAGNATION PRESSURE ('ls) AT
STANDARD HEIGHT OF 33 FEET .!
·::;:
Basic wind speed (mph) 1 -~··
Pressure qs (psf)
1Wind speed from Section 2314. Ill
TABLE NO. 23-G-COMBINED HEIGHT, EXPOSURE AND II!

GUST FACTOR COEFFICIENT ( C.Jl
HEIGHT ABOVE AVERAGE
LEVEL OF ADJOINING
GROUND (feet) EXPOSURED EXPOSUREC EXPOSURE B
0-15 1.39 1.06 0.62
20 1.45 1.13 0.67
25 1.50 1.19 0.72
30 1.54 1.23 0.76
40 1.62 1.31 0.84
60 1.73 1.43 0.95
80 1.81 1.53 1.04
100 1.88 1.61 1.13
120 1.93 1.67 1.20
160 2.02 1.79 1.31
200 2.10 1.87 1.42
300 2.23 2.05 1.63
400 2.34 2.19 1.80
Values for mtermed1ate heights above 15 feet may be mterpolated.
181
23-H 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 23-H-PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (Cq)

STRUCTURE OR PART
THEREOF DESCRIPTION Cq FACTOR
I. Primary frames and Method 1 (Normal force method)

systems Walls:
Windward wall 0.8 inward
Leeward wall 0.5 outward
Roofs 1:
Wind perpendicular to ridge
Leeward roof or flat roof 0.7 outward
Windward roof
less than 2:12 0.7 outward
Slope 2: 12 to less than 9: 12 0.9 outward or
0.3 inward
Slope9:12to 12:12 0.4 inward
Slope> 12:12 0.7 inward
Wind parallel to ridge and flat roofs 0.7 outward
Method 2 (Projected area method)
On vertical projected area
Structures 40 feet or Jess in 1.3 horizontal any
height direction
Structures over 40 feet in 1.4 horizontal any
height direction
On horizontal projected area 1 0.7 upward
2. Elements and Wall elements
.! components not in All structures 1.2 inward
areas of Enclosed and unenclosed structures 1.2outward
discontinuity 2 Open structures 1.6outward
Parapets walls 1.3 inward or
outward
Roof elements 3
Enclosed and unenclosed structures
Slope<7:12 1.3 outward
Slope 7:12 to 12:12 1.3 outward or
inward
Open structures
Slope< 2:12 1.7 outward
Slope 2:12 to 7:12 1.6 outward or
0.8 inward
Slope> 7:12 to 12:12 1.7 outward or
inward
3. Elements and Wall comers 7 1.5 outward or 1.2

components in inward
areas of Roof eaves, rakes or ridges without
discontinuities 2 .4· 6 overhangs 7
Slope< 2:12 2.3 upward
Slope 2:12 to 7:12 2.6 outward
Slope>7:12to 12:12 1.6 outward
For slopes Jess than 2: 12
Overhangs at roof eaves, rakes or 0.5 added to values
ridges, and canopies above
182
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 23-H
STRUCTURE OR PART
THEREOF DESCRIPTION C0 FACTOR
4. Chimneys, tanks Square or rectangular 1.4 any direction

and solid towers Hexagonal or octagonal 1.1 any direction
Round or elliptical 0.8 any direction
5. Open-frame Square and rectangular
towers 5·R Diagonal 4.0
Normal 3.6
Triangular 3.2
6. Tower accessories Cylindrical members
(such as ladders, 2 inches or less in diameter 1.0
conduit, lights and Over 2 inches in diameter 0.8
elevators) Flat or angular members 1.3
7. Signs, flagpoles,
lightpoles minor
structures8 1.4 any direction
1For one story or the top story of multistory open structures, an additional value of 0.5 shall 'f
be added to the outward Cq. The most critical combination shall be used for design. For ':·:
definition of open structures, see Section 2312. ::1:
2
Cq values listed are for I 0-square-foot tributary areas. For tributary areas of I 00 square feet,
the value of0.3 may be subtracted from Cq, except for areas at discontinuities with slopes
·::~.__::, _:·\:
less than 7:12 where the value of 0.8 may be subtracted from Cq. Interpolation may be
used for tributary areas between I 0 and 100 square feet. For tributary areas greater than ':;:
I ,000 square feet, use primary frame values. ,i_,\,1_,\
1
·For slopes greater than 12: 12, use wall element values.
4 Local pressures shall apply over a distance from the discontinuity of I 0 feet or 0.1 times
the least width of the structure, whichever is smaller.
5 Wind pressures shall be applied to the total normal projected area of all elements on one
face. The forces shall be assumed to act parallel to the wind direction.
6 Discontinuities at wall comers or roof ridges are defined as discontinuous breaks in the sur- ;:;::
face where the included interior angle measures 170 degrees or less. J,
7Load is to be applied on either side of discontinuity but not simultaneously on both sides. ~=~ ~
KFaclors for cylindrical elements are two thirds of those for flat or angular elements. 'i!)
183
23-1, 23-J 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 23-1

SEISMIC ZONE FACTOR Z
ZONE 2A 28 3 4
z 0.075 0.15 0.20 0.30 0.40

The zone shall be determined from the seismic zone map in Figure No. 23-2.
TABLE NO. 23-J

SITE COEFFICIENTS1
TYPE DESCRIPTION SFACTOR
s1 A soil profile with either: 1.0

(a) A rock-like material characterized by a shear-wave
velocity greater than 2,500 feet per second or by other
suitable means of classification, or
(b) Stiff or dense soil condition where the soil depth is
less than 200 feet.
Sz A soil profile with dense or stiff soil conditions, where 1.2

the soil depth exceeds 200 feet.
S3 A soil profile 70 feet or more in depth and containing 1.5

more than 20 feet of soft to medium stiff clay but not
more than 40 feet of soft clay.
S4 A soil profile containing more than 40 feet of soft clay 2.0

characterized by a shear wave velocity less than 500 feet
per second.
1The site factor shall be established from properly substantiated geotechnical data. In loca-
tions where the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the soil pro-
file type, soil profile S3 shall be used. Soil profile S4 need not be assumed unless the
building official determines that soil profile S4 may be present at the site, or in the event
that soil profile s4 is established by geotechnical data.
184
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 23-K
TABLE NO. 23·K

OCCUPANCY CATEGORIES
OCCUPANCY CATEGORIES OCCUPANCY TYPE OR FUNCTIONS OF STRUCTURE
I. Essential Facilities 1 Hospitals and other medical facilities having surgery and
emergency treatment areas.
Fire and police stations.
Tanks or other structures containing, housing or
supporting water or other fire-suppression materials or
equipment required for the protection of essential or
hazardous facilities, or special occupancy structures.
Emergency vehicle shelters and garages.
Structures and equipment in emergency-preparedness
centers.
Standby power-generating equipment for essential
facilities.
Structures and equipment in government communication
centers and other facilities required for emergency
response.
II. Hazardous Facilities Structures housing, supporting or containing sufficient
quantities of toxic or explosive substances to be
dangerous to the safety of the general public if released.
III. Special Occupancy Covered structures whose primary occupancy is public
Structure assembly-capacity > 300 persons.
Buildings for schools through secondary or day-care
centers-capacity > 250 students.
Buildings for colleges or adult education
schools-capacity > 500 students.
Medical facilities with 50 or more resident incapacitated
patients, but not included above.
Jails and detention facilities.
All structures with occupancy > 5,000 persons.
Structures and equipment in power-generating stations
and other public utility facilities not included above, and
required for continued operation.
IV. Standard Occupancy All structures having occupancies or functions not listed
Structure above.
Essential facilities are those structures which are necessary for emergency operations sub- ·' ~.,: ~_,.
1
sequent to a natural disaster.
185
23-l, 23-M 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 23-L-OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

IMPORTANCE FACTOR I
OCCUPANCY CATEGORY1 Earthquake2 Wind
I. Essential facilities 1.25 1.15

II. Hazardous facilities 1.25 1.15
III. Special occupancy structures 1.00 1.00
IV. Standard occupancy structures 1.00 1.00
:l~l~ 1
''''' 0ccupancy types or functions of structures w1thm each category are listed m Table No.
J 23-K and structural observation requirements are given in Sections 305, 306 and 307.
2for life-safety-related equipment, see Section 2336 (a).
TABLE NO. 23-M

VERTICAL STRUCTURAL IRREGULARITIES
REFERENCE
IRREGULARITY TYPE AND DEFINITION SECTION
A. Stiffness Irregularity-Soft Story

A soft story is one in which the lateral stiffness is less than 70 2333 (h) 3 B
percent of that in the story above or less than 80 percent of the
average stiffness of the three stories above.
B. Weight (mass) Irregularity
Mass irregularity shall be considered to exist where the 2333 (h) 3 B
effective mass of any story is more than 150 percent of the
effective mass of an adjacent story. A roof which is lighter
than the floor below need not be considered.
C. Vertical Geometric Irregularity
Vertical geometric irregularity shall be considered to exist 2333 (h) 3 B
where the horizontal dimension of the lateral force-resisting
system in any story is more than 130 percent of that in an
adjacent story. One-story penthouses need not be considered.
D. In-plane Discontinuity in Vertical Lateral Force-resisting
Element 2334 (g)
An in-plane offset of the lateral load-resisting elements greater
than the length of those elements.
E. Discontinuity in Capacity-Weak Story
A weak story is one in which the story strength is less than 80 2333 (i) I
percent of that in the story above. The story strength is the
total strength of all seismic-resisting elements sharing the
story shear for the direction under consideration.
186
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 23-N
TABLE NO. 23-N

PLAN STRUCTURAL IRREGULARITIES
REFERENCE
IRREGULARITY TYPE AND DEFINITION SECTION
A. Torsional Irregularity-to be considered when

diaphragms are not flexible.
Torsional irregularity shall be considered to exist when the 2337 (b) 9 E
maximum story drift, computed including accidental torsion,
at one end of the structure transverse to an axis is more than
1.2 times the average of the story drifts of the two ends of the
structure.
B. Reentrant Corners
Plan configurations of a structure and its lateral force-resisting 2337 (b) 9 E
system contain reentrant comers, where both projections of 2337 (b) 9 F
the structure beyond a reentrant comer are greater than 15
percent of the plan dimension of the structure in the given
direction.
C. Diaphragm Discontinuity
Diaphragms with abrupt discontinuities or variations in 2337 (b) 9 E
stiffness, including those having cutout or open areas greater
than 50 percent of the gross enclosed area of the diaphragm,
or changes in effective diaphragm stiffness of more than 50
percent from one story to the next.
D. Out-of-plane Offsets
Discontinuities in a lateral force path, such as out-of-plane 2334 (g),
offsets of the vertical elements. 2337 (b) 9 E
E. Nonparallel Systems
The vertical lateral load-resisting elements are not parallel to 2337 (a)
or symmetric about the major orthogonal axes of the lateral
force-resisting system.
187
N
TABLE NO. 23·0-STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
BASIC STRUCTURAL SYSTEM' LATERAL LOAD-RESISTING SYSTEM-DESCRIPTION Rw' H'
6
A. Bearing Wall System I. Light-framed walls with shear panels
a. Plywood walls for structures three stories or less 8 65
b. All other light-framed walls 6 65
2. Shear walls
a. Concrete 6 160
b. Masonry 6 160
3. Light steel-framed bearing walls with tension-only bracing 4 65
4. Braced frames where bracing carries gravity loads
a. Steel 6 160
b. Concrete4 4 -
c. Heavy timber 4 65
B. Building Frame System I. Steel eccentrically braced frame (EBF) 10 240
2. Light-framed walls with shear panels
a. Plywood walls for structures three stories or less 9 65
b. All other light-framed walls 7 65
3. Shear walls
a. Concrete 8 240 ...
b. Masonry
4. Concentrically braced frames
8 160 ...
U)
U)
c:
a. Steel 8 160 z
b. Concrete4 8 - :;;
c. Heavy timber 8 65 0
:D
c. Moment-resisting Frame I. Special moment-resisting frames (SMRF) ==
ID
System a. Steel 12 N.L. c:
b. Concrete 12 N.L. j=
2. Concrete intermediate moment-resisting frames (IMRF) 6 8 - 0
3. Ordinary moment-resisting frames (OMRF)
!l!!i
z
G>
a. Steel 6 160
0
b. Concrete 7 5 -
0
0
m
_.
::::· CQ
D. Dual Systems I. Shear walls :;:~: _.
CQ
:::::
a. Concrete with SMRF 12 N.L. c
b. Concrete with steel OMRF
c. Concrete with concrete IMRFi
6
9
160
160
~!l!l z
:;;
~r 0
d. Masonry with SMRF 8 160
e. Masonry with steel OMRF 6 160 1~1~ ::0
3::
f. Masonry with concrete IMRF' 7 - ~m IJI
c
2. Steel EBF
a. With steel SMRF 12 N.L. 1~ ~ ;=
~ [~ c
b. With steel OMRF
3. Concentrically braced frames
6 160
z
C)
a. Steel with steel SMRF 10 N.L. !ll 0
b. Steel with steel OMRF 6 160
~l~ ~
0
c. Concrete with concrete SMRF' 9 - c
d. Concrete with concrete IMRF'
::::: m
6 - =~===
~=~=~
E. Undefined Systems See Sections 2333 (h) 3 and 2333 (i) 2 - -
1Basic structural systems are defined in Section 2333 (f).
2See Section 2334 (c) for combination of structural system.
3H-Height limit applicable to Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. See Section 2333 (g).
4Prohibited in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4.
5 N.L.-No limit.
6Prohibited in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, except as permitted in Section 2338 (b).
7 Prohibited in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4.
_.
Q)
CQ
TABLE NO. 23-P-HORIZONTAL FORCE FACTOR, Cp N
j Cf
"C
ELEMENTS OF STRUCTURES AND NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT1 VALUE OF Cp FOOTNOTE
I. Part or Portion of Structure

I. Walls including the following:
a. Unbraced (cantilevered) parapets 2.00
b. Other exterior walls above the ground floor 0.75 2.3
c. All interior bearing and nonbearing walls and partitions 0.75 3
d. Masonry or concrete fences over 6 feet high 0.75
2. Penthouse (except when framed by an extension of the structural frame) 0.75
3. Connections for prefabricated structural elements other than walls, with force applied at center of
gravity 0.75 4
4. Diaphragms - 5
lllij
II. Nonstructural Components :::=·
I. Exterior and interior ornamentations and appendages 2.00
2. Chimneys, stacks, trussed towers and tanks on legs: .,lil1i·::
a. Supported on or projecting as an unbraced cantilever above the roof more than one half their total
\~:\~
height
b. All others, including those supported below the roof with unbraced projection above the roof less
2.00 :::::
::::: ..
than one half its height, or braced or guyed to the structural frame at or above their centers of mass
3. Signs and billboards
4. Storage racks (include contents)
0.75
2.00
0.75 10
~)
::::: ..
CD
CD
c:
5. Anchorage for permanent floor-supported cabinets and book stacks more than 5 feet in height (include
z
contents) 0.75
=n
0
6. Anchorage for suspended ceilings and light fixtures 0.75 4,6.7 ::D
7. Access floor systems 0.75 4,9 3:
ID
III. Equipment c:
I. Tanks and vessels (include contents), including support systems and anchorage 0.75
r=c
2. Electrical, mechanical and plumbing equipment and associated conduit, ductwork and piping, and
machinery 0.75 8
z
Gl
0
1See Section 2336 (b) for itell)s supported at or below grade. 0
2See Section 2337 (b) 4 and Section 2336 (b).
c
m
....
3Where flexible diaphragms, as defined in Section 2334 (f), provide lateral support for walls and partitions, the value of Cp for anchorage shall be l8
....
increased 50 percent for the center one half of the diaphragm span.
4 Applies to Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4 only. c:
5 See Section 2337 (b) 9. z
6Ceiling weight shall include all light fixtures and other equipment or partitions which are laterally supported by the ceiling. For purposes of ~:II
determining the seismic force, a ceiling weight of not less than four pounds per square foot shall be used.
7Ceilings constructed of lath and plaster or gypsum board screw or nail attached to suspended members that support a ceiling at one level extending 3:
IJI
from wall to wall need not be analyzed provided the walls are not over 50 feet apart. c:
8 Machinery and equipment include, but are not limited to, boilers, chillers, heat exchangers, pumps, air-handling units, cooling towers, control panels,
r=c
motors, switch gear, transformers and life-safety equipment. It shall include major conduit, dueling and piping serving such machinery and
equipment and fire sprinkler systems. See Section 2336 (b) for additional requirements for determining Cp for nonrigid or flexibly mounted z
C)
equipment.
9 WP for access floor systems shall be the dead load of the access floor system plus 25 percent ofthe floor live load plus a 10 psf partition load allowance. 0
10J:n lieu of the tabulated values, steel storage racks may be designed in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 27-11. 0
c
m
....
....
CD
TABLE NO. 23-Q

Rw FACTORS FOR NONBUILDING STRUCTURES
STRUCTURE TYPE Rw
I. Tanks, vessels or pressurized spheres on braced or unbraced legs. 3
2. Cast-in-place concrete silos and chimneys having walls continuous to the
foundation. 5
3. Distributed mass cantilever structures such as stacks, chimneys, silos and
skirt-supported vertical vessels. 4
4. Trussed towers (freestanding or guyed), guyed stacks and chimneys. 4
5. Inverted pendulum-type structures. 3
6. Cooling towers. 5
7. Bins and hoppers on braced or unbraced legs. 4
8. Storage racks. 5
9. Signs and billboards. 5
10. Amusement structures and monuments. 3
II. All other self-supporting structures not otherwise covered. 4
192
....
<D
....
<D
c:
z
:;;
0
::Q
3:
tD
c:
r=
c
z
C)
0
0
c
m
. - -....I
..\I
- -----·
~,~ 1 \c.o110
•• vL~
I o• L--
[3 Basic w1nd speed 70 mph
1. Linear interpolation between wind speed contours is acceptable.
2. Caution in use of wind speed contours in mountainous regions of Alaska is advised.
.... 3. Wind speed for Hawaii is 80, Puerto Rico is 95 and the Virgin Islands is 11 0.
B l_[!~~~~~~~~~;;;~:;:~~~~~4. Wind speed may be assumed to be constant between the coastline and the nearest inland contour. jjjli
FIGURE NO. 23-1-MINIMUM BASIC WIND SPEEDS IN MILES PER HOUR

.....
:8
.....
c:
z
~
:u
5:
CD
c:
r=
c
z
c;)
0
0
c
m
FIGURE NO. 23-2-5EISMIC ZONE MAP OF THE UNITED STATES
For areas outside of the United States, see Appendix Chapter 23.
4
v I' ' I'
SOFT TO MEDIUM CLAYS AND

SANDS (SOIL TYPE 3)
' '" "II
-
,-
c
z
:;;
0
::0
3:
1.1
'/~DEEP
3 ID
c
COHESIONLESS OR STIFF r=
0
CLAY SOILS (SOIL TYPE 2) z
G>
0
ROCK AND STIFF SOILS 0
~
J l 0
2 (SOIL TYPE 1) m
y....,
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3
PERIOD, T
(Seconds)
......
CD
Ul
FIGURE NO. 23-3--NORMALIZED RESPONSE SPECTRA SHAPES
NOTES
196
Chapter 24
MASONRY
General
Sec. 2401. (a) Scope. The materials, design, construction and quality control of
masonry shall be in accordance with this chapter.
(b) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter, certain terms are defined as fol-
lows:
AREAS:
Actual dimensions are the measured dimensions of a designated item; for ex-
ample, a designated masonry unit or wall, as used in the structure. The actual di-
mension shall not vary from the specified dimension by more than the amount
allowed in the appropriate standard of quality in Section 2402 of this chapter.
197
Nominal dimensions of masonry units are equal to its specified dimensions

plus the thickness of the joint with which the unit is laid.
Specified dimensions are the dimensions specified for the manufacture or con-
struction of masonry, masonry units, joints or any other component of a structure.
Unless otherwise stated, all calculations shall be made using or based on specified
dimensions.
GROUT LIFT is an increment of grout height within the total pour; a pour may
consist of one or more grout lifts.
GROUT POUR is the total height of masonry wall to be grouted prior to the
erection of additional masonry. A grout pour will consist of one or more grout lifts.
GROUTED MASONRY:
Grouted hollow-unit masonry is that form of grouted masonry construction in
which certain designated cells of hollow units are continuously filled with grout.
Grouted multi wythe masonry is that form of grouted masonry construction in
which the space between the wythes is solidly or periodically filled with grout.
JOINTS:
Bed joint is the mortar joint that is horizontal at the time the masonry units are
placed.
Collar joint is the vertical, longitudinal, mortar or grouted joint.
Head joint is the mortar joint having a vertical transverse plane.
MASONRY UNIT is brick, tile, stone, glass block or concrete block conform-
ing to the requirements specified in Section 2402.
Hollow-masonry unit is a masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in every
plane parallel to the bearing surface is less than 75 percent of the gross cross-sec-
tional area in the same plane.
Solid-masonry unit is a masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in every
plane parallel to the bearing surface is 75 percent or more ofthe gross cross-sec-
tional area in the same plane.
PRISM is an assemblage of masonry units and mortar with or without grout
used as a test specimen for determining properties of the masonry.
REINFORCED MASONRY is that form of masonry construction in which re-
inforcement acting in conjunction with the masonry is used to resist forces and is
designed in accordance with Section 2409.
SHELL is the outer portion of a hollow masonry unit as placed in masonry.
WALL TIE is a mechanical metal fastener which connects wythes of masonry
to each other or to other materials.
WALLS:
Bonded wall is a masonry wall in which two or more wythes are bonded to act as
a structural unit.
Cavity wall is a wall containing continuous air space with a minimum width of
2 inches and a maximum width of 4 112 inches between wythes which are tied with
metal ties.
198
WEB is an interior solid portion of a hollow-masonry unit as placed in masonry.

WYTHE is the portion of a wall which is one masonry unit in thickness. A collar
joint is not considered a wythe.
(c) Notation.
depth of equivalent rectangular stress block for strength design.
cross-sectional area of anchor bolt, square inch.
effective area of masonry.
gross area of wall. %
net area of masonry section bounded by wall thickness and length of sec- ~
tion in the direction of shear force considered, square inches. i~
A, area of tension (pullout) cone of an embedded anchor bolt projected onto
the surface of masonry, square inches.
A_,. effective cross-sectional area of reinforcement in a column or flexural
member.
A,. area of steel required for shear reinforcement perpendicular to the longi-
tudinal reinforcement.
A'.I effective cross-sectional area of compression reinforcement in a flexu-
ral member.
h effective width of rectangular member or width of flange forT and I sec-
tions.
h, computed tension force on anchor bolts, pounds.
b,. computed shear force on anchor bolts, pounds.
h' width of web in T and I member.
8, allowable tension force on anchor bolts, pounds.
8,. allowable shear force on anchor bolts, pounds.
(' distance from the neutral axis to extreme fiber.
c,,
..
masonry shear strength coefficient as obtained from Table No. 24-0.
d distance from the compression face of a flexural member to the centroid
of longitudinal tensile reinforcement.
diameter of the reinforcing bar.
dead loads, or related internal moments and forces.
e eccentricity of P,if.
maximum useable compressive strain of masonry.
E load effects of earthquake, or related internal moments and forces.
Em modulus of elasticity of masonry.
E, modulus of elasticity of steel, 29,000,000 psi.
j;, computed axial compressive stress due to design axial load.
fi, computed flexural stress in the extreme fiber due to design bending loads
only.
f~"' computed compressive stress in masonry due to dead load only.
modulus of rupture.
199
Is computed stress in reinforcement due to design loads.

[y tensile yield stress of reinforcement.
j;. computed shear stress due to design load.
f'm specified compressive strength of masonry at the age of 28 days.
~:i:
F loads due to weight and pressure of fluids or related moments and
forces.
Fa allowable average axial compressive stress for centroidally applied ax-
ialload only.
Fh allowable flexural compressive stress if members were carrying bend-
ing load only.
Fhr allowable bearing stress.
Fs allowable stress in reinforcement.
Fse allowable compressive stress in column reinforcement.
Fr allowable flexural tensile stress in masonry.
F,. allowable shear stress in masonry.
G shear modulus of masonry.
h height of wall between points of support.
h' effective height of a wall or column.
:::::
:::::
:;:;:
H loads due to weight and pressure of soil. water in soil or related internal
moments and forces.
I moment of inertia about the neutral axis of the cross-sectional area.
fg Jer gross, cracked moment of inertia of the wall cross section.
j ratio or distance between centroid of flexural compressive forces and
centroid of tensile forces to depth, d.
k the ratio of depth of the compressive stress in a flexural member to the
depth, d.
length of a wall or segment.
lh embedment depth of anchor bolts, inch.
Ihe anchor bolt edge distance, the least length measured from the edge of
masonry to the surface of the anchor bolt, inch.
ld required development length of reinforcement.
L live loads, or related internal moments and forces.
4v length of wall.
M design moment.
Me moment capacity of compression steel in a flexural member about the
centroid of the tensile force.
:~:~:
Mer cracking moment strength of the masonry wall.
Mm the moment of the compressive force in the masonry about the centroid
of the tensile force in the reinforcement.
Mn nominal moment strength of the masonry wall.
Ms the moment of the tensile force in the reinforcement about the centroid
of the compressive force in the masonry.
Mser service moment at the midheight of the panel, including P tl effects.
200
factored moment.
modular ratio= £5 /Em.
p ratio of the area of flexural tensile reinforcement, A5 , to the area (bd).
p design axial load.
Pa allowable centroidal axial load for reinforced masonry columns.
ph nominal balanced design axial strength.
Pt load from tributary floor or roof area.
Po nominal axial load strength without bending, pounds.
Pu factored axial load, pounds.
Puf factored load from tributary floor or roof loads.
Puw factored weight of the wall tributary to the section under consideration.
Pw weight of the wall tributary to section under consideration.
rh ratio of the area of bars cut off to the total area of bars at the section.
s spacing of stirrups or of bent bars in a direction parallel to that of the
main reinforcement.
s section modulus.
effective thickness of a wythe, wall or column.
T effects of temperature, creep, shrinkage and differential settlement.
u bond stress per unit of surface area of bar.
u required strength to resist factored loads, or related internal moments ~)
and forces. ~j~)\
total design shear force.
nominal shear strength, pounds.
nominal shear strength provided by masonry, pounds.
nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement, pounds.
factored distributed lateral load.
wind load, or related internal moments in forces.
ratio of distributed shear reinforcement on a plane perpendicular to
plane or Amv·
strength reduction factor.
~:~j~
horizontal deflection at midheight under factored load; p Ll effects shall mi
be included in deflection calculation. ;;~~~
~(} sum of the perimeters of all the longitudinal reinforcement.
Material Standards
Sec. 2402. (a) Quality. Materials used in masonry shall conform to the require-
ments stated herein. If no requirements are specified in this section for a material,
quality shall be based on generally accepted good practice, subject to the approval
of the building official.
(b) Standards of Quality. The standards listed below labeled a "U.B.C. stan- I
201
6. Masonry unit~ther
A. Calcium silicate
(i) U.B.C. Standard No. 24-2, Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-lime
Brick)
202
B. Glass block
(i) Glass block may be solid or hollow and contain inserts.
(ii) All mortar contact surfaces shall be treated to ensure adhesion between I
mortar and glass. i\i
C. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-14, Unburned Clay Masonry Units }
~. ~~::;:~~=~:::'""''' u~d ma.onry unit,.haJI nreettho >pp\\<>'k* :;:·:

quirements as for new masonry units of the same material for their in- ' ' '
I
F. U.B.~~~~~~~;d
sonry Prisms
No. 24-26, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Ma- il\11
7. Metal ties and anchors

A. Metal ties and anchors shall be made of a material having a minimum tensile :I
yie~~ s:~s:u~~ ~~~:o!:i~ullyembedded in mortar or grout shall be coated with Iii
copper, cadmium, zinc or a metal having at least equivalent corrosion-resistant H~
properties. ~~~
~l;~i
8. Mortar
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-20, Mortar for Unit Masonry
ill/
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-22, Field Test Specimens for Mortar
C. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-30, Standard Test Method for Flexural Bond ::~:~m~
Strength of Mortar Cement
9. Grout
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-29, Grout for Masonry
I
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-28, Method of Sampling and Testing Grout
l 0. Reinforcement
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-15, Part I, Joint Reinforcement for Masonry
B. ASTMA615,A616,A617,A 706,A 767,andA 775,DeformedandPlain .·'l··'···'i.•..
,' ,i
Billet-steel Bars, Rail-steel Deformed and Plain Bars, Axle-steel Deformed and
Plain Bars, and Deformed Low-alloy Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
C. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-l5,Partll, Cold-drawn Steel WireforConcreteRe- !.':
inforcement
~~~~j
11. Water. Water used in mortar or grout shall be clean and free of deleterious ,~,~~
amounts of acid, alkalies or organic material or other harmful substances.
Mortar and Grout

Sec. 2403. (a) General. Mortar and grout shall comply with the provisions of
this section. Special mortars, grouts or bonding systems may be used, subject to
satisfactory evidence of their capabilities when approved by the building official.
(b) Materials. Materials used as ingredients in mortar and grout shall conform 'iii
to the applicable requirements in Section 2402. Cementitious materials for grout '~!
203
·':·;.'!·'·'!,·.';
•.. ...; shall be one or both ofthe following: limefand pfortland cement. Cementitious ma-
terials for mortar shall be one or more o the ollowing: lime, masonry cement,
portl~nd cement a~d modrtadr c~m~nt. Cemh ent1·tiousbmaterif~bls or adf~itiv es shall not
1
!,i,!,i
'
contam epoxy resms an envatlves, p eno1s, as estos 1 er or tree ays.
(c) Mortar. I. General. Mortar shall consist of a mixture of cementitious mate-
rial and aggregate to which sufficient water and approved additives, if any, have
been added to achieve a workable, plastic consistency.
2. Selecting proportions. A mortar with specified proportions of ingredients
that differ from the mortar proportions of Table No. 24-A may be approved for use
when it is demonstrated by laboratory or field experience that this mortar with the
specified proportions of ingredients, when combined with the masonry units to be
used in the structure will achieve the specified compressive strength if'm). Water
content shall be adjusted to provide proper workability under existing field condi-
tions. When the proportion of ingredients is not specified, the proportions by mor-
tar type shall be used as given in Table No. 24-A.
(d) Grout. I. General. Grout shall consist of a mixture of cementitious materi-
als and aggregate to which water has been added such that the mixture will flow
=~=~= without segregation of the constituents. Grout shall have a minimum compressive
·:· · · ....
· ·;·' '...
····'
!.:· ....,· :::~~;~~~~;~~:~;:~,~;~~~"~~::,.~;~~;~:,:,~:~:.:Wf.'
i.· '•,·.: out segregation. Grout shall be specified by one of the following methods:
A. Proportions of ingredients and any additives shall be based on laboratory or
;• field expe rience wi.tf~ thebgrout ingredi~nts afn? the ma.sonry units to be used. The
••'• grout sha11 be spec I ted y the proportiOn o Its constituents in terms of parts by
# volume, or
B. Minimum compressive strength which will produce the required prism
strength, or
C. Proportions by grout type shall be used as given in Table No. 24-B.
(e) Additives and Admixtures. I. General. Additives and admixtures to mor-
tar or grout shall not be used unless approved by the building official.
2. Antifreeze compounds. Antifreeze liquids, chloride salts or other such sub-
stances shall not be used in mortar or grout.
3. Air entrainment. Air-entraining substances shall not be used in mortar or
grout unless tests are conducted to determine compliance with the requirements of
this code.
4. Colors. Only pure mineral oxide, carbon black or synthetic colors may be
used. Carbon black shall be limited to a maximum of 3 percent of the weight of the
cement.
Construction
Sec. 2404. (a) General. Masonry shall be constructed according to the provi-
sions of this section.
204
(b) Materials-Handling, Storage and Preparation. All materials shall com-

ply with applicable requirements of Section 2402. Storage, handling and prepara-
tion at the site shall conform also to the following:
I. Masonry materials shall be stored so that at the time of use the materials are
clean and structurally suitable for the intended use.
2. All metal reinforcement shall be free from loose rust and other coatings that
would inhibit reinforcing bond.
3. At the time oflaying, burned clay units and sand lime units shall have a rate of
absorption not exceeding 0.025 ounce per square inch during a period of one min-
ute. In the absorption test the surface of the unit shall be held 1/ 8 inch below the sur-
face of the water.
4. Concrete masonry units shall not be wetted unless otherwise approved.
5. Materials shall be stored in a manner such that deterioration or intrusion of
foreign materials is prevented and that the material will be capable of meeting
applicable requirements at the time of mixing.
6. The method of measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that
proportions of the materials can be controlled.
7. Mortar or grout mixed at the jobsite shall be mixed for a period of time not
less than 3 minutes or more than 10 minutes in a mechanical mixer with the amount
of water required to provide the desired workability. Hand mixing of small
amounts of mortar is permitted. Mortar may be retempered. Mortar or grout which
has hardened or stiffened due to hydration of the cement shall not be used, but under
no case shall mortar be used two and one-half hours, nor grout used one and
one-half hours, after the initial mixing water has been added to the dry ingredients
at the jobsite.
Dry mixes for mortar and grout which are blended in the factory and mixed at the II!
~~~~tt::~all be mixed in mechanical mixers until workable, but not to exceed 10 I\
(c) Cold-weather Construction. I. General. All materials shall be delivered in
a usable condition and stored to prevent wetting by capillary action, rain and snow.
The tops of all walls not enclosed or sheltered shall be covered with a strong
weather-resistive material at the end of each day or shutdown.
Partially completed walls shall be covered at all times when work is not in prog-
ress. Covers shall be draped over the wall and extend a minimum of 2 feet down
both sides and shall be securely held in place, except when additional protection is
required in Section 2404 (c) 4.
2. Execution-preparation. If ice or snow has inadvertently formed on ma-
sonry bed, it shall be thawed by application of heat carefully applied until top sur-
face of the masonry is dry to the touch.
A section of masonry deemed frozen and damaged shall be removed before con-
tinuing construction of that section.
3. Construction. Masonry units shall be dry. Wet or frozen masonry units shall
not be laid.
205
Air temperature 40°F. to 32°F.: Sand or mixing water shall be heated to produce
mortar temperatures between 40°F. and 120°F.
Air temperature 32°F. to 25°F.: Sand and mixing water shall be heated to pro-
duce mortar temperatures between 40°F. and 120°F. Maintain temperatures of
mortar on boards above freezing.
Air temperature 25°F. to 20°F.: Sand and mixing water shall be heated to pro-
duce mortar temperatures between 40°F. and 120°F. Maintain mortar temperatures
on boards above freezing. Salamanders or other sources of heat shall be used on
both sides of walls under construction. Windbreaks shall be employed when wind
is in excess of 15 miles per hour.
Air temperature 20°F. and below: Sand and mixing water shall be heated to pro-
vide mortar temperatures between 40°F. and 120°F. Enclosure and auxiliary heat
shall be provided to maintain air temperature above 32°F. Temperature of units
when laid shall not be less than 20°F.
4. Protection. When the mean daily air temperature is 40°F. to 32°F., masonry
shall be protected from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with weather-
resistive membrane.
When the mean daily air temperature is 32°F. to 25°F., masonry shall be com-
pletely covered with weather-resistive membrane for 24 hours.
When the mean daily air temperature is 25°F. to 20°F., masonry shall be com-
pletely covered with insulating blankets or equally protected for 24 hours.
When the mean daily air temperature is 20°F. and below, masonry temperature
shall be maintained above 32°F. for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat,
by electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps or other approved methods.
5. Placing grout and protection of grouted masonry. When air temperatures
fall below 40°F., grout mixing water and aggregate shall be heated to produce grout
temperatures between 40°F. and 120°F.
Masonry to be grouted shall be maintained above freezing during grout place-
ment and for at least 24 hours after placement.
Where atmospheric temperatures fall below 20°F., enclosures shall be provided
around the masonry during grout placement and for at least 24 hours after place-
ment.
(d) Placing Masonry Units. I. Mortar. The mortar shall be sufficiently plastic
and units shall be placed with sufficient pressure to extrude mortar from the joint
and produce a tight joint. Deep furrowing which produces voids shall not be used.
The initial bed joint thickness shall not be less than 1/ 4 inch or more than I inch;
subsequent bed joints shall be not less than 1/ 4 inch or more than 5/ 8 inch in thick-
ness.
2. Surfaces. Surfaces to be in contact with mortar or grout shall be clean and free
of deleterious materials.
3. Solid masonry units. Solid masonry units shall have full head and bed joints.
4. Hollow-masonry units. All head and bed joints shall be filled solidly with
mortar for a distance in from the face of the unit not less than the thickness of the
shell.
206
Head joints of open-end units with beveled ends need not be mortared. The bev-
eled ends shall form a grout key which permits grout within 5/ 8 inch of the face of
the unit. The units shall be tightly butted to prevent leakage of grout.
(e) Reinforcement Placing. Reinforcing details shall conform to the require-
ments of Section 2409 (e). Metal reinforcement shall be located in accordance with
the plans and specifications. Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement
prior to grouting by wire positioners or other suitable devices at intervals not ex-
ceeding 200 bar diameters.
Tolerances forthe placement of steel in walls and flexural elements shall be plus
or minus 1h inch ford equal to 8 inches or less, plus or minus one inch ford equal to
24 inches or less but greater than 8 inches, and plus or minus 11/ 4 inches ford great-
er than 24 inches.
Tolerance for longitudinal location of reinforcement shall be plus or minus 2 in-
ches.
(f) Grouted Masonry. I. General conditions. Grouted masonry shall be con-
structed in such a manner that all elements of the masonry act together as a struc-
tural element.
Prior to grouting, the grout space shall be clean so that all spaces to be filled with
grout do not contain mortar projections greater than 1h inch, mortar droppings or
other foreign material. Grout shall be placed so that all spaces designated to be
grouted shall be filled with grout and the grout shall be confined to those specific
spaces.
Grout materials and water content shall be controlled to provide adequate fluid-
ity for placement without segregation of the constituents, and shall be mixed thor-
oughly.
The grouting of any section of wall shall be completed in one day with no inter-
ruptions greater than one hour.
Between grout pours, a horizontal construction joint shall be formed by stop-
ping all wythes at the same elevation and with the grout stopping a minimum of 11h
inches below a mortar joint, except at top of wall. Where bond beams occur, stop
grout pour a minimum of 1h inch below the top of the masonry.
Size and height limitations of the grout space or cell shall not be less than shown
in Table No. 24-G. Higher grout pours or smaller cavity widths or cell size than
shown in Table No. 24-G may be used when approved, if it is demonstrated that
grout spaces are properly filled.
Cleanouts are required for all grout pours over 5 feet in height.
When required, cleanouts shall be provided in the bottom course at every verti-
cal bar but shall not be spaced more than 32 inches on center for solidly grouted
masonry. When cleanouts are required, they shall be sealed after inspection and be-
fore grouting.
When cleanouts are not provided, special provisions must be made to keep the
bottom and sides of the grout spaces, as well as the minimum total clear area as re-
quired by Table No. 24-G, clean and clear prior to grouting.
207
\:[ Units may be laid to the full height of the grout pour and grout shall be placed in a
:,~:continuous pour in grout lifts not exceeding 6 feet. When approved, grout lifts may
~:: be greater than 6 feet if it can be demonstrated the grout spaces can be properly
filled.
All cells and spaces containing reinforcing bars shall be filled with grout.
2. Construction requirements. Reinforcement shall be placed prior to grout-
ing. Bolts shall be accurately set with templates or by approved equivalent means
and held in place to prevent movement.
Segregation of the grout materials and damage to the masonry shall be avoided
during the grouting process.
Grout shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration during placing before loss
of plasticity in a manner to fill the grout space. Grout pours greater than 12 inches
shall be reconsolidated by mechanical vibration to minimize voids due to water
loss. Grout pours 12 inches or less in height shall be mechanically vibrated, or
puddled.
In one-story buildings having wood-frame exterior walls, foundations not over
24 inches high measured from the top of the footing may be constructed of hollow-
masonry units laid in running bond without mortared head joints. Any standard
shape unit may be used, provided the masonry units permit horizontal flow of grout
to adjacent units. Grout shall be solidly poured to the full height in one lift and shall
be puddled or mechanically vibrated.
In nonstructural elements, including fireplaces and residential chimneys, which
do not exceed 8 feet in height above the highest point of lateral support, mortar of
pouring consistency may be substituted for grout when the masonry is constructed
and grouted in pours of 12 inches or less.
In multiwythe grouted masonry, vertical barriers of masonry shall be built
across the grout space. The grouting of any section of wall between barriers shall be
completed in one day with no interruption longer than one hour.
(g) Aluminum Equipment. Grout shall not be handled nor pumped utilizing
aluminum equipment unless it can be demonstrated with the materials and equip-
ment to be used that there will be no deleterious effect on the strength of the grout.
(h) Joint Steel. Wire joint reinforcement used in the design as principal reinforc-
ing in hollow-unit construction shall be continuous between supports unless
splices are made by lapping:
I. Fifty-four wire diameters in a grouted cell, or
2. Seventy-five wire diameters in the mortared bed joint, or
3. In alternate bed joints of running bond masonry a distance not less than 54 di-
ameters plus twice the spacing of the bed joints, or
4. As required by calculation and specific location in areas of minimum stress,
such as points of inflection.
Side wires shall be deformed and shall conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 24-15,
Part I, Joint Reinforcement for Masonry.
208
Quality Control
Sec. 2405. (a) General. Quality control shall ensure that materials, construction
and workmanship are in compliance with the plans and specifications, and the
applicable requirements of this chapter. When required, inspection records shall be
maintained and made available to the building official.
(b) Scope. Quality control shall include, but is not limited to, assurance that:
1. Masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime, aggregate and all other materials
meet the requirements of the applicable standards of quality and that they are prop-
erly stored and prepared for use.
2. Mortar and grout are properly mixed using specified proportions of ingredi-
ents. The method of measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that
proportions of materials are controlled.
3. Construction details, procedures and workmanship are in accordance with the
plans and specifications.
4. Placement, splices and bar diameters are in accordance with the provisions of
this chapter and the plans and specifications.
(c) Compliance with/~. Compliance with the requirements for the specified
compressive strength of masonryf;, shall be in accordance with one of the follow-
ing:
1. Masonry prism testing. The compressive strenh, it ut masonry determined in
accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 24-26 for each set of prisms shall equal or
exceedj;,. Compressive strength of prisms is based on tests at 28 days. Compres-
sive strength at seven days or three days may be used provided a relationship be-
tween seven-day and three-day and 28-day strength has been established for the
project prior to the start of construction. Verification by masonry prism testing
shall meet the following:
A. A set of five masonry prisms shall be built and tested in accordance with
U .B.C. Standard No. 24-26 prior to the start of construction. Materials used
for the construction of the prisms shall be taken from those specified to be
used in the project. Prisms shall be constructed under the observation of the
engineer or special inspector or an approved agency and tested by an ap-
proved agency.
B. When full allowable stresses are used in design, a set of three prisms shall
be built and tested during construction in accordance with U.B.C. Standard
No. 24-26 for each 5,000 square feet of wall area, but not Jess than one set
of three masonry prisms for the project.
C. When half the allowable stresses are used in design, testing during construc-
tion is not required. A Jetter of certification from the supplier of the materi-
als used to verify thej;, in accordance with Section 2405 (c) 1 A shall be
required at the time of, or prior to, delivery of the materials to the jobsite to
assure the materials used in construction are representative of the materials
used to construct the prisms prior to construction.
2. Masonry prism test record. Compressive strength verification by masonry
prism test records shall meet the following:
209
A. A masonry prism test record approved by the building official of at least 30

masonry prisms which were built and tested in accordance with U.B.C.
Standard No. 24-26. Prisms shall have been constructed under the observa-
tion of an engineer or special inspector or an approved agency and shall have
been tested by an approved agency.
B. Masonry prisms shall be representative ofthe corresponding construction.
C. The average compressive strength of the test record shall equal or exceed
1.33f'm.
D. When full allowable stresses are used in design, a set of three masonry
prisms shall be built during construction in accordance with U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 24-26 for each 5,000 square feet of wall area; but not less than one
set of three prisms for the project.
E. When half the allowable stresses are used in design, field testing during con-
struction is not required. A letter of certification from the supplier of the ma-
terials to the jobsite shall be required at the time of, or prior to, delivery of
the materials to assure the materials used in construction are representative
of the materials used to develop the prism test record in accordance with
Section 2405 (c) 2 A.
3. Unit strength method. Verification by the unit strength method shall meet the
following:
A. When full allowable stresses are used in design, the units prior to construc-
tion and test units during construction for each 5,000 square feet of wall area
for compressive strength to show compliance with the compressive strength
required in Table No. 24-C; and
EXCEPTION: In lieu of testing units as required in Section 2405 (c) 3 A and
grout as required in Section 2405 (c) 3 D, prism tests may be used for the required test-
ing prior to construction or during construction.
B. When half the allowable stresses are used in design, testing is not required
for the units. A letter of certification from the manufacturer of the units shall
be required at the time of, or prior to, delivery of the units to the jobsite to
assure the units comply with the compressive strength required in Table No.
24-C; and
C. Mortar shall comply with the mortar type required in Table No. 24-C; and
D. When full stresses are used in design for concrete masonry, grout shall be
tested for each 5,000 square feet of wall area, but not less than one test per
project, to show compliance with the compressive strength required in
Table No. 24-C, Footnote No.4.
E. When half the allowable stresses are used in design for concrete masonry,
testing is not required for the grout. A letter of certification from the supplier
of the grout shall be required at the time of, or prior to, delivery of the grout
to the jobsite to assure the grout complies with the compressive strength re-
quired in Table No. 24-C, Footnote No.4; or
210
F. When full allowable stresses are used in design for clay masonry, grout pro-~;
portions shall be verified by the engineer, or special inspector or an ap- .
proved agency to conform with Table No. 24-B. :>!
G. When half the allowable stresses are used in design for clay masonry, a \ette'l: ~.
of certification from the supplier of the grout shall be required at the time of, ~iii
or prior to, delivery of the grout to the jobsite to assure the grout conforms ll~
to the proportions of Table No. 24-B. ,. .,
(d) Mortar Testing. When required, mortar shall be tested in accordance with -'.
U.B.C. Standard No. 24-22. .
(e) Grout Testing. When required, grout shall be tested in accordance with i
U.B.C. Standard No. 24-28. ~
Allowable Stresses
Sec. 2406. (a) General. Stresses in clay or concrete masonry under service loads
shall not exceed the values given in this section.
(b) Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry, f',. The allowable stresses
for the design of masonry shall be based on af', selected for the construction. The
I
[
architect or engineer shall specify the method by which thef', selected shall be •
verified in accordance with Section 2405 (c). ~~.
(c) Allowable Stresses in Masonry. 1. General. When the quality control pro- •·
visions do not include requirements for special inspection as prescribed in Section ,;
306, the allowable design stresses in this section shall be reduced by one half. ~
2. Compressive stress, axial. A. Unreinforced masonry walls.
Fa = 0.20/;, [1 - (~)
42t
3] (6-1)
B. Unreinforced masonry columns.
Fa = 0.20/;, [I -(~)3 ]
42t
(6-2)
C. Reinforced masonry walls.
Fa = 0.20j;, [ 1 - (~)
42t
3] (6-3)
D. Reinforced masonry columns.
Pa = (0.20/ 1;,A, + 0.65AJs, ) [ 1 - (h'

-)
42t
3] (6-4)
Fa = Pa/A, (6-5)
3. Compressive stress, flexural.
Fh = 0.33 f'm, 2,000 psi maximum (6-6)
211
·~·•:.·.,·. .
4. Tensile stress, walls in flexure. The allowable tensile stress for walls in flex-
ure of masonry elements or members without tensile reinforcement using portland
~ cement and hydrated lime or using mortar cement Type M or S mortar, shall not
1·..
•~.. exceed the values which follow. For Type N mortar made with portland cement and
i hydrated lime or made with mortar cement, the values shall be reduced by 25 per-
cent. For Type M or S masonry cement mortars, the values shall be reduced by 40
~ percent. For Type N masonry mortar, the values shall be reduced by 63 percent.
Values for tension normal to head joints are for running bond; no tension is al-
lowed across head joints in stack bond masonry. These values shall not be used for
horizontal flexural members such as beams, girders or lintels.
~ Flexural Tension (F,, psi).
I
I
Solid Units
Hollow Units
Tension normal to head joints (F,, psi).
Normal To
Bed Joints
40
25
Normal To
Head Joints
80
50
Concrete
Clay Units Units
Solid Units 72 80
Hollow Units 45 50
5. Reinforcing bond stress (u, psi).
Plain Bars 60
Deformed Bars 200
I Deformed Bars without Special

Inspection
6. Shear stress, flexural members (Fv).
100
A. No shear reinforcement,
1 (6-7)
Fv = 1.0 if',) 12, 50 psi maximum
EXCEPTION: For a distance of one sixteenth the clear span beyond the point of
inflection, the maximum stress shall be 20 psi.
B. Shear reinforcement designed to take entire shear force,
F, = 3.0 if'm) 112, 150 psi maximum (6-8)
7. Shear stress, shear walls (F,).

A. Unreinforced masonry,
1
Clay Units F, = 0.3 if',) h, 80 psi maximum (6-9)
M orS Mortar N Mortar

Concrete Units 34 psi 23 psi
The allowable shear stress in unreinforced masonry may be increased by 0.2
fmd• wherefmd is the compressive stress in the masonry due to dead load only.
212
B. With in-plane flexural reinforcement present, masonry taking all shear,
(4- ~) if'm) 12, (80- 45 ~) psi maximum (6-10)

1 1
M/Vd < l,F,. = / 3
M/Vd ~ l,Fv = 1.0 if'm) l2, 35 psi maximum

1
(6-11)
C. Shear reinforcement designed to take all the shear,
(4- ~) if'm) 12, (120- 45 ~) psi maximurr(6-12)

1 1
M/Vd < l,F" = / 2
M/Vd ~ l,Fv = !.5if'm) 12, 75 psi maximum

1
(6-13)
8. Bearing stress. A. On full area,
Fbr 0.26 f'm (6-14)

B. On one-third area or less,
(6-15)
This increase applies only when the least distance between the edges of the
loaded and unloaded areas is a minimum of one fourth of the parallel side dimen-
sion ofthe loaded area. The allowable bearing stresses on a reasonably concentric
area greater than one third but less than the full area shall be interpolated between
the values of Formulas (6-14) and (6-15).
(d) Allowable Stresses in Reinforcement (psi). I. Tensile stress.
A. Deformed bars,
0.5 /y, 24,000 psi maximum (6-16)
B. Wire reinforcement,
F... = 0.5 /y, 30,000 psi maximum (6-17)
C. Ties, anchors and smooth bars,
F... = 0.4 fv, 20,000 psi maximum (6-18)
2. Compressive stress. A. Deformed bars in columns,
F,, = 0.4 fv, 24,000 psi maximum (6-19)

B. Deformed bars in flexural members,
F . . = 0.5 /y. 24,000 psi maximum (6-20)

C. Deformed bars in shear walls which are confined by lateral ties in accordance I
with Section 2409 (e) 3 F,
213
Fsc = 0.4 f,, 24,000 psi maximum (6-21)
(e) Combined Compressive Stresses. I. Unity formula. Members subject to

combined axial and flexural stresses shall be designed in accordance with accepted
principles of mechanics or in accordance with the following formula:
fa+fh :5! (6-22)

Fa Fh
(f) Modulus of Elasticity of Materials. I. Modulus of elasticity of masonry.
The moduli for masonry may be estimated as provided below. Actual values, if re-
quired, shall be established by test. The modulus of elasticity of masonry shall be
determined by the secant method in which the slope of the line for the modulus of
elasticity is taken from 0.05/', to a point on the curve at 0.33f'm· These values are
not to be reduced by one half per Section 2406 (c) I.
A. Modulus of elasticity--clay/shale unit masonry.
Em = 750 f'm maximum 3,000,000 psi (6--23)
B. Modulus of elasticity--concrete unit masonry.
Em = 750 f'm maximum 3,000,000 psi (6--24)
2. Modulus of elasticity-steel.
E, = 29,000,000 psi (6-25)
(g) Shear Modulus of Masonry.
G = 0.4 Em (6-26)
(h) Shear and Tension on Embedded Anchor Bolts. I. General. A. Allowable

loads and placement requirements for plate anchor bolts, headed anchor bolts and
bent bar anchor bolts shall be determined in accordance with this section. The bent
bar anchor bolt shall have a hook with a 90-degree bend with an inside diameter of
j three bolt diameters, plus an extension of 11h bolt diameters at the free end. Headed
j anchor bolts shall have a standard bolt head. Plate anchor bolts shall have a plate
[[[[ welded to the shank to provide anchorage equivalent to headed anchor bolts.
B. The effective embedment length th for plate or headed anchor bolts shall be
the length of embedment measured perpendicular from the surface of the masonry
to the bearing surface of the plate or head of the anchorage, and th for bent bar an-
chors shall be the length of embedment measured perpendicular from the surface
of the masonry to the bearing surface of the bent end minus one anchor bolt diame-
ter. All bolts shall be grouted in place with at least I inch of grout between the bolt
f,.:_
,f,:.;,' and the masonry except I /4-inch-diameter bolts may be placed in bed joints which
:. are at least twice the thickness of the bolt.
214
2. Tension. Allowable loads in tension shall be the lesser value selected from
Tables Nos. 24-D-1 and 24-D-2 or shall be determined from the lesser of Formula
(6-27) or Formula (6-28).
B, = 0.5 Ap jJ', (6-27)
(6-28)
The area A1, shall be the lesser of Formula (6-29) or Formula (6-30) and where
the projected areas of adjacent anchor bolts overlap, Ap of each anchor bolt shall be
reduced by one half of the overlapping area.
(6-29)
Ar = :nth,. 2 (6-30)
3. Shear. Allowable loads in shear shall be the value selected from Table No.
24-E or shall be determined from the lesser of Formula (6-31) or Formula (6-32).
B,. = 350 1J'm~ (6-31)
(6-32)
Where the anchor bolt edge distance the in the direction ofload is less than 12 bolt ~: _·
diameters, the value of B,. in Formula (6-31) shall be reduced by linear interpo- ]
lation to zero at an lht' distance of 11/z inches. Where adjacent anchors are spaced : : :
closer than 8 dh, the allowable shear of the adjacent anchors determined by Formula
(6-31) shall be reduced by linear interpolation to 0.75 times the allowable shear
value at a center-to-center spacing of four bolt diameters.
4. Combined shear and tension. Anchor bolts subjected to combined shear and
tension shall be designed in accordance with Formula (6-33).
!?.!_ + ~ :5 1.0 (6-33)

B, B,.
5. Minimum edge distance. The minimum value of the measured from the edge
of the masonry parallel with the anchor bolt to the surface of the anchor bolt shall be
11h inches.
6. Minimum embedment depth. The minimum embedment depth shall be four
bolt diameters but not less than 2 inches.
7. Minimum spacing between bolts. The minimum center-to-center distance
between anchors shall be four bolt diameters.
(i) Load Tests. When a load test is required, the member or portion ofthe struc-
ture under consideration shall be subject to a superimposed load equal to twice the
design live load plus one half of the dead load. This load shall be left in position for
a period of24 hours before removal. If, during the test or upon removal of the load,
the member or portion of the structure shows evidence of failure, such changes or
modifications as are necessary to make the structure adequate for the rated capacity
215
shall be made; or where lawful, a lower rating shall be established. A flexural mem-
ber shall be considered to have passed the test if the maximum deflection D at the
end of the 24-hour period neither exceeds
2
I 1
D = -- nor D = -- - (6-34)
200 4,000t
and the beams and slabs show a recovery of at least 75 percent of the observed
deflection within 24 hours after removal of the load.
(j) Reuse of Masonry Units. Masonry units may be reused when clean, whole
and conforming to the other requirements of this section. All structural properties
of masonry of reclaimed units, especially adhesion bond, shall be determined by
approved test. The allowable working stresses shall not exceed 50 percent of that
permitted for new masonry units of the same properties.
Design, General Requirements

Sec. 2407. (a) General. The design of masonry structures shall comply with the
provisions of this section. Plans submitted for approval shall describe the required
design strengths of masonry materials and inspection requirements for which all
parts of the structure were designed and any load test requirements.
(b) Design Assumptions. I. Working stress analysis. The procedure presented
is based on working stresses and linear stress-strain distribution assumptions with
all stresses in the elastic range as follows:
(i) Plane sections before bending remain plane after bending.
(ii) Stress is proportional to strain.
(iii) Masonry elements combine to form a homogeneous member.
2. Stack bond. In bearing and non bearing walls, except veneer walls, if less
than 75 percent of the units in any transverse vertical plane lap the ends ofthe units
below a distance less than one half the height of the unit, or less than one fourth the
length of the unit, the wall should be considered laid in stack bond.
3. Effective thickness. A. Single-wythe walls. The effective thickness of
single-wythe walls of either solid or hollow units is the specified thickness of the
wall.
B. Multiwythe walls. The effective thickness of multi wythe walls is the speci-
fied thickness of the wall if the space between wythes is filled with mortar or grout.
For walls with an open space between wythes, the effective thickness shall be de-
termined as for cavity walls.
C. Cavity walls. If both wythes of a cavity wall are axially loaded, each wythe
shall be considered to act independently and the effective thickness of each wythe
is defined in Section 2407 (b) 3 A. If one wythe is axially loaded, the effective
thickness of the cavity wall is taken as the square root of the sum of the squares of
the specified thicknesses of the wythes.
If a cavity wall is composed of a single wythe and a multi wythe, and both sides
are axially loaded, each side of the cavity wall shall be considered to act indepen-
dently and the effective thickness of each side is as defined in Section 2407 (b) 3 A
216
and B. If one side is axially loaded, the effective thickness of the cavity wall is the
square root of the sum of the squares of the specified thicknesses of the sides.
D. Columns. The effective thickness for rectangular columns in the direction
considered is the specified thickness. The effective thickness for nonrectangular
columns is the thickness of the square column with the same moment of inertia
about its axis as that about the axis considered in the actual column.
4. Effective height. The effective height of columns and walls is at least the
clear height of members laterally supported at the top and bottom in a direction nor-
mal to the member axis considered. For members not supported at the top normal to
the axis considered, the effective height is twice the height of the member above the
support. Effective height less than clear height may be used if justified.
5. Effective area. The effective cross-sectional area shall be based on the mini-
mum bedded area of hollow units, or the gross area of solid units plus any grouted
area. If hollow units are used with cells perpendicular to the direction of stress, the
effective area shall be the lesser of the minimum bedded area or the minimum
cross-sectional area. If bed joints are raked, the effective area shall be correspond-
ingly reduced. Effective areas for cavity walls shall be that of the loaded wythes.
6. Flexural resistance of cavity walls. For computing the flexural resistance,
lateral loads perpendicular to the plane of the wall shall be distributed to the wythes
according to their respective flexural rigidities.
7. Effective width of intersecting walls. Where a shear wall is anchored to an
intersecting wall or walls, the width of the overhanging flange formed by the inter-
sected wall on either side of the shear wall, which may be assumed working with
the shear wall for purposes of flexural stiffness calculations, shall not exceed six
times the thickness of the intersected wall. Limits of the effective flange may be
waived if justified. Only the effective area of the wall parallel to the shear forces
may be assumed to carry horizontal shear.
(c) Design Loads. l. General. See Chapter 23 for design loads.
A. Distribution of concentrated vertical loads in walls. The length of wall,
laid up in running ~ond, which may be considered capable of working at the maxi-
mum allowable l 'pressive stress to resist vertical concentrated loads, shall not
exceed the center-t• >-center distance between such loads, nor the width of bearing
area plus four times the wall thickness. Concentrated vertical loads shall not be as-
sumed distributed across continuous vertical mortar or control joints unless ele-
ments designed to distribute the concentrated vertical loads are employed.
2. Loads on non bearing walls. Masonry walls used as interior partitions or as
exterior surfaces of a building which do not carry vertical loads imposed by other
elements of the building shall be designed to carry their own weight plus any super-
imposed finish and lateral forces. Bonding or anchorage of nonbearing walls shall
be adequate to support the walls and to transfer lateral forces to the supporting
structures.
(d) Support of Masonry. l. Vertical support. Structural members providing
vertical support of masonry shall provide a bearing surface on which the initial bed
joint shall not be Jess than 1/ 4 inch or more than 1 inch and shall be of noncom bus-
217
tible material, except where masonry is a nonstructural decorative feature or wear-

ing surface,
2. Vertical deflection. Elements supporting masonry shall be designed so that
their vertical deflection will not exceed 1/ 600 of the clear span under total loads. Lin-
tels shall bear on supporting masonry on each end such that allowable stresses in
the supporting masonry are not exceeded. The minimum bearing length is 4 inches.
3. Lateral support. Lateral support of masonry may be provided by cross walls,
columns, pilasters, counterforts or buttresses when spanning horizontally or by
floors, beams, girts or roofs when spanning vertically.
(e) Structural Continuity. 1. General. Intersecting structural elements in-
tended to act as a unit shall be anchored together to resist the design forces.
2. Wall intersecting with floors or roofs. Walls shall be anchored to all floors,
roofs or other elements which provide lateral support for the wall. Where floors or
roofs are designed to transmit horizontal forces to walls, the anchorage to the wall
shall be designed to resist the horizontal force.
·_.~ gr;~t~:~~~~~g~~~:~~~~:~~~~~~s~:07~!~i ~~! :~:~~ :~i~io~~e~~~~~o~

:.•_ .•_.· .
. forming to the requirements of Section 2402 and as follows:
'·· (i) Wall ties in cavity wall construction. Wall ties shall be of sufficient length to
·-~'i_,! ~~;:;d~~~~~~~!h:t;~~~~;~~h=n~:l~~i~~ew~t:litt~~: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~;!~

•.·.'
..
__ ,'__
angles with an extension not less than 2 inches long. Wall ties not completely em-
bedded in mortar or grout between wythes shall be a single piece with each end en-
j!i ga~~~!: :::1~ :y:~l:ast

one 3/winch-diameter wall tie for each 4 1/z square feet of
wall area. For cavity walls in which the width of the cavity is greater than 3 inches,
but not more than 4 1/z inches, at least one ~winch-diameter wall tie for each 3
square feet of wall area shall be provided.
Ties in alternate courses shall be staggered; the maximum vertical distance be-
tween ties shall not exceed 24 inches; the maximum horizontal distance between
ties shall not exceed 36 inches. ..
Additional ties spaced not more than 36 inches apart shall be provided around
and within 12 inches of the opening.
Wall ties of different size and spacing may be used if they provide equivalent
''~' strength between wythes .
bo~~e:;~~e~~=rf!~t~:~~::: ~~!it~;:-~:~~~::::~~i!~il~ef~;~a;~~h:~u~~ ~e~~

1
•...
.
'
-·'··
of area. Wall ties of different size and spacing may be used if they provide equiva-
...
-··'
__!.•:
__.•'__.:
__
...
'•
__...
····-··
lent strength between wythes.

''' (iii) Joint reinforcement. Prefabricated joint reinforcement for masonry walls
}! shall have at least one cross wire of at least No.9 gauge steel for each 2 square feet
[.iii of wall area. The vertical spacing of the joint reinforcement shall not exceed 16 in-
ches. The longitudinal wires shall be thoroughly embedded in the bed joint mortar.
The joint reinforcement shall engage all wythes.
218
Where the space between tied wythes is solidly filled with grout or mortar the :i
allowable stresses and other provisions for masonry bonded walls shall apply. !:.i
Where the space is not filled, tied walls shall conform to the allowable stress, lateral ., ,
support, thickness (excluding cavity), height and tie requirements for cavity walls. ''
(f) Protection of Ties and Joint Reinforcement. A minimum of%-inch mortar ~,,
cover shall be provided between ties or joint reinforcement and any exposed face. :; ;
The
shallthickness
not be lessofthan
grout
1 or mortar between 1 masonry units and joint reinforcement . .·'• .
/ 4 inch, exceptthat I4 inch or smaller diameterreinforcement
'.:~, '.:!,..· '·
or bolts may be placed in bed joints which are at least twice the thickness of the
reinforcement.
(g) Pipes and Conduits Embedded in Masonry. Pipe or conduit shall not be
embedded in any masonry so as to reduce the capacity to less than that necessary
for required stability or required fire protection.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Rigid electric conduits may be embedded in structural ma-
sonry when their location has been detailed on the approved plan.
2. Any.pipe or conduit may pass vertically or horizontally through any masonry
by means of a sleeve at least large enough to pass any hub or coupling on the pipeline.
Such sleeves shall not be placed closer than three diameters, center to center, nor shall
they unduly impair the strength of construction.
3. Placement of pipes or conduits in unfilled cores of hollow-unit masonry shall
not be considered as embedment.
(h) Special Provisions in Areas of Seismic Risk. 1. General. Masonry struc-
tures constructed in the seismic zones shown in Figure No. 23-2 shall be designed
in accordance with the design requirements ofthis chapter and the special provi-
sions for each seismic zone given in this section.
2. Special provisions for Seismic Zones Nos. 0 and 1. There are no special de-
sign and construction provisions in this section for structures built in Seismic
Zones Nos. 0 and 1.
3. Special provisions for Seismic Zone No.2. Masonry structures in Seismic
Zone No. 2 shall comply with the following special provisions:
A. Materials. The following materials shall not be used as part of the vertical or :t
lateral load-resisting systems: Type 0 mortar, masonry cement, plastic cement, J~
nonload-bearing masonry units and glass block.
B. Wall reinforcement. Vertical reinforcement of at least 0.20 square inch in
cross-sectional area shall be provided continuously from support to support at each
comer, at each side of each opening, at the ends of walls and at a maximum spacing
of 4 feet apart, horizontally throughout the wall.
Horizontal reinforcement not less than 0.2 square inch in cross-sectional area
shall be provided ( 1) at the bottom and top of wall openings and shall not extend
less than 24 inches or less than 40 bar diameters past the opening, (2) continuously
at structurally connected roof and floor levels and at the top of walls, (3) at the bot-
tom of the wall or in the top of the foundations when dowelled to the wall, (4) at
maximum spacing of I 0 feet unless uniformly distributed joint reinforcement is
provided. Reinforcement at the top and bottom of openings when continuous in the
wall may be used in determining the maximum spacing specified in Item I above.
219
C. Stack bond. Where stack bond is used. the minimum horizontal reinforce-
ment ratio shall be 0.0007bt. This ratio shall be satisfied by uniformly distributed
joint reinforcement or by horizontal reinforcement spaced not over 4 feet and fully
embedded in grout or mortar.
I D. Columns. Columns shall be reinforced as specified in Section 2409 (b) 5.
4. Special provisions for Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. All masonry structures
built in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 shall be designed and constructed in accor-
dance with requirements for Seismic Zone No. 2 and with the following additional
requirements and limitations.
EXCEPTION: One- and two-story structures of Group R, Division 3 and Group
M Occupancies in Seismic Zone No.3 with h 'It not greater than 27 and using running
bond construction may be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Seis-
mic Zone No. 2.
ilil
\1 When half allowable stresses are used, the f ~ from Table No. 24-C shall be lim-
~ ited to a maximum of 1,500 psi for concrete masonry and 2,600 psi for clay mason-
~ ry unless/~ is verified by tests in accordance with Section 2405 (c) 3 A and 3D or
~ 3 F. A letter of certification is not required.
~ When half allowable stresses are used for design, the/;, shall be limited to 1,500
. ~.· psi for concrete masonry and 2,600 psi for clay masonry for Section 2405 (c) I C
m
[ and 2 E unless/~ is verified during construction by the testing requirements of
ii! Section 2405 (c) I B. A letter of certification is not required.
Reinforced hollow-unit stacked bond construction which is part of the seismic
resisting system shall use open-end units so that all head joints are made solid, shall
use bond-beam units to facilitate the flow of grout and shall be grouted solid.
~ A. Materials. The following material shall not be used as part of the vertical or
·,;&.'[.~:~, '.· lateral load-resisting systems: Type N mortar.
B. Wall reinforcement. All walls shall be reinforced with both vertical and hor-
izontal reinforcement. The sum of the areas of horizontal and vertical reinforce-
~ ment shall be at least0.002 times the gross cross-sectional area of the wall, and the
~':.•'•!,!.'. minimum area of reinforcement in either direction shall not be less than 0.0007
'!'·.,
" times the gross cross-sectional area of the wall. The minimum steel requirements
... for Seismic Zone No. 2 in Section 2407 (h) 3 B may be included in the sum. The
spacing of reinforcem ent shall not exceed 4 feet. The diameter of reinforcement
:.!!.:.!;.!..
shall not be less than 3/g inch except that joint reinforcement may be considered as
\1! part or all of the requirement for minimum reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be
\!!! continuous around wall comers and through intersections. Only reinforcement
!II which is continuous in the wall or element shall be considered in computing the
~ minimum area of reinforcement. Reinforcement with splices conforming to See-
m tion 2409 (e) 6 shall be considered as continuous reinforcement.
C. Column reinforcement. The spacing of column ties shall not be more than 8
inches the full height for columns stressed by tensile or compressive axial over-
turning forces due to the seismic loads of Part III of Chapter 23; 8 inches for the tops
and bottoms of all other columns for a distance of one sixth of the clear column
height, but not less than 18 inches or the maximum column dimension. Tie spacing
220
for the remaining column height shall not be more than 16 bar diameters, 48 tie di-
ameters or the least column dimension, but not more than 18 inches.
D. Stack bond. Where stack bond is used, the minimum horizontal reinforce-
ment ratio shall be 0.00 15bt. If open-end units are used and grouted solid, then the
minimum horizontal reinforcement ratio shall be 0.0001bt.
E. Minimum dimension. (i) Bearing walls. The nominal thickness of rein- i\i
forced masonry bearing walls shall not be less than 6 inches except that nominal :'.:!!.::
4-inch-thick load-bearing reinforced hollow-clay unit masonry walls may be used,

provided net area unit strength exceeds 8,000 psi, units are laid in running bond, bar !·Iii
1
sizes do not exceed /z inch with no more than two bars or one splice in a cell, and ,•,.i.,'.,i,'
joints are flush cut, concave or a protruding V section.
(ii) Columns. The least nominal dimension of a reinforced masonry column
shall be 12 inches except that if the allowable stresses are reduced to one half the
values given in Section 2406, the minimum nominal dimension shall be 8 inches.
F. Shear walls. (i) Design loads. When calculating shear or diagonal tension
stresses, shear walls which resist seismic forces shall be designed to resist 1.5 times
the forces required by Section 2333.
(ii) Reinforcement. The portion of the reinforcement required to resist shear
shall be uniformly distributed and shall be joint reinforcing, deformed bars, or a
combination thereof. The maximum spacing of reinforcement in each direction
shall not be less than the smaller of one half the length or height of the element or
more than 48 inches.
Joint reinforcement used in exterior walls and considered in the determination of
the shear strength of the member shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance
with U.B.C. Standard No. 24-15.
Reinforcement required to resist in-plane shear shall be terminated with a stan-
dard hook or with an extension of proper embedment length beyond the reinforcing
at the end of the wall section. The hook or extension may be turned up, down or
horizontally. Provisions shall be made not to obstruct grout placement. Wall rein-
forcement terminating in columns or beams shall be fully anchored into these ele-
ments.
(iii) Multi wythe grouted masonry shear walls shall be designed with consider-
ation of the adhesion bond strength between the grout and masonry units. When
bond strengths are not known from previous tests, the bond strength shall be deter-
mined by test.
G. Hooks. The term "hook" or "standard hook" as used herein for tie anchor-
age in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 shall mean a minimum tum of 135 degrees plus
an extension of at least six bar diameters, but not less than 4 inches at the free end of
the bar.
EXCEPTION: Where the ties are placed in the horizontal bed joints, the hook
shall consist of a 90-degree bend having a radius of not less than four tie diameters
plus an extension of 32 tie diameters.
H. Mortar joints between masonry and concrete. Concrete abutting structur-
al masonry such as at starter courses or at wall intersections not designed as true
separation joints shall be roughened to a full amplitude of 1IJ 6 inch and shall be
221
bonded to the masonry per the requirements of this chapter as if it were masonry.
Unless keys or proper reinforcement is provided, vertical joints as per ~tion 2407
(b) 2 shall be considered to be stack bond and the reinforcement as required for
stack bond shall extend through the joint and be anchored into the concrete.
mJ (i) Empirical Design of Masonry. I. General. These empirical procedures
i\1 may be used for the design or construction of masonry buildings located in those
'' portions of Seismic Zones Nos. 0 and I as defined in Part III of Chapter 23 where
~;; the basic wind speed is less than 80 miles per hour as defined in Part II of Chapter
If 23, subject to approval of the building official. These empirical procedures may be
used in lieu of Sections 2406,2408,2409,2410,2411,2412 and 2413 .
.,., 2. Height. Buildings relying on masonry walls for lateral load resistance shall
!il not exceed 35 feet in height.
1~·
3. Lateral stability. Where the structure depends on masonry walls for lateral
I~~ stability, shear walls shall be provided parallel to the direction ofthe lateral forces
resisted.
Minimum nominal thickness of masonry shear walls shall not be less than 8 in-
ches.
=1=j In each direction in which shear walls are required for lateral stability, the mini-
!~ mum cumulative length of shear walls provided shall be 0.4 times the long dimen-
!ii sion of the building. The cumulative length of shear walls shall not include
~~ openings .
,:·~ No~~~::::~::::f~h::::~:. ::::,::::::,','::·~::::::::

..':·..,i.':.,i.
. vertical dead loads plus live loads (excluding wind or seismic loads) shall be deter-
f
.
mined in accordance with Section 2407 (i) 4 C. Dead and live loads shall be in ac-
,,~ cordance with this code with permitted live load reductions.
·Ji! B. Allowable stresses. The compressive stresses in masonry shall not exceed
~:.,! ~· ~!~~~:~~~~~:ir:E~£~:~~:;3£{;.~E~~:~~·"'::ct':::;~:~~,~~
: C. Stress calculations. Stresses shall be calculated based on specified rather
•.,'.•, :,•.', than nominal dimensions. Calculated compressive stresses shall be determined by
dividing the design load by the gross cross-sectional area of the member. The area
'·.··''i:,··:l.':··':,
..
···'l ~~~~~~~~;s~~~~~e~~~~~ecesses in walls shall not be included in the gross cross-sec-
:
:.
D. Anchor bolts. Bolt values shall not exceed those set forth in Table No. 24-M.
......
5. Lateral support. Masonry walls shall be laterally supported in either the hori-
: ~J zontal or vertical direction not exceeding the intervals set forth in Table No. 24-J.
'' Lateral support shall be provided by cross walls, pilasters, buttresses or structur-
t
al framing members horizontally or by floors, roof or structural framing members
~ ve~~cca~~-for parapet walls, the ratio of height to nominal thickness for cantilever
i i! walls shall not exceed 6 for solid masonry or 4 for hollow masonry.
222
In computing the ratio for cavity walls, the value of thickness shall be the sums of ~'''
~~es~~~t!~~~f~~~~~~~:~s~~t~;~~~:~~~~~:::r:~~~~~t~~:;:ei~s~~?;·e;g~ha:~~t~~~~ ·:.~
1
ness shall not exceed that allowed for the weakest of the combinations of units and •.·• .· •. •·.•.
mortar of which the member is composed.
6. Minimum thickness. A. General. The nominal thickness of masonry bear-
ing walls in buildings more than one story in height shall not be less than 8 inches.
Solid masonry walls in one-story buildings may be of 6-inch nominal thickness
when not over 9 feet in height, provided that when gable construction is used, an
additional 6 feet is permitted to the peak of the gable.
EXCEPTION: The thickness ofunreinforced grouted brick masonry walls may
be 2 inches less than required by this subsection, but in no case less than 6 inches.
B. Variation in thickness. When a change in thickness due to minimum thick-
ness requirements occurs between floor levels, the greater thickness shall be car-
ried up to the higher floor level.
C. Decrease in thickness. Where walls of masonry of hollow units or mason-
ry-bonded hollow walls are decreased in thickness, a course or courses of solid ma-
sonry shall be constructed between the walls below and the thinner wall above, or
special units or construction shall be used to transmit the loads from face shells or
wythes to the walls below.
D. Parapets. Parapet walls shall be at least 8 inches in thickness and their height
shall not exceed three times their thickness. The parapet wall shall not be thinner
than the wall below.
E. Foundation walls. Foundation walls shall be constructed with Type M or
Type S mortar.
When the height of unbalanced fill (height of finished grade above basement
floor or inside grade) and the height of the wall between lateral supports does not
exceed 8 feet, and when the equivalent fluid weight of unbalanced fill does not ex-
ceed 30 pounds per cubic foot, the minimum thickness of foundation walls shall be
as set forth in Table No. 24-K. Maximum depths of unbalanced fill permitted in
Table No. 24-K may be increased with the approval of the building official when
local soil conditions warrant such an increase.
When the height of unbalanced fill, height between lateral supports, or equiva-
lent fluid weight of unbalanced fill exceeds that set forth above, foundation walls
shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 29.
7. Bond. A. General. The facing and backing of multiple-wythe masonry walls
shall be bonded in accordance with this section.
B. Masonry headers. When the facing and backing of solid masonry construc-
tion are bonded by masonry headers, not less than 4 percent of the wall surface of
each face shall be composed of headers extending not less than 3 inches into the
backing. The distance between adjacent full-length headers shall not exceed 24 in-
ches either vertically or horizontally. In walls in which a single header does not ex-
tend through the wall, headers from opposite sides shall overlap at least 3 inches, or
headers from opposite sides shall be covered with another header course overlap-
ping the header below at least 3 inches.
223
\ When two or more hollow units are used to make up the thickness ofthe wall, the
: : stretcher courses shall be bonded at vertical intervals not exceeding 34 inches by
i;:~~~;::~~~:::~,:~:::~:::~=~~:::~:::~::::::.:~:::
[[[[[
3
/winch-diameter wall ties or metal ties of equivalent stiffness embedded in the
[:: : horizontal mortar joints, there shall be at least one metal tie for each 4 1h square feet
,:,: of wall area. Ties in alternate courses shall be staggered, the maximum vertical dis-
j: tance between ties shall not exceed 24 inches, and the maximum horizontal dis-
;::: tance shall not exceed 36 inches. Rods bent to rectangular shape shall be used with
i hollow masonry units laid with the cells vertical. In other walls, the ends of ties
·· shall be bent to 90-degree angles to provide hooks no less than 2 inches long. Addi-
tional ties shall be provided at all openings, spaced not more than 3 feet apart
around the perimeter and within 12 inches of the opening.
The facing and backing of masonry walls may be bonded with prefabricated
joint reinforcement. There shall be at least one cross wire serving as a tie for each
2 2h square feet of wall area. The vertical spacing of the joint reinforcement shall
not exceed 16 inches. Cross wires of prefabricated joint reinforcement shall be at
least No. 9 gauge wire. The longitudinal wire shall be embedded in mortar.
D. Longitudinal bond. In each wythe of masonry, head joints in successive
courses shall be offset at least one fourth of the unit length or the walls shall be rein-
forced longitudinally as required in Section 2407 (h) 3 C.
8. Anchorage. A. Intersecting walls. Masonry walls depending on one another
for lateral support shall be anchored or bonded at locations where they meet or in-
tersect by one of the following methods:
(i) Fifty percent of the units at the intersection shall be laid in an overlapping
pattern, with alternating units having a bearing of not less than 3 inches on the unit
below.
(ii) Walls shall be anchored by steel connectors having a minimum section of 1/ 4
inch by 11h inches with ends bent up at least 2 inches, or with cross pins to form
anchorage. Such anchors shall be at least 24 inches long and the maximum spacing
shall be 4 feet vertically.
(iii) Walls shall be anchored by joint reinforcement spaced at a maximum dis-
tance of 8 inches vertically. Longitudinal rods of such reinforcement shall be at
least No.9 gauge and shall extend at least 30 inches in each direction atthe intersec-
tion.
(iv) Interior nonbearing walls may be anchored at their intersection, at vertical
spacing of not more than 16 inches with joint reinforcing or 1/ 4 -inch mesh galva-
nized hardware cloth.
(v) Other metal ties, joint reinforcement or anchors, if used, shall be spaced to
provide equivalent area of anchorage to that required by this subsection.
224
B. Floor and roof anchorage. Floor and roof diaphragms providing lateral ::':
support to masonry walls shall be connected to the masonry walls by one of the fol- t~
lowing methods: \~\~;
(i} Wood floor joists bearing on masonry walls shall be anchored to the wall by );\:
approved metal strap anchors at intervals not exceeding 6 feet. Joists parallel to the f
wall shall be anchored with metal straps spaced not more than 6 feet on center ex- '~'~'
tending over and under and secured to at least three joists. Blocking shall be pro- '.,·' ~.': ,~ ·
vided between joists at each strap anchor.
::;::
(ii) Steel floor joists shall be anchored to masonry walls with 3/ 8 -inch round bars, '''
or their equivalent, spaced not more than 6 feet on center. Where joists are parallel ))!))
to the wall, anchors shall be located at joint cross bridging. , ,.,

(iii) Roof structures shall be anchored to masonry walls with 1h-inch-diameter !j\:
bolts at 6 feet on center or their equivalent. Bolts shall extend and be embedded at t:
least 15 inches into the masonry, or be hooked or welded to not Jess than 0.2 square r
inches of bond beam reinforcement placed not less than 6 inches from the top of the '''
wall. :::
··:··
I 0. Stone masonry. A. General. Stone masonry is that form of construction :~'\'

made with natural or cast stone in which the units are laid and set in mortar with all \~;!\
joints filled.
~)~j~
B. Construction. In ashlar masonry, bond stones uniformly distributed shall be ...
provided to the extent of not less than I0 percent of the area of exposed faces. ,l:i)
Rubble stone masonry 24 inches or less in thickness shall have bond stones with a ~'~''
maximum spacing of3 feet vertically and 3 feet horizontally and, ifthe masonry is :::::
of greater thickness than 24 inches, shall have one bond stone for each 6 square feet ~'~'~
of wall surface on both sides.
C. Minimum thickness. The thickness of stone masonry bearing walls shall not )'
be less than 16 inches.
:t:
(j) Glass Masonry. I. General. Masonry of glass blocks may be used in non- '''
load-bearing exterior or interior walls and in openings which might otherwise be r'==~=~
filled with windows, either isolated or in continuous bands, provided the glass :::
block panels have a minimum thickness of 3 inches at the mortar joint and the mor- ,i:!l
tared surfaces of the blocks are treated for mortar bonding. ~'''~
225
i 2. Mortar joints. Glass block shall be laid in TypeS or N mortar. Both vertical
t.:r,i and horizontal mortar joints shall be at least 1I4 inch and not more than 3/s inch thick
:§: and shall be completely filled.
~ 3. Horizontal forces. The panels shall be restrained laterally to resist the hori-
*''
i*i. zontal forces specified in Chapter 23 for bearing walls.
tl 4. Reinforcing. Glass block panels shall have reinforcement in the horizontal
~ mortar joint, extending from end to end of mortar joints, but not across expansion
I
;j::
joints, with joints spliced by lapping the reinforcement not less than 6 inches. The
reinforcement shall be placed in the joint immediately below and above any open-
{ ings with a panel. The reinforcement shall consist of not less than two parallellon-
i~; gitudinal, galvanized steel wires, No.9 gauge or larger, spaced 2 inches apart, and
J having welded thereto No.9 or heavier gauge cross wires at intervals not exceeding
f 8 inches.
If. 5. Size of panels. Glass block panels for exterior walls shall not exceed 144
square feet of unsupported wall surface or 15 feet in any dimension. For interior
walls, glass block panels shall not exceed 250 square feet of unsupported area or 25
I,·:. ;.•
:. feet in any dimension.
6. Expansion joints. Exterior glass block shall be provided with 1h-inch expan-
1 sion joints at the sides and top. Expansion joints shall be entirely free of mortar and
shall be filled with resilient material.
Design, Unreinforced Masonry

Sec. 2408. (a) General. The requirements of this section are in addition to the
requirements of Section 2407 and govern masonry in which reinforcement is not
used to resist design forces.
(b) Compression in Walls and Columns. l. Axial loads in walls. Stresses due
to compressive forces applied at the centroid of a wall may be computed assuming
uniform distribution over the effective area.
fa = PjA, (8-l)
2. Axial loads in columns. Stresses due to compressive forces applied at the

centroid may be computed assuming uniform distribution over the effective area,
Formula (8-l ).
3. Bending or combined bending and axial loads. A. Compressive stresses.
Compressive stresses due to combined bending and axial load shall satisfy there-
quirements of Section 2406 (e).
B. Tensile stresses. Resultant tensile stress due to combined bending and axial
load shall not exceed the allowable flexural tensile stress, Ft.
(c) Flexural Design. Stresses due to flexure shall not exceed the values given in
Section 2406 (c), where:
fh = Mc/1 (8-2)
(d) Shear in Flexural Members and Shear Walls. 1. Shear. The following for-
mula shall be the basis of shear calculations:
226
f.. = V/A, (8-3)

(e) Corbels. The slope of corbelling (angle measured from the horizontal to the
face of the corbelled surface) of unreinforced masonry shall not be less than 60 de-
grees.
The maximum horizontal projection of corbelling from the plane of the wall
shall be such that allowable stresses are not exceeded.
(f) Stack Bond. Masonry units laid in stack bond shall have longitudinal rein- .: :
forcement of at least 0.00027 times the vertical cross-sectional area of the wall
placed horizontally in the bed joints or in bond beams spaced vertically not more
than 48 inches apart.
Design, Reinforced Masonry

Sec. 2409. (a) General. I. Scope. The requirements of this section are in addi-
tion to the requirements of Section 2407 and govern masonry in which reinforce-
ment is used to resist forces. The use of plain bars larger than 1/ 4 inch in diameter
is not permitted.
2. Design assumption. The following assumptions are in addition to those
stated in Section 2407 (b) 1:
A. Masonry carries no tensile str®s.
B. Reinforcement is completely surrounded by and bonded to masonry material
so that they work together as a homogenous material within the range of working
stresses.
(b) Compression in Walls and Columns. 1. Walls, axial loads. Stresses due to
compressive forces applied at the centroid of the member may be computed assum-
ing uniform distribution over the effective area.
(9-1)
2. Walls, bending or combined btnding and axial loads. Stresses due to com-
bined bending and axial loads shall satisfy the requirements of Section 2406 (e)
where fa is given by Formula (9-1). Walls subjected to bending with or without ax-
ial loads shall meet all applicable requirements for flexural design.
The design of walls with an h'lt ratio larger than 30 shall be based on forces and
moments determined from analysis of the structure. Such analysis shall take into
account influence of axial loads and variable moment of inertia on member stif-
fness and fixed-end moments, effect of deflections on moments and forces and the
effects of duration of loads.
3. Columns, axial loads. Stresses~ue to compressive forces applied at the cen-
troid of the member may be computed assuming uniform distribution over the
effective area.
A. The allowable actual load Pa shall be given by Formula (6-4).
227
B. The allowable axial stress is given by:
(9-2)
4. Columns, bending or combined bending and axial loads. Stresses due to

combined bending and axial loads shall satisfy the requirements of Section 2406
(e) wherefu !Fa is replaced by PIP0 • Columns subjected to bending shall meet all
applicable requirements for flexural design.
5. Reinforcement for columns. A. Vertical reinforcement. The area of verti-
cal reinforcement shall not be less than 0.005 A, and not more than 0.04 A,. At least
four No. 3 bars shall be provided.
B. Lateral ties. All longitudinal bars for columns shall be enclosed by lateral
ties. Lateral support shall be provided to the longitudinal bars by the comer of a
complete tie having an included angle of not more than 135 degrees or by a hook at
the end of a tie. The comer bars shall have such support provided by a complete tie
enclosing the longitudinal bars. Alternate longitudinal bars shall have such lateral
support provided by ties and no bar shall be farther than 6 inches from such laterally
supported bar.
Lateral ties and longitudinal bars shall be placed not less than 11h inches and not
more than 5 inches from the surface of the column. Lateral ties may be against the
longitudinal bars or placed in the horizontal bed joints if the requirements of Sec-
tion 2407 (f) are met. Spacing ofties shall not be more than 16longitudinal bar di-
ameters, 48 tie diameters or the least dimension of the column but not more than 18
inches.
Ties shall be at least 1/ 4 inch in diameter for No.7 or smaller longitudinal bars and
No. 3 for larger longitudinal bars. Ties less than% inch in diameter may be used for
longitudinal bars larger than No.7, provided the total cross-sectional area of such
smaller ties crossing a longitudinal plane is equal to that of the larger ties at their
required spacing.
C. Anchor bolt ties. Additional ties shall be provided around anchor bolts which
are set in the top of the column. Such ties shall engage at least four bolts or, alter-
nately, at least four vertical column bars or a combination of bolts and bars totaling
four in number. Such ties shall be located within the top 5 inches of the column and
shall provide a total of0.4 square inch or more in cross-sectional area. The upper-
most tie shall be within 2 inches of the top of the column.
(c) Flexural Design. 1. Rectangular flexural elements. Rectangular flexural
elements shall be designed in accordance with the following equations or other
methods based on the assumptions given in Sections 2407 (b) and 2409 (a).
A. Compressive stress in the masonry:
(9-3)
228
B. Tensile stress in the longitudinal reinforcement:

M
(9-4)
A,jd
C. Design coefficients:
k = [(np) 2 + 2npr2 -np (9-5)

or,
(9-6)
k
j =I (9-7)
3
2. Nonrectangular flexural elements. Flexural elements of nonrectangular
cross section shall be designed in accordance with the assumptions given in Sec-
tions 2407 (b) and 2409 (a).
3. Lateral support. The clear distance between lateral support of a beam shall
not exceed 32 times the least width of the compression area.
4. Effective width (b) of compression area. In computing flexural stresses in
walls where reinforcement occurs, the effective width assumed for running bond
masonry shall not exceed six times the nominal wall thickness orthe center-to-cen-
ter distance between reinforcement. Where stack bond is used, the effective width
shall not exceed three times the nominal wall thickness or the center-to-center dis-
tance between reinforcement or the length of one unit, unless grouted solid using
open-ended joints.
5. Bond of flexural reinforcement. In flexural members in which tensile rein-
forcement is parallel to the compressive face, the bond stress shall be computed by
the formula:
u =--
v
(9-8)
~0 jd
(d) Shear in Flexural Members and Shear Walls. 1. The shear stress in flexu-
ral members and shear walls shall be computed by:
(9-9)
For members ofT or I section, b 'shall be substituted for b. Wherefi. as computed
by Formula (9-9) exceeds the allowable shear stress in masonry, Fv. web reinforce-
ment shall be provided and designed to carry the total shear force. Both vertical and
horizontal shear stresses shall be considered.
2. The area required for shearreinforcement placed perpendicular to the longitu-
dinal reinforcement shall be computed by:
229
A,. = ;~d (9-1 0)
Where web reinforcement is required, it shall be so spaced that every 45-degree

line (representing a potential diagonal crack) extending from a point at d/2 of the
beam to the longitudinal tension bars shall be crossed by at least one line of web
reinforcement.
(e) Reinforcing Requirements and Details. I. Maximum reinforcing size.
The maximum size of reinforcing shall be No. II. Maximum steel area in cells
shall be 6 percent ofthe cell area without splices and 12 percent ofthe cell area with
splices.
2. Spacing oflongitudinal reinforcement. The clear distance between parallel
bars, except in columns, shall not be less than the nominal diameter ofthe bars nor
I inch, except that bars in a splice may be in contact. This clear distance require-
ment applies to the clear distance between a contact splice and adjacent splices or
bars. The minimum clear distance between parallel bars in columns shall be two
and one-half times the bar diameter.
The clear distance between the surface of a bar and any surface of a masonry unit
shall not be less than 1/4 inch for fine grout and 1h inch for coarse grout. Cross
webs of hollow units may be used as support for horizontal reinforcement.
All reinforcing bars, except joint reinforcing, shall be completely embedded in
mortar or grout and have a minimum cover, including the masonry unit, of at least
3/4 inch, 11/z inches of cover when exposed to weather and 2 inches of cover when
exposed to soil.
3. Anchorage of flexural reinforcement. A. The tension or compression in any
bar at any section must be developed on each side of that section by the required
development length. The development length of the bar may be achieved by a
combination of an embedment length, anchorage or, for tension only, hooks.
The required development length for deformed bars or deformed wire shall be
calculated by:
ld = 0.002 dh ffor bars in tension (9-11)
ld = 0.0015 dh f/or bars in compression (9-12)

Development length for smooth bars shall be 2.0 times the length by Formula
(9-11 ).
B. Except at supports or at the free end of cantilevers, every reinforcing bar shall
be extended beyond the point at which it is no longer needed to resist tensile stress
for a distance equal to 12 bar diameters or the depth of the beam, whichever is
greater. No flexural bar shall be terminated in a tensile zone unless one of the fol-
lowing conditions is satisfied:
(i) The shear is not over one halfthat permitted, including allowance for shear
reinforcement, if any.
(ii) Additional shear reinforcement in excess of that required is provided each
way from the cutoff a distance equal to the depth of the beam. The shear reinforce-
230
ment spacing shall not exceed d!8rh, where rb is the ratio of the area of bars cut offto
the total area of bars at the section.
(iii) The continuing bars provide double the area required for flexure at that point
or double the perimeter required for reinforcing bond.
C. At least one third of the total reinforcement provided for negative moment at
the support shall be extended beyond the extreme position of the point of inflection
a distance sufficient to develop one halfthe allowable stress in the bar, not less than
one sixteenth of the clear span, or the depth d of the member, whichever is greater.
D. Tensile reinforcement for negative moment in any span of a continuous re-
strained or cantilever beam, or in any member of a rigid frame, shall be adequately
anchored by reinforcing bond, hooks or mechanical anchors in or through the sup-
porting member.
E. At least one third of the required positive moment reinforcement in simple
beams or at the freely supported end of continuous beams shall extend along the
same face of the beam into the support at least 6 inches. At least one fourth of the
required positive moment reinforcement at the continuous end of continuous
beams shall extend along the same face of the beam into the support at least 6 in-
ches.
F. Compression reinforcement in flexural members shall be anchored by ties or
stirrups not less than 1/ 4 inch in diameter, spaced not farther apart than 16 bar diam-
eters or 48 tie diameters. Such ties or stirrups shall be used throughout the distance
where compression steel is required.
G. In regions of moment where the design tensile stresses in the steel are greater
than 80 percent of the allowable steel tensile stress <Fs ), the lap length of splices
shall be increased not less than 50 percent of the minimum required length. Other
equivalent means of stress transfer to accomplish the same 50 percent increase
may be used.
4. Anchorage of shear reinforcement. A. Single separate bars used as shear
reinforcement shall be anchored at each end by one of the following methods:
(i) Hooking tightly around the longitudinal reinforcement through 180 degrees.
(ii) Embedment above or below the mid-depth of the beam on the compression
side a distance sufficient to develop the stress in the bar for plain or deformed bars.
(iii) By a standard hook [see Section 2409 (e) 5] considered as developing 7,500
psi, plus embedment sufficient to develop the remainder of the stress to which the
bar is subjected. The effective embedded length shall not be assumed to exceed the
distance between the mid-depth of the beam and the tangent of the hook.
B. The ends of bars forming a single U or multiple U stirrup shall be anchored by
one of the methods of Section 2409 (e) 4 A or shall be bent through an angle of at
least 90 degrees tightly around a longitudinal reinforcing bar not less in diameter
than the stirrup bar, and shall project beyond the bend at least 12 diameters of the
stirrup.
C. The loops or closed ends of simple U or multiple U stirrups shall be anchored
by bending around the longitudinal reinforcement through an angle of at least 90
231
2409-2410 1991 UNIFORM BUilDING CODE
degrees and project beyond the end of the bend at least 12 diameters of the stirrup
bar.
5. Hooks. A. The term "standard hook" shall mean one of the following:
(i) A 180-degree tum plus extension of at least 4 bar diameters but not less than
2 11z inches at free end of bar.
(ii) A 90-degree tum plus extension of at least 12 bar diameters at free end of bar.
(iii) For stirrup and tie anchorage only either a 90-degree or a 135-degree tum,
plus an extension of at least 6 bar diameters, but not Jess than 2 1/z inches at the free
end of the bar.
•: ,'·.:, B. The diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar, other than for stirrups
. and ties, shall not be Jess than that set forth in Table No. 24-F.
C. Inside diameter of bend for No.4 or smaller stirrups and ties shall not be less
than 4 bar diameters. Inside diameter of bend for No. 5 or larger stirrups and ties
shall not be less than given in Table No. 24-F.
D. Hooks shall not be permitted in the tension portion of any beam, except at the
ends of simple or cantilever beams or at the freely supported end of continuous or
restrained beams.
E. Hooks shall not be assumed to carry a load which would produce a tensile
stress in the bar greater than 7,500 psi.
F. Hooks shall not be considered effective in adding to the compressive resis-
tance of bars.
G. Any mechanical device capable of developing the strength ofthe bar without
damage to the masonry may be used in lieu of a hook. Data must be presented to
show the adequacy of such devices.
6. Splices. The amount of lap of lapped splices shall be sufficient to transfer the
allowable stress of the reinforcement as in Section 2409 (e) 3. In no case shall the
length of the lapped splice be Jess than 30 bar diameters for compression and 40 bar
diameters for tension.
Welded or mechanical connections shall develop 125 percent of the specified
yield strength of the bar in tension.
EXCEPTION: For compression bars in columns that are not part of the seismic
system and are not subject to flexure, the compressive strength only need be devel-
·· oped.
,.\: When adjacent splices in grouted masonry are separated by 3 inches or less, the
'' lap length shall be increased by 1.3 times or the splice may be staggered at least 24
bar diameters with no increase in lap length.
Design, Composite Construction

Sec. 2410. (a) General. 1. The requirements of this section are in addition to the
requirements of Section 2407, 2408 or 2409 and govern masonry in which at least
one wythe has strength or composition characteristics different from the other
wythe or wythes and are adequately bonded to act as a single structural element.
2. The following assumptions are in addition to those stated in Section 2407 (b):
232
A. Analysis shall be based on elastic transformed section of the net area.

B. The maximum computed stress in any portion of composite masonry shall not
exceed the allowable stress for the material of that portion.
~::::
(b) Determination of Moduli of Elasticity. The modulus of elasticity of each :r
type of masonry in composite construction shall be measured by test if the modular , ,.
ratio exceeds 2 to I as determined by Section 2406. !}
(c) Structural Continuity. I. Bonding ofwythes. All wythes of composite ma-
sonry elements shall be tied together as in Section 2407 (e) 3 A as a minimum re-
quirement. Additional ties or the combination of grout and metal ties shall be used
to transfer the calculated stress.
2. Material properties. The effect of dimensional changes of the various mate-
rials and different boundary conditions of various wythes shall be included in the
design.
(d) Design Procedure. One material is chosen as the reference material, and the
other materials are transformed to an equivalent area of the reference material by
multiplying the area ofthe second material by the ratio of the modulus of elasticity
of the second material to that of the reference material.
Thickness of the transformed area and its distance perpendicular to a given
bending axis remain unchanged.
Effective height or length of the element remains unchanged.
Design, Reinforced Masonry Slender Wall

Sec. 2411. (a) General. In lieu of the procedure prescribed in Section 2409, the t
procedures set forth in this section, which consider the slenderness of walls by rep- t
resenting effects of axial forces and deflection in calculation of moments, may be J
used when the vertical load stress at the location of maximum moment does not ex- :j:::=~=~
ceed 0.04 f'm as computed by Formula (11-1 ). The value of f'm shall not exceed (
6,000 psi.
Slender masonry wall construction shall have special inspection in confor- \

mance with Section 306. j
:j:j:
Slender masonry walls shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 6 inches. ·:.!
(b) Slender Wall Design Procedure. 1. Maximum reinforcement. The rein- ' '
forcement ratio shall not exceed 0.5 Ph· IJi
2. Moment and deflection calculations. All moment and deflection calcula- :! !
tions in Section 2411 (b) are based on simple support conditions top and bottom. ;t
Other support and fixity conditions, moments and deflections shall be calculated ;;;r
using established principles of mechanics. 1~~
233
3. Strength design. A. Load factors. Factored loads shall be based on:

U "' 1.4 D + 1.7L, or (11-2)
U "'0.75 (1.4D + 1.7L + 1.87 £), or (11-3)
U "' 0.75 (1.4D + 1.7L + 1.7 W), or (11-4)
U "' 0.9D + 1.43£, or (11-5)
U "' 0.9D + !.3W (11-6)
B. Required moment. Required moment and axial force shall be determined at
I
the midheight of the wall and shall be used for design. The factored moment, M., at
: the midhoight of th:w~ :.~: d:~·:~ b~onnul• (11-7) ( ll- )

·" u- ut 2 u u 7
8
I WHERE:
horizontal deflection at midheight under factored load; PA effects shall
be included in deflection calculation.
e "' eccentricity of Put·
Pu axial load at midheight of wall, including tributary wall weight.
Pu = Puw + Put (11-8)
C. Design strength. Design strength in flexure is the nominal moment strength,
M., multiplied by the strength-reduction factor, <j>, and shall equal or exceed the
.. factored moment, M., as set forth in Formula (11-9).
(11-9)
WHERE:
M. = nominal moment strength found for cross sections subjected to com-
bined flexure and given axial load.
Mn = Ase/y (d- a/2)
AJ, + P.
Y , effective area of steel.
/y
Pu + AJ;
a = --"---.:::c'-, depth of stress block due to factored loads.
0.85 f', b
The strength reduction factor for flexure, <j>, shall be 0.80.

D. Design assumptions for nominal strength. Nominal strength of singly rein-
forced masonry wall cross sections to combined flexure and axial load shall be
based on applicable conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of strains. Strain
in reinforcement and masonry walls shall be assumed directly proportional to the
distance from the neutral axis.
Maximum usable strain at extreme masonry compression fiber shall be assumed
equal to 0.003.
234
Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strength/y for grade of reinforce-~

ment used shall be taken as£., times steel strain. For strains greater than that corre-
sponding to/y, stress in reinforcement shall be considered independent of strain and
eq~:~:~~·strength of masonry walls shall be neglected in flexural calculations of =~

strength, except when computing requirements for deflection. · 1 : ·.
Relationship between masonry compressive stress and masonry strain may be

assumed to be rectangular as defined by the following:
(i) Masonry stress of 0.85 f:, shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an
equivalent compression zone bounded by edges of the cross section and a straight
line located parallel to the neutral axis at a distance a= 0.85 cfrom the fiber of max- ~.•
imum compressive strain. ~t-
(ii) Distance c from fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis shall be mea- ~
sured in a direction perpendicular to that axis.
4. Deflection design. The midheight deflection, ~s. under service lateral and
vertical loads (without load factors) shall be limited by the relation:
~s = O.OO?h (11-10)
The midheight deflection shall be computed with the following formula:
5 M h2
_ ___:.s_ (for Mser $ Mer) (11-11)
48 E,,R
2 2
5 Merh
+ 5 (Mser - Mcr)h a.
vor
M
. < M <M ) (ll-12)
48 Em/ R 48 E,Jcr <r ser n
The cracking moment strength ofthe wall shall be determined from the formula:
Mer = Sfr (11-13)
The modulus of rupture,..fr, shall be as follows:
Partially Grouted
I..
Fully Grouted
Hollow-unit Masonry 4.0 .(f;, , 235 psi max. 2.5 Jt'm , 125 psi max.
Two-wythe Brick
Masonry 2.0 .(f;, , 125 psi max. Not allowed
Strength Design, Reinforced Masonry Shear Wall

Sec. 2412. (a) General. The procedures set forth in this section, based on
strength design, may be used as an alternative to the procedure prescribed in Sec-
tion 2409 for the design of reinforced hollow-unit masonry shear walls. ~
(b) Quality Control Provisions. Special inspection during construction of the
shear wall shall be provided as set forth in Section 306.
f;, shall be verified in accordance with Section 2405 (c).
235
(c) Shear Wall Design Procedure. I. Required strength. The required

strength shall be determined as follows:
A. For earthquake loading, the load factors shall be:
U = 1.4 (D + L + E) (12-1)
U = 0.9D ± 1.4£ (12-2)

t The requirement of Section 2407 (h) 4 F (i) shall not apply to Formulas ( 12-1)
: and (12-2).
B. Required strength U to resist dead load D and live loadL shall be at least equal
to:
U = 1.4D + 1.7L (12-3)

C. If resistance to structural effects of a specified wind load Ware included in
design, the following combinations of D, Land W shall be investigated to deter-
mine the greatest required strength U.
U = 0.75 (1.4D + 1.7L + 1.7W) (12-4)

where load combinations shall include both full value and zero value of L to deter-
mine the more severe condition, and
U = 0.9D + 1.3W (12-5)

but for any combination of D, Land W, required strength U shall not be less than
Formula ( 12-3).
D. If resistance to earth pressure H is included in design, required strength U
shall be at least equal to
U = 1.4D + !.7L + !.7H (12-6)

except that where D or L reduces the effect of H. 0.9D shall be substituted for 1.4D
and zero value of L shall be used to determine the greatest required strength U. For
any combination of D,L and H. required strength U shall not be less than Formula
(12-3).
E. If resistance to loadings due to weight and pressure of fluids with well-de-
fined densities and controllable maximum heights F is included in design, such
loading shall have a load factor of 1.4 and be added to all loading combinations that
include live load.
F. If resistance to impact effects is taken into account in design, such effects
shall be included with live load, L.
G. Where structural effects T of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage or tem-
perature change may be significant in design, required strength U shall be at least
equal to
U = 0.75 (1.4D + 1.4T + 1.7L) (12-7)

but required strength U shall not be less than
236
U = 1.4 (D + 1) ( 12-8)
2. Design strength. Design strength provided by the shear wall cross section in
tenns of axial force, shear and moment shall be computed as the nominal strength
multiplied by the strength reduction factor <J>.
Shear walls shall be proportioned such that the design strength exceeds the re-
quired strength.
Strength reduction factor shall be as follows:
A. Axial load and axial load with flexure <1> = 0.65
For members in which/y does not exceed 60,000 psi, with symmetrical rein-
forcement, may be increased linearly to 0.85 as Pn decreases from 0.10f ', Ae !i:!
or 0.25 Ph to zero.
For solid grouted walls Ph may be calculated by Formula (12-9)
(12-9)
WHERE:
ab = 0.85 [emu!( emu + /y/Es)]d (12-10)
B. Shear <1> = 0.60
The shear-strength reduction factor may be 0.80 for any shear wall when its
nominal shear strength exceeds the shear corresponding to development of its
nominal flexural strength for the factored-load combination.
3. Design assumptions for nominal strength. Nominal strength of shear wall
cross sections shall be based on assumptions prescribed in Section 2411 (b) 3D.
The maximum usable strain, emu• at the extreme masonry compression fiber
shall not exceed 0.003.
f ', shall not be less than I ,500 psi or greater than 4,000 psi.
4. Reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be in accordance with the following:
A. Minimum reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with Section 2407
(h) 4 B for all seismic areas using this method of analysis.
B. When the shear wall failure mode is in flexure, the nominal flexural strength ?
of the shear wall shall be at least 1.8 times the cracking moment strength of a fully I
grouted wall or 3.0 times the cracking moment strength of a partially grouted wall ':i.:!:l·::
from Formula ( 11-13 ).

C. All continuous reinforcement shall be anchored or spliced in accordance
with Section 2409 (e) I, 2, 3 A (with];= 0.5/y), 3 B, 3D, 3 F and 3 G (with F.,= /y).
D. The minimum amount of vertical reinforcement shall not be less than one
half the horizontal reinforcement.
E. Maximum spacing of horizontal reinforcement within the region defined in
Section 2412 (c) 6 C (i) shall not exceed three times nominal wall thickness or 24
inches, whichever is less.
5. Axial strength. The nominal axial strength of the shear wall supporting axial
loads only shall be calculated by Formula ( 12-11 ).
237
Po = 0.85 f', (Ae -As) + /yA, (12-ll)

Axial design strength provided by the shear wall cross section shall satisfy For-
mula (12-12).
P 11 :S ¢J (0.80) Po (12-12)
6. Shear strength. Shear strength shall be as follows:
A. The nominal shear strength shall be determined using either Section 2412 (c)
6 B or C. Table No. 24-N gives the maximum nominal shear strength values.
B. The nominal shear strength of the shear wall shall be determined from Form u-
Ia (12-13), except as provided in Section 2412 (c) 6 C.
(12-13)
WHERE:
(12-14)
and
\1, = Am1• p,.{y (12-15)
C. For a shear wall whose nominal shear strength exceeds the shear correspond-
ing to development of its nominal flexural strength two shear regions exist.
(i) For all cross sections within the region defined by the base of the shear wall
and a plane at a distance L.,.. above the base of the shear wall, the nominal shear
strength shall be determined from Formula (12-16).
Vn = Amv p,.{y (12-16)
The required shear strength for this region shall be calculated at a distance 4../2
above the base of the shear wall but not to exceed one-half story height.
(ii) For the other region, the nominal shear strength of the shear wall shall be de-
termined from Formula (12-13).
7. Boundary member. Boundary members shall be as follows:
A. The need for boundary members at boundaries of the shear wall shall be de-
termined using either Section 2412 (c) 7 B or C.
B. Boundary members shall be provided when the failure mode is flexure and
when the maximum extreme fiber stress, corresponding to factored forces, ex-
ceeds 0.2/', The boundary member may be discontinued where the calculated
compressive stress is less than 0.15 f~, Stresses may be calculated for the factored
forces using a linearly elastic model and gross-section properties.
C. Boundary members shall be provided to confine all vertical reinforcement
whose corresponding masonry compressive stress, corresponding to factored
forces, exceeds 0.4 f', when the failure mode is flexure.
D. The minimum length of the boundary member shall be three times the thick-
ness of the wall.
E. Boundary members shall be confined with a minimum of No.3 bars at a maxi-
mum of 8-inch spacing or equivalent within the grouted core and within the region
defined by the base of the shear wall and a plane at a distance 4., above the base of
the shear wall.
238
...
CD
TABLE NO. 24-A-MORTAR PROPORTIONS FOR UNIT MASONRY l

...
CD
c
PROPORTIONS BY VOLUME
~i~i~ z
(CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS) !I ;;
0
PORTLAND HYDRATED
AGGREGATE
MEASURED
i~ ~ :0
3:
CEMENT OR
BLENDED
MASONRY CEMENT2 MORTAR CEMENT3
LIME OR
LIME
INA DAMP,
LOOSE
~~
:;:;:
ID
c
MORTAR TYPE CEMENT' M s N M s N PUTTY' CONDITION
:;~:
;=
c
z
Cement-lime M
s
N
I
I
I
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
'I•
over 'I• to '12
over 112 to 1 1/4 Not less than 2 1/•
li
:::::
Cl
0
0
0 I - - - - - - over 1'1• to and not more than c
m
2 112 3 times the sum
of the separate II
Mortar cement M
M -
I -
-
-
-
-
-
-
I
-
- -
I -
-
volumes of ~fifi
s liz - - - - - I -
cementitious
materials.
t
:~:i:
s - - - - - I - - =~==
:::j:
N - - - - - - I - ::;::
:~:::
Masonry cement M I - - I - - - -
=~=i=
M - I - - - - - - :::::
';:::
s '12 - - I - - - - ~ii:1
:::;:
s - - I - - - - -
t~
N - - - I - - - -
~~~j
0 - - - I - - - -
[~1~
'When plastic cement is used in lieu of portland cement, hydrated lime or putty may be added, but not in excess of one tenth of the volume of cement. l
~===
2Masonry cement conforming to the requirements of U. B.C. Standard No. 24-16.
JMortar cement conforming to the requirements of U .B.C. Standard No. 24-19.
l~iiii
N
N
w i"'
)>
CD
24·8, 24-C 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 24·8-GROUT PROPORTIONS BY VOLUME1

PARTS BY
VOLUME PARTS BY
OF PORT· VOLUME
LAND OF
CEMENT HYDRATED
OR LIME OR
BLENDED LIME AGGREGATE MEASURED IN A DAMP, LOOSE CONDITION
TYPE CEMENT PUTTY Ane Coarse
Fine I 0 to 1/w 2 1/4 to 3 times the sum of
grout the volumes of the
cementitious materials
Coarse I 0 to lfw 2114 to 3 times the sum of I to 2 times the sum of
grout the volumes of the the volumes of the
cementitious materials cementitious materials
1
Grout shall attain a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 2,000 psi. The building
official may require a compressive field strength test of grout made in accordance with
the U.B.C. Standard No. 24-28.
TABLE NO. 24·C-SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY, f',

(psl)2 BASED ON SPECIFYING THE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF
MASONRY UNITS
Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry, f ',
Compressive
Strength of Clay TypeMorS TypaN
Masonry Unlts1 Mortar3 Mortar3
(pal) (pal) (pal)
14,000 or more 5,300 4,400

12,000 4,700 3,800
10,000 4,000 3,300
8,000 3,350 2,700
6,000 2,700 2,200
4,000 2,000 1,600
Compressive
Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry, r;,
Strength of Concrete TypeMorS TypaN
Masonry Unlts4 Mortar3 Mortar3
(pal) (pal) (pal)
4,800 or more 3,000 2,800

3,750 2,500 2,350
2,800 2,000 1,850
1,900 1,500 1,350
1,250 1,000 950
1
Compressive strength of solid clay masonry units is based on gross area. Compressive
strength of hollow clay masonry units is based on minimum net area. Values may be inter-
( Continued)
240
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 24-C, 24-D-1, 24-D-2
polated. When hollow clay masonry units are grouted, the grout shall conform to the pro- ::,
portions in Table No. 24-B. ;!;!'
2 Assumed assemblage. The specified compressive strength of masonry f' m is based on gross
area strength when using solid units or solid grouted masonry and net area strength when
using ungrouted hollow units.
'Mortar for unit masonry, proportion specification, as specified in Table No. 24-A. These
values apply to portland cement-lime mortars without added air-entraining materials.
4 Values may be interpolated. In grouted concrete masonry the compressive strength of grout
shall be equal to or greater than the compressive strength of the concrete masonry units.
TABLE NO. 24-D-1-ALLOWABLE TENSION, S,, FOR EMBEDDED ANCHOR t

BOLTS FOR CLAY AND CONCRETE MASONRY, pounds1,2,3
EMBEDMENT LENGTH, 111 , or EDGE DISTANCE, 1,, Inches

f'm
(pel) 2 3 4 5 6 8 10
1500 240 550 970 1520 2190 3890 6080

1800 270 600 1070 1670 2400 4260 6660
2000 280 630 1120 1760 2520 4500 7020
2500 310 710 1260 1960 2lS_,u 5030 7850
3000 340 770 1380 2150 3100 5510 8600
4000 400 890 1590 2480 3580 6360 9930
5000 440 1000 1780 2780 4000 7110 11,100
6000 480 1090 1950 3040 4380 7790 12,200
1The allowable tension values in Table No. 24-D-1 are based on compressive strength of
masonry assemblages. Where yield strength of anchor bolt steel governs, the allowable
tension in pounds is given in Table No. 24-D-2.
2Values are for bolts of at least A 307 quality. Bolts shall be those specified in Section 2406
(h) I A.
3Values shown are for work with or without special inspection.
TABLE NO. 24-D-2-ALLOWABLE TENSION, S,, FOR EMBEDDED ANCHOR U

BOLTS FOR CLAY AND CONCRETE MASONRY, pounds1·2 I
BENT BAR ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETER, Inches
''• I "Ia I .,, I ''• I 3'· I ''• I 1 I 1''•

350
I 790
I 1410 1 2210
I 3180 1 433o 1 5650
..
I 7160
1Values are for bolts of at least A 307 quahty. Bolts shall be those spectfted m Section 2406
(h) I A.
2 Values shown are for work with or without special inspection.
241
24-E, 24-F, 24-G 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 24-E-ALLOWABLE SHEAR, 8y, FOR EMBEDDED ANCHOR

BOLTS FOR CLAY AND CONCRETE MASONRY, pounds1,2
BENT BAR ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETER, Inches
f 'm
(psi) ''• ''• .,. .,, 7'· 1 1'/a
1500 480 850 1330 1780 1920 2050 2170

\800 480 850 1330 1860 2010 2150 2280
2f)()() 480 850 1330 1900 2060 2200 2340
2500 480 850 1330 1900 2180 2330 2470
3000 480 850 1330 1900 2280 2440 2590
4000 480 850 1330 1900 2450 2620 2780
5000 480 850 1330 1900 2590 2770 2940
6000 480 850 1330 1900 2600 2900 3080
1Values are for bolts of at least A 307 quahty. Bolts shall be those spec1fied m Section 2406
(h) I A.
2Values shown are for work with or without special inspection.
TABLE NO. 24-F-MINIMUM DIAMETERS OF BEND

BAR SIZE MINIMUM DIAMETER
No. 3 through No. 8 6 bar diameters
No. 9 through No. II 8 bar diameters
TABLE NO. 24-G-GROUTING LIMITATIONS

MINIMUM DIMENSIONS OF THE TOTAL CLEAR
AREAS WITHIN GROUT SPACES AND CELLS2.3
GROUT POUR MAXIMUM
GROUT TYPE HEIGHT (Feet) 1 Multlwythe Mesonry Hollow-unit Mesonry
Fine I 3/4 11/z X 2
Fine 5 11/z 11/z X 2
Fine 8 11/z 11/zx3
Fine 12 11/z 13/4 X 3
Fine 24 2 3x3
Coarse I 11/z 11/z X 3
Coarse 5 2 21/z X 3
Coarse 8 2 3X 3
Coarse 12 2'/z 3X 3
Coarse 24 3 3X 4
1See also Section 2404 (f).
2The actual grout space or grout cell dimensions must be larger than the sum of the following
items: ( 1) The required minimum dimensions of total clear areas in Table No. 24-G; (2)
The width of any mortar projections within the space; and (3) The horizontal projections
of the diameters of the horizontal reinforcing bars within a cross section of the grout space
or cell.
3The minimum dimensions of the total clear areas shall be made up of one or more open
areas, with at least one area being 3I4 inch or greater in width.
242
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 24·H
TABLE NO. 24·H-ALLOWABLE COMPRESSIVE STRESSES

111·
FOR EMPIRICAL DESIGN OF MASONRY
ALLOWABLE COMPRESSIVE STRESSES'
GROSS CROS8-SECTIONAL AREA
CONSTRUCTION: COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
OF UNIT, GROSS AREA TYpe M or S Mortar TYpe N Mortar
Solid masonry of brick and other solid
units of clay or shale; sand-lime or
concrete brick:
8,000 plus, psi 350 300
4,500 psi 225 200
2,500 psi 160 140
1,500 psi 115 100
Grouted masonry, of clay or shale;
sand-lime or concrete:
4,500 plus, psi 275 200
2,500 psi 215 140
1,500si 175 100
Solid masonry of solid concrete masonry
units:
3,000 plus, psi 225 200
2,000psi 160 140
1,200psi 115 100
Masonry of hollow load-bearing units:
2,000 plus, psi 140 120
1,500 psi 115 100
l,OOOpsi 75 70
700 psi 60 55
Hollow walls (cavity or masonry
bonded) 2 solid units:
2,500 plus, psi 160 140
1,500 psi 115 100
Hollow units 75 70
Stone ashlar masonry:
Granite 720 640
Limestone or marble 450 400
Sandstone or cast stone 360 320
Rubble stone masonry
Coarse, rough or random 120 100
Unburned clay masonry 30 -
1Lmear mterpolation may be used fordetermmmg .. allowable stresses for masonry umts hav- ::::=
ing compressive strengths which are intermediate between those given in the table. _!!.[.!
2Where floor and roof loads are carried upon one wythe, the gross cross-sectional area is that
of the wythe under load. If both wythes are loaded, the gross cross-sectional area is that !!m
of the wall minus the area of the cavity between the wythes. r~
243
24·1, 24-J, 24-K 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 24·1-SHEAR WALL SPACING REQUIREMENTS

MAXIMUM RATIO
Shear wall spacing
FLOOR OR ROOF CONSTRUCTION Shear wall lenglh
Cdst-in-place concrete 5:1
Precast concrete 4:1
Metal deck with concrete fill 3:1
Metal deck with no fill 2:1
Wood diaphragm 2:1
TABLE NO. 24-J-WALL LATERAL SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS

CONSTRUCTION MAXIMUM //tor hit
Bearing Walls
Solid or Solid Grouted 20
All other 18
Non bearing Walls
Exterior 18
Interior 36
TABLE NO. 24·K-THICKNESS OF FOUNDATION WALLS FOR EMPIRICAL

DESIGN OF MASONRY
NOMINAL
THICKNESS MAXIMUM DEPTH OF
FOUNDATION WALL CONSTRUCTION INCHES UNBALANCED FILL, FEET
Masonry of hollow units, ungrouted 8 4

10 5
12 6
!ilj
Masonry of solid units 8 5
10 6
12 7
!iii
Masonry of hollow or solid 8 7
units, fully grouted 10 8
12 8
Masonry of hollow units 8 7
reinforced vertically with No.4 bars
and grout at 24" o.c. Bars located not
less than 4 1h" from pressure side of
wall.
244
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 24-L, 24-M, 24-N, 24-0
TABLE NO. 24-L-ALLOWABLE SHEAR ON BOLTS FOR

MASONRY OF UNBURNED CLAY UNITS
DIAMETER OF BOLTS EMBEDMENTS SHEAR
(Inches) (Inches) (pounds)
lh - -
5/s 12 200
3/4 15 300
7/g 18 400
I 21 500
Jl/s 24 600
TABLE NO. 24-M-ALLOWABLE SHEAR ON BOLTS FOR EMPIRICALLY

DESIGNED MASONRY EXCEPT UNBURNED CLAY UNITS
DIAMETER BOLT EMBEDMENT' SOLID MASONRY GROUTED MASONRY
(Inches) (Inches) (shear In pounds) (shear In pounds)
1tz 4 350 550

5/g 4 500 750
3/4 5 750 1,100
7/s 6 1,000 1,500
I 7 1,250 1,850Z
1
1 /s 8 1,500 2,2502
1An ..
additional 2 mches of embedment shall be provided for anchor bolts located m the top
of columns for buildings located in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4.
2Permitted only with not less than 2,500 pounds per square inch units.
TABLE NO 24-N-MAXIMUM NOMINAL SHEAR STRENGTH VALUES

Vn
M/Vd1 Ae (l'm)1/2
$ 0.25 6.0
~ 1.00 4.0
1M 1sthe max1mum bendmg moment that occurs simultaneously with the shear load Vat the
section under consideration. Interpolation may be by straight line for M!Vd values be-
tween 0.25 and 1.00.
TABLE ;~~~O-NOMINAL TAR STREN~H ~IEFACIEm
1M is the maximum bending moment that occurs simultaneously with the shear load Vat the
section under consideration. Interpolation may be by straight line for M!Vd values be-
tween 0.25 and 1.00.
245
NOTES
246
Chapter 25
WOOD
General
Sec. 2501. (a) Standard of Quality. The quality and design of wood members
and their fastenings shall conform to the provisions of this chapter.
The standards listed below labeled a "U .B.C. standard" are also listed in Chapter ' ' '
standards and as such are not adopted as part of this code (see Sections 6002 and
·'~ ·1. '~
60, Part II, and are part of this code. The other standards listed below are guideline . . . ...
··'1
6003).
~:n
~. ~~:~~~~;a~'::rd No. 25-1, Classification, Definition and Methods of Grad- . . .

ing for All Species of Lumber
'~ '~.
B. Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, U.S. Edition, NLGA
C. Standard Grading Rules No. 16, WCLIB
D. Standard Grading Rules, WWPA
E. Grading Rules, NHPMA
F. Grading Rules, SPIB
G. Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber, RIS
H. Standard Grading Rules, NELMA
2. Structural glued-laminated timber
A. ANSI/AITC Standard A 190.1 and ASTM D 3737, Design and Manufacture
of Structural Glued-laminated Timber
B. Standard Specifications for Structural Glued-laminated Timber of Softwood
Species, AITC and Standard Specifications for Hardwood Glued-laminated Tim-
ber, AITC
C. AITC 200 of the American Institute of Timber Construction, ANSI/AITC
190.1 and ASTM D 905, Standard Method of Testing, Tests for Structural Glued-
laminated Timber
3. Preservative treatment by pressure processes and quality control
A. Standard Specifications Cl, C2, C3, C4, C9, Cl4, C23, C24, C28 and M4,
AWPA
B. Standard Specifications CP, LP2, LP3, LP4, LP5, LP7, LP22, LP33, LP44,
LP55, LP77 and FDN, AWPB
4. Product standards
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 25-9, Construction and Industrial Plywood
B. ANSI 05.1, Wood Poles-Specifications and Dimensions
C. ASTM D25, Round Timber Piles
D. ANSI/AHA A 194.1, Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board (Fiberboard)
E. U.B.C. Standard No. 25-25, Mat-formed Wood Particleboard
247
11..
J
j.lJtl;;~;~~;i;:~!~;l;;;:~~!:~~~~~;~~·
~i.'b"'-, ~1:\d Nails and Staples
:,:::~: ~;:~~:~:::;:::~:~~Sown Lumbe<

C. U.B.C. Standard No. 25-18, Structural Glued Built-up Members-Plywood
i',.i.::. C~~:~·
6. Construction
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 25-21, Span Tables for Joists and Rafters
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 25-22, Plank-and-Beam Framing
7. Fire retardancy
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 25-28, Fire-retardant-treated Wood Tests on Durability
and Hygroscopic Properties
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 25-29, Fire-retardant-treated Wood
8. Adhesives and glues
A. ASTM D 3024, Dry Use Adhesives with Protein Base, Casein Type
B. ASTM D 2559, Wet Use Adhesives
C. APA Specification AFG-01, Adhesives for Field Gluing Plywood to Wood
Framing
D. ASTM D 1101 and AITC 200 referenced in PS 56, Testing of Glue Joints in
Laminated Wood Product
(b) Workmanship. All members shall be framed, anchored, tied and braced so
as to develop the strength and rigidity necessary for the purposes for which they are
used.
(c) Fabrication. Preparation, fabrication and installation of wood members and
their fastenings shall conform to accepted engineering practices and to the require-
ments of this code.
(d) Rejection. The building official may deny permission for the use of a wood
member where permissible grade characteristics or defects are present in such a
combination that they affect the serviceability of the member.
(e) Minimum Quality. Minimum capacity of structural framing members may
be established by performance tests. When tests are not made, capacity shall be
based on allowable stresses and design criteria specified in this code.
Studs, joists, rafters, foundation plates or sills, planking 2 inches or more in
depth, beams, stringers, posts, structural sheathing and similar load-bearing mem-
bers shall be of at least the minimum grades set forth in Table No. 25-A-1 or
25-A-2. Approved end-jointed lumber may be used interchangeably with sol-
id-sawn members of the same species and grade. Such use shall include, but not be
limited to, light-framing joists, planks and decking.
248
Plywood shall be of species Group I, 2, 3 or 4 and shall be one of the grades spe-
cified in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-9.
Approved fire-retardant-treated wood shall be dried, following treatment, to a
maximum moisture content as follows: solid-sawn lumber 2 inches in thickness or
less to 19 percent, and plywood to 15 percent.
(f) Shrinkage. Consideration shall be given in the design to the possible effect of
cross-grain dimensional changes considered vertically which may occur in lumber
fabricated in a green condition.
Definitions and Symbols
Sec. 2502.(a) Definitions. The following terms used in this chapter shall have
the meanings indicated in this section:
AHA is the American Hardboard Association, Inc., 520 North Hicks Road, Pal- i,i_
aline, Illinois 60067.

AITC is the American Institute of Timber Construction, 11818 S.E. Mill Plain :_,' .:,_·.
,1,•
Boulevard, Suite 415, Vancouver, Washington 98684.

APA is the American Plywood Association, 7011 South 19th Street, Tacoma, :;:
Washington 98411.
AWPA is the American Wood Preservers Association, Post Office Box 849, ::1
Stevensville, Maryland 21666.
AWPB is the American Wood Preservers Bureau, Post Office Box 5283, !:!
Springfield, Virginia 22150.
BLOCKED DIAPHRAGM is a diaphragm in which all sheathing edges not
occurring on framing members are supported on and connected to blocking.
DIAPHRAGM is a horizontal ornearly horizontal system acting to transmit lat-
eral forces to the vertical resisting elements. When the term "diaphragm" is used,
it includes horizontal bracing systems.
FIBERBOARD is a fibrous-felted, homogeneous panel made from lignocellu-
losic fibers (usually wood or cane) and having a density of less than 31 pounds per
cubic foot but more than 10 pounds per cubic foot.
GLUED BUll "-UP MEMBERS are structural elements, the sections of
which are compose, I of built-up lumber, plywood or plywood in combination with
lumber, all parts bonded together with adhesives.
GRADE (Lumber), the classification of! umber in regard to strength and utility
in accordance with the grading rules of an approved lumber grading agency.
HARDBOARD is a fibrous-felted, homogeneous panel made from ligno-cellu-
losic fibers consolidated under heat and pressure in a hot press to a density not less
than 31 pounds per cubic foot.
NELMA is the Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association, 4 Fundy :·:·.
Road, Falmouth, Maine 04105.
~~::
NFoPA is the National Forest Products Association, 1250 Connecticut Avenue, f
N.W., Washington, D.C. 20036.
NHPMA is the Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturers Association (ser- )
viced by NELMA), 4 Fundy Road, Falmouth, Maine 04105.
249
(\\. B.~.~~;!~~h~~;t~~~~l Lumber Grades Authority, Post Office Box 97, Granges,
NOMINAL SIZE (Lumber), the commercial size designation of width and

depth, in standard sawn lumber and glued-laminated lumber grades; somewhat
larger than the standard net size of dressed lumber, in accordance with U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 25-1 for sawn lumber.
NORMAL LOADING, a design load that stresses a member or fastening to the
full allowable stress tabulated in this chapter. This loading may be applied for ap-
proximately I 0 years, either continuously or cumulatively, and 90 percent of this
load may be applied for the remainder of the life of the member or fastening.
::~:
PARTICLEBOARD is a manufactured panel product consisting of particles of
wood or combinations of wood particles and wood fibers bonded together with
synthetic resins or other suitable bonding system by a bonding process in accor-
dance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-25.
PLYWOOD, a built-up panel oflaminated veneers conforming to U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 25-9 .
:.:;.\.• RIS is the Redwood Inspection Service, 591 Redwood Highway, Suite 3100,
. Mill Valley, California 94941.
ROTATION is the torsional movement of a diaphragm about a vertical axis.
SPIB is the Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, 4709 Scenic Highway, Pensacola,
J Florida 32504.
STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER is any member compris-
ing an assembly of laminations of lumber in which the grain of all laminations is
approximately parallel longitudinally, in which the laminations are bonded with
adhesives.
SUBDIAPHRAGM is a portion of a larger diaphragm designed to anchor and
transfer local forces to primary diaphragm struts and the main diaphragm.
TREATED WOOD is wood treated with an approved preservative under treat-
ing and quality control procedures.
WCLIB is the West Coast Lumberlnspection Bureau, 6980 S. W. Varnes Road,
Po~~~~e~;~~;~~~~rt::~~;~~~~ ~~~ECAY is the heartwood of the

7
·I·
:t;···· following species: black locust, black walnut, the cedars and redwood.
l WWPA is the Western Wood Products Association, 1500 Yeon Building, Port-
land, Oregon 97204.
(b) Symbols. The symbols used in this chapter have the following definitions:
A = area of cross section.
b = breadth (width) of rectangular member.
C = coefficient, constant or factor.
C· curvature factor.
C, size effect factor.
Ct form factor.
250
Cs slenderness factor.
c = distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber.
D diameter.
d depth of rectangular member, or least dimension of compression mem-
ber.
E modulus of elasticity.
eccentricity.
allowable unit stress for extreme fiber in bending.
allowable unit stress for extreme fiber in bending, adjusted for slender-
ness.
actual unit stress for extreme fiber in bending.
allowable unit stress in compression parallel to grain.
allowable unit stress in compression parallel to grain adjusted for leld
ratio where d is the least dimension.
actual unit stress in compression parallel to grain.
allowable unit stress in compression perpendicular to grain.
critical compression-perpendicular-to-grain.
actual unit stress in compression perpendicular to grain.
allowable unit stress for end grain in bearing parallel to grain (U.B.C. :t
Standard No. 25-30).
actual unit stress in end grain in bearing parallel to grain.
allowable unit stress acting perpendicular to the inclined surface,
pounds per square inch (Hankinson's Formula).
Fr allowable unit radial stress.
fr actual unit radial stress.
Frc allowable unit radial stress in compression.
/.·c actual unit radial stress in compression.
Frr allowable unit radial stress in tension.
!rt = actual unit radial stress in tension.
F, allowable unit stress in tension parallel to grain.
f, actual unit stress in tension parallel to grain.
F,. allowable unit horizontal shear stress.
f,. actual unit horizontal shear stress.
h rise.
I moment of inertia.
L span length of beam, or unsupported length of column, feet.
I span length of beam, or unsupported length of column, inch.
le effective span length of bending member or effective length of com-
pression member, inches.
M bending moment.
251
m unit bending moment.

N acting perpendicular to the inclined surface "lb" (Hankinson's For-
mula).
p total concentrated load, or axial compression load.
PIA induced axial load per unit of cross-sectional area.
Q statical moment of an area about the neutral axis.
R radius of curvature.
RH horizontal reaction.
Rv vertical reaction.
r radius of gyration.
s section modulus.
T total axial tension load.
t thickness.
v shear force.
w total uniform load.
w uniform load per unit of length.
dA allowable deformation or deflection.
da actual deformation or deflection.
e ::::; angle between the direction of load and the direction of grain, degrees
(Hankinson's Formula).
Size of Structural Members

Sec. 2503. Sizes of lumber and structural glued-laminated timber referred to in
this code are nominal sizes. Computations to determine the required sizes of mem-
bers shall be based on the net dimensions (actual sizes) and not the nominal sizes.
Stresses
Sec. 2504. (a) General. Except as hereinafter provided, stresses shall not exceed
the allowable unit stresses for the respective species and grades or fabricated prod-
ucts as set forth in Tables Nos. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2 for lumber, and Tables Nos.
25-C and 25-D for structural glued-laminated timber.
The values for Fh and Fe tabulated in Table No. 25-A-1 for visually graded struc-
;r turallumber and in Table No. 25-A-2 for machine, stress-rated lumber are for the
design of structures when the strength of an individual member is premised on the
assumption that each individual piece carries its design load.
The repetitive member design values for Fb tabulated in Tables Nos. 25-A-1 and
25-A-2 may be used for the design of an assembly of repetitive framing such as
joists, rafters and studs not over 4 inches in thickness spaced not more than 24 in-
ches, not less than three in number and joined by transverse load-distributing ele-
ments adequate to support the design load.
Values for species and grades not tabulated shall be approved by the building of-
ficial.
252
Values for plywood shall be in accordance with Table No. 25-B. All plywood
when designed to be exposed in outdoor applications shall be of the exterior type,
except as provided in Sections 2516 (i) and 2517 (h) 8.
(b) Wood Poles or Piles. The values tabulated in Table No. 25-E shall be used for
the design of round timber poles and piles.
(c) Adjustment of Stresses. 1. General. The allowable unit stresses specified in
this chapter shall be subject to the adjustments set forth in the footnotes to the ap-
propriate stress tables and to the requirements of this subsection.
2. Preservative treatment. The values for wood pressure impregnated with an
approved process and preservative need no adjustment for treatment but are sub-
ject to other adjustments.
3. Fire-retardant treatment. The values of! umber pressure impregnated with
approved fire-retardant chemicals shall be reduced to 90 percent for horizontal
shear, compression perpendicular to grain, compression parallel to grain and mo-
dulus of elasticity; 85 percent for extreme fiber in bending; and 80 percent for ten-
sion parallel to grain. Values for plywood so treated, including fastener values,
shall be developed from approved test methods that consider potential strength-re-
duction characteristics, including effects of elevated temperatures and moisture.
Other adjustments are applicable except that the impact load duration factor shall
not apply.
The values for fasteners specified in U .B.C. Standard No. 25-17 shall be reduced
to 90 percent, except that values for light metal plate connectors shall be recom-
mended by each truss plate manufacturer and approved by the building official.
Values for glue-laminated timber, including fastener designer loads, shall be
recommended by the treater and approved by the building official.
In addition to the requirements specified in Section 407, fire-retardant lumber
having structural applications shall be tested and identified by an approved inspec-
tion agency in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-29.
4. Duration of load.Values for wood and mechanical fastenings (when the
wood determines the load capacity) are subject to the following adjustments for the
various durations of loading:
(i) Where a member is fully stressed to the maximum allowable stress, either
continuously or cumulatively, for more than 10 years under the conditions of maxi-
mum design load, the values shall not exceed 90 percent of those in the tables.
(ii) When the duration of the full maximum load during the life of the member
does not exceed the period indicated below, the values may be increased in the
tables as follows:
15 percent for two months' duration, as for snow
25 percent for seven days' duration, as for roof loads
33 1h percent for wind or earthquake
I 00 percent for impact
The foregoing increases are not cumulative. For combined duration of loadings
the resultant structural members shall not be smaller than required for the longer
duration of loading.
253
The duration of load factors in this item shall not apply to compression-
perpendicular-to-grain design values based on a deformation limit, or to modulus
of elasticity.
(iii) Values for normal loading conditions may be used without regard to impact
if the stress induced by impact does not exceed the values for normal loading.
5. Size factor adjustment. When the depth of a rectangular sawn bending mem-
berexceeds 12 inches, the allowable unit stress in bending Fh shall be multiplied by
the size factor Cp as determined by the formula:
Cp = (12/rN/9
WHERE:
Cp = size factor.
d = depth of beam in inches.
For beams of circular cross section that have a diameter greater than 13.5 inches,
or 12-inch or larger square beams loaded in the plane of the diagonal, the size factor
Cp may be determined on the basis of an equivalent conventionally loaded square
beam of the same cross-sectional area.
Size factor adjustments are cumulative with form factor adjustments specified
in Section 2504 (c) 7, except for lumber I beams and box beams, but are not cumu-
lative with slenderness factor adjustments specified in Section 2504 (c) 6. Size fac-
tor adjustments for glued-laminated members shall be in accordance with Section
2511 (d) 5. The size factor adjustment shall not apply to visually graded lumber 2
inches to 4 inches thick or to machine-stress-rated lumber.
6. Slenderness factor and flexural stress. When the depth of a bending mem-
ber exceeds its breadth, allowable design stresses in bending shall be modified as
specified in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-30, Section 25.3003.
EXCEPTION: Lateral support may be provided in accordance with Section
2506 (h) in lieu of the above stress modifications.
7. Form factor adjustments. The allowable unit stress in bending for nonpris-
matic members shall not exceed the value established by multiplying such stress by
the form factor c/ determined as follows:
Beam Section Form Factor (C1)

Circular 1.180
Square (with diagonal vertical) 1.414
Lumber I Beams and

Box Beams + (dJ2
2
+ 143
+ 88
WHERE:
cf = form factor.
C~ = support factor= p 2 (6- 8p + 3p2 )( I - q) + q.
254
p = ratio of depth of compression flange to full depth of beam.

q = ratio of thickness of web or webs to the full width of beam.
The form factor adjustment shall be cumulative with the size factor adjustment,
except for lumber I beams and box beams.
X. Modulus of elasticity adjustment. The use of average modulus of elasticity
E values are appropriate for the design of normal wood structural members and as-
semblies. In special applications where deflections are critical to the stability of
structures or structural components, and where exposed to varying temperature
and relative humidity under sustained loading conditions, the average values of the
modulus of elasticity E listed in Tables Nos. 25-A-1, 25-A-2, 25-C-1, 25-C-2, 25-D
and 25-E shall be reduced to account for variability. Coefficients of variation c. in
the modulus of elasticity E for lumber and glued-laminated timber are as follows:
Visually graded sawn lumber 0.25

Machine stress-rated sawn lumber 0.11
Glued-laminated timber 0.10*
"' Applies to six or more laminations.
The average modulus of elasticity E values listed in the tables shall be multiplied
by I -C. or I - 1.65 Cv to obtain a modulus of elasticity E value exceeded by 84
percent or 95 percent individual pieces, respectively.
The duration-of-load adjustments specified in Item 4 do not apply to modulus of
elasticity values.
9. Temperature. The allowable unit stresses for untreated and preservative-
treated wood specified in this chapter and as modified in this section apply to uses
within the range of climatic temperature ordinarily encountered in buildings.
When manufacturing or equipment processes subject members to prolonged tem-
peratures above this range, but not exceeding 150°F., the allowable design stresses
shall be decreased by the appropriate reduction factors specified in U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 25-27. Wood members shall not be used in areas subject to temperatures
above 150°F. unless the exposure is infrequent and any permanent loss in strength
is accounted for in the design.
The allowable unit stresses for fire-retardant-treated solid-sawn lumber and ply- ~. •,.• ,·.~
wood, including fastener values, subject to prolonged elevated temperatures from
manufacturing or equipment processes, but not exceeding 150°F., shall be devel-
oped from approved test methods that properly consider potential strength-reduc-
tion characteristics, including effects of heat and moisture.
10. Moisture service conditions. Where sawn lumber and fastenings are ex-
posed to service conditions causing the wood to possess more than 19 percent
moisture content, the tabulated design values shall be reduced as specified in Table
No. 25-A-1, Footnotes Nos. 6 and 7. Where glued-laminated timber exceeds 16
percent moisture content, the tabulated design values shall be reduced as specified
in Table No. 25-C-1, Footnote No.2.
255
II. Bolted joints. Adjustments for bolt values used in conjunction with metal
side plates shall be in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17 and Section
25.1715 (d).
Identification
Sec. 2505. All lumber, plywood, particleboard, structural glued-laminated tim-
ber, end-jointed lumber, fiberboard sheathing (when used structurally), hardboard
siding (when used structurally), piles and poles regulated by this chapter shall con-
form to the applicable standards or grading rules specified in this code and shall be
so identified by the grade mark or a Certificate oflnspection issued by an approved
agency.
All preservatively treated wood required to be treated under Section 2516 (c)
shall be identified by the quality mark of an approved inspection agency.
Horizontal Member Design

Sec. 2506.(a) Beam Span. For simple beams, the span shall be taken as the dis-
tance from face to face of supports, plus one half the required length of bearing at
each end; for continuous beams, the span is the distance between centers of bear-
ings on supports over which the beam is continuous.
(b) Flexure. I. Circular cross section. A beam of circular cross section may be
assumed to have the same strength in flexure as a square beam having the same
cross-sectional area. If a circular beam is tapered, it shall be considered a beam of
variable cross section.
2. Notching. If possible, notching of beams should be avoided. Notches in sawn
lumber bending members shall not exceed one sixth the depth of the member and
shall not be located in the middle third of the span. Where members are notched at
the ends, the notch depth shall not exceed one fourth the beam depth. The tension
side of sawn lumber bending members of 4 inches or greater nominal thickness
shall not be notched except at ends of members. Cantilevered portions of beams
less than 4 inches in nominal thickness shall not be notched unless the reduced sec-
tion properties and lumber defects are considered in the design. For effects of notch
on shear strength, see Section 2506 (d).
3. Lateral moment distribution. Lateral moment distribution of a concen-
trated load from a critically loaded beam to adjacent parallel beams shall be calcu-
lated.
(c) Horizontal Shear. The maximum horizontal shear stress in a solid-sawn or
glued-laminated wood beam shall not exceed that calculated by means of the for-
mula:
3V
j;, = 2bd
The actual unit shear stress fv shall not exceed the allowable for the species and
grade as given in Table No. 25-A for solid-sawn lumber and in Tables Nos. 25-C
and 25-D for glued-laminated lumber, adjusted for duration ofloading, as provided
in Section 2504 (c) 4.
256
When calculating the shear force, V. distribution of load to adjacent parallel

beams by flooring or other members may be considered, and all loads within a dis-
tance from either support equal to the depth of the beam may be neglected for
beams supported by full bearing on one surface and loads applied to the opposite
surface.
(d) Horizontal Shear in Notched Beams. Where girders, beams or ~<li."t" ~~
notched at points of support on the tension side, they shall meet the design reg uire-
ments of that section in bending and in shear. The shear at such point shall not ex-
ceed the value calculated by the following formula:
V = ebd~ Fv) ( ~)
WHERE:
d' = actual depth of beam at notch.
d = total depth of beam.
Where girders, beams or joists are notched at points of support on the compres-
sion side, they shall meet design requirements for that net section in bending and in
shear. The shear at such point shall not exceed the value calculated by the following
formula:
WHERE:
d' actual depth of beam at notch.
d = total depth of beam.
e = distance notch extends inside the inner edge of support.
The shear for the notch on the compression side shall be further limited to the
value determined for a beam of depth d' if e exceeds d'.
The alternate provisions ofU.B.C. Standard No. 25-30, Section 25.3004, do not ·.!.J.J.f.',!
apply when designing notched beams.

(e) Design of Joints in Shear. Eccentric connector and bolted joints and beams
supported by connectors or bolts shall be designed so that..fv in the following formu-
la does not exceed the allowable unit stresses in horizontal shear.
3V
fv = 2bde
WHERE:
de (with connectors)= the depth of the member less the distance from the un-
loaded edge of member to the nearest edge of the nearest connector.
d, (with bolts orlag screws)= the depth of the memberless the distance from the 1
unloaded edge of the member to the center of the nearest bolt or lag screw.
257
Allowable unit stresses in shear for joints involving bolts or connectors loaded
perpendicular to grain may be 50 percent greater than the horizontal shear values as
set forth in Tables Nos. 25-A, 25-C and 25-D, provided that the joint occurs at least
if five times the depth of the member from its end. When the joint is less than five
:':! times the depth of the member from its end, the induced shear stress is calculated
iii!!
·:::=
as:
fv
3V (d)
= 2bd, de
~:j:~ and the 50 percent increase in design values for shear in joints does not apply.
(f) Compression Perpendicular to Grain. In applications where deformation
is critical, the following equation shall be used to calculate the compression-per-
pendicular-to-grain design values:
Fcl_' = 0.73 Fcl_
WHERE:
Fc..L' = critical compression-perpendicular-to-grain value.
Fc..L = compression-perpendicular-to-grain values from Table No. 25-A-1.
The duration ofload modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not
apply to compression-perpendicular-to-grain values for sawn lumber or glued-
laminated timber.
The allowable unit stresses for compression perpendicular to grain in Tables
Nos. 25-A, 25-C and 25-D apply to bearings of any length at the ends ofthe beam
and to all bearings 6 inches or more in length at any other location.
For bearings of less than 6 inches in length and not nearer than 3 inches to the end
of a member, the maximum allowable load per square inch may be obtained by
multiplying the allowable unit stresses in compression perpendicular to grain by
the following factor:
h + .375
lb
in which lb is the length of bearing in inches measured along the grain of the wood.
The multiplying factors for indicated lengths of bearing on such small areas as
plates and washers may be:
LENGTH OF
BEARING 60R
(Inches) 'I, 1 1 11, 2 3 4 MORE
Factor 1.75 1.38 1.25 1.19 1.13 1.10 1.00
In using the preceding formula and table for round washers or bearing areas, use
a length equal to the diameter.
In joists supported on a ribbon or ledger board and spiked to the studding, the
allowable stress in compression perpendicular to grain may be increased 50 per-
cent.
258
(g) Tension Perpendicular to Grain. Where designs that induce tension

stresses perpendicular to grain cannot be avoided, mechanical reinforcement suffi-
cient to resist such forces shall be specified.
(h) Lateral Support. Solid-sawn rectangular lumber beams, rafters and joists
shall be supported laterally to prevent rotation or lateral displacement in accor-
dance with the following:
If the ratio of depth to thickness, based on nominal dimensions, is:
I. 1\vo to I, no lateral support is required.
2. Three to I or 4 to 1, the ends shall be held in position, as by full-depth solid
blocking, bridging, nailing or bolting to other framing members, approved hangers
or other acceptable means.
3. Five to 1, one edge shall be held in line for its entire length.
4. Six to 1, bridging, full-depth solid blocking or cross bracing shall be installed ::ii
at intervals not exceeding 8 feet unless:
(i) Both edges of the member are held in line or,
(ii) The compression edge of the member is supported throughout its length :ii:!
to dprehventdlateradl d1·spl~cemefnbt, a~ byhadeq uate sheathing or subflooring, ,:.,.:.,.:::,.:.,,!·'·
an t e en san a11pomts o eanng ave 1atera1support to prevent rota-

tion.
5. Seven to 1, both edges shall be held in line for their entire length.
If a beam is subject to both flexure and compression parallel to grain, the ratio
may be as much as 5 to 1 if one edge is held firmly in line. If under any combination
of load the unbraced edge of the member is in tension, the ratio may be 6 to 1.
In lieu of providing lateral support by the methods specified in Items 2 through 5
above, the allowable stresses shall be reduced by the slenderness factor set forth in
Section 2504 (c) 6.
(i) Lateral Support of Arches, Compression Chords of Trusses and Studs.
Where roof joists or purlins are used between arches or compression chords, the
largest value of l,!d, calculated using the depth of the arch or compression chord or
calculated using the breadth (least dimension) of the arch or compression chord
between points of intermittent lateral support, shall be used. The roof joists or pur-
lins shall be placed to account for shrinkage (for example, by placing the upper
edges of unseasoned joists approximately 5 percent of the joist depth above the
tops of the arch or chord) but also placed low enough to provide adequate lateral
support.
Where roof joists or purlins are placed on top of an arch or compression chord
and are securely fastened to the arch or compression chord, the largest value of l,ld,
calculated using the depth of the arch or compression chord or calculated using the
breadth (least dimension) of the arch or compression chord between points of inter-
mittent lateral support, shall be used.
Where planks are placed on top of an arch or compression chord and securely
fastened to the arch or compression chord, or when sheathing is nailed properly to
the top chord of trussed rafters, the depth rather than the breadth of the arch, com-
pression chord or trussed rafter may be used as the least dimension in determining
259
l,ld. Where stud walls in light-frame construction are adequately sheathed on at

least one side, the depth rather than breadth of the stud, may be taken as the least
dimension in calculating the l,ld ratio. The sheathing shall be shown by experience
to provide lateral support and shall be fastened in accordance with Table No. 25-Q.
Column Design
Sec. 2507. (a) Column Classifications. I. Simple solid wood columns. Simple
columns consist of a single piece or of pieces properly glued together to form a
single member.
2. Spaced columns, connector joined. Spaced columns are formed of two or
more individual members with their longitudinal axes parallel, separated at the
ends and middle points of their length by blocking and joined at the ends by timber
connectors capable of developing the required shear resistance. See U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 25-15 for design.
3. Built-up columns. Built-up columns, other than connector-joined spaced
columns and glued-laminated columns, shall not be designed as solid columns.
(b) Limitation on lid Ratios. For simple solid columns, leld shall not exceed 50.
For individual members of a spaced column, see U.B.C. Standard No. 25-15.
(c) Simple Solid-column Design. The effective column length, le, shall be used
in design formulas given in this section. The effective column length, le, shall be
determined in accordance with good engineering practice. Actual column lengths,
l, may be multiplied by the factors given in the following table to determine effec-
tive column length, le.
..,.
Buckling modes I
I
I
I
.~
I
I
'""
I
I
I
I
I
•'. I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I \
I
I
I
I
t t
I
I
I
I
I
p ··~~~J.I
I
I
I
I
I I I I
I
I I I
I
I I I
I I
Jr 1,• 'Ill \. 1ltr
-.~
Design buckling factor, K.
when Ideal conditions 0.65 0.80 1.2 1.0 2.10 2.4
approximated.
~ Rotation fixed, translation fixed
'
End condition code Rotation free, translation fixed
~ Rotation fixed, translation free

~ Rotation free, translation free
Note: le = Kel
Allowable unit stresses in pounds per square inch of cross-sectional area of

square or rectangular simple solid columns shall be determined by the following
260
formulas, but such unit stresses shall not exceed values for compression, parallel to
grain Fe in Tables Nos. 25-A, 25-C, 25-D and 25-E adjusted in accordance with
provisions of Section 2504.
Short columns Ueld of 11 or less):
F :. =Fe
Intermediate columns Ueld greater than 11 but less thanK):
K = 0.671 j E
Fe
Long columns Ueld of K or greater):

F'. = 0.30£
' Ue/d) 2
Where machine stress-unit lumber is used as provided for in Table No. 25-A-2,
stresses may be determined in accordance with the following formula:
Intermediate columns:
K = 0.792 )E/Fe
Long columns:
Adjustments to allowable unit stresses, as provided in Section 2504 or else-

where, shall be applied to values of Fe and E used in these formulas and shall not be
applied to the value ofF:. obtained from the formulas.
The coefficients in the long column design formulas include a 1-1.65 Cv reduc-
tion for variability as defined in Section 2504 (c) 8.
Duration ofload adjustment from Section 2504 (c) 4 is applied to Fe but not to E.
(d) Tapered Columns. In determining the d for tapered column design, the di-
ameter of a round column or the least dimension of a column of rectangular section,
tapered at one or both ends, shall be taken as the sum of the minimum diameter or
least dimension and one third the difference between the minimum and maximum
diameters or lesser dimensions.
Flexural and Axial Loading Combined

Sec. 2508. (a) Flexure and Axial Tension. Members subjected to both flexure
and axial tension shall be so proportioned that
261
f.r_ + fh does not exceed ONE

Fr Fh
does not exceed ONE
(b) Flexure and Axial Compression. Members subjected to both flexure and
axial compression shall be so proportioned that
_f_ + fh does not exceed ONE

F: F /,- Jfc.
The value of J shall be derived as:
J = fe/d- 11
K- 11
except that] shall not be less than zero or greater than one (0~1 ~I). The value of K
shall be as specified for intermediate columns in Section 2507 (c).
F ;. and K shall be determined in accordance with the provisions in Section 2507
(c), except (I) when checking the design in the plane of bending the slenderness
ratio, leld, in the plane of bending shall be used to calculateF; and], and (2) when
checking the design perpendicular to the plane of bending the slenderness ratio,
lei d, perpendicular to the plane of bending shall be used to calculate F ;. and J shall
be set equal to zero.
(c) Spaced Columns. In the case of spaced columns, this combined stress for-
mula may be applied only if the bending is in a direction parallel to the greater d of
the individual member.
(d) Truss Compression Chords. Effects of buckling of a 2 by 4 or smaller truss
compression chord having effective buckling lengths of 96 inches or less and with
3
/ 8-inch or thicker plywood sheathing nailed to the narrow face of the chord in ac-
cordance with Table No. 25-Q shall be determined from the formula:
2, 300/e
Cr = I + - - -
Eo.os
WHERE:
Cr buckling stiffness factor.
le effective buckling length used in design of chord for compression load-
ing.
E 0.05 0.589£ for visually graded lumber.
0.819£ for machine-stress-rated lumber.
E modulus of elasticity from tables of allowable unit stresses, pounds per
square inch.
The values of Cr determined from this formula are for wood seasoned to a mois-
ture content of 19 percent or less at the time the plywood is nailed to the chord. For
wood that is unseasoned or partially seasoned at the time of plywood attachment,
Cr shall be determined from the formula:
262
1, 200/e
Cr = l + - - -
Eo.os
For chords with an effective buckling length greater than 96 inches, Cr shall be
taken as the value for a chord having an effective length of 96 inches.
The buckling stiffness factor does not apply to short columns or to trusses used
under wet conditions. The allowable unit compressive stress shall be modified by
the buckling stiffness factor when a truss chord is subjected to combined flexure
and compression and the bending moment is in the direction that induces compres-
sion stresses in the chord face to which the plywood is attached.
The buckling stiffness factor Cr shall be applied as follows:
Short columns Ueld of II or less):
F; = F,
Intermediate columns (leld greater than II but less thanK):
K = 0.671 )Cr(E/F,)
Long columns (l,ld of K or greater):

0.30ECr
F ;. = Ue/ d) 2
Compression at Angle to Grain

Sec. 2509. The allowable unit stress in compression at an angle of load to grain
between 0 degree and 90 degrees shall be computed from Hankinson's Formula as
follows:
Allow•hlo wluo. fm :d :::::~'~;:::;, :::1 ~ •dj"'tod fm dumtion of ~

load before use in Hankinson's Formula. Fg values are tabulated in U.B.C. Stan-
~=;~~s~· 25-30. Values of Fn and F,.j_ are not subjected to duration of load modifi- li
:1:::
Timber Connectors and Fasteners

Sec. 2510. (a) General. Timber connectors and fasteners may be used to trans-
mit forces between wood members and between wood and metal members. The al-
lowable loads and installation of timber connectors and fasteners shall be in
accordance with the provisions set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17. For con-
nectors and fasteners where the wood is wet at time of fabrication or wet in service,
the allowable loads shall be modified in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No.
25-17.
263
Safe loads and design practices for types of connectors and fasteners not men-
tioned or fully covered in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17 may be determined in a man-
ner approved by the building official.
Fasteners for pressure-preservative-treated and fire-retardant-treated wood
shall be of hot-dipped zinc-coated galvanized, stainless steel, silicon bronze or
copper. Fasteners for wood foundations shall be as required in U.B.C. Standard
No. 29-3.
EXCEPTION: When approved, fasteners used in contact with preservative-
treated wood products when not below grade or exposed to weather.
(b) Bolts. Safe loads in pounds for bolts in shear in seasoned lumber of Douglas
fir-larch and southern pine shall not exceed the values set forth in Table No. 25-F.
(For other species and wet conditions, see U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17.)
Allowable shear values used to connect a wood member to concrete or masonry
are permitted to be determined as one half the tabulated double shear values for a
wood member twice the thickness of the member attached to the concrete or ma-
sonry.
(c) Nails and Spikes. I. Safe lateral strength. A common wire nail driven per-
pendicular to grain of the wood, when used to fasten wood members together, shall
not be subjected to a greater load causing shear and bending than the safe lateral
strength of the wire nail or spike as set forth in Table No. 25-G.
A wire nail driven parallel to the grain of the wood shall not be subjected to more
than two thirds of the lateral load allowed when driven perpendicular to the grain.
Toenails shall not be subjected to more than five sixths of the lateral load allowed
for nails driven perpendicular to the grain.
2. Safe resistance to withdrawal. A wire nail driven perpendicular to grain of
the wood shall not be subjected to a greater load, tending to cause withdrawal, than
the safe resistance of the nail to withdrawal, as set forth in Table No. 25-H.
Nails driven parallel to grain of the wood shall not be allowed for resisting with-
drawal forces.
3. Spacing and penetration. Common wire nails shall have penetration into the
piece receiving the point as set forth in Table No. 25-G. Nails or spikes for which
the wire gauges or lengths are not set forth in Table No. 25-G shall have a required
penetration of not less than II diameters, and allowable loads may be interpolated.
Design values shall not be increased when the penetration of nails into the member
holding the point is larger than required by this item.
For wood-to-wood joints, the spacing center to center of nails in the direction of
stress shall not be Jess than the required penetration. Edge or end distances in the
direction of stress shall not be less than one half of the required penetration. All
spacing and edge and end distances shall be such as to avoid splitting of the wood.
Holes for nails, where necessary to prevent splitting, shall be bored of a diameter
smaller than that of the nails.
(d) Drift Bolts or Pins, Wood Screws and Lag Screws. Connections involving
the use of drift bolts or pins, wood screws and Jag screws shall be designed in accor-
dance with the provisions set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17.
264
(e) Joist Hangers and Framing Anchors. Connections depending on joist

hangers or framing anchors, ties, and other mechanical fastenings not otherwise
covered may be used where approved.
(f) Metal Plate Connectors. The material and workmanship during fabrication
and the design of metal plate connectors employed as joint connectors for light
wood trusses shall conform with the requirements of U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17.
Each truss manufacturer shall retain an approved agency having no financial in-
terest in the plant being inspected to make nonscheduled inspections of truss fabri-
cation and delivery and operations. The inspection shall cover all phases of truss
operation, including lumber storage, handling, cutting, fixtures, presses or rollers,
fabrication, bundling and banding, handling and delivery.
Structural Glued-laminated Timber Design

Sec. 2511. (a) General Provisions. I. Design requirements. Except as other-
wise provided in this section, structural glued-laminated timber members shall be
designed in accordance with the applicable engineering formulas used for sawn
members.
2. Fastenings. The pertinent provisions and allowable loads for fastenings given
in this chapter shall apply to structural glued-laminated timber members.
3. Allowable unit stresses. The allowable unit stresses for structural glued-lam-
inated timber shall be in accordance with Tables Nos. 25-C and 25-D and as modi-
fied by this section.
(b) Standard Sizes. Laminated members shall be of standard finished widths.
Depth of straight and curved members, length of all members and net dimen-
sions shall be specified on the plans.
(c) Specifications. For structural glued-laminated timber, the following shall be
specified on the plans:
Whether for dry or wet conditions of use
Species and applicable standard
Stress requirements
If the temperature of the timber exceeds 150°F. in service
(d) Design Stresses. 1. Dry conditions of use. Allowable stress values for dry
conditions of use shall be applicable for normal loading when the moisture content
in service is less than 16 percent, as in most covered structures.
2. Wet conditions of use. Allowable stress values for wet conditions of use shall
be applicable for normal loading when the moisture content in service is 16 percent
or more, as may occur in exterior and submerged construction.
3. Curvature factor. For the curved portion of members, the allowable unit
stress in bending shall be modified by multiplication by the following curvature
factor:
in which
265
t thickness of lamination in inches.

R radius of curvature of inside face of lamination in inches, and t!R shall
not exceed 1/ 100 for hardwoods and southern pine, or 1/ 125 for other soft-
woods.
No curvature factor shall be applied to stress in the straight portion of an assembly,
regardless of curvature elsewhere.
4. Radial tension or compression. The maximum radial stress induced in a
curved member of constant rectangular cross section by a bending moment is:
3M
fr = 2Rbd
WHERE:
f, radial stress in pounds per square inch.
M bending moment in inch-pounds.
R radius of curvature at center line of member in inches.
b width of cross section in inches.
d depth of cross section in inches.
For curved bending members having a varying cross section, the maximum ra-
dial stress induced,.fr, is given by:
6M
f,. = K,. bJl
WHERE:
M bending moment at midspan in inch-pounds.
b width of cross section, inches.
d depth of cross section at the apex in inches.
K,. radial stress factor determined from the following relationship:
WHERE:
Rm = radius of curvature at the center line of the member at midspan in
inches.
A, Band C = constants as follow:
~) A
(2)
B
(3)
c
(4)
(0.0) (0.0) (0.2500) (0.0)
2.5° 0.0079 0.1747 0.1284
5.0° 0.0174 0.1251 0.1939
7.5° 0.0279 0.0937 0.2162
10.0° 0.0391 0.0754 0.2119
15.0° 0.0629 0.0619 0.1722
20.0° 0.0893 0.0608 0.1393
25.0° 0.1214 0.0605 0.1238
30.0° 0.1649 0.0603 0.1115
266
and~ =angle between the upper edge of the member and the horizontal in degrees.
Values of K, for intermediate values of~ may be interpolated linearly.
When M is in the direction tending to decrease the curvature (increase the ra-
dius), the stress in tension across the grain (F") is limited to:
A. One third the allowable unit stress in horizontal shear of all species for wind
and earthquake loads.
B. Fifteen pounds per square inch (psi) for Douglas fir, larch, hem-fir, western
woods and other softwoods for other types of loading.
C. One third the allowable unit stress in horizontal shear for southern pine, red-
wood and hardwoods for all types of loading.
These values are subject to modification for duration of load. If these values are
exceeded, mechanical reinforcing sufficient to resist all radial tension stresses is
required, but in no case shall the calculated radial tension stress exceed one third
the allowable unit stress in horizontal shear. When mechanical reinforcing is used,
the maximum moisture content of the laminations at time of manufacture shall not
exceed 12 percent for dry conditions of use.
When M is in the direction tending to increase curvature (decrease the radius),
the radial stress is in compression and shall be limited to the allowable stress in
compression perpendicular to the grain.
When the beam is loaded with a uniform load, K, may be modified by multiply-
ing by the reduction factor C, as calculated by the following formula:
~J + C ( ::) + D ( ~J
2
C, = A + B (
WHERE:
C, reduction factor.
L span of beam.
L, length of beam between tangent points.
A,B .... H
= constants for a given l3 as follows:
267
/3 A B c D E F G H
2.3° -.142 .418 -2.358 -.053 - - .002 -
9.7° .143 .376 - .541 -.060 - - .003 -
14.9° .406 .293 - .927 -.041 - - .002 -
20.0° .423 .364 -1.022 -.067 - .146 - -
25.2° .540 .360 -1.061 -.070 - .156 - -
29.8° .502 .372 - -.076 -3.712 .138 .004 4.336
and~= angle between the upper edge of the member and the horizontal in degrees.
Values of C, for intermediate values may be interpolated linearly.
L
Lt
PITCHED AND TAPERED CURVED BEAM

5. Size factor for beams. When the depth of a rectangular glued-laminated beam
is 12 inches or greater, the allowable unit stress in bending Fh shall be multiplied by
the size factor as determined by the formula:
CF = (l2kN 19
WHERE:
CF = size factor.
d = depth of beam in inches.
The values obtained from this formula are based on a uniformly loaded beam
simply supported with an lid ratio of 21.
Tabular values for three conditions of loading are given as follows:
DEPTH SIZE FACTOR CF
Uniformly Distributed Single Concentrated
(d) Load Load Third Point Loading
12 1.00 1.08 .97

19 .95 1.02 .92
31 .90 .97 .87
52 .85 .92 .82
90 .80 .86 .77
268
For intennediate depths, straight line interpolation may be used. For continuous
beams or beams cantilevered over a support, detennine the size factor assuming
the members to be equivalent to simply supported members with a unifonnly dis-
tributed load, the length of the equivalent span being the actual distance between
supports.
Values as detennined above will be sufficiently accurate for most design situa-
tions.
For beams with other conditions of loading and other lid ratios, the ,.'0.\~'l>%
tained in the basic fonnula may be modified as follows:
LOADING CONDITION FOR SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAMS PERCENTAGE OF CHANGE
Single concentrated load +7.8

Uniform load 0
Third point load -3.2
SPAN TO DEPTH RATIO' 1/d PERCENTAGE OF CHANGE
7 +6.3
14 +2.3
21 0
28 -1.6
35 -2.8
1Formtermedmte span-to-depth ratios, use straight lme mterpola!Ion between the values
shown.
6. Ponding. Roof-framing members shall be designed for the deflection criteria
and ponding requirements specified in Sections 2305 (f) and 2307. In no case shall
the roof slope provide a positive vertical displacement less than that equivalent to
1
I4 inch per foot of horizontal distance between the level of the drain and the high
point of the roof for drainage. Such slope shall be in addition to the camber in
glued-laminated timbers of one and one-halftimes the calculated dead load deflec-
tion. The calculation of the required slope shall not include any vertical displace-
ment created by short taper cuts.
Roofs having insufficient slope for drainage shall be investigated by a rational
analysis to assure stability under ponding conditions, but in no case shall the de-
flection of such glued-laminated timbers exceed 1h inch for a 5-pound-per-
square-foot unifonn load.
(e) Tapered Faces. Sawn tapered cuts shall not be pennitted on the tension face
of any beam. Pitched or curved beams shall be so fabricated thatthe laminations are
parallel to the tension face. Straight, pitched or curved beams may have sawn ta-
pered cuts on the compression face.
For other members subject to bending, the slope of tapered faces, measured from
the tangent to the lamination of the section under consideration, shall not be steeper
than 1:24 on the tension side.
EXCEPTIONS: !.This requirement shall not apply to arches.
2.Taper may be steeper at sections increased in size beyond design requirements
for architectural projections.
269
(f) Manufacture and Fabrication. The manufacture and fabrication of struc-

tural glued-laminated timber shall be under the supervision of qualified personnel.
(g) Exposed Structural Glued-laminated Timber. Those portions of
glued-laminated timbers which form the structural supports of a building or ot'ner
structure and are exposed to weather and not properly protected by a roof, eave
overhangs or similar covering shall be pressure treated with an approved preserva-
tive or be manufactured from wood of natural resistance to decay.
Design of Glued Built-up Members

Sec. 2512. Plywood components shall be designed, fabricated and identified in
accordance with U.B.C. Standard No.25-18.
Wood Shear Walls and Diaphragms

Sec. 2513. (a) General. Lumber, plywood and particleboard diaphragms may
be used to resist horizontal forces in horizontal and vertical distributing or resisting
elements, provided the deflection in the plane of the diaphragm, as determined by
calculations, tests or analogies drawn therefrom, does not exceed the permissible
deflection of attached distributing or resisting elements. See U.B.C. Standard
No.25-9 for a method of calculating the deflection of a blocked plywood dia-
phragm.
Permissible deflection shall be that deflection up to which the diaphragm and
any attached distributing or resisting element will maintain its structural integrity
under assumed load conditions, i.e., continue to support assumed loads without
danger to occupants of the structure.
Connections and anchorages capable of resisting the design forces shall be pro-
vided between the diaphragms and the resisting elements. Openings in diaphragms
which materially affect their strength shall be fully detailed on the plans and shall
have their edges adequately reinforced to transfer all shearing stresses.
Size and shape of diaphragms shall be limited as set forth in Table No. 25-1.
In buildings of wood-frame construction where rotation is provided for, the
depth of the diaphragm normal to the open side shall not exceed 25 feet or two
thirds the diaphragm width, whichever is the smaller depth. Straight sheathing
shall not be permitted to resist shears in diaphragms acting in rotation.
EXCEPTIONS: I. One-story, wood-framed structures with the depth normal to
the open side not greater than 25 feet may have a depth equal to the width.
2. Where calculations show that diaphragm deflections can be tolerated, the depth
normal to the open end may be increased to a depth-to-width ratio not greater than
11h: I for diagonal sheathing or 2: I for special diagonal sheathed or plywood or parti-
cleboard diaphragms.
In masonry or concrete buildings, lumber, plywood and particleboard dia-
phragms shall not be considered as transmitting lateral forces by rotation.
Diaphragm sheathing nails or other approved sheathing connectors shall be
driven flush but shall not fracture the surface of the sheathing.
(b) Diagonally Sheathed Diaphragms. 1. Conventional construction. Such
lumber diaphragms shall be made up of l-inch nominal sheathing boards laid at an
270
angle of approximately 45 degrees to supports. Sheathing boards shall be directly

nailed to each intermediate bearing member with not less than two 8d nails for
l-inch by 6-inch nominal boards and three 8d nails for boards 8 inches or wider;
and, in addition, three 8d nails and four 8d nails shall be used for 6-inch and 8-inch
boards, respectively, at the diaphragm boundaries. End joints in adjacent boards
shall be separated by at least one joist or stud space, and there shall be at least two
boards between joints on the same support. Boundary members at edges of dia-
phragms shall be designed to resist direct tensile or compressive chord stresses ana
shall be adequately tied together at comers.
Conventional lumber diaphragms of Douglas fir-larch or southern pine may be
used to resist shear due to wind or seismic forces not exceeding 300 pounds per
lineal foot of width. The allowable strength shall be adjusted by the factors 0.82 and
0.65 where nails are used with sheathing and framing of Group III or IV wood spe-
cies as listed in Table No.25-17-J of U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17.
2. Special construction. Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms shall con-
form to conventional construction and, in addition, shall have all elements de-
signed in conformance with the provisions of this code.
Each chord or portion thereof may be considered as a beam loaded with a uni-
form load per foot equal to 50 percent of the unit shear due to diaphragm action.
The load shall be assumed as acting normal to the chord, in the plane of the dia-
phragm and either toward or away from the diaphragm. The span of the chord, or
portion thereof, shall be the distance between structural members of the dia-
phragm, such as the joists, studs and blocking, which serve to transfer the assumed
load to the sheathing.
Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms shall include conventional diaphragms
sheathed with two layers of diagonal sheathing at 90 degrees to each other and on
the same face of the supporting members.
Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms of Douglas fir-larch or southern pine
may be used to resist shears due to wind or seismic loads, provided such shears do
not stress the nails beyond their allowable safe lateral strength and do not exceed
600 pounds per lineal foot of width. The allowable strength shall be adjusted by the
factors 0.82 and 0.65 where nails are used with sheathing and framing of Group III
or IV wood species as listed in Table No. 25-17-J ofU.B.C. Standard No. 25-17.
(c) Plywood Diaphragms. Horizontal and vertical diaphragms sheathed with
plywood may be used to resist horizontal forces not exceeding those set forth in
Table No. 25-J-1 for horizontal diaphragms and Table No. 25-K-1 for vertical dia-
phragms, or may be calculated by principles of mechanics without limitation by
using values of nail strength and plywood shear values as specified elsewhere in
this code. Plywood for horizontal diaphragms shall be as set forth in Tables Nos.
25-S-1 and 25-S-2 for corresponding joist spacing and loads. Plywood in shear
walls shall be at least 5I 16 inch thick for studs spaced 16 inches on center and% inch
thick where studs are spaced 24 inches on center.
Maximum spans for plywood subfloor underlayment shall be as set forth in
Table No. 25-T-1. Plywood used for horizontal and vertical diaphragms shall con-
form to U.B.C. Standard No. 25-9.
271
All boundary members shall be proportioned and spliced where necessary to

transmit direct stresses. Framing members shall be at least 2-inch nominal in the
dimension to which the plywood is attached. In general, panel edges shall bear on
the framing members and butt along their center lines. Nails shall be placed not less
than 3/ginch in from the panel edge, shall be spaced not more than 6 inches on center
along panel edge bearings, and shall be firmly driven into the framing members.
No unblocked panels less than 12 inches wide shall be used.
Where plywood is applied on both faces of a shear wall in accordance with Table
No. 25-K-1, allowable shear for the wall may be taken as twice the tabulated shear
for one side, except that where the shear capacities are not equal, the allowable
shear shall be either the shear for the side with the higher capacity or twice the shear
for the side with the lower capacity, whichever is greater.
Diaphragms with panel edges supported in accordance with Tables Nos. 25-S-1,
25-S-2 and 25-T -1 shall not be considered as blocked diaphragms unless blocking
or other means of shear transfer is provided.
(d) Particleboard Diaphragms. Horizontal and vertical diaphragms sheathed
with particleboard may be used to resist horizontal forces not exceeding those set
forth in Table No. 25-J-2 for horizontal diaphragms and Table No. 25-K-2 for verti-
cal diaphragms.
All boundary members shall be proportioned and spliced where necessary to
transmit direct stresses. Framing members shall be at least 2-inch nominal in the
dimension to which the particleboard is attached. In general, panel edges shall bear
on the framing members and butt along their center lines. Nails shall be placed not
less than 3/ 8 inch in from the panel edge, shall be spaced not more than 6 inches on
center along panel edge bearings, and shall be firmly driven into the framing mem-
bers. No unblocked panels less than 12 inches wide shall be used .
.:;: Diaphragms with panel edges supported in accordance with Tables Nos. 25-S-3
{ and 25-T -2 shall not be considered as blocked diaphragms unless blocking or other
:; means of shear transfer is provided.
(e) Requirements for Wood Design-Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. 1. Wood
shear walls and diaphragms. A. General. Design and construction of wood shear
walls and diaphragms in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 shall conform to the require-
B. Framing. Collector members shall be provided to transmit tension and com-
pression forces. Perimeter members at openings shall be provided and shall be de-
tailed to distribute the shearing stresses. Diaphragm sheathing shall not be used to
splice these members.
Diaphragm chords and ties shall be placed in, or tangent to, the plane of the dia-
phragm framing unless it can be demonstrated that the moments, shears and deflec-
tions and deformations resulting from other arrangements can be tolerated.
C. Plywood. Plywood shall be manufactured using exterior glue.
Plywood diaphragms and shear walls shall be constructed with plywood sheets
not less than 4 feet by 8 feet, except at boundaries and changes in framing where
272
minimum sheet dimension shall be 24 inches unless all edges of the undersized
sheets are supported by framing members or blocking.
Framing members or blocking shall be provided at the edges of all sheets in shear
walls.
P\ywood sheathing may be used for splicing members, other than th\'>'i>~ '0\'>'..~1. ;,.,..
Section 2513 (e) I B, where the additional nailing required to develop the transfer
afforces will not cause cross-grain bending or cross-grain tension in the nailed
member.
D. Heavy wood panels. Diagonally sheathed panels utilizing 2-inch nominal
boards may be used to resist the same permissible shears as l-inch nominal lumber,
except that 16d nails shall be used instead of 8d.
Panels utilizing straight decking overlaid with plywood may be used to resist
shear forces using the same shear values as permitted for the plywood alone. Ply-
wood joints parallel to the decking shall be located at least 1 inch offset from any
parallel decking joint.
Heavy decking panels utilizing dowel pins, or vertically laminated panels con-
nected by nailing units to one another, resist shear forces based on the permissible
shear values of their connectors.
E. Particleboard. Particleboard shall be Grade 2-M-W using exterior glue. ::::
th:oa~t~~~~:a~df~!~~~~:~~:t~o:~~ea::~~~~~h~~~::~ infra~~~~ ~~:r~e~i~~~~~ i

:~~~~~:e;;i~r~~~~~ ::e~~~~~~~sb~~~~~~;~l edges of the undersized sheets are jl
Framing members or blocking shall be provided at the edges of all sheets in shear
walls.
Fiberboard Sheathing Diaphragms

Sec. 2514. Wood stud walls sheathed with fiberboard sheathing may be used to
resist horizontal forces not exceeding those set forth in Table No.25-P. The fiber-
board sheathing, 4 feet by 8 feet, shall be applied vertically to wood studs not less
than 2-inch nominal in thickness spaced 16 inches on center. Nailing shown in
Table No.25-P shall be provided at the perimeter of the sheathing board and at in-
termediate studs. Blocking not less than 2-inch nominal in thickness shall be pro-
vided at horizontal joints when wall height exceeds length of sheathing panel, and
sheathing shall be fastened to the blocking with nails sized as shown in Table No.
25-P spaced 3 inches on centers each side of joint. Nails shall be spaced not less
than 3/s inch from edges and ends of sheathing. Marginal studs of shear walls or
shear-resisting elements shall be adequately anchored at top and bottom and de-
signed to resist all forces. The maximum height-width ratio shall be 11h: 1.
Wood Combined with Masonry or Concrete

Sec. 2515. (a) Dead Load. Wood members shall not be used to permanently sup-
port the dead load of any masonry or concrete.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Masonry or concrete nonstructural floororroofsurfacingnot
more than 4 inches thick may be supported by wood members.
273
2. Any structure may rest upon wood piles constructed in accordance with there-
quirements of Chapter 29.
3. Masonry or concrete fireplace with a factory-built chimney conforming to
Chapter 37 may be supported by wood framing.
4. Veneer of brick, concrete or stone applied as specified in Section 3006 (b) may
be supported by approved treated wood foundations when the maximum height of
veneer does not exceed 25 feet above the foundation. Such veneer used as an interior
wall finish may also be supported on wood floors which are designed to support the
additional load, and be designed to limit the deflection and shrinkage to 1/soo of the
span of the supporting members.
(b) Horizontal Force. Wood members shall not be used to resist horizontal
forces contributed by masonry or concrete construction in buildings over one story
in height.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Wood floor and roof members may be used in horizontal
trusses and diaphragms to resist horizontal forces imposed by wind, earthquake or
earth pressure, provided such forces are not resisted by rotation of the truss or dia-
phragm.
2.Vertical plywood-sheathed shear walls may be used to provide resistance to
wind or earthquake forces in two-story buildings of masonry or concrete construc-
tion, provided the following requirements are met:
A. Story-to-story wall heights shall not exceed 12 feet.
B. Horizontal diaphragms shall not be considered to transmit lateral forces by
rotation or cantilever action.
C. Deflections of horizontal and vertical diaphragms shall not permit per-story
deflections of supported masonry or concrete walls to exceed 0.005 times each
story height.
D. Plywood sheathing in horizontal diaphragms shall have all unsupported edges
blocked. Plywood sheathing for both stories of vertical diaphragms shall have
all unsupported edges blocked and for the lower story walls shall have a mini-
mum thickness of 15/) 2 inch.
E. There shall be no out -of-plane horizontal offsets between the first and second
stories of plywood shear walls.
General Construction Requirements

Sec. 2516. (a) General. The requirements in this section apply to all wood-
frame construction.
(b) Preparation of Building Site. All stumps and roots shall be removed from
the soil to a depth of at least 12 inches below the surface of the ground in the area to
be occupied by the building.
All wood forms which have been used in placing concrete, if within the ground
or between foundation sills and the ground, shall be removed before a building is
occupied or used for any purpose. Before completion, loose or casual wood shall be
removed from direct contact with the ground under the building.
(c) Protection against Decay and Termites. 1. Wood support embedded in
ground. Wood embedded in the ground or in direct contact with the earth and used
for the support of permanent structures shall be treated wood unless continuously
below the groundwater line or continuously submerged in fresh water. Round or
274
rectangular posts, poles and sawn timber columns supporting permanent struc-
tures which are embedded in concrete or masonry in direct contact with earth or
embedded in concrete or masonry exposed to the weather shall be treated wood.
The wood shall be treated for ground contact.
2. Under-floor clearance. When wood joists or the bottom of wood structural
floors without joists are located closer than 18 inches or wood girders are located
closer than 12 inches to exposed ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas lo-
cated within the periphery of the building foundation, the floor assembly, including
posts, girders, joists and subfloor, shall be approved wood of natural resistance to
decay as listed in Section 2516 (c) 3 or treated wood.
When the above under-floorclearances are required, the underfloor area shall be =m
accessible. Accessible under-floor areas shall be provided with a minimum

18-inch by 24-inch opening unobstructed by pipes, ducts and similar construction. :
'~i.· ,•
.·'['...':,
r.'..
All under-floor access openings shall be effectively screened or covered. Pipes, ~~

~~~~r~~ ~t~;acs~nstruction shall not interfere with the accessibility to or within i~
0
3. Plates, sills and sleepers. All foundation plates or sills and sleepers on a con-
crete or masonry slab, which is in direct contact with earth, and sills which rest on
concrete or masonry foundations, shall be treated wood or Foundation redwood, all
marked or branded by an approved agency. Foundation cedar or No.2 Foundation
redwood marked or branded by an approved agency may be used for sills in territo-
ries subject to moderate hazard, where termite damage is not frequent and when
specifically approved by the building official. In territories where hazard of termite
damage is slight, any species of wood permitted by this code may be used for sills
when specifically approved by the building official.
4. Columns and posts. Columns and posts located on concrete or masonry
floors or decks exposed to the weather or to water splash or in basements and which
support permanent structures shall be supported by concrete piers or metal pedes-
tals projecting above floors unless approved wood of natural resistance to decay or
treated wood is used. The pedestals shall project at least 6 inches above exposed
earth and at least I inch above such floors.
Individual concrete or masonry piers shall project at least 8 inches above ex-
posed ground unless the columns or posts which they support are of approved
wood of natural resistance to decay or treated wood is used.
5. Girders entering masonry or concrete walls. Ends of wood girders entering
masonry or concrete walls shall be provided with a 1/z-inch air space on tops, sides
and ends unless approved wood of natural resistance to decay or treated wood is
used.
6. Foundation ventilation. Under-floor areas shall be ventilated by an ap-
proved mechanical means or by openings in exterior foundation walls. Such open-
ings shall have a net area of not less than I square foot for each 150 square feet of
under-floor area. Openings shall be located as close to comers as practical and shall
provide cross ventilation. The required area of such openings shall be approxi-
mately equally distributed along the length of at least two opposite sides. They
shall be covered with corrosion-resistant wire mesh with mesh openings of 1/ 4 inch
275
in dimension. Where moisture due to climate and groundwater conditions is not

considered excessive, the building official may allow operable louvers and may
allow the required net area of vent openings to be reduced to 10 percent of the
above, provided the under-floor ground surface area is covered with an approved
vapor retarder.
7. Wood and earth separation. Protection of wood against deterioration as set
forth in the previous paragraphs for specified applications is required. In addition,
wood used in construction of permanent structures and located nearer than 6 inches
to earth shall be treated wood or wood of natural resistance to decay, as defined in
Section 2502 (a). Where located on concrete slabs placed on earth, wood shall be
treated wood or wood of natural resistance to decay. Where not subject to water
splash or to exterior moisture and located on concrete having a minimum thickness
of 3 inches with an impervious membrane installed between concrete and earth,
the wood may be untreated and of any species.
Where planter boxes are installed adjacent to wood frame walls, a 2-inch-wide
air space shall be provided between the planter and the wall. Flashings shall be in-
stalled when the air space is less than 6 inches in width. Where flashing is used,
provisions shall be made to permit circulation of air in the air space. The wood-
frame wall shall be provided with an exterior wall covering conforming to the pro-
visions of Section (g).
8. Wood supporting roofs and floors. Wood structural members supporting
moisture-permeable floors or roofs which are exposed to the weather, such as con-
crete or masonry slabs, shall be approved wood of natural resistance to decay or
treated wood unless separated from such floors or roofs by an impervious moisture
barrier.
9. Moisture content of treated wood. When wood pressure treated with a wa-
ter-borne preservative is used in enclosed locations where drying in service cannot
readily occur, such wood shall be at a moisture content of 19 percent or less before
being covered with insulation, interior wall finish, floor covering or other material.
I 0. Retaining walls. Wood used in retaining or crib walls shall be treated wood.
II. Weather exposure. In geographical areas where experience has demon-
strated a specific need, approved wood of natural resistance to decay or treated
wood shall be used for those portions of wood members which form the structural
supports of buildings, balconies, porches or similar permanent building appurte-
nances when such members are exposed to the weather without adequate protec-
tion from a roof, eave, overhang or other covering to prevent moisture or water
accumulation on the surface or at joints between members. Depending on local ex-
perience, such members may include horizontal members such as girders, joists
and decking; or vertical members such as posts, poles and columns; or both hori-
zontal and vertical members.
(d) Wall Framing. The framing of exterior and interior walls shall be in accor-
dance with provisions specified in Section 2517 unless a specific design is fur-
nished.
Wood stud walls and bearing partitions shall not support more than two floors
and a roof unless an analysis satisfactory to the building official shows that shrink-
276
age of the wood framing will not have adverse effects on the structure or any
plumbing, electrical or mechanical systems, or other equipment installed therein
due to excessive shrinkage or differential movements caused by shrinkage. The
analysis shall also show that the roof drainage system and the foregoing systems or
equipment will not be adversely affected or, as an alternate, such systems shall be
designed to accommodate the differential shrinkage or movements.
fe) FJoor Framing. Wood-joisted floors shall be framed and comtru'C.\Th ?afu
anchored to supporting wood stud or masonry walls as specified in Chapter 23.
(f) Fire Blocks and Draft Stops. 1. General. In combustible construction, fire-
blocking and draftstopping shall be installed to cut off all concealed draft openings
(both vertical and horizontal) and shall form an effective barrier between floors,
between a top story and a roof or attic space, and shall subdivide attic spaces, con-
cealed roof spaces and floor-ceiling assemblies. The integrity of all fire blocks and
draft stops shall be maintained.
2. Fire blocks, where required. Fireblocking shall be provided in the following
locations:
A. In concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions, including furred spaces, at
~~:~~i~~~fo~n~~~~ri~::I:.and at 10-foot intervals both vertical and horizontal. See .·' .·•':,.•·.' · '
EXCEPTION: Fire blocks may be omitted at floor and ceiling levels when ap-
proved smoke-actuated fire dampers are installed at these levels.
·u~ ~·:~:~::::::~::~~r~~:;:~:~~2~:p::: : : ;::: .·'

and between studs along and in line with the run of stairs if the walls under the stairs
are unfinished.
'1·...···'..,i·...· · · ·'...···'·.'i
D. In openings around vents, pipes, ducts, chimneys, fireplaces and similar .,.,.
~~~~~~s:a~!~~~:.ford a passage for fire at ceiling and floor levels, with noncom- •.•
·.,1.!,••...
E. At openings between attic spaces and chimney chases for factory-built chim- .
::E·~!~:~~~~~ ~:;~!:~~~~~~~~:~~:~r~~~~~~~k~e~t:e7~ 1~~~~~~~:~~~~~~~~ ·..:~':

ber with broken lap joints or one thickness of 23h2-inch plywood with joints backed
by 23132 -inch plywood or one thickness of 3/ 4 -inch Type 2-M particleboard with
·'1..'•...
··'·::..:••:
joints backed by 3/ 4 -inch Type 2-M particleboard. ?

Fire blocks may also be of gypsum board, cement asbestos board, mineral fiber, f
glass fiber or other approved materials securely fastened in place. Loose-fill insu- · '· · ·
lation material shall not be used as a fire block unless specifically fire tested.
Walls having parallel or staggered studs for sound-transmission control shall
have fire blocks of mineral fiber or glass fiber or other approved nonrigid materi-
als.
4. Draft stops, where required. Draftstopping shall be provided in the follow-
ing locations:
277
A. Floor-ceiling assemblies. (i) Single-family dwellings. When there is usable

space above and below the concealed space of a floor-ceiling assembly in a
single-family dwelling, draft stops shall be installed so that the area of the con-
cealed space does not exceed I ,000 square feet. Draftstopping shall divide the con-
cealed space into approximately equal areas.
(ii) Two or more dwelling units and hotels. Draft stops shall be installed in
floor-ceiling assemblies of buildings having more than one dwelling unit and in
hotels. Such draft stops shall be in line with walls separating individual dwelling
units and guest rooms from each other and from other areas.
(iii) Other uses. Draft stops shall be installed in floor-ceiling assemblies of
buildings or portions of buildings used for other than dwelling or hotel occupan-
cies so that the area of the concealed space does not exceed I ,000 square feet and so
that the horizontal dimension between stops does not exceed 60 feet.
EXCEPTION: Where approved automatic sprinklers are installed within the
concealed space, the area between draft stops may be 3,000 square feet and the hori-
zontal dimension may be 100 feet.
B. Attics. (i) Single-family dwellings. None required.
j (ii) Two or more dwelling units and hotels. Draft stops shall be installed in the
!!!: attics, mansards, overhangs, false fronts set out from walls and similar concealed
·.·.i.•. ..•.:. •.•. . ~~=~te:t~:s~~~!~i~;:~~~~a~~~ni~ ~~;~ti~~~h~n;~~~~~:;a~i~i~ ~~!~~d:~~~:e~l~~~

units and guest rooms from each other and from other uses.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Draft stops may be omitted along one of the corridor walls,
provided draft stops at walls separating individual dwelling units and guest rooms
from each other and from other uses, extend to the remaining corridor draft stop.
2. Where approved sprinklers are installed, draftstopping may be as specified in
the exception to Item (iii) below.
(iii) Other uses. Draft stops shall be installed in attics, mansards, overhangs,
false fronts set out from walls and similar concealed spaces of buildings having
uses other than dwellings or hotels so that the area between draft stops does not ex-
ceed 3,000 square feet and the greatest horizontal dimension does not exceed 60
feet.
EXCEPTION: Where approved automatic sprinklers are installed, the area be-
tween draft stops may be 9,000 square feet and the greatest horizontal dimension may
be 100 feet.
5. Draft stop construction. Draftstopping materials shall not be less than
1
h-inch gypsum board, %-inch plywood, 3/ 8-inch Type 2-M particleboard or other
approved materials adequately supported.
Openings in the partitions shall be protected by self-closing doors with automat-
ic latches constructed as required for the partitions.
Ventilation of concealed roof spaces shall be maintained in accordance with
Section 3205.
6. Draft or fire blocks in other locations. Fireblocking of veneer on noncom-
bustible walls shall be in accordance with Item 2 A above.
278
For fireblocking of wood floors on masonry or concrete floors, see Sections

1804 and 1904.
For fireblocking ceilings applied against noncombustible construction, see Sec-
tion 4203, Item I.
For penetrations of fire-resistive construction, see Chapter 43.
(g) Exterior Wall Coverings. I. General. Exterior wood stud walls shall be
covered on the outside with the materials and in the manner specified in this section
or elsewhere in this code. Studs or sheathing shall be covered on the outside face
with a weather-resistive barrier when required by Section 1708 (a). Exterior wall
coverings of the minimum thickness specified in this section are based on a maxi-
mum stud spacing of 16 inches unless otherwise specified.
2. Siding. Solid wood siding shall have an average thickness of% inch unless
placed over sheathing permitted by this code.
Siding patterns known as rustic, drop siding or shiplap shall have an average
thickness in place of not less than 19/ 32 inch and shall have a minimum thickness of
not less than 3/ 8 inch. Bevel siding shall have a minimum thickness measured at the
butt section of not less than 7/ 16 inch and a tip thickness of not less than 3/ 16 inch.
Siding of lesser dimensions may be used, provided such wall covering is placed
over sheathing which conforms to the provisions specified elsewhere in this code.
All weatherboarding or siding shall be securely nailed to each stud with not less
than one nail, or to solid l-inch nominal wood sheathing or 1513 2-inch plywood
sheathing or 1/z-inch particleboard sheathing with not less than one line of nails
spaced not more than 24 inches on center in each piece of the weatherboarding or
siding.
Wood board sidings applied horizontally, diagonally or vertically shall be fas-
tened to studs, nailing strips or blocking set at a maximum 24 inches on center. Fas-
teners shall be nails or screws with a penetration of not less than 11/z inches into
studs, studs and wood sheathing combined, or blocking. Distance between such
fastenings shall not exceed 24 inches for horizontally or vertically applied sidings
and 32 inches for diagonally applied sidings.
3. Plywood. When plywood is used for covering the exterior of outside walls, it
shall be of the exterior type not less than% inch thick. Plywood panel siding shall
be installed in accordance with Table No. 25-M-1. Unless applied over l-inch
wood sheathing or 15hrinch plywood sheathing or 1/z-inch particleboard sheath-
ing, joints shall occur over framing members and shall be protected with a continu-
ous wood batten, approved caulking, flashing, vertical or horizontal shiplaps; or
joints shall be lapped horizontally or otherwise made waterproof.
4. Shingles or shakes. Wood shingles or shakes and asbestos cement shingles
may be used for exterior wall covering, provided the frame of the structure is cov-
ered with building paper as specified in Section 1708 (a). All shingles or shakes
attached to sheathing other than wood sheathing shall be secured with approved
corrosion-resistant fasteners or on furring strips attached to the studs. Wood
shingles or shakes may be applied over fiberboard shingle backer and sheathing
with annular grooved nails. The thickness of wood shingles or shakes between
wood nailing boards shall not be less than % inch. Wood shingles or shakes and
279
asbestos shingles or siding may be nailed directly to approved fiberboard nail base
sheathing not less than 1iz-inch nominal thickness with annular grooved nails.
The weather exposure of wood shingle or shake siding used on exterior walls
shall not exceed maximums set forth in Table No. 25-L.
5. Particleboard. When particleboard is used for covering the exterior of out-
side walls it shall be of the Exterior Type 2-M grades conforming to U.B.C. Stan-
.da.rs:l No. 25-25. Particleboard panel siding shall be installed in accordance with
Table No. 25-M-2 and Table No. 25-Q. Panels shall be gapped 1/ 8 inch and nails
shall be spaced not less than "Is inch from edges and ends of sheathing. Unless
applied over 5 / 8 -inch net wood sheathing or 1iz-inch plywood sheathing or 1iz-inch
particleboard sheathing, joints shall occur over framing members and shall be cov-
ered with a continuous wood batt; or joints shall be lapped horizontally or other-
wise made waterproof to the satisfaction of the building official. Particleboard
shall be sealed and protected with exterior quality finishes.
6. Hardboard. When hardboard siding is used for covering the outside of exteri-
or walls, it shall conform to Table No. 25-0. Lap siding shall be installed horizon-
tally and applied to sheathed or unsheathed walls. Comer bracing shall be installed
in conformance with Section 2517 (g) 3. A weather-resistive barrier shall be in-
stalled under the lap siding as required by Section 1708 (a).
Square-edged nongrooved panels and shiplap grooved or nongrooved siding
shall be applied vertically to sheathed or unsheathed walls. Siding that is grooved
shall not be less than 1/ 4 inch thick in the groove.
Nail size and spacing shall follow Table No. 25-0 and shall penetrate framing
11h inches. Lap siding shall overlap I inch minimum and be nailed through both
courses and into framing members with nails located 1iz inch from bottom of the
overlapped course. Square-edged nongrooved panels shall be nailed 3/ 8 inch from
the perimeter of the panel and intermediately into studs. Shiplap edge panel siding
with ·1/ 8-inch shiplap shall be nailed% inch from the edges on both sides of the shi-
plap. The 3/ 4 -inch shiplap shall be nailed % inch from the edge and penetrate
through both the overlap and under lap. Top and bottom edges of the panel shall be
nailed 3/ 8 inch from the edge. Shiplap and lap siding shall not be force fit.
Square-edged panels shall maintain a 1/winch gap at joints. All joints and edges of
siding shall be over framing members, and shall be made resistantto weather pene-
tration with battens, horizontal overlaps or ship laps to the satisfaction of the build-
ing official. A 1/ 8-inch gap shall be provided around all openings.
7. Nailing. All fasteners used for the attachment of siding shall be of a corro-
sion-resistant type.
(h) Structural Floor Sheathing. Structural floor sheathing shall be designed in
accordance with the general provisions of this code and the special provisions in
this subsection.
Sheathing used as subflooring shall be designed to support all loads specified in
this code and shall be capable of supporting concentrated loads of not less than 300
pounds without failure. The concentrated load shall be applied by a loaded disc, 3
inches or smaller in diameter.
280
Flooring, including the finish floor, underlayment and subfloor, where used,
shall meet the following requirements:
Deflection under uniform design load limited to 11360 of the span between
supporting joists or beams.
Deflection of flooring relative to joists under a l-inch-diameter concen-
trated load of200 pounds limited to 0.125 inch or less when loaded midway
between supporting joists or beams not over 24 inches on center and 1h6o of
the span for spans over 24 inches.
Floor sheathing conforming to the provisions of Table No. 25-R-1, 25-R-2,
25-S-1, 25-T-1 or 25-T-2 shall be deemed to meet the requirements of this subsec-
tion.
(i) Structural Roof Sheathing. Structural roof sheathing shall be designed in
accordance with the general provisions of this code and the special provisions in
this subsection. Structural roof sheathing shall be designed to support all loads spe-
cified in this code and shall be capable of supporting concentrated loads of not less
than 300 pounds without failure. The concentrated load shall be applied by a loaded
disc, 3 inches or smaller in diameter. Structural roof sheathing shall meet the fol-
lowing requirement:
Deflection under uniform design live and dead load limited to 1I 1so of the
span between supporting rafters or beams and 1h40 under live load only.
Roof sheathing conforming to the provisions of Tables Nos. 25-R-1 and 25-R-2
or 25-S-1 and 25-S-2 or 25-S-3 shall be deemed to meet the requirements of this
subsection.
Plywood roof sheathing shall be bonded by intermediate or exterior glue. Ply-
wood roof sheathing exposed on the underside shall be bonded with exterior glue.
U) Fastenings. I. Nailing requirements. The number and size of nails connect-
ing wood members shall not be less than that set forth in Table No. 25-Q. Other
·· nnections shall be fastened so as to provide equivalent strength. End and edge
distances and nail penetrations shall be in accordance with the applicable provi-
sions of Section 2:- I 0. Fasteners required to be corrosion resistant shall be either
zinc-coated faste ; conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17, Section 25.1721
(a), aluminum alk) .virc fasteners conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17, Sec-
tion 25.1720 (d), or stainless steel fasteners conforming to U.B.C. Standard No.
25-17, Section 25.1720 (t).
2. Joist hangers and framing anchors. Connections depending on joist hang-
ers or framing anchors, ties and other mechanical fastenings not otherwise covered
may be used where approved.
(k) Water Splash. Where wood-frame walls and partitions are covered on the
interior with plaster, tile or similar materials and are subject to water splash, the
framing shall be protected with approved waterproof paper conforming to Section
1708 (a).
(I) Mechanically Laminated Floors and Decks. A laminated lumber floor or
deck built up of wood members set on edge, when meeting the following require-
ments, may be designed as a solid floor or roof deck of the same thickness, and con-
281
tinuous spans may be designed on the basis of the full cross section using the simple
span moment coefficient.
Nail length shall not be less than two and one-halftimes the net thickness of each
lamination. When deck supports are 4 feet on center or less, side nails shall be
spaced not more than 30 inches on center and staggered one third of the spacing in
adjacent laminations. When supports are spaced more than 4 feet on center, side
nails shall be spaced not more than 18 inches on center alternately near top and bot-
tom edges, and also staggered one third of the spacing in adjacent laminations. Two
side nails shall be used at each end of butt-jointed pieces.
Laminations shall be toenailed to supports with 20d or larger common nails.
When the supports are 4 feet on center or less, alternate laminations shall be toe-
nailed to alternate supports; when supports are spaced more than 4 feet on center,
alternate laminations shall be toenailed to every support.
A single-span deck shall have all laminations full length.
A continuous deck of two spans shall not have more than every fourth lamination
spliced within quarter points adjoining supports.
Joints shall be closely butted over supports or staggered across the deck but
within the adjoining quarter spans.
No lamination shall be spliced more than twice in any span.
(m) Post-beam Connections. Where post and beam or girder construction is
used, the design shall be in accordance with the provisions of this code. Positive
connection shall be provided to ensure against uplift and lateral displacement.
Conventional Construction Provisions

~~~ Sec. 2517. (a) General. The requirements contained in this section are intended
for conventional, light-frame construction. Other methods may be used, provided
!!i :~~~~factory design is submitted showing compliance with other provisions of this
r,:_.~ ·.! ' Appendix Chapter 25 provisions for conventional construction in high-wind
areas shall apply when specifically adopted.
:~,: In Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4, all buildings of unusual shape, size or split
levels shall be designed to resist lateral forces in accordance with other provisions
of this code.
(b) Foundation Plates or Sills. Foundations and footings shall be as specified in
Chapter 29. Foundation plates or sills resting on concrete or masonry foundations
shall be bolted as required by Section 2907 (f).
(c) Girders. Girders shall be designed to support the loads specified in this code.
Girder end joints shall occur over supports. When a girder is spliced over a support,
an adequate tie shall be provided. The end of beams or girders supported on mason-
ry or concrete shall not have less than 3 inches of bearing.
(d) Floor Joists. 1. General. Spans for joists shall be in accordance with Table
No. 25-U-J-1.
282
2. Bearing. Except where supported on a l-inch by 4-inch ribbon strip and

nailed to the adjoining stud, the ends of each joist shall not have less than 11h inches
of bearing on wood or metal, or less than 3 inches on masonry.
3. Framing details. Joists shall be supported laterally at the ends and at each
support by solid blocking except where the ends of joists are nailed to a header,
bandorrimjoist or to an adjoining stud or by other approved means. Solid blocking
shall not be less than 2 inches in thickness and the full depth of joist.
Notches on the ends of joists shall not exceed one fourth the joist depth. Holes
bored in joists shall not be within 2 inches of the top or bottom of the joist, and the
diameter of any such hole shall not exceed one third the depth of the joist. Notches
in the top or bottom of joists shall not exceed one sixth the depth and shall not be
located in the middle third of the span.
Joist framing from opposite sides of a beam, girder or partition shall be lapped at
least 3 inches or the opposing joists shall be tied together in an approved manner.
Joists framing into the side of a wood girder shall be supported by framing an-
chors or on ledger strips not less than 2 inches by 2 inches.
4. Framing around openings. Trimmer and header joists shall be doubled, or of
lumber of equivalent cross section, when the span of the header exceeds 4 feet. The
ends of header joists more than 6 feet long shall be supported by framing anchors or
joist hangers unless bearing on a beam, partition or wall. Tail joists over 12 feet
long shall be supported at header by framing anchors or on ledger strips not less
than 2 inches by 2 inches.
5. Supporting bearing partitions. Bearing partitions perpendicular to joists
shall not be offset from supporting girders, walls or partitions more than the joist
depth.
Joists under and parallel to bearing partitions shall be doubled.
6. Blocking. Floor joists shall be blocked when required by the provisions of
Sections 2506 (h) and 2517 (d) 3.
(e) Subflooring. I. Lumber subfloor. Sheathing used as a structural subfloor
shall conform to the limitations set forth in Tables Nos. 25-R-1 and 25-R-2.
Joints in subflooring shall occur over supports unless end-matched lumber is
used, in which case each piece shall bear on at least two joists.
Subflooring may be omitted when joist spacing does not exceed 16 inches and
l-inch nominal tongue-and-grooved wood strip flooring is applied perpendicular
to the joists.
2. Plywood. Where used as structural subflooring, plywood shall be as set forth
in Tables Nos. 25-S-1 and 25-S-2. Plywood combination subfloor underlayment
shall have maximum spans as set forth in Table No. 25-T-1.
When plywood floors are glued to joists with an adhesive in accordance with the
adhesive manufacturer's directions, fasteners may be spaced a maximum of 12 in-
ches on center at all supports.
3. Plank flooring. Plank flooring shall be designed in accordance with the gen-
eral provisions of this code.
283
In lieu of such design, 2-inch tongue-and-groove planking may be used in accor-

dance with Table No. 25-U. Joints in such planking may be randomly spaced, pro-
vided the system is applied to not less than three continuous spans, planks are
center-matched and end-matched or splined, each plank bears on at least one sup-
port and joints are separated by at least 24 inches in adjacent pieces. One-inch nom-
inal strip square-edged flooring, 1h-inch tongue-and-groove flooring, %-inch
plywood or %-inch Type 2-M particleboard shall be applied over random-length
decking used as a floor. The "strip" and tongue-and-groove flooring shall be
applied at right angles to the span of the planks. The 3/ 8-inch plywood shall be
applied with the face grain at right angles to the span of the planks.
4. Particleboard. Where used as structural subflooring or as combined subfloor
underlayment, particleboard shall be as set forth in Table No. 25-T-2.
(t) Particleboard Underlayment. Particleboard floor underlayment shall con-
form to Type 1-M or to sanded Type2-M-W gradesofU.B.C. Standard No. 25-25.
Underlayment shall not be less than 1/ 4 inch in thickness and shall be identified by
the grademark of an approved inspection agency. Underlayment shall be installed
in accordance with this code and as recommended by the manufacturer.
(g) Wall Framing. I. Size, height and spacing. The size, height and spacing of
studs shall be in accordance with Table No. 25-R-3 except that utility grade studs
shall not be spaced more than 16 inches on center, or support more than a roof and
ceiling, or exceed 8 feet in height for exterior walls and load-bearing walls or 10
feet for interior nonload-bearing walls.
2. Framing details. Studs shall be placed with their wide dimension perpendic-
ular to the wall. Not less than three studs shall be installed at each comer of an exte-
rior wall.
EXCEPTION: At comers, a third stud may be omitted through the use of wood
spacers or backup cleats of3fs-inch-thick plywood, 3/s-inch Type 2-M particleboard,
l-inch-thick lumber or other approved devices which will serve as an adequate back-
ing for the attachment of facing materials. Where fire-resistance ratings or shear val-
ues are involved, wood spacers, backup cleats or other devices shall not be used
unless specifically approved for such use.
Bearing and exterior wall studs shall be capped with double top plates installed
to provide overlapping at comers and at intersections with other partitions. End
joints in double top plates shall be offset at least 48 inches.
EXCEPTION: A single top plate may be used, provided the plate is adequately
tied at joints, comers and intersecting walls by at least the equivalent of 3-inch by
6-inch by 0.036-inch-thick galvanized steel that is nailed to each wall or segment of
wall by six 8d nails or equivalent, provided the rafters, joists or trusses are centered
over the studs with a tolerance of no more than I inch.
When bearing studs are spaced at 24-inch intervals and top plates are less than
two 2 by 6 or two 3 by 4 members and when the floor joists, floor trusses or roof
trusses which they support are spaced at more than 16-inch intervals, such joists or
trusses shall bear within 5 inches of the studs beneath or a third plate shall be in-
stalled.
Interior nonbearing partitions may be capped with a single top plate installed to
provide overlapping at comers and at intersections with other walls and partitions.
284
The plate shall be continuously tied at joints by solid blocking at least 16 inches in
length and equal in size to the plate or by 1/ 8-inch by 11/z-inch metal ties with spliced
sections fastened with two 16d nails on each side of the joint.
Studs shall have full bearing on a plate or sill not less than 2 inches in thickness
having a width not less than that of the wall studs.
3. Bracing. All exterior walls and main cross-stud partitions shall be effectively
and thoroughly braced to resist wind and seismic forces by one of the following
methods:
A. Nominal l-inch by 4-inch continuous diagonal braces let into top and bottom
plates and intervening studs, placed at an angle not more than 60 degrees or less
than 45 degrees from the horizontal, and attached to the framing in conformance
with Table No. 25-Q.
B. Wood boards of 5/ 8-inch net minimum thickness applied diagonally on studs
spaced not over 24 inches on center.
C. Plywood sheathing with a thickness not less than 5/ 16 inch for 16-inch stud
spacing and not less than % inch for 24-inch stud spacing in accordance with
Tables Nos. 25-M-1 and 25-N-l.
D. Fiberboard sheathing 4-foot by 8-foot panels not less than 1/z inch thick
applied vertically on studs spaced not over 16 inches on center when installed in
accordance with Section 2514 and Table No. 25-P.
E. Gypsum board (sheathing 1/z inch thick by 4 feet wide, wallboard or veneer
base) on studs spaced not over 24 inches on center and nailed at 7 inches on center
with nails as required by Table No. 47-1.
F. Particleboard wall sheathing panels shall be in accordance with Table No.
25-N-2.
G. Portland cement plaster on studs spaced 16 inches on center installed in ac-
cordance with Table No. 47-1.
H. Hardboard panel siding when installed in accordance with Section 2516 (g) 6
and Table No. 25-0.
For methods B, C, D, E, F, G and H the braced panel must be at least 48 inches in
width, covering three stud spaces where studs are spaced 16 inches apart and cov-
ering two stud spaces where studs are spaced 24 inches apart.
All vertical joints of panel sheathing shall occur over studs. Horizontal joints
shall occur over blocking equal in size to the studding except where waived by the
installation requirements for the specific sheathing materials.
The location, type and amount of bracing shall comply with Table No. 25-V.
4. Cripple walls. Foundation cripple walls shall be framed of studs not less in
size than the studding above with a minimum length of 14 inches, or shall be
framed of solid blocking. When exceeding 4 feet in height, such walls shall be
framed of studs having the size required for an additional story.
Such walls having a stud height exceeding 14 inches shall be considered to be
first-story walls for the purpose of determining the bracing required by Section
2517 (g) 3. Solid blocking or plywood sheathing may be used to brace cripple walls
having a stud height of 14 inches or less.
285
5. Headers. Headers and lintels shall conform to the requirements set forth in
this paragraph and together with their supporting systems shall be designed to sup-
port the loads specified in this code. All openings 4 feet wide or less in bearing
wa([s shall be provided with headers consisting of either two pieces of2-inch fram-
\ng \um'oet placed on edge and securely fastened together or 4-inch lumber of
equivalent cross section. All openings more than 4 feet wide shall be provided with
headers or lintels. Each end of a lintel or header shall have a length of bearing of not
less than 11h inches for the full width of the lintel.
6. Pipes in walls. Stud partitions containing plumbing, heating, or other pipes
shall be so framed and the joists underneath so spaced as to give proper clearance
for the piping. Where a partition containing such piping runs parallel to the floor
joists, the joists underneath such partitions shall be doubled and spaced to permit
the passage of such pipes and shall be bridged. Where plumbing, heating or other
pipes are placed in or partly in a partition, necessitating the cutting of the soles or
plates, a metal tie not less than 118 inch thick and 11/z inches wide shall be fastened to
the plate across and to each side of the opening with not less than four 16d nails.
7. Bridging. Unless covered by interior or exterior wall coverings or sheathing
meeting the minimum requirements of this code, all stud partitions or walls with
studs having a height-to-least-thickness ratio exceeding 50 shall have bridging not
less than 2 inches in thickness and of the same width as the studs fitted snugly and
nailed thereto to provide adequate lateral support.
8. Cutting and notching. In exterior walls and bearing partitions, any wood
stud may be cut or notched to a depth not exceeding 25 percent of its width. Cutting
or notching of studs to a depth not greater than 40 percent of the width of the stud is
permitted in nonbearing partitions supporting no loads other than the weight of the
partition.
9. Bored holes. A hole not greater in diameter than 40 percent of the stud width
may be bored in any wood stud. Bored holes not greater than 60 percent of the width
of the stud are permitted in non bearing partitions or in any wall where each bored
stud is doubled, provided not more than two such successive doubled studs are so
bored.
In no case shall the edge oft he bored hole be nearer than 518 inch to the edge of the
stud. Bored holes shall not be located at the same section of stud as a cut or notch.
(h) Roof and Ceiling Framing. I. General. The framing details required in this
subsection apply to roofs having a minimum slope of3: 12 or greater. When the roof
slope is less than 3: 12, members supporting rafters and ceiling joists such as ridge
board, hips and valleys shall be designed as beams.
2. Spans. Allowable spans for ceiling joists shall be in accordance with Table
No. 25-U-J-6. Allowable spans for rafters shall be in accordance with Tables Nos.
25-U-R-1 through No. 25-U-R-14, where applicable.
3. Framing. Rafters shall be framed directly opposite each other at the ridge.
There shall be a ridge board at least l-inch nominal thickness at all ridges and not
less in depth than the cut end of the rafter. At all valleys and hips there shall be a
single valley or hip rafter not less than 2-inch nominal thickness and not less in
depth than the cut end of the rafter.
286
4. Framing around openings. Trimmer and header rafters shall be doubled, or

of lumber of equivalent cross-section, when the span of the header exceeds 4 feet.
The ends of header rafters more than 6 feet long shall be supported by framing an-
chors or rafter hangers unless bearing on a beam, partition or wall.
5. Rafter ties. Rafters shall be nailed to adjacent ceiling joists to form a continu-
ous tie between exterior walls when such joists are parallel to the rafters. Where not
parallel, rafters shall be tied to l-inch by 4-inch (nominal) minimum-size cross ties.
Rafter ties shall be spaced not more than 4 feet on center.
6. Purlins. Purl ins to support roof loads may be installed to reduce the span of
rafters within allowable limits and shall be supported by struts to bearing walls.
The maximum span of2-inch by 4-inch purl ins shall be 4 feet. The maximum span
of the 2-inch by 6-inch purl in shall be 6 feet but in no case shall the purl in be smaller
than the supported rafter. Struts shall not be smaller than 2-inch by 4-inch mem-
bers. The unbraced length of struts shall not exceed 8 feet and the minimum slope
of the struts shall not be less than 45 degrees from the horizontal.
7. Blocking. Roof rafters and ceilingjoists shall be supported laterally to prevent
rotation and lateral displacement when required by Section 2506 (h). Roof trusses
shall be supported laterally at points of bearing by solid blocking to prevent rota-
tion and lateral displacement.
8. Roof sheathing. Roof sheathing shall be in accordance with Tables Nos.
25-S-1 and 25-S-2 for plywood, 25-R-1 and 25-R-2 for lumberor25-S-3 for parti-
cleboard.
Joints in lumber sheathing shall occur over supports unless approved
end-matched lumberis used, in which case each piece shall bear on at least two sup-
ports.
Plywood used for roof sheathing shall be bonded by intermediate or exterior
glue. Plywood roof sheathing exposed on the underside shall be bonded with exte-
rior glue.
9. Roof planking. Planking shall be designed in accordance with the general
provisions of this code.
In lieu of such design, 2-inch tongue-and-groove planking may be used in accor-
dance with Table No. 25-U. Joints in such planking may be randomly spaced, pro-
vided the system is applied to not less than three continuous spans, planks are
center-matched and end-matched or splined, each plank bears on at least one sup-
port, and joints are separated by at least 24 inches in adjacent pieces.
(i) .E~i t Fa~ilfiti~s : In Sehismbic Zon_e~ Nos. 3 anhd 4d, extehrior_exit balconies, stairs .·':'•. .:'. .·
1 1
an d s1m1 arex1t ac1 Itless a 11 eposltive 1yanc ore tot epnmarystructureatnot
over 8 feet on center or shall be designed for lateral forces. Such attachment shall
not be accomplished by use of toenails or nails subject to withdrawal.
287
TABLE NO. 25·A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER
Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber-VISUAL GRADING
(Normal loading. See also Section 2504)
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH

EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
GRADING
Compres· Compres· RULES
Tension slonper· slon MODULUS
SIZE Single· Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI· member member to Grain Shear to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv F.,J.- 21 Fe E21 GRADED
ASPEN (BIGTOOTH-QUAKING) (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
Select Structural 1300 1500 775 60 265 850 1,100,000
No.I 2" to 4" 1100 1300 650 60 265 675 1,100,000
No.2 thick 925 1050 525 60 265 550 1,000,000
No.3 2" to 4" 500 575 300 60 265 325 900,000
Appearance wide 1100 1300 650 60 265 825 1,100,000 WWPA,
Stud 500 575 300 60 265 325 900,000 NHPMA, .....
andNELMA CD
Construction 2" to 4" 650 750 400 60 265 625 900,000 CD
.....
Standard thick 375 425 225 60 265 500 900,000 (See footnotes
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 60 265 325 900,000 2 through 8, c:
13, 15 and 16)
z
1150 1300 750 60 265 750 1,100,000 :;;
Select Structural 0
No.I 2" to4" 950 1100 650 60 265 675 1,100,000 ::u
No.2 thick 775 900 425 60 265 575 1,000,000 3:
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 450 525 250 60 265 375 900,000
825 1,100,000 ID
Appearance wider 950 1100 650 60 265 c:
r=
c
z
G>
0
0
c
m
...
...
CD
CD
c
z
BALSAM FIR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max.
Select Structural 2"to4" 1750
m.c.)
2000 1000 70 305 1350 1,500,000
~lJ
No.1 thick 1450 1700 850 70 305 1050 1,500,000 3:
No.2 2" to 4" 1200 1400 700 70 305 850 1,300,000 ID
No.3 wide 675 775 400 70 305 525 1,200,000 c
Appearance
Stud
1450
675
1700
775
850
400
70
70
305
305
1250
525
1,500,000
1,200,000
r=0
Construction 2" to4" 875 1000 525 70 305 950 1,200.000 zC>
Standard thick 500 575 275 70 305 775 1,200,000 NHPMA,
Utility 4"wide 225 275 125 70 305 525 1,200,000 NELMA 0
Select Structural 2" to4" 1500 1700 1000 70 1200 1,500,000 0
305 (See footnotes 0
No.1 thick 1250 1450 850 70 305 1050 1,500,000 l through 9) m
No.2 5" and 1050 1200 550 70 305 900 1,300,000
No.3 wider 600 700 325 70 305 575 1,200,000
Appearance 1250 1450 850 70 305 1250 1,500,000
Stud 600 700 325 70 305 575 1,200,000
Select Structural Beams and 1350 - 900 65 305 950 1,400,000
No.1 Stringers 1100 - 750 65 305 800 1,400,000
Select Structural Posts and 1250 - 825 65 305 1000 1,400,000
No.1 Timbers 1000 - 675 65 305 875 1,400,000
Select Decking - 1650 - - - - 1,500,000 NELMA
Commercial - 1400 - - - - 1,300,000 (See footnotes
l through 9)
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25·A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
GRADING
Com pres· Com pres·
slonper· slon MODULUS RULES
Tension
SIZE Single- Repetillv• Parallel Horizontal pendlcutar Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv F~21 F. E21 GRADED
BLACK COTTONWOOD (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190Jo max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 875 1000 500 50 180 575 1,200,000
No.2 thick 725 825 425 50 180 450 1,100,000
No.3 2" to 4" 400 450 225 50 180 275 900,000
Appearance wide 875 1000 500 50 180 700 1,200,000
Stud 400 450 225 50 180 275 900,000
50 NLGA
Construction 2" to 4" 525 600 300 180 525 900,000
Standard thick 300 325 175 50 180 425 900,000 (See footnotes
Utility 4" wide 150 ISO 75 50 180 275 900,000 2 through 9,
11,13
....
CD
Select Structural
No.I 2" to4"
875
750
1000
875
600
soo
50
50
180
180
650
575
1,200,000
1,200,000
15 and 16) ....
CD
50 475 1,100,000 c:
No.2 thick 625 700 325
so
180 z
No. 3 and Stud S" and 350 425 175 180 300 900,000 :;;
Appearance wider 750 875 soo so 180 700 1,200,000 0
::0
3:
CALIFORNIA REDWOOD (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190Jo max. m.c.) m
4" & less c:
Clear Heart Structural
Clear Structural
thick, any
width
2300 2650 1500 145 650 2150 1,400,000 RIS r=
c
2100 2650 1500 145 650 2150 1,400,000
2" to 4"
(See footnotes
2 through 7, z
Cl
Select Structural 2050 2350 1200 80 650 1750 1,400,000 9, 13, 15
thick 0
Select Structural, Open 2" to 4" 1600 1850 950 80 425 1300 1,100,000 and 16) 0
gram wide c
m
....
CQ
....
CQ
c:
z
;;
No.I 1700 1950 975 80 650 1400 1,400,000 0
No. I, Open grain 1350 1550 775 80 425 1050 1,100,000 ::D
No.2 2" to 4" 1400 1600 800 80 650 liOO 1,250,000 3:
No. 2, Open grain thick liOO 1250 625 80 425 825 1,000,000 m
No.3 2" to 4" 800 900 475 80 650 675 1,100,000 c:
No. 3, Open grain wide 625 725 375 80 425 500 900,000 ;:::
Stud 625 725 375 80 425 500 900,000 0
Construction 825 950 475 80 425 925 900,000

z
Cl
2" to 4"
Standard thick 450 525 250 80 425 775 900,000 0
Utility 4" wide 225 250 125 80 425 500 900,000 0
0
Select Structural 1750 2000 lJSO 1550 1,400,000 RIS m
80 650
Select Structural, Open 1400 1600 925 80 425 l150 1,100,000 (See footnotes
grain 2 through 7,
No.I 2"to4" 1500 1700 975 80 650 1400 1,400,000 9, 13, 15
No. I, Open grain thick l150 1350 775 80 425 1050 1,100,000 and 16)
No.2 5" and 1200 1400 650 80 650 1200 1,250,000
No. 2, Open grain wider 950 1100 500 80 425 875 1,000,000
No.3 700 800 375 80 650 725 1,100,000
No. 3, Open grain 550 650 350 80 425 525 900,000
Clear Heart Structural 1850 - 1250 135 650 1650 1,300,000

Clear Structural
5" by5"
1850 - 1250 135 650 1650 1,300,000
Select Structural and larger 1400 - 950 95 650 1200 1,300,000
No.I 1200 - 800 95 650 1050 1,300,000
No.2 975 - 650 95 650 900 1,100,000
No.3 550 - 375 95 650 550 1,000,000
(Continued)
N
CQ
.....
TABLE NO. 25-A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb GRADING
Com pres· Compres- RULES
Tension slon per- slon MODULUS UNDER
SIZE Single- Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Usaa Usas F, Fv Fc.l. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
select Decking, Close grar Decking 1850 2150 - - - - 1,400,000 RIS

Select Decking 2" thick 1450 1700 - - - - 1,100,000 (See footnotes
Commercial Decking 6" & wider 1200 1350 - - - - 1,000,000 2, 5 and 6)
COAST SITKA SPRUCE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190Jo max. m.c.)
Select Structural 1500 1700 875 65 455 llOO 1,700,000
No.I 2" to 4" 1250 1450 750 65 455 875 1,700,000
No.2 thick 1050 1200 625 65 455 700 1,500,000
No.3 2" to 4" 575 675 350 65 455 425 1,300,000
Appearance wide 1250 1450 725 65 455 1050 1,700,000
Stud 600 675 350 65 455 425 1,300,000
Construction 2" to 4" 750 875 450 65 455 800 1,300,000

NLGA ...co
Standard
Utility
thick
4" wide
425
200
500
225
250
125
65
65
455
455
650
425
1,300,000
1,300,000
(See footnotes
2 through 9,
...
co
11, 13, c
Select Structural
z
No.I 2" to4"
1300 1500 850 65 455 975 1,700,000 15 and 16) :;;
llOO 1250 725 65 455 875 1,700,000 0
No.2 thick 900 1050 475 65 455 750 1,500,000 :lJ
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 525 575 275 65 455 475 1,300,000 3:
Appearance wider llOO 1250 725 65 455 1050 1,700,000 Ill
-
5
Select Structural Beams and ll50 675 60 455 775 1,500,000 r
No.I Stringers 950 - 475 60 455 650 1,500,000 c
Select Structural Posts and llOO - 725 60 455 825
z
C')
1,500,000
No.I Timbers 875 - 575 60 455 725 1,500,000 0
0
Select Decking 1250 1450 - - 455 - 1,700,000 c
Commercial - m
1050 1200 - 455 - 1,500,000
I I I
COAST SPECIES (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190To max. m.c.) c:
Select Structural 1500 1700 850 65 370 1100 1,500,000 z
No.I 2" to 4" 1250 1450 750 65 370 875 1,500,000
No.2
No.3
thick
2" to 4"
1050
575
1200
675
625
350
65
65
370
370
700
425
1,400,000
1,200,000
~
:0
Appearance wide 1250 1450 725 65 370 1050 1,500,000 3:
Stud 575 675 350 65 370 425 1,200,000 ID
c:
Construction 2" to 4" 750 875 450 65 370 800 1,200,000 ;=
Standard thick 425 500 250 65 370 650 1,200,000 c
Utility 4" wide 200 225 125 65 370 425 1,200,000
NLGA
(See footnotes z
(;)
Select Structural 1300 1500 875 65 370 975 1,500,000 2 through 9, 0
No.I 2" to4" 1100 1250 725 65 370 875 1,500,000 II, 13, 0
No.2 thick 900 1050 ~5 65 370 750 1,400,000 15 and 16) c
5"and 600 275 65 370 475 1,200,000
m
No. 3 and Stud 525
Appearance wider 1100 1250 725 65 370 1050 1,500,000
Select Decking 1250 1450 - - 370 - 1,500,000

Commercial 1050 1200 - - 370 - 1,400,000
COI"'IDNWOOD (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
2" to 3"
thick
2"to 4" NHPMA,
Stud wide 525 600 300 65 320 350 1,000,000
(See footnotes
Construction 2"to 4" 675 775 400 65 320 650 1,000,000 1 through 9)
Standard thick 375 425 225 65 320 525 1,000,000
Utility 4"wide 175 200 100 65 320 350 1,000,000
N (Continued)
co
w
N
U1
Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber-VISUAL GRADING ~
...
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb GRADING
Compres· Compres- RULES
Tension slon per· sion MODULUS UNDER
SIZE Single· Repetltlv• Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Use a F, F. F0 J. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
DOUGLAS FIR- LARCH (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190Jo max. m.c.)
DOUGLAS FIR -LARCH (North)
Dense Select Structural 2450 2SOO 1400 95 730 1850 1,900,000
Dense No. I 2050 2400 1200 95 730 1450 1,900,000
No.I 2" to 4" 1750 20SO 1050 95 625 1250 1,800,000
Dense No.2 thick 1700 1950 1000 95 730 IISO 1,700,000
No.2 2" to 4" 1450 1650 850 95 625 1000 1,700,000
No.3
Appearance
wide 800
1750
925
20SO
475
1050
95
95
625 600
1500
1,500,000
I,SOO,OOO
NLGA, ...
co
Stud 800 925 475 95
625
625 600 1,500,000
WCLIB,
and ...
co
Construction 1050 1200 625 95 625 II SO 1,500,000 WWPA c

2" to 4" ~
Standard thick 600 675 350 95 625 925 1,500,000 (See footnotes
'T1
Utility 4" wide 275 325 175 95 625 600 1,500,000 2 through 9, 0
11, 13, 15 :lJ
Dense Select Structural 2100 2400 1400 95 730 1650 1,900,000 and 16) s::
Select Structural ISOO 2050 1200 95 625 1400 I,SOO,OOO lXI
Dense No. I 2" to 4" ISOO 2050 1200 95 730 1450 1,900,000 c
No.I thick 1500 1750 1000 95 625 1250 1,800,000 r=c
Dense No.2 1,700,000
No.2
No. 3 and Stud
5" and
wider
1450
1250
1700
1450
775
650
95
95
730
625
12SO
1050 1,700,000
1,500,000
z
C)
725 850 375 95 625 675
Appearance 1500 1750 1000 95 625 1500 1,800,000 0
0
c
m
....CD
....CD
c
Dense Select Structural 1900 -- 1100 85 730 1300 1,700,000 z
Select Structural Beams and 1600 950 85 625
730
1100 1,600,000 :;;
Dense No.I Stringers 12 1550 - 775 85 1100 1,700,000 0
No.I 1300 - 675 85 625 925 1,600,000
WCLIB ::1:1
s:::
Dense Select Structural 1750 - 1150 85 730 1350 1,700,000 (See footnotes
Ill
Select Structural Posts and ISOO - 1000 85 625 1150 1,600,000 2 through 9)
5
Dense No.I Timbersl2 1400 - 950 85 730 1200 1,700,000 r
No.I 1200 - 825 85 625 1000 1,600,000 c
Select Dex Decking 1750 2000 - - 625 - 1,800,000
z
G)
Commercial Dex 1450 1650 - - 625 - 1,700,000
0
0
Dense Select Structural 1850 - 1100 85 730 1300 1,700,000 c
Select Structural 1600 - 950 85 625 1100 1,600,000 m
Dense No.1 Beams and 1550 - 775 85 730 1100 1,700,000
No.I Stringers 12 1350 - 675 85 625 925 1,600,000
Dense No.2 1000 - 500 85 730 700 1,400,000
No.2 875 - 425 85 625 600 1,300,000
WWPA
1750 - 1150 85 730 1350 1,700,000 (See footnotes
Dense Select Structural
Select Structural 1500 - 1000 85 625 1150 1,600,000 2 through 10)
DenseNo. 1 Posts and 1400 - 950 85 730 1200 1,700,000
No.I Timbers 12 1200 - 825 85 625 1000 1,600,000
Dense No.2 800 - 550 85 730 550 1,400,000
No.2 700 - 475 85 625 475 1,300,000
Selected Decking Decking - :1000 - - -- - 1,800,000

Commercial Decking - 1650 - - - 1.700.000
Selected Decking Decking -

-
2150
1800
(Surfaced at 150ft max. m.c. and
used at 150ft max. m.c.)
1,900,000
1,700,000
Commercial Dec!rinl
N
(Continued) U1
~
....
ALLOWAELE UNIT STRESSES IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb GRADING
Com pres- Comp<es· RULES
Tension alonper· alon MODULUS UNDER
SIZE Single- Repetlllv• Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI- member member to Grain Sh"r to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses u... F, Fv Fc_L 21 Fe E 21 GRADED

No.I Stringers 1300 - 675 85 625 925 1,600,000
NLGA
Select Structural Posts and 1500 - 1000 85 625 1150 I ,600,000 (See footnotes
No.I Timbers 1200 - 825 85 625 1000 1,600,000 2 through 9
and 11)
Select 1750 2000 - - 625 - 1,800,000
Commercial Decking 1450 1650 - - 625 - 1,700,000
DOUGLAS FIR SOUTH (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190Jo max. m.c.) ....
(Q
Select Structural
No. I & Appearance
2" to 4"
thick
2000
1700
2300
1950
1150
975
90
90
520
520
1400
1150
1,400,000
1,400,000 ....
(Q
No.2 2" to 4" 1400 1600 825 90 520 900 1,300,000 c

No.3 wide 775 875 450 90 520 550 1,100,000 ~
Stud 775 875 450 90 550 1,100,000 WWPA "TI
520
(See footnotes 0
Construction J:J
2" to 4" 1000 1150 600 90 520 1000 1,100,000 2 through 10, 3:
Standard thick 550 650 325 90 520 850 1,100,000 13, 15 and 16)
Utility llJ
4" wide 275 300 !50 90 520 550 1,100,000
s:r
Select Structural 2" to4" 1700 1950 llSO 90 520 1250 1,400,000 0
No. I & Appearance
No.2
thick
5" and
1450
1200
1650
1350
975
625
90
90
520
520
1150
950
1,400,000
1,300,000
z
C)
No. 3 and Stud wider 700 800 350 90 520 600 1,100,000 0
0
0
m
.....
(I)
(I)
Select Structural Beams and 1550 - 900 85 520 1000 1.200.000 .....
No. I Stringers 1300 - 625 85 520 850 1.200.000 c
No.2 825 -
425 85 520 525 1.000.000 z
::;;
Select Structural 1400 - 950 85 520 1050 1,200,000 0
Posts and -
WWPA :0
No. I
Timbers
1150 775 85 520 925 1.200.000
3:
No.2 650 - 400 85 520 425 (See footnotes
1.000.000
2 through 10, Ill
c
Selected Decking Decking - 1900 - - - - 1,400,000
13, 15 and 16)
r=c
Commercial Decking - 1600 - - - - 1,300,000
z
G')
Selected Decking Decking - 2050 (Stresses for Decking apply at 1,500,000
Commercial Decking - 1750 15"7o moisture content) 1,300,000 C')
0
c
EASTERN HEMLOCK !Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.) m
Select Structrual 1750 2050 1050 85 550 1350 1,200,000
No.1 2" to 4" 1500 1750 875 85 550 1050 1,200,000
No.2 thick 1250 1450 725 85 550 850 1,100,000
No.3 2" to 4" 675 800 400 85 550 525 1,000,000
Appearance wide 1500 1750 875 85 550 1250 1,200,000
Stud 675 800 400 85 550 525 1,000,000
Construction 2" to 4" 900 1050 525 85 550 950 1,000,000
Standard thick 500 575 300 85 550 800 1,000,000 NELMA
Utility 4" wide 250 275 150 85 550 525 1,000,000 (See footnotes
Select Structural 2" to 4" 1550 1750 1000 85 550 1200 1,200,000 1 through 9)
No.1 thick 1300 1500 875 85 550 1050 1,200,000
No.2 5" and 1050 1250 550 85 550 900 1,100,000
No.3 wider 625 700 325 85 550 575 1,000,000
Appearance 1300 1500 875 85 550 1250 1,200,000
Stud 625 700 325 85 550 575 1,000,000
No.1 Strmgers 1150 - 775 80 550 BOO 1,200,000
No.1 Timbers 1050 - 700 80 550 875 1,200,000
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Conlinued)
IIJ Allowable Unit Stresses lor Structural Lumber-VISUAL GRADING
CD
(I) (Normal loading. See also Section 25041
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES IN POUNDS PER SOUARE INCH
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fo GRADING
Comp<eo· Compreo· RULES
Tension aionper· olon MODULUS
SIZE Single· Ropellllvo- Parallel Horizon fill pencllcu"'r Porollel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI- member member to Grain Shur to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses u••• F, F. Fc..L21 Fe £21 GRADED
EASTERN HEMLOCK-TAMARACK (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
EASTERN HEMLOCK-TAMARACK (NORTH)
No.1 1500 1750 900 85 555 1050 1,300,000
No.2 2" to 4" 1250 1450 725 85 555 850 1,100,000 NLGA,
No.3 thick 700 800 400 85 555 525 1,000,000
2" to 4" 1500 85 555 1300 1,300,000 NHPMA,
Appearance 1300 875
Stud wide 700 800 400 85 555 525 1,000,000 and
NELMA
Construction 2" to 4" 900 1050 525 85 555 975 1,000,000
thick 800 1,000,000 (See footnotes
Standard 500 575 300 85 555
Utility 4" wide 250 275 150 85 555 525 1,000,000 2 through 9, ....
CD
11, 13,
Select Structural
No.I 2" to4"
1550
1300
1750
1500
1050
875
85
85
555
555
1200
1050
1,300,000
1,300,000
IS and 16) ....CD
900 1,100,000 c
No.2 thick 1050 1200 575 85 555
575 1,000,000
z
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 625
1300
725
1500
325 85
85
555
1300 1,300,000
;;
Appearance wider 815 555 0
JJ
Select Strucrural Beams and 1400 -- 925 80 555 950 1,200,000 s::
No. I Stringers 1150 -- 775 80 555 800 1,200,000 tD
NLGA
c
;=
Select Strucrural Posts and 1300 -- 875 80 555 1000 1,200,000 (See footnotes 0
No. I Timbers 1050 -- 700 80 555 875 1,200,000 1 through 9 z
C)
and 11)
C')
Select Decking 1500 1700 -- -- -- -- 1,300,000
0
Commercial 1250 1450 -- -- -- -- 1,100,000 0
m
1,200,000 NHPMA,
...
Selel't Stru(tural
NO.I
Beams and
Stringers
1400
1150
-
-
925
775
80
80
555
555
950
800 1,200,000 NELMA
(See footnotes
...
<D
<D
- 875 80 555 1000 1,200,000 2 through 9) c:

select Structural Posts and
Timbers
1300
1050 - 700 80 555 875 1,200,000 z
No.I :;;
NELMA 0
Select Decking 1500 1700 - - - - 1,300,000 (See footnotes :a
1250 1450 - - - - 1,100,000 2 through 9) 3:
Commercial
CD
Select Structural Beams and 1450 - 850 85 555 950 1,300,000 5
Stringers - 600 555 r
No.I 1200 85 800 1,300,000
NLGA c
Select Structural Posts and 1300 - 875 M 555 1000 1,200,000
(See footnotes z
G')
No.I Timbers 1050 - 700 M 555 875 1,200,000
2 through 9
and II) 0
1700 - - 555 - 0
Select Decking 1500
- - 555 -
1,300,000 c
Commercial 1250 1450 1,100,000 m
EASTERN SOFTWOODS (Surfaced dry or surfaced green, Used at 19% max. m.c.l
Select Structural 2" to4" 1350 1550 800 70 335 1050 1,200,000 NHPMA
No.1 thick 1150 1350 675 70 335 825 1,200,000 (See footnotes
No.2 2" to 4" 950 1100 550 70 335 650 1,100,000 I through 9)
No.3 wide 525 600 300 70 335 400 1,000,000
Stud 2" to 4" 525 600 300 70 335 400 1,000.000 NHPMA,
thick NELMA
2" to4" (See footnotes
wide I through 8)
Construction 2" to 4" 700 800 400 70 335 750 1,000,000
Standard thick 375 450 225 70 335 625 1,000,000
Utility 4"wide 175 200 100 70 335 400 1,000,000 J'loliPMA
Select Structural 2" to 4" 1150 1350 775 70 335 925 1,200,000 (See footnotes
No.1 thick 1000 1150 675 70 335 825 1,200,000 I through9)
No.2 5" and 825 950 425 70 335 700 1,100,000
No.3 wider 475 550 250 70 335 450 1,000,000
Appearance 1000 1150 675 70 335 1000 1,200,000
Stud 2" to4" 475 550 250 70 335 450 1,000,000 J'loliPMA,
thick NELMA
5" and (See footnotes
wider I through 91.
(Continued)
w TABLE NO. 25·A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued)
0
0 Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber-VISUAL GRADING

GRADING
Extreme fiber in
Size bending RULES
Species and commercial grade F• Tension Horizontal Compression Compress,on Modulus
classification UNDER
parallel shear perpendicular parallel of
to grain to grain to grain
WHICH
Single- Repetitive- Fv elasticity
E 21 GRADED
member member F, FcJ. 21 Fe
uses uses
EASTERN SPRUCE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
Select Structural 2"to4" 1400 1600 BOO 7D 390 1050 1,500,000
No.1 thick 1200 1350 700 70 390 825 1,500,000
No.2 2" to 4" 975 1100 575 70 390 650 1,400,000
No.3 wide 550 625 325 70 390 400 1,200,000
Appearance 1200 1350 700 70 390 1000 1,500.000
325 390 1,200,000 ~HPMA.
Stud 550 625 70 400
NELMA
Construction 2" to 4" 700 BOO 400 70 390 750 1,200.000
Standard thick 400 450 225 70 390 625 1,200,000 (See footnotes ....
(0
390 1 through 91
Utility
Select Structural
4" wide
2" to4"
175
1200
225
1350
100
BOO
70
70 390 925
400 1,200,000
1,500,000
....
(0
No.1 thick 1000 1150 675 70 390 825 1,500,000 c:

No.2 5" and 825 950 425 70 390 700 1,400,000 ~
390 "TI
No.3 wider 475 550 250 70 450 1,200,000
Appearance 1000 1150 675 70 390 1000 1,500,000
0
:II
Stud 475 550 250 70 390 450 1,200,000 5:
Select Structural Beams and 1050 - 725 65 390 750 1,400,000 1:11
No.1 Stringers 900 - 600 65 390 625 1,400,000 c:
Select Structural Posts and 1000 -- 675 65 390 775 1,400,000 r=
c
BOO
No.1
Select
Timbers
Decking - 1300
550
- -
65
-
390 675
-
1,400,000
1,500,000 NEL\1A z
G)
Commercial - 1100 - - - - 1,400,000 (See footnotes
1 throug!!.2L (')
0
c
m
...
...~
c
z
:;;
0
lJ
EASTERN WHITE PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at I90fo max. m.c.) ~
EASTERN WHITE PINE (NORTH) NLGA
Select Structural 350 1,200,000 III
1350 I550 800 65 1050 and NELMA c
350
No.I
No.2
2" to 4"
thick
1150
950
1350
1100
675
550
65
65 350
850
675
1,200,000
1,100,000
(See footnotes r=
2 through 9, 0
No.3
Appearance
2" to 4"
wide
525
1150
600
1350
300
675
65
65
350
350
400
1000
1,000,000
1,200,000
12 and 14) z
G)
0
Stud 2" to 4 • thick 525 600 300 65 350 400 1,000,000 0
2" to4" wide NLGA,NHIMA
anciNELMA 0
m
700 65 350 (See footnotes
Construction 2" to 4" 800 400 750 1,000,000
2 through 9, II,
Standard thick 375 450 225 65 350 625 1,000,000
Utility 350 12, 13 and 14)
4" wide 175 200 100 65 400 1,000,000
Select Structural 1150 1350 775 65 350 950 1,200,000 NLGA

No.I 2" to 4" 1000 1150 675 65 350 850 1,200,000 anciNELMA
No.2 thick 825 950 450 65 350 700 1,100,000 (See footnotes
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 475 550 250 65 350 450 1,000,000 2through9,
Appearance wider 1000 1150 675 65 350 1000 1,200,000 11, 12and 14)

No.I Stringers 875 - 600 65 350 575 1,100,000 NELMA
(See footnotes
Select Structural Posts and 975 - 650 65 350 725 1,100,000 2through9)
No.I Timbers 800 - 525 65 350 625 1,100,000
(Continued)
...
Coo)
0
TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBEA-(Continued)
IN
1\)

EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fo GRADING
Com pres- Compres- RULES
Tension slonper- slon MODULUS
SIZE Single- Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendlcutar Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, F. FcJ.. 21 F, E 21 GRADED
NLGA
andNELMA
Select Decking 900 1050 - - - - 1,200,000 (See footnotts
Commercial 775 875 -- - - - 1,100,000 2through9,
11 and 12)
EASTERN WOODS (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 1100 1300 650 60 270 675 1,100,000
No.2 thick 925 1050 525 60 270 550 1,000,000 NHPMA .....
(0
No.3 2" to 4" 500 575 300 60 270 325 900,000 and (0
Stud wide 500 575 300 60 270 325 900,000 J'IOELMA .....
(See footnotes c
Construction 2" to 4" 650 750 400 60 270 625 900,000
2through 9, ~
Standard thick 375 425 225 60 270 500 900,000 "T1
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 60 270 325 900,000 13, 15 and 16) 0
:0
Appearance 2" to 4" thick 1100 1300 650 60 270 825 1,100,000
s:
2" to 4" wide OJ
c
Select Structural 1150
;::::
1300 750 60 270 750 1,100,000 c
No.I
No.2
2" to 4"
thick
950
775
1100
900
650
425
60
60
270
270
675
575
1,100,000
1,000,000
...W':\IA
(See footnotes
zG'l
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 450 525 250 60 270 375 900,000 2through9. (")
Appearance wider 950 1100 650 60 270 825 1,100,000 !Sand 16)
0
c
m
c
z
ENGELMANN SPRUCE-ALPINE FIR (ENGELMANN SPRUCE-LODGEPOLE PINE) (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"To max. m.c.) :;;
Select Structural 1350 1550 800 70 320 950 1,300,000 0
No.I 2" to 4" 1150 1350 675 70 320 750 1,300,000 :II
No.2 thick 950 1100 550 70 320 600 1,100,000 5:
No.3 2" to 4" 525 600 300 70 320 375 1,000,000 IJI
Appearance wide 1150 1350 675 70 320 900 1,300,000 c
Stud 525 600 300 70 320 375 1,000,000 r=0
Construction
Standard
2" to 4"
thick
700
375
800
450
400
225
70
70
320
320
675
550
1,000,000
1,000,000
z
G')
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 70 320 375 1,000,000 (")
0
Select Structural 1200 1350 775 70 320 850 1,300,000 WWPA 0
No.I 2" to4" 1000 1150 70 320 750 1,300,000 (See footnotes m
675
No.2 thick 825 950 425 70 320 625 1,100,000 2 through 10,
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 475 550 250 70 320 400 1,000,000
320 13, IS and 16)
Appearance wider 1000 1150 675 70 900 1,300,000
Select Structural 1050 - 625 65 320 675 1.100,000
Beams and -
No. I Stringers 875 450 65 320 550 1'100.000
No.2 575 - 275 65 320 350 900.000
Select Structural Posts and 975 -
650 65 320 700 1,100,000
No. I 800 - 525 65 320 625 1,100,000
Timbers -
No.2 450 300 65 320 275 900.000

Selected Decking Decking - 1400 (Surfaced at 15"To max. m.c. and 1,300,000
Commercial Decking - 1200 used at 15"To max. m.c.) 1,200,000
(Continued)

EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb GRADING
Com pres· Compres· RULES
Tension sionper· slon MODULUS UNDER
SIZE Single- Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI- member member to Grain Shear to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv Fc.l 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
HEM-FIR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"1o max. m.c.)

No.I 2" to 4" 1400 1600 825 75 405 1050 1,500,000
No.2 thick 1150 1350 675 75 405 825 1,400,000
No.3 2" to 4" 650 725 375 75 405 500 1,200,000 WCLIB
Appearance wide 1400 1600 825 75 405 1250 1,500,000
Stud 650 725 375 75 405 500 1,200,000 and
WWPA
Construction
Standard
2" 10 4" 825 975 500 75 405 925 1,200,000 (See footnotes ....
thick 475 550 275 75 405 775 1,200,000
~
2 through 9,
Utility 4" wide 225 250 125 75 405 500 1,200,000 II, 12, 13,
IS and 16) c:
No.I 2"to4" 1200 1400 1m 75 405 1050 1,500,000 :r;
No.2 thick 1000 1150 525 75 405 875 1,400,000 0
No. 3 and Stud S"and 575 675 300 75 405 550 1,200,000 :::0
Appearance wider 1200 1400 1m 75 405 1250 1,500,000 s::
ID
Select Structural Beams and 1300 - 750 70 405 925 1,300,000 c:
No.I Stringers 1050 - 525 70 405 750 1,300,000 i=
c
WCLIB
(See footnotes
z
No.I
Select Dex
Timbers
Decking
975
1400
- 650
-
70
-
405
405
850
-
1,300,000
1,500,000
2 through 9,
15 and 16)
"0
0
1600
Commercial Dex 1150 1350 - - 405 - 1,400,000 c
m
....
(Q
...
(Q
c
z
;;
0
::D
3:
Select Structural 1250 - 725 70 405 925 l ,300,000 tD
Beams and
No. l Stringers 1050 - 525 70 405 775 1,300,000 WWPA 5
No.2 675 - 325 70 405 475 1,100,000 r
(See footnotes c
Select Structural 1200 - 800 70 405 975 I ,300,000
2 through 9, z
G)
Posts and 15 and 16)
No. I 950 - 650 70 405 850 1,300,000 0
No.2 Timbers
525 - 350 70 405 375 1,100,000 0
c
m
No.I Stringers 12 1050 - 725 70 405 775 1,300,000 -.;LGA
(See footnotes
Select Structural Posts and 1200 - 800 70 405 975 1,300,000 2 through 12)
No.I Timbers 950 - 650 70 405 850 1,300,000

NLGA
Selected Decking Decking - 1700 (Surfaced:·· · "'lo max. m.c. and 1,600,000 and
Commercial Decking - 1450 used at JSO nax. m.c.) 1,400,000 WWPA
(See footnotes
Select Decking 1350 1550 - - 405 - 1,500,000
2 through 12)
Commercial 1150 1300 - - 405 - 1,400,000
(Continued)
w
0
Ul
Extreme fiber in GRADING

bending Fb Tension Compression Compression Modulus RULES
Species and Size Horizontal
parallel perpendicular parallel of UNDER
ccmmercial grade classification Single- Repetitive-
shear
to grain to grain to grain elasticity WHICH
member member Fv Fc.l. 21 E 21 GRADED
F, Fe
uses uses
HEM-FIR (NORTH I !Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.l
Select Structural 2" to 3'' 1600 1800 925 75 370 1300 1,500,000
No.1 thick 1350 1550 800 75 370 1050 1,500,000
No.2 2" to 4" 1100 1300 650 75 370 800 1.400,000
No.3 wide 625 700 350 75 370 500 1,200,000
Appearance 1350 1550 BOO 75 370 1250 1,500,000
Stud 625 700 350 75 370 500 1,200,000
Construction 2" to 4" 800 925 475 75 370 925 1,200,000 .....
(Cl
Standard thick 450 525 275 75 370 775 1,200,000 NLGA (Cl
Utility 4"wide 225 250 125 75 370 500 1,200,000
(See footnotes
.....
Select Structural 2" to4" 1350 1550 900 75 370 1150 1,500,000 I through 9 c:
No.1 thick 1150 1350 775 75 370 1050 1,500,000
and II) ~
No.2 5" and 950 1100 500 75 370 850 1.400.000 "T1
No.3 wider 550 650 300 75 370 550 1,200,000 0
1,500,000 :II
Appearance
Stud
1150
550
1350
650
775
300
75
75
370
370
1250
550 1,200,000 s::
tD
5
No.1 Stringers 1000 - 500 70 370 750 1,300,000 r
1150 - 370 1,300,000 c
Select Structural
No.1
Posts and
Ttmbers 925 -
775
625
70
70 370
950
850 1,300.000 z
G)
Select Decking 1350 1500 - - 370 - 1,500,000
(")
Commerctal 1100 1300 - - 370 - 1,400,000
0
c
m
...
<0
...
<0
c:
z
IDAHO WHITE PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.) ;;
Select structural 1350 1550 775 70 315 1100 1,400,000 0
No.I 2" to 4" 1150 1300 650 70 315 875 1,400,000 :II
No.2 thick 925 1050 550 70 315 675 1,300,000 s::
No.3 2" to 4" 525 600 300 70 315 425 1,200,000 Ill
Appearance wide 1150 1300 650 70 315 1050 1,400,000 !:
Stud 525 600 300 70 315 425 1,200,000 r
c
Construction 2" to 4" 675 775 400 70 315 775 1,200,000 z
G)
Standard thick 375 425 225 70 315 650 1,200,000 (')
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 70 315 425 1,200,000 0
WWPA c
Select Structural
2" to4"
1150 1300 ns 70 315 950 1,400,000
(See footnotes
m
No.I 975 1100 650 70 315 875 1,400,000
No.2 thick 800 925 425 70 315 725 1,300,000 2 through 10,
No. 3 and Stud s• and 475 550 250 70 315 450 1,200,000 13, !Sand 16)

Beams and
No. I 850 - 425 65 315 650 1.300,000
Stringers
No.2 550 - 275 65 315 40C 1.100,000
Posts and -
No. I Timbers 775 525 65 315 700 I ,300,000
No.2 450 -
300 65 315 325 1,100.000
Sdecled Decking Decking - 1300 - - - - 1,400,000

Selected Decking Decking - 1400 (Surfaced at 15"7o max. m.c. and 1,500,000
Commercial Decking - 1150 used at 15"7o max. m.c.) 1,400,000
(Continued)
(,.)
CIO
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING F• GRADING
Tension sion par· sion MODULUS UNDER
SIZE Single· Repetitive· Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI· member member to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
to Grain Shear to Grain
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fcl_ 21 E 21 GRADED
Fv Fe
LODGEPOLE PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"1o max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 1300 1500 750 70 400 900 1,300,000
No.2 thick 1050 1200 625 70 400 700 1,200,000
No.3 2" to 4" 600 675 350 70 400 425 1,000,000
Appearance wide 1300 1500 750 70 400 1050 1,300,000
Stud 600 675 350 70 400 425 1,000,000
Construction 2" to 4" 775 875 450 70 400 800 1,000,000

Standard thick 425 70 675 1,000,000 WWPA
500 250 400
2 through 10,
Select Structural 1300 1500 875 70 400 1000 1,300,000 13, IS and 16) c
No.I 2" to 4" 1100 1300 750 70 400 900 1,300,000 z
No.2 thick 925 1050 475 70 400 750 1,200,000 :;;
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 525 625 275 70 400 475 1,000,000 0
Appearance wider 1100 1300 750 70 400 1050 1,300,000 JJ
5:
Select Structural Beams and 1150 - 700 65 400 800 1,100,000 t:D
No. I Stringers 975 - 500 65 400 675 1.100,000 !:
No.2 625 - 325 65 400 425 900,000 r
c
Select Structural Posts and 1100 - 725 65 400 850 1,100,000 z
C>
No. I Timbers 875 - 600 65 400 725 1,100.000 (")
No.2 500 - 350 65 400 350 900.000 0
c
m
.....
CD
CD
.....
c:
z
Selected Decking Decking - 1450 - - - - 1,300,000 :;;
Commercial Decking - 1200 - -
I - - 1,200,000
WWPA
(See footnotes
2 through 10,
0
:II
s::
Ill
- 1,200,000 13, 15 and 16)
Commercial Decking 1300 used at 15"1o max. m.c.)
s:r
MIXED HARDWOODS (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.) c
Construction
Standard
Light
Framing
1100
600
1250
700
650
350
100
100
715
715
]()()()
825
1,300,000
1,300,000
z
G)
Utility 300 325 175 100 715 525 1,300,000 0
2" to 4" thick, 0
4"wide c
m
Select Structural Structural 2150 2500 1250 100 715 1400 1,700,000
No. I Light 1850 2100 1050 100 715 1100 1,700,000
No.2 Framing 1500 1750 875 100 715 875 1,500,000
No.3 825 950 500 100 715 525 1,300,000
Appearance 2" to 4" thick, 1850 2100 1050 100 715 1300 I ,700,000 NELMA
Stud 2" to 4" wide 825 950 500 100 715 525 I ,300,000 (See foolnoles
Select Structural Structural 1850 2150 1250 100 715 1200 1,700,000 2 through 9)
No. I Joists and 1600 1800 1050 100 715 1100 1,700,000
No.2 Planks 1300 1500 675 100 715 925 1,500,000
No.3 2" to 4" thick, 775 875 400 100 715 575 1,300,000
Appearance 5" and wider 1600 1800 1050 100 715 1300 1,700,000
Stud 775 875 400 100 715 575 1,300,000
Select Structural Beams and 1650 975 90 715 975 1,500,000
No. I Stringers 1400 700 90 715 825 1,500,000
No.2 900 450 90 715 525 1,200,000
Select Structural Posts and 1550 1050 90 715 1050 1.500,000
No. I Timbers 1250 850 90 715 900 1.500,000
No.2 725 475 90 715 425 1.200.000
w
0
CD !Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSE5-STRUCTURAL LUMBER- (Continued)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDINGF0 GRADING
RULES
Tension Compression Compression MODULUS OF UNDER
SPECIES AND SIZE CLASS I- Single- Repetitive- Parallel to Horizontal Perpendicular Parallel to ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE FICATION member Uses member Uses GrainF, Shear F. to Grain Fc-'-21 Grain Fe f21 GRADED
MIXED MAPLE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19'7c max. m.c.)
Construction Light 775 875 450 100 620 725 1,000,000
Standard Framing 425 500 250 100 620 600 1.000,000
Utility 200 225 125 100 620 400 1,000.000
2" to 4" thick.
4"wide
Select Structural Strucrural 1500 1750 900 100 620 1000 1,300,000
No. I Light 1300 1500 750 100 620 800 I ,300,000
No.2 Framing 1050 1250 625 100 620 650 1.100.000
"'ELMA
No.3
Appearance 2" to 4" thick.
600
1300
675
1500
350
750
100
100
620
620
400
975
1,000,000
1.300,000 (See footnotes
....
CD
Srud 2" to4" wide 600 675 350 100 620 400 1.000.000 2through9) ....
CD
Select Structural Strucrural 1300 1500 875 100 620 900 1,300,000 c
No. I Joists and 1100 1300 750 100 620 800 1,300.000 z
No.2 Planks 925 1050 475 100 620 675 1.100.000 ;;
No.3 2" to 4" thick. 550 625 275 100 620 425 1,000,000 0
JJ
Appearance
Stud
5" and wider 1100
525
1300
625
750
275
100
100
620
620
975
425
1.300.000
1.000,000
s::
Ill
Select Structural
No. I
Beams and
Stringers
1150
975
700
500
90
90
620
620
725
600
1.100,000
1,100.000
s:r
900,000 0
No.2
Select Structutal Posts and
625
1100
325
725
90
90
620
620
375
750 1.100.000
z
G)
No. I Timbers 875 600 90 620 650 1.100.000 (')
No.2 500 350 90 620 300 900.000 0
0
m
...
(0
...
(0
c
z
;;
0
JJ
MIXED OAK (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19o/c max. m.c.) 5:
Construction Light 875 1000 525 85 800 850 800,000 tD
Standard Framing 500 575 300 85 800 700 800,000 c
Utility 225 275 125 85 800 450 800,000 i=
c
2" to 4" thick,
4"wide z
C)
Select Structural Structural 1750 2000 1000 85 800 1200 1,100,000 (')
No. I Light 1500 1700 875 85 800 925 1,100,000 0
No.2 Framing 1200 1400 725 85 800 750 900,000 c
No.3 675 775 400 85 800 450 800,000 m
Appearance 2" to 4" thick, 1500 1700 875 85 800 1100 1.100,000 NELMA
Stud 2" to4" wide 675 775 400 85 800 450 800,000 (See footnotes
Select Structural Structural 1500 1750 1000 85 800 1050 1,100,000 2through9)
No. I Joists and 1300 1450 850 85 800 925 1,100,000
No.2 Planks 1050 1200 550 85 800 775 900,000
No.3 2" to 4" thick. 625 700 325 85 800 500 800,000
Appearance 5" and wider 1300 1450 850 85 800 1100 1.100,000
Stud 625 700 325 85 800 500 800,000
Select Structural Beams and 1350 800 80 800 825 1.000,000
No. I Stringers 1150 550 80 800 700 1,000,000
No.2 725 375 80 800 450 800,000
Select Structural Posts and 1250 850 80 800 875 1,000,000
No. I Timbers 1000 675 80 800 775 1.000,000
No.2 575 400 80 800 350 800.000
(Continued)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDINGFb GRADING
RULES
Slngl&- Repetitlv&- Tension Compression Compression MODULUS OF UNDER
SPECIES AND SIZE CLASS!- member member Parallel to Horizontal Perpendicular Parallel to ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE FICATION Uses Uses GrainF1 Shear F. to Grain Fc~21 Grain Fe f21 GRADED
MOUNTAIN HEMLOCK (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 1450 1700 850 95 570 1000 1,300,000
No.2 thick 1200 1400 700 95 570 775 1,100,000
No.3 2" to 4" 675 775 400 95 570 475 1,000,000
Appearance wide 1450 1700 850 95 570 1200 1,300,000
Stud 675 775 95 570 1,000,000 WCLIB
400 475
and
Construction 2" to 4" 875 1000 525 95 570 900 1,000,000 WWPA
Standard
Utility
thick 500
225
575
275
275
125
95
95
570
570
725
475
1,000,000
1,000,000
(See footnotes ...
CD
Select Structural
4" wide
1500 1700 1000 95 570 llOO 1,300,000
2 through 9,
13, 15 and 16) ...
CD
c:
No.I z• to 4" 1250 1450 850 95 570 1000 1,300,000 z
1050 1200 95 825 1,100,000
~:0
No.2 thick 550 570
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 625 700 325 95 570 525 1,000,000
~
Select Structural Beams and 1350 - 775 90 570 875 1,100,000 ttl
No.I Stringers llOO - 550 90 570 725 1,100,000 c:
WCLIB
;:::
Select Structural Posts and 1250 - 825 90 570 925 1,100,000 c
No.I Timbers 1000 - 675 90 570 800 1,100,000 (See footnotes
2 through 9)
zG>
Select Dex Decking 1450 1650 - - 570 - 1,300,000 (')
Commercial Dex 1200 1400 - - 570 - 1,100,000 0
c
m
c
z
;;
Select Structural Beams and 1350 775 90 570 875 1.000.000 0
No.1 1100 - 550 90 570 750 1.100,000 JJ
Stringers
No.2 725 - 375 90 570 475 900 000 :5:
Select Structural I 1250 - 825 90 570 925 1.100,000 til
Posts and
No.1 Timbers 1000 - 675 90 570 800 1,100,000 WWPA 5
No.2 575 - 375 90 570 375 900,000 (See footnotes r
c
Selected Decking
Commercial Decking
Decking -
-
1650
1400
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1,300,000
1,100,000
2 through 10) z
C>
Selected Decking Decking -
0
1800 (Surfaced at 150Jo max. m.c. and 1,300,000 0
Commercial Decking - 1500 used at 150Jo max. m.c.) 1,200,000 c
m
MOUNTAIN HEMLOCK-HEM-FIR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190Jo max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 1400 1600 825 75 405 1000 1,300,000
No.2 thick 1150 1350 675 75 405 775 1,100,000
No.3 2" to 4" 650 725 375 75 405 475 1,000,000
Appearance wide 1400 1600 825 75 405 1200 1,300,000
Stud 650 725 375 75 405 475 1,000,000
WWPA
Construction 2" to 4" 825 975 500 75 405 900 1,000,000 (See footnotes
Standard thick 475 550 275 75 405 725 1,000,000 2 through 10,
Utility 4" wide 225 250 125 75 405 475 1,000,000 13, IS and 16)
2" to4"
No.I 1200 1400 !ro 75 405 1000 1,300,000
thick 525 75 405 825 1,100,000
No.2 5' and 1000 1150
No. 3 and Stud 575 675 300 75 405 525 1,000,000
Appearance -"der 1400 !ro 75 405 1200 1,300,000
1200
(Continued)
TABt..E NO. 25·A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued) 1\,)
U1
(Normal loading. See also Section 2504) ~
....
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb GRADING
Tension slonper· slon MODULUS
SIZE Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI· member to Grain Shear to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses F, F. Fc_l_ 21 Fe E 21 GRADED

No.1 !050 - 525 70 405 750 1,100,000
Stringers
No.2 675 - 325 70 405 475 900,000
Select Structural 1200 - 800 70 405 925 1,100,000
Posts and
No.1 950 - 650 70 405 800 1,100,000 WWPA
Timbers
No.2 525 - 350 70 405 375 900,000
(See foolnotes
Selected Decking Decking - 1600 - - - - 1,300,000 2 through 10,
Commercial Decking - 1350 - - - - 1,100,000 13, 15 and 16)
Selected Decking Decking - 1700 (Surfaced at 15"To max. m.c. and 1,300,000
....
(Cl
Commercial Decking - 1450 used at 15"To max. m.c.) 1,200,000 ....
(Cl
c:
NORTHERN ASPEN (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"To max. m.c.) z
Select Structural 1300 1500 750 60 320 850 1,400,000 ::;;
No. I 2" to 4" 1100 1250 650 60 320 675 1,400,000 0
No.2 thick 900 1050 525 60 320 525 1,200,000 JJ
No.3 2" to 4" 500 575 275 60 320 325 1,100,000 "'LGA ~
Appearance wide 1100 1250 650 60 320 800 1,400,000 (See footnotes Ill
Stud 500 575 275 60 320 325 1,100,000 c:
2 through 9, r=c
11. 13,
Construction
Standard
2" to 4"
thick
650
350
750
425
375
200
60
60
320
320
600
500
!,100,000
1,100,000 15 and 16) z
G)
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 60 320 325 1,100,000
C')
0
c
m
....
CD
....
CD
c
z
Select Structural
2" to 4"
1100 1250 750 60 320 750 1,400,000
NLGA
=n
No.I 950 1100 625 60 320 675 1,400,000 0
(See footnotes
No.2 thick 775 900 400 60 320 m 1,200,000
2t!ruf.9,
::0
iii:
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 450 525 250 60 320 350 1,100,000
wider 950 1100 625 320 1,400,000 ll,1l tD
Appearance 60 IK)() 1Sand 6)
s;;
r
c
NORTHERN PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
C)
No.I 2" to 4" 1400 1600 825 70 435 975 1,400,000
No.2 thick 1150 1300 675 70 435 775 1,300,000 0
No.3 2" to 4" 625 725 375 70 435 475 1,100,000 0
Appearance wide 1200 1400 800 70 435 1,400,000
c
1150 m
Stud 625 725 375 70 435 475 1,100,000
NHPMA
Construction 2" to 4" 825 950 475 70 435 875 1,100,000 and
Standard thick 450 525 275 70 435 725 1,100,000 NELMA
Select Structural 435 2 through 9,
2" to4" 1400 1600 950 70 1100 1,400,000
No.I 1200 1400 IK)() 70 435 975 1,400,000 13, 15 and 16)
No.2 thick
5" and 950 1100 525 70 435 825 1,300,000
No. 3 and Stud 575 650 300 70 435 525 1,100,000
Appearance wider
1200 1400 IK)() 70 435 1150 1,400,000
No.I Stringers 1050 - 700 65 435 725 1,300,000
No.I Timbers 950 - 650 65 435 800 1,300,000
Select Decking 1350 1550 - - - - 1,400,000 NEL\'IA
Commercial 1150 1300 - - - - 1,300,000 (See footnotes
2 through 91
(Continued)
N
U1
..
Coo)
en
'TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSEs-STRUCTURAL LUMBER- (Continued
..~
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDINGFb GRADING
RULES
SPECIES AND SIZE CLASSI· Single- Repetitive- Parallel to Horizontal Perpendicular Parallel to ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE FICATION member Uses member Uses GrainF1 Shear F. to Grain Fc_!_21 Grain Fe f".!1 GRADED
NORTHERN RED OAK (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
Standard Framing 600 675 350 110 885 800 1,100,000
Utility 275 325 175 110 885 525 1,100,000
2" to 4" thick,
4"wide
No. l Light 1750 2050 1050 110 885 1050 1,400,000
..
No.2 Framing 1450 1650 850 110 885 850 1,300,000
No.3 800 925 475 110 885 525 1,100,000 NELMA
Appearance 2" to 4" thick, 1750 2050 1050 110 885 1300 1,400,000 (See footnotes
Stud 2" to4" wide 800 925 475 110 885 525 1,100,000 2through9)
~
Select Structural Structural 1800 2050 1200 110 885 1200 I ,400,000 c:
No. I Joists and 1500 1750 1000 110 885 1050 1,400,000 z
~:0
No.2 Planks 1250 1450 650 110 885 900 1,300,000
No.3 2" to 4" thick, 725 850 375 110 885 575 1,100,000
Stud 725 850 375 110 885 575 1,100,000 iii:
tD
No.I Stringers 1350 675 105 885 800 1,300,000
5
r
No.2 875 425 105 885 500 1,000,000 c
Select Structural Posts and 1500 1000 105 885 1000 1,300,000 z
C)
No. I Timbers 1200 800 105 885 875 1,300,000
No.2 700 475 105 885 400 1,000,000 0
0
c
m
.....
(I)
(I)
.....
c:
z
:;;
0
:II
s::
Ill
c:
NORTHERN SPECIES (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"1o max. m.c.) r=c
Select Structural
No.I 2" to 3"
1350
1150
1550
1300
775
675
65
65
350
350
1050
825
1,100,000
1,100,000 z
C)
No.2 thick 925 1050 550 65 350 650 1,000,000
No.3 2" to 4" 525 600 300 65 350 400 900,000 0
Appearance wide 1150 1300 675 65 350 975 1,100,000 0
Stud 65 350 NLGA
c
525 600 300 400 900,000 m
(See footnotes
Construction 2" to 4 • 675 775 400 65 350 750 900,000
Standard thick 375 425 225 350 2 through 9,
65 600 900,000
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 65 350 400 900,000 11, 13,
15 and 16)
No.I
2" to 4" 975 1150 650 65 350 825 1,100,000
No.2 thick 800 925 65 350 675 1,000,000
5" and 425
No. 3 and Stud 475 550 250 65 350 425 900,000
Appearance wider 975 1150 350
650 65 850 1,100,000
Select Decking 900 1050 - - 350 - 1,100,000

Commercial 775 875 - - 350 - 1,000,000
(Continued)

EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb GRADING
Com pres- Compres- RULES
Tension sion per- sion MODULUS
Single- Repetitive- Horizontal pendicular Parallel OF UNDER
SIZE Parallel
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, F. Fc.l. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
NORTHERN WHITE CEDAR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
Select Structural 1150 1350 700 65 370 875 800,000
No.I 2" to 4" 1000 1150 600 65 370 675 800,000
No.2 thick 825 950 500 65 370 550 700,000
No.3 2" to 4" 450 525 275 65 370 325 600,000
Appearance wide 850 1000 575 65 370 825 800,000
Stud 450 525 275 65 370 325 600,000
Construction 2" to 4" 600 675 350 65 370 625 600,000

Standard thick 325 375 200 65 370 500 600,000
Utility 4" wide 150 175 100 65 370 325 600,000 :\ELMA
(See footnotes
Select Structural 1000 1150 675 65 370 775 800,000 2 through 9, c:
No.I 2" to4" 850 1000 575 65 370 675 800,000 13. IS and 16) z
No.2 thick 700 825 375 65 370 575 700,000 :;;
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 425 475 225 65 370 375 600,000 0
Appearance wider 850 1000 575 65 370 825 800,000 :II
s::
Select Structural Beams and 900 - 600 60 370 600 700,000 m
No.I Stringers 750 - 500 60 370 500 700,000 c:
r=
Select Structural Posts and 850 - 575 60 370 650 700,000 c
No.I Timbers 675 - 450 60 370 550 700,000 z
G)
Select Decking 975 1100 - - - - 800,000 (")
Commercial 825 950 - - - - 700,000 0
c
m
.....
(I)
(I)
.....
c
PONDEROSA PINE-SUGAR PINE (PONDEROSA PINE-LODGEPOLE PINE) (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"1o max. m.c.) z
Select Structural 1400 1650 825 70 375 1050 1,200,000 ;;
No.I 2" to 4" 1200 1400 700 70 375 850 1,200,000 0
No.2 thick 1000 1150 575 70 375 675 1,100,000 :II
No.3 2" to 4" 550 625 325 70 375 400 1,000,000 s:
Appearance wide 1200 1400 700 70 375 1000 1,200,000 Ill
Stud 550 625 325 70 375 400 1,000,000 NLGA c
and ;=
725 825 425 70 375 775 1,000,000 c
Construction
Standard
2" to 4"
thick 400 450 225 70 375 625 1,000,000
WWPA
(See footnotes zCl
Utility 4" wide 200 225 100 70 375 400 1,000,000
2 through 13, ()
Select Structural 1200 1400 825 70 375 950 1,200,000 15 and 16) 0
No.I 2" to4" 1050 1200 700 70 375 850 1,200,000 c
thick 975 450
m
No.2 850 70 375 700 1,100,000
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 500 575 250 70 375 450 1,000,000
Select Structural Beams and 1100 - 650 65 375 750 1.100.000

No. I Stringers 925 - 450 65 375 625 1,100.000
No.2 600 - 300 65 375 400 900.000
Select Structural Posts and 1000 -
675 65 375 800 1,100,000
No. I Timbers 825 - 550 65 375 700 1.100,000 NLGA
No.2 475 - 325 65 375 325 900.000 and
- 1350 - - WWPA
Selected Decking Decking - - 1,200,000
Commercial Decking - 1150 - - - - 1,100,000 (See footnotes
2 through 131
Commercial Decking - 1250 used at 15"1o max. m.c.) 1,100,000
Select Decking 120020 1450 - - .175 - 1,300,000

Commercial 100020 1250 - - 375 - 1,100,000
(Cominued)
TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSEs-STRUCTURAL LUMBER- (Continued)
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES IN POUNOS PER SQUARE INCH
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDINGF• GRADING
RULES
SPECIES AND SIZE CLASS I· Single- Repetitive- Parallel to Horizontal Perpendicular Parallel to ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE FICATION member Uses member Uses GrainF, Shear Fv to Grain Fc_;_21 Grain Fe E21 GRADED
RED MAPLE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19o/c max. m.c.)
Standard Framing 550 625 325 105 615 750 1,300,000
Utility 250 300 150 105 615 500 1,300,000
2" to 4" thick,
4"wide
No.I Light 1650 1900 975 105 615 1000 1,700,000
No.2 Framing 1350 1550 800 105 615 800 1,500,000
No.3 750 875 450 105 615 500 1,300,000 NELMA ....CD
Appearance 2" to 4" thick, 1650 1900 975 105 615 1200 1,700,000 (See footnotes
Stud 2"to4" wide 750 875 450 105 615 500 1,300,000
2 through91
....
CD
Select Structural Structural 1650 1900 1100 105 615 1150 1,700,000 c
No. I Joists and 1400 1650 950 105 615 1000 1,700,000
z
No.2 Planks 1150 1350 600 105 615 850 1,500,000
;;
No.3 2" to 4" thick, 800 350 105 615 550 1,300,000
0
675 JJ
Appearance 5" and wider 1400 1650 950 105 615 1200 1,700,000 s:
Stud 675 800 350 105 615 550 1,300,000 ID
Select Structural Beams and 1500 875 100 615 900 1,500,000 !;;
No. I Stringers 1250 625 100 615 750 1,500,000 r-
c
No.2
Select Structuntl Posts and
800
1400
400
925
100
100
615
615
475
950
1,200,000
I ,500,000
z
C)
No. I Timbers 1150 750 100 615 825 1,500,000 0
No.2 650 425 100 615 375 1,200,000 0
c
m
....
CD
....
CD
c
z
::;;
0
:c
RED OAK (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.) 3:
Construction Light 875 1000 525 85 820 850 1,100,000 Ill
Standard Framing 500 575 300 85 820 700 1,100,000 c
Utility 225 275 125 85 820 450 1,100,000 r=
c
2" to 4" thick,
4"wide z
Select Structural
No. I
Structural
Light
1750
1500
2000
1700
1000
875
85
85
820
820
1200
925
1,400,000
1,400,000
"0
(')
No.2 Framing 1200 !400 725 85 820 750 1,200,000 c

No.3 675 775 400 85 820 450 1,100,000 m
Appearance 2" to 4" thick, 1500 1700 875 85 820 1100 1,400,000
Stud 2" to4" wide 675 775 400 85 820 450 1,100,000 NELMA
(See footnote;
No. I Joists and 1300 !450 850 85 820 925 1,400,000 2through9)
No.2 Planks 1050 !200 550 85 820 775 1,200,000
No.3 2" to 4" thick, 625 700 325 85 820 500 1,100,000
Stud 625 700 325 85 820 500 1,100,000
No. I Stringers 1150 550 80 820 700 1,200,000
No.2 725 375 80 820 450 1,000,000
No. I Timbers 1000 675 80 820 775 1,200,000
No.2 575 400 80 820 350 1,000,000
(Continued)
TABLj: NO. 25·A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
GRADING
Com pres· Com pres· RULES
Tension sion per· sion MODULUS
SIZE Single· Repetitive· Parsllel Horizontal pendicular Parsllel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI- member member toGrsin Shear to Grain to Grsin ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv Fc.l. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
RED PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190Jo max. m.c.)
No.I 1200 1350 700 70 440 825 1,300,000
2" to 3"
No.2 975 1100 575 70 440 650 1,200,000
thick 440
No.3 525 625 325 70 400 1,000,000
2" to 4"
Appearance 1200 1350 700 70 440 975 1,300,000
wide
Stud 525 625 325 70 440 400 1,000,000
Construction 2" to 4" 700 800 400 70 440 750 1,000,000

Standard thick 400 450 225 70 440 600 1,000,000 NLGA
Utility 4" wide 175 225 100 70 440 400 1,000,000
(See footnotes
Select Structural 2" to4" 1200 1350 775 70 440 900 1,300,000 2 through 9,
No.I thick 1000 1150 675 70 440 825 1,300,000 11, 13, c:
No.2 5" and 825 950 425 70 440 675 1,200,000 15 and 16) z
No. 3 and Stud wider 500 550 250 70 440 425 1,000,000
;;
Appearance 1000 1150 675 70 440 975 1,300,000 0
JJ
s:
III
No.I Stringers 875 - 450 65 440 600 1,100,000
s:r
!2
No.I Timbers 800 - 550 65 440 675 1,100,000 zG)
Select Decking 1150 1350 - - 440 - 1,300,000 0
Commercial 975 1100 - - 440 - 1,200,000 0
c
m
c:
z
:;;
0
::D
s::
SITKA SPRUCE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"1o max. m.c.) 111
Select Structural 1550 1800 925 75 435 1150 1,500,000 c:
No.I 2" to 4" 1350 1550 775 75 435 925 1,500,000
;=
c
No.2
No.3
thick
2" to 4"
1100
600
1250
700
650
350
75
75
435
435
725
450
1,300,000
1,200,000 z
C)
Appearance wide 1350 1500 750 75 435 1100 1,500,000
Stud 600 700 350 75 435 450 1,200,000 0
0
Construction 2" to 4" 800 925 475 75 435 825 1,200,000
c
m
Standard thick 450 500 250 75 435 675 1,200,000
Utility 4" wide 200 250 125 75 435 450 1,200,000 WCLIB
(See footnotes
Select Structural 1350 1550 900 75 435 1000 1,500,000 2 through 9,
No.I 2" to 4" 1150 1300 775 75 435 925 1,500,000
thick 13, 15 and 16)
No.2 925 1050 500 75 435 775 1,300,000
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 525 600 1:75 75 435 500 1,200,000

No.I Stringers 1000 - 500 70 435 675. 1,300,000

No.I Timbers 925 - 600 70 435 750 1,300,000

Commercial Dex 1100 1250 - - 435 - 1,300,000
w (Continued)
N
w
TABLE NO. 25·A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Contlnued)

EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING F0 GRADING
Compres· CompntS· RULES
Tension slonper· sion MODULUS
SIZE So ogle· Repetitive· Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIH member member to Grain Shear to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, F. Fc.l. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
SOUTHERN PINE (Surfaced at 15"1o moisture content, K.D. Used at 15"1o max. m.c.)
Dense Select Structural 2500 2900 1500 105 660 2100 1,900,000
No.I 1850 2100 1050 105 565 1450 1,800,000
No. I Dense 2" to 4" 2150 2450 1250 105 660 1700 1,900,000
No.2 thick 1550 1750 900 95 565 1150 1,600,000
No.2 Dense 2" to4" 1800 2050 1050 95 660 1350 1,700,000
No.3 wide 850 975 500 95 565 675 1,500,000
No.3 Dense 1000 1150 575 95 660 800 1,500,000
Stud 850 975 500 95 565 675 1,500.000
SPIB
(See footnotes
Construction 2" to4" 1100 1250 650 105 565 1300 1,500,000 3, 4, 9, 13,
Standard thick 625 725 375 95 565 1050 1,500,000 c
Utility 4" wide 275 300 175 95 565 675 1,500,000 IS, 16,
18 and 19)
.,~
Select Structural 2150 565 1,800,000
0
Dense Select Structural
1850
2500
1200 95
660
1600 ::c
2200 1450 95 1850 1,900,000 3:
No.I 1600 1850 1050 95 565 1450 1,800,000 III
No. I Dense 2" to4" 1850 2150 1250 95 660 1700 1,900,000 c
No.2
No.2 Dense
thick
5" and
1300
1550
1500
1750
675
800
95
95
565
660
1200
1400
1,600,000
1,700,000
r=0
No.3
No.3 Dense
wider 750
875
875
1000
400
450
95
95
565
660
725
850
1,500,000
1,500,000
zCl
Stud 800 900 400 95 565 725 1,500,000 (')
0
0
m
Dense Standard Decking 2"to4" 2150 2450 1250 105 660 1700 I ,900,000
Select Decking thick 1550 1750 900 95 565 1150 1.600,000
Dense Select Decking 2" and wider 1800 2050 1050 95 660 1350 I .700,000
Commercial Decking Decking 1550 1750 900 95 565 1150 1.600,000 c:
z
Dense Commercial
1,700,000
:;;
Decking 1800 2050 1050 95 660 1350 0
Dense Structural 86 2"to4" 2800 3250 1900 165 660 2300 1,900,000
SPIB ::c
Dense Structural 72 thick 2400 2750 1600 135 660 1950 1,900,000 (See footnotes 3:
Dense Structural 65 2150 2450 1450 125 660 1750 1,900,000 4, 9, 15, 16, Ill
KD-15orMC-15 18and 19) s:r
Industrial 86 KD 2400 2750 1600 160 415 1950 I ,800,000 c
Dense Ind. 86 KD 2800 3250 1900 160 475 2300 1,900,000 z
G)
Industrial 72 KD I" to 4" thick 2050 2350 1350 135 415 1650 I .800,000
Dense Ind. 72 KD 2400 2750 1600 !35 475 1950 1,900,000 0
Industrial 65 KD 1850 2100 1200 125 415 1500 1.800,000 0
Dense Ind. 65 KD 2150 2450 1400 125 475 1750 1,900,000 c
m
SOUTHERN PINE (Surfaced dry. Used at 19'7c max. m.c.)
Select Structural 2000 2300 1150 100 565 1550 I ,700,000
Dense Select Structural 2350 2700 1350 100 660 1800 1,800,000
No. I 2"to4" 1700 1950 1000 100 565 1250 1,700,000
No. I Dense thick 2000 2300 1150 100 660 1450 I ,800,000
No.2 2"to4" 1400 1650 825 90 565 975 1,600,000
No.2 Dense wide 1650 1900 975 90 660 1150 1.600.000
No.3 775 900 450 90 565 575 I ,400,000 SPIB
No.3 Dense 925 1050 525 90 660 675 I ,500.000 (See foolnolfs
Stud 775 900 450 90 565 575 1.400.000
2,4, 9, 13,
Construction 2"to4" 1000 1150 600 100 565 1100 1,400,000 15, 16,
Standard thick 575 675 350 90 565 900 1.400.000 18and 19)
Utility 4"wide 275 300 150 90 565 575 1.400,000
Select Structural 1750 2000 1150 90 565 1350 I .700.000
Dense Select Structural 2050 2350 1300 90 660 1600 1.800.000
No. I 2" to4" 1450 1700 975 90 565 1250 1.700.000
No. I Dense thick 1700 2000 1150 90 660 1450 1.800.000
No.2 5" and 1200 1400 625 90 565 1000 I .600.000
;o.;o. 2 Den>e wider 1400 1650 725 90 660 1200 1.600.000
No.3 700 800 350 90 565 625 1.400.000
No.3 Den'e 825 925 425 90 660 725 1.500.000
Stud 725 850 350 90 565 625 1,400.000
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSEs-STRUCTURALLUMBER-(Continued)
Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural lumber-VISUAL GRADING
(Normal loading. See also Section 2504.)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb GRADING
RULES
SPECIES AND SIZE CLASS I· Sing I&- Repetitiv&- Parallel to Horizontal Perpendicular Parallel to ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE FICATION member Uses member Uses GrainF1 Shear Fv to Grain Fc_21 Grain Fe E21 GRADED
Dense Standard Decking 2"to4" 2000 2300 1150 100 660 1450 1,800,000
Select Decking thick 1400 1650 825 90 565 975 1,600.000
Dense Select Decking 2" and wider 1650 1900 975 90 660 1150 1.600,000
Commercial Decking Decking 1400 1650 825 90 565 975 1,600.000
Dense Commercial
Decking Decking 1650 1900 975 90 660 1150 1.600.000
Dense Structural 86 2" to4" 2600 3000 1750 155 660 2000 1.800.000
Dense Structural 72 thick 2200 2550 1450 130 660 1650 1.800.000
Dense Structural 65 2000 2800 1300 I 15 660 1,800.000 SPIB
1500
(See footnotes
KD-19 or S-Dry 3,4,9,13,
Industrial 86 2250 2600 1500 155 415 1700 1,700.000
Dense Ind. 86 2600 3000 1750 155 475 2000 1.800.000
15, 16, 17,
Industrial 72 1" to 4" thick 1900 2200 1250 130 415 1400 1.700.000 18andl91
Dense Ind. 72 2200 2550 1450 130 475 1650 1.800,000 c:
Industrial 65 1700 1950 1100 115 415 1250 1.700.000 z
Dense Ind. 65 2000 2300 1300 115 475 1500 1.800.000 :;;
0
SOUTHERN PINE (Surfaced green. Used any condition.) JJ
Select Structural 1600 1850 925 95 375 1050 1.500.000 s::
Dense Select Structural 1850 2150 1100 95 440 1200 1.600.000 Ill
No.1 21/2'' to4" 1350 1550 800 95 375 825 1.500.000 c:
No. 1 Dense thick 1600 1800 925 95 440 950 1.600.000 r=
No.2 21:2" to 4" 1150 1300 675 85 375 650 1.400.000 c
No.2 Dense wide 1350 1500 775 85 440 750 1.400.000 z
G)
No.3 625 725 375 85 375 400 1.200.000
No.3 Dense 725 850 425 85 440 450 1.300.000 0
Stud 625 725 375 85 375 400 1.200.000 0
c
m
Construction 12'12"to4" 825 925 475 95 375 725 1.200.000 c:
Standard thick 475 525 275 85 375 600 1.200.000 ~
Utility 4" wide I 200 I 259
I 125 I 85 I 375 I 400 I 1.200.000 I I '11
0
Select Structural 1400 1600 900 85 375 900 1.500.000 JJ
Dense Select Structural 1600 1850 1050 85 440 1050 1.600.000 3:
No. I 1200 1350 775 85 375 825 1.500,000 CD
No. I Dense 2112" to 4" 1400 1600 925 85 440 950 I ,600.000
No.2 thick 975 1100 85 375 675 1.400.000
5
500 r
No.2 Dense 5" and 1150 1300 600 85 440 800 1.400,000 c
No.3 wider 550 650 300 85 375 425 I ,200.000 z
No.3 Dense
Stud
Dense Standard Decking 2'12''to4
650
575
1600
750
675
1800
350
300
925
85
85
95
440
375
440
475
425
950
I ,300,000
1.200,000
1.600.000 SPIB
"c
0
0
Select Decking thick 1150 !300 675 85 375 650 I ,400.000 (See footnotes m
Dense Select Decking 2" and wider 1350 1500 775 85 440 750 1.400,000
3,4,9,13,
Commercial Decking Decking 1150 !300 675 85 375 650 1.400.000
Dense Commercial 15, 16, 17,
Decking 1350 1500 775 85 440 750 1.400,000 18and 19)
No. I SR 1350 - 875 110 375 775 1.500.000
No. I Dense SR 5" and 1550 - 1050 110 440 925 1,600,000
No.2 SR thicker 1100 - 725 95 375 625 1.400.000
No. 2 Dense SR 1250 - 850 95 440 725 1.400.000
Dense Structural 86 2112" and 2100 2400 1400 145 440 1300 I ,600.000
Dense Structural 72 thicker 1750 2050 1200 120 440 1100 1.600.000
Dense Structural 65 1600 !800 1050 110 440 1000 1.600.000
MC over 19o/c
Industrial 86 1800 2050 1200 140 270 1150 I ,500.000
Dense Ind. 86 2100 2400 1400 140 315 1300 1.600.000
Industrial 72 2112'' and 1500 1750 1000 120 270 950 1.500.000
Dense Ind. 72 thicker 1750 2050 1200 120 315 1100 1.600.000
Industrial 65 1350 1500 900 110 270 850 1.500.000
Dense Ind. 65 1600 1800 1050 110 315 1000 1.600.000
(Continued)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fo
GRADING
Com pres· Compres·
Tension slon per· slon MODULUS RULES
SIZE Single· Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, F. Fc-1. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
SPRUCE-PINE-FIR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)

No.I 2" to 4" 1200 1400 725 70 425 875 1,500,000
No.2 thick 1000 1150 600 70 425 675 1,300,000
No.3 2" to 4" 550 650 325 70 425 425 1,200,000
Appearance wide 1200 1400 700 70 425 1050 1,500,000
Stud 550 650 325 70 425 425 1,200,000
Construction 2" to 4" 725 850 425 70 425 775 1,200,000

Standard thick 400 475 225 70 425 650 1,200,000 NLGA
2through9,
11, 13, c
No.I 2" to 4" 1050 1200 700 70 425 875 1,500,000
!Sand 16)
z
No.2 thick 875 1000 450 70 425 725 1,300,000 :;;
No.3 and Stud 5" and 500 575 275 70 425 450 1,200,000 0
Appearance wider 1050 1200 700 70 425 1050 1,500,000 :D
s::
Select Structural Beams and 1100 - 650 65 425 775 1,300,000 Ill
No.I Stringers 900 - 450 65 425 625 1,300,000 c
r=c
No.I Timbers 850 - 550 65 425 700 1,300,000 z
G)
Select Decking 1200 1400 - - 425 - 1,500,000 0
Commercial 1000 1150 - - 425 - 1,300,000 0
c
m
....CD
....CD
WESTERN CEDARS (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"1o max. m.c.) c:
WESTERN CEDARS (NORTH) z
Select Structural ISOO 1750 875 75 425 1200 1,100,000 ;;
No.I 2" to 3" 1300 1500 750 75 425 950 1,100,000 0
::0
No.2
No.3
thick
2" to4"
1050
600
1200
675
625
350
75
75
425
425
750
450
1,000,000
900,000
s::
Appearance 425 NLGA, ttl
wide 1300 1500 750 75 1100 1,100,000 c:
Stud 600 675 350 75 425 450 900,000 WCLIB,
i=
and c
Construction
Standard
2" to 4"
thick
77S
42S
875
500
450
250
75
75
425
425
850
700
900,000
900,000
WWPA
(See footnotes
z
G)
Utility 4" wide n> 225 125 75 425 450 900,000
2 through 9, 0
II, 12 and 13) 0
Select Structural 1300 1500 825 75 425 1050 1,100,000 c
No.I 2" to4" 1100 1300 75 425 950 1,100,000 m
750
No.2 thick 92S 1050 475 75 425 800 1,000,000
No. 3 and Stud s· and S2S 625 275 75 425 500 900,000
Select Structural Beams and 1150 - 675 70 425 875 1,000,000 NLGAand
No.I Stringers 925 - 475 70 425 725 1,000,000 WCLffi
(See footnolfs
Select Structural Posts and 1050 - 700 70 425 900 1,000,000 2through9,
No.I Timbers 850 - 575 70 425 800 1,000,000 l1 and 12)
Select Dex Decking 1200 1400 - - 425 - 1,100,000 WCLIB

(See footnotes
Commercial Dex 1050 1200 - - 425 - 1,000,000 2 through 9)
NLGA
Select 1200 1400 - - 425 - 1,100,000 (See footnotes
Commercial Decking 1050 1200 - - 425 - 1,000,000 2 throu~h 9
and I )
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued)
w
w Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber-VISUAL GRADING
0
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING F• GRADING
Compras· Compras· RULES
Tension slon per- sion MODULUS
SIZE Single- Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendicular Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses uses F, Fv F0 .l. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED

No. I Stringers 975 - 475 70 425 725 1,000,000
No.2 625 - 325 70 425 475 800,000
Select Structural 1100 - 725 70 425 925 1,000,000

No.I Posts and - 425 800 1,000,000 WWPA
875 600 70
Timbers - 375 800,000
No.2 500 350 70 425 (See footnotes
2 through 10)
Commercial Decking - 1200 - - - - 1,000,000 ....
CD
CD
Selected Decking Decking - 1550 (Surfaced at 150Jo max. m.c. and 1,100,000 .....
Commercial Decking - 1300 used at 150Jo max. m.c.) 1,000,000 c:
WESTERN HEMLOCK (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at I'JU!c max. m.c.)
z
WESTERN HEMLOCK (NORTH)
NLGA =n
1800 2100 1050 90 410 1450 1,600,000 (See footnote 0
Select Structural :II
2" to 4" 1550 1800 900 90 410 1150 1,600,000 Ill
No.I
thick 1300 1450 750 90 410 900 1,400,000 s:::
No.2 WCLIB [II
No.3 2" to 4" 700 800 425 90 410 550 1,300,000
Appearance wide 1550 1800 900 90 410 1350 1,600,000 and 5
700 800 425 90 410 550 1,300,000 WWPA r
Stud c
Construction 2" to 4" 925 1050 550 90 410 1050 1,300,000
(See footnotes
2 through 9,
zG'>
Standard thick 525 600 300 90 410 850 1,300,000 13, IS and 16!
Utility 4" wide 250 275 150 90 410 550 1,300,000 0
0
c
m
......
...
II)
II)
c
z
=n
0
JJ
:!:
Select Structural 1550 1800 1050 90 410 1300 1,600,000 m
2" to4" WCLIB,
No. I 1350 1550 900 90 410 1150 1,600,000 WWPA c
No.2
No. 3 and Stud
thick
5" and
1100
650
1250
750
515
325
90
90
410
410
975
625
1,400,000
1,300,000
(See footnotes
2 through 9,
r=c
Appearance wider 1350 1550 900 90 410 1350 1,600,000 13, 15 and 16) zC)
Select Structural Beams and 1400 - 825 85 410 1000 1,400,000 (')
No.I Stringers 1150 - 575 85 410 850 1,400,000 0
WCLIB
c
Select Structural Posts and 1300 - 875 85 410 1100 1,400,000 m
No.I Timbers 1050 - 700 85 410 950 1,400,000 (See footnotes
2 through 9)
Commercial Dex 1300 1450 - - 410 - 1,400,000
No. I Stringers 1150 - 575 85 410 850 1,400,000
No.2 750 - 375 85 410 550 1,100.000

Posts and
No. I Timbers 1050 - 700 85 410 950 I ,400.000
No.2 600 - 400 85 410 425 1,100.000 WWPA
(See footnotes
Selected Decking Decking 1750 1,600,000
Commercial Decking 1450 1,400,000 2 through 10)
Selected Decking Decking 1900 (Surfaced at 15% max. m.c. 1,700,000

Commercial Decking 1600 and used at 15% max. m.c.) 1,500,000
(Continued)
...ww
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb GRADING
Tension sionper- sion MODULUS
SIZE Parallel UNDER
Single· Repetitive· Parallel Horizontal pendlcular OF
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv Fci_ 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
WESTERN WHITE PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
No. I 2" to 4" 1150 1300 675 65 375 875 1,400,000
No.2 thick 925 1050 550 65 375 675 1,300,000
No.3 2" to 4" 525 600 300 65 375 425 1,200,000
Appearance wide 1150 1300 650 65 375 1050 1,400,000
Stud 525 600 300 65 375 425 1,200,000
Construction 2" to 4" 675 775 400 65 375 775 1,200,000

Standard thick 375 425 225 65 375 650 1,200,000
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 65 375 425 1,200,000 NLGA
(See footnotes
Select Structural 1150 1300 T/5 65 375 975 1,400,000 2 through 9,
No.I 2"to4" 975 1150 650 65 375 875 1,400,000 c:
No.2 thick 800 925 425 65 375 725 1,300,000
ll, 13, z
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 475 550 250 65 375 450 1,200,000 IS and 16) =n
0
Appearance wider 975 1150 650 65 375 1050 1,400,000 JJ
s::
Select Structural Beams and 1050 - 600 60 375 775 1,300,000 aJ
No.I Stringers 850 - 425 60 375 625 1,300,000 !:
r
Select Structural Posts and 975 - 650 60 375 800 1,300,000 c
No.I Timbers 775 - 525 60 375 700 1,300,000 zCl
Select Decking liDO 1300 - - 375 - 1,400,000 0
Commercial 925 1050 - - 375 - 1,300,000 0
c
m
c
z
:;;
0
::D
s::
WHITE OAK (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
Construction Light 925 1050 550 110 800 925 800,000
.:; ~
Standard
Utility
Framing
2" to 4" thick,

525
250
600
275
300
150
110
110
800
800
750
500
800,000
800,000
!Ill. i
ii
4"wide
No.I Light 1550 1750 900 110 800 !050 1,100,000
No.2 Framing 1250 1450 750 110 800 800 900,000
No.3 700 800 400 110 800 500 800,000
Appearance 2" to 4" thick, 1550 1750 900 110 800 1200 1,100,000 NELMA
Stud 2" to4" wide 700 800 400 110 800 500 800,000 (See footootes
Select Structural Structural 1550 1800 1050 110 800 1150 1,100,000 2through9)
No.I Joists and 1350 1550 875 110 800 1050 1,100,000
No.2 Planks 1100 1250 575 110 800 850 900,000
No.3 2" to 4" thick, 650 725 325 110 800 550 800,000
Stud 650 725 325 110 800 550 800,000
No. I Stringers 1200 575 105 800 775 1,000,000
No.2 750 375 105 800 475 800,000
No. I Timbers 1050 700 105 800 825 1,000,000
No 2 600 400 105 800 400 800,000
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSEs-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued)
(Normal loading. See also Section 2504.)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb GRADING
Single- Tension sion per· sion MODULUS
SIZE Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendicular Parallel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI· member WHICH
member to Grain Shear to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses Fc.l. 21 E 21 GRADED
F, Fv Fe
WHITE WOODS (WESTERN WOODS) (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
(MIXED SPECIES) (WEST COAST WOODS)
No.I 2" to 4" 1150 1300 650 70 315 750 1,100,000
No.2 thick 925 1050 550 70 315 600 1,000,000
No.3 2" to 4" 525 600 300 70 315 375 900,000
Appearance wide 1150 1300 650 70 315 900 1,100,000
Stud 525 600 300 70 315 375 900,000
Construction 2" to 4"

thick
675 775 400 70 315 675 900,000 WWPA ....
~
Standard 375 425 225 70 315 550 900,000 (See footnotes
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 70 315 375 900,000 2 through 10,
13, 15 and 16) c:
Select Structural
2" to 4"
1150 1300 775 70 315 850 1,100,000 z
No.I
thick
975 1100 650 70 315 750 1,100,000 :;;
No.2 800 925 425 70 315 625 1,000,000 0
No. 3 and Stud s· and 475 550 250 70 315 400 900,000 ::0
Appearance wider 975 llOO 650 70 315 900 1,100,000 s::
Ill
Select Structural Beams and 1000 - 600 65 3!5 675 1.000,000 c:
No. I Stringers 850 - 425 65 315 550 1.000.000 r=c
No.2 550 -
275 65 315 800.000
350
z
G)
(')
0
c
m
...
'D
Select Structural 950 650

...
'D
Posts and - 65 315 700 1,000,000 c:
"'o. I Timbers 775 - 525 65 315 625 1,000,000 :z
i'io. 2 450 - 300 65 315 275 800,000 WWPA ;;
(See foolnoles 0
Selected Decking Decking - 1300 - - - - 1,100,000 2 through 10, :tJ
13, IS and 16)
s::
Ill
Selected Decking Decking - 1400 (Surfaced at 15"7o max. m.c. and 1,100,000 !:
Commercial Decking - 1150 used at 15% max. m.c.) 1,000,000 r
S!
YELLOW-POPLAR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19'7c max. m.c.) :z
G')
Select Structural 2" to 3" 1500 1700 875 80 420 1050 I ,500.000
(')
No. I thick 1250 1450 750 80 420 825 I ,500,000 0
No.2 2"to4" 1050 1200 625 75 420 650 I ,300.000 c
No.3 wide 575 675 350 75 420 400 I ,200.000 m
Stud 575 675 350 75 420 400 I ,200,000
Construction 2"to4" 750 875 450 80 420 750 I ,200,000 NHPMA,
Standard thick 425 500 250 75 420 625 1.200.000 (See footnote;
Utility 4" wide 200 225 125 75 420 400 1.200.000 I through9)
Select Structural 2"to4" 1300 1500 850 75 420 925 1.500.000
No. I thick 1100 1250 725 75 420 825 1.500.000
No.2 5" and 900 1050 475 75 420 700 1.300.000
No.3 wider 525 600 275 75 420 425 1.200.000
Appearance 1100 1250 725 75 420 1000 1.500.000
Stud 525 600 275 75 420 425 1.200.000
1
Where eastern spruce and balsam ftr are shipped in a combination, the tabulated values for balsam fir shall apply.
cThe design values shown in Table No. 25-A-1 are applicable to lumber that will be used under dry conditions such as in most covered structures.
For 2-inch- to 4-inch-thick lumber. the dry surfaced size shall be used. In calculating design values. the natural gain in strength and stiffness that
occurs as lumber dries has been taken into consideration as well as the reduction in size that occurs when unseasoned lumber shrinks. The gain
in load-carrying capacity due to increased strength and stiffness resulting from drying more than offsets the design effect of size reductions due
to shrinkage. For 5-inch and thicker lumber. the surfaced sizes also may be used because design values have been adjusted to compensate for any
loss in size by shrinkage which may occur.
(Continued)
1\,)
w FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-A-1 -(Continued) U1
w
en
JValues for Fb, F, and F, for the grades of Construction, Standard and Utility apply only to 4-inch widths.
4The values in Table No. 25-A-l for dimension 2 inches to 4 inches are based on edgewise use. Where such lumber is used flatwise, the recommended
...~
design values for extreme fiber stress in bending may be multiplied by the following factors:
WIDTH THICKNESS
2" 3" 4"
2 inches to 4 inches !.10 !.04 !.00
5 inches and wider !.22 !.16 l.ll
Values for decking may be increased by lO percent for 2-inch decking and 4 percent for 3-inch decking.
5When 2-inch- to 4-inch-thick lumber is manufactured at a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and used in a condition where the moisture content
does not exceed 15 percent, the design values shown in Table No. 25-A-l for surfaced dry and surfaced green may be multiplied by the following
factors:
EXTREME FIBER IN
TENSION
PARALLEL
HORIZONTAL
SHEAR
COMPRESSION
PERPENDICULAR
COMPRESSION
PARALLEL TO MODULUS OF
...
10
BENDINGFb TOGRAINFt Fv TO GRAIN Fe~ GRAIN Fe ELASTICITYE ...
10
!.08 !.08 !.05 !.00 !.!7* 1.05* c

~
'T1
0
::0
*For redwood use !.15 for F, and !.04 for E. s::
6When 2-inch- to 4-inch-thick lumber is designed for use where the moisture content will exceed 19 percent for an extended period of time, the values m
c
shown in Table No. 25-A-l shall be multiplied by the following factors: ;=
c
TENSION HORIZONTAL COMPRESSION COMPRESSION
z
G)
EXTREME FIBER IN PARALLEL SHEAR PERPENDICULAR PARALLEL TO MODULUS OF (')
BENDINGFb TOGRAINFt Fv TO GRAIN Fe- GRAIN Fe ELASTICITY E 0
c
0.86 0.84 0.97 0.67 0.70 0.97 m
....
7 CD
When lumber 5 inches thick and thicker is designed for use where the moisture content will exceed 19 percent for an extended period of time, the ....
CD
values shown in Table No. 25-A-l shall be multiplied by the following factors: c
z
:;;
TENSION HORIZONTAL COMPRESSION COMPRESSION 0
EXTREME FIBER IN PARALLEL SHEAR PERPENDICULAR PARALLEL TO MODULUS OF :II
BENDINGFb TOGRAINF1 Fv TO GRAIN Fe- GRAIN Fe ELASTICITY E :s:::
Ill
1.00 1.00 1.00 0.67 0.91 1.00 s:r
c
Rspecific horizontal shear values may be established by use of the following tabulation when length of split or size of check or shake is known and
no increase in them is anticipated. For California redwood, southern pine, Virginia pine-pond pine, or yellow poplar, the provisions in this footnote
z
G)
apply only to the following F, values: 80 psi, California redwood: 95 psi, southern pine (KD-15); 90 psi, southern pine (S-dry); 85 psi, southern (')
pine (S-green); 95 psi, Virginia pine-pond pine (KD-15 ); 90 psi, Virginia pine-pond pine (S-dry); 85 psi, Virginia pine-pond pine (KD-15 ); 90 psi, 0
c
Virginia pine-pond pine (S-dry); 85 psi, Virginia pine-pond pine (S-green); and 75 psi, yellow poplar. m
SHEAR STRESS MODIFICATION FACTOR
Multiply Multiply Multiply

Length of Split on Wide Face of 2" Tabulated F, Length of Split on Wide Face of 3" Tabulated F, Size of Shake• in 3" and Thicker Tabulated F,
Lumber (nominal): Value by: and Thicker Lumber (nominal): Value by: Lumber (nominal): Value by:
No split ................. No shake .................

:h by wide face ..........
-/4 by Wide face ..........
2.00
1.67
1.50
No split .................
1h by narrow face .........
I by narrow face .........
2.00
1.67
1.33
1I6 by narrow face ..........
1h by narrow face ..........
2.00
1.67
1.33
I by wide face ........... 1.33 J 1h by narrow face or mor~ 1.00 1h by narrow face or more ... 1.00
11h by wide face or more .. 1.00
*Shake is measured at the end between lines enclosing the shake and parallel 1u the wide face.
9
Stress-rated boards of nominal l-inch. 1 1/ 4-inch
and 1 1h-inch
thickness. 2 inches and wider. are permitted the recommended design values shown
for Select Structural, No. I, No.2, No.3, Construction, Standard, Utility. Appearance, Clear Heart Structural and Clear Structural grades as shown
in the 2-inch- to 4-inch-thick categories herein, where graded in accordance with the stress-rated board provisions in the applicable grading rules.
!Continued)
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-A-1 -(Continued)
10When decking is used where the moisture content will exceed 15 percent for an extended period of time, the tabulated design values shall be
multiplied by the following factors: extreme fiber in bending Fh - 0.79: modulus of elasticity E- 0.92.
11 Where lumber is graded under the NLGA values shown for Select Structural, No. l, No.2, No.3, and Stud grades are not applicable to 3-inch X
4-inch and 4-inch X 4-inch sizes.
12Lumber in the beam and stringer or post and timber size classification may be assigned different working stresses for the same grade name and
species based on the grading rules of the specific agency involved. It is therefore necessary that the grading rule agency be identified to properly
correlate permitted design stresses with the grademark.
13 Utility grades of all species may be used only under conditions specifically approved by the building official.
14 A horizontal shear F,. of 70 may be used for eastern white pine graded under the NHPMA and NELMA gradinlf rules.
15 Tabulated tension parallel to grain values for species 5 inches and wider, 2 inches to 4 inches thick (and 2 1 inches to 4 inches thick) size
2
classifications apply to 5-inch and 6-inch widths only, for grades of Select Structural, No. l. No. 2, No.3, Appearance and Stud (including dense
grades). For lumber wider than 6 inches in these grades, the tabulated F1 values shall be multiplied by the following factors:
GRADE
(2 inches to 4 inches thick, 5 inches and wider) Multiply tabulated F1 values by
(2112 inches to 4 inches thick, 5 inches and wider)
(Includes "Dense" grades) 5 inches and 6 inches wide 8 inches wide 10 inches and wider
c
Select Structural 1.00 0.90 0.80 ~
'TI
0
No. I, No. 2, No. 3 and Appearance 1.00 0.80 0.60 ::D
s::
Stud 1.00 m
c
i=
c
z
G)
0
0
c
m
...
CD
16 Design values for all species of Stud grade in 5-inch and wider size classifications apply to 5-inch and 6-inch widths only.
17 Repetitive
...
CD
member design values for extreme fiber in bending for southern pine grades of Dense Structural 86, 72 and 65 apply to 2-inch to 4-inch c
thicknesses only. z
18 When 2-inch-to 4-inch-thick southern pine lumber is surfaced dry or at 15 percent maximum moisture content (KD) and is designed for use where ;;
the moisture content will exceed 19 percent for an extended period of time, the design values in Table No. 25-A-1 for the corresponding grades 0
JJ
of 2 1/z-inch- to 4-inch-thick surfaced green southern pine lumber shall be used. The net green size may be used in such designs. 5:
19When 2-inch-to 4-inch-thick southern pine lumber is surfaced dry or at 15 percent maximum moisture content (KD) and is designed for use under
Ill
dry conditions, such as in most covered structures, the net dry size shall be used in design. For other sizes and conditions of use, the net green size 5
may be used in design. r
c
20Va1ues apply only to ponderosa pine graded under the NLGA grading rules.
21 The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply. z
G)
0
0
c
m
TABLE ~0. 25-A-2-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR MACHINE STRESS RATED STRUCTURAL LUMBER
(Values listed are for normal loading conditions.s See also Section 2504 B)
Design values In pounds square inch9
Extreme fiber in bending Fb1 Tension Compression
Grading Rules Single- Repetitive- parallel parallel Modulus
arade (See footnotes Size member member to grain to grain of
Designationt o 1,2,3,4) Classification uses uses Ft Fe elasticity E
900f-l.OE 3,4 900 1050 350 725 1,000,000
1200f-1.2E I, 2, 3, 4 1200 1400 600 950 1,200,000
1350f-1.3E 2,4 1350 1550 750 107511 I ,300,000
1450f-1.3E I, 3, 4 1450 1650 800 1150 I ,300,000
1500f-1.3E 2 1500 1750 900 1200 1,300,000
1500f-1.4E I, 2, 3, 4 1500 1750 900 1200 1,400,000
1650f-1.4E 2 1650 1900 1020 1320 I ,400,000
1650f-1.5E I, 2, 3, 4 1650 1900 1020 1320 1,500,000
1800f-1.6E I, 2, 3, 4 Machine- 1800 2050 1175 1450 1,600,000
1950f-1.5E 2 rated 1950 2250 1375 1550 1.500,000
1950f-1.7E I, 2, 4 lumber 1950 2250 1375 1550 I ,700,000
2100f-1.8E I, 2, 3, 4 2"thick 2100 2400 1575 1700 1,800,000
or less
2250f-1.6E 2 2250 2600 1750 1800 I ,600,000
All widths
2250f-1.9E I, 2, 4 2250 2600 1750 1800 1,900,000
2400f-1.7E 2 2400 2750 1925 1925 1,700,000
2400f-2.0E
2550f-2.1E
I, 2, 3, 4
I, 2, 4
2400
2550
2750
2950
1925
2050
1925
2050
2,000,000
2,100,000 ...
co
2700f-2.2E I, 2, 3, 4
2
2700
2850
3100
3300
2150
2300
2150
2300
2,200,000
2,300,000
...
co
2850f-2.3E
I, 2 3000 3450 2400 2400 2,400,000
c
3000f-2.4E
3150f-2.5E 2 3150 3600 2500 2500 2,500,000 .,~
3300f-2.6E 2 3300 3800 2650 2650 2,600,000 0
::c
900f-l.OE I. 2, 3 900 1050 350 725 1,000,000 s::
900f-1.2E I, 2, 3 See 900 1050 350 725 1,200,000 tD
1200f-1.5E I, 2, 3 footnote 1200 1400 600 950 1,500,000 c
1350f-1.8E I, 2 5 1350 1550 750 1075 1,800,000 ;:::
1500 1750 900 1200 1,800,000 c
1500f-1.8E
1800f-2.1E
3
I, 2, 3 1800 2050 1175 1450 2,100,000 z
G)
1NLGA (')
2SPIB 0
3 WCLIB
c
m
4 WWPA
5 Sizeclassifications for these grades are:
NLGA-Machine-rated Lumber; 2 inches thick or Jess, all widths. c
SPIB-Machine-rated Lumber; 2 inches thick or Jess, all widths.
WCLIB-Machine-rated Joists; 2 inches thick or Jess, 6 inches and wider. ,~
6Stresses apply for lumber used at 19 percent maximum moisture content. Where moisture content exceeds 19 percent. the tabulated design values 0
JJ
shall be modified as specified in Section 2504 (c) 10. s::
7Tabulated extreme fiber in bending values Fh are applicable to lumber loaded on edge. When loaded flatwise, these values may be increased by
Ill
multiplying by the following factors: 5
r
3" 4" 5" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" c
Nominal width (in.)
z
G>
Factor 1.06 1.10 1.12 1.15 1.19 1.22 1.25 1.28
0
0
8 Footnotes Nos. I. 2, 9, II and 19 to Table No. 25-A-1 apply also to machine-stress-rated lumber. c
9 Design values for horizontal shear F,. and compression perpendicular to grain F, l. for lumber used under dry conditions are as follows: m
Lodgepole- White Woods-

Douglas I Douglas Western Ponderosa- Englemann
Southern Pine
Mixed
Fir-Larch Fir-South Hem-Fir Hemlock Sugar Pine Spruce Cedar KD S.DRY Speciest
Horizontal Shear F,
95 1 9o 75 90 70 70 75 95 90 70
Compression Perpendicular to Grain F,.l.. *
625 I 52o I 405 I 410 375 320 425 565 565 315
tGraded in accordance with the WCLIB and WWPA grading rules.
*The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply.
For other species, use values shown in Table No. 25-A-1 for visually graded lumber, No. 2 grade, for the appropriate species.
1
°For any given value of fiber stress in bending. Fh. the average modulus of elasticity,£, may vary depending on species, timber source and other
variables. TheE values included in thef-£ grade designations are those usually associated with each Fh level. Grade stamps may show higher or
lower E values (in increments of I 00,000 psi) if machine rating indicates the assignment is appropriate. When an E value associated with a
c.l designated F level is lower or higher than those listed, the tabulated h. F1 and F, values associated with the designatedfvalue are applicable. The
~ E for design ,hall be that associated with the E value on the grade stamp.
11 When graded un(Jer the WCLIB grading rules, values shall be I, I 00 psi.
TABlE NO. 25-B-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR CONSTRUCTION AND INDUSTRIAL SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD
(In Pounds per Square Inch-Normal Loading)
(To be used with section properties in Plywood-Design Specification-See U.B.C. Standard No. 25·9)
EXTERIOR A·B, B·B, B·C.
C·C (PLUGGED)
STRUCTURAL I C·D
(Use Group 1 Stresses)
STRUCTURAL II C·D
(Use Group 3 Slresses)
C·D SHEATHING
EXTERIOR A·A, A·C, C·C (Exlerior Glue)

ALL OTHER GRADES OF
SPECIES' STRUCTURAL I A·C. C·C ALL INTERIOR GRADES WITH INTERIOR INCLUDING
STRESS GROUP OF (Use Group I Slresses) EXTERIOR GLUE C·D SHEATHING
FACE PLY
Wet2 Dry3 Wet2 Dry3 Dry3
I. Extreme fiber stress

in bending lf'b) I 1430 2000 1190 1650 1650
Tension in plane of plies (F,) 2, 3 980 1400 820 1200 1200
Face grain parallel or ....
CD
perpendicular to span 4 940 1330 780 1110 1110 ....
CD
(at 45° to face grain use l16F1) c
2. Compression in plane of z
:;;
plies <Fcl I 970 1640 900 1540 1540 0
Parallel or perpendicular to 2 730 1200 680 1100 1100 :II
face grain 3 610 1060 580 990 990 s::
(at 45° to face grain use I /3 F,_) 4 610 1000 580 950 950 Ill
c
3. Shear in plane perpendicular to I 155 190 155 190 160 ;=
c
pliesF,"
Parallel or perpendicular to face grain 2, 3 120 140 120 140 120
z
G)
(at 45° to face grain use 2 Fv) 4 110 130 110 130 115 (")
0
c
m
4. Shear, rolling, in the Marine and ...
plane of plies
Parallel or perpendicular to
Structural I 63 75 63 75 ...
CD
CD
c:
face grain Structural II 49 56 49 56
(at 45• to face grain use I YJ FJ 44 53 44 53 ~
All Other5 48 Tl
5. Bearing (on face) I 210 340 210 340 340 0
JJ
Perpendicular to plane 2, 3 135 210 135 210 210 :s::
of plies 4 105 160 105 160 160 Ill
6. Modulus of elasticity I 1,500,000 1,800,000 1,500,000 1,800,000 1,800,000
c:
;=
In bending in plane of plies 2 1,300,000 1,500,000 1,300,000 1,500,000 1,500,000 c
Face grain parallel or
perpendi.:ular to ,pan
3 1,100,000
900,000
I ,200,000
1,000,000
1,100,000 1,200,000 1,200,000 zG'l
..j 900,000 1,000,000 1,000.000
(')
SPAN RATING 0
c
C·C and C·D Underlayment and C-C Plugged m
THICKNESS
(Inches) 120 16.0 20 0 24 0 32 16 4020 48 24 16 oc 20oc 24oc 48 oc
" 4 3 I
~, ~ 4' I
1'::". ].
4' I f--]
rc,,, 4' I 4' I
., 4' I 4' I
-·
., ,, 3•
~
J\. I
a. Thic~nc" not applicable to L ndcrla\ mcnt and C -C Plugged.

h. l- '" Group -' •tre"e' for Structural II.
c·. l •c Group 4 •trc"c' for L ndcrla' ment 'md C-C Plugged 24 on center.
'Sec l'.B.C Standard '\o. 2S-Y lor pi'" om! •pccic• group•. FmC-C. C-D L'ndcrl'" ment. and C-C Plugged. the combination ol •pan rating and panel
thick.JK'"" determine' the -..pc~.:Jc-.. gnn1p ,1Jld. thcrcfnrc. the --trc...,..., pennittcd. <-h in thL' aho\C tabk .
.=-\\'et condition of u . . c cnn·c,punJ..., til a rnor...turc content of 10 rerccnr or more.
~Dr: conditHHl l)r U'-C L'otTc . . pnnd-.. to ~l mni...,turc '-·ontcnt of Je,, than I h pcrccrlt.
-l.Scc l'.B.C StanLbrd '\n. ,2:;-lJ. SL'L"ti(lll .2::;_l)~l. fpr rn)\ j,jllll'- und~r \\hh..'h r
"trc''i...'' lllcl~ he !ll\._'fl'a,cd .
.:;Rcdu-:c '!!"C'-'l'" ~::; rcrL"Cnt fllf thrcc-Li~l'r ifnur-rl~ I ranch 0\C!".::.: 'in-:h thid·,
TABLE NO- 25-C-1 PART A-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 '
Members t~tressed principally in bending with load applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations
BE!iOING ABOUT X-X AXIS BENDING ABOUT Y· Y AXIS
Loaded Perpendicular Loaded Parallel
·I' ·I'
to Wide Faces of to Wide Faces of
Laminations Laminations
SPECIES AXIALLY LOADED

OUTER
COIIBINA· LAMINA- y
nON l
TIONSI
SYIIBOL19 CORE Extreme Aber in Bending Compression Perpendicular
LAMINA· to Grain Fc- .;:1
TIONS4 Fbxx
Horizontal
Sheer
Fvyyo
psi
(Formem-
berswilh
multipl•
Tension Compression Exlreme Compression piece Tension Compression Modulus
Zone Zone Horir.onta/ Modulus of Rberin Perpendicular Horizontal laminations Modulus of Parallel Para! lei ol
Stressed in Stressed in Compression Sheer Elasticity Bending517 to Grain Sheer which are Elasticity to Grain to Grain Elasticity
Tension522 lenslon& Tension Face Face F.,.. E,_,21 Fbyy Fc~yy>' Fvyy Eyy>1 F, Fe E21
psi psi psi psi psi x106psi psi psi psi :~~ X106psi psi psi x106psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 c
Visually Graded Western Species
z
=n
16F-VI DFIWW 560 7 ' 5607 !\ 14011! 23 1.) 950 155 130 65 1.1 675 975 II 0
:0
16F-V1 HfiHf
1600 800
5009 )]59 155 14 1150 375 135 70 1.) 875 1300 13 s::
16F-VJ Df/DF 56()71! 560 165 1.5 1450 560 145 75 1.5 950 1550 IS Ill
16F-V8 DFSIDFS 650 500 165 1.1 1100 500 145 75 1.1 815 1350 II
s:r
c
!6F-V4 DFINlWW
The following two combinations are Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrlalappearance.10
650 5607 9()918 1.524 900 155 130 65 1324 650 600 13 z
G)
1600 800
16F-V5 DF MJDF 650 5607 9()12 I6 1000 470 135 70 1.5 750 875 15 (")
0
c
m
.....
<D
<D
.....
The following two combinations are balanced and are Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide
equal capacity In both positive and negative bending. c:
z
I6F-V6 DF-DF
1600 !600
560~ ~ 560 7 165 1.5 1450 560 145 75 I4 950 1550 1.5 =n
!6F-V7 HFIHF 375'-~ 3759 !55 14 1200 375 !35 70 13 850 1350 IJ 0
:a
20F-VI Df;WW
f--
650 561)7 J4(l18 ~-- l ~~4 1000 255 !30 65 1.2!4 750 1000 1.2 s::
20F-V2 HFIHF I 3759 !55 1.5 1200 375 !35 70 14 950 1350 14 Ill
c:
20F-Vl DFIDF
L tJ5U 560' 165 1.6 1450 560 !45 75 1.5 1000 1550 1.5 r
2000 1000 0
20F-V4 DFIDF 59()78 5607
560
165
!55
1.6
1.5
1450
1300
560
375
145 75 1.6
14
!000 1550 16
14
z
G>
20F-VIO DFIHF 650 Ill 70 950 1500
(')
20F-VI I DFSIDFS 650 500 165 1.) 1400 500 145 75 II 900 1400 1.1
0
20F-VI2 ACIAC 560 560 190 1.5 1200 470 !65 80 1.4 900 1500 I4 0
m
The following two combinations are Intended for straight or sJightly cambered members for dry use and lndustrJsl appearance. 10
20F-V5 DFIN)WW 650 560 7 9()11 II! 1.6 1000 255 135 70 1.) 750 725 IJ
2000 1000
20F-V6 DF,MJDF I 650 560 7 90" 1.6 1000 470 135 70 1.5 775 900 15
The following three combinations are balanced and are intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide
equal capacity In both positive and negative bending.
20F-V7 DFIDF 650 650 165 1.6 1450 560 145 75 I6 1000 1600 1.6
20F-V8 Df'DF 2000 2000 590 7 ~ 59078 165 1.7 1450 560 145 75 1.6 !000 1600 1.6
20F-V9 HFIHF 5009 5009 155 u 1400 375 135 70 14 975 1400 1.4
22F-VI DFIWW 650 560 7 14011! 1.62-+ 1050 255 !30 65 !324 850 I 100 Il
22F-V2 HFIHF 5009 5()()'1 155 1.5 1250 375 !35 70 14 950 1350 14
2200 I 100
22F- VJ DF!DF 650 561)9 165 I7 1450 560 !45 75 1.6 !050 1500 16
22F-V4 Df'Df 59()7 X 560 7 165 17 1450 560 145 75 1.6 !000 1550 16
22F-VIO DFIDFS 650 560 7 165 16 1600 500 145 75 1.) !000 1400 IJ
The following two combinations are intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance.1o
22F-\'5 DFNJWW 650 5607 9()11 I~ I 6~"' I 100 255 ill 75 1.42-1 800 725 14
2200 1100
22F-V6 OF MJDF 650 560' 9()12 17 1250 470 !35 75 1.6 900 925 I6
w
....
U1
(Continued)
TABLE N<'· 25-C-1 PART A-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION'' '-(Continued)
Members stressed principally in bending with load applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations
BENOfHG ABOUT X-X AXIS BENDING ABOUT Y-Y AXIS
Lood;d Po<penclicular Loaded ParalkK
·i'
to Wide Faces of to Wide Feces of
·«'
Lamirtalion• Laminations
AXIALLY LOADED
SPfCIES
OUTER
COIIBINA- LAMINA· y
TION l
TIONSI
SYIIBOL19 CORE Extreme Fiber in Bending Compression Alrpendlcuiar
LAIIIHJI.. Fbu to Grain Fc.lx..21
TIONS4
Horizontal
Shear
F'YY"
psi
(Formem-
bet's with
multiP'e-
Tension
Zone
Com!'.:'ion Horizontal Modulus of
Extreme Compression
Aber in Perpendicular Horizontal
piece
laminations Modulus of
Tension
Parallel
Compression
Parallel
Modulus
of
StreuecS in Stressed in Compression Shear Elasticity Bending517 to Grain Shear which are Elasticity to Grain to Grain Eisslicity
TensionS 22 Tensions Tension Flee Face F.,.. Eu21 Fbyy Fc-yy21 Fvyy Eyy>1 Fr Fe f21
not edge
1 2
psi
3
psi
4
psi
5
psi
6
psi
7
xiOOpsi
8
psi
9
psi
10
psi
11
glued)20
12
x106psi
13
psi
14
psi
15
X 106psi
16
....
(D
Visually Graded Western Species-( Continued) ....
(D
The following three combinations are balanced and are Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide c
equal capacity in both positive and negative bending. z
22F-V7 DFiDF 650 650 165 u 1450 560 1~5 75 16 1100 1650 1.6 ;;
0
22F-V8 DF;DF 2200 2200 590~< 59071< 165 17 1450 560 145 75 1.6 1050 1650 1.6 :II
22F-V9 HFIHF ~(\)'1 500'1 155 J.j 1250 )75 1_15 70 1.4 975 1400 u :s::
CD
24F-VI DFIWW I 650 650 1402' 1.72-< 1250 255 1)0 70 1.~24 1000 1300 1.4
s:r
24F-V2 HFIHF 5004 500'1 155 u 1250 375 Ll5 70 I4 950 1300 u c
24F-V3 DFDF 2400 1200 650 560" 165 1.8 1500 560 145 75 16 1100 1600 16 zG>
24F-V4 Df,DF 650 650 165 18 1500 560 J.t5 75 16 1150 /650 16
(")
24F-V5 Df,HF 650 650 155 17 1350 171 i.\0 70 15 1100 1450 15 0
c
24F-Vi I Df,DFS 650 5!i 165 17 1600 500 145 75 14 1150 1700 14 m
c
z
:;;
The following two combinations are Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance.10 0
DFIN3WW 5607
:0
24F-V6
2400 1200
650 9()11 18 23 1.724 1200 255 140 70 1.524 950 800 l.i s:
24F-V7 DFIM3DF 650 5607 9012 1.7 1250 470 135 70 1.6 900 950 1.6 m
The folkMing three comtMnatlona are balanced and are Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide !:
equal capacity in both positive and negative bending. r
c
24F-V8
24F-V9
DF/DF
HFIHF 2400 2400
650
5()()9
650
5()()9
165
155
1.8
1.5
1450
1500
560
375
145
135
75
70
1.6
1.4
1100
1000
1650
1450
1.6
u
z
G)
(')
24F-VIO DFIHF 650 650 155 1.8 1400 375 140 70 1.6 1150 1600 16
0
Wet-use factors2 0.8 0.8 0.667 C.667 0.875 0.833 0.8 0.667 0.875 0.875 0.833 0.8 0.73 0.833 c
m
E-Rated \r\lestern Species
16F-EI WWIWW 25513 25513 1401823 1.324 1050 255 125 65 1.224 725 925 1.2
16F-E215 HF/HF 1600 800 50014 50014 155 1.4 1250 375 135 70 1.] 825 1200 lJ
16F-E3 DF!DF 650 650 165 1.6 1450 560 145 75 1.5 975 1600 1.5
The following two combinations are Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and Industrial appearance.10
16F-E4 DFIN3V.'W 650 650 9()111823 L624 900 255 130 65 IJ" 675 675 lJ
1600 800
16F-E5 DFIM3DF 650 650 9()12 1.6 1050 470 135 70 1.5 700 900 1.5
The following two combinations are balanced and are Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide
equal capacity in both positive and negative bending.
16F-E6 DFIDF 650 650 165 1.6 1500 560 145 75 1.5 1000 1600 15
1600 1600
16F-E715 HFIHF 50014 50014 155 1.4 1250 375 135 70 1.] 850 1150 lJ
20F-El WWIWW 25513 25515 14018 23 1.624 1100 255 125 65 IJ" 800 1050 lJ
20F-E215 HF!Hf 50014 50014 155 1.6 1400 375 135 70 14 9.:!5 1550 I4
2000 1000
20F-E3 DF/DF 650 650 165 I7 1550 560 145 75 1.6 1050 1650 16
20F-E8 Es;ES 450 450 145 1.5 1400 300 125 65 14 800 1000 14
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-C-1 PART A--ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 •-(Continued)
Members stressed principally In bending with load applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations
BCNDING ABOUT X-X AXIS BCNDING ABOUT Y-Y AXIS
~ Plrpondlcu* Loldod Pontlol
·I' ·I'
toWidefocoool toWidefocooof
i.Mnlnatlonl laminations

OUTER
COIIBINA-
1'10H
SYIIBOL19
LAMINA-
TIONSI
CORE Extreme Aber In Bending
y
•
Compression l'lrpondlcular
LA.IIINA- to Grain Fc-1~1
TIONS4 '•"" Horlzonlal
Shoar
Fvyyo
psi
(For mom-
berswitt't
multiple-
Tension Comf.:"lon Extreme Compression piece Tension Compression Modulus
Zone Horizontal Modulus of Fiber in Perpendicular Horizontal laminations Modulus of Parallel Parallel of
Stroaedln Stroaedln Compreulon Shoar Elasticity Bending517 to Grain Shear which are Elasticity to Grain to Grain Elasticity
TensionS 22
psi
Tension& TenaionFKe
psi psi
flee
psi
F.,..
psi
f.u21
x106psi
Fbyy
psi
Fc~YY''
psi
F'YY
psi ;'!..t~
Eyy>t
x106psi
Fr
psi
Fe
psi
f21
x106psi ...
(I)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B 9
E-Rated Western Species-( Continued)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
...
(I)
c
20F-E4 DFIN3WW
The following two combinations are Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance.1o
650 650 9()11 11123 1 624 1100 255 130 65 1.424 800 700 14 ,~
2000 1000 0
20F-E5 DFIN3DF 650 650 9()12 I7 1300 470 135 70 1.6 m 975 1.6 Jl
The following two combinations are balanced and are Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide s::
equal capacity In both positive and negative bending. ttl
20F-Eii Df'DF 650 650 165 1.7 1600 560 145 75 1.6 1150 1650 1.6 c
20F-E7I5 HFIHF
2000 2000
50014 50Ql4 155 1.6 1500 375 135 70 1.4 1050 1550 1.4
r=
c
22F-El DFIDF 650 650 165 1.7 1550 560 145 75 1.6 1050 1600 1.6 z
G)
2200 1100
22F-E2Is HFtHF 50Ql4 50014 155 1.6 1400 375 135 70 I4 950 1400 14
0
0
c
m
The following two combinations are Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance.11 ...
CD
22F-EJ OFINJWW
OF,NJOF
2200 1100
650 650 9()11 18 !~ 1.7! 4 1250 255 135 70 I ~!4 825 750 1.4
...
CD
22F-E4 650 650 9()10 1.8 1350 -170 135 70 1.6 950 950 1.6 c:
The following two combinations are balanced and are intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide z
equal capacity in both positive and negative bending. ::;;
22F-E5 OFIOF 650 650 165 1.7 1650 560 1.5 75 1.6 1100 1650 1.6 0
2200 2200 :rJ
22f-E615 HFIHF 5()()14 5()()14 155 1.7 1550 375 135 70 1.5 1050 1500 1.5 s::
24F-EI OFIOF 650 650 165 18 1550 560 1.5 75 1.6 1100 1600 1.6 Ill
c:
24F-E2" HF1HF 5()()14 5()()14 155 1.7 1300 375 135 70 I5 850 1400 1.5 r
0
24F-E3
24F-E4
OFIHF
OFIOF
2400 1200
650
650
5()()14
650
155
165
1.8
18
1500
1650
375
560
135
1.5
70
75
1.5
1.7
1050
1100
1550
1700
1.5
1.7
z
G)
24F-E5 Of/OF 650 650 165 1.8 1650 560 145 75 1.6 1100 1550 1.6 0
0
24F-E615 HF·WW 5()()14 5()()14 14011( :3 I 8" 1100 255 130 65 1.4'4 750 1250 14 0
The following three combinations are intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrialappearance.10
m
24F-EI4 OFDF 650 650 165 1.8 1450 560 145 75 1.6 950 1600 1.6
24F-EI5 Hf!HF 5()()14 5()()14 155 18 1300 375 135 70 1.5 950 1200 15
24F-E7 OF•NJI\'W 2400 1200 650 650 9()11 IX ~1 1.9" 1400 255 135 70 1.6" 975 875 1.6
24F-E8 OFIN30F 650 650 9()1: 19 1400 470 135 70 17 1000 1050 17
24F-E9" HF•N3HF 5()(}14 5()()14 9()11 1.8 1350 375 135 70 1.6 950 825 I6
The following four combinations are balanced and are intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide
equal capacity in both positive and negative bending.
24F-EIO OF,OF 650 650 165 19 1850 560 1•5 75 1.7 1300 1750 1.7
24F-EJJ1~ HF•HF 5()()14 50014 155 1.8 1600 375 135 70 1.5 1150 1550 1.5
24F-EI2 OFHF 650 650 !55 19 1750 375 135 70 16 1200 1600 1.6
24F-EI1 OF OF 650 650 165 18 1950 560 145 75 17 1250 1700 17
2400 2400
24F-EI6 HFHF 50014 50014 155 17 1300 .175 135 70 1.5 850 1400 1.5
24F-E17 HF\\'W 5()(}14 50014 1401~ ~ 1 l.P• 1100 255 1301~ 651 ~ 1.4~4 750 1250 14
2•F-E18 OF OF 650 650 165 18 1-150 560 l-15 75 16 950 1600 I6
2-lF-EI9 HF HF 50014 5001-1 !55 18 1300 -~~5 135 70 1.5 950 1200 15
Wet-ustfctltL'r-: 08 08 0 667 0667 0 875 0 833 08 0 667 0 875 0 875 0.831 08 0 73 0 83)
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-C-1 PART A-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMB'ER
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 '-(Continued)
Members stressed principally in bending with load applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations
BENDING ABOUT X·X AXIS BENDING ABOUT Y·Y AXIS
·~ ·~
to Wide Faces of to Wide Facet of

OUTER
COMB INA- LAMINA- y
noN X
noN&
SYMBOL19 CORE Extreme Fiber in Bending Compression Perpendicular
LAMINA· Foxx to Grain Fc- ~1
nONs•
Horizontal
Shear
FV'f'l'
psi
(For mom-
berswith
multip.._
Tension Co"f~~ssion Extreme Compression piece Tension C<>mpression Modulus
Stressed in Stressed in Compression Shear Elasticity Bending517 to Grain Shear which are Elasticity to Grain to Grain Elasticity
Tensions 22 Tension& Tension Face Face Fm Eu21 Foyy Fc-yy21 Fvyy Eyy>' Fr Fe E21
psi psi psi psi psi x106psi psi psi psi ~~~~ x106psi psi psi x106psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
c:
VIsually Graded Southern Pine z
16F-\'I SP SP 560 7
' 560' 200 1.4 1450 560 175 90 /.) 950 1450 13 ~
0
16F-\'2 SP SP 1600 800 500~ )( 500' 21XI 14 1600 560 175 90 I 4 1000 1550 1.4 JJ
16F-Yl SP SP 650 650 200 1.4 1450 560 175 90 13 975 1450 13
s:
ttl
The following combination is intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance. fO c:
16F-V4 SPSP 1600 KilO 560' H 560 7 90" I 3 ~75 470 ISO 75 1.2 650 950 12 r=c
z
"0
0
c
m
c:
~
"T1
The following combination Is balanced and intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capacity 0
in both positive and negative bending.
::0
16F-V5 SPISP 1600 1600 5607 ~ 56()1 ~ 100 14 1600 560 [75 S5 I• 1000 1550 I• s::
20F-VI sp,sp 650 560' 100 1.5 1•50 560 175 85 u 1000 1•5o I•
Ill
c:
20F-V2 SPISP 2000 1000 650 560' 100 16 1•50 560 m 85 u 1050 1550 14 ;=
0
20F-VJ SPISP 5607 ' 5607 100 14 1600 560 m S5 t.• 1000 1500 14
z
"n
The following combination Is Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance.10
20F-V4 SPISP 2000 1000 650 560 7 9()10 1.5 1100 •7o 150 75 1J 7~5 950 IJ
The following combination Is balanced and intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capacHy 0
In both positive and negative banding. 0
m
20F-V5 SPSP 2000 2000 650 560 100 1.6 1•so 650 175 S5 u 1050 1550 I•
22F-VI SPISP 650 650 !lXI 1.6 1600 560 175 85 1.5 1050 1650 15
22F-V2 SP,SP 2200 1100 560 7 ~ 560' 100 I. 1600 560 175 85 14 1000 1500 l.l
22F-VJ SPISP 650 560' 200 1.6 1500 560 175 85 I. 1050 1500 I.
The following combination is Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance.1o
22F-V4 SPISP 2200 1100 650 560' 9()10 I6 1~50 •7o 155 75 I. S~5 1000 14
The following combination is balanced and intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capacity
22F-V5 SPISP ~200 2200 650 650 200 16 1600 560 175 85 1.5 1050 1600 15
24F-VI SPISP 650 560' 200 17 1500 560 175 S5 1.5 1100 1350 15
24F-Y2 SP'SP 650 650 200 17 IWI 560 175 S5 15 1100 1600 15
2400 1200
24F-VJ SP.SP 650 650 200 u 1600 560 175 S5 16 1150 1700 1.6
24F-\'6 SP SP 650 650 200 1.7 1500 560 175 90 15 1150 1750 1.5
The following combination is Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance.10
24F-V4 SP SP 2400 1200 650 560' <;!()Ill 17 1250 .p() 155 75 I. 850 1050 I.
(.) (Continued!
...
U1
TABLE NO. 25-C-1 PART A-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 3 -(Continued)
Members stressed principally In bending with load applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations
BENDING ABOUT X-X AXIS BENDING ABOUT Y-Y AXIS
.€J
·i'
to Wide Faces of to Wide Faces of

OUTER
COMBINA-
TION
SYMBOL19
LAMINA-
TIONSI
CORE Extreme Fiber in Bending
y
Compression Perpendicular
•
LAMINA- to Grain Fc~d'
TIONS4 fou
Horizontal
Shear
F'YY'
psi
(Forrnem-
bet's with
multiple-
Tension Comfc:'ion Extreme Compresston piece Tension Compression Modulus
Stressed In Stressed In Compression Shear Elasticity Bendlng517 to Grain Shear which are Elasticity to Grain to Grain Elasticity
Tenslon522 Tension& Tension Face Face fvxx Eu21 Foyy Fc~yy" fvyy Eyy>' Fr Fe £21
psi psi psi psi psi x106psi psi psi psi ~::!.ct~ x106psl psi psi X 106psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
c:
Visually Graded Southern Pine-(Continued) z
The following combination Is balanced and Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capacity =n
In both positive and negative bending. 0
JJ
24F-V5 SPISP 2400 2400 650 650 200 1.7 1600 560 175 90 1.5 1150 1700 l.i :s::
Wet·usefactors2 0.8 0.8 0.667 0.667 0.875 0.833 0.8 0.667 0.875 0.875 0.833 08 0.73 0.833 al
E-Rated Southern Pine £
r
16F-EI SPSP 1600 800 650 650 200 1.6 1550 560 175 90 15 1050 1600 li Q
The following combination is Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and Industrial appearance.1o
z
G'l
16F-E2 SP SP 1600 800 650 650 9016 1.6 950 470 145 75 13 700 1050 I! (')
0
c
m
....
(g
....
(g
c:
.,~
0
JJ
The following combination Is balanced and Intended lor members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capacity
s::
In both positive and negative bending. tD
16F-E3 SP,SP 1600 1600 6SO 6SO 200 1.6 1700 560 115 90 1.5 1100 16SO 1.5 s:r
20F-EI SPISP 2000 6SO 200 1600 c
1000 650 1.1 S60 11S 90 IS
The following combination Is intended for straight or slightly cambered members tor dry use and industrial appearance.1 o
IOSO 1600 1.5
z
G)
20F-E2 SPISP 2000 1000 6SO 6SO 90" 16 1100 410 ISO 1S 1.4 1SO 1000 14 (')
The following combination Is balanced and intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capacity 0
in both positive and negative bending. c
20F-E3 SPISP 2000 2000 650 6SO 200 11 1~00 S60 11S 90 1.5 1150 1100 1.5
m
22F-EI SPISP 2200 1100 650 650 200 1.1 1600 560 11S 90 1.5 1050 1650 1.5
The following combination Is Intended tor straight or slightly cambered members lor dry use and industrial appearance.1o
22F-E2 SP/SP 2200 1100 650 650 90" 1.6 1250 470 155 ~0 1.4 ~50 1050 14
The following combination Ia balanced and Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capacity
22F-E3 SPISP 2200 2200 650 650 200 1.1 1150 560 175 <;() 1.5 1150 1650 1.5
24F-EI SPISP 650 650 200 1.8 1600 560 115 90 1.6 1100 1150 1.6
2400 1200
24F-E2 SPISP 650 650 200 1.9 1700 560 115 90 16 1150 1700 1.6
The following combination Is Intended for straight or slightly cambered members tor dry use and industrial appearance.10
24F-E3 SPISP 2400 1200 650 650 9016 1.8 1300 470 155 ~0 1.5 950 1100 15
The following combination Is balanced and Intended for members continuous or e&ntllevered over supports and provides equal capacity
In both posHive and negative bending.
24F-E4 SPISP 2400 2400 650 650 200 1.8 2000 560 175 90 1.6 1250 1750 1.6
Wet-use factors2 0.8 0.8 0.53 0.53 0.815 0.~33 0.8 0.53 0.815 0.815 0.~33 0.8 013 0.833
(Continued)
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-C-1, PART A
1The combinations in this table are applicable to members consisting of four or more laminations and are intended primarily for members stressed
in bending due to loads applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations. Design values are tabulated, however, for loading both
perpendicular and parallel to the wide faces of the laminations. For combinations and design values applicable to members loaded primarily axially
or parallel to the wide faces of the laminations, see Table No. 2S-C-l, Part B. For members of two or three laminations, see Table No. 2S-C-l, Part
B.
2The tabulated design values are for dry conditions of use. To obtain wet-use design values, multiply the tabulated values by the factors shown at the
end of the table.
3The tabulated design values are for normal duration of loading. For other durations of loading, see Section 2S04 (c) 4.
4The symbols used for species are AC =Alaska cedar, DF = Douglas fir-larch, DFS =Douglas fir south, HF =hem-fir, WW = softwood species,
SP =southern pine andES= eastern spruce. (N3 refers to No. 3 structural joists and planks or structural light-framing grade.) Softwood species
(WW) and eastern spruce are included in the general category of western species although eastern spruce and some softwood species are produced
in other areas.
5The tabulated design values in bending are applicable to members 12 inches or less in depth. For members greater than 12 inches in depth, the
requirements of Section 2S II (d) S apply.
6Design values in this column are for extreme fiber stress in bending when the member is loaded such that the compression zone laminations are
subjected to tensile stresses. The values in this column may be increased 200 pounds per square inch (psi) where end-joint spacing restrictions are
applied to the compression zone when stressed in tension.
7Where specified, this value may be increased to 6SO psi by providing in the bearing area at least one dense 2-inch nominal thickness lamination of
Douglas fir-larch for western species combinations, or southern pine for southern pine combinations. These dense laminations must be backed by ....
a medium-grain lamination of the same species. CD
8 For bending members greater than IS inches in depth, the design value for compression stress perpendicular to grain is 6SO psi on the tension face. ....CD
9Where specified, this value may be increased by providing at least two 2-inch nominal thickness Douglas fir-larch laminations in the bearing area. c
The compression-perpendicular-to-grain design values for Douglas fir-larch are S60 psi for medium grain and 6SO psi for dense. z
1D--rhese combinations are for dry conditions of use only because they may contain wane. They are recommended for industrial appearance grade and :;;
0
for straight or slightly cambered members only. If wane is omitted these restrictions do not apply. JJ
11 This value may be increased to 140 psi for softwood species (WW) and to ISS psi forhem-firwhen the member does not contain wane on both sides; s::
to II S psi for softwood species (WW) and to 130 psi for hem-fir when the member does not contain wane on one side. Ol
12 Th is value may be increased to l!Opsi when the member does not contain coarse-grain material; to l40psi when the member does not contain wane c
on both sides or the member does not contain coarse-grain material and wane on one side; to l6S psi when the member does not contain coarse-grain
r=
c
material and wane on both sides.
13 The compression-perpendicular-to-grain design value of 2SS psi is based on the lowest strength species of the western woods group. If at least one
z
C'l
2-inch nomtnal tl1ickness lamination of E-rated hem-fir with the same E value. orE-rated Douglas fir-larch 200,000 psi higher in modulus of (")
elasticity I£ l than that specified is used in the bearing area on the face of the member subjected to the compression-perpendicular-to-grain stress. 0
c
F, l. Jl)a\ be increased to 37S psi. If at least two 2-inch nominal thickness laminations ofE-rated hem-fir with the same E value, orE-rated Douglas m
...
fir-larch 200,000 psi higher in modulus of elasticity than that specified are used in the bearing area on the face of the member subjected to the
compression-perpendicular-to-grain stress, F, j_ may be increased to 500 psi. ...
tO
tO
14 c
Where specified. this value may be increased to 650 psi by providing in the bearing area at least one 2-inch nominal thickness lamination of Douglas z
fir-larch for western species combinations, or one 2-inch nominal thickness lamination of southern pine for southern pine combinations having a ;;
modulus of elasticity (E) value 200,000 psi higher than theE value specified. 0
15 ::0
E-rated Douglas fir-larch 200,000 psi higher in modulus of elasticity may be substituted for the specified E-rated hem-fir. 5:
16
Th is value may be increased to 140 psi when the member does not contain coarse-grain material or when the member does not contain wane on tD
both sides; to 165 psi when members do not contain coarse-grain material or wane on one side; or to 200 psi when the member does not contain 5
both coarse-grain material and wane on both sides of the member. r
17
Footnote No.5 to Table No. 25-C-1, Part B. also applies. c
18
When Douglas fir south is used in place of all of the western wood laminations required in western species combinations 16F-VI, 16F-V4. 20F-Vl, z
(;')
20F-V5, 22F-VI, 22F- V5, 24F-VI, 24F-V6, 16F-EI, 16F-E4. 20F-E I, 20F-E4. 22F-E3, 24F-E6 and 24F-E7, the design value for horizontal shear (')
is the same as for combinations using all Douglas fir-larch (F,." = 165 psi and Fn, = 145 psi for L3; and F,u = 90 psi and F,n = !35 psi for N3). 0
19
The combination symbols relate to a specific combination of grades and species ihat will provide the design values shown for the combinations. c
The first two numbers in the combination symbol correspond to the design value in bending shown in Column 3. The letter in the combination m
symbol (either a "V" or an "E") indicates whether the combination is made from visually graded (V) orE-rated (E) lumber in the outer zones.
2
D-rhese values for horizontal shear, F,.n apply to members manufactured using multiple-piece laminations with unbonded edge joints. For members
manufactured using single-piece laminations or using multiple-piece laminations with bonded edge joints, the horizontal shear values in Column
II apply.
21
The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply.
22
The design values in bending about the x-x azis (hq in this column for bending members shall be multiplied by 0.75 when the member is
manufactured without the required special tension laminations.
23
The following species may be used for softwood species (WW), provided the design values in horizontal shear in Column 7 (F,.,) and in Column
II (F,y) are reduced by I 0 psi, and the design values in horizontal shear in Column 12 (F,.,) are reduced by 5 psi: Coast sitka spruce, coast species,
eastern white pine (north) and western white pine. ·
24
The following species may be used for softwood species (WW), provided the design values in modulus of elasticity (E, and F,) in Columns 8 and
13 are reduced by 100,000 psi: western cedars, western cedars (north), white woods (western woods) and California redwood--open grain.
c.l
U1
TABLE NO. 25-C-1 PART B-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
Ol FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 '
Members stressed principally in axial tension or compression or in bending with load applied parallel
to the wide faces of the laminations
BENDING ABOUT y. Y AXIS BENDING ABOUT X.X AXIS
Loaded Parallel Loaded
.€J
to Wide Faces POrpen-
·i'
of Laminations dicular
AXIALLY LOADED to Wide
Tension
Parallel to
Compresston
. Faces of
Lamina-
tions y
Parallel
Grain to Grain Extreme Fiber
F, Fe Extreme Fiber in Bending6 Fbvv Horizontal Shear7 Fvvv in Bending8 Fbu
-·
4or More
COM PRES. Lams (For Horizon-
SIONPER- tals-
MODULUS PENDIC· witt1 F.,..
Of ULARTO multiple- 2Lams
COMBINA· LASTIC1TY GRAIN 2orMore 4or More 4orMore piece 4or More to15in. 4orMore 20< Mars
TION E14 Fe~ Lams Lams 2or 3 Lams Lams 3Lams 2L.ams lim ina- Lams 3Lams 2Lams lloop9 Lams10 Lams
SYMBOL SPECIES4 GRADES x106psl psi psi psi psi psi psi psi tions.)13 psi psi psi psi psi psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Visually Graded Western Species ....

CD
I L3 1.5 56011 900 1550 j!(XJ 1450 1~50 HXXl 75 145 115 125 1~50 1500 165 ....
CD
~ Ll 1.7 56()!1 1250 1900 1600 1800 1600 110ll 75 145 !35 125 1700 2000 165 c
1----
3 LlD 1.8 650 1450 2300 1850 2100 1850 1550 75 145 1.~5 125 2000 2300 165 ~
'11
1----
4 LICL 1.9 59011 1400 2100 1900 2200 2000 1650 75 145 135 125 1900 2200 165 0
1---- JJ
5 DF Ll 20 650 1600 1400 2100 2400 2100 IS(XJ 75 145 135 125 1100 1400 165 3:
1---- Ill
6 NJC 14 470 350 875 550 550 550 550 60 120 115 105 450 140
c
~
~ NJM 1.5 560 900 1550 700 1450 1250 IOlXJ 75 145 115 125 1000 ~
165 r
1---- c
8
'---
9
Nl
N2D
1.6
18
56()11
650
1000
1150
1550
ISOli
1150
1150
1600
1850
1550
18(Xl
1100
i5(Xl
75
75
145
145
1.~5
135
125
125
1150
1600
1600
1850
165
165
zG'l
'----
10 Nl 1.8 56011 1100 1950 1450 195(1 1150 1500 ~~ ~~~ 135 125 1750 ~100 165 (')
0
c
m
......
II '\ID 2.0 650 1500 2300 1700 2300 2100 1750 75 145 135 125 2100 2400 165 10
r----
12 DF ss 18 56()11 14()] 1950 1650 2100 1950 1650 75 145 135 125 1900 2200 165
10
......
~ c
SSD 20 650 1600 2300 1950 2400 2300 1950 75 145 135 125 2200 2400 165 z
14 L3 I3 37511 800 1100 975 1200 1050 850 70 135 130 Ill 1100 1300 155 =n
r----
15 L2 14 37511 1050 1350 1300 1500 1350 1100 70 135 130 Ill 1700
0
1450 155 JJ
r----
16 L1 16 37511 1200 1500 1450 1750 1550 1300 70 135 130 Ill 1600 1900 155 s:
r---- m
17 LID 1.7 500 1400 1750 1700 2000 1850 1550 70 135 130 115 1900 2200 155 c
1---- HF
18 NJ I3 375 425 900 575 700 700 700 70 135 130 115 575 - 155 r
1---- S2
1----
19 N2 14 37511 850 1300 975 1350 1300 1100 70 135 130 Ill 1150 1350 155 z
G)
20 Nl I6 37511 975 1450 1250 1550 1500 1250 70 135 130 Ill 1350 1550 155
~ 0
21 ss 1.6 37511 1100 1450 1350 1750 1650 1400 70 Ill 130 115 1500 1750 155 0
1.015 255 525 850 675 800 12010 11516 10516
c
-
22 L3 700 550 60" 725 850 14016 m
23 "] 1 Q15 255 275 625 450 450 450 450 6016 12010 11516 10516 400 - \4016
-
24 V,'\1,' N2 !. Jl ~ 255 550 900 700 900 875 725 6016 12Qlfl 11516 10516 775 900 14016
-
25 Nl 1.215 255 650 1000 875 1050 1000 850 6016 12016 11516 10510 875 1050 14016
- 26 ss J2l'i 255 750 1000 l()'l'J 1150 1100 925 6016 12010 ]]jlli 10516 1000 1150 14016
59 Ll II 500 800 1400 1050 12()') 1050 850 75 145 135 125 1050 1250 165
- 60 DFS L2 I3 500 1050 1750 1400 1750 1550 1150 75 145 135 125 1450 1700 165
-
61 L1 15 650 1350 2200 1850 2000 1800 1500 75 145 Ill 125 1850 2200 165
64 D I3 300 575 925 850 950 925 875 65 125 120 110 800 950 145
1----
65 [)4 15 450 825 1050 1050 1350 1350 1350 65 125 120 110 1150 1350 145
~
60 ES (4 15 450 975 1550 121XI 1750 1750 1700 65 125 120 110 1400 1650 145
~
67 (6 17 450 llll'J 1850 1450 1950 1950 1900 65 125 120 I 10 1550 1800 \45
1--- I" 450 22C_.J
68 B 1350 1850 18!¥1 2250 2150 65 IC5 120 110 1900 2250 145
f--r---
69 AC LJ 11 -PO 700 1150 1150 1000 ~75 7()') 80 165 160 140 1000 1150 190
f-- +------
70 ,\( L2 14 .no 1000 1450 1550 1250 1100 925 80 165 16() 140 1)50 1550 190
f-- +------
'I AC LID I' 56() 1250 li)(XJ 2050 1650 151XJ 12'0 80 165 16(1 140 1700 2000 190
t-- ~ I" 1900 1650 15()'1 140
"2 AC LIS 560 ICSO 2()5() 1250 80 16' 160 1700 2000 190
(C ontuwed J
w
<.11
CX>
TABLE NO. 25-C-1 PART 8-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 "-(Continued)
BENDING ABOUT Y· Y AXIS BENDING ABOUT X.X AXIS
Loaded Parallel Loaded
·*'
to Wide Faces Perpen-
·I?
of Laminations dlcular
.
Facelof
Lam in.
tions
Tension Compression
Parallel to Parallel
F, Fe Extreme Fiber in Bending6 F~ Horizontal Shear7 ~ in Bendi~8 Fbxx
4orMore
COMPRES. Lams{f:or Horizon-
SIONPEfl. members tal Shear
MODULUS PENDIC· with F,.
OF ULARTO multiple- 2Lams
COMB INA· LASTICITY GRAIN 2orMore 4orMore 4orMore piece 4or More to15in. 4orMore 2orMore
TION fl4 Fe~ Lams Lams 2or3Lams Lams 3Lams 2Lams lamina- Loms 3Lams 2Lams Deep9 Lams10 Loms
....CD
SYMBOL SPECIES4 GRADES
3
X 106psi
4
psi
5
psi
6
psi
7
psi
8
psi
9
psi
10 ,
psi tions.)13
12
psi
13
psi
14
psi
15
psi
16
psi
H
psi
18
E-Rated Western Species
....
CD
c
27 I 2·1.8E 1.8 650 900 1750 1200 1~50 !~50 \000 '5 1~5 135 125 !250 1500 165 z
1---
75
;;
18 I ~-2 OE 10 650 IillO 1000 \~IXl 1~50 1250 \OOJ 1~5 13:5 125 1500 1750 165 0
1--- -5 ::0
19 I ~-2.2E
" 650 1250 23C(l 1550 1650 \~OJ 1150 J-+5 \.15 125 1700 2000 \65
1--- :l:
30 10-l 8E 18 650 15.50 2JOO 1700 ~~00 2~ 2100 '5 1~5 \3) !25 \800 1100 165 OJ
1--- DF
.11 1 t1-2 OE ~ 0 650 \800 2-+00 JIJ{l() 2~00 2~ 2~00 ~:;
!-+5 !35 125 2100 2~ 165 £
1--- r
)2 1 t--2 2E 650 1800 1~00 2\CXI 1~00 2-+CX) 1~00 "5 !-+5 135 125 2)00 ~~ \65 0
1---
62 1:-2 1E 21 650 1150 2200 1500 J550 1350 IIIXl "< 145 !35 !25 1600 1900 165 z
C)
1---
6) 1 h-2 IE 21 65(\ \81Xl :~oo 21Xl0 2~l)') 2~()() 2~()() "'5 J-l5 JJ5 125 2200 2~ 165 (')
0
0
m
c
z
;;
0
33 I 2-1 5E I5 500 800 1050 950 1200 1050 850 70 135 130 115 1100 1300 155 :II
-
34 1.2-\ 8E u 500 900 1300 1~00 1450 ICSO 1000 70 135 130 115 1250 1500 155 s:
- OJ
1:2-2 OE 500 1100 1550 1400 1450 1250 1000 70 1500 1750 155
-
35
HF
2.0 135 130 115 5
36 1,,.15E 15 500 1200 1450 1300 2100 1900 1700 70 135 130 115 1400 1650 155 r
- 0
-
37 lfo-1 8E u 500 1550 1950 1700 2400 2400 2100 70 135 130 115 1800 2100 155 z
G')
38 ''o-2.0E 2.0 500 1800 2400 1900 2400 2400 2400 70 135 130 115 2100 2400 155
(')
39 12-15E 15 255 800 1200 950 1200 1050 850 60" 12010 1\510 10516 1100 1300 \4016 0
- 0
40 1·2-l BE 1.8 255 900 15lXI 121XI 1450 ICSO 1000 60" 120111 11516 105" 1250 1500 ]4()1fl
m
-
41 l·2-2.0E 2.0 255 1100 1750 141)') 1450 1250 1000 6016 12016 11516 10516 1500 1750 14016
42'" ww l4-l.SE 15 255 1200 1550 1300 2100 1900 171XJ 60" 12016 11516 10516 1400 1650 14016
-
43 1o-1.8E 18 255 1550 1950 1700 2400 2400 2100 6016 12Qih 11516 10516 1800 2100 \4016
-
44 l·o-2.0E 2.0 255 1800 2200 J(j(XJ 2400 2400 2400 60" 12Qlfl 1\516 10516 2100 2400 14016
Visually Graded Southern Pine

45 N3C II 470 325 850 5511 550 550 550 60 120 !15 105 450 - 140
-
46 N3M I3 560 900 1500 675 1450 1250 J(XXJ 90 175 165 150 1000 - 200
-
47 N2M" 14 56011 1200 1900 1150 1750 1550 1300 90 175 165 150 1400 1600 200
4
-
8 N2D'~ 1.7 650 1400 2200 1350 2000 1800 1500 90 175 165 150 1600 1900 200
SP
49 NIM" 1.7 56011 1350 2100 1450 1950 1750 1500 90 175 165 ISO 1800 2100 200
-
50 N\012 1.9 650 1550 2300 1700 2300 2100 1750 90 175 165 150 2100 2400 200
-
51 SSM 17 56011 1300 1900 1600 2100 1950 1650 90 175 165 ISO 1750 2100 200
-
52 SSD 19 650 1500 2200 1850 2400 23C(J 1950 90 175 165 150 2J(j(j 24(J(J 2(()
!Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-C-1 PART 8-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 "-(Continued)
BENDING ABOUT Y·Y AXIS BENDING ABOUT X-X AXIS
Loadocl Pllrallel Loadod
to Wide Faces Pll<pen-
·i' ·I'
of Laminations dieular
Faces of
Lamina-
tions y
I
Tension Compression
Pllrallelto Pllrallel
F, Fe Extreme Fiber in Bending& Fbvv Horizontal Shear7 Fvvv in Bending& Fbxx
4orMore
COM PRES. Lams {for Horizon-
SK>NPER- members tal Shear
MODULUS PENOIC- with F,..
Of Ul.ARTO multipi• 2Lams
COIIBINA- LASTICITY GRAIN 2orMore 4orMore 4orMore piece 4orMore to15in. 4orMore 2orMort
nON f14 Fe-:- Lams L.atnl 2or3Lams L.ams 3Ums 2Lams lamina- L.ams 3Lams 2Lams Dsep9 L.ams10 Lams
SYMBOL SPECIES4 GRADES 1106psl psi pol psi psi pol psi pol tlons.)13 psi psi psi psi psi psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
E-Rated Southern Pine
c
- 54
53 t,2-!8E
IJ2·2,0E
1.8
2,0
650
650
900
!100
1900
2300
!200
1400
1450
1450
1250
1250
1000
1000
90
90
175
175
165
165
!50
150
1250
1600
!500
1750
cOO
coo
,;!!!';
'----
0
112-l,ZE 650 1250 2400 1550 1650 1400 1150 90 175 165 150 1700 2000 200 JJ
- 55
SP
116-1.8£
22
650 !550 !850 1700 2400 2400 2100 90 J75 165 !50 1800 2100 200
:s:
56 !8 Ill
-----s:7
r--
lio-HE 2.0 650 !800 2400 1900 2400 2400 2400 90 175 165 !50 2100 2400 200 s:r
58 ,,.),2£ 2.2 650 1800 2400 2100 2400 2400 2400 90 175 165 150 2300 2-!00 200 c
Wet-use factors2 - 0,833 0.53 08 0,7] 0 73 0,8 08 08 0,875 0 875 0 875 0 875 0,8 0 875 0 8"5 z
G)
(')
0
c
m
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-C-1, PART 8
1
The combinations in this table are intended primarily for members loaded either axially or in bending with the loads acting parallel to the wide faces of
the laminations. Design values for bending due to loading applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations are also included: however. the c
combinations in Table No. 25-C-1. Part A, are usually better suited for this condition of loading. The design values for bending about the x-x axis
(Fhu) shown in Column 16 are for members from two laminations to I 5 inches deep without tension laminations. Design values approximately l 5
,~
0
percent higher for members with four or more laminations are shown in Column 17. These higher design values. however. require special tension JJ
:s::
laminations which may not be readily available. Ill
'The tabulated design values are for dry conditions of use. To obtain wet-use design values. multiply the tabulated values by the factors shown at the £
end of the table. r
c
3The tabulated design values are for normal duration of loading. For other durations of loading. see Section 2504 (c) 4.
z
4
The symbols used for species are AC = Alaska cedar, OF = Douglas fir-larch. DFS = Douglas fir south. ES = eastern spruce. HF = hem-fir. WW
= softwood species. and SP = southern pine.
"0
(")
5Grade designations are as follows: Softwood species (WW) and eastern spruce arc included in general category of western species although eastern c
m
spruce and some softwood species are produced in other areas.
Visually Graded Western Species
L1 is Lllaminating grade (dense for Douglas fir-larch and Douglas fir south).
L1 Dis Ll dense laminating grade for hem-fir.
LIS is a special grade of Alaska cedar. see C.B.C. Standard No. 25-ll. Section 25.1110 (h).
L1 CL is L l close grain laminating grade.
L2D is L2 laminating grade (dense).
L2 is L2laminating grade (medium grain).
L3 is L3 laminating grade (medium grain for Douglas fir-larch. Douglas fir south and hem-fir).
SSD is dense select structural. structural joists and planks. or structural light framing grade (dense).
SS is select structural. structural joists and planks. or structural light framing grade (medium grain for Douglas fir-larch).
NID is dense No. I structural joists and planks. or structural light framing grade (den,e).
N I is No. I structural joists and planks. or structural light framing grade (medium grain for Douglas fir-larch 1.
N2D is dense No. 2 structural joists and planks or structural light framing grade (medium grain for Douglas fir-larch dense 1.
!'12 is No. 2 structural joisb and planks or structural light framing grade I medium grain for Douglas fir-larch I.
N3M is 1'-'o. 3 structural joists and planks. or structural light framing grade I medium grain).
N3C is No. 3 structural joists and planks. or structural light framing grade (coarse grain I.
N3 is No.3 structural joists and planks. or structural light framing grade.
!Cominued!
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-C-1, PART 8-(Continued)
Visually Graded Southern Pine
SSD is dense select structural. structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade (dense).
SSM is select structural. structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade (medium grain).
Nl Dis No. I dense structural joists and planks. or structural light framing grade or No. I boards graded as dense.
NIM is No. I structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade or No. I boards all with a medium grain rate of growth.
N2D is No. 2 dense structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade or No. 2 boards graded as dense.
N2M is No. 2 structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade or No. 2 boards all with a medium grain rate of growth.
N3M is No. 3 structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade or No. 3 boards all with a medium grain rate of growth.
N3C is No. 3 structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade or No. 3 boards all with coarse grain rate of growth.
E-Rated Grades-All Species

1/6-2.2E has 1/6 edge characteristic with 2.2E.
1/6-l.SE has 1/6 edge characteristic with 1.8E.

...
1/4-1.5E has 1/• edge characteristic with 1.5E.
1/2-2.2E. 112-2.1 E. 1i2-2.0E, 1i2-1.8E are E-rated grades with edge characteristics occupying up to one half of cross section. ...coco
c
~
6Thevalues of F 6 " were calculated based on members 12 inches in depth (bending about Y- Y axis). When the depth is less than 12 inches. the values of "T1
Fbn can be increased by multiplying by the following factors: 0
::0
s::
DEPTH, INCHES MULTIPLYING FACTOR III
c
10.75 1.01 r
c
8.75 1.04 z
6.75
5.125
1.07
1.10 "0
C')
3.125 1.16 c
m
...
<0
...
<0
c
z
=Ti
0
:rJ
s::
Ill
5
7The design values in horizontal shear contained in this table are based on members without wane.
r
0
8The tabulated design values in bending are applicable to members 12 inches or less in depth. For members greater than 12 inches in depth. the z
G)
requirements of Section 2511 (d) 5 apply.
()
"The design values in Column 16 are for members of from two lamination>. to 15 inches in depth without tension laminations. 0
10The design values in Column 17 are for members of four or more laminations in depth and require special tension laminations. When these values are 0
m
used in design and the member is speCified by combination symbol, the designer should also specify the required design value in bending.
"When tension laminations are used to obtain the design value for F bu shown in Column 16, the compression perpendicular to grain value, F, J..., for
the tension face may be increased to 650 psi for Douglas fir-larch and southern pine, and to 500 psi for hem-fir because the tension laminations are
required to be dense.
"Combinations 47. 48, 49 and 50 have more restrictive slope of grain requirements than the basic slope of grain of the grades of lumber used in order to
obtain higher tension-parallel-to-grain values and design values in bending when loaded perpendicular to the wide face» of the laminations. The
slopes of grain used to calculate the design values in Table No. 25-C-l. Part B. were: Combination 4 7. l: 14: Combination 48. 1: 14; Combination
49, l: 16: and Combination 50, I: 14. When design stresses are lower than the design values shown. or when a less restrictive slope of grain provides
the same design value, a less restrictive slope of grain may be used. The following table gives the design values of these combinations for various
(Continued)
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-C-1, PART 8-(Continued)
slopes of grain: Values of Ft>u in column 5 are for members of two laminations to 15 inches in depth without tension laminations. and values in
Column 6 are for members of four or more laminations with tension laminations.
COMP. BENDING ABOUT THE

TENSION COMP. BENDING ABOUT THE Y·Y AXIS Fbyy
PARALLEL PARALLEL PARALLEL X-X AXIS Fbxx
SLOPE OF COMB. TO GRAIN (F,) TO GRAIN (Fe) TO GRAIN (Fe)
GRAIN NO. 20RMORE 20R3 40RMORE 2 Lams 4or More 4or More
LAMS LAMS LAMS to 15 in. Lams 2Lams 3 Lams Lams
psi psi psi psi psi psi psi psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
47 1200 1150 1900 1400 1600 1300 1550 1750
48 1400 1350 2200 1600 1900 1500 1800 2000
1.12
49 1300 1450 1900 1750 2100 1500 1750 1950
50 1550 1700 2200 2100 2400 1750 2100 2300
47 1150 1150 1700 1400 1600 1300 1550 1750 ....
tD
48 1350 1350 2000 1600 1900 1500 1800 2000 ....
tD
1.10 c
49 1150 1450 1700 1550 18SO 1SOO 1750 1850 z
;;
so 1350 1700 2000 1800 2100 1750 2100 2100 0
JJ
47 1000 1150 1500 13SO 1600 1300 1550 1600 s:
!D
48 11SO 1350 1750 1600 1850 1500 1800 1850 £
1.8 r
49 - - - - - - - - 0
so - - - - - - - -
z
G')
(")
0
0
m
c:
z
::n
1lThese values for horizontal shear, F,,., apply to members manufactured using multiple-piece laminations with unbonded edge joints. For members 0
using single-piece laminations or using multiple-piece laminations with bonded edge joints, the horizontal shear values tabulated in Columns 13, 14 ::0
s:
and 15 apply. Ill
14 The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply. s:r
15The following species may be used for softwood species (WW), provided the modulus of elasticity,£, is reduced by 100,000 psi: Western cedars.
!:1
western cedars (north), white woods (western woods) and California redwood--open grain. z
G)
I6The following species may be used for softwood species (WW) provided the design values in horizontal shear in Column 12 (F,J are reduced by 5 psi (')
and the design values in horizontal shear in Columns 13, 14 and 15 (F,.,) and in Column 18 (F,") are reduced by 10 psi: Coast sitka spruce, coast 0
species, western white pine and eastern white pine. c
m
17When special tension laminations are not used, the design values in bending about the x-x axis (Fbx) shall be multiplied by 0. 75 for bending members
over 15 inches deep. For bending members 15 inches and less in depth, use the design values in Column 16.
(..)
Ol
U1
TABLE NO. 25-C-2 PART A-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED
CALIFORNIA REDWOOD VISUALLY GRADED' 2 3
Members stressed principally in axial tension or compression or in bending with load applied perpendicular
Bending About X·X Axis Bending About y.y Axis

Loaded Parallel to Wide Faces of the Laminations Loaded Perpendicular to Wide Faces of Laminations Axially Loaded
Extreme Fiber in Bending Compression Perpen· Com pres·
Tension Compression dicular to Grain Extreme Compression Tension sion
Species Zone Zone Modulus Fiber Perpendicular Modulus Parallel Parallel Modulus
Outer Stressed Stressed Tension Compres· Horizontal of in to Grain Horizontal of to to of
Combi· Laminations in Tensions in Tensions Face sion Face Shear Elasticity? ~ndings Side Faces Shear Elasticity? Grain Grain Elasticity?
nation Core Fbxx fbxx Fc-xx Fc-xx fvxx fxx Fbyy Fc~yy fvyy Eyy Fr Fe E
Symbol Laminations4 psi psi psi psi psi x 106 psi psi psi psi x 106 psi psi psi x 106psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B-16F
VI CR/CR 1600 800 315 315 125 1.1 1400 270 110 1.1 900 1400 1.1
Wet-use factors' 0.8 0.8 0.667 0.667 0.875 0.833 0.8 0.667 0.875 0.833 0.8 0.73 0.833
'The combmat10ns in this table are mtended pnman1y for members stressed m bendmg due to loads applied perpendicular to the wtde faces of the
laminations for members with four or more lamination>. Stresses are tabulated. however. for loading both perpendicular and parallel to the wide
faces of the laminations. For combinations and stresses applicable to members loaded primarily axially or parallel to the wide faces of the
laminations, see Table No. 25-C-2, Part B. For members of two or three laminations. see Table C\!o. 25-C-2. Part B. c:
'The tabulated design values are for dry conditions of use. To obtain wet-use design values. multiply the tabulated values by the factors shown at the
end of the table.
.,~
0
lThe tabulated design values are for normal duration of loading. For other durations of loading. see Section 2504 (c) 4. :0
4 CR = California redwood. :!::
a!
'The tabulated design values in bending are applicable to members 12 inches or less in depth. For members greater than 12 inches in depth. the
requirements of Section 2511 (dl 5 apply.
!:
r
'Design values in this column are for extreme fiber stress in bending when the member is loaded such that the compression zone laminations are c
subjected to tensile stresses. The values in this column may be increased to 1200 psi when end-joint spacing restrictions arc applied to the z
C)
compression zone when stressed in teno.ion. ()
"The durati<'n of load modification factor given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply. 0
c
m
TABLE NO. 25-C-2 PART 8-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED
CALIFORNIA REDWOOD VISUALLY GRADED' 2 3 7 a c
Members stressed principally in axial tension, axial compression or in bending with load applied parallel ~
to the wide faces of the laminations "Tl
0
Axially Loaded Bending About X·X Axis JJ
Bending About Y·Y Axis
Loaded Parallel to Wide Faces of Laminations
Loaded Perpendicular to Wide
Faces of Laminations
s:
Tension Compression
Ill
Compres· Parallel Parallel Extreme Fiber Horizontal ~
sion To Grain To Grain Extreme Fiber in Bendings Horizontal Shear in Bending Shear r
Modulus Perpen 0
Combi·
nation
Species4 GradeS
of dicular 2or More 4or More 2 or3
lasticity9 to Grain Lams
4or More 3 2 4orMore 3 2 2 Lams 2or More
Lams
z
G')
Symbol Lams Lams Lams Lams Lams Lams Lams Lams to 15 in. deep
E (')
x106psi Fe- Fr Fe Fe Fbyy Fbyy Fbyy Fvyy Fvyy Fvyy Fbxx fvxx 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0
m
B-1 CR L5 1.0 315 875 1350 1350 1450 1300 1100 110 105 95 1200 125
B-2 CR L4 1.0 315 875 1350 1350 1450 1300 1100 110 105 95 1200 125
B-3 CR L3 1.2 315 1000 1550 1550 1450 1300 1100 110 105 95 1350 125
B-4 CR L2 1.2 315 1000 1600 1600 1500 1350 1150 110 105 95 1350 125
B-5 CR Ll 1.2 315 1000 1600 1600 1600 1500 1250 110 105 95 1350 125
Wet-use factors' 0.833 0.667 0.8 0.73 0. 73 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.875 0.875 0.875 0.8 0.875
1The tabulated combinations in this table are intended primarily for members loaded either axially or in bending with the loads acting parallel to the
wide faces of the laminations. Design values for bending due to loading applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations are also included:
however. the combination in Table No. 25-C-2. Part A. is usually better suited for this condition of loading for members with four or more
laminations.
'The tabulated design values are for dry conditions of use. To obtain wet-use design values. multiply the tabulated values by the factors shown at the
end of the table.
The tabulated values are for normal duration of loading. For other durations of loading. sec Section 2504 Ic) 4.
"CR ~ Caltfornia redwood.
!Continued!
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-C-2-(Continued)
5Grade designations are as follows:
Visually Graded--California redwood
Ll is Ll laminating grade (close grain).
L2 is L2 laminating grade (close grain).
L4 is L4laminating grade (close grain).
6The values of F 6 .,. were calculated based on members 12 inches in depth (bending about Y-Y axis). When the depth is less than 12 inches, the values of
F 6" can be increased by multiplying by the following factors:
DEPTH, INCHES MULTIPLYING FACTOR
10.75 1.01
8.75 1.04
6.75 1.07
5.125 1.10
3.125 1.16
c:
z
7The tabulated design values for bending are applicable to members 12 inches or less in depth. For members greater than 12 inches in depth the
=n
0
requirements of Section 2511 (d) 5 apply. ::0
8The combinations in this table are not intended for deep bending members when loaded perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations. However, :s::
Ill
if members over 15 inches in depth are necessary, AITC 302-24 tension laminations are required and the designer must specify that the member is for s;
use in bending about the x-x axis, in which case, the design value F 6 " is 1400 psi for combinations B-1 and B-2 and 1600 psi for B-3. B-4 and B-5. r
9
The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply. !2
z
"
0
0
c
m
TABLE NO. 25-0-PART A-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR HARDWOOD GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER 1
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION-DRY CONDITIONS OF USE 2 c
~
"'11
MULTIPLY THE APPROPRIATE STRESS 0
MODULE IN PART B BY THE FACTORS J]
BELOW TO DETERMINE ALLOWABLE
STRESS FOR:
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESS
(Pounds per Square Inch)
s::
Ill
SPECIES
Extreme Fiber c
j=
in :~:~~?o~b) Compression Modulus of Compression c
Parallel to
Grain(F1)
Parallel to
Grain (Fe)
Elasticity
(E)6
Horizontal
Shear (F.)
Pe~endicular
to rain (Fe')
z
G')
I. Hickory, true and pecan 3.85 3.05 1.80 260 730 (')
0
2. Beech, American 3.05 2.45 1.70 230 610 c
m
3. Birch, sweet and yellow 3.05 2.45 1.90 230 610
4. Elm, rock 3.05 2.45 1.40 230 610
5. Maple, black and sugar (hard maple) 3.05 2.45 1.70 230 610
6. Ash, commercial white 2.80 2.20 1.70 230 610
7. Oak, commercial red and white 2.80 2.05 1.60 230 610
8. Elm, American and slippery (white or soft elm) , '
1.60 1.40 190 310
9. Sweet gum (red or sap gum) 2.2 1.60 1.40 190 370
10. Tupelo, black (black gum) 2.20 1.60 1.20 190 370
II. Tupelo, water 2.20 1.60 1.30 190 370
12. Ash, black 2.00 1.30 1.30 170 370
13. Poplar, yellow 2.00 1.45 1.50 !50 270
14. Cottonwood, eastern 1.55 1.20 1.20 110 180
I Footnotes onfollowinJ? page.)

TABLE NO. 25·0-PART B-VALUES FOR USE IN COMPUTING WORKING STRESSES WITH FACTORS OF
PART A TOGETHER WITH LIMITATIONS REQUIRED TO PERMIT THE USE OF SUCH STRESSES 3
RATIO OF SIZE MODULUS OF

w OF MAXIMUM EXTREME FIBER IN BENDING TENSION PARALLEL TO GRAIN COMPRESSION PARALLEL
-..1 TO GRAIN ELASTICITY
0 COMBINA· PERMITTED (E)6
TION KNOT TO NUMBER OF
SYMBOL FINISHED LAMINATIONS 5
WIDTH OF Stress Steepest Stress Steepest Stress Steepest Stress
LAMINATION 4 Module Grain Slope Module Grain Slope Module Grain Slope Module
4 to 14 800 1:16 500 1:16 970 1:15

A 0.1 1,000,000
15 or more 800 1:16 500 1:16 970 1:15
4 to 14 770 1:16 500 1:16 920 1:15
B .2 1,000,000
15 or more 800 l: 16 500 1:16 930 1:15
4 to 14 600 1:12 450 1:15 860 1:14
c .3
15 or more 660 1:12 450 l: 16 870 1:14
900,000
4 to 14 450 1:8 350 1:10 780 1:12

D .4 1.'5 or more 520 1:8 800,000
350 1:12 810 1:12
4 to 14 300 1:8 300 1:8 690 1:10
E .5 15 or more 380 1:8 1:8 7.30 1:10
800,000
300
1The allowable unit stresses in bending obtained from Table No. 25-D apply when the wide faces of the laminations are normal to the direction of the
load. c
'Allowable stresses for dry conditions of use shall be applicable when the moisture content in service is 16 percent or less as in most covered structures. z
:;;
For wet conditions of use the following maximum percentage of the dry-use stresses shall be permitted: 0
F 6 (bending) and F, (tension) 80 percent F, (horizontal shear 88 percent) ::0
:!:
F, (compression parallel to grain) 70 percent Fcl_ (compression perpendicular to grain) 67 percent III
E (modulus of elasticity) 83 percent !:
r-
3For modification of allowable unit stresses for structural glued-laminated lumber, see Section 2504. c
4 Factors for knot sizes of 0.1 and 0. 2 are identical in case of extreme fiber in bending and in tension parallel to grain because slope of grain of I 16 is ' z
G')
greater limitation than knot size. The smaller knot size may be specified for reasons other than strength.
(')
5When Iarnim1tions of different thicknesses are used. divide the depth of the member by the thickest lamination used and then assume the quotient to bE 0
the number of larninations in the member for use in determining the allowable stress. c
6The duration <1f loa(j modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply.
m
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 25-E
TABLE NO. 25-E-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR TREATED

ROUND TIMBER POLES AND PILES 6
(Values for normal load duration and wet conditions of use,
pounds per square inch)
Compression Extreme Compression Modulus
Parallel to Fiber in Horizontal Perpendicular of
Graln7 Bendlng7 Shear to Grain Elasticity
Species Fe Fb Fv Fcj_ E
I. Pacific
Coast
Douglas
Fir'' 1250 2450 115 230 1.500,000
2. Southern
Pine 1 ·1 1200 2400 110 250 1,500.000
3. Red Oak 4 1100 2450 135 350 1.250.000
4. Red Pine' 900 1900 85 155 1.280.000
1 Design values in compression parallel to the grain for Pacific Coast Douglas fir and
southern pine may be increased 0.20 percent for each foot of length from the tip of the pile
to the critical section. The increase shall not exceed 10 percent for any single pile;
however, the increase is cumulative with the increase in section properties due to taper
from the pile tip to the critical section.
'Pacific Coast Douglas fir includes Douglas fir from west of the crest of the Cascade
Mountains in Oregon, Washington and Northern California and west of the crest of the
Sierra Nevada Mountains in the rest of California. For fastener design. use Douglas fir-
larch design values.
'Southern pine values apply to longleaf. slash, loblolly and short leaf pines.
4 Rcd oak values apply to northern and southern red oak.
'Red pine values apply to red pine grown in the United States. For fastener design, usc
northern pine design values.
6The form factor of Section 2504 (c) 7 for bending members of circular cross section is
incorporated in the allowable unit stresses for extreme fiber in bending as listed within the
table.
'The allowable values listed in Table No. 25-E for compression parallel to grain and extreme
fiber in bending are based on load-sharing principles such as occur in a pile cluster. For
piles which support their own specific load, an additional safety factor of 1.25 shall be
used with compression parallel to grain values and an additional safety factor of 1.30 shall
be used with extreme fiber in bending values.
371
TABLE NO. 25-F-HOLDING POWER OF BOLTS1 FOR DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH, CALIFORNIA REDWOOD (CLOSE GRAIN)
24
AND SOUTHERN PINE
(See U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17 where members are not of equal size and for values in other species.)
p = Safe loads parallel to grain in pounds

q = Safe loads perpendicular to grain in pounds
Length of Bolt In
Main Wood Member3 DIAMETER OF BOLT (IN INCHES)
(In Inches) '111 11.! !;II '¥4 7111 1 11111 11/4 H'l
Single p 325 470 590 710 830 945
Shear q 185 215 245 270 300 325
IV2
Doublep 650 940 1180 1420 1660 1890
Shear q 370 430 490 540 600 650
Single p 630 910 1155 1370 1575
Shear q 360 405 450 495 540
2112
....
Doublep 710 1260 1820 2310 2740 3150 CD
Shear q 620 720 810 900 990 1080 ....
CD
Single p 990 1400 1790 2135 2455 2740 3305 c

Shear q 565 630 695 760 825 895 1020 .,~
3112 0
Doublep 710 1270 1980 2800 3580 4270 4910 5480 6610 :c
640 1130 s:::
Shear q 980 1260 1390 1520 1650 1780 2040 OJ
Single p 1950 2535 3190 3820 4975 c
r
Shear q 1090 1190 1300 1395 1605 c
5Y2
Doublep 1270 1990 2860 3900 5070 6380 7640 9950
z
G)
Shear 9 930 1410 1880 2180 2380 2600 2790 3210 (")
0
c
m
....
(Q
p = Safe loads parallel to grain in pounds ....

(Q
q = Safe loads perpendicular to grain in pounds c

z
Length of Bolt In
DIAMETER OF BOLT (IN INCHES)
=n
Main Wood Member3 0
(In Inches) ~ 1,2 !i1l ¥• 718 1 1'18 11/4 H'l JJ
Single p 3975 5680
s:
Ill
Shear q 1900 2185 c
7Y' r
Doublep 1990 2860 3890 6440 7950 11,360 c
Shear q 1260 1820 2430
5080
3030 3500 3800 4370 z
G)
(')
Single p 5730
0
Shear q 2765 c
9Y'
m
Doublep 2860 3900 5080 6440 7950 11,460
Shear q 1640 2270 2960 3710 4450 5530
Single p
Shear q
11'/2
Doublep 3900 5080 6440 7950 II ,450
Shear q 2050 2770 3540 4360 6150
Single p
Shear q
13Y2
Doublep 5100 6440 7960 11,450
Shear q 2530 3310 4160 6040
1
Tabulated values are on a normal load-duration basis and apply to joints made of seasoned lumber used in dry locations. See U.B.C. Standard No.
25-17 for other service conditions.
2Double shear values are for joints consisting of three wood members in which the side members are one half the thickness of the main member. Single
shear values are for joints consisting of two wood members having a minimum thickness not less than that specified.
3
w The length specified is the length of the bolt in the main member of double shear joinh or the length of the bolt in the thinner member of single shear
i:j joints.
4
See U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17 for wood-to-metal bolted joints.
25-G 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-G-SAFE LATERAL STRENGTH AND REQUIRED

PENETRATION OF BOX AND COMMON WIRE NAILS DRIVEN
PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN OF WOOD
LOADS (Pounds)1 2 3
PENETRA· Douglas Fir
SIZE STANDARD TION Larch or
OF LENGTH WIRE REQUIRED Southern Other
NAIL (Inches) GAUGE (Inches) Pine Species
BOX NAILS
od 2 12 112 !Vs 51
Xd 2V, I IV, I V• 63
IOd 3 IOV, IV, 76 See
U.B.C.
12d 3V• 10 1/, IV2 76
Standard
16d JV, 10 1'/' X2 No.
25-17
20d 4 9 IYs 94
30d 4V, 9 IYs 94
40d 5 8 1% 108
COMMON NAILS
od 2 II y, I V• 63
8d 2V, IOV• IV2 7H
IOd 3 9 IYs 94 See
U.B.C.
12d 3'.4 9 IYs 94
Standard
16d w, 8 1% 108 No.
25-17
20d 4 6 2Vx 139
30d 4V' 5 2 1/4 155
40d 5 4 2V' 176
SOd 5V2 3 2% 199
60d 6 2 2 7/x 223
'The safe lateral strength values may be increased 25 percent where metal side
plates are used.
2For wood diaphragm calculations these values may be increased 30 percent.
(Sec U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17.)
'Tabulated values arc on a normal load-duration basis and apply to joints made of
seasoned lumber used in dry locations. See U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17 for
other service conditions.
374
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 25-H, 25-1
TABLE NO. 25-H-SAFE RESISTANCE TO WITHDRAWAL OF

COMMON WIRE NAILS
Inserted Perpendicular to Grain of the Wood, in Pounds per Linear
Inch of Penetration into the Main Member
SIZE OF NAIL
KIND OF WOOD 6d 8d 10d 12d 16d 20d 30d 40d SOd 60d
I. Douglas Fir, Larch 29 34 38 38 42 49 53 58 63 67
2. Southern Pine 35 41 46 46 50 59 64 70 76 81
3. Other Species See U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17
TABLE NO. 25-1-MAXIMUM DIAPHRAGM DIMENSION RATIOS
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
DIAPHRAGMS DIAPHRAGMS
MATERIAL Maximum Maximum
Span-Width Height-Width
Ratios Ratios
I. Diagonal sheathing, conventional 3: I 2: I

2. Diagonal sheathing, special 4:1 31/2: I
3. Plywood and particleboard, nailed all 4:1 1
3 12:1
edges
4. Plywood and particleboard. blocking 4:1 2: I
omitted at intermediate joints
375
TABLE NO. 25-J-1-ALLOWABLE SHEAR IN POUNDS PER FOOT FOR HORIZONTAL PLYWOOD DIAPHRAGMS 1\)
WITH FRAMING OF DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH OR SOUTHERN PINE' 01
BLOCKED DIAPHRAGMS
?-....
UNBLOCKED DIAPHRAGM
Nail spacing at diaphragm
boundaries (all cases), at con- Nails spaced 6 ·max. at
linous panel edges parallel supported end
Minimum to load (Cases 3 and 4) and at Load perpen-
Minimum Minimum Nominal all panel edges (Cases 5 and 6) dicular to un-
Nominal Nominal Width of blocked edges
Penetration in Plywood Framing 6 4 j21122 1 22 Other
and continuous configurations
Common Framing Thickness Member panel joints
PLYWOOD GRADE Nail Size (In Inches) (In Inches) (In Inches) Nail spacing at other (Cases 2,
plywood panel edges (Casel) 3, 4, 5 and 6)
6 6 I 4 J 3
6d P~ Y1o 2 185 250 375 420 165 125
3 210 280 420 475 185 140
STRUCTURAL I 8d H2 ~~8 2 270 360 530 600 240 180

3 300 400 600 675 265 200
!Od 3 1 ~s 15f32 2 320 425 640 730 285 215
3 360 480 720 820 320 240
~/1o 2 170 225 335 380 150 llO
3 190 250 380 430 170 125
6d 1' +
~$ 2 185 250 375 420 165 125
3 210 280 420 475 185 140 c
z
%; 2 240 320 480 545 215 160 :;;
C-D, C-C, STRUCTURAL II 3 270 360 540 610 240 180 0
and other grades covered 8d 112 ::rJ
in U .B.C. Standard No. 25-9 l5f32 2 270 360 530 600 240 180 :s:
3 300 400 600 675 265 200 lXI
!;;;
2 290 385 575 655 255 190 r
15(32
.3 325 430 650 735 290 215 c
!Od' Ps z
G)
!9iJ~ 2 320 425 640 730 285 215
3 360 480 I 720 [820 320
I 240 (")
0
c
m
1The;.c values are for short-time loads due to wind or "trthquake and must be reduced 25 percent for normal loading. Space nails 12 inches on center
along intermediate framing members.
Allo\\ able shqr v:llues for naih in framing members of other species set forth in Table No. 25-17-J of the U.B.C. Standards shall be calculated c:
z
for all grade-, hy multiplying the values for nails in Structural! by the following factors: Group III. 0.82 and Group IV, 0.65. :;;
cFraming at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where nails are spaced 2 inches or 2 1h inches on 0
center. ::0
-'Framing at adJoining panel edges shall he '-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where I Od nails having penetration into framing of s::
more than 1·/K inches are spaced 3 inc !• :· less on center. III
s;
r
0
z
Load Framing • : 1 1 CASE 2 ocoO<•H ~• C)
~t-r- -'- r-L-r~- ~H-j~-j~ j~: :~~~:~:~~~ ~

(")
0
0
m
DIAPHRAGM BOUNDA"Y
Load CASES Frammg Load CASE6 Fram1ng

j
..
W_ .-
~
\
v IH
Cont1nuous pa nel JO I nts ~ Btock1ng Conttnuous panel )Olnts~ Blockmg
:\ate: Framing may be oriented in either direction for diaphragms. provided sheathing is properly designed for vertical loading.
TABLE NO. 25-J-2-ALLOWABLE SHEAR IN POUNDS PER FOOT FOR HORIZONTAL PARTICLEBOARD DIAPHRAGMS
WITH FRAMING OF DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH OR SOUTHERN PINE 1
BLOCKED DIAPHRAGMS UNBLOCKED DIAPHRAGMS

Nail Spacing (ln.) at diaphragm Nails Spaced 6" max. at
boundaries (all cases~ at contin- Supported Edges
uous panel edges parallel to
load (Cases 3 & 4~ and at
MINIMUM all panel edges (Cases 5 & 6) Case 1 (No
MINIMUM
NAIL
MINIMUM
NOMINAL
NOMINAL
WIDTH OF
6 I 4 21f22 22 unblocked
edges or All other
PENETRATION PANEL FRAMING Nail Spacin~ (ln.) at other panel continuous configurations
COMMON IN FRAMING edges ( ases 1, 2, 3 &4) joints parallel
THICKNESS MEMBER (Cases 2, 3
PANEL GRADE NAIL SIZE (Inches) (Inch) (Inches) 6 6 4 3 to load) 4, 5 & 6)
VI6
2 170 225 335 380 150 110
3 190 250 380 430 170 125
6d I V4
3jg
2 185 250 375 420 165 125
3 210 280 420 475 185 140
2 240 320 480 545 215 160
ljg
3 270 360 540 610 240 180 ...
(I)
2-M-W 8d IV2 7116

2
3
255
285
340
380
505
570
575
645
230
255
170
190
...
(I)
c
2 270 360 530 600 240 180 ~
Vz 400 265 200 "TI
3 300 600 675 0
2 290 385 575 655 255 190 :c
1/2 s::
!Od 1 1% 3 325 430 650 735 290 215 III
2 320 425 640 730 285 215 c
5jg
3 360 480 720 820 320 240
r=c
2-M-3 IOd 1 !Vs v.. 2 320 425 640 730 285 215 z
G)
3 360 480 720 820 320 240 C')
0
c
m
1
These values are for short-time loads due to wind or earthquake and must be reduced 25 percent for normal loading. Space nails 12 inches on center
along intermediate framing members. c:
Allowable shear values for nails in framing members of other species set forth in Table No. 25-17-J of the U.B.C. Standards shall be calculated ~
for all grades by multiplying the values for nails by the following factors: Group III, 0.82 and Group IV, 0.65. "T'I
2
Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where nails are spaced 2 inches or 2 1h inches on center. 0
:n
'Framing at adJoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where I Od nails having penetration into framing of
more than 1- Is inches are spaced 3 inches or less on center.
s::
III
£
r
c
z
Load
"
(")
0
c
m
DIAPHRAGM BOUNDARY
Load CASES Load CASE6 Fram1ng

I
~ltf_
. -
- . "t'
~
v I~
Cont1nuous panel JOints ~ Block1ng Continuous panel p1nts.-L..J Blockmg
~ote: Framing may be oriented in either direction for diaphragms. provided sheathing is properly designed for vertical loading.
N
U1
TABLE NO. 25-K-1-ALLOWABLE SHEAR FOR WIND OR SEISMIC FORCES IN POUNDS PER FOOT FOR :!'...;
PLYWOOD SHEAR WALLS WITH FRAMING OF DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH OR SOUTHERN PINE1 4
PLYWOOD APPLIED OVER 1/ 2 -INCH
MINIMUM MINIMUM PLYWOOD APPLIED DIRECT TO FRAMING OR 5/8 -INCH GYPSUM SHEATHING
NOMINAL NAIL NAIL SIZE NAIL SIZE
Nail Spacing at Plywood Panel Edges Nail Spacing at Plywood Panel Edges
PLYWOOD PENETRA· (Common (Common
THICK· TIONIN or or
NESS FRAMING Galvanized Galvanized
PLYWOOD GRADE (Inches) (Inches) Box) 6 4 3 22 Box) 6 4 3 22
5fl6 l'/4 6d 200 300 390 510 8d 200 300 390 510
3 /s ]1/2 8d 230 3 360 3 460 3 610 3 !Oct' 280 430 550 730'
STRuCTURAL!
15/32 l'/2 8d 280 430 550 730 10d' 280 430 550 730
15f32 1-'ls 10d5 340 510 665 870 - - - - -
C-D,C-C 5 /16 l'/4 6d 180 270 350 450 8d 180 270 350 450
STRUCTURAL 11/4 390
3fs 6d 200 300 390 510 8d 200 300 510
II, plywood panel
siding and other 3f8 Jl/2 8d 220 3 320 3 410 3 530 3 10d' 260 380 490 640
grades covered in Jl/2 8d 260 640 380 490 640
U.B.C. Standard
l5f32 380 490 10d' 260
No. 25-9. 15 /32 J5/s IOd' 310 460 600 770 - - - - - c
19f32 J5/8 !Od5 340 510 665 870 - - - - - .,~
NAIL SIZE NAIL SIZE 0
(Galvanized (Galvanized :XI
Casing) Casing)
3:
CD
Plywood panel 275 360
c
5/]6 11/4 6d 140 210 275 360 8d 140 210 j=
>iding in grad(!S
c
covered in U.13. C.
Standard :--lo 25-9 -~\s 11'2 8d 130 1 200 1 2601 340' 10d' 160 240 310 410
z
C)
(")
0
c
m
1
All panel edges backed with 2-inch nominal or wider framing. Plywood installed either horizontally or vertically. Space naib at 6 inches on center
c:
along intermediate framing members for 31x-inch plywood installed with face grain parallel to studs spaced 24 inches on center and 12 inches on z
center for other conditions and plywood thicknesses. These values are for short-time loads due to wind or earthquake and must be reduced 25 ;;
percent for normal loading.
0
::tJ
Allowable shear values for nails in framing members of other species set forth in Table No. 25-17 -J of 1.J. B.C. Standards shall be calculated for all :s::
grades by multiplying the values for common and galvanized box nails in STRUCTURAL I and galvanized casing nails in other grades by the CD
following factors: Group III, 0.82 and Group IV, 0.65. !:
r
'Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where nails are spaced 2 inches on center. Q
3The values for 3/H-inch-thick plywood applied direct to framing may be increased 20 percent. provided studs are spaced a maximum of 16 inches on
z
(;)
center or plywood is applied with face grain across studs. (')
"Where plywood is applied on both faces of a wall and nail spacing is less than 6 inches on center on either side, panel joints shall be offset to fall on 0
c
different framing members or framing shall be 3-inch nominal or thicker and nails on each side shall be staggered. m
5 Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where I Od nails having penetration into framing of
more than 15/x inches are spaced 3 inches or less on center.

(..)
(10 TABLE NO. 25-K-2-ALLOWABLE SHEAR FOR WIND OR SEISMIC FORCES IN POUNDS PER FOOT FOR
N PARTICLEBOARD SHEAR WALLS WITH FRAMING OF DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH OR SOUTHERN PINE 1 4
PANELS APPLIED DIRECT TO FRAMING PANELS APPLIED OVER 112· GYPSUM SHEATHING
MINIMUM MINIMUM NAIL
NOMINAL PANEL PENETRATION Nail Size Nail Spacing at Panel Edges (ln.) Nail Size Nail Spacing at Panel Edges (ln.)
THICKNESS IN FRAMING (Common or (Common or
PANEL GRADE (ln.) (ln.) galvanized box) 6 4 3 22 galvanized box) 6 4 3 22
51 16
11/4 180 170 350 450 180 170 350 450
6d 8d
3/g 200 300 390 510 200 300 390 510
:./x 2201 320 3 410' 530'
2-M-W 7iJ6 ll;, 8d 240' 350 1 450 1 585' lOd' 260 380 490 640
If2 260 380 490 640
l/2 310 460 600 770 - - - - -
[5/" l0d 5
5;g 340 510 665 870 - - - - -
1All panel edges backed with 2-inch nominal or wider framing. Panels installed either horizontally or vertically. Space nails at 6 inches on center along
intermediate framing members for 3/s-inch panel installed with the long dimension parallel to studs spaced 24 inches on center and 12 inches on
center for other conditions and panel thicknesses. These values are for short-time loads due to wind or earthquake and must be reduced 25 percent
....<D
for normal loading. ....<D
Allowable shear values for nails in framing members of other species set forth in Table No. 25-17 -J of C. B.C. Standards shall be calculated for all c
grades by multiplying the values for common and galvanized box nails by the following factors: Group III, 0.82 and Group IV, 0.65. ~
"T1
'Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where nails are spaced 2 inches on center. 0
:II
-'The allowable shear values may be increased to the values shown for 112-inch-thick sheathing with the same nailing, provided: s:
(a) The studs are spaced a maximum of 16 inches on center, or Ill
(b) The panels are applied with the long dimension perpendicular to studs. !:
4
r
Where particleboard is applied on both faces of a wall and nail spacing is less than 6 inches on center on either side, panel joints shall be offset to fall on 2
different framing members, or framing shall be 3-inch nominal or thicker and nails on each side shall be staggered. z
G)
5Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where l Od nails having penetration into framing of
(")
more than 15/s inches are spaced 3 inches or less on center. 0
0
m
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 25-L, 25-M-1, 25-M-2
TABLE NO. 25·L-WOOD SHINGLE AND

SHAKE SIDEWALL EXPOSURES
SHINGLE OR SHAKE MAXIMUM WEATHER EXPOSURES

Single-Coursing Double-Coursing
Length and Type No. 1 No.2 No. 1 No.2
I. W-inch Shingles 7%" 7%" 12" [()"
2. !H-inch Shingles H%" H%" 14" 11"
3. 24-inch Shingles Il'h" 11 ]/'2 II 16" 14"

4. I H-inch Resawn Shakes HI/~" - 14" -
5. I H-inch Straight-Split H ~;,"

Shakes
- 16" -
6. 24-inch Resawn Shakes l i \2 " - 20" -
TABLE NO. 25-M-1-EXPOSED PLYWOOD PANEL SIDING
STUD SPACING (INCHES)

MINIMUM MINIMUM PLYWOOD SIDING APPLIED DIRECT
THICKNESS' NO. OF PLIES TO STUDS OR OVER SHEATHING
I. \•V 3 )62
2. V!' 4 24
1Thidne" of grooved panels is measured at bottom of grooves.

2 May be 24 inches if plywood siding applied with face Train perpendicular lo studs or over
one of the following: (a) l-inch board shealhing, (b) 5/,2-inch plywood shealhing or (c)
1
/x -inch plywood shcalhing with face grain of sheathing perpendicular 10 sluds.
TABLE NO. 25-M-2-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR EXPOSED PARTICLEBOARD

PANEL SIDING
MINIMUM THICKNESS (Inches)
Exterior Ceilings
STUD Siding and Soffits
SPACING
GRADE (Inches) Direct to Studs Continuous Support Direct to Supports
2-M-W 16 1
/x "if16 :-.;]()
~/t6
24 'I' 3 /x
2-M-1 16 5 /x -'/x -
2-M-2
2-M-3 24 y, -'/x -
383
25-N-1, 25-N-2 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-N-1-PLYWOOD WALL SHEATHING 1

(Not Exposed to the Weather, Face Grain Parallel or
Perpendicular to Studs)
STUD SPACING (Inches)

Siding
MINIMUM THICKNESS PANEL SPAN RATING Nailed to Sheathing Under Coverings
AND CONSTRUCTION Specified in Section 2516 (g) 4
Studs
Sheathing Sheathing
Parallel Perpendicular
to Studs to Studs
I. Y1o" 12/0, 16/0, 20/0 16 - 16

11
2. "'lx". 1513"2 , /:t-3
1
16 24
ply 16/0, 20/0, 24/0. 32/16 24
3. 'Yn", 112"--4 and 5

24/0, 32/16 24 24 24
ply
IJn reference to Section 2517 (g) 3, blocking of horizontal JOints ts not reqmred.
TABLE NO. 25-N-2-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR PARTICLEBOARD

WALL SHEATHING,
(Not exposed to the weather, long dimension of the panel parallel
or perpendicular to studs)
STUD SPACING (Inches)
Sheathing Under Coverings
S~ecified in Section
GRADE
THICKNESS
(Inches) Si~~n~t~~~ed 516 (g/4 Parallel
or Perpend cular to Studs
'5(]6 16 -
2-M-W 3 /x 24 16
7/16 24 24
2-M-1 3 /x 16 -
2-M-2
2-M-3 lf2 16 16
'In rcterencc to Section 2517 (g) 3, blockmg of honzontal JOints ts not reqUired.
384
TABLE NO. 25-0-HARDBOARD SIDING
FRAMING NAIL SPACING

MINIMUM ~x4'1
NOMINAL M IMUM NAIL BRACING
SIDING THICKNESS SPACING SIZE 1 •2 GENERAL PANELS3
I. LAP SIDING
Direct to studs %!" 16" o.c. 8d 16" o.c. Not

applicable
Over sheathing Ys" 16" o.c. IOd 16" o.c. Not

applicable
2. SQUARE EDGE
PANEL SIDING
Direct to studs Yx" 24" o.c. 6d 6" o.c. 4" o.c.

edges; edges;
12" o.c. at 8" o.c.
intermed. intermed.
supports supports
Over sheathing -Ys" 24" o.c. 8d 6" o.c. 4" o.c.

edges; edges;
12" o.c. at 8" o.c.
intermed. interrned.
supports supports
3. SHIPLAP EDGE
PANEL SIDING
Direct to studs :%" 16" o.c. 6d 6" o.c. 4" o.c.

edges; edges;
12" o.c. at 8" o.c.
intermed. intermed.
supports supports
Over sheathing Yx" 16" o.c. 8d 6" o.c. 4" o.c.

edges; edges;
12" o.c. at 8" o.c.
intermed. intermed.
supports supports
1Nails shall he corrosion resistant in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17.
2 Minimum acceptable nail dimensions (inches).
Panel Siding Lap Siding
Shank diameter .092 .099
!lead diameter .225 .240
1
When used to comply with Section 2517 (g) 3.
385
25-P, 25-Q 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-P-ALLOWABLE SHEARS FOR WIND OR SEISMIC LOADING

ON VERTICAL DIAPHRAGMS OF FIBERBOARD SHEATHING BOARD
CONSTRUCTION FOR TYPE V CONSTRUCTION ONLY 1
SHEAR VALUE 3-INCH
NAIL SPACING AROUND
SIZE AND PERIMETER AND 6-INCH
APPLICATION NAIL SIZE AT INTERMEDIATE POINTS
No. II gauge galvanized
I. W' X 4' X 8' 125 2
roofing nail I '12'' long, 7/1o" head
2. 2')11,'' 4' 8'· No. II gauge galvanized

X X 175
roofing nail I :Y." long, 7/16" head
1F1berboard sheathing diaphragms shall not be used to brace concrete or masonry walls.
2The shear value may be 175 for '12-inch x 4-foot x 8-foot fiberboard nail-base sheathing.
TABLE NO. 25-Q--NAILING SCHEDULE
CONNECTION NAILING'
I. Joist to sill or girder, toenail 3-8d
2. Bridging to joist, toenail each end 2-8d
3. I" x 6" subfloor or less to each joist, face nail 2-8d
4. Wider than I" x 6" subfloor to each joist, face nail 3-8d
5. 2" subfloor to joist or girder, blind and face nail 2-16d
6. Sole plate to joist or blocking, face nail 16dat 16"o.c.
7. Top plate to stud, end nail 2-16d
8. Stud to sole plate 4-8d, toenail or
2-16d, end nail
9. Double studs, face nail 16d at 24" o.c.
10. Doubled top plates, face nail 16dat 16"o.c.
II. Top plates, laps and intersections, face nail 2-16d
12. Continuous header, two pieces 16d at 16" o.c.
along each edge
13. Ceiling joists to plate, toenail 3-8d
14. Continuous header to stud, toenail 4-8d
15. Ceiling joists, laps over partitions, face nail 3-16d
16. Ceiling joists to parallel rafters, face nail 3-16d
17. Rafter to plate, toenail 3-8d
18. I" brace to each stud and plate, face nail 2-8d
19. I" x 8" sheathing or less to each bearing, face nail 2-8d
20. Wider than I" x 8" sheathing to each bearing, face nail 3-8d
21. Built-up comer studs 16d at 24" o.c.
22. Built-up girder and beams 20d at 32" o.c. at top
and bottom and staggered
2-20d at ends and at
each splice
(Continued)
386
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 25-Q
CONNECTION NAILING1
23. 2" planks 2-16d at each bearing
24. Plywood and particleboard:S
Subfloor, roof and wall sheathing (to framing):
I/2" and less 6d2
19/32" -3/4" 8d3 or 6d4
7/8"-1" 8d2
ll/s''-11/4" 10d3 or 8d4
Combination Subfloor-underlayment (to framing):
3/4" and less 6d4
7/8''-1" 8d4
ll/8"-11/4" 10d3 or 8d4
25. Panel Siding (to framing):
1/2" or less 6d6
11
5/H 8d6
26. Fiberboard Sheathing:?
1/i' No. II ga.X
6dl
No. 16 ga.9
25fl2" No. II ga.X
8d.1
No. 16 ga.9
1
Common or box nails may be used except where otherwise staled.
2Common or deformed shank.
3Common.
4 Dcfonned shank.
0
Nails spaced at 6 inches on center at edges, 12 inches at intem1ediate supports except 6
inches at all supports where spans are 48 inches or more. For nailing of plywood ami
particleboard diaphragms and shear walls, refer to Section 2513 (c). Nails for wall
sheathing may be common, box or casing.
6
Corrosion-resistant siding or casing nails conforming to the requirements of Section 2516
(j) I.
7
Fastcncrs spaced 3 inches on center at exterior edges and 6 inches on center at intennediatc
supports.
8
Corrosion-resistant roofing nails with 7; 16 -inch-diametcr head and 1 1h-inch length for
1
h-inch sheathing and 13/ 4-inch length for 251J 2-inch sheathing conforming to the
requirements of Section 2516 (j) I.
"Corrosion-resistant staples with nominal 71t 6-inch crown and 11/ 8-inch length for 1h-inch
sheathing and 11h-inch length for 2"hrinch sheathing conforming to the requirements of
Section 2516 (j) I.
387
25-R-1, 25-R-2, 25-R-3 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-R-1-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR LUMBER

FLOOR AND ROOF SHEATHING1 3
MINIMUM NET THICKNESS (Inches)

OF LUMBER PLACED
SPAN PERPENDICULAR TO SUPPORTS DIAGONALLY TO SUPPORTS
(Inches)
Surfaced Dry•
1
Surfaced
Unseasoned
FLOORS
Surfaced Dry•
I Surfaced
Unseasoned
l
I. 24 'I• 2'fn 'I• 2'h2
2. 16 'Is I IIIlo
ROOFS
51s 11 /16
3. 24 51s
I llf16 'I•
I 25!J2
'Installation details shall conform to Sections 2517 (e) I and 2517 (h) 7 for
floor and roof sheathing, respectively.
2 Maximum 19 percent moisture content.
'Floor or roof sheathing conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet
the design criteria of Section 2516.
TABLE NO. 25-R-2-SHEATHING LUMBER SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING

MINIMUM GRADE REQUIREMENTS: BOARD GRADE
SOLID FLOOR OR SPACED ROOF
GRADING RULES
ROOF SHEATHING SHEATHING
I. Utility Standard NLGA, WCLIB, WWPA
2. 4 Common or NLGA, WCLIB, WWPA,
3 Common or Standard
Utility NHPMA or NELMA
3. No.3 No.2 SP1B
4. Merchantable Construction Common R1S
TABLE NO. 25-R-3-SIZE, HEIGHT AND SPACING OF WOOD STUDS1

NONBEARING
BEARING WALLS WALLS
SUPPORTING SUPPORTING SUPPORTING LATERALLY
LATERALLY
ROOF AND ONE FLOOR, TWO FLOORS, UNSUPPORTED
UNSUPPORTED
CEILING ROOF AND ROOF AND
STUD STUD STUD
ONLY CEILING CEILING HEIGHT3 SPACING
SIZE HEIGHT3
(Inches) (Feet) SPACING (Inches) (Feet) (Inches)
I. 2 x 3' - - - - 10 16
2. 2x4 10 24 16 - 14 24
3. 3x4 10 24 24 16 14 24
4. 2x5 10 24 24 - 16 24
5. 2 X 6 10 24 24 16 20 24
!Continued)
388
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 25-R-3, 25-S-1
1
Utility grade studs shall not be spaced more than 16 inches on center, or support more than
a roof and ceiling, or exceed R feet in height for exterior walls and load bearing or I 0 feet
for interior nonload-bearing walls.
2Shall not be used in exterior walls.
)Listed heights are distances between points of lateral support placed perpendicular to the
plane of the wall. Increases in unsupported height are pennitted where justified by an
analysis.
TABLE NO. 25-S-1-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR PLYWOOD SUBFLOOR AND

ROOF SHEATHING CONTINUOUS OVER TWO OR MORE SPANS AND FACE
GRAIN PERPENDICULAR TO SUPPORTS, a
ROOF2
Maximum Span Load (In Pounds
(In Inches) per Square Foot) FLOOR
PANEL PLYWOOD MAXIMUM
SPAN THICKNESS Edges Edges Total Live SPAN4
RATINGJ (Inch) Blocked Unblocked Load Load (In Inches)
I. 12/0 5/1o 12 135 130 0
2. 16/0 5 /16, ·1/H 16 RO 65 0
3. 20/0 5/1o, 3 /x 20 70 55 0
4. 2410 3 /x 24 16 60 45 0
5. 24/0 "l.u, 112 24 24 60 45 ()
6. 32116 l:"if32, 1/2, IYf.12,

'lx 32 28 55 35' 16'•
7. 40/20 IYf:.2, 'Sf'd, 23 /:.2,
7/x 40 32 35' 20'' 7
3!4, 40'
8. 48/24 2Yl2, '1•, 7/x 48 36 40 5 35' 24
1These values apply for C-C, C-D. Structural I and II grades only. Spans shall be limited to
values shown because of possible effect of concentrated loads.
2
Unifonn load detlection limitations 1/ 1xo of the span under live load plus dead load. 1h 40
under live load only. Edges may be blocked with lumber or other approved type of edge
support.
3Span rating appears on all panels in the construction grades listed in Footnote No. I.
4Piywood edges shall have approved tongue-and-groove joints or shall be supported with
blocking unless 1/ 4 -inch minimum thickness underlaymcnt, or 1 1h inches of approved
cellular or lightweight concrete is placed over the sub floor, or finish floor is J/4-inch wood
strip. Allowable uniform load based on deflection of 1f.1 6o of span is I 65 pounds per square
foot (pst).
5 For roof live load of40 psf or total load of 55 psf, decrease spans by 13 percent or usc panel
with next greater siXlll rating.
6 May be 24 inches if 3/-1-inch wood strip flooring is installed at right angles to joists.
7 May he 24 inches where a minimum of 11h inches of approved cellular or lightweight
concrete is placed over the suhiloor and the plywood sheathing is manufactured with
exterior glue.
HFioor or roof sheathing confonning with this table shall be deemed to meet the design
criteria of Section 2516.
389
25-S-2, 25-S-3 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-S-2-ALLOWABLE LOADS FOR PLYWOOD ROOF

SHEATHING CONTINUOUS OVER TWO OR MORE SPANS AND
FACE GRAIN PARALLEL TO SUPPORTS1 2
NO. OF TOTAL LIVE
THICKNESS PLIES SPAN LOAD LOAD
15 /3"2 4 24 30 20
STRUCTURAL!
5 24 45 35
lf2 4 24 35 25
5 24 55 40
Other grades 15f:n 5 24 25 20
covered in U. B. C.
Standard No. 25-9 lf2 5 24 30 25
IY(_n
4 24 35 25
5 24 50 40
5 /x 4 24 40 30
5 24 55 45
1Uniform load deflection limitations: 1/1xo of span under live load plus dead load, 1/24o under
live load only. Edges shall be blocked with lumber or other approved type of edge
supports.
2Roof sheathing conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of
Section 2516.
TABLE NO. 25-S-3-ALLOWABLE LOADS FOR PARTICLEBOARD

ROOF SHEATHING1 2 4
MAXIMUM ON-CENTER
SPACING OF LIVE LOAD TOTAL LOAD
THICKNESS SUPPORTS (Pounds Per (Pounds Per
GRADE (Inches) (Inches) Square Foot) Square Foot)
2-M-W 3/x 1 16 45 65
7(lo 16 105 105
7!16·' 24 30 40
'12 16 110 150
'12 24 40 55
'Panels arc continuous over two or more spans.
'Uniform load deflection limitation: 1/IHo of the span under live load plus dead load and 1h•o
of the span under live load only.
'Edges shall be tongue-and-groove or supported with blocking or edge clips.
•Roof sheathing conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of
Section 2516.
390
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 25-T-1, 25-T-2
TABLE NO. 25·T·1-ALLOWABLE SPAN FOR PLYWOOD

COMBINATION SUBFLOOR-UNDERLAYMENT1 2
Plywood Continuous over TWo or More Spans and Face
Grain Perpendicular to Supports
SPACING OF JOISTS (Inches)
IDENTIFICATION 16 20 24 48
Species Group 3 Thickness in inches

I lh 51s '14 -
2,3 518 314 718 -
4 314 71s I -
Span Rating 4 16o.c. 20o.c. 24o.c. 48 o.c.

I Spans limited to value shown because of possible effect of concentrated loads. Allowable
uniform load based on deflection of 1f3 60 of span is 125 pounds per square foot (psf), except
allowable total uniform load for 11/ 8-inch plywood over joists spaced 48 inches on center
is 65 psf. Plywood edges shall have approved tongue-and-groove joints or shall be
supported with blocking, unless 1/ 4 -inch minimum thickness underlayment is installed, or
finish floor is 3/ 4-inch wood strip.
If wood strips are perpendicular to supports, thicknesses shown for 16-inch and 20-inch
spans may be used on 24-inch span.
2Floor panels conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of
Section 2516.
3 Applicable to all grades of sanded exterior-type plywood. See U .B.C. Standard No. 25-9 for
plywood species groups.
4 Applicable to underlayment grade and C-C (plugged).
TABLE NO. 25-T-2-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR PARTICLEBOARD

SUBFLOOR AND COMBINED SUBFLOOR·UNDERLAYMENT1 s
MAXIMUM SPACING OF SUPPORTS2
THICKNESS Combined
GRADE (Inches) Subfloor Subfloor-Underlayment3 4
lh 16 -
2-M-W 51s 20 16
314 24 24
2-M-3 314 20 20
1All panels are continuous over two or more spans.
2Uniform deflection limitation: lf36o of the span under 100 psf minimum load.
'Edges shall have tongue-and-groove joints or shall be supported with blocking. The
tongue-and-groove panels are installed with the long dimension perpendicular to sup-
ports.
4 A finish wearing surface is to be applied to the top of the panel.
5 Floor sheathing conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of
Section 2516.
391
25-U 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-U-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR 2-INCH

TONGUE-AND-GROOVE DECKING
SPAN' LIVE DEFLECTION f E

(In Feet) LOAD LIMIT (psi) (psi)
ROOFS
1/240 1()() 170,000
20 2.5(),000
l /.360
l/.240 2.5G,OOO
4 30 210 .1S4,000
1/3GO
l/240 .140,000
40 l/'3()() 270 ."512,000
l/240 242.000
20 1/3()0 200 30.'5,000
1/:240 :36~.000
4 ..5 30 :270 H).'J,OOO
I /360
1/240 H>4.000
40 1/3()() .'3.'50 723,000
1/240 '332,000
20 :250
1/'3()0 500,000
5.0 30 1/240 495,000
.3'30
1/'360 742,000
1/240 660,000
40 420
1/360 1,000,000
l/240 442,000
20 300
l/3GO 660,000
1/240 662,000
5.5 .'30 400
1/360 998,000
1/240 884,000
40 500
l/360 1,330,000
l/240 575,000
20 360
l/360 862,000
l/240 862,000
G.O .'30 480
l/360 1,295,000
l/240 1,150,000
40 1 /.)()() 600 1,730,000
l/240 595,000
20 420
l/360 892,000
l/240 .360 892,000
G..'5 30
l/360 1,340,000
l/240 1,190,000
40 700
l/360 1,730,000
(Continued)
392
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 25-U
SPAN 1 LIVE DEFLECTION f E

(In Feet) LOAD LIMIT (psi) (psi)
l/240 910,000
20 490
1/.'3()0 1,.'360,000
l/240 (j')(l
1,:370,000
7.0 :30 1/.'3()() 2,000,000
1/240 1,H20,000
40 HIO 2,72.5,000
1/.'360
1/240 .')(i()
1, 12.5,000
20 1,GH.5,000
l/.'3GO
1/240 1,GH.5,000
7 ..5 :30 7.50 2,.5.'30,000
1/.'3GO
1/240 2,2.50,000
40 ~no
1 /:3()0 :3,:3HO,OOO
l/240 I ,:3GO,OOO
20 ()40
]/.'3()0 2,040,000
8.0 2,040,000
l/240
.'30 8.50
I /:3(10 .'3,060,000
FLOORS
--
4 840 1,000,000
4.5 40 I /:3GO 950 1,.'300,000
5.0 ]()60 I ,f)()O,OOO
1Spans are based on simple beam action with 10 pounds per square fool dead
load and provisions for a 300-pound concentrated load on a 12-inch width of
floor decking. Random lay-up permitted in accordance with the provisions
of Section 2517 (e) 3 or 2517 (h) 8. Lumber thickness assumed at I v,
inches, net.
393
TABLE NO. 25-U-J-1-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR FLOOR JOISTS-40 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD
DESIGN CRITERIA: Deflection-For 40 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 360. Strength-Live load of 40 lbs.
per sq. ft. plus dead load of 10 lbs. per sq. ft. determines the required fiber stress value.
JOIST Modulus of Elasticity, E, in 1,000,000 psi
SIZE SPACING
(IN) (IN) 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.2
8-6 8-10 9-2 9-6 9-9 10-0 10-3 10-6 10-9 10-11 11-2 11-4 11-7 11-11
12.0 720 780 830 890 940 990 1040 1090 1140 1190 1220 1280 1320 1410
7-9 8-0 8-4 8-7 8-10 9-1 9-4 9-6 9-9 9-11 10-2 10-4 10-6 10-10
2x6 16.0 790 860 920 980 1040 1090 1150 1200 1250 1310 1360 1410 1460 1550
6-9 7-0 7-3 7-6 7-9 7-11 8-2 8-4 8-6 8-8 8-10 9-0 9-2 9-6
24.0 900 980 1050 l120 1190 1250 1310 1380 1440 1500 1550 1610 1670 1780
11-3 11-8 12-1 12-6 12-10 1.3-2 1:3-6 13-10 14-2 14-5 14-8 15-0 15-3 15-9
12.0 720 780 830 890 940 990 10-!0 1090 l140 1190 1230 1280 1320 1410
10-2 10-7 11-0 11-4 11-8 12-0 12-3 12-7 12-10 13-1 13-4 13-7 13-10 14-3
2x8 16.0 790 850 920 980 1040 1090 1150 1200 1250 1310 1360 1410 1460 1550
8-11 9-3 9-7 9-11 10-2 10-6 10-9 11-0 11-3 11-5 11-8 11-ll 12-1 12-6
24.0 900 980 1050 1120 1190 1250 1310 1.380 1440 1500 1550 1610 1670 1780
14-4 14-11 15-5 15-11 16-5 16-10 17-3 17-8 18-0 18-5 18-9 19-1 19-5 20-1
12.0 720 780 830 890 940 990 1040 1090 1140 1190 1230 1280 1320 1410
13-0 13-6 14-0 14-6 14-11 15-3 15-8 16-0 16-.5 16-9 17-0 17-4 17-8 18-3
2xl0 16.0 790 850 920 980 1040 1090 1150 1200 1250 1310 1360 1410 1460 1550
11-4 11-10 12-3 12.8 13-0 13-4 13-8 14-0 14-4 14-7 14-11 15-2 15-5 15-11
24.0 900 980 1050 1120 1190 1250 1310 1.380 1440 1500 1550 1610 1670 1780 c
~
17-5 18-1 18-9 19-4 19-11 20-6 21-0 21-6 21-11 22-.'5 22.10 23-3 23-7 24-5 "TI
12.0 720 780 830 890 940 990 1040 1090 1140 1190 12'30 1280 1320 1410 0
JJ
15-10 16-5 17-0 17-7 18-1 18.7 19-1 19-6 19-11 20-4 20-9 21-1 21-6 22-2 :s::
2x12 16.0 790 860 920 980 1040 1090 ll50 1200 1250 1310 1360 1410 1460 1550 Ill
13-10 14-4 14-11 15-4 15-10 16-3 16-8 17-0 17-5 17-9 18-1 18-5 18-9 19-4 c
24.0 900 980 1050 1120 1190 1250 1310 1380 1440 1500 1550 1610 1670 1780 ;=
0
S<ITES:
1I 1The required extreme fiber stress in bending rF,I m pounds per square inch is shown bekm each span.
z
G)
(: >l'se single or· repetitive member bending me;; values IF,I and modulu; of elasticity values IE• from Tables :--;os. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2. (")
{31For more c:o_rnprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending o,;;tress values fF h> and modulus of elasticit; values(£). other <;pacing of members and 0
,,ther condtl!<ms of loading. see l'. B.C. Standard ~o. 25-21 0
m
( .J. 1Tht spans in these tables are intended for use in covered structures or\\ here moisture content in u-;e doe-; not exceed I I} percent
TABLE NO. 25-U-J-6---ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR CEILING JOIST5-10 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD
(Drywall Ceiling)
DESIGN CRITERIA: Deflection-For 10 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. limited to span in inches divided by 240. Strength-live load of 10
lbs. per sq. ft. plus dead load of 5 lbs. per sq. ft. determines the required fiber stress value. c:
z
JOIST Modulus of Elasticity, E, in 1,000,000 psi :;;
SIZE SPACING 0
(IN) (IN) 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.2 :Il
9-10 10-3 10-7 10-11 11-3 11-7 11-10 12-2 12-5 12.8 12-11 13-2 13-4 13-9 s:
12.0 710 770 830 880 930 980 1030 1080 1130 1180 1220 1270 1310 1400 Ill
c:
2x4 16.0
8-11
780
9-4
850
9-8
910
9-11
970
10-3 10-6
1030 1080
10-9
1140
11-0
1190
11-3
1240
11-6
1290
11-9
1340
11-11
1390
12-2
1440
12-6
1540
r=c
7-10 8-1 8-5 8-8 8-11 9-2
1170 1240
9-5 9-8 9-10
1420
10-0
1480
10-3
1540
10-5
1600
10-7
1650
10-11
1760
z
G)
24.0 900 970 1040 1110 1300 1360
(')
15-6 16-1 16-8 17-2 17-8 18-2 18-8 19-1 19-6 19-11 20-3 20-8 21-0 21-8
12.0 710 770 830 880 930 980 1030 1080 1130 1180 1220 1270 1310 1400 0
c
14-1 14-7 15-2 15-7 16-1 16-6 16-11 17-4 17-8 18-1 18-5 18-9 19-1 19-8 m
2x6 16.0 780 850 910 970 1030 1080 1140 1190 1240 1290 1340 1390 1440 1540
12-3 12-9 13-3 13-8 14-1 14-5 14-9 15-2 15-6 15-9 16-1 16-4 16-8 17-2
24.0 900 970 1040 1110 1170 1240 1300 1360 1420 1480 1540 1600 1650 1760
20-5 21-2 21-1 22-8 23-4 24-0 24-7 25-2 25-8 26-2 26-9 27-2 27-8 28-7
12.0 710 770 830 880 930 ' 980 1030 1080 1130 1180 1220 1270 1310 1400
18-6 19-3 19-1 20-7 21-2 21-9 22-4 22-10 23-4 23-10 24-3 24-8 25-2 25-11
2x8 16.0 780 850 910 970 1030 1080 1140 1190 1240 1290 1340 1390 1440 1540
16-2 16-1( 17-5 18-0 18-6 19-0 19-6 19-11 20-5 20-10 21-2 21-7 21-11 22-8
24.0 900 970 1040 1110 1170 1240 1300 1360 1420 1480 1540 1600 1650 1760
26-0 27-1 28-0 28-11 29-9 30-7 31-4 32-1 . 32-9 33-5 34-1 34-8 35-4 36-5
12.0 710 770 830 880 930 980 1030 1080 1130 1180 1220 1270 1310 1400
23-8 24-7 25-5 26-3 27-1 27-9 28-6 29-2 29-9 30-5 31-0 31-6 32-1 33-1
2x 10 16.0 780 850 910 970 1030 1080 1140 1190 1240 1290 1340 1390 1440 1540
20-8 21-6 22-3 22-11 23-8 24-3 24-10 25-5 26-0 26-6 27-1 27-6 28-0 28-11
24.0 900 970 1040 1110 1170 1240 1300 1360 1420 1480 1540 1600 1650 1760
'iOTES:
1The required extremt? fiber ~tre:-;s in bending (F;,J in pound-, per ~quare inch 1~ ~hov. n belnv. each ~pan
1L'se ~iogle or repetiti\e member bending :..tre~~ \'alue~ (F" 1 and modu]u.., of elasticlt~ ,·aJue" ( E 1 trom Table.., \'n" 25-A-1 and 2:;-:\-2
JF()f m<Jre comprehen~i' e table-; CO\ering a broader range of bending stres.., value" l f ,, 1and rnoduJu.., of ehlqJCJt: ';;.lue-.. {,__-1. other -,pacing of member" ..:nJ
\ltherconditions of loading. see L-.B.C. Standard :'\o. 25-21
-~ rhe spans in these tables are int~nded for u~e in co\ered '-tructure" or v. here moi..,ture content in u~e doe~ not e\ceed 19 perct.:nt
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-1-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR LOW- OR HIGH-SLOPE RAFTERS
20 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (Supporting Drywall Ceiling)
DESIGN CRITERIA: Strength-15 lbs. per sq. ft. dead load plus 20 lbs. per sq. ft. live load determines required fiber stress.
Deflection-For 20 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 240. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection.
RAFTER
SIZE SPACING Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending Fb (psi).
(IN) (IN) 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900
K.6 9·4 10·0 10.9 ll·.5 12·11 12· 7 13·2 J3.H J.J.2 14·1> 15·2 JS.f> Hi.! 1 16· 7
12.0 0.26 0.'35 0.44 0.54 0.64 0. 75 O.Hn 0.98 !.II 1.21 I. 37 LSI 1.(;6 l.kl 1.96
7··1 /).j 8·8 9.4 9-10 JII.S 10-11 11-5 11-10 12-·1 12·9 1:3-2 1.3-7 13-11 1-l-.J
2xG _:_16::..:'·-=-0+1,.,:17,2:.::_3+00:'.-0;'3C'-O-+i:c0.~3-=-8-+;;-0'-;:-li-6-+::C0.~5-=-5-+-::0-:.f',.,:5-t-,-Oc-.7:-'5,-----J-';O,:-.o';'5-t-,-0:".97.'7-t-:;I-,-.0:-7;;-t-l;-;,:-l':cJ+;-;1."""3"'1+1"""."""44-,--t-;-l.;-5-;;6+71.,7-;;0,-
r;.o 6-7 7-1 7-7 8-1 H-6 H-11 'l-4 9-8 10-0 10-5 10-Y 11-1 11-.5 ll-8
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.31 0 ..38 0.45 0.53 0 6 I 0.70 0.78 O.ii8 0 97 1.07 1.17 1.21> 1..39
11-2 12-1 11-'3 14-2 1.5-0 I J).J() J(j_/ 17--1 18-0 18-9 19·5 2ii-O 20-R 21-.3 1 21-10
12.0 0.2G 0.3.3 0.11 :0.5·1 '0.64 ; 0.7.5 O.iiG 0.98 1.11 1.24 1.17 LSI 1.66 l.R1 I 1.96
9-8 10-7 11-6 · 12-.3 13-0 13-8 11--1 t.S-0 15-7 16-.3 W-'l 17-4 17-10 IH-5 IH-ll
2 x8 ..3:-:-R-+7-0:,:.4:_:6-+7-0:.::.5c;:5,-t-';O.:.;..6::..:'.5-t-70-';.7:...;.5-t-:1":1H.::_.5-t-:;O:.:,.~'-:JG-t-::l:.:,.<::..l7-t_1,_,.~1'.,.,J+:-1..;-1.:,1+.;-1.~4-;;4+:-1.~5-;;6+7
_:_16:.:·.::.0+1:0:l.::2.::..3+1;:.Jc.;:.3.::.0-+.;:.0:.:: 1 ~·7-;:0,.--
7 -II 1 8-8 9-4 10.0 10-7 11·2 11-9 12.3 12-9 13-1 11-H 1-1-2 II- 7 15-0 15-5
24.0 0.19 : 025 IL31 (1.18 O..J.S 0.5'3 O.fil 0.70 0.7H 0.81> 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.28 1..39
11-.3 115-8 16-lll18-1 19-2 20.2 21-2 22·1 23-0 21-11 21-9 2.5.(i 26-4 27-1 , 27-10
12.0 1126 0.35 0.44 •0.54 0.64 j 0.75 O.Hfi 0.98 1.11 1.24 117 LSI l.fi6 1.81 1.96 1
12-.J !Hi 114-8 j15-8 16-7 17-6 Hi-1 19-2 19-11 20-8 21-5 22-1 22-10 2.3 ..5 ! 24-1
2 xi o .o~. .:~: . :\=-~'.:. 1+r:.:;1.: .~o:.:.l-+r:.:.: .: 1~.: .~"'1 :.:.~2~·~ ~-+:.:.~3c :·~: ,~-+,: . :~: . :~ :.:· ~-+: . :~'~;: . :}: . :,+~-:5il.: :.~-t~. : ~-:-;: . :_~-+- ':.:.: ~.:. :~ :-:1+: . :,;-l_~,:-Ji+,:1 -il.· : _~',-.;-1' +1 :-18.: -41_~.:,-,'+:-:1'..,_;_~r" "~_!>-i!~1:9.o;'-.-3'_-;;o9s-
_1:.:fi::..:' +:
24.o 1119 112.5 0 ..11 j0.18 0.4:o •O ..:o3 1161 0.70 :078 O.liH 0'17 "
17-4 ll)_() 20-6 j21-11 23-3 21-7 2.~-9 26-l! 28-0 29-1 10-1 31-1 32-0 :32-11131-10
12.0 0 2fi · 0.1.5 0.44 0.54 , 0.64 0.7.~ O.Hfi 0 98 1.11 1.24 Ll7 LSI 1.6tl u,[ ! 1.9G
c:
15-0 16-6 17-9 19-0 120-2 21-1 22-.J 23-1 2-1-3 25-2 2fi-ll :2fi-ll 27-9 2il-6 29-1 z
:;;
2x12 _1~6_0~-\~'~~~1~l+r~:l~~o~.5-+o:-1:~~~~-+;0~IS~~~~c-to~16~~~~-+.~~~~~~~-';~~:~_~~-:;~-;;:~~"""J~~~:~~,..,I~J~~~~:-~o;'-i+~~1-~'~.~~;~1-~~:1~;nz~:s"t~2"""~~~,,6~2"""~·,~~~-- 0
24.0 ol<J 112~ 0.11 0.18 1u.5 lo ..53 0.61 o7o o7s 081i O<J7 I07 1.17 us 1.19 ::0
s:
'OafES: ID
(liThe required modulus of elasticity(£) in 1.000.000 pounds per square inch is shown belo" each span. c:
12)\..'se single or repetitive member bending stress values IF,J and modulus of elasticits values lEI from Tables~'" 25·A-I and 25·A·2 For duration of load r=
stress increases. ~ee Section 2504 (cl 4. c
(3 JFor more comprehensive tables covering a broader range of bendmg stress value-; (Fh) and modulu.;; of elasticit! value.;; I/:-). other .;;pacing of member'- ;.md z
G)
other conditions of loading. see C .B.C. Standard ~o 25·21
(4 JThe spans in these table.;; are intended for u.;;e in covered :"tructure.., or v.. here moi~ture cnntent m u:-.e doe.., not e.\ceed 19 percent n
0
c
m
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-2-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR LOW- OR HIGH-SlOPE RAFTERS
30 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (Supporting Drywall Ceiling)
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection. c
~
RAFTER "TI
Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending F b (psi).
SIZE SPACING
(IN)
0
(IN) 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 JJ
7-6 8-2 8-10 9-6 10-0 10-7 11-1 11-7 12-1 12-6 1:3-0 13-5 13-10 14-2 14-7 s:
12.0 0.27 0 ..36 0.45 0.55 0.6G 0.77 0.89 1.01 1.14 1.28 ].! I !.56 1.71 1.86 2.02 OJ
!;;;
6-6 1-l 7-8 8-2 8-8 9-2 9-7 10-0 10-5 10-10 11-.3 11-7 11-11 12-4 12-8 r
2x6 16.0 0.24 0 ..31 0 ..39 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 1.22 1.'35 1.48 1.61 1.75 Q
5-4 5-10 6-.3 6-8 7-1 7-6 7-10 8-2 8-6 8-10 9-2 9-(i 9-9 10-0 10-4 z
G)
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.32 0 ..39 0.46 0.5·1 0.63 0.72 0.81 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.21 1.31 1.4.3
9-10 10-10 11-8 12-6 13-.'3 1:3-11 14-8 15-'3 15-11 16-6 17-1 17-S 18-2 18-9 19-3 0
12.0 0.27 0.36 0.55 !.56 1.86 2 02
0
0.45 0.66 0.77 0.89 1.01 1.14 1.28 1.41 1.71 c
8-7 9-4 10-1 10-10 11-6 12-l 12-8 13-3 13-9 14-4 14-10 15-3 15-9 16-3 16-8 m
2x8 16.0 0.24 0.'31 0.39 0.48 0.57 067 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 1.22 ] ..'3.5 1.48 1.61 1.75
7-0 1-8 8-3 8-10 9-4 9-10 10-4 10-10 11-3 11-8 12-1 12-6 12-10 1'3-3 13-7
24.0 0.19 0.2.5 0.32 0 ..'39 0.46 0.51 0.6'3 0.72 0.81 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.21 1.31 1.43
12-7 13-9 14-11 15-11 16-11 17-lO 18-8 HJ-6 20-4 21-1 21-10 22-6 2'3-3 23-11 24-6
12.0 0.27 0.36 0.4.5 0.55 0.66 0.77 0.89 1.01 l.H 1.28 )..j] 1..56 1.71 1.86 2.02
10-11 II-II 12-11 [.1-9 14-8 !5-5 16-2 16-ll 17-7 18-3 !H-I l 19-6 20-1 20-8 21-3
2x!O 16.0 0.24 0.31 () .39 0.18 0.57 0.67 0.77 O.bH 0.99 1.10 1.22 1.15 1.48 Uil 175
8-1 l 9-9 10-6 ll-'3 Il-l! !2-7 13-2 !3-9 14-4 14-ll !5-5 [.5-ll !6-5 16-ll 17-4
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.32 0.39 0.46 0.54 0.63 072 0.8! 0.90 !.00 1.10 1.21 1..'31 1.43
15--1 !6-9 18-l 19-4 20-6 21-il 22-8 23-9 24-8 25-7 26-6 27-5 2H-3 29-1 29-10
12.0 0.27 0.36 0.45 0.55 0.66 0 77 0.89 1.01 1.14 1.28 1.41 1..56 1.71 1.86 2.02
13-.'3 14-6 15-8 16-9 17-9 IS-9 19-8 20-6 2!-5 2~-0 2'3-0 23-9 24-5 2.5-2 25-10
2x12 16.0 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.48 0 ..57 O.fi7 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 1.22 1.15 1.48 !.61 1.75
10-10 11-10 12-10 !3-8 14-6 15-4 16-l 16-9 17-5 !8-1 !H-9 !9-4 20-0 20-6 21-l
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.'32 0.39 0.46 0 ..54 0.63 0.72 0.81 0.90 1.00 !.10 1.21 1.31 1.43
:-.iOTES: I I !The required modulus of elasticit) i£1 in 1.000.000 pounds per square inch is shown below each span.
(21l'se single or repetiti' e member bending stress values 1F;,I and modulus of cla>ticit' values 1£1 from Tables :S:os. 25-A-1 and 25-.-\-2. For duration of load
c.u stress increases. see Section 2504 (c) 4.
!:!3 13 )For more comprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending stres; 'alues 1F;, I and modulus of e\astJcit' 'alues If. I. other spacing of members and
other conditions of loading. see C. B.C. Standard :S:o. 25-21.
(4lThe ~pan~ in these table~ are intended for use in covered -.;tructures or\\ here moi<;ture content in use doe:., not e.\ceed 19 percent.
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-7-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR LOW-SLOPE RAFTERS, SLOPE 31N 12 OR LESS
20 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (No Ceiling Load)
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection
RAFTER Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending F b (psi).
SIZE SPACING
(IN) (IN) 500 600 700 800 900 1000 llOO 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900
9-2 10-0 i 10-10 11-7 12-4 13-0 111-7 11-2 14-9 I 1.5-4 1-5-11 16-.5 16-11 17-5 17-10
12.0 0.'3'1 0.44 0.5.5 0.67 0.80 0.9-1 '1.09 1.24 1.40 ' 1.56 1 71 1.91 2 09 2.28 2.47
7-11 8-8 9-5 10-0 10-8 11-1 11-9 12-4 12-10 1-l-.'3 111-'cl 11-2 14-8 1.5-1 15-6
2\6 16.0 0.29 0 ..38 0.48 0.58 0.70 0.82 0 94 1.07 1.21 1.'3.5 !50 Ui5 1.81 1.97 2.1-1
6-6 7-1 7-8 8-2 8-8 9-2 9-7 '10-0 10-5 : 10-10 i 11-1 11-7 11-11 12-4 12-8
24.0 0.24 0.31 0 ..39 0.48 0..57 0.67 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 1."2 1.15 1.48 1.61 '1.7.5
12-1 1.3-'3 14-4 15-3 16-.3 17-1 17-11 18-9 19-6 20-.3 20-11 21-7 22-3 22-11 23-7
12.0 0 ..3.'3 0.44 0.55 0.67 0.80 () 94 !()9 1.24 1.40 1.56 1.7'3 1.91 2.09 2.28 2.47
10-6 11-6 12-5 13-3 14-0 1 1- ]() 15-6 16-3 16-10 17-6 18-2 1k-9 19-4 19-10 '20-5
2x8 16.0 0.29 0 ..'38 0.48 0.58 0.70 0.82 () 94 1.07 1.21 1 .15 150 1.65 1.81 UJ7 2.14
8-7 9-4 10-1 10-10 11-6 12-1 12-8 1'3-'3 1'3-9 11-4 i 14-10 1'5-3 15-9 16-3 16-8
24.0 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.48 0 ..57 OG7 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 i 1.22 1.15 1.48 1.61 1.75
15-5 16-11 18-1 19-6 20-8 21- ]() 22-10 2'1-11 24-10 25-10 26-8 27-7 28-5 29-3 30-1
12.0 0.)1 0.44 0.55 0.67 0.80 O.D4 1.09 1.24 1.40 1.56 1.73 1.91 2.09 2.28 2.47
11-4 14-8 15-10 16-11 17-11 18-11 19-10 20.8 21-6 22-4 : 21-2 21-11 ,2-1-7 25-4 26-0
2.x!O 16.0 0.29 0.18 0.48 0.58 0.70 0 82 0.94 1.07 1.21 · 1.'15 I 1..50 Ui5 '1.81 1.97 2.14
c:
10-11 11-11 12-11 11-9 114-8 15-.S IG-2 16-11 17-7 18-1 18-11 19-6 20-1 20-8 121-3 z
24.0 0.2-1 0..11 0 .. 39 0.48 0..57 O.G7 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 1.:22 1.15 us 1.61 i 1.75 ::;;
IS-9 20-6 22-2 21-9 25-2 2fl-6 27-10 29-1 10-.1 11-4 12-6 'l1-6 ! 14-7 I 35-7 36-7 0
J]
12.0 0.11 0.44 0 5.5 0.67 0.80 0.94 1.09 1.2-1 1-10 1.56 1.71 1.91 2.09 2.28 2.47 s:
16-.1 17-9 19-1 20-6 21-9 21-0 2-1-1 25-2 26-2 27-2 2S-2 29-1 29-11 30-10 .11-8 to
2xl2 16.0 0.29 0.18 0.48 0.58 0.70 0 1>2 0 94 1.07 1.21 1.15 1 ! ..so Ui.S 1.81 1.97 2.1-1 s;;
11-1 14-6 1.5-8 16-9 17-9 1H-9 19-8 20.6 21-5 22-2 2:).() 2'3-g 2-1-5 25-2 2.5-10 r
1.75 c
~<YfES:
24.0 0.24 0.11 0.39 0.-18 0 ..57 0.67 077 0.88 0.99 1.10
I 1)The requtred modulus of elastiCity(£) m 1.000.000 pounds per square mch is shown belov. each span.
1.22 1.15 148 1.61
z
G'l
I 2)Use single or repetitive member bending stress values !Fbi and modulus of elasticity values (£1 from Tables :-.;us. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2. For duration of l<>oJ (")
stress increases. see Section 2504 (c 14. 0
( .~ 1For· more comprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending stress values (F h land modulu~ of elasticit: \alues (El. other spacing of member:- Jnd c
clth<!r conditions of loading. see L'. B.C. Standard No. 25-21.
m
( J :Th~ )pan~ in these table" are intended for use in covered structures or where moisture content in use does not exceed 19 percent
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-8-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR LOW-SLOPE, RAFTERS SLOPE 31N 12 OR LESS
30 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (No Ceiling Load)
Deflection-For 30 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 240. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the c:
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection. z
:;;
RAFTER 0
(IN) (IN)
JJ
500 600 700 800 900 1000 liDO 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 s:
7-11 8-8 9-5 10-0 10-8 11-:3 11.9 12-4 12-10 13-.3 1:3-9 14-2 14-8 15.] 15-6 III
12.0 0.32 0.43 0.54 0.66 0.78 0.92 1.06 1.21 1.:36 1.52 1.69 1.86 2.04 2.22 2.41 c:
6-11 7.6 8-2 8-8 9-3 9-9 10-2 10-8 Il-l 11-6 11-ll 12-4 12-8 1.3-1 13-5 r
2x6 16.0 0.28 0 ..37 0.47 0.57 0.68 0.80 0 92 105 1.18 1.32 l.l6 1.61 1.76 1.92. '2.08 !2
S-7 6-2 6-8 7-1 7-6 7-11 8-4 8-8 9-5 9-9 10-0 10-4 10-8 10-11
z
9-1 G)
'24.0 0.2.:3 0.30 0.38 0.46 0.55 06'j 0.75 0.85 0.96 1.08 1.19 131 1.44 1.57 170 (')
10-6 11-6 12-5 13.3 14-0 1-1-10 15-6 16-3 16-10 17-6 18-2 18-9 19-4 19-10 20-5 0
12..0 0.32. 0.43 0.5-l 0.66 0.78 0.92 1.06 1.21 1.36 1.52 1.69 1.86 2.04 2.22 2.41 0
m
9-1 9-11 10-9 11-6 12-2 12-10 1'L5 14-0 1-l-7 15-2 1.5-8 16-3 16-9 17-2 17-8
2x8 16.0 0.28 0 ..37 0.47 0.57 0.68 0.80 0.92 1.05 1.18 1,.32 1.·16 1.61 1.76 192 2.08
7-5 8-1 8-9 9-4 9-11 10-6 11-0 11-6 11-ll 12-5 12-10 13-3 13-8 14.0 14-5
24.0 0.23 0.30 0.38 0.46 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.96 1.08 1.19 L31 1.44 1.57 1.70
13--l H-8 15-10 16-ll 17-11 18-11 19.10 20-8 21-6 22--l 23-2 23-11 2-l-7 2.5-4 26-0
12.0 0 ..32 0.4.3 0.54 0.66 0.78 0.92 11.06 1.21 1.36 !.52 1.69 l.HG 2.04 2.22 2.41
11-7 12-8 1.3-8 1-1-8 15-6 16-4 17-2 17-11 18-il 19--l 20-0 20-8 21-4 21-11 22-6
2x10 16.0 0.28 0.37 0.47 0.57 068 0.80 0.92 1.05 1.18 ] ..32 ! 1.16 Uil 1.76 1.92 2.08
9-5 10-4 11-2 11-ll 12-8 13--l J.l-0 l-1-H 15.3 15-10 lfl-4 16-11 17-.5 17-11 18-5
24.0 0.23 0 30 0.18 0.46 0 ..55 0.6.5 0 75 0.85 0.96 1.08 1.19 ].:j l 1.-14 1 ..57 1.70
16-3 17-9 19-.3 20-6 21-9 21-0 2-l-l 2.5-2 26-2 27-2 28-2 29-l 29-11 30-10 .31-8
12.0 0.32 0.43 0.54 0.66 0.78 0.92 1.06 1.21 136 LS2 1H) l.Sfi 2.0-l 2.22. 2.41
1-l-1 15-5 16-8 17-9 18-10 19-11 20.]0 21-9 22-8 2.3-6 2-l--l 25-2 25-11 26.8 27-5
2x12 16.0 0.28 0.37 0.47 0.57 068 0.80 0 92 1 o.s 1.18 1.12 I.IG Uil 1.76 1.92 2.08
--
ru:6- ill- 1--o--.---
13-7 14T 15-=-5- ~r~3- 17:cl rr7-9 -----=---
18-G 19-8 1'1-11 20-6 21-2 21-9 22-5
24.0 0.23 0 ..30 0 ..38 0.46 055 0.65 0. 7.5 0 s.s 0.96 1.08 l.ICJ U1 14-l 1.57 1.70
'-;0T£S: il >The required modulu' of elastic it\ If.) in l.O(~J.O{)() pound; per <quare inch i> 'ho\\ n bekm each >pan.
w (2ll'se ~ingle orrepetiti\e member bending 'ltre~~ value~ IF~>~ and mPdulu~ ofela~ticit\ \Jiue~ 1El from Table" \'o~. 25-:\-I and 2.5-A-2. For duratwn of \oaJ
II:> ~tress increase..,. ~ee Section 2504 (CI 4. -
II:>
I 3 JFor more co_mprehen~iv_e table" ,_xl\ering a broader range of bendmg ~tre-,~ \ alue~ rF 1) and modulu" of ela"-tit.:it~ ,·aluc.;; 1Fl. other . . pacing of member" :.mJ
other conditJons of loadtng. see L. B.C. Standard ~n. 25-21
r4 IThe . . pans in these table.;; are intended for u~e in em ered structure.;; or\\ here motsture ('()ntent 1n use Jne . . not e.\.ceed l4 percent.
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-1Q-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR HIGH-SLOPE RAFTERS, SLOPE OVER 31N 12
20 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (Heavy Roof Covering)
""
0
0 Deflection-For 20 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 180. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the
RAFTER
(IN) (IN) 500 600 700 BOO 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900
5-5 5-11 6-5 6-10 7-3 7-8 8-0 8-4 8-8 9-0 9-4 9-8 9-1110-3 10-6
12.0 0.20 0.26 0.33 0.40 0.48 0.56 0.65 0.74 0.83 0.93 1.0:3 1.14 1.241.36 1.47
4-8 5-1 5-6 5-11 6-3 6-7 6-11 7-:3 7-6 7-10 8-1 8-4 8-7 8-10 9-1
2x4 16.0 0.17 0.23 0.28 0.35 0.41 0.49 0.56 0.64 0.72 0.80 0.89 0.98 1.081.17 1.27
3-10 4-2 4-6 4.10 5-1 5-5 5-8 5-11 6-2 6-5 •7;:7 6-10 7-0 7-3 7-5
24.0 0.14 0.18 0.23 0.28 0.34 0.40 0.46 0.52 0.59 0.66 0.7:3 0.80 0.880.96 1.04
8-6 9-4 10-0 10-9 11-5 12-0 12-7 13-2 13-8 14-2 .14-8 15-2 15-816-1 16-7
12.0 0.20 0.26 0.33 0.40 0.48 0.56 0.65 0.74 0.83 0.93 1.0:3 1.14 1.241.36 1.47
7-4 8-1 8-8 9-4 9~10 10-5 10-11 11-5 11-10 12-4 12-9 1.3-2 13-713-11 14-4
2x6 16.0 0.17 0.23 0.28 0.35 0.41 0.49 0.56 0.64 0.72 0.80 0.89 0.98 1.081.17 1.27
~--- --;-:-_---
6-0 6-7 7-1 7-7- 8-1 8-6 8-11 9:4 9-8 10-0 10-5 1o:9 11-111-5 ll-8
24.0 0.14 0.!8 0.23 0.28 0.34 0.40 0.46 0.52 0.59 0.66 0.7.3 0.80 0.88 0.96 1.04
11-2 12-3 13-3 14-2 15-0 15-10 16-7 17-4 18-0 18-9 !9-5 20-0 20-8 21-3 21-10
12.0 0.20 0.26 0.33 0.40 0.48 0.56 0.65 0.74 0.83 0.93 1.01 1.14 1.24 1.36 1.47
9-8 10-7 11-6 12-3 13-0 1.3-8 14-4 15-0 15-7 16-3 16-9 17-4 17~-10 18-5 18-11
2x8 16.0 0.17 0.23 0.28 0.35 0.41 0.49 0 ..56 0.64 0.72 0.80 0.89 0.98 1.08 1.17 1.27
7-11 8-8 9-4 10-0 10-7 11-2 11-9 12.3 12-9 13-3 11-8 14-2- '14~7 15-0 15-5
24.0 0.14 0.18 0.23 0.28 0.34 0.40 0.46 0.52 0.59 0.66 0.73 0.80 0.88 0.96 1.04 c
12.0
14-3
0.20
15-8
0.26
16-11
0.33
18-1
0.40
19-2
0.48
20-2
0.56
21-2
0.65
22-1
0.74
23-0
0.8.3
23-11 24-9
0.93 1.03
25-6 26-4 27-1
1.14 1.24 1.36
27-10
1.47
.,~
0
12-4 13-6 14-8 15-8 16-7 17-6 18-4 19-2- 19-11 20-8 21-5 22-l 22-10 23-5 24-1 ::c
2xl0 16.0 0.17 0.2.3 0.28 0.35 0.41 0.49 0.56 0.64 0.72 0.80 0.89 0.98 1.08 1.17 1.27 s:
Ill
10-1 11-1 11-ll 12-9 13-6 14-3 15-0 15:::-s 16-3 16-11 17-6 18-1 18-7 19-2 19-8 c
24.0 0.14 0.18 0.23 0.28 0.34 0.40 0.46 0.52 0.59 0.66 0.71 0.80 0.88 0 96 1.04 r
c
:\'OTES: !l )The required modulus of elasticity(£) in 1.000.000 pounds per square inch is shown below each span.
12)Use single or repetitive member bending stress salues iF") and modulus of elasticity values(£) from Tables :'\os. 25-.-\-1 and 25-A-2. For duration of load
z
C)
stress increases. see Section 2504 (c) 4. (')
(~ lfor m(1re comprehensiYe table~ covering a broader range of bending stres.;; Yalues (F,l and modulus of ela~ticit) \alue~ ! E). other spacing of member~ and 0
ether Conditions of Ioadino. see C.B.C. Standard c-;o. 25-2 I c
(-+)'The s~~ans in these table~ ;re intended for use in co\ered structure~ or\\ here moi~ture content in use doe~ not exceed 19 percent. m
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-11-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR HIGH-SLOPE RAFTERS, SLOPE OVER 31N 12
30 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (Heavy Roof Covering)
Deflection-For 30 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 180. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the c
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection. z
RARER
Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending Fb (psi).
:;;
SIZE SPACING 0
(IN) (IN) 500 600 700 BOO 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 JJ
4-9 5-3 5-8 6-0 6-5 6-9 7-1 7-5 7-8 8-0 8-.3 8-6 8-9 9-0 9-3 s:
12.0 0.20 0.27 0.34 0.41 0.49 0.58 0.67 0.76 0.86 0.96 1.06 1.17 1.28 1.39 1.51 CXI
r-;;-,-
6-5-- 6-8 c
4-1 4-6 4-11 5-3 5-6 5-10 6-1 6-11 7-2 7-5 7-7 7-10 8-0 ;=
2x4 16.0 0.18 0.23 0.29 0.36 0.43 0 ..50 0.58 0.66 0.7-1 0.83 0.92 1.01 11.1 ' 1.21 1.31 c
3-4 3-8 4-0 4-3 4-6 4-9 5.0 5~3 5-5 5-8·- -5Tcl -6-0 6-3 6-5 6-7 z
G)
24.0 0.14 0.19 0.24 0.29 0.35 0.41 0.47 0.54 0.61 0.68 I 0./5 0.83 0.90 0.99 1.07
(')
7-6 8-2 8-10 9.6 10-0 10-7 11-1 11-7 12.1 12-6 13-0 13-5 13-10 14-2 14-7 0
12.0 0.20 0.27 0.34 0.41 0.49 0.58 0.67 0.76 0.86 0.96 1.06 1.17 1.28 1.39 1.51 c
6-6 7-1 7-8 8-2 8-8- rg-_2-
9~7 10-0 10~5-- ~fo 11-3
-;:--
11-11 12-4 r-u-=7 12-8 m
2x6 16.0 0.18 0.23 0.29 0.36 0.43 0 ..50 0 ..58 0.66 0.74 0.83 0.92 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.31
5-4 5-10 6-3 6-8 7-1 7:6 fTi) 8-2 +-s-6 8-10 9-" 9.6- t-9-9 10-0 10-4
24.0 0.14 0.19 0.24 0.29 0.35 0.41 0.47 0.54 0.61 0.68 0.75 0.83 0.90 0.99 1.07
9-10 10-10 11-8 12-6 1.3-3 1.3-1 I 1-1-f) 15-3 15-11 16-6 17-1 17-8 18-2 18-9 19-3
12.0 0.20 0.27 0.34 0.41 0.49 0.58 0.67 0.76 0.86 -0.96 1.06 1.17 1.28 1.39 1.51
10-1 i'o~IO ~ 12:1- CJ'z.R-'J3:3 1-'3-9 14-4 f'JT10 15.3 15-9 16-3
--- ·- ~-
8-7 9-4 16-8
2x8 16.0 0.18 0.2'3 0.29 0 ..36 0.4'3 0 ..50 0.-~ 0.66 0.74 0.83 0 92 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.31
7-0 7-8 8-3 ,. B:'lil rg-_4 - g:li) 10. ~o:10 71:,- t-y~8 -12:1 12-6 12-10 13-3 13-7
24.0 0.14 0.19 0.24 0.29 0.3.5 0.41 U.ct. 0.54 0.61 0.68 0.7.5 0.8.'3 0.90 0.99 1.07
12-7 13-9 14-11 15-11 16-11 17-10 1ii-H 19-6 20-4 21-1 21-10 22-6 23-3 23-11 24-6
12.0 0.20 0.27 .51> 0.67 0.76 0.86 0.96 1.06 1.17 1.28 1..39
0 ..34 0.41 0.49 0---;:o- 1.51
10-11 11-11 12-11 13-9 14-8 1.5-.5 '16-T "16:11 ru:--7 '18:3 t-rs-1T 79-6- 2oT 20-8 21-3
2x10 16.0 0.18 0.23 0.29 0.36 0.4.3 0 ..50 0 ..58 0.66 0.7-1 0.83 0.92 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.31
- -·""
8-11 9-9 10-6 11-3 11-11 12='7- 1.3=2' J.'3-9 t-y4-4 14-11 1.5-5 15.11 16-5 16-11 17-4
24.0 0.14 0.19 0.24 0.29 0.35 0.41 0.47 0 ..5-1 0.61 0.68 0.75 0.8.3 0.90 0.99 1.07
:"OTES: 1 liThe required modulm of elasticit) i£) in 1.000.000 pounds per square mch is shO\sn helms each span.
r ~ 1L~e si.ng\e or repetitive member bending stress \·alues (F;, land modulu~ of ela5ticit: \alue-; (£)from Table-; :\<._b. 25-A-1 and ~5-A-2. For duration of h1ad
. . rrc~s Increases. see Section 250-+ fc) -t.
r _1. 1FN rnore comprehensi\e tables coYering a broader range of bending .:.tress \alu~s (F l and 17
modulu~ of c\a.;;.,ticit: \alu~:-. (£).other ~pacing of member:-. and
l1thcr conditions of loading. see C. B.C. Standard :\'o. 25-21.
{-+!The ~P I'\s
3
in these tables are intended for use in cnYered ~tructure-; or\\ here moi...,ture content in use doe~ not e\ceed 19 percent.
20 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (Light Roof Covering)
RAFTER Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending Fb (psi).
SIZE SPACING
(IN) (IN) 500 600 700 BllO 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 IBllO 1900
6-2 6-9 7-3 7.9 8-3 8-8 9-1 9-6 9-ll 10-3 10-8 ll-0 ll-4 ll-8 12-0
12.0 0.29 0.38 0.49 0.59 0.71 0.83 0.96 1.09 ].2.3 1 ..'37 1.52 1.68 1.84 2.00 2.17
5-4 5-10 6-4 6-9 7-2 7-6 7-11 8-'3 8-7 8-11 9-3 9-6 9-10 10-1 10-5
2x4 16.0 0.25 0.33 0.42 0.51 0.61 0.72 0.8:3 0.94 1.06 1.19 1.'32 1.45 1.59 !.73 1.88
4-4 4.9 5-2 .5-6 5-10 6-2 6-5 6-9 7-0 7-3 7-6 7-9 8-0 8-3 8-6
24.0 0.21 0.27 0.34 0.42 0.50 0.59 0.68 10.77 0.87 0.97 1.08 1.19 1.'30 1.41 1.53
9-8 10-7 11-5 12-3 13-0 1 '3-li H-4 ! 15-0 15-7 16-2 16-9 17.3 17-10 18-4 18-10
12.0 0.29 0.38 0.49 0.59 0.71 0.83 0.96 '1.09 1.23 1.37 1..52 1.68 1.84 2.00 2.17
8-4 9-2 9-ll 10-7 ll-3 11-10 12-.5 13-0 13-6 14-0 14-6 15-0 15-5 15-11 16-4
2x6 16.0 0.25 0.33 0.42 0.51 0.61 0.72 083 0.94 1.06 1.19 1.32 1.45 1.59 1.73 1.88
12-.3 12-7 3 13-4
24.0
6-10
0.21
7-6
0.27
8-1
0.34
8-8
0.42
9-2 '9-8
0.50 0.59
10-2 10-7
0.68 0.77
11-0
0.87
ll-5
0.97
11-10
1.08 1.19 1..30 Ii 4? 1.53
12-9 13-11 15-1 16-l 17-l 18-0 18-11 19-9 20-6 21-4 22-1 22-9 23-6 24-2 24-10
12.0 0.29 0.38 0.49 0.59 0.71 0.8.3 0.96 1.09 1.23 1.37 1..52 1.68 1.84 2.00 2.17
11-0 12-1 13-1 13-11 14-10 L5-7 16-4 17-1 17-9 18-5 19-1 19-9 20-4 20-11 21-6
2x8 16.0 0.25 0.3.3 0.42 0.51 0.61 I 0.72 0.83 0.94 1.06 1.19 1.32 1..15 1.59 1.73 1.88
9-0 9-10 10-8 11-5 12-1 12-9 13-4 13-ll 14-6 15-1 15-7 16-1 Hi-7 17-1 17-7 c
24.0 (J.21 0.27 0.34 0.42 0.50 0.59 0 68 0.77 0.87 0.97 1.08 1.19 1.30 141 1.53 z
16-.3 17-10 19-3 20-7 21-10 23-0 24-1 2.5-2 26-2 27-2 28-2 29-1 .30-0 30-10 31-8 ;;
12.0 0.29 0.38 0.49 0 ..59 0.71 0.8.3 0.96 1.09 1.23 1.'37 1.52 1.68 1.84 2.00 2.17 0
J]
14-1 15-5 16-8 17-10 18-11 19-11 20-10 21-10 22-8 23-7 24-.5 2.5-2 25-11 26-8 27-5 s:
2x10 16.0 0.2.5 0.31 0.42 0 ..51 0.61 0.72 08.'3 0.94 1.06 1.19 1.'32 1.45 1.59 1.73 1.88 CD
11-6 12-7 1-1-7 14-6 15-.5 16-3 17-1 17-10 18-6 19-3 19-11 20-7 21-2 21-10 22-5 !:;;
24.0 0.21 0.27 0.'34 0.42 0.50 0.59 0.68 0.77 0.87 0.97 1.08 1.19 1..30 1.41 1.'53 r
!:::!
SOTES: (I )The required modulus of elasticity(£) in 1.000.000 pounds per square inch is shown below each span. z
( 21t:se single or repetitive member bending stress values iF,1 and modulm of elasticity values I£1 from Tables "-'os. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2. For duration of load Cl
<.;lress Increases. ~ee Section 2504 (c) 4. (")
( 3 1F'1 r more c~mprehensive table~ covering a broader range of bending stress \alue~ (F h) and modulu~ of elasticit;. \·alue..., (f."l. other spacing of member-; and 0
,,ther condltlons of loading. see C. B.C. Standard :--io. 25-21 0
m
(.f ll-hc "P;:n-; in these table~ are intended for use in covered ~tructure~ or\\ here moisture content in u~e doe" not e.\ceed 19 percent.
30 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (Light Roof Covering)
Oeflectior!-For 30 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 180. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the c
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection. ~
"11
RAFTER
Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending Fb (psi). 0
SIZE SPACING
(IN) (IN)
::c
500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 3:
5-3 5-9 6-.3 6-8 7-1 7-.5 7-9 S-2 8-6 8-9 9-1 9.5 9-S 10-0 10-3 III
12.0 0.27 0 ..36 0.45 0.5.5 0.66 0.77 0.89 1.02 1.1.5 1.28 1.42 1.57 1.72 1.87 2.03 !:
4-7 5-0 5-5 .5.9 6-1 6-5 6-9 7-I 7-4 7-7 7-11 8-2 8-5 S-8 8-10 r
2x4 16.0 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.48 0 ..57 0.67 0.77 O.llS0 99 1.1 I 1.2.3 1.'36 1.49 1.62 1.76 Q
zG)
3-9 4-1 4-5 4-8 5-0 1.5-3 5-6 S-9 6-0 6-.3 6-.5 6-8 6-10 7-1 7-3
24.0 O.I9 0.2.5 0 ..'32 0.39 0.47 0 ..5.5 0.6.3 0.72 0.8I 0.91 l.OI 1.11 1.2 I 1..32 1.4.3 0
8-.3 9.1 9-9 10-.5 I I-I 11-8 I2-3 I2-9 1.3-4 13-10 I4-4 U-9 IS-.3 15-8 16-1 0
12.0 0.27 0.36 0.45 o..s.s 0.66 0.77 0.89 1.02 1.1.5 1.28 U2 1.57 1.72 1.87 2.0.3 0
m
7-2 7-10 S-5 9-1 9-7 10- I I0-7 11-1 11-6 I2-0 I2-.5 I2-9 1'3-2 13-7 1.3-11
2x6 16.0 0.24 0 ..31 0.39 0.48 0.57 067 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.11 1.23 1..36 1.49 1.62 1.76
5-10 6-.5 6-11 7-5 7-10 8-'3 H-H 9-1 9-5 9-9 10-I 10-.5 10-9 I 1-1 ll-5
24.0 O.I9 0.2.5 0 ..32 0.'39 047 0.'5.5 o.rn 0.72 O.S1 0 91 10I I.II 121 1..'32 114.3
10-II I I-11 12-10 1.3-9 I4-7 I.'i-.5 I6-2 I6-1017-7 I8-2 11-l-1019-6 20-1 20-S 2I-.3
12.0 0.27 0.36 0.4.5 0 ..5.5 0.66 0 77 O.il'J 1.02 1.!.5 128 1.42 1..57 1.72 187 2.03
9-5 10-4 11-2 ll-ll 12-8 t:\-4 11-0 I 1-7I 5-2 1.5-9 W-4 I6-10 I 7-4 17-I I I8-4
2x8 I6.0 0.24 o.:3I 0 ..39 0.4H 0 ..57 I 0.67 0.77 O.fi8 0.99 l.I I 1.2'3 136 1.-19 1.62 176
7-8 8-.5 9-1 9.9 I 0-j I 10.:! I 11-.5 II-I I I2-.5 I2-10 I I'3-4 13-9 I.f-2 I4-7 i 1.5-0
24.0 0.19 0.2.5 0.32 0.39 0.41 . 0 ..').') o.rn 0.72 0.8I 0.9I 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.32 i 1.43
1-'3-11 1.5-2 16-.5 17-7 18-7 19-il 20-7 21-6 22-.5 23-3 24-1 2-1-10 2.5.7 26-4 i 27-1
12.0 0.27 0.36 0.4.5 0.55 0.66 0.77 0.89 102 11.'5 128 112 I..S7 1.72 Ul7 '2.0.'3
12-0 1,'1-2 14-.'J 1.5-2 16-2 17-0 17-10 18-7 Hl--5 20-1 20-10 21-6 22-2 22-10 2'3-5
2x!O 16.0 0.26 0 ..34 0.4.'3 0.5.'] O.fi'J 0.74 0.85 1)97 1.09 1.22 1.'3'5 1.49 16.3 1178 !.9.3
9-10 10-9 11-7 12-5 I'l-2 1'1-11 11-7 1.5-2 1.5-10 16-.') 17-0 17-7 1fl-1 18-7 I9-2
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.32 0 ..39 0.47 0.'5.5 0.6'J 0.72 0.81 0 91 1.0 I 1.11 1.21 1..32 143
'iOTES: 1I 1The required modulus of elasticit; lEI in 1.000.000 pounds per square inch is shown belo" each span.
( 2 Jl '-= si.n~?le or repetitive member bending stre~s \alue:-.! F;, land modulu~ of ela~ticit; \ alue~ IE J from Table' ~(1-, 25-A-1 and 2_:;i-:\-2. For duration of load
::-.rr,_; . . ~ Intrease~. see Section 2504 lcl 4.
(3 Jh~r :nore comprehensi\ e table~ co\ ering a broader range of bending qres~ \a}ue~ 1 F, 1 and modulu" of eb~ticit~ Yalue" 1El. other ~pacing of member~ and
othef conditions of loading. see L.B .C. Standard :\o. 25-21
(4 JTh~ "P 3 n~ in the~e table~ are intended for u::-.e in co\·ered ~tructures or v. here moi~ture content in u~e does not exceed 1Y percent
25-V 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-V-WALL BRACING

TYPE OF BRACE1 AMOUNT OF
SEISMIC
ZONE CONDITION A B c D E F G H BRACING2
One Story X X X X X X X X
Top of Two
or Three
Story
0, First Story X X X X X X X X Each end
I of Two and each
and Story or 25' of wall
2 Sewnd
Story of
Three
Story
First Story X X X X' X X X
of Three
Story
One Story X X X X X X X X Each end
Top of Two and each
or Three 25' of wall
Story
J First Story X X X X' X X X Each end.
and of Two 25r;,. of
4 Story or wall length
Second to be
Story of sheathed
Three
Story
First Story X X X X' X X X Each end.
of Three 4or;, of
Story wall length
to be
sheathed
'Sec Section 2517 (g) :l for full description.
'Bracing at ends shall be ncar thereto as possible. Braces shall be installed so that there is no
unhraccd section along the wall exceeding 25 feet.
'Gypsum wallboard applied to supports at 16 inches on center.
404
Chapter 26
CONCRETE
Copyright © by the American Concrete Institute and reproduced
with their consent. All rights reserved.
The contents of this chapter are patterned after, and in general conformity with,
the provisions of ACI Standard 318 for reinforced concrete design. For additional
background information and research data used in developing the similar design
requirements, reference to the ACI Code Commentary (ACI 318R) published by
the American Concrete Institute is suggested.
In order to make reference to the ACI commentary easier for users of the code,
the ACI chapter and section designations are shown in brackets. To clearly distin-
guish where the Uniform Building Code differs substantively from ACI Standard
318-89, those portions of the code are shown in italics.
Scope
Sec. 2601. The design of structures in concrete of cast-in-place or precast con-
struction, plain, reinforced or prestressed, shall conform to the rules and princi-
ples specified in this chapter.
Definitions [Chapter 2]
Sec. 2602. [2.1) The following terms are defined for general use in this code.
Specialized definitions appear in individual sections.
ADMIXTURE is material other than water, aggregate, or hydraulic cement
used as an ingredient of concrete and added to concrete before or during its mixing
to modify its properties.
AGGREGATE is granular material, such as sand, gravel, crushed stone and
iron blast-furnace slag, and when used with a cementing medium forms a hydraulic
cement concrete or mortar.
AGGREGATE, LIGHTWEIGHT, is aggregate with a dry, loose weight of70
pounds per cubic foot or less.
AIR-DRY WEIGHT is the unit weight ofa lightweight concrete specimen cured
for seven days with neither loss nor gain of moisture at 60° F. to 80° F. and dried for
21 days in 50± 7 percent relative humidity at 73.4°F. ± 2°F.
ANCHORAGE in posttensioning is a device used to anchor tendons to concrete
member; in pretensioning, a device used to anchor tendons during hardening of
concrete.
BONDED TENDON is a prestressing tendon that is bonded to concrete either
directly or through grouting.
COLUMN is a member with a ratio of height-to-least-lateral dimension of 3 or
greater used primarily to support axial compressive load.
COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS are concrete flexural
members of precast and cast-in-place concrete elements or both constructed in sep-
405
arate placements but so interconnected that all elements respond to loads as a unit.
See Section 2617.
CONCRETE is a mixture of portland cement or any other hydraulic cement,
fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and water, with or without admixtures.
CONCRETE, SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF (j ;.),is the
compressive strength of concrete used in design and evaluated in accordance with
provisions of Section 2604, expressed in pounds per square inch (psi). Whenever
the quantity f ; is under a radical sign, square root of numerical value only is in-
tended, and result has units of psi.
CONCRETE, STRUCTURAL LIGHTWEIGHT, is concrete containing
lightweight aggregate having an air-dry unit weight as determined by definition
above, not exceeding 115 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). In this code, a lightweight
concrete without natural sand is termed "all-lightweight concrete" and light-
weight concrete in which all fine aggregate consists of normal-weight sand is
termed "sand-lightweight concrete."
CURVATURE FRICTION is friction resulting from bends or curves in the
specified prestressing tendon profile.
DEFORMED REINFORCEMENT is deformed reinforcing bars, bar and rod
mats, deformed wire, welded smooth wire fabric and welded deformed wire fabric.
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH is the length of embedded reinforcement re-
quired to develop the design strength of reinforcement at a critical section. See Sec-
tion 2609 (d), last paragraph.
EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF SECTION (d) is the distance measured from ex-
treme compression fiber to centroid of tension reinforcement.
EFFECTIVE PRESTRESS is the stress remaining in prestressing tendons af-
ter all losses have occurred, excluding effects of dead load and superimposed load.
EMBEDMENT LENGTH is the length of embedded reinforcement provided
beyond a critical section.
JACKING FORCE is the temporary force exerted by device that introduces
tension into prestressing tendons in prestressed concrete.
LOAD, DEAD, is the dead weight supported by a member, as defined by Sec-
tion 2302 (without load factors).
LOAD, FACTORED, is the load, multiplied by appropriate load factors, used
to proportion members by the strength design method of this code. See Sections
2608 (b) and 2609 (c).
LOAD, LIVE, is the live load specified by Section 2302 (without load factors).
LOAD, SERVICE, is the live and dead loads (without load factors).
MODULUS OF ELASTICITY is the ratio of normal stress to corresponding
strain for tensile or compressive stresses below proportional limit of material. See
Section 2608 (f).
PEDESTAL is an upright compression member with a ratio of unsupported
height to average least lateral dimension of 3 or less.
PLAIN CONCRETE is concrete that does not conform to definition of rein-
forced concrete.
406
PLAIN REINFORCEMENT is reinforcement that does not conform to defi-

nition of deformed reinforcement.
POSTTENSIONING is a method of prestressing in which tendons are ten-
sioned after concrete has hardened.
PRECAST CONCRETE is plain or reinforced concrete element cast in other
than its final position in the structure.
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE is reinforced concrete in which internal
stresses have been introduced to reduce potential tensile stresses in concrete result-
ing from loads.
PRETENSIONING is a method of prestressing in which tendons are tensioned
before concrete is placed.
REINFORCED CONCRETE is concrete containing adequate reinforcement,
prestressed or nonprestressed, and designed on the assumption that the two materi-
als act together in resisting forces.
REINFORCEMENT is material that conforms to Section 2603 (b), excluding
prestressing tendons unless specifically included.
SPAN LENGTH. See Section 2608 (h).
SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT is continuously wound reinforcement in the
form of a cylindrical helix.
SPLITTING TENSILE STRENGTH(/;,) is the tensile strength of concrete.
See Section 2605 (b), last paragraph.
STIRRUP is reinforcement used to resist shear and torsion stresses in a structur-
al member; typically bars, wires, or welded wire fabric (smooth or deformed) bent
into L, U or rectangular shapes and located perpendicular to or at an angle to longi-
tudinal reinforcement. (The term "stirrups" is usually applied to lateral reinforce-
ment in flexural members and the term "ties" to those in compression members.)
See "tie."
STRENGTH, DESIGN, is the nominal strength multiplied by a strength-re-
duction factor <J>. See Section 2609 (d).
STRENGTH, NOMINAL, is the strength of a member or cross section calcu-
lated in accordance with provisions and assumptions of the strength design method
of this code before application of any strength-reduction factors. See Section 2609
(d), first paragraph.
STRENGTH, REQUIRED, is the strength of a member or cross section re-
quired to resist factored loads or related internal moments and forces in such com-
binations as are stipulated in this code. See Section 2609 (b).
STRESS is the intensity of force per unit area.
TENDON is a steel element such as wire, cable, bar, rod or strand, or a bundle of
such clements, used to impart prestress to concrete.
TIE is a loop of reinforcing bar or wire enclosing longitudinal reinforcement.
See "stirrup."
TRANSFER is the act of transferring stress in prestressing tendons from jacks
or pretensioning bed to concrete member.
407
WALL is a member, usually vertical, used to enclose or separate spaces_

:·.·.'.:.! WALL PIER is a wall segment with a horizontal length-to-thickness ratio be-
-
. tween 2 1/z and 6 and a clear height of at least two times its horizontal length.
WOBBLE FRICTION in prestressed concrete, is friction caused by unin-
tended deviation of prestressing sheath or duct from its specified profile.
YIELD STRENGTH is the specified minimum yield strength or yield point of
reinforcement in psi.
Specifications for Tests and Materials [Chapter 3]

Sec. 2603. (a) Notations. [3.0]
dh = nominal diameter of bar, inches.
j; = specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, psi.
(b) Tests of Materials. [3.1] The building official may require the testing of any
materials used in concrete construction to determine if materials are of quality spe-
cified.
Tests of materials and of concrete shall be made by an approved agency and at no
expense to the jurisdiction. Such tests shall be made in accordance with the stan-
dards listed in Section 2603 (d).
A complete record of tests of materials and of concrete shall be available for in-
spection during progress of work and for two years after completion of the project,
and shall be preserved by the inspecting engineer or architect for that purpose.
The standards listed below labeled a "U.B.C. standard" are also listed in Chapter
60, Part II, and are part of this code. The other standards listed below are guideline
6003).
I. Cement. [3.2]
A. U. B. C. Standard No. 26-1 , Portland Cement and B tended Hydraulic Cements
2. Aggregates. [3.3]
A. ASTM C 33, Concrete Aggregates
B. ASTM C 330, Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete
C. ASTM C 332, Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete
D. Aggregates failing to meet the above specifications but which have been
shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and
durability may be used where authorized by the building official.
The nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be larger than:
(i) One fifth the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, or
(ii) One third the depth of slabs, or
(iii) Three fourths the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing
bars or wires, bundles of bars, or prestressing tendons or ducts.
These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the building official,
workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed
without honeycomb or voids.
408
3. Water. [3.4] Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injuri- !~
:;ya:o~;l~t~;i~~~,t~c~~~c~~~l~; ~::~fo~~~:~~~aterials or other substances that .'~,.:.:·''=*,·~'

In addition, mixing water for prestressed concrete or for concrete that will con- ,..
..
·':·'.·
··'
...
\am a\uminum embedments, including that portion of mixing water contributed in

the form of free moisture on aggregates, shall not contain deleterious amounts of ;j;;
chloride ions. See Section 2604. (
I
Non potable water shall not be used in concrete unless the following are satisfied:
A. Selection of concrete proportions shall be based on concrete mixes using wa-
ter from the same source.
B. Mortar test cubes made with nonpotable mixing water shall have seven-day
and 28-day strengths equal to at least 90 percent of strengths of similar specimens l::
made with potable water. Strength test comparison shall be made on mortars, iden- ~i
:.:::
tical except for the mixing water, prepared and tested in accordance with approved
standards.
4. Metal reinforcement. [3.5]
A. Reinforcement shall be deformed reinforcement, except that plain reinforce-
ment may be used for spirals or tendons, and reinforcement consisting of structural
steel, steel pipe or steel tubing may be used as specified in this chapter.
Reinforcement to be welded shall be indicated on the drawings and welding pro-
cedure to be used shall be specified. Steel specifications, except for A 706, shall be
supplemented to require a report of material properties necessary to conform to
I
i.~
;I
welding procedures specified in U.B.C. Standard No. 26-8. :::::
I
B. ASTM A 615, A 616, A 617, A 706, A 767 and A 775, Reinforcing Bars for
Concrete
Deformed reinforcing bars with a specified yield strengthfy exceeding 60,000
psi may be used, provided.t_;, shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35
~ili
• ~rcent and the bars otherwise conform toASTM A615.A616.A617,A 706,A 767
and A 775. See Section 2609 (e).
D<:fiJrmed rein/iJI'cement may be galvanized or epoxy coated. Zinc or
epoxy-coated rc •rcement shall conform toASTM A 615, A 616, A 617, A 706,
II
A 767 and A 775. $
I
C. ASTM A I X4. Fahricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats
D. ASTM A 185, Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement
Welded smooth wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall conform to ASTM
185, except that for wire with a specified yield strengthfy exceeding 60,000 psi,.t_;,
shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent. Welded intersections
I
shall not be spaced farther apart than 12 inches in direction of calculated stress, ex-
cept for wire fabric used as stirrups in accordance with Section 2612 (o).
E. ASTM A 496, Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
Deformed wire for concrete reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 496, except
I~
that wire shall not be smaller than size D4, and for wire with a specified yield
strengthfv exceeding 60,000 psi,.fv shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of
0.35 percent.
409
i F. ASTM A 497, Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforce-
~ ment
~ Welded deformed wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall conform to
I ASTM A 497, except that for wire with a specified yield strength fv exceeding
t, 60,000 psi,/y shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent. Welded
r_,~ :::~~~~;:~:~:::::::~:::::~;::::~::,:::~;:~:,
_ -'1
__..
·'__···
,'":i_,·':·_'·,·_i
;'
...
H. ASTM A 421, Uncoated Stress-relieved Wire for Prestressed Concrete

I. ASTM A 722, Uncoated High-strength Steel Bar for Prestressing Concrete
1 J. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-8, Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and Coo-
l nections in Reinforced Concrete Construction
·~ K. Plain reinforcement. Plain bars for spiral reinforcement shall conform to the
·~ specification for A 615, A 616 and A 617.
$.
Smooth wire for spiral reinforcement shall conform toASTM A 82 except that for
I wire with a specified yield strengthfv exceeding 60,000 psi,fv shall be the stress
corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent. ·
L. Prestressing tendons. Wire, strands and bars for tendons in prestressed con-
Il creteWire,shallstrands
conform to ASTM A 416, A 421 and A 722.
and bars not specifically listed in ASTM A 416, A 421 and A 722
I~~ may be used, provided they conform to minimum requirements of these specifica-
tions and do not have properties that make them less satisfactory than those listed.
M. Structural steel, steel pipe or tubing. Structural steel used with reinforcing
bars in composite compression members meeting requirements of Section 2610
I
~
(o) 7 or 8 shall conform to ASTM A 36, A 242, A 441, A 572 and A 588.
Steel pipe or tubing for composite compression members composed of a
steel-encased concrete core meeting requirements of Section 2610 (o) 6 shall con-
ti:::: form to ASTM A 53, A 500 and A 501.
5. Admixtures. [3.6]
it
ili~: A. Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior approval by the
I
building official.
An admixture shall be shown capable of maintaining essentially the same com-
position and performance throughout the work as the product used in establishing
I
concrete proportions in accordance with Section 2604 (c).
Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride from other than impurities
from admixture ingredients shall not be used in prestressed concrete, in concrete
containing embedded aluminum, or in concrete cast against stay-in-place galva-
I
1: ry
nized metal forms. See Section 2604.
B. ASTM C 260, C 494, C 618, C 989 and C I 017 Admixtures for Concrete
6. Concrete.
A. ASTM C 192, Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laborato-
410
B. ASTM C 31, Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field 1:
C. ASTM C 42, Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Con-
crete
D. ASTM C 39, Compressive Tests
E. ASTM C 172, Sampling Fresh Concrete •
F. ASTM C 496, Splitting Tensile Strength
G. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-13, Ready-mixed Concrete
H. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-14, Concrete Made for Volumetric Hatching and
Continuous Mixing
I. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-15, Mill-mixed Gypsum Concrete and Poured Gyp-
sum Roof Diaphragms
1. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-16, Ground-iron Blast-furnace Slag for Use in Con-
crete and Mortars
(c) Storage of Materials. [3.7] Cement and aggregate shall be stored in such
manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter. Any material that
has deteriorated or has been contaminated shall not be used for concrete.
(d) Material and Test Standards. [3.8] The quality, testing and design of con-
crete used structurally in buildings or structures shall conform to the requirements
specified in this chapter and the applicable standards listed in Chapter 60.
The welding of reinforcing steel. metal inserts and connections in reinforced
concrete construction shall conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 26-8.
Durability Requirements [Chapter 4)
Sec. 2604. (a) Notation. [4.0]
f; = specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
(b) Freezing and Thawing Exposures. [4.1} I. Normal-weight and light-
weight concrete exposed to freezing and thawing or deicer chemicals shall be air
entrained with air content indicated in Table No. 26-A-1. Tolerance on air content
as delivered shall be± 1.5 percent. For specified compressive strength/ 'c greater
than 5,000 psi, air content indicated in Table No. 26-A-1 may be reduced I percent.
2. Concrete that will be subject to freezing and thawing in a moist condition, in-
tended to have low permeability to water or be exposed to deicing salts, brackish
water, sea water or spray from these sources shall conform to requirements of
Table No. 26-A-2.
3. The minimum cement content of concrete mixtures exposed to freezing and
thawing in the presence of deicing chemicals shall be 520 pounds of cement per
cubic yard of concrete.
4. The water-cement ratio required in Tables Nos. 26-A-2 and 26-A-3 shall be
calculated as the weight of cement plus the weight offly ash or pozzolans and/or
slag, if any.
(c) Sulfate Exposure. [4.2]1. Concrete to be exposed to sulfate-containing so-
lutions or soils shall conform to the requirements of Table No. 26-A-3 or be made
with a cement that provides sulfate resistance and used in concrete with maximum
water-cement ratio or minimum compressive strength from Table No. 26-A-3.
411
2. Calcium chloride as an admixture shall not be used in concrete to be exposed
I
'..
*'
~
to severe or very severe sulfate-containing solutions, as defined in Table No.
26-A-3.
(d) Corrosion of Reinforcement. [4.3] I. For corrosion protection, maximum
w·.1ter soluble chloride ion concentrations in hardened concrete at ages from 28 to
42 days contributed from the ingredients, including water, aggregates, cementious
materials and admixtures shall not exceed the limits of Table No. 26-A-4.
I 2. When reinforced concrete will be exposed to deicing salts, brackish water, sea
~ water or spray from these sources, requirements of Table No. 26-A-2 for water-ce-
[ ment ratio or concrete strength and minimum concrete cover requirements of Sec-
t.,: tion 2607 (h) shall be satisfied. See Section 2618 (o) for unbonded prestressing
I tendons.
Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing [Chapter 5]
f: specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
fer average splitting tensile strength oflightweight aggregate concrete, psi.
f :" required average compressive strength of concrete used as the basis for
selection of concrete portions, psi.
s = standard deviation, psi.
(b) General. [5.1] Concrete shall be proportioned to provide an average com-
pressive strength as prescribed in Section 2605 (d) 2. Concrete shall be produced to
minimize frequency of strengths below f: as prescribed in Section 2605 (g) 2 C.
Requirements forf :. shall be based on tests of cylinders made and tested as pre-
scribed in Section 2605 (g) 2.
Unless otherwise specified,f : shall be based on 28-day tests. If other than 28
days, test age for f 'c shall be as indicated in design drawings or specifications.
Design drawings shall show specified compressive strength of concrete f: for
which each part of structure is designed.
Where design criteria in Sections 2609 (f) 2 C, 2611 (c) and 2612 (c) provide for
use of a splitting tensile strength value of concrete, laboratory tests shall be made to
establish value of fc, corresponding to specified values off : . Splitting tensile
strength tests shall not be used as a basis for field acceptance of concrete.
(c) Selection of Concrete Proportions. [5.2] Proportions of materials for con-
crete shall be established to provide:
I. Workability and consistency to permit concrete to be worked readily into
forms and around reinforcement under conditions of placement to be employed
without segregation or excessive bleeding.
2. Resistance to special exposures as required by Section 2604.
3. Conformance with strength test requirements of Section 2605 (g).
Where different materials are to be used for different portions of proposed work,
each combination shall be evaluated.
412
Concrete proportions, including water-cement ratio, shall be established on the
basis of field experience and/or trial mixtures with materials to be employed, ex-
cept as permitted in Section 2605 (e) or required by Section 2604.
(d) Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and Trial Mixtures. [5. 3]
l. Standard deviation. A. With test records. Where a concrete production facil-
ity has test records, a standard deviation shall be established. Test records from
which a standard deviation is calculated:
(i) Must represent materials, quality control procedures and conditions simi-
lar to those expected, and changes in materials and proportions within the
test records shall not have been more restricted than those for proposed
work.
(ii) Must represent concrete produced to meet a specified strength or strengths
f ; within I ,000 psi of that specified for proposed work.
(iii) Must consist of at least 30 consecutive tests or two groups of consecutive
tests totaling at least 30 tests as defined in Section 2605 (g) 1 D, except as
provided in Section 2605 (d) I A.
B. Without test records. Where a concrete production facility does not have
test records meeting requirements of Section 2605 (d) 1 A, but does have a record
based on 15 to 29 consecutive tests, a standard deviation may be established as the
product of the calculated standard deviation and the modification factor of Table
No. 26-A-5. To be acceptable, the test record must meet the requirements ofltems
(i) and (ii) of Section 2605 (d) I A and represent only a single record of consecutive
tests that span a period of not less than 45 calendar days.
2. Required average strength. Required average compressive strength f ;.,.
used as the basis for selection of concrete proportions shall be the larger ofFormula
(5-I) or (5-2) using a standard deviation calculated in accordance with Section
2605 (d) l A or B.
f'u =.f: + l.34s (5-1)
or
f',, = f', + 2.33s - 500 (5-1)
When a concrete production facility does not have field strength test records for
calculation of standard deviation meeting requirements of Section 2605 (d) 1 A or
B, required average strength{;.,. shall be determined from Table No. 26-A-6 and
documentation of average strength shall be in accordance with requirements of
Section 2605 (d) 3.
3. Documentation of average strength. Documentation that proposed con-
crete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater
than required average compressive strength may consist of a field strength test re-
cord, several strength test records, or trial mixtures as follows:
A. When test records are used to demonstrate that proposed concrete propor-
tions will produce the required average strength.f ;.,.. such records shall represent
materials and conditions similar to those expected. Changes in materials, condi-
tions and proportions within the test records shall not have been more restricted
413
than those for proposed work. For the purpose of documenting average strength
potential, test records consisting of less than 30 but not less than 10 consecutive
tests may be used, provided test records encompass a period of time not less than 45
days. Required concrete proportions may be established by interpolation between
the strengths and proportions of two or more test records each of which meets other
requirements of this section.
B. When an acceptable record of field test results is not available, concrete pro-
portions may be established based on trial mixtures meeting the following restric-
tions:
(i) Combination of materials shall be those for proposed work.
(ii) Trial mixtures having proportions and consistencies required for proposed
work shall be made using at least three different water-cement ratios or ce-
ment contents that will produce a range of strengths encompassing there-
quired average strengthf ;,.
(iii) Trial mixture shall be designed to produce a slump within± 0.75 inch of
maximum permitted, and for air-entrained concrete, within± 0.5 percent
of maximum allowable air content.
(iv) For each water-cement ratio or cement content, at least three test cylinders
for each test age shall be made and cured. Cylinders shall be tested at 28
days or at test age designated for determination off;
( v) From results of cylinder tests, a curve shall be plotted showing relationship
between water-cement ratio or cement content and compressive strength
at designated test age.
(vi) Maximum water-cement ratio or minimum cement content for concrete to
be used in proposed work shall be that shown by the curve to produce the
average strength required by Section 2605 (d) 2, unless a lower water-ce-
ment ratio or higher strength is required by Section 2604.
(e) Proportioning by Water-Cement Ratio. [5.4] If data required by Section
2605 (d) are not available, permission may be granted to base concrete proportions
on water-cement ratio limits in Table No. 26-A-7.
Table No. 26-A-7 shall be used only for concrete to be made with cements meet-
ing strength requirements for Type I, I-A, II, II-A, III, III-A or V; or Type IS, IS-A,
IS(MS). IS-A(MS), I(SM), I(SM)-A, IP, IP-A, I(PM), I(PM)-A, IP(MS),
IP-A(MS), or P of U.B.C. Standard No. 26-1, and shall not be applied to concrete
containing lightweight aggregates or admixtures other than those for entraining air.
Concrete proportioned by water-cement ratio limits prescribed in Table No.
26-A-7 shall also conform to special exposure requirements of Section 2604 and to
. . compressive strength test criteria of Section 2605 (g).
(f) Average Strength Reduction. [5.5) As data become available during con-
struction, amount by which value off;, must exceed specified value off;. may be
reduced, provided:
I. Thirty or more test results are available and average of test results exceeds
that required by Section 2605 (d) 2, using a standard deviation calculated in accor-
dance with Section 2605 (d) I A, or
414
2. Fifteen to 29 test results are available and average of test results exceeds that
required by Section 2605 (d) 2, using a standard deviation calculated in accor-
dance with Section 2605 (d) I B, and
3. Special exposure requirements of Section 2604 are met.
(g) Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete. [5.6]1. Frequency of testing.
The frequency of testing shall be in accordance with the following:
A. Sampfes for strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be
taken not less than once a day, or not less than once for each 150 cubic yards of
concrete, or not less than once for each 5,000 square feet of surface area for slabs or
walls.
B. On a given project, if the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of
testing required by Item A above would provide less than five strength tests for a
given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are used.
C. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cubic yards,
strength tests may be waived by the building official if evidence of satisfactory
strength is provided.
D. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of two cylinders made
from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for
determination off~··
2. Laboratory-cured specimens. Laboratory-cured specimens shall comply
with the following:
A. Samples for strength tests shall be taken.
B. Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded, laboratory cured and tested.
C. Strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered satisfac-
tory if both the following requirements are met:
(i) Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceedf ~·.
(ii) No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) falls belowf ~·by
more than 500 psi.
D. Ifeitherofthe requirements of Section 2605 (g) 2 Care not met, steps shall be
taken to increase the average of subsequent strength test results. Requirements of
Section 2605 (g) 4 shall be observed if requirement of Section 2605 (g) 2 C (ii) is
not met.
3. Field-cured specimens. Field-cured specimens shall comply with the fol-
lowing:
A. The building official may require strength tests of cylinders cured under field
conditions to check adequacy of curing and protection of concrete in the structure.
B. Field-cured cylinders shall be cured under field conditions.
C. Field-cured test cylinders shall be molded at the same time and from the same
samples as laboratory-cured test cylinders.
D. Procedures for protecting and curing concrete shall be improved when
strength of field-cured cylinders at test age designated for determination off~· is
less than 85 percent of that of companion laboratory-cured cylinders. The RS per-
415
cent Iimitation shall not apply if field-cured strength exceedsf ~ by more than 500
psi.
4. Investigation oflow-strength test results. Investigation oflow-strength test
results shall be in accordance with the following:
A. If any strength test of laboratory-cured cylinders falls below specified value
off; by more than 500 psi or iftests of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies
in protection and curing, steps shall be taken to assure that load-carrying capacity
of the structure is not jeopardized.
B. If the likelihood of low-strength concrete is confirmed and computations in-
dicate that load-carrying capacity may have been significantly reduced, tests of
cores drilled from the area in question may be required. In such case, three cores
shall be taken for each strength test more than 500 psi below specified value off;.
C. If concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions, cores shall be
air dried (temperatures 60° to 80°F., relative humidity less than 60 percent) for
seven days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the structure will be
more than superficially wet under service conditions, cores shall be immersed in
water for at least 40 hours and be tested wet.
D. Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structurally
adequate if the average of three cores is equal to at least 85 percent off; and if no
1.1_:-~,:_
:,:.. single core is less than 75 percent off;. Additional testing of cores extracted from
. locations represented by erratic core strength results shall be permitted.
E. If criteria of Section 2605 (g) 4 Dare not met, and if structural adequacy re-
mains in doubt, the responsible authority may order load tests as outlined in Section
2620 for the questionable portion of the structure, or take other appropriate action.
(h) Preparation of Equipment and Place of Deposit. [5.7] Preparation before
concrete placement shall include the following:
I. All equipment for mixing and transporting concrete shall be clean.
2. All debris and ice shall be removed from spaces to be occupied by concrete.
3. Forms shall be properly coated.
4. Masonry filler units that will be in contact with concrete shall be well
drenched.
5. Reinforcement shall be thoroughly clean of ice or other deleterious coatings.
6. Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is placed unless
a tremie is to be used or unless otherwise permitted by the building official.
7. All laitance and other unsound material shall be removed before additional
concrete is placed against hardened concrete.
(i) Mixing. [5.8] All concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribution
of materials and shall be discharged completely before mixer is recharged.
Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with require-
) ments ofU.B.C. Standard No. 26-13.
I Concrete made by the on-site volumetric hatching and continuous mixing pro-
cedure shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with requirements of U.B.C.
Standard No. 26-14.
416
Job-mixed concrete shall be mixed in accordance with the following:

I. Mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of an approved type.
2. Mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Mixing shall be continued for at least I 1/z minutes after all materials are in the
drum, unless a shorter time is shown to be satisfactory by the mixing uniformity
tests ofU.B.C. Standard No. 26-13.
4. Materials handling, batching and mixing shall conform to applicable ~<w\-
sions of U.B.C. Standard No. 26-13.
5. A detailed record shall be kept to identify:
(i) Number of batches produced;
(ii) Proportions of materials used;
(iii) Approximate location of final deposit in structure;
(iv) Time and date of mixing and placing.
U) Conveying. [5.9] Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to place of final de-
posit by methods that will prevent separation or loss of materials.
Conveying equipment shall be capable of providing a supply of concrete at site
of placement without separation of ingredients and without interruptions sufficient
to permit loss of plasticity between successive increments.
(k) Depositing. [5.1 0] Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its
final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing.
Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic
and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement.
Concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials
shall not be deposited in the structure.
Retempered concrete or concrete that has been remixed after initial set shall not
be used unless approved by the building official.
After concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until
placing of a panel or section, as defined by its boundaries or predetermined joints,
is completed, except as permitted or prohibited by Section 2606 (d).
Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be generally level.
When construction joints are required, joints shall be made in accordance with
Section 2606 (d).
All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during place-
ment and shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures
and into corners of forms.
(I) Curing. [5. I I ] I. General. Concrete (other than high-early -strength) shall be
maintained above 50°F. and in a moist condition for at least the first seven days
after placement, except when cured in accordance with Section 2605 (I) 3.
2. High-early-strength. High-early-strength concrete shall be maintained
above 50°F. and in a moist condition for at least the first three days, except when
cured in accordance with Section 2605 (I) 3.
3. Accelerated curing. Curing by high-pressure steam, steam at atmospheric
pressure, heat and moisture or other accepted processes, may be employed to ac-
417
celerate strength gain and reduce time of curing. Accelerated curing shall provide a
compressive strength of the concrete at the load stage considered at least equal to
required design strength at that load stage.
Curing process shall be such as to produce concrete with a durability at least
equivalent to the curing method of Section 2605 (I) I or 2.
Supplementary strength tests in accordance with Section 2605 (g) 3 may be re-
quired to assure that curing is satisfactory.
(m) Cold Weather Requirements. [5.12] Adequate equipment shall be pro-
vided for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete during freezing or
near-freezing weather. All concrete materials and all reinforcement, forms, fillers
and ground with which concrete is to come in contact shall be free from frost. Fro-
zen materials or materials containing ice shall not be used.
(n) Hot Weather Requirements. [5.13] During hot weather, proper attention
shall be given to ingredients, production methods, handling, placing, protection
and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation that
may impair required strength or serviceability of the member or structure.
Formwork, Embedded Pipes and Construction Joints [Chapter 6]

Sec. 2606. (a) Design ofFormwork. [6.1] Forms shall result in a final structure
that conforms to shapes, lines and dimensions of the members as required by the
design drawings and specifications.
Forms shall be substantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar.
They shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain position and shape.
Forms and their supports shall be designed so as not to damage previously placed
structure.
Design of form work shall include consideration of the following factors:
I. Rate and method of placing concrete.
2. Construction loads, including vertical, horizontal and impact loads.
3. Special form requirements for construction of shells, folded plates, domes,
architectural concrete or similar types of elements.
Forms for prestressed concrete members shall be designed and constructed to
permit movement of the member without damage during application of prestress-
ing force.
(b) Removal of Forms and Shores. [6.2] Construction loads shall not be sup-
ported on, or any shoring removed from, any part of the structure under construc-
tion except when that portion of the structure in combination with remaining
forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to support safely its weight and
loads placed thereon.
Sufficient strength shall be demonstrated by structural analysis considering pro-
posed loads, strength of forming and shoring system and concrete strength data.
Concrete strength data may be based on tests of field-cured cylinders or, when ap-
proved by the building official, on other procedures to evaluate concrete strength.
Structural analysis and concrete strength test data shall be furnished to the building
official when so required.
418
Construction loads exceeding the combination of superimposed dead load plus

specified live load shall not be supported on any unshored portion of the structure
under construction, unless analysis indicates adequate strength to support such ad-
ditional loads.
Forms shall be removed in such manner as not to impair safety and serviceability
of the structure. All concrete to be exposed by form removal shall have sufficient
strength not to be damaged thereby.
Form supports for prestressed concrete members may be removed when suffi-
cient prestressing has been applied to enable prestressed members to carry their
dead load and anticipated construction loads.
(c) Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete. [6.3)1. Conduits, pipes and
sleeves of any material not harmful to concrete and within limitations of this sub-
section may be embedded in concrete with approval of the building official, pro-
vided they are not considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete.
2. Conduits and pipes of aluminum shall not be embedded in structural concrete
unless effectively coated or covered to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction or
electrolytic action between aluminum and steel.
3. Conduits, pipes and sleeves passing through a slab, wall or beam shall not im-
pair significantly the strength of the construction.
4. Conduits and pipes, with their fittings, embedded within a column shall not
displace more than 4 percent of the area of cross section on which strength is calcu-
lated or which is required for fire protection.
5. Except when plans for conduits and pipes are approved by the building offi-
cial, conduits and pipes embedded within a slab, wall or beam (other than those
merely passing through) shall satisfy the following:
A. They shall not be larger in outside dimension than one third the overall thick-
ness of slab, wall or beam in which they are embedded.
B. They shall be spaced not closer than three diameters or widths on center.
C. They shall not impair significantly the strength of the construction.
6. Conduits, pipes and sleeves may be considered as replacing structurally in
compression the displaced concrete, provided:
A. They are not exposed to rusting or other deterioration,
B. They are of uncoated or galvanized iron or steel not thinner than standard
Schedule 40 steel pipe, and
C. They have a nominal inside diameter not over 2 inches and are spaced not less
than three diameters on centers. ._
7. Pipes and fittings shall be designed to resist effects of the material, pressure ?~
and temperature to which they will be subjected.
8. No liquid, gas or vapor, except water not exceeding 90°F. or 50 psi pressure,
J
shall be placed in the pipes until the concrete has attained its design strength.
9. Piping in solid slabs, unless used forradiant heating or snow melting, shall be
placed between top and bottom reinforcement.
419
I 0. Concrete cover for pipes, conduit and fittings shall not be less than 11/z in-
ches for concrete exposed to earth or weather, or less than 3/ 4 inch for concrete not
exposed to weather or in contact with ground.
II. Reinforcement with an area not less than 0.002 times the area of concrete
section shall be provided normal to the piping.
12. Piping and conduit shall be so fabricated and installed that cutting, bending
or displacement of reinforcement from its proper location will not be required.
(d) Construction Joints. [6.4] I. General. Surface of concrete construction
joints shall be cleaned and laitance removed. Immediately before new concrete is
placed, all construction joints shall be wetted and standing water removed. Con-
struction joints shall be so made and located as not to impair the strength of the
structure. Provision shall be made for transfer of shear and other forces through
construction joints. See Section 2611 (h) 9.
2. In floors. Construction joints in floors shall be located within the middle third
of spans of slabs, beams and girders. Joints in girders shall be offset a minimum
distance of two times the width of intersecting beams.
3. In beams, girders or slabs. Beams, girders or slabs supported by columns or
walls shall not be cast or erected until concrete in the vertical support members is no
longer plastic.
Beams, girders, haunches, drop panels and capitals shall be placed monolithical-
ly as part of a slab system, unless otherwise shown in design drawings or specifica-
tions.
Details of Reinforcement [Chapter 7]

d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension rein-
forcement, inches.
dh nominal diameter of bar, wire or prestressing strand, inches.
/y specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, psi.
ld development length, inches. See Section 2612.
(b) Standard Hooks. [7 .I] "Standard hook" as used in this code is one of the
following:
I. One-hundred-eighty-degree bend plus 4dh extension, but not less than 2 1/z in-
ches at free end of bar.
2. Ninety-degree bend plus 12dh extension at free end of bar.
3. For stirrup and tie hooks:
(i) No.5 bar and smaller, 90-degree bend plus 6d, extension at free end of bar,
or
(ii) No.6, No.7 and No.8 bar, 90-degree bend, plus 12dh extension at free end
of bar, or
(iii) No.8 bar and smaller, 135-degree bend plus 6dh extension at free end of
bar.
420
(iv) For stirrup and tie hooks in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, refer to the hoop
and crosstie provisions of Section 2625 (b) and the transverse reinforce-
ment.
(c) Minimum Bend Diameters. [7 .2] Diameter of bend measured on the inside
of the bar, other than for stirrups and ties in sizes No.3 through No.5, shall not be
less than the values in Table No. 26-B.
Inside diameter of bends for stirrups and ties shall not be less than 4d, for No.5
bar and smaller. For bars larger than No.5, diameter of bend shall be in accordance
with Table No. 26-B.
Metal reinforcement, except prestressing tendons, with rust, mill scale or a com-
bination of both, shall be considered satisfactory, provided the minimum dimen-
sions (including height of deformations) and weight of a hand-wire-brushed test
specimen are not less than applicable specification requirements.
Prestressing tendons shall be clean and free of oil, dirt, scale, pitting and exces-
sive rust. A light oxide is permissible.
(f) Placing Reinforcement. [7.5] Reinforcement, prestressing tendons and
ducts shall be accurately placed and adequately supported before concrete is
placed, and shall be secured against displacement within tolerances ofthis section.
Unless otherwise approved by the building official, reinforcement, prestressing
tendons and prestressing ducts shall be placed within the following tolerances:
I. Tolerance for depth d, and minimum concrete cover in flexural members,
walls and compression members shall be as follows:
TOLERANCE ON TOLERANCE ON MINIMUM
d CONCRETE COVER
3
d 5. 8 in. ± 3/s in. - /s in.
1
d> 8 in. ± 1/zin. - hin.
except that tolerance for the clear distance to formed soffits shall be minus 1/4 inch
and tolerance for cover shall not exceed minus one third the minimum concrete
cover required by the approved plans or specifications.
2. Tolerance for longitudinal location of bends and ends of reinforcement shall
be± 2 inches except at discontinuous ends of members where tolerance shall be±
1
/z inch.
421
3. Welded wire fabric (with wire sizenotgreaterthan W5 or D5) used in slabs not
exceeding I 0 feet in span may be curved from a point near the top of slab over the
support to a point near the bottom of slab at midspan, provided such reinforcement
is either continuous over, or securely anchored at, support.
Welding of crossing bars shall not be permitted for assembly of reinforcement.
EXCEPTIONS: /. ReinforcinR steel not required hy design.
Z. When specifically approved by the building official. weldinR of crossinR bars
j(>r assembly purposes in Seismic Zones Nos. 0, I and 2 may he permitted, provided
that data are submitted to the building official to show that there is no detrimental
effect on the action of the structural member as a result of welding of the crossing
bars.
(g) Spacing Limits for Reinforcement. [7 .6] I. General. The minimum clear
spacing between parallel bars in a layer shall be dh but not less than I inch. See also
the second paragraph of Section 2603 (b).
Where parallel reinforcement is placed in two or more layers, bars in the upper
layers shall be placed directly above bars in the bottom layer with clear distance
between layers not less than I inch.
In spirally reinforced or tied reinforced compression members, clear distance
between longitudinal bars shall not be less than 1.5dn or less than 11h inches. See
also the second paragraph of Section 2603 (b).
Clear distance limitation between bars shall apply also to the clear distance be-
tween a contact lap splice and adjacent splices or bars.
In walls and slabs other than concrete joist construction, primary flexural rein-
forcement shall not be spaced farther apart than three times the wall or slab thick-
ness, or 18 inches.
2. Bundled bars. Groups of parallel reinforcing bars bundled in contact to act as
a unit shall be limited to four bars in one bundle. Bundled bars shall be enclosed
within stirrups or ties. Bars larger than No. 11 shall not be bundled in beams.
Individual bars within a bundle terminated within the span of flexural members
shall terminate at different points with at least 40dh stagger.
Where spacing limitations and minimum concrete cover are based on bar diame-
ter d1,, a unit of bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar of a diameter derived
from the equivalent total area.
3. Prestressing tendons and ducts. Clear distance between pretensioning ten-
dons at each end of a member shall not be less than 4dn for wire, or 3dh for strands.
See also the second paragraph of Section 2603 (b). Closer vertical spacing and bun-
dling of strands may be permitted in the middle portion of a span.
Posttensioning ducts may be bundled if it is shown that concrete can be satisfac-
torily placed and if provision is made to prevent the tendons, when tensioned, from
breaking through the duct.
(h) Concrete Protection for Reinforcement. [7.7] !.Cast-in-place concrete
(nonprestressed). The following minimum concrete cover shall be provided for
reinforcement:
422
MINIMUM COVER, INCHES

A. Concrete cast against and permanently
exposed to earth ..................... . 3
8. Concrete exposed to earth or weather:
No.6 through No. 18 bar ............ .
No. 5 bar, W31 or 031 wire, and smaller .
C. Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact
with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists:
No. 14 and No. 18 bar ............. .
No. II bar and smaller ............ .
Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement, ties, stirrups,
spirals ......................... .
Shells, folded plate members:
No. 6 bar and larger .............. .
No. 5 bar, W31 or 031 wire, and
smaller ......................... .
2. Precast concrete (manufactured under plant control conditions). The fol-
lowing minimum concrete cover shall be provided for reinforcement:
A. Concrete exposed to earth or weather:

Wall panels:
No. 14 and No. 18 bar ............. .
No. 11 bar and smaller ............ .
Other members:
No. 14 and No. 18 bar ............. .
No. 6 through No. 11 bar .......... .
No. 5 bar W31 or 031 wire, and smaller
B. Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact
with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists:
No. 14 and No. 18 bar ............. .
No. 11 bar and smaller ............ .
Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement db but not less than 5/ 8
and need not exceed
11h
Ties, stirrups, spirals .............. . %
No. 6 bar and larger .............. . 5/g
No. 5 bar, W31 or 031 wire, and
smaller ...................... . 3/s
3. Prestressed concrete. A. The following minimum concrete cover shall be
provided for prestressed and non prestressed reinforcement, ducts and end fittings,
except as provided in Section 2607 (h) 3 B and C:
423

(i) Concrete cast against and permanently
exposed to earth ...................... . 3
(ii) Concrete exposed to earth or weather:
Wall panels, slabs, joists ............. .
Other members .................... .
(iii) Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact
with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists .................. .
Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement ............ .
Ties, stirrups, spirals .............. .
No. 5 bars, W31 or D31 wire, and
smaller ......................... . 3/s
3
Other reinforcement ................ . db but not less than /4
B. For prestressed concrete members exposed to earth, weather or corrosive en-

vironments, and in which permissible tensile stress of Section 2618 (e) 2 B is ex-
ceeded, minimum cover shall be increased 50 percent.
C. For prestressed concrete members manufactured under plant control condi-
tions, minimum concrete cover for nonprestressed reinforcement shall be as re-
quired in Section 2607 (h) 2.
4. For bundled bars, minimum concrete cover shall be equal to the equivalent
diameter of the bundle, but need not be greater than 2 inches; except for concrete
cast against and permanently exposed to earth, minimum cover shall be 3 inches.
5. In corrosive environments or other severe exposure conditions, amount of
concrete protection shall be suitably increased, and denseness and nonporosity of
protecting concrete shall be considered, or other protection shall be provided.
6. Exposed reinforcement, inserts and plates intended for bonding with future
extensions shall be protected from corrosion.
7. When a thickness of cover for fire protection greater than the minimum con-
crete cover specified in Section 2607 (h) is required, such greater thickness shall be
used.
(i) Special Reinforcing Details for Columns. [7.8]l.Offset bars. Offset bent
longitudinal bars shall conform to the following:
A. Slope of inclined portion of an offset bar with axis of column shall not exceed
I in 6.
B. Portions of bar above and below an offset shall be parallel to axis of column.
C. Horizontal support at offset bends shall be provided by lateral ties, spirals or
parts of the floor construction. Horizontal support provided shall be designed to
resist one and one-halftimes the horizontal component of the computed force in the
inclined portion of an offset bar. Lateral ties or spirals, if used, shall be placed not
more than 6 inches from points of bend.
D. Offset bars shall be bent before placement in the forms. See Section 2607 (d).
424
E. Where a column face is offset 3 inches or greater, longitudinal bars shall not be
offset bent. Separate dowels, lap spliced with the longitudinal bars adjacent to the
offset column faces, shall be provided. Lap splices shall conform to Section 2612
(r).
2. Steel cores. Load transfer in structural steel cores of composite compression
members shall be provided by the following:
A. Ends of structural steel cores shall be accurately finished to bear at end-bear-
ing splices, with positive provision for alignment of one core above the other in
concentric contact.
B. At end-bearing splices, bearing shall be considered effective to transfer not
more than 50 percent of the total compressive stress in the steel core.
C. Transfer of stress between column base and footing shall be designed in ac-
cordance with Section 2615 (i).
D. Base of structural steel section shall be designed to transfer the total load from
the entire composite member to the footing; or, the base may be designed to transfer
the load from the steel core only, provided ample concrete section is available for
transfer of the portion of the total load carried by the reinforced concrete section to
the footing by compression in the concrete and by reinforcement.
U) Connections. [7.9] At connections of principal framing elements (such as
beams and columns), enclosure shall be provided for splices of continuing rein-
forcement and for end anchorage of reinforcement terminating in such connec-
tions.
Enclosure at connections may consist of external concrete or internal closed ties,
spirals or stirrups.
(k) Lateral Reinforcement for Compression Members. [7 .I 0] 1. General.
Lateral reinforcement for compression members shall conform to the provisions of
Sections 2607 (k) 2 and 3 and, where shear or torsion reinforcement is required,
shall also conform to provisions of Section 2611.
Lateral reinforcement requirements for composite compression members shall
conform to Section 2610 (o ). Lateral reinforcement requirements for prestressing
tendons shall conform to Section 2618 (1).
Lateral reinforcement requirements of Sections 2607 (k), 2610 (o) and 2618 (I)
may be waived where tests and structural analyses show adequate strength and fea-
sibility of construction.
2. Spirals. Spiral reinforcement for compression members shall conform to
Section 2610 (j) 3 and to the following:
A. Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced continuous bar or wire of such size and
so assembled as to permit handling and placing without distortion from designed
dimensions.
B. For cast-in-place construction, size of spirals shall not be less than %-inch
diameter.
C. Clear spacing between spirals shall not exceed 3 inches or be less than I inch.
See also Section 2603 (b).
425
D. Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be provided by one and one-half ex-

tra turns of spiral bar or wire at each end of a spiral unit.
E. Splices in spiral reinforcement shall be lap splices of 48db, but not less than
12 inches or welded.
F. Spirals shall extend from top of footing or slab in any story to level of lowest
horizontal reinforcement in members supported above.
G. Where beams or brackets do not frame into all sides of a column, ties shall
extend above termination of spiral to bottom of slab or drop panel.
H. In columns with capitals, spirals shall extend to a level at which the diameter
or width of capital is two times that of the column.
J I. Spirals shall be held firmly in place and true to line.

3. Ties. Tie reinforcement for compression members shall conform to the fol-
lowing:
A. All nonprestressed bars shall be enclosed by lateral ties, at least No. 3 in size
for longitudinal bars No. 10 or smaller, and at least No.4 in size for Nos. II, 14 and
18 and bundled longitudinal bars. Deformed wire or welded wire fabric of equiva-
lent area may be used.
B. In Seismic Zones Nos. 0 and I, vertical spacing of ties shall not exceed 16
longitudinal bar diameters, 48 tie bar or wire diameters, or least dimension of the
compression member. In Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and4, lateral ties shall he placed
at top and bottom of the column for a distance of one sixth of the clear column
height, or the maximum column dimension, whichever is greater, hut not less than
18 inches. The tie spacing shall not be greater than 8 bar diameters, 24 tie diame-
ters or one half the least column dimension. Ties for the remaining column height
may he spaced as required in Seismic Zones Nos. 0 and I.
C. Ties shall be arranged such that every comer and alternate longitudinal bar
shall have lateral support provided by the comer of a tie with an included angle of
not more than 135 degrees and a bar shall be not farther than 6 inches clear on each
side along the tie from such a laterally supported bar. Where longitudinal bars are
located around the perimeter of a circle, a complete circular tie may be used.
EXCEPTION: In regions of columns confined by special transverse reinforce-
ment conforming to the provisions of Section 2625 (e) 4. supplementary cross ties en-
gaging the hoops only may be considered as meeting this requirement.
D.ln Seismic Zones Nos. 0,1 and 2, column lateral ties shall he as specified in
Section 2607 (h) 3 (iii). In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, lateral ties shall have a
135-degree-minimum turn plus an extension of at least six bar diameters, hut not
less than 3 inches at the free end.
Additional ties which engage at least four vertical column bars shall he pro-
vided around anchor holts which are set in the top of a column for buildings lo-
cated in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4. Such ties shall he within 5 inches of the top
of the column and shall consist of two No.4 or three No.3 bars.
E. Ties shall be located vertically not more than half a tie spacing above the top of
footing or slab in any story and shall be spaced as provided herein to not more than
426
half a tie spacing below the lowest horizontal reinforcement in members supported
above.
F. Where beams or brackets frame from four directions into a column, ties may
be terminated not more than 3 inches below lowest reinforcement in shallowest of
such beams or brackets.
(l) Lateral Reinforcement for Flexural Members. [7 .11] Compression rein-
forcement in beams shall be enclosed by ties or stirrups satisfying the size and
spacing limitations in Section 2607 (k) 3 or by welded wire fabric of equivalent
area. Such ties or stirrups shall be provided throughout the distance where com-
pression reinforcement is required.
Lateral reinforcement for flexural framing members subject to stress reversals
or to torsion at supports shall consist of closed ties, closed stirrups, or spirals ex-
tending around the flexural reinforcement.
Closed ties or stirrups may be formed in one piece by overlapping standard stir-
rup or tie end hooks around a longitudinal bar, or formed in one or two pieces lap
spliced with a Class B splice (lap of 1. 3/d ), or anchored in accordance with Section
2612 (o).
(m) Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement. [7.12] 1. In structural
slabs. Reinforcement for shrinkage and temperature stresses normal to flexural re-
inforcement shall be provided in structural slabs where the flexural reinforcement
extends in one direction only. Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be
provided in accordance with either Subsection 2 or 3 below.
2. Deformed reinforcement. Deformed reinforcement conforming to Section
2603 (b) 4 Bused for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be provided
in accordance with the following:
A. Area of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall provide at least the
following ratios of reinforcement area to gross concrete area, but not less than
0.0014:
(i) Slabs where Grade 40 or 50 deformed bars are used 0.0020
(ii) Slabs where Grade 60 deformed bars or welded wire
fabric (smooth or deformed) are used 0.0018
(iii) Slabs where reinforcement with yield stress exceeding
60,000 psi measured at a yield strain of 0.35
percent is used 0.0018 X 60, 000
/y
B. Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be spaced not farther apart
than five times the slab thickness, or 18 inches.
C. At all sections where required, reinforcement for shrinkage and temperature
stresses shall develop the specified yield strength!yin tension in accordance with
Section 2612 (b) or (p).
3. Prestressing tendons. Prestressing tendons conforming to Section 2603 (b) 4
L used for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be proportioned to pro-
vide a minimum average compressive stress of I 00 psi on gross concrete area using
427
effective prestress, after losses, in accordance with Section 2618 (g). Spacing of
prestressed tendons used for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall not
exceed 6 feet. When the spacing of prestressed tendons used for shrinkage and tem-
perature reinforcement exceeds 54 inches, additional bonded shrinkage and tem-
?erature reinforcement conforming with Section 2607 (m) 2 shall be provided
between the tendons at slab edges extending from the slab edge for a distance equal
to the tendon spacing.
Analysis and Design [Chapter 8]

A, area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, square inches.
A~ area of compression reinforcement, square inches.
h width of compression face of member, inches.
d distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension rein-
forcement, inches.
Ec modulus of elasticity of concrete, pounds per square inch. See Section
2608 (f).
E, modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, pounds per square inch. See Sec-
tion 2608 (f).
f 'c specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per square inch.
/y specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, pounds per
square inch.
l" clear span for positive moment or shear and average of adjacent clear
spans for negative moment.
Vc nominal shear strength provided by concrete.
Wu factored load per unit length of beam or per unit area of slab.
We unit weight of concrete, pounds per cubic foot.
~1 factor defined in Section 2610 (c) 7.
p ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement.
A,/hd.
p' ratio of non prestressed compression reinforcement.
A',/hd.
Ph reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain conditions. See Section
2610 (d) 2.
<j> = strength reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
(b) Design Methods. [8.1] In design of reinforced concrete structures, members
shall be proportioned for adequate strength in accordance with provisions of this
code, using load factors and strength reduction factors <j> specified in Section 2609.
Non prestressed reinforced concrete members may be designed using the provi-
sions of Section 2626.
(c) Loading. [8.2] Design provisions of this code are based on the assumption
that structures shall be designed to resist all applicable loads.
428
Service loads shall be in accordance with Chapter 23 with appropriate live load
reductions as permitted therein.
In design for wind and earthquake loads, integral structural parts shall be de-
signed to resist the total lateral loads.
Consideration shall be given to effects of forces due to prestressing, crane loads,
vibration, impact, shrinkage, temperature changes, creep and unequal settlement
of supports.
(d) Methods of Analysis. [8.3] All members of frames or continuous construc-
tion shall be designed for the maximum effects of factored loads as determined by
the theory of elastic analysis, except as modified by this section. It is permitted to
simplify the design by using the assumptions specified in Section 2608 (g) through
U).
Except for prestressed concrete, approximate methods of frame analysis may be
used for buildings of usual types of construction, spans and story heights.
In lieu of frame analysis, the following approximate moments and shears may be
used in design of continuous beams and one-way slabs (slabs reinforced to resist
flexural stresses in only one direction), provided:
1. There are two or more spans,
2. Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans not
greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent,
3. Loads are uniformly distributed, and
4. Unit live load does not exceed three times unit dead load.
Positive moment:
End spans
Discontinuous end unrestrained Wu!,//IJ
Discontinuous end integral with support ................ . wul,?/14
Interior spans ........................................ . Wul//16
Negative moment at exterior face of first interior support
Two spans ............................................ Wul, 2/9
More than two spans ................................... wuV!IO
Negative moment at otherfaces of interior supports . . . . . . . . . . . . wuV!Jl
Negative moment at face of all supports for:
Slabs with spans not exceeding 10 feet, and beams where
ratio of sum of column stiffnesses to beam stiffness
exceeds eight at each end of the span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wul, 2/12
Negative moment at interior face of exterior support for
members built integrally with supports:
Where support is a spandrel beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wul, 2/24
Where support is a column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wul, 2/16
Shear in end members at face of first interior support ......... 1.15 wul,/2
Shear at face of all other supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wul.,/2
429
(e) Redistribution of Negative Moments in Continuous Nonprestressed

Flexural Members. [8.4] Except where approximate values for moments are
used, it is permitted to increase or decrease negative moments calculated by elastic
theory at supports of continuous flexural members for any assumed loading ar-
rangement by not more than
p- p' )
20 (I - ---
Pb
percent
The modified negative moments shall be used for calculating moments at sec-
tions within the spans.
Redistribution of negative moments shall be made only when the section, at
which moment is reduced, is so designed that p orp-p' is not greater than 0.50 ph.
where
Pb = 0. 85 {3If'c 87,000
(8-1)
!y 87,000 + /y
For criteria on moment redistribution for prestressed concrete members, see
Section 2618.
(f) Modulus of Elasticity. [8.5] Modulus of elasticity E, for concrete may be
taken as w I.S c 33 j f: (in psi) for values of We between 90 and !55 pcf. For nor-
mal-weight concrete, Ec may be taken as 57,000 JJ: .

Modulus of elasticity Es for nonprestressed reinforcement may be taken as
29,000,000 psi. Modulus of elasticity E., for prestressing tendons shall be deter-
mined by tests or supplied by the manufacturer.
(g) Stiffness. [8.6] Use of any set of reasonable assumptions is permitted for
computing relative flexural and torsional stiffnesses of columns, walls, floors and
roof systems. The assumptions adopted shall be consistent throughout analysis.
Effect of haunches shall be considered both in determining moments and in de-
sign of members.
(h) Span Length. [8.7] Span length of members not built integrally with sup-
ports shall be considered the clear span plus depth of member, but need not exceed
distance between centers of supports.
In analysis of frames or continuous construction for determination of moments,
span length shall be taken as the distance center to center of supports. For beams
built integrally with supports, design on the basis of moments at faces of support is
permitted.
Solid or ribbed slabs built integrally with supports, with clear spans not more
than 10 feet, may be analyzed as continuous slabs on knife edge supports with
spans equal to the clear spans of the slab and width of beams otherwise neglected.
(i) Columns. [8.8] Columns shall be designed to resist the axial forces from fac-
tored loads on all floors or roof and the maximum moment from factored loads on a
430
single adjacent span of the floor or roof under consideration. Loading condition
giving the maximum ratio of moment to axial load shall also be considered.
In frames or continuous construction, consideration shall be given to the effect
of unbalanced floor or roof loads on both exterior and interior columns and of ec-
centric loading due to other causes.
In computing gravity load moments in columns, it is permitted to assume as
fixed, far ends of columns built integrally with the structure.
Resistance to moments at any floor orrooflevel shall be provided by distributing
the moment between columns immediately above and below the given floor in pro-
portion to the relative column stiffnesses and conditions of restraint.
(j) Arrangement of Live Load. [8.9] It is permissible to assume that (I) the live
load is applied only to the floor or roof under consideration, and (2) the far ends of
columns built integrally with the structure are considered to be fixed.
It is permitted to assume that the arrangement of live load is limited to combina-
tions of:
I. Factored dead load on all spans with full-factored live load on two adjacent
spans, and
2. Factored dead load on all spans with full-factored live load on alternate spans.
(k) T-beam Construction. [8.10]1. In T-beam construction, the flange and web
shall be built integrally or otherwise effectively bonded together.
2. Width of slab effective as aT-beam flange shall not exceed one fourth the span
length of the beam, and the effective overhanging slab width on each side of the
web shall not exceed:
A. Eight times the slab thickness, or
B. One half the clear distance to the next web.
3. For beams with a slab on one side only, the effective overhanging flange width
shall not exceed:
A. One twelfth the span length of the beam,
B. Six times the slab thickness, or
C. One half the clear distance to the next web.
4. Isolated beams, in which the T-shape is used to provide a flange for additional
compression area, shall have a flange thickness not less than one half the width of
web and an effective flange width not more than four times the width of web.
5. Where primary flexural reinforcement in a slab that is considered as aT-beam
flange (excluding joist construction) is parallel to the beam, reinforcement perpen-
dicular to the beam shall be provided in the top of the slab in accordance with the
following:
A. Transverse reinforcement shall be designed to carry the factored load on the
overhanging slab width assumed to act as a cantilever. For isolated beams, the full
width of overhanging flange shall be considered. For other T-beams, only the ef-
fective overhanging slab width need be considered.
B. Transverse reinforcement shall be spaced not farther apart than five times the
slab thickness or 18 inches.
431
(I) Joist Construction. [8.11]1. Joist construction consists of a monolithic com-

bination of regularly spaced ribs and a top slab arranged to span in one direction or
two orthogonal directions.
Ribs shall not be less than 4 inches in width and shall have a depth of not more
than three and one-half times the minimum width of rib. Clear spacing between
ribs shall not exceed 30 inches.
Joist construction not meeting the limitations ofthe preceding two paragraphs
shall be designed as slabs and beams.
2. When permanent burned clay or concrete tile fillers of material having a unit
compressive strength at least equal to that of the specified strength of concrete in
the joists are used:
A. Vertical shells of fillers in contact with the ribs may be included in strength
computations for shear and negative moment. Other portions of fillers shall not be
included in strength computations.
B. Slab thickness over permanent fillers shall not be less than one twelfth the
clear distance between ribs or less than one and one-half inches.
C. In one-way joists, reinforcement normal to the ribs shall be provided in the
slab as required by Section 2607 (m).
3. When removable forms or fillers not complying with Section 2608 (I) 2 are
used:
A. Slab thickness shall not be less than one twelfth the clear distance between
ribs, or less than 2 inches.
B. Reinforcement normal to the ribs shall be provided in the slab as required for
flexure, considering load concentrations, if any, but not less than required by Sec-
tion 2607 (m).
4. Where conduits or pipes as permitted by Section 2603 (b) I are embedded
within the slab, slab thickness shall be at least I inch greater than the total overall
depth of the conduits or pipes at any point. Conduits or pipes shall not impair signif-
icantly the strength of the construction.
5. For joist construction, contribution of concrete to shear strength Vc is per-
mitted to be I 0 percent more than that specified in Section 2611. It is permitted to
increase shear strength using shear reinforcement or by widening the ends of the
ribs.
(m) Separate Floor Finish. [8.12] A floor finish shall not be included as part of
a structural member unless placed monolithically with the floor slab or designed in
accordance with requirements of Section 2617. All concrete floor finishes may be
considered as part of required cover or total thickness for nonstructural consider-
ations.
Strength and Serviceability Requirements [Chapter 9]

AR gross area of section, square inches.
A,- = area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, square inches.
432
A~' area of compression reinforcement, square inches.

d' distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of compression re-
inforcement, inches.
d, distance from extreme tension fiber to centroid of tension reinforce-
ment, inches.
D dead loads, or related internal moments and forces.
Ec modulus of elasticity of concrete, pounds per square inch. See Section
2608 (t).
f ', specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per square inch.
JJ:. square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per
square inch.
j;, average splitting tensile strength of lightweight aggregate concrete,
pounds per square inch.
f, modulus of rupture of concrete, pounds per square inch.
fv specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, pounds per
square inch.
F loads due to weight and pressures of fluid '1 well-defined densities
and controllable maximum heights, or related internal moments and
forces.
h overall thickness of member, inches.
H loads due to weight and pressure of soil, water in soil, or other materials,
or related internal moments and forces.
fer moment of inertia of cracked section transformed to concrete.
1,. effective moment of inertia for computation of deflection.
fx moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis, ne-
glecting reinforcement.
span length of beam or one-way slab, as defined in Section 2608 (h);
clear projection of cantilever, inches.
In length of clear span in long direction of two-way construction, measured
face to face of supports in slabs without beams and face to face of beams
or other supports in other cases.
L live loads, or related internal moments and forces.
Ma maximum moment in member at stage deflection is computed.
Mer cracking moment. See Formula (9-8).
Pb nominal axial load strength at balanced strain conditions. See Section
2610 (d) 2.
Pn nominal axial load strength at given eccentricity.
Pu factored axial load at given eccentricity::;; <l>Pn.
T time-dependent factor for sustained load. See Section 2609 (t) 2 E.
433
U required strength to resist factored loads or related internal moments and

forces.
w, weight of concrete, pounds per cubic foot.
W wind load, or related internal moments and forces.
Yt distance from centroidal axis of gross section, neglecting reinforcement,
to extreme fiber in tension.
a ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width
of slab bounded laterally by center line of adjacent panel (if any) on each
side of beam. See Section 2613.
a, average value of a for all beams on edges of a panel.
~ ratio of clear spans in long-to-short direction of two-way slabs.
~s ratio of length of continuous edges to total perimeter of a slab panel.
 strength reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
A multiplier for additional long-time deflection as defined in Section 2609
(f) 2 E.
p' = reinforcement ratio for nonprestressed compression reinforcement,
A ~lhd.
(b) General. [9.1] Structures and structural members shall be designed to have
design strengths at all sections at least equal to the required strengths calculated for
the factored loads and forces in such combinations as are stipulated in this code.
Members also shall meet all other requirements of this code to ensure adequate
performance at service load levels.
(c) Required Strength. [9.2]1. Required strength U to resist dead load D and
live load L shall be at least equal to
U = 1.4D + 1.7L (9-1)
2. If resistance to structural effects of a specified wind load Ware included in
design, the following combinations of D, Land W shall be investigated to deter-
mine the greatest required strength U
U = 0.75 (1.4D + 1.7L + 1.7W) (9-2)
where load combinations shall include both full value and zero value of L to deter-
mine the more severe condition, and
U = 0.9D + 1.3W (9-3)
but for any combination of D, Land W, required strength U shall not be less than
Formula (9-1 ).
3. If resistance to specified earthquake loads or forces E are included in design,
load combinations of Section 2609 (c) 2 shall apply, except that 1.1£ shall be sub-
stituted for W. Load factors contained in Sections 2625 and 2627 shall be used
where applicable.
4. If resistance to earth pressure His included in design, required strength U shall
be at least equal to
434
U = I.4D + !.7L + !.7H (9-4)

except that whereD or L reduces the effect of H. 0.9D shall be substituted for 1.4D
and zero value of L shall be used to determine the greatest required strength U. For
any combination of D, L andH, required strength U shall not be less than Formula
(9-1 ).
5.lfresistance to loadings due to weight and pressure of fluids with we\\-&vnm
densities and controllable maximum heights F is included in design, such loading
shall have a load factor of 1.4 and be added to all loading combinations that include
live load.
6. If resistance to impact effects is taken into account in design, such effects shall
be included with live load L.
7. Where structural effects T of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage or tem-
perature change may be significant in design, required strength U shall be at least
equal to
U = 0.75 (1.4D + I.4T + 1.7L) (9-5)
but required strength U shall not be less than
U = 1.4 (D + T) (9-6)
Estimations of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage or temperature change
shall be based on a realistic assessment of such effects occurring in service.
(d) Design Strength. [9.3]1. Design strength provided by a member or cross
section in terms of load, moment, shear or stress shall be taken as the nominal
strength calculated in accordance with requirements and assumptions of this code,
multiplied by a strength reduction factor <j>.
2. Strength reduction factor<!> shall be as follows:
A. Flexure, without axial load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.90
B. Axial load and axial load with flexure. (For axial load with flexure, both axial
load and moment nominal strength shall be multiplied by appropriate single value
of<\>.)
Axial tension and axial tension with flexure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.90
Axial compression and axial compression with flexure:
Members with spiral reinforcement conforming to
Section 2610 (j) 3 .......................................... 0.75
Other reinforced members ................................... 0.70
except that for low values of axial load,<!> may be increased in accordance with the
following:
For members in whichfy does not exceed 60,000 psi, with symmetric reinforce-
ment, and with (h-d' -ds)lh not less than 0.70, <!>may be increased linearly to 0.90
as <!>Pn decreases from 0.10 f :. AR to zero.
For other reinforced members, <!> may be increased linearly to 0.90 as <!>Pn de-
creases from 0.10 f :. AR or <\>Ph, whichever is smaller, to zero.
435
C. Shear and torsion [See also Section 2625 (c) 3 Afor shear walls in Seismic
Zones Nos. 3 and 4] ........................................... 0.85
D. Bearing on concrete [See also Section 2618 (n)] ................ 0.70
E. Flexure in plain concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.65
3. Development lengths specified in Section 2612 do not require a factor.
4. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, strength-reduction factors shall be as given
above except for the following:
The shear strength-reduction factor shall be 0.6 for the design of walls, topping
slabs used as diaphragms over precast concrete members and structural framing
members, with the exception of joints, if their nominal shear strength is less than
the shear corresponding to development of their nominal flexural strength. The
shear strength-reduction factor for joints shall be 0.85.
(e) Design Strength for Reinforcement. [9.4] Designs shall not be based on a
yield strength of reinforcementf, in excess of 80,000 psi, except for prestressing
tendons.
(f) Control of Deflections. [9.5] 1. General. Reinforced concrete members
subject to flexure shall be designed to have adequate stiffness to limit deflections or
any deformations that may adversely affect strength or serviceability of a structure
at service loads. (See Section 2307 for deflection limits.)
2. One-way construction (nonprestressed). A. Minimum thickness stipulated
in Table No. 26-C-1 shall apply for one-way construction not supporting or at-
tached to partitions or other construction likely to be damaged by large deflections,
unless computation of deflection indicates a lesser thickness may be used without
adverse effects.
B. Where deflections are to be computed, deflections that occur immediately on
application of load shall be computed by usual methods or formulas for elastic de-
flections, considering effects of cracking and reinforcement on member stiffness.
C. Unless stiffness values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis, im-
mediate deflection shall be computed with the modulus of elasticity Ec for concrete
as specified in Section 2608 (f) (normal-weight or lightweight concrete) and with
the effective moment of inertia as follows, but not greater than JR.
(9-7)
WHERE:
(9-8)
and for normal-weight concrete
fr = 7.5 JJ: (9-9)

When lightweight aggregate concrete is used, one ofthe following modifications
shall apply:
436
(i) Whenj;., is specified and concrete is proportioned in accordance with Sec-

tion 2604 (c),fr shall be modified by substitutingj;,/6.7 for Jt; , but the
value ofj;,/6.7 shall not exceed jj;..
(ii) When j;., is not specified, fr shall be multiplied by 0.75 for "all-light-
weight" concrete, and 0.85 for "sand-lightweight" concrete. Linear inter-
polation may be used when partial sand replacement is used.
D. For continuous members, effective moment of inertia may be taken as the av-
erage of values obtained from Formula (9-7) for the critical positive and negative
moment sections. For prismatic members, effective moment of inertia may be tak-
en as the value obtained from Formula (9-7) at midspan for simple and continuous
spans, and at support for cantilevers.
E. Unless values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis, additional
longtime deflection resulting from creep and shrinkage of flexural members (nor-
mal-weight or lightweight concrete) shall be determined by multiplying the imme-
diate deflection caused by the sustained load considered, by the factor
A = _ _T_ _
(9-10)
1 +SOp'
where p' shall be the value at midspan for simple and continuous spans, and at sup-
port for cantilevers. Time-dependent factor T for sustained loads may be taken
equal to
Five years or more 2.0
12 months 1.4
Six months 1.2
Three months 1.0
F. Deflection computed in accordance with this section shall not exceed limits
stipulated in Section 2307.
3. Two-way construction (nonprestressed). A. This section shall govern mini-
mum thickness of slabs or other two-way construction designed in accordance with
I
provisions of Section 2613 and conforming with the requirements of Section
2613(h) I B. Thickness of slabs without interior beams spanning between the sup-
ports on all sides shall satisfy requirements of either Section 2609(f) 3 B, C orE
Thickness of slabs with beams spanning between supports on all sides shall satisfy
requirements of either Section 2609 (f) 3 C or F.
B. Minimum thickness of slabs without interior beams spanning between the
supports shall be in accordance with the provisions of Table No. 26-C-2 and shall
not be less than the following values:
(i) Slabs without drop panels as defined in
Section 2613 (e) 6 A and B .................................. 5 inches
(ii) Slabs with drop panels as defined in
Section 2613 (e) 6 A and B .................................. 4 inches
437
C. Minimum thickness of slabs with or without beams spanning between the

supports on all sides and having a ratio of long to short span not exceeding 2 shall
be:
( 0.8 !y )
+ 200.000
h '" (9-11)
36 + 5{3 [am - 0.12( I + l)]
But not less than:
fv )
( 0.8 + 2oo:ooo
h '" 36 + 9{3
(9-12)
And need not be more than:
'" ( 0.8 + 2(~:000) (9-13)

h = ------------
36
The values obtained from Formula (9-11 ), (9-12) or (9-13) shall be modified as
required in Section 2609 (f) 3D and E, but in no case shall the thickness be less than:
(i) For ex,, less than 2.0 ................................. 5 inches
(ii) For ex, equal to or larger than 2.0 .................... 3 1/z inches
D. For slabs without beams, but with drop panels extending in each direction
from center line of support a distance not less than one sixth the span length in that
direction measured center to center of supports, and a projection below the slab at
least one fourth the slab thickness beyond the drop, thickness required by Formula
(9-11), (9-12) or (9-13) may be reduced by 10 percent.
E. At discontinuous edges, an edge beam shall be provided with a stiffness ratio
a not less than 0.80; or the minimum thickness required by Formula (9-11 ), (9-12)
or (9-13 ), shall be increased by at least I 0 percent in the panel with a discontinuous
edge.
F. S Jab thickness Jess than the minimum thickness required by Section 2609 (f) 3
A, Band C may be used if shown by computation that deflection will not exceed the
limits stipulated in Table No. 23-C-1. Deflections shall be computed taking into
account size and shape of panel, conditions of support, and nature of restraints at
panel edges. For deflection computations, modulus of elasticity Ec for concrete
shall be as specified in Section 2608 (f). Effective moment of inertia shall be that
given by Formula (9-7). Other values may be used if computed deflection is in rea-
sonable agreement with results of comprehensive tests. Additional long-time de-
flection shall be computed in accordance with Section 2609 (f) 2 E.
4. Prestressed concrete construction. For flexural members designed in accor-
dance with provisions of Section 2618, immediate deflection shall be computed by
usual methods or formulas for elastic deflections, and the moment of inertia of the
gross concrete section may be used for uncracked sections.
438
Additional long-time deflection of prestressed concrete members shall be com-

puted taking into account stresses in concrete and steel under sustained load and
including effects of creep and shrinkage of concrete and relaxation of steel.
Deflection shall not exceed limits stipulated in Section 2307.
5. Composite construction. A. Shored construction. If composite flexural
members are supported during construction so that, after removal of temporary
supports, dead load is resisted by the full composite section, the composite member
may be considered equivalent to a monolithically cast member for computation of
deflection. For non prestressed members, the portion of the member in compres-
sion shall determine whether values in Table No. 26-C-1 for normal-weight or
lightweight concrete shall apply. If deflection is computed, account should be tak-
en of curvatures resulting from differential shrinkage of precast and cast-in-place
components, and of axial creep effects in a prestressed concrete member.
8. Unshored construction. If the thickness of a nonprestressed precast flexural
member meets the requirements of Table No. 26-C-1, deflection need not be com-
puted. If the thickness of a nonprestressed composite member meets the require-
ments of Table No. 26-D, deflection occurring after the member becomes
composite need not be computed, but the long-time deflection of the precast mem-
ber should be investigated for magnitude and duration ofload prior to beginning of
effective composite action.
Flexure and Axial Loads [Chapter 10]

a depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as defined in Section 2610
(c) 7.
A effective tension area of concrete surrounding the flexural tension rein-
forcement and having the same centroid as that reinforcement, divided
by the number of bars or wires, square inches. When the flexural rein-
forcement consists of different bar or wire sizes, the number of bars or
wires shall be computed as the total area of reinforcement divided by the
area of the largest bar or wire used.
A,. area of core of spirally reinforced compression member measured to
outside diameter of spiral, square inches.
A~ gross area of section, square inches.
area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, square inches.
area of skin reinforcement per unit height in one side face, square inches ili,!
per foot.
total area oflongitudinal reinforcement (bars or steel shapes), square in-
ches.
A, area of structural steel shape, pipe or tubing in a composite section,
square inches.
A1 loaded area.
439
the area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or
tapered wedge contained wholly within the support and having for its
upper base the loaded area, and having side slopes of 1 vertical to 2 hori-
zontaL
distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral axis, inches.
a factor relating actual moment diagram to an equivalent uniform mo-
ment diagram.
forcement, inches.
thickness of concrete cover measured from extreme tension fiber to cen-
ter of bar or wire located closest thereto, inches.
E,. modulus of elasticity of concrete, pounds per square inch. See Section
2608 (f).
E., modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, pounds per square inch. See Sec-
tion 2608 (f).
El = flexural stiffness of compression member. See Formula (10-9).
f 'c specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per square inch.
is calculated stress in reinforcement at service loads, kips per square inch.
fy specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, pounds per
square inch.
lx moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis, ne-
glecting reinforcement.
lu moment of inertia of reinforcement about centroidal axis of member
cross section.
/1 moment of inertia of structural steel shape, pipe or tubing about centroi-
dal axis of composite member cross section.
k effective length factor for compression members.
lu unsupported length of compression member.
Me factored moment to be used for design of compression member.
M1 value of smaller factored end moment on compression member calcu-
lated by conventional elastic frame analysis, positive if member is bent
in single curvature, negative if bent in double curvature.
MIn value of smaller factored end moment on a braced compression mem-
ber, calculated by conventional elastic frame analysis; positive if mem-
ber is bent in single curvature, negative if bent in double curvature.
M2 value of largerfactored end moment on compression member calculated
hy conventional elastic frame analysis, always positive.
M 20 value of larger factored end moment on compression members due to
loads which result in no appreciable sidesway, calculated by conven-
tional elastic frame analysis.
440
value of larger factored end moment on compression member due to

loads which result in appreciable sides way, calculated by conventional
elastic frame analysis.
nominal axial load strength at balanced strain conditions. See Section
2610 (d) 2.
critical load. See Formula (I 0-9).
nominal axial load strength at given eccentricity.
nominal axial load strength at zero eccentricity.
Pu factored axial load at given eccentricity ::;; <j>P0 •
r radius of gyration of cross section of a compression member.
z quantity limiting distribution of flexural reinforcement. See Section
2610 (g).
~I factor defined in Section 2610 (c).
~d
::tf~l ~:a~,a:~~:e~h~~~~~~~;:~~~ ~;:~i!~~~f~~t;~~:;;~~~~=:c~~~~~~~
of Pc in Formula (I 0-7), or ratio of the maximum factored sustained Iat-
1,':,.,1!,.,.
eralload to the maximum total factored lateral load in that story in the
calculation of Pc in Formula (10-8).
moment magnification factor for frames braced against sides way tore-
flect effects of member curvature between ends of compression mem-
bers.
moment magnification factor for frames not braced against sides way to
reflect lateral drift resulting from lateral and gravity loads.
A.. /bd.
reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain conditions. See Section
2610 (d) 2.
p, ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total volume of core
(out-tc ut of spirals) of a spirally reinforced compression member.
<1> = strength -reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
(b) Scope. [ 10.1 j Provisions of Section 2610 shall apply for design of members
subject to flexure or axial loads or to combined flexure and axial loads.
(c) Design Assumptions. [10.2]1. Strength design of members for flexure and
axial loads shall be based on assumptions given in Section 2610 (c) 2 through 7, and
on satisfaction of applicable conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of strains.
2. Strain in reinforcement and concrete shall be assumed directly proportional to
the distance from the neutral axis, except, for deep flexural members with overall
depth-to-clear-span ratios greater than two fifths for continuous spans and four
fifths for simple spans, a nonlinear distribution of strain shall be considered. See
Section 2610 (g).
3. Maximum usable strain at extreme concrete compression fiber shall be as-
sumed equal to 0.003.
441
4. Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strength,{y for grade of rein-

forcement used shall be taken as E,, times steel strain. For strains greater than that
corresponding to fi., stress in reinforcement shall be considered independent of
strain and equal to,{y.
5. Tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected in axial and flexural calcula-
tions of reinforced concrete, except where meeting requirements of Section 2618
(e).
6. Relationship between concrete compressive stress distribution and concrete
strain may be assumed to be rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic or any other shape
that results in prediction of strength in substantial agreement with results of com-
prehensive tests.
7. Requirements of Section 2610 (c) 6 may be considered satisfied by an equiva-
lent rectangular concrete stress distribution defined by the following:
A. Concrete stress of 0.85f :. shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an
equivalent compression zone bounded by edges of the cross section and a straight
line located parallel to the neutral axis at a distance a= ~ 1 c from the fiber of maxi-
mum compressive strain.
B. Distance c from fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis shall be measured
in a direction perpendicular to the axis.
C. Factor ~ 1 shall be taken as 0.85 for concrete strengthsJ:. up to and including
4,000 psi. For strengths above 4,000 psi, ~ 1 shall be reduced continuously at a rate
of0.05 for each 1,000 psi of strength in excess of 4,000 psi, but ~ 1 shall not be taken
less than 0.65.
(d) General Principles and Requirements. 1. Design of cross section subject
to flexure or axial loads or to combined flexure and axial loads shall be based on
stress and strain compatibility using assumptions in Section 2610 (c).
2. Balanced strain conditions exist at a cross section when tension reinforcement
reaches the strain corresponding to its specified yield strength,{y just as concrete in
compression reaches its assumed ultimate strain of 0.003.
3. For flexural members, and for members subject to combined flexure and com-
pressive axial load when the design axial load strength <jlP" is less than the smaller
ofO.l Of~ Ax or (I>P0 , the ratio of reinforcement p provided shall not exceed 0.75 of
the ratio Po that would produce balanced strain conditions for the section under
flexure without axial load. For members with compression reinforcement, the por-
tion of Po equalized by compression reinforcement need not be reduced by the 0. 75
factor.
4. Compression reinforcement in conjunction with additional tension reinforce-
ment may be used to increase the strength of flexural members.
5. Design axial load strength <jlPn of compression members shall not be taken
greater than the following:
A. For nonprestressed members with spiral reinforcement conforming to Sec-
tion 2607 (k) 2 or composite members conforming to Section 2610 (o ):
442
(10-1)
B. For nonprestressed members with tie reinforcement conforming to Section
2607 (k) 3:
(10-2)
C. For prestressed members, design axial load strength <J>Pn shall not be taken
greater than 0.85 (for members with spiral reinforcement) or 0.80 (for members
with tie reinforcement) of the design axial load strength at zero eccentricity <j>P0 •
6. Members subject to compressive axial load shall be designed for the maxi-
mum moment that can accompany the axial load. The factored axial load Pu at giv-
en eccentricity shall not exceed that given in Section 2610 (d) 5. The maximum
factored moment Mu shall be magnified for slenderness effects in accordance with
Section 2610 (k).
(e) Distance between Lateral Supports of Flexural Members. [I 0.4] Spacing
of lateral supports for a beam shall not exceed 50 times the least width b of com-
pression flange or face.
Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be taken into account in determining
spacing of lateral supports.
(f) Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members. [ 10.5] 1. At any section of
a flexural member, except as provided in Section 2610 (f) 2 and 3 where positive
reinforcement is required by analysis, the ratio p provided shall not be less than that
given by:
. 200
pmzn. = - (10-3)
/y
In T-beams and joists where the web is in tension, the ratio p shall be computed
for this purpose using width of web.
2. Alternatively, area of reinforcement provided at every section, positive or
negative, shall be at least one-third greater than that required by analysis.
3. For structural slabs of uniform thickness, minimum area and maximum spac-
ing of reinforcement in the direction of the span shall be as required for shrinkage
and temperature according to Section 2607 (m).
(g) Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement in Beams and One-way Slabs.
[I 0.6] I. This section prescribes rules for distribution of flexural reinforcement to
control flexural cracking in beams and in one-way slabs (slabs reinforced to resist
flexural stresses in only one direction).
2. Distribution of flexural reinforcement in two-way slabs shall be as required by
Section 2613 (e).
3. Flexural tension reinforcement shall be well distributed within maximum
flexural tension zones of a member cross section as required by Section 261 0(g)4.
4. When design yield strength_[y for tension reinforcement exceeds 40,000 psi,
cross sections of maximum positive and negative moment shall be so proportioned
that the quantity z given by
443
z =fs 3 )dA
( (I 0-4)
does not exceed 175 kips per inch for interior exposure and 145 kips per inch for
exterior exposure. Calculated stress in reinforcement at service load ,I; (kips per
square inch) shall be computed as the moment divided by the product of steel area
ana't'nremal moment arm. In lieu of such computations, ,I; may be taken as 60 per-
cent of specified yield strength/y.
5. Provisions of Section 2610 (g) 4 may not be sufficient for structures subject to
very aggressive exposure or designed to be watertight. For such structures, special
investigations and precautions are required.
6. Where flanges ofT-beam construction are in tension, part of the flexural ten-
sion reinforcement shall be distributed over an effective flange width as defined in
Section 2608 (k), or a width equal to one tenth the span, whichever is smaller. If the
effective flange width exceeds one tenth the span, some longitudinal reinforce-
ment shall be provided in the outer portions of the flange.
7. If the depth ofthe web exceeds 3 feet, longitudinal skin reinforcement shall be
uniformly distributed along both side faces of the member for a distance d/2 nearest
the flexural tension reinforcement. The area of skin reinforcement, Asko per foot of
height on each side face shall be;:::: 0.012 (d-30). The maximum spacing of the skin
reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of d/6 and 12 inches. Such reinforcement
may be included in strength computations if a strain compatibility analysis is made
to determine stresses in the individual bars or wires. The total area of longitudinal
skin reinforcement in both faces need not exceed one half of the required flexural
tensile reinforcement.
(h) Deep Flexural Members. [I 0. 7]1. Flexural members with overall depth-to-
clear-span ratios greater than two fifths for continuous spans, or four fifths for sim-
ple spans, shall be designed as deep flexural members, taking into account
nonlinear distribution of strain and lateral buckling.
2. Design of deep flexural members for shear effects shall be in accordance with
Section 2611 (i).
3. Minimum flexural tension reinforcement shall conform to Section 2610 (f).
4. Minimum horizontal and vertical reinforcement in the side faces of deep flex-
ural members shall be the greater of the requirements of Section 2611 ( i) 7 and 8 or
Section 26\4 (d).
(i) Design Dimensions for Compression Members. [\0.8] I. Isolated com-
pression member with multiple spirals. Outer limits of the effective cross sec-
tion of a compression member with two or more interlocking spirals shall be taken
at a distance outside the extreme limits of the spirals equal to the minimum concrete
cover required by Section 2607 (h).
2. Compression member built monolithically with wall. Outer limits of the
effective cross section of a spirally reinforced or tied reinforced compression
member built monolithically with a concrete wall or pier shall be taken not greater
than 11h inches outside the spiral or tie reinforcement.
3. Equivalent circular compression member. In lieu of using full gross area
for design, a compression member with a square, octagonal or other shaped cross
444
section may be considered as a circular section with a diameter equal to the least
lateral dimension of the actual shape. Cross area considered, required percentage
of reinforcement, and design strength shall be based on that circular section.
4. Limits of section. For a compression member with a larger cross section than
required by considerations ofloading, a reduced effective areaAg not less than one
hl\lf the total area may be used to determine minimum reinforcement and design
strength.
(j) Limits for Reinforcement of Compression Members. [10.9]1. Areaoflon-
gitudinal reinforcement for noncomposite compression members shall not be Jess
than 0.01 or more than 0.08 times gross area Ag of section.
2. Minimum number oflongitudinal bars in compression members shall be four
for bars within rectangular or circular ties, three for bars within triangular ties, and
six for bars enclosed by spirals conforming to Section 2610 (j) 3.
3. Ratio of spiral reinforcement Ps shall not be less than the value given by
(10-5)
where h is the specified yield strength of spiral reinforcement but not more than
60,000 psi.
(k) Slenderness Effects in Compression Members. [ 10.1 0]1. Design of com-
pression members shall be based on forces and moments determined from analysis
of the structure. Such analysis shall take into account influence of axial loads and
variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and fixed-end moments, effect of
deflections on moments and forces and the effects of duration of loads.
2. In lieu of the procedure prescribed in Section 2610 (k) 1, slenderness effects in
compression members may be evaluated in accordance with the approximate pro-
cedure presented in Section 2610 (1).
3. The detailed requirements of Section 2610 (I) need not be applied if slender-
ness effects in compression members are evaluated in accordance with Section
2610(k) 1.
(I) Approximate Evaluation of Slenderness Effects. [10.11]1. Unsupported
length of compression members. A. Unsupported length lu of a compression
member shall be taken as the clear distance between floor slabs, beams or other
members capable of providing lateral support for that compression member.
B. Where column capitals or haunches are present, unsupported length shall be
measured to the lower extremity of capital or haunch in the plan considered.
2. Effective length of compression members. A. For compression members
braced against sidesway, effective length factor k shall be taken as 1.0, unless anal-
ysis shows that a lower value may be used.
B. For compression members not braced against sides way, effective length fac-
tor k shall be determined with due consideration of cracking and reinforcement on
relative stiffness, and shall be greater than 1.0.
3. Radius of gyration. Radius of gyration r may be taken equal to 0.30 times the
overall dimension in the direction stability is being considered for rectangular
445
compression members and 0.25 times the diameter for circular compression mem-
bers. For other shapes, r may be computed for the gross concrete section.
4. Consideration of slenderness effects. A. For compression members braced
against sidesway, effects of slenderness may be neglected when klulr is Jess than
34- 12M1hiM21,.
B. For compression members not braced against sidesway, effects of slender-
ness may be neglected when k/ufr is less than 22.
C. For all compression members with klulr greater than 100, an analysis as de-
fined in Section 2610 (k) I shall be made.
5. Moment magnification. A. Braced compression members shall be designed
using the factored axial load Pu from a conventional frame analysis and a magni-
fied factored moment M, defined by:
(10-6)
0h Cm
= _ __:::P~u- ~ J.O
(I 0-7)
- ¢Pel
Os ~ 1.0
l:.Pu (I 0-8)
- ¢I.P,)
AND
:n:z£1
( 10-9)
(klu) 2
'LPu and 'LP, are the summations for all columns in a story. For frames not braced
against sidesway, both 8h and bs shall be computed. For frames braced against
sidesways, bs shall be taken as 1.0. In calculation of P,, k shall be computed ac-
cording to Section 2610 (I) 2 A for 8h, and according to Section 2610 (I) 2 B for bs.
B. In lieu of a more accurate calculation, El in Formula (I 0-9) may be taken ei-
ther as
(EJR/5) + Esfse
El ( 10-10)
I + f3J
or conservatively
El (10-11)
C. In Formula (I 0-7), for members braced against sides way and without trans-
verse loads between supports, Cm may be taken as
M1h
Cm = 0.6 + 0.4 - - (10-12)
M2h
but not less than 0.4. For all other cases, Cm shall be taken as 1.0.
446
D. If computations show that there is no moment at both ends of a braced com-

pression member or that computed end eccentricities are less than (0.6 + 0.03h)
inches, M2h in Formula (I 0-6) shall be based on a minimum eccentricity of (0.6 +
D.!Hh) inches about each principal axis separately. Ratio M 1h/M2h in Formula
( \0-\ 2) shall be determined by either of the following:
(i) When computed end eccentricities are less than (0.6 + 0.03h) inches, com-
puted end moments may be used to evaluate M 1hiM2h in Formula (I 0-12).
(ii) If computations show that there is essentially no moment at both ends of
a braced compression member, the ratio M 1h/M2h shall be taken equal to
one.
E. If computations show that there is no moment at both ends of a compression
member not braced against sidesway or that computed end eccentricities are less
than (0.6 +0.03h) inch,M2h in Formula (10-6) shall be based on a minimum eccen-
tricity of (0.6 + 0.03h) inch, about each principal axis separately.
6. Moment magnification for flexural members. In frames not braced against
sidesway, flexural members shall be designed for the total magnified end moments
of the compression members at the joint.
7. Moment magnifier 0 for biaxial bending. For compression members sub-
ject to bending about both principal axes, moment about each axis shall be magni-
fied by o, computed from corresponding conditions of restraint about that axis.
(m) Axially Loaded Members Supporting Slab System. [ 10.12] Axially
loaded members supporting slab system included within the scope of Section 2613
(b) shall be designed as provided in Section 2610 and in accordance with the addi-
tional requirements of Section 2613.
(n) Transmission of Column Loads through Floor System. [ 10.13] When the
specified compressive strength of concrete in a column is greater than 1.4 times
that specified for a floor system, transmission ofload through the floor system shall
be provided by one of the following:
I. Concrete of strength specified for the column shall be placed in the floor at the
column location. Top surface of the column concrete shall extend 2 feet into the
slab from face of larger column. Column concrete shall be well integrated with
floor concrete, and shall be placed in accordance with Section 2606 (d) 3.
2. Strength of a column through a floor system shall be based on the lower value
of concrete strength with vertical dowels and spirals as required.
3. For columns laterally supported on four sides by beams of approximately
equal depth or by slabs, strength of the column may be based on an assumed con-
crete strength in the column joint equal to 75 percent of column concrete strength
plus 35 percent of floor concrete strength.
(o) Composite Compression Members. [ 10.14] I. Composite compression
members shall include all such members reinforced longitudinally with structural
steel shapes, pipe or tubing with or without longitudinal bars.
2. Strength of a composite member shall be computed for the same limiting con-
ditions applicable to ordinary reinforced concrete members.
447
3. Any axial load strength assigned to concrete of a composite member shall be

transferred to the concrete by members or brackets in direct bearing on the com-
posite member concrete.
4. All axial load strength not assigned to concrete of a composite member shall
be developed by direct connection to the structural steel shape, pipe or tube.
5. For evaluation of slenderness effects, radius of gyration of a composite sec-
tion shall not be greater than the value given by:
r = j
(EJg/5) + Esf,
(E,Ad5) + E,A,
(IO-I3)
For computing P, in Formula (I 0-8), El of the composite section shall not be

greater than
(10-14)
6. Structural steel encased concrete core. A. For a composite member with

concrete core encased by structural steel, thickness of the steel encasement shall
not be less than
h j 3£,,
!Y ,for each face of width h
or
h j fv , for circular sections of diameter h

8£.~
B. Longitudinal bars located within the encased concrete core may be consid-
ered in computing A, and / 1•
7. Spiral reinforcement around structural steel core. A composite member
with spirally reinforced concrete around a structural steel core shall conform to the
following:
A. Specified compressive strength of concrete!:. shall not be less than 2,500psi.
B. Design yield strength of structural steel core shall be the specified minimum
yield strength for grade of structural steel used but not to exceed 50,000 psi.
C. Spiral reinforcement shall conform to Section 2610 U) 3.
D. Longitudinal bars located within the spiral shall not be less than 0.0 I or more
than 0.08 times net area of concrete section.
E. Longitudinal bars located within the spiral may be considered in computing A,
and /1 •
8. Tie reinforcement around structural steel core. A composite member with
laterally tied concrete around a structural steel core shall conform to the following:
A. Specified compressive strength of concrete!: shall not be less than 2,500psi.
B. Design yield strength of structural steel core shall be the specified minimum
yield strength for grade of structural steel used but not to exceed 50,000 psi.
C. Lateral ties shall extend completely around the structural steel core.
448
D. Lateral ties shall have a diameter not less than 1/ 50 times the greatest side di-
mension of composite member, except that ties shall not be smaller than No. 3 and
need not be larger than No.5. Welded wire fabric of equivalent area may be used.
E. Vertical spacing of lateral ties shall not exceed 16longitudinal bar diameters,
48 tie bar diameters, or one half times the least side dimension of the composite
member.
F. Longitudinal bars located within the ties shall not be less than 0.01 or more
than 0.08 times net area of concrete section.
G. A longitudinal bar shall be located at every comer of a rectangular cross sec-
tion, with other longitudinal bars spaced not farther apart than one half the least side
dimension of the composite member.
H. Longitudinal bars located within the ties may be considered in computing A,
for strength but not in computing I, for evaluation of slenderness effects.
(p) Bearing Strength. [ 10.15] Design bearing strength on concrete shall not ex-
ceed <1> (0.85/ : A 1), except when the supporting surface is wider on all sides than
the loaded area, design bearing strength on the loaded area may be multiplied by
j A2/ A 1 , but not more than 2.
This section does not apply to posttensioning anchorages.
Shear and Torsion [Chapter 11]

a = shear span, distance between concentrated load and face of supports.
A, area of concrete section resisting shear transfer, square inches.
At· area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting factored moment Wu
a+ Nuc (h-d)], square inches.
Ax gross area of section, square inches.
Ah area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement,
square inches.
A1 total area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist torsion, square inches.
An area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting tensile force Nuc.••
square inches.
AP·' area of prestressed reinforcement in tension zone, square inches.
As area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, square inches.
A, area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion within a distances,
square inches.
A_. area of shear reinforcement within a distance s, or area of shear rein-
forcement perpendicular to flexural tension reinforcement within a dis-
tance s for deep flexural members, square inches.
A,l area of shear-friction reinforcement, square inches.
A,.h area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement
within a distance s 2 , square inches.
449
bo perimeter of critical section for slabs and footings, inches.

bw = web width, or diameter of circular section, inches.
bl = total width of the critical section measured in the direction of the span for
which moments are determined, inches.
b2 = total width of the critical section measured in the direction perpendicular
to b 1, inches.
CJ size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital or bracket
measured in the direction of the span for which moments are being deter-
mined, inches.
~=~~~
.;::;
::;::
C2 = size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital or bracket
measured transverse to the direction of the span for which moments are
:f being determined, inches.
:;:::
c, factor relating shear and torsional stress properties.

b"d
Yy
d distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid oflongitudinal ten-
sion reinforcement, but need not be less than 0.80h for prestressed mem-
bers, inches. (For circular sections, d need not be less than the distance
from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension reinforcement in
opposite half of member.)
f', specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per square inch.
li'c = square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per

square inch.
fc, average splitting tensile strength of lightweight aggregate concrete,
!d stress due to unfactored dead load, at extreme fiber of section where ten-
sile stress is caused by externally applied loads, pounds per square inch.
J;,, compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for all prestress losses)
at centroid of cross section resisting externally applied loads or at junc-
tion of web and flange when the centroid lies within the flange, pounds
per square inch. (In a composite member, J;,c is resultant compressive
stress at centroid of composite section, or at junction of web and flange
when the centroid lies within the flange, due to both prestress and mo-
ments resisted by precast member acting alone.)
fr, compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress forces only (af-
ter allowance for all prestress losses) at extreme fiber of section where
tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads, pounds per square
inch.
J;,u specified tensile strength of prestressing tendons, pounds per square
inch.
/y specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, pounds per
square inch.
450

h.· total depth of shearhead cross section, inches.
h.v total height of wall from base to top, inches.
I moment of inertia of section resisting externally applied factored loads.
/" clear span measured face to face of supports.
fv length of shearhead arm from centroid of concentrated load or reaction,
inches.
lw horizontal length of wall, inches.
Mer moment causing flexural cracking at section due to externally applied
loads. See Section 2611 (e) 2 A.
Mm modified moment.
M"'"' maximum factored moment at section due to externally applied loads.
Mp required plastic moment strength of shearhead cross section.
Mu factored moment at section.
M,. moment resistance contributed by shearhead reinforcement.
Nu factored axial load normal to cross section occurring simultaneously
with v.; to be taken as positive for compression, negative for tension,
and to include effects of tension due to creep and shrinkage.
N., factored tensile force applied at top of bracket or corbel acting simulta-
neously with Vus to be taken as positive for tension.
s spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction parallel to longitu-
dinal reinforcement, inches.
s1 spacing of vertical reinforcement in wall, inches.
s2 spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction perpendicular to
longitudinal reinforcement--or spacing of horizontal reinforcement in
wall, inches.
'fc nominal torsional moment strength provided by concrete.
Tn nominal torsional moment strength.
T., nominal torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement.
See Section 2611 (g) 9 A.
Tu factored torsional moment at section.
Vn nominal shear stress, pounds per square inch.
II,. nominal shear strength provided by concrete.
V.·i nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking re-
sults from combined shear and moment.
V.w nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking re-
sults from excessive principal tensile stress in web.
Vd shear force at section due to unfactored d~ad load.
vi factored shear force at section due to externally applied loads occurring
simultaneously with Mmax·
nominal shear strength.
451
VP = vertical component of effective prestress force at section.

nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement.
factored shear force at section.
x = shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section.
y longer overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section.
Yy == torsional section properties. See Sections 2611 (g) 1 A and 2611 (g) I B.
x 1 = shorter center-to-center dimension of closed rectangular stirrup.
y1 longer center-to-center dimension of closed rectangular stirrup.
y, = distance from centroidal axis of gross section, neglecting reinforcement,
to extreme fiber in tension.
a == angle between included stirrups and longitudinal axis of member.
ar angle between shear-friction reinforcement and shear plane.
a. == constant used to compute Vc in nonprestressed slabs.
a, coefficientydx 1• See Section 2611 (g) 9 A.
a, ratio of stiffness of shearhead arm to surrounding composite slab sec-
tion.
ll = ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load or reaction area.
~d constant used to compute Vc in prestressed slabs.
ll == coefficient of friction. See Section 2611 (h) 6.
'A correction factor related to unit weight of concrete.
'YJ fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure at slab-column
connection. See Section 2613 (d) 4.
Yv fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by eccentricity of shear at
slab-column connections. See Section 2611 (I) 6 A.
1-YJ·
p == ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement.
As/bd.
ph ratio of horizontal shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of ver-
tical section.
Pn ratio of vertical shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of hori-
zontal section.
Pw A,/bwd.
 strength-reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
11 number of identical arms of shearhead.
(b) Shear Strength. [ 11.1] I. Design of cross sections subject to shear shall be
based on
452
( 11-1)
where Vu is factored shear force at section considered and Vn is nominal shear
strength computed by
Vn = Vc + Vs (11-2)
where Vc is nominal shear strength provided by concrete in accordance with Sec-
&'0.7 26ll (d) or Section 2611 (e), and Vs is nominal shear strength provided by
shear reinforcement in accordance with Section 2611 (f) 6. When determining Vn
the effect of openings shall be taken into consideration.
2. In determining shear strength V:, whenever applicable, effects of axial tension
due to creep and shrinkage in restrained members shall be considered and effects of
inclined flexural compression in variable-depth members may be included.
3. The values of jf'; used in this chapter shall not exceed 100 psi.
EXCEPTION: Values of Jt~· greater than 100 psi shall be permitted in com-
puting Vc, V ci and Vcw for reinforced or prestressed concrete beams and concrete joist
construction having minimum web reinforcement equal to f ~./5,000 times, but not
more than three times the amounts required by Section 2611 (f) 5 C, D or E.
4. Maximum factored shear force Vu at supports may be computed in accordance
with Section 2611 (b) 5 or 6 when both of the following conditions are satisfied:
A. Support reaction, in direction of applied shear, introduces compression into
the end regions of member, and
B. No concentrated load occurs between face of support and location of critical
section defined in Section 2611 (b) 5 and 6.
5. Fornonprestressed members, sections located less than a distanced from face
of support may be designed for the same shear Vu as that computed at a distance d.
6. For prestressed members, sections located less than a distance h/2 from face of
support may be designed for the same shear Vu as that computed at a distance h/2.
7. For deep flexural members, brackets and corbels, walls and slabs and foot-
ings, the special provisions of Section 2611 (i) through (I) shall apply.
(c) Lightweight Concrete. [ 11.2] I. Provisions for shear strength V: and tor-
sional moment strength'[,. apply to normal-weight concrete. When lightweight ag-
gregate concrete is used, one of the following modifications shall apply:
A. Whenf,., is specified and concrete is proportioned in accordance with Section
2604 (c), provisions for v;. and '[,. shall be modified by substituting f,,/6.7 for
Jt: but the value oft.,/6.7 shall not exceed /i:..
B. Whenj,., is not specified, all values of Jt; affecting V:, Tc and Mer shall be
multiplied by 0.75 for all-lightweight concrete and 0.85 for sand-lightweight con-
crete. Linear interpolation may be used when partial sand replacement is used.
(d) Shear Strength Provided by Concrete for Nonprestressed Members.
[ 11.3]1. Shear strength Vc shall be computed by provisions of Section 2611 (d) I A
through D unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Section
2611 (d)2.
453
A. For members subject to shear and flexure only,
v, == 2 .JF: h"d (11-3)

B. For members subject to axial compression,
V, == 2 (I + 2,0~0 AJ jF;h~ (11-4)
Quantity NuiAg shall be expressed in psi.

C. For members subject to significant axial tension, shear reinforcement shall
be designed to carry total shear.
D. At sections where factored torsional moment Tu exceeds ¢ (0.5 ./F:2:x2y),
v,. =
(11-5)
[1 + (2.5c,~f]
2. Shear strength Vc may be computed by the more detailed calculation of Sec-
tion 2611 (d) 2 A through C.
A. For members subject to shear and flexure only,
(11-6)
but not greater than 3.5 jF; h"d. Quantity VudiMu shall not be taken greater than
1.0 in computing Vc by Formula ( 11-6), where Mu is factored moment occurring
simultaneously with Vu at section considered.
B. For members subject to axial compression, Formula (I 1-6) may be used to

compute Vc with Mm substituted for Mu and Vud!Mu not then limited to 1.0, where
M = M - N (4h - d) (11-7)
m u u 8
However, Vc shall not be taken greater than
V, = 3.5 ./F: hwd (11-8)
Quantity NuiAg shall be expressed in psi. When Mm as computed by Formula

( 11-7) is negative, Vc shall be computed by Formula ( 11-8).
C. For members subject to significant axial tension,
( 11-9)
where Nu is negative for tension. Quantity NulA~ shall be expressed in psi.

454
(e) Shear Strength Provided by Concrete for Prestressed Members. [ 11.4]

I. For members with effective prestress force not less than 40 percent of the tensile
strength of flexural reinforcement, unless a more detailed calculation is made in
accordance with Section 2611 (e) 2.
v, = ( 0.6)J:. + 700 ~~) h..d (11-10)
but Vc· need not be taken less than 2 JJ:. hwd nor shall V, be taken greater than
5 Jt; hwdorthe value given in Section 2611 (e) 2 D. The quantity V11 d/M11 shall not
be taken greater than 1.0, where Mu is factored moment occurring simultaneously
with Vu at section considered. When applying Formula ( 11-1 0), din the term V11 d/
Mu shall be the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed
reinforcement.
2. Shear strength V, may be computed in accordance with Section 2611 (e) 2 A
and B, where Vc· shall be the lesser of V,; or Vcw·
A. Shear strength Vci shall be computed by
Vc; = 0.6v'f:bwd + Vd + V;Mcr (11-11)

Mmax
but Vc·; need not be taken less than 1.7 JJ: h,..d, where
(11-12)
and values of Mmax and V, shall be computed from the load combination causing
maximum moment to occur at the section.
B. Shear strength V,"' shall be computed by
Vcw = (3.5 JJ:.

+ 0.3J;JC) h,.d + Vp (11-13)
Alternatively, V,w may be computed as the shear force corresponding to dead load
plus live load that results in a principal tensile stress of 4 [f'; at centroidal axis of
member, or at intersection of flange and web when centroidal axis is in the flange.
In composite members, principal tensile stress shall be computed using the cross
section that resists live load.
C. In Formulas ( 11-11) and ( 11-13), d shall be the distance from extreme com-
pression fiber to centroid of prestressed reinforcement or 0.8h, whichever is great-
er.
D. In a pretensioned member in which the section at a distance h/2 from face of
support is closer to end of member than the transfer length of the prestressing ten-
dons, the reduced prestress shall be considered when computing Vcw· This value of
V,.w shall also be taken as the maximum limit for Formula ( 11-1 0). Prestress force
may be assumed to vary linearly from zero at end of tendon to a maximum at a dis-
tance from end of tendon equal to the transfer length, assumed to be 50 diameters
for strand and 100 diameters for single wire.
455
2611 1991 UNII=ORM BUILD\NG CODE
E. In a pretensioned member where bonding of some tendons does not extend to

end of member, a reduced prestress shall be considered when computing Yc· in ac-
cordance with Section 2611 (e) I or 2. Value of Vcw calculated using the reduced
prestress shall also be taken as the maximum limit for Formula ( 11-1 0). Prestress
force due to tendons for which bonding does not extend to end of member may be
assumed to vary linearly from zero at the point at which bonding commences to a
maximum at a distance from this point equal to the transfer length, assumed to be
50 diameters for strand and I 00 diameters for single wire.
(f) Shear Strength Provided by Shear Reinforcement. [ 11.5] I. Types of
shear reinforcement. A. Shear reinforcement may consist of:
(i) Stirrups perpendicular to axis of member.
(ii) Welded wire fabric with wires located perpendicular to axis of member.
B. For nonprestressed members, shear reinforcement may also consist of:
(i) Stirrups making an angle of 45 degrees or more with longitudinal tension
reinforcement.
(ii) Longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion making an angle of 30 de-
grees or more with the longitudinal tension reinforcement.
(iii) Combination of stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement.
(iv) Spirals.
2. Design yield strength of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 60,000 psi.
3. Stirrups and other bars or wires used as shear reinforcement shall extend to a
distanced from extreme compression fiber and shall be anchored at both ends ac-
cording to Section 2612 (n) to develop the design yield strength of reinforcement.
4. Spacing limits for shear reinforcement. A. Spacing of shear reinforcement
placed perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed d/2 in nonprestressed
members and (3/4)h in prestressed members or 24 inches.
B. Inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement shall be so spaced that
every 45-degree line, extending toward the reaction from middepth of member d/2
to longitudinal tension reinforcement, shall be crossed by at least one line of shear
reinforcement.
C. When Vs exceeds 4 ff'c b.,d, maximum spacings given in Section 2611 (f) 4
A and B shall be reduced by one half.
5. Minimum shear reinforcement. A. A minimum area of shear reinforcement
shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural members (prestressed and non-
prestressed) where factored shear force Vu exceeds one half the shear strength pro-
vided by concrete <J>Vc, except:
(i) Slabs and footings.
(ii) Concrete joist construction defined by Section 2608 (I).
(iii) Beams with total depth not greater than 10 inches, two and one halftimes
thickness of flange or one half the width of web, whichever is greater.
B. Minimum shear reinforcement requirements of Section 2611 (f) 5 A may be
waived if shown by test that required nominal flexural and shear strengths can be
456
developed when shear reinforcement is omitted. Such tests shall simulate effects of
differential settlement, creep, shrinkage and temperature change, based on a realis-
tic assessment of such effects occurring in service.
C. Where shear reinforcement is required by Section 2611 (f) 5 A or by analysis,
and where factored torsional moment Tu does not exceed <j>(0.5 JJ:
~2y), mini-
mum area of shear reinforcement for prestressed [except as provided in Section
2611 (f) 5 D] and nonprestressed members shall be computed by
b.,s
A .. =50- (11-14)
/y
where h.,. and s are in inches.
D. For prestressed members with effective prestress force not less than 40 per-
cent of the tensile strength of flexural reinforcement, the area of shear reinforce-
ment shall not be less than the smaller A.. , computed by Formula (11-14) or (11-15 ).
A _ Aps /pu !.._

" - 80 /y d
j d
bw
(ll-15)
E. Where factored torsional moment Tu exceeds <j>(0.5 !f'cYy), and where

web reinforcement is required by Section 2611 (f) 5 A or by analysis, minimum
area of closed stirrups shall be computed by
b.,s
A .. + 2A, =50- (11-16)
/y
6. Design of shear reinforcement. A. Where factored shear force V,, exceeds
shear strength Vc, shear reinforcement shall be provided to satisfy Formulas
( 11-1) and (11-2), where shear strength Vs shall be computed in accordance with
Section 2611 (f) 6 B through H.
B. When shear reinforcement perpendicular to axis of member is used,
Avfyd
Vs = - - (11-17)
S
where A,. is the area of shear reinforcement within a distances.
C. When inclined stirrups are used as shear reinforcement,
Vs = Av/y (sin a+ cos a)d (ll-! 8)

s
D. When shear reinforcement consists of a single bar or a single group of parallel
bars, all bent up at the same distance from the support,
V, = Av/y sin a (11-19)
but not greater than 3 JJ: bwd.

E. When shear reinforcement consists of a series of parallel bent-up bars or
groups of parallel bent-up bars at different distances from the support, shear
strength V, shall be computed by Formula ( 11-18).
457
2611 1991 UNIFOftM BUILDING CODE
F. Only the center three fourths of the inclined portion of any longitudinal bent
bar shall be considered effective for shear reinforcement.
G. Where more than one type of shear reinforcement is used to reinforce the
same portion of a member, shear strength Vs shall be computed as the sum of the V,
values computed for the various types.
H. Shear strength V, shall not be taken greater than 8 j f ~ b...,d.

(g) Combined Shear and Torsion Strength for Nonprestressed Members
with Rectangular or Flanged Sections. [ 11.6]1. Torsion effects shall be included
with shear and flexure where factored torsional moment Tu exceeds <J>(0.5
j f; Yy ). Otherwise, torsion effects may be neglected.
A. For members with rectangular or flanged sections, the sum & 2y shall be tak-
en for the component rectangles of the section, but the overhanging flange width
used in design shall not exceed three times the flange thickness.
B. A rectangular box section may be taken as a solid section, provided wall
thickness his at leastx/4. A box section with wall thickness less thanx/4 but greater
than xll 0 may also be taken as a solid section, except that Yy shall be multiplied
by 4hlx. When his less thanx/10, stiffness of wall shall be considered. Fillets shall
be provided at interior comers of all box sections.
2. If the factored torsional moment Tu in a member is required to maintain equi-
librium, the member shall be designed to carry that torsional moment in accor-
dance with Section 2611 (g) 4 through 10.
3. In a statically indeterminate structure where reduction of torsional moment in
a member can occur due to redistribution of internal forces, maximum factored tor-
sional moment Tu may be reduced to ¢(4 .ffcY-y/3).
A. In such a case, the correspondingly adjusted moments and shears in adjoining
members shall be used in design.
B. In lieu of more exact analysis, torsional loading from a slab shall be taken as
uniformly distributed along the member.
4. Sections located less than a distanced from face of support may be designed
for the same torsional moment Tu as that computed at a distance d.
5. Torsional moment strength. Design of cross sections subject to torsion shall
be based on
(11-20)
Where Tu is factored torsional moment at section considered and Tn is nominal tor-
sional moment strength computed by
(11-21)
where Tc is nominal torsional moment strength provided by concrete in accordance
with Section 2611 (g) 6 and Ts is nominal torsional moment strength provided by
torsion reinforcement in accordance with Section 2611 (g) 9.
458
6. Torsional moment strength provided by concrete. A. Torsional moment

strength T, shall be computed by
o.sjf':Yy
T, = (ll-22\
j I + (~~~:Y
B. For members subject to significant axial tension, torsion reinforcement shall
be designed to carry the total torsional moment, unless a more detailed calculation
is made in which T, is given by Formula ( 11-22) and V, given by Formula ( 11-5)
shall be multiplied by (1 + Nuf500Ax), where Nu is negative for tension.
7. Torsion reinforcement requirements. A. Torsion reinforcement, where re-
quired, shall be provided in addition to reinforcement required to resist shear, flex-
ure and axial forces.
B. Reinforcement required for torsion may be combined with that required for
other forces, provided the area furnished is the sum of individually required areas
and the most restrictive requirements for spacing and placement are met.
C. Torsion reinforcement shall consist of closed stirrups, closed ties or spirals,
combined with longitudinal bars.
D. Design yield strength of torsion reinforcement shall not exceed 60,000 psi.
E. Stirrups and other bars and wires used as torsion reinforcement shall extend to
a distance d from extreme compression fiber and shall be anchored according to
Section 2612 (n) to develop the design yield strength of reinforcement.
F. Torsion reinforcement shall be provided at least a distance (d +b) beyond the
point theoretically required.
8. Spacing limits for torsion reinforcement. A. Spacing of closed stirrups shall
not exceed the smaller of (x 1 + y 1)/4 or 12 inches.
B. Spacing of longitudinal bars, not less than No. 3, distributed around the pe-
rimeter of the closed stirrups, shall not exceed 12 inches. At least one longitudinal
bar shall be placed in each comer of the closed stirrups.
9. Design of torsion reinforcement. A. Where factored torsional moment Tu
exceeds torsional moment strength ci>Tc, torsion reinforcement shall be provided to
satisfy Formulas ( 11-20) and ( 11-21 ), where torsional moment strength T, shall be
computed by
(11-23)
s
where Ar is the area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion within a distance
s, and f1 1 = [0.66 + 0.33 (ydx 1)] but not more than 1.50. Longitudinal bars distrib-
uted around the perimeter of the closed stirrups A1 shall be provided in accordance
with Section 2611 (g) 9 C.
B. A minimum area of closed stirrups shall be provided in accordance with Sec-
tion 2611 (f) 5 E.
C. Required area of longitudinal bars A1 distributed around the perimeter of the
closed stirrups A1 shall be computed by
459
(11-24)
or by
A, = [400xs (
fv.
Tu
T +~
) _ 2A,] (xi +
S
Y1) (11-25)
u 3Cr
whichever is greater. Value of A1 computed by Formula (11-25) need not exceed

that obtained by substituting
50b •.s .,
. .or 2A ,
fy
D. Torsional moment strength Ts shall not exceed 4 7;..
(h) Shear Friction. [11.7] I. Provisions of Section 2611 (h) shall be applied
where it is appropriate to consider shear transfer across a given plane, such as an
existing or potential crack, an interface between dissimilar materials, or an inter-
face between two concretes cast at different times.
2. Design of cross sections subject to shear transfer as described in Section 2611
(h) I shall be based on Formula (Il-l) where Vn is calculated in accordance with
provisions of Section 2611 (h) 3 or 4.
3. A crack shall be assumed to occur along the shear plane considered. Required
area of shear-friction reinforcement Avf across the shear plane may be designed
using either Section 2611 (h) 4 or any other shear transfer design methods that re-
sult in prediction of strength in substantial agreement with results of comprehen-
sive tests. Provisions of Section 2611 (h) 5 through 10 shall apply for all
calculations of shear transfer strength.
4. Shear-friction design methods shall comply with the following:
A. When shear-friction reinforcement is perpendicular to shear plane, shear
strength Vn shall be computed by
Vn = A,ffvfl. (11-26)
where f..l is coefficient of friction in accordance with Section 2611 (h) 4 C.

B. When shear-friction reinforcement is inclined to shear plane such that the
shear force produces tension in shear-friction reinforcement, shear strength Vn
shall be computed by
(11-27)
where a 1 is angle between shear-friction reinforcement and shear plane.

C. Coefficient of friction f..l in Formula (11-26) and Formula ( 11-27) shall be
Concrete placed monolithically 1.4A
Concrete placed against hardened concrete with surface
intentionally roughened as specified in Section 2611 (h) 9 1.0A.
460
Concrete placed against hardened concrete not

intentionally roughened o.6A.
Concrete anchored to as-rolled structural steel
by headed studs or by reinforcing bars
[see Section 2611 (h) 10] 0.7A.
where A= 1.0 for normal-weight concrete, 0.85 for sand-lightweight concrete and
0.75 for all-lightweightconcrete. Linear interpolation may be applied wre\\'PWJ.'!l.
sand replacement is used.
5. Shear strength V" shall not be taken greater than 0.2f'cA· or 800,4, in pounds,
where A,. is area of concrete section resisting shear transfer.
6. Design yield strength of shear-friction reinforcement shall not exceed 60,000
psi.
7. Net tension across shear plane shall be resisted by additional reinforcement.
Permanent net compression across shear plane may be taken as additive to the force
in the shear-friction reinforcement Avth when calculating required Avf·
8. Shear-friction reinforcement shall be appropriately placed along the shear
plane and shall be anchored to develop the specified yield strength on both sides by
embedment, hooks or welding to special devices.
9. For the purpose of Section 2611 (h), when concrete is placed against previous-
ly hardened concrete, the interface for shear transfer shall be clean and free of lai-
tance. lfll is assumed equal to l.OA, interface shall be roughened to a full amplitude
of approximately 1/ 4 inch.
I 0. When shear is transferred between as-rolled steel and concrete using headed
studs or welded reinforcing bars, steel shall be clean and free of paint.
(i) Special Provisions for Deep Flexural Members. [11.8] Provisions of this
section shall apply for members with /11 /d less than 5 that are loaded on one face and
supported on the opposite face so that the compression struts can develop between
the loads and the supports. See also Section 2612 (k) 6.
I. The design of simple supported deep flexural members for shear shall be
based on Formulas (Il-l) and ( 11-2), where shear strength '-"< shall be in accor-
dance with Section 2611 (i) 5 or6, and shear strength Vs shall be in accordance with
Section 2611 (i) 7.
2. The design of continuous deep flexural members for shear shall be based on
Section 2611 (b) through (f), or on methods satisfying equilibrium and strength re-
quirements. In either case, the design shall also satisfy Section 2611 (i) 3, 8 and 9.
3. Shear strength Vn for deep flexural members shall not be taken greater than
8 ./!; h.d when 111 /d is less than 2. When /11 /d is between 2 and 5,
Vn = 32 ( 10 + d
/") Jt-;ch"d (11-28)
4. Critical section for shear measured from face of support shall be taken at a
distance 0.15/" for uniformly loaded beams and 0.50a for beams with concentrated
loads, but not greater than d.
461
5. Unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Section 2611 (i)
6,
v
= 2/J:.b»d (11-29)
6. Shear strength V, may be computed by
Mu ) ( 1.9 •vfc
Vc = (3.5 - 2.5 Vud r;;r Vud ) bwd
+ 2500pw ~ (11-30)
except that the term
3.5 - 2.5 Mu)

( Vud
shall not exceed 2.5, and V, shall not be taken greater than 6 j f ;. bwd· M,. is factored
moment occurring simultaneously with Vu at the critical section defined in Section
2611 (i) 4.
7. Where factored shear force Vu exceeds shear strength V.·, shear reinforce-
ment shall be provided to satisfy Formulas (11-1) and (11-2), where shear strength
V, shall be computed by
V =
'
[A,s ( I +12 iy) + ~
Avh ( 11 -
12
iy )] d
h (11-31)
where A,. is area of shear reinforcement perpendicular to flexural tension reinforce-

ment within a distances, and Avh is area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural
reinforcement within a distance s 2 •
8. Area of shearreinforcementAv shall not be less than 0.0015 bws. and s shall not
exceed d/5 or 18 inches.
9. Area of horizontal shear reinforcement Avh shall not be less than 0.0025 bws 2 ,
and s 2 shall not exceed d/3 or 18 inches.
I 0. Shear reinforcement required at the critical section defined in Section 2611
(i) 4 shall be used throughout the span.
U) Special Provisions for Brackets and Corbels. [ 11.9] I. Provisions of Sec-
tion 2611 U) shall apply to brackets and corbels with a shear span-to-depth ratio aid
not greater than unity, and subject to a horizontal tensile forceNuc not largerthan Vu.
Distance d shall be measured at face of support.
2. Depth at outside edge of bearing area shall not be less than 0.5d.
3. Section at face of support shall be designed to resist simultaneously a shear V11 ,
a moment [Vua + Nuc (h--d)], and a horizontal tensile force Nuc·
A. In all design calculations in accordance with Section 2611 (j), strength reduc-
tion factor shall be taken equal to 0.85.
B. Design of shear-friction reinforcementAv1 to resist shear Vu shall be in accor-
dance with Section 2611 (h).
462
For normal-weight concrete, shear strength Vn shall not be taken greater than
0.2f ~hwd nor 800 hwd in pounds. For all lightweight or sand-lightweight concrete,
shear strength V11 shall not be taken greater than (0.2 = 0.07 a!d)f'chwd or (800- 280
aid) hwd in pounds.
C. Reinforcement A1to resist moment [\I;, a+ Nuc (h-d)] shall be computed in ac-
cordance with Section 2610 (c) and (d).
D. Reinforcement An to resist tensile force Nuc shall be determined from
N,,. ~ <j>A,fy· Tensile force Nuc shall not be taken less than 0.2 Vu unless special pro-
visions are made to avoid tensile forces. Tensile forceNuc shall be regarded as a live
load even when tension results from creep, shrinkage or temperature change.
E. Area of primary tension reinforcement As shall be made equal to the greater of
(Ar + All) or (2A,tl3 + An).
4. Closed stirrups or ties parallel to As, with a total area An not less than 0.5
(A,-An ), shall be uniformly distributed within two thirds of the effective depth ad-
jacent to A.,.
5. Ratio p = Asfhd shall not be less than 0.04 (f :/fy).
6. At front face of bracket or corbel, primary tension reinforcement As shall be
anchored by one of the following: ( 1) by a structural weld to a transverse bar of at
least equal size; weld to be designed to develop specified yield strength,{y of As bars;
(2) by bending primary tension bars As back to form a horizontal loop; or (3) by
some other means of positive anchorage.
7. Bearing area ofload on bracket or corbel shall not project beyond straight por-
tion of primary tension bar A,, or project beyond interior face of transverse anchor
bar (if one is provided).
(k) Special Provisions for Walls. [ 11. 10]1. Design for shear forces perpendicu-
lar to face of wall shall be in accordance with provisions for slabs in Section 2611
(1). Design for horizontal shear forces in plane of wall shall be in accordance with
Section 2611 (k) 2 through 8.
2. Design of horizontal section for shear in plane of wall shall be based on For-
mulas (Il-l) and ( 11-2), where shear strength Vc shall be in accordance with Sec-
tion 2611 (k) 5 or 6 and shear strength V, shall be in accordance with Section 2611
(k) 9.
3. Shear strength V11 at any horizontal section for shear in plane of wall shall not
be taken greater than I 0 j f: hd.
4. For design for horizontal shear forces in plane of wall, d shall be taken equal to
0.8 1,.. A larger value of d, equal to the distance from extreme compression fiber to
center of force of all reinforcement in tension may be used when determined by a
strain compatibility analysis.
5. Unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Section 2611
(k) 6, shear strength Vc shall not be taken greater than 2 j f ;. hd for walls subject to
N, in compression, or V, shall not be taken greater than the value given in Section
2611 (d) 2 C for walls subject to Nu in tension.
463
6. Shear strength Vc may be computed by Formulas (11-32) and (11-33), where

V,. shall be the lesser of Formula (11-32) or (11-33).
Vc = 3.3 }J: hd + Nud (11-32)

4/w
or
_[ j-; lw( 1.25 jF; + 0.2-a)]

Vc - 0.6 Jc + Mu fw hd (11-33)
v;-T
where Nu is negative for tension. When (Mu!Vu -lw/2) is negative, Formula ( 11-33)
shall not apply.
7. Sections located closer to wall base than a distance lw/2 or one half the wall
height, whichever is less, may be designed for the same Vc as that computed at a
distance 1•./2 or one half the height.
8. When factored shear force Vu is less than <J>Vc/2, reinforcement shall be pro-
vided in accordance with Section 2611 (k) 9 or in accordance with Section 2614.
When Vu exceeds <j> Vcf2, wall reinforcement for resisting shear shall be provided in
accordance with Section 2611 (k) 9.
9. Design of shear reinforcement for walls. A. Where factored shear force V,,
exceeds shear strength <J>Vc, horizontal shear reinforcement shall be provided to
satisfy Formulas (Il-l) and ( 11-2), where shear strength V, shall be computed by
Av/yd
V,=-- (11-34)
Sz
where A,. is area of horizontal shear reinforcement within a distance s 2 and distance
dis in accordance with Section 2611 (k) 4. Vertical shear reinforcement shall be
provided in accordance with Section 2611 (k) 9 D.
8. Ratio Ph of horizontal shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of verti-
cal section shall not be less than 0.0025.
C. Spacing of horizontal shear reinforcement s2 shall not exceed lw/5, 3h or I 8
inches.
D. Ratio Pn of vertical shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of hori-
zontal section shall not be less than
Pn = 0.0025 + 0.5 ( 2.5- ~: ) (ph-0.0025) (11-35)
or0.0025, but need not be greater than the required horizontal shear reinforcement.
E. Spacing of vertical shear reinforcement s 1 shall not exceed lw/3, 3h or 18 in-
ches.
(I) Transfer of Moments to Columns. [I I. I 1] 1. When gravity load, wind,
earthquake or other lateral forces cause transfer of moment at connections of fram-
ing elements to columns, the shear resulting from moment transfer shall be consid-
ered in the design of lateral reinforcement in the columns.
464
2. Except for connections not part of a primary seismic load-resisting system

that are restrained on four sides by beams or slabs of approximately equal depth,
connections shall have lateral reinforcement not Jess than that required by Formula
(I I- I4) within the column for a depth not Jess than that ofthe deepest connection of
framing elements to the columns. See also Section 2607 U).
(m) Special Provisions for Slabs and Footings. [ 11.12]1. The shear strength of
slabs and footings in the vicinity of columns, concentrated loads or reactions is
governed by the more severe of two conditions:
A. Beam action where each critical section to be investigated extends in a plane
across the entire width. For beam action the slab or footing shall be designed in ac-
cordance with Section 2611 (b) and (f).
B. Two-way action where each of the critical sections to be investigated shall be
located so that its perimeter, b0 , is a minimum, but need not approach closer than
d/2 to:
(i) Edges or comers of columns, concentrated loads or reaction areas, or
(ii) Changes in slab thickness such as edges of capitals or drop panels, or
(iii) Outer limits of, or changes in, the slab or footing shear reinforcement.
For two-way action, the slab of footing shall be designed in accordance with
Section 261 1(m) 2 through 6.
C. For square or rectangular columns, concentrated loads or reactions areas, the
critical sections may have four straight sides.
2. The design of a slab or footing for two-way action shall be based on Formulas
(1 I -1) and (11-2), V, shall be computed in accordance with Section 2611 (m) 2 A,
2 B or 3 A. Vs shall be computed in accordance with Section 2611 (m) 3. For slabs
with shear heads, Vn shall be in accordance with Section 2611 (m) 4. When moment
is transferred between a slab and a column, Section 2611 (m) 6 shall apply.
A. For nonprestressed slabs and footings, V, shall be the smallest of:
(i) V, = (2 + ;J JJ: b0 d (11-36)
where ~' is the ratio of long side to short side of the column, concentrated load or
reaction area
(ii) Vc = (asd +
bo
2) )J:.bod ( 11-37)
where <Xs is 40 for interior columns, 30 for edge columns and 20 for corner col-
umns, and
(iii) (11-38)
B. At columns of two-way prestressed slabs and footings that meet the require-
ments of Section 2618 (j) 3:
(11-39)
465
I where 1\, is the smallerof3.5 or(asdlho + 1.5}, as is 40forinteriorcolumns, 30 for

edge columns and 20 for corner columns, h0 is perimeter of critical section defined
in Section 2611 (m) I B,_{p" is the average value of_{p" for the two directions, and Vp is
the vertical component of all effective prestress forces crossing the critical section.
V,. may be computed by Formula ( 11-39) if the following are satisfied; otherwise,
Section 2611 (m) 2 A shall apply:
(i) No portion of the column cross section shall be closer to the discontinuous
edge than four times the slab thickness, and
(ii) f ;. in Formula (11-39) shall not be taken greater than 5,000 psi, and
(iii) /pc bin each direction shall not be less than 125 psi, or be taken greater than
500 psi.
3. Shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires is permitted in slabs and foot-
ings in accordance with the following:
A. Vn shall be computed by Formula ( 11-2), where Vc shall not be taken greater
than 2 )J;. h0 d, and the required areaofshearreinforcementAv and V, shall be cal-
culated in accordance with Section 2611 (m) and anchored in accordance with Sec-
tion 2612 (n).
B. V, shall not be taken greater than 6 JJ:. h d.

0
4. Shear reinforcement consisting of steel 1- or channel-shaped sections (shear-

heads) is permitted in slabs. The provisions of Section 2611 (m)4A through I shall
apply where shear due to gravity load is transferred at interior column supports.
Where moment is transferred to columns, Section 2611 (m} 6 C shall apply.
A. Each shearhead shall consist of steel shapes fabricated by welding with a full
penetration weld into identical arms at right angles. Shearhead arms shall not be
interrupted within the column section.
B. A shearhead shall not be deeper than 70 times the web thickness of the steel
shape.
C. The ends of each shearhead arm may be cut at angles not less than 30 degrees
with the horizontal, provided the plastic moment strength of the remaining tapered
section is adequate to resist the shear force attributed to the arm of the shearhead.
D. All compression flanges of steel shapes shall be located within 0.3d of com-
pression surface of slab.
E. The ratio a,. between the stiffness of each shearhead arm and that of the sur-
rounding composite cracked slab section of width (c 2 +d) shall not be less than
0.15.
F. The plastic moment strength Mp required for each arm of the shearhead shall
be computed by
(11-40)
466
:::::
where is the strength-reduction factor for flexure, 11 is the number of arms, and lv !)r
is the minimum length of each shearhead arm required to comply with require-
ments of Section 2611 (m) 4 G and H.
G. The critical slab section for shear shall be perpendicular to the plane of the lii/
slab and shall cross each shearhead arm at three fourths the distance Uv- (c 1,/2)]
from the column face to the end of the shearhead arm. The critical section shall be i~?
~~:,
located so that its perimeter b0 is a minimum, but need not be closer than the perime-
ter defined in Section 2611 (m) I B (i).
H. Vn shall not be taken greater than 4 j f :. b d, 0 on the critical section defined in

Section 2611(m) 4 G. When shearhead reinforcement is provided, Vn shall not be
taken greater than 7 !J: b d,
0 on the critical section defined in Section 2611 (m) I B
(i).
I. A shearhead may be assumed to contribute a moment resistance Mv to each
slab column strip computed by
M.1 = rJ>avVu (/ _5:!_) (11-41)

20 v 2
where is the strength-reduction factor for flexure, n is the number of arms, and/,.
is the length of each shearhead arm actually provided. However, Mv shall not be
taken larger than the smaller of:
(i) Thirty percent of the total factored moment required for each slab column
strip,
(ii) The change in column strip moment over the length lv,
(iii) The value of Mp computed by Formula (11-40).
J. When unbalanced moments are considered, the shearhead must have adequate
anchorage to transmit Mp to column.
5. Opening in slabs. When openings in slabs are located at a distance less than
10 times the slab thickness from a concentrated load or reaction area, or when
openings in flat slabs are located within column strips as defined in Section 2613,
the critical slab sections for shear defined in Section 2611 (m) 1 B and 4 G shall be
modified as follows:
A. For slabs without shearheads, that part of the perimeter of the critical section
that is enclosed by straight lines projecting from the centroid of the column, con-
centrated load or reaction area and tangent to the boundaries of the openings shall
be considered ineffective.
B. For slabs with shearheads, the ineffective portion of the perimeter shall be one
half of that defined in Section 2611 (m) 5 A.
6. Transfer of moment in slab-column connections. A. When gravity load,
wind, earthquake or other lateral forces cause transfer of unbalanced moment, M "'
between a slab and a column, a fraction YfMu of the unbalanced moment shall be
transferred by flexure in accordance with Section 2613 (d) 4. The remainder ofthe
unbalanced moment given by Yv Mu shall be considered to be transferred by eccen-
467
tricity of shear about the centroid of the critical section defined in Section 2611 (m)
I B where:
(11-42)
B. The shear stress resulting from moment transfer by eccentricity of shear shall
be assumed to vary linearly about the centroid of the critical sections defined in
Section 2611 (m) I B. The maximum shear stress due to the factored shear force
and moment shall not exceed <J>vn:
For members without shear reinforcement:
f/Jvn = ¢JV,j(h0 d) (11-43)
where v;. is as defined in Section 2611 (m) 2 A and B.
For members with shear reinforcement other than shearheads:
f/Jvn = r/J(V, = V,)/(h 0 d) (11-44)
where V, and \1, are defined in Section 2611 (m) 3. If shear reinforcement is pro-
vided, the design shall take into account the variation of shear stress around the col-
umn.
C. When shear reinforcement consisting of steel 1- or channel-shaped sections
(shearheads) is provided, the sum of the shear stresses due to vertical load acting on
the critical section defined by Section 2611 (m) 4 G and the shear stresses resulting
from moment transferred by eccentricity of shear about the centroid of the critical
section defined in Section 2611 (m) I B shall not exceed ifJ4 JJ;.
Development and Splices of Reinforcement [Chapter 12]

a depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as defined in Section 2610
(c) 7.
Ah area of an individual bar, square inches.
A, area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, square inches.
A11• total cross-sectional area of transverse reinforcement (stirrup or tie)
within a spacings and perpendicular to plane of bars being spliced or de-
veloped, square inches.
Av area of shear reinforcement within a distances, square inches.
A., area of an individual wire to be developed or spliced, square inches.
b., web width, or diameter of circular section, inches.
forcement, inches.
dh nominal diameter of bar, wire or prestressing strand, inches.
f ;. specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per square inch.
j f :. square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per

square inch.
468
.fc, = average splitting tensile strength of lightweight aggregate concrete,

fr,, stress in prestressed reinforcement at nominal strength, kips per square
inch.
};e = effective stress in prestressed reinforcement (after allowance for all pre-
stress losses), kips per square inch.
!v specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, pounds per
square inch.
h = overall thickness of member, inches.
Ia additional embedment length at support or at point of inflection, inches.
ld development length, inches.
ldh x applicable modification factors.
ldh basic development length, inches.

ldh = development length of standard hook in tension, measured from critical
section to outside end of hook [straight embedment length between criti-
cal section and start of hook (point of tangency) plus radius of bend and
one bar diameter], inches.
t,h X applicable modification factors.
t,h ::: basic development length of standard hook in tension, inches.
Mn nominal moment strength at section, inch-pounds.
= A./y(d- a/2).
if~
N number of bars in a layer being spliced or developed at a critical section. ~
s = spacing of stirrups or ties, inches.
Sw = spacing of wire to be developed or spliced, inches.
~~ ::: factored shear force at section.

ph ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total area of tension reinforce-
:::
ment at section.
(b) Development of Reinforcement-General. [ 12.1] Calculated tension or
compression in reinforcement at each section of reinforced concrete members
shall be developed on each side of that section by embedment length, hook or me-
chanical device, or a combination thereof. Hooks may be used in developing bars
in tension only.
The values of JJ: used in Section 2612 shall not exceed 100 psi. W
(c) Development of Deformed Bars and Deformed Wire in Tension. I. De- ~
~~~~r~:~~E~:,.::~:~?m::~:s:~:r~~~~;:~~it; ~Ei~~i~; I
bu~~"~:s~~ ~~:~:~::~~~:n~~~~:h:~~II be: ~~
No. II bar and smaller and deformed wire o.o4Ant;,J Jr * i~m:
469
No. 14 bar 0.085/y/ Jt: * *

No. 18 bar 0.125/y/ Jt: **
*The constant carries the unit of one/inch.
**The constant carries the unit of inch.
3. To account for bar spacing, amount of cover and enclosing transverse rein-
;j forcement, the basic development length shall be multiplied by a factor from
Section2612 (c) 3 A, B orC which may be modified by Section 2612 (c) 3D and/or
2612 (c) 3 E, but shall not be less than provided by Section 2612 (c) 3 F.
A. For bars satisfying any one of the following conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0
(i) Bars in beams or columns with (I) minimum cover as specified in Section
2607 (h), (2) with transverse reinforcement satisfying tie requirements of
Section 2607 (k) 3 or minimum stirrup requirements of Section 2611 (f)
4 and 5 C along the development length, and (3) with clear spacing of not
less than 3dh.
(ii) Bars in beams or columns with (I) minimum cover as specified in Section
2607 (h), and (2) enclosed within transverse reinforcement Atr, along the
development length satisfying Formula ( 12-1 ).
A > dhsN (12-1)
tr - 40
where dh is the diameter of the bar being developed.
(iii) Bars in the inner layer of slab or wall reinforcement and with clear spacing
of not less than 3dh.
(iv) Any bars with cover of not less than 2dh and with clear spacing of not less
than 3dh.
B. For bars with cover of dh or less or with clear spacing of 2dh or less .. 2.0.
C. For bars not included in Section 2612 (c) 3 A or 3 B .............. 1.4.
D. For No. ll bars and smaller with clear spacing not less than 5dh and with cover
from face of member to edge bar, measured in the plane of the bars, not less than
2.5dh, the factors in Section 2612 (c) 3 A through C may be multiplied by 0.8.
E. For reinforcement enclosed within spiral reinforcement not less than 1/4-inch
diameter and not more than 4 inches pitch, within No. 4 or larger circular ties
spaced at not more than 4 inches on center, or within No.4 or larger ties or stirrups
spaced not more than 4 inches on center and arranged such that alternate bars shall
have support provided by the comer of a tie or hoop with an included angle of not
more than 135 degrees, the factors in Section2612 (c) 3 A through C may be multi-
plied by 0.75.
F. The basic development length multiplied by the applicable factor of Section
2612 (c) A through 3 C with modifiers of Section 2612 (c) 3D and/or E shall not be
taken less than
o.o3dbM Jr
4. Basic development length ldh as modified by Section 2612 (c) 3 shall also be
multiplied by applicable factor or factors for:
470
A. Top reinforcement. Horizontal reinforcement so placed that more than 12

inches of fresh concrete is cast in the member below the development length or
splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
B. Lightweight aggregate concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Or when f., is specified .................................. 6.7 Jt; /f,

but not less than 1.0.
C. Epoxy-coated reinforcement. Bars with cover less than 3dh or clear spacing
between bars less than 6dh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.
All other conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.
The product of the factor for top reinforcement of Section 2612 (c) 4 A and the
factor for epoxy-coated reinforcement of this section need not be taken greater than
1.7.
5. Excess reinforcement. Development length may be reduced where rein-
forcement in a flexural member is in excess of that required by analysis except
where anchorage or development for /y is specifically required or the reinforce-
ment is designed under provisions of Section 2625 (c) 1 E . . . . [(A, required)/
(A, provided)]
(d) Development of Deformed Bars in Compression. [12.3] Development
length ld, in inches, for deformed bars in compression shall be computed as the
product of the basic development length and applicable modification factors as de-
fined in this section, but ld shall not be less than 8 inches.
Basic development length shall be .................... 0.02d,fy! j f;

but not less than ...................................... 0.0003dt/y
Basic development length may be multiplied by applicable factors for:
Reinforcement in excess of that required
by analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (A, required)/(As provided)
Reinforcement enclosed within spiral reinforcement not less
than 1/ 4-inch diameter and not more than 4-inch pitch
or within No. 4 ties in conformance with Section 2607
(k) 3 and spaced not more than 4 inches on center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75
(e) Development of Bundled Bars. [ 12.4] Development length of individual
bars within a bundle, in tension or compression, shall be that for the individual bar,
increased 20 percent for 3-bar bundle, and 33 percent for 4-bar bundle.
For determining the appropriate factors in Section 2612 (c) 3 and 4 C, a unit of
bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar of a diameter derived from the equiva-
lent total area.
(f) Development of Standard Hooks in Tension. [ 12.5]1. Development length
ldhin inches for deformed bars in tension terminating in a standard hook shall be
computed as the product of the basic development length lhh of Section 2612 (f) 2
and the applicable modification factor or factors of Section 2612 (f) 3, but ldh shall
not be less than Sdh or less than 6 inches.
471
2. Basic development length lhh for a hooked bar with/y equal to 60,000 psi shall
be ................................................. 1,200 4,/ JJ:.
3. Basic development length lhh shall be multiplied by applicable factor or fac-
tors for:
A. Bar yield strength. Bars with/y other than 60,000 psi . . . . . . . . /y/60,000
B. Concrete cover. For No. II bar and smaller, side cover (normal to plane of
hook) but not less than 2 1h inches; for 90-degree hook, cover on bar extension be-
yond hook not less than 2 inches for No.6 bar and larger and 1 1!2 inches cover for
No.5 bar and smaller ........................................... 0.7
C. Ties or stirrups. For No. 11 bar and smaller, hook enclosed vertically or hori-
zontally within ties or stirrup ties spaced along the full development length ldh not
greater than 3dh, where dh is diameter of hooked bar .................. 0.8
D. Excessive reinforcement. Where anchorage or development for,{y is not spe-
cifically required, reinforcement in excess of that required by
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (As required)/(As provided)
E. Lightweight aggregate concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
4. For bars being developed by a standard hook at discontinuous ends of mem-
bers with side cover and top (or bottom) cover over hook less than 2 1h inches,
hooked bar shall be enclosed within ties or stirrups spaced along the full develop-
ment length ldh not greater than 34,, where dv is diameter of hooked bar. For this
case, factor of Section 2612 (f) shall not apply.
5. Hooks shall not be considered effective in developing bars in compression.
(g) Mechanical Anchorage. [ 12.6] Any mechanical device capable of develop-
ing the strength of reinforcement without damage to concrete may be used as an-
chorage.
Test results showing adequacy of such mechanical devices shall be presented to
Development of reinforcement may consist of a combination of mechanical an-
chorage plus additional embedment length of reinforcement between the point of
maximum bar stress and the mechanical anchorage.
(h) Development of Welded Deformed Wire Fabric in Tension. [12. 7] Devel-
opment length ld, in inches, of welded deformed wire fabric measured from point of
critical section to end of wire shall be computed as the product of either of the basic
development lengths noted in this section and applicable modification factor or
factors of Section 2612 (c), but ld shall not be less than 8 inches except in computa-
tion of lap splices by Section 2612 (s) and development of web reinforcement by
Section 2612 (n).
Basic development length of welded deformed wire fabric, with at least one
cross wire within the development length not less than 2 inches from point of criti-
cal section, shall be
0.03dhif.v - 20, 000)/ JJ~ *

*The 20,000 has units of psi.
472
but not less than
0.20 Aw /y
Sw JF:
Basic development length of welded deformed wire fabric, with no cross wires
within the development length, shall be determined as for deformed wire.
(i) Development of Welded Smooth Wire Fabric in Tension. [12.8] Yield
strength of welded smooth wire fabric shall be considered developed by embed-
ment of two cross wires with the closer cross wire not less than 2 inches from point
of critical section. However, development length ld measured from point of critical
section to outermost cross wire shall not be less than
0.27 Aw fv
Sw Jt:
modified by (As required)/(As provided) for reinforcement in excess of that re-
quired by analysis and by factor of Section 2612 (c) for lightweight aggregate con-
crete, but ld shall not be less than 6 inches except in computation of lap splices by
Section 2612 (t).
(j) Development of Prestressing Strand. [ 12.9] Three- or seven-wire preten-
sioning strand shall be bonded beyond the critical section for a development
length, in inches, not less than
(/ps - ~ fse) db i"

t Expression in parentheses used as a constant without units.
where dh is strand diameter in inches, and/ps andf,, are expressed in kips per square
inch.
Investigation may be limited to cross sections nearest each end of the member
that are required to develop full design strength under specified factored loads.
Where bonding of a strand does not extend to end of member, and design in-
cludes tension at service load in precompressed tensile zone as permitted by Sec-
tion 2618 (e) 2, development length specified above shall be doubled.
(k) Development of Flexural Reinforcement-General. [ 12.10] I. Tension
reinforcement may be developed by bending across the web to be anchored or
made continuous with reinforcement on the opposite face of member.
2. Critical sections for development of reinforcement in flexural members are at
points of maximum stress and at points within the span where adjacent reinforce-
ment terminates or is bent. Provisions of Section 2612 (I) 3 must be satisfied.
3. Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point at which it is no longer required
to resist flexure for a distance equal to the effective depth of member or 12dh,
whichever is greater, except at supports of simple spans and at free end of cantile-
vers.
4. Continuing reinforcement shall have an embedment length not less than the
development length ld beyond the point where bent or terminated tension rein-
forcement is no longer required to resist flexure.
473
5. Flexural reinforcement shall not be terminated in a tension zone unless one of

the following conditions is satisfied:
A. Shear at the cutoff point does not exceed two thirds that permitted, including
shear strength of shear reinforcement provided.
B. Stirrup area in excess of that required for shear and torsion is provided along
each terminated bar or wire over a distance from the termination point equal to
three fourths the effective depth of member. Excess stirrup area Av shall not be less
than 60/J,.s/.{y. Spacings shall notexceedd/8~b where ~b is the ratio of area of rein-
forcement cut off to total area of tension reinforcement at the section.
C. For No. 11 bar and smaller, continuing reinforcement provides double the
area required for flexure at the cutoff point and shear does not exceed three fourths
that permitted.
6. Adequate end anchorage shall be provided for tension reinforcement in flexu-
ral members where reinforcement stress is not directly proportional to moment,
such as sloped, stepped or tapered footings, brackets, deep flexural members, or
members in which tension reinforcement is not parallel to compression face.
(I) Development of Positive Moment Reinforcement. [ 12.11]1. At least one
third the positive moment reinforcement in simple members and one fourth the
positive moment reinforcement in continuous members shall extend along the
same face of member into the support. In beams, such reinforcement shall extend
into the support at least 6 inches.
2. When a flexural member is part of a primary lateral load-resisting system,
positive moment reinforcement required to be extended into the support by Section
2612 (I) 1 shall be anchored to develop the specified yield strength/y in tension at
the face of support.
3. At simple supports and at points of inflection, positive moment tension rein-
forcement shall be limited to a diameter such that ld computed for h by Section
2612 (c) satisfies Formula (12-2), except Formula (12-2) need not be satisfied for
reinforcement terminating beyond center line of simple supports by a standard
hook or a mechanical anchorage at least equivalent to a standard hook.
(12-2)
WHERE:
Mn nominal strength assuming all reinforcement at the section to be stressed
to the specified yield strength/y.
Vu factored shear force at the section.
la at a support shall be the embedment length beyond center of support.
la == at a point of inflection shall be limited to the effective depth or member
of 12d,, whichever is greater.
Value of Mn!Vu may be increased 30 percent when the ends of reinforcement are
confined by a compressive reaction.
(m) Development of Negative Moment Reinforcement. [12.12] Negative
moment reinforcement in a continuous, restrained or cantilever member, or in any
474
member of a rigid frame, shall be anchored in or through the supporting member by

embedment length, hooks or mechanical anchorage.
Negative moment reinforcement shall have an embedment length into the span
as required by Section 2612 (b) and (k) 3.
At \east one third the total tension reinforcement provided for negative moment
at a support shall have an embedment length beyond the point of inflection not less
than effective depth of member, 12dh, or 1ft 6 the clear span, whichever is greater.
(n) Development of Web Reinforcement. [ 12.13] Web reinforcement shall be
carried as close to compression and tension surfaces of member as cover require-
ments and proximity of other reinforcement will permit.
Ends of single leg, simple U- or multiple U-stirrups shall be anchored by one of
the following means:
40,rn;;~~o~;l~:~,a;~t~:da~i:~;:~ ~:~~e;;~:~J~~~;~~~i:a~~~i~~;;~e':~~
1 1
of ·.,t.,•...··':··'•,•...··''·..·•
2. For Nos. 6, 7 and 8 stirrups with.fv greater than 40,000 psi, a standard stirrup
hook around a longitudinal bar plus an embedment between midheight of the mem-
ber and the outside end of the hook equal to or greater than 0.014 dt/y f :.j
3. For each leg of welded smooth wire fabric forming simple U -stirrups, either:
A. Two longitudinal wires spaced at a 2-inch spacing along the member at the top
of the U.
B. One longitudinal wire located not more than d/4 from the compression face
and a second wire closer to the compression face and spaced not less than 2 inches
from the first wire. The second wire may be located on the stirrup leg beyond a
bend, or on a bend with an inside diameter of bend not less than 8dh.
Between anchored ends, each bend in the continuous portion of a simple U -stir-
rup or multiple U-stirrups shall enclose a longitudinal bar.
Longitudinal bars bent to act as shear reinforcement, if extended into a region of
tension, shall be continuous with longitudinal reinforcement and, if extended into a
region of compression, shall be anchored beyond middepth d/2 as specified for de-
velopment length in Section 2612 (c) for that part of/y required to satisfy Formula
(11-19).
Pairs of U-stirrups or ties so placed as to form a closed unit shall be considered
properly spliced when lengths oflaps are 1.3ld. In members at least 18 inches deep,
such splices with At/y not more than 9,000 pounds per leg may be considered ade-
quate if stirrup legs extend the full available depth of member.
4. For each end of a single-leg stirrup of welded smooth or deformed wire fabric,
two longitudinal wires at a minimum spacing of2 inches and with the inner wire at
least the greater of d/4 or 2 inches from middepth of member d/2. Outer longitudi-
nal wire at tension face shall not be farther from the face than the portion of primary
flexural reinforcement closest to the face.
(o) Splices of Reinforcement. [ 12.14] 1. General. Splices of reinforcement
shall be made only as required or permitted on approved plans or specifications, or
as authorized by the building official.
475
2. Lap splices. A. Lap splices shall not be used for bars larger than No. II, ex-
cept as provided in Sections 2612 (q) I and 2615 (i) 2 C.
B. Lap splices of bars in a bundle shall be based on the lap splice length required
farindh·idual bars within the bundle, in accordance with Section 2612 (e). Individ-
ual bar splices within a bundle shall not overlap. Entire bundles shall not be lap
spliced.
C. Bars spliced by noncontact lap splices in flexural members shall not be spaced
transversely farther apart than one fifth the required lap splice length, or 6 inches.
3. Welded splices and mechanical connections. A. Welded splices and other
mechanical connections may be used.
B. Except as provided in this code, all welding shall conform to U.B.C. Standard
No. 26-8.
C. A full-welded splice shall have bars butted and welded to develop in tension at
least 125 percent of specified yield strength.f;, of the bar.
D. A full mechanical connection shall develop in tension or compression, as re-
quired, at least 125 percent of specified yield strength.f;, of the bar.
E. Welded splices and mechanical connections not meeting requirements of
Section 2612 (o) 3 CorD may be used in accordance with Section 2612 (p) 4.
(p) Splices of Deformed Bars and Deformed Wire in Tension. [ 12.15] 1.
Minimum length of lap for tension lap splices shall be as required for Class A orB
splice, but not less than 12 inches, where:
Class A splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.Old
Class B splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3/d
where ld is the tensile development length for the specified yield strength.f;, in ac-
cordance with Section 2612 (c) without the modification factor of Section 2612 (c)
5.
2. Lap splices of deformed bars and deformed wire in tension shall be Class B
splices except that Class A splices may be used when ( 1) the area of reinforcement
provided is at least twice that required by analysis over the entire length of the
splice, and (2) one half or less of the total reinforcement is spliced within the re-
quired lap length.
3. Welded splices or mechanical connections used where area of reinforcement
provided is less than twice that required by analysis shall meet requirements of
Section 2612 (o) 3 C and D.
4. Welded splices or mechanical connections used where area of reinforcement
provided is at least twice that required by analysis shall meet the following:
A. Splices shall be staggered at least 24 inches and in such manner as to develop
at every section at least twice the calculated tensile force at that section but not less
than 20,000 psi for total area of reinforcement provided.
B. In computing tensile force developed at each section, spliced reinforcement
may be rated at the specified splice strength. Unspliced reinforcement shall be
rated at that fraction of J;, defined by the ratio of the shorter actual development
length to ld required to develop the specified yield strength.f;,.
476
C. Splices in "tension tie members" shall be made with a full-welded splice or

full mechanical connection in accordance with Section 2612 (o) 3 C and D and
splices in adjacent bar shall be staggered at least 30 inches.
\q) Sp\\ces of Deformed Bars in Compression. [12.16]1. Lap splice. Com-
pression lap splice length shall be 0.0005 ,[yd, for /y of 60,000 psi or less, or (0.0009
j;.- 24) d, for fv greater than 60,000 psi, but not Jess than 12 inches. ForJ: less than
3,000 psi, length of lap shall be increased by one third.
Where bars of different size are lap spliced in compression, splice length shall be
the larger of: development length of larger bar, or splice length of smaller bar. Bar
sizes Nos. 14 and 18 may be lap spliced to No. 11 and smaller bars.
In tied reinforced compression members, where ties throughout the lap splice
length have an effective area not Jess than 0.0015hs, lap splice length may be multi-
plied by 0.83, but lap length shall not be less than 12 inches. Tie legs perpendicular
to dimension h shall be used in determining effective area.
In spirally reinforced compression members, lap splice length of bars within a
spiral may be multiplied by 0.75, but lap length shall not be less than 12 inches.
2. End-bearing splices. In bars required for compression only, compressive
stress may be transmitted by bearing of square cut ends held in concentric contact
by a suitable device.
Bar ends shall terminate in flat surfaces within 11h degrees of a right angle to the
axis of the bars and shall be fitted within 3 degrees of full bearing after assembly.
End-bearing splices shall be used only in members containing closed ties, closed
stirrups or spirals.
3. Welded splices. Welded splices or mechanical connections used in compres-
sion shall meet requirements of Section 2612 (o) 3 C and D.
(r) Special Splice Requirements for Columns. [12.17] 1. Lap splices, butt
welded splices, mechanical connections or end-bearing splices shall be used with
the limitations of Section 2612 (r) 2 through 4. A splice shall satisfy requirements
for all load combinations for the column.
2. Bar stress. A. Where the bar stress due to factored loads is compressive, lap
splices shall conform to Section 2612 (q) I and 2, and where applicable, to Section
2612 (r) 2 D or E.
B. Where the bar stress due to factored loads is tensile and does not exceed 0.5/v
in tension, lap splices shall be Class B tension lap splices if more than one half of the
bars are spliced at any section, or Class A tension lap splices if one half or fewer of
the bars are spliced at any section and alternate lap splices are staggered by IJ.
C. Where the bar stress due to factored loads is greater than 0.5.f, in tension, lap
splices shall be Class B tension lap splices.
D. Where factored load stress in longitudinal bars in a column, calculated for any
loading combination, exceeds one-half/yin tension, lap splices designed to devel-
op the specified yield strength{y in tension, or full-welded splices or full mechani-
cal connections in accordance with Section 26123 (o) 3 C and D.
477
E. At horizontal cross sections of columns where splices are located, a minimum

tensile strength in each face of the column equal to one fourth the area of vertical
reinforcement in that face multiplied by J; shall be provided.
3. Welded splices or mechanical connectors in columns. Welded splices or
mechanical connectors in columns shall meet the requirements of Section 2612 (o)
3 Cor D.
4. End-bearing splices in columns. End-bearing splices complying with Sec-
tion 2612 (q) 4 may be used for column bars stressed in compression provided the
splices are staggered or additional bars are provided at splice locations. The contin-
uing bars in each face of the column shall have a tensile strength, based on the spe-
cified yield strength J;, not less than 0.2/y times the area of the vertical
reinforcement in that face.
(s) Splices of Welded Deformed Wire Fabric in Tension. [12.18] Minimum
length of lap for lap splices of welded deformed wire fabric measured between the
ends of each fabric sheet shall not be less than 1.7/d or 8 inches, and the overlap
measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet shall not be less than
2 inches, ld shall be the development length for the specified yield strength/y in ac-
cordance with Section 2612 (h).
Lap splices of welded deformed wire fabric, with no cross wires within the lap
splice length, shall be determined as for deformed wire.
(t) Splices of Welded Smooth Wire Fabric in Tension. [ 12.19] Minimum
length of lap for lap splices of welded smooth wire fabric shall be in accordance
with the following:
I. When area of reinforcement provided is less than twice that required by analy-
sis at splice location, length of overlap measured between outermost cross wires of
each fabric sheet shall not be less than one spacing of cross wires plus 2 inches, or
less than 1.5/J, or 6 inches, ld shall be the development length for the specified yield
strength.!;. in accordance with Section 2612 (i).
2. When area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that required by analysis
at splice location, length of overlap measured between outermost cross wires of
each fabric sheet shall not be less than 1.5/J, or 2 inches, ld shall be the development
length for the specified yield strength/yin accordance with Section 2612 (i).
Slab Systems with Multiple Square or Rectangular Panels

[Chapter 13]
Sec. 2613. (a) Notations. [ 13.0]
c 1 = size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket
measured in the direction of the span for which moments are being deter-
••••• mined, inches.
c2 size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital or bracket
measured transverse to the direction of the span for which moments are
being determined, inches.
C cross-sectional constant to define torsional properties. See Formula
( 13-7).
478

forcement, inches.
E,h modulus of elasticity of beam concrete.
£,, modulus of elasticity of column concrete.
E.., modulus of elasticity of slab concrete.
k overall thickness of member, inches.
h moment of inertia about centroidal axis of gross section of beam as de-
fined in Section 2613 (c) 4.
1,. moment of inertia of gross section of column.
f, moment of inertia about centroidal axis of gross section of slab.
h3/12 times width of slab defined in notations a and ~1 •
Kh flexural stiffness of beam; moment per unit rotation.
K, flexural stiffness of column; moment per unit rotation.
Kec flexural stiffness of equivalent column; moment per unit rotation. See
Formula (13-6).
K, flexural stiffness of slab; moment per unit rotation.
l<t torsional stiffness of torsional member; moment per unit rotation.
ln length of clear span in direction that moments are being determined,
measured face to face of supports.
/1 length of span in direction that moments are being determined, mea-
sured center to center of supports.
12 length of span transverse to I 1. measured center to center of supports. See
also Section 2613 (h) 2 C and D.
M, total factored static moment.
Wu factored load per unit area.
w" factored dead load per unit area.
w1 factored live load per unit area.
x shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section.
y longer overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section.
a ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width
of slab bounded laterally by center lines of adjacent panels (if any) on
each side of the beam.
EcJh
EcJs
a. ratio of flexural stiffness of columns above and below the slab to com-
bined flexural stiffness of the slabs and beams at a joint taken in the di-
rection of the span for which moments are being determined.
~K,
479
Cl.nin minimum a, to satisfy Section 2613 (h) I 0 A.

a1 a in direction of /1.
a2 a in direction of '2·
~a ratio of dead load per unit area to live load per unit area (in each case
without load factors).
~~ ratio of torsional stiffness of edge beam section to flexural stiffness of a
width of slab equal to span length of beam, center to center of supports.
E,hc
2£c/,
6, factor defined by Formula ( 13-5). See Section 2613 (h) I 0.
Yt fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure at slab-column
connections. See Section 2613 (d) 6.
(b) Scope. [ 13.1]1. The provisions of this section shall apply for design of slab
systems reinforced for flexure in more than one direction with or without beams
between supports.
2. A slab system may be supported on columns or walls. If supported by columns
the dimensions c 1 and c2 and the clear span ln shall be based on an effective support
area defined by the intersection of the bottom surface of the slab, or the drop panel if
present, with the largest right circular cone, right pyramid, or tapered wedge whose
surfaces are located within the column and capital or bracket and are oriented no
greater than 45 degrees to the axis of the column.
3. Solid slabs and slabs with recesses or pockets made by permanent or remov-
able fillers between ribs or joists in two directions are included within the scope of
this section.
4. Minimum thickness of slabs designed in accordance with this section shall be
as required by Section 2609 (f) 3.
(c) Definitions. [ 13.2]1. Column strip is a design strip with a width on each side
of a column center line equal to 0.25/2 or 0.25/~o whichever is less. Column strip
includes beams, if any.
2. Middle strip is a design strip bounded by two column strips.
3. A panel is bounded by column, beam or wall center lines on all sides.
4. For monolithic or fully composite construction, a beam includes that portion
of slab on each side of the beam extending a distance equal to the projection of the
beam above or below the slab, whichever is greater, but not greater than four times
the slab thickness.
(d) Design Procedures. [ 13.3]1. A slab system may be designed by any proce-
dure satisfying conditions of equilibrium and geometric compatibility if shown
that the design strength at every section is at least equal to the required strength con-
sidering Section 2609 (c) and (d) and that all serviceability conditions, including
specified limits on deflections, are met.
A. For gravity loads, a slab system, including the slab and beams (if any) be-
tween supports and supporting columns or walls forming orthogonal frames, may
480
be designed by either the direct design method of Section 2613 (h) or the equivalent
frame method of Section 2613 (i).
B. For lateral loads, analysis ofunbraced frames shall take into account effects
of cracking and reinforcement on stiffness of frame members.
C. Results of the gravity load analysis may be combined with results of the later-
al load analysis.
2. A slab system, including the slab and beams (if any) between supports, and
supporting columns or walls may be designed by either the direct design method
[Section 2613 (h)] or the equivalent frame method [Section 2613 (i)].
3. The slab and beams (if any) between supports shall be proportioned for fac-
tored moments prevailing at every section.
4. When gravity load, wind, earthquake or other lateral forces cause transfer of
moment between slab and column, a fraction of the unbalanced moment shall be
transferred by flexure in accordance with Section 2613 (d) 5.
The fraction of unbalanced moment not transferred by flexure shall be trans-
ferred by eccentricity of shear in accordance with Section 2611 (1).
5. A fraction of the unbalanced moment given by YtMu shall be considered to be IIi
transferred by flexure within an effective slab width between lines that are one and
one-half slab or drop panel thickness (1.5h) outside opposite faces of the column or
capital, where Mu is the moment to be transferred and
I
( 13-1)
Concentration of reinforcement over the column by closer spacing or additional

reinforcement may be used to resist moment on the effective slab width.
6. Design for transfer of load from slab to supporting columns or walls through
shear and torsion shall be in accordance with Section 2611.
(e) Slab Reinforcement. [13.4]1. Area of reinforcement in each direction for
two-way slab systems shall be determined from moments at critical sections but
shall not be less than required by Section 2607 (m).
Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall not exceed two times the slab
thickness, except for portions of slab area that may be of cellular or ribbed con-
struction. In the slab over cellular spaces, reinforcement shall be provided as re-
quired by Section 2607 (m).
2. Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall
extend to the edge of slab and have embedment, straight or hooked, at least 6 inches
in spandrel beams, columns or walls.
3. Negative moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall
be bent, hooked or otherwise anchored, in spandrel beams, columns or walls, to be
developed at face of support according to provisions of Section 2612.
4. Where a slab is not supported by a spandrel beam or wall at a discontinuous
edge or where a slab cantilevers beyond the support, anchorage of reinforcement
may be within the slab.
481
5. In slabs with beams between supports with a value of a greater than 1.0, spe-
cial top and bottom slab reinforcement shall be provided at exterior comers in ac-
cordance with the following:
A. The special reinforcement in both top and bottom of slab shall be sufficient to
resist a moment equal to the maximum positive moment (per foot of width) in the
slab.
B. Direction of moment shall be assumed parallel to the diagonal from the corner
in the top of the slab and perpendicular to the diagonal in the bottom of the slab.
C. The special reinforcement shall be provided for a distance in each direction
from the corner equal to one fifth the longer span.
D. In either the top or bottom of the slab, the special reinforcement may be placed
in a single band in the direction of the moment or in two bands parallel to the sides
of the slab.
6. Where a drop panel is used to reduce amount of negative moment reinforce-
ment over the column of a flat slab, size of drop panel shall be in accordance with
the following:
A. Drop panel shall extend in each direction from center line of support a dis-
tance not less than one sixth the span length measured from center to center of sup-
ports in that direction.
B. Projection of drop panel below the slab shall be at least one fourth the slab
thickness beyond the drop.
C. In computing required slab reinforcement, thickness of drop panel below the
slab shall not be assumed greater than one fourth the distance from edge of drop
panel to edge of column or column capital.
(f) Details of Reinforcement in Slabs without Beams. In addition to the other
requirements of Section 2613 (e), reinforcement in slabs without beams shall have
minimum extensions as prescribed in Figure No. 26-1.
Where adjacent spans are unequal, extension of negative moment reinforcement
beyond the face of support as prescribed in Figure No. 26-1 shall be based on re-
quirements of longer span.
Bent bars may be used only when depth-span ratio permits use of bends 45 de-
grees or less.
For slabs in frames not braced against sidesway, lengths of reinforcement shall
be determined by analysis but shall not be less than those prescribed in Figure No.
26-l.
At least two of the column strip bottom bars or wires in each direction shall be
continuous or spliced at the support with Class A splices or anchored within sup-
port. These bars shall pass through the column and shall be placed within the col-
umn core.
(g) Openings in Slab Systems. [ 13.5] 1. Openings of any size may be provided
in slab systems if shown by analysis that the design strength is at least equal to the
required strength considering Section 2609 (c) and (d), and that all serviceability
conditions, including the specified limits on deflections, are met.
482
2. In lieu of special analysis as required by Section 2613 (g) 1, openings may be

provided in slab systems without beams when in accordance with the following:
A. Openings of any size may be located in the area common to intersecting
middle strips, provided total amount of reinforcement required for the pane\ with-
out the opening is maintained.
B. In the area common to intersecting column strips, not more than one eighth
rhe width of column strip in either span shall be interrupted by openings. An
.atJWJJnt ofreinforcement equivalent to that interrupted by an opening shall be add-
ed on the sides of the opening.
C. In the area common to one column strip and one middle strip, not more than
one fourth the reinforcement in either strip shall be interrupted by openings. An
amount of reinforcement equivalent to that interrupted by an opening shall be add-
ed on the sides of the opening.
D. Shear requirements of Section 2611 (m) 5 shall be satisfied.
(h) Direct Design Method. [ 13.6]1. Slab systems within the following limita-
tions may be designed by the direct design method:
A. There shall be a minimum of three continuous spans in each direction.
B. Panels shall be rectangular with a ratio oflongerto shorter span center-to-cen-
ter supports within a panel not greater than 2.
C. Successive span lengths center-to-center supports in each direction shall not
differ by more than one third the longer span.
D. Columns may be offset a maximum of 10 percent of the span (in direction of
offset) from either axis between center lines of successive columns.
E. All loads shall be due to gravity only and uniformly distributed over an entire
panel. Live load shall not exceed three times dead load.
F. For a panel with beams between supports on all sides, the relative stiffness of
beams in two perpendicular directions
2
a1/2
(13-2)
2
a2/1
shall not be less than 0.2 or greater than 5.0.

G. Moment redistribution as permitted by Section 2608 (e) shall not be applied
for slab systems designed by the direct design method. See Section 2613 (h) 7.
H. Variations from the limitations of this section may be considered acceptable if
demonstrated by analysis that requirements of Section 2613 (d) 1 are satisfied.
2. Total factored static moment for a span. A. Total factored static moment for
a span shall be determined in a strip bounded laterally by center line of panel on
each side of center line of supports.
B. Absolute sum of positive and average negative factored moments in each di-
rection shall not be less than
(13-3)
483
C. Where the transverse span of panels on either side of the center line of sup-
ports varies, /2 in Formula (13-3) shall be taken as the average of adjacent trans-
verse spans.
D. When the span adjacent and parallel to an edge is being considered, th.e dis-
tance from edge to panel center line shall be substituted for /2 in Formula ( 13-3).
E. Clear span ln shall extend from face to face of columns, capitals, brackets or
walls. Value of In used in Formula (13-3) shall not be less than 0.65/ 1• Circular or
regular polygon-shaped supports shall be treated as square supports with the same
area.
3. Negative and positive factored moments. Negative factored moments shall
be located at face of rectangular supports. Circular or regular polygon-shaped sup-
ports shall be treated as square supports with the same area.
In an interior span, total static moment M, shall be distributed as follows:
Negative factored moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.65
Positive factored moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.35
In an end span, total factored static moment M 0 shall be distributed as follows:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Slab Without Beams
Exterior Slab with Between Interior Supports
Edge Beams Without With Exterior Edge
Re!'::~rned
Unre- Between All Edge Edge
strained Supports Beam Beam
Interior negative
factored moment 0.75 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.65
Positive factored
moment 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.50 0.35
Exterior negative
factored moment 0 0.16 0.26 0.30 0.65
Negative moment sections shall be designed to resist the larger of the two in-
terior negative factored moments determined for spans framing into a common
support unless an analysis is made to distribute the unbalanced moment in accor-
dance with stiffness of adjoining elements.
Edge beams or edges of slab shall be proportioned to resist in torsion their share
of exterior negative factored moments.
For moment transfer between slab and an edge column in accordance with Sec-
tion 2613 (d) 4, column strip nominal moment strength provided shall be used as
the transfer moment for gravity load.
4. Factored moments in column strips. Column strips shall be proportioned to
resist the following percentage of interior negative factored moments:
,2,1 0.5 1.0 2.0
(ailz!II) = 0 75 75 75
(a 1l/l 1);;. 1.0 90 75 45
Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.

484
Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the following percentage of exteri-

or negative factored moments:
12111 0.5 1.0 2.0
{3, =0 100 100 100

(a1/2/i1) =0
{3,;;;, 2.5 75 75 75
{3, =0 100 100 100
(aN/ 1);,1.0
{3,;;;, 2.5 90 75 45
Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.

Where supports consist of columns or walls extending for a distance equal to or
greater than three fourths the span length /2 used to computeM0 , negative moments
shall be considered to be uniformly distributed across /2 •
Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the following percentage of posi-
tive factored moments:
1211 0.5 1.0 2.0
(a1lil1) = 0 60 60 60
(al/2/11);;;, 1.0 90 75 45
Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown:

For slabs with beams between supports, the slab portion of column strips shall be
proportioned to resist that portion of column strip moments not resisted by beams.
5. Factored moments in beams. Beams between supports shall be propor-
tioned to resist 85 percent of column strip moments if (a 1/ 2/ / 1) is equal to or greater
than 1.0. For values of (a 1/ 2/ / 1) between 1.0 and zero, proportion of column strip
moments resisted by beams shall be obtained by linear interpolation between 85
and zero percent. In addition to moments calculated for uniform loads according to
Section 2613 (h) 2 B and this paragraph, beams shall be proportioned to resist all
moments caused by concentrated or linear loads applied directly to beams, includ-
ing weight of projecting beam stem above or below the slab.
6. Factored moments in middle strips. That portion of negative and positive
factored moments not resisted by column strips shall be proportionately assigned
to corresponding half middle strips. Each middle strip shall be proportioned tore-
sist the sum of the moments assigned to its two half middle strips. A middle strip
adjacent to and parallel with an edge supported by a wall shall be proportioned to
resist twice the moment assigned to the half middle strip corresponding to the first
row of interior supports.
7. Modification of factored moments. Negative and positive factored mo-
ments may be modified by 10 percent, provided the total static moment for a panel
in the direction considered is not less than that required by Formula (13-3).
8. Factored shear in slab systems with beams. Beams with (a 1/ 2/l I) equal to or
greater than 1.0 shall be proportioned to resist shear caused by factored loads on
485
tributary areas bounded by 45-degree lines drawn from the comers of the panels
and the center lines of the adjacent panels parallel to the long sides.
Beams with (<Xtlz/11) less than 1.0 may be proportioned to resist shear obtained
by linear interpolation, assuming beams carry no load at a= 0. In addition to shears
calculated according to this section, beams shall be proportioned to resist shears
caused by factored loads applied directly on beams.
Slab shear strength may be computed on the assumption that load is distributed
to supporting beams in accordance with the preceding paragraph. Resistance to to-
tal shear occurring on a panel shall be provided.
Shear strength shall satisfy requirements of Section 2611.
9. Factored moments in columns and walls. Columns and walls built integral-
ly with a slab system shall resist moments caused by factored loads on the slab sys-
tem.
At an interior support, supporting elements above and below the slab shall resist
the moment specified by Formula ( 13-4) in direct proportion to their stiffnesses
unless a general analysis is made.
(13-4)
where WJ, 1'2 and I ~ refer to shorter span.
I 0. Provisions for effects of pattern loadings. Where ratio Pa of dead load to
live load is less than 2, one of the following conditions shall be satisfied:
A. Sum of flexural stiffnesses of the columns above and below the slab shall be
such that a,.. is not less than O,;n specified in Table No. 26-D.
B. If a,.. for the columns above and below the slab is less than O,;n specified in
Table No. 26-D, positive factored moments in panels supported by such columns
shall be multiplied by the coefficient Ds determined from Formula (13-5).
os 2-
= I + - - ( 1 - -ac- )
-f3a (13-5)
4 + f3a amin
where Pa is ratio of dead load to live load, per unit area (in each case without load
factors).
(i) Equivalent Frame Method. [13.7]1. Design of slab systems by the equiva-
lent frame method shall be based on assumptions given in Section 2613 (i) 2
through 6, and all sections of slabs and supporting members shall be proportioned
for moments and shears thus obtained.
Where metal column capitals are used, account may be taken of their contribu-
tions to stiffness and resistance to moment and to shear.
Change in length of columns and slabs due to direct stress, and deflections due to
shear, may be neglected.
2. Equivalent frame. The structure shall be considered to be made up of equiva-
lent frames on column lines taken longitudinally and transversely through the
building. Each frame shall consist of a row of columns or supports and slab-beam
strips, bounded laterally by the center line of panel on each side of the center line of
486
columns or supports. Frames adjacent and parallel to an edge shall be bounded by

that edge and the center line of adjacent panel.
Columns or supports shall be assumed to be attached to slab-beam strips by tor-
sional members [Section 2613 (i) 5] transverse to the direction of the span for
which moments are being determined and extending to bounding lateral panel cen-
ter lines on each side of a column.
£acfi equivalent frame may be analyzed in its entirety, or for vertical loading,
each floor and the roof (slab-beams) may be analyzed separately with far ends of
columns considered fixed. Where slab-beams are analyzed separately, it may be
assumed in determining moment at a given support that the slab-beam is fixed at
any support two panels distant therefrom, provided the slab continues beyond that
point.
3. Slab-beams. Moment of inertia of slab-beams at any cross section outside of
joints or column capitals may be based on the gross area of concrete. Variation in
moment of inertia along axis of slab-beams shall be taken into account.
Moment of inertia of slab-beams from center of column to face of column,
bracket or capital shall be assumed equal to the moment of inertia of the slab-beam
at face of column, bracket or capital divided by the quantity (I -c 2112f where c 2 and
/ 2 are measured transverse to the direction of the span for which moments are being
determined.
4. Columns. Moment of inertia of columns at any cross section outside ofjoints
or column capitals may be based on the gross area of concrete. Variation in moment
of inertia along axis of columns shall be taken into account. Moment of inertia of
columns from top to bottom of the slab-beam at a joint shall be assumed infinite.
5. Torsional members. Torsional members shall be assumed to have a constant
cross section throughout their length consisting of the larger of:
A. A portion of slab having a width equal to that of the column, bracket or capital
in the direction of the span for which moments are being determined.
B. For monolithic or fully composite construction, the portion of slab specified
in A above plus that part of the transverse beam above and below the slab.
C. Transverse beam as defined in Section 2613 (c) 4.
Stiffness K1 of an attached torsional member shall be calculated by the following
expression:
9E,.,C
Kr = ~ --,-..:..::...---;--
lz (I - ~Y (13-6)
where c 2 and /2 relate to the transverse spans on each side of column. The constant C
in Formula ( 13-6) may be evaluated for the cross section by dividing it into separate
rectangular parts and carrying out the following summation:
C= ~ (I - 0.63 ~) x; (13-7)
Where beams frame into columns in the direction of the span for which moments
are being determined, value of K1 as computed by Formula ( 13-6) shall be multi-
487
plied by the ratio of moment of inertia of slab with such beam to moment of inertia
of slab without such beam.
6. Arrangement of live load. When loading pattern is known, the equivalent
frame shall be analyzed for that load.
When live load is variable but does not exceed three fourths the dead load, or the
nature oflive load is such that all panels will be loaded simultaneously, maximum
factored moments may be assumed to occur at all sections with full factored live
load on entire slab system.
For loading conditions other than those defined in the preceding paragraph,
maximum positive factored moment near midspan of a panel may be assumed to
occur with three fourths the full factored live load on the panel and on alternate pan-
els; and maximum negative factored moment in the slab at a support may be as-
sumed to occur with three fourths the full live load on adjacent panels only.
Factored moments shall not be taken less than those occurring with full factored
live load on all panels.
7. Factored moments. At interior supports, critical section for negative fac-
tored moment (in both column and middle strips) shall be taken at face of rectilin-
ear supports, but not greater than 0.175/ 1 from center of a column.
At exterior supports provided with brackets or capitals, critical section for nega-
tive factored moment in the span perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at a dis-
tance from face of supporting element not greater than one half the projection of
bracket or capital beyond face of supporting element.
Circular or regular polygon-shaped supports shall be treated as square supports
with the same area for location of critical section for negative design moment.
Slab systems within limitations of Section 2613 (h) 1, when analyzed by the
equivalent frame method, may have resulting computed moments reduced in such
proportion that the absolute sum of the positive and average negative moments
used in design need not exceed the value obtained from Formula (13-3).
Moments at critical sections across the slab-beam strip of each frame may be
distributed to column strips, beams and middle strips as provided in Section 2613
(h) 4, 5 and 6 if the requirement of Section 2613 (h) l F is satisfied.
Walls [Chapter 14]

A~ = gross area of section, square inches.
f;. specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per square inch.
k = effective length factor.
I, vertical distance between supports, inches.
Mu factored moment at section, inch-pound See Section 2614 (i) 2.
Mn nominal moment strength at section, inch-pound.
Mer cracking moment 5 Jf:.Igjy 1 for regular concrete.
488
P,w nominal axial load strength of wall designed by Section 2614 (e).
Pu factored axial load at midheightofwall, including tributary wall weight.
c)> strength-reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
Ph reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain conditions. See Formula
(8-1 ).
(b) Scope. [14.1] Provisions of Section 2614 shall apply for design of walls sub-
jected to axial load, with or without flexure.
Cantilever retaining walls are designed according to flexural design provisions
of Section 2610 with minimum horizontal reinforcement according to Section
2614 (d) 3.
(c) General. [ 14.2] Walls shall be designed for eccentric loads and any lateral or
other loads to which they are subjected. Walls subject to axial loads shall be de-
signed in accordance with Section 2614 (c), (d) and either 2614 (e) or (f). Design
for shear shall be in accordance with Section 2611 (k).
Unless demonstrated by a detailed analysis, horizontal length of wall to be con-
sidered as effective for each concentrated load shall not exceed center-to-center
distance between loads, or width of bearing plus four times the wall thickness.
Compression members built integrally with walls shall conform to Section 261 0
(i) 2.
Walls shall be anchored to intersecting elements such as floors or roofs or to col-
umns, pilasters, buttresses, and intersecting walls and footings.
Quantity of reinforcement and limits of thickness required by Section 2614 (d)
and (f) may be waived where structural analysis shows adequate strength and sta-
bility.
(d) Minimum Reinforcement. [ 14.3]1. Minimum vertical and horizontal rein-
forcement shall be in accordance with Section 2614 (d) 2 and 3 unless a greater
amount is required for shear by Section 2611 (k) 8 and 9.
2. Minimum ratio of vertical reinforcement area to gross concrete area shall be:
A. 0.0012 for deformed bars not larger than No. 5 with a specified yield strength
not less than 60,000 psi, or
B. 0.0015 for other deformed bars, or
C. 0.0012 for welded wire fabric (smooth or deformed) not larger than W31 or
D31.
3. Minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement area to gross concrete area shall
be:
A. 0.0020 for deformed bars not larger than No. 5 with a specified yield strength
not less than 60,000 psi, or
B. 0.0025 for other deformed bars, or
C. 0.0020 for welded wire fabric (smooth or deformed) not larger than W31 or
D31.
489
4. Walls more than I 0 inches thick, except basement walls, shall have reinforce-
ment for each direction placed in two layers parallel with faces of wall in accor-
A. One layer consisting of not less than one half and not more than two thirds of
total reinforcement required for each direction shall be placed not less than 2 inches
or more than one third the thickness of wall from exterior surface.
B. The other layer, consisting of the balance of required reinforcement in that
direction, shall be placed not less than 3/ 4 inch or more than one third the thickness
of wall from interior surface.
5. Vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall not be spaced farther apart than
three times the wall thickness, or 18 inches.
6. Vertical reinforcement need not be enclosed by lateral ties if vertical rein-
forcement area is not greater than 0.0 I times gross concrete area, or where vertical
reinforcement is not required as compression reinforcement.
7. In addition to the minimum reinforcement required by Section 2614 (d) I and
2, not less than two No.5 bars shall be provided around all window and door open-
ings. Such bars shall be extended to develop the bar beyond the comers of the open-
ings but not less than 24 inches.
8. The minimum requirements for horizontal and vertical steel of Section 2614
(d) 2 and 3 may be interchanged for precast panels which are not restrained along
vertical edges to inhibit temperature expansion or contraction.
(e) Walls Designed as Compression Members. [14.4] Except as provided in
Section 2614 (f), walls subject to axial load or combined flexure and axial load
shall be designed as compression members in accordance with provisions of Sec-
tions 2610 (c), (d), (k), (1), (m), (p) and 2614 (c) and (d).
(f) Empirical Design Method. [ 14.5]1. Walls of solid rectangular cross section
may be designed by the empirical provisions of Section 2614 (f) if resultant of all
factored loads is located within the middle third of the overall thickness of wall and
all limits of Section 2614 (c), (d) and (f) are satisfied.
2. Design axial load strength <j>Pnw of a wall satisfying limitations of Section
2614 (f) I shall be computed by Formula (14-1) unless designed in accordance with
Section 2614 (e).
2
¢P nw = 0.55 ¢ f c A 8 [ I -
1
( klch ) ] (14-1)
32
where <j> =0.70 and effective length factor k shall be:

For walls braced top and bottom against lateral translation and
A. Restrained against rotation at one or both ends (top and/or bottom) 0.8
B. Unrestrained against rotation at both ends 1.0
For walls not braced against lateral translation 2.0
3. Minimum thickness of walls designed by empirical design method.
490
A. Thickness of bearing walls shall not be less than 1hs the unsupported height or
length, whichever is shorter, or not less than 4 inches.
B. Thickness of exterior basement walls and foundation walls shall not be less
than 7 1h inches.
(g) Non bearing Walls. [ 14.6] Thickness of non bearing walls shall not be less
than 4 inches, or not less than 1ho the least distance between members that provide
lateral support.
(h) Walls as Grade Beams. [ 14. 7]1. Walls designed as grade beams shall have
top and bottom reinforcement as required for moment in accordance with provi-
sions of Section 2610 (c) through (h). Design for shear shall be in accordance with
provisions of Section 2611.
2. Portions of grade beam walls exposed above grade shall also meet require-
ments of Section 2614 (d).
(i) Alternate Design Slender Walls. When flexural tension controls desif?n of
walls, the requirements ofSection2610 (k) 1 may he satisfied hy complying with the
limitations and procedures set forth in this section.
I. Limitations.
A. Vertical service load stress at the location of maximum moment does not ex-
ceed 0.04 f~.
B. The reinforcement ratio p does not exceed .6 Ph·
C . .Sufficient reinforcement is provided so that the nominal moment capacity
times the ¢!factor is greater than Mer·
D. Distribution ofconcentrated load does not exceed the width ofbearinf? plus a
width increasing at a slope of2 vertical to 1 horizontal down to the design flexural
section.
2. Design strength. The requiredfactored moment, Mu at the midheight cross
section for combined axial and lateral factored loads, including the P ll moments,
shall he as set forth in Formula (14-2).
(14-2)
Unless a more comprehensive analysis is used, the P !l moment shall he calculated

using the maximum potential deflection, A,, as defined in Section 2614 (i) 3.
3. Deflection design. The midheight deflection A,, under service lateral and ver-
tical loads (without load factors), shall he limited hy the relation
(.
!l. = - (14-3)
\ 150
Unless a more comprehensive analysis is used, the midheight deflection shall he

computed with the following formulas:
491
M,,.-
( Mn- M,.,
M,.,) (An - A,.,); for Ms > M,., (14-4)
A 5Mslc 2
Lls = - - - ; for Ms < M,., ( 14-5)
48EJR
WHERE:
5M,.,( 2
A, =
48EJR
5Mnlc 2
48EJcr
3
nAse(d - c) 2 + 3bc
the maximum moment in the wall resulting from the application of the
unfactored load combinations.
Pu + A.,/y
f,
Footings [Chapter 15]
dp diameter of pile at footing base.
Ji: square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per
square inch.
~ = ratio of long side to short side of footing.
 = strength-reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
(b) Scope. [ 15.1] Provisions of this section shall apply for design of isolated
footings and, where applicable, to combined footings and mats.
Additional requirements for design of combined footings and mats are given in
Section 2615 (k).
(c) Loads and Reactions. [ 15.2] Footings shall be proportioned to resistthe fac-
tored loads and induced reactions, in accordance with the appropriate design re-
quirements of this code and as provided in this section.
External forces and moments* applied to footings shall be transferred to sup-
porting soil without exceeding permissible soil pressures.
For footings on piles, computations for moments and shears may be based on the
assumption that the reaction from any pile is concentrated at pile center.
*Externa/.forces and moments are those resulting from un.factored loads (D. L, Wand
E) specified in Chapter 23.
492
Base area of footing or number and arrangement of piles shall be determined

from the external forces and moments* (transmitted by footing to soil or piles) and
permissible soil pressure or permissible pile capacity selected through principles
of soil mechanics.
(d) Footings Supporting Circular or Regular Polygon-shaped Columns or
Pedestals. [ 15.3] Circular or regular polygon-shaped concrete columns or pedes-
tals may be treated as square members with the same area for location of critical
sections for moment, shear and development of reinforcement in footings.
(e) Moment in Footings. [ 15.4]1. External moment on any section of a footing
shall be determined by passing a vertical plane through the footing and computing
the moment of the forces acting over entire area of footing on one side of that verti-
cal plane.
2. Maximum factored moment for an isolated footing shall be computed as pre-
scribed in Section 2615 (e) I at critical sections located as follows:
A. At face of column, pedestal or wall, for footings supporting a concrete col-
umn, pedestal or wall.
B. Halfway between middle and edge of wall, for footings supporting a masonry
wall.
C. Halfway between face of column and edge of steel base, for footings support-
ing a column with steel base plates.
3. In one-way footings, and two-way square footings, reinforcement shall be
distributed uniformly across entire width of footing.
4. In two-way rectangular footings, reinforcement shall be distributed as fol-
lows:
A. Reinforcement in long direction shall be distributed uniformly across entire
width of footing.
B. For reinforcement in short direction, a portion of the total reinforcement giv-
en by Formula ( 15-1) shall be distributed uniformly over a band width (centered on
center line of column or pedestal) equal to the length of short side of footing.
Remainder of reinforcement required in short direction shall be distributed uni-
formly outside center band width of footing.
Reinforcement in band width 2
(I 5-\)
Total reinforcement in short direction (/3 + I)
(f) Shear in Footings. [ 15.5] I. Computation of shear in footings shall be in ac-
cordance with Section 2611 (m).
2. Location of critical section for shear in accordance with Section 2611 shall be
measured from face of column, pedestal or wall, for footings supporting a column,
pedestal or wall. For footings supporting a column or pedestal with steel base
plates, the critical section shall be measured from location defined in Section 2615
(e) 2 C.
*External forces and moments are those resulting from unfactored loads (D. L, Wand
E) specified in Chapter 23.
493
3. Computation of shear on any section through a footing supported on piles

shall be in accordance with the following:
A. Entire reaction from any pile whose center is located dp/2 or more outside the
.~ectionshall be considered as producing shear on that section.
B. Reaction from any pile whose center is located dp/2 or more inside the section
shall be considered as producing no shear in that section.
C. For intermediate positions of pile center, the portion ofthe pile reaction to be
considered as producing shear on the section shall be based on straight-nne inteT-
polation between full value at dp/2 outside the section and zero value at 0,/2 inside
the section.
(g) Development of Reinforcement in Footings. [ 15.6] I. Computation of de-
velopment of reinforcement in footings shall be in accordance with Section 2612.
2. Calculated tension or compression in reinforcement at each section shall be
developed on each side of that section by proper embedment length, end anchor-
age, hooks (tension only), or combinations thereof.
3. Critical sections for development of reinforcement shall be assumed at the
same locations as defined in Section 2615 (e) 2 for maximum factored moment,
and at all other vertical planes where changes of section or reinforcement occur.
See also Section 2612 (k) 6.
(h) Minimum Footing Depth. [ 15. 7] Depth of footing above bottom reinforce-
ment shall not be less than 6 inches for footings on soil, or not less than 12 inches for
footings on piles.
(i) Transfer of Force at Base of Column, Wall or Reinforced Pedestal. [ 15 .8]
I. Forces and moments at base of column, wall, or pedestal shall be transferred to
supporting pedestal or footing by bearing on concrete and by reinforcement, dow-
els and mechanical connectors.
A. Bearing on concrete at contact surface between supported and supporting
member shall not exceed concrete bearing strength for either surface as given by
Section 2610 (p).
B. Reinforcement, dowels or mechanical connectors between supported and
supporting members shall be adequate to transfer:
(i) All compressive force that exceeds concrete bearing strength of either
member.
(ii) Any computed tensile force across interface.
In addition, reinforcement, dowels or mechanical connectors shall satisfy Sec-
tion 2615 (i) 2 or 3.
C. If calculated moments are transferred to supporting pedestal or footing, rein-
forcement, dowels or mechanical connectors shall be adequate to satisfy Section
2612 (s).
D. Lateral forces shall be transferred to supporting pedestal or footing in accor-
dance with shear-friction provisions of Section 2611 (h) or by other appropriate
means.
494
2. In cast-in-place construction, reinforcement required to satisfy Section 2615

(i) I shall be provided either by extending longitudinal bars into supporting pedes-
tal or footing, or by dowels.
A. For cast-in-place columns and pedestals, area of reinforcement across inter-
face shall not be less than 0.005 times gross area of supported member.
B. For cast-in-place walls, area of reinforcement across interface shall not be
less than minimum vertical reinforcement given in Section 2614 (d) 2.
C. At footings, No. 14 and No. 18longitudinal bars, in compression only, may be
lap spliced with dowels to provide reinforcement required to satisfy Section 2615
(i) I. Dowels shall not be larger than No. II bar and shall extend into supported
member a distance not less than the development length of No. 14or No. 18 bars or
the splice length of the dowels, whichever is greater, and into the footing a distance
not less than the development length of the dowels.
D. If a pinned or rocker connection is provided in cast-in-place construction,
connection shall conform to Section 2615 (i) I and 3.
3. In precast construction, reinforcement required to satisfy Section 2615 (i) I
may be provided by anchor bolts or suitable mechanical connectors.
A. Connection between precast columns or pedestals and supporting member
shall have a tensile strength not less than 200AR, in pounds, where A~ is area of sup-
ported member.
B. Connection between precast wall and supporting member shall have a tensile
strength not less than 50 A~, in pounds, where AR is cross-sectional area of wall.
C. Anchor bolts and mechanical connectors shall be designed to reach their de-
sign strength prior to anchorage failure or failure of surrounding concrete.
(j) Sloped or Stepped Footings. [ 15.9] In sloped or stepped footings, angle of
slope or depth and location of steps shall be such that design requirements are satis-
fied at every section.
Sloped or stepped footings designed as a unit shall be constructed to assure ac-
tion as a unit.
(k) Combined Footings and Mats. [15.10] I. Footings supporting more than
one column, pedestal or wall (combined footings or mats) shall be proportioned to
resist the factored loads and induced reactions in accordance with appropriate de-
sign requirements of this code.
2. The direct design method of Section 2613 shall not be used for design of com-
bined footings and mats.
3. Distribution of soil pressure under combined footings and mats shall be con-
sistent with properties of the soil and the structure and with established principles
of soil mechanics.
({)Plain Concrete Pedestals and Footings. 1. Stresses due to factored loads in
plain concrete pedestals and footings on soil shall be computed assuming a linear
stress distribution in the concrete.
2. For plain concrete pedestals and footings with concrete cast against soil, ef-
fective thickness used in computing stresses shall he taken as overall thickness
minus 3 inches.
495
3. Stresses due to factored loads in plain concrete pedestals andfootinf?s on soil

shall not exceed the followinf?:
Flexure-Extreme fiber stress in tension ...................... S<j> Jr;
Shear-Beam action ..................................... 2<j> Jf;
-Two-way action ................................... 4<j> Jt:

4. Maximum compressive stress in plain concrete pedestals shall not exceed
concrete hearinf? stren[?th as Riven in Section 2610 (p). Where concrete hearinf?
strength is exceeded, reinforcement shall he provided and the pedestal desi[?ned as
a reinforced concrete member.
5. Plain concrete shall not he used for footinf?s on piles.
6. Overall thickness of plain concrete footings shall not be less than 8 inches.
Precast Concrete [Chapter 16]

Sec. 2616. (a) Scope. [16.1] I. Provisions of this section shall apply only to de-
sign of precast concrete members manufactured under plant-controlled condi-
tions.
2. All provisions of this code shall apply to precast concrete members, except as
specifically modified in this section.
(b) Design. [ 16.2] I. Design of precast members shall consider all loading and
restraint conditions from initial fabrication to completion of the structure, includ-
ing form removal, storage, transportation and erection.
2. In precast construction that does not behave monolithically, effects at all in-
terconnected and adjoining details shall be considered to assure proper perform-
ance of the structural system.
3. Effects of initial and long-time deflections shall be considered including ef-
fects on interconnected elements.
4. Design of joints and bearings shall include effects of all forces to be trans-
mitted, including shrinkage, creep, temperature, elastic deformation, wind and
earthquake.
5. All details shall be designed to provide for manufacturing and erection toler-
ances and temporary erection stresses.
(c) Precast Wall Panels. [ 16.3] I. Precast bearing and non bearing walls shall be
designed in accordance with provisions of Section 2614. Desif?n shall include ef-
fects of temperature and shrinkaf?e.
2. Where precast panels are designed to span horizontally to columns or isolated
footings, the ratio of height to thickness shall not be limited, provided the effect of
deep beam action, lateral buckling, vertical buckling (includinf? P ~effects) and
deflections are provided for in the design. See Section 2610 (h) and (k).
(d) Details. [ 16.4] I. All details ofreinforcement, connections, bearing seats,
inserts, anchors, concrete cover, openings, lifting devices, fabrication and erection
tolerances shall be shown on the shop drawings.
496
2. When approved by the building official, embedded items (such as dowels or

inserts) that either protrude from concrete or remain exposed for inspection may be
embedded while concrete is in a plastic state, provided:
A. Embedded items are not required to be hooked or tied to reinforcement within
plastic concrete.
B. Embedded items are maintained in correct position while concrete remains
plastic, and
C. Embedded items are properly anchored to develop required factored loads.
(e) Identification and Marking. [ 16.5] Each precast member or element shall
be marked to indicate location in the structure, top surface and date of fabrication.
Identification marks shall correspond to the placing plans.
(f) Transportation, Storage and Erection. [16.6] During curing, form remov-
al, storage, transportation and erection, precast members shall not be overstressed,
warped or otherwise damaged or have camber adversely affected.
Precast members shall be adequately braced and supported during erection to
ensure proper alignment and structural integrity until permanent connections are
completed.
Composite Concrete Flexural Members [Chapter 17]

b, width of cross section at contact surface being investigated for horizon-
tal shear.
forcement for entire composite section, inches.
Vnh nominal horizontal shear strength.
Vu factored shear force at section.
 strength-reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
(b) Scope. [ 17 .1] Provisions of this section shall apply for design of composite
concrete flexural members defined as precastorcast-in-place concrete elements or
both constructed in separate placements but so interconnected that all elements re-
spond to loads as a unit.
All provisions of this code shall apply to composite concrete flexural members,
except as specifically modified in this section.
(c) General. [17.2]1. An entire composite member or portions thereof may be
used in resisting shear and moment.
2. Individual elements shall be investigated for all critical stages of loading.
3. If the specified strength, unit weight or other properties of the various ele-
ments are different, properties ofthe individual elements or the most critical values
shall be used in design.
4. In strength computations of composite members, no distinction shall be made
between shored and unshored members.
5. All elements shall be designed to support all loads introduced prior to full de-
velopment of design strength of composite members.
497
6. Reinforcement shall be provided as required to control cracking and to pre-

vent separation of individual elements of composite members.
7. Composite members shall meet requirements for control of deflections in ac-
cordance with Section 2609 (f).
(d) Shoring. [ 17.3 J When used, shoring shall not be removed until supported
elements have developed design properties required to support all loads and limit
deflections and cracking at time of shoring removal.
(e) Vertical Shear Strength. [ 17 .4] I. When an entire composite member is as-
sumed to resist vertical shear, design shall be in accordance with requirements of
Section 2611 as for a monolithically cast member of the same cross-sectional
shape.
2. Shear reinforcement shall be fully anchored into interconnected elements in
accordance with Section 2612 (n).
3. Extended and anchored shear reinforcement may be included as ties for hori-
zontal shear.
(f) Horizontal Shear Strength. [ 17 .5]1. In a composite member, full transfer of
horizontal shear forces shall be assured at contact surfaces of interconnected ele-
ments.
2. Full transfer of horizontal shear forces may be assumed when all of the fol-
lowing are satisfied:
A. Contact swfaces are clean ,free oflaitance, and intentionally roughened to a
ji11l amplitude rJf approximately 114 inch,
B. Minimum ties are provided in accordance with Section 2617 (g),
C. Web members are designed to resist total vertical shear, and
D. All shear reinforcement is fully anchored into all interconnected elements.
3. !fall requirements r~{Section 2617 (j) 2 are not satisfied, horizontal shear
shall be investigated in accordance with Section 2617 (f) 4 or 5.
4. Unless calculated in accordance with Section 2617 (f) 5, design of cross sec-
tions subject to horizontal shear shall be based on
(17-1)
where V11 is factored shear force at section considered and V, 11 is nominal horizontal
shear strength in accordance with the following:
A. When contact surfaces are clear, free oflaitance and intentionally roughened,
shear strength V, 11 shall not be taken greater than than 80b.,d.
B. When minimum ties are provided in accordance with Section 2617 (g) and
contact surfaces are clean and free of laitance, but not intentionally roughened,
shear strength V,, shall not be taken greater than 80b.,d.
C. When minimum ties are provided in accordance with Section 2617 (g) and
contact surfaces are clean, free of laitance, and intentionally roughened to a full
amplitude of approximately 1/ 4 inch, shear strength V,,, shall not be taken greater
than 350b,.d.
D. When factored shear force V, at section considered exceeds <j>(350b,.d), de-
sign for horizontal shear shall be in accordance with Section 2611 (h).
498
5. Horizontal shear may be investigated by computing the actual compressive or

tensile force in any segment, and provisions made to transfer that force as horizon-
tal shear to the supporting element. The factored horizontal shear force shall not
exceed horizontal shear strength Vn 11 as given in Section 2617 (f) 4 A through D.
6. When tension exists across any contact surface between interconnected ele-
ments, shear transfer by contact may be assumed only when minimum ties are pro-
vided in accordance with Section 2617 (g).
(g) Ties for Horizontal Shear. [ 17 .6]1. When ties are provided to transfer hori-
zontal shear, tie area shall not be less than that required by Section 2611 (f) 5 C and
tie spacing shall not exceed four times the least dimension of supported element, or
24 inches.
2. Ties for horizontal shear may consist of single bars or wire, multiple leg stir-
rups or vertical legs of welded wire fabric (smooth or deformed).
3. All ties shall be fully anchored into interconnected elements in accordance
with Section 2612 (n).
Prestressed Concrete [Chapter 18]
Sec. 2618. (a) Notations. [ 18.0]
A area of that part of cross section between flexural tension face and center
of gravity of gross section, square inches.
A,. area of concrete at cross section considered, square inches.
Ap.- area of prestressed reinforcement in tension zone, square inches.
A,,. area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, square inches.
A's area of compression reinforcement, square inches.
d distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of nonprestressed
tension reinforcement, inches.
d' distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of compression re-
inforcement, inches.
d,, distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed rein-
forcement.
D dead loads or related internal moments and forces.
e base of Napierian logarithms.
f:. specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per square inch.
Jf: square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per
square inch; or square root of compressive strength ofconcrete at time of
initial prestress. pounds per square inch.
f;.i compressive strength of concrete at time of initial prestress, pounds per
square inch.
fr,. average compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress force
only (after allowance for all prestress losses), pounds per square inch.
f,,, stress in prestressed reinforcement at nominal strength. pounds per
square inch.
499
J;m specified tensile strength of prestressing tendons, pounds per square

inch .
.!,n· specified yield strength of prestressing tendons, pounds per square inch.
J, modulus of rupture of concrete, pounds per square inch.
J;e effective stress in prestressed reinforcement (after allowance for all pre-
stress losses), pounds per square inch.
f~ specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, pounds per
square inch.
K wobble friction coefficient per foot of prestressing tendon.
length of prestressing tendon element from jacking end to any point x,
feet. See Formulas ( 18-1) and ( 18-2); or length of span oftwo-way flat
plates in direction parallel to that of the reinforcement being determined,
inches. See Formula (18-8).
L live loads or related internal moments and forces.
N, tensile force in concrete due to unfactored dead load plus live load
(D + L).
P_, prestressing tendon force at jacking end.
P, prestressing tendon force at any point x.
a total angular change of prestressing tendon profile in radians from ten-
don jacking end to any point x.
~1 factor defined in Section 2610 (c) 7.
y, factor for type of prestressing tendon.
0.55 for /py/fr,u not less than 0.80.
0.40 for.fr,y!J;m not less than 0.85.
0.28 for /py/fr,u not less than 0.90.
j..l curvature friction coefficient.
A.Jhd.
p' = ratio of compression reinforcement.
A:Jhd.
p, ratio of prestressed reinforcement.
A,.Jhd,.
cp strength-reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
w = Pfv!f: ·
w' p'fv!f: ..
cq, p,J,,,!f:.
500
(J).,,, W,w. (!)~,
reinforcement indices for flanged sections computed as for 0>, w,. and
0>' except that b shall be the web width, and reinforcement area sha1\ be
that required to develop compressive strength of web only.
(b) Scope. [ 18.1] Provisions of this section shall apply to members prestressed
with wire, strands or bars conforming to provisions for prestressing tendons.
All provisions of this code not specifically excluded, and not in conflict with
provisions of this section, shall apply to prestressed concrete.
The following provisions of this code shall not apply to prestressed concrete,
except as specifically noted: Sections 2607 (g) I (last paragraph); 2608 (e), (k) 2
through 4 and(!); 2610 (d) 2 and 3, (f), (j) I and 2; 2613; and 2614 (d), (f) and (g).
(c) General. [ 18.2]1. Prestressed members shall meet the strength requirements
specified in this code.
2. Design of prestressed members shall be based on strength and on behavior at
service conditions at all load stages that may be critical during the life ofthe struc-
ture from the time prestress is first applied.
3. Stress concentrations due to prestressing shall be considered in design.
4. Provisions shall be made for effects on adjoining construction of elastic and
plastic deformations, deflections, changes in length and rotations due to prestress-
ing. Effects of temperature and shrinkage shall also be included.
5. Possibility of buckling in a member between points where concrete and pre-
stressing tendons are in contact and of buckling in thin webs and flanges shall be
considered.
6. In computing section properties prior to bonding of prestressing tendons, ef-
fect of loss of area due to open ducts shall be considered.
(d) Design Assumptions. [18.3]1. Strength design of prestressed members for
flexure and axial loads shall be based on assumptions given in Section 2610 (c),
except Section 2610 (c) 4.
2. For investigation of stresses at transfer of prestress, at service loads and at
cracking loads, straight-line theory may be used with the following assumptions:
A. Strains vary linearly with depth through entire load range.
B. At cracked sections, concrete resists no tension.
(e) Permissible Stresses in Concrete-Flexural Members. [18.4]1. Stresses
in concrete immediately after prestress transfer (before time-dependent prestress
losses) shall not exceed the following:
A. Extreme fiber stress in compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.60f~·i
B. Extreme fiber stress in tension except as permitted in .......... 3 JJ;.i

C. Extreme fiber stress in tension at ends of simply supported
members ................................................. 6 JJ;.i
Where computed tensile stresses exceed these values, bonded auxiliary reinforce-
ment (nonprestressed or prestressed) shall be provided in the tensile zone to resist
501
the total tensile force in concrete computed with the assumption of an uncracked
section.
2. Stresses in concrete at service loads (after allowance for all prestress losses)
shall not exceed the following:
A. Extreme fiber stress in compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4V;
B. Extreme fiber stress in tension in precompressed
tensile zone ............................................... 6 Jl:
C. Extreme fiber stress in tension in precompressed tensile zone of members
(except two-way slab systems) where analysis based on transformed cracked sec-
tions and on bilinear moment-deflection relationships show that immediate and
long-time deflections comply with requirements of Section 2609 (f) 4, and where
cover requirements comply with Section 2607 (h) 3 B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 JJ:.
3. Permissible stresses in concrete of Section 2618 (e) I and 2 may be exceeded if
shown by test or analysis that performance will not be impaired.
(f) Permissible Stress in Prestressing Tendons. [18.5] Tensile stress in pre-
stressing tendons shall not exceed the following:
I. Due to tendon jacking force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0. 94(,11.
but not greater than the lesser of0.80J;, 11 and the maximum value recommended by
manufacturer of prestressing tendons or anchorages.
2. Immediately after prestress transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.82.f,,,.
but not greater than 0.74]~11 •
3. Posttensioning tendons, at anchorages and couplers, immediately after ten-
don anchorage ............................................. 0.70.!,,
(g) Loss of Prestress. [ 18.6] I. To determine effective prestress{,,, allowance
for the following sources of loss of prestress shall be considered:
A. Anchorage seating loss.
B. Elastic shortening of concrete.
C. Creep of concrete.
D. Shrinkage of concrete.
E. Relaxation of tendon stress.
F. Friction loss due to intended or unintended curvature in posttensioning ten-
dons.
2. Friction loss in posttensioning tendons. A. Effect of friction loss in postten-
sioning tendons shall be computed by
P, = P,e (KI + !W) ( 18-1)
When (KI ± J.HX) is not greater than 0.3, effect of friction loss may be computed by
P, = P, (I + Kl + f1.a) (18-2)
B. Friction loss shall be based on experimentally determined wobble K and cur-
vature 11 friction coefficients and shall be verified during tendon stressing opera-
tions.
502
C. Values of wobble and curvature coefficients used in design, and acceptable

ranges of tendon jacking forces and tendon elongations shall be shown on design
drawings.
D. Where loss of prestress in member may occur due to connection of member to
adjoining construction, such loss of prestress shall be allowed for in design.
(h) Flexural Strength. [ 18.7] I. Design moment strength of flexural members
shall be computed by the strength design methods of this code. For prestressing
tendons,.f;,, shall be substituted for .f;. in strength computations.
2. In lieu of a more accurate determination off,, based on strain compatibility,
the following approximate values of.f,,, shall be used iff,. is not less than 0.5 f,,.
A. For members with bonded prestressing tendons:
!," o J,,., C-i: [P, J: <(w- w')]) ( 18-3)
If any compression reinforcement is taken into account when calculating_[,,., by

Formula ( 18-3), the term
.~J/1
[P."f:
- +d- (w- w ')]
dl'
shall be taken not less than 0.17 and d' shall be no greater than 0.15 dl'.
B. For members with unbonded prestressing tendons and with a span-to-depth
ratio of 35 or less:
J;,, =.1;,. + 10,000 + ,t~n (18-4)
"'
but.f;,, in Formula ( 18-4) shall not be taken greater than.f;,y. or (j,,. + 60,000).
C. For members with unbonded prestressing tendons and with a span-to-depth
ratio greater than 35:
.f;,., = .t;,. + I 0, 000 + 3t~P,, {18-5)
butfr,, in Formula ( 18-5) shall not be taken greater thanJ;,y. or (j,,. + 30,000).
3. Nonprestressed reinforcement if used with prestressing tendons, may be con-
sidered to contribute to the tensile force and may be included in moment strength
computations at a stress equal to the specified yield strengthfv. Other nonpres-
tressed reinforcement may be included in strength computations only if a strain
compatibility analysis is made to determine stresses in such reinforcement.
(i) Limits for Reinforcement of Flexural Members. [ 18.8] I. Ratio of pre-
stressed and nonprestressed reinforcement used for computation of moment
strength of a member, except as provided in Section 2618 (i) 2, shall be such that
w 1, ]w, + d/d, (w- w')], or ]w1'" + d/d, (w"'- w'wll is not greater than
0.36131·
503
2. When a reinforcement ratio in excess of that specified in Section 2618 (i) I is

provided, design moment strength shall not exceed the moment strength based on
the compression portion of the moment couple.
3. Total amount of prestressed and nonprestressed reinforcement shall be ade-
quate to develop a factored load at least 1.2 times the cracking load computed on
the basis of the modulus of rupture fr specified in Section 2609 (f) 2 C, except for
flexural members with shear and flexural strength at least twice that required by
Section 2609 (c).
U) Minimum Bonded Reinforcement. [ 18.9] I. A minimum area of bonded re-
inforcement shall be provided in all flexural members with unbonded prestressing
tendons as required by Section 2618 U) 2 and 3.
2. Except as provided in Section 2618 (j) 3, minimum area of bonded reinforce-
ment shall be computed by
As = 0.004A (18-6)
A. Bonded reinforcement required by Formula ( 18-6) shall be uniformly distrib-
uted over precompressed tensile zone as close as practicable to extreme tension fi-
ber.
B. Bonded reinforcement shall be required regardless of service load stress con-
ditions.
One-way, unhanded, posttensioned slabs and beams shall be designed to carry
the dead load of the slab or beam plus 25 percent of the unreduced superimposed
live load by some method other than the primary unhanded posttensioned rein-
forcement. Design shall be based on the strength method ofdesign with a load fac-
tor and capacity reduction factor of one. All reinforcement other than the primary
unbonded reinforcement provided to meet other requirements of this section may
be used in the design.
C. Maximum spacing limitations of Sections 2607 (g) 1 and 2608 (k),ltem5 B,
for bonded reinforcement in slabs are not applicable to spacing of bonded rein-
forcement in members with unhanded tendons.
3. For two-way flat plates, defined as solid slabs of uniform thickness, minimum
area and distribution of bonded reinforcement shall be as follows:
A. Bonded reinforcement shall not be required in positive moment areas where
computed tensile stress in concrete at service load (after allowance for prestress
losses) does not exceed 2 JJ:.
B. In positive moment areas where computed tensile stress in concrete at service
load exceeds 2 fFc minimum area of bonded reinforcement shall be computed by
Nc
A=-- (18-7)
s 0.5fy
where design yield strength h shall not exceed 60,000 pounds per square inch.
Bonded reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed over precompressed tensile
zone as close as practicable to extreme tension fiber.
504
C. In negative moment areas at column supports, minimum area of bonded rein-

forcement in each direction shall be computed by
A, = 0.00075hl ( 18-8)
where lis length of span in direction parallel to that of the reinforcement being de-
termined. Bonded reinforcement required by Formula ( 18-8) shall be distributed
within a slab width between lines that are I.Sh outside opposite faces of the column
support. At least four bars or wires shall be provided in each direction. Spacing of
bonded reinforcement shall not exceed 12 inches.
4. Minimum length of bonded reinforcement required by Section 2618 U) 2 and
3 shall be as follows:
A. In positive moment areas, minimum length of bonded reinforcement shall be
one third the clear span length and centered in positive moment area.
B. In negative moment areas, bonded reinforcement shall extend one sixth the
clear span on each side of support.
C. Where bonded reinforcement is provided for design moment strength in ac-
cordance with Section 2618 (h) 3, or for tensile stress conditions in accordance
with Section 2618 U) 3, minimum length also shall conform to provisions of Sec-
tion 2612.
(k) Frames and Continuous Construction. [ 18.10] I. Frames and continuous
construction of prestressed concrete shall be designed for satisfactory perform-
ance at service load conditions and for adequate strength.
2. Performance at service load conditions shall be determined by elastic analy-
sis, considering reactions, moments, shears, and axial forces produced by pre-
stressing, creep, shrinkage, temperature change, axial deformation, restraint of
attached structural elements and foundation settlement.
3. Moments to be used to compute required strength shall be the sum of the mo-
ments due to reactions induced by prestressing (with a load factor of 1.0) and the
moments due to factored loads including redistribution as permitted in Section
2618 (k) 4.
4. Redistribution of negative moments due to gravity loads in continuous
prestressed flexural members. A. Where bonded reinforcement is provided at
supports in accordance with Section 2618 (j) 2, negative moments calculated by
elastic theory for any assumed loading arrangement may be increased or decreased
by not more than
20[
1
- Wp + d-:;._w -
0.36{31
w')] percent
B. The modified negative moments shall be used for calculating moments at

sections within spans for the same loading arrangement.
505
C. Redistribution of negative moments shall be made only when the section at

which moment is reduced is so designed that w 1,. [wp + d/dp (w - w')], or
[wpw + d/dp (w .. - w' "')], whichever is applicable, is not greater than 0.24 PI·
(I) Compression Members-Combined Flexure and Axial Loads. [ 18.11]1.

Prestressed concrete members subject to combined flexure and axial load, with or
without nonprestressed reinforcement, shall be proportioned by the strength de-
sign methods of this code for members without prestressing. Effects of prestress,
creep, shrinkage and temperature change shall be included.
2. Limits for reinforcement of prestressed compression members. A. Mem-
bers with average prestress.!;" less than 225 psi shall have minimum reinforcement
in accordance with Sections 2607 (k) and 2609 U) 1 and 2 for columns, or Section
2614 (d) for walls.
B. Except for walls, members with average prestressJ;,c equal to or greater than
225 psi shall have all prestressing tendons enclosed by spirals or lateral ties in ac-
cordance with the following:
(i) Spirals shall conform to Section 2607 (k) 2.
(ii) Lateral ties shall be at least No.3 in size or welded wire fabric of equivalent
area, and spaced vertically not to exceed 48 tie bar or wire diameters or
least dimension of compression member.
(iii) Ties shall be located vertically not more than half a tie spacing above top
of footing or slab in any story, and shall be spaced as provided herein to
not more than half a tie spacing below lowest horizontal reinforcement in
members supported above.
(iv) Where beams or brackets frame into all sides of a column, ties may be ter-
minated not more than 3 inches below lowest reinforcement in such beams
or brackets.
C. For walls with average prestressJ;,c equal to or greater than 225 pounds per
square inch, minimum reinforcement required by Section 2614 (d) may be waived
where structural analysis shows adequate strength and stability.
(m) Slab Systems. [ 18.12]1. Factored moments and shears in prestressed slab
systems reinforced for flexure in more than one direction shall be determined in
accordance with provisions of Section 2613 (i), excluding Section 2613 (i) 7 D and
E, or by more detailed design procedures.
2. Moment strength of prestressed slabs at every section shall be at least equal to
the required strength considering Sections 2609 (c) and (d), and 2618 (k) 3 and 4.
Shear strength of prestressed slabs at columns shall be at least equal to the required
strength considering Sections 2609 (c) and (d), and 2611 (b), (I) 2 D and (m) 2.
3. At service load conditions, all serviceability limitations, including specified
limits on deflections, shall be met, with appropriate consideration of the factors
listed in Section 2618 (k) 2.
4. For normal live loads and load uniformly distributed, spacing of prestressing
tendons or groups of tendons in one direction shall not exceed eight times the slab
thickness, or 5 feet. Spacing of tendons also shall provide a minimum average pre-
506
stress, after allowance for all prestress losses, of 125 psi on the slab section tribu-
tary to the tendon or tendon group. A minimum of two tendons shall be provided in
each direction through the critical shear section over columns. Special consider-
ation of tendon spacing shall be provided for slabs with concentrated loads.
5. In slabs with unbonded prestressing tendons, bonded reinforcement shall be
provided in accordance with Section 2618 (j) 3 and 4.
(n) Tendon Anchorage Zones. [18.13 J I. Reinforcement shall be provided
where required in tendon anchorage zones to resist bursting, splitting and spalling
forces induced by tendon anchorages. Regions of abrupt change in section shall be
adequately reinforced.
2. End blocks shall be provided where required for support bearing or for distri-
bution of concentrated prestressing forces.
3. Posttensioning anchorages and supporting concrete shall be designed tore-
sist maximum jacking force for strength of concrete at time of prestressing.
4. Posttensioning anchorage zones shall be designed to develop the guaranteed
ultimate tensile strength of prestressing tendons using a strength-reduction factor
<!>of 0.90 for concrete.
(o) Corrosion Protection for Unbonded Prestressing Tendons. [18.14] I.
Unbonded tendons shall be completely coated with suitable material to ensure cor-
rosion protection.
2. Tendon wrapping shall be continuous over entire length to be unbonded, and
shall prevent intrusion of cement paste or loss of coating materials during concrete
placement.
(p) Posttensioning Ducts. [ 18.15] I. Ducts for grouted or unbonded tendons
shall be mortar-tight and nonreactive with concrete, tendons or filler materials.
2. Ducts for grouted single wire, strand or bar tendons shall have an inside diam-
eter at least 1/4 inch larger than tendon diameter.
3. Ducts for grouted multiple wire, strand or bar tendons shall have an inside
cross-sectional area at least two times net area of tendons.
4. Ducts shall be maintained free of water if members to be grouted are exposed
to temperatures below freezing prior to grouting.
(q) Grout for Bonded Prestressing Tendons. [ 18.16] I. Grout shall consist of
portland cement and water; or portland cement, sand and water.
2. Materials for grout shall conform to the following:
A. Portland cement shall conform to Section 2603 (b) I.
B. Water shall conform to Section 2603 (b) 3.
C. The gradation sand may be modified as necessary to obtain satisfactory
workability.
D. Admixtures conforming to Section 2603 (b) 5 and known to have no injuri-
ous effects on grout, steel or concrete may be used. Calcium chloride shall not be
used.
3. Selection of grout proportions. A. Proportions of materials for grout shall be
based on either of the following:
507
(i) Results of tests on fresh and hardened grout prior to beginning grouting
operations, or
(ii) Prior documented experience with similar materials and equipment and
under comparable field conditions.
B. Cement used in the work shall correspond to that on which selection of grout
proportions was based.
C. Water content shall be the minimum necessary for proper pumping of grout;
however, water-cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45 by weight.
D. Water shall not be added to increase grout flowability that has been decreased
by delayed use of grout.
4. Mixing and pumping grout. A. Grout shall be mixed in equipment capable of
continuous mechanical mixing and agitation that will produce uniform distribution
of materials, passed through screens, and pumped in a manner that will completely
fill tendon ducts.
B. Temperature of members at time of grouting shall be above 35°F. and shall be
maintained above 35°F. until field-cured 2-inch cubes of grout reach a minimum
compressive strength of 800 pounds per square inch.
C. Grout temperatures shall not be above 90°F. during mixing and pumping.
(r) Protection for Prestressing Tendons. [ 18.17] Burning or welding opera-
tions in vicinity of prestressing tendons shall be carefully performed so that ten-
dons are not subject to excessive temperatures, welding sparks or ground currents.
(s) Application and Measurement ofPrestressing Force. [ 18 .18] I. Prestress-
ing force shall be determined by both of the following methods:
A. Measurement of tendon elongation. Required elongation shall be determined
from average load-elongation curves for the prestressing tendons used.
B. Observation of jacking force on a calibrated gauge or load cell or by use of a
calibrated dynamometer.
Cause of any difference in force determination between A and B that exceeds 5
Ji1i percent for pretensioned elements or 7 percent for post-tensioned construction
shall be ascertained and corrected.
2. Where transfer of force from bulkheads of pretensioning bed to concrete is
accomplished by flame cutting prestressing tendons, cutting points and cutting se-
quence shall be predetermined to avoid undesired temporary stresses.
3. Long lengths of exposed pretensioned strand shall be cut near the member to
minimize shock to concrete.
4. Total loss of prestress due to unreplaced broken tendons shall not exceed 2
percent of total prestress.
(t) Posttensioning Anchorages and Couplers. [18.19]1. Anchorages and cou-
plers for bonded and unbonded prestressed tendons shall develop at least 95 per-
cent of the specified breaking strength of the tendons, when tested in an unbonded
condition, without exceeding anticipated set.
For bonded tendons, anchorages and couplers shall be located so that I00 per-
cent of the specified breaking strength of the tendons shall be developed at critical
sections after tendons are bonded in the member.
508
2. Couplers shall be placed in areas approved by the huildinf? official and en-
closed in housing long enough to permit necessary movements.
3.ln unbonded construction subject to repetitive loads, special attention shall be
given to the possibility of fatigue in anchorages and couplers.
4. Anchorages, couplers and end fittings shall be permanently protected against
~...uTasian.
Shells and Folded Plates [Chapter 19]

.r; specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per square inch.
}!'; square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, pounds per

square inch .
.f;. specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, pounds per
square inch.
E, modulus of elasticity of concrete, pounds per square inch. See Section
2608 (f).
h thickness of shell or folded plate, inches.
<1> strength-reduction factor.
(b) Scope and Definitions. [ 19.1] Provisions of Section 2619 shall apply to
thin-shell and folded-plate concrete structures, including ribs and edge members.
All provisions of Chapter 26 not specifically excluded, and not in conflict with
provisions of Section 2619, shall apply to thin-shell structures.
AUXILIARY MEMBERS are ribs or edge beams which serve to strengthen,
stiffen and/or support the shell; usually, auxiliary members act jointly with the
shell.
ELASTIC ANALYSIS is an analysis of deformations and internal forces based
on equilibrium, compatibility of strains and assumed elastic behavior and repre-
senting to suitable approximation the three-dimensional action ofthe shell togeth-
er with its auxiliary members.
EXPERIMENTAL ANALYSIS is an analysis procedure based on the mea-
surement of deformations and/or strains of the structure or its model; experimental
analysis may be based on either elastic or inelastic behavior.
FOLDED PLATES are a special class of shell structures formed by joining flat,
thin slabs along their edges so as to create a three-dimensional spatial structure.
INELASTIC ANALYSIS is an analysis of deformations and internal forces
based on equilibrium, nonlinear stress-strain relations for concrete and reinforce-
ment, consideration of cracking and time-dependent effects and compatibility of
strains. The analysis shall represent to suitable approximation the three-dimen-
sional action of the shell together with its auxiliary members.
RIBBED SHELLS are spatial structures with material placed primarily along
certain preferred rib lines, with the area between the ribs filled with thin slabs or left
open.
509
THIN SHELLS are three-dimensional spatial structures made up of one or

more curved slabs or folded plates whose thicknesses are small compared to their
other dimensions. Thin shells are characterized by their three-dimensional
load-carrying behavior which is determined by the geometry of their forms, by the
manner in which they are supported and by the nature of the applied load.
(c) Analysis and Design.[l9.2]1. Elastic behavior shall bean accepted basis for
determining internal forces and displacements of thin shells. This behavior may be
established by computations based on an analysis of the uncracked concrete struc-
ture in which the material is assumed linearly elastic, homogeneous and isotropic.
Poisson's ratio of concrete may be assumed equal to zero.
2. Inelastic analysis may be used where it can be shown that such methods pro-
vide a safe basis for design.
3. Equilibrium checks of internal resistances and external loads shall be made to
ensure consistency of results.
4. Experimental or numerical analysis procedures may be used where it can be
shown that such procedures provide a safe basis for design.
5. Approximate methods of analysis not satisfying compatibility of strains either
within the shell or between the shell and auxiliary members may be used where it
can be shown that such methods provide a safe basis for design.
6. In prestressed shells, the analysis must also consider behavior under loads in-
duced during prestressing, at cracking load and at factored load. Where prestress-
ing tendons are draped within a shell, design shall take into account force
components on the shell resulting from tendon profile not lying in one plane.
7. The thickness h of a thin shell and its reinforcement shall be proportioned for
the required strength and serviceability. All elements shall be proportioned by the
same method, using either the strength design method of Section 2608 (b) or the
alternate design method of Section 2626.
8. Shell design shall investigate and preclude the possibility of general or local
instability.
9. Auxiliary members shall be designed according to the applicable provisions
of this code. The design method selected for shell elements under Section 2619 (c)
7 shall also be used for auxiliary members. A portion of the shell equal to the flange
width specified in Section 2608 (k) may be assumed to act with the auxiliary mem-
ber. In such portions of the shell, the reinforcement perpendicular to the auxiliary
member shall be at least equal to that required for the flange of aT-beam by Section
2608 (k) 5.
(d) Design Strength of Materials. [ 19.3] I. Specified compressive strength of
concretef: at 28 days shall not be less than 3,000 psi.
2. Specified yield strength of non prestressed reinforcement.fv shall not exceed
60,000 psi.
(e) Shell Reinforcement. [ 19 .4] I. Shell reinforcement shall be provided tore-
sist tensile stresses from internal membrane forces, to resist bending and twisting
moments, to control shrinkage and temperature cracking and as special reinforce-
ment as shell boundaries, load attachments and shell openings.
510
2. Membrane reinforcement shall be provided in two or more directions in all

parts of the shell.
3. The area of shell reinforcement at any section as measured in two orthogonal
directions shall not be less than the slab shrinkage or temperature reinforcement
required by Section 2607 (m).
4. Reinforcement required to resist shell membrane forces shall be provided so
that the design strength in every direction shall be at least equal to the component of
the principal membrane forces in the same direction due to factored loads.
5. The area of shell tension reinforcement shall be limited so that the reinforce-
ment will yield before crushing of concrete in compression can take place.
6. In regions of high tension, membrane reinforcement shall, if practical, be
placed in the general directions of the principal tensile membrane forces. Where
this is not practical, membrane reinforcement may be placed in two or more com-
ponent directions.
7. If the direction of reinforcement varies more than I 0 degrees from the direc-
tion of principal tensile membrane force, the amount of reinforcement may have to
be increased to limit the width of possible cracks at service load levels.
8. Where the magnitude of the principal tensile membrane stress within the shell
varies greatly over the area of the shell surface, reinforcement resisting the total
tension may be concentrated in the regions of largest tensile stress where it can be
shown that this provides a safe basis for design. However, the ratio of shell rein-
forcement in any portion of the tensile zone shall not be less than 0.0035 based on
the overall thickness of the shell.
9. Reinforcement required to resist shell bending moments shall be propor-
tioned with due regard to the simultaneous action of membrane axial forces at the
same location. Where shell reinforcement is required in only one face to resist
bending moments, equal amounts shall be placed near both surfaces of the shell
even though a reversal of bending moments is not indicated by the analysis.
I0. Shell reinforcement in any direction shall not be spaced farther apart than 18
inches, or five times the shell thickness. Where the principal membrane tensile
stress on the gross concrete area due to factored loads exceeds 4 ¢ Jr , rein-
forcement shall not be spaced farther apart than three times the shell thickness.
II. Shell reinforcement at the junction of the shell and supporting members or
edge members shall be anchored in or extended through such members in accor-
dance with the requirements of Section 2612, except that the minimum develop-
ment length shall be 1.2 d but not less than 18 inches.
12. Splice development lengths of shell reinforcement shall be governed by the
provisions of Section 2612, except that the minimum splice length of tension bars
shall be 1.2 times the value required by Section 2612 but not less than 18 inches.
The number of splices in principal tensile reinforcement shall be kept to a practical
minimum. Where splices are necessary, they shall be staggered at least ld with not
more than one third of the reinforcement spliced at any section.
(f) Construction. [ 19.5] I. When removal of form work is based on a specific
modulus of elasticity of concrete because of stability or deflection considerations,
511
the value of the modulus of elasticity£, shall be determined from flexural tests of
field-cured beam specimens. The number of test specimens, the dimensions of test
beam specimens and test procedures shall be specified.
2. The tolerances for the shape of the shell shall be specified. If construction re-
sulrs in tkviations from the shape greater than the specified tolerances, an analysis
of the effect of the deviations shall be made and any required remedial actions shall
be taken to ensure safe behavior.
Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures [Chapter 20]

a = maximum deflection under test load of member relative to a line joining
the ends of the span, or ofthe free end of cantilever relative to its support,
inches.
D dead loads, or related internal moments and forces.
I, span of member under load test (shorter span of flat slabs and of slabs
supported on four sides). Span of member, except as provided in Section
2620 (e) 9, is distance between centers of supports or clear distance be-
tween supports plus depth of member, whichever is smaller, inches.
L = live loads, or related internal moments and forces.
(b) Strength Evaluation-General. [20.1] If doubt develops concerning the
safety of a structure or member, or low-strength concrete or both is confirmed in
accordance with Section 2605 (g) 4 D and computations indicate that load-carry-
ing capacity has been significantly reduced, the engineer or building official may
order a load test.
(c) Analytical Investigations-General. [20.2] If strength evaluation is by
analysis, a thorough field investigation shall be made of dimensions and details of
members, properties of materials and other pertinent conditions of the structure as
actually built.
Analyses based on investigation required by this subsection shall satisfy the
building otTicial that the load factors meet requirements and intent of this code. See
Section 2620 (g).
(d) Load Tests-General. [20.3] If strength evaluation is by load tests, a quali-
fied engineer acceptable to the building official shall control such tests.
A load test shall not be made until that portion of the structure to be subject to
load is at least 56 days old. When the owner of the structure, the contractor and all
involved parties mutually agree, the test may be made at an earlier age.
When only a portion of the structure is to be load tested, the questionable portion
shall be load tested in such a manner as to adequately test the suspected source of
weakness.
Forty-eight hours prior to application oftest load, a load to simulate effect of that
portion of the dead loads not already acting shall be applied and shall remain in
place until all testing has been completed.
512
(e) Load Tests of Flexural Members. [20.4] I. When flexural members, includ-
ing beams and slabs, are load tested, the additional provisions of this subsection
shall apply.
2. Base readings (datum for deflection measurements) shall be made immedi-
ately prior to application of test load.
3. That portion of the structure selected for loading shall be subject to a total load,
including dead loads already acting, equivalent to 0.85 ( 1.4D + 1.7L). Determina-
tion of L shall include live load reductions as permitted by Section 2306.
4. Test load shall be applied in not less than four approximately equal increments
without shock to the structure and in such a manner as to avoid arching ofloading
materials.
5. After test load has been in position for 24 hours, initial deflection readings
shall be taken.
6. Test load shall be removed immediately after initial deflection readings, and
final deflection readings shall be taken 24 hours after removal of the test load.
7. If the portion of the structure tested shows visible evidence of failure, the por-
tion tested shall be considered to have failed the test and no retesting of the pre-
viously tested portion shall be permitted.
8. If the portion of the structure tested shows no visible evidence of failure, the
following criteria shall be taken as indication of satisfactory behavior:
A. If measured maximum deflection a of a beam, floor or roof is less than
1,2!20,000h.
B. If measured maximum deflection a of a beam, floor or roof exceeds
11 2/20,000h, deflection recovery within 24 hours after removal of the test load shall
be at least 75 percent of the maximum deflection for nonprestressed concrete, or 80
percent for prestressed concrete.
9. In Section 2620 (e) 8 A and B, 11 for cantilevers shall be taken as two times the
distance from support to cantilever end, and deflection shall be adjusted for any
support movement.
I0. Nonprestressed concrete construction failing to show 75 percent recovery of
deflection as required by Section 2620 (e) 8 B may be retested not earlier than 72
hours after removal of the first test load. The portion of the structure tested shall be
considered satisfactory if:
A. The portion of the structure tested shows no visible evidence of failure in the
retest, and
B. Deflection recovery caused by second test load is at least 80 percent of the
maximum deflection in the second test.
II. Prestressed concrete construction shall not be retested.
(f) Members Other Than Flexural Members. [20.5] Members other than
flexural members preferably shall be investigated by analysis.
(g) Provision for Lower Load Rating. [20.6] If the structure under investiga-
tion does not satisfy conditions or criteria of Section 2620 (c), (e) 8 or (e) 10, the
building official may approve a lower load rating for that structure based on results
of the load test or analysis.
513
(h) Safety. [20.7] Load tests shall be conducted in such a manner as to provide
for safety of life and structure during the test.
No safety measures shall interfere with load test procedures or affect results.
Shotcrete
Sec. 2621. (a) General. Shotcrete shall be defined as mortar or concrete pneu-
matic·ally projected at high velocity onto a surface. Except as specified in this sec-
tion, shotcrete shall conform to the regulations of this chapter for plain concrete
or reinforced concrete.
(b) Proportions and Materials. Shotcrete proportions shall be selected that al-
low suitable placement procedures using the delivery equipment selected and shall
result infinished in-place hardened shotcrete meeting the strength requirements of
this code.
(c) Aggregate. Coarse aggregate, if used, shall not exceed 3!4 inch.
(d) Reinforcement. The maximum size of reinforcement shall be No.5 bars un-
less it can be demonstrated by preconstruction tests that adequate encasement of
larger bars can be achieved. When No.5 or smaller bars are used, there shall be a
minimum clearance between parallel reinforcement barsof2 1!2 inches. When bars
larger than No.5 are permitted, there shall be a minimum clearance between par-
t alief bars equal to six diameters of the bars used. When two curtains of steel are
provided, the curtain nearest the nozzle shall have a minimum spacing equal to 12
bar diameters and the remaining curtain shall have a minimum spacing of six bar
diameters.
EXCEPTION: Subject to the approval of the building official, reduced clear-
ances may be used where it can be demonstrated by preconstruction tests that ade-
quate encasement of the bars used in the design can be achieved.
Lap splices in reinforcing bars shall be by the noncontact lap splice method with
at least 2 inches clearance between bars. The building official may permit the use
of contact lap splices when necessary for the support of the reinforcing provided it
can be demonstrated by means of preconstruction testing, that adequate encase-
ment of the bars at the splice can be achieved, and provided that the splices are
placed so that a line through the center of the two spliced bars is perpendicular to
the sulface of the shotcrete work.
Shotcrete shall not he applied to spirally tied columns.
(e) Preconstruction Tests. When required by the building official a test panel
shall be shot, cured, cored or sawn, examined and tested prior to commencement of
the project. The sample panel shall be representative ofthe projectandsimulatejob
conditions as closely as possible. The panel thickness and reinforcing shall repro-
duce the thickest and most congested area specified in the structural design .It shall
be shot at the same angle, using the same nozzleman and with the same concrete
mix design that will be used on the project.
(f) Rebound. Any rebound or accumulated loose aggregate shall be remowd
from the surfaces to be covered prior to placing the initial or any succeeding layers
ofshotcrete. Rebound shall not be reused as aggregate.
514
(g) Joints. Except where permitted herein, unfinished work shall not he allowed
to standfor more than 30 minutes unless all edges are sloped to a thin edge. Before
placing additional material adjacent to previously applied work, sloping and
square edges shall be cleaned and wetted.
(h) Damage. An in-place shotcrete which exhibits sags or sloughs, segregation.
honeycombing, sand pockets or other obvious defects shall he removed andre-
placed.
(i) Curing. During the curing periods specified herein, shotcrete shall be main-
tained above 40°F. and in moist condition./n initial curing, shotcrete shall he kept
continuously moist for 24 hours after placement is complete. Final curing shall
continue for seven days after shotcreting,for three days if high-early-strength ce-
ment is used, or until the specified strength is obtained. Final curing shall consist of
a fog spray or an approved moisture-retaining cover or memhrane.ln sections ofa
depth in excess of 12 inches ,final curing shall be the same as that for initial curing.
(j) Strength Test. Strength test for shotcrete shall he made by an approved
aJ?ency on specimens which are representative of work and which have been water
soaked for at least 24 hours prior to testing. When the maximum size aggregate is
larger than 3!8 inch, specimens shall consist of not less than three ]-inch-diameter
cores or 3-inch cubes. When the maximum size aggregate is 3!8 inch or smaller,
specimens shall consist of not less than three 2-inch-diameter cores or 2-inch
cubes. Specimens shall he taken in accordance with one of the following:
/.From the in-place work: taken at least once each shift or less than one for each
50 cubic yards of shotcrete; or
2. From test panels: made not less than once each shift or not less than one for
each 50 cubic yards ofshotcrete placed. When the maximum size aggregate is larg-
er than 3!8 inch, the test panels shall have a minimum dimension of 18 by 18 inches.
When the maximum size aggregate is 3!8 inch or smaller, the test panels shall have a
minimum dimension of12 by 12 inches. Panels shall he gunned in the same position
as the work, during the course of the work and by nozzlemen doing the work. The
condition under which the panels are cured shall he the same as the work.
The average ofthree cores from a single panel shall he equal to or exceed 0.85 f:.
with no single core less than 0.75 f; .. The average ofthree cubes taken from a single
panel must equal or exceedf;. with no individual cube less than 0.88f; .. To check
testinJ? accuracy, locations represented by erratic core strengths may he retested.
(k) Inspections. I. During placement. When shotcrete is used for columns and
beams, a special inspector is required by Section 306 (a) 12. The special inspector
shall provide continuous inspection of the placement of the reinforcement and
shotcreting and shall submit a statement indicating compliance with the plans and
specifications.
2. Visual examination for structural soundness of in-place shotcrete. Com-
pleted shotcrete work shall he checked visually for reinforcing bar embedment,
voids, rock pockets, sand streaks and similar deficiencies by examining a minimum
of three 3-inch cores taken from three areas chosen by the design engineer which
represent the worst congestion of reinforcing bars occurring in the project. Extra
reinforcinJ? bars may he added to noncongested areas and cores may he taken from
515
these areas. The cores shall be examined by the special inspector and a report sub-
mitted to the building official prior to final approval of the shotcrete.
EXCEPTION: Shotcrete work fully supported on earth, minor repairs, and
when, in the opinion of the huildinf( official, no special hazard exists.
(I) Equipment. The equipment used in preconstruction testing shall be the same
equipment used in the work requiring such testing, unless substitute equipment is
Plain Concrete
Sec. 2622. (a) General. Plain concrete, other than fill, shall have a minimum
ultimate compressive strength at 28 days of2 ,000 pounds per square inch, and ma-
terial proportioning and placing shall conform to the requirements ofthis chapter.
Concrete made with lightweight aggregates may be used with strengths less than
2,000 pounds per square inch if it has been shown by tests or experience to have
sufficient strength and durability.
Provisions shall be made to care for temperature and shrinkage stresses either
by use of reinforcement or by means of joints.
Plain concrete construction shall conform to the detailed minimum require-
ments specified in this chapter.
Plain concrete shall not be used in Seismic Zone No.2, 3 or 4.
EXCEPTION: Plain concrete may he used for footinf(s of Group R, Division 3
Occupancies constructed in accordance with Section 2517.
(b) Wall Thickness. Except where justifying data are submitted, the thickness of
plain concrete walls shall not be less than 6 inches and the ratio of unsupported
height or length (whichever is the lesser) to thickness shall not be greater than 22.
(c) Design. Plain concrete walls shall be designed to withstand all vertical and
horizontal loads as specified in Chapter 23.
(d) Stresses. The allowable working stresses in plain concrete walls shall not ex-
ceed the following percentages of ultimate strength:
1. Compression .......................................... 0.25f:.
2. Tension .............................................. 1.6 Jr;
3. Shear ................................................ 0.02f:.
Minimum Slab Thickness

Sec. 2623. The minimum thickness of concrete floor slabs supported directly on
the ground shall not be less than3 1/ 2 inches.
Anchorage to Concrete
Sec. 2624. (a) Service Load Design. Bolts and headed stud anchors shall be sol-
idly cast in concrete and the service load shear and tension shall not exceed the val-
ues set forth in Table No. 26-E.
516
For combined tension and shear:
WHERE:
P.,. applied service tension load.
P1 Table No. 26-E service tension load.
\1, applied service shear load.
V1 Table No. 26-E service shear load.
(h) Strength Design. The factored loads on embedded anchor holts and headed
studs shall not exceed the design strengths determined by Section 2624 (c).
In addition to the load factors in Section 2609 (c), a multiplierof2 shall he used
(f special inspection is not provided, or of 1.3, if it is provided. When anchors are
embedded in the tension zone of a member, the load factors in Section 2609 (c)
shall have a multiplier of3 if special inspection is not provided, or of2, if it is pro-
vided.
(c) Strength of Anchors. The strength of concrete anchors shall he taken as the
average of 10 tests, approved by the building official ,for each concrete strength
and anchor size or calculated as the minimum of Ps or Pc in tension and \1, or 
Vc in shear when:
Ps 0.9 Abf;.
Pc rp).. jj'. (2.8A.,. + 4A 1),when edge distance is less than embedment
length, reduce proportionately. For multiple edge distances less than
the embedment length, use multiple reductions.
Vs .75 Aif~.
Vc ¢800 A h).. jj'.when loaded toward an edge greater than 10 diameters
away.
Vc = ¢2 7r de 2 A jj'.when loaded toward an edge less than 10 diameters
away.
For groups of anchors the concrete design shear strength shall he taken as the
smallest of:
I. The strength of the weakest stud times the number of studs.
2. The strength of the row of studs nearest the free edge in the direction of shear
times the number of rows.
3. The strength of the row farthest from the free edge in the direction of shear.
For shear loading toward an edge less than 10 diameters away, or tension or
shear not toward an edge less than 4 diameters away, reinforcing sufficient to
carry the load shall he provided to prevent failure of the concrete in tension. In no
case shall the edge distance he less than one third the above. The bearing area of
headed anchors shall he at least one and one-halftimes the shank area for anchors
of not over 120,000 psi yield strength.
When tension and shear act simultaneously, both the following shall he met:
517
WHERE:
A1, =
area (in square inches) ofbolt or stud. Must be used with the correspond-
ing steel properties to determine the weakest part ofthe assembly in ten-
sion. In shear, the insert leg need not he checked.
As the sloping area (in square inches) of an assumed failure swjace. The
swface to he that of a cone or truncated pyramid radiating at a 45 -de-
gree slope from the bearing edge of the anchor or anchor group to the
swface.
For thin sections with anchor groups, the failure swface shall he as-
sumed to follow the extension of this slope through to the jar side rather
than truncate as in A,.
A, = the area (in square inches) of the flat bottom of the truncated pyramid of
an assumed concrete.failure swface. When anchors in a group are closer
together than twice their embedded length, the.failure surface pyramid is
assumed to truncate at the anchor bearing edge rather than form sepa-
rate cones.
de distance .from the anchor axis to the free edge.
f: concrete strength, 6,000 pounds per square inch limit for design.
t~; .f'.\' ultimate tensile strength (in psi) of the holt, stud or insert leg wires. For
A307 holts or A/08 studs may he assumed to be 60,000.
P11 V" tensile, shear strength required due to factored loads (in pounds).
A I for normal weight, 0.75 for all lightweight and 0.85 for sand-light-
weight concrete.
<j> == strength-reductionfactor = 0.65.
EXCEPTION: When the anchor is attached to or hooked around reinj(JTcin[?
steel or otherwise terminated so as to effectively transferforces to reinji1rcin[? steel
which is designed to distribute jim·es and avert sudden local failure. <j> may he taken
as(J.I'i5.
Reinforced Concrete Structures Resisting Forces Induced by

~! Earthquake Motions [Chapter 21]
A.·h cross-sectional area of a structural member measured out-to-out of
transverse reinforcement, square inches.
area of concrete section, resisting shear, of an individual pier or horizon-
tal wall segment, square inches.
net area of concrete section bounded by web thickness and length of sec-
tion in the direction of shear force considered, square inches.
A; effective cross-sectional area within a joint [see Section 2625 (g) 3 A].
518
A,11 total cross-sectional area of transverse reinforcement (including cross-

ties) within spacing, s, and perpendicular to dimension, h.
A,. total cross-sectional area of shear reinforcement within spacing, s, and
perpendicular to longitudinal axis of structural member, square inches.
h effective compressive flange width of a structural member, inches.
h_. web width, or diameter of circular section, inches.
a effective depth of section.
dh bar diameter.
f; specified compressive strength of concrete, psi .
.1; specified yield strength of reinforcement, psi .
.f;.11 specified yield strength of transverse reinforcement, psi.
h overall thickness of structural member.
h, cross-sectional dimension of column core measured center-to-center of
confining reinforcement.
h.. height of entire wall (diaphragm) or of the segment of wall (diaphragm)
considered.
1<1 development length for a straight bar.
1, 11, development length for a bar with a standard hook as defined in Formula
(25-5).
/" minimum length, measured from joint face along axis of structural
member, over which transverse reinforcement must be provided, inches.
/_. length of entire wall (diaphragm) or of segment of wall (diaphragm)
considered in direction of shear force.
M1" probable flexural strength of members, with or without axial load, deter-
mined using the properties of the member at the joint faces assuming a
tensile strength in the longitudinal bars of at least 1.25 .t;. and a strength-
reduction factor <j> of 1.0.
M, portion of slab moment balanced by support moment.
s spacing of transverse reinforcement measured along the longitudinal
axis of the structural member, inches.
s" maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement, inches.
V nominal shear strength provided by concrete.
V" design shear force determined from Section 2625 (h) I A or B.
V11 nominal shear strength.
V11 factored shear force at section.
a. coefficient defining the relative contribution of concrete strength to wall
strength.
p ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement= A.Jhd.
pg ratio of total reinforcement area to cross-sectional area of column.
519
Pn ratio of distributed shear reinforcement on a plane perpendicular to

plane of A:v·
p_, ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to the core volume confined by
the spiral reinforcement (measured out-to-out).
Pv A,,./A,.v; where Asv is the projection onA,.v of area of distributed shear re-
inforcement crossing the plane of A.·v·
<j> strength-reduction factor.
(b) Definitions. [21.1] For the purposes of this section, certain terms are defined
as follows:
BASE OF STRUCTURE. See Section 2331.
CONFINED CORE is the area within the core defined by h,.
CROSS TIE is a continuous bar having a hook of not less than 135 degrees with
an extension of not less than six diameters (but not less than 3 inches) at one end and
a hook of not less than 90 degrees with an extension of not less than six diameters at
the other end. The hooks shall engage peripheral longitudinal bars. The 90-degree
hooks of two successive crossties engaging the same longitudinal bar shall be alter-
nated end for end.
DESIGN LOAD COMBINATIONS are combinations of factored loads and
forces specified in Sections 2609 (c) and 2625 (c) 4.
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH FOR A BAR WITH A STANDARD HOOK
is the shortest distance between the critical section (where the strength of the bar is
to be developed) and a tangent to the outer edge of the 90-degree hook.
FACTORED LOADS AND FORCES are the specified loads and forces modi-
fied by the factors in Sections 2609 (c) and 2625 (c) 4.
HOOP is a closed tie or continuously wound tie. A closed tie may be of several
reinforcing elements with 135-degree hooks having a six-diameter (but not less
than 3-inch) extension at each end. A continuously wound tie shall have at each end
a 135-degree hook with a six-diameter (but not less than 3-inch) extension that en-
gages the longitudinal reinforcement.
IMRF is an intermediate moment-resistingframe conforming to the provisions
of Section 2625 (k).
LIGHTWEIGHT-AGGREGATE CONCRETE is all-lightweight or
sanded-lightweight aggregate concrete made with lightweight aggregates.
SEISMIC HOOK is a 135-degree bend with a six-bar-diameter, but not less
than 3-inch, extension that engages the longitudinal reinforcement and projects
into the interior of the stirrup or hoop.
SHELL CONCRETE is concrete outside the transverse reinforcement confin-
ing the concrete.
SMRF is a special moment-resistingframe conforming to provisions of Section
2625, as they apply to moment-resisting frames.
SPECIFIED LATERAL FORCES are lateral forces corresponding to the ap-
propriate distribution of the design base shear force prescribed by the governing
code for earthquake-resistant design.
520
STRUCTURAL DIAPHRAGMS are structural members, such as floor and

roof slabs, which transmit inertial forces to lateral-force-resisting members.
STRUCTURAL TRUSSES are assemblages of reinforced concrete members
subjected primarily to axial forces.
STRUT is an element of a structural diaphragm used to provide continuity
around an opening in the diaphragm.
TIE ELEMENTS are elements which serve to transmit inertia forces and pre-
vent separation of such building components as footings and walls.
(c) General Requirements. [21.2]1. Scope. A. Section 2625 contains special
requirements for design and construction of reinforced concrete members of a
structure for which the design forces, related to earthquake motions, have been de-
termined on the basis of energy dissipation in the nonlinear range of response.
B. The provisions of Sections 260 I through 2617 shall apply except as modified
by the provisions of Section 2625.
C. In Seismic Zones Nos. 0 and I, the provisions ofSection 2625 shall not apply.
D. In Seismic Zone No.2, reinforced concrete frames resisting forces induced
hy earthquake motions shall he intermediate moment-resisting frames propor-
tioned to satisfy only Section 2625 (k) in addition to the requirements of Sections
2601 through 2618.
E. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, all structural reinforced concrete members
shall satisfy Section 2625 (c) through (i) in addition to the requirements of Sections
260 1 through 2617.
F. A reinforced concrete structural system not satisfying the requirements of this
section may be used if it is demonstrated by experimental evidence and analysis
that the proposed system will have strength and toughness equal to or exceeding
those provided by a comparable monolithic reinforced concrete structure satisfy-
ing this section.
2. Analysis and proportioning of structural members. A. The interaction of
all structural and nonstructural members which materially affect the linear and
nonlinear response of the structure to earthquake motions shall be considered in the
analysis.
B. Rigid members assumed not to be a part of the lateral-force-resisting system
may be used, provided their effect on the response of the system is considered and
accommodated in the structural design. Consequences of failure of structural and
nonstructural members which are not a part of the lateral-force-resisting system
shall also be considered.
C. Structural members below base of structure required to transmit to the foun-
dation forces resulting from earthquake effects shall also comply with the require-
ments of Section 2625.
D. All structural members assumed not to be part of the lateral-force-resisting
system shall conform to Section 2625 (i).
3. Strength-reduction factors. Strength-reduction factors shall be as given in
Section 2609 (d), except for the following:
521
The strength-reduction factor for axial compression and flexure shall be 0.5 for
all frame members with factored axial compressive forces exceeding (Ad:IIO) if
the transverse reinforcement does not conform to Section 2625 (e) 4.
4. Load factors. For earthquake loading, the load factors given in Equations
(9-2) and (9-3) shall he modified to:
U = 1.4 (D + L + E)
U = 0.9D ± 1.4E
5. Concrete in members resisting earthquake-induced forces. A. Compres-
sive strength/: shall not be less than 3,000 psi.
B. Compressive strength oflightweight-aggregate concrete used in design shall
not exceed 4,000 psi. Lightweight aggregate concrete with higher design compres-
sive strength may be used if demonstrated by experimental evidence that structural
members made with that lightweight aggregate concrete provide strength and
toughness equal to or exceeding those of comparable members made with nor-
mal-weight aggregate concrete of the same strength. In no case shall the compres-
sive strength of lightweight concrete used in design exceed 6,000 psi.
6. Reinforcement in members resisting earthquake-induced forces. Rein-
forcement resisting earthquake-induced flexural and axial forces in frame mem-
bers and in wall boundary members shall comply with low alloy A 706. Billet steel
A 615 Grades 40 and 60 reinforcement may be used in these members if (I) the
actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed the specified yield strength
by more than 18,000 psi (retests shall not exceed this value by more than an addi-
tiona\3,000 psi), and (2) the ratio of the actual ultimate tensile stress to the actual
tensile yield strength is not less than 1.25.
Reinforcement required by factored load combinations which include earth-
quake effect shall not be welded except as specified in Section 2625 (d) 2 D and (e)
3 B. Welding shall comply with Uniform Building Code Standard No. 26-8. Weld-
ing of stirrups, ties, inserts or other similar elements to longitudinal reinforcing
hars shall not he permitted.
(d) Flexural Members of Frames. [21.3]1. Scope. Requirements of this sec-
tion apply to frame members (I) resisting earthquake-induced forces and (2) pro-
portioned primarily to resist flexure. These frame members shall also satisfy the
following conditions:
A. Factored axial compressive force on the member shall not exceed (Ad:.n 0).
B. Clear span for the members shall not be less than four times its effective depth.
C. The width-to-depth ratio shall not be less than 0.3.
D. The width shall not be (I) less than I 0 inches and (2) more than the width of
the supporting member (measured on a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis
of the flexural member) plus distances on each side of the supporting member not
exceeding three fourths of the depth of the flexural member.
2. Longitudinal reinforcement. A. At any section of a flexural member and for
the top as well as for bottom reinforcement, the amount of reinforcement shall not
be less than (200 h.,d!f...). The reinforcement ratio, p, shall not exceed 0.025. At
least two bars shall be .provided continuously at both top and bottom.
522
B. Positive-moment strength at joint face shall not be less than one half of the
negative-moment strength provided at that face of the joint. Neither the negative
nor the positive-moment strength at any section along member length shall be less
than one fourth the maximum moment strength provided at face of either joint.
C. Lap splices of flexural reinforcement shall be permitted only if hoop or spiral
reinforcement is provided over the lap length. Maximum spacing of the transverse
reinforcement enclosing the lapped bars shall not exceed d/4 or 4 inches. Lap
splices shall not be used (I) within the joints, (2) within a distance of twice the
member depth from the face of joint, and (3) at locations where analysis indicates
flexural yielding caused by inelastic lateral displacements of the frame.
D. Welded splices and mechanical connections conforming to Sections 2612 (o)
3 A through D may be used for splicing, provided not more than alternate bars in
each layer of longitudinal reinforcement are spliced at a section and the cen-
ter-to-center distance between splices of adjacent bars is 24 inches or more mea-
sured along the longitudinal axis of the frame member.
3. Transverse reinforcement. A. Hoops shall be provided in the following re-
gions of frame members:
(i) Over a length equal to twice the member depth measured from the face ofthe
supporting member toward midspan, at both ends of the flexural members.
(ii) Over lengths equal to twice the member depth on both sides of a section
where flexural yielding may occur in connection with inelastic lateral displace-
ments of the frame.
B. The first hoop shall be located not more than 2 inches from the face of a sup-
porting member. Maximum spacing of the hoops shall not exceed (I) d/4, (2) eight
times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bars, (3) 24 times the diameter of the
hoop bars, and (4) 12 inches.
C. Where hoops are required, longitudinal bars on the perimeter shall have later-
al support conforming to Section 2607 (k) 3 C.
D. Where hoops are not required, stirrups with /35-degree seismic hooks shall
be spaced at no more than d/2 throughout the length of the member.
E. Hoops in flexural members may be made up of two pieces of reinforcement: a :J
U-stirrup having 135-degree hooks with six-diameter (but not less than 3-inch) ex- I!
tensions anchored in the confined core and a cross tie to make a closed hoop. Con- !'!\
secutive cross ties engaging the same longitudinal bars shall have their 90-degree
hooks at opposite sides of the flexural member. If the longitudinal reinforcing bars
secured by the cross ties are confined by a slab on only one side ofthe flexural frame
member, the 90-degree hooks of the cross ties shall all be placed on that side.
(e) Frame Members Subjected to Bending and Axial Load. [21.4]1. Scope.
The requirements of this section apply to all frame members (I) resisting earth-
quake-induced forces and (2) having a factored axial force exceeding Ag{~/10.
These frame members shall also satisfy the following conditions:
A. The shortest cross-sectional dimension, measured on a straight line passing
through the geometric centroid, shall not be less than 12 inches.
523
B. The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to the perpendicular di-

mension shall not be less than 0.4.
2. Minimum flexural strength of columns. A. Flexural strength of any column
proportioned to resist a factored axial compressive force exceeding AJ:.fJ 0 shall
satisfy Section 2625 (e) 2 B or C.
Lateral strength and stiffness of columns not satisfying Section 2625 (e) 2 B
shall be ignored in determining the calculated strength and stiffness of the structure
but shall conform to Section 2625 (i).
B. The flexural strengths of the columns shall satisfy Formula (25-1 ).
~M, ~ ( 6 j 5 )~MK (25-1)
WHERE:
W, = sum of moments, at the center of the joint, corresponding to the design
flexural strength of the columns framing into that joint. Column flexural
strength shall be calculated for the factored axial force, consistent with
the direction of the lateral forces considered, resulting in the lowest flex-
ural strength.
WK = sum of moments, at the center of the joint, corresponding to the design
flexural strengths of the girders framing into that joint.
Flexural strengths shall be summed such that the column moments oppose the
beam moments. Formula (25-1) shall be satisfied for beam moments acting in both
directions in the vertical plane of the frame considered.
C. If Section 2625 (e) 2 B is not satisfied at a joint, columns supporting reactions
from that joint shall be provided with transverse reinforcement as specified in Sec-
tion 2625 (e) 4 over their full height.
3. Longitudinal reinforcement. A. The reinforcement ratio pg shall not be less
than 0.01 and shall not exceed 0.06.
B. Lap splices are permitted only within the center half of the member length.
They shall he proportioned as Class A tension splices in accordance with Section
2612 and shall have transverse reinforcement over the full lap splice length in ac-
cordance with Section 2625 (e) 4. Welded splices and mechanical connections con-
forming to Section 2612 (o) 3 A through D may be used for splicing the
reinforcement at any section, provided not more than alternate longitudinal bars
are spliced at a section and the distance between splices is 24 inches or more along
the longitudinal axis of the reinforcement.
4. Transverse reinforcement. A. Transverse reinforcement as specified below
shall be provided unless a larger amount is required by Section 2625 (h).
(i) The volumetric ratio of spiral or circular hoop reinforcement, Ps· shall not be
less than that indicated by Formula (25-2).
Ps = 0.12J'Jfyh (25-2)
and shall not be less than that required by Formula (I 0-5).
( ii) The total cross-sectional area of rectangular hoop reinforcement shall not be
less than that given by Formulas (25-3) and (25-4).
524
Ash = 0.3 (sh, f:/.t;,h>[cAxfA,h) - 1] (25-3)
Ash = 0.09 (sh, f://vh) (25-4)

(iii) Transverse reinforcement may be provided by single or overlapping hoops.
Crossties of the same bar size and spacing as the hoops may be used. Each end of
the crosstie shall engage a peripheral longitudinal reinforcing bar and be secured to
the peripheral hoop. Consecutive cross ties shall be alternated end for end along the
longitudinal reinforcement.
(iv) If the design strength of member core satisfies the requirement of the speci-
fied loading combinations including earthquake effect, Formulas (25-3) and
(I 0-5) need not be satisfied.
( v) Any area ofa column which .for architectural purposes, extends more than 4
inches beyond the confined core shall have minimum reinforcement as requiredfor
nonseismic columns as specified in Section 2625 (i).
(vi) Where the calculated point of contraflexure is not within the middle half of
the member clear height, provide transverse reinforcement as specified in Section
2625 (e) 4 A (i) through (iii) over the full height of the member.
B. Transverse reinforcement shall be spaced at distances not exceeding 4 inches.
C. Cross ties or legs of overlapping hoops shall not be spaced more than 14 inches
on center in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the structural
member.
D. Transverse reinforcement in amount specified in Section 2625 (e) 4 A
through C shall be provided over a length /0 from each joint face and on both sides
of any section where flexural yielding may occur in connection with inelastic later-
al displacements of the frame. The length 10 shall not be less than ( 1) the depth of the
member at the joint face or at the section where flexural yielding may occur, (2) one
sixth of the clear span of the member, and (3) 18 inches.
E. Columns supporting reactions from discontinued stiff members, such as
walls, shall be provided with transverse reinforcement as specified in Sections
2625 (e) 4 A through Cover their full height beneath the level at which the disconti-
nuity occurs if the factored axial compressive force in these members, including
earthquake effect, exceeds AJ:./1 0. Transverse reinforcement as specified in Sec- ':
tion 2625 (e) 4 A through C shall extend into the discontinued member for at least
the development length of the largest longitudinal reinforcement in the column in
accordance with Section 2625 (g) 4. If the lower end of the column terminates on a
wall, transverse reinforcement as specified in Section 2625 (e) 4 A through C shall
extend into the wall for at least the development length of the largest longitudinal
reinforcement in the column at the point of termination. If the column terminates
on a footing or mat, transverse reinforcement as specified in Section 2625 (e) 4 A
through C shall extend at least 12 inches into the footing or mat.
F. At any section where the nominal strength, <PPn, of the column is less than the
sum of the shears V, computed in accordance with Section 2625 (h) 1 for all the
beams framing into the column above the level under consideration, transverse re-
inforcement as specified in Section 2625 (e) 4 A through C shall he provided. For
525
heamsji·aming into opposite sides of the column, the moment components may he
assumed to he ofopposite sign. For the determination ofthe nominal strength, <j>P,,
ofthe column, these moments may he assumed to result from the deformation ofthe
ji·ame in any one principal axis.
G. Where transverse reinforcement as specified in Section 2625 (e) 4 A through
Cis not provided throughout the full length ofthe column, the remainder of the col-
umn (engtn snail contain spiral or hoop reinforcement with center-to-center spac-
ing not exceeding the smaller of six times the diameter of the longitudinal column
bars or 6 inches.
(f) Shear Walls, Diaphragms and Trusses. [21.5]1. Scope. The requirements
of this section apply to shear walls and trusses serving as parts of the earth-
quake-force-resisting systems as well as to diaphragms, struts, ties, chords and col-
lector members which transmit forces induced by earthquake.
2. Reinforcement. A. The reinforcement ratio, Pv• for shear walls shall not be
less than 0.0025 along the longitudinal and transverse axes. Reinforcement spac-
ing each way shall not exceed 18 inches. Reinforcement provided for shear
strength shall be continuous and shall be distributed across the shear plane.
B. At least two curtains of reinforcement shall be used in a wall if the in-plane
factored shear force assigned to the wall exceeds 2A,v j f :..
C. Structural-truss members, struts, ties and collector members with compres-
sive stresses exceeding 0.2f:. shall have special transverse reinforcement, as spe-
cified in Section 2625 (e) 4, over the total length of the member. The special
transverse reinforcement may be discontinued at a section where the calculated
compressive stress is less than 0.15 f: .. Stresses shall be calculated for the factored
forces using a linearly elastic model and gross-section properties of the members
considered.
D. All continuous reinforcement in shear walls, diaphragms, trusses, struts, ties,
chords and collector members shall be anchored or spliced in accordance with the
provisions for reinforcement in tension as specified in Section 2625 (g) 4. Splices
in horizontal reinforcement shall he staggered. Splices in two curtains where used
shall not occur in the same location.
3. Boundary members for shear walls and diaphragms. A. Boundary mem-
bers shall be provided at boundaries and edges around openings of shear walls and
diaphragms for which the maximum extreme fiber stress, corresponding to fac-
tored forces, including earthquake effect, exceeds 0.2f~ unless the entire wall or
diaphragm member is reinforced to satisfy Section 2625 (e) 4 A through C. The
boundary member may be discontinued where the calculated compressive stress is
less than 0.15 f: . Stresses may be calculated for the factored forces using a linearly
elastic model and gross-section properties.
B. Boundary members, where required, shall have transverse reinforcement as
specified in Section 2625 (e) 4 A through C.
C. Boundary members of shear walls shall be proportioned to carry all factored
gravity loads on the wall, including tributary loads and self-weight, as well as the
526
vertical force required to resist overturning moment calculated from factored

forces related to earthquake effects.
D. Boundary members of structural diaphragms shall be proportioned to resist
the sum of the factored axial force acting in the plane of the diaphragm and the force
obtained from dividing the factored moment at the section by the distance between
the edges of the diaphragm at that section.
E. Transverse reinforcement in walls with boundary members shall be anchored
within the confined core of the boundary member to develop the yield stress in ten-
sion of the transverse reinforcement.
Except when V11 in the plane of the wall is less than Av j f :. , transverse rein-
forcement terminating at the edges of structural shear walls without boundary
members shall have a standard hook engaging the edge reinforcement, or the edge
reinforcement shall be enclosed in "U" stirrups having the same size and spacing
as, and spliced to, the transverse reinforcement.
F. Structural steel members conforming to Chapter 27 and encased monolithi-
cally in the walls at the edges may be used for boundary members, provided ade-
quate shear transfer is provided between the steel and the concrete.
4. Construction joints. All construction joints in walls and diaphragms shall
conform to Section 2606 (d), and contact surfaces shall be roughened as specified
in Section 2611 (h) 9.
5. Coupling Beams. Horizontal members with clear span-to-effective-depth ra-
tio (In/d) ofless than 4 andfactored shearforce V11 exceeding 4 j f: b,d and which
interconnect shear walls shall be provided with special shear reinforcement as fol-
lows:
A. Symmetrical diagonal shear reinforcement shall be provided to extend diago-
nally across the full length of the member and located within the confined concrete
core as specified in Section 2625 (d) 3.
B. The required area ofone leg ofthe diagonal reinforcement Avd shall not be less
than
VII
2fv sina
WHERE:
Vu factored shear force.
f.· yield stress of diagonal reinforcement.
a angle between diagonal reinforcement and longitudinal axis ofthe mem-
ber.
C. Flexural strength contribution by the diagonal reinforcement shall be in-
cluded in the flexural capacity calculation of the memho:
6. Discontinuous walls. Columns supporting discontinuous wall elements shall
be reinforced in accordance with Section 2625 (e) 4 E.
527
7. A cast-in-place topping on a precast floor system may serve as the dia-

phragm. provided the cast-in-place topping acting alone is proportioned and de-
tailed to resist the design forces.
8. Minimum thickness of diaphragms. Diaphragms used to resist prescribed
latera/forces shall not be less than 2 inches thick. Topping slabs placed over pre-
cast floor and roof elements shall not be less than 2 112 inches thick.
9. Wall piers. A. Wall piers not designed as part of a special moment-resisting
frame shall have transverse reinforcement designed to satisfy the requirements in
Section 2625 (t) 9 B.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Wall piers that satisfy Section 2625 (i).
2. Wall piers along a wall line within a story where other shear wall segments pro-
vide lateral support to the wall piers, and such segments have a total stiffness of at
least six times the sum of the stiffnesses of all the wall piers.
B. Transverse reinforcement shall be designed to resist the shear forces deter-
mined from Section 2625 (h) I B and 2 A. When the axial compressive force, in-
cluding earthquake effects, is less than AR J:. /20, transverse reinforcement in wall
piers may have standard hooks at each end in lieu of hoops. Spacing of transverse
reinforcement shall not exceed 6 inches. Transverse reinforcement shall be ex-
tended beyond the pier clear height for at least the development length of the largest
longitudinal reinforcement in the wall pier.
C. Wall segments with horizontal length-to-thickness ratio less than 2 11z shall be
designed as columns.
(g) Joints of Frames. [21.6]1. General requirements. A. Forces in longitudi-
nal beam reinforcement at the joint face shall be determined by assuming that the
stress in the flexural tensile reinforcement is 1.25 /y.
B. Strength of joint shall be governed by the appropriate strength-reduction fac-
tors specified in Section 2609 (d).
C. Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminated in a column shall be extended to
the far face of the confined column core and anchored in tension according to Sec-
tion 2625 (g) 4, and in compression according to Section 2612.
D. Where longitudinal beam reinforcing bars extend through a joint. the column
depth in the direction of loading shall not be less than 20 times the diameter of the
largest longitudinal bar.
2. Transverse reinforcement. A. Transverse hoop reinforcement as specified
in Section 2625 (e) 4 shall be provided within the joint, unless the joint is confined
by structural members as specified in Section 2625 (g) 2 B.
B. Within the depth of the shallowest framing member, transverse reinforce-
ment equal to at least one half the amount required by Section 2625 (e) 4 A shall be
provided where members frame into all four sides of the joint and where each
member width is at least three fourths the column width. At these locations, the
spacing specified in Section 2625 (e) 4 B may be increased but shall not exceed 6
inches.
C. Transverse reinforcement as required by Section 2625 (e) 4 shall be provided
through the joint to provide confinement for longitudinal beam reinforcement out-
528
side the column core if such confinement is not provided by a beam framing into the
joint.
3. Shear strength. A. The nominal shear strength of the joint shall not exceed
the forces specified below for normal-weight aggregate concrete. Ill.
For joints confined on all four faces ........................ 20 //; 111
For joints confined on three faces or on two opposite faces ...... 15 Jf'rA;
For others ............................................ 12 /r; A 1
WHERE:
Aj = effective cross-sectional area within a joint in a plane parallel to the
plane of the reinforcement generating shear in the joint. The joint depth
shall be the overall depth of the column. Where a beam frames into a sup-
port of larger width, the effective width of the joint shall not exceed the
smaller of
I. Beam width plus the joint depth,
2. Twice the smaller perpendicular distance from the longitudinal axis of
the beam to the column side.
A joint is considered to be confined if such confining members frame into all
faces of the joint.
A member that frames into a face is considered to provide confinement to the ···
joint if at least three fourths of the face of the joint is covered by the framing mem- 1111!
ber.
B. For lightweight aggregate concrete, the nominal shear strength of the joint
shall not exceed three fourths of the limits given in Section 2625 (g) 3 A.
4. Development length for reinforcement in tension. A. The development
length, ldh• for a bar with a standard 90-degree hook in normal-weight aggregate
concrete shall not be less than Sdh, 6 inches, and the length required by Formula
(25-5).
tdh = !A/65 [f; (25-5)

for bar sizes No. 3 through No. II.
For lightweight aggregate concrete, the development length for a bar with a stan-
dard 90-degree hook shall not be less than 10£"4, 7.5 inches, and 1.25 times that re-
quired by Formula (25-5).
The 90-degree hook shall be located within the confined core of a column or of a
boundary member.
B. For bar sizes No. 3 through No. II, the development length, /d, for a straight
bar shall not be less than (I) 2.5 times the length required by Section 2625 (g) 4 A if
the depth of the concrete cast in one lift beneath the bar does not exceed 12 inches,
and (2) 3.5 times the length required by Section 2625 (g) 4 A if the depth of the
concrete cast in one lift beneath the bar exceeds 12 inches.
529
C. Straight bars terminated at a joint shall pass through the confined core of a
column or of a boundary member. Any portion of the straight embedment length
not within the confined core shall be increased by a factor of 1.6.
(h) Shear-strength Requirements. [21.7]1. Design forces. A. Frame mem-
bers subjected primarily to bending. The design shear forces Ve shall be deter-
mined from consideration of the static forces on the portion of the member between
faces of the joint. It shall be assumed that moments of opposite sign correspon<"lmg
to probable strength M,, act at the joint faces and that the member is loaded with the
tributary gravity load along its span.
B. Frame members subjected to combined bending and axial load. The de-
sign shear force Ve shall be determined from the consideration of the maximum
forces that can be generated at the faces of the joints at each end of the member.
These joint forces shall be determined using the maximum probable moment
strengths, M,,, of the member associated with the range of factored axial loads on
the member. The member shear need not exceed those determined from joint
strengths based on the probable moment strength, M,,, of the transverse members
framing in the joint. In no case shall Ve be less than the factored shear determined by
analysis of the structure.
C. Shear walls, diaphragms and trusses. The design shear force V,, shall be
obtained from the lateral load analysis in accordance with the factored loads and
combinations specified in Section 2609 (c) and as modified in Section 2625 (c) 4.
2. Transverse reinforcement in frame members. A. For determining there-
quired transverse reinforcement in frame members in which the earthquake-in-
duced shear force represents one half or more of total design shear, the quantity V,.
shall be assumed to be zero if the factored axial compressive force including earth-
quake effects is less than (Ad',/ 20). Earthquake-induced shear force is the shear
induced by moments of opposite sign corresponding to probable strength acting at
the joint faces, calculated in accordance with Section 2625 (h) I.
B. Stirrups orties required to resist shear shall be hoops over lengths of members
as specified in Section 2625 (d) 3, (e) 4 and (g) 2.
3. Shear strength of shear walls and diaphragms. A. The nominal shear
strength, V,,for shear walls and diaphragms shall be determined in accordance
with Formula (25-6) or (25-7).
Where the ratio of (h~.flw) is 2 or greater:
Vn = Acv (2 vfc + PJy) (25-6)
Where the ratio of (~./iw) is less than 2:
(25-7)
a. varies linearly from 3.0 for~ llw = 1.5 to 2.0 for ~·llw = 2.0.
B. In Section 2625 (h) 3 A, value of ratio (~./lw) used for determining V, for seg-
ments of a wall or diaphragm shall be the largest of the ratios for the entire wall
(diaphragm) and the segment of wall (diaphragm) considered.
C. Walls (diaphragms) shall have distributed shear reinforcement providing re-
sistance in two orthogonal directions in the plane of the wall (diaphragm). If the
530
ratio (h..,,/ I.,) does not exceed 2.0, reinforcement ratio Pv shall not be less than rein-
forcement ratio Pn.
D. Nominal shear strength of all wall piers sharing a common lateral force shall
not be assumed to exceed SAC\' ff,.where Ac·v is the total cross-sectional area and
the nominal shear strength of any one of the individual wall piers shall not be as-
sumed to exceed IOA.cp ff,.where Acp represents the cross-sectional area of the
pier considered.
E. Nominal shear strength of horizontal wall segments shall not be assumed to
exceed lOA.c·r ff,.where Acp represents the cross-sectional area of a horizontal
wall segment.
( i) Frame Members Not Part of the Lateral-force-resisting System. [21.8 j All
frame memhers assumed not to he part of the latera/force-resisting system shall
conform to the requirements of Section 2337 (h) 4. Such members shall satisfy the
minimum reinforcement requirements of Sections 2607,2610,2611,2625 (d) 2 A
and (j) 2 A.
(j) Inspection. For moment frames resisting design seismic load in structures
within Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, a specially qualified inspector who will provide
reports to the person responsible for the structural design shall provide continu-
ous inspection (~(the placement ofthe reinforcement and concrete and shall suhmit
a certificate indicating compliance with the plans and specifications.
(k) Requirements for Frames in Seismic Zone No.2. [21.9]1./n Seismic Zone
No. 2, structural frames proportioned to resist forces induced by earthquake mo-
tions shall satisfy the requirements of Section 2625 (k) in addition to those of Sec-
tions 260 I through 2618.
2. Reinforcement details in a frame member shall satisfy Section 2625 (k) 4 if
the factored compressive axial load for the member does not exceed (Agf'cll 0). If
the factored compressive axial load is larger, frame reinforcement details shall sat-
isfy Section 2625 (k) 5 unless the member has spiral reinforcement according to
Formula (10-5). If a two-way slab system without beams is treated as part of a
frame-resisting earthquake effect, reinforcement details in any span resisting mo-
ments caused by lateral force shall satisfy Section 2625 (k) 6.
3. Design shear strength of beams, columns and two-way slabs resisting earth-
quake effect shall not be less than either (I) the sum of the shear associated with
development of nominal moment strengths of the member at each restrained end
of the clear span and the shear calculated for gravity loads, or (2) the maximum
shear obtained from design load combinations which include earthquake effect E,
with E assumed to be twice that prescribed in Section 2312.
4. Beams. A. The positive-moment strength at the face of the joint shall not be
less than one third the negative-moment strength provided at that face of the joint.
Neither the negative- nor the positive-moment strength at any section along the
length of the member shall be less than one fifth the maximum moment strength
provided at the face of either joint.
531
B. At both ends of the member, stirrups shall be provided over lengths equal to
twice the member depth measured from the face of the supporting member toward
mid-span. The first stirrup shall be located at not more than 2 inches from the face
of the supporting member. Maximum stirrup spacing shall not exceed (I) d/4, (2)
eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar enclosed, (3) 24 times the
diameter of the stirrup bar, and (4) 12 inches.
C. Stirrups shall be placed at not more than d/2 throughout the length of the
member.
5. Columns. A. Maximum tie spacing shall not exceed s0 over a length /0 mea-
sured from the joint face. Spacing s0 shall not exceed (I) eight times the diameter
of the smallest longitudinal bar enclosed, (2) 24 times the diameter of the tie bar,
(3) one half of the smallest cross-sectional dimension of the frame member, and
(4) 12 inches. Length 10 shall not be less than (I) one sixth of the clear span of the
member, (2) maximum cross-sectional dimension of the member, and (3) 18 in-
ches.
B. The first tie shall be located at not more than s,,/2 from the joint face.
C. Joint reinforcement shall conform to Section 2611 (I) 2.
D. Tie spacing shall not exceed twice the spacings s0 •
6. Two-way slabs without beams. A. Factored slab moment at support related
to earthquake effect shall be determined for load combinations defined by Formu-
las (9-2) and (9-3). All reinforcement provided to resist Ms. the portion of slab mo-
ment balanced by support moment, shall be placed within the column strip defined
in Section 2613 (c) I.
B. The fraction, defined by Formula ( 13-1 ), of moment Ms shall be resisted by
reinforcement placed within the effective width specified in Section 2613 (d) 5.
C. Not less than one half of the reinforcement in the column strip at support shall
be placed within the effective slab width specified in Section 2613 (d) 5.
D. Not less than one fourth ofthe top reinforcement at the support in the column
strip shall be continuous throughout the span.
E. Continuous bottom reinforcement in the column strip shall not be less than
one third of the top reinforcement at the support in the column strip.
F. Not less than one half of all bottom reinforcement at midspan shall be contin-
uous and shall develop its yield strength at face of support as defined in Section
2613 (h) 2 E.
G. At discontinuous edges of the slab, all top and bottom reinforcement at sup-
port shall be developed at the face of support as defined in Section 2613 (h) 2 E.
Alternate Design Method [Appendix A]

Sec. 2626. (a) Notation. [A.O] The following symbols and notations apply only
to the provisions of this section:
A1 loaded area.
A2 maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that is geometri-
cally similar to and concentric with the loaded area.
532
1991 UNIFORM BU!LDING CODE 2626
Av area of shear reinforcement within a distance s, square inches.

b width of compression face of member, inches.
b0 perimeter of critical section for slabs and footings, inches.
bw web width, or diameter of circular section, inches.
forcement, inches.
Ec modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi. See Section 2608 (f).
£., modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, psi. See Section 2608 (f).
J:. specified compressive strength of concrete, psi. See Section 2604.
[f; square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
fer average splitting tensile strength oflightweight aggregate concrete, psi.
See Section 2604 (b).
Is permissible tensile stress in reinforcement, psi.
/y specified yield strength of reinforcement, psi.
M design moment.
n modular ratio of elasticity.
E.Jf....
N design axial load normal to cross section occurring simultaneously with
V; to be taken as positive for compression, negative for tension and to
include effects of tension due to creep and shrinkage.
s spacing of shear reinforcement in direction parallel to longitudinal rein-
forcement, inches.
v design shear stress.
Vc permissible shear stress carried by concrete, psi.
vh permissible horizontal shear stress, psi.
V design shear force at section.
~c ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load or reaction area.
a angle between inclined stirrups and longitudinal axis of member.
p = ratio of tension reinforcement.
A.,/bd.
<j> strength-reduction factor. See Section 2626 (c).
(b) Scope. [A.l] Nonprestressed reinforced concrete members may be designed
using service loads (without load factors) and permissible service load stresses in
accordance with provisions of this section. For design of members not covered by
this section, appropriate provisions of this code shall apply.
All applicable provisions of this code for nonprestressed concrete, except Sec-
tion 2608 (e), shall apply to members designed by the alternate design method.
Flexural members shall meet requirements for deflection control in Section 2609
(f) and requirements of Section 2610 (e) through (h) of this code.
(c) General. [A.2] Load factors and strength-reduction factors <j> shall be taken
as unity for members designed by the alternate design method.
533
Members may be proportioned for 75 percent of capacities required by other

parts of the section when considering wind or earthquake forces combined with
other loads, provided the resulting section is not less than that required for the com-
bination of dead and live load.
When dead load reduces effects of other loads, members shall be designed for 85
percent of dead load in combination with the other loads.
(d) Permissible Service Load Stresses. [A.3]1. Stresses in concrete shall not
exceed the following:
A. Flexure.
Extreme fiber stress in compression
B. Shear.t
Beams and one-way slabs and footings:
Shear carried by concrete, v, 1.1 /r:
Maximum shear carried by
concrete plus shear reinforcement .................. v, + 4.4 JJ;
Joists.*
Shear carried by concrete, v, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 j{;
Two-way slabs and footings:
Shear carried by concrete, v,::f. ................... (I + 2/P,) /t; ,
..................................... but not greater than 2 jf ;.
\I c. Bearing on loaded area** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 r
t For more detailed calculation of shear stress carried by concrete v, and shear values for
lightweight aggregate concrete, see Section 2626 (i).
*Designed in accordance with Section 2608 (I) of this code.
i=If shear reinforcement is provided, see Section 2626 (I) 4 and 5.
**When the supporting surface is wider on all sides than the loaded area, permissible bear-
ing stress on the loaded area may be increased by j A2/ A 1 but not more than 2. When
the supporting surface is sloped or stepped, A2 may be taken as the area of the lower base
of the largest frustum of a right pyramid or cone contained wholly within the support and
having for its upper base the loaded area and having side slopes of I vertical to 2 horizon-
tal.
2. Tensile stress in reinforcement]; shall not exceed the following:
A. Grade 40 or Grade 50 reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,000 psi
B. Grade 60 reinforcement or greater and welded wire fabric
(smoothed or deformed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,000 psi
C. For flexural reinforcement, 3/ 8 inch or less in diameter,
in one-way slabs of not more than 12-foot span
but not greater than 30,000 psi ............................. 0.50f,.
(e) Development and Splices of Reinforcement. [A.4] Development and
splices of reinforcement shall be as required in Section 2612. In satisfying require-
ments of Section 2612 (1), Mn shall be taken as computed moment capacity assum-
534
ing all positive moment tension reinforcement at the section to be stressed to the
permissible tensile stress.fs, and Vu shall be taken as unfactored shear force at the
section.
(I) Flexure. [A.5] For investigation of stresses at service loads, straight-line
theory (for flexure) shall be used with the following assumptions:
I. Strains vary linearly as the distance from the neutral axis, except for deep flex-
ural members with overall depth-span ratios greater than 2:5 for continuous spans
and4:5 for simple spans, a nonlinear distribution of strain shall be considered. [See
Section 2610 (h).)
2. Stress-strain relationship of concrete is a straight line under service loads
within permissible service load stresses.
3. In reinforced concrete members, concrete resists no tension.
4. Modular ratio, n = E.JEc. may be taken as the nearest whole number (but not
less than 6). Except in calculations for deflections, value of n for lightweight con-
crete shall be assumed to be the same as for normal-weight concrete of the same
strength.
5. In doubly reinforced flexural members, an effective modular ratio of 2 E.JEc
shall be used to transform compression reinforcement for stress computations.
Compressive stress in such reinforcement shall not exceed permissible tensile
stress.
(g) Compression Members with or without Flexure. [A.6] Combined flexure
and axial load capacity of compression members shall be taken as 40 percent of that
computed in accordance with provisions in Section 2610.
Slenderness effects shall be included according to requirements of Section 2610
(k) and (1). In Formulas ( l 0-7) and ( l 0-8), the term Pu shall be replaced by 2.5 times
the design axial load, and shall be taken equal to 1.0.
Walls shall be designed in accordance with Section 2614 with flexure and axial
load capacities taken as 40 percent of that computed using Section 2614. In
Formula ( 14-1 ), shall be taken equal to 1.0.
(h) Shear and Torsion. [A.7] Design shear stress v shall be computed by:
v =--
v (26-l)
b"d
where V is design shear force at section considered.
When the reaction, in direction of applied shear, introduces compression into the
end regions of a member, sections located Jess than a distanced from face of sup-
port may be designed for the same shear v as that computed at a distance d.
Whenever applicable, effects of torsion, in accordance with provisions of Sec-
tion 2611, shall be added. Shear and torsional moment strengths provided by con-
crete and limiting maximum strengths for torsion shall be taken as 55 percent of the
values given in Section 2611.
535
(i) Shear Stress Carried by Concrete. 1. For members subject to shear and
flexure only, shear stress carried by concrete Vc shall not exceed 1.1 jf ~ unless a
more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Section 2626 (i) 4.
2. For members subject to axial compression, shear stress carried by concrete Vc
shall not exceed 1.1 j f ;. unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance
with Section 2626 (i) 5.
3. For members subject to significant axial tension, shear reinforcement shall be
designed to carry total shear, unless a more detailed calculation is made using
v,. = 1.1 ( 1 + 0.004 ~) Jt:. (26-2)
where N is negative for tension. Quantity NIA8 shall be expressed in psi.

4. For members subject to shear and flexure only, Vc may be computed by
Vc = JJ: + 1,300 Qw ~ (26-3)
but Vc shall not exceed 1.9 JJ~. Quantity Vd/M shall not be taken greater than 1.0
where M is design moment occurring simultaneously with Fat section considered.
5. For members subject to axial compression, vc may be computed by
Vc = 1.1 ( 1 + 0.0006 ~) JJ: (26-4)
Quantity NIA8 shall be expressed in psi.

6. Shear stresses carried by concrete Vc apply to normal-weight concrete. When
lightweight aggregate concrete is used, one of the following modifications shall
apply:
A. Whenj;., is specified and concrete is proportioned in accordance with Section
2604 (c),j;.,/6.7 shall be substituted for [f;, but the value ofj;.,/6.7 shall not ex-
ceed Jt:.
B. Whenj;., is not specified, the value of JJ:.
shall be multiplied by 0.75 for
all-lightweight concrete and by 0.85 for sand-lightweightconcrete. Linear interpo-
lation may be applied when partial sand replacement is used.
7. In determining shear stress carried by concrete v0 whenever applicable, ef-
fects of axial tension due to creep and shrinkage in restrained members shall be
considered and effects of inclined flexural compression in variable depth members
may be included.
(j) Shear Stress Carried by Shear Reinforcement. 1. Types of shear rein-
forcement. Shear reinforcement may consist of:
A. Stirrups perpendicular to axis of member.
536
B. Welded wire fabric with wires located perpendicular to axis of member mak-
ing an angle of 45 degrees or more with longitudinal tension reinforcement.
C. Longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion making an angle of 30 degrees
or more with longitudinal tension reinforcement.
D. Combinations of stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement.
E. Spirals.
2. Maximum yield strength. Design yield strength of shear reinforcement shall
not exceed 60,000 psi.
3. Anchorage ofshear reinforcement. Stirrups and other bars or wires used as
shear reinforcement shall extend to a distance d from extreme compression fiber
and shall be anchored at both ends according to Section 2612 (p) to develop design
yield strength of reinforcement.
4. Spacing limits for shear reinforcement. Spacing of shear reinforcement
placed perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed d/2 or 24 inches.
Inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement shall be so spaced that ev-
ery 45-degree line, extending toward the reaction from middepth of member d/2 to
longitudinal tension reinforcement, shall be crossed by at least one line of shear
reinforcement.
When (v-vc) exceeds 2 j f :. , maximum spacing given by this subsection shall be

reduced by one half.
5. Minimum shear reinforcement. A minimum area of shear reinforcement
shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural members where design shear
stress v is greater than one half the permissible shear stress vc carried by concrete,
except the following:
A. Slab and footings.
B. Concrete joist construction defined by Section 2608 (I) of this code.
C. Beams with total depth not greater than 10 inches, two and one-half times
thickness of flange or one half the width of web, whichever is greater.
Minimum shear reinforcement requirements of this subsection may be waived if
shown by test that required ultimate flexural and shear strength can be developed
when shear reinforcement is omitted.
Where shear reinforcement is required by this subsection or by analysis, mini-
mum area of shear reinforcement shall be computed by
bwS
Av = 5 0 - (26-5)
/v
where b., and s are in inches.
6. Design of shear reinforcement. Where design shear stress v exceeds shear
stress carried by concrete vc. shear reinforcement shall be provided in accordance
with this subsection.
When shear reinforcement perpendicular to axis of member is used,
537
A = (v- Vc)b"s
(26-6)
v fs
When inclined stirrups are used as shear reinforcement,
__ (v- vJbws
A (26-7)
v f, (sin a + cos a)
When shear reinforcement consists of a single bar or a single group of parallel
bars, all bent up at the same distance from the support,
A = (v-vJbwd
(26-8)
v f, sin a
where ( v - Vc) shall not exceed 1.6 [f;.
When shear reinforcement consists of a series of parallel bent-up bars or groups
of parallel bent-up bars at different distances from the support, required area shall
be computed by Formula (26-7).
Only the center three fourths of the inclined portion of any longitudinal bent bar
shall be considered effective for shear reinforcement.
When more than one type of shear reinforcement is used to reinforce the same
portion of a member, required area shall be computed as the sum of the various
types separately. In such computations, vc shall be included only once.
Value of (v- Vc) shall not exceed 4.4 [f;.
(k) Shear Friction. Where it is appropriate to consider shear transfer across a
given plane such as an existing or potential crack, an interface between dissimilar
materials, or an interface between two concretes cast at different times, shear fric-
tion provisions of Section 2611 (h) may be applied with limiting maximum stress
for shear taken as 55 percent of that given in Section 2611 (h) 5. Permissible stress
in shear friction reinforcement shall be that given in Section 2626 (d) 2.
(I) Special Provisions for Slabs and Footings. 1. Shear capacity of slabs and
footings in the vicinity of concentrated loads or reactions is governed by the more
severe of the following two conditions:
A. Beam action for slab or footing with a critical section extending in a plane
across the entire width and located at a distanced from face of concentrated load or
reaction area. For this condition, the slab or footing shall be designed in accordance
with Section 2626 (h) through (j).
B. Two-way action for slab or footing with a critical section perpendicular to
plane of slab and located so that its perimeter is a minimum but need not approach
closer than d/2 to perimeter of concentrated load or reaction area. For this condi-
tion, the slab or footing shall be designed in accordance with Sections 2626 (I) 2 and
3.
2. Design shear stress v shall be computed by
v =-
v (26-9)
bod
where Vand b, shall be taken at the critical section defined in Section 2626 (I) I B.
538
3. Design shear stress v shall not exceed vc given by Formula (26-10) unless
shear reinforcement is provided.
Vc =(1 + ;J Jf~ (26-10)
hut Y,- shaJJ not exceed 2 lfc. ~c is the ratio of long side to short side of concen-
trated load or reaction area. When lightweight aggregate concrete is used, the mod-
ifications of Section 2626 (i) 6 shall apply.
4. If shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires is provided in accordance
with Section 2611 (m) 3, Vc shall not exceed lfc, and v shall not exceed 3 lfc.
5. If shear reinforcement consisting of steel I or channel shapes (shearheads) is
provided in accordance with Section 2611 (m) 4 of this code, von the critical sec-
tion defined in Section 2626 (m) 1 B shall not exceed 3.5 lfc and von the critical
section defined in Section 2611 (m) 4 G shall not exceed 2 lfc. In Formulas
( 11-38) and (11-39}, design shear force V shall be multiplied by 2 and substituted
for Vu.
(m) Special Provisions for Other Members. For design of deep flexural mem-
bers, brackets and corbels and walls, the special provisions of Section 2611 shall be
used with shear strengths provided by concrete and limiting maximum strengths
for shear taken as 55 percent of the values given in Section 2611. In Section 2611
(k) 6, the design axial load shall be multiplied by 1.2 if compression and 2.0 if ten-
sion and substituted for Nu.
(n) Composite Concrete Flexural Members. For design of composite con-
crete flexural members, permissible horizontal shear stress vh shall not exceed 55
percent of the horizontal shear strengths given in Section 2617 (f) 4.
Reinforced Gypsum Concrete

Sec. 2627. (a) General. Reinforced gypsum concrete shall conform to U.B.C.
Standard No. 26-15.
Reinforced gypsum concrete shall develop the minimum ultimate compressive
strength in pounds per square inch set forth in Table No. 26-F when dried to con-
stant weight, with tests made on cylinders 2 inches in diameter and 4 inches long or
on 2-inch cubes.
For special inspection, see Section 306.
(b) Design. The minimum thickness ofreinforced gypsum concrete shall be 2 in-
ches except the thickness may be reduced to 1 112 inches,provided all ofthe follow-
ing conditions are satisfied:
1. The overall thickness including the formboard is not less than 2 inches.
2. The clear span ofthe gypsum concrete between supports does not exceed 2feet
9 inches.
3. Diaphragm action is not required.
539
4. The design live load does not exceed 40 pounds per square foot.
(c) Stresses. The maximum allowable unit working stresses in reinforced gyp-
sum concrete shall not exceed the values setforth in Table No. 26-G except as speci-
fied in Chapter 23. Bolt values shall not exceed those set forth in Table No. 26-H.
Allowable shear in poured-in-place reinforced gypsum concrete diaphragms
using standard hot-rolled bulb tee subpurlins shall be determined by U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 26-15. (See Table No. 26-15-A in the standard for values for commonly
used roof systems.)
540
_.
CD
_.
CD
c:
FIGURE NO. 26-1-MINIMUM EXTENSIONS FOR REINFORCEMENT z
IN SLABS WITHOUT BEAMS :;;
0
[See Section 2612 (I) 1 for reinforcement extension into supports.] ::0
3:
m
z c:
0 MINIMUM r=c
5 PERCENT-A5 WITHOUT DROP PANELS WITH DROP PANELS z
C)
9 AT SECTION
0
;'. 0
~ 0.30 1n 0.33ln ~ c
::£
~ . .. 1 1.. .. ' m
~
Q.
0
1-
50
Remainder
~ 0.20ln
~ ,. .
0.2010 ~
~
~ 0.20ln
~
o::: ~I ~
t; ~ I ~
z::E ~~~-------+---+----------------------~------~------------~--------------~~
:>
50 ~ :.-
~;r.
3• moa.--+t
1
0.1251 1 :;_IMoa.
•
:-_
-,~
5 ~ ~l~~~~~~~---------M •._o_._l2_5~1~,~~~--~~~2-4--bo_r_d_i_o._M
__o_ __I_2__m_ln_._a_n_b_a_r_s~j~
u t: Remainder ~ ~ \ -~ I I • ·
0 ~ ·~
m ~ ~ • 'At least 2 bars continuous or anchored . ~,~,~-~~~ s•-1 ~
~. ~1+-6 as required in Section 13.4.8.5 ~r'~'~'~Edge or drop_.~!!~P.e'""'-"~ ~
Ul
....
N
FIGURE NO. 26-1-(Continued)
~ }
,.. 0.22ln
~·
~
0.22ln ~
~ . 0.221n 0.22ln l: ~~
Q. ~ •I ~
!!:
a:
t-
...
0 100 }
~
~ -~
~
~
~
~
~
[H
~
~
en ~
-t -t-6•
~
"' ~
~ ~
J
0
:l 50 ~ ~
~
~
0 ~ ~
e ~
.
~ ~
t- ~ Ma•. 0.15~"-. ~ ~
:E t- ~ /_Ma..0.15J ~ if
' ~
~·
0 Remainder
c,l f:
ID ~~-6· 6·~~ t-4,
I I
~ ~ ~ :
~-i ~-
:< ~-
,~
~;4""
~
~ ~ Clear span ·ln ~ Clear span - ln ~ ~
~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~
~ ~ Face or support ~ Face or suppor I ~ I c
~ ~ ~ z
Cenler Ia cenler span • 1 :;;
Cenler Ia eeRier span -1--· 0
:a
t Ealerlor support 4_ Interior support Ealerlor support t 3:
(No slab conlinuily) (Conllnullr provided) (No slab canlinuilr) ID
c
r=c
z
C>
0
0
c
m
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 26-A-1 , 26-A-2
TABLE NO. 26-A-1-TOTAL AIR CONTENT FOR

FROST-RESISTANT CONCRETE
AIR CONTENT, PERCENTAGE
NOMINAL MAXIMUM
AGGREGATE SIZE (Inches) Severe Exposure Moderate Exposure
3/g 71/z 6
l!z 7 5 1h
3 6 5
/4
I 6 4 1h
11h 5 1h 4 1/4
21 5 4
31 41/z 3 1h
1These air contents apply to total mix, as for the preceding aggregate s1zes. When testmg
this concrete, however, aggregate larger than I h inches is removed by hand picking or
sieving, and air content is determined on the minus 11/z-inch fraction.
TABLE NO. 26-A-2-REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL

EXPOSURE CONDITIONS I
MAXIMUM
WATER-CEMENT
RATIO,
NORMAL-WEIGHT
AGGREGATE
MINIMUM f'c•
LIGHTWEIGHT
AGGREGATE
'I
~"::
~
~
EXPOSURE
Concrete intended to have low
permeability when exposed to water
CONCRETE
0.50
CONCRETE
3,750
I~
Concrete exposed to freezing and thawing
in a moist condition 0.45 4,250 Ij
For corrosion protection for reinforced
concrete exposed to deicing salts, =~==
brackish water, sea water or spray from 1;~\
these sources 0.40 1 4,750 1
1lf minimum concrete cover required by Section 2607 (h) is increased by 0.5 inch, water-ce-
~
t.f.:.:;::
ment ratio may be increased to 0.45 for normal-weight concrete, or J: reduced to 4,250 .,.
psi for lightweighl concrete. ~!
543
26-A-3, 26-A-4 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 26-A-3-REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE

EXPOSED TO SULFATE-CONTAINING SOLUTIONS
WATER NORMAL· LIGHTWEIGHT·

SOLUBLE WEIGHT AGGREGATE
SULFATE AGGREGATE CONCRETE
(SO~~N SOIL, SULFATE Maximum Minimum
SULFATE P CENT (SO~ IN CEMENT water-Cament Compressive
EXPOSURE BY WEIGHT WATE ,PPM TYPE Rallo, by W81ght1 Strength, f'c pail
Negligible 0.00-0.10 0-150 - - -

Moderate2 0.10-0.20 150-1500 II, IP(MS), 0.50 3750
IS(MS)
Severe 0.20-2.00 1500-10,000 v 0.45 4250
Very Over2.00 Over 10,000 Vplus 0.45 4250

Severe pozzolan3
1
A lower water-cement ratio or higher strength may be required for low permeability or for
protection against corrosion of embedded items or freezing and thawing (Table No.
26-A-2).
2Seawater.
·1Pozzolan that has been determined by test or service record to improve sulfate resistance
when used in concrete containing Type V cement
TABLE NO. 26-A-4-MAXIMUM CHLORIDE ION CONTENT

FOR CORROSION PROTECTION
MAXIMUM WATER SOLUBLE CHLORIDE

ION (CL) IN CONCRETE, PERCENT BY
TYPE OF MEMBER WEIGHT OF CEMENT
Prestressed concrete 0.06

Reinforced concrete exposed to
chloride in service 0.15
Reinforced concrete that will be dry
or protected from moisture in service 1.00
Other reinforced concrete
construction 0.30
544
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 26-A-5, 26-A-6, 26-A-7
TABLE NO. 26-A-5-MODIFICATION FACTOR FOR STANDARD

DEVIATION WHEN LESS THAN 30 TESTS ARE AVAILABLE
MODIFICATION FACTOR FOR
NUMBER OF TESTS' STANDARD DEVIATION2
Less than 15 Use Table No. 26-A-6
15 1.16
J 20 1.08
25 1.03
30 or more 1.00 I
1Interpolate
for intermediate numbers of tests.
2Modified standard deviation to be used to determine required average strengthJ;., from
Section 2605 (d) 2, first paragraph.
TABLE NO. 26-A-6-REQUIRED AVERAGE COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH WHEN DATA ARE NOT AVAILABLE TO ESTABLISH
A STANDARD DEVIATION
SPECIF;;'D REQUIRED AVERAGE
COMPRESSIVE liTRENGTH COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
f',PSI f' cr PSI
Less than 3000 psi !~ + 1000
3000to5000 f'c + 1200
Over5000 f'c + 1400
TABLE NO. 26-A-7-MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WATER-CEMENT RATIOS

FOR CONCRETE WHEN STRENGTH DATA FROM FIELD
EXPERIENCE OR TRIAL MIXTURES ARE NOT AVAILABLE
SPECIFIED ABSOLUTE WATER-CEMENT RATIO BY WEIGHT
COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH Nonalr-entralned Air-entrained
f',PSI1 Concrete Concrete
2500 0.67 0.54

3000 0.58 0.46
3500 0.51 0.40
4000 0.44 0.35
0.38 2
4500
5000 2 2
1Twenty-eight-day strength. With most materials, water-cement ratios shown will provide
average strengths greater than indicated in Section 2605 (d) 2 as being required.
2For strengths above 4,500 psi (nonair-entrained concrete) and 4,000 psi (air-entrained
concrete), concrete proportions shall be established by methods of Section 2605 (d).
545
26-B, 26-C-1, 26-C-2 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 26-B-MINIMUM DIAMETERS OF BEND
BAR SIZE MINIMUM DIAMETER
Nos. 3 through 8 6db

Nos. 9, 10 and 11 8db
Nos. 14 and 18 !Odb
TABLE NO. 26-C-1-MINIMUM THICKNESS OF NONPRESTRESSED BEAMS

OR ONE-WAY SLABS UNLESS DEFLECTIONS ARE COMPUTED 1
MINIMUM THICKNESS, h
SIMPLY ONE END BOTH ENDS CANTI·
SUPPORTED CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS LEVER
Member• not au~rtlng.or attached to pertltlona or other
MEMBER conatructlon II ely to damaged by large dellactlona
Solid one-way slabs 1120 l/24 l/28 l/10

Beams or ribbed one-
way slabs l/16 1!18.5 l/21 l/8
I Span length I is in inches.

Values given shall be used directly for members with normal-weight concrete (wc = 145 pcf)
and Grade 60 reinforcement. For other conditions, the values shall be modified as
follows:
(a) For structural lightweight concrete having unit weights in the range 90-120 pounds
per cubic foot, the value shall be multiplied by (1.65 -0.005wc) but not less than
1.09, where we is the unit weight in pounds per cubic foot.
(b) For/y other than 60,000 psi, the values shall be multiplied by (0.4 + /yilOO,OOO).
I
TABLE NO. 26-C-2-MINIMUM THICKNESS OF ~LABS
WITHOUT INTERIOR BEAMS
WITHOUT DROP PANELS2 WITH DROP PANELS2
Exterior Interior Exterior Interior
~~j Panels Panels Panel a Panels
I
YIELD STRESS Without With Without With
fy Edge Edge Edge Edge
pall Baama Beams3 Beams Beams3
}:1~ Ln Ln Ln Ln Ln
40,000 L"
~¥.~
"'33 "'36 "'36 "'36 40 40
60,000 L" L" L" L. L" L.
30 33 33 33 "'36 "'36
!·',~ stress between 40,000 and 60,000 psi minimum thickness
I For values of reinforcement yield
~ shall be obtained by linear interpolation.
f 20rop panel is defined in Section 2613 (e) 6.
t.~.~,
JSlabs with beams between columns along exterior edges. The value of a for the edge beam
..:.'.l.:.
, shall not be less than 0. 8.
546
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 26-D, 26-E
TABLE NO. 26-D-VALUES OF a mtn

RELATIVE BEAM STIFFNESS, a
ASPECT RATIO
(3. /2//1 0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0
2.0 0.5·2.0 0 0 0 0 0
\.0 0.5 0.6 0 0 0 0
0.8 0.7 0 0 0 0
1.0 0.7 0.1 0 0 0
1.25 0.8 0.4 0 0 0
2.0 1.2 0.5 0.2 0 0
0.5 0.5 1.3 0.3 0 0 0
0.8 1.5 0.5 0.2 0 0
1.0 1.6 0.6 0.2 0 0
1.25 1.9 1.0 0.5 0 0
2.0 4.9 1.6 0.8 0.3 0
0.33 0.5 1.8 0.5 0.1 0 0
0.8 2.0 0.9 0.3 0 0
1.0 2.3 0.9 0.4 0 0
1.25 2.8 1.5 0.8 0.2 0
2.0 13.0 2.6 1.2 0.5 0.3
TABLE NO. 26-E-ALLOWABLE SERVICE LOAD ON EMBEDDED BOLTS

(Pounds) 1•2
MINIMUM CONCRETE STRENGTH (In psi)
MINIMUM3
SHEAR4 TENSIONS
DIAMETER EMBEDMENT
(In Inches) (In Inches) 2000 3000 2000to5000
'I• 2 112 500 500 200

lis 3 liOO 1100 500
'12 4 2000 2000 950
'Is 4 2750 3000 1500
'I• 5 2940 3560 2250
71s 6 3580 4150 3200
I 7 3580 4150 3200
Jlls 8 3580 4500 3200
1'14 9 3580 5300 3200
1Values are for natural stone aggregate concrete and bolts of at least A307 quality. Bolts shall
have a standard bolt head or an equal deformity in the embedded portion.
2Values are based upon a bolt spacing of 12 diameters with a minimum edge distance of 6
diameters. Such spacing and edge distance may be reduced 50 percent with an equal
reduction in value. Use linear interpolation for intermediate spacings and edge margins.
JAn additional 2 inches of embedment shall be provided for anchor bolts located in the top of
columns for buildings located in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4.
•Values shown are for work with or without special inspection.
'Values shown are for work without special inspection. Where special inspection is provided
values may be increased 100 percent. •
547
26-F, 26-G, 26-H 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 26-F-MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH AND MODULUS OF ELASTICITY AND OF
RIGIDITY OF REINFORCED GYPSUM CONCRETE
COMPRESSIVE MODULUS OF
STRENGTH ELASTICITY Es/Eg MODULUS OF
CLASS PSI (fg} PSI (E) (n) RIGIDITY (G)
A 500 200,000 150 .36E

B 1000 600,000 50 .40E
TABLE NO. 26-G-ALLOWABLE UNIT WORKING STRESS

REINFORCED GYPSUM CONCRETE
CLASS A CLASSB
TYPE OF STRESS FACTOR (Pounds per Square Inch)
Flexural Compression ............... .25!, 125 250

Axial Compression or Bearing ......... .20/, 100 200
Bond for Plain Bars and Shear' ........ .02!, 10 20
Bond for Deformed Bars and
Electrically Welded Wire Mesh' ....... .03!, 15 30
'Electrically welded wire mesh reinforcement shall be considered as meeting the bond and
shear requirements of this section. In no case shall the area of principal reinforcement be
less than 0.26 square inch per foot of slab width.
TABLE NO. 26-H-5HEAR ON ANCHOR BOLTS AND

DOWELS-REINFORCED GYPSUM CONCRETE 1
BOLT OR DOWEL SIZE EMBEDMENT SHEAR2

(Inches) (Inches) (Pounds)
3/s Bolt 4 325
112 Bolt 5 450
5fs Bolt 5 650
3fs Deformed Dowel 6 325
112 Deformed Dowel 6 450
1The bolts or dowels shall be spaced not closer than 6 inches on center.
2The tabulated values may be increased one third for bolts or dowels resisting wind or
seismic forces.
548
Chapter 27
STEEL
NOTE: This chapter has been revised in its entirety.
Design and Identification of Steel for Structures

Sec. 2701. (a) Standards of Quality. The quality, testing and design~{ "'"-~<:J.
used structurally in buildings or structures shall conform to the requirements speci-
fied in this chapter.
The standards listed below labeled a "U .B.C. standard" are also listed in Chapter
60, Part II, and are part of this code. The other standards listed below are guideline
6003).
I. Material specifications
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-1, Material Specifications for Structural Steel
B. AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
Steel Buildings; Erection, Fabrication, Identification and Painting of Structural
Steel
2. Design
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-3, Stress Variation or Stress Reversal Design
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-4, Open Web Steel Joists
C. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-9, Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel
Structural Members
D. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-10, Specification for the Design of Cold-formed
Stainless Steel Structural Members
E. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-11, Steel Storage Racks
F. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-12, Structural Application of Steel Cables for Build-
ings
G. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-14, Load and Resistance Factor Design Specifica-
tion for Structural Steel Buildings
H. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-15, Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design for
Structural Steel Buildings
3. Welding
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-6, Structural Welding
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-13, Welding Sheet Steel
4. Connectors
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-7, High-strength Bolts
B. ASTM A 502, Structural Rivet Steel
(b) Identification. Steel furnished for structural load-carrying purposes shall be
properly identified for conformity to the ordered grade as follows:
Structural steels shall be identified. Where structural steel is furnished to a speci-
fied minimum yield point greater than 36,000 pounds per square inch (psi), the
ASTM or other specification designation shall be marked thereon.
549
Cold-formed carbon and low-alloy steel shall be identified by the fabricator in

accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 27-9. Where cold-formed steel structural
members are furnished to a specified minimum yield point greater than 33,000 psi,
the grade and the ASTM specification number or other specification designation
shall be indicated by painting, decal, tagging or other suitable means on each lift or
bundle of fabricated elements. In the case of members having a yield point of, or in
excess of, 33,000 psi obtained through additional treatment, the resulting mini-
mum yield point shall be indicated in addition to the specification designation.
Cold-formed stainless steel structural elements designed in accordance with
U.B.C. Standard No. 27-10 shall be identified as to grade through mill test reports,
and certification shall be furnished that the yield point of the material supplied
equals or exceeds that considered in the design. Identification shall be by painting,
decal, tagging or other suitable means on each lift or bundle of fabricated elements.
Each lift or bundle of open-web steel joists and similar fabricated light structural
load-carrying members shall be identified in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No.
27-4 as to type, size and manufacturer by tagging or other suitable means at the time
of manufacture or fabrication, and such identification shall be maintained continu-
ously to the point of their installation in a structure.
The fabricator shall maintain identity of the material and shall maintain suitable
procedures and records attesting that the specified grade has been furnished in con-
formity with the applicable U.B.C. standard. Where structural steel is furnished to
a specified minimum yield point greater than 36,000 psi, the ASTM or other speci-
fication designation shall be included near the erection mark on each shipping as-
sembly or important construction component over any shop coat of paint prior to
shipment from the fabricator's plant. The fabricator's identification mark system
shall be established and on record prior to fabrication.
Steel which is not readily identifiable as to grade from marking and test records
shall be tested to determine conformity to such standard. The fabricator shall, when
requested, furnish an affidavit of compliance with such standard.
Structural Steel Construction

Sec. 2702. The design, fabrication and erection of structural steel shall be in ac-
cordance with the requirementsofU.B.C. Standard No. 27-l4or27-l5. In Seismic
Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4, the provisions ofU.B.C. Standard No. 27-14 may be used
for the design of the seismic-resisting frames when approved by the building offi-
cial and when special detailing criteria equivalent to the provisions of Section 2710
or 2711 are used.
Cold-formed Steel Construction

Sec. 2703. The design of cold-formed steel structural members shall be in accor-
dance with the requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No. 27-9.
Cold-formed Stainless Steel Construction

Sec. 2704. The design of cold-formed stainless steel structural members shall be
in accordance with the requirements of U.B.C. Standard No. 27-10.
550
Open-web Steel Joists and Joist Girders

Sec. 2705. The design, manufacture and use of steel joist, H, K, LH and KLH se-
ries and joist girders shall be in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 27-4.
Steel Storage Racks

Sec. 2706. Steel storage racks may be designed in accordance with the provi-
sions of U.B.C. Standard No. 27-11.
Steel Cables
Sec. 2707. Structural applications of steel cables for buildings shall be in accor-
dance with the provisions ofU.B.C. Standard No. 27-12.
Welding
Sec. 2708. Welding procedures, welder qualification requirements and welding
electrodes for structural steel shall be in accordance with the requirements of
U.B.C. Standard No. 27-6. Welding procedures, welder qualification requirements
and welding electrodes for sheet steel shall be in accordance with the requirements
ofU.B.C. Standard No. 27-13.
Bolts
Sec. 2709. The use of high-strength A 325 and A 490 bolts shall be in accordance
with the requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No. 27-7.
Steel Structures Resisting Forces Induced by Earthquake Motions

in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4
Sec. 2710. (a) General. Design and construction of steel framing in lateral-
force-resisting systems in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 shall conform to the require-
ments of the code and to the requirements of this section.
(b) Definitions.
ALLOWABLE STRESSES are prescribed in U.B.C. Standard No. 27-15.
CHEVRON BRACING is that form of bracing where a pair of braces located
either above or below a beam terminates at a single point within the clear beam
span.
CONNECTION is the group of elements that connect the member to the joint.
DIAGONAL BRACING is that form of bracing that diagonally connects joints
at different levels.
ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) is that form of braced frame
where at least one end of each brace intersects a beam at a point away from the col-
umn girder joint.
GIRDER is the horizontal member in a seismic frame. The words beam and
girder may be used interchangeably.
JOINT is the entire assemblage at the intersections of the members.
K BRACING is that form of bracing where a pair of braces located on one side
of a column terminates at a single point within the clear column height.
551
LINK BEAM is that part of a beam in an eccentrically braced frame which is

designed to yield in shear and/or bending so that buckling of the bracing members
is prevented.
STRENGTH is the strength as prescribed in Section 2710 (d) 2.
V BRACING is that form of chevron bracing that intersects a beam from above
and inverted V bracing is that form of chevron bracing that intersects a beam from
below.
X BRACING is that form of bracing where a pair of diagonal braces cross near
midlength of the bracing members.
(c) Symbols and Notations. The symbols and notations unique to this section
are as follows:
Mp plastic moment.
PoL axial dead load.
PE axial load on member due to earthquake.
PLL axial live load.
Psc compressive axial strength of member.
Ps1 tensile axial strength of member.
V, shear strength of member.
Z plastic section modulus.
(d) Materials. 1. Structural steel used in lateral-force-resisting systems shall
conform to A 36, A441, A 500, A501, A 572 (Grades42 and 50) andA588. Struc-
tural steel conforming to A 283 (Grade D) may be used for base plates and anchor
bolts.
EXCEPTION: Other steels permitted in this code may be used for the following:
A. One-story buildings.
B. Light-framed wall systems in accordance with Section 2710 (j).
2. Member strength. Where this section requires that the strength of the mem-
ber be developed, the following shall be used:
STRENGTH
Flexure Ms =ZFy
Shear Vs =0.55 Fydt
Axial compression Psc = 1.7 FaA
Axial tension Pst =FyA
Connectors
Full-penetration welds FyA
Partial penetration welds 1.7 Allowable
Bolts and fillet welds I. 7 Allowable
Members need not be compact unless otherwise required by this section.
(e) Column Requirements. 1. Column strength. Columns shall satisfy the
load combinations required by Section 2303 (f) at allowable stress limits, with
stress increases allowed by Section 2303 (d). In addition, in Seismic Zones Nos. 3
and 4, columns in frames shall have the strength to resist the axial loads resulting
from the load combinations in Items A and B following.
552
A. Axial Compression
1.0 PoL + 0.7 PLL + 3(Rw/8)PE
B. Axial Tension
0.85 PoL + 3(Rw/8)PE
EXCEPTION: The axial load combination as outlined in Items A and B above:
A. Need not exceed either the maximum force that can be transferred to the col-
umn, by elements of the structure, or the limit as determined by the overturning uplift
which the foundation is capable of resisting.
B. Need not apply to columns in moment-resisting frames complying with Formu-
las ( I0-3a)or(I0-3b) where.fa is equal to or less than 0.3 Fy for all load combinations.
The load combinations from Items A and B need be used only when specifically
referred to.
2. Column splices. Column splices shall have sufficient strength to develop the
column forces determined from Section 2710 (e) I. Welded column splices subject
to net tensile forces shall comply with the more critical of the following:
A. Partial penetration welds shall be designed to resist 150 percent of the force
determined from Section 2710 (e) 1 B.
B. Welding shall develop not less than 50 percent of the flange area strength of
the smaller column.
Splices employing partial penetration welds shall be located at least three feet
from girder flanges.
3. Slenderness evaluation. This paragraph is applicable when the provisions
are applied to the effective length determination of columns of moment frames re-
sisting earthquake forces. In the plane of the earthquake forces the factor K may be
taken as unity when all of the following conditions are met:
A. The column is either continuous or is fixed at each joint.
B. The maximum axial compressive stress, .fa, does not exceed 0.4 Fy under de-
sign loads.
C. The calculated story drift ratios are less than the values given in Section 2334
(h).
(f) Ordinary Moment Frame Requirements. Girder-to-column connections
of ordinary moment frames shall meet the requirements of Section 2710 (g) I un-
less it can be shown that they are capable of resisting the combination of gravity
loads and 3(Rw!8) times the design seismic forces.
(g) Special Moment-resisting Frame (SMRF) Requirements. I. Girder-to-
column connection. A. Required strength. The girder-to-column connection
shall be adequate to develop the lesser of the following:
(i) The strength of the girder in flexure.
(ii) The moment corresponding to development ofthe panel zone shear strength
as determined from Formula (I 0-1 ).
EXCEPTION: Where a connection is not designed to contribute flexural resis-
tance at the joint, it need not develop the required strength if it can be shown to meet
the deformation compatibility requirements of Section 2337 (b) 4.
553
B. Connection strength. The girder-to-column connection may be considered

to be adequate to develop the flexural strength of the girder if it conforms to the
following:
(i) The flanges have full-penetration butt welds to the columns.
(ii) The girder web-to-column connection shall be capable of resisting the girder
shear determined for the combination of gravity loads and the seismic shear forces
which result from compliance with Section 2710 (g) 2 A. This connection strength
need not exceed that required to develop gravity loads plus 3 (Rw/8) times the girder
shear resulting from the prescribed seismic forces.
Where the flexural strength ofthe girder flanges is greater than 70 percent of the
flexural strength ofthe entire section (i.e., bfJ (d-fj)Fy >0.7ZxFy) the web connec-
tion may be made by means of welding or high-strength bolting.
For girders not meeting the criteria in the paragraph above, the girder web-
to-column connection shall be made by means of welding the web directly or
through shear tabs to the column. That welding shall have a strength capable of de-
veloping at least 20 percent of the flexural strength of the girder web. The girder
shear shall be resisted by means of additional welds or friction-type slip-critical
high-strength bolts or both.
C. Alternate connection. Connection configurations utilizing welds or
high-strength bolts not conforming with paragraph B above may be used if they are
shown by test or calculation to meet the criteria in paragraph A above. Where con-
formance is shown by calculation, 125 percent of the strengths of the connecting
elements may be used.
D. Flange detail limitations. For steel whose specified ultimate strength is less
than 1.5 times the specified yield strength, plastic hinges shall not form at locations
in which the beam flange area has been reduced, such as for bolt holes. Bolted con-
nections of flange plates of beam-column joints shall have the net-to-gross area
ratio A,/A~ equal to or greater than 1.2 Fy!Fu.
2. Panel zone. A. Strength. The panel zone ofthe joint shall be capable of resist-
ing the shear induced by beam bending moments due to gravity loads plus 1.85
times the prescribed seismic forces, but the shear strength need not exceed that re-
quired to develop 0.8:EMs of the girders framing into the column flanges at the
joint. The joint panel zone shear strength may be obtained from the following
formula:
(10-1)
WHERE:
t the total thickness of the joint panel zone including doubler plates.
dh the depth of the beam.
de the column depth.
he is the width of the column flange.
554
tcf = is the thickness of the column flange.

B. Thickness. The panel zone thickness, t,, shall conform to the following
formula:
t, ;?: (d, + w,)/90 (I 0-2)
WHERE:
d, = the panel zone depth between continuity plates.
w, = the panel zone width between column flanges.
For this purpose, t,, shall not include any double plate thickness unless the dou-
bler plate is connected to the column web with plug welds adequate to prevent local
buckling of the plate.
C. Doubler plates. Doubler plates provided to reduce panel zone shear stress or
to reduce the web depth thickness ratio shall be placed not more than 1h 6 inch from
the column web and shall be welded across the plate width top and bottom with at
least a 3/winch fillet weld. They shall be either butt or fillet welded to the column
flanges to develop the shear strength of the doubler plate. Weld strength shall be as
given in Section 2710 (d) 2.
3. Flange width-thickness ratio. Girders shall comply with U.B.C. Standard
No. 27-15, except that the flange width-thickness ratio, hj/2t1, shall not exceed
52/ jF,.
4. Continuity plates. When determining the need for girder tension flange con-
tinuity plates, the value of Phf in U.B.C. Standard No. 27-15 shall be taken as 1.8
(hft)Fvb·
5. Strength ratio. At any moment frame joint, the following relationships shall
be satisfied:
(10-3a)
or
~Zc (Fyc - fa)/l.25~Mpz > 1.0 (10-3b)
WHERE:
!a> 0
Mp, = the sum of beam moments when panel zone shear strength reaches the
value specified in Formula (1 0-l).
EXCEPTION: Columns meeting the compactness limitations for beams given
in Section 2710 (g) 3 need not comply with this requirement provided they conform
to one of the following conditions:
A. Columns with .fa less than 0.4 Fy for all load combinations other than loads spe-
cified in Section 2710 (e) I, and
(i) Which are used in the top story of a multistory building with building period
greater than 0.7 second; or
(ii) Which are used in single-story buildings; or
(iii) Where the sum of their resistance is less than 20 percent of the shear in a story,
and is less than 33 percent of the shear on each of the column lines within that story.
A column line is defined for the purpose of this exception as a single line of columns,
555
or parallel lines of columns located within I 0 percent of the plan dimension perpen-
dicular to the line of columns; or
( iv) When the design for combined axial compression and bending is proportioned
to satisfy U.B.C. Standard No. 27-15 without the one-third permissible stress in-
crease.
B. Columns in any story which have lateral shear strength 50 percent greater than
that of the story above.
C. Columns which lateral shear strengths are not included in the design to resist
code-required shears.
6. Trusses in SMRF. Trusses may be used as horizontal members in SMRF if the
sum of the truss seismic force flexural strength exceeds the sum of the column seis-
mic force flexural strength immediately above and below the truss by a factor of at
least 1.25. For this determination the strengths of the members shall be reduced by
the gravity load effects. In buildings of more than one story, the column axial stress
shall not exceed 0.4Fy and the ratio of the unbraced column height to the least ra-
dius of gyration shall not exceed 60. Columns shall have allowable stresses re-
duced 25 percent when one end frames into a truss, and 50 percent when both ends
frame into trusses.The connection of the truss chords to the column shall develop
the lesser of the following:
A. The strength of the truss chord.
B. The chord force necessary to develop 125 percent of the flexural strength of
the column.
7. Girder-column joint restraint. A. Restrained joint. Where it can be shown
that the columns of SMRF remain elastic, the flanges of the columns need be later-
ally supported only at the level of the girder top flange.
Columns may be assumed to remain elastic if one of the following conditions is
satisfied:
(i) The ratio in Formula (10-3a) or (10-3b) is greater than 1.25.
(ii) The flexural strength of the column is at least 1.25 times the moment that cor-
responds to the panel zone shear strength.
(iii) Girder flexural strength or panel zone strength will limit column stress (fa+
fi,, + fi,y) to Fy of the column.
(iv) The column will remain elastic under gravity loads plus 3(Rw/8) times the
prescribed seismic forces.
Where the column cannot be shown to remain elastic, the column flanges shall
be laterally supported at the levels of the girder top and bottom flanges. The column
flange lateral support shall be capable of resisting a force equal to one percent of the
girder flange capacity at allowable stresses and at a limiting displacement perpen-
dicular to the frame of 0.2 inch. Required bracing members may brace the column
flanges directly or indirectly through the column web or the girder flanges.
B. Unrestrained joint. Columns without lateral support transverse to a joint
shall conform to the requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No. 27-15, with the column
considered as pin ended and the length taken as the distance between lateral sup-
ports conforming with A above. The column stress, fa, shall be determined from
gravity loads plus the lesser of the following:
556
(i) 3(R.,.,J8) times the prescribed seismic forces.

(ii) The forces corresponding to either 125 percent of the girder flexural strength
or the panel zone shear strength.
The stressfny• shall include the effects of the bracing force specified in Section
2710 (g) 7 A and P .-1.
l!r for such columns shall not exceed 60.
At truss frames the column shall be braced at each truss chord for a lateral force
equal to one percent of the compression yield strength of the chord.
8. Beam bracing. Both flanges of beams shall be braced directly or indirectly.
The beam bracing between column center lines shall not exceed 96ry. In addition,
braces shall be placed at concentrated loads where a hinge may form.
9. Changes in beam flange area. Abrupt changes in beam flange area are not
permitted within possible plastic hinge regions of special moment-resistant
frames.
I 0. Moment frame drift calculations. Moment frame drift calculations shall
include bending and shear contributions from the clear girder and column spans,
column axial deformation and the rotation and distortion of the panel zone.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Drift calculations may be based on column and girder center
lines where either of the following conditions is met:
A. It can be demonstrated that the drift so computed for frames of similar configu-
ration is typically within 15 percent of that determined above.
B. The column panel zone strength can develop 0.8 I. Ms of girders framing to the
column flanges at the joint.
2. Column axial deformations may be neglected if they contribute less than I 0 per-
cent to the total drift.
(h) Requirements for Braced Frames. I. General. The provisions of this sec-
tion apply to all braced frames except eccentrically braced frames (EBF) designed
in accordance with Section 2710 (i). Those members which resist seismic forces
totally or partially by shear or flexure shall be designed in accordance with Section
2710 (g) except Subsection 3.
2. Bracing members. A. Slenderness. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, the 1/r
ratio for bracing members shall not exceed 720/ [F; except as permitted in Sub-
sections 5 and 6 below.
B. Stress reduction. The allowable stress, Fas• for bracing members resisting
seismic forces in compression shall be determined from the following formula:
Fas = BFa (10-4)
WHERE:
Fa the allowable axial compressive stress allowed in U.B.C. Standard No.
27-15.
B the stress-reduction factor determined from the following formula:
B = 1/[1 + (Kl/r/2C,.)] (I 0-5)
557
C. Lateral force distribution. The seismic lateral force along any line of brac-
ing shall be distributed to the various members so that neither the sum of the hori-
zontal components of the forces in members acting in tension nor the sum of the
horizontal components of forces in members acting in compression exceed 70 per-
cent of the total force.
EXCEPTION: Where compression bracing acting alone has the strength, ne-
glecting the strength-reduction factor B, to resist 3(Rw/8) times the prescribed seis-
mic force such distribution is not required.
A line of bracing is defined, for the purpose ofthis provision, as a single line or
parallel lines within 10 percent of the dimension of the structure perpendicular to
the line of bracing.
D. Built-up members. The 1/r of individual parts of built-up bracing members
between stitches, when computed about a line perpendicular to the axis through
the parts, shall not be greater than 75 percent of the 1/r of the member as a whole.
E. Compression elements in braces. The width-thickness ratio of stiffened and
unstiffened compression elements used in braces shall be as shown in U.B.C.
Standard No. 27-15.
3. Bracing connections. A. Forces. Bracing connections shall have the
strength to resist the lesser of the following:
(i) The tensile strength of the bracing.
(ii) 3(Rw/8) times the force in the brace due to the prescribed seismic forces.
(iii) The maximum force that can be transferred to the brace by the system.
Beam-to-column connections for beams that are part ofthe bracing system shall
have the capacity to transfer the force determined above.
B. Net area. In bolted brace connections, the ratio of effective net section area to
gross section area shall satisfy the formula:
Ae > 1.2 aF * (10-6)
Ax - Fu
WHERE:
Ae effective net area as defined in U.B.C. Standard No. 27-15.
F* stress in brace as determined in Section 2710 (h) 3 A.
Fu minimum tensile strength.
a fraction of the member force from Section 2710 (h) 3 A that is trans-
ferred across a particular net section.
4. Bracing configuration. A. Chevron bracing. Chevron bracing shall con-
form with the following:
(i) Bracing members shall be designed for 1.5 times the otherwise prescribed
seismic forces.
(ii) The beam intersected by chevron braces shall be continuous between col-
umns.
(iii) Where chevron braces intersect a beam from below, i.e., inverted V brace,
the beam shall be capable of supporting all tributary gravity loads presuming the
bracing not to exist.
558
EXCEPTION: This limitation need not apply to penthouses, one-story build-

ings or the top story of buildings.
B. K bracing. K bracing is prohibited except as permitted in Subsection 5 below.
5. One- and two-story buildings. Braced frames not meeting the requirements
of Section 2710 (h) 2 and 4 may be used in buildings not over two stories in height
and in roof structures as defined in Chapter 36 if the braces have the strength to
resist 3(Rw/8) times the code equivalent static forces.
6. Non building structures. Nonbuilding structures with Rw values defined by
Table No. 23-Q need comply only with the provisions of Section 2710 (h) 3.
(i) Eccentrically Braced Frame (EBF) Requirements. Eccentrically braced
frames shall be designed in accordance with the following:
I. Link beam. There shall be a link beam provided at least at one end of each
brace. Beams in EBFs shall comply with the requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No.
27-15, except that the flange width-thickness ratio, b1!2t1, shall not exceed
52/ jFy.
2. Link beam strength. A. Link beam shear strength, Vs, and flexural strength,
M,, are the strengths as defined in Section 2710 (d) 2. Where link beam strength is
governed by shear, the flexural and axial capacities within the link shall be calcu-
lated using the beam flanges only.
B. A reduced flexural strength, Mrs. for use in Section 2710 (i) 7 and 12 is defined
as Z(Fy-/a). Where fa is less than O.I5Fy,/a may be neglected.
3. Link beam rotation. The rotation of the link segment relative to the rest of the
beam, at a total frame drift of3(Rw/8) times the drift determined for prescribed seis-
mic forces, shall not exceed the following:
A. 0.060 radians for link segments having clear lengths of 1.6 Ms!Vs or less.
B. 0.015 radians for link segments having clear lengths of2.6 Ms!Vs or greater.
C. A value obtained by linear interpolation for clear lengths between the above
limits.
4. Link beam web. The web of the link beam shall be single thickness without
doubler plate reinforcement. No openings shall be placed in the web of a link beam.
The web shear shall not exceed 0.8Vs under prescribed lateral forces.
5. Beam connection braces. Brace-to-beam connections shall develop the
compression strength of the brace and transfer this force to the beam web. No part
of the brace-to-beam connection shall extend into the web area of a link beam.
6. Link beam stiffeners. Link beams shall have full-depth web stiffeners on
both sides of the beam web at the brace end of the link beam. In addition, for link
beams with clear lengths within the limits in Section 2710(i) 3 C, full-depth stiffen-
ers shall be placed at a distance b1 from each end of the link. The stiffeners shall
have a combined width not less than b-2tw and a thickness not less than 0.75 fw or
less than 'Is inch.
7. Intermediate stiffeners. Intermediate full-depth web stiffeners shall be pro-
vided in either of the following conditions:
A. Where the link beam strength is controlled by Vs.
559
B. Where the link beam strength is controlled by flexure and the shear deter-
mined by applying the reduced flexural strength, Mrs• exceeds 0.45 Fydt.
8. Web stiffener spacing. Where intermediate web stiffeners are required, the
spacing shall conform to the requirements given below.
A. For link beams with rotation angle of 0.06 radians, the spacing shall not ex-
ceed 38t-d/5.
B. For link beams with a rotation angle of0.03 radians or less, the spacing shall
not exceed 56tw-dl5. Interpolation may be used for rotation angles between 0.03
and 0.06 radians.
9. Web stiffener location. For beams 24 inches in depth and greater, intermedi-
ate full-depth web stiffeners are required on both sides of the web. Such web stiff-
eners are required only on one side of the beam web for beams less than 24 inches in
depth. The stiffener thickness, tw, of one side stiffeners shall not be less than% inch
and the width shall not be less than (b1!2)-tw.
I 0. Stiffener welds. Fillet welds connecting the stiffener to the beam web shall
develop a stiffener force of As,Fy. Fillet welds connecting the stiffener to the
flanges shall develop a stiffener force of As 1 Fy/4, whereAs,= bt of stiffener and b =
width of stiffener plate.
II. Link beam-column connections. A. Where a link beam is connected to the
column flange, the following requirements shall be met:
(i) The beam flanges shall have full-penetration welds to the column.
(ii) Where the link beam strength is controlled by shear in conformance with
Section 2710 (i) 7, the web connection shall be welded to develop the full link beam
web shear strength.
B. Where the link beam is connected to the column web, the beam flanges shall
have full-penetration welds to the connection plates and the web connection shall
be welded to develop the link beam web shear strength.
12. Brace strength. Each brace shall have a compressive strength at least 1.5
times the axial force corresponding to the controlling link beam strength. The con-
trolling link beam strength is either the shear strength, Vso or the reduced flexural
strength, Mrs. whichever results in the lesser force in the brace.
13. Column strength. Columns shall be designed to remain elastic at 1.25 times
the strength of the EBF bay, as defined in Subsection 12 above.
14. Roof link beam. A link beam is not required in roof beams for EBF over five
stories.
15. Concentric brace in combination. The first story of an EBF bay over five
stories in height may be concentrically braced if this story can be shown to have an
elastic capacity 50 percent greater than the yield capacity of the story frames above
the first story.
16. Axial forces. Axial forces in beams of EBF frames due to braces and due to
transfer of seismic force to the end of the frames shall be included in the frame cal-
culations.
560
17. Beam flanges. Top and bottom flanges of EBF frame beams shall be lateral-
ly braced at the ends oflink beams and at intervals not exceeding 76/ JF; times the
beam flange width. End bracing shall be designed to resist 1.5 percent of the beam
flange strength, defined as Fyb1t1 . Intermediate bracing shall be designed to resist
1.0 percent of the beam flange force at the brace point using the link beam strength
determined in Section 2710 (i) 12.
18. Beam-column connection. Beam connections to columns may be designed
as pins in the plane of the beam web if the link beam is not adjacent to the column.
Such connection shall have the capacity to resist a torsional moment of O.OlFy
h1 t1d.
U) Stud Wall Systems. Stud wall systems may be used to resist the specified
seismic forces in buildings not over five stories in height. Such systems shall com-
ply with the following:
1. The 1/r of the brace may exceed 200 and is unlimited.
2. All boundary members, chords and collectors shall be designed and detailed
to transmit the induced axial forces.
3. Connection of the diagonal bracing member, top chord splices, boundary
members and collectors shall be designed to develop the full tensile strength of the
member or 3(Rw/8) times the otherwise prescribed seismic forces.
4. Vertical and diagonal members of the braced bay shall be anchored so the bot-
tom track is not required to resist uplift forces by bending of the track web.
5. Both flanges of studs in a bracing panel shall be braced to prevent lateral tor-
sional buckling. Wire tied bridging shall not be considered to provide such re-
straint.
6. Screws shall not be used to resist lateral forces by pullout resistance.
7. Provision shall be made for pretensioning or other methods of installation of
tension-only bracing to guard against loose diagonal straps.
(k) Nondestructive Testing. Welded connections between the primary mem-
bers of special moment-resisting frames shall be tested by nondestructive methods
for compliance with U.B.C. Standard No. 27-6 and job specifications. This testing
shall be a part of the special inspection requirements of Section 306. A program for
this testing shall be established by the person responsible for structural design and
as shown on plans and specifications.
As a minimum, this program shall include the following:
I. All complete penetration groove welds contained in joints and splices shall be
tested 100 percent either by ultrasonic testing or by radiography.
EXCEPTION: When approved, the nondestructive testing rate for an individual
welder or welding operator may be reduced to 25 percent, provided the reject rate is
demonstrated to be 5 percent or less of the welds tested for the welder or welding op-
erator. A sampling of at least 40 completed welds for a job shall be made for such re-
duction evaluation. Reject rate is defined as the number of welds containing
rejectable defects divided by the number of welds completed. For evaluating there-
ject rate of continuous welds over 3 feet in length where the effective throat thickness
is I inch or less, each 12-inch increment or fraction thereof shall be considered as one
561
weld. For evaluating the reject rate on continuous welds over 3 feet in length where
the effective throat thickness is greater than I inch, each 6 inches oflength or fraction
thereof shall be considered one weld.
When approved by the building official and outlined in the project plans and speci-
fications, this nondestructive ultrasonic testing may be performed in the shop of an
approved fabricator utilizing qualified test techniques in the employment of the fabri-
cator.
Z. Partial penetration groove welds when used in column splices shall be tested
either by ultrasonic testing or radiography when required by the plans and specifi-
cations.
3. Base metal thicker than 11h inches, when subjected to through-thickness weld
shrinkage strains, shall be ultrasonically inspected for discontinuities directly be-
hind such welds after joint completion.
Any material discontinuities shall be accepted or rejected on the basis of the de-
fect rating in accordance with the (larger reflector) criteria ofU.B.C. Standard No.
27-6.
Steel Structures Resisting Forces Induced by Earthquake Motions

in Seismic Zones Nos. 1 and 2
Sec. 2711. (a) General. I. Design and construction of steel framing in lateral-
force-resisting systems in Seismic Zones Nos. I and 2 shall conform to the require-
ments of this code. In addition, in Seismic Zone No.2, such framing shall conform
to the requirements of this section. Ordinary moment frames in Seismic Zone No.
I, meeting the requirements of Section 2711 (d), may use an Rw value of 12. Other
framing in Seismic Zone No. I need not comply with this section.
(b) Definitions. Definitions shall be as prescribed in Section 2710 (b).
(c) Materials. Materials shall be as prescribed in Section 2710 (d).
EXCEPTION: Ordinary moment frames in accordance with Section 2711 (d).
(d) Ordinary Moment Frame Requirements. Girder-to-column connections
of ordinary moment frames shall meet the requirements of Section 2711 (e) I un-
less it can be shown that they are capable of resisting the combination of gravity
loads and 3(Rw/8) times the design seismic forces.
(e) Special Moment-resisting Frame (SMRF) Requirements. I. Girder-to-
column connection. A. Required strength. The girder-to-column connection
shall be adequate to develop the lesser of the following:
(i) The strength of the girder in flexure.
(ii) The moment corresponding to development ofthe panel zone shear strength
as determined from Formula ( 10-1 ).
EXCEPTION: Where a connection is not designed to contribute flexural resis-
tance at the joint, it need not develop the required strength if it can be shown to meet
the deformation compatibility requirements of Section 2337 (b) 4.
B. Connection strength. The girder-to-column connection may be considered
to be adequate to develop the flexural strength of the girder if it conforms to the
following:
(i) The flanges have full-penetration butt welds to the columns.
562
(ii) The girder web-to-column connection shall be capable of resisting the girder
shear determined for the combination of gravity loads and the seismic shear forces
which result from compliance with Section 2711 (e) 1 A. This connection strength
need not exceed that required to develop gravity loads plus 3(Rw/8) times the girder
shear resulting from the prescribed seismic forces.
Where the flexural strength of the girder flanges is greater than 70 percent of the
flexural strength of the entire section [i.e., btt(d-ft )Fy>0.72xFy] the web connec-
tion may be made by means of welding of high-strength bolting.
For girders not meeting the criteria in the paragraph above, the girder web-to-co-
lumn connection shall be made by means of welding the web directly or through
shear tabs to the column. That welding shall have a strength capable of develop-
ment at least 20 percent of the flexural strength of the girder web. The girder shear
shall be resisted by means of additional welds or friction-type high-strength bolts
or both.
C. Alternate connection. Connection configurations utilizing welds or high-
strength bolts not conforming with Subsection B above may be used if they are
shown by test or calculation to meetthe criteria in Subsection A above. Where con-
formance is shown by calculation, 125 percent of the strengths of the connecting
elements may be used.
D. Flange detail limitations. For steel whose specified strength is less than 1.5
times the specified yield strength, plastic hinges shall not form at locations in
which the beam flange area has been reduced, such as for bolt holes. Bolted con-
nections of flange plates ofbeam-columnjoints shall have the net-to-gross area ra-
tio A, IAg equal to or greater than 1.25 yl Fu.
2. Trusses in SMRF. Trusses may be used as horizontal members in SMRF if the
sum of the truss seismic force flexural strength exceeds the sum of the column seis-
mic force flexural strength immediately above and below the truss by a factor of at
least 1.25. For this determination, the strengths of the members shall be reduced by
the gravity load effects. In buildings of more than one story, the column axial stress
shall not exceed 0.4Fy and the ratio of the unbraced column height to the least ra-
dius of gyration shall not exceed 60. The connection of the truss chords to the col-
umn shall develop the lesser of the following:
A. The strength of the truss chord.
B. The chord force necessary to develop 125 percent ofthe flexural strength of
the column.
3. Girder-column joint restraint. A. Restrained joint. Where it can be shown
that the columns of SMRF remain elastic, the flanges of the columns need be later-
ally supported only at the level of the girder top flange.
Columns may be assumed to remain elastic if one of the following conditions is
satisfied:
(i) The ratio in Formula (10-3a) or (I0-3b) is greater than 1.25.
(ii) The flexural strength of the column is at least 1.25 times the moment that cor-
responds to the panel zone shear strength.
563
(iii) Girder flexural strength of panel zone strength will limit column stress ifa +
fhx + Ji,y) to Fy of the column.
(iv) The column will remain elastic under gravity loads plus 3(Rw/8) times the
prescribed seismic forces.
Where the column cannot be shown to remain elastic, the column flanges shall
be laterally supported at the levels of the girder top and bottom flanges. The col-
umn flange lateral support shall be capable of resisting a force equal to one percent
of the girder flange capacity at allowable stresses (and at a limiting displacement
perpendicular to the frame of 0.2 inch). Required bracing members may brace the
column flanges directly or indirectly through the column web or the girder flanges.
B. Unrestrained joint. Columns without lateral support transverse to a joint
shall conform to the requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No. 27-15, with the column
considered as a pin ended and the length taken as the distance between lateral sup-
ports conforming with A above. The column stress, Fa, shall be determined from
gravity loads plus the lesser of the following:
(i) 3(Rw/8) times the prescribed seismic forces.
(ii) The forces corresponding to either 125 percent of the girder flexural strength
or the panel zone shear strength.
The stress, Fhy· shall include the effects of the bracing force specified in Section
2711 (e) 3 A and P ~.
1/r for such columns shall not exceed 60.
At truss frames, the column shall be braced at each truss chord for a lateral force
equal to one percent of the compression yield strength of the chord.
4. Changes in beam flange area. Abrupt changes in beam flange area are not
permitted within possible plastic hinge regions of special moment-resistant
frames.
(f) Requirements for Braced Frames. I. General. The provisions of this sec-
tion apply to all braced frames, except eccentrically braced frames designed in ac-
cordance with Section 2710 (i). Those members which resist seismic forces totally
or partially by shear or flexure shall be designed in accordance with Section 2711
(e).
2. Bracing members. A. Stress reduction. The allowable stress, Fas• for brac-
ing members resisting seismic forces in compression shall be determined from the
following formula:
(11-1)
WHERE:
Fa the allowable axial compressive stress allowed in U.B.C. Standard No.
27-15.
B the stress-reduction factor determined from the following formula:
B = 1/[1 + (Kl/r/2Cc)] ~ 0.8 (11-2)
B. Built-up members. The 1/r of individual parts of built-up bracing members
between stitches, when computed about a line perpendicular to the axis through
the parts, shall not be greater than 75 percent of the 1/r of the member as a whole.
564
C. Compression elements in braces. The width-to-thickness ratio of stiffened

and unstiffened compression elements used in braces shall be shown in U.B.C.
Standard No. 27-15.
3. Bracing connections. A. Forces. Bracing connections shall be designed{(')~
the lesser of the following:
{i) The tensile strength of the bracing.
(ii) 3(Rw/8) times the force in the brace due to prescribed seismic forces.
(iii) The maximum force that can be transferred to the brace by the system.
Beam-to-column connections for beams that are part of the bracing system shall
have the capacity to transfer the force determined above.
B. Net area. In bolted brace connections, the ratio of effective net section area to
gross section area shall satisfy the formula:
Ae 1.2aF * (11-3)
Ag ----p;:-
WHERE:
Ae effective net area as defined in U.B.C. Standard No. 27-15.
F* stress in brace due to the forces determined in Section 2710 (h) 3 A.
a fraction of the member force from Section 2710 (h) 2 A that is trans-
ferred across a particular net section.
4. Bracing configuration for chevron and K bracing. A. Bracing members
shall be designed for 1.5 times the otherwise prescribed forces.
B. The beam intersected by chevron braces shall be continuous between col-
umns.
C. Where chevron braces intersect a beam from below, i.e., inverted V brace, the
beam shall be capable of supporting all tributary gravity loads presuming the brac-
ing not to exist.
EXCEPTION: This limitation need not apply to penthouses, one-story build-
ings or the top story of buildings.
5. One- and two-story buildings. Braced frames not meeting the requirements
of Section 2711 (f) 2 and 4 may be used in buildings not over two stories in height
and in roof structures as defined in Chapter 36 if the braces have the strength to
resist 3(Rw/8) times the code equivalent static forces.
6. Non building structures. Non building structures with Rw values defined by
Table No. 23-Q, need comply only with the provisions of Section 2711 (f) 3.
(g) Eccentrically Braced Frames. Eccentrically braced frames shall comply
with the requirements of Section 2710 (i).
(h) Nondestructive Testing. Shall comply with the provisions of Section 2710
(k).
565
NOTES
566
Chapter 28
ALUMINUM
Material Standards and Symbols
Sec. 2801. (a) General. The quality, design, fabrication and erection of alumi-
num used structurally in buildings and structures shall conform to the requirements
ofthis chapter, to other applicable requirements of this code and to U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 28-1 which is a part of this code and is also listed in Chapter 60, Part II.
(b) Alloys. The use of aluminum alloys and tempers other than those covered by
this chapter shall be permitted for structural members and assemblies, provided
standards of performance not less than those required by this chapter are substan-
tiated to the satisfaction of the building official. When required by the building offi-
cial, certification that the alloys and tempers called for on the plans have been
furnished shall be provided.
(c) Symbols and Notations. The symbols and notations used in these regula-
tions are defined as follows:
A area, square inches.
area of compression element, square inches (compression flange plus :::
iii!::
one third of area of web between compression flange and neutral axis). t~
area of cross section lying within 1.0 inch of a weld, square inches.
shorter dimension of rectangular panel, inches.
longer dimension of rectangular panel, inches.
equivalent width of rectangular panel, inches.
B,D,C
buckling formula constants, with following subscript:
c----<:ompression in columns
p----<:ompression in flat plates
1-----<:ompression in round tubes
tO--bending in round tubes
b--bending in rectangular bars
s-shear in flat plates
h width of sections, inches.
hit width-to-thickness ratio or rectangular element of a cross section.
c distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber, inches.
D diameter, inches.
d depth of section or beam, inches.
E compressive modulus of elasticity, kips per square inch (ksi).
f calculated stress, ksi.
fa average compressive stress on cross section of member produced by ax-
ial compressive load, ksi.
ji, maximum bending stress (compressive) caused by transverse loads or
end moments, ksi.
567
f. shear stress caused by torsion or transverse shear, ksi.

F allowable stress, ksi.
Fa allowable compressive stress for member considered as an axially
loaded column, ksi.
Fn allowable compressive stress for member considered as a beam, ksi.
Fnu bearing ultimate strength, ksi.
Fnuw bearing ultimate strength within 1.0 inch of a weld, ksi.
Fny bearing yield strength, ksi.
Fnyw bearing yield strength within 1.0 inch of a weld, ksi.
Fe allowable compressive stress, ksi.
Fey compressive yield strength, ksi.
Fcyw compressive yield strength across a butt weld (0.2 percent offset in
I 0-inch gauge length), ksi.
Fee 1t 2EI[nu(l/r) 2 ],
where llr is slenderness ratio for member considered as a
column tending to fail in the plane ofthe applied bending moments, ksi.
Fn allowable stress for cross section 1.0 inch or more from weld, ksi.
Fpw allowable stress on cross section, part of whose area lies within 1.0 inch
of a weld, ksi.
F., allowable shear stress for members subjected only to torsion or shear,
ksi.
Fsu shear ultimate strength, ksi.
F.:rmw shear ultimate strength within 1.0 inch of a weld, ksi.
F.,y shear yield strength, ksi.
F'.,yw shear yield strength within 1.0 inch of a weld, ksi.
Fru tensile ultimate strength, ksi.
Fruw tensile ultimate strength across a butt weld, ksi.
Fry tensile yield strength, ksi.
Fryw tensile yield strength across a butt weld (0.2 percent offset in 10-inch
gauge length), ksi.
Fv either Fry or Fey• whichever is smaller, ksi.
g spacing of rivet or bolt holes perpendicular to direction of load, inches.
G modulus of elasticity in shear, ksi.
h clear height of shear web, inches.
I moment of inertia, inches4 .
lh moment of inertia of horizontal stiffener, inches 4 •
Is moment of inertia of transverse stiffener to resist shear buckling,
inches4 •
lx moment of inertia of a beam about axis perpendicular to web, inches4 •
ly moment of inertia of a beam about axis parallel to web, inches 4 •
l\l\l lye moment of inertia of compression element about axis parallel to vertical
~\~~ web, inches4 .
568
J torsion constant, inches 4 •

kl = coefficient for determining slenderness limit S2 for sections for which
the allowable compressive stress is based on crippling strength.
k2 coefficient for determining allowable compressive stress in sections
with slenderness ratio above S2 for which the allowable compressive
stress is based on crippling strength.
k, coefficient for compression members.
k, coefficient for tension members.
fir slenderness ratio for columns.
L length of compression member between points of lateral support, or
twice the length of a cantilever column (except where analysis shows
that a shorter length can be used), inches.
L1, length of beam between points at which the compression flange is sup-
ported against lateral movement, or length of cantilever beam from free
end to point at which the compression flange is supported against lateral
movement, inches.
L11 total length of portion of column lying within 1.0 inch of a weld (exclud-
ing welds at ends of columns that are supported at both ends), inches.
Lw increased length to be substituted in column formula to determine allow-
able stress for welded column, inches.
M bending moment, inch-kips.
M, bending moment at center of span resulting from applied bending loads,
inch-kips.
Mm maximum bending moment in span resulting from applied bending
loads, inch-kips.
bending moments at two ends of a beam, inch-kips.

na factor of safety on appearance of buckling.
n 11 factor of safety on ultimate strength.
n,. factor of safety on yield strength.
N length of bearing at reaction or concentrated load, inches.
p local load concentration on bearing stiffener, kips.
allowable reaction or concentrated load per web, kips.
allowable tensile load per fastener, sheet to purlin or girt, kips.
r least radius of gyration of a column, inches.
radius of gyration of lip or bulb about face of flange from which lip pro-
jects, inches.
radius of gyration of a beam (about axis parallel to web), inches. (For
beams that are unsymmetrical about the horizontal axis, ry should be cal-
culated as though both flanges were the same as the compression
flange.)
R outside radius of round tube or maximum outside radius for an oval tube,
inches.
569
radius of curvature of tubular members, inches.

transition radius, the radius of an attachment of the weld detail.
s spacing of transverse stiffeners (clear distance between stiffeners for
stiffeners consisting of a pair of members, one on each side of the web,
center-to-center distance between stiffeners consisting of a member on
one side of the web only), inches; spacing of rivet or bolt holes parallel to
direction of load, inches.
Sc section modulus of a beam, compression side, inches 3 •
SR stress ratio, the ratio of minimum stress to maximum stress.
section modulus of a beam, tension side, inches 3 .
slenderness limits.
thickness of flange, plate, web or tube, inches. (For tapered flanges, tis
the average thickness.)
V shear force on web at stiffener location, kips.
a a factor equal to unity for a stiffener consisting of equal members on both
sides of the web and equal to 3.5 for a stiffener consisting of a member on
one side only.
e = angle between plane of web and plane of bearing surface (9 ~ 90), de-
''' grees.
(d) Identification. Aluminum for structural elements shall at all times be segre-
gated or otherwise handled in the fabricator's plant so that the separate alloys and
tempers are positively identified and, after completion of fabrication, shall be
marked to identify the alloy and temper. Such markings shall be affixed to com-
plete members and assemblies or to boxed or bundled shipments of multiple units
prior to shipment from the fabricator's plant.
Allowable Stresses for Members and Fasteners

Sec. 2802. (a) Allowable Unit Stresses. Except as modified by U.B.C. Standard
No. 28-1, allowable unit stresses in aluminum alloy structural members shall be
determined in accordance with the formulas of Table No. 28-C utilizing the safety
factors listed in Table No. 28-D, and the constants and coefficients listed in Tables
Nos. 28-E, 28-F and 28-G. Where two formulas are given, the smaller of the result-
ing stresses shall be used.
(b) Welded Structural Members. Allowable unit stresses for structural mem-
bers whose entire cross-sectional area lies within 1 inch of the center line of a butt
weld of the heel of a fillet weld shall be determined by means of the formulas of
Table No. 28-C utilizing the applicable minimum expected mechanical properties
for welded aluminum alloys listed in U.B.C. Standard No. 28-1. The tensile ulti-
mate strength, F'""'' shall be 90 percent of the ASME weld qualification test value
of ultimate strength. Except as modified by U.B.C. Standard No. 28-1, buckling
constants determined in accordance with the formulas of Tables Nos. 28-E and
28-G shall be calculated using the non welded mechanical properties of the respec-
tive aluminum alloys.
570
Ifless than 15 percent of the area of a given cross section lies within I inch ofthe
center line of a butt weld or the heel of a fillet weld, the effect of the weld may be
neglected and allowable stresses for non welded structural members may be used.
If the area of a cross section that lies within I inch of a weld is between 15 percent
and I 00 percent of the total area of the cross section, the allowable stress shall be
calculated by the following formula:
WHERE:
Fpw allowable stress on cross section part of whose area lies within 1.0 inch
of a weld.
Fn allowable stress for cross section 1.0 inch or more from weld.
Fw allowable stress on cross section if entire area were to lie within 1.0 inch
of a weld.
Aw area of cross section lying within 1.0 inch of a weld.
A net area of cross section of a tension member or tension flange of a beam,
or gross area of cross section of a compression member or compression
flange of a beam, square inches. (A beam flange is considered to consist
of that portion of the member further than 2c/3 from the neutral axis,
where c is the distance from the neutral axis to the extreme fiber.)
For columns and beams with welds at locations other than at their supported ends
(not farther from the supports than 0.05 L from the ends), and for cantilever col-
umns and single web beams with transverse welds at or near the supported end, the
effect of welding on allowable stresses shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions of U.B.C. Standard No. 28-1.
(c) Rivets and Bolts. Allowable stresses in aluminum rivets and bolts shall be as
set forth in Table No. 28-A.
(d) Fillet Welds. Allowable sheer stresses in fillet welds shall be as set forth in
Table No. 28-B.
Design
Sec. 2803. (a) Combined Stresses. Members subjected to combinations of
compression and bending or shear, compression and bending shall be proportioned
in accordance with the provisions of U.B.C. Standard No. 28-1.
(b) Light Gauge Members. Where the design of light gauge structural mem-
bers is involved, the special provisions of U.B.C. Standard No. 28-1 shall be
applied.
(c) Structural Roofing and Siding. The live load deflection of structural roof-
ing and siding made of formed sheet shall not exceed 1/ 60 of the span length.
(d) Connections. The design of mechanical and welded connections shall be in
accordance with this chapter and the provisions of U.B.C. Standard No. 28-1.
571
Fabrication and Erection

Sec. 2804. (a) Cutting. Oxygen cutting of aluminum alloys shall not be per-
mitted.
(b) Fasteners. Bolts and other fasteners shall be aluminum, stainless steel or
aluminized, hot-dip galvanized or electrogalvanized steel. Double cad-
mium-plated AN steel bolts may also be used. Steel rivets shall not be used except
where aluminum is to be joined to steel or where corrosion resistance of the struc-
ture is not a requirement or where the structure is to be protected against corrosion.
(c) Dissimilar Materials. Where aluminum alloy parts are in contact with dis-
similar metals, other than stainless, aluminized or galvanized steel or absorbent
building materials likely to be continuously or intermittently wet, the faying sur-
faces shall be painted or otherwise separated in accordance with U.B.C. Standard
No. 28-1.
(d) Painting. Except as prescribed in Section 2804 (c), painting or coating of
aluminum alloy parts shall be required only when called for on the plans.
(e) Welding. Aluminum parts shall be welded with an inert gas shielded arc or
resistance welding process. No welding process that requires a welding flux shall
be used. Filler alloys complying with the requirements of U.B.C. Standard No.
28-1 shall be used.
(f) Welder Qualification. All welds of structural members shall be performed
by welders qualified in accordance with the procedures of U.B.C. Standard No.
28-1.
(g) Erection. During erection, structural aluminum shall be adequately braced
and fastened to resist dead, wind and erection loads.
572
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 28-A, 28-B
TABLE NO. 28·A

ALLOWABLE STRESSES FOR RIVETS
MINIMUM ALLOWABLE
EXPECTED SHEAR
DESIGNATION DESIGNATION SHEAR STRESS ON
BEFORE DRIVING AFTER STRENGTH EFFECTIVE
DRIVING PROCEDURE DRIVING ksi AREA ksi
ll00-H14 Cold, as received 1100-F 9.5 4

2017-T4 Cold, as received 2017-T3 34 14.5
2117-T4 Cold, as received 2117-T3 29 12
5056-H32 Cold, as received 5056-H321 26 11
6053-T61 Cold, as received 6053-T61 20 8.5
6061-T4 Hot, 990° to 6061-T43 21 9
l050°F.
6061-T6 Cold, as received 6061-T6 26 Ill
ALLOWABLE STRESSES FOR BOLTS
ALLOWABLE 2 SHEAR ALLOWABLE

MINIMUM STRESS ON TENSILE STRESS
ALLOY AND EXPECTED SHEAR EFFECTIVE ON ROOT AREA
TEMPER STRENGTH ksi AREA ksi ksi
2024-T4 37 16 26
6061-T6 27 12 18
7075-T73 40 17 28
1Aiso applies to 6061-T6 pins.
2Values apply to either turned bolts or unfinished bolts in holes not more than
1116 inch oversized.
TABLE NO. 28-B

ALLOWABLE SHEAR STRESSES IN FILLET WELD5-ksi
(Shear Stress Is Considered to Equal to the Load Divided
by the Throat Area)
5356
FILLER ALLOY 1100 4043 5554 5556
Parent Alloy
1100 3.2 4.8 " "
3003 3.2 5 " "
Alclad 3004 " 5 7 8
5052 " .5 7 "
5083 " " " 8.5
5086 " " 7 8.5
5454 " " 7 8.5
5456 " " " 8.5
6061 " 5 7 8.5
6063 " 5 6.5 6.5
•Not permilled.
573
TABLE NO. 28·C-GENERAL FORMULAS FOR DETERMINING ALLOWABLE STRESSES N
cp
TYPE OF MEMBER OR COMPONENT
SPEC. ALLOWABLE STRESS, 0
TYPE OF STReSjl NO. KSI
TENSION, axial, Any tension member:

net section 1 F.,/•, or F~/(k,o,J
Rectanaular tubes, structural

shapes bent about strona axis -1-D- IV'\ 2 F,,/n, or F,.J(~.)
TENSION IN
BEAMS,
extreme fiber,
Round or oval tubes -o{)o- 3 l.l1F,,/n, or 1.24F,J(A:,n.)
net section Rectangular ban, plates.

shapes bent about weak axis I
_....., 4 t.30Fr11/n, or 1.42FrJ(kcn.)
BEARING
On rivets and bolts
s F,,f•, or F..J(l.2n.)
On flat surfaces and pins and on bolts in slotted holes 6 F..J(l.5•,) or F,./(1.8.. )
ALLOWABLE
ALLDNABLE STRESS, KSI ALlDNABLE STRESS,
STRESS, KSI, SLENDERNESS SLENDERNESS
SLENDERNESS KSI
SLENDERNESS UMIT, S,
BETWEEN S, AND S,
UMIT, S, SLENDERNESS ;;.. ~
<S,
COMPRESSION
IN COLUMNS, B - n.F..,
rr'E
...
axial, aross
section
All columns
7
F.,
"'"·
~=~
' D,
f.(s,-o,!')
• r
~=C.. flu (L/r)2 ...
CD
CD
c:
--1•1- -l. 1- -l•j _n.F.,, z
Outstandifll
8
F.,
!!=~
8
f.(s,- 5w}) !! ... ~ 1T2E
:;;
flanges and legs
I 1-f 1<.•, I 5.10,. • I I 5.1 nu (5.lblt) 2 0
::tl
COMPRESSION
Flat plates with 1--Y B _n.Ft, 3:
IN COMPONENTS f.g_ f.(s, -1.6D,~) !!=~ tr.v'ii;E aJ
r\Y !!=~
OF COLUMNS,
gross
section
both edges
supported H -hi-
9 1<.•, I 1.6D,.
• I I 1.6D, .. (1.61>/1) c:
r=
0
Curved plates
!_=(B,- i;:,· )' zG>
~bcp f.(s,-o,J~)
Tr2£
supported on both F.,
~=C,
edges. walls of
round or oval tubes
10
"'"· I D, 16nJlf-Jil + v:;rr 0
0
0
m
ALIDWAIILE
....
ALLOWABLE STRESS, KSI ALLOW'ABLE STRESS, CD
STRESS, KSI,
TYPE OF STRESS TYPE OF MEMBER OR COMPONENT SPEC.
NO.
SLENDERNESS
<S,
SLENDERNESS
UMIT, S,
SLENDERNESS
BETWEEN S, AND ~
SLENDERNESS
UMIT, ~
KSI
SLENDERNESS ~ ~
....
CD
c::
z
Single web beams
bent about strong
IIXis
-I-T-E- 11 ..
fu !:! _ 1.2(8, - F,1)
'• 0,
;)_8 D,t..)
• .. - 1.2r.
!:! •
r,
._zc. _.E
•• u..~a.~,, • ~
::0
3:
Round or oval
tubes 664 12
1.17F"
n,
~=
'
r··- 1.17F,.r
o••
~s.• -o•.f-j)
Ro
-=
I (:•·-· )'
-o.• -o.
...
Same as Specification 10
1
m
c::
r=c
z
C')
COMPRESSION
IN BEAMS,
O.rved Sections
~
12
1.17F"
...
_~~_ =
I
r·- 1.17F... r
0,
~8,-o,~)
R
-=c.
I 18n,
,.•E
(7)( I+ ~r
0
0
c
m
extreme
.,
fiber, gross •-;t-
seedon Solid rectangular
!.:.!fu ~J!j- 8,- UF,, .!.(s,- uo.~~) d.fJ c, _.E
beams
-EE 13 I d 2.)0, "• tl I
I 7-2.3 5.29n,(il/1) 1 (t../li)
RKtangular tubes
~md box sections
-0- 14 ..
fu W, _ (8,- F,,)'
'· 1.60..
~8,-1.60.#,) 4~·-(0..)'
'· 1.6
_.E
2.56o,IW./1 0 )
COMPRESSION
Outstanding
~-1 t- -1 ..... ~
.. B,- F,, HB,- 5.10.~) ..•. l,Vi;i

IN COMPONENTS
OF BEAMS,
(component
Ganges
I [
-1~1--;~t-
~~-
F\....r
15 fu ~-
I 5.10, ' I
~-
I S.tO, .,(5.11>/1)
., ..
under uniform
Trv
llat plates with
F,, ~-~ loVB;i
compression),
gross section
both edges
supported
16 fu ~- 8,-
I 1.60,
.!(8, - 1.60,~)
( I 1.60, ... (1.61>/1)
(Continued)
N
~
0
TABLE NO. 28·C-GENERAL FORMULAS FOR DETERMINING ALLOWABLE STRESSES-(Continued)
ALLOWAIIU
STRESS, KSI, ALLOWABLE STRESS, KSI ALLOWABLE STRESS,
SPt;C. SLENDERNESS SLENDERNESS SLENDERNESS KSI
TYPE OF StRESS TYPE OF MEMBER OR COMPONENT SLEIIIOERNESS UIIIT, S, UIIIT, S,
NO. <51 BElWEEN So AND S, SLENDERNESS ~ S,
Flat plates with

COMPRESSION compressed edge
lift tension ~
1 - •:1 j=~, 17 !!=B,-UF.,
I ),50,
_!._(s.
n,
- uo.~)
I
7r2£
n" (3.5bfl)2
IN COMPONENTS edge supported
OFBEAMS,
(component
under bending
in own
Flat plates with
both edges
Slpported
•
~\
18
I!
~~~~~----------~------~--~--------1-----------+-------------r----------+------------~
J.JF"!
_!._(s.-
n,
o.67o,'!.)
I .. k,Vii;E
n., (0.67hil)
plan•),
Ep.ro ~.··
.. ...
gross Flat plates with
section horizontal stiffener, .. .. I.JF., !!~B,- UF,, k,Vii;E
both edges 19 0.290, nr (0.29hlt)
!llpported
I
...
ID
ID
c:
~-.5_
SHEAR
IN WEBS,
Unstiffened
nat webs I LJI 20 h 8,-F,,
~- 1.250, t - 1.25 n,. ( 1.25hft)2
z
~
gross ::c
section Sliffened flat webs [t[fii..fi::::fi.J.. 21
F,, .!!L- .5_
rr2£ s:
n, t - 1.25 n" ( 1.25a,./l)' ID
... ..;.;. +o. 71•, , ••,. c:
r=
c
1For Fbltvalues greater than S2, the allowable bending shall be determined from the formula for tubes in compression, Specification 10, using the
formula that is appropriate for the particular value of Rb!t. Note that in this case Rblt may be either less or greater than the value of S2 fortubes in
z
G')
compression. 0
0
c
m
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 28·0, 28-E
TABLE NO. 28-D-FACTORS OF SAFETY FOR USE WITH ALUMINUM

ALLOWABLE STRESS SPECIFICATIONS
Building
And
Similar TYpe
Structures
I. Tension Members
F.S. on tensile strength, n" .... . 1.95
F.S. on yield strength, nY .. ........ . 1.65
2. Columns
F.S. on buckling strength, n" .. ........................................ . 1.95
F.S. on crippling strength of thin sections, nu ........ . 1.95
F.S. on yield strength for short columns, ny ......... . 1.65
3. Beams
F.S. on tensile strength, n" ........................................... . 1.95
F.S. on tensile yield strength, ny ... .................................... . 1.65
F.S. on compressive yield strength for short beams, ny ..................... . 1.65
F.S. on buckling strength, ny. . . . . .......... . 1.65
F.S. on crippling strength of thin sections, nY. . . . . . . . . ............ . 1.65
F. S. on shear buckling of webs, na . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . 1.20
4. Connections
F.S. on bearing strength... . . . . . . . . . . . ............... 1.2 x 1.95 = 2.34
F.S. on bearing yield strength, ny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.65
F.S. on shear strength of rivets and bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 x I. 95 = 2.34
F.S. onshearstrengthoffilletwelds ............................ 1.2 x 1.95 = 2.34
F.S. on tensile strength of butt welds, n". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. 95
F.S. on tensile yield strength of butt welds, ny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.65
TABLE NO. 28-E-FORMULAS FOR BUCKLING CONSTANTS

For All Products Whose Temper Designation Begins with -0, -H, -T1, -T2, -T3 or -T4
TYPE OF MEMBER
AND STRESS INTERCEPT, KSI SLOPE, KSI INTERSECTION
I. Compression in Columns
and Beam Flanges B' =F;y [~)112]
I+ 1000 D,
=~
20
(6B,) 112
E
c 28,
,=3D,
2. Compression in Flat
Plates BP=Fcy [ I+~
(F) I''] B ( 6B )
Dp=To- T 112
CP- 3D
_.l:!!.e_
p
115
3. Compression in Round
Thbes Under Axial End B=F
' cy [I+~
5.8 ] D, =~(~)"'
3.7 E c, •
Load
113
4. Compressive Bending
B•= l.3Fcy [1 + (F;/ ] -~(~)112
Db- 20 E
28b
Stress in Solid Rectan- c.= 3D•
gular Bars
Stress in Round Thbes B,.= 1.5FY I
[
+Ts
(F. ) 1/5] _.!!.E._ ( B,b)
D,.- 2.7 E
"' C
lb
=(B,.-B,r
D,b-D,
6. Shear Stress in Flat
Plates -
B,-F., [I+ ~_
113]
D,
=~(-6B,_)
20 E
1/2 c 28,
,=3D,
62
7. Crippling of Flat Plates
in Compression or
Bending
kl = 0.50 k2 =2.04
*C, can be found from a plot of the curves of allowable stress based on elastic and inelastic buckling or
by a trial-and-error solution.
sn
28-F, 28-G 1991 UNIFORM BUilDING CODE
TABLE NO. 28-F-VALUES OF COEFFICIENTS k 1 and kc

NONWELDED OR REGIONS
FARTHER THAN 1.0 INCH REGIONS WITHIN 1.0 INCH
ALLOY AND TEMPER FROM A WELD OF A WELD
k, kc k, k c1
2014-T6, -T651 1.25 1.12 - -

A\clad 20\4-T6, -T651 1.25 1.12 - -
6061-T6, -T65l 1.0 1.12 1.0 1.0
6063-TS, -T6, -T83 1.0 1.12 1.0 1.0
6351-TS 1.0 1.12 1.0 1.0
All others listed in
U.B.C. Standard No. 28-1 1.0 1.!0 1.0 1.0
11f the
weld yield strength exceeds 0.9 of the parent metal yield strength, the allowable com-
pressive stress within 1.0 inch of a weld should be taken equal to the allowable stress for
nonwelded material.
TABLE NO. 28-G-FORMULAS FOR BUCKLING CONSTANTS

For All Products Whose Temper Designation Begins with -T5,·T6,·TI,-T8 or-T9
TYPE OF MEMBER
AND STRESS INTERCEPT, KSI SLOPE, KSI INTERSECTION
8,=F,Y[l+(~r l
2
l. Compression in Columns
D,
=~(~)f/2
10 E
8,.
C,=0.41D;:"
and Beam Flanges
2. Compression in Flat
Plates
- [ J!d
8P-F0 • l+ ll.4
l/3] 8 (8
Dp=To- T r -
CP-0.41 ~
DP
3. Compression in Round
Thbes Under Axial End
-
8,-F,Y [~II>]
1+ _
87 D,= :.5 (ir' c, •
Load
4. Compressive Bending [ (F )
8b= l.3Fcy 1 + f
113] =~(~)112 2Bb
Cb=TIJ;
Stress in Solid Rectan- Db 20 E
gular Bars
Stress in Round Thbes
-
8,b-1.5Fr l+
[ JfJ_
_
87
I >] -~(~)l/3
D,b- 2.7 E
C =(8,b-8,r
rb D,h-Dr
I/3] 112
~o·(-i-)
6. Shear Stress in Flat [ (F) 8,
Plates 8,=F, l + T 3 D,= C,=0.41D,

in Compression k, = 0.35 k2 = 2.27
in Bending k, = 0.50 k2 = 2.04
*C, can be found from a plot of the curves of allowable stress based on elastic and inelastic buckling or
by a trial-and-error solution.
578
Part VI
DETAILED REGULATIONS
Chapter 29
EXCAVATIONS, FOUNDATIONS AND
RETAINING WALLS
Scope
Sec. 2901. (a) General. This chapter sets forth requirements for excavation and
fills for any building or structure and for foundations and retaining structures.
Reference is made to Appendix Chapter 70 for requirements governing excava-
tion, grading and earthwork construction, including fills and embankments.
(b), Standard.s of Quality. The standards listed below labeled a "U.B.C. stan- .'•,.: .
,!.,!..,!
d ard' are a1so 1tsted in Chapter 60, Part II, and are part of this code.
I. Testing
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 29-1, Soils Classification
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 29-2, Expansion Index Test
2. Design
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 29-3, Treated Wood Foundation System
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 29-4,DesignofSiab-on-gradeFoundations to Resist the
Effects of Expansive Soils
Quality and Design

Sec. 2902. The quality and design of materials used structurally in excavations,
footings and foundations shall conform to the requirements specified in Chapters
23, 24, 25,26 and 27 of this code.
Excavations and Fills

Sec. 2903. (a) General. Excavation or fills for buildings or structures shall be so
constructed or protected that they do not endanger life or property.
Slopes for permanent fills shall not be steeper than 2 horizontal to I vertical. Cut
slopes for permanent excavations shall not be steeper than 2 horizontal to I vertical
unless substantiating data justifying steeper cut slopes are submitted. Deviation
from the foregoing limitations for cut slopes shall be permitted only upon the pre-
sentation of a soil investigation report acceptable to the building official.
No fill or other surcharge loads shall be placed adjacent to any building or struc-
ture unless such building or structure is capable of withstanding the additional
loads caused by the fill or surcharge.
Existing footings or foundations which may be affected by any excavation shall
be underpinned adequately or otherwise protected against settlement and shall be
protected against lateral movement.
579
Fills to be used to support the foundations of any building or structure shall be

placed in accordance with accepted engineering practice. A soil investigation re-
port and a report of satisfactory placement of fill, both acceptable to the building
official, shall be submitted.
(b) Protection of Adjoining Property. The requirements for protection of adja-
cent property and depth to which protection is required shall be as defined by pre-
vailing law. Where not defined by law, the following shall apply: Any person
making or causing an excavation to be made to a depth of 12 feet or less below the
grade shall protect the excavation so that the soil of adjoining property will not cave
in or settle, but shall not be liable for the expense of underpinning or extending the
foundation of buildings on adjoining properties when the excavation is not in ex-
cess of 12 feet in depth. Before commencing the excavation, the person making or
causing the excavation to be made shall notify in writing the owners of adjoining
buildings not less than I 0 days before such excavation is to be made that the exca-
vation is to be made and that the adjoining buildings should be protected.
The owners of the adjoining properties shall be given access to the excavation
for the purpose of protecting such adjoining buildings.
Any person making or causing an excavation to be made exceeding 12 feet in
depth below the grade shall protect the excavation so that the adjoining soil will not
cave in or settle and shall extend the foundation of any adjoining buildings below
the depth of 12 feet below grade at the expense of the person causing or making the
excavation. The owner of the adjoining buildings shall extend the foundation of
these buildings to a depth of 12 feet below grade at such owner's expense, as pro-
vided in the preceding paragraph.
Soil Classification-Expansive Soil

Sec. 2904. (a) Soil Classification: General. For the purposes ofthis chapter, the
definition and classification of soil materials for use in Table No. 29-B shall be ac-
cording to U.B.C. Standard No. 29-1.
(b) Expansive Soil. When the expansive characteristics of a soil are to be deter-
mined, the procedures shall be in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 29-2 and
the soil shall be classified according to Table No. 29-C. Foundations for structures
resting on soils with an expansion index greater than 20, as determined by U.B.C.
Standard No. 29-2, shall require special design consideration. In the event the soil
expansion index varies with depth, the weighted index shall be determined accord-
ing to Table No. 29-D.
Foundation Investigation
Sec. 2905. (a) General. The classification of the soil at each building site shall
be determined when required by the building official. The building official may re-
quire that this determination be made by an engineer or architect licensed by the
state to practice as such.
(b) Investigation. The classification shall be based on observation and any nec-
essary tests of the materials disclosed by borings or excavations made in appropri-
ate locations. Additional studies may be necessary to evaluate soil strength, the
580
effect of moisture variation on soil-bearing capacity, compressibility and expan-

siveness.
(c) Reports. The soil classification and design bearing capacity shall be shown
on the plans, unless the foundation conforms to Table No. 29-A. The building~{{\
cia! may require submission of a written report of the investigation which shall in-
clude, but need not be limited to, the following information:
I. A plot showing the location of all test borings and/or excavations.
2. Descriptions and classifications of the materials encountered.
3. Elevation of the water table, if encountered.
4. Recommendations for foundation type and design criteria, including bearing
capacity, provisions to minimize the effects of expansive soils and the effects of
adjacent loads.
5. Expected total and differential settlement.
(d) Expansive Soils. When expansive soils are present, the building official may
require that special provisions be made in the foundation design and construction
to safeguard against damage due to this expansiveness. The building official may
require a special investigation and report to provide these design and construction
criteria.
(e) Adjacent Loads. Where footings are placed at varying elevations the effect
of adjacent loads shall be included in the foundation design.
(f) Drainage. Provisions shall be made for the control and drainage of surface
water around buildings. [See also Section 2907 (d) 5.]
Allowable Foundation and Lateral Pressures

Sec. 2906. The allowable foundation and lateral pressures shall not exceed the
values set forth in Table No. 29-B unless data to substantiate the use of higher val-
ues are submitted. Table No. 29-B may be used for design of foundations on rock
or nonexpansive soil for Types II One-hour, II-N and V buildings which do not ex-
ceed three stories in height or for structures which have continuous footings having
a load of less than 2,000 pounds per lineal foot and isolated footings with loads of
less than 50,000 pounds.
Footings
Sec. 2907. (a) General. Footings and foundations shall be constructed of rna- !f,
sonry, concrete or treated wood in conformance with U.B.C. Standard No. 29-3 ~'
and shall extend below the frost line. Footings of concrete and masonry shall be of [
solid material. Foundations supporting wood shall extend at least 6 inches above
the adjacent finish grade. Footings shall have a minimum depth as indicated in
Table No. 29-A unless another depth is recommended by a foundation investiga-
tion.
The provisions of this section do not apply to building and foundation systems in f
those areas subject to scour and water pressure by wind and wave action. Buildings \.~' :, '
and foundations subject to such loads shall be designed in accordance with ap- ?
proved national standards. i~
581
(b) Bearing Walls. Bearing walls shall be supported on masonry or concrete

foundations or piles or other approved foundation system which shall be of suffi-
cient size to support all loads. Where a design is not provided, the minimum foun-
dation requirements for stud bearing walls shall be as set forth in Table No. 29-A.
EXCEPTIONS: I. A one-story wood- or metal-frame building not used for hu-
man occupancy and not over 400 square feet in floor area may be constructed with
walls supported on a wood foundation plate when approved by the building official.
2. The support of buildings by posts embedded in earth shall be designed as speci-
fied in Section 2907 (g). Wood posts or poles embedded in earth shall be pressure
treated with an approved preservative. Steel posts or poles shall be protected as speci-
fied in Section 2908 (i).
(c) Stepped Foundations. Foundations for all buildings where the surface ofthe
ground slopes more than I foot in I 0 feet shall be level or shall be stepped so that
both top and bottom of such foundation are level.
(d) Footings on or Adjacent to Slopes. I. Scope. The placement of buildings
and structures on or adjacent to slopes steeper than 3 horizontal to I vertical shall be
in accordance with this section.
2. Building clearance from ascending slopes. In general, buildings below
slopes shall be set a sufficient distance from the slope to provide protection from
slope drainage, erosion and shallow failures. Except as provided for in Subsection
6 of this section and Figure No. 29-1, the following criteria will be assumed to pro-
vide this protection. Where the existing slope is steeper than I horizontal to I verti-
cal, the toe of the slope shall be assumed to be at the intersection of a horizontal
plane drawn from the top ofthe foundation and a plane drawn tangent to the slope at
an angle of 45 degrees to the horizontal. Where a retaining wall is constructed at the
toe of the slope, the height of the slope shall be measured from the top of the wall to
the top of the slope.
3. Footing setback from descending slope surface. Footing on or adjacent to
slope surfaces shall be founded in firm material with an embedment and setback
from the slope surface sufficient to provide vertical and lateral support for the foot-
ing without detrimental settlement. Except as provided for in Subsection 6 of this
section and Figure No. 29-1, the following setback is deemed adequate to meet the
criteria. Where the slope is steeper than I horizontal to I vertical, the required set-
back shall be measured from an imaginary plane 45 degrees to the horizontal, pro-
jected upward from the toe of the slope.
4. Pools. The setback between pools regulated by this code and slopes shall be
equal to one half the building footing setback distance required by this section.
That portion of the pool wall within a horizontal distance of 7 feet from the top of
the slope shall be capable of supporting the water in the pool without soil support.
5. Foundation elevation. On graded sites, the top of any exterior foundation
shall extend above the elevation of the street gutter at point of discharge or the inlet
of an approved drainage device a minimum of 12 inches plus 2 percent. The build-
ing official may approve alternate elevations, provided it can be demonstrated that
required drainage to the point of discharge and away from the structure is provided
at all locations on the site.
582
6. Alternate setback and clearance. The building official may approve alter-
nate setbacks and clearances. The building official may reyuire an investigation
and recommendation of a yualified engineer to demonstrate that the intent of this
section has been satisfied. Such an investigation shall include consideration of ma-
terial, height of slope. slope gradient. load intensity and erosion characteristics of
slope material.
(c) Footing Design. Except for special provisions of Section 2909 covering the
design of piles. all portions of footings shall be designed in accordance with the
structural provisions of this code and shall be designed to minimize differential
settlement and the effects of expansive soils when present.
Slab-on-grade and mat-type footings for buildings located on expansive soils
may be designed in accordance with the provisions of U .B.C. Standard No. 29-4 or
such other engineering design based on geotechnical recommendation as ap-
proved by the building official.
(I") Foundation Plates or Sills. Foundation plates or sills shall be bolted to the
foundation or foundation wall with not less than 1h-inch nominal diameter steel
bolts embedded at least 7 inches into the concrete or masonry and spaced not more
than 6 feet apart. There shall be a minimum of two bolts per piece with one bolt
located within 12 inches of each end of each piece. A properly sized nut and washer
shall be tightened on each bolt to the plate. Foundation plates and sills shall be the
kind of wood specified in Section2516 (c).
(g) Designs Employing Lateral Rearing. I. General. Construction employing
posts or poles as columns embedded in earth or embedded in concrete footings in
the earth may be used to resist both axial and lateral loads. The depth to resist lateral
loads shall be determined by means of the design criteria established herein or oth-
er methods approved by the building official.
2. Design criteria. A. Nonconstrained. The following formula may be used in
determining the depth of embedment reyuired to resist lateral loads where no con-
straint is provided at the ground surface. such as rigid llooror rigid ground surface
pavement.
d =A
- ( I+
2
j 4.36h)
1+ --
A
WHERE:
2.34P
A
S1h
P applied lateral force in pounds.
S1 allowable lateral soil-bearing pressure as set forth in Table No. 29-B
based on a depth of one third the depth of embedment.
S1 allowable lateral soil-bearing pressure as set forth in Table No. 29-B
based on a depth eyual to the depth of embedment.
583
h diameter of round post or footing or diagonal dimension of square post

or footing (feet).
h distance in feet from ground surface to point of application of "P."
d depth of embedment in earth in feet but not over 12 feet for purpose of
computing lateral pressure.
B. Constrained. The following formula may be used to determine the depth of
embedment required to resist lateral loads where constraint is provided at the
ground surface, such as a rigid floor or pavement.
Jl = 4.25 !..!!..._
S3b
C. Vertical load. The resistance to vertical loads is determined by the allowable
soil-bearing pressure set forth in Table No. 29-B.
3. Backfill. The backfill in the annular space around columns not embedded in
poured footings shall be by one of the following methods:
A. Backfill shall be of concrete with an ultimate strength of 2,000 pounds per
square inch at 28 days. The hole shall not be less than 4 inches larger than the diam-
eter of the column at its bottom or 4 inches larger than the diagonal dimension of a
square or rectangular column.
B. Backfill shall be of clean sand. The sand shall be thoroughly compacted by
tamping in layers not more than 8 inches in depth.
4. Limitations. The design procedure outlined in this subsection shall be subject
to the following limitations:
The frictional resistance for retaining walls and slabs on silts and clays shall be
Iimited to one half of the normal force imposed on the soil by the weight of the foot-
ing or slab.
Posts embedded in earth shall not be used to provide lateral support for structural
or nonstructural materials such as plaster, masonry or concrete unless bracing is
provided that develops the limited deflection required.
(h) Grillage Footings. When grillage footings of structural steel shapes are used
on soils, they shall be completely embedded in concrete with at least 6 inches on the
bottom and at least 4 inches at all other points.
(i) Bleacher Footings. Footings for open-air seating facilities shall comply with
Chapter 29.
EXCEPTIONS: Temporary open-air portable bleachers as defined in Section
3322 may be supported upon wood sills or steel plates placed directly upon the
ground surface, provided soil pressure does not exceed I ,200 pounds per square foot.
Piles-General Requirements
Sec. 2908. (a) General. Pile foundations shall be designed and installed on the
basis of a foundation investigation as defined in Section 2905 where required by
The investigation and report provisions of Section 2905 shall be expanded to in-
clude but not be limited to the following:
584
I. Recommended pile types and installed capacities.

2. Driving criteria.
3. Installation procedures.
4. Field inspection and reporting procedures (to include procedures for verifica-
tion of the installed bearing capacity where required).
5. Pile load test requirements.
The use of piles not specifically mentioned in this chapter shall be permitted,
subject to the approval of the building official upon submission of acceptable test
data, calculations or other information relating to the properties and load-carrying
capacities of such piles.
(b) Interconnection. Individual pile caps and caissons of every structure sub-
jected to seismic forces shall be interconnected by ties. Such ties shall be capable of
resisting, in tension or compression, a minimum horizontal force equal to I 0 per-
cent of the larger column vertical load.
EXCEPTION: Other approved methods may be used where it can be demon-
strated that equivalent restraint can be provided.
(c) Determination of Allowable Loads. The allowable axial and lateral loads
on piles shall be determined by an approved formula, by load tests or by a founda-
tion investigation.
(d) Static Load Tests. When the allowable axial load of a single pile is deter-
mined by a load test, one of the following methods shall be used:
Method 1. It shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield point under test load. The
yield point shall be defined as that point at which an increase in load produces a
disproportionate increase in settlement.
Method 2. It shall not exceed one half of the load which causes a net settlement,
after deducting rebound, ofO.O I inch per ton of test load which has been applied for
a period of at least 24 hours.
Method 3. It shall not exceed one half of that load under which, during a40-hour
period of continuous load application, no additional settlement takes place.
(e) Column Action. All piles standing unbraced in air, water or material not
capable of lateral support, shall conform with the applicable column formula as
specified in this code. Such piles driven into firm ground may be considered fixed
and laterally supported at 5 feet below the ground surface and in soft material at I 0
feet below the ground surface unless otherwise prescribed by the building official
after a foundation investigation by an approved agency.
(f) Group Action. Consideration shall be given to the reduction of allowable
pile load when piles are placed in groups. Where soil conditions make such load
reductions advisable or necessary, the allowable axial load determined for a single
pile shall be reduced by any rational method or formula approved by the building
official.
(g) Piles in Subsiding Areas. Where piles are driven through subsiding fills or
other subsiding strata and derive support from underlying firmer materials, consid-
eration shall be given to the downward frictional forces which may be imposed on
the piles by the subsiding upper strata.
585
Where the influence of subsiding fills is considered as imposing loads on the

pi lc, the allowable stresses specified in this chapter may be increased if satisfactory
substantiating data are submitted.
(h) Jetting. Jetting shall not be used except where and as specifically permitted
by the building official. When used, jetting shall be carried out in such a manner
that the carrying capacity of existing piles and structures shall not be impaired. Af-
ter withdrawal of the jet, piles shall be driven down until the required resistance is
obtained.
( i) Protection of Pile Materials. Where the boring records of site conditions in-
dicate possible deleterious action on pile materials because of soil constituents,
changing water levels or other factors, such materials shall be adequately protected
by methods or processes approved by the building official. The effectiveness of
such methods or processes for the particular purpose shall have been thoroughly
established by satisfactory service records or other evidence which demonstrates
the effectiveness of such protective measures.
(j) Allowable Loads. The allowable loads based on soil conditions shall bees-
tablished in accordance with Section 2908.
EXCEPTION: Any uncased cast-in-place pile may be assumed to develop a
frictional resistance equal toone sixth of the bearing value of the soil material at mini-
mum depth as set forth in Table No. 29-B but not to exceed 500 pounds per squarefoot
unless a greater value is allowed by the building official after a soil investigation as
specified in Section 2905 is submitted. Frictional resistance and bearing resistance
shall not be assumed to act simultaneously unless recommended after a foundation
investigation as specified in Section 2905.
(k) Use of Higher Allowable Pile Stresses. Allowable compressive stresses
greater than those specified in Section 2909 shall be permitted when substantiating
data justifying such higher stresses are submitted to and approved by the building
official. Such substantiating data shall include a foundation investigation includ-
ing a report in accordance with Section 2908 (a) by a soils engineer defined as a
civil engineer experienced and knowledgeable in the practice of soils engineering.
Specific Pile Requirements
Sec. 2909. (a) Round Wood Piles. I. Material. Except where untreated piles
are permitted, wood piles shall be pressure treated. Untreated piles may be used
only when it has been established that the cutoff will be below lowest groundwater
level assumed to exist during the life of the structure.
2. Allowable stresses. The allowable unit stresses for round wood piles shall not
exceed those set forth in Table No. 25-E.
The allowable values listed in Table No. 25-E for compression parallel to the
grain at extreme fiber in bending are based on load sharing as occurs in a pile clus-
ter. For piles which support their own specific load, a safety factor of 1.25 shall be
applied to compression parallel to the grain values and 1.30 to extreme fiber in
bending values.
(b) Uncased Cast-in-place Concrete Piles. I. Material. Concrete piles cast in
place against earth in drilled or bored holes shall be made in such a manner as to
ensure the exclusion of any foreign matter and to secure a full-sized shaft. The
586
length of such pile shall be limited to not more than 30 times the average diameter.
Concrete shall have an ultimate compressive strength/: of not less than 2,500
pounds per square inch (psi).
EXCEPTION: The length of pile may exceed 30 times the diameter provided the
design and installation of the pile foundation is in accordance with an approved in-
vestigation report.
2. Allowable stresses. The allowable compressive stress in the concrete shall
not exceed 0.33j; .. The allowable compressive stress of reinforcement shall not
exceed 34 percent of the yield strength of the steel or 25,500 psi.
(c) Metal-cased Concrete Piles. I. Material. All concrete used in metal-cased
concrete piles shall have an ultimate compressive strength/:. of not less than 2,500
psi.
2. Installation. Every metal casing for a concrete pile shall have a sealed tip with
a diameter of not less than 8 inches.
Concrete piles cast in place in metal shells shall have shells driven for their full
length in contact with the surrounding soil and left permanently in place. The shells
shall be sut1'iciently strong to resist collapse and sufficiently watertight to exclude
water and foreign material during the placing of concrete.
Piles shall be driven in such order and with such spacing as to ensure against dis-
tortion of or injury to piles already in place. No pile shall be driven within four and
one-half average pile diameters of a pile filled with concrete less than 24 hours old
unless approved by the building official.
3. Allowable stresses. Allowable stresses shall not exceed the values specified
in Section 2909 (b) 2, except that the allowable concrete stress may be increased to
a maximum value of0.40j; for that portion of the pile meeting the following con-
ditions:
I. The thickness of the metal casing is not less than No. 14 gauge.
2. The casing is seamless or is provided with seams of equal strength and is of a
configuration which will provide confinement to the cast-in-place concrete.
3. The designj; shall not exceed 5,000 psi and the ratio of metal yield strength
shall not be less than 6.
4. The pile diameter is not greater than 16 inches.
(d) Precast Concrete Piles. I. Material. Precast concrete piles prior to driving
and at 28 days after pouring shall develop an ultimate compressive strength{; of at
least 3,000 psi.
2. Reinforcement ties. The longitudinal reinforcement in driven precast con-
crete piles shall be laterally tied with steel ties or wire spirals. Ties and spirals shall
not be spaced more than 3 inches apart, center to center, for a distance of2 feet from
the ends and not more than 8 inches elsewhere. The gauge of ties and spirals shall be
as follows:
For piles having a diameter of 16 inches or less, wire shall not be smaller than No.
5 gauge.
For piles having a diameter of more than 16 inches and less than 20 inches, wire
shall not be smaller than No. 4 gauge.
587
For piles having a diameter of20 inches and larger, wire shall not be smaller than
1
/4 inch round or No. 3 gauge.
3. Allowable stresses. Precast concrete piling shall be designed to resist stresses
induced by handling and driving as well as by loads. The allowable stresses shall
not exceed the values specified in Section 2909 (b) 2.
(e) Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles (Pretensioned). 1. Material. Precast
prestressed concrete piles shall develop a compressive strength of not less than
4,000 psi before driving and an ultimate compressive strengthf:. at 28 days after
pouring of not less than 5,000 psi.
2. Reinforcement. The longitudinal reinforcement shall be high-tensile
seven-wire strand. Longitudinal reinforcement shall be laterally tied with steel ties
or wire spirals.
Ties or spiral reinforcement shall not be spaced more than 3 inches apart center
to center for a distance of2 feet from the ends and not more than 8 inches elsewhere.
At each end of the pile, the first five ties or spirals shall be spaced 1 inch center to
center.
For piles having a diameterof24 inches or less, wire shall not be smaller than No.
5 gauge. For piles having a diameter greater than 24 inches but less than 36 inches,
wire shall not be smaller than No.4 gauge. For piles having a diameter greater than
36 inches, wire shall not be smaller than 1/ 4 inch round or No.3 gauge.
3. Allowable stresses. Precast prestressed piling shall be designed to resist
stresses induced by handling and driving as well as by loads. The effective pre-
stress in the pile shall not be less than 400 psi for piles up to 30 feet in length, 550 psi
for piles up to 50 feet in length, and 700 pounds per square inch for piles greater
than 50 feet in length.
The compressive stress in the concrete due to externally applied load shall not
exceed:
h = 0.33f;. - 0.27fp,
WHERE:
fPc = effective prestress stress on the gross section.
Effective prestress shall be based on an assumed loss of 30,000 psi in the pre-
stressing steel. The allowable stress in the prestressing steel shall not exceed the
values specified in Section 2618.
(f) Structural Steel Piles. 1. Material. Structural steel piles, steel pipe piles and
fully welded steel piles fabricated from plates shall conform to U.B.C. Standard
No. 27-1 and be identified in accordance with Section 2701 (b).
2. Allowable stresses. The allowable axial stresses shall not exceed 0.35 of the
minimum specified yield strength Fy, provided such yield strength shall not be as-
.
sumed greater than 36,000 psi for computational purposes.
EXCEPTION: When justified in accordance with Section 2908 (k), the allow-
able stresses may be increased to 0.50 Fy .
3. Minimum dimensions. Sections of driven H-piles shall comply with the fol-
lowing:
588
A. The flange projection shall not exceed 14 times the minimum thickness of
metal in either the flange or the web, and the flange widths shall not be less than 80
percent of the depth of the section.
B. The nominal depth in the direction of the web shall not be less than 8 inches.
C. Flanges and webs shall have a minimum nominal thickness of% inch.
Sections of driven pipe piles shall have an outside diameter of not less than I 0
inches and a minimum thickness of not less than 1/ 4 inch.
(g) Concrete-filled Steel Pipe Piles. l. Material. Steel pipe piles shall conform
to U.B.C. Standard No. 27-1 and shall be identified in accordance with Section
2701 (b). The concrete-filled steel pipe piles shall have an ultimate compressive
strength/; of not less than 2,500 psi.
2. Allowable stresses. The allowable axial stresses shall not exceed 0.35 of the
minimum specified yield strength Fy on the steel plus 0.33 of the ultimate compres-
sive strengthf'c of the concrete, provided Fy shall not be assumed greater than
36,000 psi for computational purposes.
EXCEPTION: When justified in accordance with Section 2908 (k), the allow-
able stresses may be increased to 0.50 Fy.
3. Minimum dimensions. Driven piles of uniform section shall have a nominal
outside diameter of not less than 8 inches.
Foundation Construction-seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4

Sec. 2910. (a) General. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 the furtherrequirements
of this section shall apply to the design and construction offoundations, foundation
components and the connection of superstructure elements thereto.
(b) Soil Capacity. The one-third stress increase allowed by Section 2303 (d)
may be exceeded for soils for combinations including earthquake when substan-
tiated by geotechnical data. The foundation shall be capable of transmitting the de-
sign base shear and overturning forces prescribed in Section 2334 from the
structure into the supporting soil. The short-term dynamic nature ofthe loads may
be taken into account in establishing the soil properties.
(c) Superstructure-to-foundation Connection. The connection of superstruc-
ture elements to the foundation shall be adequate to transmit to the foundation the
forces for which the elements were required to be designed.
(d) Foundation-soil Interface. For regular buildings, the force F, may be
omitted when determining the overturning moment to be resisted at the founda-
tion-soil interface.
(e) Special Requirements for Piles and Caissons. Piles and caissons shall be
designed for flexure whenever the tops of such members will be displaced by earth-
quake motions. The criteria and detailing requirements of Section 2625 (e) for con-
crete and Section 2710 (e) for steel shall apply for a length of such members equal
to 120 percent of the flexural length.
589
29-A, 29·8 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 29-A-FOUNDATIONS FOR STUD BEARING WALL5-MINIMUM

REQUIREMENTS1 2
NUMBER OF THICKNESS OF OEPTH BELOW
FLOORS FOUNDATION WALL WIDTH OF THICKNESS UNDISTURBED
SUPPORTED (Inches) FOOTING OF FOOTING GROUND
BY THE UNIT (Inches) (Inches) SURFACE
FOUNDATION3 CONCRETE MASONRY (Inches)
I 6 6 12 6 12
2 8 8 15 7 18
3 10 10 18 8 24
1Where unusual conditions or frost conditions are found, footings and foundations shall be
as required in Section 2907 (a).
2The ground under the floor may be excavated to the elevation of the top of the footing.
3Foundations may support a roof in addition to the stipulated number of floors. Foundations
supporting roofs only shall be as required for supporting one floor.
TABLE NO. 29·8-ALLOWABLE FOUNDATION AND LATERAL PRESSURE

LATERAL SLIDING!
LATERAL
BEARING
LBS./SQ./FT./
ALLOWABLE FT. OF DEPTH
FOUNDATION BELOW
PRESSURE LBS. NATURAL COEF- RESISTANCE
CLASS OF MATERIALS2 /SQ.FT.3 GRADE4 FICIENTS LBS./SQ. FT.&
I. Massive Crystalline Bedrock 4000 1200 .70

2. Sedimentary and Foliated
Rock 2000 400 .35
3. Sandy Gravel and/or Gravel
(GWandGP) 2000 200 .35
4. Sand, Silty Sand, Clayey
Sand, Silty Gravel and
Clayey Gravel (SW, SP, SM,
SC, GM and GC) 1500 150 .25
5. Clay, Sandy Clay, Silty Clay
and Clayey Silt (CL, ML,
MHandCH) 10007 100 130
1Lateral bearing and lateral sliding resistance may be combined.
2For soil classifications OL, OH and PT (i.e., organic clays and peat), a foundation investiga-
tion shall be required.
3 Ail values of allowable foundation pressure are for footings having a minimum width of
12 inches and a minimum depth of 12 inches into natural grade. Except as in Footnote No.
7 below, increase of 20 percent allowed for each additional foot of width or depth to a
maximum value of three times the designated value.
4 May be increased the amount of the designated value for each additional foot of depth to
a maximum of 15 times the designated value. Isolated poles for uses such as flag~oles or
signs and poles used to support buildings which are not adversely affected by a h-inch
motion at ground surface due to short-term lateral loads may be designed using lateral
bearing values equal to two times the tabulated values.
5Coefficient to be multiplied by the dead load.
6 Lateral sliding resistance value to be multiplied by the contact area. In no case shall the lat-
eral sliding resistance exceed one half the dead load.
7 No increase for width is allowed.
590
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 29-C, 29-D, 29-1
TABLE NO. 29-C-CLASSIFICATION OF EXPANSIVE SOIL

EXPANSION INDEX POTENTIAL EXPANSION
0-20 Very low

21-50 Low
51-90 Medium
91-130 High
Above 130 Very high
TABLE NO. 29-D-WEIGHTED EXPANSION INDEX 1

DEPTH INTERVAL• WEIGHT FACTOR
0-1 0.4
1-2 0.3
2-3 0.2
3-4 0.1
Below 4 0
•The weighted expansion index for nonuniform soils is determined by multiplying the
expansion index for each depth interval by the weight factor for that interval and summing
the products.
2Depth in feet below the ground surface.
FIGURE NO. 29-1
591
NOTES
592
Chapter 30
VENEER
Scope
Sec. 3001. (a) General. All veneer and its application shall conform to there-
quirements of this code. Wainscots not exceeding 4 feet in height measured above
the adjacent ground elevation for exterior veneer or the finish floor elevation for
interior veneer may be exempted from the provisions of this chapter if approved
by the building official.
(b) Limitations. Exterior veneer shall not be attached to wood-frame construc-
tion at a point more than 30 feet in height above the noncombustible foundation,
except the 30-foot limit may be increased when special construction is designed to
provide for differential movement and when approved by the building official.
Definitions
Sec. 3002. For the purpose of this chapter, certain terms are defined as follows:
BACKING as used in this chapter is the surface or assembly to which veneer is
attached.
VENEER is nonstructural facing of brick, concrete, stone, tile, metal, plastic or
other similar approved material attached to a backing for the purpose of ornamen-
tation, protection or insulation.
Adhered Veneer is veneer secured and supported through adhesion to an ap-
proved bonding material applied over an approved backing.
Anchored Veneer is veneer secured to and supported by approved mechanical
fasteners attached to an approved backing.
Exterior Veneer is veneer applied to weather-exposed surfaces as defined in
Section 424.
Interior Veneer is veneer applied to surfaces other than weather-exposed sur-
faces as defined in Section 424.
Materials
Sec. 3003. Materials used in the application of veneer shall conform to the appli-
cable requirements for such materials as set forth elsewhere in this code.
For masonry units and mortar, see Chapter 24.
For precast concrete units, see Chapter 26.
For portland cement plaster, see Chapter 47.
Anchors, supports and ties shall be noncombustible and corrosion resistant.
When the terms "corrosion resistant" or "noncorrosive" are used in this chap-
ter they shall mean having a corrosion resistance equal to or greater than a
hot-dipped galvanized coating of 1.5 ounces of zinc per square foot of surface area.
When an element is required to be corrosion resistant or noncorrosive, all of its
parts, such as screws, nails, wire, dowels, bolts, nuts, washers, shims, anchors, ties
and attachments, shall be corrosion resistant.
593
Design
Sec. 3004. (a) General. The design of all veneer shall comply with the require-
ments of Chapter 23 and this section.
Veneer shall support no load other than its own weight and the vertical dead load
of veneer above.
Surfaces to which veneer is attached shall be designed to support the additional
vertical and lateral loads imposed by the veneer.
Consideration shall be given for differential movement of supports, including
that caused by temperature changes, shrinkage, creep and deflection.
(b) Adhered Veneer. With the exception of ceramic tile, adhered veneer and its
backing shall be designed to have a bond to the supporting element sufficient to
withstand a shearing stress of 50 psi.
(c) Anchored Veneer. Anchored veneer and its attachments shall be designed
to resist a horizontal force equal to twice the weight of the veneer.
Adhered Veneer
Sec. 3005. (a) Permitted Backing. Backing shall be continuous and may be of
any material permitted by this code. It shall have surfaces prepared to secure and
support the imposed loads of veneer.
Exterior veneer, including its backing, shall provide a weatherproof covering.
For additional backing requirements, see Sections 1708 (a) and 510 (b).
(b) Area Limitations. The height and length of veneered areas shall be unlimit-
ed except as required to control expansion and contraction and as limited by Sec-
tion 3001 (b).
(c) Unit Size Limitations. Veneer units shall not exceed 36 inches in the great-
est dimension or more than 720 square inches in total area and shall weigh not
more than 15 pounds per square foot (psf) unless approved by the building official.
EXCEPTION: Veneer units weighing less than 3 psf shall not be limited in di-
mension or area.
(d) Application. In lieu of the design required by Section 3004 (a) and (b), ad-
hered veneer may be applied by one of the following application methods:
I. A paste of neat portland cement shall be brushed on the backing and the back
of the veneer unit. Type S mortar then shall be applied to the backing and the ve-
neer unit. Sufficient mortar shall be used to create a slight excess to be forced out
the edges of the units. The units shall be tapped into place so as to completely fill
the space between the units and the backing. The resulting thickness of mortar in
back of the units shall not be less than 1h inch or more than 11/4 inches.
2. Units of tile, masonry, stone or terra cotta, not over I inch in thickness shall be
restricted to 81 square inches in area unless the back side of each unit is ground or
box screeded to true up any deviations from plane. These units and glass mosaic
units of tile not over 2 inches by 2 inches by 3/s inch in size may be adhered by
means of portland cement. Backing may be of masonry, concrete or portland ce-
ment plaster on metal lath. Metal lath shall be fastened to the supports in accor-
dance with the requirements of Chapter47. Mortar as described in Table No. 30-A
594
shall be applied to the backing as a setting bed. The setting bed shall be a minimum
of 3/ 8 inch thick and a maximum of 3/ 4 inch thick. A paste of neat portland cement or
one-half portland cement and one-half graded sand shall be applied to the back of
the exterior veneer units and to the setting bed and the veneer pressed and tapped
into place to provide complete coverage between the mortar bed and veneer unit. A
cement mortar shall be used to point the veneer.
(c) Ceramic Tile. Portland cement mortars for installing ceramic tile on walls,
floors and ceilings shall be as set forth in Table No. 30-A.
Anchored Veneer
Sec. 3006. (a) Permitted Backing. Backing may be of any material permitted
by this code. Exterior veneer including its backing shall provide a weatherproof
covering.
(b) Height and Support Limitations. Anchored veneers shall be supported on
footings, foundations or other noncombustible support except as provided under
Section 2515.
In Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4 the weight of all anchored veneers installed on
structures more than 30 feet in height above the noncombustible foundation or sup-
port shall be supported by noncombustible, corrosion-resistant structural framing.
The structural framing shall have horizontal supports spaced not more than 12 feet
vertically above the initial30-foot height. The vertical spacing between horizontal
supports may be increased when special design techniques, approved by the build-
ing official, are used in the construction.
Noncombustible, noncorrosive lintels and noncombustible supports shall be
provided over all openings where the veneer unit is not self-spanning. The deflec-
tions of all structural lintels and horizontal supports required by this subsection
shall not exceed 1/o!xl of the span under full load of the veneer.
(c) Area Limitations. The area and length of anchored veneer walls shall be un-
limited, except as required to control expansion and contraction and by Section
3001 (b).
(d) Application. In lieu of the design required by Section 3004 (a) and (c), an-
chored veneer may be applied in accordance with the following:
I. Masonry and stone units (5 inches maximum in thickness). Masonry and
stone veneer not exceeding 5 inches in thickness may be anchored directly to struc-
tural masonry, concrete or studs in one of the following manners:
(i) Anchor ties shall be corrosion resistant, and if made of sheet metal, shall
have a minimum size of No. 22 gauge by 3/4 inch or, if of wire, shall be a !If
minimum of No.9 gauge. Anchor ties shall be spaced so as to support not
more than 2 square feet of wall area but not more than 24 inches on center
horizontally. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, anchor ties shall have a lip
or hook on the extended leg that will engage or enclose a horizontal joint
reinforcement wire of No.9 gauge or equivalent. The joint reinforcement
shall be continuous with butt splices between ties permitted.
When applied over stud construction, the studs shall be spaced a maxi-
mum of 16 inches on centers and approved paper shall first be applied over
595
the sheathing or wires between studs except as otherwise provided in Sec-

tion 1708, and mortar shall be slushed into the l-inch space between fac-
ing and paper.
As an alternate, an air space of at least I inch may be maintained be-
tween the backing and the veneer in which case spot bedding at all ties
shall be of cement mortar.
(ii) Veneer may be applied with l-inch-minimum grouted backing space
which is reinforced by not less than 2-inch by 2-inch No. 16 gauge galva-
nized wire mesh placed over waterproof paper backing and anchored di-
rectly to stud construction.
The stud spacing shall not exceed 16 inches on center. The galvanized
wire mesh shall be anchored to wood studs by galvanized steel wire fur-
ring nails at 4 inches on center or by barbed galvanized nails at 6 inches
on center with a 11/g-inch-minimum penetration. The galvanized wire
mesh may be attached to steel studs by equivalent wire ties. If this method
is applied over solid sheathing the mesh must be furred for embedment
in grout. The wire mesh must be attached at the top and bottom with not
less than 8-penny common wire nails. The grout fill shall be placed to fill
the space intimately around the mesh and veneer facing.
2. Stone units (10 inches maximum in thickness). Stone veneer units not ex-
ceeding 10 inches in thickness may be anchored directly to structural masonry,
concrete or to studs:
(i) With concrete or masonry backing. Anchor ties shall not be less than
No. 12 gauge galvanized wire, or approved equal, formed as an exposed
eye and extending not less than 1h inch beyond the face of the backing.
The legs of the loops shall not be less than 6 inches in length bent at right
angles and laid in the masonry mortar joint and spaced so that the eyes or
loops are 12 inches maximum on center in both directions. There shall be
provided not less than a No. 12 gauge galvanized wire tie, or approved
equal, threaded through the exposed loops for every 2 square feet of stone
veneer. This tie shall be a loop having legs not less than 15 inches in length
so bent that it will lie in the stone veneer mortar joint. The last 2 inches
of each wire leg shall have a right angle bend. One inch of cement grout
shall be placed between the backing and the stone veneer.
(ii) With stud backing. A 2-inch by 2-inch No. 16 gauge galvanized wire
mesh with two layers of waterproof paper backing shall be applied direct-
ly to wood studs spaced a maximum of 16 inches on center. On studs the
mesh shall be attached with 2-inch-long galvanized steel wire furring
nails at 4 inches on center providing a minimum Jl /g-inch penetration into
each stud and with 8-penny common nails at 8 inches on center into top
and bottom plates. The galvanized wire mesh may be attached to steel
studs with equivalent wire ties. There shall be not less than a No. 12 gauge
galvanized wire, or approved equal, looped through the mesh for every
2 square feet of stone veneer. This tie shall be a loop having legs not less
than 15 inches in length, so bent that it will lie in the stone veneer mortar
joint.
596
The last 2 inches of each wire leg shall have a right angle bend.
One-inch-minimum thickness of cement grout shall be placed between the
backing and the stone veneer.
3. Slab-type units (2 inches maximum in thickness). For veneer units of ;~~~!
marble, travertine, granite or other stone units of slab form, ties of corrosion-resis- iii!.
tantdowels shall engage drilled holes located in the middle third of the edge of the /{
units spaced a maximum of 24 inches apart around the periphery of each unit with jiji,
not less than four ties per veneer unit. Units shall not exceed 20 square feet in area.
Ifthe dowels are not tight fitting, the holes may be drilled not more than 1/ 16 inch
larger in diameter than the dowel with the hole countersunk to a diameter and depth
equal to twice the diameter of the dowel in order to provide a tight-fitting key of
cement mortar at the dowel locations when the mortar in the joint has set.
All veneer ties shall be corrosion-resistant metal capable of resisting in tension
or compression a force equal to two times the weight of the attached veneer.
If made of sheet metal, veneer ties shall not be smaller in area than No. 22 gauge
by I inch or, if made of wire, not smaller in diameter than No. 9 gauge wire.
4. Terra cotta or ceramic units. Tied terra cotta or ceramic veneer units shall
not be less than 11/ 4 inches in thickness with projecting dovetail webs on the back
surface spaced approximately 8 inches on centers. The facing shall be tied to the
backing wall with noncorrosive metal anchors of not less than No. 8 gauge wire
installed at the top of each piece in horizontal bed joints not less than 12 inches or
more than 18 inches on centers; these anchors shall be secured to 1/ 4-inch galva-
nized pencil rods which pass through the vertical aligned loop anchors in the back-
ing wall. The veneer ties shall have sufficient strength to support the full weight of
the veneer in tension. The facing shall be set with not less than a 2-inch space from
the backing wall and the space shall be filled solidly with portland cement grout and
pea gravel. Immediately prior to setting, the backing wall and the facing shall be
drenched with clean water and shall be distinctly damp when the grout is poured.
Plastic Veneer
Sec. 3007. When used within a building, plastic veneer shall comply with the in-
terior finish requirements of Chapter 42. Exterior plastic veneer shall be of ap-
proved plastics materials as defined in Chapter 4 and shall comply with the
following:
(a) Plastic veneer shall not be attached to any exterior wall to a height greater
than 50 feet above grade.
(b) Sections of plastic veneer shall not exceed 300 square feet in area and shall be
separated by a minimum of 4 feet vertically.
EXCEPTION: The area and separation requirements and the smoke-density
limitation are not applicable to plastic veneer applied to Type V-N buildings, pro-
vided the walls are not required to have a fire-resistive rating.
597
TABLE NO. 30·A-CERAMIC TILE SETTING MORTARS

VOLUME U.B.C.
VOLUME VOLUME MINIMUM
STD.24-21
TYPE1 TYPES MAXIMUM INTERVAL
SAND
PORTLAND HYDRATED THICKNESS BETWEEN
COAT CEMENT LIME Dry Damp OF COAT COATS
I. Walls and 1 liz 4 5 3/s" 24 hrs.
Scratch
ceilings 1 0 3 4 3/s" 24 hrs.
over W liz 3f4" 24 hrs.
Float or 1 4 5
sq. ft. 6 3f4''
leveling I 1 7 24 hrs.
2. Walls and Scratch 3/s"
1/2 3f4'' 24 hrs.
ceilings and float I 2 112 3
10 sq. ft.
or less
3. Floors Setting I 0 5 6 11/4
11
-
bed I 1/10 5 6 Jl/4'' -
598
Chapter 31
ACCESSIBILITY
NOTE: This is a new chapter.
Scope
Sec. 3101. (a) General. Buildings or portions of buildings shall be accessible to
persons with disabilities as required by this chapter.
Reference is made to Appendix Chapter 31 for requirements governing the pro-
vision of accessible site facilities not regulated by this chapter. See Section 103.
(b) Design. The design and construction of accessible building elements shall be
in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 31-1 which is a part of this code and is also
listed in Chapter 60, Part II, or other nationally recognized standards as approved
Definitions
Sec. 3102. For the purpose of the chapter certain terms are defined as follows:
ACCESSIBLE is approachable and usable by persons with disabilities.
ACCESSIBLE ROUTE OF TRAVEL is a continuous unobstructed path con-
necting all accessible elements and spaces in an accessible building or facility that
can be negotiated by a person using a wheelchair and that is usable by persons with
other disabilities.
ADAPTABILITY refers to the capability of spaces or facilities to be readily
modified and made accessible.
AREA FOR EVACUATION ASSISTANCE is an accessible space which is
protected from fire and smoke and which facilitates a delay in egress.
PERSON WITH DISABILITY is an individual who has a physical impair-
ment, including impaired sensory, manual or speaking abilities, that results in a
functional limitation in gaining access to and using a building or facility.
PRIMARY ENTRY is the principal entrance through which most people enter
the building, as designated by the building official.
PRIMARY ENTRY LEVEL is the floor or level of the building on which the
primary entry is located.
Building Accessibility
Sec. 3103. (a) Where Required. I. General. Accessibility to buildings or por-
tions of buildings shall be provided for all occupancy classifications except as mo-
dified by this chapter. See also Appendix Chapter 31.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Floors or portions of floors not customarily occupied, includ-
ing, but not limited to, elevator pits, piping and equipment catwalks and machinery
rooms.
2. In other than Group R Occupancies, floors above and below fully accessible
levels with a combined occupant load ofless than 50 need not be accessible provided
the primary entry level provides accessible facilities equivalent to those located on
the nonaccessible levels.
599
3. Buildings or portions of buildings used exclusively for storage or warehousing

which are not intended for public use and where persons are not employed.
2. Group A Occupancies. All Group A Occupancies shall be accessible as pro-
vided in this chapter.
EXCEPTION: In dining and drinking establishments with seating, at least 50
percent of the total seating area shall be accessible. The movement of chairs is per-
mitted to accomplish the required accessibility. Comparable facilities shall be avail-
able in all seating areas.
Stadiums, theaters, auditoriums and similar occupancies shall have not Jess than
four wheelchair positions for each assembly area with a total seating capacity of
300 or Jess. For occupancies with larger seating capacities, four wheelchair posi-
tions shall be provided for the first 300 fixed seats plus one additional position for
each additional300 seats or fraction thereof. Removable seats shall be permitted in
the wheelchair positions.
EXCEPTION: Temporary grandstands and bleachers erected for less than 90
days.
3. Group B Occupancies. Group B Occupancies shall be accessible as provided
in this chapter.
4. GroupE Occupancies. GroupE Occupancies shall be accessible as provided
in this chapter.
EXCEPTION: GroupE, Division 3 Occupancies having an occupant load of 20
or Jess.
5. Group H Occupancies. Group H Occupancies shall be accessible as pro-
vided in this chapter.
6. Group I Occupancies. Group I Occupancies shall be accessible as provided
in this chapter.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In Group I, Divisions 1.1 and 2 Occupancies, only one of ev-
ery 20 patient rooms in each nursing unit, including associated bathroom facilities,
need be accessible.
2. Group I, Division 1.1 intensive-care and coronary-care units.
3. Group I, Division 2 Occupancies with 16 or fewer residents.
4. In Group I, Division 3 Occupancies, only one in every 100 rooms or cells, in-
cluding associated bathroom facilities, need be accessible.
7. Group M Occupancies. Group M, Division 1 private garages which are ac-
cessory to dwelling units required to be adaptable shall be accessible. Other Group
M Occupancies need not be accessible.
8. Group R Occupancies. Group R Occupancies shall be accessible as provided
in this chapter. Public-use and common-use areas serving adaptable dwelling units
shall be accessible.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Group R Occupancies containing three or less dwelling units
or congregate residences accommodating I 0 persons or less.
2. Dwelling units within Group R Occupancies required to be accessible may be
adaptable dwelling units.
3. Dwelling units in Group R, Division I apartment buildings which are located
on floors other than the primary entry level when no elevator is provided within the
building.
600
4. Any individual dwelling unit of two or more stories.

In hotels, lodging houses and congregate residences containing more than I 0
guest rooms, one of every 20 guest rooms or fractional part thereof, including asso-
ciated bathing and toilet facilities, shall be accessible.
(b) Design and Construction. I. General. When accessibility is rquired by
this chapter, it shall be designed and constructed in accordance with U. · z.C. Stan-
dard No. 31-1.
2. Accessible route of travel. When a building, or portion of a building, is re-
quired to be accessible or adaptable, an accessible route of travel shall be provided
to all portions of the building, to accessible building entrances and between the
building and the public way. Except within an individual dwelling unit, an accessi-
ble route of travel shall not pass though kitchens, storage rooms, restrooms, closets
or other spaces used for similar purposes.
EXCEPTION: For sites where the natural terrain or other unusual property char-
acteristics do not allow the provision of an accessible route of travel from the public
way to the building, the point of vehicular debarkation may be considered the accessi-
ble entrance to the site.
3. Primary entry access. The primary entry to a building shall be accessible. All
other entrances to a building which are located within 6 inches of adjacent ground
4. Signs. Accessible entrances to a building shall be identified by the interna-
tional symbol of accessibility as specified in U .B.C. Standard No. 31-1.
5. Adaptable dwelling units. Dwelling units shall be considered adaptable
when they comply with the appropriate provisions of adaptability contained in
Egress and Areas for Evacuation Assistance

Sec. 3104. (a) General. In buildings or portions of buildings required to be ac-
cessible, accessible means of egress shall be provided in the same number as re-
quired for exits by Chapter 33. When an exit required by Chapter 33 is not
accessible, an area for evacuation assistance shall be provided.
Areas for evacuation assistance shall comply with the requirements of this code
and shall adjoin an accessible route of travel complying with U.B.C. Standard No.
31-1.
(b) Areas for Evacuation Assistance. I. Location and construction. An area
for evacuation assistance shall be one of the following:
A. A portion of a stairway landing within a smokeproof enclosure, complying
with Section 3310.
B. A portion of an exterior exit balcony located immediately adjacent to an exit
stairway when the exterior exit balcony complies with Section 3305. Openings to
the interior of the building located within 20 feet of the area for evacuation assis-
tance shall be protected with fire assemblies having a three-fourths-hour fire-pro-
tection rating.
C. A portion of a one-hour fire-resistive corridor complying with Section 3305
(g) and (h) located immediately adjacent to an exit enclosure.
601
D. A vestibule located immediately adjacent to an exit enclosure and con-

structed to the same fire-resistive standards as required by Section 3305 (g) and (h).
E. A portion of a stairway landing within an exit enclosure which is vented to the
exterior and is separated from the interior of the building by not less than one-hour
fire-resistive door assemblies.
F. When approved by the building official, an area or room which is separated
Jmm other portions of the building by a smoke barrier. Smoke barriers shall have a
fire-resistive rating of not less than one hour and shall completely enclose the area
or room. Doors in the smoke barrier shall be tight-fitting smoke- and draft-control
assemblies having a fire-protection rating of not less than 20 minutes and shall be
self-closing or automatic closing. The area or room shall be provided with an exit
directly to an exit enclosure. When the room or area exits into an exit enclosure
which is required to be of more than one-hour fire-resistive construction, the room
or area shall have the same fire-resistive construction, including the same opening
protection, as required for the adjacent exit enclosure.
G. An elevator lobby complying with Section 3104 (d).
2. Size. Each area for evacuation assistance shall provide at least two accessible
areas that are not less than 30 inches by 48 inches. The area for evacuation assis-
tance shall not encroach on any required exit width. The total number of such
30-inch by 48-inch areas per story shall not be less than one for every 200 persons
of calculated occupant load served by the area for evacuation assistance.
EXCEPTION: The building official may reduce the minimum number of
30-inch by 48-inch areas to one for each area for evacuation assistance on floors
where the occupant load is less than 200.
3. Stairway width. Each stairway adjacent to an area for evacuation assistance
shall have a minimum clear width of 48 inches between handrails.
4. Two-way communication. A telephone with controlled access to a public
telephone system or another method of two-way communication shall be provided
between each area for evacuation assistance and the primary entry. The fire depart-
ment may approve a location other than the primary entry.
5. Identification. Each area for evacuation assistance shall be identified by a
sign which states AREA FOR EVACUATION ASSISTANCE and the internation-
al symbol of accessibility. The sign shall be illuminated when exit sign illumination
is required. In each area for evacuation assistance, instructions on the use of the
area under emergency conditions shall be posted adjoining the two-way communi-
cation system.
(c) Accessible Exits. All exterior exits which are located adjacent to accessible
areas and within 6 inches of adjacent ground level shall be accessible.
(d) Area for Evacuation Assistance, High-rise Alternative. Within a building
of any height or occupancy constructed in accordance with the requirements of
Section 1807 or 1907, an area for evacuation assistance may be located in the eleva-
tor lobby when:
I. The area for evacuation assistance complies with the requirements for size,
two-way communication and identification as specified in Section 3104 (b); and
602
I a;;~ I unrrvnr¥1 !gUIL.LIIITIU VVLII:.
2. Elevator shafts and adjacent lobbies are pressurized as required for smoke-
proof enclosures in Section 3310. Such pressurization system shall be activated by
smoke detectors on each floor located in a manner approved by the building offi-
ciaL Pressurization equipment and its ductwork within the building shall be sepa-
rated from other portions of the building by a minimum two-hour fire-resistive
construction.
Facility Accessibility
Sec. 3105. (a) General. When buildings are required to be accessible, building
facilities shall be accessible as provided in this section. Where specific floors of a
building are required to be accessible, the requirements shall apply only to the faci-
lities located on accessible floors.
All building facilities or elements required by this section to be accessible shall
be designed and constructed in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 31-1.
(b) Bathing and Toilet Facilities. 1. Bathing facilities. When bathing facilities
are provided, at least 2 percent, but not less than one bathtub or shower, shall be
accessible.
2. Toilet facilities. Toilet facilities located within accessible dwelling units,
guest rooms and congregate residences shall comply with U.B.C. Standard No.
3 1-1. In each toilet facility in other occupancies, at least one accessible water closet
shall be provided. When there are 10 or more water closets within a facility, two
accessible water closets shall be provided. Accessible water closet enclosures shall
be designed and constructed to the size required for a standard stall as specified in
3. Lavatories, mirrors and towel fixtures. At least one accessible lavatory
shall be provided within any toilet facility. Where mirrors and towel fixtures are
provided, at least one of each shall be accessible.
4. Fixtures in adaptable dwelling units. Grab bars need not be installed in ei-
ther a bathing or toilet facility within an adaptable dwelling unit provided all struc-
tural reinforcements for future grab bar installation are provided in the appropriate
locations in the adjoining walls.
(c) Elevators. Elevators shall be accessible.
EXCEPTION: Private elevators serving only one dwelling unit.
Elevators required to be accessible shall be designed and constructed to comply
with either Chapter 51 or with U.B.C. Standard No. 31-1.
(d) Other Building Components. 1. Water fountains. On any floor where wa-
ter fountains are provided, at least one fountain shall be accessible.
2. Telephones. On floors where public telephones are provided, at least one tele-
phone shall be accessible. On any floor where two or more banks of multiple tele-
phones are provided, at least one telephone in each bank shall be accessible.
3. Kitchens. Kitchens within adaptable dwelling units shall be accessible.
4. Swimming pools. When common-use or public-use swimming pools, hot
tubs, spas and similar facilities are provided, they shall be accessible. Swimming
pools shall be accessible by hydraulic chair, ramp, transfer tier or other means. Hot
tubs and spas need be accessible only to the edge of the facility.
603
(e) Signs. All accessible toilet and bathing facilities shall be identified by the in-
ternational symbol of accessibility. See U.B.C. Standard No. 31-1.
EXCEPTION: Signs need not be provided for facilities within an adaptable
dwelling unit, or within an accessible patient or guest room.
604
Chapter 32
ROOF CONSTRUCTION AND COVERING
Scope
Sec. 3201. (a) General. Roofs shall be as specified in this code and as otherwise
required by this chapter.
Roof coverings shall be secured or fastened to the supporting roof construction i;1~~
and shall provide weather protection for the building at the roof.
Subject to the requirements of this chapter, combustible roof coverings and roof
insulation may be used in any type of construction.
Skylights shall be constructed as required in Chapter 34.
Penthouses shall be constructed as required in Chapter 36.
For use of plastics in roofs, see Chapter 52.
For solar energy collectors located above or upon a roof, see Section 1715 ..
I
dard" are also listed in Chapter60, Part II, and are part of this code. The other stan-
dards listed below are guideline standards and as such are not adopted as part ofthis
I. Roof coverings
A. UL 55-A, Materials for Use in Construction of Built-up Roof Coverings
B. UL 55-B, Class C Sheet Roofing and Shingles Made from Organic Felt
C. ASTM A 570 and A 611, Sheet Metals
D. U.B.C. Standard No. 32-8, Wood Shakes
E. ASTM C 222, Asbestos-Cement Shingles
F. ASTM C 406, Slate Shingles
G. U.B.C. Standard No. 32-11, Wood Shingles
H. U.B.C. Standard No. 32-12, Roofing Tile
I. U .B.C. Standard No. 32-13, Modified Bitumen, Thermoplastic and Thermo-
set Membranes
2. Roofing materials
A. ASTM D 312 and D 450, Roofing Asphalt and Coal Tar Bitumen
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 32-5, Roofing Aggregates
C. ASTM A 219 and A 239, Corrosion-resistant Metals
D. ASTM B 134, B 211 and B 250, Wire
3. Roofing test
U.B.C. Standard No. 32-7, Fire Retardancy of Roof-covering Materials
4. Roof vents
U.B.C. Standard No. 32-14, Automatic Smoke and Heat Vents
Definitions
Sec. 3202. For purposes of this chapter certain terms are designated as follows:
605
BASE PLY is one layer of felt secured to the deck over which a built-up roof is
applied.
BASE SHEET is a product used as the base ply in a built -up roofing membrane.
»lJJl.]'-llP ROOF COVERING is two or more layers of felt cemented togeth-
er and surfaced with cap sheet, mineral aggregate, smooth coating or similar sur-
facing material.
CAP SHEET is roofing made of organic or inorganic fibers, saturated and
coated on both sides with a bituminous compound, surfaced with mineral granules,
mica, talc, ilmenite, inorganic fibers or similar materials.
CEMENTING is solidly mopped application of asphalt, cold liquid asphalt
compound, coal tar pitch or other approved cementing material.
COMBINATION SHEET is a glass fiber felt integrally attached to kraft paper.
CORROSION-RESISTANT is any nonferrous metal or any metal having an
unbroken surfacing of nonferrous metal, or steel with not less than 10 percent chro-
mium or with not less than 0.20 percent copper.
EQUIVISCOUS TEMPERATURE (EVT) is the temperature determined by
the manufacturer at which the asphalt has a viscosity of 125 centistrokes and is con-
sidered to be the proper temperature for asphalt applications.
FELT is matted organic or inorganic fibers, saturated or coated with bituminous
compound.
FELT, NONBITUMINOUS SATURATED, is a felt for special-purpose roof-
ing weighing not less than 12 pounds per l 00 square feet, not less than 0.022 inch in
thickness, containing a fire- and water-retardant binder, and reinforced with glass
fibers running lengthwise of the sheet not more than 1/ 4 inch apart.
FIRE-RETARDANT SHAKES AND SHINGLES are wood shakes and
shingles complying with U.B.C. Standard No. 32-8 or 32-11 impregnated by the
full-cell vacuum-pressure process with fire-retardant chemicals, and have been
qualified by U.B.C. Standard No. 32-7 for use on Class A, B or C roofs. Each
bundle of treated wood shakes and shingles shall bear labels identifying their roof-
covering classification and approved quality control agency.
INTERLAYMENT is a layer of felt or nonbituminous saturated felt not less
than 18 inches wide, shingled between each course of roof covering.
INTERLOCKING ROOFING TILES are individual units, typically of clay
or concrete, possessing matching ribbed or interlocking vertical side joints that
have been designed to restrict lateral movement and water penetration.
METAL ROOFING is metal shingles or sheets for application on solid roof
surfaces, and corrugated or otherwise shaped metal sheets or sections for applica-
tion on roof frameworks or on solid roof surfaces.
MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOF COVERING is one or more
layers ofpolymermodified asphalt sheet membranes complying with U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 32-13. The sheet materials may be fully adhered or mechanically attached
to the substrate or held in place with an appropriate ballast layer.
606
ROOF-COVERING CLASSIFICATION is the classification assigned to a

roof covering or roof-covering assembly by Section 3204 or the classification of a
covering established by testing in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 32-7.
ROOFING PLY is a layer of felt in a built-up roofing membrane.
ROOFING SQUARE is 100 square feet of roofing surface.
ROOFING TILES are units, typically clay or concrete, which comply with
SPOT CEMENTING is discontinuous application of asphalt, cold liquid as-
phalt compound, coal tar pitch or other approved cementing material.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOF COVERING is a sheet mem-
brane composed of polymerrs and other proprietary ingredients, in compliance
with U.B.C. Standard No. 32-13, whose chemical composition allows the sheet to
be welded together by either heat or solvent throughout its service life.
THERMOSET MEMBRANE ROOF COVERING is a sheet membrane
composed of polymers and other proprietary ingredients, in compliance with
U .B.C. Standard No. 32-13, whose chemical composition vulcanizes orcrosslinks
during manufacture or during its service life.
UNDERLAYMENT is one or more layers of felt, sheathing paper, non bitumi-
nous saturated felt, or other approved material over which a roofing system is
applied.
VAPOR RETARDER is a layer of material or a laminate used to appreciably
reduce the flow of water vapor into the roofing system.
WOOD SHAKES are tapered or nontapered pieces of approved durable wood
of random widths ranging from 4 inches to 14 inches and of the following four
types:
(a) Hand split and resawn: tapered with one sawed and one split face; semisplit:
tapered with partially sawn and split faces both sides, 15 inches, 18 inches or 24
inches in length.
(b) Taper split: tapered with both split faces, 24 inches in length.
(c) Straight split: non tapered with both split faces, either 18 inches or 24 inches
in length.
(d) Tapersawn: sawn both sides, edges sawn or split. Lengths 24 inches and long-
er.
Wood Shakes (treated) are taper-sawn pieces of southern pine, black gum/ ....l=~=~
sweetgum wood treated in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 25-12 of random I);
widths ranging from 4 to 8 inches and lengths of 18 inches or 24 inches. Maximum
weather exposure as shown in Table No. 32-C, Wood Shakes.
WOOD SHINGLES are tapered pieces of approved durable wood, sawed both
sides, of random widths ranging from 3 inches to 14 inches and in lengths of 16
inches, 18 inches or 24 inches.
Roof-covering Requirements
Sec. 3203. The roof covering on any structure regulated by this code shall be as
specified in Table No. 32-A and as classified in Section 3204.
607
The roof-covering assembly includes the roof deck, underlayment, interlay-

ment, insulation and covering which is assigned a roof-covering classification.
Roof-covering Classification
Sec. 3204. (a) Class A Roof Covering. A Class A roof covering shall be one of
the following roofings:
I. Any Class A roofing assembly.
2. Asbestos-cement shingles or sheets.
3. Exposed concrete slab roof.
4. Sheet ferrous or copper roof covering.
5. Slate shingles.
6. Clay or concrete roof tile.
(b) Class B Roof Covering. Class B roof shall be any Class B roofing assembly.
(c) Class C Roof Covering. Class C shall be any Class C roofing assembly.
(d) Nonrated Roof Covering. A nonrated roof covering shall be one ofthe fol-
lowing roofings:
I. Any mineral aggregate surface built-up roof for application to roofs having a
slope of not more than 3 inches in 12 inches applied as specified in Section 3208 (b)
4, consisting of not less than the following:
Roofing Plies
Three layers of felt, and
Surfacing Material
300 pounds per roofing square of gravel or other approved surfacing material, or
250 pounds per roofing square of crushed slag.
2. Modified bitumen membrane assemblies not meeting Class A, B orC roofing.
3. Thermoplastic membrane assemblies not meeting Class A, B or C roofing.
4. Thermoset membrane assemblies not meeting Class A, B, or C roofing.
5. Wood shingles.
6. Wood shakes.
(e) Special-purpose Roofs. I. Wood shakes and shingles with nonbitumi-
nous saturated felt. A. Wood shakes. Special-purpose wood shake roofing shall
conform to grading and application requirements of this chapter except that nonbi-
tuminous saturated felt is to be substituted for the asphalt felt specified in Section
3208 (b) 10. In addition, the deck shall be constructed of 19hz-inch plywood with
exterior glue or l-inch nominal tongue-and-groove boards overlaid with a layer of
approved nonbituminous saturated felt lapped 2 inches on the horizontal and verti-
caljoints. An 18-inch-wide strip of the same felt shall be shingled in between each
course of shakes in such manner that no felt is exposed to the weather.
B. Wood shingles. Special-purpose wood shingle roofing shall conform to
grading and application requirements of this chapter. In addition, the deck, whether
of spaced boards or solid, shall be overlaid with a layer of approved nonbituminous
saturated felt lapped 2 inches on the horizontal and vertical joints.
608
2. Wood shakes or shingles with gypsum board underlayment. Special-

purpose wood shake or wood shingle roofing shall conform to the grading and
application requirements of this chapter. In addition, an underlayment of 1/z-inch
1Jpe X gypsum board shall be placed under 15h2-inch plywood solid sheathing or
l-inch nominal spaced sheathing.
Attics: Access, Draft Stops and Ventilation

Sec. 3205. (a) Access. An attic access opening shall be provided to attics of
buildings with combustible ceiling or roof construction. The opening shall be lo-
cated in a corridor, hallway or other readily accessible location. Attics with a maxi-
mum vertical height of less than 30 inches need not be provided with access
openings.
The opening shall not be less than 22 inches by 30 inches.
Thirty-inch minimum clear headroom in the attic space shall be provided at or
above the access opening.
(b) Draft Stops. Attics, mansards, overhangs and other concealed roof spaces
formed of combustible construction shall be draft stopped as specified in Section
2516(f).
(c) Ventilation. Where determined necessary by the building official due to at-
mospheric or climatic conditions, enclosed attics and enclosed rafter spaces
formed where ceilings are applied directly to the underside of roof rafters shall
I
~
[
have cross ventilation for each separate space by ventilating openings protected
against the entrance of rain and snow. The net free ventilating area shall not be less I
than 1/ 150 of the area of the space ventilated. ~
EXCEPTIONS: I. The area may be 1hoo of the area of the space ventilated pro-
vided 50 percent of the required ventilating area is provided by ventilators located in
the upper portion of the space to be ventilated at least three feet above eave or cornice
I
vents with the balance of the required ventilation provided by eave or cornice vents.
2. The area may be 1hoo of the area of the space ventilated provided a vapor retard-
er having a transmission rate not exceeding I perm is installed on the warm side of
the attic insulation.
The openings shall be covered with corrosion-resistant metal mesh with mesh
openings of 1/ 4 inch in dimension.
II
Smoke and Heat Venting
Sec. 3206. (a) When Required. Smoke and heat vents complying with U.B.C.
Standard No. 32-14 or fixed openings shall be installed in accordance with the pro-
visions ofthis section as follows:
1. In single-story Group B, Divisions 2 and 4 Occupancies having over 50,000
square feet in undivided area.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Office buildings and retail sales areas where storage does not
exceed 12 feet in height.
2. Group B, Division 4 Occupancies used for bulk frozen food storage when the
building is protected by a complete automatic sprinkler system.
2. In Group H, Divisions 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 Occupancies any of which are over 15,000
square feet in single floor area.
609
For requirements on smoke and heat venting in buildings with high-piled com-
bustible stock, see the Fire Code.
(b) Mixed Occupancies. Venting facilities shall be installed in buildings of
mjxed occupancy on the basis of the individual occupancy involved.
(c) Types of Vents. Vents shall be fixed in the open position or vents shall be acti-
vated by temperature and shall open automatically in the event of fire.
Fixed openings may consist of skylights or other openings which provide vent-
ing directly to exterior above the plane of the main roof in which they are located.
Vents shall meet the design criteria of this subsection regarding elevation, and Sub-
section (e) of this section regarding venting area, dimensions, spacing and venting
ratios. The building official may require documentation of the design to assure
proper performance of required venting.
Temperature activation of vents shall be at or near the highest elevation of the
ceiling and in no case lower than the upper one third of the smoke curtain. Where
plain glass is used, provisions shall be made to protect the occupants from glass
breakage. In no case shall vents be located closer than 20 feetto an adjacent proper-
ty line.
(d) Releasing Devices. Release devices shall be in accordance with U.B.C.
Standard No. 32-14.
(e) Size and Spacing of Vents. I. Effective venting area. The effective venting
area is the minimum cross-sectional area through which the hot gases must pass en
route to atmosphere. The effective venting area shall not be less than 16 square feet
with no dimension less than 4 feet, excluding ribs or gutters whose total width does
not exceed 6 inches.
2. Spacing. The maximum center-to-center spacing between vents within the
building shall be:
A. In Group B Occupancies: 120 feet.
B. In Group H Occupancies: 100 feet.
3. Venting ratios. The following ratios of effective area of vent openings to floor
areas shall be:
A. In Group B Occupancies: 1: I00.
B. In Group H Occupancies: I :50.
(f) Curtain Boards. 1. General. Curtain boards shall be provided to subdivide a
vented building in accordance with the provisions of this subsection.
2. Construction. Curtain boards shall be sheet metal, asbestos board, lath and
plaster, gypsum wallboard or other approved materials which provide equivalent
performance that will resist the passage of smoke. All joints and connections shall
be smoke tight.
3. Location and depth. Curtain boards shall extend down from the ceiling for a
minimum depth of 6 feet, but need not extend closer than 8 feet to the floor. In
Group H Occupancies, the minimum depth shall be 12 feet except that it need not be
closer than 8 feet to the floor, provided the curtain is not less than 6 feet in depth.
4. Spacing. The distance between curtain boards shall not exceed 250 feet and
the curtained area shall be limited to 50,000 square feet. In Group H Occupancies,
610
the distance between curtain boards shall not exceed I 00 feet and the curtained area
shall be limited to 15,000 square feet.
Roof Drainage
Sec. 3207. (a) General. Roof systems shall be sloped a minimum of 1/ 4 inch in
12 inches for drainage. See Section 2305 (f).
(b) Roof Drains. Unless roofs are sloped to drain over roof edges, roof orains
shall be installed at each low point of the roof.
Roof drains shall be sized and discharged in accordance with the Plumbing
Code.
(c) Overflow Drains and Scuppers. Where roof drains are required, overflow
drains having the same size as the roof drains shall be installed with the inlet flow
line located 2 inches above the low point of the roof, or overflow scuppers having
three times the size of the roof drains may be installed in adjacent parapet walls
with the inlet flow line located 2 inches above the low point of the adjacent roof and
having a minimum opening height of 4 inches.
Overflow drains shall be connected to drain lines independent from the roof :t
drain lines. j~j ~
:::::
(d) Concealed Piping. Roof drains and overflow drains, when concealed within
the construction of the building, shall be installed in accordance with the Plumbing
Code.
(e) Over Public Property. Roof drainage water from a building shall not be per-
mitted to flow over public property.
EXCEPTION: Group R, Division 3 and Group M Occupancies.
Roof-covering Materials and Application

Sec. 3208. (a) General. Roof coverings shall be as specified in this section, and
shall be provided as follows:
I. Materials. The quality and design of roofing materials and their fastenings
shall conform to the applicable standards listed in Chapter 60, Part II.
2. Identification. All material shall be delivered in packages bearing the man-
ufacturer's label or identifying mark.
Each package of asphalt shingles, mineral surfaced roll roofing, fire-retar-
dant-treated wood shingles and shakes, modified bitumen, thermoplastic and ther- t'
moset membranes and built-up roofing ply materials shall bear the label of an
approved agency having a service for the inspection of material and finished prod-
ucts during manufacture.
Each bundle of wood shakes or shingles shall comply with U.B.C. Standard No.
32-8 or 32-11, respectively. Each bundle of wood shakes or shingles and slate
shingles shall bear the label or identification mark of an approved inspection bu-
reau or agency showing the grade.
Asphalt shall be delivered in cartons indicating the name of the manufacturer,
the tlash point and the type of product. Bulk shipments shall be accompanied with
the same infonnation issued in the form of a certification or on the bill oflading by
611
the manufacturer. Coal tar pitch shall bear the manufacturer's name and type. Ad-
ditional information such as equiviscous temperature (EVT) may be furnished.
(b) Application. Application of roof-covering materials shall be in accordance
with the following provisions:
I. Asbestos-cement roofing. Corrugated asbestos-cement roofing shall be
applied in an approved manner.
2. Asbestos-cement shingles. Asbestos-cement shingles shall be installed in an
approved manner.
3. Asphalt shingles. Asphalt shingles shall be fastened according to manufac-
turer's instructions and Table No. 32-B-1.
4. Built-up roofs. Built-up roofing shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and Tables Nos. 32-E through 32-G.
5. Clay or concrete tile. Tile of clay or concrete shall comply with U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 32-12 and shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instruc-
tions and Tables Nos. 32-D- I and 32-D-2.
6. Metal roofing. Metal roofing exposed to the weather shall be corrosion resis-
tant.
Corrugated or ribbed steel shall not be less than No. 30 galvanized sheet gauge.
Flat steel sheets shall not be less than No. 30 galvanized sheet gauge. Other fer-
rous sections or shapes shall not be less than No. 26 galvanized sheet gauge.
Flat nonferrous sheets shall not be less than No. 28 B. & S. gauge. Other nonfer-
rous sections or shapes shall not be less than No. 25 B. & S. gauge.
Corrugated or otherwise shaped sheets or sections shall be designed to support
the required live load between supporting members.
Ferrous sheets or sections shall comply with U.B.C. Standards Nos. 27-9 and
32-4.
7. Metal shingles. Metal shingles shall be applied in an approved manner. Non-
ferrous shingles shall not be less than No. 28 B. & S. gauge.
8. Sheet roofing. Sheet roofing shall be installed in an approved manner.
9. Slate shingles. Slate shingles shall be installed in an approved manner.
I 0. Wood shakes. Shakes shall comply with U .B.C. Standard No. 32-8 and shall
be installed in accordance with Table No. 32-B-2.
II. Wood shingles. Shingles shall comply with U .B.C. Standard No. 32-11 and
shall be installed in accordance with Table No. 32-B-2.
12. Modified bitumen, thermoplastic and thermoset membranes. Modified
bitumen, thermoplastic and thermoset roof membranes shall be applied in accor-
dance with the manufacturer's instructions.
(c) Flashing. I. Valleys. Roof valley flashings shall be as in this subsection.
Shingle application shall be consistent with applicable Table No. 32-B-1, 32-8-2,
32-D-1 or 32-D-2.
A. Asphalt shingles. The roof valley flashing shall be provided of not less than
No. 28 galvanized sheet gauge corrosion-resistant metal, and shall extend at least 8
inches from the center line each way. Sections of flashing shall have an end lap of
612
not less than 4 inches. Alternatively, the valley shall consist of woven asphalt
shingles applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
In each case, the roof valley flashing shall have a 36-inch-wide underlayment
directly under it consisting of one layer of Type 15 felt running the full length ofthe
valley, in addition to the underlayment specified in Table No. 32-B-1. In severe cli-
mates, the metal valley flashing underlayment shall be solid cemented to the roof
underlayment for slopes under 7 inches in 12 inches.
B. Metal shingles. The roof valley flashing shall be provided of not less than No.
28 galvanized sheet gauge corrosion-resistant metal, which shall extend at least 8
inches from the center line each way and shall have a splash diverter rib not less
than 3I4 inch high at the flow line formed as part of the flashing. Sections of flashing
shall have an end lap of not less than 4 inches. The metal valley flashing shall have a
36-inch-wide underlayment directly under it consisting of one layer of Type 15 felt
running the full length of the valley, in addition to underlayment required for metal
shingles. In severe climates, the metal valley flashing underlayment shall be solid
cemented to the roofing underlayment for roof slopes under 7 inches in 12 inches.
C. Asbestos-cement shingles, slate shingles, and clay and concrete tile. The
roof valley flashing shall be provided of not less than No. 28 galvanized sheet
gauge corrosion-resistant metal, which shall extend at least 11 inches from the cen-
ter line each way and shall have a splash diverter rib not less than 1 inch high at the
flow line formed as part ofthe flashing. Sections of flashing shall have an end lap of
not less than 4 inches. For roof slopes of 3 inches in 12 inches and over, the metal
valley flashing shall have a 36-inch-wide underlayment directly under it consisting
of one layer of Type 15 felt running the full length of the valley, in addition to the
underlayment specified in Tables Nos. 32-D-1 and 32-D-2. In severe climates, the
metal valley flashing underlayment shall be solid cemented to the roofing under-
laymen! for slopes under 7 inches in 12 inches.
D. Wood shingles and wood shakes. The roof valley flashing shall be provided
of not less than No. 28 galvanized sheet gauge corrosion-resistant metal, which
shall extend at least 8 inches from the center line each way for wood shingles and 11
inches from the center line each way for wood shakes. Sections of flashing shall
have an overlap of not less than 4 inches. The metal valley flashing shall have a
36-inch-wide underlayment directly under it consisting of one layer of Type 15 felt
running the full length of the valley, in addition to underlayment specified in Table
No. 32-B-2. In severe climates, the metal valley flashing underlayment shall be
solid cemented to the roofing underlayment for roof slopes under 7 inches in 12
inches.
EXCEPTION: Where local practice indicates satisfactory perfonnance, the
building official may pennit valley flashing without underlayment.
2. Other flashing. At the juncture of the roof and vertical surfaces, flashing and
counterflashing shall be provided per roofing manufacturer's instructions, and
when of metal, shall not be less than No. 26 gauge corrosion-resistant metal.
(d) Rooflnsulation. Roof insulation shall be of a rigid type suitable as a base for
application of a roof covering. Foam plastic roof insulation shall conform to the
613
requirements of Section 1713. The use of insulation in fire-resistive construction

shall comply with Section 4305 (a).
The roof insulation, deck material and roof covering shall meet the fire-retard-
ancy requirements of Section 3204 and Table No. 32-A.
Insulation for built-up roofs shall be applied in accordance with Table No. 32-E.
Insulation for modified bitumen, thermoplastic and thermoset membrane roofs
shall be applied in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's recommendations.
For other roofing materials such as shingles or tile, the insulation shall be covered
with a suitable nailing base secured to the structure.
614
.....
10
TABLE NO. 32-A-MINIMUM ROOF CLASSES 10
.....
TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION c:
v z
I II Ill IV ;;
OCCUPANCY F.R. F.R. 1-HR N 1·HR N H.T. 1-HR N 0
:IJ
A-I B B - - - - - - - iii:
A) 2-2.1 B B B - B - B B - Ill
c:
A-3 B B B B B3 c4 B3 B3 c4 ;:::::
0
A-4 B B B B B B B B B3 z
G)
B) 1-2 B B B B B3 c4 B3 B3 c4
0
B) 3-4 B B B B B B B B B3 0
0
E B B B B B B B B B3 m
H-1 A A A A - - - - -
H) 2-3-4-5-6-7 A B B B B B B B B
I) 1.1-1.2-2 A B B - B - B B -
I-3 A B Bl - Bl - - B2 -
M B B B B NRS NRS NR 5 NR 5 NRS

R-1 B B B B B2.3 c2.4 B2.3 B2.3 c2.4
R-3 B B B B NR NR NR NR NR
1See Section 1002 (b).
2Nonrated roof coverings may be used on buildings which are not more than two stories in height and have not more than 3,000 square feet of projected
roof area and there is a minimum of I 0 feet from the extremity of the roof to the property line on all sides except for street fronts.
-'Buildings which are not more than two stories in height and have not more than 6,000 square feet of projected roof area and there is a minimum of
I 0 feet from the extremity of the roof to the property line or assumed property line on all sides except for street fronts may have Class C roof
coverings which comply with U.B.C. Standard No. 32-7 and roofs of cedar or redwood shakes and No. I shingles constructed in accordance with
Section 3204 (e). Special-purpose Roofs.
4 Buildings which are not more than two slories in height and have not more than 6,000 square feet of projected roof area and where there is a minimum
Q) of I 0 feet from the extremity of the roof to the property line or assumed property line on all sides, except for street fronts, may have roofs of No.
..... I cedar or redwood shakes and No. I shingles constructed in accordance with Section 3204 (e) .
Ul
~ FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 32-A-(Continued)
a> 5Unless otherwise required because of location as specified in Parts IV and V of this code, Group M, Division I roof coverings shall consist of not
less than one layer of cap sheet. or built-up roofing consisting of two layers of felt and a surfacing material as specified in Section 3204 (d) I.
A-Class A roofing C-Class C roof covering N-No requirements for fire resistance H.T.-Heavy timber
B-Class B roofing NR-Nonrated roof coverings F.R.-Fire resistive
TABLE NO. 32-B-1-ASPHALT SHINGLE APPLICATION

ASPHALT SHINGLES
Nol Permitted below 2:12
Roo! Slope 2:12 to less than 4:12 4:12 and over
I. Deck requirement Asphalt shingles shall be fastened to solidly sheathed roofs. Sheathing shall conform to Sections 2516 (i) and
2517 (h) 8.
2. Underlayment Asphalt strip shingles may be installed on slopes as One layer nonperforated Type 15 felt lapped 2 inches
Temperate climate low as 2 inches in 12 inches, provided the shingles are horizontally and 4 inches vertically to shed water.
approved self-sealing or are hand sealed and are
installed with an underlayment consisting of two c
layers of nonperforated Type 15 felt applied shingle z
fashion. =n
Starting with an IS-inch-wide sheet and a 0
JJ
36-inch-wide sheet over it at the eaves, each 3:
subsequent sheet shall be lapped 19 inches OJ
horizontally. !:
r
Severe climate: Same as for temperate climate, and additionally the Same as for temperate climate, except that one layer c
In areas ~ubject to two layers shall be solid cemented together with No. 40 coated roofing or coated glass base shall be z
G')
wind-driven snow approved cementing material between the plies applied from the eaves to a line 12 inches inside the 0
or roof i~e buildup. extending from the eave up the roof to a line 24 inches exterior wall line with all laps cemented together. 0
inside the exterior wall line of the building. c
m
.....
3. Attachment Corrosion-resistant nails, minimum 12-gauge 3;8-inch head, or approved corrosion-resistant staples, minimum ~
.....
combined 16-gauge 15 h6-inch crown width. c
systems, Type of Fasteners shall comply with the requirements of U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17. z
fasteners Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate into the sheathing 3;4 inch or through the thickness of the sheathing,
whichever is less. ~:0
s:::
No. of fasteners I 4 per 36 to 40-inch strip Ill
2 per 9 to 18-inch shingle c
i=
Exposure c
Field of roof Per manufacturer's instructions included with packages of shingles. z
G)
Hips and ridges Hip and ridge weather exposures shall not exceed those permitted for the field of the roof.
0
Method Per manufacturer's instructions included with packages of shingles. 0
c
m
4. Flashing
Valleys Per Section 3208 (c) I A
Other flashing Per Section 3208 (c) 2
1Figures shown are for normal application. For special conditions such as mansard application and where roofs are in special wind regions, shingles
shall be attached per manufacturer's instructions.
TABLE NO. 32·8·2-WOOD SHINGLE OR SHAKE APPLICATION

WOOD SHINGLES WOOD SHAKES
Not Permitted below 3:12 Not Permitted below 4:121
ROOF SLOPE See Table No. 32-C See Table No. 32-C
I. Deck requirement Shingles and shakes shall be applied to roofs with solid or spaced sheathing.
When spaced sheathing is used, sheathing boards shall not be less than I inch by 4 inches nominal dimensions
and shall be spaced on centers equal to the weather exposure to coincide with the placement of fasteners. When
l-inch by 4-inch spaced sheathing is installed at 10 inches on center, additional l-inch by 4-inch boards must be
installed between the sheathing boards.
Sheathing shall conform to Sections 2516 (i) and 2517 (h) 8.
!Continued)
w
...
en
CXI 2. Inter)ayment
TABLE NO. 32-B-2-WOOD SHINGLE OR SHAKE APPLICATION-{Continued)
No requirements. One 18-inch-wide interlayment of Type 30 felt }~
N
a,
shingled between each course in such a manner that no :@~ N
felt is exposed to the weather below the shake butts .J
and in the keyways (between the shakes). :m
3. Underlayment No requirements. No requirements. :I
:i
Temperate climate ·::::
i:i:
Severe climate: Two layers of non perforated Type 15 felt applied Sheathing shall be solid and, in addition to the f
In areas subject to shingle fashion shall be installed and solid cemented interlayment of felt shingled between each course in t:
wind-driven snow together with approved cementing material between such a manner that no felt is exposed to the weather =:::
or roof ice buildup. the plies extending from the eave up the roof to a line below the shake butts, the shakes shall be applied over
36 inches inside the exterior wall line of the building. a layer of nonperforated Type 15 felt applied shingle :~;~\
fashion. Two layers ofnonperforated Type 15 felt ~~~~
applied shingle fashion shall be installed and solid
cemented together with approved cementing material I~~~=
between the plies extending from the eave up the roof t
to a line 36 inches inside the exterior wall line of the
building.
I
.t ...
4. Attachment Corrosion-resistant nails. minimum No. 14 1/z-gauge Corrosion-resistant nails, minimum No. 13-gauge
Type of fasteners 7h2-inch head, or corrosion-resistant staples, when
7h2-inch head, or corrosion-resistant staples, when
...c
CD
CD
Fasteners shall comply with the requirements of U .B.C. Standard No. 25-17. z
:;;
Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate into the sheathing 3/ 4 inch or through the thickness of the 0
sheathing, whichever is less. ::0
3:
No. of fasteners 2 per shingle 2 per shake Ill
c
Exposure
Field of roof
r=0
Weather exposures shall not exceed those set forth in Table No. 32-C.
Hips and ridges Hip and ridge weather exposure shall not exceed those permitted for the field of the roof. z
G')
0
0
0
m
Method Shingles shall be laid with a side lap of not less than Shakes shall be laid with a side lap of not less than 11h
11h inches between joints in adjacent courses, and not inches between joints in adjacent courses. Spacing
in direct alignment in alternate courses. Spacing between shakes shall not be less than 3/ 8 inch or more c:
between shingles shall be approximately / 4 inch. Each than 5/g inch except for preservative-treated wood z
shingle shall be fastened with two nails only,
positioned approximately 3/4 inch from each edge and
shakes which shall have a spacing not less than 1/4
inch or more than 3Js inch.
~
::tl
approximately I inch above the exposure line. Starter Shakes shall be fastened to the sheathing with two !!!:
course at the eaves shall be doubled. nails only, positioned approximately 1 inch from each aJ
edge and approximately 2 inches above the exposure 5
r
line. The starter course at the eaves shall be doubled. c
The bottom or first layer may be either shakes or z
G')
shingles. Fifteen-inch or 18-inch shakes may be used
for the starter course at the eaves and final course at 0
the ridge. 0
c
m
5. Flashing
Valleys Per Section 3208 (c) I D
Other flashing Per Section 3208 (c) 2
1
When approved by the bmldmg official, wood shakes may be mstalled on a slope of not less than 3 mches m 12 mches when an underlayment of
not less than non perforated Type I 5 felt is installed.
....
0)
ID
32-C 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 32·C-MAXIMUM WEATHER EXPOSURE

GRADE LENGTH 3" TO LESS THAN 4"" IN 12'' 4" IN 12" AND STEEPER
(Inches) (Inches)
Wood Shingles
I. No. I 16-inch 33/4 5

2. No. 21 16-inch 3 /z1 4
3. No. 3 1 16-inch 3 3 1/z
4. No. I 18-inch 4 1/4 5 1/z
5. No. 2 1 18-inch 4 4 1/z
6. No. 3 1 18-inch 3 1/z 4
7. No. I 24-inch 53/4 7 1/z
8. No. 2 1 24-inch 5 1/z 6 1h
9. No. 3 1 24-inch 5 5 1h
Wood Shakes'
7 1h 7 1/z
I
10. No. I 18-inch
II. No. I 24-inch 10 10
12. No. 2 18-inch

tapersawn shakes - 5'/z
No. 2 24-inch
li~
13.
tapersawn shakes - 7 12
1
To be used only when sr,cifically permitted by the building official.
2Exposure of 24-inch by· / 8-inch resawn handsplit shakes shall not exceed 5 inches regard-
less of the roof slope.
620
TABLE NO. 32-D-1-ROOFING TILE APPLICATION1 FOR ALL TILES
ROOF SLOPE 21/ 2 :12 TO LESS THAN 3:12 ROOF SLOPE 3:12 AND OVER
-...
( I)
(I)
c
I. Deck requirements Solid sheathing per Sections 2516 (i) and 2517 (h) 8 z
2. Underlayment ~:a
In climate areas s::
subject to wind- Same as for other climate areas, except that extending IJI
driven snow, roof ice from the eaves up the roof to a line 24 inches inside c
damming or special the exterior wall line of the building, two layers of r=
c
wind regions as
shown in Figure No. Built-up roofing membrane, three plies minimum,
underlayment shall be applied shingle fashion and
solidly cemented together with an approved cementing
z
G)
23-1 of Chapter 23. applied per Section 3208 (b) 4. Surfacing not required. material. 0
0
Other climate areas One layer heavy-duty felt or Type 30 felt side lapped 2 c
inches and end lapped 6 inches. m
3. Attachment2 Corrosion-resistant nails not less than No. II gauge, 5/] 6-inch head. Fasteners shall comply with the
Type of fasteners requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No. 25-17. Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate into the sheathing 3/4
inch or through the thickness of the sheathing, whichever is less. Attaching wire for clay or concrete tile shall
not be smaller than No. 14 gauge.
Number of One fastener per tile. Flat tile without vertical laps, Two fasteners per tile. Only one fastener on slopes of
fasteners 2.3 two fasteners per tile. 7:12 and less fortiles with installed weight exceeding
7.5 pounds per square foot having a width no greater
than 16 inches. 4
4. Tile headlap 3 inches minimum.
5. Flashing Per Section 3208 (c) I C and 2.
1 . .
In snow areas a m1mmum of two fasteners per ule are reqmred .
2In areas designated by the building official as being subject to repeated wind velocities to excess of 80 miles per hour or where the roof height exceeds
40 feet above grade, all tiles shall be attached as follows:
(a) The heads of all tiles shall be nailed.
(b) The noses of all eave course tiles shall be fastened with approved clips.
(c) All rake tiles shall be nailed with two nails.
~ (d) The noses of all ridge. hip and rake tiles shall be set in a bead of approved roofer's mastic.
_. (Continued)
m FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 32-D-1-{Continued)
~ 3In snow areas a minimum of two fasteners per tile are required. or battens and one fastener.
40n slopes over 24: I 2. the nose end of all tiles shall be securely fastened.
TABLE NO. 32-0-2-CLAY OR CONCRETE ROOFING TILE APPLICATION

INTERLOCKING TILE WITH PROJECTING ANCHOR LUG5-MINIMUM ROOF SLOPE 4·12
ROOF SLOPE 4:12 AND OVER
1. Deck requirements Spaced structural sheathing boards or solid roof sheathing.
2. Underlayment
In climate areas
Solid sheathing one layer of Type 30 felt lapped 2 inches horizontally and 6 inches vertically, except that
subject to wind-
extending from the eaves up the roof to line 24 inches inside the exterior wall line of the building, two layers of
driven snow, roof ice
the underlayment shall be applied shingle fashion and solid cemented together with approved cementing
or special wind
material.
regions as shown in
Figure No. 23-1.
Other climates For spaced sheathing, approved reinforced membrane. For solid sheathing, one layer heavy-duty felt or Type 30
felt lapped 2 inches horizontally and 6 inches vertically.
3. Attachment 1
Type of fasteners Corrosion-resistant nails not less than No. II gauge, 5/] 6-inch head. _.
Fasteners shall comply with the requirements of U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17. CD
CD
_.
Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate into the battens 2 or sheathing 3/4 inch or through the thickness of the
sheathing, whichever is less. Attaching wire for clay or concrete tile shall not be smaller than 14 gauge. c
Horizontal battens are required on solid sheathing for slo~s 7: 12 and over. 1
z
;;
Horizontal battens are required for slopes over 7:12. 2 0
::D
No. of fasteners with: Below 5:12, fasteners not required. 5:12 to less than 12:12, one fastener per tile every other row. 12:12 to 24:12, 3:
Spaced/solid sheath- one fastener every tile. 4 All perimeter tiles require one fastener. 5 Tiles with installed weightless than 9 pounds tD
ing with battens, or per square foot require a minimum of one fastener per tile regardless of roof slope. c
spaced sheathing3 ;=
Solid sheathing c
without battens3 One fastener per tile. z
G')
(")
4. Tile headlap 3-inch minimum.
0
5. Flashing Per Section 3208 (c) I C and 2. c
m
1In areas de>ignated by the building official as being subject to repeated wind velocities to excess of 80 miles per hour, or where the roof height exceeds
40 feet above grade, all tiles shall be attached as set forth below:
(a) The heads of all tiles shall be nailed. c
z
(b) The noses of all eave course tiles shall be fastened with a special clip. ;;
(c) All rake tiles shall be nailed with two nails. 0
(d) The noses of all ridge, hip and rake tiles shall be set in a bead of approved roofer's mastic. ::D
2Battens shall not be less than l-inch by 2-inch nominal. Provisions shall be made for drainage beneath battens by a minimum of 1/ -inch risers at 3:
8
t:D
each nail or by 4-foot-long battens with at least 1h-inch separation between battens. Battens shall be fastened with approved fasteners spaced at c
not more than 24 inches on center. i=
3In snow areas a minimum of two fasteners per tile are required, or battens and one fastener. c
4 Slopes over 24: 12, nose ends of all tiles must be securely fastened.
5 Perimeter fastening areas include three tile courses but not less than 36 inches from either side of hips or ridges and edges of eaves and gable rakes.
z
G)
0
TABLE NO. 32-E-BUILT-UP ROOF-COVERING APPLICATION 0
c
MECHANICALLY FASTENED SYSTEMS I ADHESIVELY FASTENED SYSTEMS m
I. Deck conditions Decks shall be firm, broom-clean, smooth and dry. Insulated decks shall have wood insulation stops at all edges
of the deck, unless an alternative suitable curbing is provided. Insulated decks with slopes greater than 2:12 shall
have wood insulation stops at not more than 8 feet face to face. Wood nailers shall be provided where nailing is
required for roofing plies.
Solid wood sheathing shall conform to Sections 2516 Provide wood nailers where nailing is required for
(i) and 2517 (h) 8. roofing plies (see below).
2. Underlayment One layer of sheathing paper, Type 15 felt or other Not required.
approved underlayment nailed sufficiently to hold in
place, is required over board decks where openings
between boards would allow bitumen to drip through.
No underlayment requirements for plywood decks.
Underlayment on other decks shall be in accordance
with deck manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Base ply requirements Over approved decks, the base pi y shall be nailed Decks shall be primed in accordance with the roofing
Over noninsulated using not less than one fastener for each 11h square manufacturer's instructions. The base ply shall be
decks feet. solidly cemented or spot mopped as required by the
type of deck material using adhesive application rates
shown in Table No. 32-F.
(Contmued)
TABLE NO. 32-E-BUILT-UP ROOF-COVERING APPLICATION-(Continued)
4. Mechanical fasteners Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate 3( 4 inch When mechanical fasteners are required for attachment
into the sheathing or through the thickness of the of roofing plies to wood nailers or insulation stops (see
sheathing, whichever is less. Built-up roofing nails for below), they shall be as required for wood board
wood board decks shall be minimum No. 12 gauge decks.
7h -inch head driven through tin caps or approved
6
nails with integral caps. For plywood, No. II gauge
ring-shank nails driven through tin caps or approved
nails with integral caps shall be used. For gypsum,
insulating concrete, cementitious wood fiber and other
decks, fasteners recommended by the manufacturer
shall be used.
5. Vapor retarder A vapor retarder shall be installed where the average January temperature is below 45°F., or where excessive
Over insulated decks moisture conditions are anticipated within the building. It shall be applied as for a base ply.
6. Insulation When no vapor retarder is required, roof insulation When no vapor retarder is required, roof insulation
shall be fastened in an approved manner. When a shall be solid mopped to the deck using the adhesive
vapor retarder is required, roof insulation is to be application rate specified in Table No. 32-F. When a
solidly mopped to the vapor retarder using the vapor retarder is required, roof insulation is to be
adhesive application rate specified in Table No. 32-F. solidly mopped to the vapor retarder, using the
See manufacturer's instructions for the attachment of adhesive application rate specified in Table No. 32-F.
insulation over steel decks. See manufacturer's installation instructions for ....
CD
attachment of insulation over steel decks. ....
CD
7. Roofing plies Successive layers shall be solidly cemented together and to the base ply or the insulation using the adhesive c
rates shown in Table No. 32-F. On slopes greater than I: 12 for aggregate-surfaced, or 2:12 for smooth-surfaced z
or cap sheet surfaced roofs, mechanical fasteners are required. Roofing plies shall be blind-nailed to the deck,
wood nailers or wood insulation stops in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's recommendations. On
~
:tl
slopes exceeding 3:12, plies shall be laid parallel to the slope of the deck (strapping method). iii:
I:D
8. Cementing materials See Table No. 32-G. c
;=
9. Curbs and walls Suitable cant strips shall be used at all vertical intersections. Adequate attachment shall be provided for both c
base flashing and counterflashing on all vertical surfaces. Reg lets shall be provided in wall or parapets receiving
metal counterflashing.
z
10. Surfacing Mineral aggregate surfaced roofs shall comply with the requirements of U.B.C. Standard No. 32-5 and Table No.
"0
0
32-F. Cap sheets shall be cemented to the roofing plies as set forth in Table No. 32-F. c
m
.....
CD
TABLE NO. 32-F-BUILT-UP ROOFING CEMENTING ADHESIVE AND SURFACING APPLICATION RATES CD
.....
MINIMUM APPLICATION RATE, MATERIAL/100 FT.2 ROOF AREA c:
z
~
Hot Asphalt Hot Coal·Tar Cold-process Cement
MATERIAL TO BE ADHERED (pounds) (pounds) (gallons)
::u
Base ply or vapor retarder s:::
I. Spot mopping 15 15 I al
2. Solid cementing 20 20 11/z c:
;=
c
Insulation
I. Solid cementing 20 20 11/z z
Roofing plies (and between layers of vapor retarder)
"0
0
I. Felts 20 20 Not permitted c
2. Coated felts 20 20 11/z m
Cap sheets
I. Solid cementing 20 Not permitted 11/z
Mineral aggregate 1.2 -
I. Fire-retardant roof coverings
(a) Gravel, 400 lb./sq. 50 60 4
(b) Slag, 300 lb./sq. 50 60 4
(c) Granules, 60 lb./sq. - - 3
2. Nonrated roof coverings
(a) Gravel, 300 lb./sq. 40 50 4
(b) Slag, 250 lb./sq. 40 50 4
(c) Granules, 60 lb./sq. - - 3
1Mineralaggregate shall not be used for bmlt-up roofing membranes at roof slopes greater than 3 mches m 12 mches.
2A minimum of 50 percent of the required aggregate shall be embedded in the pour coat.
w
N
;,
en TABLE NO. 32-G-APPLICATION OF CEMENTING MATERIALS
N
en
MAXIMUM SLOPE, INCHES PER 12 INCHES
Asphal1 Type
APPLICATION Type I Type II Type Ill Type IV Coal·Tar Pi1ch
1. Insulation to deck - - All All -

1 1
2. Felt or vapor retarder to deck - h or less 3 or less All h or less
1 1 1
3. Felt to felt - h or less /z -3 All /z or less
4. Cap sheet to felt - - 3 or less All -
1 1 1 1fz
5. Gravel to felts /z or less /z or less /z-3 N.P. or less
6. Heating of cementing material, I 0 F.
Temperature at kettle2 (maximum) 475 525 525 525 425
Application temperature, 3 0 F. 375-425 375-425 375-425 400-450 350-400
N.P. =Not permitted

1Bulk
2
tanker temperatures shall be reduced to 320 to 350°F. at night or during periods when no roofing will occur.
Cementing material shall not be heated above a temperature which is 25°F. below its flash point. ...
3Asphalt which is identified with the equiviscous temperature (EVT) shall be applied at the EVT ± 25°F.
...
:8
c:
z
~JJ
3:
m
c:
;::
0
z
Cl
0
0
0
m
Chapter 33
EXITS
General
Sec. 3301. (a) Scope and Standards of Quality. Every building or portion
thereof shall be provided with exits as required by this chapter.
The standards listed below labeled a "U.B.C. standard" are also listed in Chapter J
60, Part II, and are part of this code. The other standards listed below are guideline ~·
~~~~:::::::"'" •re oot •dopted " p•rt of ilii• code (•re Soctioo. 6002 '"' '.~ ·,.
1.
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 33-1, Power-operated Exit Doors ~

B. U.B.C. Standard No. 43-13, Horizontal Sliding Fire Doors Used in an Exit
2. Stairway numbering system II
~
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 33-2, Stairway Identification
3. Hardware
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 33-4, Panic Hardware =~i~.
lows:
BALCONY, EXTERIOR EXIT, is a landing or porch projecting from the wall
of a building, and which serves as a required exit. The long side shall be at least 50
percent open, and the open area above the guardrail shall be so distributed as to pre-
vent the accumulation of smoke or toxic gases.
EXIT is a continuous and unobstructed means of egress to a public way and shall l
include intervening aisles, doors, doorways, gates, corridors, exterior exit balco- :,'~."?: , :'.
nies, ramps, stairways, smokeproof enclosures, horizontal exits, exit passage- ,,
ways, exit courts and yards. ii
EXIT COURT is a yard or court providing access to a public way for one or
more required exits.
EXIT PASSAGEWAY is an enclosed exit connecting a required exit or exit
court with a public way.
HORIZONTAL EXIT is an exit from one building into another building on ap-
proximately the same level, or through or around a wall constructed as required for
a two-hour occupancy separation and which completely divides a floor into two or
more separate areas so as to establish an area of refuge affording safety from fire or
smoke coming from the area from which escape is made.
MULTITHEATER COMPLEX is a building or portion thereof containing !·'!·':.,:!.';:•
two or more motion picture auditoriums which are served by a common lobby. .
PANIC HARDWARE is a door-latching assembly incorporating an unlatching
device, the activating portion of which extends across at least one half the width of
the door leaf on which it is installed.
627
PRIVATE STAIRWAY is a stairway serving one tenant only.

PUBLIC WAY is any street, alley or similar parcel of land essentially unob-
structed from the ground to the sky which is deeded, dedicated or otherwise perma-
nently appropriated to the public for public use and having a clear width of not less
than 10 feet.
SPIRAL STAIRWAY is a stairway having a closed circular form in its plan
view with uniform section shaped treads attached to and radiating about a mini-
mum diameter supporting column. The effective tread is delineated by the nosing
radius line, the exterior arc (center line of railing) and the overlap radius line (nos-
ing radius line of tread above). Effective tread dimensions are taken along a line
perpendicular to the center line of the tread.
(c) Exit Obstruction. Obstructions shall not be placed in the required width of
an exit except projections permitted by this chapter.
(d) Changes in Elevation. Within a building, changes in elevation of less than
12 inches along any exit serving an occupant load of I 0 or more shall be by ramps.
EXCEPTION: Group R. Division 3 Occupancies and along aisles adjoining
seating areas.
~1 (e) Yards, Patios and Courts. Yards, patios, courts and similar outdoor areas
ii accessible to and usable by the building occupants shall be provided with exits as
f·~'i.,·; ~'r_.:
required by this chapter. The occupant load of such outdoor areas shall be assigned
~
by the building official in accordance with their anticipated use. When outdoor
...
areas are to be used by persons in addition to the occupants of the building, and exits
] from the outdoor areas pass through the building, exit requirements for the building
~ shall be based on the sum of the occupant loads of the building plus the outdoor
areas.
I
EXCEPTIONS: I. Outdoor areas used exclusively for service of the building
may have only one exit.
2. Outdoor areas associated with Group R, Division 3 Occupancies.
(f) Building Accessibility. In addition to provisions of this chapter, exits which
provide access to, or egress from, buildings for persons with disabilities shall also
comply with Chapter 31.
(g) Elevators or Escalators. Elevators or escalators shall not be used as a re-
I quired exit.
Occupant Load
Sec. 3302. (a) Determination of Occupant Load. In determining the occupant
load, all portions of a building shall be presumed to be occupied at the same time.
EXCEPTION: Accessory use areas which ordinarily are used only by persons
who occupy the main areas of an occupancy shall be provided with exits as though
they are completely occupied, but their occupant load need not be included in com-
puting the total occupant load of the building.
The occupant load for a building shall be determined in accordance with the fol-
lowing:
628
I. General. For areas without fixed seats, the occupant load shall not be less than
the number determined by dividing the floor area assigned to that use by the occu-
pant load factor set forth in Table No. 33-A. Where an intended use is not listed in
Table No. 33-A, the building official shall establish an occupant load factor based
on a listed use which most nearly resembles the intended use.
For a building or portion thereof which has more than one use, the occupant load
shall be determined by the use which gives the largest number of persons.
The occupant load for buildings or areas containing two or more occupancies
shall be determined by adding the occupant loads of the various use areas as com-
puted in accordance with the applicable provisions of this section.
2. Fixed seating. For areas having fixed seats and aisles, the occupant load shall
be determined by the number of fixed seats installed therein. The required width of
aisles serving fixed seats shall not be used for any other purpose.
For areas having fixed benches or pews, the occupant load shall not be less than
the number of seats based on one person for each 18 inches of length of pew or
bench.
Where booths are used in dining areas, the occupant load shall be based on one
person for each 24 inches of booth length or major portion thereof.
3. Reviewing stands, grandstands and bleachers. The occupant load for re-
viewing stands, grandstands and bleachers shall be calculated in accordance with
this section and the specific requirements contained in Section 3322.
(b) Maximum Occupant Load. The maximum occupant load for other than an
assembly use shall not exceed the capacity of exits as determined in accordance
with this chapter.
The maximum occupant load for an assembly use shall not exceed the occupant
load as determined in accordance with Section 3302 (a).
EXCEPTION: The occupant load for an assembly building or portion thereof
may be increased, when approved by the building official, if all the requirements of
this code are met for such increased number of persons. The building official may re-
quire an approved aisle, seating or fixed equipment diagram to substantiate such an
increase, and may require that such diagram be posted.
(c) Posting of Room Capacity. Any room having an occupant load of 50 or
more where fixed seats are not installed, and which is used for classroom, assembly
or similar purpose, shall have the capacity of the room posted in a conspicuous
place on an approved sign near the main exit from the room. Such signs shall be
maintained legible by the owner or the owner's authorized agent and shall indicate
the number of occupants permitted for each room use.
(d) Revised Occupant Load. After a building is occupied, any change in use or
increase in occupant load shall comply with this chapter. See Section 502.
Exits Required
Sec. 3303. (a) Number of Exits. Every building or usable portion thereof shall
have at least one exit, not less than two exits where required by Table No. 33-A and
additional exits as required by this subsection.
629
For purposes of this section, basements and occupied roofs shall be provided
with exits as required for stories.
EXCEPTIONS: Occupied roofs on Group R, Division 3 Occupancies may have
one exit if such occupied areas are less than 500 square feet and are located no higher
than immediately above the second story.
Floors complying with the provisions for mezzanines as specified in Section
1717 shall be provided with exits as specified therein.
The second story shall be provided with not less than two exits when the occu-
pant load is 10 or more. Occupants on floors above the second story and in base-
ments shall have access to not less than two separate exits from the floor or
basement.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Two or more dwelling units on the second story or in a base-
ment may have access to only one common exit when the total occupant load served
by that exit does not exceed I 0.
2. Except as provided in Table No. 33-A, only one exit need be provided from the
second floor or a basement within an individual dwelling unit or a Group R, Division
3 congregate residence.
3. When the third floor within an individual dwelling unit or a Group R, Division
3 congregate residence does not exceed 500 square feet, only one exit need be pro-
vided from that floor.
4. Floors and basements used exclusively for service of the building may have one
exit. For the purposes of this exception, storage rooms, laundry rooms, maintenance
offices and similar uses shall not be considered as providing service to the building.
5. Storage rooms, laundry rooms and maintenance offices not exceeding 300
square feet in floor area may be provided with only one exit.
6. Elevator lobbies may have one exit provided the use of such exit does not require
keys, tools, special knowledge or effort.
For special requirements see the following sections: Group A, Section 3317;
Group E, Section 3318; Group H, Section 3319; Group I, Section 3320; Rooms
Containing Fuel-fired Equipment and Cellulose Nitrate Handling Rooms, Section
3321; Reviewing Stands, Grandstands and Bleachers, Section 3322; Laboratories,
Sections 702 (c) and 802 (d); and Open Parking Garages, Section 709 (g). For stage
exits, see Section 3903 (f).
Every story or portion thereof having an occupant load of 50 I to I ,000 shall not
have less than three exits.
Every story or portion thereof having an occupant load of I ,00 I or more shall not
have less than four exits.
The number of exits required from any story of a building shall be determined by
using the occupant load of that story plus the percentages of the occupant loads of
floors which exit into the level under consideration as follows:
I. Fifty percent of the occupant load in the first adjacent story above and the first
adjacent story below, when a story below exits through the level under consider-
ation.
2. Twenty-five percent of the occupant load in the story immediately beyond the
first adjacent story.
630
The maximum number of exits required for any story shall be maintained until
egress is provided from the structure. (See Section 3311.)
(b) Width. The total width of exits in inches shall not be less than the total occu-
rantload served by an exit multiplied by 0.3 for stairways and 0.2 forotherexits nor
less than specified elsewhere in this code. Such widths of exits shall be divided ap-
proximately equally among the separate exits.
The maximum exit width required from any story of a building shall be main-
tained.
(c) Arrangement of Exits. If only two exits are required, they shall be placed a
distance apart equal to not less than one half of the length of the maximum overall
diagonal dimension of the building or area to be served measured in a straight line
between exits.
EXCEPTION: Exit separations may be measured along a direct line of travel
within the exit corridor when exit enclosures are provided as a portion of the required
exit and are interconnected by a one-hour fire-resistive corridor conforming to there-
quirements of Section 3305. Enclosure walls shall not be less than 30 feet apart at any
point in a direct line of measurement.
Where three or more exits are required, at least two exits shall be placed a dis-
tance apart equal to not less than one half of the length of the maximum overall di-
agonal dimension of the building or area to be served measured in a straight line
between the exits, and the additional exits shall be arranged a reasonable distance
apart so that if one becomes blocked the others will be available.
(d) Distance to Exits. The maximum distance oftravel from any point to an ex-
teriorexitdoor, horizontal exit, exit passageway or an enclosed stairway in a build-
ing not equipped with an automatic sprinkler system throughout shall not exceed
150 feet, or 200 feet in a building equipped with an automatic sprinkler system
throughout. These distances may be increased a maximum of 100 feet when the
increased travel distance is the last portion of the travel distance and is entirely
within a one-hour fire-resistive corridor complying with Section 3305. See Section
3318 for GroupE Occupancy and Section 3319 for Group H Occupancy travel dis-
tances.
In a one-story Group B, Division 4 Occupancy classified as a factory or ware-
house and in one-story airplane hangars, the exit travel distance may be increased
to 400 feet if the building is equipped with an automatic sprinkler system through-
out and provided with smoke and heat ventilation as specified in Section 3206.
In an open parking garage as defined in Section 709, the exit travel distance may
be increased to 250 feet which may be measured to open stairways which are per-
mitted in accordance with Section 3309 (a).
(e) Exits through Adjoining Rooms. Rooms may have one exit through an ad-
joining or intervening room which provides a direct, obvious and unobstructed
means of travel to an exit corridor, exit enclosure or until egress is provided from
the building, provided the total distance of travel does not exceed that permitted by
other provisions of this code. In other than dwelling units, exits shall not pass
through kitchens, store rooms, restrooms, closets or spaces used for similar pur-
poses.
631
EXCEPTIONS: I. Rooms within dwelling units may exit through more than one
intervening room.
2. Rooms with a cumulative occupant load of 10 or less may exit through more
!han one intervening room.
Foyers, lobbies and reception rooms constructed as required for corridors shall
not be construed as intervening rooms.
Doors
Sec. 3304. (a) General. This section shall apply to every exit door serving an
area having an occupant load of I 0 or more, or serving hazardous rooms or areas,
except that Subsections (c), (i), U) and (k) shall apply to all exit doors regardless
of occupant load. Buildings or structures used for human occupancy shall have at
least one exterior exit door that meets the requirements of Subsection (f). Doors
and landings at doors which are located within an accessible route of travel shall
also comply with Chapter 31.
(b) Swing and Opening Force. Exit doors shall be ofthe pivoted or side-hinged
swinging type. Exit doors shall swing in the direction of exit travel when serving
any hazardous area or when serving an occupant load of 50 or more. The door latch
shall release when subjected to a 15-pound force, and the door shall be set in motion
when subjected to a 30-pound force. The door shall swing to full-open position
when subjected to a 15-pound force. Forces shall be applied to the latch side. See
Section 4507 for doors swinging over public property.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Group I, Division 3 Occupancy used as a place of detention.
2. Doors within or serving an individual dwelling unit.
3. Special door conforming with Subsection (h).
Double-acting doors shall not be used as exits when any of the following condi-
tions exist:
I. The occupant load served by the door is I 00 or more.
2. The door is part of a fire assembly.
3. The door is part of a smoke- and draft-control assembly.
4. Panic hardware is required or provided on the door.
A double-acting door shall be provided with a view panel of not less than 200
square inches.
(c) Type of Lock or Latch. Exit doors shall be openable from the inside without
the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In Group B Occupancies, key-locking hardware may be used
on the main exit when the main exit consists of a single door or pair of doors if there
is a readily visible, durable sign on or adjacent to the door stating THIS DOOR TO
REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS. The sign shall be in letters
not less than I inch high on a contrasting background. When unlocked, the single door
or both leaves of a pair of doors must be free to swing without operation of any latch-
ing device. The use of this exception may be revoked by the building official for due
cause.
2. Exit doors from individual dwelling units; Group R, Division 3 congregate resi-
dences: and guest rooms of Group R Occupancies having an occupant load of I0 or
632
less may be provided with a night latch, dead bolt or security chain, provided such
devices are openable from the inside without the use of a key or tool and mounted
at a height not to exceed 48 inches above the finished floor.
Manually operated edge- or surface-mounted flush bolts and surface bolts are
prohibited. When exit doors are used in pairs and approved automatic flush boils
are used, the door leaf having the automatic flush bolts shall have no door knob or
surface-mounted hardware. The unlatching of any leaf shall not require more than
one operation.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Group R, Division 3 Occupancies.
2. When a pair of doors serving a room not normally occupied are needed for the
movement of equipment, manually operated edge or surface bolts may be used and
a door closer need not be provided on the inactive leaf.
(d) Panic Hardware. Panic hardware, when installed, shall comply with there-
quirements ofU.B.C. Standard No. 33-4. The activating member shall be mounted
at a height of not less than 30 inches or more than 44 inches above the floor. The
unlatching force shall not exceed 15 pounds when applied in the direction of exit
travel.
When balanced doors are used and panic hardware is required, panic hardware
shall be of the push-pad type and the pad shall not extend across more than one half
of the width of the door measured from the latch side.
(e) Special Egress-control Devices. When approved by the building official,
exit doors in Group B, Division 2 Occupancies may be equipped with approved
listed special egress-control devices of the time-delay type, provided the building
is protected throughout by an approved automatic sprinkler system and an ap-
proved automatic smoke-detection system. Such devices shall conform to all of the
following:
I. Automatically deactivate the egress-control device upon activation of either
the sprinkler system or the detection system.
2. Automatically deactivate the egress-control device upon loss of electrical
power to any one of the following:
A. The egress-control device.
B. The smoke-detection system.
C. Exit illumination as required by Section 3313.
3. Be capable of being deactivated by a signal from a switch located in an ap-
proved location.
4.1nitiate an irreversible process which will deactivate the egress-control device
whenever a manual force of not more than 15 pounds is applied for two seconds to
the panic bar or other door-latching hardware. The egress-control device shall
deactivate within an approved time period not to exceed a total of 15 seconds. The
time delay established for each egress-control device shall not be field adjustable.
5. Actuation of the panic bar or other door-latching hardware shall activate an
audible signal at the door.
6. The unlatching shall not require more than one operation.
A sign shall be provided on the door located above and within 12 inches of the
panic bar or other door-latching hardware reading:
633
KEEP PUSHING. THIS DOOR WILL OPEN I N - - - - -

SECONDS. ALARM WILL SOUND.
Sign letter shall be at least I inch in height and shall have a stroke of not less than
r/x inch.
Regardless of the means of deactivation, relocking of the egress-control device
shall be by manual means only at the door.
( t) Width and Height. Every required exit doorway shall be of a size as to per-
mit the installation of a door not less than 3 feet in width and not less than 6 feet 8
inches in height. When installed, exit doors shall be capable of opening so that the
clear width of the exit is not less than 32 inches. In computing the exit width re-
quired by Section 3303 (b), the net dimension of the exitway shall be used.
(g) Door Leaf Width. A single leaf of an exit door shall not exceed 4 feet in
width.
(h) Special Doors. Revolving, sliding and overhead doors shall not be used as
required exits.
EXCEPTION: Horizontal sliding doors complying with U.B.C. Standard No.
43-13 may be used in:
A. Elevator lobbies.
B. Smoke barriers of Group I, Division 1.1 Occupancies.
Power-operated doors complying with U.B.C. Standard No. 33-1 may be used
for exit purposes. Such doors when swinging shall have two guide rails installed on
the swing side projecting out from the face of the door jambs for a distance not less
than the widest door leaf. Guide rails shall not be less than 30 inches in height with
solid or mesh panels to prevent penetration into door swing and shall be capable of
resisting a horizontal load at top of rail of not less than 50 pounds per lineal foot.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Walls or other type separators may be used in lieu of the
above guide rail, provided all the criteria are met.
2. Guide rails in industrial or commercial occupancies not accessible to the public
may conform with the exception to the third paragraph of Section 1712.
3. Doors swinging toward flow of traffic shall not be permitted for use by untrained
pedestrian traffic unless actuating devices start to function at least 8 feet II inches
beyond the door in an open position and guide rails extend 6 feet 5 inches beyond
the door in an open position.
Clearances for guide rails shall be as follows:
I. Six inches maximum between rails and leading edge of door at the closest
point in its arc of travel.
2. Six inches maximum between rails and the door in an open position.
3. Two inches minimum between rail at hinge side and door in an open position.
4. Two inches maximum between freestanding rails and jamb or other adjacent
surface.
(i) Floor Level at Doors. Regardless ofthe occupant load, there shall be a floor
or landing on each side of a door. When access for persons with disabilities is re-
quired by Chapter 31, the floor or landing shall not be more than 1h inch lower than
the threshold of the doorway. When such access is not required, such dimension
634
shall not exceed I inch. Landings shall be level except for exterior landings, which
may have a slope not to exceed 1/ 4 inch per foot.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In Group R, Division 3, and Group M Occupancies and with-
in individual units of Group R, Division I Occupancies:
A. A door may open at the top step of an interior tlight of stairs, provided the door
does not swing over the top step.
:::::
B. A door may open at a landing that is not more than 8 inches lower than the :{
tloor level, provided the door does not swing over the landing.
C. Screen doors and storm doors may swing over stairs, steps or landings.
2. Doors serving building equipment rooms which are not normally occupied.
(j) Landings at Doors. Landings shall have a width not less than the width of the
stairway or the width of the door, whichever is the greater. Doors in the fully open
position shall not reduce a required dimension by more than 7 inches. When a land-
ing serves an occupant load of 50 or more, doors in any position shall not reduce the
landing dimension to less than one half its required width. Landings shall have a
length measured in the direction of travel of not less than 44 inches.
EXCEPTION: In Group R, Division 3, and Group M Occupancies and within
individual units of Group R, Division I Occupancies, such length need not exceed 36
inches.
A landing which has no adjoining door shall comply with Section 3306 (g).
(k) Door Identification. Glass doors shall conform to the requirements speci-
fied in Section 5406.
Exit doors shall be marked so that they are readily distinguishable from the adja-
cent construction.
( 1) Additional Doors. When additional doors are provided for egress purposes,
they shall conform to all provisions of this chapter.
EXCEPTION: Approved revolving doors having leaves which will collapse un-
der opposing pressures may be used in exit situations, provided:
A. Such doors have a minimum width of 6 feet 6 inches.
B. At least one conforming exit door is located adjacent to each revolving door.
C. The revolving door shall not be considered to provide any exit width.
Corridors and Exterior Exit Balconies

Sec. 3305. (a) General. This section shall apply to every corridor serving as a
required exit for an occupant load of I 0 or more except that Subsection (b) shall ap-
ply to all corridors. For the purposes of this section, the term "corridor" shall in-
clude "exterior exit balconies" and any covered or enclosed exit passageway,
including walkways, tunnels and malls. Partitions, rails, counters and similar space
dividers not over 5 feet 9 inches in height above the floor shall not be construed to
form corridors.
Exit corridors shall not be interrupted by intervening rooms.
EXCEPTION: Foyers, lobbies or reception rooms constructed as required for
corridors shall not be construed as intervening rooms.
Corridors which are located within an accessible route of travel shall also com-
ply with Chapter 3 1.
635
For Group I Occupancies see Section 3320 (c).

·~ (b) Width. The minimum corridor width shall be determined as specified in Sec-
'' tion 3303 (b), but shall not be less than 44 inches, except as specified herein. Corri-
;\l dors serving an occupant load of 49 or less shall not be less than 36 inches in width.
~~ ~~~~:cia! requirements for Groups E and I Occupancies, see Sections 3318 and
(c) Height. Corridors and exterior exit balconies shall have a clear height of not
less than 7 feet measured to the lowest projection from the ceiling.
(d) Projections. The required width of corridors shall be unobstructed.
EXCEPTION: Handrails and doors, when fully opened, shall not reduce there-
quired width by more than 7 inches. Doors in any position shall not reduce the re-
quired width by more than one half. Other nonstructural projections such as trim and
similar decorative features may project into the required width 11/z inches on each
side.
(e) Access to Exits. When more than one exit is required, they shall be soar-
ranged that it is possible to go in either direction from any point in a corridor to a
separate exit, except for dead ends not exceeding 20 feet in length.
(f) Changes in Elevation. When a corridor or exterior exit balcony is accessible
to the handicapped, changes in elevation of the floor shall be made by means of a
ramp, except as provided for doors by Section 3304 (i).
(g) Construction. Walls of corridors serving a Group R, Division I or Group I
Occupancy having an occupant load of I 0 or more and walls of corridors serving
other occupancies having an occupant load of 30 or more shall be of not less than
one-hour fire-resistive construction and the ceilings shall not be less than that re-
quired for a one-hour fire-resistive floor or roof system.
EXCEPTIONS: I. One-story buildings housing Group B, Division 4 Occupan-
cies.
2. Corridors more than 30 feet in width where occupancies served by such corri-
dors have at least one exit independent from the corridor. (See Chapter 56 for covered
malls.)
3. Exterior sides of exterior exit balconies.
4. In Group I, Division 3 Occupancies such as jails, prisons, reformatories and
similar buildings with open-barred cells forming corridor walls, the corridors and cell
doors need not be fire resistive.
5. Corridor walls and ceilings need not be of fire-resistive construction within
office spaces having an occupant load of 100 or less when the entire story in which
the space is located is equipped with an automatic sprinkler system throughout and
smoke detectors are installed within the corridor in accordance with their listing.
6. In other than Type I or II construction, exterior exit balcony roof assemblies
may be of heavy-timber construction without concealed spaces.
7. Within office spaces occupied by a single tenant, partial height partitions
which form corridors and which do not exceed 6 feet in height need not be fire resis-
tive, provided they are constructed in accordance with Section 1705 and are not more
than three fourths of the floor-to-ceiling height.
When the ceiling of the entire story is an element of a one-hour fire-resistive
floor or roof system, the corridor walls may terminate at the ceiling. When the
636
room-side fire-resistive membrane of the corridor wall is carried through to the un-
derside of a fire-resistive floor or roof above, the corridor side of the ceiling may be
protected by the use of ceiling materials as required for one-hour floor or roof sys-
(em construction or the corridor ceiling may be of the same construction as the cor-
ridor walls.
Ceilings of noncombustible construction may be suspended below the fire-re-
sistive ceiling.
For wall and ceiling finish requirements, see Table No. 42-B.
For restrictions on the use of corridors to convey air, see Chapter I 0 of the Me-
chanical Code.
(h) Openings. I. Doors. When corridor walls are required to be of one-hour
fire-resistive construction by Section 3305 (g), every interior door opening shall be
protected by a tight-fitting smoke- and draft-control assembly having a fire-pro-
tection rating of not less than 20 minutes when tested in accordance with U .B.C.
Standard No. 43-2. Said doors shall not have louvers. The door and frame shall bear
an approved label or other identification showing the rating thereof, the name of the
manufacturer and the identification of the service conducting the inspection of ma-
terials and workmanship at the factory during fabrication and assembly. Doors
shall be maintained self-closing or shall be automatic closing by actuation of a
smoke detector in accordance with Section 4306 (b). Smoke- and draft-control
door assemblies shall be provided with a gasket so installed as to provide a seal
where the door meets the stop on both sides and across the top.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Viewports may be installed if they require a hole not larger
than I inch in diameterthrough the door, have at least a 1/ 4-inch-thick glass disc and
the holder is of metal which will not melt out when subject to temperatures of
1,700°F.
L
2. Protection of openings in the interior walls of exterior exit balconies is not re- ' ':
qui red when it is possible to exit in two directions.
2. Openings other than doors. Where corridor walls are required to be of
one-hour fire-resistive construction by Section 3305 (g), interior openings for oth-
er than doors or ducts shall be protected by fixed glazing listed and labeled for a
fire-protection rating of at least three-fourths hour in accordance with Section4306
(i). The total area of all openings, other than doors, in any portion of an interior cor-
ridor shall not exceed 25 percent of the area of the corridor wall of the room which it
is separating from the corridor. For duct openings, see Section 4306.
EXCEPTION: Protection of openings in the interior walls of exterior exit balco-
nies is not required when it is possible to exit in two directions.
(i) Location on Property. Exterior exit balconies shall not be located in areas
where openings are not permitted or where openings are required to be protected
due to location on the property.
U) Elevators. Elevators opening into a corridor serving a Group R, Division I or
Group I Occupancy having an occupant load of I 0 or more, or a corridor serving
other occupancies having an occupant load of 30 or more shall be provided with an
elevator lobby at each floor containing such a corridor. The lobby shall completely
separate the elevators from the corridor by construction conforming to Section
637
II ~;~t~~~lda:~ ;~~~fr:~i~;s~~~~i~: ~~~~y(~)~ll contiguous with the corridor shall be

EXCEPTIONS: I. In office buildings classed as a Group B, Division 2 Occu-
pancy, separations need not be provided from a street floor lobby, provided the entire
street floor is protected with an automatic sprinkler system.
2. Elevators not required to meet the shaft enclosure requirements of Section 1706.
3. When additional doors are provided in accordance with Section 5106.
Elevator lobbies shall comply with Section 5102.
In fully sprinklered office buildings, corridors may lead through enclosed eleva-
tor lobbies if all areas of the building have access to at least one required exit with-
out passing through the elevator lobby.
Stairways
Sec. 3306. (a) General. Every stairway having two or more risers serving any
::~ building or portion thereof shall conform to the requirements of this section. When
aisles in assembly rooms have steps, they shall conform with the provisions in Sec-
._]:_,:!_.
__
. tion3315.
EXCEPTION: Stairs or ladders used only to attend equipment are exempt from
the requirements of this section.
: ;: (b) Width. The minimum stairway width shall be determined as specified in
::~::
.,., Section 3303 (b), but shall not be less than 44 inches except as specified herein.
~[ :t~~:.ays serving an occupant load of 49 or less shall not be less than 36 inches in
Handrai Is may project into the required width a distance of3 1/z inches from each
side of a stairway. Stringers and other projections such as trim and similar decora-
tive features may project into the required width 11/z inches on each side.
(c) Rise and Run. The rise of every step in a stairway shall not be less than 4
inches or greater than 7 inches. Except as permitted in Subsections (d) and (f), the
run shall not be less than II inches as measured horizontally between the vertical
planes of the furthermost projection of adjacent treads. Except as permitted in Sub-
sections (d), (e) and (f), the largest tread run within any flight of stairs shall not ex-
ceed the smallest by more than 3/x inch. The greatest riser height within any flight of
stairs shall not exceed the smallest by more than 3/x inch.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Private stairways serving an occupant load of less than 10
and stairways to unoccupied roofs may be constructed with an 8-inch-maximum rise
and a 9-inch-minimum run.
2. Where the bottom or top riser adjoins a sloping public way, walk or driveway
having an established grade and serving as a landing, the bottom or top riser may be
reduced along the slope to less than 4 inches in height with the variation in height
of the bottom or top riser not to exceed 3 inches in every 3 feet of stairway width.
(d) Winding Stairways. In Group R, Division 3 Occupancies and in private
stairways in Group R, Division I Occupancies, winders may be used if the required
width of run is provided at a point not more than 12 inches from the side of the stair-
way where the treads are narrower, but in no case shall any width of run be less than
6 inches at any point.
638
(e) Circular Stairways. Circular stairways may be used as an exit, provided the
minimum width of run is not less than I 0 inches and the smaller radius is not less
than twice the width of the stairway. The largest tread width or riser height within
any night of stairs shall not exceed the smallest by more than % inch.
(f) Spiral Stairways. In Group R, Division 3 Occupancies and in private stair-
ways within individual units of Group R, Division I Occupancies, spiral stairways
may be installed. Such stairways may be used for required exits when the area
served is limited to 400 square feet.
The tread must provide a clear walking area measuring at least 26 inches from
the outer edge of the supporting column to the inner edge of the handrail. A run of at
least 7 1h inches is to be provided at a point 12 inches from where the tread is the
narrowest. The rise must be sufficient to provide 6-foot 6-inch headroom. The rise
shall not exceed 9 1/z inches.
(g) Landings. Every landing shall have a dimension measured in the direction of
travel not less than the width of the stairway. Such dimension need not exceed 44
inches when the stair has a straight run. There shall not be more than 12 feet verti-
cally between landings. For landings with adjoining doors, see Section 3304 U).
EXCEPTION: Stairs serving an unoccupied roof are exempt from these provi-
sions.
(h) Basement Stairways. When a basement stairway and a stairway to an upper
story terminate in the same exit enclosure, an approved barrier shall be provided to
prevent persons from continuing on into the basement. Directional exit signs shall
be provided as specified in Section 3314.
(i) Handrails. Stairways shall have handrails on each side, and every stairway
required to be more than 88 inches in width shall be provided with not less than one
..
intermediate handrail for each 88 inches of required width. Intermediate handrails
shall be spaced approximately equally across with the entire width of the stairway.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Stairways less than 44 inches in width or stairways serving
one individual dwelling unit in Group R, Division I or 3 Occupancies or a Group R,
Division 3 congregate residence may have one handrail.
2. Private stairways 30 inches or less in height may have handrails on one side only.
3. Stairways having less than four risers and serving one individual dwelling unit
in Group R, Division I or 3, or a Group R, Division 3 congregate residence or serving
Group M Occupancies need not have handrails.
The top of handrails and handrail extensions shall be placed not less than 34 in-
ches or more than 38 inches above the nosing of treads and landings. Handrails
shall be continuous the full length of the stairs and, except for private stairways, at
least one handrail shall extend in the direction of the stair run not less than 12 in-
ches beyond the top riser nor less than 12 inches beyond the bottom riser. Ends
shall be returned or shall terminate in newel posts or safety terminals.
The hand grip portion of handrails shall not be less than 11h inches or more than 2
inches in cross-sectional dimension or the shape shall provide an equivalent grip-
ping surface. The hand grip portion of handrails shall have a smooth surface with no
sharp comers.
639
Handrails projecting from a wall shall have a space of not less than 11h inches
between the wall and the handrail.
(j) Guardrails. Stairways open on one or both sides shall have guardrails as re-
quired by Section 1712.
(k) Exterior Stairway Protection. Except in Group R, Division 3 Occupancies,
all openings in the exterior wall below and within IOfeet, measured horizontally, of
an exterior ex it stairway serving a building over two stories in height or a floor level
having such openings in two or more floors below shall be protected by self-clos-
ing fire assembly having a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Openings may be unprotected when two separated exterior
stairways serve an exterior exit balcony.
2. Protection of openings is not required for open parking garages conforming to
Section 709.
Exterior stairways enclosed on three or more sides shall comply with the
flame-spread requirements for interior stairways.
(I) Interior Stairway Construction. Interior stairways shall be constructed as
specified in Part IV of this code.
Except when enclosed usable space under stairs is prohibited by Section 3309
(t), the walls and soffits of the enclosed space shall be protected on the enclosed
side as required for one-hour fire-resistive construction.
All required interior stairways which extend to the top floor in any building four
or more stories in height shall have, at the highest point of the stair shaft, an ap-
proved hatch openable to the exterior not less than 16 square feet in area with a
minimum dimension of 2 feet.
EXCEPTION: The hatch need not be provided on smokeproof enclosures or on
;;; stairways that extend to the roof with an opening onto that roof.
~~~ Stairways exiting directly to the exterior of a building four or more stories in
l height shall be provided with means for emergency entry for fire department ac-
;{ cess.
(m) Exterior Stairway Construction. Exterior stairways shall be constructed
as specified in Part IV of this code.
Exterior stairways shall not project into yards where openings are not permitted
or protection of openings is required.
Enclosed usable space under stairs shall have the walls and soffits protected on
the enclosed side as required for one-hour fire-resistive construction .
.; Stairways exiting directly to the exterior of a building four or more stories in
~ height shall be provided with means for emergency entry for fire department ac-
:~
;!i; cess.
(n) Stairway to Roof. In buildings four or more stories in height, one stairway
shall extend to the roof surface, unless the roof has a slope greater than 4 in 12. See
Subsection 3306 (I) for roof hatch requirements.
(o) Headroom. Every stairway shall have a headroom clearance of not less than
6 feet 8 inches. Such clearances shall be measured vertically from a plane parallel
and tangent to the stairway tread nosings to the soffit above at all points.
640
(p) Stairway Identification. Approved stairway identification signs shall be lo-

cated at each floor level in all enclosed stairways in buildings four or more stories in F
l
height. The sign shall identify the stairway, indicate whether there is roof access, 1
the floor level, and the upper and lower terminus of the stairway. The sign shall be F
located approximately 5 feet above the floor landing in a position which is readily I
visible when the door is in the open or closed position. Signs shall comply with re- F
qyc,'remerrts of U.B.C. Standard No. 33-2. I
R~~:.~307. (a) General. Except for ramped aisles in assembly rooms, ramps '\:
used as exits shall conform to the provisions of this section. Ramped aisles within 1!
assembly rooms shall conform with the provisions in Section 3315. Ramps which
are located within an accessible route of travel shall also comply with Chapter 31.
·:~,.' -l~.:;· '!
;.
..·'·.•
(b) Width. The width of ramps shall be determined as specified in Section 3303 t
(b), but shall not be less than 44 inches, except as specified herein. Ramps serving j
an occupant load of 49 or less shall not be less than 36 inches in width. .. ,
Handrails may project into the required width a distance of 3 1h inches from each ~
side of a ramp. Other projections, such as trim and similar decorative features, may j
project into the required width 11h inches on each side. ilil
(c) Slope. The slope of ramps required by Chapter 31 which are located within an ''''
accessible route oftravel shall not be steeper than I vertical to 12 horizontal. The '.·~. ·
slope of other ramps shall not be steeper than I vertical to 8 horizontal.
(d) Landings. Ramps having slopes steeper than I vertical to 15 horizontal shall
have landings at the top and bottom, and at least one intermediate landing shall be
provided for each 5 feet of rise. Top landings and intermediate landings shall have a
dimension measured in the direction of ramp run of not less than 5 feet. Landings at
the bottom of ramps shall have a dimension in the direction of ramp run of not less
than 6 feet.
Doors in any position shall not reduce the minimum dimension of the landing to
less than 42 inches and shall not reduce the required width by more than 3 1h inches
when fully open.
When ramp access is provided to comply with Chapter 31 and a door swings
over a landing, the landing shall extend at least 24 inches beyond the latch edge of
the door, measured parallel to the door in the closed position, and shall have a
length parallel to the direction of travel through the doorway of not less than 5 feet.
(e) Handrails. Ramps having slopes steeper than 1 vertical to 15 horizontal shall
have handrails as required for stairways, except that intermediate handrails shall
not be required. Ramped aisles need not have handrails on sides serving fixed seat-
ing.
(f) Construction. Ramps shall be constructed as required for stairways.
(g) Surface. The surface of ramps shall be roughened or shall be of slip-resistant
materials.
(h) Guardrails. Ramps open on one or both sides shall have guardrails as re- ~i
quircd by Section 1712. ;;:
641
Horizontal Exit
Sec. 3308. (a) Used as a Required Exit. A horizontal exit may be considered as
a required exit when conforming to the provisions of this chapter. A horizontal exit
shall not serve as the only exit from a portion of a building, and when two or more
exits are required, not more than one half of the total number of exits or total exit
width may be horizontal exits.
(b) Openings. All openings in the two-hour fire-resistive wall which provide a
horizontal exit shall be protected by a fire assembly having a fire-protection rating
of not less than one and one-half hours.
(c) Discharge Areas. A horizontal exit shall lead into a floor area having capac-
ity for an occupant load not less than the occupant load served by such exit. The
capacity shall be determined by allowing 3 square feet of net clear floor area for
each occupant to be accommodated therein, not including areas of stairs, elevators
and other shafts or courts. In Group I, Division 1.1 Occupancies the capacity shall
be determined by allowing 15 square feet of net clear floor area per ambulatory oc-
cupant and 30 square feet per nonambulatory occupant. The area into which a hori-
zontal exit leads shall be provided with exits adequate to meet the requirements of
this chapter but need not include the added capacity imposed by persons entering it
through horizontal exits.
Stairway, Ramp and Escalator Enclosures

Sec. 3309. (a) General. Interior stairways, ramps or escalators shall be enclosed
as specified in this section.
EXCEPTIONS: l.ln otherthan Groups Hand I Occupancies, an enclosure need
not be provided for a stairway. ramp or escalator serving only one adjacent floor and
not connected with corridors or stairways serving other floors. For enclosure of esca-
lators serving Group B Occupancies, see Section 706.
2. Stairs in Group R, Division 3 Occupancies and stairs within individual dwelling
units in Group R, Division l Occupancies need not be enclosed.
3. Stairs in open parking garages, as defined in Section 709, need not be enclosed.
(b) Enclosure Construction. Enclosure walls shall not be of less than two-hour
fire-resistive construction in buildings four or more stories in height or of Types I
and II fire-resistive construction and shall not be ofless than one-hour fire-resistive
construction elsewhere.
EXCEPTION: In sprinkler-protected parking garages restricted to the storage
of private or pleasure-type motor vehicles, stairway enclosures may be enclosed with
glazing meeting the requirements of Section 4306 (g), (h) and (i).
(c) Openings into Enclosures. Openings into exit enclosures other than per-
mitted exterior openings shall be limited to those necessary for exiting from a nor-
mally occupied space into the enclosure and exiting from the enclosure. Other
penetrations into and opening through the exit enclosure are prohibited except for
ductwork and equipment necessary for independent stair pressurization, sprinkler
piping, standpipes and electrical conduit serving the stairway and terminating in a
listed box not exceeding 16 square inches in area. Penetrations and communicating
openings between adjacent exit enclosures are not permitted regardless of whether
the opening is protected.
642
All exit doors in an exit enclosure shall be protected by a fire assembly having a
fire-protection rating of not less than one hour where one-hour shaft construction is
permitted and one and one-half hours where two-hour shaft construction is re-
quired. Doors shall be maintained self-closing or shall be automatic closing by ac-
tuation of a smoke detector as provided for in Section 4306 (b). The maximum
transmitted temperature end point shall not exceed 450°F. above ambient at the end
of 30 minutes of the fire exposure specified in U.B.C. Standard No. 43-2.
(d) Extent of Enclosure. Stairway and ramp enclosures shall include landings
and parts of floors connecting stairway flights and shall also include a corridor on
the ground floor leading from the stairway to the exterior of the building. Enclosed
corridors or passageways are not required from unenclosed stairways. Every open-
ing into the corridor shall comply with the requirements of Section 3309 (c).
EXCEPTION: In office buildings classed as a Group B, Division 2 Occupancy,
a maximum of 50 percent of the exits may discharge through a street-floor lobby, pro-
vided the required exit width is free and unobstructed and the entire street floor is pro-
tected with an automatic sprinkler system.
(e) Barrier. A stairway in an exit enclosure shall not continue below the grade
level exit unless an approved barrier is provided at the ground-floor level to prevent
persons from accidentally continuing into the basement.
(f) Use of Space under Stair and Ramp. There shall be no enclosed usable
space under stairways or ramps in an exit enclosure, nor shall the open space under
such stairways be used for any purpose.
Smokeproof Enclosures
Sec. 3310. (a) General. A smokeproof enclosure shall consist of a vestibule and
continuous stairway enclosed from the highest point to the lowest point by walls
of two-hour fire-resistive construction. There shall be no openings into the stair-
way portion of the smokeproof enclosure other than those permitted by the first
paragraph of Section 3309 (c). The supporting frame shall be protected as set forth
in Table No. 17-A.
In buildings with air-conditioning systems or pressure air supply serving more
than one story, an approved smoke detector shall be placed in the return-air duct or
plenum prior to exhausting from the building or being diluted by outside air. Upon
activation, the detector shall cause the return air to exhaust completely from the
building without any recirculation through the building. Such devices may be in-
stalled in each room or space served by a return-air duct.
(b) When Required. In a building having a floor used for human occupancy
which is located more than 75 feet above the lowest level of fire department vehicle
access, all of the required exits shall be smokeproof enclosures.
EXCEPTIONS: I. For buildings equipped with an automatic sprinkler system
throughout in accordance with Section 1807 (c), smoke-proof enclosures may be
omitted. provided all enclosed exit stairways are equipped with a barometric damp-
erect relief opening at the top and the stairway supplied mechanically with sufficient
air to discharge a minimum of2,500 cubic feet per minute through the relief opening
while maintaining a minimum positive pressure of 0.15-inch water column in the
shaft relative to atmospheric pressure with all doors closed. Activation of the me-
643
chanica! equipment shall be initiated by a smoke detector installed outside the stair
enclosure and within 5 feet of the enclosure door. Such equipment shall also be acti-
vated by actuation of the automatic sprinkler system.
2.Enclosures need not be provided in open parking garages as defined in Section
709.
(c) Outlet. A smokeproof enclosure shall exit into a public way or into an exit
passageway leading to a public way. The exit passageway shall be without other
openings and shall have walls, floors and ceiling of two-hour fire-resistive con-
struction.
(d) Barrier. A stairway in a smokeproof enclosure shall not continue below the
grade level unless an approved barrier is provided at the ground level to prevent
persons from accidentally continuing into the basement.
(e) Access. Access to stairways in smokeproof enclosures shall be by way of a
vestibule or open exterior exit balcony construction of noncombustible materials.
(f) SmokeproofEnclosure by Natural Ventilation I. Doors. When a vestibule
is provided, the door assembly into the vestibule shall have a one- and
one-half-hour fire-protection rating, and the door assembly from the vestibule to
the stairs shall be a smoke- and draft-control assembly having not less than a
20-minute fire-protection rating. Doors shall be maintained self-closing or shall be
automatic closing by actuation of a smoke detector.
When access to the stairway is by means of an open exterior exit balcony, the
door assembly to the stairway shall have a one- and one-half-hour fire-protection
rating and shall be maintained self-closing or shall be automatic closing by actua-
tion of a smoke detector.
2. Open-air vestibule. The vestibule shall have a minimum dimension of 44 in-
ches in width and 72 inches in direction of exit travel. The vestibule shall have a
minimum of 16 square feet of opening in a wall facing an exterior court, yard or
public way at least 20 feet in width.
(g) Smokeproof Enclosures by Mechanical Ventilation. I. Doors. The door
assembly from the building into the vestibule shall have a one- and one-half-hour
fire-protection rating, and the door assembly from the vestibule to the stairway
shall be a smoke- and draft-control assembly having not less than a 20-minute
fire-protection rating. The door to the stairways shall be provided with a drop sill or
other provision to minimize the air leakage. Doors shall be maintained self-closing
or shall be automatic closing by activation of a smoke detector or in the event of a
power failure.
2. Vestibule size. Vestibules shall have a minimum dimension of 44 inches in
width and 72 inches in direction of exit travel.
3. Vestibule ventilation. The vestibule shall be provided with not less than one
air change per minute, and the exhaust shall be 150 percent of the supply. Supply air
shall enter and exhaust air shall discharge from the vestibule through separate
tightly constructed ducts used onlyforthatpurpose. Supply air shall enter the vesti-
bule within 6 inches of the floor level. The top of the exhaust register shall be down
from the top of the smoke trap and shall be entirely within the smoke trap area.
Doors, when in the open position, shall not obstruct duct openings. Duct openings
644
may be provided with controlling dampers if needed to meet the design require-
ments but are not otherwise required.
4. Smoke trap. The vestibule ceiling shall be at least 20 inches higher than the
door opening into the vestibule to serve as a smoke and heat trap and to provide an
upward-moving air column. The height may be decreased when justified by engi-
neering design and field testing.
5. Stair shaft air movement system. The stair shaft shall be provided with a
dampered relief opening at the top and supplied mechanically with sufficient air to
discharge a minimum of 2,500 cubic feet per minute through the relief opening
while maintaining a minimum positive pressure of0.05 inch ofwatercolumn in the
shaft relative to atmosphere with all doors closed and a minimum ofO.I 0-inch wa-
ter column difference between the stair shaft and the vestibule.
6. Operation of ventilating equipment. The activation of the ventilating equip-
ment shall be initiated by a smoke detector installed outside the vestibule door in an
approved location. The activation of the closing device on any door shall activate
the closing devices on all doors of the smokeproof enclosure at all levels. When the
closing device for the stair shaft and vestibule doors is activated by a smoke detec-
tor or power failure, the mechanical equipment shall operate at the levels specified
in Subsections 3 and 5.
7. Standby power. Standby power for mechanical ventilation equipment shall
be provided by an approved self-contained generator set to operate whenever there
is a loss of power in the normal house current. The generator shall be in a separate
room having a minimum one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation and shall
have a minimum fuel supply adequate to operate the equipment for two hours. See
Section 1807 (i) for standby power requirements for high-rise Group B, Division 2
offices and Group R, Division I Occupancies.
8. Acceptance testing. Before the mechanical equipment is accepted by the
building official, it shall be tested to confirm that the mechanical equipment is op-
erating in compliance with these requirements.
9. Emergency lighting. The stair shaft and vestibule shall be provided with
emergency lighting. A standby generator which is installed for the smokeproof en-
closure mechanical ventilation equipment may be used for such stair shaft and ves-
tibule power supply. See Section 1807 (i) for emergency lighting requirements for
high-rise Group B, Division 2 offices and Group R, Division I Occupancies.
Exit Courts
Sec. 3311. (a) General. Exit courts shall discharge into a public way or exit pas-
sageway.
(b) Width. Exit court minimum widths shall be determined in accordance with
provisions of Section 3303 based on the occupant load and such required width
shall be unobstructed to a height of7 feet, except for projections permitted in corri-
dors by Section 3305. The width of exit courts shall not be less than 44 inches ex-
cept Group R, Division 3 and Group M Occupancies, where the width may be
reduced to 36 inches.
645
When the width is reduced from any cause, the reduction shall be effected gradu-
ally by a guardrail at least 3 feet in height and making an angle of not more than 30
degrees with the axis of the exit court.
(c) Number of Exits. Exit courts shall be provided with exits as determined by
Section 3303.
(d) Construction and Openings. When an exit court serving a building or por-
tion thereof having an occupant load of I 0 or more is less than I 0 feet in width, the
exit court walls shall be a minimum of one-hour fire-resistive construction for a
distance of I 0 feet above the tloor of the court, and all openings therein shall be
protected by fire assemblies having a fire-protection rating of not less than
three-fourths hour.
Exit Passageways
Sec. 3312. (a) Construction and Openings. The walls of exit passageways
shall be without openings other than required exits and shall have walls, floors and
ceilings of the same period of fire resistance as required for the walls, tloors and
ceilings of the building served with a minimum of one-hour fire-resistive construc-
tion. Exit openings through the enclosing walls of exit passageways shall be pro-
tected by fire assemblies having a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating.
(b) Detailed Requirements. Except for construction and opening protection as
specified in Subsection (a) above, exit passageways shall comply with the require-
ments for corridors as specified in Section 3305.
Exit Illumination
Sec. 3313. (a) General. Except within individual dwelling units, guest rooms
and sleeping rooms, exits shall be illuminated at any time the building is occupied
with light having intensity of not less than I footcandle at tloor level.
EXCEPTION: In auditoriums, theaters, concert or opera halls and similar as-
semhly uses, the illumination at floor level may he reduced during perfonnances to
not less than 0.2 footcandlc.
Fixtures required for exit illumination shall be supplied from separate sources of
power where required by Subsection (b).
(h) Separate Sources of Power. The power supply for exit illumination shall
normally be provided by the premises' wiring system. In the event of its failure,
illumination shall be automatically provided from an emergency system for Group
I, Divisions 1.1 and 1.2 Occupancies and for all other occupancies where the exit-
ing system serves an occupant load of I 00 or more.
For high-rise buildings, see Section 1807. For smokeproof enclosures, see Sec-
tion 3310 (g) 9.
Emergency systems shall he supplied from storage batteries or an on-site gener-
ator set and the system shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the
Electrical Code.
Exit Signs
Sec. 3314. (a) Where Required. When two or more exits from a story are re-
quired by Section 3303, exit signs shall be installed at stair enclosure doors, hori-
646
zontal exits and other required exits from the story. When two or more exits are
required from a room or area, exit signs shall be installed at the required exits from
the room or area and where otherwise necessary to clearly indicate the direction of
egress.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Main exterior exit doors which obviously and clearly are
identifiable as exits need not be signed when approved by the building official.
2. Group R. Division3, and individual units of Group R, Division I Occupancies.
3. Exits from rooms or areas with an occupant load of less than 50 when located
within a Group I, Division 1.1, 1.2 or 2 Occupancy or a GroupE, Division3 day-care
occupancy.
(b) Graphics. The color and design of lettering, arrows and other symbols on
exit signs shall be in high contrast with their background. Words on the sign shall be
in block letters 6 inches in height with a stroke of not less than 3/ 4 inch.
(c) Illumination. Signs shall be internally or externally illuminated by two elec-
tric lamps or shall be of an approved self-luminous type. When the luminance on
the face of an exit sign is from an external source, it shall have an intensity of not
less than 5.0 footcandles from either lamp. Internally illuminated signs shall pro-
vide equivalent luminance.
(d) Power Supply. Current supply to one of the lamps for exit signs shall be pro-
vided by the premises' wiring system. Power to the other lamp shall be from stor-
age batteries or an on-site generator set and the system shall be installed in
accordance with the Electrical Code. For high-rise buildings, see Section 1807.
(e) Floor-level Exit Signs. When exit signs are required by Section 3314 (a),
additional approved low-level exit signs which are internally or externally illumi-
nated, or self-luminous, shall be provided in all interior exit corridors serving guest
rooms of hotels in Group R, Division I Occupancies.
The bottom of the sign shall not be less than 6 inches or more than 8 inches above
the tloor level. For exit doors, the sign shall be on the door or adjacent to the door
with the closest edge of the sign within 4 inches of the door frame.
(f) Amusement Building Exit Marking. Approved direction exit marking and
exit signs shall be provided. Approved low-level exit signs and directional marking
shall be located not more than 8 inches above the walking surface and at the exit
path. Such marking shall be activated in accordance with Section 610 (c).
Aisles
Sec. 3315. (a) General. Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from
all portions of buildings. Aisles located within an accessible route of travel shall r:~
also comply with Chapter 31. ~
(b) Width in Occupancies without Fixed Seats. The width of aisles in occu- ~
pancies without fixed seats shall comply with this section. Aisle widths shall be ~;
f.
r·.': ,~-.
provided in accordance with the following:
I. In areas serving employees only, the minimum aisle width may be 24 inches
but not less than the width required by the number of employees served. ··,
2. In public areas of Group B, Division 2 Occupancies, and in assembly occu- .!.!.!l
pancies without fixed seats, the minimum clear aisle width shall be 36 inches where .
647
) tables, counters, furnishings, merchandise or other similar obstructions are placed

••• ~~t~n,~;~~:~~~~ea~~~~ only and 44 inches when such obstructions are placed on
,,, (c) Width in Assembly Occupancies with Fixed Seats. Aisles in assembly oc-
"-"'1>'.\\ll:\~\'. w\th f\xed
seats shall comply with this section. The clear width of aisles
shall be based on the number of occupants within the portion of the seating areas
served by the aisle.
The clear width of an aisle in inches shall not be less than the occupant load
served by the aisle multiplied by 0.3 for aisles with slopes greater than I vertical to
Xhorizontal and not less than 0.2 for aisles with slopes of I vertical to 8 horizontal
or less. In addition, when the rise of steps in aisles exceeds 7 inches, the aisle clear
width shall be increased by 11/ 4 inches for each 100 occupants or fraction thereof
served for each 1/ 4 inch of riser height above 7 inches.
Where exiting is possible in two directions, the width of such aisles shall be uni-
form throughout their length.
When aisles converge to form a single path of exit travel, the aisle width shall not
be less than the combined required width of the converging aisle.
In assembly rooms with fixed seats arranged in rows, the clear width of aisles
shall not be less than set forth above or less than the following:
4!1 inches for stairs having seating on both sides.
36 inches for stairs having seating on one side.
23 inches between a stair handrail and seating when the aisles are subdivided by
the handrail.
42 inches for level or ramped aisles having seating on both sides.
36 inches for level or ramped aisles having seating on one side.
23 inches between a stair handrail and seating when an aisle does not serve more
than five rows on one side.
(d) Aisle Termination. Aisles shall terminate at a cross aisle, foyer, doorway or
vomitory. Aisles shall not have a dead end greater than 20 feet in length.
EXCEPTION: A longer dead-end aisle is permitted when seats served by the
dead-end aisle are not more than 24 seats from another aisle measured along a row
of seats having a minimum clear width of 12 inches plus 0.6 inch for each additional
seat above seven in a row.
Each end of a cross aisle shall terminate at an aisle, foyer, doorway or vomitory.
(e) Ramp Slope. The slope of ramped aisles shall not be more than I vertical in 8
horizontal. Ramped aisles shall have a slip-resistant surface.
(I) Aisle Steps. I. When prohibited. Steps shall not be used in aisles having a
slope of I vertical to 8 horizontal or less.
2. When required. Aisles with a slope steeper than I vertical to 8 horizontal
shall consist of a series of risers and treads extending across the entire width of the
aisle.
The height of risers shall not be more than 7 inches or less than 4 inches and the
tread run shall not be less than II inches. The riser height shall be uniform within
each tlight and the tread run shall be uniform throughout the aisle. Variations in run
648
or height between adjacent treads or risers shall not exceed 3I 16 inch. A contrasting !{
marking stripe or other approved marking shall be provided on each tread at the .'·• .,•:.',· ,·
nosing or leading edge such that the location of each tread is readily apparent when
~~e2w~~1~~;~;;;~;~~;~;~;~;~;~;~;;~;;~~;~; ~.!·'
unifonn but only to the extent necessitated by changes in the slope of the adjoining
sea{ing area to maintain adequate sightlines. Variations may exceed 3/)6 inch be-
tween adjacent risers provided the exact location of such variations is identified with
.,'•.·. .· •.·.·'· ·'.· '.
,,,
a marking stripe on each tread at the nosing or leading edge adjacent to the nonuni- :m
::i:r.;~~~:;~: ::~,::~: :::::::.:::::: ::;~::· I

(g)
sions set forth in Section 3306 (i) and shall have rounded terminations or bends. }
Ramped aisles having a slope steeper than I vertical to 15 horizontal and aisle stairs :;;
~:2:~~~~~~~~;;~~~:~~~~:~:~~~~;~:~ i
~~~·~~nt~:a~i~~=~:~:a~~t~~~:~:~:!~%~r~~~~r~i~~.e side of an aisle which con-
Handrails located within the aisle width shall be discontinuous with gaps or
.·'~, :·! ..i.·
breaks at intervals not to exceed five rows. These gaps or breaks shall have a clear .,.,
width of not less than 22 inches or more than 36 inches measured horizontally. Such i.!!!
handrails shall have an additional intermediate handrail located 12 inches below ?!
the main handrail.
Seat Spacing
tw~:~· r~~:~:~e:;te~!i~;s~ot~::~~ei~~~~~e~~::~:~~h=s~~~i~~::: ~~r~::~~:~!~~ ·.':·;

tance from the back of the row ahead and the nearest projection ofthe row behind. ····'...
···'!·:.··,:··'·
...·. .'·
Where seats are automatic or self-rising, measurement may be made with the seats
in the raised position. Where seats are not automatic or self-rising, the minimum fi
clear width shall be measured with the seat in the down position. (
The clear width shall be increased as follows: 1!1\
(a) For rows of seating served by aisles or doorways at both ends, there shall be
no more than 100 seats per row and the minimum clear width of 12 inches between :.:!
~E:.:~;,~7:~r~::;~~~::~?.~~~z.::~::~~::: =~:! ;;.~:::: . 1,1.•1,
(b) For rows of seating served by an aisle or doorway at one end only, the mini-
mum clear width of 12 inches between rows shall be increased by 0.6 inch for every
additional seat beyond seven, but the minimum clear width need not exceed 22 in-
649
) ches. In addition, the distance to the point where the occupant has a choice of two
~ :::;o::o~~~:tvel to'" '>;t AArul not meed 30 f~t fmm tho po;nt whore tho ocon-
Group A Occupancies
Sec. 3317. (a) Main Exit. Group A, Division I, 2 or 2.1 Occupancies shall be
provided with a main exit.
The main exit shall be of sufficient width to accommodate one half of the total
occupant load but shall not be less than the total required width of all aisles, exit
passageways and stairways leading thereto and shall connect to a continuous and
unobstructed means of egress to a public way.
(b) Side Exits. Auditoriums of Group A, Division I, 2 or 2.1 Occupancies shall
be provided with exits on each side. The exits on each side of the auditorium shall
be of sufficient width to accommodate one third of the total occupant load served.
Side exits shall open directly to a public way or into an exit court, approved stair-
way, exterior stairway or exit passageway leading to a public way. Side exits shall
be accessible from a cross aisle.
(c) Balcony Exits. Balconies having an occupant load of II or more shall be pro-
vided with a minimum of two exits. Balcony exits shall open directly to an exterior
stairway or other approved stairway or ramp. When there is more than one balcony,
exits shall open into an exterior or enclosed stairway or ramp. Balcony exits shall
be accessible from a cross aisle. The number and distribution of exits shall be as
otherwise specified in this chapter.
(d) Panic Hardware. Exit doors from a Group A Occupancies having an occu-
pant load of 50 or more shall not be provided with a latch or lock unless it is panic
hardware.
EXCEPTIONS: !.In Group A, Division 3 Occupancies and in all churches, pan-
ic hardware may be omitted from the main exit when the main exit consists of a single
door or pair of doors. A key-locking device may be used in place of the panic hard-
ware, provided there is a readily visible durable sign adjacent to the doorway stating
THIS DOOR MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS. The
sign shall be in letters not less than I inch high on a contrasting background. When
unlocked, the single door or both leaves of a pair of doors must be free to swing with-
out operation of any latching device. When a pair of doors is installed, one leaf shall
have no locking devices whatsoever, and the second leaf shall be arranged to latch or
lock into the frame and into the first leaf in such a manner that a single unlocking ac-
tion will unlock both leaves simultaneously. Flush, edge or surface bolts or any other
.
type of device that may be used to close or restrain the door other than by operation
of the locking device are prohibited. The use of this exception may be revoked by the
building official for due cause .
2. Panic hardware may be waived on gates surrounding stadiums when the gates
are under constant immediate supervision while the public is present, and provided
safe dispersal areas based on 3 square feet per occupant are located between the sta-
dium and the fence. The required dispersal area shall not be located less than 50 feet
from the stadium.
650
(e) Multitheater Complex. The main exit from the multi theater complex shall :===
be of sufficient width to accommodate one half of the aggregate occupant load of \\\
the complex. \\1
Corridor walls and ceilings shall be of not less than one-hour fire-resistive con- ' '
struction ;~t~;;;;~~: ~;:::t;:r::e::i~~i:e:o!~e::~:~::e~~~c~~otion picture au- ~

ditorium has at least one half of its required exits opening directly to the exterior or
into an exit passageway.
Group E Occupancies
Sec. 3318. (a) Definitions. For the purpose of this section, the following defini-
tions apply:
INTERIOR ROOM is a room whose only exit is through an adjoining or inter-
vening room which is not an exit corridor.
ROOM is a space or area bounded by any obstructions to exit passage which at
any time enclose more than 80 percent of the perimeter of the area. In computing
the unobstructed perimeter, openings less than 3 feet in clear width and less than 6
feet 8 inches high shall not be considered.
SEPARATE EXIT SYSTEM is a path of exit travel separated in such a manner
from other required exits as to provide an atmospheric separation which precludes
contamination of both paths by the same fire.
(b) Separate Exit Systems Required. Every room with an occupant load of
more than 300 shall have one of its exits into a separate exit system. When three or
more exits are required from a room, no more than two required exits shall enter
into the same exit system.
(c) Travel Distance. 1. In rooms. The distance from any point in a room shall
not be more than 75 feet from an exit corridor, an enclosed stairway or the exterior
of the building.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In buildings not more than two stories in height and protected
throughout with smoke detectors, the distance may be increased to 90 feet.
2. In buildings protected throughout by an automatic sprinkler system, the dis-
tance may be increased to II 0 feet.
2. From any location. All portions of unsprinklered buildings shall not be more
than 150 feet from either an exterior exit door, a horizontal exit, an exit passageway
or an enclosed stairway measured along the line of travel. In a building protected
throughout with an automatic sprinkler system such distance may be increased to
225 feet. In buildings not more than two stories in height protected throughout with
smoke detectors, the distance may be increased to 175 feet.
(d) Exits through Adjoining Rooms. Interior rooms may exit through adjoin-
ing or intervening rooms, provided the total distance of travel through such rooms
to an exit corridor does not exceed that specified in Subsection (c) 1 above and is a
direct, obvious and unobstructed path of travel. Such paths of exit travel shall not
pass through kitchens, storerooms, restrooms, closets, laboratories using hazard-
ous materials, industrial shops or other similar places.
651
Foyers and lobbies constructed as required for exit corridors shall not be con-
strued as adjoining or intervening rooms.
When the only means of exit from a room is through an adjoining or intervening
room, smoke detectors shall be installed throughout the area of the common atmo-
~pherc through which the exit must pass. The detectors shall actuate alarms audible
.i» 1nc jnterior room and shall be connected to the school fire alarm system.
EXCEPTIONS: I. When the aggregate occupant load of the interior room or
rooms is I0 or less.
2. When the enclosures forming interior rooms are less than two thirds of the
floor-to-ceiling height and do not exceed 8 feet.
3. Rooms used exclusively for mechanical and public utility service to the build-
ings.
(e) Corridors and Exterior Exit Balconies. Corridor walls and ceilings shall
be of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction with openings protected as
required in Section 3305 (h).
EXCEPTION: When each room used for instruction has at least one exit door
directly to the exterior at ground level and when rooms used for assembly purposes
have at least one half of the required exits directly to the exterior ground level,
one-hour fire-resistive construction of corridor walls and ceilings is not required.
Any change in elevation of Jess than 2 feet in a corridor or exterior exit balcony
shall be by means of ramps.
The width of a corridor in a Group E, Division I Occupancy shall be the width
required by Section 3303, plus 2 feet, but not less than 6 feet.
EXCEPTION: When the number of occupants served is 100 or less, the corridor
may be 44 inches wide.
(f) Exit Serving Auditoriums in Group E, Division 1 Occupancy. An exit
serving an auditorium and other rooms need provide only for the capacity of
whichever requires the greater width if the auditorium is not to be used simulta-
neously with the other rooms.
(g) Stairs. Each floor above or below the ground floor level shall have not Jess
than two exit stairs and the required exit width shall be equally divided between
such stairs, provided that stairs serving an occupant load of 100 or more shall be not
less than 5 feet in clear width.
EXCEPTION: This subsection does not apply to rooms used for maintenance,
storage and similar purposes.
(h) Doors. The width of exit doors shall be sufficient to accommodate the occu-
pant load served.
(i) Basement Rooms. Exit stairways from a basement shall open directly to the
exterior of the building without entering the first floor corridor.
U) Panic Hardware. Exit doors from rooms having an occupant load of 50 or
more and from corridors shall not be provided with a latch or Jock unless it is panic
hardware.
(k) Fences and Gates. School grounds may be fenced and gates therein
equipped with Jocks, provided safe dispersal areas are located not Jess than 50 feet
from the buildings. Dispersal areas shall be sized to provide an area of not less than
652
3 square feet per occupant. Gates shall not be installed across corridors or passage-
ways leading to such dispersal areas unless they comply with exit requirements.
See Section 3322 for exits from dispersal areas.
Group H Occupancies
Sec. 3319. Every portion of a Group H Occupancy having a floor area of 200
square feet or more shall be served by at least two separate exits.
EXCEPTION: Group H. Division 40ccupancies having a floor area ofless than
I ,000 square feet may have one exit.
Within Group H, Divisions I, 2 and 3 Occupancies, all portions of any room shall
be within 75 feet of an exit door. Exit doors from a room classified as Group H,
Divisions I, 2 and 3 Occupancies shall not be provided with a latch or lock unless it
is panic hardware.
Doors leading to a corridor of fire-resistive construction shall have a minimum
three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating; shall not have more than I 00 square in-
ches of wired glass set in steel frames; shall be maintained self-closing or shall be
automatic closing as defined in Section 4306 (b); and shall open in the direction of
exit travel.
Within Group H, Division 7 and within fabrication areas of Group H, Division 6
Occupancies, the distance of travel to an exterior exit door, exit corridor, horizontal
exit, exit passageway or an enclosed stairway shall not exceed I 00 feet.
Group I Occupancies
Sec. 3320. (a) Exterior Doors. All required exterior exit doors shall open in the
direction of exit travel.
(b) Minimum Size of Exits. The clear width of exits serving areas occupied or
used by bed or litter patients shall be such that it will allow ready passage of such
equipment, but shall not be less than 44 inches. Other exits shall have a clear width
of not less than 32 inches. There shall be no projections into the clear width.
(c) Corridors. The minimum clear width of a corridor shall be determined as
specified in Section 3303 (b), but shall not be less than 44 inches, except that corri-
dors serving any area housing one or more nonambulatory persons shall not be less
than 8 feet in width.
EXCEPTION: Corridors serving surgical areas of Group I, Division 1.2 Occu-
pancies shall not be less than six feet in width until reaching an exterior door. enclosed
exit stairway or horizontal exit and shall not pass through an adjoining room.
Any change in elevation of the floor in a corridor serving nonambulatory per-
sons shall be made by means of a ramp.
Corridors shall comply with Section 3305 except that in hospitals and nursing
homes classified as Group I, Division 1.1 Occupancies the following exceptions [[i[
apply:
I. Nurses' stations including space for doctors' and nurses' charting and com-
munications constructed as required for corridors need not be separated from corri-
dors.
2. Waiting areas and similar spaces constructed as required for corridors need
not be separated from corridors, provided:
653
(i) Each space is located to permit direct visual supervision by the facility
staff, and
(ii) The space and corridors into which the space opens are in the same smoke
compartment and the space is protected by an approved electrically super-
vised automatic smoke-detection system.
3. Door closers need not be installed on doors to sleeping rooms.
4. Fixed fully tempered or laminated glass in wood or metal frames may be used
in corridor walls, provided the glazed area does not exceed 25 percent ofthe area of
the corridor wall of the room.
5. The total area of glass in corridor walls is not limited when the glazing is fixed
1
/ 4 -inch-thick wired glass in steel frames and the size of individual glazed panel
does not exceed I ,296 square inches.
(d) Basement Exits. One exit accessible to every room below grade shall lead
directly to the exterior at grade level.
(e) Ramps. Group I, Divisions 1.1 and 1.2 Occupancies housing nonambulatory
patients shall have access to a ramp leading from the first story to the exterior of the
building at the ground floor level.
(f) Hardware. Exit doors serving an area having an occupant load of 50 or more
shall not be provided with a latch or lock unless it is panic hardware. Patient room
doors shall be readily openable from either side without the use of keys.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In Group I, Division 1.1 hospitals and nursing homes, lock-
ing devices, when approved, may be installed on patient sleeping rooms, provided
such devices are readily openable from the patient room side and are readily operable
by the facility staff on the other side. When key locks are used on patient room doors,
keys shall be located on the floor involved at a prominent location accessible to the
staff.
2. In Group I, Division 3 Occupancies, approved locks or safety devices may be
used where it is necessary to forcibly restrain the personal liberties of inmates or pa-
tients.
Special Hazards
Sec. 3321. (a) Rooms Containing Fuel-tired Equipment or Cellulose Ni-
trate. Except in Group R, Division 3 Occupancies, any room containing a boiler,
furnace, incinerator or other fuel-fired equipment shall be provided with two exits
when both of the following conditions exist:
I . The area of the room exceeds 500 square feet, and
2. The largest piece of fuel-fired equipment exceeds 400,000 Btu per hour input
capacity.
If two exits are required, one may be a fixed ladder. Exits shall be separated by a
horizontal distance not less than half the greatest horizontal dimension of the room.
Interior openings between a Group H Occupancy and an incinerator room are pro-
hibited.
(b) Cellulose Nitrate Handling. When cellulose nitrate is handled in film labo-
ratories, projection rooms and film processing rooms, two exits shall be provided.
654
Doors shall be self-closing and have a fire-protection rating of not less than one
hour.
Reviewing Stands, Grandstands, Bleachers and Folding and

Telescoping Seating
Sec. 3322. (a) Scope. The provisions of this section apply to reviewing stands,
grandstands, bleachers, and folding and telescoping seating.
(b) Definitions. For the purpose of this section certain terms are defined as fol-
lows:
BLEACHERS are tiered or stepped seating facilities without backrests in
which an area of 3 square feet or less is assigned per person for computing the
occupant load.
DISPERSAL AREA, SAFE, is an area which will accommodate a number of
persons equal to the total capacity of the stand and building which it serves such
that a person within the area will not be closer than 50 feet from the stand or build-
ing. Dispersal area capacity shall be determined by allowing 3 square feet of net
clear area per person.
FOLDING AND TELESCOPING SEATING is a structure that is used for
tiered seating of persons, and which overall shape and size may be reduced without
being dismantled, for purposes of moving or storing.
FOOTBOARDS are that part of a raised seating facility other than an aisle or
cross aisle upon which the occupant walks to reach a seat.
GRANDSTANDS are tiered or stepped seating facilities wherein an area of
more than 3 square feet is provided for each person.
OPEN-AIR GRANDSTANDS AND BLEACHERS are seating facilities
which are located so that the side toward which the audience faces is unroofed and
without an enclosing wall.
PERMANENT STANDS are those seating facilities which remain at a location
for more than 90 days.
REVIEWING STANDS are elevated platforms accommodating not more than
50 persons. Seating facilities, if provided, are normally in the nature of loose
chairs. Reviewing stands accommodating more than 50 persons shall be regulated
as grandstands.
TEMPORARY SEATING FACILITIES are those which are intended for use
at a location for not more than 90 days.
(c) Height of Reviewing Stands, Grandstands, Bleachers, and Folding and
Telescoping Seating. See Section 602.
(d) Design Requirements. See Chapter 23 and Section 2907 (i).
(e) General Requirements. I. Row spacing. There shall be a clear space of not
less than 12 inches measured horizontally between the back or backrest of each seat
and the front of the seat immediately behind it. The minimum spacing of rows of
seats measured from back to back shall be:
A. Twenty-two inches for seats without backrests.
655
B. Thirty inches for seats with backrests.

C. Thirty-three inches for chair seating.
2. Rise between rows. The maximum rise from one row of seats to the next shall
not exceed 16 inches unless the seat spacing from back to back measured horizon-
tally is 40 inches or more.
EXCEPTION: When automatic- or self-rising seats are installed, the rise be-
tween rows may be increased to 24 inches with the horizontal spacing back to back
or 33 inches.
3. Seating capacity determination. When bench-type seating is used, the num-
ber of seats shall be based on one person for each 18 inches of length of the bench.
4. Aisles. A. Aisles required. Aisles shall be provided in all seating facilities
except that aisles may be omitted when all of the following conditions exist:
(i) Seats are without backrests.
(ii) The rise from row to row does not exceed 12 inches per row.
(iii) The number of rows does not exceed II in height.
(iv) The top seating board is not over 10 feet above grade.
(v) The first seating board is not more than 20 inches above grade.
B. Obstructions. No obstruction shall be placed in the required width of any
aisle or exitway.
C. Width. Aisles serving seats on both sides shall have a minimum width of 42
inches. When serving seats on only one side, the aisle shall have a minimum width
~j~
,.,. of 36 inches. The required width for aisles shall equal the greater of the two mini-
!\\ mum required widths determined in accordance with Section 3315 (c) and this sub-
m: section.
5. Cross aisles and vomitories. Cross aisles and vomitories shall not be less
than 54 inches in clear width and shall extend to an exit, enclosed stairway or ex-
,~.,i.,' terior perimeter ramp. The required width for cross aisles shall equal the greatest of
,·':..
· three minimum required widths determined in accordance with Section 3315 and
!!!; this subsection .
•.
,''·,.,:.[.':.1.,.'·' sta~.d~.t~i~~::::r:n!~~.~~~~gE:~~ptte~;s~~~~~~i::a~r~;i::~,i~~;:;,~e~~;~~~~;
applicable sections of this chapter. Stairways and ramps shall have a maximum rise
and run as provided in Section 3306 (c) and Section 3307, except those within the
!~ seating facility which serve as aisles at right angles to the rows of seats where the
} rise shall not exceed 8 inches. When an aisle terminates at an elevation more than 8
!l! inches above grade or floor below, the aisle shall be provided with a stairway or
1. ramp which width is not less than the width ofthe aisle. Stairways and ramps shall
';··':.,:.!
'.
have handrails as provided in Sections 3306 and 3307, except stairways within the
;,;, seating facility which serve as aisles at right angles where handrails shall be pro-
!.,:·..l ':~,
...·':··'··'!' ~hde
vided at one sth.de obr along dcefnter~in1 e. ~inimuhm
A o~
c.lear width 4 8 ihnchdes be-
tween seats s a 11 e provt e or ats e statrways avmg center-ats 1e an rat 1s.
When there is seating on both sides of the aisle, handrails shall be discontinuous
·,,l,i.,·' with openings at intervals not exceeding five rows for access to seating. The open-
'
ing shall have a clear width of at least 22 inches and not greater than 36 inches mea-
656
sured horizontally, and the handrail shall have rounded terminations. When
handrails are provided in the middle of the aisle stairs, there shall be an additional
intermediate rail located approximately 12 inches below the top of the handrail.
I
7. Guardrails. Perimeter guardrails or enclosing walls or fencing shall be pro-
vided for all portions of elevated seating facilities which are more than 30 inches
above grade or floor. Construction of guardrails shall comply with Section 1712
and Table No. 23-B. Guardrails shall be 42 inches above the rear of a seat board or
42 inches above the rear of the steps in an aisle when the guardrail is parallel and
adjacent to the aisle.
EXCEPTION: Guardrails at the front of the front row of seats, which are not lo-
cated at the end of an aisle and where there is no cross aisle, may have a height of 26
inches and need not meet the 4-inch-maximum spacing specified in Section 1712; I
however, a midrail shall be installed.
The open vertical space between footboards and seats shall not exceed 9 inches
when footboards are more than 30 inches above grade.
8. Toeboards. A 4-inch-high vertical barrier shall be installed along the edge of
walking platforms whenever guardrails are required.
EXCEPTION: Toeboards shall not be required at the ends of footboards.
9. Footboards. Footboards shall be provided for all rows of seats above the third
row or beginning at such a point where the seat is more than 2 feet above the grade
or floor below. When the same platform is used for both seating and footrests, foot-
rests are not required, provided each level or platform is not less than 24 inches
wide. When aisles are required by Section 3322 (e) 4, footboards not less than 18
inches in width shall be installed between each row of seats.
(f) Grandstands, Bleachers, and Folding and Telescoping Seating within
Buildings. Except as otherwise provided in this section, grandstands, bleachers,
and folding and telescoping seating within a building shall comply with the other
applicable sections of this chapter.
EXCEPTIONS: I. When seats are without backrests, there may be nine seats be-
tween any seat and an aisle.
2. When seats are without backrests, dead ends in vertical aisles shall not exceed
a depth of 16 rows.
(g) Open-air Grandstands, Bleachers, and Folding and Telescoping Seat-~
ing. Except as otherwise provided in Items I through 9 below, open-air grand-
stands, bleachers, and folding and telescoping seating shall comply with the other
applicable sections of this chapter.
1. Number of seats between aisles. The number of seats between any seat and
an aisle shall not be greater than 20 when the seats are without backrests and nine if
the seats have backrests.
2. Dead ends. Dead ends in vertical aisles shall not exceed a depth of 16 rows for
permanent grandstands and 26 rows for temporary grandstands.
3. Distance to exit. The line of travel from any seat to a safe dispersal area exit
ramp, enclosed stairway or vomitory shall not be more than 200 feet. When the
seats have no backrests, the distance may be a direct line measurement.
657
4. Safe dispersal area. Each safe dispersal area shall have a minimum of two
exits. If more than 6,000 persons are to be accommodated within a dispersal area,
there shall be a minimum of three exits and for more than 9,000 persons there shall
be at least four exits. The aggregate clear width of exits from a safe dispersal area
shall be determined on the basis of not less than one exit unit of 22 inches for each
500 persons to be accommodated, and no exit shall be less than 44 inches in width.
5. Two exits required. Two exits shall be provided from every facility which
accommodates more than 300 persons.
6. Three exits required. Three exits shall be required when a facility or section
thereof accommodates more than I ,000 persons.
7. Four exits required. Four exits shall be required when a facility or section
thereof accommodates more than 3,000 persons.
8. Determination of exit width. The total width of exits in feet shall not be less
than the total occupant load served divided by !50 when exiting by stairs and di-
vided by 200 when exiting by ramps, corridors, tunnels or vomitories.
..
9. Minimum exit width. No exit shall be less than 42 inches in width .
658
TABLE NO. 33-A-MINIMUM EGRESS REQUIREMENTS1
MINIMUM OF TWO EXITS
OTHER THAN
ELEVATORS ARE
REQUIRED WHERE
NUMBER OF OCCUPANT LOAD
OCCUPANTS IS AT FACTOR'
USE 2 LEAST (sq. ft.)
I. Aircraft hangars
(no repair) 10 500
2. Auction rooms 30 7
3. Assembly areas, concentrated use
(without fixed seats) 50 7
1
Auditoriums
Churches and chapels
Dance floors
I
Lobby accessory to assembly
occupancy
Lodge rooms
Reviewing stands
Stadiums
Waiting Area 50 3
4. Assembly areas,
less-concentrated use 50 15
Conference rooms
Dining rooms
Drinking establishments
Exhibit rooms
Gymnasiums
Lounges
Stages
5. Bowling alley (assume no
occupant load for bowling lanes) 50 4
6. Children's homes and homes for

the aged 6 80
7. Classrooms 50 20
8. Congregate residences
(accommodating 10 or less
persons and having an area of
3,000 square feet or less) 10 300
Congregate residences
(accommodating more than 10
persons or having an area of
more than 3,000 square feet) 10 200
9. Courtrooms 50 40
10. Dormitories 10 50
II. Dwellings 10 300
12. Exercising rooms 50 50
(Continued)
659
!i! TABLE NO. 33-A-MINIMUM EGRESS REQUIREMENTS 1-(Continued)

MINIMUM OF TWO EXITS
OTHER THAN
ELEVATORS ARE
REQUIRED WHERE
NUMBER OF OCCUPANT LOAD
OCCUPANTS IS AT FACTOR'
USE' LEAST (sq. ft.)
13. Garage, parking 30 200
14. Hospitals and sanitariums-
Nursing homes
Sleeping rooms 6 80
Treatment rooms 10 80
Health-care center 10 80
15. Hotels and apartments 10 200
16. Kitchen--commercial 30 200
17. Library reading room 50 50
18. Locker rooms 30 50
19. Malls (see Chapter 56) - -
20. Manufacturing areas 30 200
21. Mechanical equipment room 30 300
22. Nurseries for children (day care) 7 35
23. Offices 30 100
24. School shops and vocational
rooms 50 50
25. Skating rinks 50 50 on the skating
area; 15 on the
deck
26. Storage and stock rooms 30 300
27. Stores-retail sales rooms 50 30
28. Swimming pools 50 50 for the pool
area; 15 on the
deck
29. Warehouses 30 500
30. All others 50 100
1Access to, and egress from, buildings for persons w1th disabilities shall be prov1ded as spe-
cified in Chapter 31.
2 For additional provisions on number of exits from Groups H and I Occupancies and from
rooms containing fuel-fired equipment or cellulose nitrate, see Sections 3319, 3320 and
3321, respectively.
1
· This table shall not be used to determine working space requirements per person.
4 0ccupant load based on five persons for each alley, including 15 feet of runway.
660
Chapter 34
SLOPED GLAZING AND SKYLIGHTS
Scope
Sec. 3401. This chapter applies to the installation of glass or other transparent,
translucent or opaque glazing material installed at a slope of 15 degrees or more
from the vertical plane, including glazing materials in skylights, roofs and sloped
walls.
Allowable Glazing Materials

Sec. 3402. Sloped glazing shall be of any of the following materials, subject to
the limitations specified in Section 3403.
For single-layer glazing systems, the glazing material ofthe single light or layer
shall be laminated glass with a minimum 30-mil polyvinyl butyral (or equivalent)
interlayer, wired glass, approved plastic materials meeting the requirements of
Section 5207, heat-strengthened glass or fully tempered glass.
For multiple-layer glazing systems, each light or layer shall consist of any of the
glazing materials specified above.
Annealed glass may be used as specified within Exceptions 2 and 3 of Section
3403.
Screening
Sec. 3403. Heat-strengthened glass and fully tempered glass, when used in
single-layer glazing systems, shall have screens installed below glazing. The
screens shall be capable of supporting the weight of the glass and shall be substan-
tially supported below and installed within 4 inches of the glass. They shall be con-
structed of a noncombustible material not thinner than 0.08 inch with a mesh not
larger than I inch by I inch. In a corrosive atmosphere, structurally equivalent non-
corrosive screening materials shall be used. Heat-strengthened glass, fully tem-
pered glass and wired glass, when used in multiple-layer glazing systems as the
bottom glass layer over the walking surface, shall be equipped with screening
which complies with the requirements for monolithic glazing systems.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Fully tempered glass may be installed without required pro-
tective screens when located between intervening floors at a slope of 30 degrees or
less from the vertical plane if the highest point ofthe glass is 10 feet or less above the
walking surface.
2. Allowable glazing material, including annealed glass, may be installed without
required screens if the walking surface or any other accessible area below the glazing
material is permanently protected from falling glass for a minimum horizontal dis-
tance equal to twice the height.
3. Allowable glazing material, including annealed glass, may be installed without
screens in the sloped glazing systems of commercial or detached greenhouses used
exclusively for growing plants and not intended for use by the public, provided the
height of the greenhouse at the ridge does not exceed 20 feet above grade.
661
4. Screens need not be provided within individual dwelling units when fully tem-
pered glass is used as single glazing or in both panes of an insulating glass unit when
all the following conditions are met:
A. The area of each pane (single glass) or unit (insulating glass) shall not exceed
16 square feet.
B. The highest point of the glass shall not be more than 12 feet above any walking
surface or other accessible area.
C. The nominal thickness of each pane shall not exceed 3/) 6 inch.
Framing
Sec. 3404. In Types I and II construction, skylight frames shall be constructed
of noncombustible materials.
EXCEPTION: In foundries or buildings where acid fumes deleterious to metal
are incidental to the use of the buildings, approved pressure-treated woods or other
approved noncorrosive materials may be used for sash and frames.
Skylights set at an angle ofless than45 degrees from the horizontal plane shall be
mounted at least 4 inches above the plane of the roof on a curb constructed of ma-
terials as required for the frame. Skylights may be installed in the plane ofthe roof
when the roof slope is 45 degrees or greater from horizontal.
Design Loads
Sec. 3405. Sloped glazing and skylights shall be designed to withstand the tribu-
tary loads specified in Section 2305. Sizing limitations specified within Graph No.
54-I and Table No. 54-A may be utilized for glazing materials set forth in Section
3402, provided the design loads are increased by a factor of 2.67.
Floors and Sidewalks

Sec. 3406. Glass used for the transmission of light, if placed in floors or side-
walks, shall be supported by metal or reinforced concrete frames, and such glass
shall not be less than 1/z inch in thickness. Any such glass over 16 square inches in
area shall have wire mesh embedded in the same or shall be provided a wire screen
underneath, as specified for skylights in this section. All portions of the floor lights
or sidewalk lights shall be of the same strength as is required by this code for floor
or sidewalk construction, except in cases where the floor is surrounded by a railing
not less than 3 feet 6 inches in height, in which case the construction shall be calcu-
lated for not less than roof loads.
Chapter 35
SOUND TRANSMISSION CONTROL
For sound transmission control, see Appendix Chapter 35.
662
I 4. Screens need not be provided within individual dwelling units when fully tem-
pered glass is used as single glazing or in both panes of an insulating glass unit when
all the following conditions are met:
A. The area of each pane (single glass) or unit (insulating glass) shall not exceed
16 square feet.
B. The highest point of the glass shall not be more than 12 feet above any walking
surface or other accessible area.
C. The nominal thickness of each pane shall not exceed 3fi 6 inch.
Framing
Sec. 3404. In Types I and II construction, skylight frames shall be constructed
of noncombustible materials.
EXCEPTION: In foundries or buildings where acid fumes deleterious to metal
are incidental to the use of the buildings, approved pressure-treated woods or other
approved noncorrosive materials may be used for sash and frames.
Skylights set at an angle ofless than 45 degrees from the horizontal plane shall be
mounted at least 4 inches above the plane of the roof on a curb constructed of ma-
terials as required for the frame. Skylights may be installed in the plane of the roof
when the roof slope is 45 degrees or greater from horizontal.
Design Loads
Sec. 3405. Sloped glazing and skylights shall be designed to withstand the tribu-
tary loads specified in Section 2305. Sizing limitations specified within Graph No.
54-I and Table No. 54-A may be utilized for glazing materials set forth in Section
3402, provided the design loads are increased by a factor of 2.67.
Floors and Sidewalks

Sec. 3406. Glass used for the transmission of light, if placed in floors or side-
walks, shall be supported by metal or reinforced concrete frames, and such glass
shall not be less than 1h inch in thickness. Any such glass over 16 square inches in
area shall have wire mesh embedded in the same or shall be provided a wire screen
underneath, as specified for skylights in this section. All portions of the floor lights
or sidewalk lights shall be of the same strength as is required by this code for floor
or sidewalk construction, except in cases where the floor is surrounded by a railing
not less than 3 feet 6 inches in height, in which case the construction shall be calcu-
lated for not less than roof loads.
Chapter 35
For sound transmission control, see Appendix Chapter 35.
662
Chapter 36
PENTHOUSES AND ROOF STRUCTURES
Penthouses and Roof Structures
Sec. 3601. (a) Height. No penthouse or other projection above the roof in struc-
tures of other than Type I construction shall exceed 28 feet in height above the roof
when used as an enclosure for tanks or for elevators which run to the roof and in
all other cases shall not extend more than 12 feet in height above the roof.
(b) Area. The aggregate area of all penthouses and other roof structures shall not
exceed 33 1h percent of the area of the supporting roof.
(c) Prohibited Uses. No penthouse, bulkhead or any other similar projection
above the roof shall be used for purposes other than shelter of mechanical equip-
ment or shelter of vertical shaft openings in the roof. Penthouses or bulkheads used
for purposes other than permitted by this section shall conform to the requirements
of this code for an additional story.
(d) Construction. Roof structures shall be constructed with walls, floors and
roof as required for the main portion of the building.
EXCEPTIONS: I. On Types I and 11-F.R. buildings, the exterior walls and roofs
of penthouses which are 5 feet or more from an adjacent property line may be of
one-hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction.
2. On Types Ill and IV buildings. walls not less than 5 feet from an adjacent proper-
ty line may be of one-hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction.
3. Enclosures housing only mechanical equipment and located at least 20 feet
from adjacent property lines may be of unprotected noncombustible construction.
4. On one-story buildings, unroofed mechanical equipment screens, fences or
similar enclosures may be of combustible construction when located at least 20 feet
from adjacent property lines and when not exceeding 4 feet in height above the roof
surface.
The restrictions of this subsection shall not prohibit the placing of wood flag-
poles or similar structures on the roof of any building.
Towers and Spires

Sec. 3602. Towers or spires when enclosed shall have exterior walls as required
for the building to which they are attached. Towers not enclosed and which extend
more than 75 feet above grade shall have their framework constructed of iron, steel
or reinforced concrete. No tower or spire shall occupy more than one fourth of the
street frontage of any building to which it is attached and in no case shall the base
area exceed I ,600 square feet unless it conforms entirely to the type of construction
requirements of the building to which it is attached and is limited in height as a main
part of the building. If the area of the tower or spire exceeds 100 square feet at any
horizontal cross section, its supporting frame shall extend directly to the ground.
The roof covering of spires shall be as required for the main roof of the rest of the
structure.
Skeleton towers used as radio masts and placed on the roof of any building shall
be constructed entirely of noncombustible materials when more than 25 feet in
663
height and shall be directly supported on a noncombustible framework to the

ground. They shall be designed to withstand a wind load from any direction as spe-
cified in Chapter 23, Part II, in addition to any other loads.
664
Chapter 37
CHIMNEYS, FIREPLACES AND BARBECUES
Scope
Sec. 3701. Chimneys, flues, fireplaces and barbecues, and their connections,
carrying products of combustion shall conform to the requirementsofthi.'&cl;w.?f.'!.~.
Definitions
Sec. 3702. BARBECUE is a stationary open hearth or brazier, either fuel fired
or electric, used for food preparation.
CHIMNEY is a hollow shaft containing one or more passageways, vertical or
nearly so, for conveying products of combustion to the outside atmosphere.
CHIMNEY, FACTORY-BUILT, is a chimney manufactured at a location oth-
er than the building site and composed of listed factory-built components as-
sembled in accordance with the terms of the listing to form the completed chimney.
MASONRY CHIMNEY is a chimney of masonry units, bricks, stones or listed
masonry chimney units lined with approved flue liners. For the purpose of this
chapter, masonry chimneys shall include reinforced concrete chimneys.
CHIMNEY CLASSIFICATIONS:
Chimney, Residential Appliance-type, is a factory-built or masonry chimney
suitable for removing products of combustion from residential-type appliances
producing combustion gases not in excess of I ,000°F. measured at the appliance
flue outlet.
Chimney, Low-heat Industrial Appliance-type, is a factory-built, masonry or
metal chimney suitable for removing the products of combustion from fuel-burn-
ing low-heat appliances producing combustion gases not in excess of I ,000°F. un-
der normal operating conditions but capable of producing combustion gases of
I ,400°F. during intermittent forced firing for periods up to one hour. All tempera-
tures are measured at the appliance flue outlet.
Chimney, Medium-heat Industrial Appliance-type, is a factory-built, ma-
sonry or metal chimney suitable for removing the products of combustion from
fuel-burning medium-heat appliances producing combustion gases not in excess
of 2,000°F. measured at the appliance flue outlet.
Chimney, High-heat Industrial Appliance-type, is a factory-built, masonry
or metal chimney suitable for removing the products of combustion from
fuel-burning high-heat appliances producing combustion gases in excess of
2,000°F. measured at the appliance flue outlet.
CHIMNEY CONNECTOR is the pipe or breeching which connects a
fuel-burning appliance to a chimney. (See Chapter 9, Mechanical Code.)
CHIMNEY LINER is a lining material of fireclay tile or approved fireclay re-
fractory brick. For guideline standard on fireclay refractory brick see Sections
6002 and 6003, ASTM C 27, Fireclay Refractories.
FIREBRICK is a refractory brick.
665
FIREPLACE is a hearth and fire chamber or similar prepared place in which a

fire may be made and which is built in conjunction with a chimney.
Factory-built Fireplace is a listed assembly of a fire chamber, its chimney and
related factory-made parts designed for unit assembly without requiring field con-
struction. Factory-built fireplaces are not dependent on mortar-filled joints for
c<mtinuea safe use.
Masonry Fireplace is a hearth and fire chamber of solid masonry units such as
bricks, stones, masonry units, or reinforced concrete provided with a suitable
chimney.
Chimneys, General
Sec. 3703. (a) Chimney Support. Chimneys shall be designed, anchored, sup-
ported and reinforced as required in this chapter and applicable provisions of
Chapters 23, 24, 26,27 and 29 of this code. A chimney shall not support any struc-
tural load other than its own weight unless designed as a supporting member.
(b) Construction. Each chimney shall be so constructed as to safely convey flue
gases not exceeding the maximum temperatures for the type of construction as set
forth in Table No. 37-B and shall be capable of producing a draft at the appliance
not less than that required for safe operation.
(c) Clearance. Clearance to combustible material shall be as required by Table
No. 37-B.
(d) Lining. When required by Table No. 37 -B, chimneys shall be lined with fire-
clay flue tile, firebrick, molded refractory units or other approved lining not less
than 5/ 8 inch thick as set forth in Table No. 37-B. Chimney liners shall be carefully
bedded in approved mortar with close-fitting joints left smooth on the inside.
(e) Area. Chimney passageways shall not be smaller in area than the vent con-
nection on the appliance attached thereto or not less than that set forth in Table No.
37-A, unless engineering methods approved by the building official have been
used to design the system.
(f) Height and Termination. Every chimney shall extend above the roof and the
highest elevation of any part of a building as shown in Table No. 37-B. For altitudes
. over 2,000 feet, the building official shall be consulted in determining the height
of the chimney.
(g) Cleanouts. Cleanout openings shall be provided within 6 inches of the base
of every masonry chimney.
(h) Spark Arrester. Where determined necessary by the building official due to
local climatic conditions or where sparks escaping from the chimney would create
a hazard, chimneys attached to any appliance or fireplace that bums solid fuel shall
be equipped with an approved spark arrester. The net free area of the spark arrester
shall not be less than four times the net free area of the outlet of the chimney. The
spark arrester screen shall have heat and corrosion resistance equivalent to
12-gauge wire, 19-gauge galvanized wire or 24-gauge stainless steel. Openings
shall not permit the passage of spheres having a diameter larger than 1/z inch and
shall not block the passage of spheres having a diameter of less than % inch.
666
Chimneys used with fireplaces or heating appliances in which solid or liquid fuel I
is used shall be provided with a spark arrester as required in the Fire Code. ~
EXCEPTION: Chimneys which are located more than 200 feet from any moun-
tainous, brush-covered or forest -covered land or land covered with flammable mate- ~
ilj\j
rial and are not attached to a structure having less than a Class C roof covering, as set
forth in Chapter 32.
Masonry Chimneys
Sec. 3704. (a) Design. Masonry chimneys shall be designed and constructed to
comply with Sections 3703 (b) and 3704 (b).
(b) Walls. Walls of masonry chimneys shall be constructed as set forth in Table
No. 37-B.
(c) Reinforcing and Seismic Anchorage. Unless a specific design is provided,
every masonry or concrete chimney in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4 shall be rein-
forced with not less than four No.4 steel reinforcing bars conforming to the provi-
sions of Chapter 24 or 26 of this code. The bars shall extend the full height of the
chimney and shall be spliced in accordance with the applicable requirements of
Chapters 24 and 26. In masonry chimneys the vertical bars shall have a minimum j~:
cover of 1h inch of grout or mortar tempered to a pouring consistency. The bars ~
shall be tied horizontally at 18-inch intervals with not less than 114 -inch-diameter ,.,.,
steel ties. The slope of the inclined portion of the offset in vertical bars shall not
exceed 1 inch horizontal in 2 inches vertical. Two ties shall also be placed at each ~
I
bend in vertical bars. Where the width of the chimney exceeds 40 inches, two addi-
tional No.4 vertical bars shall be provided for each additional flue incorporated in
the chimney or for each additional 40 inches in width or fraction thereof.
In Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4, all masonry and concrete chimneys shall be
anchored at each floor or ceiling line more than 6 feet above grade, except when
constructed completely within the exterior walls of the building. Anchorage shall
consist of two 3I winch by 1-inch steel straps cast at least 12 inches into the chimney
with a 180-degree bend with a 6-inch extension around the vertical reinforcing bars
in the outer face of the chimney.
Each strap shall be fastened to the structural framework of the building with two
1
h-inch-diameter bolts per strap. Where the joists do not head into the chimney, the
anchor strap shall be connected to 2-inch by 4-inch ties crossing a minimum of four
joists. The ties shall be connected to each joist with two 16dnails. As an alternative ~~-~
to the 2-inch by 4-inch ties, each anchor strap shall be connected to the structural "
framework by two 1h-inch-diameter bolts in an approved manner. Metal chimneys
shall be anchored at each joist with two 11h-inch by 118-inch metal straps looped
around the outside of the chimney installations and nailed with six 8d nails per strap ~·
to the roof or ceiling framing.
(d) Chimney Offset. Masonry chimneys may be offset at a slope of not more
than 4 inches in 24 inches, but not more than one third of the dimension of the chim-
ney, in the direction of the offset. The slope of the transition from the fireplace to the ®,
chimney shall not exceed 1 inch horizontal in 2 inches vertical. ~
667
(e) Change in Size or Shape. Changes in the size or shape of a masonry chim-
ney, where the chimney passes through the roof, shall not be made within a distance
of 6 inches above or below the roof joists or rafters.
(f) Separation of Masonry Chimney Passageways. Two or more flues in a
chimney shall be separated by masonry not less than 4 inches thick bonded into the
masonry wall of the chimney.
(g) Inlets. Every inlet to any masonry chimney shall enter the side thereof and
shall be of not less than 1/ 8-inch-thick metal or %-inch-thick refractory material.
I
Where there is no other opening below the inlet other than the cleanout, a masonry
plug shall be constructed in the chimney not more than 16 inches below the inlet
and the cleanout shall be located where it is accessible above the plug. If the plug is
located less than 6 inches below the inlet, the inlet may serve as the cleanout.
Factory-built Chimneys and Fireplaces
Sec. 3705. (a) General. Factory-built chimneys and factory-built fireplaces
shall be listed and shall be installed in accordance with the terms of their listings
and the manufacturer's instructions as specified in the Mechanical Code.
(b) Hearth Extensions. Hearth extensions of listed factory-built fireplaces
shall conform to the conditions of listing and the manufacturer's installation in-
structions.
(c) Multiple Venting in Vertical Shafts. Factory-built chimneys utilized with
listed factory-built fireplaces may be used in a common vertical shaft having the
required fire-resistance rating.
Metal Chimneys
Sec. 3706. Metal chimneys shall be constructed and installed to meet the re-
quirements of the Mechanical Code.
Masonry and Concrete Fireplaces and Barbecues

Sec. 3707. (a) General. Masonry fireplaces, barbecues, smoke chambers and
fireplace chimneys shall be of masonry or reinforced concrete and shall conform
to the requirements of this section.
(b) Support. Masonry fireplaces shall be supported on foundations designed as
specified in Chapters 23, 24 and 29.
When an approved design is not provided, foundations for masonry and con-
crete fireplaces shall not be less than 12 inches thick, extend not less than 6 inches
outside the fireplace wall and project below the natural ground surface in accor-
dance with the depth of foundations set forth in Table No. 29-A.
(c) Fireplace Walls. Masonry walls of fireplaces shall not be less than 8 inches
in thickness. Walls of fireboxes shall not be less than 10 inches in thickness, except
that where a lining of firebrick is used, such walls shall not be less than a total of 8
inches in thickness. The firebox shall not be less than 20 inches in depth. Joints in
firebrick shall not exceed 1/ 4 inch.
(d) Hoods. Metal hoods used as part of a fireplace or barbecue shall not be less
than No. 19 gauge copper, galvanized steel or other equivalent corrosion-resistant
668
ferrous metal with all seams and connections of smokeproof unsoldered construc-
tions. The hoods shall be sloped at an angle of 45 degrees or less from the vertical
and shall extend horizontally at least 6 inches beyond the limits of the firebox. Met-
al hoods shall be kept a minimum of 18 inches from combustible materials unless
approved for reduced clearances.
(e) Metal Heat Circulators. Approved metal heat circulators may be installed
In fireplaces.
(f) Smoke Chamber. Front and side walls shall not be less than 8 inches in thick-
ness. Smoke chamber back walls shall not be less than 6 inches in thickness.
(g) Chimneys. Chimneys for fireplaces shall be constructed as specified in Sec-
tions 3703, 3704 and 3705 for residential-type appliances.
(h) Clearance to Combustible Material. Combustible materials shall not be
placed within 2 inches of fireplace, smoke chamber or chimney walls. Combus-
tible material shall not be placed within 6 inches ofthe fireplace opening. No such
combustible material within 12 inches of the fireplace opening shall project more
than 1/R inch for each l-inch clearance from such opening.
No part of metal hoods used as part of a fireplace or barbecue shall be less than 18
inches from combustible material. This clearance may be reduced to the minimum
requirements specified in the Mechanical Code.
(i) Areas of Flues, Throats and Dampers. The net cross-sectional area of the
flue and of the throat between the firebox and the smoke chamber of a fireplace
shall not be less than as set forth in Table No. 37-A. Metal dampers equivalent to not
less than No. 12 gauge steel shall be installed. When fully opened, damper open-
ings shall not be less than 90 percent of the required flue area.
(j) Lintel. Masonry over the fireplace opening shall be supported by a noncom-
bustible lintel.
(k) Hearth. Masonry fireplaces shall be provided with a brick, concrete, stone or
other approved noncombustible hearth slab. This slab shall not be less than 4 inches
thick and shall be supported by noncombustible materials or reinforced to carry its
own weight and all imposed loads. Combustible forms and centering shall be re-
moved.
(I) Hearth Extensions. Hearths shall extend at least 16 inches from the front of,
and at least 8 inches beyond each side of, the fireplace opening. Where the fireplace
opening is 6 square feet or larger, the hearth extension shall extend at least 20 in-
ches in front of, and at least 12 inches beyond each side of, the fireplace opening.
Except for fireplaces which open to the exterior of the building, the hearth slab
shall be readily distinguishable from the surrounding or adjacent floor.
(m) Fire Blocking. Fire blocking between chimneys and combustible construe- ,_f '.~_ ,!_ f
.•·.'
tion shall meet the requirements specified in Section 2516.

(n) Nonconforming Fireplaces. Imitation and other fireplaces not conforming
to the other requirements of this section shall not exceed 6 inches in depth.
Gas-burning appliances may be installed in such nonconforming fireplaces, pro-
vided that compliance is made in accordance with the requirements of the Mechan-
ical Code.
669
TABLE NO. 37-A-MINIMUM PASSAGEWAY AREAS

FOR MASONRY CHIMNEYS1
MINIMUM CROSS.SECTIONAL AREA
TILE LINED
LINED WITH
TYPE OF SQUARE OR FIREBRICK OR
MASONRY CHIMNEY ROUND RECTANGLE UNLINED
I. Residential 50 sq. in. 50 sq. in. 85 sq. in.
1it2of 1/wof 1/s of
2. Fireplace2 opening opening opening
Minimum Minimum Minimum
50 sq. in. 64 sq. in. 100 sq. in.
3. Low heat 50 sq. in. 57 sq. in. 135 sq. in.
4. Incinerator
Apartment type
I opening 196 sq. in.
2 to 6 openings 324 sq. in.
7to 14
openings 484 sq. in. Not applicable
15 or more
openings 484sq. in. plus !Osq. in. for each
additional opening
1Areas for medium- and high-heat chimneys shall be determined using accepted engineering
methods and as approved by the building official.
2 Where fireplaces open on more than one side, the fireplace opening shall be measured along
the greatest dimension.
Note: For altitudes over 2,000 feet above sea level, the building official shall be consulted
in determining the area of the passageway.
670
.....
CD
CD
.....
c:
z
TABLE NO. 37-B-CONSTRUCTION, CLEARANCE AND TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS FOR MASONRY ;;
AND CONCRETE CHIMNEYS 0
:::::
!D
Clearance to c:
Height Height Combustible i=
Above Above any Part Construction c
Thickness
(Min. Inches)
Roof
Opening
of Building
within (Feet) Int.
(Inches)
Ext.
z
C)
Chimneys Serving Walls Lining (Feet) 10 25 50 In st. In st.
1. RESIDENTIAL-TYPE APPLIANCES 1 2
8c
(Low Btu Input) m
43 5/8 fire-
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick 43 clay tile 1 or
Reinforced Concrete 48 or 2 fire- 2 2 2 1h
Hollow Masonry Units 12 brick gypSUilJ4
Stone
4% fire-
Unburned Clay Units 8 brick
2. BUILDING HEATING AND
INDUSTRIAL-TYPE LOW-HEAT
APPLIANCES I 2 ( 1000°F. operating
temp.-1400°F. Maximum) 8 5/8 fire-
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick 3 2 2 2
88 clay tile
Hollow Masonry Units or 2 fire-
Reinforced Concrete 8 brick
Stone 12
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 37·8-CONSTRUCTION, CLEARANCE AND TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS FOR MASONRY
AND CONCRETE CHIMNEYS-(Continued)
3. MEDIUM-HEAT INDUSTRIAL-
TYPE APPLIANCES' 5
(2000°F. Maximum)
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick 8 10 4 4
Hollow Masonry Units 8 4Yz Medium 10
(Grouted Solid) duty fire-
Reinforced Concrete 8 brick
Stone 12
4. HIGH-HEAT INDUSTRIAL-TYPE
APPLIANCES' 2 (Over 2000°F.)
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick 16 6 4% High 7 7
Hollow Masonry Units 16 6 20 20
duty fire-
( Grouted Solid) brick
Reinforced Concrete 16 6
5. RESIDENTIAL TYPE INCINERATORS Same as for Residential-Type Appliances as shown above
...
6. muTE-FED AND FLUE-FED INCIN-
DlATORS WITH COMBINED HEARTH
...
(Q
(Q
AND GRATE AREA 7 SQ. IT. OR LESS c

z
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick 4 1 2 ~fedium :;;
or Hollow Units duty fire- 3 2 2 2 0
brick :tl
Portion extending to 10ft. 3:
above combustion chamber roof 4 5/8 fire- Ill
Portion more than 10ft. above
8
clay tile
liner
sr
combustion chamber roof c
z
G')
8
c
m
....
:g
....
c:
Heipt Clearance to z
Thickness
Height
Above
Above any Part
of Building
Combustible
Construction
(Inches)
~
3:
(Min. Inches) Roof within (Feet)
Opening Ill
Chimneys Serving Walls Lining (Feet) 10 25
Int. Ext. c:
50 In st. lnst.
r=c
7. CHUTE-FED AND FLUE-FED
INCINERATORS - COMBINED
z
G)
HEARTH AND GRATE AREAS 0
LARGER THAN 7 SQ. FT. 0
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick 4% Medium c
m
or Hollow Units Grouted Solid duty fire-
or Reinforced Concrete brick
Portion extending to 40 ft. 5/8 fire- 2
above combustion chamber roof 4 clay tile 10 2
Portion more than 40 ft. above liner
combustion chamber roof 8 4% Medium
Reinforced Concrete 8 duty fire-
brick
laid in medium
duty refract
mortar
8. COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL-
TYPE INCINERATORS2
Clay or Shale Solid Brick 8 4% Medium
Reinforced Concrete 8 duty fire-
brick
laid in medium 10 4 4
duty refract
mortar
(Continued)
1See Table No. 9-A o{ the Mechanical Code for types of appliances allowed with each type of chimney.
2 Lining shall extend Jlom bottom to top of chimney.
3Chimneys having walls 8 inches or more in thickness may be unlined.
4
Chimneys for residential-type appliances installed entirely on the exterior of the building. For fireplace and barbecue chimneys, see Section 3707
(h).
5Lining to extend from 24 inches below connector to 25 feet above.
tYrwo 8-inch walls with 2-inch airspace between walls. Outer and inner walls may be of solid masonry units or reinforced concrete or any combination
thereof.
7Clearance shall be approved by the building official and shall be such that the temperature of combustible materials will not exceed 160°F.
8Equivalent thickness including grouted cells when grouted solid. The equivalent thickness may also include the grout thickness between the liner
and masonry unit.
c
z
~::z:J
:a:
al
c
r=c
z
C)
0
0
c
m
Chapter 38
FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
Scope
Sec. 3801. (a) General. All fire-extinguishing systems required in this code
shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of this chapter.
Fire hose threads used in connection with fire-extinguishing systems shall be na-
tional standard hose thread or as approved by the fire department.
In buildings used for high-piled combustible storage, fire protection shall be in
accordance with the Fire Code.
(b) Standard of Quality. All fire-extinguishing systems including automatic l
sprinkler systems, Class I, Class II and Class III standpipe systems, special auto- l
matic extinguishing systems and basement pipe inlets shall be approved and shall !.,!..
,i!,,l.,:.,!
be subject to such periodic tests as may be required. The location of all fire depart- ,
ment hose connections shall be approved by the fire department. i.l:
The standards listed below labeled a "U.B.C. standard" are also listed in Chap- l!
ter 60, Part II, and are part of this code. il
~. ~~=~~~t~~=~~:~!n~:.y;~~~ Installation of Sprinkler Systems ~
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 38-3, Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Group ROc- i!!
cupancies Four Stories or Less !~
2. Standpipe systems ~~
::$
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 38-2, Standpipe Systems m
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter, certain terms are defined as fol-
lows:
AUTOMATIC FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM is an approved system

of devices and equipment which automatically detects a fire and discharges an ap-
proved fire-extinguishing agent onto or in the area of a fire. 4tl
FIRE DEPARTMENT INLET CONNECTION is a connection through
which the fire department can pump water into a standpipe system, or sprinkler
system.
STANDPIPE SYSTEM is a wet or dry system of piping, valves, outlets andre- F
lated equipment designed to provide water at specified pressures and installed ex- I
elusively for the fighting of fires, including the following: F
1
Class I is a standpipe system equipped with 2 h-inch outlets. I
F
Class II is a standpipe system directly connected to a water supply and equipped I
with 11h-inch outlets and hose. F
Class III is a standpipe system directly connected to a water supply and I
F
equipped with 2 1h-inch outlets or 2 1h-inch and 11h-inch outlets when a 11h-inch 1
hose is required. Hose connections for Class III systems may be made through F
2 1h-inch hose valves with easily removable 2 1/z-inch by 11h-inch reducers. 1
675
(d) Standards. Fire-extinguishing systems shall comply with U.B.C. Standards

Nos. 38-1 and 38-2.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Automatic fire-extinguishing systems not covered by
U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1 or 38-2 shall be approved and installed in accordance with
approved standards.
2. Automatic sprinkler systems may be connected to the domestic water-supply
main when approved by the building official, provided the domestic water supply
is of adequate pressure, capacity and sizing for the combined domestic and sprinkler
requirements. In such case, the sprinkler system connection shall be made between
the public water main or meter and the building shutoff valve, and there shall not be
intervening valves or connections. The fire department connection may be omitted
when approved by the fire department.
~~ 3. Automatic sprinkler systems in Group R Occupancies four stories or Jess may
f be in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 38-3. When residential sprinkler systems
f as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 38-3 are provided, exceptions to or reductions
§:! in code requirements based on the installation of an automatic fire-extinguishing sys-
1
~:
tem are not allowed.
(e) Modifications. When a residential sprinkler system as set forth in U.B.C.
• Standard No. 38-1 is provided, exception to, or reductions in, code requirements
~j ~~~;:!~~~~~se of the installation of an automatic fire-extinguishing system are
Automatic Fire-extinguishing Systems

Sec. 3802. (a) Where Required. An automatic fire-extinguishing system shall
be installed in the occupancies and locations as set forth in this section.
For provisions on special hazards and hazardous materials, see the Fire Code.
(b) All Occupancies except Group R, Division 3 and Group M. Except for
Group R, Division 3 and Group M Occupancies, an automatic sprinkler system
shall be installed:
I. In every story or basement of all buildings when the floor area exceeds 1,500
square feet and there is not provided at least 20 square feet of opening entirely
above the adjoining ground level in each 50 lineal feet or fraction thereof of exteri-
or wall in the story or basement on at least one side of the building. Openings shall
have a minimum dimension of not less than 30 inches. Such openings shall be ac-
cessible to the fire department from the exterior and shall not be obstructed in a
manner that firefighting or rescue cannot be accomplished from the exterior.
When openings in a story are provided on only one side and the opposite wall of
such story is more than 75 feet from such openings, the story shall be provided with
an approved automatic sprinkler system, or openings as specified above shall be
provided on at least two sides of an exterior wall of the story.
If any portion of a basement is located more than 75 feet from openings required
in this section, the basement shall be provided with an approved automatic sprin-
kler system.
2. At the top of rubbish and linen chutes and in their terminal rooms. Chutes ex-
tending through three or more floors shall have additional sprinkler heads installed
within such chutes at alternate floors. Sprinkler heads shall be accessible for serv-
icing.
676
3. In rooms where nitrate film is stored or handled.

4. In protected combustible fiber storage vaults as defined in the Fire Code.
(c) Group A Occupancies. I. Drinking establishments. An automatic sprin-
kler system shall be installed in rooms used by the occupants for the consumption
of alcoholic beverages and unseparated accessory uses where the total area of such
unseparated rooms and assembly uses exceeds 5,000 square feet. For uses to be
considered as separated, the separation shall not be less than as required for a
one-hour occupancy separation. The area of other uses shall be included unless
separated by at least a one-hour occupancy separation.
2. Basements. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed in basements
classified as a Group A Occupancy when the basement is larger than I ,500 square
feet in floor area.
3. Exhibition and display rooms. An automatic sprinkler system shall be in-
stalled in Group A Occupancies which have more than 12,000 square feet of floor
area which can be used for exhibition or display purposes.
4. Stairs. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed in enclosed usable
space below or over a stairway in Group A, Divisions 2, 2.1, 3 and 4 Occupancies.
See Section 3309 (f).
5. Multitheater complex. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed in ·1,.'•
every building containing a multi theater complex.
6. Amusement buildings. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed in all
amusement buildings. The main water-flow switch shall be electrically super-
vised. The sprinkler main cutoff valve shall be supervised. When the amusement
building is temporary, the sprinkler water-supply system may be of an approved ! '
temporary type.
EXCEPTION: An automatic sprinkler system need not be provided when the
floor area of a temporary amusement building is less than I ,000 square feet and the
exit travel distance from any point is less than 50 feet.
7. Other areas. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed under the roof
and gridiron, in the tie and fly galleries, and in all places behind the proscenium
wall of stages; over and within permanent platforms in excess of 500 square feet in
area; and in dressing rooms, workshops and storerooms accessory to such stages or
permanent platforms.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Stages or platforms open to the auditorium room on three or
more sides.
2. Altars, pulpits or similar platforms and their accessory rooms.
3. Stage gridirons when side-wall sprinklers with 135°F. rated heads with
heat-baffle plates are installed around the entire perimeter of the stage except for the
proscenium opening at points not more than 30 inches below the gridiron or more
than 6 inches below the baffle plate.
4. Under stage or under platform areas less than 4 feet in clear height used exclu-
sively for chair or table storage and lined on the inside with materials approved for
(d) Group B, Division 2 Occupancies. An automatic sprinkler system shall be
installed in retail sales rooms classed as Group B, Division 2 Occupancies where
677
the floor area exceeds 12,000 square feet on any floor or 24,000 square feet on all
floors or in Group B, Division 2 retail sales occupancies more than three stories in
height. The area of mezzanines shall be included in determining the areas where
sprinklers are required.
(c) (;roup E Occupancies. I. Basements. An automatic sprinkler system shall
be installed in basements classified as a GroupE Occupancy when the basement is
lar,ger than I ,500 square feet in floor area.
2. Stairs. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed in enclosed usable
space below or over a stairway in GroupE Occupancies. See Section 3309 (f).
(f) Group H Occupancies. I. General. An automatic fire-extinguishing system
shall be installed in Group H, Divisions I, 2, 3 and 7 Occupancies.
2. Division 4. An automatic fire-extinguishing system shall be installed in
Group H, Division 4 Occupancies having a floor area of more than 3,000 square
feet.
3. Division 6. An automatic fire-extinguishing system shall be installed
throughout buildings containing Group H, Division 6 Occupancies. The design of
the sprinkler system shall not be less than that required under U .B.C. Standard No.
38-1 for the occupancy hazard classifications as follows:
LOCATION OCCUPANCY HAZARD CLASSIFICATION
Fabrication areas Ordinary Hazard Group 3
Service corridors Ordinary Hazard Group 3
Storage rooll's without dispensing Ordinary Hazard Group 3
Storage rooms with dispensing Extra Hazard Group 2
Exit corridors Ordinary Hazard Group 3 1
1When the destgn area of the spnnkler system conststs of a comdor protected by one row
of sprinklers. the maximum number of sprinklers that needs to be calculated is 13.
(g) Group I Occupancies. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed in
Group I Occupancies.
EXCEPTION: In jails, prisons and reformatories, the piping system may be dry.
provided a manually operated valve is installed at a continuously monitored location.
Opening of the valve will cause the piping system to be charged. Sprinkler heads in
such systems shall be equipped with fusible elements or the system shall be designed
as required for deluge systems in U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1.
(h) Group R, Division 1 Occupancies. An automatic sprinkler system shall be
installed throughout apartment houses three or more stories in height or containing
16 or more dwelling units, in congregate residences three or more stories in height
and having an occupant load of 50 or more and in hotels three or more stories in
height or containing 20 or more guest rooms. Residential or quick-response stan-
dard sprinklers shall be used in the dwelling units and guest room portions of the
building.
Sprinkler System Supervision Alarms
Sec. 3803. All valves controlling the water supply for automatic sprinkler sys-
tems and water-flow switches on all sprinkler systems shall be electrically super-
vised when the number of sprinklers are:
678
(a) Twenty or more in Group I, Division 1 Occupancies.

(b) One hundred or more in all other occupancies.
Valve supervision and water-flow alarm and trouble signals shall be distinctly
dtfferent and shall be automatically transmitted to an approved central station, re-
mote station or proprietary supervising station as defined by national standards, or,
when approved by the building official with the concurrence of the chief of the fire
department, sound an audible signal at a constantly attended location.
EXCEPTION: Underground key or hub valves in roadway boxes provided by
the municipality or public utility need not be supervised.
Permissible Sprinkler Omissions

Sec. 3804. Subject to the approval of the building official and with the concur-
rence of the chief of the fire department, sprinklers may be omitted in rooms or
areas as follows:
(a) When sprinklers are considered undesirable because of the nature of the con-
tents or in rooms or areas which are of noncombustible construction with wholly
noncombustible contents and which are not exposed by other areas. Sprinklers
shall not be omitted from any room merely because it is damp, of fire-resistive con-
struction or contains electrical equipment.
(b) Sprinklers shall not be installed when the application of water or flame and
water to the contents may constitute a serious life or fire hazard, as in the manufac-
ture or storage of quantities of aluminum powder, calcium carbide, calcium phos-
phide, metallic sodium and potassium, quicklime, magnesium powder and sodium
peroxide.
(c) Safe deposit or other vaults of fire-resistive construction, when used for the
storage of records, files and other documents, when stored in metal cabinets.
(d) Communication equipment areas under the exclusive control of a public
communication utility agency, provided:
I. The equipment areas are separated from the remainder of the building by
one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation; and
2. Such areas are used exclusively for such equipment; and
3. An approved automatic smoke-detection system is installed in such areas
and is supervised by an approved central, proprietary or remote station ser-
vice or a local alarm which will give an audible signal at a constantly at-
tended location; and
4. Other approved fire-protection equipment such as portable fire extinguish-
ers or Class II standpipes are installed in such areas.
(e) Other approved automatic fire-extinguishing systems may be installed to
protect special hazards or occupancies in lieu of automatic sprinklers.
Standpipes
Sec. 3805. (a) General. Standpipes shall comply with the requirements ofthis
section and U.B.C. Standard No. 38-2.
(b) Where Required. Standpipe systems shall be provided as set forth in Table
No. 38-A.
679
(c) Location of Class I Standpipes. There shall be a Class I standpipe outlet

connection at every floor-level landing of every required stairway above or below
grade and on each side of the wall adjacent to the exit opening of a horizontal exit.
Outlets at stairways shall be located within the exit enclosure or, in the case of
smokeproof enclosures, within the vestibule or exterior balcony, giving access to
the stairway.
Risers and laterals of Class I standpipe systems not located within an enclosed
stairway or smokeproof enclosure shall be protected by a degree of fire resistance
equal to that required for vertical enclosures in the building in which they are lo-
cated.
EXCEPTION: In buildings equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler sys-
tem, risers and laterals which are not located within an enclosed stairway or smoke-
proof enclosure need not be enclosed within fire-resistive construction.
There shall be at least one outlet above the roofline when the roof has a slope of
less than 4 inches in 12 inches.
In buildings where more than one standpipe is provided, the standpipes shall be
interconnected at the bottom.
(d) Location of Class II Standpipes. Class II standpipe outlets shall be accessi-
ble and shall be located so that all portions of the building are within 30 feet of a
nozzle attached to 100 feet of hose.
In Group A, Divisions 1 and 2.1 Occupancies, with occupant loads of more than
I ,000, outlets shall be located on each side of any stage, on each side of the rear of
the auditorium and on each side of the balcony.
Fire-resistant protection of risers and laterals of Class II standpipe systems is not
required.
(e) Location of Class III Standpipes. Class III standpipe systems shall have
outlets located as required for Class I standpipes in Section 3805 (c) and shall have
Class II outlets as required in Section 3805 (d).
Risers and laterals of Class III standpipe systems shall be protected as required
for Class I systems.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In buildings equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler
system, risers and laterals which are not located within an enclosed stairway or
smokeproof enclosure need not be enclosed within fire-resistive construction.
2. Laterals for Class II outlets on Class III systems need not be protected.
In buildings where more than one Class III standpipe is provided, the standpipes
shall be interconnected at the bottom.
Buildings under Construction

Sec. 3806. (a) General. During the construction of a building and until the per-
manent fire-extinguishing system has been installed and is in service, fire protec-
tion shall be provided in accordance with this section.
(b) Where Required. Every building six stories or more in height shall be pro-
vided with not less than one standpipe for use during construction. Such standpipes
shall be installed when the progress of construction is not more than 50 feet in
height above grade. Such standpipe shall be provided with fire department hose
680
connections at accessible locations adjacent to usable stairs and the standpipe out-
lets shall be located adjacent to such usable stairs. Such standpipe systems shall be
extended as construction progresses to within one floor of the highest point of con-
struction having secured decking or flooring.
In each floor there shall be provided a 2 1/z-inch valve outlet for fire department
use. Where construction height requires installation of a Class III standpipe, fire
pumps and water main connections shall be provided to serve the standpipe.
(c) Temporary Standpipes. Temporary standpipes may be provided in place of
permanent systems if they are designed to furnish 75 gallons ofwaterperminute at
50 pounds per square inch pressure with a standpipe size of not less than 4 inches.
All outlets shall not be less than 2 1/z inches. Pumping equipment sufficient to pro-
vide this pressure and volume shall be available at all times when a Class III stand-
pipe system is required.
(d) Detailed Requirements. Standpipe systems for buildings under construc-
tion shall be installed as required for permanent standpipe systems.
Basement Pipe Inlets

Sec. 3807. For basement pipe inlet requirements, see Appendix Section 3807.
681
TABLE NO. 38-A-STANDPIPE REQUIREMENTS

NONSPRINKLERED SPRINKLER ED
BUILDING! BUILDING23
Standpipe Hose Standpipe Hose
OCCUPANCY Class Requirement Class Requirement
I. Occupancies exceeding !50 ft.

in height and more than one III Yes I 'll.<o
story
2. Occupancies 4 stories or more
[I and II 4] l
I No
but less than 150ft. in height, (or III) Yes
except Group R, Div. 3
3. Group A Occupancies with No
II Yes No
occupant load exceeding I 0006 requirement
4. Group A, Div. 2.1 Occupancies
over 5000 square feet in area II Yes II Yes
used for exhibition
5. Groups I, H, B, Div. I, 2 or 3
Occupancies less than 4 stories II4 No
Yes No
in height but greater than 20,000 requirement
square feet per floor
1Except as otherwise specified in Item 4 of this table, Class II standpipes need not be pro-
vided in basements having an automatic fire-extinguishing system throughout.
2The standpipe system may be combined with the automatic sprinkler system.
3Portions of otherwise sprinklered buildings which are not protected by automatic sprinklers
shall have Class II standpipes installed as required for the unsprinklered portions.
4 ln open structures where Class II standpipes may be damaged by freezing, the building offi-
cial may authorize the use of Class I standpipes which are located as required for Class
II standpipes.
5 Hose is required for Class II standpipes only.
6Class II standpipes need not be provided in assembly areas used solely for worship.
682
Chapter 39
STAGES AND PLATFORMS
Scope
;:·:
Sec. 3901. (a) Standards of Quality. Platforms and stages shall conform with
the requirements of this chapter. i
The standards listed below labeled a "U.B.C. standard" are also listed in Chapter
I
60, Part II, and are part of this code.
I. U.B.C. Standard No. 6-1, Proscenium Curtains
2. U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1, Installation of Sprinkler Systems
3. U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1, Test Method for Surface-burning Characteristics
4. U .B.C. Standard No. 43-1, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
lows:
BATTEN is a flown metal pipe or shape on which lights or scenery are fastened.
DROP is a large piece of scenic canvas or cloth which hangs vertically, usually
across the stage area.
FLY is the space over the stage of a theater where scenery and equipment can be
hung out of view. Also called lofts and rigging lofts.
FLY GALLERY is a narrow raised platform at the side oflegitimate stage from
which the lines for flying scenery are manipulated.
~ RIDitR"ONflis _thearrangemendthofbe~msbovtter lefgitimaht~ shtagertsu~porting

a
eqUtpmen 10r ymg scenery an angmg a ens rom w IC cu ams, scenery
the . '~_:.·l _:i
···'r_,
..
and lighting are hung.

LEG DROP is a long narrow strip of fabric used for masking. When used on
either or both sides of the acting area, it is provided to designate an entry onto the
stage by the actors. It is also used to mask the side stage area. They may also be
called "wings."
PINRAIL is a beam at one side of a legitimate stage through which wooden or
metal pins are driven and to which lines from the flies are fastened.
PLATFORM is that raised area within a building used for the presentation of
music, plays or other entertainment; the head table for special guests; the raised
area for lectures and speakers; boxing and wrestling rings; theater in the round; and
similar purposes wherein there are not overhead hanging curtains, drops, scenery
or stage effects other than lighting.
PLATFORM, PERMANENT, is a platform used within an area for more than
30 days.
PLATFORM, TEMPORARY, is a platform used within an area for not more
than 30 days.
PROSCENIUM WALL is the wall that separates the stage from the auditorium
or house.
683
STAGE is a partially enclosed area within a building used for the purpose of en-
tertainment and shall be classified as either:
Stage, Legitimate, is a stage wherein curtains, drops, leg drops, scenery, light-
ing devices or other stage effects are retractable horizontally or suspended over-
head.
Stage, Regular, is a stage wherein curtains, fixed leg drops, valances, scenery
and other stage effects are hung and are not retractable, with the exception of a va-
lance, a light trough, the main (house) curtain, a bank of lights and a single back-
drop, which may be retractable without the stage being considered a legitimate
stage.
Stage, Thrust, is a platform extending beyond the proscenium arch and into the
audience.
THEATER-IN-THE-ROUND is an acting area in the middle of a room with
the audience sitting all around it.
(c) Materials and Design. Materials used in the construction of platforms and
stages shall conform to the applicable materials and design requirements as set
forth in this code.
Platforms
Sec. 3902. Temporary platforms may be constructed of any materials. The space
between the floor and the platform above shall not be used for any purpose other
than electrical wiring to platform equipment.
Permanent platforms shall be constructed of materials as required for the type of
construction of the building in which the permanent platform is located. When the
space beneath the permanent platform is used for storage or any purpose other than
equipment wiring or plumbing, the floor construction shall not be less than
one-hour fire-resistive construction. When the space beneath the permanent plat-
form is not used for any purpose other than equipment wiring or plumbing, the un-
derside of the permanent platform need not be protected.
Stages
Sec. 3903. (a) Construction. Regular stages and thrust stages shall be con-
structed of materials as required for the type of construction of the building in
which it is located. In all cases the finish floor may be of wood.
Legitimate stages shall be constructed of materials as required for a Type I or II
F.R. building. Legitimate stage floors may be constructed with a wood floor of not
less than 2 inches in nominal thickness on a resilient mounting upon a concrete or
masonry floor.
Openings through stage floors (traps) shall be equipped with tight-fitting trap
doors of wood having a nominal thickness of not less than 2 inches with approved
safety locks.
(b) Accessory Rooms. Dressing rooms, workshops and store rooms accessory
to stages shall be separated from each other and from the stage by not less than
one-hour fire-resistive construction, and openings within such separations shall be
protected as required for corridors.
684
EXCEPTION: A separation is not required for stages having a floor area not ex-
ceeding 500 square feet.
(c) Vents. Stages exceeding l,OOOsquarefeetin floor area shall be provided with
one or more vents constructed of noncombustible material. Vents shall be located
near the center and above the highest part of any stage. They shall be raised above
the stage roof and shall have a total vent area equal to at least 5 percent of the t1oor
area of the stage.
The vents shall open by spring action or force of gravity sufficient to overcome
the effects of neglect, rust, dirt, frost, snow or expansion by heat or warping of the
framework. Glass, if used in vents, must be protected against falling onto the stage.
A wire screen, if used under the glass, must be so placed that, if clogged, it cannot
reduce the required venting area or interfere with the operating mechanism or ob-
struct the distribution of water from an automatic sprinkler. Vents shall be arranged
to open automatically by the use of fusible links. The fusible links and operating
cable shall hold each door closed against the minimum 30-pound counterforce
which may be exerted by springs or counterweights. This minimum counterforce
shall be exerted on each door through its entire arc of travel and for a minimum of
115 degrees. A manual control shall be provided at an approved location.
Springs, when employed to actuate vent doors, shall be capable of maintaining
full required tension. Springs shall not be stressed more than 50 percent of their
rated capacity and shall not be located directly in the airstream or exposed to the
outside.
A fusible link shall be placed in the cable control system on the underside of the
vent at or above the roof line or as approved by the building official and shall be so
located as not to be affected by the operation of an automatic sprinkler system. Re-
mote, manual or electrical controls shall provide for both opening and closing of
the vent doors for periodic testing and shall be located at a point on the stage desig-
nated by the building official. When remote control vents are electrical, power fail-
ure shall not affect its instant operation in the event of fire. Hand winches may be
employed to facilitate operation of manually controlled vents.
Curbs for vents shall be as required for skylights.
-
(d) Proscenium Walls. Legitimate stages shall be completely separated from
the seating area by a proscenium wall of not less than two-hour fire-resistive non-
combustible construction.
Proscenium walls may have, in addition to the main proscenium opening, one
opening at the orchestra pit level and not more than two openings into the audito-
rium at the stage floor level. Each of the latter two openings shall not be more than
25 square feet in area.
All openings in the proscenium wall of a legitimate stage shall be protected by a
fire assembly having a 11/z-hour fire-protection rating. The main proscenium i\
opening used for viewing performances shall be provided with an automatic-clos-
ing fire-protection curtain as provided in U.B.C. Standard No. 6-1. Such curtain •
materials shall conform to the following conditions: •
I. The curtain shall be tested in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1 as \!\\
modified in U.B.C. Standard No. 6-1. The time period fortesting shall be not less !/
685
than 30 minutes, and the unexposed surface of the test sample shall not show any
evidence of through penetration of flame or smoke, or excessive smoking (only the
vapors escaping as a result of baking the sample).
2. The curtain shall be listed by an approved agency and have a permanent mark-
ing giving the manufacturer's name, the approved agency's name or insignia, the
rating achieved, and a statement that the curtain shall be installed in accordance
w(lk V.B.C. Standard No. 6-1.
3. Curtain fabrics shall have a smoke density no greater than 25 when tested in
accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1. The curtain fabric shall be tested in the
condition in which it is to be used.
4. A water curtain or deluge system complying with U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1
may be used only in conjunction with an automatically closing opaque noncom-
bustible curtain in lieu of the proscenium fire-safety curtain described in U.B.C.
Standard No. 6-1. Both the deluge system and curtain closure shall be actuated by
combination rate-of-temperature-rise and temperature devices located on the
stage. The water system shall be designed to completely wet the entire curtain.
(e) Gridirons, Fly Galleries and Pinrails. Gridirons, fly galleries and pinrails
shall be constructed of noncombustible material.
(f) Special Exiting. Each side of a legitimate stage shall be provided with at least
one well-marked exit providing not less than 32 inches clear width. Such exit shall
open directly to a street, exit court or exit passageway leading to a street.
Fly galleries shall be provided with an exit stair not less than 30 inches in width.
Each tier of dressing rooms shall be provided with two exits meeting the require-
ments of Chapter 33.
Stairways required by this subsection need not be enclosed.
686
Chapter 40
MOTION PICTURE PROJECTION ROOMS
General
SL't'. 4/)/)1. (a) Scope. The provisions of this chapter shall apply where rib-
bon-type cellulose acetate or other safety film is used in conjunction wi.tn etectn<:
arc, Xenon or other light-source projection equipment which develops hazardous
gases, dust or radiation. Where cellulose nitrate film is used, projection rooms shall
comply with the Fire Code.
(b) Projection Room Required. Every motion picture machine projecting film
as mentioned within the scope of this chapter shall be enclosed in a projection
room. Appurtenant electrical equipment, such as rheostats, transformers and gen-
erators, may be within the projection room or in an adjacent room of equivalent
construction.
There shall be posted on the outside of each projection room door and within the
projection room itself a conspicuous sign with l-inch block letters stating: SAFE-
TY FILM ONLY PERMITTED IN THIS ROOM.
Construction
Sec. 4002. Every projection room shall be of permanent construction consistent
with the construction requirements for the type of building in which the projection
room is located. Openings need not be protected.
The room shall have a floor area of not less than 80 square feet for a single ma-
chine and at least 40 square feet for each additional machine. Each motion picture
projector, floodlight, spotlight or similar piece of equipment shall not be used un-
less approved and shall have a clear working space not less than 30 inches by 30
inches on each side and at the rear thereof, but only one such space shall be required
between two adjacent projectors.
The projection room and the rooms appurtenant thereto shall have a ceiling
height of not less than 7 feet 6 inches.
Exits
Sec. 4003. Exits shall be provided as required in Chapter 33. Motion picture pro-
jection rooms used for projection of safety film only are required to have only one
exit.
Projection Ports and Openings

Sec. 4004. The aggregate of openings for projection equipment shall not exceed
25 percent of the area of the wall between the projection room and the auditorium.
All openings shall be provided with glass or other approved material so as to
completely close the opening.
Ventilation
Sec. 4005. (a) General. Ventilation shall be provided in accordance with the
provisions of this section.
687
(b) Projection Booth. I. Supply air. Each projection room shall be provided
with adequate air-supply inlets so arranged as to provide well-distributed air
throughout the room. Air-inlet ducts shall provide an amount of air equivalent to
the amount of air being exhausted by projection equipment. Air may be taken from
the outside; from adjacent spaces within the building, provided the volume and in-
filtration rate is sufficient; or from the building air-conditioning system, provided
it is so arranged as to provide sufficient air when other systems are not in operation.
2. Exhaust air. Projection booths may be exhausted through the lamp exhaust
system. The lamp exhaust system shall be positively interconnected with the lamp
so that the lamp will not operate unless there is the air flow required for the lamp.
Exhaust air ducts shall terminate at the exterior of the building in such a location
that the exhaust air cannot be readily recirculated into any air-supply system. The
projection room ventilation system may also serve appurtenant rooms such as the
generator room and the rewind room.
Each projection machine shall be provided with an exhaust duct that will draw
air from each lamp and exhaust it directly to the outside ofthe building. The lamp
exhaust may serve to exhaust air from the projection room to provide room air cir-
culation. Such ducts shall be of rigid materials, except for a flexible connector ap-
proved for the purpose. The projection lamp or projection room exhaust system or
both may be combined but shall not be interconnected with any other exhaust or
return system, or both, within the building.
(c) Projection Equipment Ventilation. Each projection machine shall be pro-
vided with an exhaust duct which will draw air from each lamp and exhaust it di-
rectly to the outside of the building in such a fashion that it will not be picked up by
supply inlets. Such a duct shall be of rigid materials, except for a continuous flex-
ible connector approved for the purpose. The lamp exhaust system shall not be in-
terconnected with any other system.
I. Electric arc projection equipment. The exhaust capacity shall be 200 cubic
feet per minute for each lamp connected to the lamp exhaust system, or as recom-
mended by the equipment manufacturer. Auxiliary air may be introduced into the
system through a screened opening to stabilize the arc.
2. Xenon projection equipment. The lamp exhaust system shall exhaust not
less than 300 cubic feet per minute per lamp or not less than that exhaust volume
required or recommended by the equipment manufacturer, whichever is the great-
er. The external temperature of the lamp housing shall not exceed 130°F. when op-
erating.
Miscellaneous Equipment
Sec. 4006. Each projection room shall be provided with rewind and film storage
facilities.
A maximum of four containers for flammable liquids not greater than 16-ounce
capacity and of a nonbreakable type may be permitted in each projection booth.
688
Sanitary Facilities
Sec. 4007. Every projection room shall be provided with a lavatory. Every pro-
jection room serving an assembly occupancy shall be provided with a water closet.
EXCEPTION: A water closet shall not be required in a projection room where
completely automated projection equipment is installed which does not require a
projectionist in attendance for projection or rewinding film.
Chapter 41
(SEE UNIFORM BUILDING SECURITY CODE)
689
Sanitary Facilities
Sec. 4007. Every projection room shall be provided with a lavatory. Every pro-
jection room serving an assembly occupancy shall be provided with a water closet.
EXCEPTION: A water closet shall not be required in a projection room where
completely automated projection equipment is installed which does not require a
projectionist in attendance for projection or rewinding film.
Chapter 41
(SEE UNIFORM BUILDING SECURITY CODE)
689
NOTES
690
Part VII
FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR
FIRE PROTECTION
Chapter 42
INTERIOR WALL AND CEILING FINISH
General
Sec. 4201. (a) Scope. Interior wall and ceiling finish shall mean interior wain-
scoting, paneling or other finish applied structurally or for decoration, acoustical
correction, surface insulation or similar purposes. Requirements for finishes in this
chapter shall not apply to trim defined as picture molds, chair rails, baseboards and
handrails; to doors and windows or their frames; or to materials which are less than
1
h8 inch in thickness applied directly to the surface of walls or ceilings, ifthese ma-
terials have surface-burning characteristics no greater than paper of this thickness
applied directly to a noncombustible backing in the same manner.
Foam plastics shall not be used as interior finish except as provided in Section
1713. For foam plastic trim, see Section 1705 (e).
dard" are also listed in Chapter 60, Part II, and are part of this code.
I. U .B.C. Standard No. 42-1, Test Method for Surface-burning Characteristics
2. U.B.C. Standard No. 42-2, Standard Test Method for Evaluating Room Fire
Growth Contribution of Textile Wall Covering
Testing and Classification of Materials

Sec. 4202. (a) Testing. Tests shall be made by an approved testing agency toes-
tablish surface-burning characteristics and to show that materials when cemented
or otherwise fastened in place will not readily become detached when subjected to
room temperatures of 300°F. for 25 minutes. Surface-burning characteristics shall
be determined by one of the following methods:
1. The surface-burning characteristics as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1.
2. Any other recognized method of test procedure for determining the sur-
face-burning characteristics of finish materials that will give comparable results to
those specified in method No. 1 above.
3. The room fire growth contribution for textile wall coverings as set forth in t:
U.B.C. Standard No. 42-2. j ~j
(b) Classification. The classes of materials based on their flame-spread index
shall be as set forth in Table No. 42-A. The smoke density shall be no greater than
450 when tested in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 42-1 in the way intended
for use.
691
Application of Controlled Interior Finish

Sec. 4203. Interior finish materials applied to walls and ceilings shall be tested
as specified in Section 4202 and regulated for purposes oflimiting surface-burning
by the following provisions:
1. When walls and ceilings are required by any provision in this code to be of
fire-resistive or noncombustible construction, the finish material shall be applied
directly against such fire-resistive or noncombustible construction or to furring
strips not exceeding 13/ 4 inches applied directly against such surfaces. The inter-
vening spaces between such furring strips shall be filled with inorganic or Class I
material or shall be fire blocked not to exceed 8 feet in any direction. See Section
2516 (t) for fire blocking.
2. Where walls and ceilings are required to be of fire-resistive or noncombus-
tible construction and walls are set out or ceilings are dropped distances greater
than specified in paragraph 1 ofthis section, Class I finish materials shall be used
except where the finish materials are protected on both sides by automatic sprin-
kler systems or are attached to a noncombustible backing or to furring strips in-
stalled as specified in paragraph 1. The hangers and assembly members of such
dropped ceilings that are below the main ceiling line shall be of noncombustible
materials except that in Type III and Type V construction, fire-retardant-treated
wood may be used. The construction of each set-out wall shall be of fire-resistive
construction as required elsewhere in this code. See Section 2516 (t) for fire blocks
and draft stops.
3. Wall and ceiling finish materials of all classes as permitted in this chapter may
be installed directly against the wood decking or planking of Type IV heavy-timber
construction, or to wood furring strips applied directly to the wood decking or
planking installed and fire blocked as specified in paragraph I.
4. An interior wall or ceiling finish that is not more than 1/ 4 inch thick shall be
applied directly against a noncombustible backing.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Class I materials.
2. Materials where the qualifying tests were made with the material suspended
or furred out from the noncombustible backing.
Maximum Allowable Flame Spread

Sec. 4204. (a) General. The maximum flame-spread class of finish materials
used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 42-B.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Except in Group I Occupancies and in enclosed vertical exit-
ways, Class III may be used in other exitways and rooms as wainscoting extending
not more than 48 inches above the floor and for tack and bulletin boards covering not
more than 5 percent of the gross wall area of the room.
2. When a sprinkler system complying with U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1 or 38-3 is
provided, the flame-spread classification rating may be reduced one classification,
but in no case shall materials having a classification greater than Class III be used.
3. The exposed faces of Type IV-H.T., structural members and Type IV-H.T., deck-
ing and planking, where otherwise permissible under this code, are excluded from
flame-spread requirements.
692
(b) Carpeting on Ceilings. When used as interior ceiling finish, carpeting and
similar materials having a napped, tufted, looped or similar surface shall have a
Class I flame spread.
Textile Wall Coverings

Sec. 4205. When used as interior wall finish, textile wall coverings, including
materials such as those having a napped, tufted, looped, nonwoven, woven or simi-
lar surface shall comply with the following:
I. Textile wall coverings shall have a Class I flame spread and shall be protected
by automatic sprinklers complying with U .B.C. Standard No. 38-1 or 38-3, or
2. The textile wall covering shall meet the acceptance criteria of U .B.C. Stan-
dard No. 42-2 when tested using a product mounting system, including adhesive,
representative of actual use.
693
42·A, 42·8 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 42·A-FLAME·SPREAD CLASSIFICATION

MATERIAL QUALIFIED BY:
Class Flame-spread Index
I 0-25
II 26-75
III 76-200
TABLE NO. 42·8-MAXIMUM FLAME-SPREAD CLASS,

ENCLOSED
OCCUPANCY VERTICAL OTHER ROOMS OR
GROUP EXITWAYS EXITWAYS2 AREAS
A I II IJ3
E I II III
I I J7 II•
H I II IIJ5
B I II III
R-1 I II III
R-3 III III III•
M NO RESTRICTIONS
1Foam plastics shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 1712. Carpeting on
ceilings and textile wall coverings shall comply with the requirements specified in
Sections 4204 (b) and 4205, respectively.
Zfinish classification is not applicable to interior walls and ceilings of exterior exit bal-
conies.
lJn Group A, Divisions 3 and 4 Occupancies, Class III may be used.
•In rooms in which personal liberties of inmates are forcibly restrained, Class I material only
shall be used.
sover two stories shall be of Class II.
6 Flame-spread provisions are not applicable to kitchens and bathrooms of Group R, Division
3 Occupancies.
7Jn Group I, Divisions 2 and 3 Occupancies, Class II may be used or Class III when the
Division 2 or 3 is sprinklered.
694
Chapter 43
FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS
General
!Iii
·=·=·
neer
13. ASTM C 330 and C 332, Lightweight Aggregates for Structural and Insulat-
ing Concrete
(b) Definitions. F RATING is the time period that a through-penetration fire .,
stop limits the spread of fire, flame and hot gases through the fire-stop assembly, ,~ :'l :,
r.,·
..
including penetrating elements, when tested in accordance with the time-tempera- :,

ture curve defined in U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1. .~
'';··''!.',l,,,!,,
T RATING is the time period that a through-penetration fire stop limits temper- ,·
ature rise through the fire-stop assembly, including penetrating elements, when ~==
tested in accordance with the time-temperature curve defined in U.B.C. Standard .!I
No. 43-1. :r
Fire-resistive Materials and Systems
Sec. 4302. (a) General. Materials and systems used for fire-resistive purposes
shall be limited to those specified in this chapter unless accepted under the proce-
dure given in Section 4302 (b) or (c). For standards referred to in this chapter, see
Chapter60.
The materials and details of construction for the fire-resistive systems described
in this chapter shall be in accordance with all other provisions of this code except as
modified herein.
695
For the purpose of determining the degree offire resistance afforded, the materi-
als of construction listed in this chapter shall be assumed to have the fire-resistance
rating indicated in Table No. 43-A, 43-B or 43-C.
~f As an alternate to Tables Nos. 43-A, Band C, fire-resistive construction may be

aQQroved by the building official on the basis of evidence submitted showing that
$ the construction meets the required fire-resistive classification.
(b) Qualification by Testing. Material or assembly of materials of construction
tested in accordance with the requirements set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1
shall be rated for fire resistance in accordance with the results and conditions of
such tests.
EXCEPTION: The acceptance criteriaofU.B.C. StandardNo.43-l for exterior
bearing walls shall not be required to be greater with respect to heat transmission and
passage of flame or hot gases than would be required of a nonbearing wall in the same
building with the same distance to the property line. The fire exposure time period,
water pressure and duration of application for the hose stream test shall be based on
the fire-resistive rating determined by this exception.
Fire-resistive assemblies tested under U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1 shall not be
considered to be restrained unless evidence satisfactory to the building official is
furnished by the person responsible for the structural design showing that the con-
struction qualifies for a restrained classification in accordance with U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 43-1. Restrained construction shall be identified on the plans.
(c) Calculating Fire Resistance. The fire-resistive rating of a material or as-
sembly may be established by calculations. The procedures used for such calcula-
tions shall be in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 43-9.
(d) Concrete.
CARBONATE AGGREGATE CONCRETE is concrete made with aggre-
gates consisting mainly of calcium or magnesium carbonate, e.g., limestone or do-
lomite, and containing 40 percent or less quartz, chert or flint.
LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATE CONCRETE is concrete made with ag-
gregates of expanded clay, shale, slag or slate or sintered fly ash and weighing 85 to
115 pounds per cubic foot (pcf).
SAND-LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE is concrete made with a combination
of expanded clay, shale, slag or slate or sintered fly ash and natural sand. Its unit
weight is generally between 105 and 120 pcf.
SILICEOUS AGGREGATE CONCRETE is concrete made with nor-
mal-weight aggregates consisting mainly of silica or compounds other than cal-
cium or magnesium carbonate, and may contain more than 40 percent quartz, chert
or flint.
(e) Shotcrete. Shotcrete without coarse aggregate shall be classified in accor-
dance with the aggregate used.
Protection of Structural Members

Sec. 4303. (a) General. Structural members having the fire-resistive protection
set forth in Table No. 43-A shall be assumed to have the fire-resistance ratings set
forth therein.
696
(b) Protective Coverings. I. Thickness of protection. The thickness offire-re-

sistive materials required for protection of structural members shall be not less than
set forth in Table No. 43-A, except as modified in this section. The figures shown
shall be the net thickness of the protecting materials and shall not include any hol-
low space back of the protection.
2. Unit masonry protection. Where required, metal ties shall be embedded in
transverse joints of unit masonry for protection of steel columns. Such ties shall be
as set forth in Table No. 43-A or be equivalent thereto.
3. Reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete column protection.
Cast-in-place concrete protection for steel columns shall be reinforced at the edges
of such members with wire ties of not less than 0.18 inch in diameter wound spiral-
ly around the columns on a pitch of not more than 8 inches or by equivalent rein-
forcement.
4. Embedment of pipes. Conduits and pipes shall not be embedded in required
fire protection of structural members.
5. Column jacketing. Where the fire-resistive covering on columns is exposed
to injury from moving vehicles, the handling of merchandise or other means, it
shall be protected in an approved manner.
6. Ceiling membrane protection. When a ceiling forms the protective mem- ®.
brane for fire-resistive assemblies, the assemblies and their supporting horizontal ~.f~j
structural members need not be individually fire protected except where such ...
members support directly applied loads from a floor and roof or more than one t.'.t_i,J_,_
floor. The required fire resistance shall not be less than that required for individual ,
protection of members. [jj
7. Plaster application. Plaster protective coatings may be applied with the fin-
ish coat omitted when they comply with the design mix and thickness requirements
of Tables Nos. 43-A, 43-B and 43-C.
8. Truss protection. Where trusses are used as all or part of the structural frame
and protection is required by Table No. 17-A, such protection may be provided by
fire-resistive materials enclosing the entire truss assembly on all sides for its entire
length and height. The required thickness and construction of fire-resistive assem-
blies enclosing trusses shall be based on the results offull-scale tests or combina-
tions of tests on truss components or on approved calculations based on such tests
which satisfactorily demonstrate that the assembly has the required fire resistance.
(c) Protected Members. I. Attached metal members. The edges of lugs,
brackets, rivets and bolt heads attached to structural members may extend to within
I inch of the surface of the fire protection.
2. Reinforcing. Thickness of protection for concrete or masonry reinforcement
shall be measured to the outside ofthe reinforcement except that stirrups and spiral
reinforcement ties may project not more than 1/z inch into the protection.
3. Bonded prestressed concrete tendons. For members having a single tendon
or more than one tendon installed with equal concrete cover measured from the
nearest surface, the cover shall not be less than that set forth in Table No. 43-A.
697
For members having multiple tendons installed with variable concrete cover, the
average tendon cover shall not be Jess than that set forth in Table No. 43-A, pro-
vided:
A. The clearance from each tendon to the nearest exposed surface is used to de-
termine the average cover.
B. In no case can the clear cover for individual tendons be Jess than one half of
that set forth in Table No. 43-A. A minimum coverof 3f4inch for slabs and 1 inch for
beams is required for any aggregate concrete.
C. For the purpose of establishing a fire-resistive rating, tendons having a clear
covering less than that set forth in Table No. 43-A shall not contribute more than 50
percent of the req11ired ultimate moment capacity for members Jess than 350 square
inches in cross-sectional area and 65 percent for larger members. For structural de-
sign purposes, however, tendons having a reduced cover are assumed to be fully
effective.
(d) Fire Protection Omitted. Fire protection may be omitted from the bottom
t1ange of lintels spanning not over 6 feet, shelf angles, or plates that are not a part of
the structural frame.
(e) Spray-applied Fireproofing. The density and thickness of spray-applied
fireproofing shall be determined following the procedures set forth in U .B.C. Stan-
dard No. 43-8.
Walls and Partitions

Sec. 4304. (a) General. Fire-resistive walls and partitions shall be assumed to
have the fire-resistance ratings set forth in Table No. 43-B.
(b) Combustible Members. Combustible members framed into a wall shall be
protected at their ends by not Jess than one half the required fire-resistive thickness
of such wall.
(c) Exterior Walls. In fire-resistive exterior wall construction, the fire-resistive
rating shall be maintained for such walls passing through attic areas.
(d) Nonsymmetrical Wall Construction. Walls and partitions ofnonsymmet-
rical construction shall be tested with both faces exposed to the furnace, and the
assigned fire-resistive rating will be the shortest duration obtained from the two
tests conducted in conformance with U .B.C. Standard No. 43-1. When evidence is
furnished to show that the wall was tested with the least fire-resistive side exposed
to the furnace, subject to acceptance of the building official, the wall need not be
subjected to tests from the opposite side.
\:
lj (e) Through Penetration. Penetrating items passing entirely through both pro-
tective membranes of bearing walls required to have a fire-resistance rating and
walls requiring protected openings shall be protected with through-penetration fire
stops suitable for the method of penetration.
1
i.''
~
EXCEPTION: Penetrations not larger than a 4-inch nominal pipe or 16 square
inches in overall cross-sectional area containing noncombustible penetrating items,
where the annular space between the penetrating items and the wall assembly being
~ penetrated is filled with a material which will prevent the passage of flame and hot
j gases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when subjected to U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1
698
time-temperature fire conditions under a minimum positive pressure differential of

0.0 l-inch water column at the location of the penetration for the time period at least
equal to the fire-resistance rating of the wall assembly.
The T rating for through-penetration fire stops in fire-rated walls requiring pro-
tected openings shall apply to penetrations in the following locations:
I. Above corridor ceilings which are not part of a fire-resistive assembly.
2. Below any ceiling.
EXCEPTION: Any through-penetrating item not larger than a 4-inch nominal
pipe or 16 square inches in overall cross-sectional area need not have aT rating.
(f) Membrane Penetrations. Walls may have openings for steel electrical out-
let boxes not exceeding 16 square inches in area, provided the aggregate area of ::;:
such openings is not more than I 00 square inches for any l 00 square feet of wall or 1!1i
~:t2~~e=:~~~i!~:::t~~~:;~~~::!:~:J~ :::~~:1: :::~:i::::r~:~~ o:e~:::~

1 1
,'i=,_'_·'i'::·:,,_.':,_::,,:·'i.•.·
larger openings are required than permitted above, the penetrating items shall be:
I. Protected with membrane-penetration fire stops suitable for the methods of
penetration, or
2. Installed in accordance with the installation instructions of their listing for
such use.
EXCEPTION: Penetrations not larger than a 4-inch nominal pipe or 16 square
inches in overall cross-sectional area containing noncombustible penetrating items,
where the annular space between the penetrating items and the protective membrane
being penetrated is filled with a material which will prevent the passage of flame and
hot gases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when subjected to U .B.C. Standard No. 43-1
time-temperature fire conditions under a minimum positive pressure differential of
0.0 l-inch water column at the location of the penetration for the time period at least
equal to the fire-resistance rating of the wall assembly.
(g) Construction Joints. Construction joints shall comply with the require-
Floor-Ceilings or Roof-Ceilings
Sec. 4305. (a) General. Fire-resistive floors, floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling as- ~
semblies shall be assumed to have the fire-resistance ratings set forth in Table No.
43-C. When materials are incorporated into an otherwise fire-resistive assembly ·
I
which may change the capacity for heat dissipation, fire test results orothersubstan- I
tiating data shall be made available to the building official to show that the required iii
fire-resistive time period is not reduced. ~~
(b) Ceiling Membrane Protection. When a ceiling forms the protective mem-
brane for a fire-resistive floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly, the ceiling shall be
without openings in order to protect structural elements.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Openings for noncombustible sprinkler pipe and openings for 1
steel electrical outlet boxes not greaterthan 16 square inches in area may be installed, I
provided the aggregate area of such openings through the ceiling is not more than !:!
I 00 square inches for any 100 square feet of ceiling area. ffil
2. Duct openings protected with approved ceiling fire dampers. ~
699
.I 3. In other than corridors that are required to have fire-resistive ceilings, duct
openings may be unprotected when tests, conducted in accordance with U .B.C. Stan-
t dard No. 43-1, have shown that opening protection is not required to maintain the
.., fire resistance of the assembly.
[:\: 4. Other ceiling openings and penetrations may be installed where such openings
f
.. and penetrations and the assemblies in which they are utilized are tested in accor-
dance with the provisions of U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1.
5. Openings enclosed in fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
,,~
f:
6. Access doors may be installed in such ceilings when they are approved horizon-
))\ tal access door assemblies listed for such purpose.
i
~
Where the weightoflay-in ceiling panels used as part of fire-resistive floor-ceil-
ing or roof-ceiling assemblies is not adequate to resist an upward force of I pound
~ per square foot, wire holddowns or other approved devices shall be installed above
:illj the panels to prevent vertical displacement under such upward force.
II.·
~ (c) Floors. Fire-resistive floors and floors which are part of a floor-ceiling as-
sembly shall be continuous without openings or penetrations in order to complete-
ly separate one story or basement from another.
· EXCEPTIONS: 1. Openings enclosed in fire-resistive-rated shaft enclosures in
accordance with Section 1706 (a).
2. Exit enclosures in accordance with Chapter 33.
=· 3. Openings permitted in accordance with Section 1706 (c).
~.· 4. Atria constructed in accordance with Section 1716.
~ 5. Penetrations protected with through-penetration fire stops installed to provide
~ an F rating or aT rating in accordance with Section 4301 (b). The T rating shall apply
i only to:
A. Penetrations which are not contained within a wall at the point where they
penetrate the floor, or
B. Penetrations which are larger than a 4-inch nominal pipe or 16 square inches
in overall cross-sectional area.
6. Penetrations not larger than a 4-inch nominal pipe or 16 square inches in overall
cross-sectional area containing noncombustible penetrating items, where the annu-
lar space between the penetrating items and the floor assembly being penetrated is
filled with a material which will prevent the passage of flame and hot gases sufficient
to ignite cotton waste when subjected to U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1 time-temperature
fire conditions under a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch water
column at the location of the penetration for the time period at least equal to the
fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly.
(d) Roofs. Fire-resistive roofs may have unprotected openings. See Chapter 34
for skylight construction.
(e) Wiring in Plenums. Wiring in plenums shall comply with the Mechanical
Code.
(f) Construction Joints. Construction joints such as those used to accommo-
date wind, seismic or expansion movements when located in fire-resistive floors
shall comply with the requirements of Section 1707.
Fire-resistive Assemblies for Protection of Openings
Sec. 4306. (a) General. Where required by this code for the fire protection of
openings, fire-resistive assemblies shall meet the requirements of this chapter.
700
(b) Definitions.
FIRE ASSEMBLY is the assembly of a fire door, fire windows or fire damper,
including all required hardware, anchorage, frames and sills.
FIRE ASSEMBLY, AUTOMATIC-CLOSING, is a fire assembly which may
remain in an open position and which will close automatically when subjected to
one or the other of the following:
I. An increase in temperature.
Unless otherwise specified, the closing device shall be one rated at a maximum
temperature of !65°F.
2. Actuation of a smoke detector.
The closing device shall operate by the activation of an approved listed smoke
detector. Smoke detectors shall be installed and maintained as set forth in Uniform
Fire Code Standard No. 14-2.
FIRE ASSEMBLY, SELF-CLOSING, is a fire assembly which is kept in a
normally closed position and is equipped with an approved device to ensure clos-
ing and latching after having been opened for use.
(c) Identification of Fire Doors, Fire Windows and Fire Dampers. Fire
doors, fire windows and fire dampers shall have a label or other identification
showing the fire-protection rating. Such label shall be approved and shall be per-
manently affixed. The label shall be applied at the factory where fabrication and
assembly are done. Inspection shall be made by an approved inspection agency
during fabrication and assembly.
Oversized fire doors may be installed when approved by the building official.
The doors shall be labeled or be furnished with a Certificate of Inspection from an
approved agency.
(d) Installation of Fire Doors, Hardware and Frames, and Fire Dampers.
Approved fire door hardware and fire door frames including the anchorage thereof
shall be installed in accordance with their listing. Fire dampers shall be fabricated
and installed in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 43-7.
(e) Fire-resistive Tests. The fire-protection rating of all types of required fire
assemblies shall be determined in accordance with the requirements specified in
U.B.C. Standards Nos. 43-2, 43-3, 43-4 and 43-7.
(f) Hardware. 1. Closing devices. Every fire assembly shall be provided with a
closing device as follows:
A. Fire assemblies required to have a three-hour fire-protection rating shall be
automatic-closing fire assemblies. Automatic-closing fire assemblies to be acti-
vated by an increase in temperature shall have one heat-actuating device installed
on each side of the wall at the top of the opening and one on each side of the wall at
the ceiling height where the ceiling is more than 3 feet above the top of the opening.
B. Fire assemblies required to have a one- and one-half-hour, one-hour or
three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating shall be either automatic- or self-closing
fire assemblies. Automatic-closing fire assemblies to be activated by an increase
in temperature shall have heat-actuating devices located as required in Item A or
by a single fusible link in the opening incorporated in the closing device.
701
C. Fire door assemblies required to have fire-protection rating, which are in-
stalled across a corridor, shall be automatic-closing fire assemblies. Such fire as-
semblies shall be activated by a smoke detector. All hold-open devices shall be
listed for the purpose and shall release or close the door in the event of a power fail-
ure a\ \he device.
D. Fire assemblies required by provisions of Chapter 33 shall have closing de-
vices as specified in Chapter 33.
Fire doors which are automatic closing by smoke detection shall not have a clos-
ing or reclosing delay of more than 10 seconds.
2. Hinges. Swinging fire doors shall not have less than two hinges, and when
such door exceeds 60 inches in height, an additional hinge shall be installed for
each additional 30 inches of height or fraction thereof. Hinges, except for spring
hinges, shall be of the ball-bearing or anti friction type. When spring hinges are
used for door-closing purposes, not less than one half of the hinges shall be spring
hinges.
3. Latch. Unless otherwise specifically permitted, all single doors and both
leaves of pairs of side-hinged swinging doors shall be provided with an automatic
latch which will secure the door when it is closed.
(g) Glazed Openings in Fire Doors. Glazed openings in fire doors shall not be
permitted in a fire assembly required to have a three-hour fire-resistive rating.
The area of glazed openings in a fire door required to have one- and one-half-
hour or one-hour fire-resistive rating shall be limited to 100 square inches with a
minimum dimension of 4 inches. When both leaves of a pair of doors have observa-
tion panels, the total area of the glazed openings shall not exceed 100 square inches
for each leaf.
Glazed openings shall be limited to 1,296 square inches in wood and plas-
tic-faced composite or hollow metal doors, per light, when fire-resistive assem-
blies are required to have a three-fourths-hour fire-resistive rating.
(h) Fire Window Size. Windows required to have a three-fourths-hour fire-re-
sistive rating may have an area not greater than 84 square feet with neither width
nor height exceeding 12 feet.
(i) Glazing. Glass or glass block assemblies shall be qualified by tests in accor-
dance with U.B.C. Standard No.43-2 (for doors) orU.B.C. StandardNo.43-4(for
windows). Glass or glass block shall be installed in accordance with their listing.
(j) Fire Dampers. Except where fire tests have shown that fire dampers are not
necessary to maintain the required fire resistance of the construction, fire dampers
complying with the requirements of U .B.C. Standard No. 43-7 shall be installed
and be readily accessible for servicing in the following locations:
1. Duct penetrations through area or occupancy separation walls.
2. Duct penetrations through horizontal exit walls.
3. Duct penetrations through shaft enclosures.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Duct penetrations by steel exhaust air subducts extending ver-
tically upward at least 22 inches in a vented shaft where the airflow is upward.
2. Where not more than one duct penetrates the shaft enclosure between adjacent
floor levels, the fire dampers at the shaft enclosure may be omitted when the upper
702
adjacent floor opening within the shaft enclosure is protected by horizontal fire :;:;
dampers. }
4. Duct penetrations of the ceiling of fire-resistive floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling !!!!
:l::~;~~;~;,:~~:~;~,;.:;~~~:~~~~~~;;~:;~~,u~~~~.l
Standa~:!;~:~;~~~7;~;;~~~;:~~~~;~;~;~~ii;:!~):~=~:~~~;:;:;;:::~;·~~; i·~',
6. Ducts that are not a part of the smoke-control system, penetrating atrium walls
or ceilings as defined in Section 1716 (c).
. ·.'. ···'[.'i,.':···''·'
(k) Installation. Fire assemblies shall be installed in accordance with their list-
ing.
(I) Signs. When required by the building official, a sign shall be displayed per-
manently near or on each required fire door in letters not less than I inch high to
read as follows:
FIRE DOOR
DO NOT OBSTRUCT
Roof Coverings
Sec. 4307. Roof coverings shall be as specified in Table No. 32-A.
~~7i~~~~~;;~;~~~~~~~:;~~~~~;~:"ru%:'~~~~~~·g~:;~! :.·';·':,!~
Through-penetration fire stops may be used for membrane penetrations.
The F rating shall apply to all through penetrations and shall not be less than the
.
':··''.,!
......
··'···'·'...·
~~~!~~~!if!Fr~;~j!i~~;~~r~E~~~::,~",~~~~~;~:: :!.,1.1,!.:
Sec. 4309. When penetrations of smoke partitions or smoke zone boundaries by

ducts or transfer grilles are required to be protected, listed smoke dampers conform- t:
ing to U.B.C. Standard No. 43-12 shall be installed. Where the penetration is also Ii!i
required to have fire dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers conforming to ,l,,f,i.,l,l
U.B.C. Standards Nos. 43-7 and 43-12 may be used.

:-:-:
.:-:·
Smoke dampers shall have a leakage rating of Class 0, I, II or III.
Smoke dampers or combination fire/smoke dampers shall have a degradation
test temperature rating of not less than 250°F.
703
I
Tables begin on page 705.
704
...
TABLE NO. 43-A--MINIMUM PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL PARTS BASED ON TIME PERIODS FOR
VARIOUS NONCOMBUSTIBLE INSULATING MATERIALS• ...
CD
CD
c:
MINIMUM THICKNESS OF INSULATING z
STRUCTURAL
MATERIAL FOR FOLLOWING ;;
PARTS TO BE ITEM
FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS (In Inches) 0
:II
PROTECTED NUMBER INSULATING MATERIAL USED 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr.
3:
1-l.l Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete, members 2 112 2 1'12 I Ill
c:
6" by 6" or greater (not including sandstone, granite and siliceous gravel).' r=
c
1-1.2 Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete, members
8" by 8" or greater (not including sandstone, granite and siliceous gravel).'
2 1'12 I I
z
C)
0
1-1.3 Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete, members 1'12 I I I 0
12"by 12" or greater (not including sandstone, granite and siliceous gravel).' c
m
1-1.4 Siliceous aggregate concrete and concrete excluded in Item No. 1-l.l, 3 2 1'12 I
members 6" by 6" or greater.'
I . Steel Columns
and All 1-1.5 Siliceous aggregate concrete and concrete excluded in Item No. 1-1.1' 2 112 2 I I
Members of members 8" by 8" or greater.'
Primary
1-1.6 Siliceous aggregate concrete and concrete excluded in Item No. 1-1.1' 2 I I I
Trusses
members 12" by 12" or greater.'
1-2.1 Clay or shale brick with brick and mortar fill. 1 33/4 2 1/4
1-3.1 4" Hollow clay tile in two 2" layers; 112" mortar between tile and column; 3/s" 4
metal mesh (. 046" wire diameter) in horizontal joints; tile fill. 1
2" Hollow clay tile; 3/4" mortar between tile and column; 3/s" metal mesh
1-3.2 (.046" wire diameter) in horizontal joints; limestone concrete fill;' plastered 3
with Jf4'' gypsum plaster.
2" Hollow clay tile with outside wire ties (.08" diameter) at each course of tile
1-3.3 or 3/s" metal mesh (.046" diameter wire) in horizontal joints; limestone or 3
trap-rock concrete fill 1 extending I" outside column on all sides.
(Continued)
T'ABLE 1\10. 43-A-MINIMUM PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL PARTS BASED ON TIME PERIODS FOR
VARIOUS NONCOMBUSTIBLE INSULATING MATERIALS•-(Continued)
MINIMUM THICKNESS OF INSULATING
STRUCTURAL MATERIAL FOR FOLLOWING
PARTS TO BE ITEM FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS (In Inches)
1-3.4 2" Hollow clay tile with outside wire ties (.08" diameter) at each course of tile 2
with or without concrete fill; 3f4'' mortar between tile and column.
Portland cement plaster over metal lath wire tied to 3f4'' cold-rolled vertical
1-4.1 channels with No. 18 gauge wire ties spaced 3" to 6" on center. Plaster mixed 21f22 1fg
1:2 112 by volume, cement to sand.

I. Steel Columns Vermiculite concrete, I :4 mix by volume over paperbacked wire fabric lath
and All wrapped directly around column with additional 2" by 2" No. 16116 gauge
Members of 1-5.1 wire fabric placed 3f4'' from outer concrete surface. Wire fabric tied with No. 2
Primary
Trusses
18 gauge wire spaced 6" on center for inner layer and 2" on center for outer
layer.
....
co
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster over metal lath wrapped around
....
co
c:
1-6.1 column and furred 1'14'' from column flanges. Sheets lapped at ends and tied 1'12 I z
at 6" intervals with No. 18 gauge tie wire. Plaster pushed through to flanges.
~:II
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster over self-furring metal lath wrapped
1-6.2 directly around column, lapped I" and tied at 6" intervals with No. 18 gauge P/4 Pis I
s::
a:J
wire. c:
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster on metal lath applied to 3/4" cold-rolled
r=c
1-6.3 channels spaced 24 inches apart vertically and wrapped flatwise around 1'12 z
C)
column.
0
0
c
m
...
...
CD
CD
c:
z
~:II
3:
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster over 2 layers of W' plain full-length m
c:
gypsum lath applied tight to column flanges. Lath wrapped with I" hexago- ;:::
I. Steel Columns nal mesh of No. 20 gauge wire and tied with doubled No. 18 gauge wire ties c
and All
1-6.4
spaced 23" on center. For three-coat work the plaster mix for the second coat
2 112 2 z
C)
Members of shall not exceed I 00 pounds of gypsum to 2 112 cubic feet of aggregate for the 0
Primary three-hour system. 0
Trusses c
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster over one layer of W' plain full-length m
gypsum lath applied tight to column flanges. Lath tied with doubled No. 18
gauge wire ties spaced 23" on center and scratch coat wrapped with I"
1-6.5 2
hexagonal mesh No. 20 gauge wire fabric. For three-coat work the plaster
mix for the second coat shall not exceed I 00 pounds of gypsum to 2112 cubic
feet of aggregate.
Multiple layers of W' gypsum wallboard3 adhesivelY' secured to column
flanges and successive layers. Wallboard applied without horizontal joints.
1-7.1 Comer edges of each layer staggered. Wallboard layer below outer layer 2 I
secured to column with doubled No. 18 gauge wire ties spaced 15" on center.
Exposed corners taped and treated.
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 43-A-MINIMUM PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL PARTS BASED ON TIME PERIODS FOR
VARIOUS NONCOMBUSTIBLE INSULATING MATERIALS"-(Continued)
MATERIAL FOR FOLLOWING
STRUCTURAL
FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS (In Inches)
PARTS TO BE ITEM
Three layers of Sis" Type X gypsum wallboard. 3 First and second layer held in
place by 1is" diameter by 13is" long ring shank nails with 51!6" diameter heads
spaced 24" on center at corners. Middle layer also secured with metal straps
1-7.2 Pis
at mid-height and 18" from each end, and by metal corner bead at each corner
held by the metal straps. Third layer attached to corner bead with I" long
gypsum wallboard screws spaced 12" on center.
I. Steel Columns Three layers of 5/ 8 " Type X gypsum wallboard, 3 each layer screw attached to
15/ 8 " steel studs (No. 25 gauge) at each comer of column. Middle layer also
and All
Members of 1-7.3 secured with No. 18 gauge double strand tie wire, 24" on center. Screws are Pis ...
Primary
Trusses
No.6 by I" spaced 24" on center for inner layer, No.6 by ! 5/ 8" spaced 12" on
center for middle layer and No. 8 by 2 1/l' spaced 12" on center for outer layer.
...:g
c
Wood-fibered gypsum plaster mixed I: I by weight gypsum to sand aggre-
z
:;;
gate applied over metal lath. Lath lapped !"and tied 6" on center at all ends, 0
lJ
edges and spacers with No. 18 gauge tie wire. Lath applied over 1h" spacers 3:
1-8.1 made of 3i4" furring channel with 2" legs bent around each corner. Spacers J5is IJJ
located I" from top and bottom of member and a maximum of 40" on center c
and wire tied with a single strand of No. 18 gauge wire. Corner bead tied to r=c
the lath at 6" on center along each corner to provide plaster thickness. z
Cl
0
0
c
m
c:
z
:;;
0
::u
==
ID
Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete (not includ- c:
ing sandstone, granite and siliceous gravel) with 3" or finer metal mesh
;=
2-1.1 2 Ph I I c
placed I" from the finished surface anchored to the top flange and providing z
G)
not less than .025 square inch of steel area per foot in each direction.
0
2. Websor Siliceous aggregate concrete and concrete excluded in Item 2-1.1 with 3" or 0
Flanges of finer metal mesh placed I" from the finished surface anchored to the top c
2-1.2 2 1h 2 Ph I m
Steel Beams flange and providing not less than .025 square inch of steel area per foot in
and Girders each direction.
Portland cement plaster on metal lath attached to 3/4" cold-rolled channels
2-2.1 with No. 18 gauge wire ties spaced 3" to 6" on center. Plaster mixed I :2 1h by 2 1h 2 7/s
volume, cement to sand.

Vermiculite gypsum plaster on a metal lath cage, wire tied to No. 8 steel wire
2-3.1 hangers wrapped around beam and spaced 16" on center. Metal lath ties 7/s
spaced approximately 5" on center at cage sides and bottom.
(Continued)
...a
..... TABLE NO. 43-A-MINIMUM PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL PARTS BASED ON TIME PERIODS
0 FOR VARIOUS NONCOMBUSTIBLE INSULATING MATERIALS8 -(Continued)
MINIMUM THICKNESS OF
INSULATING MATERIAL FOR
FOLLOWING FIRE-RESISTIVE
STRUCTURAL PERIODS (inches)
PARTS TO ITEM
BE PROTECTED NUMBER INSULATING MATERIAL USED 4Hr. 3 Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr.
Two layers of 518" Type X gypsum wallboard 3 are attached to U-shaped
brackets spaced 24" on center. No. 25 gauge 15Is" deep by I" galvanized steel
runner channels are first installed parallel to and on each side of the top beam
flange to provide a 1h" clearance to the flange. The channel runners are
attached to steel deck or concrete floor construction with approved fasteners
spaced 12" on center. U-shaped brackets are formed from members identical
to the channel runners. At the bent portion of the U -shaped bracket, the flanges
of the channel are cut out so that 15Is" deep corner channels can be inserted
2. Webs or without attachment parallel to each side of the lower flange.
flanges of As an alternate, No. 24 gauge I" by 2" runner and corner angles may be used in
steel beams
2-4.1 1114
lieu of channels, and the web cutouts in the U-shaped brackets may be
and girders omitted. Each angle is attached to the bracket with 1h" long No.8 self-drilling
screws. The vertical legs of the U -shaped bracket are attached to the runners .....
with one 1h" long No. 8 self-drilling screw. The completed steel framing co
provides a 2 1Is" and 11h" space between the inner layer of wallboard and the co
.....
sides and bottom of the steel beam, respectively. The inner layer of wallboard c:
is attached to the top runners and bottom corner channels or corner angles with z
1114" long No.6 self-drillinf. screws spaced 16" on center. The outer layer of ::n
0
walboard is applied with I 14" long No. 6 self-drilling screws spaced 8" on JJ
center. The bottom corners are reinforced with metal comer beads. s::
m
c:
r=c
z
G)
0
0
c
m
....
CD
....
CD
c
z
:;;
Three layers of 5Js'' Type X gypsum wallboardl attached to a steel suspension 0
system as described immediately above utilizing the No. 25 gauge I" by 2" ::0
3:
lower comer angles. The framing is located so that a 2 1/s" and 2" space is ID
2. Websor provided between the inner layer of wallboard and the sides and bottom of the c
Ranges of beam respectively. The first two layers of wallboard are attached as described r=
0
Steel Beams
and Girders
2-4.2
immediately above. A layer of No. 20 gauge !"hexagonal galvanized wire
mesh is applied under the soffit of the middle layer and up the sides
Pis z
C>
approximately 2". The mesh is held in position with the No. 6 J5/s" long 0
screws installed in the vertical leg of the bottom comer angles. The outer 0
0
layer of wallboard is attached with No. 6 2'14' long screws spaced 8" on m
center. One screw is also installed at the mid-depth of the bracket in each
layer. Bottom comers are finished as described above.
3. Bonded
Pretensioned 3-1.1 Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate• concrete
Reinforcement Beams or girders 4' 3' 2 1/z7 1'12
in Prestressed Solid slabss 2 1'12 I
Concretes
4. Bondedor Carbonate, lightweight, sand-lightweight and siliceous aggregate concrete
Unbonded Unrestrained Members:
Posttensioned Solid Slabss 2 1112
4-1.1
Tendons in Beams and Girders"
Prestressed 8 in. wide 4 112 2'/z P/4
Concretes w > 12 in. wide 3 2 112 2 1112
(Continued)
....
......
....
TABLE NO. 43-A-MINIMUM PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL PARTS BASED ON TIME PERIODS FOR
VARIOUS NONCOMBUSTIBLE INSULATING MATERIALS"-(Continued)
MATERIAL FOR FOLLOWING
STRUCTURAL
FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS (In Inches)
PARTS TO BE ITEM
4. Bonded or Carbonate, lightweight, sand-lightweight and siliceous aggregate

Unbonded Restrained Members:12
Posttensioned Solid Slabss Jl/4 1 3f4
4-1.2
Tendons in Beams and Girders 11
Prestressed Sin. Wide 21/z 2 P/4
Concretes w > 12in. wide 2 J3/4 Jllz
5. Reinforcing Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete, members
Steel in 12" or larger, square or round. (Size limit does not apply to beams and girders Jllz Jllz ]liz
5-1.1 ]liz
Reinforced monolithic with floors.)
Concrete
Columns,
Beams, 5-1.2 Siliceous aggregate concrete, members 12" or larger, square or round. (Size 2 Jl/z Jl/z Jl/z
Girders and limit does not apply to beams and girders monolithic with floors.)
Trusses c:
z
6. Reinforcing :;;
Steel in 6-1.1 Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete. II/4 Jl/4 I 3f4 0
::0
Reinforced 3:
Concrete 6-1.2 Siliceous aggregate concrete. P/4 Jl/z I 3/4 lXI
Joists9 c:
;=
7. Reinforcing 0
and Tie Rods
7-1.1 Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete. I I 3/4 3/4
z
G)
in Floor and 0
7-1.2 Siliceous aggregate concrete. Jl/4 I I 3f4
0
RoofSJabs 9
0
m
.....
ID
ID
.....
c:
z
:;;
0
::0
3:::
:lil[ ID
"Generic fire-resistance ratings (those not designated by a company code letter) as listed in the Fire Resistance Design Manual, Twelfth Edition, dated c:
:ilil
August, 1988, as published by the Gypsum Association, may be accepted as if herein listed.
1Reentrant parts of protected members to be filled solidly.
::::: r=c
2Two layers of equal thickness with a 3/ -inch air space between.
4
3For all of the construction with gypsum wallboard described in Table No. 43-A, gypsum base for veneer plaster of the same size, thickness and core
z
G>
type may be substituted for gypsum wallboard, provided attachment is identical to that specified for the wallboard and the joints on the face layer 0
0
are reinforced, and the entire surface is covered with a minimum of 11!6-inch gypsum veneer plaster. c
4 An approved adhesive qualified under U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1. m
5 Where lightweight or sand-lightweight concrete having an oven-dry weight of II 0 pounds per cubic foot or less is used, the tabulated minimum cover
may be reduced 25 percent, except that in no case shall the cover be less than 3/ 4 inch in slabs or 11/z inches in beams or girders.
6For siliceous aggregate concrete, increase tendon cover 20 percent.
7Adequate provisions against spalling shall be provided by U-shaped or hooped stirrups spaced not to exceed the depth of the member with a clear
cover of I inch.
8Prestressed slabs shall have a thickness not less than that required in Table No. 43-C for the respective fire-resistive time period.
"For use with concrete slabs having a comparable fire endurance where members are framed into the structure in such a manner as to provide equivalent
performance to that of monolithic concrete construction.
10fire coverage and end anchorages shall be as follows: Cover to the prestressing steel at the anchor shall be 1h inch greater than that required away
from the anchor. Minimum cover to steel bearing plate shall be I inch in beams and 3; 4 inch in slabs.
11 For beam widths between 8 and 12 inches, cover thickness can be determined by interpolation.
12
Interior spans of continuous slabs, beams and girders may be considered restrained.
TABLE NO. 43-B-RATED FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS FOR VARIOUS WALLS AND PARTITIONS• 1
MINIMUM FINISHED THICKNESS
FACE-TO-FACE2
ITEM (In Inches)
MATERIAL NUMBER CONSTRUCTION 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr.
1-1.1 Solid units (at least 75 percent solid). 8 63 4
1-1.2 Solid units plastered each side with 5/s" gypsum or portland cement plaster. 43J44
Portland cement plaster mixed 1:2 112 by weight, cement to sand.
1-2.1 Hollow brick units 5 at least 71 percent solid. 8
1-2.2 Hollow brick units 5 at least 71 percent solid, plastered each side with s;s" 83/4
gypsum plaster.
1-3.1 Hollow (rowlock6). 12 8
1-3.2 Hollow (rowlock6) plastered each side with 5Js" gypsum or portland cement 9
plaster. Portland cement plaster mixed I :2 112 by weight, cement to sand.
I. Brick of Clay 1-4.1 Hollow cavity wall consisting of two 4" nominal clay brick units with air 10
or Shale space between. ...
co
1-4.2 Cavity wall consisting of two 3-inch nominal thick solid clay units with air 8 ...
co
space. c
::~:=
z
1-5.1 Hollow brick, not filled 5.0 4.3 3.4 2.3 :;;
1-5.2 Hollow brick unit wall, grouted or filled with perlite, vermiculite, expanded 6.6 5.5 4.4 3.0
:~ ~
:;::
0
:D
shale aggregate
.;:;: 3:
:~~ til
c
4" nominal thick units at least 75 percent solid backed with a hat-shaped r=c
metal furring channel 3/4 inch thick formed from 0.021-inch sheet metal
1-6.1 attached to the brick wall on 24-inch centers with approved fasteners; and 112 54 z
G)
inch Type X gypsum wallboard7 attached to the metal furring strips with
0
l-inch-long Type S screws spaced 8 inches on center. 0
c
m
...
co
...
co
c:
z
2-1.1 One cell in wall thickness, units at least 50 percent solid, plastered each side 4 1/4 ;;
with 5fs" gypsum plaster. 0
::0
2. Hollow Clay 2-1.2 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 45 percent solid. 6 3:
ID
Tile, Non-
2-1.3 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 45 percent solid. Plastered each side 7 c:
load-bearing ;:::
with 5fs" gypsum plaster. c
(End or Side
Construction) 2-1.4 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 60 percent solid. Plastered each side 5
z
G)
with 5fs" gypsum plaster. 0
0
3-1.1 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. 8 c
m
3-1.2 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. Plastered one side 8 1/2
with 5fs" gypsum plaster.
3-1.3 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 49 percent solid. 8
3. Hollow Clay 3-1.4 Three cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. 12
Tile, Load-
3-1.5 Two units and three cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. 12
bearing (End
or Side 3-1.6 Two units and four cells in wall thickness, units at least 45 percent solid. 12
Construction) 3-2.1 Two units and three cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. 121/z
Plastered one side with 5/s" gypsum plaster.
3-2.2 Three cells in wall thickness, units at least 43 percent solid. Plastered one 81/z
side with 5Js" gypsum plaster.
(Continued)
.....
.....
(II
......
....
en T,6BLE NO. 43-B--RATED FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS FOR VARIOUS WALLS AND PARTITIONS• 1-(Continued)
FACE·JO.FACE2
(In Inches)
ITEM
3-2.3 Two cells in wall thickness, units at leasl40 percent solid. Plastered each side 9
with 5/s" gypsum plaster.
3. Hollow Clay 3-2.4 Three cells in wall thickness, units at least 43 percent solid. Plastered each 9
Tile, Load- side with 5Js" gypsum plaster.
bearing (End
3-2.5 Three cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. Plastered each 13
or Side
side with 5Js" gypsum plaster.
Construction)
Hollow cavity wall consisting of two 4" nominal clay tile units (at least 40
percent solid) with air space between. Plastered one side (exterior) with 3/4"
3-3.1 10
portland cement plaster and other side with 5/s" gypsum plaster. Portland
cement plaster mixed 1:3 by volume, cement to sand.
4. Combination 4-1.1 4" brick and 8" tile.
...
CD
of Clay Brick
12
...
CD
and Load- c
bearing
4-1.2 4" brick and 4" tile. 8 z
:;;
Hollow Clay 81/z 0
4-1.3 4" brick and 4" tile plastered on the tile side with 5/s" gypsum plaster. ::0
Tile
3:
5-1.113 14 Expanded slag or pumice. 4.7 4.0 3.2 2.1 ID
5. Concrete 5-1.213 14 Expanded clay, shale or slate. 5.1 4.4 3.6 2.6
sr
Masonry c
Unitss
5-1.313 Limestone, cinders or air-cooled slag. 5.9 5.0 4.0 2.7 z
G)
5-1.413 14 Calcareous or siliceous gravel. 6.2 5.3 4.2 2.8 0
0
c
m
.....
:8
....
c:
z
Siliceous Aggregate Concrete. 7.0 6.2 5.0 3.5 ~:II
6. Solid Carbonate Aggregate Concrete. 6.6 5.7 4.6 3.2 3:
6-1.1
Concrete8 15 IJJ
Sand-lightweight Concrete. 5.4 4.6 3.8 2.7 c:
;=
Lightweight Concrete. 5.1 4.4 3.6 2.5 c
One 2" unit cored 15 percent maximum and one 4" unit cored 25 percent
z
G)
7-1.1 maximum with 3f4" mortar filled collar joint. Unit positions reversed in 63/g 0
alternate courses. 0
c
7. Glazed or One 2" unit cored 15 percent maximum and one 4" unit cored 40 percent
m
Unglazed maximum with 3/s" mortar filled collar joint. Plastered one side with 314''
7-1.2 63/4
Facing Tile, gypsum plaster. Two wythes tied together every fourth course with No. 22
Nonload- gauge corrugated metal ties.
bearing 7-1.3 One unit with three cells in wall thickness, cored 29 percent maximum. 6
One 2" unit cored 22 percent maximum and one 4" unit cored 41 percent
7-1.4 maximum with W' mortar filled collar joint. Two wythes tied together every 6
third course with No. 22 gauge corrugated metal ties.
7-1.5 One 4" unit cord 25 percent maximum with 3f4" gypsum plaster on one side. 4 3/4
7-1.6 One 4" unit with two cells in wall thickness, cored 22 percent maximum. 4
(Continued)
.....
....
.....
TABLE NO. 43-B-RATED FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS FOR VARIOUS WALLS AND PARTITION& 1-(Continued)
.....
..... MINIMUM FINISHED THICKNESS
(10
FACE·TO.FACE2
(In Inches)
ITEM
7. Glazedor 7-1.7 One 4" unit cored 30 percent maximum with 31•" vermiculite gypsum plaster 4 1/z
Unglazed on one side.
Facing Tile,
Nonload- 7-1.8 One 4" unit cored 39 percent maximum with 3/•" gypsum plaster on one side. 4 1/z
bearing
31•" by No. 16 gauge vertical cold-rolled channels, 16" on center with
2.5-pound flat metal lath applied to oneface and tied with No. 18 gauge wire 24
8-1.1
at 6" spacing. Gypsum plaster each side mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum to sand
aggregate.
31•" by No. 16 gauge cold-rolled channels 16" on center with metal lath
applied to one face and tied with No. 18 gauge wire at 6" spacing. Perlite or
8-1.2 vermiculite gypsum plaster each side. For three-coat work the plaster mix for 2If24 2•
8. Solid the second coat shall not exceed 100 pounds of gypsum to 2 1h cubic feet of
.....
Gypsum aggregate for the one-hour system. CD
CD
Plaster .....
'I•" by No. 16 gauge vertical cold-rolled channels, 16" on center, with 3/s" c:
8-1.3 gypsum lath applied to one face and attached with sheet metal clips. Gypsum 2• z
plaster each side mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum to sand aggregate.
~
:a
Studless with 'h" full-length plain gypsum lath and gypsum plaster each side.
8-2.1 Plaster mixed I: 1 for scratch coat and 1:2 for brown coat, by weight, gypsum 2•
3:
ID
to sand aggregate. c:
r=
8-2.2 Stud1ess with 1h" full-length plain gypsum lath and perlite or vermiculite 2lf24 2• c
gypsum plaster each side. z
c;)
Studless partition with 3/s" rib metal lath installed vertically, adjacent edges 0
8-2.3 tied 6" on center with No. 18 gauge wire ties, gypsum plaster each side mixed 2• 0
c
I :2 by weight, gypsum to sand aggregate. m
...
...
l8
c
z
~:a
9. Solid Perlite Perlite mixed in the ratio of 3 cubic feet to I 00 pounds of portland cement and
iii:
and Portland machine applied to stud side of JII2" mesh by No. 17 gauge paper-backed
9-1.1 3 1/s4 ID
Cement woven wire fabric lath wire-tied to 4" deep steel trussed wire9 studs 16" on c
center. Wire ties of 18 gauge galvanized steel wire 6" on center vertically. i=
c
10. Solid Neat z
c;)
Wood 3/4''
by No. 16 gauge cold-rolled channels, 12" on center with 2.5-pound flat
0
Fibered 10-1.1 metal lath applied to one face and tied with No. 18 gauge wire at 6" spacing. 2• 0
Gypsum Neat gypsum plaster applied each side. c
m
Plaster
II. Solid
One full-length layer 1/z" Type X gypsum wallboard 7 laminated to each side
Gypsum
ll-1.1 of I" full-length V-edge gypsum coreboard with approved laminating 2•
Wallboard
compound. Vertical joints of face layer and core board staggered at least 3".
Partition
12. Hollow One fuJI-length layer of Sfs" Type X gypsum wallboard7 attached to both sides
(Studless) of wood or metal top and bottom runners laminated to each side of l" x 6"
Gypsum full-length gypsum coreboard ribs spaced 24" on center with approved
12-1.1 2 1/44
Wallboard laminating compound. Ribs centered at vertical joints of face plies and joints
Partition staggered 24" in opposing faces. Ribs may be recessed 6" from the top and
bottom.
(Continued)
......,
CQ
TABLE NO. 43-B-RATED FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS FOR VARIOUS WALLS AND PARTITIONS• 1-(Continued)
FACE-TO-FACE2
ITEM (In Inches)
12. Hollow I" regular gypsum V-edge full-length backing board attached to both sides of
(Studless) wood or metal top and bottom runners with nails or J5fs" drywall screws at
Gypsum 12-1.2 24" on center. Minimum width of runners J5/s". Face layer of 1h" regular 45fg4
Wallboard full-length gypsum wallboard laminated to outer faces of backing board with
Partition approved laminating compound.
13-1.1 3'14'' by No. 18 gauge steel studs spaced 24" on center. 5fs" gypsum plaster on 4 3/44
metal lath each side mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum to sand aggregate.
35/s" No. 16 gauge approved nailableiO studs spaced 24" on center. 5fs" neat
13-1.2 gypsum wood fibered plaster each side over 3/s" rib metal lath nailed to studs 55/g
13. Noncombus-
tible Studs
with 6d common nails, 8" on center. Nails driven 11/4'' and bent over. ...
Interior 4" No. 18 gauge channel-shaped steel studs at 16" on center. On each side
approved resilient clips pressed onto stud flange at 16" vertical spacing, '14''
...
CD
CD
Partition 13-1.3 75fg4 c:

with Plaster pencil rods snapped into or wire-tied onto outer loop of clips, metal lath z
:;;
Each Side wire-tied to pencil rods at 6" intervals, I" perlite gypsum plaster, each side. 0
::0
3:
2 1h" No. 18 gauge steel studs spaced 16" on center. Wood fibered gypsum ID
plaster mixed I: I by weight gypsum to sand aggregate applied on 3.4 pound c:
13-1.4
metal lath wire tied to studs, each side. 3/4'' plaster applied over each face,
4'!•• r=
c
including finish coat. z
G)
0
0
c
m
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with 5/s" gypsum plaster on metal lath. Lath
attached by 4d common nails bent over or No. 14 gauge by 1 114'' x 3f4'' crown
14-1.111 16 5 1/s
width staples spaced 6" on center. Plaster mixed I: I' h for scratch coat and I :3 c:
for brown coat, by weight, gypsum to sand aggregate. z
:;;
14. Wood Studs 2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with metal lath and 7/s" neat wood fibered 0
Interior 14-1.2 11 gypsum plaster each side. Lath attached by 6d common nails, 7" on center. 51iz4 :rJ
i:
Partition Nails driven 1114" and bent over. ID
with Plaster
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with 3/s" perforated or plain gypsum lath and
c:
Each Side r=
14-1.311 16 liz" gypsum plaster each side. Lath nailed with IIJ8' by No. 13 gauge by 19J64" 0
head plasterboard blued nails, 4" on center. Plaster mixed 1:2 by weight,
5'14 zC)
gypsum to sand aggregate.
0
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with 3/s" Type X gypsum lath and liz" gypsum 0
0
14-1.411 16 plaster each side. Lath nailed with Jlls" by No. 13 gauge by 19164" head m
5 114
plasterboard blued nails, 5" on center. Plaster mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum
to sand aggregate.
No. 25 gauge channel-shaped studs 24" on center with one full-length layer of
SJs" Type X gypsum wallboard 7applied vertically attached with I" long No. 6
drywall screws to each stud. Screws are 8" on center around the perimeter and
15. Noncombus- 12" on center on the intermediate stud. The wallboard may be applied
tible Studs- 15-1.1 horizontally when attached to 35/s" studs and the horizontal joints are 27Jg4
Interior staggered with those on the opposite side. Screws for the horizontal
Partition application shall be 8" on center at vertical edges and 12" on center at
with Gypsum intermediate studs.
Wallboard No. 25 gauge channel-shaped studs 24" on center with two full-length layers
Each Side of liz" Type X gypsum wallboard7 applied vertically each side. First layer
attached with I" long, No. 6 drywall screws, 8" on center around the
15-1.2 perimeter and 12" on center on the intermediate stud. Second layer applied 35Jg4
with vertical joints offset one stud space from first layer using ISis" long, No.
6 drywall screws spaced 9" on center along vertical joints, 12" on center at
intermediate studs and 24" on center along top and bottom runners.
(Continued)
.....
N
N TABLE NO. 43-B-RATED FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS FOR VARIOUS WALLS AND PARTITION& 1-(Continued)
FACE·TO-FACE2
ITEM (In Inches)
15. Noncombus-
tible Studs- No. 16 gauge approved nailable metal studs 10 24" on center with full-length
Interior 5/s" Type X gypsum wallboard 7 applied vertically and nailed 7" on center with
15-1.3 4 7/s
Partition 6d cement-coated common nails. Approved metal fastener grips used with
with Gypsum nails at vertical butt joints along studs.
Wallboard
Each Side
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with two layers of 3fs" regular gypsum
wallboard 7 each side, 4d cooler 12 or wallboard 12 nails at 8" on center first
16-1.1" 16 layer, 5d cooler 12 or wallboard 12 nails at 8" on center second layer with 5
laminating compound between layers. Joints staggered. First layer applied
16. Wood
Studs-
full length vertically, second layer applied horizontally or vertically. .....
Interior 2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with two layers 1/z" regular gypsum ~
Partition
16-1.2 11 16 wallboard7 applied vertically or horizontally each side, joints staggered. Nail
5'/z c:
with Gypsum base layer with 5d cooler12 or wallboard 12 nails at 8" on center, face layer with z
Wallboard 8d cooler'2 or wallboard 12 nails at 8" on center. ~:a
Each Side 2" x 4" wood studs 24" on center with%" Type X gypsum wallboard7 applied 3:
16-1.3 11 16 vertically or horizontally nailed with 6d cooler 12 or wallboard 12 nails at 7" on 4 3/4 ID
center with end joints on nailing members. Stagger joints each side. c:
r=
2" x 4" fire-retardant -treated wood studs spaced 24" on center with one layer 0
of 5fs" thick Type X gypsum wallboard7 applied with face paper grain (long
z
G>
16-1.4 11 43f44
dimension) parallel to studs. Wallboard attached with 6d cooler 12 or 0
wallboard'2 nails at 7" on center. 0
c
m
.....
CD
CD
.....
c
z
:;;
0
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with two layers Sfs" 'JYpe X gypsum :0
wallboard7 each side. Base layers applied vertically and nailed with 6d 3:
16. Wood
Studs- cooler12 or wallboard 12 nails at 9" on center. Face layer applied vertically or Ill
c
16-1.511 16 horizontally and nailed with 8d cooler12 or wallboard12 nails at 7" on center. 6 i=
Interior
For nail-adhesive application, base layers are nailed 6" on center. Face layers c
Partition
With applied with coating of approved wallboard adhesive and nailed 12" on z
C)
Gypsum center. 0
Wallboard 0
2" x 3" fire-retardant-treated wood studs spaced 24" on center with one layer c
Each Side of Sfs'' thick 1Ype X gypsum wallboard7 applied with face paper grain (long m
16-1.6 11 J5fg4
dimension) at right angles to studs. Wallboard attached with 6d
cement-coated box nails spaced 7" on center.
Exterior surface with 3/4" drop siding over 1/2'' gypsum sheathing on 2" x 4"
wood ~tuds at 16" on center; interior surface treatment as required for
one-hour-rated exterior or interior 2" x 4" wood stud partitions. Gypsum
17. Exterior or
17-1.11116 sheathing nailed with 13/4" by No. 11 gauge by 71!6" head galvanized nails at Varies
Interior
8" on center. Siding nailed with 7d galvanized smooth box nails.
Walls
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with metal lath and 3/4" exterior cement
17-1.21116 plaster on each side. Lath attached with 6d common nails 7" on center driven 5 3/s
to 1" minimum penetration and bent over. Plaster mix 1:4 for scratch coat and
1:5 for brown coat, by volume, cement to sand.
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 43-B-RATED FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS FOR VARIOUS WALLS AND PARTITIONS• 1-(Continued)
FACE·TQ.FACE2
(In IncheS)
ITEM
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with 7 /s" exterior cement plaster (measured
17-1.311 16 from the face of studs) on the exterior surface with interior surface treatment Varies
as required for interior wood stud partitions in this table. Plaster mix I :4 for
scratch coat and 1:5 for brown coat, by volume, cement to sand.
35/s" No. 16 gauge noncombustible studs 16" on center with 7/s" exterior
cement plaster (measured from the face of the studs) on the exterior surface
17-1.4 with interior surface treatment as required for interior, nonbearing, Varies'
noncombustible stud partitions in this table. Plaster mix 1:4 for scratch coat
17. Exterior or
and I :5 for brown coat, by volume, cement to sand.
Interior
Walls 2114" x 33/4" clay face brick with cored holes over W' gypsum sheathing on .....
exterior surface of2" x4" wood studs at 16" on center and two layers 5/s" Type CD
CD
X gypsum wallboard7 on interior surface. Sheathing placed horizontally or .....
vertically with vertical joints over studs nailed 6" on center with 13/4" by No. c:
z
11 gauge by 7116'' head galvanized nails. Inner layer of wallboard placed ::;;
horizontally or vertically and nailed 8" on center with 6d cooler12 or 0
17-1.5 16 10 :::0
wallboardl2 nails. Outer layer of wallboard placed horizontally or vertically s:::
and nailed 8" on center with 8d cooler 12 or wallboard 12 nails. All joints tu
staggered with vertical joints over studs. Outer layer joints taped and c:
finished with compound. Nailheads covered with joint compound. No. 20
;=
0
gauge corrugated galvanized steel wall ties 3/4' by 65/8' attached to each stud z
with two 8d coolerl2 or wallboard 12 nails every sixth course of bricks. c;)
0
0
0
m
2" x 6" fire-retardant-treated wood studs 16" on center. Interior face has two ....
co
layers of 5is" Type X gypsum wallboard? with the base layer placed vertically co
and attached with 6d box nails 12" on center. The face layer is placed
....
c
horizontally and attached with 8d box nails 8" on center at joints and 12" on z
center elsewhere. The exterior face has a base layer of 5is" Type X gypsum ;;
wallboard placed vertically with 6d box nails 8" on center at joints and 12" on 0
:II
center elsewhere. An approved building paper is next applied, followed by 3:
17-1.6 11 16 self-furred exterior lath attached with 2 'h'', No. 12 gauge galvanized roofing 8 1i4 Ill
nails with a 3is" diameter head and spaced 6" on center along each stud. c
Exterior cement plaster consisting of a 1iz" brown coat is then applied. The
r=c
scratch coat is mixed in the proportion of I :3 by weight, cement to sand with z
C>
10 pounds of hydrated lime and 3 pounds of approved additives or
0
admixtures per sack of cement. The brown coat is mixed in the proportion of 0
I :4 by weight, cement to sand with the same amounts of hydrated lime and c
17. Exterior or m
Interior approved additives or admixtures used in the scratch coat.
Walls 2" x 6" wood studs 16" on center. The exterior face has a layer of 5is" Type X
gypsum wallboard 7 placed vertically with 6d box nails 8" on center at joints
and 12" on center elsewhere. An approved building paper is next applied,
followed by I" by No. 18 gauge self-furred exterior lath attached with 8d by
2 1iz" long galvanized roofing nails spaced 6" on center along each stud.
Exterior cement plaster consisting of a liz" scratch coat, a bonding agent and a
112" brown coat and a finish coat is then applied. The scratch coat is mixed in
the proportion of I :3 by weight, cement to sand with I 0 pounds of hydrated
17-1.7" 16 lime and 3 pounds of approved additives or admixtures per sack of cement. 83is
The brown coat is mixed in the proportion of I :4 by weight, cement to sand
with the same amounts of hydrated lime and approved additives or
admixtures used in the scratch coat. The interior is covered with 3is" gypsum
lath with I" hexagonal mesh of No. 20 gauge woven wire lath furred out Sf16"
and I" perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster. Lath nailed with 1 1is" by No. 13
gauge by 19i64" head plasterboard blued nails spaced 5" on center. Mesh
attached by Pi4" by No. 12 gauge by 'is" head nails with 3is" furrings, spaced
8" on center. The plaster mix shall not exceed 100 pounds of gypsum to 2 1iz
cubic feet of aggregate.
(Contmued)
TABLE NO. 43-B-RATED FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS FOR VARIOUS WALLS AND PARTITIONS• 1--{Continued)
FACE-TO-FACE2
(In Inches)
ITEM
2" x 6" wood studs 16" on center. The exterior face has a layer of 5fs" Type X
gypsum wallboard 7 placed vertically with 6d box nails 8" on center at joints
and 12" on center elsewhere. An approved building paper is next applied,
followed by 11/z" by No. 17 gauge self-furred exterior lath attached with 8d
by 21/z" long galvanized roofing nails spaced 6" on center along each stud.
Exterior cement plaster consisting of a 112'' scratch coat, and a 1/2'' brown coat
is then applied. The plaster may be placed by machine. The scratch coat is
17-1.811 16 mixed in the proportion of 1:4 by weight, plastic cement to sand. The brown 83/s
coat is mixed in the proportion of 1:5 by weight, plastic cement to sand. The
interior is covered with 3fs" gypsum lath with I" hexagonal mesh of No. 20
gauge woven wire lath furred out 51!6" and 1" perlite or vermiculite gypsum
17. Exterior or
plaster. Lath nailed with 11/s" by No. 13 gauge by 19/64" head plasterboard
Interior
blued nails spaced 5" on center. Mesh attached by 1314'' by No. 12 gauge by
Walls
3fs" head nails with 3/s" furrings, spaced 8" on center. The plaster mix shall not ......
exceed 100 pounds of gypsum to 2 1/z cubic feet of aggregate. CD
CD
......
4" No. 18 gauge, nonload-bearing metal studs, 16" on center, with I" portland c:
cement lime plaster (measured from the back side of the 3.4# expanded z
metal lath) on the exterior surface. Interior surface to be covered with I" of ~:IJ
gypsum plaster on 3.4# expanded metal lath proportioned by weight-1:2
17-1.9
for scratch coat, I :3 for brown, gypsum to sand. Lath on one side of the
61!z4 s::
m
partition fastened to 1/•" diameter pencil rods supported by No. 20 gauge c:
metal clips, located 16" on center vertically, on each stud. 3" thick mineral i=
c
fiber insulating batts friction fitted between the studs.
zC>
"Generic fire-resistance ratings (those not designated by a company code letter) as listed in the Fire Resistance Design Manual, Twelfth Edition, dated iii
August 1988, as published by the Gypsum Association, may be accepted as if herein listed. i 0
0
'Staples with equivalent holding power and penetration may be used as alternate fasteners to nails for attachment to wood framing. c
m
2Thickness
.....
shown for prick and clay tile are nominal thicknesses unless plastered, in which case thicknesses are net. Thickness shown for concrete { (D
(D
masonry and hollow clay or shale brick is equivalent thickness defined as the average thickness of solid material in the wall and is represented by .....
the formula: c:
z
h=~ :;;
LxH 0
::tl
WHERE: 3::
h equivalent thickness, in inches. ID
c:
Vn net volume (gross volume less volume of voids), in cubic inches. i=
c
L
H
length of block or brick using specified dimensions as defined in Chapter 24, in inches.
height of block or brick using specified dimensions as defined in Chapter 24, in inches.
z
C)
0
Thic~hness _includes pladster, l_ath and gfiyp s~m w a~lboard, where m entionfied , and m~ or grout whedn adll c ells arhe solid grou tedhor whhen all cells are filled ',',:,:,~
1 11 1
0
w1t s1 1cone-treate per11te 1oose- 1 msu1auon; verm1cu1Ite 1oose- 111 msu auon; or expan e c1ay, s a1e or s1ate 11g twe1g t aggregate. c
3Single-wythe m
brick.
4 Shall be used for nonbearing purposes only.
5 Hollow brick units 4-inch by 8-inch by 12-inch nominal with two interior cells having a 11/z-inch web thickness between cells and 13/4-inch-thick
face shells.
6 Rowlock design employs clay brick with all or part of bricks laid on edge with the bond broken vertically.
7For all of the construction with gypsum wallboard described in Table No. 43-B, gypsum base for veneer plaster of the same size, thickness and core
type may be substituted for gypsum wallboard, provided attachment is identical to that specified for the wallboard and the joints on the face layer
are reinforced and the entire surface is covered with a minimum of 1/winch gypsum veneer plaster.
8 See also Footnote No. 2. The equivalent thickness may include the thickness of portland cement plaster or 1.5 times the thickness of gypsum plaster
applied in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 47 of the code.
9 Studs are welded truss wire studs with No. 7 gauge flange wire and No. 7 gauge truss wires.
1
~ailable metal studs consist of two channel studs spot welded back to back with a crimped web forming a nailing groove.
11 Plywood may be installed between the fire protection and the wood studs on either the interior or exterior side of the wood-frame assemblies in this
table, provided the length of the fasteners used to attach the fire protection are increased by an amount at least equal to the thickness of the plywood.
12 For properties of cooler or wallboard nails, see U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17, Table No. 25-17-H.
13 The fire-resistive time period for concrete masonry units meeting the equivalent thicknesses required for a two-hour fire-resistive rating in Item
5, and having a thickness of not less than 75/ 8 inches is four hours when cores which are not grouted are filled with silicone-treated perlite loose-fill
insulation: vermiculite loose-fill insulation; or expanded clay, shale or slate lightweight aggregate, sand or slag having a maximum particle size
of 3/s inch.
(Continued)
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 43-8--{Continued)
14For determining equivalent thickness of concrete masonry units made from unblended aggregates, see Footnote No. 2. The equivalent thickness
of units composed of blends of two or more aggregate categories shall be determined by interpolating between the equivalent thickness values
specified in Table No. 43-B in proportion to the percentage by volume of each aggregate.
The equivalent thickness required to provide a desired fire-resistive time period for concrete masonry composed of units manufactured with fine
aggregates passing a No.4 sieve listed in Item 5-1.4 of Table No. 43-B blended with aggregates listed in Item 5-1.1 or 5-1.2 shall be determined
by interpolating between the equivalent thickness values specified in Table No. 43-B in proportion to the percentage by volume of each aggregate
as follows:
I. ETrequired=ET!.4XV1.4+ETu xVu
2. ETrequired= ET1.4 X V1.4 + ET1.2 X V1.2
The required equivalent thickness of concrete masonry units manufactured with aggregates listed in Items 5-1.1, 5-1.2 and 5-1.4 of Table No.
43-B shall be determined as follows:
3. ETrequired= ET1.4 X V1.4 + ET1.2 X (Vu + V1.2)
WHERE:
ETu, ET1.2, ET1.4 =specified equivalent thickness for Items 5-1.1, 5-1.2
...
and 5-1.4 of Table No. 43-B. ...
CD
CD
Vu, V1.2. V1.4 =volume of aggregates expressed as a percentage of the c:

z
total aggregate volume for Item 5-1.1, 5-1.2 or 5-1.4 of ;;
Table No. 43-B. 0
15
:::0
Concrete walls shall be reinforced with horizontal and vertical temperature reinforcement as required by Sections 2614 (d) 2 and 3. 3:
1
1Yfhe design stress of studs shall be reduced to 78 percent of allowable F'c with the maximum not greater than 78 percent of the calculated stress with aJ
c:
studs having a slenderness ratio !.£d of 33. ;=
0
zc;>
0
0
0
m
c:
z
~:a
TABLE NO. 43-C-MINIMUM PROTECTION FOR FLOOR AND ROOF SYSTEMS•1 i:
THICKNESS OF FLOOR MINIMUM THICKNESS Ill
c:
OR ROOF SLAB
(In Inches)
OF CEILING
(In Inches)
r=c
FLOOR OR ROOF
CONSTRUCTION
ITEM
NUMBER CEILING CONSTRUCTION 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr. 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr.
z
G>
I. Siliceous Aggregate Concrete 1-1.1 7.0 6.2 5.0 3.5 0
0
c
2. Carbonate Aggregate Concrete 2-1.1 Slab (no ceiling required). Mini- 6.6 5.7 4.6 3.2 m
mum cover over nonprestressed re-
3. Sand-lightweight Concrete 3-1.1 inforcement shall be not less than 5.4 4.6 3.8 2.7
% inch. 2
4. Lightweight Concrete 4-1.1 5.1 4.4 3.6 2.5
Slab with suspended ceiling of

vermiculite gypsum plaster over
metal lath attached to 3f4" cold- 3/4
5. Reinforced Concrete Joists 5-1.1 3 2 I
rolled channels spaced 12" on cen-
ter. Ceiling located 6" minimum
below joists.
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 43-C-MINIMUM PROTECTION FOR FLOOR AND ROOF SYSTEMS•1-(Continued)
THICKNESS OF FLOOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
OR ROOF SLAB OF CEILING
(In Inches) (In Inches)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
CONSTRUCTION NUMBER CEILING CONSTRUCTION 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr. 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr.
3Js Type X gypsum wallboard3 at-

tached to No. 25 gauge by 7is" deep
by 25/s" hat-shaped galvanized
steel channels with I" long No. 6
screws. The channels are spaced
24" on center, span 35" and are
supported along their length at 35"
intervals by No. 21 gauge galva-
nized steel flat strap hangers hav-
ing formed edges which engage·
the lips of the channel. The strap
hangers are attached to the side of
5. Reinforced Concrete Joists 5-2.1 the concrete joists with 5!J,'' by 2 112 5Js
....
1'14" long powder-driven fasten- l8
....
ers. The wallboard is installed c:
with the long dimension perpen- z
::;;
dicular to the channels. All end 0
joints occur on channels and sup- :xJ
plementary channels and supple- 5:
OJ
mentary channels are installed c:
parallel to the main channels, 12" r=c
each side, at end joint occur-
rences. The finish ceiling is lo-
z
G)
cated approximately 12" below the 0
soffit of the floor slab. 0
c
m
....
CD
....
CD
c
Gypsum plaster on metal lath at- z
tached to the bottom cord with sin- :;;
0
gle No. 16 gauge or doubled No. ::u
18 gauge wire ties spaced 6" on 3:
6-1.1 center. Plaster mixed 1:2 for 2'/z 2 1/4 3/4 5 /s ID
c
scratch coat, 1:3 for brown coat, r=
c
by weight, gypsum to sand aggre-
gate for two-hour system. For z
C)
three-hour system plaster is neat. 0
0
6. Steel Joists Constructed with a Vermiculite gypsum plaster on c
Poured Reinforced Concrete metal lath attached to the bottom m
Slab on Metal Lath Forms or 6-2.1 chord with single No, 16 gauge or 2 5/s
Steel Form Units 4 ·~ doubled No. 18 gauge wire ties 6"

on center.
Portland cement plaster over
metal lath attached to the bottom
chord of joists with single No. 16
gauge or doubled No. 18 gauge
6-3.1 wire ties spaced 6" on center. Plas- 5/g6
2
ter mixed 1:2 for scratch coat, I :3
for brown coat for one-hour sys-
tern and I: I for scratch coat, I: 1'12
for brown coat for two-hour sys-
tern, by weight, cement to sand.
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 43-c-MINIMUM PROTECTION FOR FLOOR AND ROOF SYSTEMS•1-(Contlnued)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
Ceiling of s;s" Type X wallboard3
attached to 7Js" deep by 25/s" by
No. 25 gauge hat-shaped furring
channels 12" on center with 1"
long No. 6 wallboard screws at 8"
6-4.1 2 112 5Js
on center. Channels wire tied to
bottom chord of joists with dou-
bled No. 18 gauge wire or sus-
pended below joists on wire hang-
6. Steel Joists Constructed with a
ers.?
Poured Reinforced Concrete
Slab on Metal Lath Forms or Wood-fibered gypsum plaster
Steel Form Units4 •5 mixed I: I by weight gypsum to
sand aggregate applied over metal
lath. Lath tied 6" on center to 3J4" 3J4
6-5.1 2 112
channels spaced 13 1/z" on center. c
Channels secured to joists at each z
intersection with two strands of ~:a
No. 18 gauge galvanized wire.
iii:
7. Reinforced Concrete Slab and aJ
Joists with Hollow Clay Tile 7-l.l SJs" gypsum plaster on bottom of 8s 5Js c
Fillers Laid End to End in Rows floor or roof construction.
r=
0
2'12" or More Apart; Reinforce- z
G")
ment Placed Between Rows
0
and Concrete Cast Around and 0
7-1.2 None. 5 1h9 0
Over Tile
m
8. Steel Joists Constructed with a Vermiculite gypsum plaster on
...
co
Reinforced Concrete Slab on 8-1.1
metal lath attached to 3J4'' cold-
2 1h 10 3f4
...
co
Top Poured on a 1h" Deep Steel rolled channels with No. 18 gauge c:
Deck. 5 wire ties spaced 6" on center.
z
;;
Suspended ceiling of vermiculite 0
:II
gypsum plaster base coat and ver- 3:
miculite acoustical plaster on til
c:
metal lath attached at 6" intervals
to 3J4'' cold-rolled channels spaced
r=c
9. 3" Deep Cellular Steel Deck 12" on center and secured to Jl/2' z
C)
with Concrete Slab on Top. cold-rolled channels spaced 36"
9-1.1 21/z 1t 18 tt 0
Slab Thickness Measured to on center with No. 16 gauge wire. 0
Top of Cells. llfz'' channels supported by No. 8 c
m
gauge wire hangers at 36" on cen-
ter. Beams within envelope and
with a 2 1/z" air space between
beam soffit and lath have a 4-hour
rating.
Ceiling of gypsum plaster on
metal lath. Lath attached to 3/4''
10. llfz''DeepSteelRoofDeckon
furring channels with No. 18
Steel Framing. Insulation
gauge wire ties spaced 6" on cen-
Board, 30 lbs. per Cubic Foot
ter. 3/4'' channel saddled-tied to 2"
Density, Composed of Wood
channels with doubled No. 16
Fibers with Cement Binders 10-1.1 J7/g I 3/412 3/412
gauge wire ties. 2" channels
of Thickness Shown Bonded
spaced 36" on center suspended 2"
to Deck with Unfilled Asphalt
below steel framing and saddle-
Adhesive. Covered with a
tied with No. 8 gauge wire. Plaster
Class A or B Roof Covering
mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum to
sand aggregate.
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 43-C-MINIMUM PROTECTION FOR FLOOR AND ROOF SYSTEMS• 1-(Continued)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
Ceiling of gypsum plaster on
metal lath. Lath attached to 3f4''
furring channels with No. 18
gauge wire ties spaced 6" on cen-
ter. 3f4" channels saddle tied to 2"
II. IW' Deep Steel Roof Deck on
channels with doubled No. 16
Steel Framing Wood Fiber In-
gauge wire ties. 2" channels
sulation Board, 17.5 lbs. per
Cubic Foot Density on Top ll-1.1
spaced 36" on center suspended 2"
Jlh I 7fg7 3/412 ....
below steel framing and saddle :8
Applied Over a 15-lb. Asphalt
tied with No. 8 gauge wire. Plaster ....
Saturated Felt. Class A or B mixed I :2 for scratch coat and I :3 c:
Roof Covering. z
for brown coat, by weight, gyp- :;;
sum to sand aggregate for one- 0
hour system. For two-hour system
:a
3:
plaster mix is 1:2 by weight, gyp- ID
sum to sand aggregate. c:
r=c
zG)
0
0
c
m
...
...
l8
c:
z
~
::u
3:
ID
12. l'h''DeepStee!RoofDeckon c:
Steel Framing Insulation of r=
c
Rigid Board Consisting of Ex-
panded Perlite and Fibers Im-
z
G)
pregnated With Integral As- Gypsum-vermiculite plaster on 0
phalt Waterproofing; Density metal lath wire tied at 6" intervals 0
c
9 to 12 Lbs./Cu. Ft. Secured to 3f4'' furring channels spaced 12" m
to Metal Roof Deck by If2" on center and wire tied to 2" runner
12-1.1 I 7Js
Wide Ribbons of Water- channels spaced 32" on center.
proof, Cold-process Liquid Runners wire tied to bottom chord
Adhesive Spaced 6" Apart. of steel joists.
Steel Joist or Light Steel Con-
struction with Metal Roof
Deck, Insulation and Class A
orB Built-up Roof Covering. 5
(Continued)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
Gypsum plaster over 3fs" Type X
gypsum lath. Lath initially applied
with not less than four 11is" by No.
13 gauge by 19/64" head plaster-
board blued nails per bearing.
Continuous stripping over lath
along all joist lines. Stripping con-
sists of 3" wide strips of metal lath
attached by llf2'' by No. II gauge
by 112" head roofing nails spaced 6"
13. Double Wood Floor Over on center. Alternate stripping con-
Wood Joists Spaced 16" on 13-1.1 sists of 3" wide .049" diameter 7jg
Center. 13•14 wire stripping weighing one

pound per sq. yd. and attached by ....
No. 16 gauge by !liz" by 3J4'' crown :g....
width staples, spaced 4" on center.
c
Where alternate stripping is used z
the lath nailing may consist of two :;;
nails at each end and one nail at 0
::0
each intermediate bearing. Plaster s::
mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum to ID
c
sand aggregate. r=c
Portland cement or gypsum plas-
ter on metal lath. Lath fastened
z
(;')
with llfz'' by No. II gauge by 7/16" 0
head barbed shank roofing nails 0
13-1.2
spaced 5" on center. Plaster mixed
5jg c
m
1:2 for scratch coat and 1:3 for
...
U)
13-1.2 brown coat, by weight, cement to ...

U)
sand aggregate. c:
z
13. Double Wood Aoor Over
Wood Joists Spaced 16" on
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum
plaster on metal lath secured to
~::a
Center. 13 · 14 13-1.3 joists with 1112" by No. II gauge 5/s 3:
by 7!J6" head barbed shank roofing m
c:
nails spaced 5" on center. ;:::
c
1
/z" Type X gypsum wallboard3 z
C)
nailed to joists with 5d cooler 15 or
lf2 0
13-1.4 wallboard 15 nails at 6" on center. 0
End joints of wallboard centered on c
joists.
m
1/z" thick wood fiberboard weigh-
ing 15 to 18 lbs. per cu. ft. installed

14. Plywood Stressed Skin Panels with long dimension parallel to
Consisting of 5fs" Thick Inte- stringers or 3/s" C-D (exterior glue)
rior C-D (Exterior Glue) Top plywood glued and/or nailed to
Stressed Skin on 2" by 6" stringers. Nailing to be with 5d
Nominal (Minimum) String- 14-1.1 cooler 15 orwallboard 15 nails at 12" I
ers. Adjacent Panel Edges on center. Second layer of 1h" Type
Joined with 8d Common Wire X gypsum wallboard3 applied with
Nails Spaced 6" on Center. long dimension perpendicular to
Stringers Spaced 12" Maxi- joists and attached with 8d cooler 15
mum on Center. or wallboard 15 nails at 6" on center
at end joints and 8" on center else-
where. Wallboard joints staggered
with respect to fiberboard joints.
....
If
0
(Continued)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
15. Vermiculite Concrete Slab

Proportioned I :4 (Portland
Cement to Vermiculite Ag-
gregate) on a 11h" Deep Steel
Deck Supported on lndividu-
ally Protected Steel Framing.
Maximum span of deck 6' 10" 15-1.1 None. 310
where deck is less than No. 26
gauge and 8' 0" where deck is
No. 26 gauge or greater. Slab
Reinforced with 4" by 8" No. ....
12114 gauge Welded Wire l8
....
Mesh. c
16. Perlite Concrete Slab Propor-
z
tioned I :6 (Portland Cement ~::0
to Perlite Aggregate) on a 3::::
1114'' Deep Steel Deck Sup- ID
ported on Individually Pro- 16-1.1 None. JltziO c
tected Steel Framing. Slab rc
Reinforced with 4" by 8" No. z
C')
12/14 gauge Welded Wire
(')
Mesh. 0
c
m
17. Perlite Concrete slab Propor-
tioned 1:6 (PortlaJid Cement Perlite gypsum plaster on metal
to Perlite Aggregate) on a 9116" lath wire tied to 3/4'' furring chan- c
Deep Steel Deck Supported 17-1.1 216 216 7jg 3/4 z
nels attached with No. 16 gauge :;;
by Steel Joists 4' on Center. wire ties to lower chord of joists. 0
Class A orB roof covering on lJ
top. 5
3:
m
18. Perlite Concrete Slab Propor- c
tioned 1:6 (Portland Cement
r=c
to Perlite Aggregate) on 1W' z
Deep Steel Deck Supported
on Individually Protected
"0
0
Steel Framing. Maximum c
m
span of deck 6' 10" where 18-1.1 1 16
2 1.
None.
deck is less than No. 26 gauge
and 8' 0" where deck is No. 26
gauge or greater. Slab Rein-
forced with No. 19 Gauge
Hexagonal Wire Mesh. Class
A or B roof covering on top.
Suspended envelope ceiling of

19. Aoor and Beam Construction perlite gypsum plaster on metal
Consisting of 3" Deep Cellu- lath attached to 3/4'' cold-rolled
Jar Steel Aoor Units Mounted channels, secured to 11/z" cold-
on Steel Members with 1:4 rolled channels spaced 42" on cen-
19-1.1 2 16 Jl2
(Proportion of Portland Ce- ter supported by No .. 6 wire 36" on
ment to Perlite Aggregate) center. Beams in envelope with 3"
Perlite-concrete floor slab on minimum air space between beam
top. soffit and lath have a 4-hour rat-
ing.
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 43-C-MINIMUM PROTECTION FOR FLOOR AND ROOF SYSTEMS•1-(Continued)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
CONSTRUCTION NUMBER CEIUNG CONSTRUCTION 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr. 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr.
20. Perlite concrete proportioned

1:6 (portland cement to perlite
aggregate) poured to 1/s-inch
thickness above top of corru-
gations of 15ft6-inch-deep gal-
vanized steel deck maximum
span 8' (j' for No. 24 gauge or
6' 0" for No. 26 gauge with
deck supported by individu-
ally protected steel framing.
Approved polystyrene foam
plastic insulation board hav-
......
ing a flame spread not exceed-
ing 75 (1" to 4" thickness with
:g
......
vent holes which approximate c
3 percent of the board surface z
area) placed on top of perlite ~:II
slurry. A 2' by 4' insulation 20-1.1 None. Varies
3:
board contains six 23!4'' diam- til
eter holes. Board covered c
with 2 1/4'' minimum perlite ;:::
0
concrete slab. Slab reinforced
with mesh consisting of No.
z
C)
19 gauge (0.041" galvanized) 0
steel wire twisted together to 0
0
form 2" hexagons with m
....tO
....tO
c:
z
~:D
straight No. 16 gauge
(0.0625" galvanized) steel
wire woven into mesh and s::
spaced 3". Alternate slab rein- lXI
forcement may consist of 4 by 5
r
8, No. 1214 SWG, or 2 by 2, c
No. 14114 SWG welded wire z
C)
fabric. Class A orB roof cover-
0
ing on top. 0
c
Base layer 51s" Type X gypsum m
wallboard applied at right angles
to joist or truss 24" o.c. with 11/4''
21. Wood joist, floor trusses and Type S or Type W drywall screws
roof trusses spaced 24" o.c. 24" o.c. Face layer 51s" Type X
with 1/z" plywood with exte- gypsum wallboard or veneer base
rior glue applied at right an- applied at right angles to joist or
gles to top of joist or truss with 21-1.1 truss through base layer with 171s" Varies Jll4
8d nails. The plywood thick- Type S or Type W drywall screws
ness shall not be less than 112'' 12" o.c. at joints and intermediate
nor less than required by joist or truss. Face layer joints off-
Chapter 25. set 24" from base layer joints, 1112"
Type G drywall screws placed 2"
back on either side of face layer
endjoints, 12"o.c.
(Footnotes on following page.)

FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 43-C
"Generic fire-resistance ratings (those not designated by company code letter) as listed in the Fire Resistance Design Manual, Twelfth Edition, dated
August, 1988, as published by the Gypsum Association, may be accepted as if herein listed.
1Staples with equivalent holding power and penetration may be used as alternate fasteners to nails for attachment to wood framing.
2When the slab is in an unrestrained condition, minimum reinforcement cover shall not be less than 15/s inches for four-hour (siliceous aggregate only); ~j~j
11I4 inches for four- and three-hour; I inch for two-hour (siliceous aggregate only); and 3I4 inch for all other restrained and unrestrained conditions.
3For all of the construction with gypsum wallboard described in Table No. 43-C, gypsum base for veneer plaster of the same size, thickness and core
type may be substituted for gypsum wallboard, provided attachment is identical to that specified for the wallboard, and the joints on the face layer
are reinforced and the entire surface is covered with a minimum of 11J 6-inch gypsum veneer plaster.
4 Slab thickness over steel joists measured at the joists for metal lath form and at the top of the form for steel form units.
5 a. The maximum allowable stress level for H-Series joists shall not exceed 22,000 pounds per square inch (psi). : :_,\
b. The allowable stress forK -Series joists shall not exceed 26,000 psi, the nominal depth of such joist shall not be less than l 0 inches and the nominal ;~;;
joist weight shall not be less than 5 pounds per lineal foot. ,,,,
6 Portland cement plaster with 15 pounds of hydrated lime and 3 pounds of approved additives or admixtures per bag of cement.
7Gypsum wallboard ceilings attached to steel framing may be suspended with 11h-inch cold-formed carrying channels spaced 48 inches on center
which are suspended with No. 8 SWG galvanized wire hangers spaced 48 inches on center. Cross-furring channels are tied to the carrying channels
with No. 18 SWG galvanized wire (double strand) and spaced as required for direct attachment to the framing. This alternative is also applicable
to those steel framing assemblies recognized under Footnote a.
8 Six-inch hollow clay tile with 2-inch concrete slab above. ...
9Four-inch hollow clay tile with I 1h-inch concrete slab above.
1Dntickness measured to bottom of steel form units. ...
10
10
11 Five-eighths inch of vermiculite gypsum plaster plus 1h inch of approved vermiculite acoustical plastic. c
z
IZFurring channels spaced 12 inches on center. ;;
13 Double wood floor may be either of the following: 0
(a) Subfloor of l-inch nominal boarding, a layer of asbestos paper weighing not less than 14 pounds per 100 square feet and a layer of l-inch :lJ
3:
nominal tongue-and-groove finish flooring; or Ill
(b) Subfloorof l-inch nominal tongue-and-groove boarding or 15hz-inch interior-type plywood with exterior glue and a layer of l-inch nominal c
tongue-and-groove finish flooring or 19hz-inch interior-type plywood finish flooring or a layer of Type I Grade M-1 particleboard not less than i=
5Is inch thick. 0
14The ceiling may be omitted over unusable space, and flooring may be omitted where unusable space occurs above. z
C)
15 For properties of cooler or wallboard nails, see U .B.C. Standard No. 25-17, Table 25-17 -H.
1 0
~ickness measured <Jn top of steel deck unit. 0
0
m
Part VIII
REGULATIONS FOR USE OF PUBLIC
STREETS AND PROJECTIONS OVER
PUBLIC PROPERTY
Chapter 44
PROTECTION OF PEDESTRIANS DURING
CONSTRUCTION OR DEMOLITION
General
Sec. 4401. No person shall use or occupy a street, alley or public sidewalk for the
performance of work under a building permit except in accordance with the provi-
sions of this chapter.
No person shall perform any work on any building or structure adjacent to a pub-
lic way in general use by the public for pedestrian travel, unless the pedestrians are
protected as specified in this chapter.
Any material or structure temporarily occupying public property, including
fences and walkways, shall be adequately lighted between sunset and sunrise.
Temporary Use of Streets and Alleys

Sec. 4402. The use of public property shall meet the requirements of the public
agency having jurisdiction. Whenever requested, plot plans and construction de-
tails shall be submitted for review by the agencies concerned.
Storage on Public Property

Sec. 4403. Material and equipment necessary for work to be done under a permit
shall not be placed or stored on public property so as to obstruct free and convenient
approach to and use of any fire hydrant, fire or police alarm box, utility box, catch
basin or manhole or so as to interfere with the free flow of water in any street or
alley gutter.
Mixing Mortar on Public Property

Sec. 4404. The mixing or handling of mortar, concrete or other material on pub-
lic property shall be done in a manner that will not deface public property or create
a nuisance.
Protection of Utilities
Sec. 4405. A substantial protective frame and boarding shall be built around and
over every street lamp, utility box, fire or police alarm box, fire hydrant, catch basin
and manhole that may be damaged by any work bei11g done under the permit. This
protection shall be maintained while such work is being done and shall not obstruct
the normal functioning of the device.
743
Walkway
Sec. 4406. A walkway not less than 4 feet wide shall be maintained on the side-
walk in front of the building site during construction, alteration or demolition un-
less the public agency having jurisdiction authorizes the sidewalk to be fenced and
c\osed. A..dequate signs and railings shall be provided to direct pedestrian traffic.
Railings shall be provided when required by Section 4407.
The walkway shall be capable of supporting a uniform live load of 150 pounds
per square foot (psf). A durable wearing surface shall be provided.
Pedestrian Protection
Sec. 4407. (a) Protection Required. Pedestrian traffic shall be protected by a
railing on the street side when the walkway extends into the roadway, by a railing
adjacent to excavations and by such other protection as set forth in Table No. 44-A.
The construction of such protective devices shall be in accordance with the provi-
sions of this chapter.
(b) Railings. Railings shall be substantially built and, when of wood, shall be
constructed of new material having a nominal size of at least 2 inches by 4 inches.
Railings shall be at least 3 feet 6 inches in height and when adjacent to excavations
shall be provided with a midrail.
(c) Fences. Fences shall be solid and substantially built, be not less than 8 feet in
height above grade and be placed on the side of the walkway nearest to the building
site. Fences shall extend the entire length of the building site and each end shall be
returned to the building line.
Openings in such fences shall be protected by doors which normally are kept
closed.
All fences shall be provided with 2-inch by 4-inch plate, top and bottom, and
shall be well braced. The fence material shall be a minimum of 3/ 4-inch boards or
1
/ 4 -inch plywood. Plywood fences shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Plywood panels shall be bonded with an adhesive identical to that for exterior
plywood.
2. PI ywood 1I4 inch or 5h6 inch in thickness shall have studs spaced not more than
2 feet on center.
3. Plywood% inch or 1/z inch in thickness shall have studs spaced not more than
4 feet on center, provided a 2-inch by 4-inch stiffener is placed horizontally at the
midheight when the stud spacing exceeds 2 feet on center.
4. Plywood 5/ 8 inch or thicker shall not span over 8 feet.
(d) Canopies. The protective canopy shall have a clear height of 8 feet above the
walkway. The roof shall be tightly sheathed. The sheathing shall be 2-inch nominal
wood planking or equal. Every canopy shall have a solid fence built along its entire
length on the construction side.
If materials are stored or work is done on the roof of the canopy, the street sides
and ends of the canopy roof shall be protected by a tight curb board not less than 1
foot high and a railing not less than 3 feet 6 inches high.
744
The entire structure shall be designed to carry the loads to be imposed on it, pro-
vided the live load shall not be less than 150 psf. In lieu of such design a protection
canopy supporting not more than 150 psf may be constructed as follows:
1. Footings shall be continuous 2-inch by 6-inch members with scabbed jo\nts.
2. Posts not less than 4 inches by 6 inches in size shall be provided on both ~ides
of the canopy and spaced not more than 12 feet, center to center.
3. Stringers not less than 4 inches by 12 inches in size shall be placed on edge
upon the posts.
4. Joists resting upon the stringers shall be at least 2 inches by 8 inches in size
and shall be spaced not more than 2 feet, center to center.
5. The deck shall be of planks at least 2 inches thick nailed to the joists.
6. Each post shall be knee-braced to joists and stringers by members 4 feet long,
not less than 2 inches by 4 inches in size.
7. A curb not less than 2 inches by 12 inches in size shall be set on edge along the
outside edge of the deck.
EXCEPTION: Protection canopies for new, light-frame construction not ex-
ceeding two stories in height may be designed for a live load of75 psf or the loads to
be imposed on it, whichever is the greater.
Maintenance and Removal of Protective Devices

Sec. 4408. (a) Maintenance. Pedestrian protection required by Section 4407
shall be maintained in place and kept in good order for the entire length of time pe-
destrians may be endangered.
(b) Removal. Every protection fence or canopy shall be removed within 30
days after such protection is no longer required by this chapter for protection of
pedestrians.
Demolition
Sec. 4409. The work of demolishing any building shall not be commenced until
the required pedestrian protection structures are in place.
The building official may require the permittee to submit plans and a complete
schedule for demolition. Where such are required, no work shall be done until such
plans or schedule, or both, are approved by the building official.
745
44·A 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 44·A-TYPE OF PROTECTION REQUIRED FOR PEDESTRIANS

HEIGHT OF DISTANCE FROM CONSTRUCTION PROTECTION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIRED
8 feet Less than 6 feet Railing
or less 6 feet or more None
Fence and
Less than 6 feet canopy
6 feet or more but not more than Fence and
one-fourth the height of construction canopy
More than 6 feet or more, but between one·
8 feet fourth to one-half the height of Fence
construction
6 feet or more but exceeding one-
half the construction height None
746
Chapter 45
PERMANENT OCCUPANCY
OF PUBLIC PROPERTY
General
Sec. 4501. No part of any structure or any appendage thereto, except signs, shall
project beyond the property line of the building site, except as specified in this
chapter.
Structures or appendages regulated by this code shall be constructed of materials
as specified in Section 1711.
The projection of any structure or appendage shall be the distance measured hor-
izontally from the property line to the outermost point of the projection.
Nothing in this code shall prohibit the construction and use of a structure be-
tween buildings and over or under a public way, provided the structure complies
with all requirements of this code.
No provisions of this chapter shall be construed to permit the violation of other
laws or ordinances regulating the use and occupancy of public property.
Projection into Alleys

Sec. 4502. No part of any structure or any appendage thereto shall project into
any alley.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Acurborbufferblockmayprojectnotmore than 9 inches and
not exceed a height of 9 inches above grade.
2. Footings located at least 8 feet below grade may project not more than 12 inches.
Space below Sidewalk

Sec. 4503. The space adjoining a building below a sidewalk on public property
may be used and occupied in connection with the building for any purpose not in-
consistent with this code or other laws or ordinances regulating the use and occu-
pancy of such spaces on condition that the right so to use and occupy may be
revoked by the city at any time and that the owner of the building will construct the
necessary walls and footings to separate such space from the building and pay all
costs and expenses attendant therewith.
Footings located at least 8 feet below grade may project not more than 12 inches.
Balconies, Sun-control Devices and Appendages

Sec. 4504. Oriel windows, balconies, sun-control devices, unroofed porches,
cornices, belt courses and appendages such as water tables, sills, capitals, bases
and architectural projections may project over the public property of the building
site a distance as determined by the clearance of the lowest point of the projection
above the grade immediately below, as follows:
Clearance above grade less than 8 feet-no projection is permitted.
747
Clearance above grade over 8 feet-1 inch of projection is permitted for each
additional inch of clearance, provided that no such projection shall exceed a dis-
tance of 4 feet.
Marquees
Sec. 4505. (a) General. For the purpose ofthis section a marquee shall include
any object or decoration attached to or a part of said marquee.
(b) Projection and Clearance. The horizontal clearance between a marquee
and the curb line shall not be less than 2 feet.
A marquee projecting more than two thirds of the distance from the property line
to the curb line shall not be less than 12 feet above the ground or pavement below.
A marquee projecting less than two thirds of the distance from the property line
to the curb line shall not be less than 8 feet above the ground or pavement below.
(c) Length. A marquee projecting more than two thirds of the distance from the
property line to the curb line shall not exceed 25 feet in length along the direction of
the street.
(d) Thickness. The maximum height or thickness of a marquee measured verti-
cally from its lowest to its highest point shall not exceed 3 feet when the marquee
projects more than two thirds of the distance from the property line to the curb line
and shall not exceed 9 feet when the marquee is less than two thirds of the distance
from the property line to the curb line.
(e) Construction. A marquee shall be supported entirely by the building and
constructed of noncombustible material or, when supported by a building of Type
V construction, may be of one-hour fire-resistive construction.
(f) Roof Construction. The roof or any part thereof may be a sky light, provided
glass skylights are of laminated or wired glass complying with Chapter 34. Plastic
skylights shall comply with Section 5207.
Every roof and skylight of a marquee shall be sloped to downspouts which shall
conduct any drainage from the marquee under the sidewalk to the curb.
(g) Location Prohibited. Every marquee shall be so located as not to interfere
with the operation of any exterior standpipe or to obstruct the clear passage of stair-
ways or exits from the building or the installation or maintenance of electroliers.
Awnings
Sec. 4506. (a) Definition. For the purpose of this section:
t AWNING is a shelter supported entirely from the exterior wall of a building.
!:! (b) Construction. Awnings shall have noncombustible frames but may have
•.'·~,:'·; ,: combustible coverings. Awnings shall be either fixed, retractable, folding or col-
. lapsible. Awnings in any configuration shall not obstruct the use of a required exit.
(c) Projection. Awnings may extend over public property not more than 7 feet
from the face of a supporting building, but no portion shall extend nearer than 2 feet
to the face of the nearest curb line measured horizontally. In no case shall the aw-
ning extend over public property greater than two thirds of the distance from the
property line to the nearest curb in front of the building site.
748
(d) Clearances. All portions of any awning shall be at least 8 feet above any
public walkway.
EXCEPTION: Any valance attached to an awning shall not project above the
roof of the awning at the point of attachment and shall not extend more than 12 inches
below the roof of the awning at the point of attachment, but in no case shall any por-
tion of a valance be less than 7 feet in height above a public way.
Doors
Sec. 4507. Power-operated doors and their guide rails shall not project over
public property. Other doors, either fully opened or when opening, shall not project
more than I foot beyond the property line, except that in alleys no projection be-
yond the property line is permitted.
Chapter 46
NO REQUIREMENTS
749
NOTES
750
Part IX
WALL AND CEILING COVERINGS
Chapter 47
INSTALLATION OF WALL AND CEILING
COVERINGS
Scope
Sec. 4701. (a) General. The installation oflath. plaster and gypsum board shall
be done in a manner and with materials as specified in this chapter and, when re-
quired for fire-resistive construction, also shall conform with the provisions of
Chapter43.
Other approved wall or ceiling coverings may be installed in accordance with
the recommendations of the manufacturer and the conditions of approval.
(b) Inspection. No lath or gypsum board or their attachments shall be covered or
finished until it has been inspected and approved by the building official in accor-
dance with Section 305 (e).
(c) Tests. The building official may require tests to be made in accordance with
approved standards to determine compliance with the provisions of this chapter,
provided the permit holder has been notified 24 hours in advance of the time of
making such tests.
(d) Definitions. For purposes of this chapter, certain terms are defined as fol-
lows: ·
CORNER BEAD is a rigid formed unit or shape used at projecting or external
angles to define and reinforce the comers of interior surfaces.
CORNERITE is a shaped reinforcing unit of expanded metal or wire fabric
used for angle reinforcing and having minimum outstanding legs of not less than 2
inches.
CORROSION-RESISTANT MATERIALS are materials that are inherently
rust resistant or materials to which an approved rust-resistive coating has been
applied either before or after forming or fabrication.
EXTERIOR SURFACES are weather-exposed surfaces as defined in Section
424.
EXTERNAL CORNER REINFORCEMENT is a shaped reinforcing unit
for external comerreinforcement for portland cement plaster formed to ensure me-
chanical bond and a solid plaster comer.
INTERIOR SURFACES are surfaces other than weather-exposed surfaces.
MOIST CURING is any method employed to retain sufficient moisture for hy-
dration of portland cement plaster.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER is a mixture of portlahd cement or port-
land cement and lime and aggregate and other approved materials as specified in
this code.
751
STEEL STUDS, LOAD-BEARING AND NONLOAD-BEARING, are pre-

fabricated channel shapes, welded wire or combination wire and steel angle types,
galvanized or coated with rust-resistive material.
STRIPPING is flat reinforcing units of expanded metal or wire fabric or other
materials not less than 3 inches wide to be installed as required over joints of gyp-
sum lath.
TCE WfRE is wire for securing together metal framing or supports, for tying
metal and wire fabric lath and gypsum lath and wallboard together and for securing
accessories.
WIRE BACKING is horizontal strands oftautened wire attached to surfaces of
.. Materials
vertical wood supports which, when covered with building paper, provide a back-
ing for portland cement plaster.
Sec. 4702. Lathing, plastering, wallboard materials, ceiling suspension systems

and plywood paneling shall conform to the applicable standards listed in Chapter
60.
'' The standards listed below labeled a "U .B.C. standard" are also listed in Chapter
'..
[:,.·':
!··'::,::,.·'1·.··':: ~~~1~::::::::::::::::::::,~:::=~~:
2. U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17, Part IV, Nails and Staples
3. A. United States Government Military Specification MIL-B-19235 (Docks),
~ Pl;~~:;~d~n;5~~~~~esives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing
:~
4. ASTM C 35, Perlite, Vermiculite and Sand Aggregates for Gypsum Plaster
5. ASTM C 646, Drill Screws
~~ 6. ASTM C 475 and C 474, Gypsum Wallboard Tape and Joint Compound
7. ASTM C 442, Gypsum Backing Board
I 8. ASTM C 37, Gypsum Lath

9. ASTM C 28, Gypsum Plasters
Iil
10. ASTM C 79, Gypsum Sheathing Board
11. ASTM C 36, Gypsum Wallboard
.,. 12. ASTM C 61, Keene's Cement
13. ASTM C 630, Water-resistant Gypsum Backing Board
~. ,.~ .
14. ASTM C 588 AND C 587, Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster and Gypsum
.,: Veneer Plaster
~~ 15. ASTM C 6 and C 206, Lime
I 16. ASTM C 22, C 472 and C 473, Testing Gypsum and Gypsum Products
17. ASTM C 635 and C 636, Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
\~1 for Lay-in Panel Ceilings
752
18. ASTM C 843 and C 844, Application of Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster and
Gypsum Veneer Plaster
19. ASTM C 514, Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard, Gypsum
Backing Board and Gypsum Veneer Base
Vertical Assemblies
Sec. 4703. (a) General. In addition to the requirements of this section, vertical
assemblies of plaster or gypsum board shall be designed to resist the loads speci-
fied in Chapter 23 of this code. For wood framing, see Chapter 25. For metal fram-
ing, see Chapter 27.
EXCEPTION: Wood-framed assemblies meeting the requirements of Section
2517 need not be designed.
(b) Wood Framing. Wood supports for lath or gypsum board shall not be less
than 2 inches nominal in least dimension. Wood stripping or furring shall not be
less than 2 inches nominal thickness in the least dimension except that furring
strips not less than l-inch by 2-inch nominal dimension may be used over solid
backing.
(c) Studless Partitions. The minimum thickness of vertically erected studless
solid plaster partitions of 3/ 8 -inch and 3/ 4-inch rib metal lath or 1/z-inch-thick
long-length gypsum lath and gypsum board partitions shall be 2 inches.
Horizontal Assemblies
Sec. 4704. (a) General. In addition to the requirements of this section, supports
for horizontal assemblies of plaster or gypsum board shall be designed to support
all loads as specified in Chapter 23 of this code.
EXCEPTION: Wood-framed assemblies meeting the requirements of Section
2517 need not be designed.
(b) Wood Framing. Wood stripping or suspended wood systems, where used,
shall not be less than 2 inches nominal thickness in the least dimension, except that
furring strips not less than l-inch by 2-inch nominal dimension may be used over
solid backing.
(c) Hangers. Hangers for suspended ceilings shall not be less than the sizes set
forth in Table No.4 7-A, fastened to or embedded in the structural framing, mason-
ry or concrete.
Hangers shall be saddle-tied around main runners to develop the full strength of
the hangers. Lower ends of flat hangers shall be bolted with 3/ 8-inch bolts to runner
channels or bent tightly around runners and bolted to the main part of the hanger.
(d) Runners and Furring. The main runner and cross-furring shall not be less
than the sizes set forth in Table No. 47-A, except that other steel sections of equiva-
lent strength may be substituted for those set forth in this table. Cross-furring shall
be securely attached to the main runner by saddle-tying with not less than one
strand of No. 16 or two strands of No. 18 U.S. gauge tie wire or approved equiva-
lent attachments.
753
Interior Lath
Sec. 4705. (a) General. Gypsum lath shall not be installed until weather protec-
tion for the installation is provided. Where wood-frame walls and partitions are
covered on the interior with portland cement plaster or tile of similar material and
are subject to water splash, the framing shall be protected with an approved mois-
ture barrier.
Showers and public toilet walls shall conform to Section 510 (b).
(b) Application of Gypsum Lath. The thickness, spacing of supports and the
method of attachment of gypsum lath shall be as set forth in Tables Nos. 4 7-B and
47-C. Approved wire and sheet metal attachment clips may be used.
Gypsum lath shall be applied with the long dimension perpendicular to supports
and with end joints staggered in successive courses. End joints may occur on one
support when stripping is applied the full length of the joints.
Where electrical radiant heat cables are installed on ceilings, the stripping, if
conductive, may be omitted a distance not to exceed 12 inches from the walls.
Where lath edges are not in moderate contact and have joint gaps exceeding 3/ 8
inch, the joint gaps shall be covered with stripping orcomerite. Stripping orcomer-
ite may be omitted when the entire surface is reinforced with not less than l-inch
No. 20 U.S. gauge woven wire. When lath is secured to horizontal or vertical sup-
ports not used as structural diaphragms, end joints may occur between supports
when lath ends are secured together with approved fasteners. Vertical assemblies
also shall conform with Section 2309 (b).
Comerite shall be installed so as to retain position during plastering at all internal
comers. Comerite may be omitted when plaster is not continuous from one plane to
an adjacent plane.
(c) Application of Metal Plaster Bases. The type and weight of metal lath, and
the gauge and spacing of wire in welded or woven lath, the spacing of supports, and
the methods of attachment to wood supports shall be as set forth in Tables Nos.
47-B and 47-C.
Metal lath shall be attached to metal supports with not less than No. 18 U.S.
gauge tie wire spaced not more than 6 inches apart or with approved equivalent at-
tachments.
Metal lath or wire fabric lath shall be applied with the long dimension of the
sheets perpendicular to supports.
Metal lath shall be lapped not less than 1h inch at sides and 1 inch at ends. Wire
fabric lath shall be lapped not less than one mesh at sides and ends, but not less than
1 inch. Rib metal lath with edge ribs greater than 1/ 8 inch shall be lapped at sides by
nesting outside ribs. When edge ribs are 1/ 8 inch or less, rib metal lath may be
lapped 1h inch at sides, or outside ribs may be nested. Where end laps of sheets do
not occur over supports, they shall be securely tied together with not less than No.
18 U.S. gauge wire.
Comerite shall be installed in all internal comers to retain position during plas-
tering. Comerite may be omitted when lath is continuous or when plaster is not con-
tinuous from one plane to an adjacent plane.
754
Exterior Lath
Sec. 4706. (a) General. Exterior surfaces are weather-exposed surfaces as de-
fined in Section 424. For eave overhangs required to be fire resistive, see Section
1711.
!b) Corrosion Resistance. All lath and lath attachments shall be of corro-
sion-resistant material. See Section 4701 (d).
(c) Backing. Backing or a lath shall provide sufficient rigidity to permit plaster
application.
Where lath on vertical surfaces extends between rafters or other similar project-
ing members, solid backing shall be installed to provide support for lath and attach-
ments.
Gypsum lath or gypsum board shall not be used, except that on horizontal sup-
ports of ceilings or roof soffits it may be used as backing for metal lath or wire fab-
ric lath and portland cement plaster.
Backing is not required under metal lath or paperbacked wire fabric lath.
(d) Weather-resistive Barriers. Weather-resistive barriers shall be installed as
required in Section 1708 (a) and, when applied over wood base sheathing, shall in-
clude two layers of Grade D paper.
(e) Application of Metal Plaster Bases. The application of metal lath or wire
fabric lath shall be as specified in Section 4705 (c) and they shall be furred out from
vertical supports or backing not less than 1/ 4 inch except as set forth in Footnote No.
2, Table No. 47-B.
Where no external comer reinforcement is used, lath shall be furred out and car-
ried around comers at least one support on frame construction.
A minimum 0.021-inch (No. 26 gauge) corrosion-resistant weep screed with a
minimum vertical attachment flange of3 1h inches shall be provided at or below the
foundation plate line on all exterior stud walls. The screed shall be placed a mini-
mum of 4 inches above the earth or 2 inches above paved areas and shall be of a type I
which will allow trapped water to drain to the exterior of the building. The weath- ··
er-resistive barrier and exterior lath shall cover and terminate on the attachment
flange of the screed.
Interior Plaster
Sec. 4707. (a) General. Plastering with gypsum plaster or portland cement plas-
ter shall not be less than three coats when applied over metal lath or wire fabric lath
and shall not be less than two coats when applied over other bases permitted by this
chapter. Showers and public toilet walls shall conform to Section 510 (b).
Plaster shall not be applied directly to fiber insulation board. Portland cement
plaster shall not be applied directly to gypsum lath, gypsum masonry or gypsum
plaster except as specified in Section 4706 (c).
When installed, grounds shall assure the minimum thickness of plaster as set
forth in Table No. 47-D. Plaster thickness shall be measured from the face of lath
and other bases.
755
(b) Base Coat Proportions. Proportions of aggregate to cementitious materials

shall not exceed the volume set forth in Table No. 47-E for gypsum plaster and
Table No. 47-F for portland cement and portland cement-lime plaster.
(c) Base Coat Application. Base coats shall be applied with sufficient material
and pressure to form a complete key or bond.
I. Gypsum plaster. For two-coat work, the first coat shall be brought out to
grounds and straightened to a true surface, leaving the surface rough to receive the
finish coat. For three-coat work, the surface of the first coat shall be scored suffi-
ciently to provide adequate bond for the second coat and shall be permitted to hard-
en and set before the second coat is applied. The second coat shall be brought out to
grounds and straightened to a true surface, leaving the surface rough to receive the
finish coat.
2. Portland cement plaster. The first two coats shall be as required for the first
coats of exterior plaster, except that the moist-curing time period between the first
and second coats shall not be less than 24 hours and the thickness shall be as set
forth in Table No. 47-D. Moist curing shall not be required where job and weather
conditions are favorable to the retention of moisture in the portland cement plaster
for the required time period.
(d) Finish Coat Application. Finish coats shall be applied with sufficient mate-
rial and pressure to form a complete bond. Finish coats shall be proportioned and
mixed in an approved manner. Gypsum and lime and other interior finish coats
shall be applied over gypsum base coats which have hardened and set. Thicknesses
shall not be less than 1/ 16 inch.
Portland cement and lime finish coats may be applied over interior portland ce-
ment base coats which have been in place not less than 48 hours.
Approved acoustical finish plaster may be applied over any base coat plaster,
over clean masonry or concrete, or other approved surfaces.
(e) Interior Masonry or Concrete. Condition of surfaces shall be as specified
in Section 4708 (h). Approved specially prepared gypsum plaster designed for
application to concrete surfaces or approved acoustical plaster may be used. The
total thickness of base coat plaster applied to concrete ceilings shall be as set forth
in Table No. 47-D. Should ceiling surfaces require more than the maximum thick-
ness permitted in Table No.4 7-D, metal lath or wire fabric lath shall be installed on
such surfaces before plastering.
Exterior Plaster
Sec. 4708. (a) General. Plastering with portland cement plaster shall not be less
than three coats when applied over metal lath or wire fabric lath and shall not be
less than two coats when applied over masonry, concrete or gypsum backing as
specified in Section 4 706 (c). If plaster surface is completely covered by veneer or
other facing material, or is completely concealed by another wall, plaster applica-
tion need be only two coats, provided the total thickness is as set forth in Table No.
47-F.
On wood-frame or metal stud construction with an on-grade concrete floor slab
system, exterior plaster shall be applied in such a manner as to cover, but not extend
756
below, lath and paper. See Section 4 706 (e) for the application of paper and lath, and
flashing or drip screeds.
Only approved plasticity agents and approved amounts thereof may be added to
portland cement. When plastic cement is used, no additional lime or plasticizers
shall be added. Hydrated lime or the equivalent amount oflime putty used as a plas-
ticizer may be added to portland cement plaster in an amount not to exceed that set
forth in Table No. 47-F.
Gypsum plaster shall not be used on exterior surfaces. See Section 424.
(b) Base Coat Proportions. The proportion of aggregate to cementitious mate-
rials shall be as set forth in Table No. 47-F.
(c) Base Coat Application. The first coat shall be applied with sufficient mate-
rial and pressure to fill solidly all openings in the lath. The surface shall be scored
horizontally sufficiently rough to provide adequate bond to receive the second
coat.
The second coat shall be brought out to proper thickness, rodded and floated suf-
ficiently rough to provide adequate bond for the finish coat. The second coat shall
have no variation greater than 1/ 4 inch in any direction under a 5-foot straight edge.
(d) Environmental Conditions. Portland cement-based plaster shall not be
applied to frozen base or those bases containing frost. Plaster mixes shall not con-
tain frozen ingredients. Plaster coats shall be protected from freezing for a period
of not less than 24 hours after set has occurred.
(e) Curing and Interval. First and second coats of plaster shall be applied and
moist cured as set forth in Table No. 47-F.
When applied over gypsum backing as specified in Section 4 706 (c) or directly
to unit masonry surfaces, the second coat may be applied as soon as the first coat
has attained sufficient hardness.
(f) Alternate Method of Application. As an alternate method of application,
the second coat may be applied as soon as the first coat has attained sufficient rigid-
ity to receive the second coat.
When using this method of application, calcium aluminate cement up to 15 per-
cent of the weight of the portland cement may be added to the mix.
Curing of the first coat may be omitted and (he second coat shall be cured as set
forth in Table No. 47-F.
(g) Finish Coats. Finish coats shall be proportioned and mixed in an approved
manner and in accordance with Table No. 47-F.
Portland cement and lime finish coats shall be applied over base coats which
have been in place for the time periods set forth in Table No. 47-F. The third or fin-
ish coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to bond to and to cov-
er the brown coat and shall be of sufficient thickness to conceal the brown coat.
(h) Preparation of Masonry and Concrete. Surfaces shall be clean, free from
efflorescence, sufficiently damp and rough to assure proper bond. If surface is in-
sufficiently rough, approved bonding agents or a portland cement dash bond coat
mixed in the proportions of 11h cubic feet of sand to 1 cubic foot of portland cement
shall be applied. Dash bond coat shall be left undisturbed and shall be moist cured
757
not less than 24 hours. When dash bond is applied, first coat of base coat plaster
may be omitted. See Table No. 47-D for thickness.
Exposed Aggregate Plaster

Sec. 4709. (a) General. Exposed natural or integrally colored aggregate may be
partially embedded in a natural or colored bedding coat of portland cement or gyp-
sum plaster, subject to the provisions of this section.
(b) Aggregate. The aggregate may be applied manually or mechanically and
shall consist of marble chips, pebbles or similar durable, nonreactive materials,
moderately hard (three or more on the MOH scale).
(c) Bedding Coat Proportions. The exterior bedding coat shall be composed of
one part portland cement, one part Type S lime and a maximum three parts of
graded white or natural sand by volume. The interior bedding coat shall be com-
posed of I 00 pounds neat gypsum plaster and a maximum 200 pounds of graded
white sand, or exterior or interior may be a factory-prepared bedding coat. The ex-
terior bedding coat shall have a minimum compressive strength of I ,000 pounds
per square inch.
(d) Application. The bedding coat may be applied directly over the first
(scratch) coat of plaster, provided the ultimate overall thickness is a minimum of
7
/ 8 inch including lath. Over concrete or masonry surfaces the overall thickness
shall be a minimum of 1h inch.
(e) Bases. Exposed aggregate plaster may be applied over concrete, masonry,
portland cement plaster base coats or gypsum plaster base coats.
(f) Preparation of Masonry and Concrete. Masonry and concrete surfaces
shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Section 4708 (h).
(g) Curing. Portland cement base coats shall be cured in accordance with Table
No.47-F. Portland cement bedding coat shall retain sufficient moisture for hydra-
tion (hardening) for 24 hours minimum or, where necessary, shall be kept damp for
24 hours by light water spraying.
Pneumatically Placed Plaster (Gunite)

Sec. 4710. Pneumatically placed portland cement plaster shall be a mixture of
portland cement and sand, mixed dry, conveyed by air through a pipe or flexible
tube, hydrated at the nozzle at the end of the conveyor and deposited by air pressure
in its final position.
Rebound material may be screened and reused as sand in an amount not greater
than 25 percent of the total sand in any batch.
Pneumatically placed portland cement plaster shall consist of a mixture of one
part cement to not more than five parts sand. Plasticity agents may be used as speci-
fied in Section 4 708 (a). Except when applied to concrete or masonry, such plaster
shall be applied in not less than two coats to a minimum total thickness of 7/ 8 inch.
The first coat shall be rodded as specified in Section 4708 (c) for the second coat.
The curing period and time interval shall be as set forth in Table No. 47-F.
758
Gypsum Wallboard
Sec. 4711. (a) General. Gypsum wallboard shall not be installed on exterior sur-
faces. See Section 424. For use as backing under stucco, see Section 4706 (c).
Gypsum wallboard shall not be installed until weather protection forthe installa-
tion is provided.
(b) Supports. Supports shall be spaced not to exceed the spacing set forth in
Table No. 47-G for single-ply application and Table No. 47-H for two-ply applica-
tion. Vertical assemblies shall conform with Section 4703. Horizontal assemblies
shall comply with Section 4704.
(c) Single-ply Application. All edges and ends of gypsum wallboard shall occur
on the framing members, except those edges and ends which are perpendicular to
the framing members. All edges and ends of gypsum wallboard shall be in moder-
ate contact except in concealed spaces where fire-resistive construction or dia-
phragm action is not required.
The size and spacing of fasteners shall conform with Table No. 47-G except
where modified by fire-resistive construction meeting the requirements of Section
4302 (b). Fasteners shall be spaced not less than% inch from edges and ends of
gypsum wallboard. Fasteners at the top and bottom plates of vertical assemblies, or
the edges and ends of horizontal assemblies perpendicular to supports, and at the
wall line may be omitted except on shear-resisting elements or fire-resistive as-
semblies. Fasteners shall be applied in such a manner as not to fracture the face pa-
per with the fastener head.
Gypsum wallboard may be applied to wood-framing members with an approved
adhesive. A continuous bead of the adhesive shall be applied to the face of all fram-
ing members, except top and bottom plates, of sufficient size as to spread to an av-
erage width of I inch and thickness of 1/ 16 inch when the gypsum wallboard is
applied. Where the edges or ends of two pieces of gypsum wallboard occur on the
same framing member, two continuous parallel beads of adhesive shall be applied
to the framing member. Fasteners shall be used with adhesive application in accor-
dance with Table No. 47-G.
(d) Two-ply Application. The base of gypsum wallboard shall be applied with
fasteners of the type and size as required for the nonadhesive application of
single-ply gypsum wallboard. Fastener spacings shall be in accordance with Table
No. 47-H except where modified by fire-resistive construction meeting the re-
quirements of Section 4302 (b).
The face ply of gypsum wallboard may be applied with gypsum wallboard joint
compound or approved adhesive furnishing full coverage between the plies or with
fasteners in accordance with Table No. 47-H. When the face ply is installed with
joint compound or adhesive, the joints of the face ply need not occur on supports.
Temporary nails or shoring shall be used to hold face ply in position until the joint
compound or adhesive develops adequate bond.
(e) Joint Treatment. Gypsum wallboard single-layer fire-rated assemblies
shall have joints treated.
EXCEPTION: Joint treatment need not be provided when any of the following
conditions occur:
759
A. Where the wallboard is to receive a decorative finish such as wood paneling,

battens, acoustical finishes or any similar application which would be equivalent to
joint treatment.
B. Joints occur over wood-framing members.
C. Assemblies tested without joint treatment.
Use of Gypsum in Showers and Water Closets

Sec. 4712. When gypsum is used as a base for tile or wall panels for tub or shower
enclosures or water closet compartment walls, water-resistant gypsum backing
board shall be used, except that water-resistant gypsum board shall not be used in
the following locations:
I. Over a vapor retarder.
2. In areas subject to continuous high humidity, such as saunas, steam rooms or
gang shower rooms.
3. On ceilings.
Softwood Plywood Paneling

Sec. 4713•. All softwood plywood paneling shall conform with the provisions of
Chapters 25 and 42 and shall be installed in accordance with Table No. 47-J.
Shear-resisting Construction with Wood Frame

Sec. 4714. (a) General. Portland cement plaster, gypsum lath and plaster, gyp-
sum veneer base, gypsum sheathing board and gypsum wallboard may be used on
wood studs for vertical diaphragms if applied in accordance with this section.
Shear-resisting values shall not exceed those set forth in Table No.4 7-I. The effects
of overturning on vertical diaphragms shall be investigated in accordance with
Section 2303 (b) 3.
The shear values tabulated shall not be cumulative with the shear value of other
materials applied to the same wall. The shear values may be additive when the
identical materials applied as specified in this section are applied to both sides of
the wall.
(b) Masonry and Concrete Construction. Portland cement plaster, gypsum
lath and plaster, gypsum veneer base, gypsum sheathing board and gypsum wall-
board shall not be used in vertical diaphragms to resist forces imposed by masonry
or concrete construction.
(c) Wall Framing. Framing for vertical diaphragms shall conform with Section
2517 (g) for bearing walls, and studs shall be spaced not farther apart than 16 inches
center to center. Sills, plates and marginal studs shall be adequately connected to
framing elements located above and below to resist all design forces.
(d) Height-to-Length Ratio. The maximum allowable height-to-length ratio
for the construction in this section shall be 2 to 1. Wall sections having
height-to-length ratios in excess of 11/z to 1 shall be blocked.
(e) Application. End joints of adjacent courses of gypsum lath, gypsum veneer
base, gypsum sheathing board or gypsum wallboard sheets shall not occur over the
same stud.
760
Where required in Table No. 47-I, blocking having the same cross-sectional di-
mensions as the studs shall be provided at all joints that are perpendicular to the
studs.
The size and spacing of nails shall be as set forth in Table No. 47-I. Nails shall be
spaced not less than % inch from edges and ends of gypsum lath, gypsum veneer
base, gypsum sheathing board, gypsum wallboard or sides of studs, blocking and
top and bottom plates.
I. Gypsum lath. Gypsum lath shall be applied perpendicular to the studs. Maxi-
mum allowable shear values shall be as set forth in Table No. 47-I.
2. Gypsum sheathing board. Four-foot-wide pieces may be applied parallel or
perpendicular to studs. Two-foot-wide pieces shall be applied perpendicular to the
studs. Maximum allowable shear values shall be as set forth in Table No. 47-I.
3. Gypsum wallboard or veneer base. Gypsum wallboard or veneer base may
be applied parallel or perpendicular to studs. Maximum allowable shear values
shall be as set forth in Table No. 47-I.
761
TABLE NO. 47-A-SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS 1
(For Support of Ceilings Weighing Not More than 10 Pounds per Square Foot)
Minimum Sizes for Wire and Rigid Hangers

MAXIMUM AREA
SUPPORTED
SIZE AND TYPE (In SQuare Feet}. SIZE
12.5 No. 9 gauge wire

16 No. 8 gauge wire
Hangers for Suspended Ceilings 18 X." diameter, mild steel rod 2
20 jj," diameter, mild steel rod 2
22.5 \14 " diameter, mild steel rod 2
25.0 I " x ?; 6 " mild steel flats 3
Single Hangers Between 8 No. 12 gauge wire
Beams 4 12 No. 10 gauge wire ....
10
16 No. 8 gauge wire
....
10
For Supporting Runners Double Wire Loops at 8 No. 14 gauge wire c

Beams or Joists 3 12 No. 12 gauge wire
z
:;;
Hangers for Attaching 16 No. ll__gaiJ&.e wire 0
Runners and Furring Di- :u
rectly to Beams and Joists For Supporting Furring Type of Support: No. 14 gauge wire 5:
Ill
without Runners 4 (Wire Concrete 8 No. 16 gauge wire (2loops) 5
Loops at Supports) Steel No. 16 gauge wire (2loops)5 5
r
Wood c
z
C)
0
0
c
m
....
7 CD
Minimum Sizes and Maximum Spans for Main Runners 6
....
CD
MAXIMUM SPACING Of HANGERS MAXIMUM SPACING Of RUNNERS c:

SIZE AND TYPE
OR SUPPORTS (ALONG RUNNERS) (TRANSVERSE) z
:;;
~"- .3 pound per foot, cold- or hot-rolled channel 2'0" 3'0" 0
1¥.."- .475pound per foot, cold-rolled channel 3'0" 4'0" l:J
1¥.."- .475pound per foot, cold-rolled channel 3'6" 3'6" 3:
1 ¥.. "- .475 pound per foot, cold-rolled channel 4'0" 3'0" m
1 ¥.. "-1.12 pounds perfoot, hot-rolled channel 4'0" 5'0" c:
2 "-1.26 pounds per foot, hot-rolled channel 5'0" 5'0" r=c
2 "- .59 pound per foot, cold-rolled channel
1 ¥.!" x 1 ¥.!" x i'•" angle
5'0"
5'0"
3'6"
3'6"
z
G>
0
Minimum Sizes and Maximum Spans for Cross Furring 6 7 0
c
SIZE AND TYPE Of CROSS FURRING MAXIMUM SPACING Of RUNNERS MAXIMUM SPACING Of CROSS m
OR SUPPORTS FURRING MEMBERS (TRANSVERSE)
'4 " diameter pencil rods 2'0" 12"

%" diameter pencil rods 2'0" 19"
%" diameter pencil rods 2'6" 12"
3'0" 24"
')4 "-.3 pound per foot, cold- or hot-rolled channel 3'6" 16"
4'0" 12"
4'0" 24"
l "-.410 pound per foot, hot-rolled channel 4'6" 19"
5'0" 12"
1Metal suspension systems for acoustical tile and lay-in panel ceiling systems weighing not more than 4 pounds per square foot, including light fixtures
and all ceiling-supported equipment are exempt from Table No. 47-A.
2 All rod hangers shall be protected with a zinc or cadmium coating or with a rust-inhibitive paint.
3All flat hangers shall be protected with a zinc or cadmium coating or with a rust-inhibitive paint.
4 Inserts, special clips or other devices of equal strength may be substituted for those specified.
5Two loops of No. 18 gauge wire may be substituted for each loop of No. 18 gauge wire for attaching steel furring to steel or wood joists.
6 Spans are based on webs of channels being erected vertically.
70ther sections of hot- or cold-rolled members of equivalent strength may be substituted for those specified.
TABLE NO. 47-81-TYPES OF LATH-MAXIMUM SPACING OF SUPPORTS
VERTICAL
(In Inches)
Metsl HORIZONTAL
(In Inches)
MINIMUM WEIGHT Solid
(PIIr Square Yard~ Plaster Wood or
TYPE OF LATH2 GAUGE AND MESH IZE Wood Partitions Other Concrete Metal
I. Expanded Metal Lath 2.5 163 163 12 12 12

(Diamond Mesh) 3.4 163 !63 16 16 16
2. Flat Rib Expanded 2.75 16 16 16 16 16
Meta!Latb 3.4 19 24 19 19 19
3. Stucco Mesh Expanded 1.8 and 16" - - - -
Metal Latb 3.6
3.4 24 245 24 24 24
4. 3fs" Rib Expanded Metal Lath 4.0 24 245 24 24 24
5. Sheet Lath 4.5 24 5 24 24 24 ...
1.95 pounds, No. II gauge, 2" x 2" 24 24 24 24 24 ...
(Q
(Q
Welded 1.16 pounds, No. 16 gauge, 2" x 2" 16 16 16 16 16 c

1.4 pounds, No. 18 gauge, I" X 1"6 164 - - - - z
6. Wire Fabric Latb :;;
0
1.1 pounds, No. 18 gauge, llf2'' Hexagonal 6 24 16 16 24 16 ::EI
Woven4 1.4 pounds, No. 17 gauge, Jif2"HexagonaJ6 24 16 16 24 16
1.4 pounds, No. 18 gauge, I" Hexagonal6 24 16 16 24 16
==
ID
c
7. 3fs'' Gypsum Lath (plain) 16 - 167 16 16 ;=
0
8. lf2'' Gypsum Lath (plain) 24 - 24 24 24 z
Cl
0
0
0
m
....CD
....
CD
c
1
For fire-resistive construction, see Tables Nos. 43-A, 43-B and 43-C. For shear-resisting elements, see Table No. 47-1. z
2
Metallath and wire fabric lath used as reinforcement for portland cement plaster shall be furred out away from vertical supports at least 1/ 4 inch. =n
Self-furring lath meets furring requirements. Exception: Furring of expanded metal lath is not required on supports having a bearing surface width 0
:a
3
of 15/ 8 inches or less. s:
Span may be increased to 24 inches with self-furred metal lath over solid sheathing assemblies approved for this use. m
4 Wire backing required on open vertical frame construction except under expanded metal lath and paperbacked wire fabric lath. c
5 May be used for studless solid partitions. ;=
6 Woven wire or welded wire fabric lath, not to be used as base for gypsum plaster without absorbent paperbacking or slot-perforated separator. c
7Span may be increased to 24 inches on vertical screw or approved nailable assemblies. z
C)
0
0
c
m
......
en
en
TABLE NO. 47-C-TYPES OF LATH-ATIACHMENT TO WOOD AND METAL1 SUPPORTS
STAPLES34
NAILS23 SCREWS36 Round or Flattened Wire
MAXIMUM SPACINGS MAX. SPACINGS MAX. SPACINGS
L
TYPE OF LATH TYPE AND SIZE Vertical I Horizontal Vertical I Horizontal Wire Gauge Crown Leg7 I Vertical I Horizontal
(In Inches) (In Inches) No. (In Inches)
4d blued smooth box

I. Diamond Mesh JI/2" 11 No. 14 gauge
Expanded Metal '!J2" head (clinched)S 6 -
6 - 6 6 16 314 71s
6 6
Lath and Flat I" No. II gauge 7l16"
Rib Metal Lath head, barbed 6 6
1112" No. II gauge 71!6"
head, barbed .....
<0
2. 31s" Rib Metal <0
I \12'' No. II gauge 7/16" At At .....
Lath and Sheet 6 6 6 6 16 3f4 1'14 c
Lath
head, barbed Ribs Ribs z
;;
4d common 1112" At 0
JJ
3. 314" Rib Metal No. 12 112 gauge Ribs At At s::
At At
Lath
114'' head
- Ribs Ribs 16 314 J51s
Ribs Ribs m
2" No. II gauge At 5
'116" head, barbed Ribs r
c
z
G>
0
0
c
m
c
4d blued smooth z
box (clinched)' 6 - ~
::D
I" No. 11 gauge 6 -
4. Wire Fabric 7jg 3:
7II 6" head, barbed 16 3/4 6 6 [II
Lath 9 6 6 c
I W' No. II gauge 7fi6" 16 7fi69 7/s 6 6 r=
c
head, barbed
I W' No. 12 gauge 3/g" 6
6
6
6
z
G)
head, furring
I" No. 12 gauge 3jg" 6 0
0
head c
m
5. Gypsum Lath 11/s" No. 13 gauge g!O gJO g!O gJO 7/s gJO gJO
3/s"
19/64" head, blued 16 3/4
gJO giO giO gHl

6. 1h" Gypsum Lath IV." No. 13 gauge 8 16 3/4 Jl/s giO
Io/64" head, blued 6'' 611 6"
1
Metallath, wire lath, wire fabric lath and metal accessories shall conform with approved standards.
2
For nailable nonload-bearing metal supports, use annular threaded nails or approved staples.
3For fire-resistive construction, see Tables Nos. 43-B and 43-C. For shear-resisting elements, see Table No. 47-1. Approved wire and sheet metal
attachment clips may be used.
4 With chisel or divergent points.
5 Maximum spacing of attachments from longitudinal edges shall not exceed 2 inches.
6 Screws shall be an approved type long enough to penetrate into wood framing not less than 5/ inch and through metal supports adaptable for screw
8
attachment not less than 1/ 4 inch.
7 1
When lath and stripping are stapled simultaneously, increase leg length of staple / 8 inch.
8For interiors only.
9
Attach self-furring wire fabric lath to supports at furring device.
H'fhree attachments per 16-inch-wide lath per bearing. Four attachments per 24-inch-wide lath per bearing. ,.
11
--.1 Supports spaced 24 inches on center. Four attachments per 16-inch-wide lath per bearing. Five attachments per 24-inch-wide lath per bearing. -..I
m
--.1
0
TABLE NO. 47-D-THICKNESS OF PLASTER1
FINISHED THICKNESS OF PLASTER FROM FACE OF LATH, MASONRY, CONCRETE
PLASTER BASE Gypsum Plaster Portland Cement Plaster
I. Expanded Metal Lath 5 /s" minimum 2 Sfg" minimum 2

2. Wire Fabric Lath 5 /g" minimum 2 3f4" minimum (interior)'
7 /s" minimum (exterior)3
3. Gypsum Lath 112" minimum

4. Masonry Walls4 Ifl' minimum 1/2 11
minimum
5. Monolithic Concrete Walls 4 s 5/s" maximum 8 7 hl'maximum 8
6. Monolithic Concrete Ceilings4 s 3/s" maximum 6 7 8 112" maximum 7 8
1For fire-resistive construction, see Tables Nos. 43-A, 43-B and 43-C.
2When measured from back plane of expanded metal lath. exclusive of ribs, or self-furring lath, plaster thickness shall be 3/4-inch minimum.
3When measured from face of support or backing.
....
<0
4 Because masonry and concrete surfaces may vary in plane, thickness of plaster need not be uniform. ....
<0
5When applied over a liquid bonding agent, finish coat may be applied directly to concrete surface. c
6 Approved acoustical plaster may be applied directly to concrete, or over base coat plaster, beyond the maximum plaster thickness shown.
~
'11
7 0n concrete ceilings, where the base coat plaster thickness exceeds the maximum thickness shown, metal lath or wire fabric lath shall be attached to 0
::0
the concrete. 3:
8An approved skim-coat plaster 11!6 inch thick may be applied directly to concrete. CD
5
r
c
z
C)
(')
0
c
m
....
CD
....CD
TABLE NO. 47·E-GYPSUM PLASTER PROPORTIONS 1 c
z
::;;
MAXIMUM VOLUME AGGREGATE PER 100 POUNDS NEAT PLASTER 2 3 0
PLASTER BASE (Cubic Feet) ::0
NUMBER COAT OR LATH Damp Loose Sand4 Perlite or Vermiculite 4 3:
Ill
Base Coat Gypsum Lath 2~ 2 c
I. Two-coat Work r=
c
Base Coat Masonry 3 3
First Coat Lath 25
z
C)
2
0
Second Coat Lath 35 26 0
2. Three-coat Work c
First and m
Masonry 3 3
Second Coats
1
Wood-fibered gypsum plaster may be mixed in the proportions of 100 pounds of gypsum to not more than I cubic foot of sand where applied on
masonry or concrete.
2 For fire-resistive construction, see Tables Nos. 43-A, 43-B and 43-C.
3When determining the amount of aggregate in set plaster, a tolerance of I 0 percent shall be allowed.
4
Combinations of sand and lightweight aggregate may be used, provided the volume and weight relationship of the combined aggregate to gypsum
plaster is maintained.
5If used for both first and second coats, the volume of aggregate may be 2 1h cubic feet.
6Where plaster is I inch or more in total thickness, the proportions for the second coat may be increased to 3 cubic feet.
TABLE NO. 47-F-PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERS 1
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

MAXIMUM WEIGHT
(OR VOLUME) UME MAXIMUM VOLUME
VOLUME PER VOLUME SAND PER VOLUME APPROXIMATE MINIMUM PERIOD MINIMUM INTERVAL
COAT CEMENT CEMENT2 CEMENT' MINIMUM THICKNESS4 MOIST CURING BETWEEN COATS
First I 20 lbs. 4 3jg"5 486 Hours 487 Hours
1st and 2nd Coats
Second I 20 lbs. 5 48 hours 7 Days 8
total%"
J9 1st, 2nd and Finish 8
Finish I 3 -
Coats 7/s"
PORTLAND CEMENT-LIME PLASTER'o
MAXIMUM VOLUME
~~~~~= J8t~::
SAND PER COMBINED
VOLUME VOLUMES CEMENT APPROXIMATE MINIMUM PERIOD MINIMUM INTERVAL
COAT CEMENT11 CEMENT AND LIME MINIMUM THICKNESS4 MOIST CURING BETWEEN COATS
First I I 4 3fs"5 486 Hours 487 Hours
I st and 2nd Coats
Second I I 41!2 48 hours 7 Days 8
total%"
J9 1st, 2nd and Finish 8 ......
Finish I 3 - 10
Coats 7/s" 10
......
1
Exposed aggregate plaster shall be applied in accordance with Section 4709. Minimum overall thickness shall be 3/ 4 inch. c
2Up to 20 pounds of dry hydrated lime (or an equivalent amount of lime putty) may be used as a plasticizing agent in proportion to each sack (cubic z
::;;
foot) of Type I and Type II standard portland cement in first and second coats of plaster. See Section 4708 (a) for use of plastic cement. 0
3 :JJ
When determining the amount of sand in set plaster, a tolerance of 10 percent may be allowed.
4
See Table No. 47-D. s:
5Measured from face of support or backing to crest of scored plaster. ID
6See Section 4707 (c) 2. c
7Twenty-four-hour minimum interval between coats of interior portland cement plaster. For alternate method of application, see Section 4708 (e). i=
0
8Finish coat plaster may be applied to interior portland cement base coats after a 48-hour period.
9For finish coat plaster, up to an equal part of dry hydrated lime by weight (or an equivalent volume of lime putty) may be added to Types I, II and
z
G)
III standard portland cement. (')
10
No additions of plasticizing agents shall be made. 0
11 Type I, II or III standard portland cement. See Section 4708 (a) for use of plastic cement. 0
m
TABLE NO. 47-G-SINGLE-PLV GYPSUM WALLBOARD APPLIED PARALLEL (II) OR PERPENDICULAR (_l) (I)
.....
TO FRAMING MEMBERS c::
z
MAXIMUM LONG DIMENSION OF
MAXIMUM SPACING :;;
THICKNESS SPACING OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD OF FASTENERS1 0
OF FRAMING SHEETS IN RELATION (Center to Center) :D
GYPSUM MEMBER1 TO DIRECTION OF :!:
WALL· PLANE OF (Center to FRAMING MEMBERS (inches)
BOARD FRAMING Center) Ill
(inch) SURFACE (inches) II l_ Nails3 Screws4 NAILSLTO WOOD c::
;=
p p 0
Horizontal
16
7 12 No. 13 gauge, 13jg" long, 19164" head; 0.098" diameter, 11/4" z
24 NP p long, annular ringed; Sd, cooler or wallboards nail (0.086" dia., G)
lh
~~
16 p p 16 1s/g" long, IS/64" head).
Vertical 8
24 p p 12
16 p p
Horizontal 7 12 No. 13 gauge, 1Sj8" long, 19164" head; 0.098" diameter, 13/g"
24 NP p
5/g long, annular ringed; 6d, cooler or wallboardS nail (0.092" dia.,
16 p p 16 17/g" long, 1/4" head).
Vertical 8
24 p p 12
Nail or Screw Fastenings with Adhesives (Maximum Center to Center in Inches)
(Column headings as above) End Edges Field
16 p p 16 16 24
lh Horizontal As required for 1h" and Sfs" gypsum wallboard, see above.
or 24 NP p 16 24 24
Sjg Vertical 24 p p 16 24 NR
NOTES: Horizontal refers to applications such as ceilings. Vertical refers to applications such as walls.
II denotes parallel.
l_ denotes perpendicular. P-Permitted. NP-Not permitted. NR-Not required.
1 A combination of fasteners consisting of nails along the perimeter and screws in the field of the gypsum board may be used with the spacing of the
fasteners shown in the table.
For fire-resistive construction, see Tables Nos. 43-B and 43-C. For shear-resisting elements, see Table No. 47-1.
""-..!
(Continued) 6
2 Where the metal framing has a clinching design formed to receive the nails by two edges of metal, the nails shall not be less than 5/ 8 inch longer than
the wallboard thickness, and shall have ringed shanks. Where the metal framing has a nailing groove formed to receive the nails, the nails shall have
barbed shanks or be 5d, No. 13 1h gauge, l 5/s inches long, 15/64-inch head for 1h-inch gypsum wallboard; 6d, No. 13 gauge, 17/ 8 inches long, 15/ 64 -inch
head for 5/s-inch gypsum wallboard.
3Two nails spaced 2 inches to 2 1h inches apart may be used where the pairs are spaced 12 inches on center except around the perimeter of the sheets.
4 Screws shall be long enough to penetrate into wood framing not less than 5 / inch and through metal framing not less than 1/ inch.
8 4
5For properties of cooler or wallboard nails, see U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17, Table No. 25-17-H.
c
z
=n
0
::D
s::
tD
c
r=c
z
G)
0
0
c
m
1
TABLE NO. 47-H-APPLICATION OFTWO·PLY GYPSUM WALLBOARD .....
<0
<0
FASTENERS ONLY .....
c:
MAXIMUM z
THICKNESS
SPACING OF
FRAMING MAXIMUM SPACING OF FASTENERS
;;
OF GYPSUM MEMBERS (Center to Center) (In Inches) 0
WALLBOARD PLANE OF LONG DIMENSION (Center to :::tJ
(Each Ply)
(Inch)
FRAMING
SURFACE
OF GYPSUM
WALLBOARD SHEETS
Center)
(In Inches) Nalls2
Base Ply
screws3 Staples4 Nails2
Face Ply
Screws3
s:
Ill
Horizontal Perpendicular only 16 7 c:
% r=
c
Vertical Either Direction 16 8
Horizontal Perpendicular only 24 16 24 16 7 12
z
G>
'h (')
Vertical Either Direction 24 8 0
c
Horizontal Perpendicular only 24 7 m
%
Vertical Either Direction 24 8
Fasteners and Adhesives
% Horizontal Perpendicular only 16 7 5

Base Ply Either Direction 8
Vertical 24 7
Temporary Nailing or
~-2 Horizontal Perpendicular only 24 7 12 5
Base Ply Shoring to Comply with
Vertical Either Direction 24 8 7
Section 4711 (d)
o/s Horizontal Perpendicular only 24 7 5
Base Ply Vertical Either Direction 24 8 7
1
For fire-resistive construction, see Tables Nos. 43-B and 43-C. For shear-resisting elements, see Table No. 47-I.
2
Nails for wood framing shall be long enough to penetrate into wood members not less than 3; 4 inch, and the sizes shall conform with the provisions
of Table No. 47-G. For nails not included in Table No. 47-G, use the appropriate size cooler or wallboard nails as set forth in Table No. 25-17-H
of U.B.C. Standarcj No. 25-17. Nails for metal framing shall conform with the provisions of Table No. 47-G.
3
Screws shall conform with the provisions of Table No. 47-G.
Staples shall not, be .Jess than No. 16 ~au?e by 3/4-inch crown width with leg length of 7/ 8 inch. 11/ 8 inches and I 'Is inches for gypsum wallboard
4
th1ckne~ses of .fs 'nch, 1/z mch and· /g mch. respectively.

TABLE NO. 47-1-ALLOWABLE SHEAR FOR WINO OR SEISMIC FORCES IN POUNDS PER FOOT
FOR VERTICAL DIAPHRAGMS OF LATH AND PLASTER OR GYPSUM BOARD FRAME WALL ASSEMBLIES 1
NAIL
SPACING2
THICKNESS OF WALL MAXIMUM SHEAR
TYPE OF MATERIAL MATERIAL CONSTRUCTION (In Inches) VALUE MINIMUM NAIL SIZE3,4
I. Expanded metal. or No. II gauge, ! 1/2" long, 7/16" head

woven wire lath and 7/H" Unblocked 6 180 No. 16 gauge staple. 7/x" legs
portland cement
plaster
2. Gypsum lath 3 /x" Lath and Unblocked 5 100 No. 13 gauge. I W' long, 10.'6·'' head. plasterboard
1/2" Plaster blued nail
3. Gypsum sheathing 1ii'x2'x8' Unblocked 4 75 No. II gauge. I 3/4' long, 7/1o" head, diamond-point.
board galvanized
1h"x4' Blocked 4 175
1h"x4'
Unblocked 7 100
L'nblocked 7 100
4 125 5d cooler or wallboard
If{ Blocked 7 125
....
(0
4 150 ....
(0
c
4. Gypsum wallboard Unblocked 7 115 z
or veneer base. 4 6d cooler or wallboard
::;;
145 0
5 /s" Blocked 7 145 ::XJ
s::
4 175 m
c
Blocked Base ply 9
250
Base ply---6d cooler or wallboard ;=
Two ply Face ply 7 Face ply~Sd cooler or wallboard 0
zC>
0
0
0
m
1These vertical diaphragms shall not be used to resist loads imposed by masonry or concrete construction. See Section 4714 (b). Values are for short- c:
term loading due to wind. Values must be reduced 25 percent for normal loading. The values for gypsum products must be reduced 50 percent for z
dynamic loading due to earthquake in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. =n
2Applies to nailing at all studs, top and bottom plates and blocking. 0
::0
3Alternate nails may be used if their dimensions are not less than the specified dimensions. 3:
4 aJ
For properties of cooler or wallboard nails, see U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17, Table No. 25-17-H.
c:
r=0
z
G)
0
0
0
m
47-J 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 47·J-SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD PANELING

(Meeting Requirements of U.B.C. Standard No. 25·9)
PLYWOOD MAX. SUPPORT NAIL SPACING (Inches)

THICKNESS SPACING NAIL SIZE
(Inch) (Inches) & TYPE Panel Edges Intermediate
1,4 161 4d casing or 6 12
finish
% 24 6d casing or 6 12
finish
'Twenty inches if face grain of paneling is across supports.
776
Part X
SPECIAL SUBJECTS
Chapter 48
CELLULOSE NITRATE
Cellulose Nitrate
Sec. 4801. The handling and storage of cellulose nitrate film shall be in accor-
dance with the Fire Code.
Chapter 49
NO REQUIREMENTS
(See page 979-Appendix.)
777
Chapter 50
PREFABRICATED CONSTRUCTION
General
Sec. 5001. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this chapter is to regulate materials and
establish methods of safe construction where any structure or portion thereof is
wholly or partially prefabricated.
(b) Scope. Unless otherwise specifically st(lted in this chapter, all prefabricated
construction and all materials used therein shall conform to all the requirements of
this code. (See Section 105.)
(c) Definition. PREFABRICATED ASSEMBLY is a structural unit, the inte-
gral parts of which have been built up or assembled prior to incorporation in the
building.
Tests of Materials
Sec. 5002. Every approval of a material not specifically mentioned in this code
shall incorporate as a proviso, the kind and number of tests to be made during pre-
fabrication.
Tests of Assemblies
Sec. 5003. The building official may require special tests to be made on assem-
blies to determine their durability and weather resistance.
Connections
Sec. 5004. Every device designed to connect prefabricated assemblies shall be
capable of developing the strength of the members connected, except in the case
of members forming part of a structural frame designed as specified in Chapter 23.
The connection device shall be designed as required by the other chapters in this
code. Connections between roofs and supporting walls shall be capable of with-
standing an uplift force equal to the requirements contained in Chapter 23.
Pipes and Conduits

Sec. 5005. In structural design, due allowance shall be made for any material to
be removed for the installation of pipes, conduits or other equipment.
Certificate and Inspection

Sec. 5006. (a) Materials. Materials and the assembly thereof shall be inspected
to determine compliance with this code. Every material shall be graded, marked or
labeled where required elsewhere in this code.
(b) Certificate. A Certificate of Approval shall be furnished with every prefab-
ricated assembly, except where the assembly is readily accessible to inspection at
the site. The Certificate of Approval shall certify that the assembly in question has
been inspected and meets all the requirements of this code. When mechanical
779
equipment is installed so that it cannot be inspected at the site, the Certificate of

Approval shall certify that such equipment complies with the laws applying there-
to.
(c) Certifying Agency. To be acceptable under this code, every certificate of ap-
proval shall be made by an approved agency.
(d) Field Erection. Placement of prefabricated assemblies at the building site
shall be inspected by the building official to determine compliance with this code.
(e) Continuous Inspection. If continuous inspection is required for certain
materials where construction takes place on the site, it shall also be required where
the same materials are used in prefabricated construction.
EXCEPTION: Continuous inspection will not be required during prefabrication
if the approved agency certifies to the construction and furnishes evidence of com-
pliance.
780
Chapter 51
ELEVATORS, DUMBWAITERS, ESCALATORS
AND MOVING WALKS
Scope
Sec. 5101. The provisions of this chapter shall apply to the design, construction,
installation, operation, alteration and repair of elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators
and moving walks and their hoistways.
Elevator and Elevator Lobby Enclosures

Sec. 5102. Walls and partitions enclosing elevator and dumbwaiter hoistway
shafts and escalator shafts shall not be of less than the fire-resistive construction
required under Types of Construction in Part IV of this code.
ke~~~;~~:. 1~::~~:1 s::~:~v;g:t ~~a;;~~. exit. The use of such exit shall not require !!
Special Provisions
Sec. 5103. (a) Number of Cars in Hoistway. When there are three or fewer ele-
vator cars in a building, they may be located within the same hoistway enclosure.
When there are four elevator cars, they shall be divided in such a manner that at
least two separate hoistway enclosures are provided. When there are more than
four elevators, not more than four elevator cars may be located within a single ho-
istway enclosure.
(b) Smoke-detection Recall. When the elevator vertical travel is 25 feet or :1:~:
more, each associated elevator lobby or entrance area and associated machine
rooms shall be provided with an approved listed smoke detector for elevator recall
purposes only. The detector may serve to close the elevator lobby door and addi-
tional doors at the hoistway opening allowed in Section 5106.
When the lobby or entrance area smoke detector, or machine room smoke detec-
tor is activated, elevator doors shall be prevented from opening and all cars serving
that lobby or entrance area, or served by equipment in that machine room, shall re-
turn to the main floor where they shall be under manual control only. If the main
floor or transfer floor lobby or entrance-area smoke detector is activated, all cars
serving the main floor or transfer floor shall return to a location approved by the
chief of the fire department and building official where they shall be under manual
control only.
(c) Standby Power. Standby power when required by Section 1807 shall be pro-
vided to at least one elevator in each bank. Standby power shall be manually trans-
ferable to all elevators in each bank. Standby power shall be provided by an
approved self-contained generator set to operate automatically whenever there is a
loss of electrical power to the building. The generator set shall be located in a sepa-
rate room enclosed by at least a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation. The
generator shall have a fuel supply adequate to operate the equipment connected to it
for a minimum of two hours.
781
EXCEPTIONS: I. Where a single elevator serves all floor levels in the building
and is located so that all areas of the building can be reached within a travel distance
of 300 feet from the elevator, then only that elevator need be provided with standby
power.
2. Standby power shall be capable of operating one elevator at a time in any bank
or group of banks having a common lobby.
NOTE: A bank of elevators is a group of elevators or a single elevator controlled
by a common operating system; that is, all those elevators which respond to a single
call button constitute a bank of elevators. There is no limit on the number of cars
which may be in a bank or group, but there may not be more than four cars within a
common hoistway.
(d) Size of Cab and Control Locations. In buildings three or more stories in
height served by an elevator or a building served by an elevator required by Table
No. 33-A, at least one elevator serving all floors shall accommodate a wheelchair,
as follows:
I. Operation and leveling. The elevator shall be automatic and be provided
with a self-leveling feature that will automatically bring the car to the floor land-
ings within a tolerance of plus or minus 1h inch under normal loading and unload-
ing conditions. This self-leveling shall, within its zone, be entirely automatic and
independent of the operating device and shall correct the overtravel or undertravel.
The car shall also be maintained approximately level with the landing, irrespective
of load.
2. Door operation. Power-operated horizontally sliding car and hoistway doors
opened and closed by automatic means shall be provided.
3. Door size. Minimum clear width for elevator doors shall be 36 inches.
EXCEPTION: When approved by the building official, the minimum door
width may be reduced to 32 inches for car with dimensions as permitted by the excep-
tion to Section 5103 (d) 6.
4. Door protective and reopening device. Doors closed by automatic means
shall be provided with a door-reopening device which will function to stop andre-
open a car door and adjacent hoistway door in case the car door is obstructed while
closing. This reopening device shall also be capable of sensing an object or person
in the path of a closing door without requiring contact for activation at a nominal5
and 29 inches above the floor.
Door reopening devices shall remain effective for a period of not less than 20
seconds.
5. Door delay (passenger service time). A. Hall call. The minimum acceptable
time from notification that a car is answering a call (lantern and audible signal) un-
til the doors of that car start to close shall be as indicated in the following table:
DISTANCE TIME
(feet) (seconds)
Oto5 4
10 7
15 10
20 13
782
The distance shall be established from a point in the center of the corridor or
lobby (maximum 5 feet) directly opposite the farthest hall button to the center line
of the hoistway entrance.
B. Car call. The minimum acceptable time for doors to remain fully open shall
not be less than 3 seconds.
6. Car inside. The car inside shall allow for the turning of a wheelchair. The
minimum clear distance between walls or between wall and door, excluding return
panels, shall not be less than 68 inches by 54 inches. Minimum distance from wall
to return panel shall not be less than 51 inches.
EXCEPTION: When approved by the building official, elevators provided in
schools, institutions or other buildings may have a minimum clear distance between
walls or between wall and door, excluding return panels, of not less than 54 inches
by 54 inches. Minimum distance from wall to return panel shall not be less than 51
inches.
7. Car controls. Controls shall be readily accessible from a wheelchair upon en-
tering an elevator.
The center line of the alarm button and emergency stop switch shall be at a nomi-
nal 35 inches, and the highest floor button no higher than 54 inches from the floor.
Floor registration buttons, exclusive of border, shall be a minimum 3/ 4 inch in size,
raised, flush or recessed. Visual indication shall be provided to show each call reg-
istered and extinguished when call is answered. Depth of flush or recessed buttons
when operated shall not exceed % inch.
Markings shall be adjacent to the controls on a contrasting color background to
the left of the controls. Letters or numbers shall be a minimum of 5/ 8 inch high and
raised or recessed 0.030 inch.
Applied plates permanently attached shall be acceptable.
Emergency controls shall be grouped together at the bottom of the control panel.
Controls not essential to the automatic operation of the elevator may be located
as convenient.
8. Car position indicator and signal. A car position indicator shall be provided
above the car operating panel or over the opening of each car to show the position of
the car in the hoistway by illumination of the indication corresponding to the land-
ing at which the car is stopped or passing.
Indications shall be on a contrasting color background and a minimum of 1h inch
in height.
In addition, an audible signal shall sound to tell a passenger that the car is stop-
ping or passing a floor served by the elevator.
A special button located with emergency controls may be provided. Operation
of the button will activate an audible signal only for the desired trip.
9. Telephone or intercommunicating system. A means of two-way communi-
cation shall be provided between the elevator and a point outside the hoistway.
If a telephone is provided, it shall be located a maximum of 54 inches from the
floor with a minimum cord length of29 inches. Markings or the international sym-
bol for telephones shall be adjacent to the control on a contrasting color back-
783
ground. Letters or numbers shall be a minimum of% inch high and raised or
recessed 0.030 inch.
I 0. Floor covering. Floor covering shall have a nonslip hard surface which per-
mits easy movement of wheelchairs.
If carpeting is used, it shall be securely attached, heavy duty, with a tight weave
and low pile, installed without padding.
II. Handrails. A handrail shall be provided on one wall of the car, preferably the
rear. The rails shall be smooth and the inside surface at least 11/z inches clear of the
walls at a nominal height of 32 inches from the floor.
Nominal = ± I inch.
NOTE: Thirty-two inches required to reduce interference with car controls where
lowest button is centered at 35 inches above floor.
12. Minimum illumination. The minimum illumination at the car controls and
the landing when the car and landing doors are open shall not be less than 5 foot-
candles.
13. Hall buttons. The center line of the hall call buttons shall be a nominal42
inches above the floor.
Direction buttons, exclusive of border, shall be a minimum of 3/ 4 inch in size,
raised, flush or recessed. Visual indication shall be provided to show each call reg-
istered and extinguished when the call is answered. Depth of flush or recessed but-
ton when operated shall not exceed % inch.
14. Hall lantern. A visual and audible signal shall be provided at each hoistway
entrance indicating to the prospective passenger the car answering the call and its
direction of travel.
The visual signal for each direction shall be a minimum of2 1/z inches in size and
visible from the proximity of the hall call button.
The audible signal shall sound once for the up direction and twice for the down
direction.
The center line ofthe fixture shall be located a minimum of 6 feet from the floor.
The use of in-car lanterns conforming to above and located in jamb shall be ac-
ceptable.
15. Door jamb marking. The floor designation shall be provided at each hoist-
way entrance on both sides of jamb visible from within the car and the elevator
lobby at a height of 60 inches above the floor. Designations shall be on a contrasting
background 2 inches high and raised 0.030 inch.
(e) Stretcher Requirements. In all structures four or more stories in height, at
least one elevator shall be provided with a minimum clear distance between walls
or between walls and door excluding return panels, not less than 80 inches by 54
inches, and a minimum distance from wall to return panel not less than 51 inches
with a 42-inch side slide door, unless otherwise designed to accommodate an am-
bulance-type stretcher 76 inches by 24 inches in the horizontal position.
784
In buildings where one elevator does not serve all floors, two or more elevators ~
may be used. Thd.e elevators shall be identified by the international symbol for f,
emergency me I cal services (Star of Life). The symbol shall not be less than 3 in- li
ches and placed inside on both sides of the hoistway door frame. The symbol shall ,,j
~~~~a~~~~o lower than 78 inches from the floor level or higher than 84 inches from I
(f) Emergency Signs. Except at the main entrance level, an approved pictorial
sign of a standardized design shall be posted adjacent to each elevator call station
which will indicate that, in case of fire, the elevator will not operate and that exit
stairways should be used.
(g) Restricted or Limited-use Elevators. The building official may waive the
requirements of this section for any elevator designed for limited or restricted use
serving only specific floors or a specific function.
Hoistway Venting
Sec. 5104. Shafts (hoistways) housing elevators extending through more than
two floor levels shall be vented to the outside. The area of the vent shall not be less
than 3 1/z percent of the area of the elevator shaft, provided a minimum of 3 square
feet per elevator is provided.
EXCEPTION: When energy conservation requires that the vents be normally J
closed, automatic venting by actuation of an elevator lobby detector or power failure ,*·f,.',;,l.·
may be accepted. When hoistway pressurization is used, venting upon power failure ..
may be accepted. In either case, a manual override shall be provided. illl
The venting of each individual hoistway shall be independent from any other
hoistway venting, and the interconnection of separate hoistways for the purpose of
venting is prohibited.
Elevator Machine Room Floors

Sec. 5105. Elevator hoistways shall not be vented through an elevator machine
room unless such venting is accomplished by an approved duct system installed
through the elevator machine room. Cable slots entering the machine room shall
be sleeved beneath the machine room floor and extend to not less than 12 inches
below the shaft vent to inhibit the passage of smoke into the machine room.
Additional Doors
Sec. 5106. Doors other than the hoistway door and the elevator car door shall be
prohibited at the point of access to an elevator car.
EXCEPTION: Doors which are readily openable from the car side without a
key, tool, or special knowledge or effort.
785
1991 UNIFORM BUilDING CODE
NOTES
786
Chapter 52
LIGHT-TRANSMITTING PLASTICS
Scope
Sec. 5201. (a) General. The provisions of this chapter shall govern the quality
am:J methods of application of plastics for use as light-transmitting materials in
buildings and structures. For foam plastics, see Sections 1705 (e) and 1713.
Light-transmitting plastic materials which meet the other code requirements for
walls and roofs may be used in accordance with the other applicable chapters of the
code.
(b) Approval for Use. The building official shall require that sufficient techni-
cal data be submitted to substantiate the proposed use of any light-transmitting ma-
terial and, if it is determined that the evidence submitted is satisfactory for the use
intended, the building official may approve its use subject to the requirements of
this chapter.
(c) Identification. Each unit or package of plastic shall be identified with a mark
or decal satisfactory to the building official, which includes identification as to the
material classification.
(d) Combination of Glazing and Exterior Wall Panels. Combinations of plas-
tic glazing and plastic exterior wall panels shall be subject to the area, height, per-
centage and separation requirements applicable to the class of plastics as
prescribed for wall panel installation.
(e) Combination of Roof Panels and Skylights. Combinations of plastic roof
panels and plastic skylights shall be subject to the area percentage and separation
requirements applicable to roof panel installation.
(f) Standards of Quality. The standards listed below labeled a "U.B.C. stan- J
dard" are also listed in Chapter 60, Part II, and are part of this code. The other stan- ir
~~~~s(l~:~~~~:~:s~~~~i~~~n;0~~~ards and as such are not adopted as part of this 1111
I. U.B.C. Standard No. 32-7, Test Method for Determining the Fire Retardancy
of Roof-covering Materials
I
2. U .B.C. Standard No. 52-2, Chamber Method of Test for Measuring the Densi-
ty of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastic Materials
3. ASTM D 1929, Ignition Properties of Plastics
4. ASTM D 635, Method ofTesting for Determining Classification of Approved
Light-transmitting Plastics ~=~~
Definitions
EXTERIOR WALL PANELS are materials which are not classified as plastic
glazing and which are used as light-transmitting media in exterior walls.
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC is plastic reinforced with glass fi-
ber having not less than 20 percent of glass fibers by weight.
787
GLAZING is material which has all edges set in frame or sash and is not held by
mechanical fasteners which pass through the material.
LIGHT-DIFFUSING SYSTEM is construction consisting in whole or in part
of lenses, panels, grids or baffles made with approved plastics positioned below
independently mounted electrical light sources. Lenses, panels, grids and baffles
which are part of an electrical fixture shall not be considered as a light-diffusing
system.
PLASTIC MATERIALS, APPROVED. See Chapter 4.
ROOF PANELS are structural panels other than skylights which are fastened to
structural members or structural panels or sheathing and which are used as
light-transmitting media in the plane of the roof.
THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL is a plastic material which is capable ofbe-
ing repeatedly softened by increase of temperature and hardened by decrease of
temperature.
THERMOSETTING MATERIAL is a plastic material which is capable of
being changed into a substantially nonreformable product when cured.
Design and Installation

Sec. 5203. (a) Structural Requirements. Plastic materials in their assembly
shall be of adequate strength and durability to withstand the design loads as pre-
scribed elsewhere in this code. Technical data shall be submitted to establish
stresses, maximum unsupported spans and such other information for the various
thicknesses and forms used as may be deemed necessary by the building official.
(b) Fastening. Fastening shall be adequate to withstand design loads as pre-
scribed elsewhere in this code. Proper allowance shall be made for expansion and
contraction of plastic materials in accordance with accepted data on coefficient of
expansion of the material and other material in conjunction with which it is
employed.
Glazing of Unprotected Openings

Sec. 5204. In Type V-N construction, doors, sash and framed openings notre-
quired to be fire protected may be glazed or equipped with approved plastic materi-
al.
In types of construction other than Type V-N, openings not required to be fire
protected may be glazed or equipped with approved plastic, subject to the follow-
ing requirements:
(a) The aggregate area of plastic glazing shall not exceed 25 percent of the area of
any wall face ofthe story in which it is installed. The area of a single pane of glazing
installed above the first story shall not exceed 16 square feet and the vertical dimen-
sion of a single pane shall not exceed 4 feet.
EXCEPTION: When an approved automatic sprinkler system is provided
throughout, the area of glazing may be increased to a maximum of 50 percent of the
wall face of the story in which it is installed with no limit on the maximum dimension
or area of a single pane of glazing.
788
(b) Approved flame barriers extending 30 inches beyond the exterior wall in the
plane of the floor, or vertical panels not less than 4 feet in height, shall be installed
between glazed units located in adjacent stories.
(c) Plastics shall not be installed more than 65 feet above grade level.
Light-transmitting Exterior Wall Panels
Sec. 5205. In Type V-N construction, approved plastics may be installed in ex-
terior walls provided the walls are not required to have a fire-resistive rating.
In types of construction other than Type V-N, approved plastics may be installed
in exterior walls, provided the walls are not required to have a fire-resistive rating,
subject to the following requirements:
(a) Approved exterior wall panels shall not be installed more than 40 feet above
grade level.
(b) Approved exterior wall panels shall not be installed in exterior walls located
less than I 0 feet from the property line determined in accordance with Section 504.
(c) The area and size shall be limited to that set forth in Table No. 52-A.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In structures which are provided with approved flame barri-
ers extending 30 inches beyond the exterior wall in the plane of the floor, there need
be no vertical separation at the floor except that provided by the vertical thickness of
the flame-barrier projection.
2. When an approved automatic sprinkler system is provided throughout the build-
ing, the maximum percentage area of plastic panels in the exterior wall and the maxi-
mum square feet of any individual panel may be increased 50 percent above that set
forth in Table No. 52-A, and the separation requirements, both vertical and horizon-
tal, as set forth in Table No. 52-A may be reduced by 50 percent.
Roof Panels
Sec. 5206. Approved plastic roof panels may be installed in roofs of buildings
not required to have a fire-resistive rating, subject to the following limitations:
(a) Individual roof panels or units shall be separated from each other by dis-
tances of not less than 4 feet measured in a horizontal plane.
(b) Roof panels or units shall not be installed within that portion of a rooflocated
within a distance to property line or public way where openings in exterior walls
are prohibited or required to be protected, whichever is most restrictive.
(c) Roof panels of Class CCI plastics shall be limited to a maximum individual
panel area of 150 square feet, and the total maximum aggregate area of all panels
shall not exceed 33 1h percent of the floor area of the room or space sheltered. Roof
panels of Class CC2 plastics shall be limited to a maximum individual panel area of
I 00 square feet, and the total maximum aggregate area of all panels shall not ex-
ceed 25 percent of the floor area of the room or space sheltered.
EXCEPTION: Swimming pool shelters are exempt from the area limitations of
Section 5206, provided such shelters do not exceed 5,000 square feet in area and are
not closer than I 0 feet to the property line or adjacent building.
Skylights
Sec. 5207. (a) General. Skylight assemblies may be glazed with approved plas-
tic materials in accordance with the following provisions:
789
I. The plastics shall be mounted at least4 inches above the plane of the roof by a
curb constructed consistent with the requirements for the type of construction clas-
sification.
EXCEPTION: Curbs may be omitted on roofs ofGroupR, Division 3 Occupan-
cies with a minimum slope of 3:12 when self-flashing skylights are used.
2. Flat or corrugated plastic skylights shall slope at least 4:12. Dome-shaped
skylights shall rise above the mounting flange a minimum distance equal to I 0 per-
cent of the maximum span of the dome but not less than 5 inches.
EXCEPTION: Skylights which pass the Class B Burning Brand Test specified
in U.B.C. Standard No. 32-7.
3. The edges of the plastic lights or domes shall be protected by metal or other
noncombustible materials or shall be tested to show that equivalent fire protection
is provided.
EXCEPTION: The metal or noncombustible edge is not required where non-
rated roof coverings are permitted.
4. Each skylight unit may have a maximum area within the curb of I 00 square
feet for CC2 material and 200 square feet for CCI material.
EXCEPTIONS: I. The maximum area within the curb need not be limited if the
building on which the skylights are located is not more than one story in height, the
building has an exterior separation from other buildings of at least 30 feet, and the
room or space sheltered by the roof is not classified in a Group I, Division 1.1, 1.2 or
3 Occupancy or as a required means of egress.
2. Except for Groups A, Divisions I and 2, I and H, Divisions 1.1, 1.2 and 2 Occu-
pancies, the maximum area within the curb need not be limited where skylights are:
A. Serving as a fire venting system complying with this code: or
B. Used in a building completely equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler
system complying with U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1 or 38-3.
5. The aggregate area of skylights installed in the roof shall not exceed 33 1h per-
cent of the floor areaofthe room or space sheltered by the roof when CC 1 materials
are used and 25 percent when CC2 materials are used.
6. Skylight units shall be separated from each other by a distance of not less than
4 feet measured in a horizontal plane.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Except for Groups A, Divisions I and 2, I and H, Divisions
1.1, 1.2 and 2 Occupancies, the separation is not required where the skylights are:
A. Serving as a fire venting system complying with this code; or
B. Used in a building completely equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler
system complying with U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1 or 38-3.
2. Multiple skylights located above the same room or space with a combined area
not exceeding the limits set forth in Section 5207 (a) 4.
7. Skylights shall not be installed within that portion of a roof located within a
distance to property line or public way where openings in exterior walls are prohib-
ited or required to be protected, whichever is most restrictive.
(b) Plastics over Stair Shafts. Approved plastic materials which will not auto-
matically vent but which are able to be vented may be used over stairways and
shafts, provided the installation conforms to the requirements of Section 5207 (a).
790
Light-diffusing Systems
Sec. 5208. (a) General. Plastic diffusers in light-diffusing systems shall be sup-
ported directly or indirectly by the use of noncombustible hangers.
Light-transmitting plastic materials in light-diffusing systems shall comply
with Chapter 42 unless the approved plastic used in the light-diffusing system
meets the following requirements:
I. Diffusers shall fall from their mounting at an ambient temperature of at least
200°F. below the ignition temperature of the plastic material.
2. Diffusers shall remain in place at an ambient room temperature of 175°F. for a
period of not less than 15 minutes.
3. The maximum length of any single plastic panel shall not exceed I 0 feet, and
the maximum area of any single plastic panel shall not exceed 30 square feet.
4. The area of approved plastic materials when used in required exits as defined
in Chapter 33 shall not exceed 30 percent of the aggregate area of the ceiling in
which they are installed.
EXCEPTION: The aggregate area need not be limited in a building equipped
with an approved automatic sprinkler system complying with U.B.C. Standard No. !!!!
38-1 or 38-3. :m
(b) Plastic light-diffusing system shall not be installed in the areas to be equipped
with automatic sprinklers unless appropriate tests have shown that the system does
not prevent effective operation of the sprinklers or unless sprinklers are located
both above and below the light-diffusing system to give effective sprinkler protec-
tion.
Diffusers in Electrical Fixtures

Sec. 5209. Use of approved plastics as light-diffuser panels installed in ap-
proved electrical lighting fixtures in or on walls or ceilings shall comply with
Chapter 42 unless the plastic panels meet the requirements of Section 5208 (a).
Partitions
Sec. 5210. Light-transmitting plastics may be used in or as partitions, provided
they meet the requirements of this code.
Awnings and Patio Covers

Sec. 5211. Approved plastics may be used in awnings and patio covers. All such
awnings shall be constructed in accordance with provisions specified in Section
4506 for projections and appendages. For patio covers, see Appendix Chapter 49.
Greenhouses
Sec. 5212. Approved plastics may be used in lieu of plain glass in greenhouses.
Canopies
Sec. 5213. Approved plastic panels may be installed in canopies erected over
motor vehicle service station pumps, provided the panels are located at least I 0 feet
791
from any building on the same property and face yards or streets not less than 40
feet in width on the other sides. The aggregate area of plastics shall not exceed
1,000 square feet. The maximum area of any individual panel shall not exceed 100
square feet.
Solar Collectors
Sec. 5214. Solar collectors having noncombustible sides and bottoms may be
equipped with plastic covers on buildings not over three stories in height or 9,000
square feet in total floor area, provided the plastic cover when exceeding a thick-
ness of 0.0 I 0 inch shall be of approved plastic and the total area shall not exceed
33 1h percent of the roof area for CCI materials or 25 percent of the roof area for
CC2 materials.
EXCEPTION: Plastic covers having a thickness ofO.OIO inch or less may be of
any plastic, provided the total area of the collectors does not exceed 33 1h percent of
the roof area.
792
....
l8
....
c:
z
=n
0
::0
3:
ID
c:
;::::
c
TABLE NO. 52-A- z
C)
AREA LIMITATION AND SEPARATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EXTERIOR WALL PANELS 1 0
0
MINIMUM SEPARATION c
OF PANELS
m
MAXIMUM PERCENT AREA MAXIMUM SQUARE FEET MAXIMUM (Feet)
OF EXTERIOR WALLS IN SINGLE INDIVIDUAL PANEL HEIGHT
CLASS OF PLASTIC PLASTIC PANELS PANELS (Feet) vertical Horizontal
CCI 25 100 16 6 4
CC2 15 75 8 8 4
1The ..
maximum percent area of extenor walls hmJtatwn shall be based upon the mdiVIdual story wall area .
Chapter 53
(SEE APPENDIX CHAPTER 53)
794
Chapter 54
GLASS AND GLAZING
Scope
Sec. 5401. (a) General. The provisions of this chapter apply to:
I. Exterior glass and glazing in all occupancies. ; ,:
EXCEPTION: Occupancy Groups Rand M not over three stories in height and :t
located in areas with a minimum basic wind speed less than 80 miles per hour. ~:~;:
2. Interior and exterior glass and glazing in all occupancies subject to human
impact as specified in Section 5406 and hinged shower doors in all occupancies as
specified in Section 5407.
(b) Standards. Standards for material shall be as specified in this chapter and
U.B.C. Standard No. 54-l.
Standards for glazing subject to human impact (hazardous location) as speci-
fied in Section 5406 shall be as specified in U.B.C. Standard No. 54-2.
(c) Other Provisions. See Part IV of this code for additional glass requirements
where openings are required to be fire protected, and Section 5204 for openings
glazed with plastics.
(d) Standards of Quality. The standards listed below labeled a "U.B.C. stan-
dard" are also listed in Chapter 60, Part II, and are part of this code.
l. U.B.C. Standard No. 54-I, Glass Standard Specification
2. U.B.C. Standard No. 54-2, Safety Glazing
Identification
Sec. 5402. Each light shall bear the manufacturer's label designating the type
and thickness of glass. When approved by the building official, labels may be
omitted, provided an affidavit is furnished by the glazing contractor certifying that
each light is glazed in accordance with approved plans and specifications. ldentifi-
cation of glazing in hazardous locations shall be in accordance with Section 5406.
Area Limitations
Sec. 5403. Glass in windows, curtain and window walls, skylights, doors and
other exterior applications shall be chosen to withstand the loads for cladding as
set forth in Chapter 23, Part II.
The area of individual lights shall not be more than as set forth in Graph No.
54-1, as adjusted by Table No. 54-A. Glass sizing for skylight applications shall be
adjusted per Section 3405.
Graph No. 54-1 is applicable to rectangular glass firmly supported on all four i !i
edges. {
When approved by the building official, alternate means for selecting glass may
be used in place of Graph No. 54-1 and Table No. 54-A.
Glass and glazing subject to ice or snow loads shall be designed in accordance
with Chapter 23.
795
Glazing Support
I
;?~
Sec. 5404. Glass shall be firmly supported on all four edges. For glass not firmly
supported on all four edges, design shall be submitted to the building official for
approval.
Louvered Windows and Jalousies

Sec. S4DS. Regular float, wired and patterned glass in jalousies and louvered
windows shall be no thinner than nominal 3fi 6 inch and no longer than 48 inches.
' Exposed glass edges shall be smooth.
Wired glass with wire exposed on longitudinal edges shall not be used in jalou-
sies or louvered windows.
Safety Glazing
Sec. 5406. (a) General. Glazing subject to human impact shall comply with this
. . section.
(b) Identification. Each light of safety glazing material installed in hazardous
locations as defined in Section 5406 (d) shall be identified by a label which will
specify the labeler, whether the manufacturer or installer, and state that safety glaz-
ing material has been utilized in such installation. For additional identification re-
quirements and for limitation on size and use by category classification, see U .B.C.
Standard No. 54-2, Part I.
Each unit oftempered glass shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer.
The identification shall be etched or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible when
the unit is glazed. Tempered spandrel glass is exempted from permanent labeling
but such glass shall be identified by the manufacturer with a removable paper label.
~
. (c) Human Impact Loads. Individual glazed areas in hazardous locations such
~.. as those indicated in Section 5406 (d) shall pass the test requirements of Part I of
, U.B.C. Standard No. 54-2.
1.
i
ffi
W
..·
EXCEPTIONS: I. Louvered windows and jalousies complying with Section
5405 need not comply with Section 5406 (c).
2. Polished wired glass complying with Part II of U.B.C. Standard No. 54-2 may
be used in fire-rated assemblies and in locations specified in Items 6 and 7 of Section
w 5406 (d).
Plastic glazing used in exterior applications also shall comply with the weather-
ing requirements in Part II of U.B.C. Standard No. 54-2.
(d) Hazardous Locations. The following shall be considered specific hazard-
ous locations for the purposes of glazing:
I. Glazing in ingress and egress doors except jalousies.
~ 2. Glazing in fixed and sliding panels of sliding door assemblies and panels in
~ swinging doors other than wardrobe doors.
3. Glazing in storm doors.
4. Glazing in all unframed swinging doors.
~.~ 5. Glazing in doors and enclosures for hot tubs, whirlpools, saunas, steam
"' rooms, bathtubs and showers. Glazing in any portion of a building wall enclosing
796
~~~~:~~~Jva;t:s~:~sd:~e:~~a~~:~~~r:~~~~~:t~dge of the glazing is less than 60 ,. •.

6. Glazing in fixed or operable panels adjacent to a door where the nearest ex- ,~
'.,:· ~ .·
:r.:·.'·.'··
..
posed edge of the glazing is within a 24-inch arc of either vertical edge of the door
\n a dosed position and where the bottom exposed edge of the glazing is less than ·•·•
60 inches above the walking surface. f
d<:~:::~:~·;~~:::~~~=.:~~~ 1~~~~,;~~~\:~~ion• :..·~ !

B. Exposed bottom edge less than 18 inches above the floor. .\
!.'•• .'.
c. Exposed top edge greater than 36 inches above the floor. ·.: r. •'.~·.[:
D. One or more walking surfaces within 36 inches horizontally of the plane of .
the glazing.
8. Glazing in railings regardless of height above a walking surface. Included are
structural baluster panels and nonstructural in-fill panels.
EXCEPTION: The following products and applications are exempt from the require-
ments for hazardous locations as listed in Items I through 8:
A. Glazing in Item 6 when there is an intervening wall or other permanent barrier between
the door and the glazing.
B. Glazing in Item 7 when a protective bar is installed on the accessible sides of the glazing
34 inches to 38 inches above the floor. The bar shall be capable of withstanding a horizontal
load of 50 pounds per linear foot without contacting the glass and be a minimum of 11lz inches
in height.
C. Outboard pane in insulating glass units and in other multiple glazed panels in Item 7 ""
when the bottom exposed edge of the glass is 25 feet or more above any grade, roof, walking ~
surface or other horizontal or sloped (within 45 degrees of horizontal) surface adjacent to "
the glass exterior. l
D. Openings in door through which a 3-inch-diameter sphere will not pass. \\i
rat~~J:E~;::~: l~::::~~:~::e::rc::::::~::. in Items I, 2, 6 and 7 when used for deco- .'i·i~·•.

.:.r.:• ..t··•.•
G. Doors in commercial refrigerated cabinets. .~

H. Glass block panels complying with Section 2407 U)5.
(e) Wardrobe Doors. Glazing in wardrobe doors shall meet the impact test re-
quirements for safety glazing as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 54-2, Part II.
Laminated glass must also meet the boil test requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No.
54-2, Part II.
EXCEPTION: The impact test shall be modified so that if no breakage occurs
when the impacting object is dropped from the height of 18 inches, the test shall prog-
ress in height increments of 6 inches until the maximum of 48 inches is reached.
(f) Glass Railings. Glass used as structural balustrade panels in railings shall be
one of the following types:
I. Single fully tempered glass.
2. Laminated fully tempered glass.
3. Laminated heat-strengthened glass.
797
. 5406-5408 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
The panels and their support system shall be designed to withstand the load spe-
cified in Table No. 23-B. A safety factor of 4 shall be used.
Each handrail or guardrail section shall be supported by a minimum of three
glass balusters or otherwise supported so that it remains in place should one balus-
ter panel fail.
Glass balusters shall not be installed without a handrail or guardrail attached.
For all glazing types the minimum nominal thickness shall be 1/ 4 inch.
Glazing materials shall not be installed in railings in parking garages except for
those locations where the railing is not exposed to impact from vehicles.
Hinged Shower Doors

Sec. 5407. Hinged shower doors shall open outward.
Racquetball and Squash Courts

Sec. 5408. (a) Test Method. Each panel of glass (including doors) in an actual
installation or test mockup shall be impacted from the playing side at a point 59 in-
ches from the playing surface and its horizontal midpoint. The impactor and test
procedure shall be as described in U.B.C. Standard No. 54-2, Part I, Category II,
using a drop height of 48 inches. Results from a test mockup shall apply only to ac-
tual installations in which the glass is no greater in either dimension and is at least
as thick. Fittings and attachments for a mockup shall be identical to those used in
actual installations. The conditions of Section 5408 (b) shall be met.
(b) End Point Conditions. The following conditions shall be met when the glass
is impacted as described in Section 5408 (a):
I. The glass shall not break.
2. Deflection at the point of impact shall not exceed 11/z inches.
3. Door hardware shall remain intact and operable.
4. The deflection of the door edges shall be no greater than the following for the
listed drop heights. The impactor and procedures shall be as indicated in Section
5408 (a).
Drop Height Deflection
24 inches Thickness of adjacent glass+ 1/ 8 inch
36 inches Thickness of adjacent glass+ 1/ 4 inch
48 inches Thickness of adjacent glass + 1/z inch
798
300
250
"' "'"\ 1'\."' "
"'"""'""'"' "
t\. "\
200
150 ~~
"\ "\
t
100
80
~""' """" '" 1\.
"'"'-""' '"'- '
'r-. "
i'-, f\..
1'-.. 'r-. -~
"""'\ ~ ~ '~,;~K .
d
""
Ill
~
w
a:
<(
Ill
Ill
80
50
40
~""'
~~ '"
"~ "~~
~ ~~1
"'- " '
.f\.. ' "\ ~
~ I~" 1'\\(v/.. r\", "I\. ""'
:5CJ
"' "'"'
:::E 30
"'\'1\.."' ""'~
::I
:::E "'-"
~ ~ ~~'\ ' f\ "\
25 ~ 6';:.· >
~
:::E 20 OU' '
"~IS't:a~r·~or.~~6') ~ ~1'\ '\'\, ~

""' ~
,," ,,
' '\ '\
15
~R~
""
'\ '\
10
8
' ' ''\ ' ' '\ '\.'\
' '
'\.
8
10 15 20 30
" "' '
40 50 60 80
1'\
100
"\."
1\. '\.. " :'\..
150 200
DESIGN WIND PRESSURE FROM CHAPTER 23, PART II-

POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT
GRAPH NO. 54·1-MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE AREA OF GLASS1
1Applicable for ratios of width to length of I: I to 5: I. Design safety factor= 2.5.
799
TABLE NO. 54-A-ADJUSTMENT FACTORs-RELATIVE

RESISTANCE TO WIND LOADS
Glasa Type Adjustment Factor!
Laminated2 0.75
Fully Tempered 4.00
Heat Strengthened 2.00
Wired 0.50
Insulating Glass 3 - 2 panes 1.70
-3 panes 2.55
Patterned4 1.00
Regular (annealed) 1.00
Sandblasted 0.40 5
1Loads determined from Chapter 23, Part II, shall be divided by this adjustment factor for
use with Graph No. 54-I.
2Applies when two plies are identical in thickness and type; use total glass thickness, not
thickness of one ply.
3 Applies when each glass panel is the same thickness and type; use thickness of one panel.
4 Use minimum glass thickness, i.e.,measured at the thinnest part of the pattern; if necessary,
interpolation of curves in Graph No. 54-I may be required.
5 Factor varies depending on depth and severity of sand blasting; value shown is minimum .
..
Chapter 55
(SEE APPENDIX CHAPTER 55)
800
Chapter 56
COVERED MALL BUILDINGS
General
Sec. 5601. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this chapter is to establish minimum
standards of safety for the construction and use of covered mall buildings having
not more than three levels.
(b) Scope. The provisions of this chapter shall apply to buildings or structures
defined herein as covered mall buildings and shall supersede other similar require- i!m
ments in other chapters of the code.
This chapter does not apply to terminals for transportation facilities and lobbies
of hotel, apartment and office buildings.
Covered mall buildings conforming with all other applicable provisions ofthis
code are not required to comply with the provisions of this chapter.
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter, certain terms are defined as fol-
lows:
ANCHOR BUILDING is an exterior perimeter department store, major mer-
chandising center or Group R, Division 1 Occupancy having direct access to a cov- ~
ered mall building but having all required exits independent of the mall.
COVERED MALL BUILDING is a single building enclosing a number of
tenants and occupancies such as retail stores, drinking and dining establishments,
entertainment and amusement facilities, offices and other similar uses wherein two
or more tenants have a main entrance into the mall.
GROSS LEASABLE AREA is the total floor area designed for tenant occu-
pancy and exclusive use. The area of tenant occupancy is measured from the center
lines of joint partitions to the outside of the tenant walls. All tenant areas, including
areas used for storage, shall be included in calculating gross leasable area.
MALL is a roofed or covered common pedestrian area within a covered mall
building which serves as access for two or more tenants and may have three levels
that are open to each other.
(d) Applicability of Other Provisions. Except as specifically required by this
chapter, covered mall buildings shall meet all applicable provisions of this code.
Types of Construction and Required Yards for Unlimited Area

Sec. 5602. (a) Type of Construction. One- and two-level covered mall build-
ings may be of any type of construction permitted by this code. Three-level covered
mall buildings shall be at least Type II One-hour construction.
Anchor buildings and parking garages shall be limited in height and area in ac- ~
cordance with Sections 505, 506 and 507.
(b) Required Yards for Unlimited Area. Covered mall buildings may be of un-
limited area, provided the covered mall building, attached anchor buildings and
parking garages are adjoined by public ways, streets or yards not less than 60 feet in
width along all exterior walls.
801
Special Provisions
Sec. 5603. (a) Automatic Sprinkler Systems. The covered mall building shall
be provided with an automatic sprinkler system conforming to the provisions of
,~ U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1 which is a part of this code. See Chapter60. In addition
to these standards, the automatic sprinkler system shall comply with the following:
1. All automatic sprinkler system control valves shall be electrically supervised
b)' an approved central, proprietary or remote station or a local alarm service which
will give an audible signal at a constantly attended location.
2. The automatic sprinkler system shall be complete and operative throughout
all occupied space in the covered mall building prior to occupancy of any of the
tenant spaces. The level of protection provided for unoccupied tenant space shall
be subject to the approval of the building official and fire department.
3. Sprinkler protection for the mall shall be independent from that provided for
tenant spaces. However, tenant spaces may be supplied by the same system if they
can be independently controlled.
The respective increases for area and height for covered mall buildings, includ-
il: ing anchor buildings, specified in Sections 506, 507 and 709 of this code, shall be
permitted.
!!: (b) Standpipes. There shall be a combined Class I standpipe outlet connected to
~''' a system sized to deliver 250 gallons per minute at the most hydraulically remote
I~:f'~~;:::::~::~:~~~::h::~~::::~::::::~follow-
l! outlet. The outlet shall be supplied from the mall zone sprinkler system and shall be
tl the2~~~ ~ach floor-level landing within enclosed stairways opening directly onto
1
'~!' 3. At exterior public entrances to the mall.
(c) Smoke-control System. l. Required. A mechanically operated air-handl-
ing system shall be installed in covered mall buildings which will restrict the move-
ment of smoke to the general area of fire origin and maintain the exiting system in a
condition that is safe for exiting.
~! 2. General. The smoke-control system shall be connected to both the sprinkler
,.,. system and the smoke detector system and shall automatically operate when either
'.®·,'i·'·'':··'l ;:~~:=~~;;::~~:;:s~~~::.:.""'"''
(i)
of mmom ""'''"""·
A minimum of one area-type smoke detector in each tenant space hav-
} ing an opening to the mall. Such detector shall be located at each open-
~·.'·.··'.',··'.l.'l. (ii) i':r::~~~:sa~~ke detectors or approved projected beam detectors shall

be installed to monitor the mall area that can contain combustible load-
ing such as kiosks or displays. Such installations shall be engineered to
!!!I
distinguish fire in the mall from fire in the tenant space.
802
B. ~et~~:!e;;~;:~~l equipment for the mall shall be separate from that serv- ). ·'~.,!:~·'
.. ...
C. The covered mall building shall be compartmented into smoke-control

zones. Smoke-control zones shall be separated from each other by construc-
tion having a fire-resistive time period of not less than one hour. Walls be- t
::ee~::nt~n~~:~~e~:~:et~;~h=r~~e0~:~~~~~:~~~~~ones shall extend from ~ ~
E. A smoke-control zone shall coincide with the area of coverage of a single

sprinkler supply. Within that sprinkler zone there may be one or more
air-moving systems but no single smoke-control zone shall be larger than
the sprinkler area.
F. When a fire occurs within a tenant sprinkler zone, that zone is to go to 100
percent exhaust and the supply air to that zone is to be shut down. All adjoin- ~11
··:·
ing tenant smoke-control zones are to go into normal operation. The mall ili
shall go to 100 percent fresh air supply without exhaust or recirculation.
G. When a fire occurs within the mall, the mall smoke-control equipment shall
go to 100 percent exhaust and the adjoining tenant spaces shall go into nor-
mal operation.
H. The covered mall building smoke-control equipment shall be sized to pro-
vide a minimum of six air changes per hour.
I. Mall exhaust inlets shall not be less than 6 feet above the walking surface for
each pedestrian level.
J. During those hours when the building air-conditioning systems are not op- \ii
erating, smoke detector or sprinkler systems shall be designed so the activa- t
tion of either will transmit an alarm as required in Subsection (a), Item 1, of II
this stectiontant~ shaTllhactiv~te the smhokeb-cotntrtodl sby~em.th k t ·.=.:l.:.:.'
3 . Accep ance es mg. e equipment s a11 e es e etore e smo e-con ro1
~~~~E~J!§~~~::::::::::::~:::::;::::~:t·.':
are installed and shall be certified by the installer as being complete and functional. .·
B. The mechanical engineer or designer of the smoke-control system shall coor-
· · · ·'i
· · : ':!· · · · · :· · · · · '!,·....
~~§s::::::::::~::::::::::::::::~:::::• :.
(i) Automatic smoke-control mode, after activation of first alarm.
·';,.r!,l
..',·'.-'··'·
~
(ii) Manual override of normal and smokeccontrol modes.
(iii) Return to normal.
803
(d) Fire Department Access to Equipment. Rooms or areas containing con-

trols for air-conditioning systems, automatic fire-extinguishing systems or other
detection, suppression or control elements shall be identified for use by the fire de-
partment.
(e) Tenant Separation. Each tenant space shall be separated from other tenant
spaces by a wall having a fire-resistive rating of not less than one hour. The separa-
tion wall shall extend from the floorto the underside of the ceiling above. Except as
required by other provisions of this code, the ceiling need not be a fire-resistive as-
sembly. A separation is not required between any tenant space and a mall except for
occupancy separations required by Section 5605 or for smoke-control purposes.
(f) Public Address System. Covered mall buildings exceeding 50,000 square
feet in total floor area shall be provided with a public address system accessible for
use by the fire department. Covered mall buildings of 50,000 square feet or less in
total floor area, when provided with a public address system, shall have such sys-
tem accessible for use by the fire department.
(g) Plastic Panels and Plastic Signs. Within every story or level and from side
wall to side wall of each tenant space or mall, approved plastic panels and signs
shall be limited as follows:
1. They shall not exceed 20 percent of the wall area facing the mall;
2. They shall not exceed a height of 36 inches except that if the sign is vertical
then the height shall not exceed 96 inches and the width shall not exceed 36 inches;
3. They shall be located a minimum distance of 18 inches from adjacent tenants.
(h) Lease Plan. Each covered mall building owner shall provide both the build-
ing and fire departments with a lease plan showing the location of each occupancy
and its exits after the Certificate of Occupancy has been issued. Such plans shall be
kept current. No modifications or changes in occupancy or use shall be made from
that shown on the lease plan without prior approval of the building official.
1.' tween anchor buildings of Type I, II-F.R, II One-hour or II-N construction and the
i,l.:,i:~.'i
. separatiOn tween roup , 0!VISion 1 s 1 eepmg rooms an t e rna11, opemngs e-
(i) o.penbeings betGween ARnc ~o~ ~uil di ng ~nd Mall. Exdcehpt for the oc~upanbcy
jj[ mall need not be protected.

U) Standby Power. Covered mall buildings exceeding 50,000 square feet shall
be provided with standby power systems which are capable of operating the public
'~~~ address system, the smoke-control activation system and the smoke-control equip-
r·':,~l.'.i·:' ment for the most demanding combination of tenant zones and the adjacent af-
fected mall zone or zones.
Exits
Sec. 5604. (a) General. Each tenant space and the covered mall building shall
be provided with exits as required by this section and Chapter 33 of this code.
Where there is a conflict between the requirements of Chapter 33 and the require-
ments of this section, the requirements of this section shall apply.
(b) Determination of Occupant Load. The occupant load permitted in any in-
dividual tenant space in a covered mall building shall be determined as required by
804
Section 3302 of this code. Exit requirements for individual tenant spaces shall be
based on the occupant load thus determined.
The occupant load permitted for the covered mall building, assuming all por-
tions, including individual tenant spaces and the mall to be occupied at the same
time, shall be determined by dividing the gross leasable area by 30 for covered mall
buildings containing up to 150,000 square feet of gross leasable area, by 40 for cov-
ered mall buildings containing between 150,001 and 350,000 square feet of gross
leasable area, and by 50 for covered mall buildings containing more than 350,000
square feet of gross leasable area. Exit requirements for the covered mall building
shall be based on the occupant load thus determined.
The occupant load of anchor buildings opening into the mall shall not be in-
cluded in determining exit requirements for the mall.
(c) Number of Exits. When the distance of travel to the mall exceeds 75 feet
within the public area of a tenant space or when the occupant load served by the exit
to the mall exceeds 50, not less than two exits shall be provided. The occupant load
of a public sales area shall be computed at 30 square feet per occupant. Occupant
loads for other areas shall be computed in accordance with Table No. 33-A.
(d) Arrangement of Exits. Group A, Divisions 1, 2 and 2.1 Occupancies, other
than drinking and dining establishments, shall be so located in the covered mall
building that their entrance will be immediately adjacent to a principal entrance to
the mall and shall have not less than one half oftheirrequiredexits opening directly
to the exterior of the covered mall building.
Required exits for anchor buildings shall be provided independently from the
mall exit system.
Malls shall not exit through anchor buildings. Malls terminating at an anchor
building where no other means of exit has been provided shall be considered as a
dead-end mall.
(e) Distance to Exits. Within each individual tenant space in a covered mall
building the maximum distance of travel from any point to an exterior exit door,
horizontal exit, exit passageway, enclosed stairway or entrance to the mall shall not
exceed 200 feet.
The maximum distance of travel from any point within a mall to an exterior exit
door, horizontal exit, exit passageway or an enclosed stairway shall not exceed 200
feet.
(f) Access to Exits. Exits shall be so arranged that it is possible to go in either
direction from any point in a mall to a separate exit, except for dead ends not ex-
ceeding a length equal to twice the width of the mall measured at the narrowest lo-
cation within the dead-end portion of the mall.
The minimum width of exit from a mall shall be 66 inches.
When exit passageways are present to provide a secondary exit from a tenant
space, doors to the exit passageway shall be one-hour fire doors. Such doors shall
be self-closing and be so maintained or shall be automatic closing by smoke detec-
tor actuation.
805
Storage is prohibited in exit passageways which are also used for service to the
tenants. Such exit passageways shall be posted with conspicuous signs so stating.
(g) Malls. For the purpose of providing required egress, malls may be consid-
ered as corridors but need not comply with the requirements of Section 3305 (g)
am\ ~h) of this code when the width of mall is as specified in this section.
J The minimum aggregate clear width of the mall shall be 20 feet. There shall be a
. ,. minimum of 10 feet clear width to a height of8 feet on each side of the mall between
iii! any projection from a tenant space bordering the mall and the nearest kiosk, vend-
ing machine, bench, display or other obstruction to egress. Kiosks, vending rna-
,'·.···'
:.,;.'t.. ,!.':·'...:·:·
: chines and similar uses shall be spaced at least 20 feet from each other and shall not
;,~, be more than 300 square feet in area.
Malls which do not conform to the requirements of this section shall comply
with the requirements of Section 3305 (g) and (h) of this code.
(h) Security Grilles and Doors. Horizontal sliding or vertical security grilles or
doors which are a part of a required means of egress shall conform to the following:
I. They must remain secured in the full open position during the period of occu-
pancy by the general public.
2. Doors or grilles shall not be brought to the closed position when there are more
than I 0 persons occupying spaces served by a single exit or 50 persons occupying
spaces served by more than one exit.
3. The doors or grilles shall be openable from within without the use of any spe-
cial knowledge or effort when the space is occupied.
4. When two or more exits are required, not more than one half of the exits may
be equipped with horizontal sliding or vertical rolling grilles or doors.
Occupancy
Sec. 5605. (a) General. Covered mall buildings shall be classified as Group B,
Division 2 Occupancies and may contain accessory uses consisting of Group A, E
orR, Division I Occupancies. The area of individual accessory uses within a cov-
ered mall building shall not exceed three times the basic area permitted by Table
No. 5-C of this code for the type of construction and the occupancy involved. The
aggregate area of all accessory uses within a covered mall building shall not exceed
25 percent of the gross leasable area.
An attached garage for the parking or storage of private or pleasure-type motor
vehicles having a capacity of not more than nine persons and open parking garages
may be considered as separate buildings when they are separated from the covered
mall building by an occupancy separation having a fire-endurance time period of at
least two hours.
(b) Mixed Occupancy. Individual tenant spaces within a covered mall building
:::: which comprise a distinct "occupancy," as described in Chapters 5, 6, 7, 8, I 0, II
and 12 of this code, shall be separated from any other occupancy as specified in
Section 503 (d) of this code.
EXCEPTION: A main entrance which opens onto a mall need not be separated.
806
Chapters 57-59
NO REQUIREMENTS
807
NOTES
808
Part XI
Chapter 60
Part I
NOTE: This chapter has been revised in its entirety.
U.B.C. Standards
Sec. 6001. The Uniform Building Code standards referred to in various parts of
this code, which are also listed in Part II of this chapter, are hereby declared to be
part of this code and are referred to in this code as a "U.B.C. standard."
Standard of Duty
Sec. 6002. The guideline standards listed in Part III of this chapter are intended
to comply with a standard of duty which requires buildings and structures to be rea-
sonably safe for persons and property.
Guideline Standards
Sec. 6003. The standards listed in Part III of this chapter are not adopted as part
of this code, but are offered as guideline standards. Compliance with these guide-
line standards shall be prima facie evidence of compliance with the standard of
duty set forth in Section 6002.
Part 11-U.B.C. STANDARDS

U.B.C.
STD. AND
SEC. NO. TITLE AND SOURCE
CHAPTER4
4-1; 401 (b), 415
Noncombustible Material-Tests. Standard Method of TestE 136-79 of the
ASTM.*
CHAPTER6
6-1; 608,3901 (a), 3903 (d)
Proscenium Fire-safety Curtains. Installation Standard of the International
Conference of Building Officials.
CHAPTER 17
17-1; 1701 (b), 1708 (a)
Kraft Waterproof Building Paper. Federal Specification UU-B-790a (Feb-
ruary 5, 1968).
*ASTM refers to the American Society for Testing and Materials.
809
6003 1991 UNIFORM BUilDING CODE
17-2; 1701 (b), 1713 (d), 1713 (e) 2

Test Method to Determine Potential Heat of Building Materials. Test Stan-
dard of the International Conference of Building Officials.
17-3; 1701 (b), 1712 (d)
Test Method for the Evaluation of Thermal Barriers. Standard of the Inter-
national Conference of Building Officials.
17-5; 1701 (b), 1713 (f)
Room Fire Test Standard for Interior of Foam Plastic Systems. Test Stan-
dard of the International Conference of Building Officials.
17-6; 1701 (b), 1713 (e) 2
Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Ex-
terior, Nonload-bearing Wall Panel Assemblies Using Foam Plastic Insula-
tion. Test Standard of the International Conference of Building Officials.
CHAPTER 18
18-1; 1807 (i), Appendix 716
Fire Alarm and Standby Power-generating Systems for High-rise Build-
ings. Installation Standard of the International Conference of Building Offi-
cials.
CHAPTER24
24-1; 2402 (b) 4
Building Brick, Facing Brick and Hollow Brick. (Made from Clay or
Shale.) Standard Specifications C 62-87, C 216-86 and C 652-87a of the
ASTM.
24-2; 2402 (b) 6
Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-lime Brick). Standard Specification C
73-75 of the ASTM.
24-3; 2402 (b) 5
Concrete Building Brick. Standard Specification C 55-75 (1980) of the
ASTM.
24-4; 2402 (b) 5
Hollow and Solid Load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units. Standard Speci-
fication C 90-86 of the ASTM.
24-6; 2402 (b) 5
Nonload-bearing Concrete Masonry Units. Standard Specification C
129-75 (1980) of the ASTM.
24-7; See Uniform Code for Building Conservation.
In-Place Masonry Shear Tests. Test Standard of the International Confer-
ence of Building Officials.
Tests of Anchors in Unreinforced Masonry Walls. Test Standard of the In-
ternational Conference of Building Officials.
Pointing ofUnreinforced Masonry Walls. Construction Specification of the
International Conference of Building Officials.
810
24-14; 2402 (b) 6

Unburned Clay Masonry Units and Standard Methods of Sampling and
Testing Unburned Clay Masonry Units. Test Standard of the International
24-15; 2402 (b), 2404 (h), 2407 (h) 4, 2603 (b) 4
Part I-Joint Reinforcement for Masonry. Specification Standard of the In-
ternational Conference of Building Officials. Part 11---Cold-drawn Steel
Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. Standard Specification A 82-88 of the
ASTM.
24-16; 2402 (b) 2, Table No. 24-A
Cement, Masonry. Standard Specification C 91-83a of the ASTM.
24-17; 2402 (b) 3
Quicklime for Structural Purposes. Standard Specification C 5-79 (1984)
of the ASTM.
24-18; 2402 (b) 3
Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. Standard Specification C 207-79
(Reapproved 1984) of the ASTM.
24-19; 2402 (b) 2, Table No. 24-A J!
Mortar Cement. Test Standard of the International Conference of Building \1
Officials. [\\
24-20; 2402 (b) 8 '"
Mortar for Unit Masonry and Reinforced Masonry Other Than Gypsum.
Standard Specifications C 161-44T and C 270-59T of the ASTM.
24-22; 2402 (b) 8
Field Tests Specimens for Mortar. Test Standard of the International Con-
ference of Building Officials.
24-26; 2402 (b) 6, 2405 (c) 1, 2405 (c) 2
Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. Standard Test
MethodE 447-80 of the ASTM.
24-28; 2402 (b) 9, Table No. 24-B
Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. Standard Method C 1019-84 of the
ASTM.
24-29; 2402 (b) 9
Grout for Masonry. Standard Specification C 476-83 of the ASTM.
24-30; 2402 (b) 8 ,,
Standard Test Method for Flexural Bond Strength of Mortar Cement. Test f!
Standard of the International Conference of Building Officials. ::,:
CHAPTER25
25-1; 2501 (a), 2502 (a)
Classification, Definition and Methods of Grading for All Species of Lum-
ber. Standard Methods D 245-70 and D 2555-70 of the ASTM, Handbook
No. 72 of the United States Department of Agriculture, American Softwood
Lumber Standard PS20-70 and National Grading Rule for Dimension Lum-
ber of the National Grading Rule Committee.
811
25-9; 2501 (a), 2501 (e), 2502 (a), 2513 (a), 2513 (c), 4702, Tables Nos. 25-B,
25-J-1, 25-K-1, 25-S-2, 25-T-1 and 47-J
Construction and Industrial Plywood. Products Standard PS 1-83 of the
United States Department of Commerce, and National Bureau of Standards
Calculation Diaphragm Action, an Engineering Standard of the Interna-
tional Conference of Building Officials.
25-15; 2501 (a), 2507 (a) 2, 2507 (b)
Spaced Wood Column Design. National Design Specification for Wood
Construction ( 1982), including the 1982 Supplement, National Forest
Products Association.
25-17; 2501 (a), 2504 (c), 2510 (a), 2510 (b), 2510 (d), 2510 (f), 2513 (b) 1, 2516
(j) 1, 4702, Tables Nos. 25-F, 25-G, 25-H, 25-J-1, 25-J-2, 25-K-1, 25-K-2, 25-0,
32-B-1, 32-B-2, 32-D-1, 32-D-2, 43-B, 43-C, 47-G, 47-H, 47-I, Appendix Table
No. A-24-4
Timber Connector Joints, Bolted Joints, Drift Bolts and Wood Screws, and
Lag Screws; Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Design; and Nails and Sta-
ples. National Design Specification for Wood Construction (1986), includ-
ing the 1986 Supplement, National Forest Products Association; Design
Specifications for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss TPI-85, and Design
Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood Trusses,
PCT-80 of the Truss Plate Institute; and Federal Specification No.
FF-N-105B, March 17, 1971.
25-18; 2501 (a), 2512
Structural Glued Built-up Members-Plywood Components. Design and
Fabrication Specifications of the American Plywood Association.
25-21; 2501 (a), Tables Nos. 25-U-J-1, 25-U-J-6, 25-U-R-1, 25-U-R-2, 25-U-R-7,
25-U-R-8, 25-U-R-10, 25-U-R-11, 25-U-R-13 and 25-U-R-14
Span Tables for Joists and Rafters. Specification Standard of the Interna-
25-22; 2501 (a)
Plank-and-Beam Framing. Wood Construction Data No.4 (1970) of the
National Forest Products Association.
25-25; 2501 (a), 2502 (a), 2516 (g) 5, 2517 (f)
Wood Particleboard. American National Standard for Wood Particleboard,
ANSI** A208.1-1989.
25-27; 2501 (a), 2504 (c) 9
Temperature Effects. National Design Specification for Wood Construc-
tion ( 1986), including the 1986 Supplement, National Forest Products As-
sociation.
25-28; 401 (b), 407, 2501 (a)
Fire-retardant-treated Wood Tests on Durability and Hygroscopic Proper-
ties. Standard Test Methods D 2898-81 and D 3201-79 of the ASTM and
**ANSI refers to the American National Standards Institute
812
Standards C 20-83 and C 27-83 of the American Wood Preservers Associ-

ation.
25-29; 407, 2501 (a), 2504 (c) 3
Fire-retardant-treated Wood. National Design Specification for Wood Con-
struction Policy on Design Values for Fire-retardant-treated Lumber
( 1982), including 1982 Supplement, National Forest Products Association.
25-30; 2501 (a), 2502 (b), 2504 (c) 6, 2506 (d), 2509
Design Provisions for Sawn Lumber. National Design Specification for
Wood Construction ( 1986), National Forest Products Association.
CHAPTER26
26-1; 2603 (b) I, 2605 (e)
Portland Cement and Blended Hydraulic Cements. Standard Specifications
C 150-85a and C 595-86 of the ASTM.
26-8; 2603 (b) 4, 2603 (c), 2612 (o) 3, 2625 (c) 6
Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced
Concrete Construction. Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel AWS
D 1.4-79 of the American Welding Society, Inc.
26-13; 301 (c), 305 (e) Item I, 2603 (b) 6, 2605 (i)
Ready-mixed Concrete. Standard Specification C 94-86a of the ASTM.
26-14; 2603 (b) 6, 2605 (i)
Concrete Made by Volumetric Hatching and Continuous Mixing. Standard
Specification C 685-86 of the ASTM.
26-15; 2603 (b) 6, 2627 (a), 2627 (c)
Mill-Mixed Gypsum Concrete and Poured Gypsum Roof Diaphragms.
Standard Specification C 317-70 of the ASTM. Poured Gypsum Roof Dia-
phragm, based on reports of test programs by S. B. Barnes and Associates,
dated February 1955, November 1956, January 1958, and February 1962.
26-16; 2603 (b) 6
Ground-iron Blast-furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. Standard
Specification C 989-84 of the ASTM.
CHAPTER27
27-1; 2701 (a), 2909 (f) 1, 2909 (g) 1
Material Specifications for Structural Steel. Standard Specifications A 27,
A 36, A 48, A 53, A 148, A 242, A 252, A 283, A 307, A 325, A 336, A 441,
A 446, A 449, A 490, A 500, A 501, A 514, A 529, A 563, A 569, A 570,
A 572, A 588, A 606, A 607, A 611, A 618, A 666, A 668, A 690, A 715
and A 852 of the ASTM.
27-3; 2701 (a)
Stress Variation or Stress Reversal Design. Specifications of the American
Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (November 1, 1978).
27-4; 2701 (a), 2701 (b), 2705
Open Web Steel Joists. Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists,
H Series; K Series; Longs pan Steel Joists, LH Series; Deep Longspan Steel
Joists, DLH Series; and Joist Girders, 1978 (including 1986 revisions), of
the Steel Joist Institute.
813
27-6; 2701 (a), 2'708

Structural Welding. Structural Welding Code-Steel ANSI/AWS D 1-1.90
of the American Welding Society, Inc.
27-7; 301 (c), 306 (a) 6, 2701 (a), 2709
High-strength Bolts. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325
or A 490 Bolts. Approved by the Research Council of Structural Connec-
tions of the Engineering Foundation, November 18, 1985, and endorsed by
the American Institute of Steel Construction and by the Industrial Fasteners
Institute.
27-9; 2701 (a), 2701 (b), 2703, 3208 (b) 6
Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members.
Based on Specification of the American Iron and Steel Institute (1986).
27-10; 2701 (a), 2701 (b), 2704, 2710 (k)
Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Stainless Steel Structural
Members. Specification Manual, 1974 Edition, of the American Iron and
Steel Institute.
27-11; Table No. 23-P, 2701 (a) 2, 2706
Steel Storage Racks. Specification for the Design, Testing and Utilization
of Industrial Steel Storage Racks, 1990 Edition, of the Rack Manufacturers
Institute.
27-12; 2701 (a), 2707
Structural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings. Criteria for Structur-
al Application of Steel Cables for Buildings, 1973 Edition, and Standard
Specifications A 586-68 (1976), A 603-70 (1974) and B 6-70ofthe ASTM.
27-13; 2701 (a), 2708
Welding Sheet Steel. Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel ANSI/AWS
D 1.3-89 of the American Welding Society, Inc.
27-14; 2701 (a), 2702
Load and Resistance Factor Design for Structural Steel Buildings. Specifi-
cation on Load and Resistance Factor Design for Structural Steel Buildings
(September 1, 1986, with Supplement No. 1, January 1, 1989) of the Ameri-
can Institute of Steel Construction.
27-15;270l(a),2702,2710(b),2710(e)3,2710(g)3,2710(g)4,2710(g)7,2710
(h) 2, 2710 (i) I, 2711 (e) 3, 2711 (f) 2
Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design for Structural Steel Buildings.
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress Design and
Plastic Design of the American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (June
I, 1989).
CHAPTER28
28-1; 2801 (a), 2802 (a), 2802 (b), 2803 (a), 2803 (b), 2803 (d), 2804 (c), 2804 (e),
2804 (f), Table No. 28-F
Standard for Aluminum Structures. Specifications for Aluminum Struc-
tures, Aluminum Association (December 1986).
814
CHAPTER 29
29-1; 2901 (b), 2904 (a)
Soils Classification. Standard Method D 2487-69 of the ASTM.
29-2; 2901 (b), 2904 (b)
Expansion Index Test. Recommendation ofthe Los Angeles Section of\~
ASCE Soil Committee.
29-3; 2510 (a), 2901 (b), 2907 (a)
Treated Wood Foundation System. National Forest Products Association,
Technical Report No.7.
29-4; 2901 (b), 2907 (e)
Design of Slab-on-Grade Foundations to Resist the Effects of Expansive
Soils. Part I-Design of Slab-on-Ground Foundations based on design
specification of the Wire Reinforcement Institute (August 1981 ). Part
II-Design of Post-tensioned Slabs on Ground, based on design specifica-
tion of the Post-Tensioning Institute.
CHAPTER31
31-1; 3101 (b), 3103 (b)!, 3103 (b) 4, 3105 (b) 5, 3104 (a), 3105 (a), 3105 (b) 2,
3105 (c), 3105 (e)
Design of Buildings for Access and Use by the Disabled. Standard for
Buildings and Facilities-Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physi-
cally Handicapped People, All7.!-1986 of the American National Stan-
dards Institute.
CHAPTER32
32-5; 3201 (b), Table No. 32-E
Roofing Aggregates. Material Standard of the International Conference of
Building Officials.
32-7; 1701 (b), 1713 (e) 3, 3201 (b), 3202, Table No. 32-A, 5201 (f), 5207 (a) 2
Test Standard for Determining the Fire Retardancy of Roof-Covering Ma-
terials. Standard Specification 790 (October 5, 1983) of the Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.
32-8; 3201 (b), 3202, 3208 (a) 2, 3208 (b) 10
Wood Shakes. Part 1-Wood Shakes (nonpreservative treated). Grading
and Packing Rules for Red Cedar Shakes. Grading Rules of the Red Cedar
Shingle & Handsplit Shake Bureau, 1975. Part 11-Wood Shake Hip and
Ridge Units (nonpreservative). Shake and Shingle Council and Material
Standard of the International Conference of Building Officials. Part
III-Wood Shakes (preservative treated). Grading and Packing Rules for
Treated Southern Pine Taper-sawn Shakes. Grading Rules of the Red Cedar
Shingle & Handsplit Shake Bureau, 1982, and Material Standard of the In-
ternational Conference of Building Officials. Part IV-Southern Yellow
Pine, Black Gum/Sweet Gum Taper-sawn Shake Hip and Ridge Units. Ma-
terial Standard of the International Conference of Building Officials.
815
32-11; 3201 (b), 3202, 3208 (a) 2, 3208 (b) 11

Wood Shingles. Standard of the Red Cedar Shingle & Handsplit Shake Bu-
reau and Material Standard ofthe International Conference of Building Of-
ficials.
32-12; 3201 (b), 3202, 3208 (b) 5
Roof Tile. Test Standard of the International Conference of 8\J.i.ldi.Q..<t, Q((~
cials.
32-13; 3201 (b), 3202
Modified Bitumen, Thermoplastic and Thermoset Membranes Used for
Roof Coverings. Standard Specifications D 412-87, D 471-79, D 570-81,
D 624-86, D 638-84, D 751-79, D 816-82, D 1004-66 (1981 ), D 1204-84,
D 2136-84 and D 2137-83 of the ASTM.
32-14; 3201 (b), 3206 (a), 3206 (d)
Automatic Smoke and Heat Vents. Material Standard of the International
CHAPTER33
33-1; 3301 (a), 3304 (h)
Power-operated Exit Doors. Test Standard of the International Conference
of Building Officials.
F 33-2; 3301 (a), 3306 (p)
I Stairway Identification. Specification Standard ofthe International Confer-
~ ence of Building Officials.
33-3; Appendix Ill (a)
Exit Ladder Device. Test Standard of the International Conference of
Building Officials.
33-4; 3301 (a), 3304 (d)
Panic Hardware. Standard 305, July 30, 1979, of the Underwriters Labora-
tories Inc.
CHAPTER38
F 38-1;911 (c), 1807(c),3801 (b),3801 (d),3801 (e),3802(f)3,3802(g),3802(h),
I 3901 (a), 3903 (d), 4204 (a), 5207 (a), 5208 (a), 5603 (a), Appendix 1108 (b)
I ,~.
F \~
Installation of Sprinkler Systems. Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler
Systems, NFPA 13-1989, National Fire Protection Association.
38-2; 3801 (b), 3801 (d), 3805 (a)
F Standpipe Systems. Installation Standard of the International Conference
I of Building Officials.
F 38-3; 3801 (b), 3801 (d), 4204 (a), 4205, 5207 (a), 5208 (a)
I Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Group R Occupancies Four Stories or
I
F
Less in Height. S~andard for theSins.tal~atHion. ohf SpNrFinp~}e r SRys tem s iNn R.esi-
dential Occupanctes up to Four tones m etg t, ~ 1 3 1 9 89
- , atton-
1 al Fire Protection Association.
816
CHAPTER42
42-1;401 (b),407,415,417, 1701 (b), 1713(c), 1713(e)2, 1713(f), 1714(b), 1714
(c), 3901 (a), 3903 (d), 4201 (b), 4202 (a) 1, 4202 (b)
Test Method for Surface-burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
Standard Test Method E 84-84 of the ASTM.
42-2; 4201 (b), 4205
Standard Test Method for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of
Textile Wall Covering. Test Method of the International Conference of
Building Officials.
CHAPTER43
43-1; 1701 (b), 1704(b), 1707, 1713(e)2,3901 (a),3903(d),4301 (a),4302(b),
4304 (d), 4304 (e), 4304 (f) 2, 4305 (b), 4305 (c), Table No. 43-A
Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. Standard Methods E
119-83 of the ASTM.
43-2; 503 (d), 802 (b) 2, 3305 (h), 3309 (c), 4301 (a), 4306 (e), 4306 (i), 4306 (j)
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Standard IOB-1988 of the Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. and International Conference of Building Officials Test
Standard for Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies.
43-3; 4301 (a), 4306 (e)
Tinclad Fire Doors. Specification of the American National Standards In-
stitute/Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1OA-1979 (R 1985).
43-4; 4301 (a), 4306 (e), 4306 (i)
Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. Standard Methods E 163-76 of the
ASTM.
43-6; 4308
Fire Tests of Through-penetration Fire Stops. Standard Method E 814-83
of the ASTM.
43-7; 503 (c), 1701 (b), 1706 (b), 4301 (a), 4306 (d), 4306 (e), 4306 (j), 4309
Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. Test Standard of the International Con-
ference of Building Officials.
43-8; 301 (c), 306 (a) 10, 4301 (a), 4303 (e)
Thickness and Density Determination for Spray-applied Fireproofing. Test
Standard of the International Conference of Building Officials.
43-9; 4301 (a), 4302 (c)
Methods for Calculating Fire Resistance of Steel, Concrete and Wood Con-
struction. Standard of the International Conference of Building Officials.
43-12; 4306 (j), 4309
Smoke Dampers. Standard for Leakage-rated Damper for Use in
Smoke-control Systems, 555S, September 14, 1983, of the Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.
43-13; 1002 (b), 3301 (a), 3304 (h)
Horizontal Sliding Fire Doors Used in an Exit. Test Standard of the Interna-
817
CHAPTER 52
52-2; 417,5201 (f)
Chamber Method of Test for Measuring the Density of Smoke from the
Burning or Decomposition of Plastic Materials. Standard Test Method D
2843-70 of the ASTM.
CHAPTER 54
54-I; 5401 (b), 5401 (d), 5406 (c)
Flat Glass. Standard Specification C 1036-85 of the ASTM.
54-2; 5401 (b), 5401 (d), 5406 (b), 5406 (c), 5406 (e), 5408 (a)
Safety Glazing. Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials (16
C.F.R., Part 1201) of the United States Consumer Product Safety Commis-
sion and Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Transparent
Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. ANSI Z97 .1-1975 ofthe Amer-
ican National Standards Institute, Inc.
CHAPTER 55
55-I; Appendix 5502 (b)
Flame-retardant Membranes. Test Standard of the International Confer-
ence of Building Officials.
Part Ill-GUIDELINE STANDARDS

SECTION
TITLE AND SOURCE REFERENCE
CHAPTER 17
Fire Test Standard for Insulated Roof Deck Construction. 1701 (b)
Factory Mutual Standard.
Fire Test Standard for Insulated Roof Deck Construction. 170 I (b)
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1256 (January, 1985).
CHAPTER24
Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 2402 (b)
C 140-75 (1980) of the ASTM.
Structural Clay Load-bearing Wall Tile and
Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Structural
Clay Tile. 2402 (b)
C 34-70 and C 112-70 of the ASTM.
Structural Clay Nonload-bearing Tile. 2402 (b)
C 56-70 of the ASTM.
Cast Stone. 2402 (b)
ACI 704-44 of the American Concrete Institute.
Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 2402 (b)
Aggregates for Grout. 2402 (b)
C 404-76 (1981) of the ASTM.
818
Sampling and Testing Brick. 2402 (b)

Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile. 2402 (b)
Standard Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of
Concrete Block.
C 426-70 (Reapproved 1982) of the ASTM.
CHAPTER25
Black Cottonwood, Coast Sitka Tables Nos. 25-A-1, 25-A-2
Spruce, Douglas Fir-Larch (North), Eastern
Hemlock-Tamarack (North), Eastern White
Pine (North), Hem-Fir (North), Northern Aspen,
Ponderosa Pine, Red Pine, Spruce-Pine-Fir,
Western Cedars (North)and Western White Pine.
Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber,
United States Edition (September 1979).
Douglas Fir (Coast Region), West Tables Nos. 25-A-1, 25-A-2
Coast Hemlock, Western Red Cedar, White Fir
and Sitka Spruce.
Standard Grading Rules No. 16 of the West Coast
Lumber Inspection Bureau (September 1970).
Douglas Fir, Larch, Hem-Fir, Tables Nos. 25-A-1, 25-A-2
Mountain Hemlock Alpine Fir, Engelmann Spruce,
Lodgepole Pine, Ponderosa Pine, Sugar Pine,
Idaho White Pine, Western Cedars, Western Hemlock
and Aspen (Bigtooth Quaking).
Standard Grading Rules ( 1981) of the Western Wood
Products Association.
Eastern Woods, Eastern White Pine, Table No. 25-A-1
Red Pine, Eastern Spruce, Balsam Fir, Aspen
(Bigtooth Quaking), Eastern Hemlock and Tamarack.
Grading Rules of the Northern Wood and Pine
Manufacturers Association, Inc. (September I, 1970).
Southern Pine. Tables Nos. 25-A-1, 25-A-2
Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber of the
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (March 15, 1977,
and Supplement No. I, Apri11977, through Supplement
No. 15, May I, 1986).
Redwood. Table No. 25-A-1
Standard Specifications of California Redwood
Lumber (November 1970) of the Redwood
Inspection Service.
819
Eastern Woods, Eastern Spruce, Balsam Fir, Table No. 25-A-1

Eastern White Pine, Northern Pine, Eastern
Hemlock-Tamarack and Northern White Cedar.
Standard Grading Rules of the Northeastern Lumber
Manufacturers Association, Inc. (September 1, 1970).
Structural Glued-laminated Timber. 2501 (a)
ANSI/AITC Al90-I-1983, American National
Standards Institute, D 3737-85 of the ASTM.
Structural Glued-laminated Timbers: 2501 (a)
Softwood and Hardwood Species
Standard Specifications for Structural Glued-laminated
Timber of Softwood Species ( 1986), American Institute of
Timber Construction, and Standard Specifications for
Hardwood Glued-laminated Timber (1985), American
Institute of Timber Construction.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes 2501 (a)
and Quality Control Standards.
c 1-86, c 2-85, c 3-86, c 4-86, c 9-85, c 14-86,
C 23-84, C 24-86 and C 28-85, and CP-79, LP 2-80,
LP 3-78, LP 4-78, LP 5-78, LP 7-78, LP 22-80, LP 33-78,
LP 44-78, LP 55-78, LP 77-78 and FD N-80 of the
American Wood Preservers Association.
Wood Poles. 2501 (a)
ANSI 05.1-1972 of the American National Standards Institute, Inc.
Round Timber Piles. 2501 (a)
D 25-87 of the ASTM.
Adhesives. 2501 (a)
Test for Glue Joints in Laminated Wood Product. 2501 (a)
Tests for Structural Glued-laminated Timber. 2501 (a)
Inspection Manual, AITC 200-86, of the American
Institute of Timber Construction referenced in
American National Standard ANSI/AITC
A 190.1-1983 which is used as the basis for
U.B.C. Standard No. 25-10 and Standard Method
of Testing D 905-49 (R81) of the ASTM.
Cellulosic Fiberboard. 2501 (a)
American National Standard ANSI/AHA Al94.1-1985.
Hardboard Siding. 2501 (a)
American National Standard ANSI/AHA AI35.6-l989.
820
CHAPTER 26
Concrete Aggregates. 2603 (b)
Lightweight Aggregates for Structural and 2603 (b), 4301
Insulating Concrete.
Reinforcing Bars for Concrete. 2603 (b)
A 615-87, A 616-87, A 617-87, A 706-86,
A 767-M-88 and A 775-M-88 of the ASTM.
Smooth Steel Wire for Spiral Reinforcement
A 82-85 of the ASTM
Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats.
2603 (b)
2603 (b)
I
A 184-86 of the ASTM.
Welded Steel Wire Fabric and Deformed Steel Wire. 2603 (b)
A 185-85, A 496-85 and A 497-86 of the ASTM.
Steel Wire, Strand and Bar for Prestressing. 2603 (b)
A 416-88, A 421-80 and A 722-88 of the ASTM.
Admixtures for Concrete. 2603 (b)
C 260-86, C 494-86, C 618-85, C 989-87a and
Concrete Tests. 2603 (b)
I
~~
C 31-85, C 39-86, C 42-84a, C 172-82 and
Splitting Tensile Strength. 2603 (b)
CHAPTER27
Erection, Fabrication and Identification of 2701 (a)
Structural Steel.
Specifications of the Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings of the
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
(November I, 1978).
Structural Rivet Steel. 2701 (a)
A 502-65 of the ASTM.
CHAPTER32
Materials for Use in Construction of Built-up 1701 (b), 3201 (b)
Roof Coverings.
Standard Specification 55-A 1983 (Reprinted
December 24, 1985) of the Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.
Roofing Asphalt and Coal Tar Bitumen. 3201 (b)
D 312-84 and D 450-78 ( 1984) of the ASTM.
821
Class C Sheet Roofing and Shingles Made 3201 (b)

from Asphalt Organic Felt.
Standard Specification 55-B, October 5, 1983, of the
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Sheet Metals. 3201 (b)
A 245-62aT, A 361-63T and B 209-63 of the ASTM.
Corrosion-resistant Metals. 3201 (b)
A 219-59 and A 239-41 of the ASTM.
Asbestos-Cement Shingles. 3201 (b)
Slate Shingles. 3201 (b)
C 406-57T of the ASTM.
Wire. 3201 (b)
B 134-62, B 211-63 and B 250-62 of the ASTM.
CHAPTER35
Laboratory Determination of Airborne Sound Appendix 3501 (a)
Transmission Class (STC).
E 90-83 and E 413-73 ( 1980) of the ASTM.
Impact Sound Insulation. Appendix 3501 (a)
E 492-77 of the ASTM.
Airborne Sound Insulation Field Test. Appendix 3501 (a)
E 336-84 of the ASTM.
CHAPTER37
Fireclay Refractories. 3702
CHAPTER41
41-1; See Uniform Building Security Code
Tests for Doors and Locking Hardware Used for Security. Standard of the
International Conference of Building Officials.
41-2; See Uniform Building Security Code
Tests for Window Assemblies. Standard of the International Conference of
Building Officials.
CHAPTER43
Perlite Loose-fill Insulation. 4301 (a)
Vermiculite Loose-fill Insulation. 4301 (a)
CHAPTER47
Plaster Bonding Agents. 4702
United States Government Military Specification
MIL-B-19235 (Docks) December 12, 1965; the
822
1965 Edition of Standard Specifications of the

California Lathing and Plastering Contractors
Association, and the Recommendations of the
Gypsum Association.
Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard 4702
to Wood Framing.
Perlite, Vermiculite and Sand Aggregates for 4702
Gypsum Plaster.
Metal Lath, Wire Lath, Wire Fabric Lath and 4702
Metal Accessories.
Standard Specification A 42.4-1955 of the ASTM
and Specification 2.6. 73 of the California Lathing
and Plastering Contractors Association.
Drill Screws. 4702
Gypsum Wallboard Tape and Joint Compound. 4702
Gypsum Backing Board. 4702
Gypsum Lath. 4702
Gypsum Plasters. 4702
C 28-76a of the ASTM.
Gypsum Sheathing Board. 4702
Gypsum Wallboard. 4702
Keene's Cement. 4702
Water-resistant Gypsum Backing Board. 4702
Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster and Gypsum 4702
Veneer Plaster.
Lime. 4702
C 6-49 (1968) and C 206-49 (1968) of the ASTM.
823
Testing Gypsum and Gypsum Products. 4702

C 22-50 (R74), C 472-73 and C 473-76a of the ASTM.
Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and 4702
for Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
Application of Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster and 4702
Gypsum Veneer Plaster.
Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard 4702
Gypsum Backing Board and Gypsum Veneer Base.
CHAPTER 52
Ignition Properties of Plastics. 520 I (f)
D 1929-68 (1975) of the ASTM.
Method of Test for Determining Classification 401 (b), 5201 (f)
of Approved Light-transmitting Plastics.
CHAPTER 70
Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Appendix 7002
Aggregate Mixtures.
In Place Density of Soils by the Sand Cone Method. Appendix 7002
In Place Density of Soils by the Appendix 7002
Rubber-Balloon Method.
D 2167-66 (1977) of the ASTM.
In Place Density of Soil by the Appendix 7002
Drive-Cylinder Method.
D 2937-71 (1976) of the ASTM.
In Place Moisture Content and Density of Appendix 7002
Soils by Nuclear Methods.
D 2922-81 and D 3017-78 of the ASTM.
824
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Chapter 1
Division I
LIFE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR
EXISTING BUILDINGS OTHER THAN
HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS
General
Sec. 110. (a) Purpose. The purpose ofthis division is to provide a reasonable de-
gree of safety to persons occupying existing buildings by providing for alterations
to such existing buildings which do not conform with the minimum requirements
of this code.
EXCEPTION: Group M and high-rise occupancies, and Group R, Division 3 ~.,® i ! l·~ ,:
Occupancies, except that Group R, Division 3 Occupancies shall comply with Sec- '!'
tion 115. ~,:
(b) Effective Date. Within 18 months after the effective date of this division,
plans for compliance shall be submitted and approved, and within 18 months there-
after the work shall be completed or the building shall be vacated until made to con-
form.
Exits
Sec. 111. (a) Number of Exits. Every floor above the first story used for human
occupancy shall have access to at least two separate exits, one of which may be an
exterior fire escape complying with Subsection (d) of this section. Subject to the
approval of the building official, an approved ladder device may be used in lieu of
a fire escape when the construction feature or location of the building on the prop-
erty makes the installation of a fire escape impracticable.
EXCEPTION: In all occupancies, second stories with an occupant load of I 0 or
less may have one exit.
An exit ladder device when used in lieu of a fire escape shall conform with
U.B.C. Standard No. 33-3 which is a part of this code (see Chapter60) and the fol-
lowing:
I. Serves an occupant load of I 0 or less or a single dwelling unit or guest room.
2. The building does not exceed three stories in height.
3. The access is adjacent to an opening as specified for emergency egress orres-
cue or from a balcony.
4. Shall not pass in front of any building opening below the unit being served.
5. The availability of activating the device for the ladder is accessible only from
the opening or balcony served.
6. So installed that it will not cause a person using it to be within 6 feet of exposed
electrical wiring.
825
APPENDIX 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
(b) Stair Construction. All required stairs shall have a minimum run of9 inches
and a maximum rise of 8 inches and shall have a minimum width of 30 inches ex-
clusive of handrails. Every stairway shall have at least one handrail. A landing hav-
ing a minimum 30-inch run in the direction of travel shall be provided at each point
of access to the stairway.
EXCEPTION: Fire escapes as provided for in this section.
Exterior stairs shall be of noncombustible construction.
EXCEPTION: On buildings of Types III, IV and V, provided the exterior stairs
are constructed of wood not less than 2-inch nominal thickness.
(c) Corridors. Corridors of Groups A, B, E, I, Hand R, Division 1 Occupancies
serving as an exit for an occupant load of30 or more shall have walls and ceilings of
not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction as required by this code. Existing
walls surfaced with wood lath and plaster in good condition or 1h-inch gypsum
wallboard or openings with fixed wired glass set in steel frames are permitted for
corridor walls and ceilings and occupancy separations when approved. Doors
opening into such corridors shall be protected by 20-minute fire assemblies or solid
wood doors not less than 1% inches thick. Where the existing frame will not ac-
commodate the I %-inch-thick door, a 1%-inch-thick solid bonded wood core
door or equivalent insulated steel door shall be permitted. Doors shall be self-clos-
ing or automatic closing by smoke detection. Transoms and openings other than
doors from corridors to rooms shall comply with Section 3305 (h) of this code or
shall be covered with a minimum of 3/ 4 -inch plywood or 1h-inch gypsum wall-
board or equivalent material on the room side.
EXCEPTION: Existing corridor walls, ceilings and opening protection not in
compliance with the above may be continued when such buildings are protected with
an approved automatic sprinkler system throughout. Such sprinkler system may be
supplied from the domestic water system if it is of adequate volume and pressure.
(d) Fire Escapes. 1. Existing fire escapes which in the opinion ofthe building
official comply with the intent of this section may be used as one of the required
exits. The location and anchorage of fire escapes shall be of approved design and
construction.
2. Fire escapes shall comply with the following:
Access from a corridor shall not be through an intervening room.
All openings within 10 feet shall be protected by three-fourths-hour fire assem-
blies. When located within a recess or vestibule, adjacent enclosure walls shall be
of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction.
Egress from the building shall be by a clear opening having a minimum dimen-
sion of not less than 29 inches. Such openings shall be openable from the inside
without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. The sill of an opening giving
access shall not be more than 30 inches above the floor of the building or balcony.
Fire escape stairways and balconies shall support the dead load plus a live load of
not less than I 00 pounds per square foot and shall be provided with a top and inter-
mediate handrail on each side. The pitch of the stairway shall not exceed 60 degrees
with a minimum width of 18 inches. Treads shall not be less than 4 inches in width
826
and the rise between treads shall not exceed 10 inches. All stair and balcony railings
shall support a horizontal force of not less than 50 pounds per lineal foot of railing.
Balconies shall not be less than 44 inches in width with no floor opening other
than the stairway opening greater than 5/ 8 inch in width. Stairway openings in such
balconies shall not be less than 22 inches by 44 inches. The balustrade of each bal-
cony shall not be less than 36 inches high with not more than 9 inches between bal-
usters.
Fire escapes shall extend to the roof or provide an approved gooseneck ladder
between the top floor landing and the roof when serving buildings four or more sto-
ries in height having roofs with less than 4:12 slope. Fire escape ladders shall be
designed and connected to the building to withstand a horizontal force of 100
pounds per lineal foot; each rung shall support a concentrated load of 500 pounds
placed anywhere on the rung. All ladders shall be at least 15 inches wide, located
within 12 inches of the building and shall be placed flatwise relative to the face of
the building. Ladder rungs shall be % inch in diameter and shall be located 12 in-
ches on center. Openings for roof access ladders through cornices and similar pro-
jections shall have minimum dimensions of 30 inches by 33 inches.
The lowest balcony shall not be more than 18 feet from the ground. Fire escapes
shall extend to the ground or be provided with counterbalanced stairs reaching to
the ground.
Fire escapes shall not take the place of stairways required by the codes under
which the building was constructed.
Fire escapes shall be kept clear and unobstructed at all times and maintained in
good working order.
(e) Exit and Fire Escape Signs. Exit signs shall be provided as required by this
code.
EXCEPTION: The use of existing exit signs may be continued when approved
All doors or windows providing access to a fire escape shall be provided with
fire escape signs.
Enclosure of Vertical Shafts

Sec. 112. Interior vertical shafts, including but not limited to stairways, elevator
hoistways, service and utility shafts, shall be enclosed by a minimum of one-hour
fire-resistive construction. All openings into such shafts shall be protected with
one-hour fire assemblies which shall be maintained self-closing or be automatic
closing by smoke detection. All other openings shall be fire protected in an ap-
proved manner. Existing fusible link-type automatic door-closing devices may be
permitted if the fusible link rating does not exceed 135°F.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In other than Group I Occupancies, an enclosure will not be
required for openings serving only one adjacent floor.
2. Stairways need not be enclosed in a continuous vertical shaft if each story. is
separated from other stories by one-hour fire-resistive construction or approved
wired glass set in steel frames. In addition, all exit corridors shall be sprinklered and
the openings between the corridor and occupant space have at least one sprinkler
827
head above the openings on the tenant side. The sprinkler system may be supplied
from the domestic water supply if of adequate volume and pressure.
3. Vertical openings need not be protected if the building is protected by an ap-
proved automatic sprinkler system.
Basement Access or Sprinkler Protection

Sec. 113. An approved automatic sprinkler system shall be provided in base-
ments or stories exceeding 1,500 square feet in area and not having a minimum of
20 square feet of opening entirely above the adjoining ground level in each 50 lineal
feet or fraction thereof of exterior wall on at least one side of the building. Openings
shall have a minimum clear dimension of 30 inches.
If any portion of a basement is located more than 7 5 feet from required openings,
the basement shall be provided with an approved automatic sprinkler system
throughout.
Standpipes
Sec. 114. Any buildings over four stories in height shall be provided with an ap-
proved Class I or Class III standpipe system.
Smoke Detectors
Sec. 115. (a) General. Dwelling units and hotel or lodging house guest rooms
that are used for sleeping purposes shall be provided with smoke detectors. Detec-
tors shall be installed in accordance with the approved manufacturer's instructions.
(b) Power Source. Smoke detectors may be battery operated or may receive
their primary power from the building wiring when such wiring is served from a
commercial source. Wiring shall be permanent and without a disconnecting switch
other than those required for overcurrent protection.
(c) Location within Dwelling Units. In dwelling units, detectors shall be
mounted on the ceiling or wall at a point centrally located in the corridor or area
giving access to each separate sleeping area. Where sleeping rooms are on an upper
level, the detector shall be placed at the center of the ceiling direct! y above the stair-
way. Detectors shall also be installed in the basement of dwelling units having a
stairway which opens from the basement into the dwelling. Detectors shall sound
an alarm audible in all sleeping ar~as ofthe dwelling unit in which they are located.
(d) Location in Efficiency Dwelling Units and Hotels. In efficiency dwelling
units, hotel suites and in hotel sleeping rooms, detectors shall be located on the ceil-
ing or wall of the main room or hotel sleeping room. When sleeping rooms within
an efficiency dwelling unit or hotel suite are on an upper level, the detector shall be
placed at the center of the ceiling directly above the stairway. When actuated, the
detector shall sound an alarm audible within the sleeping area of the dwelling unit,
hotel suite or sleeping room in which it is located.
Separation of Occupancies
Sec. 116. Occupancy separations shall be provided as specified in Section 503
of this code. When approved by the building official, existing wood lath and plaster
828
in good condition or 1/z-inch gypsum wallboard may be acceptable where one-hour

occupancy separations are required.
Division II
LIFE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR
EXISTING HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS
Scope
Sec. 120. These provisions apply to existing high-rise buildings constructed
prior to the adoption of this division and which house Group B, Division 2 offices
or Group R, Division I Occupancies, each having floors used for human occupan-
cy located more than 75 feet above the lowest level of fire department vehicle ac-
cess.
General
Sec. 121. Existing high-rise buildings as specified in Section 120 shall be modi-
fied to conform with not less than the minimum provisions specified in Table No.
A-1-A and as further enumerated within this division.
The provisions of this division shall not be construed to allow the elimination of
fire-protection systems or a reduction in the level of fire safety provided in build-
ings constructed in conformance with previously adopted codes.
Compliance Data
Sec. 122. After adoption of this division, the building official shall duly notify
the owners whose buildings are subject to the provisions of this division. Upon re-
ceipt of such notice, the owner shall, subject to the following time limits, take nec-
essary actions to comply with the provisions of this division.
Plans and specifications for the necessary alterations shall be filed with the
building official within the time period established by the local jurisdiction after
the date of owner notification. Work on the required alterations to the building shall
commence within 30 months of the date of owner notification and such work shall
be completed within five years from the date of owner notification.
The building official shall grant necessary extensions of time when it can be
shown that the specified time periods are not physically practical or pose an undue
hardship. The granting of an extension of time for compliance shall be based on the
showing of good cause and subject to the filing of an acceptable systematic pro-
gressive plan of correction with the building official.
Authority of the Building Official

Sec. 123. For the purpose of applying the provisions of this division, the building
official shall have the authority to consider alternative approaches and grant neces-
sary deviations from this division as follows:
829
(a) Allow alternate materials or methods of compliance if such alternate mate-

rials or methods of compliance will provide levels of fire and life safety equal to or
greater than those specifically set forth in this division.
(b) Waive specific individual requirements if it can be shown that such require-
ments are not physically possible or practical and that a practical alternative cannot
be provided.
Appeals Board
Sec. 124. Appeals of the determinations of the building official in applying the
provisions of this code may be made by an appeal directed to the board of appeals
as established by Section 204 of this code.
Specific Provisions and Alternates

Sec. 125. (a) Specific Provisions. The following provisions shall apply when re-
quired by Table No. A-1-A.
I. Type of construction. Buildings classified as Type 11-N, III-Nor V-N con-
struction shall be equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler system installed
in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1 which is a part of this code (see Chap-
ter 60).
EXCEPTION: Installation of meters or backflow pre venters for the connection
to the water works system need not be provided unless required by other regulations
of the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Automatic sprinklers. All required exit corridors, stairwells, elevator lob-
bies, public assembly areas occupied by 100 or more persons and commercial
kitchens shall be protected by an approved automatic sprinkler system meeting the
design criteriaofU .B.C. Standard No. 38-1 which is a part of this code (see Chapter
60). A minimum of one sprinkler shall be provided on the room side of every corri-
dor opening.
EXCEPTION: Sprinkler may be omitted in stairwells of noncombustible con-
struction.
3. Fire department communication system. When it is determined by test
that the portable fire department communication equipment is ineffective, a com-
munication system acceptable to the fire department shall be installed within the
existing high-rise building to permit emergency communication between fire-sup-
pression personnel.
4. Single-station smoke detectors. Single-station smoke detectors shall be in-
stalled within all dwelling units or guest rooms in accordance with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions. In dwelling units, the detector shall be mounted on the
ceiling or wall at a point centrally located in the corridor or area giving access to
each separate sleeping area. When sleeping rooms are located on an upper level,
the detector shall be installed atthe center of the ceiling directly above the stairway
within the unit. In efficiency dwelling units, hotel suites and in hotel guest rooms,
detectors shall be located on the ceiling or wall of the main room or hotel sleeping
room. When actuated, the detector shall provide an audible alarm in the sleeping
area of the dwelling unit, hotel suite or guest room in which it is located.
830
Such detectors may be battery operated.

5. Manual fire alarm system. An approved manual fire alarm system con-
nected to a central, proprietary or remote station service, or an approved manual
fire alarm system which will provide an audible signal at a constantly attended lo-
cation, shall be provided.
6. Occupant voice notification system. An approved occupant voice notifica-
tion system shall be provided. Such system shall provide communication from a
location acceptable to the fire department and shall permit voice notification to at
least all normally occupied areas of the building.
The occupant voice notification system may be combined with a fire alarm sys-
tem, provided the combined system has been approved and listed for such use. The
sounding of a fire alarm signal in any given area or floor shall not prohibit voice
communication to other areas or floors. Combination systems shall be designed to
permit voice transmission to override the fire alarm signal, but the fire alarm shall
not terminate in less than three minutes.
7. Vertical shaft enclosures. Openings through two or more floors except mez-
zanine floors, which contain a stairway or elevator, shall be provided with vertical
shaft enclosure protection as specified herein. Such floor openings, when not en-
closed by existing shaft enclosure construction, shall be protected by one-hour
fire-resistive-rated shaft enclosure construction. For floor openings which are en-
closed by existing shaft enclosure construction having fire-resistive capabilities
similar to wood lath and plaster in good condition, 1h-inch gypsum wallboard or
approved 1/ 4-inch-thick wired glass is acceptable. Wired glass set in a steel frame
may be installed in existing shaft enclosure walls but shall be rendered inoperative
and be fixed in a closed position.
Openings through two or more floors for other than stairways or elevators, such
as openings provided for piping, ducts, gas vents, dumbwaiters, and rubbish and
linen chutes, shall be provided with vertical shaft enclosure protection as specified
for stairways and elevators.
EXCEPTION: Openings for piping, ducts, gas vents, dumbwaiters and rubbish
and linen chutes of copper or ferrous construction are permitted without a shaft enclo-
sure, provided the floor openings are effectively fires topped at each floor level.
8. Shaft enclosure opening protection. Openings other than those provided
for elevator doors in new vertical shaft enclosures constructed of one-hour fire-re-
sistive construction shall be equipped with approved fire assemblies having a
fire-protection rating of not less than one hour. Openings other than those provided
for elevator doors in existing vertical shaft enclosures shall be equipped with ap-
proved 20-minute-rated fire assemblies, 13/ 4 -inch solid wood doors or the equiva-
lent thereto. Doors shall be either self-closing or automatic closing and automatic
latching.
All elevators on all floors shall open into elevator lobbies which are separated
from the remainder of the building as is required for corridor construction in the
Building Code, JYlless the building is protected throughout by a sprinkler system.
9. Manual shutoff of heating, ventilating and air-conditioning (HVAC)
systems. Heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems shall be equipped with
831
manual shutoff controls installed at an approved location when required by the fire
department.
I 0. Automatic elevator recall system. Elevators shall be equipped with an ap-
proved automatic recall system as required by Section 1807 (h) 2.
II. Unlocked stairway doors. Exit doors into exit stairway enclosures shall be
maintained unlocked from the stairway side on at least every fifth floor level. All
unlocked doors shall bear a sign stating ACCESS ONTO FLOOR THIS LEVEL.
Stairway doors may be locked, subject to the following conditions:
A. Stairway doors which are to be locked from the stairway side shall have the
capability of being unlocked simultaneously without unlatching upon a signal
from an approved location.
B. A telephone or other two-way communications system connected to an ap-
proved emergency service which operates continuously shall be provided at not
less than every fifth floor in each required stairway.
12. Stair shaft ventilation. Stair shaft enclosures which extend to the roof shall
be provided with an approved manually openable hatch to the exterior having an
area not less than 16 square feet with a minimum dimension of 2 feet.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Stair shaft enclosures complying with the requirements for
smokeproof enclosures.
2. Stair shaft enclosures pressurized as required for mechanically operated smoke-
proof enclosures to a minimum of 0.15- and a maximum of0.50-inch water column.
13. Elevator shaft ventilation. Elevator shaft enclosures which extend to the
roof shall be vented to the outside with vents whose area shall not be less than 3 1h
percent of the area of the elevator shaft, with a minimum of 3 square feet per eleva-
tor.
EXCEPTION: Where energy conservation or hoistway pressurization requires
that the vents be normally closed, automatic venting by actuation of an elevator lobby
detector or power failure may be accepted.
14. Posting of elevators. A permanent sign shall be installed in each elevator
cab adjacent to the floor status indicator and at each elevator call station on each
floor reading IN FIRE EMERGENCY, DO NOT USE ELEVATOR-USE EXIT
STAIRS, or similar verbiage approved by the building official.
EXCEPTION: Sign may be omitted at the main entrance floor-level call station.
15. Exit stairways. All high-rise buildings shall have a minimum of two ap-
proved exit stairways.
16. Exit corridor construction. Corridors serving as an exit for an occupant
load of 30 or more shall have walls and ceilings of not less than one-hour fire-resis-
tive construction as required by this code. Existing walls may be surfaced with
wood lath and plaster in good condition or 1h-inch gypsum wallboard for corridor
walls and ceilings and occupancy separations when approved.
17. Exit corridor openings. Openings in corridor walls and ceilings shall be
protected by not less than 1%-inch solid-bonded wood-core doors, approved
1
/ 4 -inch-thick wired glass, approved fire dampers conforming to.,.U.B.C. Standard
No. 43-7 which is a part of this code, or by equivalent protection in lieu of any of
these items (see Chapter 60). Transoms shall be fixed closed and covered with
832
1
/z-inch Type X gypsum wallboard or equivalent material installed on both sides of
the opening.
18. Exit corridor door closers. Exit doors into corridors shall be equipped with
self-closing devices or shall be automatic closing by actuation of a smoke detector.
When spring hinges are used as the closing device, not less than two such hinges
shall be installed on each door leaf.
19. Exit corridor dead ends. The length of dead end corridors serving an occu-
pant load of more than 30 shall not exceed 20 feet.
20. Interior finish. The interior finish in exit corridors, exit stairways and exten-
sions thereof shall conform to the provisions of Chapter 42 of this code.
21. Exit stairway illumination. When the building is occupied, exit stairways
shall be illuminated with lights having an intensity of not less than I footcandle at
the floor level. Such lighting shall be equipped with an independent alternate
source of power such as a battery pack or on-site generator.
22. Exit corridor illumination. When the building is occupied, exit corridors
shall be illuminated with lights having an intensity of not less than I footcandle at
the floor level. Such lighting shall be equipped with an independent alternate
source of power such as a battery pack or on-site generator.
23. Exit stairway exit signs. The location of exit stairways shall be clearly indi-
cated by illuminated exit signs. Such exit signs shall be equipped with an indepen-
dent alternate source of power such as a battery pack or on-site generator or shall be
of an approved self-illuminating type.
24. Exitway exit signs. Illuminated exit signs shall be provided in all exitways
and located in such a manner as to clearly indicate the direction of egress. Such exit
signs shall be equipped with an independent alternate source of power such as a
battery pack or on-site generator or shall be of an approved self-illuminating type.
25. Emergency plan. The management for all buildings shall establish and
maintain a written fire- and life-safety emergency plan which has been approved
by the chief. The chief shall develop written criteria and guidelines on which all
plans shall be based.
26. Posting of emergency plan and exit plans. Copies of the emergency plan
and exiting plans (including elevator and stairway placarding) shall be posted in
locations approved by the chief.
27. Fire drills. The management of all buildings shall conduct fire drills for their
staff and employees at least every 120 days. The fire department must be advised of
such drills at least 24 hours in advance. A written record of each drill shall be main-
tained in the building management office and made available to the fire department
for review.
(b) Sprinkler Alternatives. The requirements of Table No. A-l-A may be mo-
dified as specified by the following for existing high-rise buildings of Type I,
11-F.R., II One-hour, III One-hour, IV or V One-hour construction when an ap-
proved automatic sprinkler system is installed throughout the building in accor-
dance with U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1:
Item 5-Manual fire warning system shall not be required.
833
Item 6-0ccupant voice notification system shall not be required; however, if

the building is equipped with a public address system, the public address sys-
tem shall be available for use as an occupant voice notification system.
Item 7-Vertical shaft enclosures may be of nonrated construction for required
exit stairway enclosures. Vertical shaft enclosures of openings in floors pro-
vided for elevators, escalators and supplemental stairways shall not be re-
quired, provided such openings are protected by an approved curtain board
and water curtain system.
Item 8-Protection of openings in vertical shaft enclosures may be nonrated but
shall not be less than a 13/ 4-inch solid-wood door or the equivalent thereto.
Closing and latching hardware shall be provided.
Item I 0-An automatic elevator recall system shall not be required.
Item 12-Stair shaft ventilation shall not be required.
Item 16----Existing corridor construction need not be altered.
Item 17-Dooropenings into exit corridors may be protected by assemblies oth-
er than those specified in Section 125 (a), provided an effective smoke barrier
is maintained. Closing and latching hardware shall be provided. Protection of
duct penetrations is not required.
Item 19-The length of existing exit corridor dead ends shall not be limited.
Item 20-Interior finish in exitways may be reduced by one classification but
shall not be less than Class III.
Installation of meters or backflow preventers for the connection to the water
works system need not be provided unless required by other regulations of the au-
thority having jurisdiction.
834
TABLE NO. A-1-A-OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION AND USE1 .....
cg
cg
GROUP R, DIVISION 1 GROUP B, DIVISION 2 .....
Apartment Hotel Office c:
z
~
Height Zones2
ITEM REQUIRED 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
::D
l. Automatic sprinklers in buildings of1)'pe 11-N, 3:
III-Nor V-N construction. See Section 125 (a) l. R R - R R - R R - m
c:
2. Automatic sprinklers in corridors, stairways,
;=
c
elevator lobbies, public assembly areas, kitchens
and at doors opening to corridors. See Section
z
G)
125 (a) 2. R R R R R R R R R 0
0
3. Fire department communication system or radios. c
m
See Section 125 (a) 3. R R R R R R R R R
4. Single-station smoke detectors. See Section
125 (a) 4. R R R R R R NR NR NR
5. Manual fire warning system. See Section
125 (a) 5. R R R R R R R R R
6. Occupant voice notification system. See Section
125 (a) 6. NR R R NR R R NR NR NR
7. Vertical shaft enclosure walls of one-hour fire
resistance. See Section 125 (a) 7. R R R R R R R R R
8. Protection of openings in vertical shaft enclosures
by 20-minute-rated assemblies. See Section
125 (a) 8. R R R R R R R R R ,..-o
9. Manual shutoff of HVAC systems. See Section -o
125 (a) 9. R R R R R R R R R m
z
c
10. Automatic elevator recall system. See Section
125 (a) 10. R R R R R R R R R
x
(Continued)
T.ABLE NO. A-1-A-OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION AND USE1-(Continued) Jlo
GROUP R, DIVISION 1 GROUP B, DIVISION 2 "tl
"tl
Apartment Hotel Office m
z
Height Zones2 c
ITEM REQI.IIRED 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 ><
11. Unlocked stairway doorS every fifth floor. See
Section 125 (a) 11. R R R R R R NR R R
12. Stair shaft ventilation. See Section 125 (a) 12. R R R R R R R R R
13. Elevator shaft ventilation. See Section 125 (a) 13. R R R R R R R R R
14. Posting of elevators as not intended for exiting
purposes. See Section 125 (a) 14. R R R R R R R R R
15. Minimum of two exit stairways. See Section
125 (a) 15. R R R R R R R R R
16. Exit corridor wall construction. See Section
125 (a) 16. R R R R R R R R R
17. Protected exit corridor openings with ...
CD
20-minute-rated assemblies or 13/4-inch solid
wood door. See Section 125 (a) 17. R R R R R R NR NR NR
...
CD
c
z
18. Exit corridor doors equipped with self-closing :;;
devices. See Section 125 (a) 18. R R R R R R NR NR NR 0
l:J
19. Exit corridor dead ends limited to 20 feet 3:
maximum. See Section 125 (a) 19. R R R R R R NR NR NR IJI
c
20. Interior finish controlled in exit corridors, exit r=c
stairways and extensions thereof. See Section
125 (a) 20. R R R R R R R R R
z
C)
0
21. Exit stairway illumination. See Section 0
125 (a) 21. R R R R R R R R R c
m
...
...
CD
CD
c:
z
=n
22. Exit corridor illumination. See Section 0
::D
125 (a) 22. R R R R R R NR NR NR 3:
ID
23. Exit stairway exit signs. See Section 125 (a) 23. R R R R R R R R R c:
r=
24. Exitway exit signs. See Section 125 (a) 24. R R R R R R R R R c
25. Emergency planning. See Section 125 (a) 25. R R R R R R R R R z
C)
26. Posting of emergency instructions. See Section 0
0
125 (a) 26. R R R R R R R R R c
m
27. Fire drills. See Section 125 (a) 27. NR NR NR R R R NR NR NR
IR indicates provisions are required.
NR indicates provisions are not required.
2Height zones are established based on a building having a floor as measured to the top of the floor surface used for human occupancy located within
the ranges of heights above the lowest level of the fire department vehicle access in accordance with the following:
Height Zone No. I: More than 75 feet but not in excess of 149 feet.
Height Zone No. 2: More than 149 feet but not in excess of 399 feet.
Height Zone No. 3: More than 399 feet.
)>
"U
"U
m
z
c
><
NOTES
838
Chapter 7
AVIATION CONTROL TOWERS
General
Sec. 711. The provisions of this appendix apply exclusively to aviation control
towers not exceeding I ,500 square feet per floor. Such buildings shall be classified
as Group B, Division 2 Occupancies and shall be used only for the following uses:
I. Airport traffic control cab.
2. Electrical and mechanical equipment rooms.
3. Airport terminal radar and electronics rooms.
4. Office spaces incidental to the tower operation.
5. Lounges for employees, including restrooms.
Sec. 712. Buildings or portions of buildings constructed under the provisions of
this chapter shall be either Type 1-F.R., Type 11-F.R., Type II One-hour, Type 11-N
or Type III One-hour construction. The height of the building or parts thereof shall
not exceed the limitations specified in Table No. A-7-A and the area of such build-
ings shall not exceed I ,500 square feet on any floor.
Exit Facilities
Sec. 713. A single stairway may be used for exiting in towers of any height, pro-
vided the occupant load per floor does not exceed 15. Access to the stairway and
the elevator shall be separated from each other a distance apart equal to no less than
one half of the length of the maximum overall diagonal dimension of the area
served measured in a straight line. The exit stairway and elevator hoistway may be
located in a common shaft enclosure, provided they are separated from each other
by a four-hour separation having no openings. Such stairway shall be constructed
to comply with the requirements for smokeproof enclosures as specified in Section
3310. Stairways, however, need not extend to the roof as specified in Section 3306
(n). The provisions of Sections 1807 and 1907 do not apply.
Fire Alarms
Sec. 714. Smoke detectors shall be installed in all occupied levels. These devices
shall be part of an approved fire alarm system having audible alarms mounted in
all occupied levels.
Access for Handicapped
Sec. 715. Aviation control towers need not be accessible to the handicapped as
specified in the provisions of Chapters 17 and 33.
Standby Power and Emergency Generation Systems

Sec. 716. A standby power-generation system conforming to U.B.C. Standard
No. 18-1 shall be installed in aviation control towers over65 feet in height and shall
provide power to the following equipment:
839
I. Smokeproof enclosure, mechanical equipment and lighting.

2. Elevator operational power.
3. Smoke-detection systems.
TABLE NO. A-7-A-MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF AVIATION CONTROL TOWERS

(In Feet)
TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
1-F.R. I 11-F.R. I II One-hour I Ill One-hour I 11-N
Unlimited I 240 I 100 I 65 I 85
840
Chapter 10
DETENTION AND CORRECTIONAL FACILITIES
NOTE: New appendix chapter.
Scope
Sec. 1011. The provisions of this chapter apply to the design and construction of
Group I, Division 3 Occupancies housing detention or correctional facilities (pris-
ons, jails and reformatories).
Application
Sec. 1012. This appendix chapter may be used as alternative provisions to re-
quirements found in Chapter 10 of this code. If this appendix chapter is used for de-
sign or construction purposes, all requirements in this appendix chapter shall be
used. Chapter 10 provisions may be used if not specifically noted in this appendix
chapter.
Definitions
CELL is a housing unit in a detention or correctional facility for the confinement
of not more than two inmates or prisoners.
CELL COMPLEX is a cluster or group of cells in a jail, prison or similar deten-
tion facility, together with rooms used for accessory purposes, all of which open
into the cell complex, and are used for functions such as dining, counseling, exer-
cise, classrooms, sick call, visiting, storage, staff offices, control rooms or similar
functions, and interconnecting corridors all within the cell complex.
CELL, MULTIPLE-OCCUPANCY, is a housing area in a detention or correc-
tional facility designed to house no less than three or no more than 16 inmates.
CELL TIER are cells located one level above the other, not exceeding two lev-
els per floor.
DAY ROOM is a room which is adjacent to a cell, cell complex or cell tier, and
which is used as a dining, exercise or other activity room for inmates.
Construction, Requirement Exceptions

Sec. 1014. (a) General. Except as provided in this appendix chapter, buildings
shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of this code.
(b) Exceptions to Table No. 17-A. Regardless of the provisions of Table No.
17-A, nonbearing cell walls within cell complexes may be of nonfire-rated, non-
combustible construction, provided the cell complex is separated from all other
areas ofthe building, including corridors which connect to the cell complex by con-
struction and opening protection as required for exit corridors.
The open space in front of a cell tiernotexceeding two tiers in height in detention
or correctional facilities shall not be considered a vertical shaft whether extending
from the floor to ceiling above or from floor to underside of roof.
841
Compartmentation
Sec. 1015. Every story having an occupant load of more than 50 inmates in a de-
tention or correctional facility shall be divided into not less than two approximately
equal compartments by a smoke-stop partition, constructed pursuant to the provi-
sions of Section I 002.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Protection may be accomplished with horizontal exits. (See
Section 3308.)
2. In restraint areas there are no restrictions on the total number area of glazed
openings in a smoke barrier, provided vision panels are of glazing material as speci-
fied in Section 4306 (i).
Occupancy Separations
Sec. 1016. Regardless of the provisions ofTable No. 5-B, a three-hour fire-resis-
tive occupancy separation as set forth in Section 503 (c), may be used between a
Group I, Division 3 Occupancy and a Group B, Division I Occupancy used only
forthe parking of vehicles used to transport inmates or prisoners provided no repair
work or fueling is performed.
EXCEPTION: Such occupancy separations need not be provided unless the
Group B, Division I Occupancy area is enclosed with both surrounding walls and a
solid roof.
Glazing
Sec. 1017. In restraint areas of fully sprinklered detention and correctional faci-
lities, the area of glazing in one-hour corridor walls is not restricted, provided:
(a) All glazing is approved 1/4-inch-thick wired glass or other approved and
fire-tested glazing material set in steel frames.
(b) In lieu of the sizes set forth in Section 3305 (h), the size and area of wired
glass assemblies shall conform to Section 4306 (g) and (h). Other glazing material
shall not exceed the sizes and areas as specified in the fire test.
Electrical
Sec. 1018. Approved special electrical systems, exit illumination, power instal-
lations and alternate on-site electrical supplies shall be provided for every building
or portion of a building housing I 0 or more inmates in a detention or correctional
facility.
Automatic Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems

Sec. 1019. (a) General. Every building, or portion thereof, housing more than
six inmates in a detention or correctional facility or similar occupancy, shall be pro-
tected by an automatic sprinkler system conforming to the provisions of U .B.C.
Standard No. 38-1. The main sprinkler control valve or valves and all other control
valves in the system shall be electrically supervised so that at least a local alarm will
sound at a constantly attended location when valves are closed.
EXCEPTION: The sprinkler and piping serving single cells may be imbedded
in the concrete construction. Protection for sprinklers and piping shall meet the provi-
sions ofU.B.C. Standard No. 38-1.
842
When a complete approved automatic sprinkler system conforming to this sec-

tion is installed in a building or buildings of a detention or correctional facility,
smokeproof enclosures need not be provided. However all required stairways shall
be pressurized to a minimum of 0. I 5 inch of water column upon actuation of the
smoke-detection system.
(b) Wet Standpipes. Every building in a detention or correctional facility, hous-
ing 50 or more inmates, shall be provided with Class II standpipes with hoses, con-
forming to the provisions of Chapter 38. Wet standpipes shall be located in cell
complexes and in other cell areas of the building. In addition, Class II standpipes
shall be located so that it will not be necessary to extend hose lines through inter-
locking security doors or any exit doors in smoke-stop partitions or horizontal exit
walls.
(c) Dry Standpipes. Regardless of the height of the building or number of sto-
ries, every detention or correctional facility shall be provided with a Class I stand-
pipe.
EXCEPTION: In lieu of dry standpipes, combined systems meeting the provi-
sions of U.B.C. Standard No. 38-2 may be used.
When acceptable to the fire authority having jurisdiction, fire department con-
nections may be located inside all security walls or fences on the property.
Standpipes shall be located in accordance with Chapter 38, and when located in
cell complexes, may be placed in secured pipe chases.
Fire Alarm Systems

Sec. 1020. (a) General. A manual and automatic fire alarm system shall be in-
stalled as set forth in the Fire Code for alerting staff in Group I, Division 3 Occu-
pancy jails, prisons, reformatories and buildings where personal liberties of
inmates are similarly restrained.
Initiation of the fire alarm system shall be by motivation of any automatic fire-
extinguishing system, manual means and automatic means of any required detec-
tion devices or detection systems. Staff notification shall be accomplished
automatically, without delay, upon operation of any fire alarm initiating device.
Prealarm (presignal) systems are prohibited.
(b) Manual Fire Alarms. Manual fire alarm boxes are permitted to be locked
provided staff is present within the subject area when occupied and have keys
readily available to operate the boxes.
EXCEPTION: Unlocked manual fire alarm boxes may be located in a statfloca-
tion provided the stafflocation is occupied when the building is occupied and has di-
rect supervision of the sleeping area.
(c) Smoke Detection. An approved smoke-detection system shall be installed
as set forth in U.F.C. Standards Nos. 14-1 and 14-2 throughout all resident housing
areas, including sleeping areas and any contiguous day room, group activity space
or other common spaces for customary access of residents.
EXCEPTION: Other arrangements and positioning of smoke detectors may be
used to prevent damage or tampering or for other purposes provided the function of
detecting any fire is fulfilled and the location of the detectors is such that the speed
843
of detection will be equivalent to that provided by the spacing and arrangements de-
scribed in U.F.C. Standard No. 14-2. This may include the location of detectors in ex-
haust ducts from cells, behind grilles or in other locations. The equivalent
performance of the design, however, must be approved by the chief.
(d) Annunciation Alarm. Trouble and supervisory conditions shall be annun-
ciated at an approved constantly attended location to indicate the buildings, floor,
zone or other designated area. Separate zones shall be provided for each fire-pro-
tection system, each building when the system serves more than one building, each
floor, each cell complex, or each section of a floor compartmented by smoke-stop
partitions.
(e) Fire Department Notification. The fire alarm system shall be supervised by
an approved central, proprietary or remote station service or a local alarm which
will give an audible signal at a constantly attended location.
EXCEPTION: Smoke detectors may be arranged to annunciate locally at a con-
stantly attended location and are not required to accomplish a general alarm or trans-
mit an alarm to the fire department.
Smoke Management
Sec. 1021. (a) Smoke Management System. A mechanically operated smoke
management system or systems shall be provided in every detention or correction-
al facility.
(b) Design and Installation. Every smoke management system shall be de-
signed with zones which shall not exceed one smoke compartment per zone, except
cell zones. Upon activation, the system shall operate at I 00 percent exhaust from
any zone of smoke generation and at I 00 percent supply to all floors with returns
closed in all zones adjacent to zone of smoke generation at not less than eight air
changes per hour.
(c) Automatic Initiation. Operation of the smoke-management system shall be
initiated automatically upon the actuation of appropriately zoned automatic sprin-
kler flow indicators or smoke detectors or both. Smoke detectors shall be installed
in accordance with Section I 009 of the Uniform Mechanical Code and their listing.
(d) Manual Controls. Zone operation status indicators and manual controls ca-
pable of overriding the automatic controls shall be provided in a location approved
by the fire department.
(e) Location oflntakes. Exhaust discharges and fresh air supply intakes shall be
so located as to prevent the reintroduction of smoke into the building.
(f) Plans. The location of required fire dampers or combination smoke-fire
dampers shall be clearly indicated on plans.
(g) Omission of Fire Dampers. Fire dampers required by other provisions of
this code are not required if such dampers interfere with the operation of the smoke
management system.
EXCEPTION: Those required to maintain the integrity of a floor-ceiling assem-
bly.
(h) Duct Materials. Duct materials shall be capable of safely conveying heat,
smoke and toxic gases, to withstand both positive and negative pressures which
844
may be imposed during the smoke-control mode, and to maintain their structural
integrity under fire exposure conditions.
Exits
Sec. 1022. (a) Number of Exits. Multiple-occupancy rooms and day rooms in
buildings or portions thereof in correctional or detention facilities constructed of
not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction shall be provided with a mini-
mum of two exits when the occupant load is more than 20.
The occupant load of any restraint area shall be determined by Table No. 33-A
and classified as to the occupancy group it most nearly resembles and exits shall be
provided as required by Section 3303 (a).
A minimum of two exits shall be provided in all areas of restraint (cells. day
rooms, cell tiers and cell complexes) within a detention or correctional facility
when the occupant load is more than 20.
(b) Exits through Adjoining or Accessory Areas. Exits from a room may open
into an adjoining or intervening room or area, provided such adjoining room is ac-
cessory to the area served and provides a direct exit to an exit corridor, exit stair-
way, exterior exit, horizontal exit, exterior exit balcony or exit passageway.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Exits are not to pass through kitchens, storerooms restrooms,
closets or spaces used for similar purposes.
2. The space in front of cells normally called a day room and used for access to
an exitway in a detention or correctional facility shall not be considered an adjoining
or accessory area if individual cells open directly into the space.
(c) Cell Door Width. Cell doors shall not be less than 2 feet in width and 6 feet in
height.
(d) Sliding Doors in Detention or Correctional Facilities. Electrically con-
trolled and operated sliding doors may be used as exit doors regardless of occupant
load served. Electrically controlled doors shall be designed to allow for manual op-
eration by staff in the event of power failure.
(e) Dead-end Balconies. Exit balconies serving cell tiers shall not extend more
than 50 feet beyond an exit stairway.
NOTE: For number of exits, see Section 3303 (a).
(h) Electrically Operable Exit Doors. All exit doors (except those opening di-
rectly to the exterior of the building) and doors from cells and holding rooms in
detention and correctional occupancies shall be electrically operable from the fa-
cility control center. Electric operation shall override any manual device.
Fenced Enclosures
Sec. 1023. Exterior fenced enclosures into which an exit from a building or
buildings terminate shall be provided with a safe dispersal area located not less
than 50 feet from any building. Dispersal areas shall be based on an area of not less
than 3 square feet per occupant. A gate shall be provided from the safe dispersal
area to allow for necessary relocation of occupants.
Exterior fenced enclosures used for exit termination and which do not provide a
safe dispersal area shall have not less than two exits.
845
Fenced enclosures located on roofs of buildings one or more stories in height

shall be provided with not less than two exits regardless of occupant load.
Fenced enclosures used for recreational or activity purposes only shall be pro-
vided with exits in accordance with Section 3303.
846
Chapter 11
AGRICULTURAL BUILDINGS
Scope
Sec. 1107. The provisions of this appendix shall apply exclusively to agricultur-
al buildings. Such buildings shall be classified as a Group M, Division 3 Occupan-
cy and shall include the following uses:
I. Storage, livestock and poultry.
2. Milking barns.
3. Shade structures.
4. Horticultural structures (greenhouse and crop protection).

Sec. 1108. (a) General. Buildings classed as a Group M, Division 3 Occupancy
shall be of one of the types of construction specified in this code and shall not ex-
ceed the area or height limits specified in Sections 505, 506 and 507 and Table No.
A-ll-A.
(b) Special Provisions. The area of a Group M, Division 3 Occupancy in a
one-story building shall not be limited if the building is entirely surrounded and
adjoined by public ways or yards not less than 60 feet in width, regardless of the
type of construction.
The area of a two-story Group M, Division 3 Occupancy shall not be limited if
the building is entirely surrounded and adjoined by public ways or yards not less
than 60 feet in width and is provided with an approved automatic sprinkler system
throughout, conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1.
Buildings using plastics shall comply with Type V-N construction. Plastics shall
be approved plastics as defined in Chapter 4 and regulated by Chapter 52. For foam
plastic, see Section 1713.
EXCEPTIONS: I. When used as skylights or roofs, the areas of plastic skylights
shall not be limited.
2. Except where designs must consider snow loads, plastics less than 20 mil thick
may be used without regard to structural considerations. The structural frame of the
building, however, shall comply.
Occupancy Separations
Sec. 1109. Occupancy separations shall be as specified in Section 503 and Table
No.A-11-B.

Sec. 1110. Except where Table No. 17-A requires greater protection, exterior
walls of agricultural buildings shall not be Jess than one-hour fire-resistive con-
struction when less than 20 feet from property line.
847
Openings in exterior walls of agricultural buildings which are less than 20 feet
from property lines shall be protected by fire assemblies having a fire-protection
rating of not less than three-fourths hour.
Exit Facilities
Sec. 1111. Exit facilities shall be as specified in Chapter 33.
EXCEPTIONS: I. The maximum distance of travel from any point in the build-
ing to an exterior exit door, horizontal exit, exit passageway or an enclosed stairway
shall not exceed 300 feet.
2. One exit is required for each 15,000 square feet of floor area and fraction there-
of.
3. Exit openings shall not be less than 2 feet 6 inches by 6 feet 8 inches.
848
...
...
CD
CD
c:
z
:;;
TABLE NO. A·11·A-BASIC ALLOWABLE AREA FOR A GROUP M, DIVISION 3 OCCUPANCY, ONE STORY IN HEIGHT 0
::r:l
AND MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF SUCH OCCUPANCY 3:
I II Ill and IV v IJJ
c:
One-Hour i=
F-R One-Hour N N One-Hour N c
I I or Type IV
ALLOWABLE AREA 1
I I z
C)
0
Unlimited 60,000 I 27,100 I 18,000 27,100 I 18,000 21,100 I 12,000 1 0
c
MAXIMUM HEIGHT IN STORIES2 m
Unlimited 12 I 4 I 2 4 I 2 3 I 2
1See Section I 108 for unlimited area under certain conditions.
2 For maximum height in feet, see Chapter 5, Table No. 5-D.
TABLE NO. A·11·B-REQUIRED SEPARATIONS BETWEEN GROUP M, DIVISION 3 AND OTHER OCCUPANCIES
(In Hours)
Occupancy
Rating
)>
1See Chapter 9 for Group H, Division I Occupancies. "C
"C
m
z
c
x
NOTES
850
Chapter 12
Division I
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP R,
DIVISION 3 OCCUPANCIES
General
Sec. 1221. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this division is to provide minimum
standards for the protection of life, limb, health, property, environment and for the
safety and welfare of the consumer, general public and the owners and occupants
of Group R, Division 3 Occupancies regulated by this code.
(b) Scope. The provisions of this division apply to the construction, prefabrica-
tion, alteration, repair, use, occupancy and maintenance of detached one- or l!,
two-family dwellings not more than three stories in height and their accessory
structures.
One and Two Family Dwelling Code Adopted

Sec. 1222. Buildings regulated by this division shall be designed and con-
structed to comply with the requirements of the Council of American Building Of- ~~*.i.i..•.!·
ficials One and Two Family Dwelling Code, 1989 edition (as it applies to detached ·~·
one- and two-family dwellings), promulgated jointly by the International Confer-
ence of Building Officials, the Building Officials and Code Administrators Inter-
national and the Southern Building Code Congress International.
Division II
General
standards of safety for group care facilities.
(b) Scope. 1. General. The provisions of this division shall apply to buildings
or portions thereof that are to be used for Group R, Division 4 Occupancies.
2. Applicability of other provisions. Except as specifically required by this di-
vision, Group R, Division 4 Occupancies shall meet all applicable provisions of
this code. Group R, Division 4 Occupancies need not be accessible to persons with ~:;.,l.,' ·.•.·.
disabilities. ,;
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this division, certain terms are defined as fol-
lows:
GROUP R, DIVISION 4 OCCUPANCIES shall be residential group care fa-
cilities for ambulatory, nonrestrained persons who may have a mental or physical
impairment (each accommodating more than five and not more than 16 clients or
residents, excluding staff).
851
Chapter 12
Division I
General
standards for the protection of life, limb, health, property, environment and for the
safety and welfare of the consumer, general public and the owners and occupants
of Group R, Division 3 Occupancies regulated by this code.
(b) Scope. The provisions of this division apply to the construction, prefabrica-
tion, alteration, repair, use, occupancy and maintenance of detached one- or !:!i
two-family dwellings not more than three stories in height and their accessory
structures.
One and Two Family Dwelling Code Adopted

Sec. 1222. Buildings regulated by this division shall be designed and con-
structed to comply with the requirements of the Council of American Building Of- j
ficials One and Two Family Dwelling Code, 1989 edition (as it applies to detached ~~:
one- and two-family dwellings), promulgated jointly by the International Confer-
ence of Building Officials, the Building Officials and Code Administrators Inter-
national and the Southern Building Code Congress International.
Division II
General
standards of safety for group care facilities.
(b) Scope. I. General. The provisions of this division shall apply to buildings
or portions thereof that are to be used for Group R, Division 4 Occupancies.
2. Applicability of other provisions. Except as specifically required by this di-
vision, Group R, Division 4 Occupancies shall meet all applicable provisions of
this code. Group R, Division 4 Occupancies need not be accessible to persons with i.·'!i~·_.':,•
disabilities. ;
lows:
GROUP R, DIVISION 4 OCCUPANCIES shall be residential group care fa-
cilities for ambulatory, nonrestrained persons who may have a mental or physical
impairment (each accommodating more than five and not more than 16 clients or
residents, excluding staff).
851
AMBULATORY PERSONS are those capable of achieving mobility suffi-

cient to exit without the assistance of another person.

Sec. 1224. (a) General. Buildings or portions of buildings classified as Group
R, Division 4 may be constructed of any materials allowed by this code, shall not
exceed two stories in height or be located above the second story in any building,
and shall not exceed 3,000 square feet in floor area per story except as provided in
Sections 505, 506 and 507.
(b) Special Provisions. Group R, Division 4 Occupancies having more than
3,000 square feet of floor area above the first story shall be of not less than
one-hour fire-resistive construction throughout.
(c) Mixed Occupancies. Group R, Division 4 Occupancies shall be separated
from Group H Occupancies by a four-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation and
shall be separated from all other occupancies by a one-hour fire-resistive occupan-
cy separation.
EXCEPTIONS: I. An occupancy separation need not be provided between a
Group R, Division 4 Occupancy and a carport having no enclosed uses above, pro-
vided the carport is entirely open on two or more sides.
2. In the one-hour occupancy separation between a Group R, Division 4 and
Group M, Division I Occupancy, the separation may be limited to the installation
of materials approved for one-hour fire-resistive construction on the garage side and
a self-closing, tight-fitting solid-wood door 1% inch in thickness will be permitted
in lieu of a one-hour fire assembly. Fire dampers need not be installed in air ducts
passing through the wall, floor or ceiling separating a Group R, Division 4 Occupan-
cy from a Group M, Division I Occupancy, provided such ducts within the Group
M Occupancy are constructed of steel having a thickness not less than 0.019 inch (No.
26 galvanized sheet gauge) and have no openings into the Group M Occupancy.
Sec. 1225. Exterior walls located less than 3 feet from property lines shall be of
one-hour fire-resistive construction. Openings shall not be permitted in exterior
walls located less than 3 feet from property lines. For other requirements, see Sec-
tion 504 and Part IV.
Exits and Emergency Escapes

Sec. 1226. (a) General. Group R, Division 4 Occupancies shall be provided
with exits as required by this section and Chapter 33 of this code.
(b) Exits Required. I. Number of exits. Every story, basement or portion there-
of housing a Group R, Division 4 Occupancy shall have not less than two exits.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Basements used exclusively for the service of the building
may have one exit. For the purpose of this exception, storage rooms,laundry rooms,
maintenance offices and similar uses shall not be considered as providing service to
the building.
2. Storage rooms, laundry rooms and maintenance offices not exceeding 300
square feet in floor area may be provided with only one exit.
852
2. Distance to exits. The maximum travel distance specified in Chapter 33 shall

be reduced by 50 percent.
(c) Corridor Width. Corridors shall be not less than 36 inches in width.
(d) Stairways. Stairways shall be constructed as required by Section 3306 of
this code.
EXCEPTION: In buildings that are converted to a Group R, Division 4 Occu-
pancy, existing stairways may have an 8-inch-maximum rise, 9-inch-minimum run
and may be 30 inches in width.
(e) Emergency Exit Illumination. In the event of power failure, exit illumina-
tion shall be automatically provided from an emergency system. Emergency sys-
tems shall be supplied from storage batteries or an on-site generator set and the
system shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the Electrical
Code.
(f) Emergency Escape. Every sleeping room shall be provided with emergency
escape or rescue facilities as required by Section 1204 of this code.

Sec. 1227, Light, ventilation and sanitation shall be as specified in Section 1205.
Yards and Courts

Sec. 1228. Yards and courts shall be as specified in Section 1206.
Room Dimensions
Sec. 1229. Room dimensions shall be as specified in Section 1207.
Sec. 1230. No requirements.
Shaft Enclosures
Elevator shafts, vent shafts, dumbwaiter shafts, clothes chutes and other vertical
openings shall be enclosed and the enclosure shall be as specified in Section 1706.
Fire Alarm Systems ~~

vi::~·i~~r~u~~~~~~:~:na:~::~~:~i~;anual fire alarm system shall be pro- II
Heating
Sec. 1233. All habitable rooms shall be provided with heating facilities capable
of maintaining a room temperature of 70°F. at a point 3 feet above the floor.
Special Hazards
Sec. 1234. (a) Heating Equipment. All heating equipment shall be permanent-
ly installed. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform to the requirements of
853
(b) Flammable Liquids. The storage and handling of gasoline, fuel oil or other
flammable liquids shall be in accordance with the Fire Code.
Division Ill
BARRIERS FOR SWIMMING POOLS,
SPAS AND HOT TUBS
NOTE: This is a new division.
General
Sec. 1241. The provisions of this section apply to the design and construction of
barriers for swimming pools located on the premises of Group R, Division 3 Occu-
pancies.
Definitions
Sec. 1242. For the purpose of this section, certain terms, words and phrases are
defined as follows:
ABOVEGROUND/ON-GROUND POOL. See definition of swimming pool.
BARRIER is a fence, wall, building wall or a combination thereof, which com-
pletely surrounds the swimming pool and obstructs access to the swimming pool.
GRADE is the underlying surface such as earth or a walking surface.
HOT TUB. See definition of swimming pool.
IN-GROUND POOL. See definition of swimming pool.
SPA, NONPORTABLE. See definition of swimming pool.
SPA, PORTABLE, is a nonpermanent structure intended for recreational bath-
ing, in which all controls, water-heating and water-circulating equipment are an
integral part of the product and which is cord connected (not permanently electri-
cally wired).
SWIMMING POOL is any structure intended for swimming or recreational
bathing that contains water over 24 inches deep. This includes in-ground, above-
ground and on-ground swimming pools, hot tubs and spas.
SWIMMING POOL, INDOOR, is a swimming pool which is totally con-
tained within a residential structure and surrounded on all four sides by walls of
said structure.
SWIMMING POOL, OUTDOOR, is any swimming pool which is not an in-
door pool.
Requirements
Sec. 1243. (a) Outdoor Swimming Pool. An outdoor swimming pool, includ-
ing an in-ground, aboveground or on-ground pool, hot tub or spa shall be provided
with a barrier which shall comply with the following:
854
(b) Flammable Liquids. The storage and handling of gasoline, fuel oil or other
flammable liquids shall be in accordance with the Fire Code.
Division Ill
BARRIERS FOR SWIMMING POOLS,
SPAS AND HOT TUBS
General
Sec. 1241. The provisions of this section apply to the design and construction of
barriers for swimming pools located on the premises of Group R, Division 3 Occu-
pancies.
Definitions
Sec. 1242. For the purpose of this section, certain terms, words and phrases are
defined as follows:
ABOVEGROUND/ON-GROUND POOL. See definition of swimming pool.
BARRIER is a fence, wall, building wall or a combination thereof, which com-
pletely surrounds the swimming pool and obstructs access to the swimming pool.
GRADE is the underlying surface such as earth or a walking surface.
HOT TUB. See definition of swimming pool.
IN-GROUND POOL. See definition of swimming pool.
SPA, NONPORTABLE. See definition of swimming pool.
SPA, PORTABLE, is a nonpermanent structure intended for recreational bath-
ing, in which all controls, water-heating and water-circulating equipment are an
integral part of the product and which is cord connected (not permanently electri-
cally wired).
SWIMMING POOL is any structure intended for swimming or recreational
bathing that contains water over 24 inches deep. This includes in-ground, above-
ground and on-ground swimming pools, hot tubs and spas.
SWIMMING POOL, INDOOR, is a swimming pool which is totally con-
tained within a residential structure and surrounded on all four sides by walls of
said structure.
SWIMMING POOL, OUTDOOR, is any swimming pool which is not an in-
door pool.
Requirements
Sec. 1243. (a) Outdoor Swimming Pool. An outdoor swimming pool, includ-
ing an in-ground, aboveground or on-ground pool, hot tub or spa shall be provided
with a barrier which shall comply with the following:
854
I. The top of the barrier shall be at least 48 inches above grade measured on the
side of the barrier which faces away from the swimming pool. The maximum ver-
tical clearance between grade and the bottom of the barrier shall be 2 inches mea-
sured on the side of the barrier which faces away from the swimming pooL Where
the top of the pool structure is above grade, such as an aboveground pool, the barri-
er may be at ground level, such as the pool structure, or mounted on top of the pool
structure. Where the barrier is mounted on top of the pool structure, the maximum
vertical clearance between the top of the pool structure and the bottom of the barrier
shall be 4 inches.
2. Openings in the barrier shall not allow passage of a 4-inch-diameter sphere.
3. Solid barriers which do not have openings, such as masonry or stone walls,
shall not contain indentations or protrusions except for tooled masonry joints.
4. Where the barrier is composed of horizontal and vertical members and the dis-
tance between the tops of the horizontal members is less than 45 inches, the hori-
zontal members shall be located on the swimming pool side of the fence. Spacing
between vertical members shall not exceed 13/ 4 inches in width. Where there are
decorative cutouts within vertical members, spacing within the cutouts shall not
exceed I 3/ 4 inches in width.
5. Where the barrier is composed ofhorizontal and vertical members and the dis-
tance between the tops of the horizontal members is 45 inches or more, spacing be-
tween vertical members shall not exceed 4 inches. Where there are decorative
cutouts within vertical members, spacing within the cutouts shall not exceed 3/4 in-
ches in width.
6. Maximum mesh size for chain link fences shall be a 11/4-inch square unless the
fence is provided with slats fastened at the top or the bottom which reduce the open-
ings to no more than 13/ 4 inches. The wire shall not be less than 9 gauge.
7. Where the barrier is composed of diagonal members, such as a lattice fence,
the maximum opening formed by the diagonal members shall be no more than 13/4
inches.
8. Access gates shall comply with the requirements of Items I through 7 and
shall be equipped to accommodate a locking device. Pedestrian-access gates shall
open outward away from the pool and shall be self-closing and have a self-latching
device. Gates other than pedestrian access gates shall have a self-latching device.
Where the release mechanism of the self-latching device is located less than 54 in-
ches from the bottom of the gate, (I) the release mechanism shall be located on the
pool side of the gate at least 3 inches below the top of the gate and (2) the gate and
barrier shall have no opening greater than 1h inch within 18 inches of the release
mechanism.
9. Where a wall of a dwelling serves as part of the barrier, doors with direct ac-
cess to the pool through that wall shall be equipped with an alarm which produces
an audible warning when the door and its screen, if present, are opened. The alarm
shall sound continuously for a minimum of 30 seconds immediately after the door
is opened, and be capable of being heard throughout the house during normal
household activities. The alarm shall automatically reset under all conditions. The
alarm system shall be equipped with a manual means, such as a touchpad or switch,
855
to temporarily deactivate the alarm for a single opening. Such deactivation shall
last for no more than 15 seconds. The deactivation switch shall be located at least
54 inches above the threshold of the door. Other means of protection, such as
self-closing doors with self-latching devices approved by the building official,
shall be acceptable so long as the degree of protection afforded is not Jess than the
protection afforded by the alarm system described above.
10. Where an aboveground pool structure is used as a barrier or where the bar-
rier is mounted on top of the pool structure, and the means of access is a ladder or
steps, then ( 1) the ladder or steps shall be capable of being secured, locked or re-
moved to prevent access or (2) the ladder or steps shall be surrounded by a barrier
which meets the requirements of Items I through 9. When the ladder or steps are
secured, locked or removed, any opening created shall not allow the passage of a
4-inch-diameter sphere.
(b) Indoor Swimming Pool. Doors with direct access to an indoor swimming
pool shall comply with Section 1243 (a) 9.
856
Chapter 23
Division I
SNOW LOAD DESIGN
General
Sec. 2340. (a) Scope. Buildings, structures and portions thereof shall be de-
signed and constructed to sustain all dead loads plus live loads as provided by
Table No. 23-C or snow loads as defined in this division where such snow loads
will result in larger members or connections.
(b) Definitions. For the purpose of this appendix, certain terms are defined as ::i::
follows:
PRODUCTION GREENHOUSE is a greenhouse used exclusively for the II
~~~~is~g of flowers or plants on a production basis or for research, with no public ~~~
HEATED GREENHOUSE is a production greenhouse provided with heating , ,

facilities capable of maintaining an interior temperature of no less than 50°F. at .• :!_ ,':;_ .~
any point 3 feet above the floor, and provided with roof-ceiling assembly with a .
thermal resistance (R) less than 2.0.
Notations
Sec. 2341.
a roof slope expressed in degrees.
B width of projection measured parallel to ridge, feet. Minimum assumed
width shall be I foot.
Ce snow exposure factor (see Table No. A-23-S).
Cs slope reduction factor.
C, valley design coefficient (see Figure No. A-13).
D density of snow, pounds per cubic foot (pcf) (refer to Formula 47-2).
F,,. ice splitter horizontal load, pounds.
F,, ice splitter snow weight, pounds.
hh height of balanced snow load on lower roof or deck, feet.
hJ maximum height of drift surcharge, feet (refer to Formula 47-1 ).
hg depth of ground snow (as determined by the building official), feet.
hr difference in height between the upper and lower roof or deck, feet.
I importance factor (see Table No. A-23-T).
L horizontal distance between projection and ridge, feet.
Pf minimum roof snow load, pounds per square foot (psf).
Pg basic ground snow load, psf.
Pm maximum intensity of the load at the height change, psf.
S horizontal separation between adjacent structures, feet (see Figure No.
A-7).
857
Wh horizontal dimension in feet of upper roof normal to the line of change

in roof level, but not less than 50 feet, or greater than 500 feet.
wd width of drift, base of triangular drift load, feet.
X vertical component of roof slope (rise), feet.
Y horizontal component of roof slope (run), feet.
Ground Snow Loads

Sec. 2342. The ground snow load, Px, to be used in the determination of design
snow loads for buildings and other structures shall be as shown in Figures Nos.
A-5-A, A-5-B and A-5-C. For the hatched areas in Figure No. A-5-A, the basic
ground snow loads shall be determined by the building official. The ground snow
load, Px, may be adjusted by the building official when a registered engineer or ar-
chitect submits data substantiating the adjustments.
'.~ R~::.~;~: ~:a~a~ue

..
''[··''.i.':··'! of roof (or other member) snow load, P1, shall be deter-
mined by the following formula:
(43-IA)
I! where Ce is given in Table No. A-23-S and I is given in Table No. A-23-T.
I
EXCEPTION: The value of roof snow load, P1, or heated greenhouses shall
be determined by the following formula:
(43-18)
The roof snow load shall be assumed to act vertically upon the area projected
!]!ji upon a horizontal plane. Portions of curved roofs or inclined walls having a slope
'!'!' exceeding 70 degrees shall be considered free from snow load. The point at which
i
jjjjj the slope exceeds 70 degrees shall be considered the eave for such roofs. For
curved roofs, the roof slope factor, C.., shall be determined from the appropriate
::~";',;;!~""" r~ul• by oo,;ng tho •lop< on tho ,.rt;oo! •nglo fmm tho"" to
Where roof snow loads are in excess of 20 psf and a is greater than 30 degrees,
t! Formula (43-1 A) or 43-1 B) may be multiplied by C, given by the formula:
r
a-30
c, = 1 - --
40 (43-2A)
t' for unobstructed slippery surfaces, and
cs = i -a-45
--
25 (43-2B)
'' for all other surfaces where a is greater than 45 degrees.

858
EXCEPTION: For heated greenhouses Cs is given in the formulas:
(a - 15)
Cs = I - for unobstructed slippery surfaces (43-2C)
55
C = _(a- 30)
s
1 40 for other surfaces (43-20)
Where the ground snow load Pg is greater than 100 psf and a is greater than 20
degrees,
Cs = I _ (Pf- 20)(~)
p
f 40
(43-2E)
The following conditions must be met before using Formulas (43-2A), (43-2B ),
(43-2C), (43-20) and (43-2E):
(a) The height of all eaves exceeds hg; and,
(b) There are no obstructions adjacent to the structure for a distance hg mea-
sured from the eave normal to the ridge line.
Where the eave height is less than hg but greater than hg /2, and condition (b)
above is met, the roof snow load reduction represented by the last term in Formu-
las (43-2A), (43-2B) and (43-2C) shall be divided by 2.
(c) If Pg is 20 psf or less, design roof snow load must not be less than Pg. If Pg
exceeds 20 psf, design roof snow load must not be less than 20 psf.
(d) Reduced roof loads where Pg exceeds 70 psf shall not be less than those ob-
tained through use of Formula (43-1 A) for Pg equal to 70 psf.
Unbalanced Snow Loads, Gable Roofs

Sec. 2344. (a) General. In addition to the balanced load condition, unbalanced
loading shall be considered for gable roofs in accordance with this section.
(b) Single-gable Roofs. Single-gable roofs with slopes greater than 1h 12 and
less than 3:12 shall be designed to sustain a uniformly distributed load of 0.5 Pt
acting on one slope and 1.0 P1on the opposite slope. Roofs with slopes greater than
3: 12 shall be designed to sustain a uniformly distributed load equal to 1.25 Pt
applied to one slope only.
(c) Multiple-gable Roofs. I. With parallel ridge lines. For multiple-gable
roofs with parallel ridge lines having slopes exceeding 2: 12, the roof snow load
shall be increased from one half the applicable uniform roof load at the ridge
(0.5Pt) to three times the uniform load at the valley (3.0 Pt)·
2. With nonparallel ridge lines. Structural members at roof valleys for multi- ))!
pie-gable roofs having intersecting ridge lines in areas where Pg is greater than 70 ')jj
psf and where the slope is 3: 12 or greater shall be designed for Pt times Cv and the :jlli
859
Idistribution ofloads is as shown in Figures Nos. A-14 and A-15 where C.. shall be
~ :::::::o:~::o: ;~: :uNed Roofs

Sec. 2345. Portions of curved roofs having a slope exceeding 70 degrees shall
be considered free of snow load. The equivalent slope of a curved roof for calcula-
tt'ng ~ is equal to the slope of a line from the point at which the slope exceeds 70
degrees to the crown. lfthe equivalent slope is less than I 0 degrees or greater than
60 degrees, unbalanced snow loads need not be considered.
In all cases the windward side shall be considered free of snow. The unbalanced
load varies linearly from 0.5~, Pf to 2~, PrICe where the slope is 30 degrees and
decreasing to
If the ground or another roof abuts an arched roof structure with a slope exceed-
ing 30 degrees at or within 3 feet of its eave, the snow load shall not be decreased
between the 30-degree point and the eave, but shall remain constant at 2C,, Pf!Ce.
Special Eave Requirements

Sec. 2346. Eave overhanging roof structures shall be designed to sustain a uni-
formly distributed load of 2.0 Pf. or as determined by the building official, to ac-
count for ice dams and snow accumulation as shown in Figure No. A-12. Heat
strips or other exposed heat methods may not be used in lieu of this design criterion.
For shingle or shake roofs, hot or cold underlayment roofing is required on all roofs
from the building edge for a distance of 5 feet or to the ridge, whichever is less. All
building exits under down-slope eaves shall be protected from sliding snow and
ice.
Drift Loads on Lower Roofs, Decks and Roof Projections

Sec. 2347. (a) General. Multilevel roofs, lower roofs and decks of adjacent
structures and roofs adjacent to projections shall be designed in accordance with
this section.
(b) Drift Loads for Lower Roofs. The geometry of the surcharge load produced
by snow drifting shall be taken as the triangular load distributions shown in Figures
Nos. A-6, A-7, A-8, A-9 and A- 10. The height of the drift shall be calculated ac-
cording to the formula:
(47-1)
The value of hd can be taken from Figure No. A-ll for Wh ~ 600 feet.
860
(c) Roof of an Adjacent Lower Structure. Drifts may occur on lower roofs of
structures sited within 20 feet of a higher structure as depicted in Figure No. A-7.
The height of the surcharge on the lower structure shall be taken as /z,] multiplied
by (20-S)/20 to account for the horizontal separation between structures, S. in feet.
(d) Sliding Snow. Lower roofs which are located below roofs having a slope
greater than 2: 12 shall be designed for an increase in drift height of 0.4hcJ, except
that the total drift surcharge ( 1.4 hd ) shall not exceed the height of the roof above
the uniform snow depth (h,.- hh). Sliding snow need not be considered if the lower
roof is separated a distance, S, greater than h,. or 20 feet as shown in Figures Nos.
(A-7) and (A-8).
(e) Roof Projections. Mechanical equipment, penthouses, parapets and other
projections above the roof can produce drifting as depicted in Figure No. A-9.
Such drift loads shall be calculated on all sides of projections having horizontal di-
mensions exceeding 15 feet. Drifts created at the perimeter of the roof by projec- @
tions shall be computed using half the drift height from Formula (4 7-1) (i.e., 0.5 he!) Jl
with WI> taken equal to the length of the roof associated with the projections. The J
value of WI> shall be taken as the maximum distance from the projection to the
edges of the roof, or 50 feet, whichever is less.
(f) Intersecting Drifts. When one snow drift intersects another at an angle as
depicted in Figure No. A-10, the maximum unit pressure of the drift shall be taken
as the greater of the two individual drifts, but not the sum of the two. The total load
on the area of intersection is increased, however, simply because of the assumed
geometry of the intersecting drifts.
Rain on Snow
Sec. 2348. In geographic areas where intense rains may add to the roof snow
load, the building official may require the use of an additional rain on snow sur-
861
charge of 5 psf. This surcharge may be disregarded where roof slopes exceed 1h: 12
or where the basic ground snow load, Pg, exceeds 50 psf. See Section 2305 (f) for
ponding.
Oetlections
Sec. 2349. For roof slopes less than 1h: 12, the deflection of any structural mem-
~ersrraU nor exceed L/180 evaluated on the basis of roof snow loads plus K times
dead load, where K is defined in Table No. 23-E.
t.:·
·',:
....
_.'[··',l!.t·'l.:, lm:e:~~~5~~~henever P~
exceeds 70 psf, structures which could be subjected to
': impact loads (snow unloading from a higher roof) shall be designed for impact
loading.
Vertical Obstructions
Sec. 2351. Whenever P~ exceeds 70 psf, roof projections which could be sub-
jected to sliding ice or snow shall be protected with ice splitters or crickets, or shall
be designed for these forces. These conditions apply whenever the roof slope is
3: 12 or greater (except those projections within 36 inches of the ridge). All ice split-
ters shall be constructed the full width of the projection base (see Figure No. A-16).
Ice splitters shall be designed for a horizontal force F., and the resultant moment
produced from Fs being applied at midheight of the splitter given by:
F = F)( (51-1)
' Jxz + yz
WHERE:
F, = L (O.SL + B) Pt
The projection width, 8, shall not exceed 6 feet where the roof slope is greater
than 2: 12 unless approved by the building official. Chimneys and similar projec-
tions at or near the eave of a roof shall have footings and roof/wall ties designed to
resist the force of the sliding snow. Cross-grain bending of wood ledgers and edge
nailing of plywood shall not be considered to resist such forces. Snow melting
equipment shall not be considered to reduce the required design loads.
862
TABLE NO. A-23-5-SNOW EXPOSURE COEFFICIENT (C.,) 1•2

I. Roofs located in generally open terrain extending one-half mile or
more from the structure. 0.6
2. Structures located in densely forested or sheltered areas. 0.9
3. All other structures. 0.7
.177re ouiiding official may determine this coefficient for specific structures with special
local conditions. For Alaska, Arizona and Hawaii, the coefficient shall be determined
2For roofs at or near grade with slopes less than 3:12 or decks at or near grade, Ce = 1.0.
TABLE NO. A·23·T-VALUES FOR OCCUPANCY

IMPORTANCE FACTOR I
I
TYPE OF OCCUPANCY Snow
I. Essential facilities. 1 1.15
2. Any building where the primary occupancy is
for assembly use for more than 300 persons (in
one room). 1.15
3. Agricultural buildings, production greenhouses 0.9

and other miscellaneous structures.
4. All others. 1.0
1
See Table No. 23-K for definition and Section 2336 (d) for definition and additional .:l.,:.,l.,:.,•
requirements for essential facilities.
863
~ In these areas extreme local variations in snow loads preclude mapping at this
E.!1 scale; ground snow load, P,. shall be established by the building official.
The zoned value is not appropriate for certain geographic settings, such as high
country, in these areas; ground snow load, P,. shall be established by the building
official.
In these areas ground snow load, P,. shall be established by the building official.
D Those areas shown as zero, 5 and 10 are for information only.
FIGURE NO. A-5-A-GROUND SNOW LOAD, Pg, FOR 50-YEAR MEAN

RECURRENCE INTERVAL FOR WESTERN UNITED STATES
(Pounds per square foot)
864
D Those areas shown as zero, 5 and 10 are for information only.
In these areas extreme local variations in snow loads preclude mapping at this
scale; ground snow load, J;. shall be established by the building official.
~ The zoned value is not appropriate for certain geographic settings, such as high
country, in these areas; ground snow load, J;. shall be established by the building
I!§ official.
FIGURE NO. A-5-8-GROUND SNOW LOAD, P9 , FOR 50-YEAR MEAN

RECURRENCE INTERVAL FOR THE CENTRAL UNITED STATES
865
D Those areas shown as zero, 5 and I 0 are for information only.
In these areas extreme local variations in snow loads preclude mapping at this
scale; ground snow load, P.· shall be established by the building official.
~ The zoned value is not appropriate for certain geographic settings, such as high
country, in these areas; ground snow load, P.· shall be established by the building
~ official.
FIGURE NO. A·S·C-GROUND SNOW LOAD, PQ.' FOR 50-YEAR MEAN

RECURRENCE INTERVAL FOR THE EASTERN UNITED STATES
866
FIGURE NO. A-6-DRIFTING SNOW ON LOW ROOFS AND DECKS
FIGURE NO. A-7-DRIFTING SNOW ONTO ADJACENT

LOW STRUCTURES
~ wb
FIGURE NO. A-s-ADDITIONAL SURCHARGE DUE TO
SLIDING SNOW
867
FIGURE NO. A-9-SNOW DRIFTING AT ROOF PROJECTIONS
FIGURE NO. A-10--INTERSECTING SNOW DRIFTS
NOTE:
~is evaluated on the basis of upper roof
868
FIGURE NO. A-11

DETERMINATION OF 11cJ
10 ~
L..,..oo ~
-~ 8
Wb=60~
""""' ....... - ~ 1--
~~
~ / """ 400
..,;
.r:.
Cl
'ii
.r:. 6
V'
~V /
v
v
2~ ~ -- -
-
Gl
~
IV
.r:.
~
/ ~
~ 100......... ~
4
~~
:I """ I
..
Ill
:E / 50
Q
2 v I"'
~~~
~ ~.,.....- ~ !--""
I""
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Ground snow load, P9 (psf)
869
~I I ··~
\
I 1I I l
rn····· AT OVERHANG
OVERHANG
FIGURE NO. A-12-0VERHANG LOADS
1.9 .......
I
............
...........
1.75 t- ,_ 9~
.... -..li 0-QF-
-- - -- --- --
> r-~
0
a: 1.6 ~
-J!!J ~'.e.t.
~ 8~,..,
0
1.45 1- ..M'_ r--_ ~-...::: ~~
~ lNr:.
Q
c(
- - - grf ...:::= §! ~
_.
0 1.3
I !:JrP
1.2
1-
1.0 10° 0 119 I I _j I I I I I
...
0
ROOF SNOW LOAD P1 (psf) CJ)
0
0
FIGURE NO. A-13-VALLEY COEFFICIENT, Cv

870
r'·o
1
!l
,..,..,...-:.
"·. .
r.o.., _,.., ··: .... ~v
.,./_ Vo\I.U.'I'
, •.o
I ......... / ...
-~···:.- .... ' ..
.. c,.,-..,y ·.
Y..'
' .. ~f'
..·/.: "/.·. .. :.......'.. .· . .·.I J
I·.~.·/
:. I
r.o ... v.r .. :.·I

N. .. . . . . 1',
...... .
I • • '\. . . .. \llL I
I. ... ''\
I. ·c., ....1-. ·..
I• ~.'\,:.-· .. .\
r.o,J • · .· ••. • ,
,.
.....,
.
: .
v....... :.....:....~ ·. ·.
~ •
.'\.
.. c,
.\
.
r ~'
1.0
ir
V~l.l.liV
'!-r- .....
"'= rf,O
~
DENOTES INCREASED LOAD AREA:

-
I. Load is constant on lines connecting points noted 1.0.
2. Load is constant on lines connecting points noted Cv.
3. Load varies linearly between 1.0 & Cv.
FIGURE NO. A-14-VALLEV DESIGN COEFFICIENTS Cv
871
.. DENOTES INCREASED LOAD AREA:
LJ . l. Load is constant on lines connecting points noted 1.0 .

2. Load is constant on lines connecting points noted C, ..
3. Load varies linearly between 1.0 and C,..
FIGURE NO. A-15-VALLEY DESIGN COEFFICIENTS Cv
872
RIDGE
r---L/2_,
-
I
.J
T y
~----~~~~~·-----1_
ICE SPLITTER
ROOF
PROJECTION
FIGURE NO. A-16-ICE SPLITTER-PLAN VIEW
873
Division II
EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTATION
Genera\
Sec. 2360. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 every building over six stories in
height with an aggregate floor area of 60,000 square feet or more, and every build-
ing over I 0 stories in height regardless of floor area, shall be provided with not less
than three approved recording accelerographs.
Location
Sec. 2361. The instruments shall be located in the basement, midportion, and
near the top of the building. Each instrument shall be located so that access is main-
tained at all times and is unobstructed by room contents. A sign stating MAIN-
TAIN CLEAR ACCESS TO THIS INSTRUMENT shall be posted in a
conspicuous location.
Maintenance
Sec. 2362. Maintenance and service of the instruments shall be provided by the
owner of the building, subject to the approval of the building official. Data pro-
duced by the instruments shall be made available to the building official on request.
Instrumentation of Existing Buildings

Sec. 2363. All owners of existing structures selected by the jurisdiction authori-
ties shall provide accessible space for the installation of appropriate earthquake-
recording instruments. Location of said instruments shall be determined by the ju-
risdiction authorities. The jurisdiction authorities shall make arrangements to pro-
vide, maintain and service the instruments. Data shall be the property of the
jurisdiction, but copies of individual records shall be made available to the public
on request and the payment of an appropriate fee.
SEISMIC ZONE TABULATION

For Areas outside the United States
Location Seismic Zone Location Seismic Zone
ASIA PACIFIC OCEAN AREA
Turkey Caroline Island
Ankara 2 Koror, Paulau 2
Karamursel 3 Ponape 0
ATLANTIC OCEAN AREA Johnston Island I
Azores 2 Kwajalein
Bermuda I Mariana Islands
CARIBBEAN SEA Guam 3
Bahama Islands I Saipan 3
Canal Zone 2 Tin ian 3
Leeward Islands 3 Marcus Island I
Puerto Rico 3 Okinawa 3
Trinidad Island 2 Philippine Islands 3
874
SEISMIC ZONE TABULATION-(Continued)

For Areas Outside the United States
NORTH AMERICA Samoa Islands 3
Greenland Wake Island 0
Iceland
Keflavik 3
Division Ill
EARTHQUAKE REGULATIONS FOR
SEISMIC-ISOLATED STRUCTURES
NOTE: This is a new division
General
Sec. 2370. Every seismic-isolated structure and every portion thereof shall be
designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of this division and
the applicable requirements of Chapter 23, Part III.
The lateral force-resisting system and the isolation system shall be designed to
resist the deformations and stresses produced by the effects of seismic ground mo-
tions as provided in this division.
Where wind forces prescribed by Chapter 23, Part II, produce greater deforma-
tions or stresses, such loads shall be used for design in lieu of the deformations and
stresses resulting from earthquake forces.
Definitions
Sec. 2371. The definitions of Section 2331 and the following apply to the provi-
sions of this division:
DESIGN-BASIS EARTHQUAKE is defined in Section 2335 (b).
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT is the design-basis earthquake lateral displace-
ment, excluding additional displacement due to actual and accidental torsion, re-
quired for design of the isolation system.
EFFECTIVE DAMPING is the value of equivalent viscous damping corre-
sponding to energy dissipated during cyclic response of the isolation system.
EFFECTIVE STIFFNESS is the value of the lateral force in the isolation sys-
tem, or an element thereof, divided by the corresponding lateral displacement.
ISOLATION INTERFACE is the boundary between the upper portion of the
structure, which is isolated, and the lower portion of the structure. which moves
rigidly with the ground.
ISOLATION SYSTEM is the collection of structural elements which includes
all individual isolator units, all structural elements which transfer force between
elements of the isolation system, and all connections to other structural elements.
875
SEISMIC ZONE TABULATION-(Continued)

For Areas Outside the United States
NORTH AMERICA Samoa Islands 3
Greenland Wake Island 0
Iceland
Ketlavik 3
Division Ill
EARTHQUAKE REGULATIONS FOR
SEISMIC-ISOLATED STRUCTURES
NOTE: This is a new division
General
Sec. 2370. Every seismic-isolated structure and every portion thereof shall be
designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of this division and
the applicable requirements of Chapter 23, Part III.
The lateral force-resisting system and the isolation system shall be designed to
resist the deformations and stresses produced by the effects of seismic ground mo-
tions as provided in this division.
Where wind forces prescribed by Chapter 23, Part II, produce greater deforma-
tions or stresses, such loads shall be used for design in lieu ofthe deformations and
stresses resulting from earthquake forces.
Definitions
Sec. 2371. The definitions of Section 2331 and the following apply to the provi-
sions of this division:
DESIGN-BASIS EARTHQUAKE is defined in Section 2335 (b).
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT is the design-basis earthquake lateral displace-
ment, excluding additional displacement due to actual and accidental torsion, re-
quired for design of the isolation system.
EFFECTIVE DAMPING is the value of equivalent viscous damping corre-
sponding to energy dissipated during cyclic response of the isolation system.
EFFECTIVE STIFFNESS is the value of the lateral force in the isolation sys-
tem, or an element thereof, divided by the corresponding lateral displacement.
ISOLATION INTERFACE is the boundary between the upper portion of the
structure, which is isolated, and the lower portion of the structure, which moves
rigidly with the ground.
ISOLATION SYSTEM is the collection of structural elements which includes
all individual isolator units, all structural elements which transfer force between
elements of the isolation system, and all connections to other structural elements.
875
The isolation system also includes the wind-restraint system if such a system is
used to meet the design requirements of this section.
ISOLATOR UNIT is a horizontally flexible and vertically rigid structural ele-
ment of the isolation system which permits large lateral deformations under design
seismic load. An isolator unit may be used either as part of or in addition to the
weight-supporting system of the building.
MAXIMUM CREDIBLE EARTHQUAKE is the maximum level of earth-
quake ground shaking which may ever be expected at the building site within the
known geological framework. This intensity may be taken as the level of earth-
quake ground motion that has a I 0 percent probability of being exceeded in a
250-year time period.
TOTAL DESIGN DISPLACEMENT is the design-basis earthquake lateral
displacement, including additional displacement due to actual and accidental tor-
sion, required for design of the isolation system, or an element thereof.
TOTAL MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT is the maximum credible earth-
quake lateral displacement, including additional displacement due to actual and
accidental torsion, required for verification of the stability of the isolation system,
or elements thereof, design of building separations, and vertical load testing of iso-
lator unit prototypes.
WIND-RESTRAINT SYSTEM is the collection of structural elements which
provide restraint of the seismic-isolated structure for wind loads. The wind-
restraint system may be either an integral part of isolator units or may be a separate
device.
Sec. 2372. The symbols and notations of Section 2332 and the following provi-
sions apply to the provisions of this division:
B = numerical coefficient related to the effective damping of the isola-
tion system as set forth in Table No. A-23-W.
h the shortest plan dimension of the structure, in feet, measured per-
pendicular to d.
D design displacement, in inches, at the center of rigidity of the isola-
tion system in the direction under consideration, as prescribed by
Formula (74-1 ).
Dr total design displacement, in inches, of an element of the isolation
system including both translational displacement at the center of ri-
gidity, D, and the component of torsional displacement in the direc-
tion under consideration, as specified in Section 2374 (c) 3.
DrM total maximum displacement, in inches, of an element of the isola-
tion system, including both translational displacement at the center
of rigidity and the component of torsional displacement in the direc-
tion under consideration, as prescribed by Formula (74-4).
d the longest plan dimension of the structure, in feet.
e the actual eccentricity, in feet, measured in plan between the center of
mass of the structure above the isolation interface and the center of
876
rigidity of the isolation system, plus accidental eccentricity, in feet,

taken as 5 percent of d.
F- maximum negative force in an isolator unit during a single cycle of
prototype testing at a displacement amplitude of d-.
Fm-;;, maximum negative force in an isolator unit for all cycles of prototype
testing at a common displacement amplitude of d-.
F;;;;;, minimum negative force in an isolator unit for all cycles of prototype
testing at a common displacement amplitude of d-.
F+ maximum positive force in an isolator unit during a single cycle of
prototype testing at a displacement amplitude of d+.
Fni, maximum positive force in an isolator unit for all cycles of prototype
testing at a common displacement amplitude of d+.
F;!i;, minimum positive force in an isolator unit for all cycles of prototype
testing at a common displacement amplitude of d+.
keJJ effective stiffness of an isolator unit, as prescribed by Formula
(81-1 ).
kmax maximum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design
displacement in the horizontal direction under consideration.
km; 11 minimum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design dis-
placement in the horizontal direction under consideration.
N numerical coefficient related to the proximity of the building or
structure to active faults as set forth in Table No. A-23-V.
R..1 numerical coefficient related to the type oflateral force-resisting sys-
tem above the isolation interface as set forth in Table No. A-23-X for
seismic-isolated structures.
S1 numerical coefficient for site-soil profile as set forth in Table No.
A-23-U for seismic-isolated structures.
T1 period of seismic-isolated structure, in seconds, in the direction un-
der consideration, as prescribed by Formula (74-2).
Vh the total lateral seismic design force or shear on elements at or below
the isolation interface, as prescribed by Formula (74-5).
V, the total lateral seismic design force or shear on elements above the
isolation interface, as prescribed by Formula (74-6).
W the total seismic dead load defined in Section 2334 (a). For design of
the isolation system, W is the total seismic dead load weight of the
structure above the isolation interface.
y the distance, in feet, between the center of rigidity of the isolation
system rigidity and the element of interest, measured perpendicular
to the direction of seismic loading under consideration.
d+ maximum positive displacement of an isolator unit during each cycle
of prototype testing.
877
A- maximum negative displacement of an isolator unit during each

cycle of prototype testing.
l3 effective damping of the isolation system, as prescribed by Formula
(81-2).
Criteria Selection
Sec. 2373. (a) Basis for Design. The procedures and limitations for the design
of seismic-isolated structures shall be determined considering zoning, site char-
acteristics, occupancy, configuration, structural system and height in accordance
with Section 2333, except as noted below.
(b) Stability of the Isolation System. The stability of the vertical load-carry-
ing elements of the isolation system shall be verified by analysis and test, as re-
quired, for lateral seismic displacement equal to the total maximum displacement.
(c) Occupancy Categories. The importance factor,/, for a seismic-isolated
building shall be taken as 1.0 regardless of occupancy category.
(d) Configuration Requirements. Each structure shall be designated as being
regular or irregular on the basis of the structural configuration above the isolation
interface.
(e) Selection of Lateral Response Procedure. I. General. Any seismic-iso-
lated structure may be, and certain seismic-isolated structures defined below shall
be, designed using the dynamic lateral response procedure of Section 2375.
2. Static analysis. The static lateral response procedure of Section 2374 may be
used for design of a seismic-isolated structure, provided:
A. The structure is located at least 15 kilometer (km) from all active faults.
B. The structure is located on a soil profile with a site factor of S 1 or S2•
C. The structure is located in Seismic Zone No. 3 or 4.
D. The structure above the isolation interface is equal to or less than four stor-
ies, or 65 feet, in height.
E. The isolated period of the structure, T1 , is equal to or less than 3.0 seconds.
F. The isolated period of the structure, h is greater than 3 times the elastic,
fixed-base period of the structure above the isolation interface, as determined by
Formula (34-5) of Section 2334.
G. The structure above the isolation interface is of regular configuration.
H. The isolation system does not limit the total maximum displacement to less
than 1.5 times the total design displacement.
I. The isolation system is defined by all of the following attributes:
(i) The effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design displacement
is greater than one third of the effective stiffness at 20 percent of the design
displacement.
(ii) The isolation system is capable of producing a restoring force, as specified
in Section 2377 (b) 4.
(iii) The isolation system has force-deflection properties which are indepen-
dent of the rate of loading.
878
(iv) The isolation system has force-deflection properties which are indepen-
dent of vertical load and bilateral load.
3. Dynamic analysis. The dynamic lateral response procedure of Section 2375
shall be used for design of seismic-isolated structures as specified below:
A. Response spectrum analysis. Response spectrum analysis may be used for
design of a seismic-isolated structure, provided:
(i) The structure is located on a soil profile with a site factor of S 1, S2 or S3•
(ii) The isolation system is defined by all of the attributes specified in Section
2373 (e) 2 Hand I.
B. Time-history analysis. Time-history analysis may be used for design of any
seismic-isolated structure and shall be used for design of all seismic-isolated struc-
tures not meeting the criteria of Section 2373 (e) 3 A.
C. Site-specific design spectra. Site-specific ground motion spectra of the de-
sign-basis earthquake and the maximum credible earthquake, developed in accor-
dance with Section 2335 (b), shall be used for design and analysis of all
seismic-isolated structures as specified below:
(i) The structure is located on a soil profile with a site factor of S3 or S4 .
(ii) The structure is located within 15 km of an active fault.
(iii) The structure is located in Seismic Zone No. I, 2A or 2B.
(iv) The isolated period of the structure, T1 , is greater than 3.0 seconds.
Static Lateral Response Procedure

Sec. 2374. (a) General. Except as provided in Section 2375, every seismic-iso-
lated structure, or portion thereof, shall be designed and constructed to resist mini-
mum earthquake displacements and forces as specified by this section and the
applicable requirements of Section 2334.
(b) Deformation Characteristics of the Isolation System. Minimum lateral
earthquake design displacements and forces on seismic-isolated structures shall be
based on the deformation characteristics of the isolation system.
The deformation characteristics of the isolation system shall explicitly include
the effects of the wind-restraint system if such a system is used to meet the design
requirements of this document.
The deformation characteristics of the isolation system shall be based on proper-
ly substantiated tests performed in accordance with Section 2381.
(c) Minimum Lateral Displacements. I. Design displacement. The isola-
tion system shall be designed and constructed to withstand minimum lateral earth-
quake displacements which act in the direction of each of the main horizontal axes
of the structure in accordance with the formula:
D = IOZNS/ft/8 (74-1)
2. Isolated-structure period. The isolated-structure period, T1, shall be deter-
mined using the deformational characteristics of the isolation system in accor-
879
dance with the formula:
(74-2)
3. Total design displacement. The total design displacement, Dr, of elements

of the isolation system shall include additional displacement due to actual and acci-
dental torsion calculated considering the spatial distribution of the lateral stiffness
of the isolation system and the most disadvantageous location of mass eccentricity.
The total design displacement, Dr, of elements of an isolation system with uni-
form spatial distribution of lateral stiffness shall not be taken as less than that pre-
scribed by the formula:
Dr= D { 1 + y[l2e/(h 2 + d!)]} (74-3)
The total design displacement, Dr, may be taken as less than the value prescribed
by Formula (74-3), but not less than 1.1 times D, provided the isolation system is
shown by calculation to be configured to resist torsion accordingly.
4. Total maximum displacement. The total maximum displacement, DTM, re-
quired for verification of isolation system stability in the most critical direction of
horizontal response shall be calculated in accordance with the formula:
DTM = 1.5 Dr (74-4)
(d) Minimum Lateral Forces. 1. Structural elements at or below the isola-
tion interface. The isolation system, the foundation, and all structural elements
below the isolation interface shall be designed and constructed to withstand a mini-
mum lateral seismic force, Vh, using all of the appropriate provisions for a noniso-
lated structure where:
(74-5)
2. Structural elements above the isolation interface. The structure above the
isolation interface shall be designed and constructed to withstand a minimum shear
force, V,, using all of the appropriate provisions for a nonisolated structure where:
(74-6)
The Rwt factor shall be based on the type oflateral force-resisting system used for
the structure above the isolation system.
3. Limits on V,. The value of V, shall not be taken as less than the following:
A. The lateral seismic force required by Chapter 23, Part III, for a fixed-base
structure of the same weight, W, and a period equal to the isolated period, Tt.
B. The base shear corresponding to the design wind load.
C. The lateral seismic force required to fully activate the isolation system (e.g.,
the yield level of a softening system, the ultimate capacity of a sacrificial wind-
restraint system or the static friction level of a sliding system).
880
(e) Vertical Distribution of Force. The total force shall be distributed over the
height of the structure above the isolation interface in accordance with the formula:
F,=-n--
v,wx (74-7)
i=f
At each level designated as x, the force F, shall be applied over the area of the
building in accordance with the mass distribution at the level. Stresses in each
structural element shall be calculated as the effect of force, Fx, applied at the appro-
priate levels above the base.
(f) Drift Limits. The maximum interstory drift ratio of the structure above the
isolation system shall not exceed O.O!O/R.,1•
Dynamic Lateral Response Procedure

Sec. 2375. (a) General. As required by Section 2373, every seismic-isolated
structure, or portion thereof, shall be designed and constructed to resist earthquake
displacements and forces as specified in this section and the applicable require-
(b) Isolation System and Structural Elements below the Isolation Inter-
face. The total design displacement of the isolation system shall not be taken as
less than 90 percent of Dr as specified by Section 2374 (c) 3.
The total maximum displacement of the isolation system shall not be taken as
less than 80 percent of DrM as prescribed by Formula (74-4).
The design lateral shear force on the isolation system and structural elements
below the isolation interface shall not be taken as less than 90 percent of Vh as pre-
scribed by Formula (74-5).
(c) Structural Elements above the Isolation Interface. The design lateral
shear force on the structure above the isolation interface, if regular in configura-
tion, shall not be taken as less than 80 percent of kmaxDIR.,1, or less than the limits
specified by Section 2374 (d) 3.
EXCEPTION: The design lateral shear force on the structure above the isolation
interface, if regular in configuration, may be taken as less than 80 percent of k,w_,DI
R.,,, but not less than 60 percent of kma.,DIR.,,, provided time-history analysis is used
for design of the structure.
The design lateral shear force on the structure above the isolation interface, if
irregular in configuration, shall not be taken as Jess than kmaxDI R.-1 , or less than the
limits specified by Section 2374 (d) 3.
EXCEPTION: The design lateral shear force on the structure above the isolation
interface, if irregular in configuration, may be taken as less than kma.,DIR.,,, but not
less than 80 percent of kmaxDIRw1 , provided time-history analysis is used for design
of the structure.
(d) Ground Motion. I. Design spectra. Properly substantiated, site-specific
spectra are required for design of all structures with an isolated period, T1 , greater
than 3.0 seconds, or located on a soil type profile of S3 or S4 , or located within 15 km
881
of an active fault or located in Seismic Zone No. I, 2A or 2B. Structures not requir-
ing site-specific spectra shall be designed using spectra based on Figure No. 23-3
of Chapter 23, Part III.
A design spectrum shall be constructed for the design-basis earthquake. This de-
sign spectrum shall not be taken as less than the normalized response spectrum
given in Figure No. 23-3 ofChapter23, Part III, for the appropriate soil type, scaled
by the seismic zone coefficient.
EXCEPTION: If a site-specific spectrum is calculated for the design-basis
earthquake, then the design spectrum may be taken as less than I 00 percent, but not
less than 80 percent of the normalized response spectrum given in Figure No. 23-3
of Chapter 23, Part Ill, the appropriate soil type, scaled by the seismic zone coeffi-
cient.
A design spectrum shall be constructed for the maximum credible earthquake.
This design spectrum shall not be taken as less than 1.25 times the design basis
earthquake spectrum. This design spectrum shall be used to determine the total
maximum displacement for testing of the stability of the base-isolation system.
2. Time histories. Pairs of horizontal ground motion time-history components
shall be selected from not less than three recorded events. These motions shall be
scaled such that the square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of the 5 percent-damped
spectrum of the scaled horizontal components does not fall below 1.3 times the 5
percent-damped spectrum of the design-basis earthquake (or maximum credible
earthquake) by more than I 0 percent in the period range of T1, as determined by
Formula (74-2), for periods from T1 minus 1.0 seconds to T1 , plus 2.0 seconds.
The duration of the time histories shall be consistent with the magnitude and
source characteristics of the design-basis earthquake (or maximum credible earth-
quake).
· Time histories developed for sites within 15 km of a major active fault shall in-
corporate near-fault phenomena.
(e) Mathematical Model. I. General. The mathematical models of the iso-
lated structure, including the isolation system, the lateral force-resisting system
and other structural elements, shall conform to Section 2335 (c) and to the require-
ments of Subsections 2 and 3 below.
2. Isolation system. The isolation system shall be modeled using deformation-
al characteristics developed and verified by test in accordance with the require-
ments of Section 2374 (b).
The isolation system shall be modeled with sufficient detail to:
A. Account for the spatial distribution of isolator units,
B. Calculate translation, in both horizontal directions, and torsion of the struc-
ture above the isolation interface, considering the most disadvantageous location
of mass eccentricity,
C. Assess overturning/uplift forces on individual isolator units, and
D. Account for the effects of vertical load, bilateral load and/or the rate of load-
ing if the force deflection properties of the isolation system are dependent on one or
more of these attributes.
882
3. Isolated structure. A. Displacement. The maximum displacement of each

floor and the total design displacement and total maximum displacement across
the isolation system shall be calculated using a model of the isolated structure
which incorporates the force-deflection characteristics of nonlinear elements of
the isolation system and the lateral force-resisting system.
Isolation systems with nonlinear elements include, but are not limited to, sys-
tems which do not meet the criteria of Section 2373 (e) 2 I.
Lateral force-resisting systems with nonlinear elements include, but are not lim-
ited to, irregular structural systems designed for a lateral force less than kmaxDIRw1
and regular structural systems designed for a lateral force less than 80 percent of
k,"',DIRwl·
B. Forces and displacements in key elements. Design forces and displace-
ments in key elements of the lateral force-resisting system may be calculated using
a linear elastic model of the isolated structure, provided:
(i) Pseudo-elastic properties assumed for nonlinear isolation system compo-
nents are based on the maximum effective stiffness of the isolation system.
(ii) All key elements of the lateral force-resisting system are linear.
(f) Description of Analysis Procedures. I. General. A response spectrum
analysis or a time-history analysis, or both, shall be performed in accordance with
Section 2335 (d) and (e) and the requirements of this section.
2. Input earthquake. The design-basis earthquake shall be used to calculate
the total design displacement of the isolation system and the lateral forces and dis-
placements of the isolated structure. The maximum credible earthquake shall be
used to calculate the total maximum displacement of the isolation system.
3. Response spectrum analysis. Response spectrum analysis shall be per-
formed using a damping value equal to the effective damping of the isolation sys-
tem or 30 percent of critical, whichever is less.
Response spectrum analysis used to determine the total design displacement
and the total maximum displacement shall include simultaneous excitation of the
model by I00 percent of the most critical direction of ground motion and 30 percent
of the ground motion on the orthogonal axis.
4. Time-history analysis. Time-history analysis shall be performed with at
least three appropriate pairs of horizontal time-history components, as defined in
Section 2375 (d) 2.
Each pair of time histories shall be applied simultaneously to the model, consid-
ering the most disadvantageous location of mass eccentricity.
The maximum response of the parameter of interest calculated by the three time-
history analyses shall be used for design.
(g) Design Lateral Force. I. Structural elements at or below the isolation
interface. The isolation system, the foundation and all structural elements below
the isolation interface shall be designed using all of the appropriate provisions for a
nonisolated structure and the forces obtained from the dynamic analysis reduced
by a factor of I .5.
883
2. Structural elements above the isolation interface. Structural elements

above the isolation interface shall be designed using all of the appropriate provi-
sions for a non isolated structure and the forces obtained from the dynamic analysis
reduced by a factor of Rwt· The Rwt factor shall be based on the type of lateral
force-resisting system used for the structure above the isolation system.
3. Scaling of results. When the factored lateral shear force on structural ele-
ments, determined using either response spectrum or time-history analysis, is less
than the minimum level prescribed by Section 2375 (a), then all response parame-
ters, including member forces and moments shall be adjusted upward proportion-
ally.
(h) Drift Limits. Maximum inters tory drift corresponding to the design lateral
force shall not exceed the following limits:
I. The maximum inters tory drift ratio of the structure above the isolation sys-
tem, calculated by response spectrum analysis, shall not exceed 0.015/Rwt·
The maximum interstory drift ratio of the structure above the isolation system,
calculated by time-history analysis considering the force-deflection characteris-
tics of nonlinear elements of the lateral force-resisting system, shall not exceed
0.020/K.,.
The secondary effects of the maximum credible earthquake lateral displacement
(delta) of the structure above the isolation system combined with gravity forces
shall be investigated if the interstory drift ratio exceeds 0.010/Rwt·
Lateral Load on Elements of Structures and Nonstructural

Components Supported by Structures
Sec. 2376. (a) General. Parts or portions of an isolated structure, permanent
nonstructural components and the attachments to them, and the attachments for
permanent equipment supported by a structure shall be designed to resist seismic
forces and displacements as prescribed by this section and the applicable require-
(b) Forces and Displacements. I. Components at or above the isolation in-
terface. Elements of seismic-isolated structures and nonstructural components, or
portions thereof, which are at or above the isolation interface, shall be designed to
resist a total lateral seismic force equal to the maximum dynamic response of the
element or component under consideration divided by a factor of 1.5.
EXCEPTION: Elements of seismic-isolated structures and nonstructural com-
ponents, or portions thereof, may be designed to resist total lateral seismic force as
prescribed by Formula (36-1) of Section 2336.
2. Components which cross the isolation interface. Elements of seismic-iso-
lated structures and nonstructural components, or portions thereof, which cross the
isolation interface shall be designed to withstand the total maximum displacement.
3. Components below the isolation interface. Elements of seismic-isolated
structures and nonstructural components, or portions thereof, which are below the
isolation interface shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the re-
quirements of Section 2336.
884
Detailed Systems Requirements

Sec. 2377. (a) General. The isolation system and the structural system shall
comply with the requirements of Section 2337 and the material requirements of
Chapters 24 through 28. In addition, the isolation system shall comply with the de-
tailed system requirements of this section and the structural system shall comply
with the detailed system requirements of this section and the applicable portions
of Section 2337.
(b) Isolation System. 1. Environmental conditions. In addition to the require-
ments for vertical and lateral loads induced by wind and earthquake, the isolation
system shall be designed with consideration given to other environmental condi-
tions including aging effects, creep, fatigue, operating temperature and exposure to
moisture or damaging substances.
2. Wind forces. Isolated structures shall resist design wind loads at all levels
above the isolation interface in accordance with the general wind design provi-
sions. At the isolation interface, a wind restraint system shall be provided to limit
lateral displacement in the isolation system to a value equal to that required be-
tween floors of the structure above the isolation interface.
3. Fire resistance. Fire resistance for the isolation system shall meet that re-
quired for the building columns, walls or other structural elements.
4. Lateral restoring force. The isolation system shall be configured to produce
a restoring force such that the lateral force at the total design displacement is at least
0.025W greaterthan the lateral force at 50 percent of the total design displacement.
EXCEPTION: The isolation system need not be configured to produce a restor-
ing force, as required above, provided the isolation system is capable of remaining
stable under full vertical load and accommodating a total maximum displacement
equal to the greater of either 3.0 times the total design displacement or 36ZNS, in-
ches.
5. Displacement restraint. If the isolation system is configured to limit the
total maximum displacement to less than 1.5 times the total design displacement,
then the isolation system shall be designed for lateral forces corresponding to the
maximum credible earthquake and the structure above the isolation system shall
be checked for stability and ductility demand of the maximum credible earthquake.
The total maximum displacement required for vertical load testing of isolator unit
prototypes, building separations and verification of isolation system stability shall
be calculated using time-history analysis, but shall not be taken as less than 1.2
times the total design displacement.
6. Vertical load stability. The isolation system shall provide a factor of safety
of three for vertical loads (dead load plus live load) in its laterally undeformed
state. It shall also be designed to be stable under the full design vertical loads at a
horizontal displacement equal to the total maximum displacement.
7. Overturning. The factor of safety against global structural overturning at
the isolation interface shall not be less than 1.0 for required load combinations. All
gravity and seismic loading conditions shall be investigated, except that seismic
forces for overturning calculations shall be based on the maximum base shear for
the superstructure; and W shall be used for the vertical restoring force.
885
Local uplift of individual elements is permitted provided the resulting deflec-

tions do not cause overstress or instability of the isolator units or other building
elements.
8. Inspection and replacement. Access for inspection and replacement of all
components of the isolation system shall be provided.
9. Quality control. A quality control testing program for isolator units shall be
established by the engineer responsible for the structural design.
(c) Structural System. I. Horizontal distribution of force. A horizontal dia-
phragm or other structural elements shall provide continuity above the isolation
interface and shall have adequate strength and ductility to transmit forces (due to
nonuniform ground motion) from one part of the building to another.
2. Building separations. Minimum separations between the isolated building
and surrounding retaining walls or other fixed obstructions shall not be less than
the total maximum displacement.
Nonbuildlng Structures
Sec. 2378. Nonbuilding structures shall be designed in accordance with there-
quirements of Section 2338 using design displacements and forces calculated in
accordance with Section 2374 or 2375.
Foundations
Sec. 2379. Foundations shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
the requirements of Chapter 29 using design forces calculated in accordance with
Section 2374 or 2375.
Design and Construction Review

Sec. 2380. (a) General. A design review of the isolation system and related test
programs shall be performed by an independent engineering team including per-
sons licensed in the appropriate disciplines, experienced in seismic analysis meth-
ods and the theory and application of seismic isolation.
(h) Isolation System. Isolation system design review shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
I. Review of site-specific seismic criteria, including the development of
site-specific spectra and ground motion time histories, and all other design
criteria developed specifically for the project.
2. Review of the preliminary design, including the determination of the total
design displacement of the isolation system design displacement and lateral
force design level.
3. Overview and observation of prototype testing (Section 2381 ).
4. Review of the final design ofthe entire structural system and all supporting
analyses.
5. Review of the isolation system quality control testing program [Section
2377 (b) 9].
886
Required Tests of Isolation System

Sec. 2381. (a) General. The deformation characteristics and damping values of
the isolation system used in the design and analysis of seismic-isolated structures
shall be based on the following tests of a selected sample of the components prior
to construction.
The isolation system components to be tested shall include the wind restraint
system if such systems are used in the design.
The tests specified in this section are for establishing and validating the design
properties of the isolation system, and shall not be considered as satisfying the
manufacturing quality control tests of Section 2377 (b) 9.
(b) Prototype Tests. I. General. Prototype tests shall be performed separately
on two full-size specimens of each type and size of isolator unit of the isolation
system. The test specimens shall include the wind restraint system, as well as indi-
vidual isolator units, if such systems are used in the design. Specimens tested shall
not be used for construction.
2. Record. For each cycle of tests the force-deflection and hysteretic behavior
of the test specimen shall be recorded.
3. Sequence and cycles. The following sequence of tests shall be performed for
the prescribed number of cycles at a vertical load equal to the typical or average DL
on all isolator units of a common type and size:
A. Twenty fully reversed cycles of loading at a lateral force corresponding to
the wind design force.
B. Three fully reversed cycles ofloading at each ofthe following increments of
the total design displacement: 0.25, 0.50, 0.75 and 1.0.
C. I5St/B, but not Jess than ten, fully reversed cycles ofloading at 1.0 times the
total design displacement and a vertical load equal to DL.
If an isolator unit is also a vertical load-carrying element, then Item 8 of these-
quence of cyclic tests specified above shall be performed for two additional verti-
cal load cases:
(I) 1.2DL + 0.5LL + lEI
(2) 0.8DL - lEI
where DL, LL and E are as defined in Chapter 23, Part III. In these tests, the com-
bined vertical load shall be taken as the typical or average downward force on all
isolator units of a common type and size.
4. Units dependent on loading rates. If the force-deflection properties of the
isolator units are dependent on the rate of loading, then each set of tests specified in
Section 2381 (b) 3 shall be performed dynamically at three different rates ofload-
ing. The frequency of loading shall correspond to 1h. I and 2 times the inverse of
the isolated structure period, defined as a cycle of response at the total design dis-
placement.
EXCEPTION: Properly documented dynamic tests of scaled specimens may be
used to quantify the properties of rate-dependent systems, in lieu of the above speci-
fied dynamic tests. The scaled specimens shall be representative of full-scale proto-
type specimens.
887
The force-deflection properties of an isolator unit shall be considered to be de-

pendent on the rate of loading if there is greater than a± 10 percent change in the
effective stiffness at the design displacement for either a factor of two increase or a
factor of two decrease in the rate ofloading, where the frequency ofloading is taken
as the inverse of the isolated structure period.
5. Units dependent on bilateral load. If the force-deflection properties of the
isolator units are dependent on bilateral load, then the tests specified in Section
2381 (b) 3 and 4 shall be augmented to include bilateral load at increments of the
total design displacement 0.25 and 1.0, 0.50 and 1.0, 0.75 and 1.0, and 1.0 and 1.0.
EXCEPTION: Properly documented dynamic tests of scaled specimens may be
used to quantify the properties of direction dependent systems, in lieu of the above
specified tests. The scaled specimens shall be representative of full-scale prototype
specimens.
The force-deflection properties of an isolator unit shall be considered to be de-
pendent on bilateral load, if the bilateral and unilateral force-deflection properties
have greater than a I 0 percent difference in effective stiffness at the design dis-
placement.
6. Downward vertical load. The vertical load-carrying elements of the isola-
tion system shall be statically tested for maximum and minimum downward verti-
calload, at the total maximum displacement. In these tests, the combined vertical
load of 1.2DL + I.OLL + 1£1 shall be taken as the maximum downward force, and
the combined vertical load ofO. 8DL -1£1 shall be taken as the minimum downward
force, on any one isolator unit of a common type and size.
7. Sacrificial wind-restraint systems. If a sacrificial wind-restraint system is
to be utilized, then the ultimate capacity shall be established by test.
8. Testing similar units. The prototype tests are not required if an isolator unit
is of similar size and of the same type and material as the prototype isolator unit that
has been previously tested using the specified sequence of tests.
(c) Determination of Force-deflection Characteristics. The force-deflec-
tion characteristics of the isolation system shall be based on the cyclic load test re-
sults for each fully reversed cycle of loading.
The effective stiffness of an isolator unit shall be calculated for each cycle of
loading as follows:
(81-1)
where F+ and F-are the maximum positive and maximum negative forces, re-
spectively, and il+ and Ll- are the maximum positive and maximum negative test
displacements, respectively.
If the minimum effective stiffness is to be determined, then Frn"tn and F;;;n shall
be used in the equation.
If the maximum effective stiffness is to be determined, then Frntx and Fn-;;, shall
be used in the equation.
888
(d) System Adequacy. The performance of the test specimens shall be assessed
as adequate if the following conditions are satisfied:
1. The force-deflection plots of all tests specified in Section 2381 (b) have a
positive incremental force-carrying capacity.
2. For each increment of test displacement specified in Section 2381 (b) 3 Band
for each vertical load case specified in Section 2381 (b) 3:
A. There is no greater than a I 0 percent difference between the effective stiff-
ness at each of the three cycles of test and the average value of effective stif-
fness for each test specimen.
B. There is no greater than a 10 percent difference in the average value of effec-
tive stiffness of the two test specimens of a common type and size of the iso-
lator unit over the required three cycles of test.
3. For each specimen there is no greaterthan a± 20 percent change in the initial
effective stiffness of each test specimen overthe 1551/B, but not less than I 0, cycles
of test specified in Section 2381 (b) 3 C.
4. For each specimen there is no greater than a 20 percent decrease in the initial
effective damping over for the l5Stf8, but not less than I 0, cycles of test specified
in Section 2381 (b) 3 C.
5. All specimens of vertical load-carrying elements of the isolation system re-
main stable at the total maximum displacement for static load as prescribed in Sec-
tion 2381 (b) 6.
(e) Design Properties of the Isolation System. I. Effective stiffness. The
minimum and maximum effective stiffnesses of the isolation system shall be deter-
mined as follows:
A. The value of k,,;n shall be based on the minimum effective stiffnesses of in-
dividual isolator units as established by the cyclic tests of Section 2381 (b)
3 B at a displacement amplitude equal to the design displacement.
B. The value of kmax shall be based on the maximum effective stiffnesses of in-
dividual isolator units as established by the cyclic tests of Section 2381 (b)
3 B at a displacement amplitude equal to the design displacement.
C. For isolator units that are found by the tests of Section 2381 (b) 3, 4 and 5
to have force-deflection characteristics which vary with vertical load, rate
of loading or bilateral load, respectively, the value of kmax shall be increased
and the value of kmin shall be decreased, as necessary, to bound the effects
of measured variation in effective stiffness.
2. Effective damping. The effective damping(~) of the isolation system shall
be calculated as:
{3 _ J_ [Total Area]
2 (81-2)
- 2Jr kmaxD
where the total area shall be taken as the sum ofthe areas of the hysteresis loops of
all isolator units and the hysteresis loop area of each isolator unit shall be taken as
889
the minimum area of the three hysteresis loops established by the cyclic tests of
Section 2381 (b) 3 Bat a displacement amplitude equal to the design displacement.
TABLE NO. A-23-U

SITE COEFFICIENTS FOR SEISMIC-ISOLATED STRUCTURES
SOIL PROFILE TYPE' S, FACTOR
s, 1.0
s2 1.5
s, 2.0
s4 2.7
1See Table No. 23-J for a descnption of soil profile types and related requirements.
TABLE NO. A-23-V

NEAR-FIELD RESPONSE COEFFICIENT N
'
CLOSEST DISTANCE, d,, TO AN ACTIVE FAULT'·'
d, > 15km I d, = 10km I d, < 5km
N 1.0 I 1.2 I 1.5
1Active faults shall be established from properly substantiated geotechnical data (e.g., most
recent mapping of active faults by the United States Geological Survey or the California
Division of Mines and Geology).
2The near-field response coefficient shall be based on linear interpolation for values of the
closest distance, dF, to an active fault other than those given.
TABLE NO. A-23-W

DAMPING COEFFICIENT, B
EFFECTIVE DAMPING (Percentage of Crltical) 1•2
<2"k I 5% I 10% I 20% I 30% I 40% I >50%
B 0.8 I 1.0 I 1.2 I 1.5 I 1.7 I 1.9 I 2.0

1The damping coefficient shall be based on the effective dampmg of the isolation system
determined in accordance with the requirements of Section 2381 (e).
2The damping coefficient shall be based on linear interpolation for effective damping values
other than those given.
890
TABLE NO. A-23-X

STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS ABOVE THE ISOLATION INTERFACE
BASIC STRUCTURAL LATERAL LOAD-RESISTING ,..,.
5
SYSTEM' SYSTEM-DESCRPTION Rw1
A. Bearing wall I. Light-framed walls with shear panels

system a. Plywood walls for structures three
stories or less 2.6 65
b. All other light-framed walls 2.2 65
2. Shear walls
a. Concrete 2.6 160
b. Masonry 2.6 160
3. Light-steel-framed bearing walls with
tension-on! y bracing 1.6 65
4. Braced frames where bracing carries
gravity loads
a. Steel 1.8 160
b. Concrete3 1.5 -
c. Heavy timber 1.5 65
B. Building frame I. Steel eccentric-braced frame (EBF) 3.0 240
system 2. Light-framed walls with shear panels
a. Plywood walls for structures three
stories or less 2.6 65
b. All other light-framed walls 2.2 65
3. Shear walls
a. Concrete 3.0 240
b. Masonry 3.0 160
4. Concentric-braced frames
a. Steel 2.2 160
b. Concrete 3 2.6 -
c. Heavy timber 2.6 65
c. Moment-resisting I. Special moment-resistng frames (SMRF)
frame system a. Steel 3.0 N.L.4
b. Concrete 3.0 N.L.
2. Concrete intermediate moment-resisting
frames (IMRF) 6 2.2 -
3. Ordinary moment-resisting frames
a. Steel 1.8 160
b. Concrete 3 1.5 -
D. Dual system I. Shear walls
a. Concrete with SMRF 3.0 N.L.
b. Concrete with concrete IMRP·6 2.6 160
c. Masonry with SMRF 3.0 160
d. Masonry with concrete IMRF 3 2.6 -
2. Steel EBF with steel SMRF 2.6 N.L.
3. Concrete-braced frames
a. Steel with steel SMRF 2.2 N.L.
b. Concrete with concrete SMRF 3 2.2 -
c. Concrete with concete IMRF 3 1.8 -
E. Undefined systems See Section 2333 (i) 2 - -
1Basic structural systems are defmed m Section 2333 (f).
2H =height limit applicable to Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. See Section 2333 (g) for excep-
tions.
3 Prohibiled in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4.
4
N.L. =No limit.
5See Section 2334 (c) for combination of structural system.
6 Prohibited in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, except as permitted in Section 2338 (b).
891
APPENDIX 1991 UNIFORM BUilDING CODE
Division IV
FLOOD-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION
General
Sec. 2390. (a) Purpose. The provisions of this division are intended to promote
public safety and welfare by reducing the risk of flood damage in areas prone to
flooding.
(b) Scope. Buildings and structures erected in areas prone to flooding shall be
constructed as required by the provisions of this division. The base flood elevation
shown on the approved flood hazard map is the minimum elevation used to define
areas prone to flooding, unless records indicate a higher elevation is to be used. The
flood-prone areas are defined in the jurisdiction's floodplain management ordi-
nance.
lows:
BASE FLOOD ELEVATION is the depth or peak elevation of flooding, in-
cluding wave height, having I percent chance of being equaled or exceeded in any
given year.
FLOOD HAZARD MAP is a map published by an approved agency, which de-
fines the flood boundaries, elevations and insurance risk zones as determined by a
detailed flood insurance study.
HAZARD ZONES are areas which have been determined to be prone to flood-
ing and are classified as either flood hazard zones, A zones, or coastal high-hazard
zones, V zones, in accordance with Sections 2393 (a) and 2394 (a).
Manufactured Structures
Sec. 2391. New or replacement manufactured structures located in any flood
hazard zone shall be located in accordance with the applicable elevation require-
ments of Sections 2393 (b) and 2394 (b), and the anchor and tie-down requirements
of Section 2396 (a).
Protection of Mechanical and Electrical Systems

Sec. 2392. New or replacement electrical equipment and heating, ventilating, air
conditioning and other service facilities shall be either placed above the base flood
elevation or protected to prevent water from entering or accumulating within the
system components during floods up to the base flood elevation. Installation of
electrical wiring and outlets, switches, junction boxes and panels below the base
flood elevation shall conform to the provisions of the Electrical Code for such
items in wet locations.
Flood Hazard Zones-A Zones

Sec. 2393. (a) General. Areas which have been determined as prone to flooding
but not subject to wave heights of more than 3 feet are designated as flood hazard
892
zones. Buildings or structures erected in flood hazard zones shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with this section.
(b) Elevation. Buildings or structures erected within a flood hazard zone shall
have the lowest floor, including basement floors, located at or above the base flooo
elevation.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Except for Group R Occupancies, any occupancy may have
floors below the base flood elevation in accordance with Section 2393 (d).
2. Floors of buildings or structures which are used only for building access, exits,
foyers, storage and parking garages may be below the base flood elevation in accor-
dance with Section 2393 (c).
(c) Enclosures below Base Flood Elevation. Enclosed spaces below the base
flood elevation shall not be used with the exception of building access, exits, foy-
ers, storage and parking garages. Enclosed spaces shall be provided with vents,
valves or other openings which will automatically equalize the lateral pressure of
waters acting on the exterior wall surfaces. The bottom of the openings shall not be
higher than 12 inches above finish grade. A minimum of two openings per build-
ing, or one opening for each enclosure below the base flood elevation, whichever is
greater, shall be provided. The total net area of such openings shall not be less than
4 square feet or I square inch for every square foot of enclosed area, whichever is
greater.
(d) Flood-resistant Construction. Buildings or structures of any occupancy
other than Group R may, in lieu of meeting the elevation provisions of Section
2393 (b), be erected with floors usable for human occupancy below the base flood
elevation, provided the following conditions are met:
I. Space below the base flood elevation shall be constructed with exterior walls
and floors that are impermeable to the passage of water.
2. Structural components subject to hydrostatic and hydrodynamic loads dur-
ing the occurrence of flooding to the base flood elevation shall be capable of resist-
ing such forces, including the effect of buoyancy.
3. Openings below the base flood elevation shall be provided with watertight
closures and shall have adequate structural capacity to support flood loads acting
upon closure surfaces.
4. Floor and wall penetrations for plumbing, mechanical and electrical systems
shall be made watertight to prevent flood water seepage through spaces between
penetration and wall construction materials. Sanitary sewer and storm drainage
systems that have openings below the base flood elevation shall be provided with
closure devices to prevent backwater flow during conditions of flooding.
(e) Plan Requirements for Flood-resistant Construction. When buildings or
structures are to be constructed in accordance with Section 2393 (d), an architect or
engineer licensed by the state to practice as such shall prepare plans showing de-
tails of the floor wall and foundation support components. Calculations and ap-
proved technical data used to comply with the conditions of Section 2393 (d) shall
also be provided.
893
Coastal High Hazard Zones-V Zones

Sec. 2394. (a) General. Areas which have been determined to be subject to
wave heights in excess of 3 feet or subject to high-velocity wave run-up or wave-
induced erosion are designated as coastal high-hazard zones. Buildings or struc-
tures erected in coastal high-hazard zones shall be designed and constructed in
accordance with this section.
(b) Elevation. Buildings or structures erected within a coastal high-hazard zone
shall be elevated so that the lowest portion of horizontal structural members with
the exception of footings, mat or raft foundations, piles, pile caps, columns, grade
beams and bracing shall be located at or above the base flood elevation.
(c) Enclosures below Base Flood Elevation. Spaces below the base flood ele-
vation in a coastal high-hazard zone shall be free of obstruction.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Footings, mat or raft foundations, piles, pile caps, columns,
grade beams and bracing that provide structural stability for the building.
2. Structural systems of entrances and required exits.
3. Storage of portable or mobile items that can be moved in the event of a storm.
4. Walls or partitions may be used to enclose all or part of the space, provided they
are not part of the structural support of the building and are designed to break away
under high tides or wave action without causing damage to the structural system of
the building, see Section 2396 (f). Screening, lattice-type arrangements or other ma-
terials which allow the passage of water may also be used.
(d) Foundations. Buildings or structures erected in coastal high-hazard zones
shall be supported on piles or columns. When piles are used, they shall have soil
penetration to resist the combined wave and wind loads to which they may be sub-
ject during a flood equal to the base flood elevation. Pile design shall include con-
sideration of decreased resistance capacity caused by scour of the soil strata
surrounding the piles. Pile system design and installation shall be made in accor-
dance with the provisions of this code. When mat or raft foundations are used, they
shall be located at a depth to provide protection from erosion or scour.
(e) Plan Requirements for Coastal High-hazard Construction. When build-
ings or structures are to be constructed in accordance with Section 2394, an archi-
tect or engineer licensed by the state to practice as such shall submit plans showing
details of the foundation support and connection components to comply with the
requirements of Section 2394 (d). When solid walls or partitions are proposed be-
low the base flood elevation, wall, framing and connection details of such walls in
accordance with Section 2394 (c) shall be provided.
Elevation Certification
Sec. 2395. A land surveyor, architect or engineer licensed by the state to prac-
tice as such shall certify that the actual elevation in relation to mean sea level of the
lowest floor, if in a flood hazard zone, or the bottom of the lowest horizontal struc-
tural member, if in a coastal high-hazard zone, are at or above the minimum eleva-
tion when required by the provisions of Sections 2393 (b) and 2394 (b).
894
Design Requirements
Sec. 2396. (a) Structural Systems. Structural systems ofbuildings or structures
shall be constructed, connected and anchored to resist flotation, collapse or perma-
nent lateral movement due to loads from flooding equal to the base flood elevation.
(b) Design Loads. The structural system shalJ be designed in accordance with
well-established engineering principles and with consideration of hydrodynamic
and hydrostatic loads. The required loading shall be established by site-specific
criteria or approved national standards. Impact loads shall be considered in the
analysis of the structural system.
(c) Load Combinations. Loading combinations shall be subject to approval by
the building official. The structural system shall be designed to resist each combi-
nation of loading acting simultaneously. In lieu of site-specific loading require-
ments, load combinations from an approved national standard may be used.
(d) Stress Increases. Allowable stresses may be increased one third for flood
loads in combination with dead load or dead and live load combinations. When
strength design is used, flood loads may be considered as dead loads when consid-
ering dead and live load conditions. Flood loads may be considered as wind loads in
other load combinations.
(e) Overturning. Buildings and structures and parts or elements shall be de-
signed to resist sliding or overturning by at least 1.5 times the lateral force or over-
turning moment caused by wind and flood loads acting simultaneously. For the
purpose of providing stability, only the dead load shall be considered effective in
resisting overturning.
(f) Breakaway Walls. When walls or partitions located below the base flood
elevation are required to break away in accordance with Section 2394 (c), such
walls shall be designed for not less than 10 pounds per square foot (psf) or more
than 20 psf on the vertical projected area.
895
APPENDIX 1991 UNIFORM BUilDING CODE
NOTES
896
Chapter 24
PRESCRIPTIVE MASONRY CONSTRUCTION IN
HIGH-WIND AREAS
GeneraJ
Sec. 2425. (a) Purpose. The provisions of this chapter are intended to promote
public safety and welfare by reducing the risk of wind-induced damages to mason-
ry construction.
(b) Scope. The requirements of this chapter shall apply to masonry construction
in buildings when all of the following conditions are met:
I. The building is located in an area with a basic wind speed from 80 through
110 miles per hour (mph).
2. The building is located in Seismic Zone No. 0, I or 2.
3. The building does not exceed two stories.
4. Floor and roof joists shall be wood or steel or of precast hollowcore concrete
planks with a maximum span of32 feet between bearing walls. Masonry walls shall
be provided for the support of steel joists or concrete planks.
5. The building is of regular shape.
(c) General. The requirements of Chapter 24 are applicable except as specifi-
cally modified by this chapter. Other methods may be used provided a satisfactory
design is submitted showing compliance with the provisions of Chapter 23, Part II,
and other applicable provisions of this code.
Wood floor, roof and interior walls shall be constructed as specified in Appendix
Chapter 25 and as further regulated in this section.
In areas where the wind speed exceeds II 0 mph, masonry buildings shall be de-
signed in accordance with Chapter 23, Part II, and other applicable provisions of
this code.
Bui Idings of unusual shape or size, or split-level construction, shall be designed
in accordance with Chapter23, Part II, and other applicable provisions of this code.
In addition to the other provisions of this chapter, foundations for buildings in
areas subject to wave action or tidal surge shall be designed in accordance with ap-
All metal connectors and fasteners used in exposed locations or in areas other-
wise subject to corrosion shall be of corrosion-resistant or noncorrosive material.
When the terms "corrosion resistant" or "noncorrosive" are used in this chapter,
they shall mean having a corrosion resistance equal to or greater than a hot-dipped
galvanized coating of 1.5 ounces of zinc per square foot of surface area. When an
element is required to be corrosion resistant or noncorrosive, all of its parts, such as
screws, nails, wire, dowels, bolts, nuts, washers, shims, anchors, ties and attach-
ments shall be corrosion resistant.
(d) Materials. I. General. All masonry materials shall comply with Section
2402 (b) as applicable for standards of quality.
897
2. Hollow-unit masonry. A. Exterior concrete block shall be a minimum of

Grade N-Il with a compressive strength of not less than I ,900 pounds per square
inch (psi) on the net area.
B. fnteriorconcrete block shall be a minimum of Grade S-11 with a compressive
strength of not less than 700 psi on the gross area.
C. Exterior clay or shale hollow brick shall have a compressive strength of not
(ess Chan 2,500 psi on the net area. Such hollow brick shall be at least Grade MW
except that where subject to severe freezing it shall be Grade SW.
D. Interior clay or shale hollow brick shall be Grade MW with a compressive
strength of 2,000 psi on the net area.
3. Solid masonry. A. Exterior clay or shale bricks shall have a compressive
strength of not less than 2,500 psi on the net area.
B. Exterior clay or shale bricks shall be Grade MW, except that where subject to
severe freezing they shall be Grade SW.
C. Interior clay or shale bricks shall have a compressive strength of not less than
2,000 psi.
4. Grout. Grout shall achieve a compressive strength of not less than 2,000 psi.
5. Mortar. Mortar for exterior walls and for interior shear walls shall be Type
M or TypeS.
(e) Construction Requirements. Grouted cavity wall and block wall construc-
tion shall comply with Section 2404.
Unburned clay masonry and stone masonry shall not be used.
(f) Foundations. Footings shall have a thickness of not less than 8 inches and
shall comply with Tables Nos. A-24- 1-A and A-24- 1-B for width. See Figure No.
A-24-A for other applicable details.
Footings shall extend 18 inches below the undisturbed ground surface or the
frost depth, whichever is deeper.
Foundation stem walls shall be as wide as the wall they support. They shall be
reinforced with reinforcing bar sizes and spacing to match the reinforcement of
the walls they support.
Basement and other below-grade walls shall comply with Table No. A-24-2.
(g) Drainage. Basement walls and other walls or portions thereof retaining
more than 3 feet of earth and enclosing interior spaces or floors below grade shall
have a minimum 4-inch-diameter footing drain as illustrated in Table No. A-24-2
and Figure No. A-24-2- I.
The finish elevations around the building shall be graded to provide a slope
away from the building of not less than 1/4 inch per foot.
(h) Wall Construction. I. Minimum thickness. Reinforced exterior bearing
walls shall have a minimum 8-inch nominal thickness. Interior masonry non bear-
ing walls shall have a minimum 6-inch nominal thickness. Unreinforced grouted
brick walls shall have a minimum 10-inch thickness. Unreinforced hollow-unit
and solid masonry shall have a minimum 8-inch nominal thickness.
EXCEPTION: In buildings not more than two stories or 26 feet in height,
masonry walls may be of 8-inch nominal thickness. Solid masonry walls in one-
898
story buildings may be of 6-inch nominal thickness when not over 9 feet in height,
provided that when gable construction is used an additional 6 feet are permitted
to the peak of the gable.
2. Lateral support and height. All walls shall be laterally supported at the top
and bottom. The maximum unsupported height of bearing walls or other masonry
walls shall be 12 feet. Gable-end walls may be 15 feet at their peak.
Wood-framed gable-end walls on buildings shall comply with Table No.
A-24-9 and Figures Nos. A-24-9-1 or A-24-9-2.
3. Walls in Seismic Zone No.2 and use of stack bond. In Seismic Zone No.2,
walls shall comply with Figure No. A-24-B as a minimum. Walls with stack bond
shall be designed.
4. Lintels. The span of lintels over openings shall not exceed 12 feet, and lintels
shall be reinforced. The reinforcement bars shall extend not less than 2 feet beyond
the edge of opening and into lintel supports.
Lintel reinforcement shall be within fully grouted cells in accordance with
Table No. A-24-5.
5. Reinforcement. Walls shall be reinforced as shown in Tables Nos A-24-3-A
through A-24-3-E and Figure No. A-24-B.
6. Anchorage of walls to floors and roofs. Anchors between walls and floors
or roofs shall be embedded in grouted cells or cavities and shall conform to Section
2425 (i).
(i) Floor and Roof Systems. The anchorage of wood roof systems which are
supported by masonry walls shall comply with Appendix Section 2518 (d) I and 8,
Table No. A-24-4 and Figure No. A-24-C.
Wood roof and floor systems which are supported by ledgers at the inside face of
masonry walls shall comply with Table No. A-24-4, Part I.
The ends of joist girders shall extend a distance of not less than 6 inches over
masonry or concrete supports and be attached to a steel bearing plate. This plate is
to be located not more than 1h inch from the face of the wall and is to be not less
than 9 inches wide perpendicular to the length of the joist girder. Ends of joist gird-
ers resting on steel bearing plates on masonry or structural concrete shall be at-
tached thereto with a minimum of two 1/4-inch fillet welds 2 inches long, or with
two 3/4-inch bolts.
Ends of joist girders resting on steel supports shall be connected thereto with a
minimum of two 1/4-inch fillet welds 2 inches long, or with two 3/4-inch bolts. In
steel frames, joist girders at column lines shall be field bolted to the columns to
provide lateral stability during construction.
Steel joist roof and floor systems shall be anchored in accordance with Table
No. A-24-8.
Wall ties spaced as shown in Table No. A-24-4, Part II, shall connect to framing
or blocking at roofs and walls. Wall ties shall enter grouted cells or cavities and
shall be 11/s-inch minimum width by 20 gauge sheet steel.
Roof and floor hollow-core precast plank systems shall be anchored in accor-
dance with Table No. A-24-7.
899
Roof uplift anchorage shall enter a grouted bond beam reinforced with horizon-
tal bars as shown in Tables Nos. A-24-3-A through A-24-3-E and Figure No.
A-24-C.
U) Lateral Force Resistance. I. Complete load path and uplift resistance.
Strapping, approved framing anchors, and mechanical fasteners, bond beams, and
vertical reinforcement shall be installed to provide a continuous tie from the roof
to the foundation system. (See Figure No. A-24-D.) In addition, roof and floor sys-
tems, masonry shear walls, or masonry or wood cross walls shall provide lateral
stability.
2. Floor and roof diaphragms. Floor and roof diaphragms shall be connected
to masonry walls as shown in Table No. A-24-6, Part II.
Gabled and sloped roof members not supported at the ridge shall be tied by
ceiling joists or equivalent lateral ties located as close to where the roof member
bears on the wall as is practically possible, at not more than 48 inches on center.
Collar ties shall not be used for these lateral ties. (See Figure No. A-24-9-1 and
Table No. A-24-9.)
3. Walls. Masonry walls shall be provided around all sides of floor and roof
systems in accordance with Figure No. A-24-6-1 and Table No. A-24-6.
The cumulative length of exterior masonry walls along each side of the floor or
roof systems shall be at least 20 percent of the parallel dimension. Required ele-
ments shall be without openings and shall not be less than 48 inches in width.
Interior cross walls (nonbearing) at right angles to bearing walls shall he pro-
vided when the length of the building perpendicular to the span of the floor or roof
framing exceeds twice the distance between shear walls or 32 feet, whichever is
greater. Cross walls, when required, shall conform to Section 2425 U) 4.
4. Interior cross walls. When required by Table No. A-24-6, Part I, masonry
walls shall be at least 6 feet long and reinforced with 9 gauge wire joint reinforce-
ment spaced not more than 16 inches on center. Cross walls shall comply with
Footnote No. 3 of Table No. A-24-6, Part I.
Interior wood stud walls may be used to resist the wind load from one-story ma-
sonry buildings in areas where the basic wind speed is 100 mph, Exposure C or
less, and 110 mph, Exposure B. When wood stud walls are so used, they shall:
A. Be perpendicular to exterior masonry walls at 15 feet or less on center.
B. Be at least 8 feet long without openings and be sheathed on at least one side
with 15132-inch plywood nailed with 8d common or galvanized box nails at 6 in-
ches on center edge and field nailing. All unsupported edges of plywood shall be
blocked.
C. Be connected to wood blocking or wood joists below with two 16d nails at 16
inches on center through their sill plates. They shall be connected to footings with
1h-inch-diameter bolts at 3 feet 6 inches on center.
D. Connect to wood roof systems as outlined in Table No. A-24-6, Part II, as a
cross wall. Plywood roof sheathing shall have all unsupported edges blocked.
900
TABLE NO. A-24-1-A-EXTERIOR FOUNDATION REQUIREMENTS

FOR MASONRY BUILDINGS WITH 6- AND 8-INCH-THICK WALLS
(Wood or Steel Framing)
(Width of Footings in lnches)3,4,s
See Figure No. A-24-A for typical details.
ONE..STORY BUILDINGS TWO.STORY BUILDINGS
Roof Live Load1 Roof Live Loed 1
SPAN 20 30 I 40
TO Plus Floor Live Loed,2 pal
WALL BEARING 20 30 40
HEIGHT WALLS pal plf plf 50 I 100 50 1oo 1 50 I 100
(Feet) (Feet) (Inches) (Inches) (Inches) Minimum Width of Footing (Inches)
8 12 12 12 12 12 12
8 16 12 12 14 12 14 12 14
24 14 18 14 18 16 18
32 16 20 18 20 18 20
8 12 12 12 12 12 12
10 16 12 14 16 14 16 14 16
24 16 20 16 18 16 20
32 20 24 20 22 20 24
8 12 12 12 12 14 12 14 12 14
12 16 12 12 12 16 18 16 16 14 16
24 12 12 14 18 20 18 20 18 20
32 12 14 16 20 22 22 22 22 24
1From Table No. 23-C or local snow load tables. For areas without snow loads use
20 pounds per square foot.
2From Table No. 23-A. For intermediate floor loads go to next higher value.
1
· For buildings with under-floor space or basements, footing thickness is to be a mini-
mum of 12 inches. It shall be reinforced with No. 4 bars at 24 inches on center when
its width is required to be 18 inches or larger and it supports more than the roof and
one floor.
4 Soil to be at least Class 4 as shown in Table No. 29-B.
5 Footings are a minimum of I 0 inches thick for a one-story building and 12 inches thick
for a two-story building. Bottom of footing to be 18 inches below grade or the frost
depth, whichever is deeper. Footing to be reinforced with No.4 bars at 24 inches on
center when supporting more than the roof and one floor.
901
TABLE NO. A-24·1-B-INTERIOR FOUNDATION REQUIREMENTS

FOR MASONRY BUILDINGS WITH 6- AND 8-INCH-THICK WALLS
(Wood or Steel Framing)
(Width of Footings in lnches)3,4,5,6
See Figure No. A-24-A for typical details.
ONE.STORY BUILDINGS TWO.STORY BUILDINGS
Roof Live Load1 Roof Live Loed 1
SPAN& 20 I 30 40
TO Plus Floor Uve Loed,2 psi
YALL BEARING 20 30 40
HEIGHT WALLS psi pal psi 50 I 1oo I 50 100 50 100
(Feel) (Feel) (Inches) (Inches) (Inches) Minimum Width of Footing (lnchea)
8 12 12 12 12 14 12 14 12 14
8 16 12 12 12 16 20 18 20 18 22
24 12 12 14 20 26 22 28 22 28
32 14 14 16 24 28 26 32 28 34
8 12 12 12 14 16 14 16 14 16
10 16 12 12 12 20 24 20 22 20 22
24 12 14 14 22 28 22 28 22 28
32 14 14 16 26 34 26 32 28 34
8 12 12 12 14 16 16 18 16 18
12 16 12 14 16 20 24 20 22 20 22
24 14 14 16 24 28 22 28 24 28
32 16 16 18 28 30 28 32 28 34
1From Table No. 23-C or local snow load tables. For areas without snow loads use
20 pounds per square foot.
2From Table No. 23-A. For intermediate floor loads go to next higher value.
3 For buildings with under-floor space or basements, footing thickness is to be a mini-
mum of 12 inches. It shall be reinforced with No. 4 bars at 24 inches on center when
its width is required to be 18 inches or larger and it supports more than the roof and
one floor.
4 Soil to be at least Class 4 as shown in Table No. 29-B.
5 Footings are I 0 inches thick for up to 24 inches wide and 12 inches thick for up to
34 inches wide. Footings shall be reinforced with No. 4 bars at 24 inches on center
when supporting more than the roof and one floor.
6 These interior footings support roof-ceiling or floors or both for a distance on each side
equal to the span length shown. A tributary width equal to the span length may be
used.
902
Note: Horizontal and

vertical reinforcement to
be determined by Tables
.>ws. A-24-3-A through CMU or brick
A-24-3-E and A-24-6. masonry wall
Vertical reinforcement
(fill cells at reinforcement
with grout)
For lap see Tables

Nos. A-24-3-A Horizontal reinforcement
through A-24-3-E as required
Embed 18" below

grade or below the
frost line, whichever
is deeper (typ.)
Continuous
reinforcement
required if on fill
No. 4 horizontal bars See Table No. A-24-1-A

at 24" o.c. where for depth and width (typ.)
required by Table
No. A-24-1-A (typ.)
HOLLOW-MASONRY UNIT
EXTERIOR FOUNDATION WALL
FIGURE NO. A-24-A-VARIOUS DETAILS OF FOOTINGS

(See Table No. A-24-1 for widths.)
(Continued)
903
(Continued)
Vertical reinforcement
with grout)
Horizontal reinforcement
See Tables Nos. A-24-3-A Concrete slab on grade

through A-24-3-E
GRADE BEAM OR CONTINUOUS CONCRETE SLAB-TURN DOWN
Note: See adjacent

drawing for details and
dimensions not called out.
Continuous
reinforcement
No. 4 dowels at 24" o.c. - - - •

at property line
Required width per

Table No. A-24-1-A
Center footing when wall

not on property line
HOLLOW-MASONRY UNIT CONCRETE
EXTERIOR FOUNDATION WALL
FIGURE NO. A-24-A-VARIOUS DETAILS OF FOOTINGS

(See Table No. A-24-1 for Wldths)-(Contlnued)
904
CMU or brick masonry
~"1--- Vertical reinforcement

with grout)
Horizontal
reinforcement
Continuous
reinforcement
if on fill
HOLLOW-MASONRY UNIT INTERIOR FOUNDATION WALL
Note: See above for details

not called out.
Continuous
reinforcement
if on fill
CONCRETE INTERIOR NONBEARING WALL FOOTING
905
ROOF) ONE NO.4 BAR AT BOND BEAM
-----~~~~~~~~~±\4~
10-FOOT-
MAXIMUM
SPACING
I
ONE NO. 4 BAR ) ,
4FT. MAX
L-----~~=l===t~BARAT4
ONE N0.4
FEETO.C.
MINIMUM
24-INCH OR 40-BAR VERTICALLY,
~~~ESJJ I-" DIAMETER M\NIMU~, T\PICAL TYPICAL
A-24-5FOR
LINTEL
REINFORCEMENT
1--F=:x:=:!::::::;H ~ 12 FEET
OR LESS
ALSO SEE FLOOR~ BOND BEAM AT LEDGER,

TABLE NO.
A-24·6 FOR
~!!!f!!!!!!!~~!!!!!!!!!!!l!!!!!!!!i!!!l~!!j:!!!!lt!!!!!f-'--
ONE NO.4 MINIMUM!'
BOND BEAM
REINFORCEMENT ONE NO.4 BAR AT 10 FEET ON CENTER HORIZONTALLY,
TYPICAL. OR USE UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED JOINT
~EINFORCEMENT OF EQUIVALENT AREA INSTEAD.
CONTINUOUS
><
LINTEL
REINFORCEMENT- ")
12 FEET
M~~~f~~~g:s ~~r--ift======t--ti~==~====ir-t--1 OR LESS
HORIZONTAL
REQUIRED ~
REINFORCEMENT I\ 1'\ ~- ~
24·1NCH OR 40 BAR DIAMETER MINIMUM, TYPICAL
~'WM,I/
EXTEND DOWELS ON SAME SIZE AS VERTICAL
FOOTING 30 BAR DIAMETERS INTO THE WALL
I
ONE NO.4 HORIZONTAL BAR IN
FOOTING, MINIMUM
FIGURE NO. A-24-B-MINIMUM MASONRY

WALL REQUIREMENTS IN SEISMIC ZONE NO. 2
906
TABLE NO. A-24-2-VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT

AND TOP RESTRAINT FOR VARIOUS HEIGHTS
OF BASEMENT AND OTHER BELOW-GRADE WALLS
DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS
A. Materials: 1. Concrete Masonr~ Unlt&-Grade hollow load-bearin% units conforming to Appendix
Section 2425 (d) for strength of units should not e less than that required for
applicable f' m·
2. Mortar-Type M, 2,500 psi strength.
3. Corefiii--Fine or coarse grout (ASTM C 476) with an ultimate strength (28 days) of at
least 2,500 psi.
4. Reinforcement-Deformed billet-steel bars (ASTM A 615-60).
5. 1,500 psi soil bearing required4.
B. Allowable stresses in accordance with Section 2406 and Table No. 24-H.
Vertical Reinforcement with Axial
Compressive Load (P~ Equal to or Lass
Soli Equlv.-fluld wt. = 30 pcf4 Than 5,000 I ./lin. ft.
Floor
Well Depth
Connactlon1,2 f'm = 1,500 psi
Balow Grade Spacing of
h, Feat Wood Floor Reinforcement, lnches3
Bolland Angle Clip
Spacing Spacing
&-INCH WALLS No.3 No.4 No.5
4 112" at 60" 48" o.c. 24 40 56

5 112" at 40" 32" o.c. 16 24 40
6 5/s" at 32" 20"o.c. - 16 24
Spacing of
Reinforcement, Inches
1o-1NCH WALLS No.4 No.5 No.6 No.7
6 SJs" at 32" 20" o.c. 40 56 64 72

7 5/s" at 24" 16" o.c. 24 40 48 56
8 3/4" at 20" 2 at 24" o.c. 16 24 32 40
Spacing of
Reinforcement, Inches
12-INCH WALLS No.4 No.5 No.6 No.7
7 5/s" at 24" 16" o.c. 40 56 80 80

8 3/4" at 20" 2 at 24" o.c. 32 48 56 64
9 7/s" at 18" 2 at 18" o.c. 24 40 48 48
10 I" at 16" 2 at 16" o.c. 16 32 40 40
1There shall be no backfill placed until after the wall is anchored to the floor and 7 days have
passed after grouting.
2For Figure No. A-24-2-2 only.
3See Figure No. A-24-2-3 for placement of reinforcement.
4 Soiltype is at least Class 4 as shown in Table No. 29-B.
907
SEE FIGURES NOS. A-24-2-2

AND A-24-2-4 FOR VARIOUS
FLOOR SUPPORT DETAILS.
(/)
d (See Figure No. w
A-24-2-4.) a:
~
SEE FIGURE NO. A-24-2-1

BELOW FOR DRAINAGE
SEE TABLE NO. A-24-1-A FOR

WIDTH AND REINFORCEMENT
BASEMENT WALL
FULL MORTAR JOINT
FIGURE NO. A-24-2-1
908
SIDING
PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
ANGLE CLIP
2"TREATED
WOOD PLATE ON
MORTAR BED
FILL TOP COURSE
WITH GROUT
FILL WITH GROUT
=t.--t<::....l.....!AT ANCHORS
NOTE: SEE ADJACENT DRWG.

FOR DET. NOT CALLED OUT
ANGLE CLIP
ANGLE CLIP: FOUR Bd COMMON NAILS EACH LEG.

USE MINIMUM 18 GAUGE (See Table No. A-24-2
for minimum spacing. Where two clips are required
place one clip on each side of joist.)
FIGURE NO. A-24-2-2 HOLLOW-MASONRY

UNIT FOUNDATION WALL-WOOD FLOOR
909
VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT
ANCHOR WALL TO .,.......,,_~/VERT. REINF.

FTG. WITH DOWELS
OF SAME SIZE,
SPACING AND
POSITION AS
VERT. REINF.
TWO CORE UNITS

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL SECTION
8" WALLS: t = 75/a" d = 5"
10"WALLS:t = 95/a" d = 7"
ALT. ANCHORAGE DETAIL 12"WALLS:t = 115/a" d = 83/4"
FIGURE NO. A·24-2·3
MASONRY BRIDGING
BETWEEN JOISTS
WOOD JOISTS
JOIST ANCHORS BOLTED

TO WOOD JOISTS WITH
ENDS BENT DOWN AND
EMBEDDED IN BOND
BEAM AT 48" MAX.
(A) HOLLOW-MASONRY UNIT WALL-WOOD FLOOR
FIGURE NO. A-24·2·4-VARIOUS CONNECTIONS

OF FLOORS TO BASEMENT WALLS
910
NOTE: SEE ADJACENT

GROUT AT ANCHOR DRAWING FOR DETAILS
NOT CALLED OUT
JOINT REINF.
AS REQUIRED
•
.
.
PLAN
NOTE: SEE ABOVE FOR

DETAILS NOT CALLED OUT
~~~k Hollow-masonry unit CAVITY WALL

-'-'~h-'L:,..t__ wall single wythe
(B) WOOD FLOOR, JOISTS PARALLEL TO WALL
911
)>
-a
TABLE NO. A-24-3-A-VERTICAL REINFORCING STEEL REQUIREMENTS FOR 6-INCH·THICK
BOND BEAM. SEE -a
FOOTNOTE NO.3 THIS m
MASONRY WALLS4 IN AREAS WHERE BASIC WIND SPEEDS ARE 80 MPH OR GREATER2.3.6 TABLE AND TABLE NO. A-24-6. z
!
(Wood or Steel Roof and Floor Framing) 0
VERTICAL BAR-STANDARD
x
HOOK OVER BOND BEAM
ahemate fNory other bar).
Criteria: Roof Live Load =20 to 40 psf; Floor Live Load =50 psf; enclosed building
80MPH I 90MPII I 100MPII 110MPII
Span ' * - Bearing Wills (Feet)
UNSUPPORTED
HEIGHT a I 16 1 24 I 32 I 8 I 16 1 24 32 8 1 16 24132\ 8 I 16 1 24 1 32
EXPOSURE STORIES (Feet) Size of Rebar and Spacing (InChes)
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4
8 N.R.*
80 80 80 80 64 64 72 88
One-
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4
story 10 48
B building 80 88 96 96 64 64 72 80 48 48 48 56 40 40 40
12 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 ....
48 48 56 64 40 40 48 48 48 48 56 56 40 40 40 40 CD
Two-story Design required or use 8-inch

....
CD
building or larger units for two-story condition. c:

z
8
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4
72 72 72 96 56
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4
56 56 56 40 40 48 48 32 32
No.4 No.4
32 40 ~
:II
One- No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 s::
story 10 m
c 40 40 40 48 32 32 32 32 40 40 40 48 32 32 32 40
building c:
12 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5
48 48 32
No.5 No.5 No.5
32 32 Use 8-inch or larger units r=
40 48 40
Two-story Design required or use 8-inch z0
G)
building or larger units for two-story condition.
0
0
0
m
......
CQ
CQ
......
c:
8
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No. 41No. 41No. 41No. 4 z
One-
56 56 64 80 48 48 48 48 32 40
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5
40 40 32 32 32 32
~:II
story 10 s:::
32 32 32 40 40 40 48 48 48 32 32 40
D building ID
No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 Use 8-inch or larger units c:
12 32 40 40 40 ;::::
c
Two-story
building
Design required or use 8-inch
or larger units for two-story condition. z
G)
* N.R. =No vertical reinforcement required. However, see Table No. A-24-6 for shear wall reinforcement. 0
0
1The figure on top of the listed data is the bar size; the figure below it is the maximum spacing in inches. Reinforcing bar strength shall be A 615 Grade c
60. The vertical bars are centered in the middle of the wall. m
2 Roof load is assumed to be concentrically loaded on the wall. For roofs which hang on ledgers, a design is required.
3Minimum horizontal reinforcement shall be one No.4 at the ledger and foundation. Also, see Table No. A-24-5 for lintels and Table No. A-24-6 for
shear wall reinforcing where applicable.
<Vrhese values are for walls with running bond. For stack bond see Section 2425 (h) 3.
5Design required for open buildings of 6-inch-thick masonry.
6 Hook vertical bars over bond beam bars as shown. Extend bars into footing using lap splices where necessary.
To use this table, check criteria by the following method:

A. Choose proper roof live load from Table No. 23-C or snow load criteria for the locality in which the building is located.
B. Check if building is enclosed or open by the procedure in Chapter 23, Part II.
C. Choose proper floor load from Table No. 23-A. [For loads less than 50 pounds per square foot (psf), use 50 psf, and for loads between 50 psf and
100 psf, use 100 psf.]
D. Find proper wind speed and exposure for the site-see Figure No. 23-1, Chapter 23, Section 2312.
E. Within the proper vertical column, choose appropriate span-to-bearing wall and appropriate height and story. J>
'tl
F. Read proper si~e and spacing of reinforcement for the thickness of the wall mentioned in the title of the table. (Equivalent area of steel, taking 'tl
spacing into account, may be substituted.) m
z
G. For buildings it, Seismic Zone No.2 (see Figure No. 23-2 in Chapter 23), use minimum reinforcement in Figure No. A-24-B if it is more restrictive c
....
CQ
w than the table Values . x

BOND BEAM. SEE
. FOOTNOTE NO.3 THIS
I
TABLE AND TABLE NO. A-24-6.
TABLE ,.o.
A-24-3-8--VERTICAL REINFORCING STEEL REQUIREMENTS FOR 8-INCH-THICK
.....,.
CD MASQ,.RY WALLS4IN AREAS WHERE BASIC WIND SPEEDS ARE 80 MPH OR GREATER2.3,s
(Wood or Steel Roof and Floor Framing)
HOOKOVERBONDBEAM
)>
"tJ
a~emate <>VerY other bar). "tJ
m
Criteria: Roof live load = 20 to 40 psf; Floor live load =50 psf; enclosed building z
c
SO MPH I 90MPH 100MPH 110MPH
x
Span between Bearing wans (Feet)
UNSUPPORTED
HEIGHT 8 16 24 I 32 I 8 I 16 1 24 I 32 I 8 1 1s 24 32 1 8 I 16 1 2c 32
EXPOSURE STORIES (Feet) Size of Rebar and Spacing (Inches)
One-story No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3

8 N.R.* 56 56 64
building 64
or No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4
top story 10 48
80 80 88 88 64 64 64 72 48 56 56
of two-story No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5
building 12
B 64 72 72 72 56 56 56 56 40 40 64 64 56 56 56 56
First 8 96 96 96 96 96 72 72 64
96 96 96 96 88 80 72 64
story
of a No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4
10
two-story 88
No.4
80
No.4
72
No.4
64
No.4
64
No.4
64
No.4
56
No.4
56
No.4
72
No.4
72
No.4
64
No.5
64
No.5
64
No.5
56
No.5
56
No.5
56
No.5
...
building 12
80 72 64 64 64 56 56 48 48 48 64 56 56 56 48 48 ...
CD
CD
One-story No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 c
8 N.R.*
48 48 48 56 64 64 72 72 48 56 56 56 z
building :;;
or No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 0
top story 10 48 48 48 48 ::D
56 56 64 64 48 56 56 56 56 48 48 48
s::
12 ID
c building 56 64 64 64 48 48 48 48 56 56 56 56 40 40 40 48 c
No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 r=c
First 8
story
80
No.4
80
No.4
56
No.4
72
No.4
56
No.4
56
No.4
56
No.4
56
No.4
72
No.5
72
No.5
72
No.5
64
No.5
56
No.5
56
No.5
56
No.5
56
No.5
z
C)
of a 10
72 64 64 56 56 48 48 48 64 56 56 56 48 48 48 48 0
tw~~tory 0
No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6
builuing 12
64 64 56 56 48 48 48
No.5
48
No.6
56
No.6
56
No.6
48 48 48 40 N~-6 N~06 c
m
...
One-story 8
No.3
48
No.3
48
No.3
56
No.3
56
No.4 No.4
64 72
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4
72 80 56 56
No.4
56
No.4
56
No.4
40
No.4
48
No.4
48
No.4
48
~
building c
or
lO
No.4 No.4 No.4
No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 z
top story 48 48 48 56 56 64 64 64 48 48 48 48 40 40 40 40 :;;
of two-story 0
No.5 No.5 No.5
No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 ::0
building 12 40 s:::
D 48 48 56 56 56 56 56 56 48 48 48 48 40 40 40
No.3 No.3 No.3
No.3 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 ID
First 8
64 64 64 56 80 80 72 72 64 56 56 56 48 48 48 48 5
r
story
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 c
of a
two-story
10
56 56 56 48 48 64 64 56 48 48 48 48 40 40 40 32 z
G)
building No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 0
12
56 56 48 48 56 56 56 48 48 48 40 40 40 32 32 32 0
c
*N.R. =No vertical reinforcement required. However, see Table No. A-24-6 for shear wall reinforcement. m
1The figure on top of the listed data is the bar size; the figure below it is the maximum spacing in inches. Reinforcing bar strength shall be A 615 Grade
60.
4These values are for walls with running bond. For stack bond see Section 2425 (h) 3.
5 Hook vertical bars over bond beam as shown. Extend bars into footing using lap splices where necessary. Where second-story bar spacing does not
match those on the first story, hook bars around floor bond beam also.
C. Choose proper floor load from Table No. 23-A. [For loads less that 50 pounds per square foot (psf), use 50 psf, and for loads between 50 psf and
I 00 psf, use I 00 psf.]
D. Find proper wind speed and exposure for the site-see Figure No. 23-1, Chapter 23, Section 2312. ,,
):oo
E. Within the prt:Jper vertical column, choose appropriate span-to-bearing wall and appropriate height and story. m
F. React proper ~ize and spacing of reinforcement for the thickness of the wall mentioned in the title of the table. (Equivalent area of steel, taking z
...
CD
Ul
spaCing mto a.ccount, may be substituted.)
c
x
G. For buildings in Seismic Zone No.2 (see Figure No. 23-2 in Chapter 23), use minimum reinforcement in Figure No. A-24-B if it is more restrictive
than the table values.
BOND BEAM. SEE
FOOTNOTE N0.3 THIS
I
TABLE NO. A-24-3-C-VERTICAL REINFORCING STEEL REQUIREMENTS FOR 8-INCH-THICK TABLE AND TABLE NO. A-24·6.
co MASONRY WALLS4IN AREAS WHERE BASIC WIND SPEEDS ARE 80 MPH OR GREATER2.3•5
....
en (Wood or Steel Roof and Floor Framing) VERT~LBAR-STANDARD
>
'tl
HOOK OVER BOND BEAM 'tl
alternate every other bar). m
Criteria: Roof Live Load= 20 to 40 psf; Floor Live Load= 100 psf; enclosed building z
c
x
SO MPH 90MPH 100MPH I 110MPH
Span between Bearing Wills (Feat)
UNSUPPORTED
HEIGHT 8 I 16 24 32 8 16 24 I 32 8 I 16 I 24 I 32 I 8 16 24 32
EXPOSURE STORIES (Feel) Size of Rebar and Spacing (Inches)
One-story No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3
8
building N.R.* 56 56 64 64
or No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4
10
top story 64 64 64 72 64 64 64 72 48 48 56 56
building 12
B 64 72 72 72 56 56 56 56 40 40 40 40 56 56 56 56
First 8 96 96 80 64 96 88 72 56 48 48
80 64 56 64 56 64
story No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5
of a 10 72 64 48 48
two-story 56 56 64 56 72 64 56 48 56 48 48 56 ....co
building No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5
12
72 64 56 48 56 48 48 40 48 40 48 48 56 48 48 40 ....co
One-story No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 c
8 N.R.*
building 48 48 48 56 64 64 72 72 48 56 56 56 .,~
10 56 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 l:J
top story 56 64 64 56 56 56 56 48 5:
of two-story No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.5 IXJ
building 12 40 64 64 64 48 48 48 48 56 56 40 40 32 c
c 40 56 40
j=
8
First
story
72
No.4
64
No.4
56
No.4
48
No.4
56
No.4
48
No.4
64
No.5
56
No.5
72
No.5
64
No.5
56
No.5
48
No.5
56
No.5
48
No.5
48
No.5
56
No.5
z
G'l
of a 10 64 56 48 48 48 48 56 56 56 56 48 48 48 48 40 40 0
two-story 0
building 12
40 56 48 48 48 40 40 48 40 48 48 40 40 40 40 32 m
One-story No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4
8 48 48 56 64 72 80 56 56 40 48 48 48
building 56 72 56 56
c
or 10
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 z
top story 48 48 48 56 56 64 64 64 48 48 48 48 40 40 40 40 =n
of two-story No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 0
building 12 :u
D 48 48 56 56 40 40 56 56 48 48 48 32 40 40 40 40 3:
No.3 No.3 No.3 No.4 No.3 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 !D
First 8
56 56 48 64 48 64 56 56 56 56 48 64 48 64 56 56 c
story No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6
r=c
of a
two-story
10 56 48 48 56 64 56 48 48 48 48 40 40 40 40 48 48 z
C)
12 48 24 0
48 40 40 40 40 48 40 48 40 40 32 32 32 32 0
c
*N.R. =No vertical reinforcement required. However, see Table No. A-24-6 for shear wall reinforcement. m
60.
4 These values are for walls with running bond. For stack bond see Section 2425 (h) 3.
5 Hook vertical bars over bond beam as shown. Extend bars into footing using lap splices where necessary. Where second-story bar spacing does not
match those on the first story, hook bars around floor bond beam also.
I 00 psf, use I 00 psf.]
)>
D. Find proper wind speed and exposure for the site-see Figure No. 23-1, Chapter 23, Section 2312. 'tl
E. Within the proper vertical column, choose appropriate span-to-bearing wall and appropriate height and story. 'tl
m
F. Read proper size and spacing of reinforcement for the thickness of the wall mentioned in the title of the table. (Equivalent area of steel, taking z
c
spacing into account, may be substituted.)
G. For buildings in Seismic Zone No.2 (see Figure No. 23-2 in Chapter 23), use minimum reinforcement in Figure No. A-24-B if it is more restrictive
x
BOND BEAM. SEE
FOOTNOTE NO.3 THIS
I
TABLE AND TABLE NO. A·24-6.
TABLE NO. A-24-3-D-VERTICAL REINFORCING STEEL REQUIREMENTS FOR 8-INCH-THICK
<D MASONRY WALLS4 IN AREAS WHERE BASIC WIND SPEEDS ARE 80 MPH OR GREATER2.3,s VERTICAL BAR-STANDARD
l>
~ (Wood or Steel Roof and Floor Framing) HOOK OVER BOND BEAM
"tl
"tl
alternate fNery other bar). m
Criteria: Roof Live Load =20 to 40 psf; Floor Live Load =50 psf; open building z
0
BOMPH 90MPH 100MPH I 110MPH ><
Span betwMn Bearing walls (Feel)
UNSUPPORTED
HEIGKT Bl16l24l32l8l t6 1 24 32 81161241 321 8 t6 1 24 1 32
8 96 80 88 56 64 40 48 48 64
building 96 56 64 48 64 64 72
or No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5
10 72 40
top story 64 64 72 48 56 56 56 40 40 40 48 56 56 56
building 12 48
B 40 48 48 56 56 56 56 40 40 40 40 48 48 48 48
First 8 96 80 48 64
96 88 72 72 64 64 48 48 48 64 64 64
story No.3 No.3 No.3 No.4 No.4 No.4
No.3 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5
of a 10 48 48 48 48 64 56 48 48 56 48
two-story 56 56 48 40 40 56
12 48 48 40 48 40 40 48 48
48 40 56 56 48 40 48 48
One-story No.3 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 c:
8
40 40 40 40 56 56 56 56 40 40 40 48 56 56 56 56 z
building :;;
10 40 40 48 48 32 40 :II
top story 40 40 48 48 32 40 40 40 40 40
3:
of two-story No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 Use 10-inch or
12 !D
building c:
c 40 40 40 40 40 48 48 48 32 32 32 32 larl!;er units
r=0
8
First
story
48
No.4
48
No.4
48
No.4
48
No.4
56
No.5
56
No.5
56
No.5
56
No.5
48
No.5
48
No.5
40
No.5
40
No.6
56 56 56
No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6
48 z
Cl
ofl1 10 0
two-story 40 40 40 40 48 48 48 48 40 40 40 48 48 48 40 40
0
buildi.ng No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 Use 10-inch or 0
12 40 40 48 larl(er units m
40 48 48 40 40 32 32 32 32
......
No.4 No.4 No.4
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 CD
One-story 8 CD
56 56 56
64 40 48 48 48 56 56 56 56 48 48 48 48 ......
building
or No.5 No.5 No.5
No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 c
10 z
top story 48 48 48
56 40 40 40 40 56 48 48 48 32 32 40 40 :;;
of two-story No.6 No.6 No.6
No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 Use 10-inch or 0
building 12 48 48 48 40 ::D
D 48 40 40 40 24 32 32 32 lan~er units 3:
No.4 No.4 No.4
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 IJI
First 8
64 64 64 56 48 48 48 48 40 40 56 56 48 48 48 40 5
story No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5
r
of a 10 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 c
two-story 56 56 48 48 40 40 40 40 48 48 48 40 40 40 32 32 z
building 12
No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6
48 48 48 48 40
No.6
40 Use 10-inch or larger units "0
0
*N.R. =No vertical reinforcement required. However, see Table No. A-24-6 for shear wall reinforcement.
c
m
60.
2Roof load is assumed to be concentrically loaded on the wall. For roofs which hang on ledgers, a design is required.
4These values are for walls with running bond. For stack bond see Section 2425 (h) 3.
5 Hook vertical bars over bond beam as shown. Extend bars into footing using lap splices where necessary.

100 psf, use 100 psf.]
D. Find proper wind speed and exposure for the site-see Figure No. 23-1, Chapter 23, Section 2312.
E. Within the proper vertical column, choose appropriate span-to-bearing wall and appropriate height and story. ,,,..
F. Read proper size and spacing of reinforcement for the thickness of the wall mentioned in the title of the table. (Equivalent area of steel, taking m
spacing into account, may be substituted.) z
c
....CDCD G. For buildings in Seismic Zone No.2 (see Figure No. 23-2 in Chapter 23), use minimum reinforcement in Figure No. A-24-B if it is more restrictive x
•
~~~N~EiTHrs
TABLE NO. A-24-3-E-VERTICAL REINFORCING STEEL REQUIREMENTS FOR 8-INCH-THICK TABLE AND TABLE NO. A-24-6.
MASONRY WALLS41N AREAS WHERE BASIC WIND SPEEDS ARE 80 MPH OR GREATER2.3.5 )>
(Wood or Steel Roof and Floor Framing) HOOK OVER BOND BEAM "0
ahemate every other bar). "0
m
Criteria: Roof Live Load= 20 to 40 psf; Floor Live Load= 100 psf; open building z
0
SO MPH 90MPH I 100MPH 110MPH ><
Span bel-. Bearing watls (Feet)
UNSUPPORTED
HEIGHT 8 I 16 24 321 8 I 161241321 a I 16 I 24 I 32 8 l 16 l 24 32
8 72 96 80 88 56 56 64 64 80 80 80 88 64 64 64 72
building
or No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5
top story 10 64 64 72 72 48 56 56 56 40 40 40 40 48 56 56 56
building 12 48 48 48 56 56 40 40 40 48 48 48 48
B 40 56 56 40
First 8 88 96 56 72 64 56 64 64 80 64 56 64 56 48 48
72
story No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5
of a No.4
10 64 56 48 48 48 40 48 40 56 48 56 48 48 40
two-story 72 56
.....
building 12 CD
CD
48 40 40 48 56 48 48 40 40 40 48 48 48 48 40 40 .....
One-story No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 c:
building
8 64 64 72 72 56 56 56 56 40 40 40 48 56 56 56 56 z
;;
top story 10 40 40 48 48 32 40 40 40 40 J:J
56 56 48 48 56 56 40
of two-story 3:
No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 Use 10-inch or
building 12 Ill
c 40 40 40 40 40 48 48 48 32 32 32 32 lan!er units c:
8
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 r=
0
First
story
72
No.5
64
No.5
56 48 56
No.5 No.5 No.5
48
No.5
48
No.5
40
No.5
40
No.5
40
No.6
40
No.6
48
No.6
56 48 48
No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6
40
z
C)
of a 10 48 48 48 40 40 40 48 40 40 40 40 32
two-story 64 56 48 48 0
No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 0
building 12 Use 10-inch or larger units 0
40 48 48 40 40 40 40 32 32 32 32 m
...
co
One-story 8
No.4
56
No.4
56
No.4
56
No.4
64
No.4
40
No.5
72
No.5
72
No.5
72
No.5
56
No.5
56
No.5
56
No.5
56
No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5
48 48 48 48
...
co
building c:
or 10
No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 z
top story
of two-story
48
No.6
48
No.6
48
No.6
56
No.6
40
No.6
40
No.6
40
No.6
40
No.6
56
No.6
48
No.6
48
No.6
48
No.6
32 32 40
Use 10-inch or
40
~::tl
building 12 48 48 40 3::::
D 48 48 40 40 40 24 32 32 32 larger units
No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.4 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 tD
First 8 c:
64 56 48 48 48 64 56 56 56 48 48 48 48 40 40 40 ;=
story No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.5 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 c
of a
two-story
10 56 48 48 40 40 40 48 48 48 40 40 40 40 32 32 32 z
G>
building No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 No.6 0
12 40 40 40 32 32 Use 10-inch or larger units
48 48 32 0
c
*N.R. = No vertical reinforcement required. However, see Table No. A-24-6 for shear wall reinforcement. m
'The figure on top of the listed data is the bar size; the figure below it is the maximum spacing in inches. Reinforcing bar strength shall be A 615 Grade
60.
2Roof load is assumed to be concentrically loaded on the wall. For roofs which hang on ledgers, a design is required.
3Minimum horizontal reinforcement shall be one No. 4 at the ledger and foundation. Also, see Table No. A-24-5 for lintels and Table No. A-24-6 for
4 These values are for walls with running bond. For stack bond see Section 2425 (h) 3.
SHook vertical bars over bond beam as shown. Extend bars into footing using lap splices where necessary.
B. Check if building is enclosed or open by the procedure in Section 2311 (k).
C. Choose proper floor load from Table No. 23-A. (For loads less than 50 psf, use 50 psfand for loads between 50 psf and 100 psf, use 100 psf.)
D. Find proper wind speed and exposure for the site-see Figure No. I , Chapter 23, Section 2311 (c) and (d).
E. Within the proper vertical column, choose appropriate span-to-bearing wall and appropriate height and story. )>
F. Read proper size and spacing of reinforcement for the thickness of the wall mentioned in the title of the table. (Equivalent area of steel, taking -c
-c
spacing into account, may be substituted.) m
G. For buildings in Seismic Zone No. 2 (see Figure No. 2 in Chapter 23), use minimum reinforcement in Figure No. A-24-B if it is more restrictive
z
c
...
co
N than the table values. x
TABLE NO. A-24-4 )>
ANCHORAGE OF WOOD MEMBERS TO EXTERIOR WALLS FOR VERTICAL AND UPLIFT FORCES 'tJ
'tJ
(In areas where basic wind speeds are 80 miles per hour or greater) m
z
See Figure No. A-24-C for details c
Part 1-Anchor bolt size and spacing (in inches)5,6,8 on wood ledgers carrying vertical loads from roofs and floors 2 ·3
x
Douglas fir-larch, California redwood (close grain) and southern pine1•10
UVE
2x LEDGER I 3x LEDGER I 4x LEDGER
TYPE OF LOA04,7 Span between Bearing wans {Feet)
LOADING paf 8 16 24 32 8 16 24 32 8 16 24 32
112 (2) 112 5/s 7/s 112 112 (2)112 7/s - 5/s 7 /s (2)5/s
20
32 16 16 16 32 16 32 16 - 32 32 32
(2) 112 l!z 3/4 7/s liz (2)7/s 7/s 7/s - (2)112 5/s 3/4
Roof 30
32 16 16 16 16 32 16 16 - 32 16 16
40
112 5/s 3/4 - 5/s (2)5/s 7/s 1 5/s 5/s 3/4 7/s
16 16 8 - 16 32 16 16 32 16 16 16
112 1 - - 5/s 3/4 3/4 P/4 5/s 7/s 7/s 7/s
50
Floor9 16 12 - - 24 32 12 12 24 24 16 12 .....
CD
1 (2)3/4 - - 5/s 1 (2)3/4 (2)1 7/s 3/4 1 (2)3/4 CD
100 .....
16 12 - - 16 12 12 12 16 12 12 12 c:
1See U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17, Table No. 25-17-G, for other species. Adjust spacing in direct proportion to.the perpendicular-to-grain values forthe
z
applicable ledger and bolt sizes shown using the procedure described in Section 2510 (b), second paragraph. No increase is allowed for special inspec- ~:II
tion.
2Tabulated values are based on short-term loading due to roof loads (25 percent) or snow loads ( 15 percent), whichever controls. No increase is allowed 3::
IJI
for floor loads. c:
3See details in Figure No. A-24-C for location relative to other construction. Note that roofs are concentrically loaded. i=
c
4See Table No. 23-C or Appendix Chapter 23, Division I, for values.
5Closer spacing may be used.
z
C')
6 Use two boltS. o.ne above the other, at splices and locate them away from the splice end by 3 1h inches for 1h-inch diameter, 4 1h inches for 5 /s-inch 0
0
diameter, 5 1/4 lO(;hes for 3/4-inch diameter, 6 1/4 inches for 7/g-inch diameter and 7 inches for l-inch diameter. c
7Joist spacing i' lin1ited to 30 inches on center maximum. m
...
<0
8 See Table No. A-24-6 for lateral force requirements (when applicable).
9 Where two bolts are required they shall be staggered at half the spacing shown or be placed one above the other.
...
<0
c:
10 Values on top are bolt sizes and underneath are spacing. Multiple bolts are shown in parenthesis: example (2) =two. z
~::rJ
s::
CD
c:
r=c
Part 11-Uplift anchors3 for wood roof members (number of common nails in a 20 gauge by 11/8 -inch
tie strap embedded 5 inches into a masonry bond beam 4). z
c;)
0
BOMPH I 90MPH I 100MPH 110 MPH 0
Span between Bearing wans (Feet)5 c
m
ENCLOSURE! EXPOSURE2 8 16 24 32 8 16 24 32 8 16 24 32 8 16 24 32
B NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR
NR NR NR
NR NR NR 2-8d 2-Sd
NR NR NR NR NR 2-8d 3-8d 4-8d 2-8d
4-8d 5-IOd 5-10d 2-IOd 4-10d 3-10d 4-IOd
Enclosed
c 24" 24"
D NR 2-8d 3-8d 4-8d 2-8d 4-8d 4-IOd 5-IOd 3-8d 5-8d 5-IOd 4-IOd 3-10d 5-10d 4-10d 5-IOd
24" 24" 24"
B NR NR NR NR NR NR 2-8d 2-8d NR 2-8d 4-8d 5-10d 2-8d 4-8d 5-8d 6-IOd
2-8d 4-8d 5-8d 5-IOd 3-8d 5-8d 3-10d 4-10d 3-IOd 5-10d 5-10d 5-10d 5-8d 4-10d 5-10d 6-IOd
Open c 24" 24" 24" 16" 24" 16" 16"
2-8d 5-8d 5-10d 5-10d 4-8d 5-IOd 4-10d 5-10d 5-8d 4-10d 6-IOd 6-IOd 4-8d 5-10d 6-10d 6-IOd
D 24" 12"
24" 24" 24" 24" 16" 24" 16"
NR = No requirements; use Table No. 25-Q minimum.
1See Chapter 23, Part II for definitions.
)>
2
See Section 2312 for definitions. 'tl
'tl
3
Tie straps are at 48 inches on center unless otherwise stated. See Figure No. A-24-C for illustration of tie straps. m
z
4 Bond beam to be at least 48 inches deep nominal and shall be reinforced as shown in Table No. A-24-5 for lintels, or Table No. A-24-3 for walls in c
general where they are more restrictive. ><
5 For flat roofs connected to interior walls, the span shall be one half the larger distance on either side of the wall.
NOTE: HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL RAFTERS

REINFORCEMENT TO BE DETERMINED
BY TABLES NOS. A-24-3 AND A-24-6
BOND BEAM WITH GROUT-FILLED

CELLS C/ CONT. TOP AND
BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT
VERT. REINF. (Fill Cells at
Rein!. w"h Grout)
ROOF WITH OVERHANG
SHEATHING AND ROOFING
BOND BEAM OR CHORD REINFORCING

ANCHOR BOLTS AS
REQUIRED FOR WALL
ANCHORAGE AND
LATERAL LOADS
FIGURE NO. A-24-C-VARIOUS DETAILS ASSOCIATED

WITH TABLE NO. A-24·4 (Uplift Resistance)
924
METAL COPING WITH 1/2''<1>

ANCHOR AT 6' O.C.
CAP AND BASE FLASHING
NOTE: SEE OTHER

DRAWINGS FOR
DET. AND DIM. NOT
CALLED OUT
METAL TIES AT
16"0.C. TYP. ~~i.Gf--12"
hollow-
WOOD JOIST ROOF COMPOSITE WALL masonry
unit
J I
1. I·
HOLLOW-MASONRY UNIT FOUNDATION

WALL-JOIST PERPENDICULAR
NOTE: HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL 6" or 8" CMU or brick masonry wall
REINFORCEMENT PER TABLES NOS.
A-24-3 AND A-24-6
2" CONT. BLOCKING, BOLT AT 48" O.C.
VERT. REINF. MIN. LAP AS

(Fill Cells at Reinf. with Grout)
HORIZ. BAR IN GROUT-

FILLED BOND BEAM
FLOOR JOIST WITH
GROUT FILL ALL CELLS STANDARD JOIST ANCHOR
BELOW FLOOR
LEDGER-BOLTS DETERMINED
UNDISTURBED GROUND SURFACE::---~~ BY TABLE NO. A-24-4, PART I
CONT. REINF.

(Continued)
925
NOTE: SEE DRAWING

FOR DET. NOT CALLED OUT
JOIST ANCHOR AT 4' -0" O.C.

NAILED INTO BLOCKING (Under 3 '· ::·
Joists)
END JOIST OR LEDGER BOLTED TO
WALL
EXTERIOR WALL-JOIST PARALLEL INTERIOR WALL-JOIST PARALLEL
FINISH VARIES
PLYWD OR DIAGONAL SUBFLOOR
CONT. HORIZONTAL BAR IN
GROUT-FILLED BOND BEAM
GROUT FILL ALL CELLS

BELOW FLOOR
FLOOR JOIST WITH STD. HANGER
LEDGER-BOLTS DETERMINED
BY TABLE NO. A-24-4, PART I
CONT. REINF.
SEE TABLE NO. A-24-1-A


WITH TABLE NO_ A-24-4 (Uplift ReslstanceHContinued)
926
METAL WALL TIES

FINISH VARIES
WOOD FLOOR
ON WOOD JOISTS
3" MIN. BEARING
6" or 8" bridge

or hollow-masonry TWISTED STEEL PL.
JOIST ANCHOR
unit, typ.
Solid masonry unit
WOOD FLOOR
VERT. REINF. --Je~<'l-- CMU or brick masonry wall

(RIICells
atReinf.
with Grout)
BOND BEAM _,.,..,.....,,
REIN F.
FLOOR JOIST WITH STD. HANGER

LEDGER WITH BOLTS (Use same
depth as joists)
EXTERIOR WALL- INTERIOR WALL-

JOIST PERPENDICULAR JOIST PERPENDICULAR
(Continued)
927
BOND BEAM OR
CHORD STEEL
BLOCKING BETWEEN JOISTS
LEDGER WITH ANCHOR BOLTS TO

SUPPORT VERTICAL FLOOR LOADS.
SEE TABLE NO. A-24-4.
BLOCKING BETWEEN JOISTS
JOISTS ANCHOR AS PER FIGURE NO. A-24-E
END JOIST SECURED TO WALL WITH

ANCHOR BOLTS

WITH TABLE NO. A-24-4 (Uplift Resistance)-(Continued)
928
1 NO.4 CONTINUOUS AT LAP COURSE

Typical
hollow-masonry CONTINUOUS LEDGER
unit or brick wall
SHEET METAL
reinforcing ANCHOR STRAP
(see Tables AT48"0.C.
Nos. A-24-3
and A-24-6)
FIGURE NO. A-24-D-CONTINUOUS LOAD PATH
929
LINTEL OR BOND BEAM UNITS

PLACE METAL LATH OR HEAVY WATERPROOF PAPER
OVER CORES OF BEARING UNITS TO RETAIN
CONCRETE
-TWO NO.4 EACH SIDE OF OPENING. EXTEND 24"
BEYOND OPENING OR HOOK OVER BOND BEAM BARS11
REINFORCING DETAILS
24"MINIMUM
TWO NO. 4, TYPICAL
r /.1
SECTION SPAN 175/8" I~~~RING
SECTION ELEVATION
WITHOUT STIRRUPS
! ~
'f-
1- STD.B x 8 x 16"UNIT(2or3Core)
NO.3 TIES SPACE PER THE TABLE
WHEN REQUIRED
J ~
~-· ~P"-r-- LINTEL OR BOND BEAM UNIT
TWO NO.4 EACH SIDE OF OPENING WITH
~ STANDARD HOOK IF 24" NOT AVAILABLE.11
SP_'A_;N;___--1...;7_;518.:::."--t MIN.
to- BEARING
SECTION ELEVATION
WITH STIRRUPS
930
....
ID
....
ID
c:
z
:;;
0
:a
TABLE NO. A-24-5--LINTEL REINFORCEMENT OVER EXTERIOR OPENINGS1-WOOD AND STEEL FRAMING7 ==
tD
c:
(Lintels larger than 12'-0" shall be designed.)9 j=
8-INCH MASONRY UNITS4 c
Part 1-Roof Loads4 z
C)
SECOND STORY OF A TWO-STORY BUILDING OR ONE·STORY BUILDINGS 0
ROOF LIVE LOAD2,10,11 0
c
20-30psf I 40psf m
Width of Opening& (Feet)
ANY WALL SPAN TO
HEIGHT BEARING 4 I 8 I 12 I 4 I 8 I 12
(Feet) WALLS (Feet) Llmel depth (Inches) number and size of reber
8 8 16 8 8 16
8 1 No.3 1 No.3 1 No.4 1 No.3 1 No.4 1 No.4
(B) (B)
8 8 16 8 8 16
16 1 No.3 1 No.3 1 No.4 1 No.3 2No.4 2No. 5
Any (B) (A) (B)
(up to 12') 8 8 16 8 16 24
24 1 No.3 1 No.4 1 No.4 1 No.3 1 No.4 2No. 5
(B) (B) (B)
8 16 16 8 16 24
32 1 No.3 I No.4 1 No.5 1 No.3 1 No.5 2No. 5
(B) (B) (B) (C) >
"C
"C
m
(Continued) z
c
x
TABLE NO. A-24-5--LINTEL REINFORCEMENT OVER EXTERIOR OPENINGS1-WOOD AND STEEL FRAMING7 )>
(Lintels larger than 12'-0" shall be designecl.)s "tl
"tl
8-INCH MASONRY UNITS4-(Continued) m
z
0
S<
Part 11-Fioor and Roof Loads4
FIRST STORY OF TWO-STORY BUILDINGS
FLOOR LIVE LOAD3
SOps! _l 100 psi
Width of Opening& (Feet)
SPAN TO
WALL BEARINGS,& 4 8 _l 12 _l 4 _l 8 j_ 12
HEIGHT WALLS (Feet) Lintel depth (Inches) number and size of rebar
8 8 16 8 8 16
8 1 No.3 1 No.4 I No.4 1 No.3 2No.4 2No. 5
(B) (A) (B)
8 8 16 8 16 24
16 I No.3 2No. 4 2No. 5 1 No.3 1 No.4 2No.4
Any (A) (B) (B) (C)
(up to 12') 8 16 24 8 16 24 ...
co
24 I No.3 1 No.4
(B)
2No. 5
(B)
1 No.3
(A)
I No.5
(B)
3 No.5
(C) ...
co
8 16 24 24 c
8 Design z
32 1 No.3 I No.5 2No. 5 I No.4 2No. 5
Required
;;
(B) (C) (B) (C) 0
:D
3:
CD
c
r=
0
z
G)
0
0
0
m
.....
1The values shown are CQ
number and size of A 615, 60 grade steel reinforcement bars: Example-2 No.4 is two 1/z-inch-diameter deformed reinforcing CQ
bars. See also Figure No. A-24-D for continuous load path. .....
2 The stirrup size and spacing, where required, as indicated in parenthesis below the reinforcing bar requirements. c
3From Table No. 23-A. For other floor loads go to next higher value. Where required floor load exceeds 100 pounds per square foot, a design is z
=n
required. 0
4 Wall weight is included. J:l
5When interior walls support floors from each side, these values may be used if the spans on each side are less than 16 feet 0 inch each. Enterthe table 3:
with the total of both span widths. Ill
c
6 For spans between the figures shown, go to next higher span width.
7Design required for lintels supporting precast planks.
r=c
8 Lintels are 8-inch nominal depth where supporting roof loads only and 16-inch nominal depth where supporting floor and roofs unless otherwise z
c;)
stated. All lintels are solidly grouted.
9Stirrup spacing requirements: A = No. 3 at 8 inches on center, B = No. 3 at 4 inches on center, C = No. 4 at 8 inches on center. None are required 0
unless specifically mentioned in the table.
0
c
10All exposure categories are included for wind uplift on the lintel. See Footnote No.3 of Tables Nos. A-24-3-A through A-24-3-E as a minimum m
bond beam. Table No. A-24-6 may also control.
11 Two No.5 vertical bars minimum are required on each side of the lintel for I 00 and II 0 miles per hour, Exposure D. Bar to extend 25 inches beyond
opening or hook over top bars.
>
"tJ
"tJ
m
z
c
x
TABLE NO. A-24-6-MASONRY SHEAR WALL2,4,7 AND DIAPHRAGM

REQUIREMENTS IN HIGH-WIND AREAS 1
Part 1-Minimum wall length and horizontal bar reinforcement required for
exterior shear walls and cross walls 3 (all wall heights). (Design criteria: 20
to 40 psf roof load; 50 or 100 psf floor load; open or enclosed buildinqs.~
8-INCH WALLSS
Distance
between Shear
Resisting Walls& One-story Build In~ First story of
Wind "L"or"b" or Second Story o a Two-story
Speed Exposure {Feel) a Two-story Building Building
32 NSR 9'-4"
5'-4"
B 48 NSR DBL(D)
7'-6"
64 10'-0" DBL(C)
5'-4"
32 NSR DBL(C)
8'-8"
c 48 II '-0" DBL(C)
80mph
15'-0"
64 13'-4" (D)
7'-0"
32 8' -8" (C)
9'-4" 10'-8"
D 48 (C) (D)
10'-0" 13'-8"
64 (D) (D)
7'-8"
32 NSR DBL (C)
8'-0"
48 NSR (D)
B
12'-0"
64 12'-8" (D)
32 NSR 14'-8"
10'-0"
48 13'-8"
c (D)
90mph 10'-8" 15'-6"
64 (C) DBL(B)
7'-8" II '-8"
32 (C) (D)
12'-0" 12'-8"
D 48 (C) DBL(B)
11'-8" 18'-4"
64 (D) DBL(C)
934
8-INCH WALLS5
Distance
between Shear
Resisting walls& One-story Bulldln~ First story of
Wind "L"or"b" or Second Story o a Two-story
Speed Exposure (Feet) a Two-story Building Building
5'-4"
32 NSR DBL(C)
10'-0" 10'-0"
48 (D)
B
15'-4" 64'-8"
64 DBL(C)
5'-4" II '-8"
32 (D) (D)
12'-8" 12'-8"
c 48 (C) DBL(C)
!OOmph
12'-4" 19'-8"
64 (D) DBL(C)
5'-4" 9'-4"
32 DBL(B) DBL(C)
9'-4" 14'-8"
D 48 (D) DBL(C)
17'-4" 21 '-0"
64 (D) DBL(C)
6'-0"
32 NSR DBL(C)
12'-0" 10'-0"
B 48 DBL(C)
12'-8" 14'-0"
64 (C) (D)
5'-4" 9'-8"
32 DBL(B) (D)
110 mph c 48
12'-0" 15'-4"
(C) (D)
16'-8" 18'-8"
64 (C) DBL(C)
8'-8" 11'-4"
32 (C) (D)
12'-4" 18'-0"
D 48 (C) (D)
18' -8" 20'-8"
64 (C) DBL(C)
*NSR-No special horizontal reinforcement required for shear resistance if 5 feet 4 inches
long minimum.
1Table is adjusted to include provisions for Seismic Zones Nos. 0, I and 2.
(Continued)
935
TABLE NO. A-24·6-MASONRY SHEAR WALL2,4, 7 AND DIAPHRAGM

REQUIREMENTS IN HIGH-WIND AREAS 1-(Contlnued)
2Cumulative shear wall length is to be at least as long as is shown in this table. However,
see Figure No. A-24-6-l. The top figure is the minimum length. When required, the
figure below it in parenthesis is the spacing of steel reinforcing wire installed as shown
in Figure No. A-24-6-2, below. (A)= two No.9 gauge at 16 inches on center, (B)= two
3/16 inch at 16 inches on center, (C)= two No.9 gauge at 8 inches on center, (D)= two
3116 inch at 8 inches on center. The symbol DBL means double these amounts. Equivalent
areas of reinforcing bars spaced not over 4 feet 0 inch on center may be used.
3Cross walls are to be at least twice as long as shown in the table for shear walls. The
tributary width (L/2) shall be the distance used in the third column above to find
minimum reinforcement and length.
4 All bearing and shear walls are to be in-plane with vertical reinforcement, when required,
extending from one floor to the other as dictated in Table No. A-24-3
5 For walls which width is equal to or less than half its height, add an extra No. 5 vertical
bar at each end.
6 Use 32-foot requirements for distances less than 32 feet. Also use it for bearing walls used
as shear walls.
7 Minimum bond beam shall be 100 miles per hour (mph), Exposure B; 90 mph, Exposure
Band 80 mph, Exposures Band C, one No.4; 100 mph, Exposure C; 80 and 90 mph
Exposures C and D, two No. 4; all others two No. 5.
ADD CROSS WALLS THIS

DIRECTION WHEN L EXCEEDS
64 FEET. NO MODULE SHALL
EXCEED 32' x 64'
b = DISTANCE BETWEEN
BEARING WALLS (32 feet
maximum)
MINIMUM CROSS SHEAR

[:2.....------t-WALL LENGTH 40% "L"
IN ALL CASES THE

MINIMUM WALL
SEGMENT FOR
RESISTING LATERAL
LOADS IS 4 '-0"
FIGURE NO. A-24-6-1
936
1 NO.5 SAR EACH END.

TYPICAL WHERE REQUIRED
SY FOOTNOTE NO. 5 ASOVE
SINGLE-WYTHE
WALLS
CORNERS AND TEES
CORNER (All Sizes

and Combinalions)
mr. TEE (All Sizes and
~binations)
L---,------J
FIGURE NO. A-24-6-2
937
TABLE NO. A-24-6-SHEAR WALL AND DIAPHRAGM

REQUIREMENTS IN HIGH-WIND AREAS 1-(Continued)
Part II-Wood floor and roof diaphragms and connectlons 1•3
(All wall heights 8-12')
FRAMING OF DOUGLAS FIR·LARCH OR SOUTHERN PINE

Distance between Minimum Plywood/Psrtlcleboard
SheerWBIIsS Slze3 and Nalllng2,4
Wind "L"or"b" Thickness Common Nail Nail Spacing
Speed Exposure (Feel) (Inches) Slza (Psnny) (lnchas)
16 5116 6 6o.c.
B 32 3jg 6 6o.c.
48 3/s 8 6o.c.
64 3jg 8 6o.c.
16 3jg 8 6o.c.
32 liz or 1s;,2 8 6o.c.
80mph c
48 liz or 15/32 10 6o.c.
64 Sfs or 19f32 10 6o.c.
16 liz or 15 /32 8 6o.c.
32 Sfs or 19f32 10 6o.c.
'iz or 15f32
D 48 8 4/6o.c.
blocked
'iz or 15f32
64 8 4/6o.c.
blocked
16 5!J6 6 6o.c.
B 32 3jg 8 6o.c.
48 3/s 8 6o.c.
64 3jg 8 6o.c.
16 1/2 or 15 /32 10 6o.c.
3jg
32 blocked
8 416 o.c.
c 48
3jg
8 4/6o.c.
90mph blocked
5/s or 19h2
64 10 6o.c.
blocked
16 s;s or 19/32 10 6o.c.
1iz or 15132
32 blocked
10 416 o.c.
D 1iz or 15f32
48 10 4/6o.c.
blocked
Design required or
64 provide extra cross walls
938
FRAMING OF DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH OR SOUTHERN PINE

Distance between Minimum Plywood/ParticlebOard
ShearWallsS Slze3 and Nelllng2,4
Wind "L"or"b" Thlcknaas Common Nail Nell Spacing
Speed Exposure (Feet) (Inches) Size (Psnny) (Inches)
16 3/s 8 6o.c.
B 32 1f2or 15f32 8 6o.c.
48 1f2 or 15/32 8 6o.c.
64 5fs or 19/32 10 6o.c.
3/s
16 8 4/6o.c.
blocked
5/s or 19f32
32 blocked
10 416 o.c.
c
5/s or 19f32
48 10 4/6o.c.
!OOmph blocked
Design required or
112 or 15/32
16 10 4/6o.c.
blocked
5fs or 19f32
32 blocked
10 416o.c.
D
Design required or
Design required or
16 112 or 15/32 8 6o.c.
32 1f2 or 15/32 10 6o.c.
B 48 5fs or 19f32 10 6o.c.
1f2 or 15f32
64 8 4/6o.c.
blocked
1f2 or 15/32
16 8 4/6 o.c.
blocked
5fs or 19f32
32 blocked 10 4/6o.c.
c
48 Design required or
110mph provide extra cross walls
Design required or
5fs or 19f32
16 10 416 o.c.
blocked
Design required or
D
Design required or
Design required or
64
provide extra cross walls
(Continued)
939
TABLE NO. A-24-6-SHEAR WALL AND DIAPHRAGM

REQUIREMENTS IN HIGH-WIND AREAS1-(Continued)
1These requirements represent the maximum values for a diaphragm which is within a
maximum 32-foot by 64-foot module surrounded by shear walls, cross walls or bearing
walls. (See Figure No. A-24-6-1.)
2The plywood/particleboard (all grades) thickness is given first. The nailing size and
boundary/supported edge spacing is shown next (see Tables Nos. 25-J-1 and 25-J-2).
Blocking of unsupported edges is stated where required. Twelve-inch spacing required
in the field of the roof/floor. Boundary nailing is required over interior walls [see Figure
No. A-24-6-4 (b)J.
3See Tables Nos. 25-S-1 and 25-S-2 for minimum sizes depending on span between joists.
4Use Case I for unblocked diaphragms and any case for blocked diaphragms (see Tables
Nos. 25-J-1 and 25-J-2 for illustration).
5 See Figure No. A-24-6-1 for "L" and "b."
(o) FLOOR JOISTS PERPENDICULAR TO (b) FLOOR JOISTS PARALLEL TO WALL

WALL JOIST HANGER SUPPORTS
BLOCKING-TRANSFERS IN·PLANE
JOIST ANCHOR AT 4' O.C. MAX.
SHEAR TO WALL
NAILED OR BOLTED TO JOIST
~~~~~~J~O~IST~AN~CHOR
·1 AT 4' O.C.-MAX.
TIE WILL TO JOISTS
lX:!b~,.-----
BOLTED WOOD LEDGER
(c) WOOD LEDGER FLOOR JOIST SUPPORT (d) STEEL LEDGER FLOOR JOIST SUPPORT
FIGURE NO. A-24·6·3
940
r--------------CAP
i;;;;;;.;,;,i,b----------- FlASH UP PARAPET AND OVER CAP

,--------CANT
BOUNDARY NAILING -DIAGONAL SHEATHING OR PLYWOOD
STANDARD JOIST ANCHORS AT 48" O.C. MAXIMUM
"1:.~---,.-£.-'--SOLID BLOCK-sHEAR BOLTING
_A::-------- PLATE 2"" x 4" -112" BOLT AT 6" O.C. MAX.

MINIMUM 3/4" MORTAR BED
!-+-----REINFORCING BARS CONTINUOUS

IN GROUT·FILLED CORES
---------HANGERS
...__ _ _ _ _ _ SOLID BLOCKING FOR CEILING JOISTS

2~ x s~-112"BOLTAT4'-o~o.c.
{a) EXTERIOR WALL SUPPORT
TWO ROWS OF
BOUNDARY NAILING
FW~~~~~~~-SOLIDBLOCK
t
HOLD·DOWN STRAP
46"" O.C. OR OTHER
APPROVED ANCHORAGE
AS REQUIRED BY
TOENAILING TABLE NO. A·24·4
EQUIVALENT
TO BOUNDARY 2" PLATE AND BOLT
NAILING HORIZONTAL BARS
CONTINUOU5-BOTTOM
BARS MAY ALSO SERVE
AS LINTEL BARS
(b) INTERIOR WALL SUPPORT

BOND-BEAM SUPPORTS
FIGURE NO. A-24-6-4
941
TABLE NO. A-24-7-MINIMUM WALL CONNECTION

REQUIREMENTS IN HIGH-WIND AREAS
Precast Hollow-core Plank Floors and Roofs.
Spacing of No. 4 bent reinforcing bar in block or brick walls connected to
precast concrete planks1,2
WIND SPEED EXTERIOR INTERIOR

AND EXPOSURE WALLS WALLS
90 mph Exposure C and less, and 32" o.c.
100 mph Exposure B 16"o.c.
90 mph Exposure D
100 mph Exposure C 24" o.c. 12" o.c.
110 mph Exposure B
100 mph Exposure D 16" o.c. 12" o.c.
110 mph Exposures C and D
1Thistable assumes maximum wall height of 12 feet and a width-to-length ratio of dia-
phragm between shear walls of 3: I or less.
2The precast planks shall be designed as shall the walls and footings supporting them.
MORTAR BED
TO LEVEL
BLOCK COURSE
VERTICAL
REINFORCEMENT.
SEE TABLE NO. A-24·3.
SEE TABLE ABOVE
BEARING WALL REINFORCEMENT

GROUTED IN
SLAB KEYWAY
GROUTED/ BEARING STRIP
BEARING BOND BEAM,
COURSE TYPICAL
(a) SLAB PERPENDICULAR TO WALL
FIGURE NO. A-24-7-1-VARIOUS TYPES OF WALL CONNECTIONS
942
GROUT AT
BARS
SOLID
BEARING
COURSE
(b) ALTERNATE CONNECTION (c) SLAB PARALLEL WITH WALL

PERPENDICULAR TO WALL
WALLS
\,.
THIS JOINT REQUIRES DESIGN
j
(May require weld plates) )
lr- r+ G"'"T<O '""'' ""'

A A
fJoQoooo~·oo~
HOLLOW-CORE PRECAST PANELS"-"'-..)
SECTION A-A
(d) PLAN VIEW OF FLOOR OR ROOF AND CROSS SECTION THROUGH PLANKS
(Continued)
943
Hollow-masonry
unit or brick wall
VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT (Fill
3'0" Cells at Reinforcement with Grout)
~~ HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT
N0.4 DOWELS x 6'-0"AS
REQUIRED IN TABLE ABOVE
CONCRETE TOPPING ON PRECAST
HOLLOW-CORE SLAB
BOND
BEAM
BOND BEAM WITH GROUT-
_}_ (Note: Topping to be reinforced.) FILLED CELLS
(e) ALTERNATE PLANK PARALLEL

WITH WALL WITH TOPPING (f) ALTERNATE WITH TOPPING
SEE ADJACENT DRAWING

FOR DETAILS NOT CALLED
OUT
(g) INTERIOR WALL MINIMUM CONNECTION
FIGURE NO. A-24-7-1-VARIOUS TYPES OF WALL

CONNECTIONS-(Continued)
944
TABLE NO. A-24-8-MINIMUM HOLD-DOWN

REQUIREMENTS IN HIGH-WIND AREAS
Steel Floors and Roofs.
MAXIMUM SPACING OF
WIND SPEED ROOF JOISTS WITH
AND EXPOSURE CONNECTION SHOWN1,2,3
100 mph Exposure B
90 mph Exposures B and C 4'-0"
80 mph Exposures B, C and D
II 0 mph Exposure B
100 mph Exposure C
2'-6"
II 0 mph Exposures C and D
Design required
100 mph Exposure D
I Maximum span is 32 feet to bearing walls.

2Joists and decking to be designed.
3Bottom chord of joists to be braced for reversal of stresses caused by wind uplift.
4"
BENT Je 11 GAUGE x C
4"
2' -0" MAXIMUM

OVERHANG, TYPICAL
3/4" lil x 8" A.B. AT 24"
12" MAX. END DISTANCE
(Min. of 2 bolts
(a) per joist space)
Je1/2" X 6" X 1'-2"WITH

2'-3/4"0 X 10" A.B.
AT11"GAUGEON
3/4" DAYPACK
(b) ALTERNATE
FIGURE NO. A-24-8-1-EXTERIOR WALL DETAILS
945
1i' 5/s" x 8" LENGTH

OFii'EQUAL TO
JOIST BEARING WIDTH "'\.
PLUS 6" ON 1112'' '\
DAYPACK
~
25/s"<j> x 10" A.B.
71/2'' MIN. GAUGE
rJj
~STEEL JOIST
li'1/4 x 6" CONT. WITH

W'<j> X 12"WELDED METAL DECKING
ANCHORS AT 24" O.C.
TOP OF WALL
ELEV. VARIES
WITH ROOF SLOPE
:~---STEEL JOISTS
IN BOND BEAM
II
JL
FIGURE NO. A-24·8·2-INTERIOR WALL DETAILS
946
3f1s
4" WIDE BRNG. ~WITH
23/4"0 x 10" A.B. AT
7W'MIN.
GAUGE (6" MIN. EMBED.)
LENGTH OF ~ EQUAL TO
JOIST BRNG. WIDTH + 6"
THICKNESS OF~ EQUALS
W' FOR JOISTS 16" D
OR LESS S/e" FOR JOISTS
18" D OR MORE. CENTER
AT WALL.
CONTINUOUS
BOND BEAM. SEE WALL REINFORCEMENT,
TABLE NO. A-24-6 TYPICAL
NOTE:
BASE ~TO BE SET OVER
FULLY GROUTED MASONRY
COURSE FOR FULL 100 PERCENT
BEARING AT BOTTOM
SIDE OF PLATE.
FIGURE NO. A-24-8-3--FLOOR DETAILS

(Design Required for Joists and Wall)
947
TABLE NO. A-24-9-DIAGONAL BRACING REQUIREMENTS >
~
FOR GABLE-END WALL1,2 ROOF PITCH 3:12 to 5:12 ~
m
BASIC WIND SPEED (mph)
z
0
80 90 100 110 ><
EXPOSURE 3:12 4:12 and 5:12 3:12 4:12 and 5:12 3:12 4:12 and 5:12 3:12 4:12 and 5:12
I III I III I III I III

B at at at at at at at at
48" o.c. 48" o.c. 48" o.c. 48" o.c. 24" o.c. 24" o.c. 24" o.c. 24" o.c.
I III I III II IV II IV
c at at at at at at at at
I III II IV II IV Two-II Two-III
c at at at at at at at at
I I 2 x 4 brace, one clip angle. ...

II
III
2 x 4 brace, two clip angles (one each side).
3 x 4 brace, one clip angle. ...
ID
ID
c
IV 3 x 4 brace, two clip angles (one each side). z
The spacing requirements of the brace are shown below the symbol.
2 See Figures Nos. A-24-9-1 and A-24-9-2 for details and size of clip angles. ~
:a
5:
ID
c
;=
0
z
C)
0
0
0
m
16dEACHEND
CLIP AS AEOUIRED5
18 GAUGE ANGLE
1For roof slopes up to 5: 12; see Table No. A-24-9.

2See Detail 2, Table No. A-24-2, for size of angle clip.
3Angle clip one side or both sides as required by Table No. A-24-9.
4 Use six 16d nails to fasten brace to block, except me two braces and six 16d nails each for
110 miles per hour (mph), Exposure D. Place one brace on each side block.
5 Add angle clip each end of block for 90 mph, Exposure D, and I 00 and II 0 mph for Expo-
sures C and D.
6 Use 2 x 6 block with 2 x brace, 2 x 8 block with 3 x brace.
FIGURE NO. A·24·9·1-DIAGONAL BRACING OF GABLE-END WALL 1
949
2x BLOCKING AT
3' 0" O.C. AND
2'0"0.C.AS
REQUIRED BELOW
16dAT
9"0.C.
TW016d
TWO ANGLE CLIPS EACH END
ONE EACH SIDE
2 x 4MIN. "T"
CONTINUOUS
~~../
2 x VERTICAL LEG OF "T"

BLOCKING SAME DEPTH AS
CEILING JOIST
1------DETAILA·A------'
Note: This detail may be used for flat roofs, also,

except use full height blocking connected to roof
sheathing in lieu of "T"
2 x 4 "T" at 36 inches on center-90 miles per hour
(mph} exposure C and less, and 100 mph and 110 mph,
Exposure B.
2 x 4 "T" at 24 inches on center-required for 90 mph
Exposure D, 100 mph and 110 mph Exposures C and D.
See Figure No. A-24-2-2 for details of clip angle and connections.
FIGURE NO. A-24·9·2-ALTERNATE HORIZONTAL

BRACING OF GABLE-END WALL
950
Chapter 25
CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION
IN HIGH-WIND AREAS
General
Sec. 2518. (a) Purpose. The provisions of this chapter are intended to promote
public safety and welfare by reducing the risk of wind-induced damages to conven-
tionallight-frame construction.
(b) Scope. This chapter applies to regular-shaped buildings which have roof
structural members spanning 32 feet or less, are not more than three stories in
height, are of conventional light-frame construction and are located in areas with a
basic wind speed from 80 through II 0 miles per hour (mph).
EXCEPTION: Detached carpons and garages not exceeding 600 square feet
and accessory to Group R, Division 3 Occupancies need only comply with the
roof-member-to-wall-tie requirements of Section 2518 (e) 8.
(c) Definitions. Forthe purpose of this chapter, certain terms are defined as fol-
lows:
CORROSION RESISTANT or NONCORROSIVE is material having a cor-
rosion resistance equal to or greater than a hot-dipped galvanized coating of 1.5
ounces of zinc per square foot of surface area.
(d) General. The requirements of Section 2517 are applicable except as specif-
ically modified by this chapter. Other methods may be used, provided a satisfacto-
ry design is submitted showing compliance with the provisions of Section 2311 and
other applicable portions of this code.
In addition to the other provisions of this chapter, foundations for buildings in
areas subject to wave action or tidal surge shall be designed in accordance with ap-
When an element is required to be corrosion resistant or noncorrosive, all of its
parts, such as screws, nails, wire, dowels, bolts, nuts, washers, shims, anchors, ties
and attachments, shall also be corrosion resistant or noncorrosive.
(e) Complete Load Path and Uplift Ties. I. General. Blocking, bridging,
straps, approved framing anchors or mechanical fasteners shall be installed to pro-
vide continuous ties from the roof to the foundation system. (See Figure No.
A-25-A.)
Tie straps shall be 11/x-inch by 0.036-inch (No. 20 gauge) sheet steel and shall be
corrosion resistant as herein specified. All metal connectors and fasteners used in
exposed locations or in areas otherwise subject to corrosion shall be of corro-
sion-resistant or noncorrosive material.
2. Walls-to-foundation tie. Exterior walls shall be tied to a continuous founda-
tion, or an elevated foundation system in accordance with Section 2518 (j).
3. Sills and foundation tie. Foundation plates resting on concrete or masonry
foundations shall be bolted to the foundation with not less than 1/z-inch-diameter
951
anchor bolts with 7-inch-minimum embedment into the foundation. In areas where
the basic wind speed is 90 mph or greater, the maximum spacing of anchor bolts
shall be 4 feet on center. Structures located where the basic wind speed is less than
90 mph may have anchor bolts spaced not more than 6 feet on center.
4. Floor-to-foundation tie. The lowest-level exterior wall studs shall be con-
nected to the foundation sill plate or an approved elevated foundation system with
bent tie straps spaced not more than 48 inches on center. Tie straps shall be nailed
and installed in accordance with Table No. A-25-2 and Figure No. A-25-A.
5. Wall framing details. The spacing of 2 by 4 studs in exterior walls shall not
exceed 16 inches on center for areas with a basic wind speed of 90 mph or greater.
Mechanical fasteners complying with this chapter shall be installed as required
to connect studs to the sole plates, foundation sill plate and top plates of the wall.
Interior main cross-stud partitions shall be installed approximately perpendicu-
lar to the exterior wall when the length of the structure exceeds the width. The
maximum distance between these partitions shall not exceed the width of the struc-
ture. Interior main cross-stud partition walls shall be securely fastened to exterior
walls at the point of intersection with fasteners as required by Table No. 25-Q. The
main cross-stud partitions shall be covered on both sides by materials as described
in Item 6.
6. Wall sheathing. All exterior walls and required interior main cross-stud
partitions shall be sheathed in accordance with Table No. A-25-1. The total width
of sheathed wall elements shall not be less than 50 percent of the exterior wall
length or 60 percent of the width of the building for required interior main
cross-stud partitions. The exterior wall sheathing or covering shall extend from the
foundation sill plate or girder to the top plates at the roof level and shall be ade-
quately attached thereto.
A sheathed wall element not less than 4 feet in width shall be installed at each
comer or as near thereto as possible. There shall not be less than one 4-foot
sheathed wall element for every 20 feet or fraction thereof of wall length. The
height-to-length ratio of required sheathed wall elements shall not exceed 3 for
plywood or particleboard and 11h for other sheathing materials listed in Table No.
A-25-1.
7. Floor-to-floor tie. Upper-level exterior wall studs shall be aligned and con-
nected to the wall studs below with a tie strap as required by Table No. A-25-2.
8. Roof-members-to-wall tie. Tie straps shall be provided from the side of the
roof-framing member to the exterior studs, posts or other supporting members be-
low the roof. The wall studs to which the roof-framing members are tied shall be
aligned with the roof-framing member and be connected in accordance with Table
No. A-25-2.
The eave overhang shall not exceed 3 feet unless an analysis is provided showing
that the required resistance is provided to prevent uplift.
Where openings exceed 6 feet in width, the required tie straps shall be doubled at
each edge of the opening and connected to a doubled full-height wall stud. When
openings exceed 12 feet in width, ties designed to prevent uplift shall be provided.
952
EXCEPTION: The opening width may be increased to 16 feet for garages and
carports accessory to Group R, Division 3 Occupancies when constructed in accor-
A. Approved column bases shall be a minimum 3/winch steel plate embedded
not less than 8 inches into the concrete footing and connected to a minimum
4 by 4 wood post with two %-inch-diameter through bolts.
B. Beams over openings shall be connected to minimum 4 by 4 wood posts be-
low with an approved 3/16-inch steel post cap with two 5/ 8-inch-diameter
through bolts to the posts and to the beams.
9. Ridge ties. Opposing rafters shall be aligned at the ridge and be connected at
the rafters with a tie strap in accordance with Table No. A-25-3.
(f) Masonry Veneer. Anchor ties shall be spaced so as to support not more than
11h square feet of wall area but not more than 12 inches on center vertically. The
materials and connection details shall comply with Chapter 30.
(g) Roof Sheathing. Solid roof sheathing shall be applied and shall consist of a
minimum l-inch-thick nominal lumber applied diagonally or a minimum 15hz-
inch-thick plywood or particleboard or other approved sheathing applied with the
long dimension perpendicular to supporting rafters. Sheathing shall be nailed to
roof framing in an approved manner. The end joints of plywood or particleboard
shall be staggered and shall occur over blocking, rafters or other supports.
(h) Gable-end Walls. The roof overhang at gabled ends shall not exceed 2 feet
unless an analysis showing that the required resistance to prevent uplift is pro-
vided.
Gable-end wall studs shall be continuous between points of lateral support
which are perpendicular to the plane of the wall.
Gable-end wall studs shall be attached with approved mechanical fasteners at
the top and bottom.
(i) Roof Covering. Roof coverings shall be approved and shall be installed and
fastened in accordance with Chapter 32 and with the manufacturer's instructions.
In areas with basic wind speeds of90 mph or greater strip asphalt shingles shall be
fastened with a minimum of six fasteners and hand sealed.
(j) Elevated Foundation. I. General. When approved, elevated foundations
supporting not more than one story and meeting the provisions of this section may
be used. A foundation investigation may be required by the building official.
2. Material. All exposed wood-framing members shall be treated wood. All
metal connectors and fasteners used in exposed locations shall be corrosion-resis-
tant or noncorrosive steel.
3. Wood piles. The spacing of wood piles shall not exceed 8 feet on center.
Square piles shall not be Jess than 10 inches and tapered piles shall have a tip of not
less than 8 inches. Ten-inch-square piles shall have a minimum embedment length
of I 0 feet and shall project not more than 8 feet above undisturbed ground surface.
Eight-inch taper piles shall have a minimum embedment length of 14 feet and shall
project not more than 7 feet above undisturbed ground surface.
953
4. Girders. Floor girders shall be solid sawn timber, built-up 2-inch-thick lum-
ber or trusses. Splices shall occur over wood piles. The floor girders shall span in
the direction parallel to the potential floodwater and wave action.
5. Connections. Wood piles may be notched to provide a shelf for supporting
the floor girders. The total notching shall not exceed 50 percent of the pile cross
section. Approved bolted connections with 1/ 4 -inch corrosion-resistant or noncor-
rosive steel plates and 3/ 4-inch-diameter bolts shall be provided. Each end of the
girder shall be connected to the piles using a minimum of two 3/ 4-inch-diameter
bolts.
TABLE NO. A-25-1-WALL SHEATHING AT EXTERIOR WALLS AND

INTERIOR MAIN CROSS-STUD PARTITIONS 1
EXPOSURE
BASIC WIND SPEED (mph) STORIES LEVEL2 B c D
80 I A A B
2 2 A A B
I c D D
3 3 A A B
2 c D D
I c D E
90 I A B B
2 2 A B B
I c D D
3 3 A B Not
2 c D pennitted
I D E
100 I A c c
2 2 A c c
I c D E
3 3 A Not Not
2 c pennitted pennitted
I D
110 I B c c
2 2 B c c
I D E E
1Sheathing types; exterior walls with sheathing at one face, interior main cross-stud parti-
tions with sheathing at each face. The values for sheathing are listed in order of increased
capacity. Sheathing with a capacity greater than required may be substituted for the
sheathing listed. Particleboard sheathing in accordance with Table No. 25-N-2 may be
substituted for sheathing Types A and B.
A. One-half-inch gypsum board or gypsum sheathing with 5d cooler nails at 7 inches or
3/R-inch gypsum lath and 1h-inch plaster.
B. One-half-inch gypsum board or gypsum sheathing with 5d cooler nails at 4 inches.
C. Expanded metal lath and 7/R-inch portland cement plaster.
D. Three-eighths-inch plywood or particleboard sheathing with 8d nails at 6 inches all
edges and 12 inches intennediate.
954
E. Three-eighths-inch plywood or particleboard sheathing with 8d nails at 4 inches all

edges and 12 inches intermediate.
The application of these sheathing materials shall comply with Section 4714 (e) and Table
No. 47-1 for Types A, Band C, and Section 2513 (a) and Table No. 25-K-1 or 25-K-2 for
Types D and E. All panel edges of Types D and E shall be backed with 2-inch nominal
or wider framing.
2Level refers to the space between the upper surface of any floor and upper surface of floor
next above. The topmost level shall be the space between upper surface of the topmost
floor and the ceiling or roof above. Wall sheathing at useable or unused under-floor space
shall be provided as required for the level directly above.
TABLE NO. A-25-2

ROOF AND FLOOR ANCHORAGE AT EXTERIOR WALLS
NUMBER OF NAILS1
Exposure
BASIC WIND SPEED
(mph) LOCATION2 B c D
80 roof to wall 6-8d 8-8d 8-lOd

floor to floor - 4-lOd 6-lOd
floor to foundation - 4-10d 4-lOd
90 roof to wall 8-8d 8-lOd 10-10d
floor to floor - 6-10d 8-10d
floor to foundation - 4-lOd 6-lOd
100 roof to wall 8-10d 10-lOd 12-10d
floor to floor 6-lOd 8-lOd 10-lOd
floor to foundation 4-lOd 6-lOd 8-lOd
110 roof to wall 10-10d 12-lOd 12-lOd
floor to floor 8-lOd 10-10d 10-10d
floor to foundation 6-lOd 8-lOd 8-lOd
1Number of common nails listed is total required for each tie strap. The tie straps shall be
spaced at 48 inches on center along the length of the wall. The number of nails on each
side of the roof or floor plate joints shall be equal. Nails shall be spaced to avoid splitting
of the wood. See Figure No. A-25-A for illustration of these tie straps.
2 For floor-to-foundation anchorage, see Section 2518 (e) 4.
TABLE NO. A-25-3

RIDGE TIE-STRAP NAILING1
NUMBER OF NAILS1
Exposure
BASIC WIND SPEED (mph) B c D
80 6-10d 8-lOd l0-10d

90 8-lOd 10-lOd 12-lOd
100 10-lOd 12-lOd l4-10d
110 12-lOd 14-10d 16-lOd
1Number of common nails listed is total required for each tie strap. The tie straps shall be
spaced at 48 inches on center along the length of the roof. The number of nails on each
side of the rafter/ridge joint shall be equal. Nails shall be spaced to avoid splitting of the
wood. See Figure No. A-25-A for illustration of these tie straps.
955
112 REQUIRED NAILS

EACH SIDE OF RIDGE.
SEE TABLE NO. A-25-3.
BLOCKING AND CEILING

JOIST, WHERE OCCURS,
NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.
RIDGE
ANGLE TIE STRAP AS REQUIRED

TO MAINTAIN REQUIRED
NAIL SPACING.
112 REQUIRED NAILS EACH

SIDE OF ROOF OR FLOOR PLATES,
TYPICAL. SEE TABLE NO. A-25-2.
NOTE: CORROSION-RESISTANT STEEL TIE

STRAP 11/a'' x 0.036" (No. 20 Gauge)
AT 4' -0" ON CENTER, TYPICAL.
FLOOR TO FLOOR
2-10d NAIL,
EACH SIDE
• '
.. . .
.
• 0
SLAB ON FOUNDATION
GRADE CRIPPLE
WALL
FIGURE NO. A-25-A-COMPLETE LOAD PATH DETAILS
956
112 REQUIRED
NAILING LISTED
IN TABLE NO.
A-25-2
GIRDER AT
ELEVATED
•• FOUNDATION
RAISED
FOUNDATION
FIGURE NO. A-25-A-COMPLETE LOAD PATH DETAIL5-(Continued)
957
NOTES
958
Chapter 26
PROTECTION OF RESIDENTIAL CONCRETE
EXPOSED TO FREEZING AND THAWING
General
Sec. 2628. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this appendix is to provide minimum
standards for the protection of residential concrete exposed to freezing and thaw-
ing conditions.
(b) Scope. The provisions of this appendix apply to concrete used in buildings
of Groups M and R Occupancies which are three stories or less in height.
(c) Special Provisions. Normal-weight aggregate concrete used in buildings of
Groups M and R Occupancies three stories or less in height which are subject to
deicer chemicals or freezing and thawing conditions as determined from Figure
No. A-26-1 shall comply with the requirements of Table No. A-26-A.
TABLE NO. A-26-A-MINIMUM SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH OF CONCRETE 1
MINIMUM
SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH 2 (f'c)
Weathering Potential'
TYPE OR LOCATION OF CONCRETE
CONSTRUCTION Negligible Moderate Severe
Basement walls and foundations not 2,500 2,500 2,5004
exposed to the weather
Basement slabs and interior slabs on 2,500 2,500 2,50o4
grade, except garage floor slabs
Basement walls, foundation walls, exteri- 2,500 3,000S 3,000S
or walls and other vertical concrete work
exposed to the weather
Porches, carport slabs and steps exposed 2,500 3,000S 3,50(}1
to the weather, and garage floor slabs
1Increases in compressive strength above those used in the design shall not cause implemen-
tation of the special inspection provisions of Section 306 (a) I.
2At 28 days, pounds per square inch.
1See Figure No. A-26-1 for weathering potential.
4Concrete in these locations which may be subject to freezing and thawing during construc-
tion shall be air-entrained concrete in accordance with Footnote No. 5.
5Concrete shall be air entrained. Total air content (percentage by volume of concrete) shall
not be less than 5 percent or more than 7 percent.
959
WEATHERING PROBABILITY MAP FOR CONCRETE
Negligible (Under 100*)

Weathering Regions (Weathering Index)
•Index in day-inches, multiply by 25.4 to convert to day-mm
FIGURE NO. A-26·1

Notes:
I. Lines defining areas are approximate only. Local conditions may be more or less severe
than indicated by the region classification.
2. Data needed to determine the weathering index for any locality may be found or
estimated from the tables of Local Climatological Data, published by the Weather
Bureau, U.S. Department of Commerce.
3. The weathering index for any locality is the product of the average annual number of
freezing-cycle days and the average annual winter rainfall in inches, defined as follows:
A freezing-cycle day is any day during which the air temperature passes either above
or below 32°F. The average number of freezing-cycle days in a year may be taken to equal
the difference between the mean number of days during which the minimum temperature
was 32°F. or below and the mean number of days during which the maximum temperature
was 32°F. or below.
Winter rainfall is the sum, in inches, of the mean monthly corrected precipitation
(rainfall) occurring during the period between and including the normal date of the first
killing frost in the fall and the normal date of the last killing frost in the spring. The winter
rainfall for any period is equal to the total precipitation less one tenth of the total fall of
snow, sleet and hail. Rainfall for a portion of a month is prorated.
The map indicates general areas of the United States in which concrete is subject to
severe, moderate and mild weathering. The severe weathering region has a weathering
index greater than 500. The moderate weathering region has a weathering index of 100 to
500. The mild weathering region has a weathering index of less than I 00.
960
Chapter 29
WATERPROOFING AND DAMPPROOFING
FOUNDATIONS
Scope
Sec. 2911. Walls, or portions thereof, retaining earth and enclosing interior
spaces and floors below grade shall be waterproofed or dampproofed according to
this appendix chapter.
EXCEPTION: Walls enclosing crawl spaces.
Groundwater Table Investigation

Sec. 2912. A subsurface soils investigation shall be made in accordance with
Section 2905 (c) 3 to determine the possibility of the groundwater table rising
above the proposed elevation of the floor or floors below grade. The building offi-
cial may require that this determination be made by an engineer or architect li-
censed by the state to practice as such.
EXCEPTIONS: I. When foundation waterproofing is provided.
2. When dampproofing is provided and the building official finds that there is sat-
is factory data from adjacent areas to demonstrate that groundwater has not been a
problem.
Dampproofing Required
Sec. 2913. Where the groundwater investigation required by Section 2912 indi-
cates that a hydrostatic pressure caused by the water table will not occur, floors and
walls shall be dampproofed and a subsoil drainage system shall be installed in ac-
cordance with this appendix chapter.
EXCEPTION: Wood foundation systems shall be constructed in accordance
with U.B.C. Standard No. 29-3.
Floor Dampprooflng
Sec. 2914. (a) General. Dampproofing materials shall be installed between the
floor and base materials required by Section 2916 (b).
EXCEPTION: Where a separate floor is provided above a concrete slab, the
dampproofing may be installed on top of the slab.
(b) Dampproofing Materials. Dampproofing installed beneath the slab shall
consist of not less than 6-mil polyethylene, or other approved methods or materi-
als. When permitted to be installed on top of the slab, dampproofing shall consist of
not less than 4-mil polyethylene, mopped-on bitumen or other approved methods
or materials. Joints in membranes shall be lapped and sealed in an approved man-
ner.
Wall Dampprooflng
Sec. 2915. (a) General. Dampproofing materials shall be installed on the exteri-
or surface of walls, and shall extend from a point 6 inches above grade, down to the
top of the spread portion of the footing.
961
(b) Surface Preparation. Prior to application of dampproofing materials on

concrete walls, fins or sharp projections that may pierce the membrane shall be
removed and all holes and recesses resulting from the removal of form ties shall be
sealed with a dry-pak mortar, bituminous material, or other approved methods or
materials.
(c) Dampproofing Materials. Wall dampproofing shall consist of a bitumi-
nous material, acrylic modified cement base coating, any of the materials per-
mitted for waterproofing in Section 2919 (d), or other approved methods or
materials. When such materials are not approved for direct application to unit ma-
sonry, the wall shall be parged on the exterior surface below grade with not less
than 3/x inch of portland cement mortar.
Other Dampproofing Requirements

Sec. 2916. (a) Subsoil Drainage System. When dampproofing is required, a
base material shall be installed under the floor and a drain shall be installed around
the foundation perimeter in accordance with this subsection.
EXCEPTION: When the finished ground level is below the floor level for more
than 25 percent of the perimeter ofthe building,the base material required by Section
2916 (b) need not be provided and the foundation drain required by Section 2916 (c)
need be provided only around that portion of the building where the ground level is
above the floor level.
(b) Base Material. Floors shall be placed over base material not less than 4 in-
ches in thickness consisting of gravel or crushed stone containing not more than I 0
percent material that passes a No. 4 sieve.
(c) Foundation Drain. The drain shall consist of gravel, crushed stone or drain
tile.
Gravel or crushed stone drains shall contain not more than I 0 percent material
that passes a No. 4 sieve. The drain shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond
the outside edge of the footing. The depth shall be such that the bottom of the drain
is not higher than the bottom of the base material under the floor, and the top of the
drain is not less than 6 inches above the spread portion of the footing. The top of the
drain shall be covered with an approved filter membrane material.
When drain tile or perforated pipe is used, the invert of the pipe or tile shall be
not higher than the floor elevation. The top of joints or the top of perforations shall
be protected with an approved filter membrane material. The pipe or tile shall be
placed on not less than 2 inches of gravel or crushed stone complying with this sec-
tion and covered with not less than 6 inches of the same material.
(d) Drainage Disposal. The floor base and foundation perimeter drain shall dis-
charge by gravity or mechanical means into an approved drainage system.
EXCEPTION: Where a site is located in well-drained gravel or sand-gravel
mixture soils, a dedicated drainage system need not be provided.
Waterproofing Required
Sec. 2917. Where the groundwater investigation required by Section 2912 indi-
cates that a hydrostatic pressure caused by the water table does exist, walls and
floors shall be waterproofed in accordance with this appendix chapter.
962
EXCEPTIONS: I. When the groundwater table can be lowered and maintained

at an elevation not less than 6 inches below the bottom of the lowest floor, dampproof-
ing provisions in accordance with Section 2913 may be used in lieu of waterproofing.
The design of the system to lower the groundwater table shall be based on accepted
principles of engineering which shall consider, but not necessarily be limited to, the
permeability of the soil, the rate at which water enters the drainage system, the rated
capacity of pumps, the head against which pumps are to pump, and the rated capacity
of the disposal area of the system.
2. Wood foundation systems constructed in accordance with U .B .C. Standard No.
29-3 are to be provided with additional moisture-control measures as specified in
Section 29.303.
Floor Waterproofing
Sec. 2918. (a) General. Floors required to be waterproofed shall be of concrete
designed to withstand anticipated hydrostatic pressure.
(b) Waterproofing Materials. Waterproofing of floors shall be accomplished
by placing under the slab a membrane of rubberized asphalt, polymer-modified as-
phalt, butyl rubber, neoprene, or not less than 6-mil polyvinyl chloride or polyeth-
ylene, or other approved materials capable of bridging nonstructural cracks. Joints
in the membrane shall be lapped not less than 6 inches and sealed in an approved
manner.
Wall Waterproofing
Sec. 2919. (a) General. Walls required to be waterproofed shall be of concrete
or masonry designed to withstand the anticipated hydrostatic pressure and other
lateral loads.
(b) Wall Preparation. Prior to the application of waterproofing materials on
concrete or masonry walls, the wall surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with
Section 2915 (b).
(c) Where Required. Waterproofing shall be applied from a point 12 inches
above the maximum elevation of the groundwater table down to the top of the
spread portion of the footing. The remainder of the wall located below grade shall
be dampproofed with materials in accordance with Section 2915 (c).
(d) Waterproofing Materials. Waterproofing shall consist of rubberized as-
phalt, polymer-modified asphalt, butyl rubber, or other approved materials capa-
ble of bridging non structural cracks. Joints in the membrane shall be lapped and
sealed in an approved manner.
(e) Joints. Joints in walls and floors, and between the wall and floor, and pene-
trations of the wall and floor shall be made watertight using approved methods and
materials.
Other Dampproofing and Waterproofing Requirements
Sec. 2920. (a) Placement of Backfill. The excavation outside the foundation
shall be backfilled with soil which is free of organic material, construction debris
and large rocks. The backfill shall be placed in lifts and compacted in a manner
which does not damage the waterproofing or dampproofing material or structural-
ly damage the wall.
963
(b) Site Grading. The ground immediately adjacent to the foundation shall be
sloped away from the building at not less than I inch per 12 inches for a minimum
distance of 6 feet measured perpendicular to the face of the wall or an approved
alternate method of diverting water away from the foundation shall be used. Con-
sideration shall be given to possible additional settlement of the backfill when es-
tablishing final ground level adjacent to the foundation.
(c) Erosion Protection. Where water impacts the ground from the edge of the
roof, downspout, scupper, valley, or other rainwater collection or diversion device,
provisions shall be used to prevent soil erosion and direct the water away from the
foundation.
964
Chapter 31
Division I
SITE ACCESSIBILITY
Exterior Routes of Travel
Sec. 3106. (a) General. When more than one building or facility is located on
a site, accessible routes of travel shall be provided between buildings and accessi-
ble site facilities. The accessible route of travel shall be the most practical direct
route between accessible building entrances, accessible site facilities and the ac-
cessible entrance to the site.
(b) Design and Construction. When accessibility is required by this section, it
shall be designed and constructed in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 31-1 or
other nationally recognized standards as approved by the building official.
(c) Signs. At every primary public entrance and at every major junction along or
leading to an accessible route of travel, there shall be a sign displaying the
international symbol of accessibility. Signs shall indicate the direction to
accessible building entrances and facilities.
Parking Facilities
Sec. 3107. (a) Accessible Parking Required. When parking lots or parking
garage facilities are provided, accessible parking spaces shall be provided in
accordance with Table No. A-31-A.
Accessible parking spaces shall be located on the shortest possible accessible
route of travel to an accessible building entrance. In facilities with multiple acces-
sible building entrances with adjacent parking, accessible parking spaces shall be
dispersed and located near the accessible entrances. When practical, the accessi-
ble route of travel shall not cross lanes for vehicular traffic. When crossing vehicle
traffic lanes is necessary, the route of travel shall be designated and marked as a
crosswalk.
(b) Design and Construction. When accessible parking spaces are required by
this section, they shall be designed and constructed in accordance with U.B.C.
Standard No. 31-1.
Accessible parking spaces shall be located on a surface with a slope not exceed-
ing I vertical in 50 horizontal.
(c) Signs. Every parking space required by this section shall be identified by a
sign, centered between 3 feet and 5 feet above the parking surface, at the head of
the parking space. The sign shall include the international symbol of accessibility
and state RESERVED, or equivalent language.
EXCEPTION: Parking garages and facilities of 5 or fewer total parking spaces
need not identify the required accessible parking space with a sign.
Passenger Drop-off and Loading Zones
Sec. 3108. (a) Location. When provided, passenger drop-off and loading zones
shall be located on an accessible route of travel.
965
(b) Design and Construction. Passenger drop-off and loading zones shall be
designed and constructed in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 31-1. Such
zones shall be located on a surface with a slope not exceeding I vertical in 50 hori-
zontal.
TABLE NO A·31·A-NUMBER OF ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES

TOTAL PARKING SPACES MINIMUM REQUIRED NUMBER
IN LOT OR GARAGE OF ACCESSIBLE SPACES
1-25 I
26-50 2
51-75 3
76-100 4
101-150 5
151-200 6
201-300 7
301-400 8
401-500 9
501-1,000 2% of total spaces
Over 1,000 20 spaces plus I space for every I00
spaces, or fraction thereof, over
1,000
Division II
ACCESSIBILITY FOR EXISTING BUILDINGS
Scope
Sec. 3109. The provisions of this appendix apply to renovation, alteration and
additions to existing buildings, including those identified as historic buildings.
This chapter identifies minimum standards for removing architectural barriers,
and providing and maintaining accessibility to existing buildings and their related
facilities.
Definitions
Sec. 3110. For the purposes of this chapter certain terms are defined as follows:
ALTERATION is any change, addition or modification in construction or oc-
cupancy.
ALTERATION, SUBSTANTIAL, is any alteration where the total cost of all
alterations (including, but not limited to, electrical, mechanical, plumbing and
structural changes) for a building or facility within any 12-month period amounts
to 50 percent or more of the assessed value.
966
(b) Design and Construction. Passenger drop-off and loading zones shall be
designed and constructed in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 31-1. Such
zones shall be located on a surface with a slope not exceeding I vertical in 50 hori-
zontal.
TABLE NO A-31-A-NUMBER OF ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES

TOTAL PARKING SPACES MINIMUM REQUIRED NUMBER
IN LOT OR GARAGE OF ACCESSIBLE SPACES
1-25 I
26-50 2
51-75 3
76-100 4
101-150 5
151-200 6
201-300 7
301-400 8
401-500 9
501-1,000 2% of total spaces
Over 1,000 20 spaces plus I space for every I 00
spaces, or fraction thereof, over
1,000
Division II
ACCESSIBILITY FOR EXISTING BUILDINGS
Scope
Sec. 3109. The provisions of this appendix apply to renovation, alteration and
additions to existing buildings, including those identified as historic buildings.
This chapter identifies minimum standards for removing architectural barriers,
and providing and maintaining accessibility to existing buildings and their related
facilities.
Definitions
Sec. 3110. For the purposes of this chapter certain terms are defined as follows:
ALTERATION is any change, addition or modification in construction or oc-
cupancy.
ALTERATION, SUBSTANTIAL, is any alteration where the total cost of all
alterations (including, but not limited to, electrical, mechanical, plumbing and
structural changes) for a building or facility within any 12-month period amounts
to 50 percent or more of the assessed value.
966
STRUCTURALLY IMPRACTICAL describes alterations that require

changes to load-bearing structural members other than conventional light-frame
construction.
Additions
Sec. 3111. (a) General. New additions may be made to existing buildings with-
out making the entire building comply, provided the new additions conform to the
provisions of Chapter 31 and applicable sections ofU.B.C. Standard No. 31-1. Un-
less structurally impractical, existing buildings to which additions are attached
shall comply with this section.
(b) Entrances. When a new addition to a building or facility does not have an
accessible entrance, then at least one entrance in the existing building or facility
(c) Accessible Route. When the only accessible entrance to the addition is lo-
cated in the existing building or facility, at least one accessible route of travel shall
be provided through the existing building or facility to all rooms, elements and
spaces in the new addition which are required to be accessible.
(d) Toilet and Bathing Facilities. When there are no toilet rooms and bathing
facilities in the addition and these facilities are provided in the existing building,
then at least one toilet and bathing facility in the existing building shall comply with
Chapter 31 or with Section 3112 (c) 6 of this appendix.
Alterations
Sec. 3112. (a) General. Unless it is structurally impractical, alterations to exist-
ing buildings or facilities shall comply with the following:
I. When existing elements, spaces, essential features or common areas are
altered, then each such altered element, space, feature or area shall comply with
the applicable provisions of Chapter 31 of this code and applicable provisions of
2. When an escalator or new stairway is planned or installed requiring major
structural changes, then a means of vertical transportation shall be installed in
accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 31-1.
3. Where alterations of single elements, when considered together, provide
access to an area of a building or facility, the entire area or space shall be accessible.
4. Alteration of an existing element, space or area of a building shall not impose
a requirement for greater accessibility than that which would be required for new
construction.
5. When the alteration work is limited solely to the electrical, mechanical or
plumbing systems and does not involve the alteration, structural or otherwise, of
any elements and spaces required to be accessible under these standards, this ap-
pendix and Chapter 31 do not apply.
(b) Substantial Alterations. Where substantial alteration occurs to a building
or facility, each element or space that is altered or added shall comply with the
applicable provisions of Chapter 31 of this code and U.B.C. Standard No. 31-1 or
967
this appendix, except when it is structurally impractical. The altered building or

facility shall contain:
1. At least one accessible route.
2. At least one accessible entrance, preferably the main entrance. When addi-
tional entrances are altered, they shall comply.
3. The following toilet facilities, whichever is greater:
A. At least one toilet facility for each sex in the altered building.
B. At least one toilet facility for each sex on each substantially altered floor,
where such facilities are provided.
(c) Modifications. I. General. The modifications set forth in this section may
be used for compliance when the required standard is structurally impractical or
when providing access to historic buildings.
2. Ramps. Curb ramps and ramps constructed on existing sites, or in existing
buildings or facilities, may have slopes and rises as specified for existing facilities
in U .B.C. Standard No. 31-1, when space limitations preclude the use of a slope of
I vertical in 12 horizontal or less.
3. Stairs. Full extension of stair handrails is not required when such extension
would be hazardous or impossible due to plan configuration. When an accessible
elevator is provided, existing stairs need not be made accessible.
4. Elevators. If a safety door edge is provided on existing automatic elevators,
the automatic door reopening devices as specified in U.B.C. Standard No. 31-1
may be omitted.
When existing hoistway shaft or structural elements prohibit strict compliance
with U.B.C. Standard No. 31-1, the minimum floor area dimensions may be re-
duced, but in no case shall they be less than 48 inches by 48 inches.
5. Doors. A. Clearance. When existing elements prohibit strict compliance
with the clearance requirements, a projection of 5/ 8 inch maximum is permitted for
the latch side door stop.
B. Thresholds. Existing thresholds measuring % inch high or less which are
modified to provide a beveled edge on each side may be retained.
6. Toilet rooms. A. Shared facilities. The addition of one unisex toilet facility
accessible to all occupants on the floor may be provided in lieu of making existing
toilet facilities accessible when it is structurally impractical to comply with this ap-
pendix and Chapter 31.
B. Stall size. In alterations when provision of a standard stall is structurally im-
practical or when Plumbing Code requirements prevent combining existing stalls
to provide an accessible stall, an alternate stall as described in U.B.C. Standard No.
31-1 may be provided in lieu of a standard stall.
7. Assembly areas. Seating shall adjoin an accessible route of travel that also
serves as a means of emergency egress or route to an area for evacuation assistance.
968
Historic Preservation
Sec. 3113. (a) General. Generally, the accessibility provisions of this appendix
shall be applied to historic buildings and facilities as defined in Section I 04 (f) of
this code.
The building official shall determine whether provisions required by this appen-
dix for accessible routes of travel (interior or exterior), ramps, entrances, toilets,
parking or signage would threaten or destroy the historic significance of the bui !d-
ing or facility.
If it is determined that any of the accessibility requirements listed above would
threaten or destroy the historic significance of a building or facility, the modifica-
tions of Section 3112 (c) for that feature may be utilized.
(b) Special Provisions. When removing architectural barriers or providing ac-
cessibility would threaten or destroy the historic significance of a building or facil-
ity, the following special provisions may be used:
I. At least one accessible route from a site access point to an accessible route
shall be provided.
2. At least one accessible entrance which is used by the public shall be provided.
EXCEPTION: When it is determined by the building official that no entrance
used by the public can comply, access at any entrance which is unlocked during busi-
ness hours may be used provided directional signs are located at the main entry. The
route of travel for the accessible entry shall not pass through hazardous areas, storage
rooms, closets, kitchens or spaces used for similar purposes.
3. Where toilet facilities are provided, at least one toilet facility complying with
Section 3111 or 3112 of this appendix shall be provided along an accessible route.
Such toilet facility shall be a shared facility available to both sexes.
4. Accessible routes from an accessible entrance to all publicly used spaces, on
at least the level of accessible entrance, shall be provided. Access shall be provided
to all levels of a building or facility when practical.
Appeal
Sec. 3114. (a) Request for Appeal. An appeal from the standards for accessibil-
ity for existing buildings may be filed with the building official when:
I. Existing structural elements or physical constraints of the site prevent full
compliance or would threaten or destroy the historical significance of a historic
building, or
2. The cost of compliance with this chapter would exceed 25 percent of the total
project cost, inclusive of the cost of eliminating barriers, within a 12-month period.
(b) Review. Review of appeal requests shall include consideration of alternative
methods which may provide partial access.
969
NOTES
970
Chapter 32
REROOFING
General
Sec. 3209. All reroofing shall conform to the applicable provisions of Chapter
32 of this code.
Roofing materials and methods of application shall comply with the U.B.C.
Standards or shall follow manufacturer's installation requirements when approved
Inspections
Sec. 3210. New roof coverings shall not be applied without first obtaining an in-
spection by the building official and written approval from the building official. A
final inspection and approval shall be obtained from the building official when the
reroofing is complete. The preroofing inspection shall pay particular attention to
evidence of accumulation of water. Where extensive ponding of water is apparent,
an analysis of the roof structure for compliance with Section 3207 shall be made
and corrective measures, such as relocation of roof drains or scuppers, res loping
of the roof or structural changes, shall be made.
An inspection report covering the above-listed topics prepared by a special in- ' '
spector may be accepted in lieu of the preinspection by the building official. !j!
Built-up Roofs
Sec. 3211. (a) General. Built-up roof covering shall be completely removed be-
fore applying the new roof covering. New roofing conforming to Section 3203
shall be applied except that when the new roof is to be applied directly to a nail able
deck which has residual bitumen adhering to it, a rosin-sized or other dry sheet
shall be installed prior to the installation of the new roof system.
EXCEPTION: The building official may allow existing roof coverings tore-
main when inspection or other evidence reveals all of the following:
A. That the roof structure is sufficient to sustain the weight of the additional dead
load of the roof covering.
B. There is not more than one existing roof covering on the structure.
C. The existing roof covering is securely attached to the deck.
D. The roof deck is structurally sound.
E. The existing insulation is not water soaked.
(b) Preparation of Roof and Application ofNew Covering. I. General. When
reroofing without removal of existing roof coverings is permitted by the building
official and when the conditions specified in the exceptions to Subsection (a) above
have been met, the reroofing shall be accomplished in accordance with this section.
2. Over gravel-surfaced roof coverings. Over gravel-surfaced roof coverings,
the roof shall be cleaned of all loose gravel and debris. All blisters, buckles and oth-
er irregularities shall be cut and made smooth and secure. Minimum %-inch insu-
lation board shall be nailed or securely cemented to the existing roofing with hot
971
bitumen over which a new roof complying with Section 3203 shall be installed.
When insulation board is to be attached with hot bitumen, the existing surface shall
be primed.
Alternatively, on nailable decks only, all existing gravel shall be spudded off to
provide a smooth surface. All blisters, buckles and other irregularities shall be cut
and made smooth and secure. A rosin-sized or other dry sheet shall be installed and
a base sheet as defined in the code shall be mechanically fastened in place. New
roofing conforming to Section 3203 shall be applied.
3. Over smooth or cap-sheet surface. Over smooth or cap-sheet surfaced roof
coverings, all blisters, buckles and other irregularities shall be cut and made
smooth and secure. In the case of non-nailable decks, a base sheet shall be spot
cemented to the existing roofing. New roofing conforming to Section 3203 shall be
applied.
In the case of nailable decks, a base sheet shall be nailed in place. In those cases
where residual materials may cause the new base sheet to adhere to the old roof, a
rosin-sized dry or other sheet shall be installed under the base sheet. New roofing
conforming to Section 3203 shall be applied.
(c) Construction Details. I. Flashings and edgings. Vent flashings, metal edg-
ings, drain outlets, metal counterflashing and collars shall be removed and cleaned.
Rusted metal shall be replaced. Metal shall be primed with cutback primer prior to
installation. Collars and flanges shall be flashed per the roofing manufacturer's in-
structions.
2. Intersecting walls. All concrete and masonry walls shall be completely
cleaned and primed to receive new flashing. All vertical walls, other than concrete
or masonry, shall have the surface finish material removed to a height of approxi-
mately 6 inches above the deck new roof surface to receive new roofing and flash-
ing. All rotted wood shall be replaced with new materials. Surface finish material
shall be replaced.
3. Parapets. Parapets of area separation walls shall have noncombustible
faces, including counterflashing and coping materials.
EXCEPTION: Combustible roofing may extend 7 inches above the roof sur-
face.
4. Cant strips. Where space permits, cant strips shall be installed at all angles.
All angles shall be flashed with at leasttwo more layers than in the new roof with an
exposed finish layer of inorganic felt or mineral surfaced cap sheet.
Shingles and Shakes

Sec. 3212. (a) General. Based on inspection of the existing roofing, the building
official may permit the recovering of existing shingle or shake roofing in accor-
dance with the provisions of this section.
(b) Asphalt Shingle Application. Not more than two overlays of asphalt
shingles shall be applied over an existing asphalt shingle roof.
Not more than two overlays of asphalt shingle roofing shall be applied over
wood shingles. Asphalt shingles applied over wood shingles shall have an overlay
underlayment of not less than Type 30 nonperforated felt.
972
On structures with a slope of2: 12 or greater and having no more than one exist-
ing built-up roof, one overlay of asphalt shingles may be applied, provided:
A. If the built-up roof has a gravel surface, the gravel must first be spudded off
to provide a smooth surface. All blisters and irregularities shall be cut and made
smooth and secure and an underlayment of not less than Type 30 n<m~~{-;y;·l{~'\!, ~"-t'•'<
shall be installed.
B. If the built-up roof has a smooth or cap-sheet surface, all blisters and irregu-
larities shall be cut and made smooth and secure and an underlayment of not less
than Type 30 nonperforated felt shall be installed.
(c) Wood Shake Application. Not more than one overlay of wood shakes shall
be applied over an existing asphalt shingle or wood shingle roof (with one layer of
18-inch, Type 30 nonperforated felt interlaced between each layer of shakes).
(d) Wood Shingle Application. Not more than one overlay of wood shingles
shall be applied over existing wood shingles.
(e) Application over Shakes. New roof covering shall not be applied over an
existing shake roof.
(f) Flashing and Edgings. Rusted or damaged flashing, vent caps and metal
edgings shall be replaced with new materials as necessary.
Tile
Sec. 3213. Tile roofs may be applied over existing roof coverings when ap-
proved by the building official. Such installations shall be substantiated by struc-
tural data indicating that the existing or modified roof-framing system is adequate
to support the additional tile roof covering.
Existing tile roofing shall be removed and cleaned. Damaged or rusted flashing
and cracked or broken tile shall be replaced. Tile shall be applied in accordance
with the requirements of Section 3208 (b) 5 (application of clay or concrete tile)
and in conformance with the original manufacturer's specifications.
EXCEPTION: When the original manufacturer's specifications are no longer
available, the tile may be reinstalled to match the prior installation except that clay
and terra-cotta hips and ridge tile shall be reinstalled with portland cement mortar.
Metal Roofing
Sec. 3214. Reroofing with metal roofing shall be in accordance with the original
manufacturer's specifications or when the original manufacturer's specifications
are no longer available as required by Section 3208 (b) 6.
Other Roofings
Sec. 3215. Reroofing with systems not covered elsewhere in Chapter 32 or this
appendix, such as, but not limited to, those that are fluid applied, foamed in place
or applied as nonasphaltic sheets, shall be done with materials and procedures ap-
proved by the building official.
973
NOTES
974
Chapter 35
Sound Transmission Control
.W. 3SI)l. (a) General. In Group R Occupancies, wall and floor-ceiling assem-
blies separating dwelling units or guest rooms from each other and from public
space such as interior corridors and service areas shall provide airborne sound in-
sulation for walls, and both airborne and impact sound insulation for floor-ceiling
assemblies.
The standards listed below are guideline standards and as such are not adopted as :~ll~!i!
part of this code (see Sections 6002 and 6003).
I. ASTM E 90 and E 413, Laboratory Determination of Airborne Sound Trans- \!_!
mission Class (STC)
2. ASTM E 492, Impact Sound Insulation.
3. ASTM E 336, Airborne Sound Insulation Field Test
(b) Airborne Sound Insulation. All such separating walls and floor-ceiling as-
semblies shall provide an airborne sound insulation equal to that required to meet a
sound transmission class (STC) of 50 (45 if field tested).
Penetrations or openings in construction assemblies for piping, electrical de-
vices, recessed cabinets, bathtubs, soffits, or heating, ventilating or exhaust ducts
shall be sealed, lined, insulated or otherwise treated to maintain the required rat-
ings.
Entrance doors from interior corridors together with their perimeter seals shall
have a laboratory-tested sound transmission class (STC) rating of not less than 26
and such perimeter seals shall be maintained in good operating condition.
(c) Impact Sound Insulation. All separating floor-ceiling assemblies between
separate units or guest rooms shall provide impact sound insulation equal to that
required to meet an impact insulation class (II C) of 50 (45 if field tested). Floor
coverings may be included in the assembly to obtain the required ratings and must
be retained as a permanent part of the assembly and may be replaced only by other
floor covering that provides the same sound insulation required above.
(d) Tested Assemblies. Field or laboratory tested wall or floor-ceiling designs
having an STC or IIC of 50 or more may be used without additional field testing
when, in the opinion of the building official, the tested design has not been compro-
mised by flanking paths. Tests may be required by the building official when evi-
dence of compromised separations is noted.
(e) Field Testing and Certification. Field testing, when required, shall be done
under the supervision of a professional acoustician who shall be experienced in the
field of acoustical testing and engineering and who shall forward certified test re-
sults to the building official that minimum sound insulation requirements stated
above have been met.
(f) Airborne Sound Insulation Field Tests. When required, airborne sound in-
sulation shall be determined according to the applicable Field Airborne Sound
975
Transmission Loss Test procedures. All sound transmitted from the source room to
the receiving room shall be considered to be transmitted through the test partition.
(g) Impact Sound Insulation Field Test. When required, impact sound insula-
tion shall be determined.
Sound Transmission Control Systems

Sec. 3502. Generic systems as listed in the Fire Resistance Design Manual,
Twelfth Edition, dated August 1988, as published by the Gypsum Association may
be accepted where a laboratory test indicates that the requirements of Section 350 I
are met by the system.
976
Chapter 38
BASEMENT PIPE INLETS
Basement Pipe Inlets

Sec. 3807. (a) General. All basement pipe inlets shall be installed in accordance
with requirements of this section.
(b) Where Required. Basement pipe inlets shall be installed in the first floor
of every store, warehouse or factory having basements.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Where the basement is equipped with an automatic sprinkler
system as specified in Section 3802.
2. Where the basement is used for the storage of permanent archives or valuables
such as safe deposit vaults or similar uses adversely affected by water.
(c) Location. The location of basement pipe inlets shall be as required by the
fire department.
(d) Detailed Requirements. All basement pipe inlets shall be of cast iron, steel,
brass or bronze with lids of cast brass or bronze.
The basement pipe inlet shall consist of a sleeve not less than 8 inches inside
diameter extending through the floor and terminating flush with or through the
basement ceiling and shall have a top flange recessed with an inside shoulder to
receive the lid. The top flange shall be installed flush with finish floor surface. The
lid shall be a solid casting and have a lift recessed in the top. This lid shall be
provided with a cast-in sign reading: FIRE DEPARTMENT ONLY, DO NOT
COVER. The lid shall be installed in such a manner to permit its easy removal from
the flange shoulder.
977
NOTES
978
Chapter 49
PATIO COVERS
Patio Covers Defined
Sec. 4901. Patio covers are one-story structures not exceeding 12 feet in height.
Enclosure walls may have any configuration, provided the open area of the longer
wall and one additional wall is equal to at least 65 percent of the area below a mini-
mum of 6 feet 8 inches of each wall, measured from the floor. Openings may be en-
closed with insect screening or plastic that is readily removable translucent or
transparent plastic not more than 0.125 inch in thickness.
Patio covers may be detached or attached to other buildings as accessories to
Group M; Group R, Division 3; or to single dwelling units in Group R, Division
I Occupancies. Patio covers shall be used only for recreational, outdoor living pur-
poses and not as carports, garages, storage rooms or habitable rooms.
Design Loads
Sec. 4902. Patio covers shall be designed and constructed to sustain, within the
stress limits of this code, all dead loads plus a minimum vertical live load of I 0
pounds per square foot except that snow loads shall be used where such snow loads
exceed this minimum. Such covers shall be designed to resist the minimum hori-
zontal wind loads set forth in this code, except that where less than 12 feet high, the
horizontal wind load shall be as indicated in Table No. 49-A. In addition, they shall
be designed to support a minimum wind uplift equal to the horizontal wind load
acting vertical upward normal to the roof surface, except that for structures not
more than 10 feet above grade the uplift may be three fourths of the horizontal wind
load. When enclosed with insect screening or plastic that is readily removable
translucent or transparent plastic not more than 0.125 inch in thickness, wind loads
shall be applied to the structure, assuming it is fully enclosed.
Light and Ventilation

Sec. 4903. Windows required for light and ventilation may open into a patio
structure conforming to Section 4901.
Footings
Sec. 4904. A patio cover may be supported on a concrete slab on grade without
footings, provided the slab is not less than 3 1h inches thick and further provided
that the columns do not support live and dead loads in excess of750 pounds per col-
umn.
TABLE NO 49-A-DESIGN WIND PRESSURES FOR PATIO COVERS 1
WIND SPEED-MAP AREAS (miles per hour)
HEIGHT ZONE
IN FEET 70 I 80 I 90 1 100 I 110 I 120 I 130
Less than 12 10 I 13 l 15 I 19 1 23 I 21 I 32
See F1gure No. 23-1 m Chapter 23 for basic wmd speeds.
979
NOTES
980
Chapter 51
ELEVATORS, DUMBWAITERS, ESCALATORS
AND MOVING WALKS
Purpose
Sec. 5107. The purpose of this appendix is to safeguard life, limb, property and
public welfare by establishing minimum requirements regulating the design, con-
struction, alteration, operation and maintenance of elevators, dumbwaiters, esca-
lators and moving walks and by establishing procedures by which these
requirements may be enforced.
Scope
Sec. 5108. This appendix shall apply to new and existing installations of eleva-
tors, dumbwaiters, escalators and moving walks, requiring permits therefore and
providing for the inspection and maintenance of such conveyances.
Definitions
Sec. 5109. For purposes of this appendix, certain terms are defined as follows:
ANSI CODE is the ANSI!ASME Al7.1 Code-1984 with Supplements
A 17.la-1985,A17.1 b-1985,A17.1c-1986,A17.ld-1986andA17.le-1987 Safety
Code for Elevators and Escalators, an American National Standard published by
the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
Permits-Certificates of Inspection
Sec. 5110. (a) Permits Required. It shall be unlawful to hereafter install any
new elevator, moving walk, escalator or dumbwaiter, or to make major alterations
to any existing elevator, dumbwaiter, escalator or moving walk as defined in Part
XII of the ANSI code, without having first obtained a permit for such installation
from the building official. Permits shall not be required for maintenance or minor
alterations.
(b) Certificates oflnspection Required. It shall be unlawful to operate any ele-
vator, dumbwaiter, escalator or moving walk without a current Certificate of In-
spection issued by the building official. Such certificate shall be issued upon
payment of prescribed fees and the presentation of a valid inspection report indi-
cating that the conveyance is safe and that the inspections and tests have been per-
formed in accordance with Part X of the ANSI code. Certificates shall not be issued
when the conveyance is posted as unsafe pursuant to Section 5114.
EXCEPTION: Certificates of Inspection shall not be required for conveyances
within a dwelling unit.
(c) Application for Permits. Application for a permit to install shall be made on
forms provided by the building official, and the permit shall be issued to an owner
upon payment of the permit fees specified in this section.
(d) Application for Certificates oflnspection. Application for a Certificate of
Inspection shall be made by the owner of an elevator, dumbwaiter, escalator or
981
moving walk. Applications shall be accompanied by an inspection report as de-

scribed in Section 5113. Fees for Certificates oflnspection shall be as specified in
this section.
(e) Fees. A fee for each permit or Certificate of Inspection shall be paid to the
building official as follows:
New Installations:
Passenger or freight elevator, escalator, moving walk:
Up to and including $40,000 of valuation-$55.00
Over $40,000 of valuation-$55.00 plus $1.00 for each $1,000 or fraction
thereof over $40,000
Dumbwaiter or private residence elevator:
Up to and including $10,000 ofvaluation-$15.00
Over $10,000 of valuation-$15.00 plus $1.00 for each $1,000 or fraction
thereof over $10,000
Major Alterations:
Fees for major alterations shall be as set forth in Table No. 3-A.
Installation fees include charges for the first year's annual inspection fee and
charges for electrical equipment on the conveyance side of the disconnect switch.
Annual Certificates of Inspection:
For each elevator $25.00
For each escalator or moving walk $15.00
For each commercial dumbwaiter $10.00
(Each escalator or moving walk unit powered by one motor shall be considered
as a separate escalator or moving walk.)
ANSI Code Adopted
Sec. 5111. All new elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators and moving walks and
major alterations to such conveyances and the installation thereof shall conform to
the requirements of the American National Standard Institute ANSI/ASME
A 17.1-1984 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, including Supplements
A 17.la-1985, A 17.1 b-1985, A 17.lc-1986, Al7.ld-1986 and Al7.le-1987, pub-
lished by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
Design
Sec. 5112. For detailed design, construction and installation requirements, see
Chapter 23 and the appropriate requirements of the ANSI code.
In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, elevators shall conform to Appendix F of the
ANSI code.
Requirements for Operation and Maintenance
Sec. 5113. (a) General. The owner shall be responsible for the safe operation
and maintenance of each elevator, dumbwaiter, escalator or moving walk installa-
tion and shall cause periodic inspections, tests and maintenance to be made on such
conveyances as required in this section.
982
(b) Periodic Inspections and Tests. Routine and periodic inspections and tests
shall be made as required by Part X of the ANSI code.
(c) Alterations, Repairs and Maintenance. Alterations, repairs and mainte-
nance shall be made as required by Part XII of the ANSI code.
(d) Inspection Costs. All costs of such inspections and tests shall be paid by the
owner.
(e) Inspection Reports. After each required inspection, a full and correct report
of such inspection shall be filed with the building official.
Unsafe Conditions
Sec. 5114. When an inspection reveals an unsafe condition, the inspector shall
immediately file with the owner and the building official a full and true report of
such inspection and such unsafe condition. If the building official finds that the un-
safe condition endangers human life, the building official shall cause to be placed
on such elevator, escalator or moving walk, in a conspicuous place, a notice stating
that such conveyance is unsafe. The owner shall see to it that such notice of unsafe
condition is legibly maintained where placed by the building official. The building
otficial shall also issue an order in writing to the owner requiring the repairs oral-
terations to be made to such conveyance which are necessary to render it safe and
may order the operation thereof discontinued until the repairs or alterations are
made or the unsafe conditions are removed. A posted notice of unsafe conditions
shall be removed only by the building official when satisfied that the unsafe condi-
tions have been corrected.
983
NOTES
984
Chapter 53
ENERGY CONSERVATION IN NEW
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
General
Sec. 5301. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this appendix is to regulate the design
and construction of the exterior envelopes and selection ofheating, ventilating and
air-conditioning, service water heating, electrical distribution and illuminating
systems and equipment required for the purpose of effective conservation of ener-
gy within a building or structure governed by this code.
(b) Model Energy Code Adopted. In order to comply with the purpose of
this appendix, buildings shall be designed to comply with the requirements of the
Model Energy Code promulgated jointly by the International Conference ofBuild-
ing Officials (ICBO), the Southern Building Code Congress International
(SBCCI), the Building Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCA),
and the National Conference of States on Building Codes and Standards
(NCSBCS), dated 1989. ?
985
NOTES
986
Chapter 55
MEMBRANE STRUCTURES
General
Sec. 5501. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this appendix is to establish minimum
standards of safety for the construction and use of air-supported, air-inflated and
membrane-covered cable or frame structures, collectively known as membrane
structures.
(b) Scope. The provisions of this appendix shall apply to membrane structures
erected for a period of 180 days or longer. Those erected for a shorter period of time
shall comply with applicable provisions of the Uniform Fire Code.
EXCEPTION: Water storage facilities, water clarifiers, water treatment plants,
sewer plants, aquaculture pond covers, residential and agricultural greenhouses and
similar facilities not used for human occupancy need meet only the requirements of
Section 5502 (b) and Section 5505.
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this appendix, certain terms are defined as
follows:
AIR-INFLATED STRUCTURE is a building where the shape of the structure
is maintained by air pressurization of cells or tubes to form a barrel vault over the
usable area. Occupants of such a structure do not occupy the pressurized area used
to support the structure.
AIR-SUPPORTED STRUCTURE is a building wherein the shape of the
structure is attained by air pressure and occupants of the structure are within the
elevated pressure area. Air-supported structures are of two basic types:
I Single skin-Where there is only the single outer skin and the air pressure
is directly against that skin.
2. Double skin-Similar to a single skin, but with an attached liner which is
separated from the outer skin and provides an air space which serves for insu-
lation, acoustic, aesthetic or similar purposes.
A cable-restrained air-supported structure is one in which the uplift is resisted by
cables or webbing which are anchored to either foundations or deadmen. Reinforc-
ing cable or webbing may be attached by various methods to the membrane or may
be an integral part of the membrane. This is not a cable-supported structure.
CABLE STRUCTURE is a nonpressurized structure in which a mast and cable
system provide support and tension to the membrane weather barrier and the mem-
brane imparts structural stability to the structure.
FRAME-COVERED STRUCTURE is a nonpressurized building wherein
the structure is composed of a rigid framework to support tensioned membrane
which provides the weather barrier.
MEMBRANE is a thin, flexible, impervious material capable of being sup-
ported by an air pressure of 1.5 inches of water column.
NONCOMBUSTIBLE MEMBRANE STRUCTURE is a membrane struc-
ture in which the membrane and all component parts of the structure are noncom-
bustible as defined by Section 415.
987
TENT is any structure, enclosure or shelter constructed of canvas or pliable ma-

terial supported by any manner except by air or the contents it protects.
Type of Construction and General Requirements
Sec. 5502. (a) General. Membrane structures shall be classified as Type V-N
construction, except that noncombustible membrane structures may be classified
as Type li-N construction.
EXCEPTION: A noncombustible membrane structure used exclusively as a
roof and located more than 25 feet above any floor, balcony or gallery is deemed
to comply with the roof construction requirements for Type I and Type II fire-resistant
construction, provided that such a structure complies with the requirements of this
section.
(b) Membrane Material. Membranes shall be either noncombustible as de-
fined by Section 415, or flame retardant conforming to U .B.C. Standard No. 55-1,
which is a part of this code (see Chapter 60).
EXCEPTION: Plastic less than 20-mil thickness used in greenhouses and for
aquaculture pond covers need not be flame retardant.
(c) Applicability of Other Provisions. Except as specifically otherwise re-
quired by this section, membrane structures shall meet all applicable provisions of
this code. Roof coverings shall be fire retardant.
EXCEPTION: Roof coverings for Group M, Division I Occupancies not ex-
ceeding I ,000 square feet in area need not be fire retardant.
(d) Allowable Floor Areas. The area of a membrane structure shall not exceed
the limits set forth in Table No. 5-C, except as provided in Section 506.
(e) Maximum Height. Membrane structures shall not exceed one story nor shall
they exceed the height limits in feet set forth in Table No. 5-D.
EXCEPTION: Noncombustible membrane structures serving as roof only.
Inflation Systems
Sec. 5503. (a) General. Air-supported and air-inflated structures shall be pro-
vided with primary and auxiliary inflation systems to meet the minimum require-
(b) Equipment Requirements. The inflation system shall consist of one or
more blowers and shall include provisions for automatic control to maintain the
required inflation pressures. The system shall be so designed as to prevent over-
pressurization of the system.
In addition to the primary inflation system, in buildings exceeding I ,500 square
feet in area, there shall be provided an auxiliary inflation system with sufficient ca-
pacity to maintain the inflation of the structure in case of primary system failure.
The auxiliary inflation system shall operate automatically if there is a loss of in-
ternal pressure or should the primary blower system become inoperative.
Blower equipment shall meet the following requirements:
I. Blowers shall be powered by continuous rated motors at the maximum power
required for any flow condition as required by the structural design.
988
2. Blowers shall be provided with inlet screens, belt guards and other protective
devices as may be required by the building official to provide protection from inju-
ry.
3. Blowers shall be housed within a weather-protecting structure.
4. Blowers shall be equipped with back draft check dampers to minimize air
loss when inoperative.
5. Blower inlets shall be located to provide protection from air contamination.
Location of inlets shall be approved by the building official.
(c) Emergency Power. Whenever an auxiliary inflation system is required, an
approved standby power-generating system shall be provided. The system shall be
equipped with a suitable means for automatically starting the generator set upon
failure of the normal electrical service and for automatic transfer and operation of
all the required electrical functions at full power within 60 seconds of such normal
service failure. Standby power shall be capable of operating independently for a
minimum of four hours.
Section Provisions
Sec. 5504. A system capable of supporting the membrane in the event of defla-
tion shall be provided in all air-supported and air-inflated structures having an oc-
cupant load of more than 50 or when covering a swimming pool regardless of
occupant load. Such system shall maintain the membrane at least 7 feet above the
floor, seating area or surface of the water.
EXCEPTION: Membrane structures used as a roof for Type I or Type II fire-
resistant construction must be maintained not less than 25 feet above floor or seating
areas.
Engineering Design
Sec. 5505. All membrane structures shall be structurally designed in accordance
with criteria approved by the building official and developed by an engineer or ar-
chitect licensed by the state to practice as such.
989
NOTES
990
Chapter 57
REGULATIONS GOVERNING FALLOUT
SHELTERS
Purpose
Sec. 5701. The purpose of this appendix is to establish minimum criteria which
must be met before a building or building space can be constructed, occupied, used
or designated a fallout shelter.
Scope
Sec. 5702. The scope of this appendix extends to building spaces designated for
use as fallout shelters, including periods of drill and instruction for this purpose.
Definitions
Sec. 5703. FALLOUT SHELTER is any room, structure or space designated
as such and providing its occupants with protection at a minimum protection factor
of 40 from gamma radiation from fallout from a nuclear explosion as determined
by a qualified fallout shelter analyst certified by the Office of Civil Defense. Area
used for storage of shelter supplies need not have a protection factor of 40.
DUAL-USE FALLOUT SHELTER is a fallout shelter having a normal, rou-
tine use and occupancy as well as an emergency use as a fallout shelter.
SINGLE-PURPOSE FALLOUT SHELTER is a fallout shelter having no use
or occupancy except as a fallout shelter.
PROTECTION FACTOR is a factor used to express the relation between
the amount of fallout gamma radiation that would be received by an unprotected
person and the amount that would be received by one in a shelter.
UNIT OF EGRESS WIDTH is 22 inches.
Occupancy Requirements
Sec. 5704. (a) General. Nothing in these regulations shall be construed as
preventing the dual use or multiple use of normal occupancy space as fallout
shelter space, providing the minimum requirements for each use are met.
(b) Mixed Occupancy. The occupancy classification shall be determined by
the normal use of the building. When a normal-use space is designed to have an
emergency use as a fallout shelter in addition to the normal use, the most restrictive
requirements for all such uses shall be met.
(c) Occupancy Separation. No occupancy separation is required between that
portion designated as a fallout shelter and the remainder of the building.
(d) Space and Ventilation. A minimum of 10 square feet of net floor area
shall be provided per shelter occupant. Partitions, columns and area for storage of
federal shelter supplies also may be included in net area. A minimum of 65 cubic
991
feet of volume shall be provided per shelter occupant. A minimum of3 cubic feet of
fresh air per minute per person shall be provided.
In addition, the shelter shall have a ventilating rate sufficient to maintain a daily
average effective temperature of not more than 82°F. for at least 90 percent of the
days of the year.
(e) Illumination. No special lighting levels are required.
(f) Hazards. Hazardous utility lines such as steam, gas and oil shall not be
located in or near the shelter unless provision is made to control such lines by
valving or other approved means.
Exits
Sec. 5705. There shall be no fewer than two widely spaced exits from a fallout
shelter, leading directly to other spaces of the building or outdoors. Exits from the
fallout shelter shall aggregate at least one unit of egress width for every 200 shelter
occupants. In no case shall a single exit be Jess than 24 inches wide.
Flame-spread Index of Interior Surfaces

Sec. 5706. Interior surfaces of single-purpose fallout shelters shall have a flame-
spread index not exceeding 200.
Minimum Design Loads

Sec. 5707. (a) Dual-use Fallout Shelters. In the case of dual-use fallout shel-
ters, design live load required for the normal use shall govern, except that concen-
trated loads shall be considered.
(b) Single-purpose Fallout Shelters. Minimum live loads for floor design in
single-purpose fallout shelters shall be 40 pounds per square foot except that con-
centrated loads shall be considered.
Sanitation
Sec. 5708. Toilets, either flush-type operating from the normal water supply
system, or chemical or other types, shall be provided on the basis of one toilet per
50 fallout shelter occupants. Fifty percent ofthe toilets may be provided outside the
fallout shelter area. Empty water containers may be considered as fulfilling this
requirement.
992
Chapter 70
EXCAVATION AND GRADING
Purpose
Sec. 7001. The purpose of this appendix is to safeguard life, limb, \)I0\)1!-tt'J ·~mi
the public welfare by regulating grading on private property.
Scope
Sec. 7002. This appendix sets forth rules and regulations to control excavation,
grading and earthwork construction, including fills and embankments; establishes
the administrative procedure for issuance of permits; and provides for approval of
plans and inspection of grading construction.
The standards listed below are guideline standards and as such are not adopted as ·,:,!,:,!,!
part of this code (see Sections 6002 and 6003).

I. Testing
A. ASTM D 1557, Moisture-density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggre-
t:
:::f.
grate Mixtures
B. ASTM D 1556, In Place Density of Soils by the Sand-Cone Method
~· ~~:~~;:~;:~;~;;~E~:&:.;:Rf::~;;;,2::;~ I
Soils by Nuclear Methods
Permits Required
Sec. 7003. (a) Permits Required. Except as specified in Subsection (b) of this !!!!
section, no person shall do any grading without first having obtained a grading per- i:i:
mi;:;::~:~~~=~:~~~i~!i::;.;;,;,•~=:~.~~: ',::,::.w::,;oon-1
tained area if there is no danger to private or public property.
2. An excavation below finished grade for basements and footings of a build-
ing, retaining wall or other structure authorized by a valid building permit. This
shall not exempt any fill made with the material from such excavation or exempt
any excavation having an unsupported height greater than 5 feet after the comple-
tion of such structure.
3. Cemetery graves.
4. Refuse disposal sites controlled by other regulations.
5. Excavations for wells or tunnels or utilities.
6. Mining, quarrying, excavating, processing, stockpiling of rock, sand, gravel,
aggregate or clay where established and provided for by law, provided such opera-
tions do not affect the lateral support or increase the stresses in or pressure upon any
adjacent or contiguous property.
993
7. Exploratory excavations under the direction of soil engineers or engineering

geologists.
8. An excavation which (I) is less than 2 feet in depth, or (2) which does not
create a cut slope greater than 5 feet in height and steeper than 11h horizontal to I
vertical.
9. A fill less than I foot in depth and placed on natural terrain with a slope flatter
than 5 horizontal to 1 vertical, or less than 3 feet in depth, not intended to support
structures, which does not exceed 50 cubic yards on any one lot and does not ob-
struct a drainage course.
Exemption from the permit requirements of this chapter shall not be deemed to
::;! grant authorization for any work to be done in any manner in violation ofthe provi-
: : : sions of this chapter or any other laws or ordinances of this jurisdiction.
Hazards
Sec. 7004. Whenever the building official determines that any existing excava-
tion or embankment or fill on private property has become a hazard to life and limb,
or endangers property, or adversely affects the safety, use or stability of a public
way or drainage channel, the owner of the property upon which the excavation or
fill is located, or other person or agent in control of said property, upon receipt of
notice in writing from the building official, shall within the period specified therein
repair or eliminate such excavation or embankment so as to eliminate the hazard
and be in conformance with the requirements of this code.
Definitions
Sec. 7005. For the purposes of this appendix the definitions listed hereunder
shall be construed as specified in this section.
APPROVAL shall mean the proposed work or completed work conforms to this
chapter in the opinion of the building official.
AS-GRADED is the extent of surface conditions on completion of grading.
BEDROCK is in-place solid rock.
BENCH is a relatively level step excavated into earth material on which fill is to
be placed.
BORROW is earth material acquired from an off-site location for use in grading
on a site.
CIVIL ENGINEER is a professional engineerregistered in the state to practice
in the field of civil works.
CIVIL ENGINEERING is the application of the knowledge of the forces of
nature, principles of mechanics and the properties of materials to the evaluation,
design and construction of civil works.
COMPACTION is the densification of a fill by mechanical means.
EARTH MATERIAL is any rock, natural soil or fill or any combination
thereof.
ENGINEERING GEOLOGIST is a geologist experienced and knowledge-
able in engineering geology.
994
ENGINEERING GEOLOGY is the application of geologic knowledge and

principles in the investigation and evaluation of naturally occurring rock and soil
for use in the design of civil works.
EROSION is the wearing away of the ground surface as a result of the move-
ment of wind, water or ice.
EXCAVATION is the mechanical removal of earth material.
FILL is a deposit of earth material placed by artificial means.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. See "soils engineer."
GRADE is the vertical location of the ground surface.
Existing Grade is the grade prior to grading.
Rough Grade is the stage at which the grade approximately conforms to the
approved plan.
Finish Grade is the final grade ofthe site which conforms to the approved plan.
GRADING is any excavating or filling or combination thereof.
KEY is a designed compacted fill placed in a trench excavated in earth material
beneath the toe of a proposed fill slope.
PROFESSIONAL INSPECTION is the inspection required by this code to be : :
performed by the civil engineer, soils engineer or engineering geologist. Such in- J
spections include that performed by persons supervised by such engineers or geol- Ij
ogists and shall be sufficient to form an opinion relating to the conduct of the work. :::;
SITE is any lot or parcel of land or contiguous combination thereof, under the
same ownership, where grading is performed or permitted.
SLOPE is an inclined ground surface the inclination of which is expressed as a
ratio of horizontal distance to vertical distance.
SOIL is naturally occurring superficial deposits overlying bedrock.
SOILS ENGINEER (GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER) is an engineer expe-
rienced and knowledgeable in the practice of soils engineering (geotechnical) en-
gineering.
SOILS ENGINEERING (GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING) is the
application of the principles of soils mechanics in the investigation, evaluation and
design of civil works involving the use of earth materials and the inspection or test-
ing of the construction thereof.
TERRACE is a relatively level step constructed in the face of a graded slope
surface for drainage and maintenance purposes.
Grading Permit Requirements ···
Sec. 7006. (a) Permits Required. Except as exempted in Section 7003 of this Iii
code, no person shall do any grading without first obtaining a grading permit from ' '"
the building official. A separate permit shall be obtained for each site, and may :)')'
cover both excavations and fills.
(b) Application. The provisions of Section 302 (a) are applicable to grading and :::!
in addition the application shall state the estimated quantities of work involved. .!.!.1:.!
(c) Grading Designation. Grading in excess of 5,000 cubic yards shall be per-
formed in accordance with the approved grading plan prepared by a civil engineer, jojl
995
(! and shall be designated as "engineered grading." Grading involving less than 5,000
cubic yards shall be designated "regular grading" unless the permittee chooses to
have the grading performed as engineered grading, or the building otficial deter-
mines that special conditions or unusual hazards exist, in which case grading shall
conform to the requirements for engineered grading.
(d) Engineered Grading Requirements. Application for a grading permit shall
be accompanied by two sets of plans and specifications, and supporting data con-
sisting of a soils engineering report and engineering geology report. The plans and
specifications shall be prepared and signed by an individual licensed by the state to
prepare such plans or specifications when required by the building official.
Specifications shall contain information covering construction and material re-
quirements.
Plans shall be drawn to scale upon substantial paper or cloth and shall be of suf-
ficient clarity to indicate the nature and extent of the work proposed and show in
detail that they will conform to the provisions of this code and all relevant laws,
ordinances, rules and regulations. The first sheet of each set of plans shall give lo-
cation of the work, the name and address of the owner and the person by whom they
were prepared.
The plans shall include the following information:
.:·: I. General vicinity of the proposed site.
.•.1.:,· · 2. Property limits and accurate contours of existing ground and details of ter-
rain and area drainage .
·········! 3. Limiting dimensions, elevations or finish contours to be achieved by the
.
grading, and proposed drainage channels and related construction.
:.:,: 4. Detailed plans of all surface and subsurface drainage devices, walls, crib-
·:·: bing, dams and other protective devices to be constructed with, or as a part of, the
proposed work together with a map showing the drainage area and the estimated
!.•'.•.•.:.•
,·.......
runoff of the area served by any drains.

::• 5. Location of any buildings or structures on the property where the work is to
: : : be performed and the location of any buildings or structures on land of adjacent
::~;
owners which are within 15 feet of the property or which may be affected by the
' ' ' proposed grading operations.
6. Recommendations included in the soils engineering report and the engineer-
ii!i ing geology report shall be incorporated in the grading plans or specifications .
•: : When approved by the building official, specific recommendations contained in
·:.•i•:.· !·:•.:... ~~: ~~i~:~~f~;~:~~g~:~~~;~~~~h:Ye~;;;~~~~~ geology report, which are applica-

7. The dates of the soils engineering and engineering geology reports together
with the names, addresses and phone numbers of the firms or individuals who pre-
if; pared the reports.
:;: (e) Soils Engineering Report. The soils engineering report required by Sub-
section (d) shall include data regarding the nature, distribution and strength of
!··'·:·!:.:
.•
·
existing soils, conclusions and recommendations for grading procedures and de-
sign criteria for corrective measures, including buttress fills, when necessary, and
996
opinion on adequacy for the intended use of sites to be developed by the proposed ~;;
grading as affected by soils engineering factors, including the stability of slopes. ill
(f) Engineering Geology Report. The engineering geology report required by ;;;;
Subsection (d) shall include an adequate description of the geology of the site, con-
elusions and recommendations regarding the effect of geologic conditions on the
i,
, ;,
proposed development, and opinion on the adequacy forthe intended use of sites to :;';:
be developed by the proposed grading, as affected by geologic factors. !@
j:j~.
(g) Regular Grading Requirements. Each application for a grading permit t
shall be accompanied by a plan in sufficient clarity to indicate the nature and extent ;:;:;
of the work. The plans shall give the location of the work, the name of the owner ~ lj:
and the name of the person who prepared the plan. The plan shall include the fol- ~.;J.;
lowing information:
I. General vicinity of the proposed site.
2. Limiting dimensions and depth of cut and fill.
3. Location of any buildings or structures where work is to be performed, and =:=·=
the location of any buildings or structures within 15 feet of the proposed grading. I
(h) Issuance. The provisions of Section 303 are applicable to grading permits. II:!
The building official may require that grading operations and project designs be
modified if delays occur which incur weather-generated problems not considered ;!if!
at the time the permit was issued.
The building official may require professional inspection and testing by the soils ~~
engineer. When the building official has cause to believe that geologic factors may
be involved, the grading will be required to conform to engineered grading.
Grading Fees
Sec. 7007. (a) General. Fees shall be assessed in accordance with the provisions
of this section or shall be as set forth in the fee schedule adopted by the jurisdiction.
(b) Plan Review Fees. When a plan or other data are required to be submitted, a
plan review fee shall be paid at the time of submitting plans and specifications for
review. Said plan review fee shall be as set forth in Table No. 70-A. Separate plan
review fees shall apply to retaining walls or major drainage structures as required
elsewhere in this code. For excavation and fill on the same site, the fee shall be
based on the volume of excavation or fill, whichever is greater.
(c) Grading Permit Fees. A fee for each grading permit shall be paid to the
building official as set forth in Table No. 70-B. Separate permits and fees shall ap-
ply to retaining walls or major drainage structures as required elsewhere in this
code. There shall be no separate charge for standard terrace drains and similar faci-
lities.
997
TABLE NO. 70-A-GRADING PLAN REVIEW FEES 1

50 cubic yards or less . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No fee
51 to IOOcubicyards ........................................ $15.00
101 to 1,000 cubic yards ...................................... 22.51;)
1,001 to 10,000 cubic yards .................................... 30.00
I 0,00 I to 100,000 cubic yards-$30.00 for the first 10,000 cubic yards, plus
$15.00 for each additional I 0,000 yards or fraction thereof.
100,001 to 200,000 cubic yards-$165.00 for the first 100,000 cubic yards, plus
$9.00 for each additional 10,000 cubic yards or fraction thereof.
200,001 cubic yards or more-$255.00 for the first 200,000 cubic yards, plus
Other Fees:
Additional plan review required by changes, additions
or revisions to approved plans ......................... $30.00 per hour*
*Or the total hourly cost to the jurisdiction, whichever is the greatest. This cost shall include
supervision, overhead, equipment, hourly wages and fringe benefits of the employees
involved.
TABLE NO. 70-B-GRADING PERMIT FEES1

50 cubic yards or less . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $15.00
51 to I00 cubic yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.50
I0 I to I ,000 cubic yards-$22.50 for the first I 00 cubic yards plus $10.50 for each
additional I 00 cubic yards or fraction thereof.
I ,00 I to I0,000 cubic yards-$117 .00 for the first 1,000 cubic yards, plus $9.00 for
each additional I ,000 cubic yards or fraction thereof.
I 0,001 to 100,000 cubic yards-$198.00 for the first 10,000 cubic yards, plus
$40.50 for each additional I 0,000 cubic yards or fraction thereof.
100,001 cubic yards or more-$562.50 for the first 100,000 cubic yards, plus
Other Inspections and Fees:
I. Inspections outside of normal business hours . . . . . . . . $30.00 per hour2
(minimum charge-two hours)
2. Reinspection fees assessed under provisions of
Section 305 (g) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $30.00 per hour2
3. Inspections for which no fee is specifically indicated . $30.00 per hour2
1The fee for a grading permit authorizing additional work to that under a valid permit shall
be the difference between the fee paid for the original permit and the fee shown for the
entire project.
20r the total hourly cost to the jurisdiction, whichever is the greatest. This cost shall include
supervision, overhead, equipment, hourly wages and fringe benefits of the employees
involved.
998
Bonds
Sec. 7008. The building official may require bonds in such form and amounts
as may be deemed necessary to assure that the work, if not completed in accordance
with the approved plans and specifications, will be corrected to eliminate hazard-
ous conditions.
In lieu of a surety bond the applicant may file a cash bond or instrument of credit
with the building official in an amount equal to that which would be required in the
surety bond.
Cuts
Sec. 7009. (a) General. Unless otherwise recommended in the approved soils
engineering or engineering geology report, cuts shall conform to the provisions of
this section.
In the absence of an approved soils engineering report, these provisions may be
waived for minor cuts not intended to support structures.
(b) Slope. The slope of cut surfaces shall be no steeper than is safe for the
intended use and shall be no steeper than 2 horizontal to I vertical unless the
permittee furnishes a soils engineering or an engineering geology report, or both,
stating that the site has been investigated and giving an opinion that a cut at a
steeper slope will be stable and not create a hazard to public or private property.
Fills
:::~:
Sec. 7010. (a) General. Unless otherwise recommended in the approved soils ::
engineering report, fills shall conform to the provisions of this section.
In the absence of an approved soils engineering report, these provisions may be !;!;
waived for minor fills not intended to support structures. t!
(b) Preparation of Ground. Fill slopes shall not be constructed on natural f
slopes steeper than 2: I. The ground surface shall be prepared to receive fill by re- r
moving vegetation, noncomplying fill, topsoil and other unsuitable materials scar- ,,
ifying to provide a bond with the new fill and, where slopes are steeper than 5: I and it
the height is greater than 5 feet, by benching into sound bedrock or other competent !1i
:::::
material as determined by the soils engineer. The bench under the toe of a fill on a '''
slope steeper than 5: I shall be at least I 0 feet wide. The area beyond the toe of fill ';!;
shall be sloped for sheet overflow ora paved drain shall be provided. When fill is to :::
i1t1t
be placed over a cut, the bench under the toe of fill shall be at least I 0 feet wide but , .,
the cut shall be made before placing the fill and acceptance by the soils engineer or !\~·
engineering geologist or both as a suitable foundation for fill.
t~
(c) Fill Material. Detrimental amounts of organic material shall not be per- ::;
mitted in fills. Except as permitted by the building official, no rock or similar irre- : ,:
ducible material with a maximum dimension greater than 12 inches shall be buried r
or placed in fills.
EXCEPTION: The building official may permit placement of larger rock when :J
the soils engineer properly devises a method of placement, and continuously inspects it
its placement and approves the fill stability. The following conditions shall also ap- :j:;:
ply:
999
A. Prior to issuance of the grading permit, potential rock disposal areas shall be
delineated on the grading plan.
B. Rock sizes greater than 12 inches in maximum dimension shall be 10 feet or
more below grade, measured vertically.
C. Rocks shall be placed so as to assure filling of all voids with well-graded soil.
(d) Compaction. All fills shall be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent of
maximum density.
(e) Slope. The slope of fill surfaces shall be no steeper than is safe for the in-
tended use. Fill slopes shall be no steeper than 2 horizontal to I vertical.
Setbacks
Sec. 7011. (a) General. Cut and fill slopes shall be set back from site boundaries
in accordance with this section. Setback dimensions shall be horizontal distances
measured perpendicular to the site boundary. Setback dimensions shall be as
shown in Figure No. 70-1.
(b) Top of Cut Slope. The top of cut slopes shall not be made nearer to a site
boundary line than one fifth of the vertical height of cut with a minimum of 2 feet
and a maximum of I 0 feet. The setback may need to be increased for any required
interceptor drains.
(c) Toe of Fill Slope. The toe of fill slope shall be made not nearer to the site
boundary line than one half the height of the slope with a minimum of2 feet and a
maximum of 20 feet. Where a fill slope is to be located near the site boundary and
the adjacent off-site property is developed, special precautions shall be incorpo-
rated in the work as the building official deems necessary to protect the adjoining
property from damage as a result of such grading. These precautions may include
but are not limited to:
I. Additional setbacks.
2. Provision for retaining or slough walls.
3. Mechanical or chemical treatment of the fill slope surface to minimize ero-
sion.
4. Provisions for the control of surface waters.
(d) Modification of Slope Location. The building official may approve alter-
nate setbacks. The building official may require an investigation and recommenda-
tion by a qualified engineer or engineering geologist to demonstrate that the intent
of this section has been satisfied.
Drainage and Terracing

Sec. 7012. (a) General. Unless otherwise indicated on the approved grading
plan, drainage facilities and terracing shall conform to the provisions of this section
for cut or fill slopes steeper than 3 horizontal to I vertical.
(b) Terrace. Terraces at least 6 feet in width shall be established at not more than
30-foot vertical intervals on all cut or fill slopes to control surface drainage and
debris except that where only one terrace is required, it shall be at midheight. For
cut or fill slopes greater than 60 feet and up to 120 feet in vertical height, one terrace
1000
at approximately midheight shall be 12 feet in width. Terrace widths and spacing

for cut and fill slopes greater than 120 feet in height shall be designed by the civil
engineer and approved by the building official. Suitable access shall be provided to
permit proper cleaning and maintenance.
Swales or ditches on terraces shall have a minimum gradient of 5 percent and
must be paved with reinforced concrete not less than 3 inches in thickness or
an approved equal paving. They shall have a minimum depth at the deepest point of
I foot and a minimum paved width of 5 feet.
A single run of swale or ditch shall not collect runoff from a tributary area
exceeding 13,500 square feet (projected) without discharging into a down drain.
(c) Subsurface Drainage. Cut and fill slopes shall be provided with subsurface
drainage as necessary for stability.
(d) Disposal. All drainage facilities shall be designed to carry waters to the near-
est practicable drainage way approved by the building official or other appropriate
jurisdiction as a safe place to deposit such waters. Erosion of ground in the area
of discharge shall be prevented by installation of nonerosive downdrains or other
devices.
Building pads shall have a drainage gradient of 2 percent toward approved
drainage facilities, unless waived by the building official.
EXCEPTION: The gradient from the building pad may be I percent if all of the
following conditions exist throughout the permit area:
A. No proposed fills are greater than 10 feet in maximum depth.
B. No proposed finish cut or fill slope faces have a vertical height in excess of
10 feet.
C. No existing slope faces, which have a slope face steeper than I 0 horizontal to
I vertical, have a vertical height in excess of 10 feet.
(e) Interceptor Drains. Paved interceptor drains shall be installed along the top
of all cut slopes where the tributary drainage area above slopes toward the cut and
has a drainage path greater than 40 feet measured horizontally. Interceptor drains
shall be paved with a minimum of 3 inches of concrete or gunite and reinforced.
They shall have a minimum depth of 12 inches and a minimum paved width of
30 inches measured horizontally across the drain. The slope of drain shall be
Erosion Control
Sec. 7013. (a) Slopes. The faces of cut and fill slopes shall be prepared and
maintained to control against erosion. This control may consist of effective plant-
ing. The protection for the slopes shall be installed as soon as practicable and prior
to calling for final approval. Where cut slopes are not subject to erosion due to the
erosion-
resistant character of the materials, such protection may be omitted.
(b) Other Devices. Where necessary, check dams, cribbing, riprap or other
devices or methods shall be employed to control erosion and provide safety.
1001
!i'' Grading Inspection

I:, Sec. 7014. (a) General. Grading operations for which a permit is required shall
11
;:;' be subject to inspection by the building official. Professional inspection of grading
\~ operations shall be provided by the civil engineer, soils engineer and the engineer-
, , ing geologist retained to provide such services in accordance with Section 7014 (e)
i; for engineered grading and as required by the building official for regular grading .
.,J (b) Civil Engineer. The civil engineer shall provide professional inspection
!J within such engineer's area of technical specialty, which shall consist of observa-
:m lion and review as to the establishment of line, grade and surface drainage of the
f development area. If revised plans are required during the course of the work they
' ' ' shall be prepared by the civil engineer.
j~ ~: (c) Soils Engineer. The soils engineer shall provide professional inspection
) within such engineer's area oftechnical specialty, which shall include observation
i!j'1 vide sufficient observation during the preparation of the natural ground and place-
:~' during grading and testing for required compaction. The soils engineer shall pro-
' !' ment and compaction of the fill to verify that such work is being performed in
;l\lj accordance with the conditions of the approved plan and the appropriate require-
i'i' ments of this chapter. Revised recommendations relating to conditions differing
m: from the approved soils engineering and engineering geology reports shall be sub-
'''' mitted to the permittee, the building official and the civil engineer.
1m (d) Engineering Geologist. The engineering geologist shall provide profes-
:~:~~
:m sional inspection within such engineer's area of technical specialty, which shall in-
clude professional inspection of the bedrock excavation to determine if conditions
: : : encountered are in confonnance with the approved report. Revised recommenda-
·===·
@! lions relating to conditions differing from the approved engineering geology report
!i!i shall be submitted to the soils engineer.
t (e) Permittee. The permittee shall be responsible for the work to be performed
ti in accordance with the approved plans and specifications and in conformance with
' ' ' the provisions of this code, and the permittee shall engage consultants, if required,
't to provide professional inspections on a timely basis. The permittee shall act as a
{j coordinator between the consultants, the contractor and the building official. In the
1.~,!., ! event of changed conditions, the permittee shall be responsible for informing the
.
:;:;:
building official of such change and shall provide revised plans for approval.
(f) Building Official. The building official shall inspect the project at the vari-
: .· ous stages of work requiring approval to determine that adequate control is being
i~!~! exercised by the professional consultants.
!!~ (g) Notification of Noncompliance. If, in the course of fulfilling their respec-
, , , tive duties under this chapter. the civil engineer, the soils engineer or the engineer-
::~::
,.,., ing geologist finds that the work is not being done in conformance with this chapter
or the approved grading plans, the discrepancies shall be reported immediately in
,·'..··''..·'!i,.···'...··'i·:
·, writing to the permittee and to the building official.

.:
(h) Transfer of Responsibility. If the civil engineer, the soils engineer, or the
: : : engineering geologist of record is changed during grading, the work shall be
· · · stopped until the replacement has agreed in writing to accept their responsibility
~j~! within the area of technical competence for approval upon completion of the work.
1002
It shall be the duty ofthe permittee to notify the building official in writing of such m\
change prior to the recommencement of such grading. 1m
Completion of Work
::;:
Sec. 7015. (a) Final Reports. Upon completion of the rough grading work and •:.,•,: •
at the final completion ofthe work, the following reports and drawings and supple-
:=:::
ments thereto are required for engineered grading or when professional inspection
is performed for regular grading, as applicable.
I. An as-built grading plan prepared by the civil engineer retained to provide
such services in accordance with Section 7014 (e) showing original ground surface ::::
elevations, as-graded ground surface elevations, lot drainage patterns, and the , .,
\!!!
locations and elevations of surface drainage facilities and of the outlets of subsur-
face drains. As-constructed locations, elevations and details of subsurface drains
shall be shown as reported by the soils engineer. \!~!
Civil engineers shall state that to the best of their knowledge the work within .,:,
their area of responsibility was done in accordance with the final approved grading :• •
plan.
2. A report prepared by the soils engineer retained to provide such services in .;.t
accordance with Section 7014 (c), including locations and elevations of field den- ·
:~j\
sity tests, summaries of field and laboratory tests, other substantiating data, and ,,
comments on any changes made during grading and their effect on the recommen- :t
dations made in the approved soils engineering investigation report. Soils engi-
neers shall submit a statement that, to the best of their knowledge, the work within .,• •
their area of responsibilities is in accordance with the approved soils engineering i'
report and applicable provisions of this chapter. ,.,,.,:.,i,i
3. A report prepared by the engineering geologist retained to provide such ser-

vices in accordance with Section 70 14(e), including a final description of the geol- ::
ogy of the site and any new information disclosed during the grading and the effect ...
of same on recommendations incorporated in the approved grading plan. Engi- :i·i.
neering geologists shall submit a statement that, to the best of their knowledge, the ,,,
work within their area of responsibility is in accordance with the approved engi- it
neering geologist report and applicable provisions of this chapter.
4. The gradingfcont~actor shall submit in a form prescrdibehd by th~f?uil.ding offi- •..''..':·,'
cia! a statement o con.ormance to said as-built p1an an t e spect tcatwns.
(b) Notification of Completion. The permittee shall notify the building official
when the grading operation is ready for final inspection. Final approval shall not be
given until all work, including installation of all drainage facilities and their protec-
tive devices, and all erosion-control measures have been completed in accordance
with the final approved grading plan, and the required reports have been submitted.
1003
PA*
I
I
H/2 but 2' min.

and20' max.
Toe
Slope
* Permil Area Boundary
Figure No. 70·1
1004
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE UNIT CONVERSION TABLES
UNIT CONVERSION TABLES
Sl SYMBOLS AND PREFIXES

BASE UNITS
Quantity Unit Symbol
Length Meter m
Mass Kilogram kg
Time Second s
Electric current Ampere A
Thermodynamic temperature Kelvin K
Amount of substance Mole mol
Luminous intensity Candela cd
Sl SUPPLEMENTARY UNITS
Quantity Unit Symbol
Plane angle Radian rad
Solid angle Steradian sr
SIPREFIXES
Multiplication Factor Prefix Symbol
I 000 000 000 000 000
000 = I 0 18 exa E
I 000 000 000 000
000 = I 01s pet a p
I 000 000 000
000 = 10 12 tera T
I 000 000
000 = 109 giga G
I 000
000 = 106 mega M
I
000 = 103 kilo k
100 = 102 hecto h
10 = 10 1 deka da
0.1 = 10·1 deci d
0.01 = 10·2 centi c
0.001 = 10·3 milli m
0.000001 = 10·6 micro f.J..
0.000 000 001 = 10·9 nano n
0.000 000 000 001 = 10·12 pico p
0. 000 000 000 000 00 I = 10·15 femto f
0. 000 000 000 000 000 00 I =10·18 at to a
(Continued)
1005
UNIT CONVERSION TABLES 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Sl SYMBOLS AND PREFIXE5-(Contlnued)

Sl DERIVED UNIT WITH SPECIAL NAMES
Quantity Unit Symbol Formula
Frequency (of a periodic phenomenon) hertz Hz 1/s
Force newton N kgorn!s 2
Pressure, stress pascal Pa Nfm2
Energy, work, quantity of heat joule J Nom
Power, radiant flux watt w J/s
Quantity of electricity, electric charge coulomb c Aos
Electric potential, potential difference,
electromotive force volt v WIA
Capacitance farad F C!V
Electric resistance ohm fl VIA
Conductance siemens s A!V
Magnetic flux weber Wb Vos
Magnetic flux density tesla T Wb/m 2
Inductance henry H Wb!A
Luminous flux lumen lm cdosr
Illuminance lux lx lrnlm 2
Activity (of radionuclides) becquerel Bq 1/s
Absorbed dose gray Gy J/kg
CONVERSION FACTORS
To convert to multiply by
LENGTH
I mile (U.S. statute) km 1.609 344
I yd m 0.9144
I ft m 0.3048
mm 304.8
I in mm 25.4
AREA
I mile 2 (U.S. statute) km 2 2.589 99
I acre (U.S. survey) ha 0.404 687
m2 4046.87
I yd 2 m2 0.836 127
I ft 2 m2 0.092 903
I in 2 mm2 645.16
VOLUME, MODULUS OF SECTION
I acre ft mJ 1233.49
I yd 3 mJ 0.764 555
100 board ft mJ 0.235 974
I ft3 m3 0.028 316 8
L(dm 3) 28.3168
I in 3 mm3 16 387.1
mL(cm3) 16.3871
I barrel (42 U.S. gallons) mJ .158 987
1006
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE UNIT CONVERSION TABLES
CONVERSION FACTORS-(Contlnued)
(FLUID) CAPACITY
I gal (U.S. liquid)** L* 3.785 41
I qt (U.S.Iiquid) mL 946.353
I pt (U.S. liquid) mL 473.177
I fl oz (U.S.) mL 29.5735
I gal (U.S. liquid) mJ 0.003 785
**I gallon (UK) approx. 1.2 gal (U.S.)
*I liter approx. 0.001 cubic meters
SECOND MOMENT OF AREA
I in4 mm4 416 231
m• 0.416 231 X 10·6
PLANE ANGLE
I o (degree) rad 0.017 453 3
mrad 17.4533
I' (minute) urad 290.888
I" (second) urad 4.848 14
VELOCITY, SPEED
I ftls m/s 0.3048
I mile/h km/h 1.609 344
m/s 0.447 04
VOLUME RATE OF FLOW
I ftJ/s m 3/s 0.028 316 8
I ft3/min Lis 0.471 947
I gal/min Lis 0.063 090 2
I gal/min m3/min 0.0038
I gal/h mL/s 1.051 50
I million gal/d Lis 43.8126
I acre ftls m 3/s 1233.49
TEMPERATURE INTERVAL
I°F °CorK 0.555 556
5/9°C = 519 K
EQUIVALENT TEMPERATURE (toe =Tk- 273.15)
toF 9/5 t0 , + 32
MASS
I ton (short***) metric ton 0.907 185
kg 907.185
lib kg 0.453 592
I oz g 28.3495
•••1 long ton (2240 lb) kg 1016.05
MASS PER UNIT AREA
llb/ft 2 kg/m 2 4.882 43
I oz/yd 2 g/m 2 33.9057
I oz/ft 2 glmz 305.152
(Continued)
1007
UNIT CONVERSION TABLES 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
CONVERSION FACTORs-(Contlnued)
DENSITY (MASS PER UNIT VOLUME)
\ \bift3 kg/m 3 16.0185
llb/yd 3 kg/m 3 0.593 276
I ton/yd 3 t!m 3 1.186 55
FORCE
I tonf (ton-force) kN 8.896 44
I kip (1000 lbf) kN 4.448 22
llbf (pound-force) N 4.448 22
MOMENT OF FORCE, TORQUE
llbfoft Nom 1.355 82
llbfoin Nom 0.112 985
I tonfoft kNom 2.711 64
I kipoft kNom 1.355 82
FORCE PER UNIT LENGTH
llbf/ft N!m 14.5939
llbf/in N!m 175.127
I tonf/ft kN/m 29.187 8
PRESSURE, STRESS, MODULUS OF ELASTICITY (FORCE PER UNIT AREA) (1 Pa = 1 N/m2)
I tonf/in2 MPa 13.7895
I tonf/ft 2 kPa 95.7605
I kip/in 2 MPa 6.894 76
llbf/in2 kPa 6.894 76
llbf/ft2 Pa 47.8803
Atmosphere kPa 101.3250
I inch mercury kPa 3.376 85
I foot (water column at 32°F.) kPa 2.988 98
WORK, ENERGY, HEAT (1J = 1N-m = 1W-s)
I kWh (550 ftolbf/s) Mj 3.6
I Btu (Int. Table) kJ 1.055 06
J 1055.06
I ftolbf J 1.355 82
COEFFICIENT OF HEAT TRANSFER
I Btu/ (ft2oho °F) W/(m2oK) 5.678 26
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
I Btu/ (ftoho °F) W/(moK) 1.730 73
ILLUMINANCE
I lrnlft2 (footcandle) lx (lux) 10.7639
LUMINANCE
I cd/ft 2 cd/m 2 10.7639
I foot lambert cd/m 2 3.426 26
I lambert kcd/m 2 3.183 01
1008
1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE INDEX
INDEX
For index by parts, chapters and sections, see pages vii to xx
A
Section
A-OCCUPANCIES . Chapter 6
ACCESS (see also ACCESSIBILITY)

To attic ......... . 3205 (a)
To building features Chapter 31
To roof ..... 3306 (n)
To water closets .... . .... 511 (a)
To under-floor areas 2516 (c) 2
ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEMS ... 2304 (d), Tables Nos. 23-A and 23-P
ACCESSIBILITY
Access to buildings .... 3301 (f), 3304 (i), 3305 (f)
Adaptability 3102, 3103 (b)
Corridors 3305 (a)
Definition 3102
Doors ...... 3304 (a)
Dwelling units 3105 (b) and (d)
Egress ......... 3104
Elevators ............... . . .. 3105 (c), 3301 (g)
Evacuation assistance, area for ...... 3102, 3104
Existing buildings Appendix Chapter 31, Division II
Exits .............................. . . ... 3104 (c)
Facilities (toilets, lavatories, bathing, fixtures) 3105 (a) and (b), 511
Landings at doors .. 3304 (a)
Persons with disability 3102
Primary entry 3102
Ramps 3307
Signs .................... 3105 (e)
Site ........ . . .. Appendix Chapter 31, Division I
Swimming pools 3105 (d)
Telephones .... 3105 (d)
Water lountains 3105 (d)
Where required 3103
ACCESSORY BUILDINGS (see M-OCCUPANCIES)
ACOUSTICAL 407
ADDITIONS, to buildings 104
ADHERED VENEER 3002, 3004 (b), 3005
ADHESIVES, glued construction . 2511, 2512, 2517 (e)
ADJOINING BUILDINGS (see also LOCATION ON PROPERTY)

Foundation to be protected 2903 (b)
Wall protection ..... 504 (c)
ADMINISTRATIVE (see Part I) Chapters 1, 2 and 3
ADMIXTURE 2403 (e), 2602, 2603 (b) 5
ADOBE CONSTRUCTION (see MASONRY, unburned clay)
AEROSOL
Definition . 402
Buildings storing ....... . 708
Occupancy classification . 90t (a)
AGED, HOMES FOR Chapter 10, Table No. 33-A
AGGREGATES
Concrete .. 2603 (b) 2
Definition . . . . . . ..... 2602
Fire·resistive construction 4302 (d)
Masonry, mortar and grout . 2402 (b) t
Proporttons in concrete .. . .. 2605 (c)
Storage of 2603 (h)
1009
INDEX 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
AGRICULTURAL BUILDINGS
Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 402
General . Chapter 11, Appendix Chapter 11
AIRCRAFT HANGARS
Areas allowed 505, 506 (a) 3
Classified .. 701,901
Exterior walls .... 702, 902 (k)
Floors . 702 (c), 902 (b)
Height . . . . . . . . . 507
Ventilating equipment 705,905
AIR SPACE
Around timber in masonry 2516 (c) 5
AISLES 3315
ALARM VALVE, AUTOMATIC FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 3803
ALLEY
Definition . 402
Projection into 4502
Temporary use ..... 4402
Allowable floor areas 505
ALLOWABLE WORKING STRESSES (see WORKING STRESSES, ALLOWABLE)
ALTERATION
Definition 402
General ........ . 104, 502
To historic buildings 104 (f)
ALTERNATE MATERIALS AND METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION
Board of appeals 204
May be approved by building official 105
Suitability of 204
Tests required 107
ALUMINUM ..... . ..... Chapter 28
Allowable stresses 2802
Alloys .. 2801 (b)
Bolts .... . . 2802 (c)
Connections .. 2803 (d)
Design 2803
Erection .. 2804 (g)
Fasteners .. 2802, 2804 (b)
Identification .. 2801 (d)
Materials. dissimilar .. 2804 (c)
Painting .. 2804 (d)
Rivets .. 2802 (c)
Stresses. allowable ...... . 2802
Structural roofing and siding ................ 2803 (c)
Welding . 2802 (b) and (d), 2804 (e)
AMUSEMENT BUILDING
Definition 402, 601
Alarm system 610
AMUSEMENT PARK STRUCTURES 601, 602 (e), 604 (b)
ANCHORAGE
Chimneys . . . ....... . ......................... 3704 (c)
Concrete or masonry walls . . . .. 2310, 2336, 2337 (b) 8, 2337 (b) 9,
2407 (b) and (e), 2409 (e) 3 and 4, 2614 (c)
General . 2303 (b), 2310
Masonry construction . . ... .. 2407 (e)
Nonbearing masonry partitions 2407 (c)
Steel in reinforced concrete .. 2607 (b)
ANCHOR BUILDING .... Chapter 56
ANCHORS
Concrete 2624
Foundation sills . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2907 (f)
Masonry construction ..... 2407 (b) and (e)
Reinforcing in concrete ........... 2607 (b)
Veneer, attachment .... Chapter 30
Wood members 2510
Wood framing .. 2510 (e)
ANSI 402
1010
ANTENNAE, radio and television (see TOWERS)

APARTMENT HOUSE
Classed as t20t
Fire-extinguishing system 3802 (h)
Unit separation 1202 (b)
APPEALS, BOARD OF 204
APPLIANCES (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Chimneys 3703
High-heat 3702
Low-heat 3702
Medium-heat 3702
APPLICATION
For permit, details required 302, Appendix 7006 (b)
To existing buildings 104, Appendix Chapter 1
APPROVAL
After called inspection 305 (a) and (d)
Final 305 (b) and (d)
Of fabricators .......... . 306 (f)
Of Federal Aviation Agency 710 (e)
Of fire chief 3801 (b)
Of plans for permit . 303 (a)
Of special inspector 306 (b)
Use of streets and alleys 4402
APPROVED, definition 402
APPROVED AGENCY
Certifies prefabricated assembly 5006 (b) and (c)
Definition 402
APPROVED FABRICATOR (see also FABRICATOR)
Definition 402
Special inspection 306 (f)
ARCHITECTURAL PROJECTIONS 1711' 4504
ARC WELDS (see WELDING)
AREA
Allowable (see also OCCUPANCY and TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION) 505
Floor, definition 407
For plastics used structurally 3007, Chapter 52
Increase allowable 506
Limitations of exterior glass ....... 5403
Separation of 505 (f), 702, 802, 1102
Separation walls 505 (f)
Sum of ratios 505 (e)
Support limitations 3006 (b) and (d)
Unlimited 506 (b)
ASPHALT
In roof coverings 3208, Tables Nos. 32-F and G
ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS
Accessibility (handicapped) 3103 (a)
Areas allowed 505
Classified 601
Definition 402
Exits, special requirements 3317
Exterior walls 603
Requirements Chapter 6
Type of construction 602 (a) through (e)
ASTM 402
ASTRAGALS 808, 1002 (b) 3
ATRIUM
Area Table No. 17-B
Definition 402
Openings Table No. 17-B
Requirements 1716
ATTIC
Access 3205 (a)
Separation 2516 (f)
Ventilation 3205 (c)
1011
AUDITORIUMS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)

AUTOMATIC FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (see FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS)
AVIATION CONTROL TOWERS Appendix Chapter 7
AWNINGS
Definition 4506
Fixed, regulations 45%
Movable, regulations 4506
Of plastic materials ... 5211
8
B-OCCUPANCIES .... Chapter 7
BALCONY
Assembly, definition 403
Exits ......... 3317 (c)
Exterior exit .... 3301 (b), 3305
For smokeproof enclosures 3305, 3310
May project over public property .......... 4504
Protection against decay and termites ......... 2516 (c)
Waterproofing ......... 1708 (c)
BARBECUES ..... Chapter 37
BARRICADES, construction ....... Chapter 44
BARS
For concrete reinforcing (see REINFORCED CONCRETE)
Panic (see PANIC HARDWARE)
BASEMENT
Definition 403
Enclosure 1703
Pipe inlets ...... . Appendix 3807
Protection of ceiling . . . . . ....... . . ...... '.. 1703
Smoke detector required, residential ......... 1210 (a)
Sprinklers, when required 3802
BASE PLATE (see FOUNDATION PLATES)
BATHROOM
Required ... 1205 (d), 1208
BEAMS
Construction details ......... 2106 (g)
Reinforced concrete ...... 2608,2609, 2610,2611
Reinforced masonry 2409
Span, wood ................. . ........ 2506 (a)
Steel (see STEEL. STRUCTURAL)
T-beams of reinforced concrete ......... 2608 (k)
Wood .... ... 2506, 2511
Wood in heavy-timber construction 2106
BEARING
For wood beams and girders .. 2506 (f), 2517 (c)
For wood joists ... 2517 (d)
BEARING PARTITIONS (see WALLS)
BEARING WALL SYSTEM 2331
BEARING WALLS (see WALLS)

BENDING MOMENTS (see REINFORCED CONCRETE)
BLEACHERS (see also REVIEWING STANDS)
Definition ......... 3322 (b)
Folding and telescoping .. 3322 (b)
Footings 2907 (i)
General requirements ................. 3322 (e)
Open-air ..... . ........ 3322 (g), 602 (e)
Within buildings . ........ 3322 (f)
BLOCKING
For floor joists ......... 2517 (d)
For roof rafters. etc. 2517 (h)
BLOCKS, CONCRETE (see CONCRETE BLOCKS)
1012
BOARD OF APPEALS
General 204
Limitation of authority 204 (b)
BOILER (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Hot-water-heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 409
Low~pressure hot-water-heating 413
Low-pressure steam-heating .. 413
Room for (see BOILER ROOM)
BOILER ROOM
Definition 403
Exits. special requirements 3321
For occupancy groups "08" sections of Chapters 6-1 0; 1213
BOLTS
For foundations 2907 (f)
In aluminum ........................... 2802 (c)
In masonry 2406 (h), 2407 (i) 4 and 2407 (i), 2409 (b),
Tables Nos. 24-D-1, 24-D-2 and 24-E, 24-L and 24-M
In reinforced concrete 2624
In steel construction (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
In wood construction 2510
Special inspection 306 (a)
BOND
For veneer 3002, 3004
Reinforcements 2409 (c) 5
BRACED FRAME (see also STEEL, STRUCTURAL) 2331
BRACING
For foundation studs 2517 (g)
For reinforced concrete forms 2606 (a)
For wood stud walls and partitions 2517 (g)
BRICK (see MASONRY)
BRICK, SAND-LIME 2402 (b)
BRIDGING
For concrete joists 2610 (e)
For wood joists ....... 2506 (h), 2517 (d)
For wood walls 2517 (g)
BUILDING CODE
Application 103, 104
Enforced 202
Purpose 102
Scope 103
Title 101
BUILDING MATERIALS
May be stored on public property 4403
BUILDING OFFICIAL
Approvals required 303 (a), 305 (d)
Approves special inspector 306
Approves work in progress 305 (e). 4701 (b)
Classifies building occupancy 501
Completion of work reports Appendix 7015
Cooperation of other officials 202 (g)
Definition 403
Deputies 202 (b)
Excavation report 2903 (a)
Fill report 2903 (a)
Grading operations inspection Appendix 7014
Granting modifications 106
Issues permit 303
Liability 202 (f), 305 (a)
May approve alternate materials and methods of construction 105
May enter prem1ses .. 202 (c)
May order occupancy of building discontinued 202 (e)
May require bonds Appendix 7008
May require plans by licensed engineer or architect 302 (b)
May require special inspector 306
May require tests ................. 107,2603 (b), 4701 (c)
May stop work 202 (d)
Plastics. approved 5201 (b)
Powers and duties 202
Retention of plans 303 (b)
1013
Shall make inspections 305

Shall require reports ......... 306 (c)
BUILDING OFFICIAL'S AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED
For changes of use or occupancy 104 (c), 308 (b), 502
For alterations to approved plans . 303 (a)
BUILDING PERMITS
Expiration ......... 303 (d)
Fees 304
Issuance 303 (a)
Suspension or revocation 303 (e)
Validity ...... 303 (c)
When required 301, Appendix 7003
BUILDINGS
Air-conditioned . . . 3310 (a)
Areas allowable . . ......... . 505
Change in use .............. . 104 (c), 308 (b), 502
Class1fied by type of construction 1701
Classified by use or occupancy 501, 503
Definition ............. 403
Drainage, around 2905 (f), 2907 (d) 5
Energy conservation in . Appendix Chapter 53
Existing . . . . . . . ... 104, 403, Appendix Chapter 1
Height, definition 409
Heights allowable 507
Historic 104 (f)
Location on same property .. 504 (c)
Membrane structures Appendix Chapter 55
Moving .......... 104 (e), 301 (a)
Nonconforming 104, Appendix Chapter 1
Site preparation . 2516 (b)
Temporary 104 (e)
To be condemned 203
To be occupied 308
To conform to code 103, 104
Two or more on same property ......... 504 (c)
Unsafe 203
Unsafe appendages to 203
BUSINESS OCCUPANCIES
Accessibility (handicapped) ... 3103 (a)
c
CANOPIES, CONSTRUCTION . 702 (c), 4505,4506, 5213
CARPETING (see TEXTILE WALL COVERINGS)
CARPETING ON CEILINGS 4204 (b)
CARPORT
Classification .. 1101
Separation 503(a)
CAISSONS ........ 2908 (b)
CAST STONE 404, 2402 (b) 6
CAVITY WALL MASONRY . 2407 (b) and (e)
CEILING
Carpeting on 4205
Corridors .. 3305 (c) and (g)
Design loads and factors . 2304, Tables Nos. 23-B and 23-P
Dropped 1207,2516 (f), 4203,4701 (e), 4704
Fire-resistive required, basements .. .. .. .. .. . 1703
For fire-protection purposes . 4303 (b), 4305
Framing ........ 2517 (h)
Insulation 1714
Minimum height of, in dwellings ................................ 1207 (a)
Minimum height of garages ............. 702 (c), 709 (d), 1102 (c)
Minimum height of mezzanines 1717
Minimum height of projection rooms 4002
Panels ........ 4305 (b)
Suspended, acoustical systems for 4704
CEMENT, PORTLAND (see PORTLAND CEMENT)
1014
CENTRAL HEATING PLANT

Definition ... . 404
For occupancy groups "08" sections of Chapters 6·10, 1213
CERTIFICATE
Of approval 5006 (b)
Of rnspection .... 2505
01 occupancy, atria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... .. 1716 (i)
01 occupancy, for change of use or occupancy classificatron 308, 502
01 occupancy, for high-rise buildings 1807 (b)
Of occupancy, issued to owner 308
Of occupancy, revocatron . 308 (f)
Of registration of fabricator 306 (f)
Posting of 308 (e)
Temporary 308 (d)
CHANGE OF OCCUPANCY, certificate required 308, 502
CHIEF OF THE FIRE DEPARTMENT

Approval required of fire-extinguishing systems 3801 (b)
Definttion 404
CHILDREN, homes for Chapter 10

CHIMNEYS (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Anchorage .... 3704 (c)
Classification 3702
Definition 3702
Des1gn 3703, 3704
Factory-built ..... . 3705
Fireblocking around 2516 (1), 3707 (m)
For fireplaces . . .. 3707
General requirements 3703
Height above roof 3703 (f)
Inlets 3704 (g)
Metal 3706
Of masonry ..... . 3704
Reinforcing for masonry . 3704 (c)
Seismic anchorage for masonry ...... 3704 (c)
Wood frame, spaced from ...... 3703 (c)
CHURCHES (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)

CHUTES
Clothes 1209, 1706
Refuse 1706
Automatic fire-extinguishing system 3802 (b)
CITY (see JURISDICTION)

CLASSIFICATION
Of buildings, by occupancy . . . . ... Chapter 5
Of buildings. by types of construction Chapter 17
Of fire-resrstive construction Chapter 43
Of occupancies .... 501' 503
Of types of construction 1701
CLAY ROOF TILE

Application of 3208 (b)
Matenals 3208 (a)
CLEANOUT
For chimney 3703 (g)
For masonry 2401 (b), 2404 (f)
CLEARANCE (see also CEILING, Minimum height: and HEADROOM)

Around chimneys, combustible materials .. 3703 (c), 3707 (h)
Around frreplaces, combustible materials 3707 (h)
Around reinforcement in concrete ........ 2607 (h)
Around timber in masonry .......... 2516 (c)
Between marquee and curb line 4505 (b)
For swelling of heavy-timber floors 2106 (e)
Of balconies above grade 4504
Of wood above grade ........... 2516 (c)
Of wood framing from chimneys .. 3703 (c). 3707 (h)
Under first-floor joists .. 2516 (c)
CLUBS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)

COLD STORAGE 701
1015
COLUMN CAPITAL
Concrete . 2613 (b)
COLUMNS
Composite .... . ..... 2610 (o)
Definition, concrete 2602
Fire protec11on 4303
Heavy timber .......................... 2106 (b)
Masonry 2408 (b), 2409 (b)
Reinforced concrete, design Chapter 26
Round, footings supporting ........ 2615 (d)
Steel prpe filled . . . . . . . . ..... . .......... 2610 (o)
Structural steel, allowable stresses 2701
Wood, allowable stresses 2504
Wood, design 2507, 2508
COMBINED LOADS (see LOAD COMBINATIONS)
COMBINED STRESSES
Aluminum, design 2803
Concrete, design 2609
Masonry, design ..... 2406 (e)
Steel, design .......... Chapter 27
Wood, design 2508
COMBUSTIBLE FURNISHINGS IN ATRIA 1716 (j)
COMBUSTIBLE GOODS, sales and storage (see GROUP B, Divisions 1, 2 and 3)
COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS
Allowed in noncombustible construction 1705
COMPLIANCE
Determrned by inspection . 305 (a)
With code 103
COMPOSITION ROOFINGS 3208
COMPRESSED GASES 512
COMPUTATIONS, required 302 (b)
CONCENTRATED LOADS
Assumed distribution on walls ... 2406 (c), 2407 (c), 2409 (b), 2614 (c)
Special requirements for .......... 2304 (c)
CONCRETE
Blocks of (see CONCRETE BLOCKS)
Bolts in ........... 2624
Bracing of forms .............. 2606 (a)
Combined with wood 2515
Compressive strength, definition 2602
Compressive strength, shown on drawings . 2604 (b)
Conduits, embedded in ............. 2606 (c)
Construction joints .................. 2606 (d)
Conveying 2605 (j)
Corrosion of reinforcement 2604 (d)
Curing 2605 (I)
Definitions 2602
Depositing .......... 2605 (k)
Design, general ............. Chapter 26
Exposed to freezing 2605 (m)
Fire-resistive classification (see Chapter 43) ........ 4302 (d), 4303
Footings 2615
Forms 2606
For roof tile ......... 3202, 3204 (a), 3208
Freezing and thawing exposures ............. 2604 (b)
General 2601
Inspection 305, 306
Jacking force, defined 2602
Materials 2603
Members carrying 1709
Minimum strength 2609 (b), (c), (d) and (e)
Mix design 2605
Mixrng 2605 (i)
Pedestal, definition 2602
Piles 2909 (b), (c), (d), (e) and (g)
Pipes embedded in ............. 2606 (c)
Placrng 2605 (d)
Plain concrete 2602. 2622
Precast concrete 2616
1016
Prestressed concrete 2618

Proportions 2605 (c), (d) and (e)
Plain ............ . 2622
Quality ............................ . 2605
Reinforced (see REINFORCED CONCRETE)
Residential concrete exposed to freezing and thawing,
protection of Appendix Chapter 26
Shotcrete .................... .. 2621, 4302 (e)
Slabs on grade, minimum thickness 2623
Special inspection ......... . 306
Structural lightweight, definition 2602
Sulfate exposure ........ 2604 (c)
Tests . . . . . . ........................... . 2605 (d) and (g)
Transporting and placing . . . . . .... . 2605 (i), (j) and (k)
Unreinforced (see CONCRETE, Plain)
Walls 2611 (k), 2614, 2622, 2625 (f)
Water-cement ratio 2604 (e)
Weather requirements ... 2605 (m) and (n)
CONCRETE BLOCKS ....... 2402 (b) 5
CONDEMNATION 203
CONGREGATE RESIDENCES 1201
CONNECTIONS
Bolted ................... . 2510 (b), 2624,2907 (f)
For prefabricated assemblies ............... . 5004
For structural steel (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
In wood framing .............. . 2510,2516 (j)
Mechanical and welded, aluminum 2802
Resisting seismic forces ........ 2337 (b) 3
CONSTRUCTION
Fire-resistive substitution ........ . 508
For occupancies (see OCCUPANCY)
For types of (see TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
Lights required . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . 4401
Temporary use of streets allowed during 4402
CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION .. 302 (c)
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
In concrete 2606 (d)
In tire-resistive assemblies 1707
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
Allowed in streets 4402, 4403
CONTROL AREA
Definition 404
CORBELING
Of masonry walls 2408 (e)
CORNICES (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION) 1711' 4504
CORRIDORS
As required exits 3305
Elevator lobby separation 3305 (j)
In Group E Occupancies 3318
In Group H Occupancies ...... 911 (c), 3319
In Group I Occupancies .. .. .. .. .. .. . 3320
In stores and offices 1705 (b)
Separation of corridors in Group R, Division 1 Occupancies 1209
CORROSION RESISTANT
Definition ......... . ........ 3003, 3202
Fasteners . . Chapter 32 Tables
Roofing/flashing .......... . 3208
CORROSIVE
Definition 404
COST (see also VALUATION)

Of permits 304
COURT
Between buildings .... 504 (c), 1206 (c)
Definition 404
Exits required 3301 (e)
1017
Minimum width t206 (c)

Used as exit ... 3301 (b), 3311
COVERED MALLS 5601
COVERINGS
For exterior walls, weather protection 1708
For exterior wood stud walls .... 2516 (g)
For fire protection 4303, 4304, 4305
For roofs ... Chapter 32
CURB
Allowed in alley 4502
For skylights 3404, 5207
CURTAIN, PROSCENIUM .. 608, 3903 (d)
CURTAIN BOARDS, smoke venting 3206 (f)
D
DAMPERS, FIREPLACE 3707 (i)
DAMPPROOFING FOUNDATION WALLS . 1708 (d)
DEAD LOAD
Definition 2302
DEFLECTION CRITERIA
General 2307
Interior walls . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . 2309
Roofs ..................... .. Appendix Chapter 23, Division I
Steel (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
DEMOLITION 203, 4409
DEPARTMENT
Creation of 201
DEPTH OF FOUNDATIONS
Affects excavations 2903
Governed by frost line .... 2907 (a)
DESIGN
Aluminum 2803
Concrete ......... . . .... Chapter 26
Footings and foundations . Chapter 29
General ..... . Chapter 23
Load and resistance factor design (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
Masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... Chapter 24
Must be approved by building official .... 303
Plastic, steel (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
Retaining walls . 2308 (b)
Structural steel .. Chapter 27
Walls 2309, 2310
Wood .. Chapter 25
DETECTORS (see SMOKE DETECTORS)
DIAPHRAGM, WOOD
Blocked, definition 2502
Definition 2502
Design 2513
Sub, definition 2502
DIMENSIONS
Unit masonry, defined .... 2401 (b)
DISPERSAL AREA, SAFE . 3318 (k), 3322
DISTANCE
To exits . 3303 (d)
To property lines 504
DOORS
Construction for fire-resistive rating 4306
Corridor .. 3305 (h)
Exit 3304
Fire-resistive, classification, design, hanging ..................................... . 4306
F1re-res1stive, when required (see under OCCUPANCY and TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
For occupancy separat1ons .... ... ..... ... ................ .... .. 503
1018
For high-rise buildings 1807 (j)

For motion picture machine booths .................. 4003
For smokeproof enclosures .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 3310 (I) and (g)
General requirements ............ 3304,4306
Glass .......... . .................. 5406
Louvers prohibited . .............. 3305 (h)
May not project over public property . 4507
Power-operated ..... 3304 (h)
Shower ......... 5406,5407
Special egress-control devices ......... 3304 (e)
DORMITORY
Definition ................... 404
DOWNSPOUT
For marquees 4505 (f)
For roofs, general ..... 3207
DRAFT STOPS ....................... 2516 (f), 3205 (b)
DRAINAGE
Around buildings 2905 (f), 2907 (d) 5, 3207 (e)
~~~~raded sites ... Appendix 7012
................ 3207
DRAWINGS (see PLANS)
DRESSING ROOMS
Construction 3903 (b)
Location .............. 3903 (b)
DRIFT, BUILDING .......... 2334 (h)
DRINKING FOUNTAIN, REQUIRED 605, 3105 (d)
DROPPED CEILINGS
Design .... 2304, Tables Nos. 23-B and 23-P
General Chapter 42
Height ... 1207 (a)
Installation . 4701 (e), 4704
Interior, controlled finish .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4203
DRY-CLEANING PLANTS (see also UNIFORM FIRE CODE) . 901
DRYWALL (see GYPSUM WALLBOARD)
DUCTS (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
For ventilation of motion picture booths ....... 4005
DUMBWAITER ...... . Chapter 51
Construction of walls 1706,5102
DUTIES
Of board of appeals .. .. .. .. .................. . . 204
Of building officials (see also BUILDING OFFICIAL) . 202
Of special inspector ............ . . 306 (c)
DWELLING
Classified as Group R Occupancy ............... 1201
Definition .................. 405
Efficiency units 406, 1208
DWELLING CODE, ONE AND TWO FAMILY Appendix Chapter 12
E
E-OCCUPANCIES ....... Chapter 8, 3318
EARTHQUAKE (see also LATERAL FORCE PROVISIONS)
Anchorage of chimneys . . . . . . ............ . ................................. 3704 (c)
Earthquake-recording instruments ......... . Appendix Chapter 23, Division II; 2339
Seism1c considerations for high-rise buildings ... 1807 (c) and (k)
Seismic design 2330 through 2338
EAVES
Projection 504 (a), 1711
Construction ..... 1711
EDUCATIONAL OCCUPANCIES
Accessibility .............. 3103 (a)
Uses 701,801
1019
For high-rise buildings . . . . . . . ... 1807 (j)

For motion picture machine booths ...... 4003
For smokeproof enclosures 3310 (f) and (g)
General requirements ..... 3304,4306
Glass .......... . .. .... 5406
Louvers prohibited . . . . . . . ......... . 3305 (h)
May not project over public property .. . ..... 4507
Power-operated ................ . . .. 3304 (h)
Shower .................... . . ....... 5406,5407
Special egress-control devices ... 3304 (e)
DORMITORY
Definition 404
DOWNSPOUT
For marquees .. 4505 (f)
For roofs, general . 3207
DRAFT STOPS . 2516 (f), 3205 (b)
DRAINAGE
Around buildings 2905 (f), 2907 (d) 5, 3207 (e)
~~~~raded sites . ........... . .. Appendix 7012
.... 3207
DRAWINGS (see PLANS)
DRESSING ROOMS
Construction ... 3903 (b)
Location ... 3903 (b)
DRIFT, BUILDING ... 2334 (h)
DRINKING FOUNTAIN, REQUIRED 605, 3105 (d)
DROPPED CEILINGS
Design ..... 2304, Tables Nos. 23-B and 23-P
General Chapter 42
Height ......... 1207 (a)
Installation ..... 4701 (e), 4704
Interior, controlled finish . 4203
DRY-CLEANING PLANTS (see also UNIFORM FIRE CODE) ...... 901
DRYWALL (see GYPSUM WALLBOARD)
DUCTS (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
For ventilation of motion picture booths . 4005
DUMBWAITER . . .... Chapter 51
Construction of walls 1706, 5102
DUTIES
Of board of appeals .. . . . . . ................... . .. ..... 204
Of building officials (see also BUILDING OFFICIAL) 202
Of special inspector 306 (c)
DWELLING
Classified as Group R Occupancy ... 1201
Definition ....... 405
Efficiency units 406, 1208
DWELLING CODE, ONE AND TWO FAMILY Appendix Chapter 12
E
E-OCCUPANCIES .... Chapter 8, 3318
EARTHQUAKE (see also LATERAL FORCE PROVISIONS)

Anchorage of chimneys ... ........................... 3704 (c)
Earthquake-recording instruments . . . . . . . . . Appendix Chapter 23, Division II; 2339
Seismic considerations for high-rise buildings .. . .. .. . . .......... 1807 (c) and (k)
Seismic design 2330 through 2338
EAVES
Projection 504 (a), 1711
Construction ..... 1711
EDUCATIONAL OCCUPANCIES
Accessibility .. 3103 (a)
Uses 701,801
1019
EGRESS (see Chapter 33)

ELECTRIC WELDING (see WELDING)
ELEVATORS ... Chapter 51 and Appendix Chapter 51
Accessible .... . . 3105 (c)
As required exit ..................... . . .. 3301 (g)
Emergency operation and communication 5103
Enclosures ......... . 5102
For high-rise buildings .................... 1807 (h)
Loads ..... Table No. 23·B
Lobbies ........... . ... 1807 (h)
Lobby doors .................. . . .... 3304 (h)
Lobby, number of exits 3303 (a)
Stretcher requirements .......... 5103 (e)
Venting ......... . 5104
ELEVATOR SHAFTS (see VERTICAL OPENINGS)
EMERGENCY EXITS
General ... ... .......... . .. Chapter 33
Residential escape or rescue . 1204
ENCLOSURE OF VERTICAL OPENINGS (see also OCCUPANCY, TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION, STAIRS
and EXITS)
Automobile ramp ................ . 906
Construction requirements . 503 (c), 1706
Elevator shafts ........ . 706,906
Escalators 706
Fire resistance required 1701' 1706
For atria ............. . 1716 (c)
For open parking garages 709 (j)
For stairs and ramps ...... 3309
Required ......... . . .. "06" sections of Chapters 6-1 0; 1209, 1706, 3309, 4304
Smokeprool enclosure 3310
~~~~us~~~;cupan~y separations .. . ... 503 (c)
706, 906
ENCLOSURE WALLS (see WALLS)
ENERGY, conservation in buildings Appendix Chapter 53
ENTRANCE TO BUILDINGS . 603, 803, 3301 (e) and (I)
ENTRY, right of ...... 202 (c)
ESCALATORS (see ELEVATORS)
Enclosure 706
EXCAVATIONS (see also GRADING)
Definitions .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix 7005
General details 2901, 2902, 2903, Appendix Chapter 70
Protection .. 2903 (b), 4407, Appendix Chapter 70
Water to be removed ........ 2605 (h)
EXHAUST VENTILATION (see VENTILATION)
EXISTING BUILDINGS
Additions, alterations, repairs ................... t04 (b)
Application of code 103, 104
Definition ............................ 403
High rise ....... Appendix Chapter 1, Division II
Historic .................... 104 (f)
Load tests ................. . ........... 2620
Nonconforming existing buildings Appendix Chapter 1
EXISTING OCCUPANCY, continued use 104 (c)
EXITS
Accessible .. 3102, 3103 (b), 3104
Automobile ramp enclosure ............. 906
Definition ............ . ........................ 3301 (b)
Changes in floor elevation . .... 3301 (d), 3304 (i), 3315 (h)
Court ............................ 3301 (b), 3311
Facilities "04" sections of Chapters 6·10; 1204, Chapter 33
For amusement structures .................................. 604 (b)
For atria . . . . . . . . .......... . 1716 (c), (d) and (e)
For covered mall 5604
For fallout shelters Appendix 5705
For helistops 710
For malls 5604
1020
For mezzanines ........ . 1717

For open parking garages . 709 (g)
General requirements . . Chapter 33
Horizonlal 3301 (b), 3308
Illumination lor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3313, 3314
Number required, exisling buildings .. . .... Appendix 111 (a)
Number required, new buildings ... 3303
Obstruction prohibited .. . .................. 3301 (c)
Panic hardware required 3317 (d), 3318 (J), 3320 (f)
Passageway 3301 (b), 3312
Reviewing stands . . . . . ...... . 3322
Special requirements, occupancies 709 (g), 1715 (d), 3317,
3318, 3319, 3320, 3321
Stage 3903 (f)
Width ..... 3303 (b), 3322 (g)
EXIT LIGHTS 3313, 3314
EXPANSIVE SOILS
Classification 2904
Investigation report . 2905 (d)
Slab-on-grade design 2907 (e)
EXPIRATION OF PERMIT 303 (d)
EXPLOSION CONTROL 910
EXPLOSIVES, storage, handling, use or sale 901
EXTERIOR BALCONIES 1711
EXTERIOR EXIT BALCONY . 3301 (b), 3305 (a)
EXTERIOR OPENING, PROTECTION REQUIRED
Because of location on property ........................... . 504 (b)
Because of type of construction (see TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
For bo1ler rooms 608, 808 and 1008
When near exits ..... 3306 (k), 3311 (d)
EXTERIOR STAIRWAYS . 3306, Appendix 111 (d)
EXTERIOR WALLS
Construction (see LOCATION ON PROPERTY, TYPES OF
CONSTRUCTION and WALLS)
Definition 424
Coverings 1708, 2516 (g)
FABRICATOR, APPROVED 306 (f), 402, Chapter 50

FACTORIES
Occupancy classilication 701,901
FALLOUT SHELTERS Appendix Chapter 57
FAMILY, definition 407
FEES
Additional fee required ... 303 (d), 304 (e)
For building permits .......................... 304
Plan checking ...... 304 (c), Appendix 7007 (b)
Refund 304 (f)
Reinspection 305 (g)
FENCES
Around school grounds .... 3318 (k)
Classified by occupancy .......... 1101
Design in seismic zones Table No. 23-P
For construction purposes .... 4407 (c)
FIBERBOARD ........ 2514,2516 (g), 2517 (g)
FILMS, FLAMMABLE 3321 (b), 4001, Chapter 48
FINAL APPROVAL 305 (e)
FINAL INSPECTION .... 305 (e) and 307 (c)
FINISH RATING
Required Chapter 42
1021
FIRE ALARMS
For high-rise buildings . 1807 (d), (e) and (f)
Required . . . . . . . 609,610,809,909, 1009, 1211
FIRE ASSEMBLY
AJea separations 505
Automatic closing 4306 (b) and (f)
Definitions ......................... 4306 (b)
I' or doors, automobile ramp enclosures . 906
For vents supplying air backstage ..... . 3903 (d)
Occupancy separations 503, 505
FIRE BLOCKING
Between chimneys and wooden construction 3707 (m)
Between stories 2516 (f)
Between wood sleepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804, 1904
Exterior wood veneer walls ............. 1705 (d)
Floor spaces 2516 (f)
For wood-frame construction 2516 (f)
Furred interior finishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4203
Material ............................................................... 2516(f)3
Of attic spaces 2516 (f)
Where required 2516 (f) 2
FIREBRICK
Definition ...... . 3702
For chimney lining ........................ 3703 (d)
For fireplaces ........................... 3707 (c)
FIRE CHIEF (see CHIEF OF THE FIRE DEPARTMENT)
FIRE DAMPERS 4306 (j)
FIRE-DETECTION SYSTEMS 1210, 1807
FIRE DEPARTMENT
Access to basement pipe inlets 3807, Appendix 3807
Access to equipment (in malls) ...... 5603 (d)
Central control station for 1807 (f)
FIRE ESCAPES (see EXTERIOR STAIRWAYS)
FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
Apartment buildings 3802 (h)
Areas Increased by ... 506 (c)
Automatic, requirements ......... 3801 (d)
Automatic, where required 3802
Basement pipe inlets, where required Appendix 3807
Distance to exits, reducing . 3303 (d)
For alternate to one-hour-rated construction 508
For atrium 1716
For high-rise buildings 1807 (c)
For mall ..... 5603 (a)
For occupancy groups "07" sections of Chapters 6-10; 1210 (b)
Guest rooms ......... 3802 (h)
Height increased IJy 507
Hotels ...... 3802 (h)
Standpipes, requirements 3805
FIREPLACES, CONSTRUCTION OF 3707
FIRE-PROTECTED PASSAGEWAYS
For smokeproof enclosures 3310
FIRE PROTECTION (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
For buildings under construction ............... . 3806
For spray booths (see also UNIFORM FIRE CODE) ........ 503 (a)
Requirements, detailed ........ Chapter 43
FIRE PUMPS, for standpipe supply ... 3806 (c) and (d)
FIRE RATINGS
For area separations 505 (f)
For materials . Chapter 43
For occupancy separations ..... 503 (d)
FIRE RESISTANCE (see also FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS)
Definition 407
Of area separation walls 505
Of buildings ... Table No. 17-A
1022
Of exterior walls 504

Of materials ......... . Chapter 43
Of occupancy separations 503 (c) and (d)
FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS
Ceilings .......... . 4305
~m~ffi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4306 (j)
Doors, windows and shutters ......... . 4306
Floors 4305
General Chapter 43
Materials 4302
Partitions ........... . 4304
Protection of structural members 4303
Roof coverings 4307
Walls 504 (b), 4304
FIRE-RETARDANT ROOFS
Shakes and shingles 3202
FIRE-RETARDANT WOOD 407, 1705 (b) and (d), 1801, 1901,2003, 2103,2504 (c), 4203
FIRE SEPARATION
Required tor areas . . . 505 (f), 702 (b) and (c), 1002 (b)
Required for occupancy ................................. 503, 505 (c)
FIRE STATIONS 701
FIRESTOPPING (see PENETRATION)
FIRE-WARNING SYSTEM (see also SMOKE DETECTORS and FIRE ALARMS)
In dwelling units 1210, 1211
In guest rooms ................ . t2t0, t2tt
In hazardous occupancy 909
FLAG POLES ON BUILDINGS 3601 (d)
FLAME, OPEN, prohibited ........................ . 908
FLAMESPREAD ..................................... . Chapter 42
FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS
Handling, definition ............................................. . 409
In occupancy groups .......................... "08" sections of Chapters 6-8; 1008, t 104, 1213
Storage, handling, use or sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . 901
Use. closed system ................................ . 422
Use. definition 422
Use. open system ................................................. . 422
FLASHING ......................................................... 1708 (b), 3208 (c)
FLAT SLAB 2611,2613
FLOOD-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION . Appendix Chapter 23,
Division IV
FLOOR AREA
Definition ............................. . 407
Limited (see OCCUPANCY) 505, 506
FLOOR CONSTRUCTION
Concrete Chapter 26
Fire-resistive ................... . ......... 503 (c), 4305
Framing 2106 (c) and (e). 2516 (e), 25t7 (d)
Heavy-timber ................................ . 2106 (c) and (e)
Insulating material, general 1714
Insulating material under flooring .............. t705 (g)
Laminated ..................... 2106 (h), 2511, 2516 (I)
Mezzanines 1717
Motion picture machine booths 4002
Particleboard 2517 (e)
Plank flooring 2517 (e)
Plywood 2517 (e)
Stages 3903
Steel joists (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
.......... 2613
~~~~~ro~~r system ...................... 510~)
Wood joists .................... . 2506 (h), 2516 (c), 2517 (d)
Wood sleepers 1804, 1904
Wood trusses 2510 (I)
FLOOR FILL, required 1804, 1904
1023
FLOOR LEVELS
Changes in elevation . . . . . . . . . 3301 (d), 3304 (i), 3305 (f), 3315 (e) and (f)
For Group A Occupancies, slope 602
FLOOR LOADS
Assumed live 2303, 2304
Definitions 2302
General 2304
FLOOR OPENINGS
Enclosures of, when required (see VERTICAL OPENINGS, ENCLOSURE OF)
For atria . . . . . . . . . . ................. . .................... . 1716
General . . . . . . ... 4305
In stages, construction 3903
FLUES (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Area required .. . ..... 3703 (e), 3707 (i)
Lining for chimneys 3703 (d)
Shahs for gas vents 1706
FLY GALLERIES
Construction ... 3903 (e)
Design loads . Table No. 23-B
FM .............................................................................. 407
FOAM PLASTICS
General 1713
Insulation, definition 407
In doors 1713 (e) 4
In roof covering 1713 (e) 3
In walls 1713 (e) 2
Trim ... 1705 (e)
FOOTING
Bleacher 2907 (i)
Concrete, design 2615, 2902, 2907
Definition 407
Design, general 2907
Grillage .. 2907 (h)
Minimum requirements for bearing walls .. 2907 (b)
Stepped . 2907 (c)
Under sidewalk 4503
FOLDING AND TELESCOPING SEATING 3322
FOLDING PARTITIONS 1705 (c)
FORMS
For concrete construction 2606
May be removed . 2606 (b)
FOUNDATION
2615
g~~~;~~~~i~.{~~~we.i (see l'vF>E:s OF coNsTi=il.icTioN).
Dampproof walls . 1708 (d)
Design 2902, 2907
Excavations 2903
Footing design 2907
For retaining wall 2308 (b)
Inspection required 305
Lateral pressure allowed 2906
May project beyond property line 4503
Openings in wall for ventilation 2516 (c)
Owner's liability . 2903 (b)
Piles 2908, 2909
Plates ..... 2516 (c), 2517,2907 (f)
Protection of adjoining property . 2903 (b)
Sills .... 2516 (c), 2517,2907 (f)
Stepped in Type V buildings ... 2907 (c)
Wood 2907 (a)
FRAME CONSTRUCTION 2201
FRAME INSPECTION, required 305
FRAMES (see also STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
Braced 2331
Definitions 2331' 2333
FRAMEWORK OF BUILDINGS (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION) 1702
1024
FRAMING
Around chimneys ............. . . 3703 (c)
Of wood construction (see WOOD)
FRONTAGE REQUIRED 603, 803

FRONT OF LOT, definition ......... 4(:)1
FROST
Depth of foundation ................... . 2907 (a)
Protection of concrete ............. . 2605 (m)
FUEL-DISPENSING STATIONS 701' 705
Occupancy classification .......... 701
Ventilation ............ 705
FURNACES (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Central heating plant definition .................................... . 404
FURRING
For interior finish .. . .................... 4203
For plaster or gypsum wallboard ....... 4703 (b), 4704 (b)
Of ceiling .......... . 1207 (a)
Of stucco reinforcement 4706
FUSIBLE LINKS
For stage ventilators .. 3903 (c)
G
GARAGE, OPEN PARKING ..... 709
GARAGE, PRIVATE
Carport ..................... . 1101
Classified ... . ... 1101
Definition .......... 408
Floor surface .............. 1105
GARAGE, PUBLIC
Classified ......... . 701
Definition ........ . 408
Open parking garage 701' 709
Parking garages 701
Ramps 906
Repair ............ . 701,901
Separations required ......... . 503
Storage ........ . .. ........ 701
Ventilation required .. 705, 709 (k), 905
GENERATING SYSTEMS FOR HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS ........ 1807 (i)
GIRDERS
Construction details .......... . 2106 (g)
r~=t:~~~~~~~ ···········
1708
. . . . . . . . . . 2306
................. 2707
Wood ......................... 2516 (c) and (m), 2517 (c)
GLASS BLOCK MASONRY .................. 2402 (b) 6. 2407 m

GLASS RAILINGS (see GUARDRAIL, Glass)
GLAZING
Glass ........ . Chapter 54
In atria . ............... 1715(b)and(c)
In corridor walls ......... 3305 (h) 2
In fire·resistive assemblies ................ 4306 (g) through (i)
In mezzanines ..... .. ....... . ....... 1716
In roofs ..................... Chapter 34
Plastic ................. . Chapter 52
Safety ................. . 5406
Skylights (see SKYLIGHTS)
Sloped walls Chapter 34
Support 5404
GRADE (see also GRADING)

Ground level, definition ............ . 408
1025
GRADING (earth) Appendix Chapter 70

Bonds Appendix 7008
Definitions . . . . . Appendix 7005
General provisions Appendix 7001, 7002
Hazardous conditions Appendix 7004
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix 7014
Permits Appendix 7003, 7006, 7007, 7008
Plans Appendix 7006
GRADING (lumber)
By machine or visual 2504 (a)
Definition 2502
Identification 2505
Stress 2504
GRANDSTANDS 3322
Height 602 (e)
GREENHOUSE, roofs .. 2320 (h), 3403, 5212
GRIDIRONS
Construction ... 3903 (e)
GROUT 2402, 2403, 2404 (c), 2618 (q)
GROUTED MASONRY 2404 (f)
GUARDRAIL
Definition 408
Design .................... . . ... Table No. 23-B
For folding and telescoping seating 3322(e)7
For grandstands and bleachers 3322 (e) 7
For open parking garages ............... 1711
For pedestrian protection ............ 4407 (b)
Glass .. 5406 (f)
Required, general . 1712 (a), 1717
GUEST, definition 408
GUEST ROOM, definition 408
GUNITE (see SHOTCRETE and PNEUMATICALLY PLACED PLASTER)
GUTTERS
For roof drainage ............. . 3207
When to keep free of obstructions 4403
GYMNASIUMS
General ... 601, 602 (a)
Live loads .. .. . .. 2304
Special construction 1804, 1904
GYPSUM
Concrete . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2627
Plaster tor fire-resistive purposes 4302
Plaster lath 4701' 4702, 4705
Wallboard ..... . . 4711' 4714
Working stresses 2627
GYPSUM, REINFORCED
Special inspection . 306 (a)
H
H-OCCUPANCIES . Chapter 9
HABITABLE ROOM
Definition . . . . . . . . ..... 409
Minimum requirements for 1207
HANDICAPPED (see ACCESSIBLE)

HANDLING
Definition 409
HANDRAIL
Construction 3306 (i)
Definition 409
1026
GRADING (earth) ................... . Appendix Chapter 70

Bonds Appendix 7008
Definitions ..... . Appendix 7005
General provisions ... Appendix 700t, 7002
Hazardous conditions . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix 7004
Inspection .......... Appendix 7014
Permits Appendix 7003, 7006, 7007, 7008
Plans Appendix 7006
GRADING (lumber)
By machine or visual . 2504 (a)
Definition ... 2502
Identification 2505
Stress .............. . 2504
GRANDSTANDS 3322
Height ..... 602 (e)
GREENHOUSE, roofs ... 2320 (h), 3403, 5212
GRIDIRONS
Construction ....... 3903 (e)
GROUT 2402, 2403, 2404 (c), 2618 (q)
GROUTED MASONRY 2404 (I)
GUARDRAIL
Definition 408
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . Table No. 23·B
For folding and telescoping seating 3322(e)7
For grandstands and bleachers 3322(e)7
For open parking garages ........... 17tt
For pedestrian protection ....... 4407 (b)
Glass ......... . 5406 (I)
Required, general .. 1712 (a), 1717
GUEST, definition 408
GUEST ROOM, definition 408
GUNITE (see SHOTCRETE and PNEUMATICALLY PLACED PLASTER)
GUTIERS
For roof drainage ............ . 3207
When to keep free of obstructions 4403
GYMNASIUMS
General ... 601, 602 (a)
Live loads ....... . 2304
Special construction 1804, 1904
GYPSUM
Concrete .................. . 2627
Plaster tor tire-resistive purposes 4302
Plaster lath 4701' 4702, 4705
Wallboard ....... . . 4711,4714
Working stresses 2627
GYPSUM, REINFORCED
General requirements ........... 2627
Special inspection ........ 306 (a)
H
H-OCCUPANCIES ...... Chapter 9
HABITABLE ROOM
Definition 409
Minimum requirements tor 1207
HANDICAPPED (see ACCESSIBLE)

HANDLING
Definition 409
HANDRAIL
Construction 3306 (i)
Definition 409
1026
Design Table No. 23-B, 2308 (a), 3306 (i)

For ramps 3307 (e)
Measuring stair clear width 3306 (b)
Required for stairways 3306 (i)
HANGARS, AIRCRAFT
Allowable area 505, 506, 702, 902
Classified 701,901
Ventilating equipment 705,905
HANGERS, JOIST 2510 (e), 2516 (j)
HARDBOARD 2502 (a), 2505,2516 (g), 2517 (g)
HAZARDOUS BUILDINGS 203
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS LISTED (see also FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS)
Chemical and health Table No. 9-B
Phys1cal Table No. 9-A
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT REPORT ........... 901 (f)
HAZARDOUS OCCUPANCIES
Accessibility 3103 (a)
Defined 901
GMm~ ....... ....... . ................ . Chapter 9
Moderately hazardous (see Group B, Divisions 1, 2, 3) 701
Nonhazardous (see Group B, Division 4) 701
Exits 3319
HEADERS
Headroom for stairways .... 3306 (f) and (o)
Joist. support required 2517 (d)
Over opening in stud partitions 2517 (g)
HEADROOM (see also CEILING)
For stairways .... 3306 (f) and (o)
In garages 702 (c), 709 (d), 1102 (b)
HEARTH FOR FIREPLACE .... 3707 (k) and (I)
HEALTH HAZARD 409, Table No. 9-B
HEATING (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Required 1212
HEAT VENTING
Smoke and heat 3206
HEAVY-TIMBER CONSTRUCTION
(see TYPE IV BUILDINGS, Chapter 21) 2106
HEIGHT
Additional for roof structures 507, 3601
Awnings 4506
Buildings .. ........... ~7
Ceilings .... 702 (c), 709 (d), 1102 (c), 1207 (a), 1716,4002
Corridors . 3305 (c)
Definition ......... . 409
Exterior exit balconies ............. 3305 (c)
Garages. public 702 (c), 709 (d), 1102 (c)
Marquees above sidewalk 4505
Mezzanines 1716
Of buildings 409, 507
Of masonry walls (see WALLS)
Permanent projections over property line 4501
Towers or spires ......... . 507, 3602
Types II, Ill, IV and V 507
Veneered walls ............ 1705 (d), Chapter 30
HELIPORT/HELISTOPS
Classification 701,901
Definition ...... 409
Design .......... 2308 (c)
General requirements ............. 710
HIGHLY TOXIC MATERIAL, definition 409
HIGH-RISE, EXISTING Appendix Chapter 1, Division 2
HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS
Area for evacuation assistance (for handicapped) 3104 (d)
Special provisions tor 1807
1027
HISTORIC BUILDINGS 104 (f)

HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCK OR TILE (see CONCRETE BLOCKS)
HOLLOW MASONRY
Units 2401 (b), 2402 (b)
Walls 2407
HORIZONTAL EXITS
Definition ......... . . ........ 3301 (b)
Signs for 3314
HOSE, as equipment for standpipe .... 3801 (c) and (d)
HOSE CONNECTIONS
To standpipes 3801 (a), (c) and (d), 3805
HOSPITALS
Exits ............. 3320
General ........ Chapter 10
Live loads 2304
Sprinklers 3802 (g)
HOTELS
Classified 1201
Definition ............ 409
Existing, nonconforming Appendix Chapter 1
Fire-extinguishing system .. 3802 (h)
Live loads 2304
I-OCCUPANCIES .... Chapter 10

ILLUMINATION
For exits 3313
INFORMATION ON PLANS ........ 302 (d)
INSPECTION
Construction (architect/engineer) ..... 302 (c)
Final, required ... 305 (d)
For change of occupancy 307
General 305
Grading ............. . Appendix 7014
Material for prefabrication 5006
Of foundation (soils report) 2905
Of prefabricated construction 5006
Of wallboard 305 (e), 4701 (b)
Plastering 305 (e), 4701 (b)
Record card .. 305 (b) and (g)
Special 306
INSTITUTIONAL OCCUPANCIES
INSULATION
All materials, flame spread and smoke density 1714 (c)
Floor ...... 1705 (g)
..... 1714 (b)
~';,'n~i~r~mitaiions · 1714
Roof .... 3208 (d)
INTERIOR FINISH
Application of materials 4203
Classification of materials 4202
Flame spread of 4202, 4204
In atria ..... ..... 1716 (h)
Occupancy requirements .. ... 4204
Of plastic . Chapter 52
INTERIOR TRIM ... ........ 1705 (e), 4201, 4203
INTERIOR WALLS (see WALLS)

INTERCONNECTION
Pile .... 2908 (c)
INTERPRETATION OF CODE
By board of appeals 204
By building official 202
1028
J
JAILS Chapter to
JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION, in concrete 2606 (d)
JOIST HANGERS 2510 (e), 2516 (j)
JOISTS
Ceiling, dead load Table No. 23-8
Concrete 2608 (I)
Fire protection 4303
Wood 2506, 2517 (d)
JURISDICTION, definition 411
K
NO REQUIREMENTS
L
LABELS
Fire doors 4306
Foam plastic insulation 1713 (b)
Roofing 3208
Windows 4306
LADDERS
Used for exit from equipment .. 3306 (a), 3321 (a)
LAMINATED
Floors 2106 (h), 2511,2516 (I)
Timber, glued . 2511
LANDINGS
At doors 3304 (J)
For stairs 3306 (g)
LATERAL FORCE PROVISIONS 2308 (b), Part II, 2311 through 2321 and
Part Ill, 2330 through 2338,2515
LATH
Fire-resistive 4302
Gypsum 4705, 4706
Inspection 305 (e)
Metal 4705, 4706
LAVATORIES
Installation 511
Required 605, 705, 805, t 205 (c), t 208
LIABILITY 202 (f), 305 (a)
LIBRARIES
General 601,801
Live loads 2304
LIGHT
For exits ....................... 3313, 3314
For occupancy groups "05" sections of Chapters 6-tO, 12
LIME
For mortar .. 2402 (b), Table No. 24-A
Proportions for plaster 4707, 4708
LINING
Of chimneys (masonry) 3703 (d)
Of chimneys (metal) 3706
Of fireplaces 3707 (c)
LINTEL
Definition 413
Omission of fire protection t 709, 4303 (d)
LIQUIDS (see also FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS)

Definition 413
1029
LIQUID STORAGE ROOM

Definition .... 413
Requirements . 901 (d)
LIQUID STORAGE WAREHOUSE
Definition 413
Requirements ... 901 (e\
LIVE LOADS
Ceiling framing ...... Table No. 23-B
Concentrated 2304 (c)
Definition 2302
Floor ....... . 2304
Greenhouse roof .. 2305 (e)
Partition loads .... 2304 (d)
Posting ..................... 2304 (e)
Rain Appendix Chapter 23, Division I
Reductions allowed 2306
ReqUired to be posted 2304 (e)
Roofs 2305
Snow 2305 (d), Appendix Chapter 23, Division I
Special considerations 2303' 2304' 2305
Un1t, for certain occupancies 2304
LOAD COMBINATIONS 2303 (f)
LOADING PLATFORM 1705 (f)
LOADS (see DEAD, FLOOR, LIVE, ROOF, SEISMIC, WIND, UPLIFT)
LOCATION ON PROPERTY
Fills . ..... . . Appendix 7010
General requirements .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 504
Occupancy groups .... "03" sections of Chapters 6·12
Open parking garages 709 (f)
LOCKS ON DOORS, PROHIBITED 3304 (c), 3317,3318, 3319, 3320
LODGES (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
LODGING HOUSES
Definition ........... . 413
Occupancy classification 1201
LOT LINES (see LOCATION ON PROPERTY)
LOT SURVEY .... 305 (a)
LOW-PRESSURE HOT·WATER·HEATING BOILER 414
LOW-PRESSURE STEAM-HEATING BOILER 414
LUMBER (see WOOD) .. Chapter 25
M
M-OCCUPANCIES . Chapter 11, Appendix Chapter 11
Accessory buildings . 1101
MAINTENANCE
Of buildings ...... . . 104 (d)
Of protective devices 4408 (a)
MALLS
Definition 5601
Tenant separation . 5603 (e)
MARQUEES
Defined . . . . . . ... 414
Live load Table No. 23·A
MASONRY
Adobe (unburned clay) .. 2407 (i) 9
Allowable stresses ...................... 2406
Anchorage 2310, 2407 (b) 7 and (e), 2409 (e)
Arches and lintels 2407 (d) 2
Area of hollow units .... 2401 (b)
Bearing walls ......................... 2407, 2408, 2409, 2411
Bed joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 2401 (b), 2404 (d), 2407 (b) 5 and (d), 2407 (h) 4 H
Bolts 2406 (h), 2407 (i) 4 and (i) 8, 2409 (b), Tables Nos. 24·0-1 and 24-D-2, 24-E, Land M
1030
Bond beam 2401 (b)

Brick 2402 (b)
Cast stone . 2402 (b) 6
Cavity walls 2407 (b)
Cement . 2402 (b) 2
Chimneys 3704
Cleanouts ........ 2404 (f)
Cold weather protection 2404 (c)
Columns . . . . . . . . . . : : : .2461 (b)·. "24oi (b) and (ti), 24·0·8· (b), 2409 (b)
Combined with wood . 2515
Composite construction 2410
Compressive stresses 2407 (i), Table No. 24-H
Concentrated loads . 2407 (c)
Concrete units . . . .... 2402 (b) 6
Construction joint . . . . . . 2404 (f)
Construction requirements 2404
Corbeling 2408 (e)
Definition 414
Design 2407, 2408, 2409, 2410, 2411, 2412
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . 2401 (b)
Empirical requirements 2407 (i)
Glass block ........ 2402 (b) 6, 2407 (j)
Glazed units ........... . ... 2402 (b) 4
Grout ... 2403, 2404 (c)
Grouted ........ 2404 (f)
Grouted, reinforced 2409
S~Fts~~sses 240~ f~
6
·. ........ .
High-lift grout construction 2404 (f)
Hollow units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2402 (b)
Joint reinforcement . 2402 (b) 10, 2404 (h) and (i)
Lime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2402 (b), Table No. 24-A
Low-lift grout construction 2404 (f)
Materials ..... 2402
Members carrying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
Mortar . . . . . . . . . . ... 2403, 2404, 2405 (b), 2407 (h) and Table No. 24-A
Nonbearing walls . 2407 (c)
Prism testing . . . . . . . . . . 2405
Pipes embedded 2407 (g)
Quality control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2405
Reinforcement . . . . . . .. 2402 (b) 10, 2404 (e) and (h), 2406 (d), 2407 (e), (f) and (h), 2409 (b) and (e)
Shear wall, strength design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 2412
Slender wall design . 2411
Special inspection . . ........ 306 (a). 2406 (c)
Stack bond 2407 (b) and (h), 2408 (f)
Stone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 2402 (b) 6
Supports must be fire protected ................... ..... 1709
Tests 2405, 2406 (i)
Thickness of walls 2407 (i)
Tile, structural ....... 2402 (b) 4
Unburned clay 2402 (b) 6, 2407 (i) 9
Unreinforced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2408 (b) and (c)
Wind risk reduction, construction for Appendix Chapter 24
Wood, in connection with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2407 (d), 2515
Working stresses 2406, 2407, 2408, 2409, Tables Nos. 24-C, 24-H
MASONRY VENEER ..... 2515 (a), Chapter 30
MATERIALS
Alternates 105
Standards for Chapter 60
MECHANICAL VENTILATION (see VENTILATION)
MENTAL HOSPITALS Chapter 10
METAL
As lath (see METAL OR WIRE LATH)
Roof covering 3208
METAL-FRAME BUILDINGS (See TYPE II One-hour and Type 11-N buildings)
METAL OR WIRE LATH
For exterior and interior plastering 4705, 4706
For fire-resistive construction ..... 4302
For horizontal assemblies of plaster 4704
For vertical assemblies of plaster 4703
METHODS OF CALCULATIONS 2303
METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION
Alternates 105
1031
MEZZANINE OR MEZZANINE FLOOR

Allowable area .. 505 (d)
Definition of 414
General 1717
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
Purpose of code 102
MINOR ACCESSORY USE 505 (c)
MIX
For masonry mortars ......... 2403, Table No. 24-A
FVI·\..131"i\~·ret6e 2604 (c) and (d), 2605 (e) and (i)
MIXED OCCUPANCIES ..... 503, 505 (c)
MIXED TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION 1701
MORTAR
For masonry construction 2403, 2404, 2405 (b), 2407 (h), Table No. 24-A
MOTELS (see also HOTELS), definition 414
MOTION PICTURE MACHINE BOOTHS
Ceiling height 4002
Construction and design 4002
Ex1ts ..................... . 4003
For Groups A, E, and I Occupancies 608, 808, 1008
Ports and openings 4004
Projection booths 4005
Regulation of equipment 4006
Sanitary requirements 4007
Sprinkler requirements ..... 3802 (b)
Ventilation 4005
MOTION PICTURE THEATERS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
MOTOR VEHICLE FUEL-DISPENSING STATION 414
MOVED BUILDINGS ... 104 (e)
MOVING OF BUILDINGS
Compliance 104 (e)
Permit required 301
MOVING WALKS .... Chapter 51
MULTITHEATER COMPLEX, definition 3301 (b)
MUSEUMS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
N
NAILS . 2510 (c), Table No. 25-0
NEW MATERIALS OR METHODS 105
NONBEARING WALLS (see WALLS)
NONCOMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL, definition 415
NONCONFORMING BUILDINGS 104, Appendix Chapter 1
NOTICES
For inspections by building official 305
Of approval required 305
Of condemnation 203
Of excavation or fill 2903
Of violations 202 (e)
NURSERIES 1001
NURSING HOMES .. Chapter 10
0
OBSERVATION, STRUCTURAL 307
OCCUPANCY SEPARATION
Exceptions for atria 1716 (f)
Types of 1716 (c)
1032
Forms of ........ . 1716 (b)

Minor accessory use . 505 (c)
OCCUPANT LOAD 3302
OIL
Storage (in occupancy) 708, 808, 1008, 1104, 1213
OPENINGS
Exterior, to be protected when (see LOCATION ON PROPERTY and TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
In area separation walls . . . . ................ .. ................ . . ........... 505 (f)
In atria ....... 1716 (c)
In ceilings ................. 4305 (b)
In floors . .......... . ....... 4305 (c)
In occupancy separations ......... 503 (c)
In walls .......... . . 4304 (e) and (I)
Protection of, fire assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4306
Vertical, to be protected when (see VERTICAL OPENINGS, ENCLOSURE OF)
OPEN PARKING GARAGE 709
ORIEL WINDOW
Definition 416
Projection 4504
ORPHANAGES 1001
OVERCROWDING PROHIBITED 3302 (b)
OVERTURNING MOMENT
For earthquake calculations .................. 2312 (g), 2334 (g)
For wind calculations 2317
General 2303 (b)
OXIDIZERS 901
p
PAINTING
Of aluminum alloy parts .................. . 2804 (d)
Of structural steel (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
Spray (see also UNIFORM FIRE CODE) 503 (a)
PAINT SHOPS 802 (d), 901
PAINT STORAGE 901
PAINT STORES 701,901
PANEL STRIPS, definition ........ 2613 (c)
PANIC HARDWARE
Definition .................. . 3301 (b)
In Groups A, E and I Occupancies 3317 (d), 3318 (j), 3319, 3320 (f)
PAPER, waterproof, required 1708,4706 (d)
PARAPET WALL
Definition ......... . 424
Required 1710
PARKING GARAGE, OPEN 709
PARTICLEBOARD ...... 2502 (a), 2505,2513 (d), 2516 (g), 2517 (e), (f) and (g)
PARTITIONS
Bearing, noncombustible 2408,2409,2411' 2614,2618,2622
Fire~ resistive 4304
Folding, portable or movable .. 1705 (c)
For frame construction 2517 (g)
General (see TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
Temporary . 1705 (c)
Unprotected materials allowed 1705 (b)
PASSAGEWAYS
As horizontal exits 3308
As stairway enclosures 3309 (d)
Construction 3312 (a)
For smokeproof enclosures ........ 3310 (c)
Openings 3308 (b), 3312 (a), 3309 (c)
To be sprinklered 3802
1033
PATIO
Covers .. 5211, Appendix 4901
Design 2305, Appendix 4902
Exits required 3301 (e)
PEDESTAL
Concrete, definition 2602
Concrete, design 2615, 2622
Foottngs Appendix 4904
PEDESTRIANS, PROTECTION OF .. Chapter 44
PEDESTRIAN WALKWAYS 509
PENETRATION
Fir estop 417,4308
Membrane 4304 (f)
Through ... 4304 (e), 4308
PENTHOUSE
PERMIT
Application 302 (a)
Definition 417
Does not permit violation ........ 303 (c)
Expiration ..... 303 (d)
Fees 304
For alteration 301
For change of occupancy 308
~~; ~~~~~~r~i.n9umb;,.;~iters
301
and waiks · ..... Appendix 5110
For grading Appendix 7006
For moving 301
For new buildings or structures 301
For use or occupancy 307
Information on plans and specifications ..... 302 (d)
Partial . 303 (a)
Plans required 302 (b)
Revocation of ....... 303 (e)
Suspension of .... 303 (e)
Validity . 303 (c)
When required 301
Work without ...... 304 (e)
PERSON, definition 417
PETROLEUM STORAGE 901
PEWS, width .... 3302 (a), 3316
PILES, general requirements 2908, 2909
Interconnection ...... 2908 (b)
PLAN REVIEW
Fee for 304 (c) and (d), Appendix 7007 (a)
Required ..... 303 (a)
PLANK AND BEAM CONSTRUCTION 2106, 2516 (I) and (m), 2517 (e) 3
PLANS (see also PLAN REVIEW)
Alteration of ................ 303 (a)
Approved by building official ......... 303 (a)
For demolishing 4409
Hazardous materials management 901 (f)
Information on .. 302 (a) and (d)
Kept on building site ......... 303 (b)
Required for permit, when ... 302 (b)
Retention of ........ 303 (b)
Shall bear name of whom ...... 302 (a) and (b)
PLASTER AND PLASTERING
Ceiling, suspended 4701 (e), 4704
Definitions . 4701 (d)
Exterior, application .... 4708
Exterior, corner beads 4701 (d), 4705 (b), 4706 (e)
Fire-resistive 4303
Inspection of 305 (e), 4701 (b)
Interior 4707
Lathing 4705, 4706
Materials 4702
1034
Matenals for fire-resist1ve construction 4303

Over masonry or concrete ...... 4707 (e), 4708 (h), 4709 (f)
Pneumatically placed 4710
Portland cement, definition 4701 (d)
To resist horizontal forces 4714
PLASTERBOARD, GYPSUM
For fire res~stance, ceilings 4305 (a) and (b)
For fire resistance, partitions 4304
Inspection .. 305 (e), 4701 (b)
PLASTIC DESIGN (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
PLASTICS, light-transmitting (also see FOAM PLASTICS)
Approval for use 5201 (b)
Approved 5202
Area limitations 5204, 5205, 5206, 5207, 5208, 5209
Awn1ngs 5211
Canopies 5213
Classification ... 5201 (c)
Definitions 417, 5202
Design 5203
Fastenings 5203 (b)
Foam 1713
Glazmg of openings 5204, 5207, 5405
Greenhouses 5212
Identification 5201 (c)
Installation 5203
Interior finish and tnm 1705 (e), 4201, 4203
Light diHusers in ce1hngs ....... . 5208
L1ght diHusers in electncal fixtures 5209
Patio covers 5211
Roof panels 5206
Skylights 5207
Structural requirements 5203
Trim 1705 (e), 4201. 4203
Veneer 3007
Wall panels, exterior 5205
Wall panels, interior 4203, 4204, 5210
PLATE
Foundat1on 2907 (f)
In bearing partitions 2517 (b)
PLATE GIRDERS (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
PLATFORM, ENCLOSED
Definition 417, 3901
Requirements 3902
Special provisions 602
PLATFORM, LOADING 1705 (f)
PLYWOOD
Diaphragms 2513 (a) and (c)
For exterior sheathing 2516 (g)
For roof sheathing 2516 (i), 2517 (h)
For subflooring 2517 (e)
PNEUMATICALLY PLACED PLASTER 4710
PORTABLE PARTITIONS 1705 (c)
PORTLAND CEMENT
For plaster .............. .. ......... 4ro1
In masonry ... 2402 (b) and Table No. 24-A
Specifications . 2402 (b) 2, 2603 (b) 1
POSTING
Certificate of Occupancy 308 (e)
Live loads 2304 (e)
Room capacity 3302 (c)
Unsafe building 203
POWER PLANTS 701
POWER SUPPLY
For exit Illumination 3313 (b)
For exit s1gns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . 3314 (d)
Standby and emergency system for high-rise buildings 1807 (i)
Standby power for atria 1716 (g)
1035
PREFABRICATED CONSTRUCTION ............... Chapter 50

PREMISES IDENTIFICATION 513
PRESSURE TREATED
Treated wood (see WOOD, Treated)
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 2618
PRINTING PLANTS 701
PRISONS ................ Chapter 10
PRIVATE GARAGE (see GARAGE, PRIVATE)
PROJECTIONS FROM BUILDING (see TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
Awnings 4506
Below sidewalk 4503
Cornices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711,4504
Eaves .......... . . ....... 504, 1711
Eaves over required windows 504
In alleys 4502
Marquees 4505
Plastic awniniJS ......... 5211
Plastic canop1es 5213
PROSCENIUM
Sprinklers required 3802 (c) 7
Wall ............. . 3901' 3903 (d)
Wall openings allowed ... 3903 (d)
PROSCENIUM CURTAIN
Required ..... 608, 3903 (d)
PROTECTIVE MEMBRANE 417
PUBLIC GARAGE (see GARAGE, PUBLIC)
PUBLIC PROPERTY
Use during construction ...... Chapter 44
PUBLIC WAY, definition ....... 3301 (b)
PUMP
Fuel dispensing 503 (a)
Islands . 503 (a)
PUMPING PLANTS 701
Q
QUALITY AND DESIGN OF THE MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
Aluminum ... Chapter 28
Masonry .............. Chapter 24
Reinforced concrete ........... Chapter 26
Steel and iron ..... Chapter 27
Wood Chapter 25
R
A-OCCUPANCIES . Chapter 12
RADIO TOWERS 507, Table No. 23-H, 3602
RAFTERS (see ROOF CONSTRUCTION)
RAIL AROUND OPENINGS ........... 1712, Table No. 23-B
RAILINGS (see GUARDRAIL and HANDRAIL)
RAILWAY STATIONS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
RAMPS
Automobile ramp enclosure 906
Construction 3307 (f)
Doors in automobile enclosures 906
Enclosure ..... 3309
For hospitals and sanitariums . .. 3320 (e)
Gradient . 3307 (c)
Landings .. 3307 (d)
Reviewing stands, for 3322 (e) 6
1036
Used as exits .................. 3307

When required ............... 330t (d). 3320 (e)
RECORD CARD OF INSPECTIONS 305 (b)
REDUCTIONS
Of live loads . . .. .... ........... .. . ..... 2306
Of strength for length of concrete compression members 26t0 (k) and (I)
REFRIGERATION (see UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
REFUSE CHUTES ...... t706 (e), 3802 (b)
REINFORCED CONCRETE (see also CONCRETE)
Against ground 2607 (h)
Analysis and design ..... . 2608
Anchorage of reinforcement 26t2
Bars, bent . . .. 2607 (b), (c) and (d)
Beams, lateral support . . . . . . . . . . . . 26t0 (e)
Bending moments, transfer to columns 26tt (m)
Columns . . . . . . . . ......... . 26t0, 26tt (I)
Composite design and construction . 26t7
Computations, flexural ..... . 2608, 26t0
Control of cracking . 2607 (m)
Cover of reinforcing ..... 2607 (h), 4303 (c)
Deflection 2307, 2609 (f)
Design, methods .............................. . 2608 (b)
Ductile moment-resisting space frames 2625
Durability requirements .......................... . 2604
Fire protection of (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION) 4303
Folded plates 26t9
Footings, design 26t5, 2902, 2907
Footings, shear 26tt (m), 26t5 (f) and (i)
Footings, thickness 26t5 (h)
Frame analysis 2608 (d) and (e), 2625
Height and thickness, walls 26t4 (c)
Joints and bearing for precast 26t6
Joists 2608 (I)
Lateral reinforcement 2607 (k) and (I)
Load tests 2620 (d) and (e)
Materials, tests 2603 (b)
Modulus of elasticity 2608 (f)
Placing of reinforcement 2607 (f)
Plain reinforcement .... .. ............. 2602, 2603 (b)
Precast wall panels ................................................... 26t6 (c)
Prestressed 26t8
Reinforcement (see also REINFORCEMENT) 2607
Seismic Zone designs 2330 through 2338, 2625
Shear and torsion 26tt
Shear walls 26tt (k)
Shells 2619
Slab, opening . 26tt (m), 26t3 (g)
Slab, reinforcement .... 26t3(e)and(f)
Slab, shear 26t1 (d), (e), (f) and (m)
Slab, thickness of 2609 (f)
Slabs, one-way 2609 (f), 26t0 (g)
Slabs, systems ................................ . 26t3
Strength and serviceability requirements 2609
T-beams .............................. . .... 2608 (k)
Tests 2604
Torsion 2611
Transmission of column load 2610 (n)
Walls 27t1 (k), 2614, 2616 (c)
Web reinforcement, development 2612 (n)
Working stress design (alternate method) . 2626
Yield strength, definition ............. . 2602
REINFORCED GYPSUM CONCRETE
Design 2627 (b)
General 2627 (a)
Special inspection 306 (a)
Stresses ......... 2627 (c)
REINFORCEMENT
Anchorage 2612
Bends, minimum diameter ... 2607 (c)
2607 (d)
~~~~~3 reiritOrceme~t~-~i~i~un1-prestr9SS8d conc;etB. 2618 (j)
Bonded tendon, definition 2602
Chimneys, reinforcing and seismic anchorage 3704 (c)
1037
Cover, minimum concrete for protection ... 2607 (h), 4303

Definition ............... ............ 2602
Desi~n (and analysis) 2608
Deta1ls of . . . . . . . . 2607
Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2612 (b) through (n)
Embedment length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 2612 (b)
End regions (tendon anchorage zones) .......................... 2618 (n)
Fabric, welded wire 2603 (f), 2607 (f), 2612 (h), (s) and (t)
Fire protection . . . . . . . . . . . ...................... .......... 4303
For columns, reinforced concrete .............................. 2607, 2610 (n) and (o), 2612 (r)
For masonry . . . . . . . . . . ... 2402 (b) 10, 2404 (e), 2406 (d), 2407 (e) and (h), 2409 (b) and (e)
For prestressed concrete 2618
For stucco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4706 (e)
For T·beams, reinforced concrete . . . . .... ... .......... 2608 (k)
For two·way slabs, reinforced concrete ........... 2613
For web (diagonal tension), concrete ........... 2611
General 2603 (f)
Hooks . 2607 (b)
Inspection, special ...... 306 (a)
Lateral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... ................ 2607 (k) and (I)
Minimum bend diameter, definition ........ 2607 (c)
Minimum in flexural members ........... 2610 (f)
Modulus of elasticity 2608 (f)
Placing in reinforced concrete 2607 (f)
Post tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2618 (t)
Prestressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2618
Protection, 1n concrete (minimum cover) ............................ 2607 (h), 4303
Protection, in masonry . .. ........ . ............. 2407 (f), 2409 (e), 4303
Shrinkage 2607 (m)
~~~ .. . ....... ~~
Splices . . . . . . . . . . . .................................. 2612 (o) through (t)
Splices, in concrete ...... 2612 (o), (p), (q), (r), (s) and (t)
Splices, in masonry ...... 2404 (h), 2409 (e) 6
Stress allowable unit .. 2609, 2610 (c)
Surface conditions of ........ 2607 (e)
Temperature 2607 (m)
Welding .......... . .... 2603 (b) 4 J
Zones-prestressed tendons ..... 2618 (n)
REfNSPECTION
May be made 305 (g), 602 (e)
REPAIR
Definition 419
Garages .... 901
May be required 203
Of existing buildings 104
Reroofing ....... . Appendix Chapter 32
To historic buildings 104 (f)
REPORTS
Hazardous storage or use 901 (f)
Of board of appeals 204
Of special inspector ......... 306 (c)
Of tests of concrete 2604
Of tests, general 107
REQUIREMENTS BASED ON OCCUPANCY
Classification of all occupancies ..... . ....... ··························· 501,503
For Groups A through R Occupancies ........... Chapters 6·12, Appendix Chapters 1H2
REQUIREMENTS BASED ON TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION

Classification of buildings ....... . 1701
For Type I through Type V buildings .. Chapters 17·22
RESIDENCES (see DWELLINGS)
RESIDENTIAL OCCUPANCIES
Accessibility (handicapped) ...... 3103 (a)
RESISTING MOMENT, DEAD LOAD

For earthquake calculations 2334
For wind calculations 2317
General . 2303 (a)
RESTAURANTS 601,701
RETAIL STORES 701
1038
RETAINING WALLS
Definition 424
Design ......................................... . 2308 (b)
REVIEWING STANDS
Classification .. 601
Construction 602 (a) and (e)
Height 602 (e)
REVOCATION OF CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY 308 (f)
REVOCATION OF PERMIT .. 303 (e)
RIBBON, in frame construction 2517 (d)
RIGHT OF ENTRY .......................... 202 (c)
RISERS
For Class I standpipes . . ...... 3805 (c)
For Class II standpipes 3805 (d)
For Class Ill standpipes 3805 (e)
For stairways .. 3306
RIVETS
General (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
Holes, to be deducted (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
In aluminum .......................... . 2802 (c)
In connections (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
ROOF CONSTRUCTION (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION and ROOF COVERING)
Access to attic spaces ................... . 3205 (a)
Access to roof ........................ 3306 (n)
Camber ............................................. 2305 (f), 2307
Decks ......................... . ......... 2106 (f) and (h)
Design 2305
Drainage ................ 2305 (f)' 3207
Flashing ................ . ........................... 1708 (b), 3208 (c)
~::j~~
Insulation
............ .
. ............................................. 2106 (d), 2517 (h)
...........................
3201
1714, 3208 (d)
Of marquee ..................................................... 4505 (f)
Panels, of plastic 5206
Planking ................................... . 2517 (h)
Purlins 2517 (h)
Rafters ............................. . 2517 (h)
Rafter ties ............. . 2517 (h)
Sheathing ............ . 2516 (i), 2517 (h)
ROOF COVERING (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . 3208 (b)
Asbestos-cement shingles 3208
Asphalt shingles 3208
g~~~~~f;ed ·... ................. ................. ........... ~~~~

3204, Table No.
Clay tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3208
Composition 3208
Concrete tile ................ 3208
Definitions 3202
Fasteners for Table No. 32-B1 and 82
Flashing 3208 (c)
Insulation 3208 (d)
Kind required 3203
Metal .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3208
Nonrated ................................................. 3204
Repairs 104 (d), Appendix Chapter 32
Reroofing Appendix Chapter 32
Slate shingles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3208
Special purpose 3204 (e)
Wires for ....................................................... Tables Nos. 32-D-1 and 2
Wood shakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3208
Wood shingles 3208
ROOF DESIGN 2305
ROOF DRAINAGE . 2305 (f), 3207, 4505 (f)
ROOF OVERHANG 504 (a) and (b), 1711
ROOF PANELS 5202. 5206
ROOF STRUCTURES 3601
1039
ROOM
Capacity .. 3302 (c)
Dimens1ons 1207
Guest, definition 408
Habitable 1207
Habitable, definition 409
RUNNING TRACKS (see GYMNASIUMS)
s
SAFEGUARDS, maintenance .... 104 (d)
SALES ROOMS
For combustible goods 701
For noncombustible goods 701
SAND
For concrete 2603
For mortar ......... 2402 (b)
For plaster 4702, 4707, 4708
SAND-LIME BRICK (see BRICK, SAND-LIME)
SANITARIUMS 1001
SANITATION .......... 510; "05" sections of Chapters 6-10, 12
SCHOOLS
Colleges 701
Exits 3318
General requirements 801 through 809
Live loads 2304
SCUTILE
Access to attic ......... 3205 (a)
Access to roof, when required ......... 3306 (n)
Access to under-floor areas 2516 (c) 2
SEATING
Folding 602 (e)
Telescoping .. 602 (e)
SEATING CAPACITY (see OCCUPANT LOAD)
SEATS
Number of, to be posted ......... 3302 (c)
Spacing 3315,3316,3322
Width 3302 (a), 3322 (e)
SECURITY PROVISIONS (see also UNIFORM BUILDING SECURITY CODE)

Door latches ..... 3304 (c)
Door viewports ...... 3305 (h)
Window grilles, bars and grates 1204
SEISMIC
Des1gn 2330 through 2338
Seismic isolation ............ Appendix Chapter 23, Division Ill
Zones. overseas ... Appendix Chapter 23, Division II
Zones, U.S. Figure No. 23-2
SELF-CLOSING DOOR
Attic partitions ....... 2516 (f) 5
Automobile ramp enclosure 906
Basement 1703
Basement stairways
Corridors
33 6 1
nl
· · · · · · · · · · •. 33as (h). 4 3°o 6
Exit enclosures ...... 3309 (c)
Exterior sta1rways ..... 3306 (k)
Fire doors . 4306 (b)
Garage ... 503 (d)
Smokeproof enclosures .... 3310 (g)
Usable space under floor 1703
SEMICONDUCTOR FACILITIES 901
SEPARATION
Around buildings 506
Minor accessory use .. 505 (C)
Occupancy 503
Of areas 505
1040
Of areas tor suspended ceilings . . . 2516 (t)

Ot buildings tor seismic action .. 2337 (b)
Tenant 1202 (b), 5603 (e)
SERVICE STATIONS, GASOLINE (see FUEL-DISPENSING STATIONS)
SHAFT (see also VERTICAL OPENINGS, ENCLOSURE OF)
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . !,'<">
Enclosures 420, "06" sections of Chapters 6-1 0; 1209, 1706 (a) and (b)
SHALL, definition ot 420
SHEAR
Base 2334 (b)
Horizontal . 2334 (e), 2506 (c,l and (d,l
Masonry, stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2406 (c), 2407 (i), Table No. 24-K
Reinforced concrete, allowable stresses .......... . 2609 (d)
Reinforced concrete, design ............ . 2611
Structural steel (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
Wall, definition ................................ . 2331
Wood 2506 (c) and (d)
SHEATHING
Diaphragm .................... 2513
Fiberboard ......................... 2514
Floor ............ . ........... 2516 (h), 2517 (e)
Particleboard ................... 2513 (d)
Plywood ························ ~3~
Root 2516 (i), 2517 (h), 3203
Subtloor 2517 (e)
Wall 2516 (g), 2517 (g) 3
SHELLS (concrete) 2619
SHINGLES AND SHAKES
As roof covering 3204, 3208
As siding 2516 (g)
SHORING
Of adjoining foundations 2903
SHOTCRETE
Fire-resistive standards 4302 (e)
Requirements 2621
SHOW WINDOWS 1705 (d)
SHUTTERS
For motion picture machine booths 4004
Required tor stage vent ducts 3903
SIDEWALKS
Glass lights 3406
Live load tor design 2304
Railing required around 3406
Required to be protected 4407
Space under, may be occupied 4503
Walkways 4406
SIGNS (see also UNIFORM SIGN CODE)
Exit 3314
For basement pipe inlets Appendix 3807
For exits ........ 3314, Appendix 111 (e)
For fire doors 4306 (I)
For live load 2304 (e)
For room capacity ...................... . 3302 (c)
For stairs 3306 (q)
For unsafe building 203
Over public property 4501
SILL (see FOUNDATION, Plates)
SINK, KITCHEN 1205 (d), 1208
SKYLIGHTS
General requirements (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION) 3401
Plastic .............. . 5207
SLAB
Gypsum ......... . 2627
Minimum thickness for fire-resistive purposes 4303, 4305
Minimum thickness for floors 2608, 2609, 2611' 2623
Reinforced concrete (see CONCRETE)
1041
SLATE, for roof covering 3208
SLEEPERS, WOOD
On floors 1804, 1904
SMOKE CONTROL
In atria
In high-rise bUildings
In malls
SMOKE DAMPERS .. 802 (b) 2. 1002 (b)
SMOKE DETECTORS
Definition 420
For doors 4306 (b), 4306 (f)
For elevators 5103
In atria . 1716 (b) and (c)
In dwelling umts 1210
In guest rooms 1210
In high-nse buildings 1807 (d)
In hospitals and nursing homes 1010
In Group E Occupancies 3318 (d)
SMOKEPROOF ENCLOSURE, REQUIRED

Construction and design 3310
SMOKE VENTING
In Group H Occupancies 3206
In high-rise buildings . 1807 (g)
In one-story buildings 3206
Over stages 3903
SNOW LOAD 2305 (d), Appendix Chapter 23, Division I
SOIL
Bearing. allowable 2906
Classification 2333, 2904
Excavatio.n and grading Appendix Chapter 70
lnvest1gat1on required 2903, 2905, 2908
Profile Table No. 23-J
Tests requ1red 2904, 2908
SOLAR ENERGY COLLECTORS 1715, 5214
SOLID MASONRY (see MASONRY)
SOLID MASONRY WALLS (see WALLS)
SOUND TRANSMISSION CONTROL Appendix Chapter 35
SPECIAL INSPECTOR 306 (b) and (c)
SPECIAL-PURPOSE ROOF COVERING 3204 (e)
SPECIFICATIONS, required for permit 302 (b)
SPIRES (see TOWERS)
SPLICES
Re1nforctng steel 2612
SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING
Spec1al inspection ...... . . 306 (a)
Structural member protection 4303 (a), (b), (c) and (e)
SPRAY PAINTING
Construction requirements for booths (see UNIFORM FIRE CODE)
Location on property 903
Separation 503 (a)
SPRINKLERS, AUTOMATIC (see FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS)
STADIUMS 601
STAGE
Classification of occupancy 601
Construction 602, 3903
Definition 3901
Exiting 3903 (f)
General Chapter 39
Sprinklers required 3802 (c)
Standpipes required ....... 3805 (d)
Ventilation 605, 608, 3903 (c)
1042
STAIRWAY
Access to roof . . . .. . .. .. . .. .................. . 3306 (n)
Application to building, general (see GROUPS, OCCUPANCY
and TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
Arrangement of exits ....... 3303 (c), 3306
Basement t 703, 3306 (h)
Circular · .............. .............. . ..... 3306 (e)
Construction 1805, 1905, 2004, 2104, 2204, Appendix 111, Table No. 17-A
Definitions 3301 (b)
Design, general Table No. 23-A, 3306
Doors, leading to 3304
Enclosures 3309
Exterior ..................... . 3306 (k) and (m), Appendix 111 (b) and (d)
Fireblocks (wood-frame construction) 2516 (f)
From fly gallery 3903 (f)
Handrails ....... . 3306 (i)
Headroom clearance 3306 (o)
Helistops 710 (d)
Horizontal exits 3308
Interior ........ . . .......... 3306 (I), Appendix 111 (b) and 112
Landings, intermediate 3306 (g)
Lighting 3313, 3314
Live loads ........... . 2304
Number of exits required 3303
Numbering system ... 3306 (p)
Obstructions prohibited ... 3301 (c), 3306 (b)
Passageways as enclosures ...... 3309 (d)
Railings ............. . 3306 (1) and (j)
Ramps may be substituted 3307
Requirements, detailed 3306
Reviewing stands, for 3322 (e) 6
Rise and run ... 3306 (c)
Signs required . . . . . 3306 (p), 3314
Smokeproof enclosure .................... 3310
Space under 3306 (I) and (m), 3309 (f)
Spiral 3301 (b), 3306 (I)
Waterproofing 1708 (c)
Width, minimum .. 3306 (b)
Winders, permitted 3306 (d)
STANDARDS, UNIFORM BUILDING CODE (U.B.C.) 422, Chapter 60
STANDPIPES
Class I, Class II and Class Ill standpipes, defined .. 3801 (c)
Class I, Class II and Class Ill standpipes, design and construction 3801 (d)
Class I, Class II and Class Ill standpipes. where required 3805
Covered malls 5603 (b)
Open parking garages 709 (h)
STEEL, REINFORCING (see REINFORCEMENT)
STEEL, STRUCTURAL
Cables 2707
Cold-formed steel construction 2703, 2704
Connectors ........ . 2701 (b) 4, 2709
2701 (b) 2
~~~~~ismic zones Nos 1 and 2 2711
For Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 2710
General 2701 (a)
Identification . . . . ... 2701 (b)
Matenal specification 2701 (b) 1
Open-web joists and girders 2705
Stainless steel 2704
Storage racks ......... 2706
Welding 2701 (b) 3, 2708
STIRRUPS REQUIRED
Anchorage of 2612 (n)
Concrete 2611
STONE
Cast 2402 (b) 6
Masonry 2402 (b) 6
Veneer 3002
STOP ORDERS 202 (d)
STORAGE
Combusttbles 701
Film Chapter 48
1043
Flammables 608,708,808,901, 1008, 1104, 1213

701
s:~ft~e~aiard goods . 901
ln connection with stores .. 702 (c)
Live loads 2304
Materials in streets 4401' 4403
Noncombustibles 701
Physical-hazard goods 901
Racks 2701 (b), 2706, Tables Nos. 23-8 and 23-P
STOREROOMS-GROUPS A AND E OCCUPANCIES
Ftre protection . . ............. . 3802 (c), 3903 (b)
Flammable liquids, storage regulated 608,808
STORES
Live loads . . . . . . 2304
Retail and wholesale 701
STORY, definition 420
STORY, FIRST, definition 420
STREET
Center line .. 504 (a)
Definition 420
Temporary use 4402
STRENGTH DESIGN 2412, 2608, 2609
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS (see QUALITY AND DESIGN OF THE MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION)
STRESSED SKIN PANELS 2512
STRESSES (see WORKING STRESSES, ALLOWABLE)
STRUCTURAL FRAME 305 (e); "02" sections of Chapters 17-22; 2309
STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION 420
STRUCTURE, definition 420
STUCCO (see PLASTERING)
STUDS IN WOOD CONSTRUCTION 2516 (d), 2517 (g)
SURFACE-BURNING CHARACTERISTICS
Foam plastic insulation 1713 (c)
SURGICAL AREA 420
SURVEY REQUIRED .... 305 (a)
SUSPENDED CEILINGS
As protective membrane .... 4305 (b)
Design 4701 (e), 4704, Tables Nos. 23-8 and 23-P
Dralt stops and fireblocking for 2516 (f), 4203
Sprinkler system for . 3801 (d). 4203
Upward force resistance devices .. 4305 (b)
SUSPENSION OF PERMIT . 303 (e)
T
TANKS
For storage of flammable liquids (see also UNIFORM FIRE CODE) . . . . . . . . . .. 901, 1104
Horizontal forces, design 2338, Table No. 23-H
Roof structures 3601
Water ..... 1101
T-BEAMS IN REINFORCED CONCRETE ... 2608 (k)
TELEPHONES
Accessible 3105 (d)
In high-rise buildings 1807 (f)
TELESCOPING SEATING 3322
TEMPORARY BUILDINGS ....... 104 (e)
TEMPORARY PARTITIONS 1705 (c)
TERMITE PROVISIONS .. 2516 (c)
1044
TERRACING Appendix 7012

TESTS
Concrete 2605
Concrete aggregates 2603 (b)
Fire-resistive materials 4302
Masonry 2405, 2406 (i)
Materials 1n prefabrication 5002
May be required 107, 5002, 5003
New materials and devices 105
Piles, safe bearing ..... . 2908
Prefabricated construction Chapter 50
Soil bearing 2905
To classify mortars 2402 (b)
Welds (see STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
TEXTILE WALL COVERINGS 4205
THEATERS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
THERMAL BARRIER 1713 (d)
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRE STOP 421

TILE
Ceramic 3005 (e)
Of clay (see CLAY ROOF TILE)
Of concrete (see CONCRETE BLOCKS)
TIMBER (see WOOD)
TOILET ROOM ...... 510 (a), 511
TOWERS (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
Antennae (radio and television) 507, 3602, Table No. 23-H
General requirements 507, 3602
Setbacks 2333
Wind pressure 2311 through 2321
TRAP DOORS, STAGES 3903 (a)
TRAVEL DISTANCE
In atria 1716 (d)
In high-rise buildings ..... 1807 (c)
To exits 3303 (d)
TRIM 1705 (e)
TRUSSES
Fire protection of (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION) 4303
TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION (see also TYPE I, II, Ill, IV or V BUILDINGS)
General Chapter 17
Wood frame 2516
TYPE I BUILDINGS Chapter 18
TYPE II BUILDINGS Chapter 19
TYPE Ill BUILDINGS Chapter 20
TYPE IV BUILDINGS Chapter 21
TYPE V BUILDINGS Chapter 22
u
U.B.C. STANDARDS (see UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARDS)
UNBURNED CLAY MASONRY ....... 2402 (b) 6, 2407 (i)
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARDS Chapter 60
UNIT STRESSES (see WORKING STRESSES, ALLOWABLE)
UNLAWFUL TO OCCUPY, When 203, 308
UNLIMITED AREA 506 (b)
UNSAFE BUILDINGS 203
UPLIFT LOADS
HydrostatiC 2308 (d)
1045
URINALS
Required 805
Walls around . 510 (b)
USABLE SPACE UNDER FLOOR 1703
USE OF BUILDING (see also OCCUPANCY)
Chan9e ........... . .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 308 (b), 502
Classified . . . . . ..... . "01" sections of Chapters 6-12
Not specifically mentioned 501
Mixed ...... . . .. 503, 505 (c)
Permitted when ....... 308 (a)
UTILITIES
Protected 4405
v
VALIDITY
Of permits ...... 303 (c)
VALUATION
Definition ................ . 423
Of buildings by building official 304 (b)
VALUE, definition 423
VEHICLE BARRIERS ...... 1712 (b)
VENEER
Adhered . 3005
Anchored 3006
Definition 3002
Design .. 3004
Of plastic ..... 3007
Supported by wood .. . .. 2515 (a)
Walls of (see WALLS)
VENTILATION
Attic 3205 (c)
Automobile repair 905
Automobile storage 705
Fuel-dispensing stations 705
Motion picture machine booths 4005
Occupancy groups ... · · ••••• .:o5" ~~cticiris ~i Chapt~;s 6~10: 12o5 (c)
Open parking garages 709 (k)
Over stage 3903
~~~k~~~g~~a~~~r 705
.. 2516 (c)
VENTS
For explosion control 910
For motion picture machine booths 4005
For public garages .. 705,905
For smoke and heat 3206
For stages 3903
VENTS, HEATING (see UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
VENT SHAFTS (see VERTICAL OPENINGS, ENCLOSURE OF)
VERTICAL OPENINGS, ENCLOSURE OF
Construction requirements 706
Elevator shafts 706, 906
Escalators ....... 706
Existing buildings Appendix Section 112
Fire assemblies for protection of 4306
For atria 1716 (c)
For occupancy groups ... "06" sections of Chapters 6-10; 1209
Vent shafts 706,906
When required 1706, 3309
w
WALLBOARD, GYPSUM ... 4711,4714
WALLS
Anchoring 2310, 2337 (b), 2407 (e) and (i)
Area separation 505 (f)
Basement. enclosure 1703
1046
Bearing .............................. 424,2407,2408,2409,2411,2517 (g), 2614,2907 (b)

~~~c~~~traieci iciacis · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ········ 2467 (c)·. '24ci9 (b). ~m \~l
Concrete, plain ......... ..... 2602, 2622
Coverings 2516 (g), 4205
Cripple . .. .. .......... 2517 \g)
Curtain (see Nonbearing, below)
Definition 424
Design 2309
Exterior 424
Faced, definition ........ ................... 424
Fire-resistive 1803, 1903, 2003, 2103,2203,4304
Foundation 2907
Framing ... 2516 (d), 2517 (g)
Fronting on streets or yards 1705 (d)
Height allowed 2407, 2614
Lintels 2407 (d)
Nonbearing .. 424, 2407 (c), 2614 (g)
Nonsymmetrical construction, fire-resistive test 4304 (d)
Of exit enclosures 3309
Of roof structures ...... . 3601
Of smokeproof enclosures .. ............. . ........ 3310
Openings "03" sections of Chapters 18·22
Parapet 1710
Partitions (see PARTITIONS)
Plain concrete ..... . 2622
Protection of openings 504
Reinforced concrete 2614
Retaining (see RETAINING WALLS)
25·1~~. 2516 (g). ~m ~~l
Seismic zone requirements
Sheathing, when required · · · · · · · · · · · · ·:::: ... 25.13.
Stone 2402 (b) 6
Thickness of masonry ......... . 2407
Veneered Chapter 30
Water closet .............. 510 (b)
Water splash .................. 2516 (k)
Wood studs ..... 2516 (d), 2517 (g)
WAREHOUSE
For storage 701,901
Live load 2304
WATER
Accumulation on roof ................. 2305 (f)
Drainage around buildings 2905 (f), 2907 (d) 5, 3207 (e)
Drainage from roof 3207
Fountains 605
Heater, definition 424
Removal from excavations 2605 (h)
Requirements for concrete 2603 (b)
Requirements for masonry 2402 (b)
Retaining walls, design for 2308 (b)
Supply for automatic sprinkler system 3801 (d)
Supply for standpipes 3801 (d)
WATER-CEMENT RATIO
Consistency required 2605
Control of proportions 2605
WATER CLOSET COMPARTMENTS AND SHOWERS
Access (for handicapped) 511,3105
Fallout shelters Appendix 5708
Floors and walls of compartments ........... . ......... . ......... ~0~
For occupancies ....... "05" sections of Chapters 6-1 0; 1205 (d), 1208
Separation required .......... 510 (a)
Size of compartment ...... 511 (a)
WATER CLOSET HEIGHT 3105 (b)
WATER PRESSURE
Retaining walls, design 2308 (b)
WATERPROOFING (see WEATHER PROTECTION)
WEATHERBOARDING 2516 (g)
WEATHER-EXPOSED SURFACES
Areas ........ 1708 (c)
Definition 424
WEATHER PROTECTION 1708, 2605 (m) and (n), 3005 (a), 3006 (a)
1047
WEEP SCREEDS ..... 4706 (e)

WELDING (see also STEEL, STRUCTURAL)
Allowable stresses ......... . 2802 (a), (b) and (d)
Special inspection ..... 306 (a)
Standard for 2804 (e) and if)
WIDTH
Aisles ... 3315 (b)
Corridors 3305 (b), 3318 (e), 3320 (c)
Courts 1206 (c), 3311 (b)
Entrance doors .. 3304 (f)
Exit passageways ......... 3312 (b)
Rooms 1207 (c)
Ramps ....... . . ..... 3307 (b)
Stairway landings ......... 3306 (g)
Stairway treads . 3306 (c), (d), (e) and (f)
Stairways .. 3306 (b)
~;\~~~~set
4406
511 (a)
Yards ...... 1206 (b)
WIND
Definitions 2312
Design 2311 through 2321
General . . . . . . . . ... . ........ 2311
Gust factor coefficient (C,) Table No. 23-G
Occupancy catagories 2321
WINDOWS
Area limitations 5403
Fire-resistive, design 4306 (g), (h) and (i)
For escape or rescue .......... . ........ 1204
For occupancy groups "05" sections of Chapters 6-10; 1205, 1206
Glazing support . . . . . . . . . 5404
Grilles, bars and grates over 1204
Hazardous locations .......... 5406 (d)
Identification .............. 5402, 5406 (b)
Impact loads ..... 5406
In Types I to V buildings 1803, 1903, 2003, 2103, 2203
Louvered .................. 5405, 5406 (a)
Plastic 5204
Safety glazing 5406
Shower enclosures 5406, 5407
Skylights ............... Chapter 34, 5207
WIRE
For stucco reinforcing 4706 (e)
For tieing roofing materials Tables Nos. 32-D-1 and 32-D-2
Hangers for suspended ceilings .................. 4704 (c)
Masonry joint reinforcement 2402 (b) 10
Ties for fire-resistive materials ..................................... 4303, 4305 (b)
Veneer, anchorage 3003, 3006
WIRED GLASS
In fire-resistive doors and windows ... 4306 (g), (h) and (i)
In skylights 3402, 3403, 3405
Required by location (see LOCATION ON PROPERTY, DOORS and WINDOWS)
WIRE MESH
For exterior lath 4706
For interior lath 4705
For skylights 3403
For stage ventilators .. 3903 (c)
WIRING IN PLENUMS .. 4305 (e)
WOOD
Acronyms 2502
Adhesives ......... 2501 (a)
Allowable stresses 2504
Anchors and ties ............................... 2516 (j), 2517 (h)
Beams and girders ........................ 2506, 2517 (c)
Beams and joists 2506
Blocking ..................................................................... 2517 (d)
Bolted connection 25t0 (b)
Bored holes 2517 (g)
Bracing 2517 (g)
Bridging ........................ 2517 (g)
Clearance above grade ... 2516 (c)
1048
Clearance from chimneys .. 3703 (c)

Columns or posts . 2507,2516 (c)
Combined stresses . . . . . . . . ............. . 2508
Combined structurally with masonry or concrete ........... 2515
Compression at an angle to grain 2509
Compression perpendicular to grain .... 2506 (f)
Concrete, in combination .. 2515, 2516 (c)
Connections and connectors 2501 (a), 2504, 2510,2516 (m)
Conventional construction 2517
Cripple walls 2517 (g)
Cutting and notching 2517 (d) and (g)
Deflection criteria 2307
Duration of load ... 2504 (c)
Diaphragms ........... 2502, 2513
Earth separation .......... 2516 (c)
Fastenings 2516 (j)
Fiberboard .......... 2501 (a), 2502 (a), 2514
Fire-retardant treated .. 407, 1705, 1801, 1901,2501 (a), 2504 (c)
Floors, laminated ............ 2516 (I)
Form factors 2504
Foundations ... . 2907 (a)
Foundation sills ............. . . ..... 2516 (c), 2517 (b), 2907 (f)
Glued built-up members, definition ........ 2501 (a), 2502 (a), 2512
Glued-laminated timber, design ......... 2501 (a), 2502 (a), 2511
Grade, definition and identification 2502 (a), 2505
Grading rules ... 2501 (a)
Hardboard siding 2501 (a)
Headers ..... 2517 (g)
Heavy wood panels . Chapter 21, 2513 (e)
Horizontal members, framing details and design 2506
Horizontal shear ......... . 2506 (c) and (d)
Joists ... 2517 (d)
Joist hangers 2516 (j)
Masonry, in combination ....... 2515, 2516 (c)
Masonry, supported 2515 (b)
Metal plate con nectars 2510 (f)
Modulus of elasticity 2504
Moisture service conditions 2504, 2516 (c)
Nails ............. . . .... 2510 (c)
Nominal size, definition 2502 (a)
Normal loading, definition 2502 (a)
Particleboard 2501 (a), 2513 (d), 2517 (e)
Partitions, framing details 2517 (g)
Piles and poles 2501 (a), 2504 (b), 2516 (c), 2909
Pipes in walls ....... . 2517 (g)
Plank and beam framing .................... 2501 (a), 2517 (e) and (h)
Plywood .......... 2501 (a), 2502 (a), 2513 (c), 2516 (g), 2517 (e)
Plywood exterior covering ...... 2513 (c), 2516 (g)
Pressure treated 2501 (a), 2504 (c), 2516 (c), 2907 (a)
Rafters 2517 (h)
Required sizes, determination 2503
Roof framing 2506, 2517 (h)
Round timber piles 2501 (a)
Sawn lumber design provisions 2501 (a)
Scope 2501 (a)
Shear, horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2506 (c) and (d)
Sheathing 2513 (b) and (e), 2514, 2516, 2517
~:~;raci~r
2516 (g)
· 2504
Slenderness factor 2504
Spaced wood columns . . . . . . . 2501 (a)
Span tables for joists and rafters 2501 (a)
Stressed skin panels 2512
Stresses, adjustment .. 2504 (c)
Structural glued-laminated timber .... 2501 (a), 2502 (a), 2511
Stud walls, framing details 2516 (d) and (f). 2517 (g)
Subfloor . 2516 (h), 2517 (e)
Temperature effects 2501 (a), 2504 (c) 9
Termite protection . 2516 (c)
Timber connections 2510
Treated ..... . . . 1705, 2502 (a), 2504 (c), 2516, 2909
Truss compression chords 2508 (d)
Unit stresses, decrease for exposure 2504
Ventilation, under-floor . 2516 (c)
Water splash ......... 2516 (k)
Weatherboarding 2516 (g)
Weather exposure ..................... . . ...... 2516 (c)
Wood of natural resistance to decay, definition 2502 (a)
1049
WOOD-FRAME BUILDINGS (see TYPE V BUILDINGS)

WOODWORKING FACTORIES 901
WORKING STRESSES, ALLOWABLE
Aluminum 2802 (a)
Increase allowed for earthquake or wind forces 2303 (d)
Increase allowed, wood 2504
Masonry ..... 2406, 2407, 2408, 2409, Tables Nos. 24-C and 24-H
Piles ....... . 2908, 2909
.Piaio rowete ... 2622 (d)
Reduction, wood 2504
Reinforced concrete " . 2626
Soil .... Table No. 29-B
Wood 2504, 2509, 2511
WORKMANSHIP
Aluminum . 2804
Inspection 305 (e), 306 (a)
Wood ... 2501 (b)
WORKSHOPS
Moderately hazardous 701
Nonhazardous 701
WRECKING (see DEMOLITION)
X
NO REQUIREMENTS
y
YARD
Between buildings .. 504 (c), t 206
Definition 426
Exits required ....... 3301 (e)
Minimum width 1206
Required ... . ..... 504 (a)
'fa be maintained ..... . . .. 504 (a)
Used for area increases 506
z
NO REQUIREMENTS
1050

Ubc 1991 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ubc 1991 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ubc 1991 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNIFORM

Publication Date: May I, 1991

International Conference of Building Officials

PRINTED IN THE U.S.A.

Part 11-Definitions and Abbreviations

Part Ill-Requirements Based on Occupancy

CHAPTER 11. Requirements for Group M Occupancies

CHAPTERS 13-16 (No Requirements)

Part IV-Requirements Based on Types of Construction

CHAPTER 17. Classification of All Buildings by Types of

Part V-Engineering Regulations-Quality and Design of

SEC. ~~g~: ~~~l;iti~~~ ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: 18~

Part VI-Detailed Regulations

CHAPTER 36. Penthouses and Roof Structures

t~~-f~iti~~~ ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ~~~

Part VII-Fire-resistive Standards for Fire Protection

Part VIII-Regulations for Use of Public Streets and

Part IX-Wall and Ceiling Coverings

('< ·,truction. Requirement Exceptions .................. 841

A. OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: Compute the floor area ana

B. TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: Determine the type of construction of

C. LOCATION ON PROPERTY: Determine the location of the building

Application to Existing Buildings and Structures

Alternate Materials and Methods of Construction

Powers and Duties of Building Official

Unsafe Buildings or Structures

d•;~!~:::~;,~:.~ ~u~~~.!h::O:'~:~~t~~~re~;~wo~·.~:'~o~;u Bc '"'" '.' [i.'.'!' .,

A. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-13, Ready-mixed Concrete

A. U.B.C. Standard No. 27-7, High-strength Bolting

Application for Permit

1. The fabricator has developed and submitted a detailed fabrication procedural

2. The structure is required to comply with Section 1807, or

TABLE NO. 3-A-BUILDING PERMIT FEES

TOTAL VALUATION FEE

~-~~;·~~~~:~~:~~~!';_',~~:~·~:~~,;;;;:~"'·homing Ch•m<l<ri"' '

B. U .B.C. Standard No. 25-28, Fire-retardant-treated Wood Tests on Durability

Re~,g:;~~Jig~f:~::¥::fiootion of the HeiDfu, Fl•mm•bility '"d·, · '·1 .,' ~

chanica!, electrical, communication or similar systems or to serve as an air-supply

lion, instruction, worship, entertainment, amusement, drinking or dining or await-

CHIEF OF THE FIRE DEPARTMENT is the head of the fire department or a

.. ated to the atmosphere.

ELECTRICAL CODE is the National Electrical Code promulgated by the Na-

ment are received and which is continually staffed by trained personnel. F

LIQUID STORAGE WAREHOUSE is a Group H, Division 3 Occupancy =:=!

steam at pressures not exceeding 15 psi.

str~~~~n~~l%~ t~~~~~~~:!~:r~~!~i!!~!i~~~t:a;::is:~:~;~::~. ~~~~ :_,_l.li.••

and hot gases through openings in a protective membrane in order to accommodate

PLATFORM. See Chapter 39.

SHAFT ENCLOSURE is the walls or construction forming the boundaries of a ,l.r,~.:,:

visible particles of combustion.

ST RUCT~R AdL. OBbSERVATION means the visual observation of the struc-

Allowable Floor Areas

Allowable Area Increases

Maximum Height of Buildings and Increases

(c) Openings between Pedestrian Walkways and Buildings. Openings from

t: 3. Showers. Showers in all occupancies shall be finished as specified in Subsec-

Accessibility to Toilets and Other Features

3-Aircraft hangars where no repair work is done except exchange of parts

t N-No requirements for fire resistance F.R.-Fire resistive H.T.-Heavy timber

SEC. ~~g~: ~l;iti~ ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: 18~

t~~-f~iti~ ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ~

d•;~!~:::~;,~:.~ ~u~~~.!h::O:'~:t~re~;~wo~·.~:'~o~;u Bc '"'" '.' [i.'.'!' .,

~-;·::~!';_',:~·~:~~,;;;;:~"'·homing Ch•m<l<ri"' '

str~~nl%~ t~~~~~~~:!~:r~~!~i!!~!i~~~t:a;::is:~:~;~::~. ~~~~ :_,_l.li.••

~:;:~",~;~;,~~~~~:~: ~;:;:~ ;;,;;;:~io~h~;::;::..:,~,::: ~;r~~:;o'~=~~;

~ t::~:::~i~:op~<y boildiog•, '""""" portio"' co•-